diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
index 0813a30567..4ab8f892a8 100644
--- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ MRK	1	2	e3by	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσ
 MRK	1	2	z8b7	figs-ellipsis	ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1		Mark is leaving out some of the words that this sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “in the scroll of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	1	2	gu7i	figs-idiom	πρὸ προσώπου σου	1	before your face	Here, **before your face** is an idiom which means that the **messenger** was sent first, and then the second person came after him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify. Alternate translation: “first” or “before you”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	1	2	fsqn	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		The term **Behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case “seeing” means giving attention to what follows. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “Pay attention!” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
-MRK	1	2	s28q	figs-yousingular	προσώπου σου&τὴν ὁδόν σου	1	your face … your way	Here, both uses of the pronoun **your** refer to Jesus and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	1	2	s28q	figs-yousingular	προσώπου σου & τὴν ὁδόν σου	1	your face … your way	Here, both uses of the pronoun **your** refer to Jesus and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	1	2	kl12	figs-metaphor	ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου	1	will prepare your way	That the messenger **will prepare your way** represents preparing the people for the Lord’s arrival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who will prepare the people for your arrival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	1	3	lkm3	writing-quotations	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ,	1	The voice of one crying out in the wilderness	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, he is saying,” or “a voice crying out in the wilderness, hear him saying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 MRK	1	3	dqi9	figs-quotesinquotes	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1		Here there is a direct quotation nested inside a direct quotation as Mark quotes Isaiah, who quotes the messenger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, telling people to make ready the way of the Lord and to make his paths straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ MRK	1	3	v3n3	figs-parallelism	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρί
 MRK	1	3	peh5	figs-metaphor	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1	Make ready the way of the Lord	Here Isaiah uses the metaphor of preparing **paths** or **the way** on which someone will travel to make them walkable. If a person in high authority were coming, the people would clear the roads of any hazards. So this metaphor means that the people should prepare themselves to receive the Lord’s message when he comes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain speech. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 MRK	1	3	yyk3	figs-extrainfo	Κυρίου	1		In this quotation from Isaiah, **the Lord** refers to God, but Mark is showing how it also refers to Jesus the Messiah. However, do not translate this as “Jesus” here, because this double reference must be maintained. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo)
 MRK	1	3	h8rt	figs-idiom	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν	1		The imagery of a path, or **the way**, is used here to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message. If someone prepares a path for someone else, the preparer makes the path walkable. If someone in high authority was coming, others would make sure the roads were cleared of any hazards. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an alternate translation: “Prepare the people for the arrival of the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
-MRK	1	3	wltl	figs-yousingular	ἑτοιμάσατε&ποιεῖτε	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, both occurrences of the word **Make** are plural and are commands addressing a group of people. Use the natural forms in your language to express this meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	1	3	wltl	figs-yousingular	ἑτοιμάσατε & ποιεῖτε	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, both occurrences of the word **Make** are plural and are commands addressing a group of people. Use the natural forms in your language to express this meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	1	4	s05n	figs-explicit	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1		The **baptism of repentance** proclaimed by John the Baptizer likely had its origin in baptisms done by Gentiles who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time and showed that these people were converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have turned from their former evil ways, accepted God’s forgiveness for their sins, and were now following God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
 MRK	1	4	dtqv	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance**, **forgiveness**, and **sins**, you can express those ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have repented of their former evil way of living and that God has forgiven them for sinning against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	1	5	u9yg	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα	1	the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem	The phrase **region of Judea** is used here to refer to the people living within Judea, a large area in which the city of Jerusalem was located. Alternate translation: “the people from Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -30,13 +30,13 @@ MRK	1	6	h518	translate-unknown	καμήλου	1		If your readers would not know
 MRK	1	6	jpzh	translate-unknown	ἀκρίδας	1		If your readers would not know what **locusts** are, you could include a description in a footnote or use a more general term. Alternate translation: “grasshoppers” or “insects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	1	7	p7tl	writing-quotations	ἐκήρυσσεν λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he announced loudly to the people” or “he proclaimed these things, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 MRK	1	7	l7jd	writing-pronouns	ἐκήρυσσεν	1	he was proclaiming	The pronoun **he** is referring to John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “John was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	1	7	bk1j	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται&ὀπίσω μου	1		Here, **coming after me** means that this mightier person would come at a later time than John came. It does not mean that he is behind John, chasing John, or following John as a disciple of his. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	1	7	bk1j	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται & ὀπίσω μου	1		Here, **coming after me** means that this mightier person would come at a later time than John came. It does not mean that he is behind John, chasing John, or following John as a disciple of his. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	1	7	g8fw	figs-explicit	οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ	1	of whom the strap of his sandals I am not worthy to stoop down to untie	Untying the straps of sandals was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that John is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
 MRK	1	8	e4qi	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	but he will baptize you with the Holy Spirit	John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak of spiritual baptism, which will put people under the influence of the Holy Spirit. If possible, use the same word for **baptize** here as you used for John’s baptism. That should aid the comparison between the two. If this is not possible, you could use a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “but he will join you to the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 MRK	1	8	r1j9	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, baptism by water and baptism by the Holy Spirit are being contrasted. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 MRK	1	9	u65k	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	it happened that in those days	This phrase, **And it happened that in those days**, marks the beginning of a new event in the storyline. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	1	9	y8ea	writing-pronouns	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1		The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “John was preaching and baptizing people when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	1	9	gi39	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη&ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου	1	he was baptized by John	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
+MRK	1	9	gi39	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου	1	he was baptized by John	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
 MRK	1	9	zv8t	figs-go	ἦλθεν Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus went from Nazareth in Galilee” or “Jesus went out from Nazareth in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	1	10	stwh	grammar-connect-time-sequential	εὐθὺς	1		The word **immediately** occurs often throughout the book of Mark. As used here, it means that the event it introduces occurs directly after the previous event. Use a natural form in your language for communicating this. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential)
 MRK	1	10	n8sg	figs-activepassive	εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he saw the heavens bursting open” or “he saw God tearing the heavens open” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ MRK	1	24	m8gz	figs-rquestion	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς?	1	Have yo
 MRK	1	24	qsig	figs-explicit	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς	1		Here, **us** refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1–20). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	1	28	hrbh	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1		The phrase **went out everywhere** means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it throughout the region of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout all of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	1	29	ybs7	figs-go	ἦλθον	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-MRK	1	30	bvvl	writing-background	ἡ&πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα	1	the mother-in-law of Simon was lying down, being sick with a fever	This phrase gives background information about Peter’s **mother-in-law**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MRK	1	30	bvvl	writing-background	ἡ & πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα	1	the mother-in-law of Simon was lying down, being sick with a fever	This phrase gives background information about Peter’s **mother-in-law**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	1	30	vnp5	translate-unknown	πυρέσσουσα	1		A **fever** is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. This usually results in the need to lie down in bed and rest, as Peter’s mother-in-law was doing. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “being feverish from illness” or “being ill with an elevated temperature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	1	31	bzd2	figs-events	ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός	1		Here, the author mentions Jesus helping her up before mentioning that Jesus took her by the hand, even though it happened in the opposite order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “Jesus took her hand and helped her up out of bed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 MRK	1	31	sff6	figs-metaphor	ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός	1	the fever left her	This is a metaphor meaning that Jesus healed her of **the fever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “he healed her of the fever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ MRK	1	37	vgc7	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε	1	Everyone is s
 MRK	1	38	plm9	figs-exclusive	ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ	1	We may go elsewhere	Here, Jesus uses the word **us** to refer to himself, along with Simon, Andrew, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	1	38	z53z	figs-extrainfo	εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις	1		The passages which follow clarify what is meant by the **surrounding towns**. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	1	39	lb9t	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	κηρύσσων, εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐκβάλλων	1		Jesus’ was both **preaching** and **casting out the demons**. Jesus was not necessarily doing these in any order. Use the appropriate connecting word or phrase to show that Jesus was doing both of these things together. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous)
-MRK	1	39	zs4i	figs-hyperbole	ἦλθεν&εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	He went in all of Galilee	The words **in all** express an exaggeration used to emphasize that Jesus went to many locations in **Galilee**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he went to many places in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	1	39	zs4i	figs-hyperbole	ἦλθεν & εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	He went in all of Galilee	The words **in all** express an exaggeration used to emphasize that Jesus went to many locations in **Galilee**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he went to many places in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	1	41	l9jg	figs-idiom	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	having been moved with compassion	Here, the word **moved** is an idiom meaning to feel emotion about another person’s need. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having felt compassion for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	1	41	flc0	figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **compassion** in another way. Alternate translation: “feeling compassionate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	1	41	qjz4	figs-ellipsis	θέλω	1	I am willing	If **I am willing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply what Jesus is willing to do from the context. Alternate translation: “I am willing to make you clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ MRK	2	1	afvi	figs-explicit	ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν	1		There is some debate
 MRK	2	3	s21g	translate-unknown	παραλυτικὸν	1		Here, **a paralytic** is someone who, because of injury or disease, is not able to use their arms, legs, torso, or some combination of those parts of their body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	2	4	v6ma	translate-unknown	ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι	1	they removed the roof where he was, and having made an opening, they lowered	In the region where Jesus lived, houses had flat roofs made of clay covered with tiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	2	4	ouxr	translate-unknown	κράβαττον	1		A **mat** was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. Think of something in your culture on which you might carry an injured person to take them for medical attention. Alternate translation: “a stretcher” or “a cot” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
-MRK	2	5	trg9	figs-explicit	ἰδὼν&τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	having seen their faith	The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	2	5	trg9	figs-explicit	ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	having seen their faith	The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	5	hzg6	translate-kinship	τέκνον	1	Child	The word **Child** here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. This man was not actually Jesus’ son. If your language has a term like this that would be appropriate in this context, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “Beloved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 MRK	2	6	le6v	figs-metonymy	διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	reasoning in their hearts	Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	2	7	yr5a	figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ?	1	Why does this man speak this way?	These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means that Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view he would be speaking blasphemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man should not be speaking this way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ MRK	2	7	sj6j	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτί
 MRK	2	8	niy6	figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	in his spirit	Here, **spirit** means Jesus’ inner thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	2	8	h3zp	figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful in your language, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having become aware though no one told him” or “Jesus, without hearing them, knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	8	wga7	figs-rquestion	τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν?	1	Why are you thinking these things in your hearts?	Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	2	8	s3m6	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα&ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	these things in your hearts	The word **hearts** means their inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	2	8	s3m6	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα & ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	these things in your hearts	The word **hearts** means their inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	2	9	wv5d	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει?	1	Which is easier to say to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins have been forgiven’ or to say ‘Get up and take up your bed, and walk’?	Jesus is not asking for information but is using the question form here to prepare the scribes and Pharisees for the miracle he is about to perform. It is easier to say, “Your sins are forgiven you,” because there is no visible proof when someone’s sins are forgiven. However, if someone says to a paralyzed person, “Get up and take up your mat, and walk,” but the person does not do so, then it is obvious that the person speaking lacks God’s authority. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is surely easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ than to say, ‘Get up and walk!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	2	9	q905	figs-quotesinquotes	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up, take his mat, and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	2	10	g4jn	figs-explicit	εἰδῆτε	1	But in order that you may know	The word **you** refers to the scribes and the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ MRK	2	25	cjzx	figs-doublet	ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείν
 MRK	2	26	y57j	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως	1	the bread of the presence	The phrase **the bread of the presence** refers to the 12 loaves of **bread** that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	2	26	wz3g	figs-metaphor	εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Jesus is describing the tabernacle as **the house of God**. He is speaking of it as the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 MRK	2	27	i374	figs-activepassive	τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο	1	The Sabbath was made for man	With the passive phrase **The Sabbath was made for man**, Jesus explains why God established the Sabbath. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	2	27	u83s	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἄνθρωπον&ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	man	Although the term **man** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people … people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-MRK	2	27	v3mb	figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον&ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		The word **man** is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person but to mankind as a whole. Alternate translation: “people … people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+MRK	2	27	u83s	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	man	Although the term **man** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people … people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+MRK	2	27	v3mb	figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		The word **man** is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person but to mankind as a whole. Alternate translation: “people … people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	2	27	s2yd	figs-ellipsis	οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον	1	not man for the Sabbath	The words **was made** are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here if that would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “man was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make man for the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	2	28	wgwu		ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
 MRK	2	28	kq1c	figs-123person	ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ MRK	3	8	mm5v	figs-explicit	ὅσα ἐποίει	1	how much he was doing	This ph
 MRK	3	9	zu5e	figs-explicit	εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν	1	he said to his disciples that a small boat should be waiting for him because of the crowd, so that they would not press against him	As the large **crowd** was pushing forward toward Jesus, he was in danger of being crushed by them. They would not crush him intentionally; the danger was because there were so many people who wanted to touch him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	3	10	e86s	grammar-connect-logic-result	πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1	For he healed many, so that as many as had diseases pressed against him so that they might touch him	This verse tells why so many people were crowding around Jesus that they might crush him. Alternate translation: “For, because Jesus had healed many people, everyone pressed against him so that they might touch him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MRK	3	10	ge71	figs-explicit	ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1	as many as had diseases pressed against him so that they might touch him	They **pressed against him** because they believed that touching Jesus would make them well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “all the sick people pushed forward, eagerly trying to touch him so that they might be healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	3	10	qyyv	figs-metaphor	ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ&ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1		Here, **pressed against him** means they came very close to Jesus to make physical contact with him. Usually this has to do with crowds surrounding someone. If this might be misunderstood, think of a way to express this more clearly in your language. Alternate translation: “so all the people who had diseases surrounded him closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	3	10	qyyv	figs-metaphor	ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ & ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1		Here, **pressed against him** means they came very close to Jesus to make physical contact with him. Usually this has to do with crowds surrounding someone. If this might be misunderstood, think of a way to express this more clearly in your language. Alternate translation: “so all the people who had diseases surrounded him closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	3	11	ca5i	figs-explicit	προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα	1	they were falling down before him and crying out, saying	Here, **they** refers to the unclean spirits. It is they who cause the people they possess to do such things. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they caused the people they were possessing to fall down before him and to cry out to him, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	3	11	xf41	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	The title **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. See how you translated this title in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	3	13	fatx	figs-idiom	ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος	1		Here, **he goes up on the mountain** does not refer to a specific mountain. This phrase is an idiom which means that Jesus was in a mountainous area. If it would be helpful in your language, you may state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus went up into the mountainous regions” or “Jesus went up into area with many hills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ MRK	3	30	sfa2	figs-idiom	πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει	1	He has an
 MRK	3	31	gef8		καὶ ἔρχονται ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Then his mother and his brothers come	Alternate translation: “Then Jesus’ mother and brothers arrived”
 MRK	3	33	qe8c	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου?	1	Who are my mother and my brothers?	Jesus uses this question to teach the people that he considers those who follow God to be his beloved ones. He has not forgotten who his physical family members are, but these are people who belong to his spiritual family. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you whom I consider to be my mother and brothers.” or “I will tell you whom I love as a mother or brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	3	33	iu9r	translate-kinship	ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1		Jesus uses the words **mother** and **brothers** here not to refer to biological relatives but to those whom he loves and who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-MRK	3	35	dr45	figs-genericnoun	ὃς&ἂν ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	whoever may do … this is	Here, **whoever** does not refer to any specific person but to any person who does **the will of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whichever person may do the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+MRK	3	35	dr45	figs-genericnoun	ὃς & ἂν ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	whoever may do … this is	Here, **whoever** does not refer to any specific person but to any person who does **the will of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whichever person may do the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	3	35	yr9i	figs-metaphor	οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν	1	this is my brother, and sister, and mother	This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	intro	f5ua			0		# Mark 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Mark 4:3–10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14–23.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Parables<br><br>The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The historic present<br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 MRK	4	1	i95e	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	the sea	Jesus **stepped into a boat** because the crowd was so big that, if he had stayed among them, it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat on the water so the crowd could hear his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -230,13 +230,13 @@ MRK	4	6	z2el	figs-idiom	ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος	1		Here, **the sun r
 MRK	4	6	ee49	figs-activepassive	ἐκαυματίσθη	1	it was scorched	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can restate **it was scorched** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched the plant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	4	7	bw62		ἄλλο ἔπεσεν	1	choked it … it did not produce	See the note on [4:5](../04/05.md)
 MRK	4	8	v3sr	figs-ellipsis	αὐξανόμενα, καὶ ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	increasing and yielding one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100	The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipses are used here to shorten the phrases, but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “producing a plant that bore 30 times as much grain or 60 times as much grain or even 100 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	4	8	u327	translate-numbers	τριάκοντα&ἑξήκοντα&ἑκατόν	1	30 … 60 … 100	These may be written as numerals. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+MRK	4	8	u327	translate-numbers	τριάκοντα & ἑξήκοντα & ἑκατόν	1	30 … 60 … 100	These may be written as numerals. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 MRK	4	9	p2us	figs-metonymy	ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear	The phrase **has ears** here refers to the willingness to understand and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	4	9	qxy4	figs-123person	ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear	Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 MRK	4	10	u2nj	figs-explicit	ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας	1	when he was alone	The phrase **he was alone** does not mean that Jesus was completely **alone**. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone and Jesus was only with the 12 disciples and some of his other close followers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	4	10	kqcz	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [11:7](../11/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	4	11	t9ee	figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	To you has been given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have given you the mystery of the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	4	11	q2az	figs-explicit	ἐκείνοις&τοῖς ἔξω	1	to those who are outside	The phrase **to those, the ones outside** refers to the people who are not a part of Jesus’ group of disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those who are outside of this group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	4	11	q2az	figs-explicit	ἐκείνοις & τοῖς ἔξω	1	to those who are outside	The phrase **to those, the ones outside** refers to the people who are not a part of Jesus’ group of disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those who are outside of this group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	4	12	p4fv	figs-metaphor	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν	1	they may look, but may not see	Here, **but may not see** means being spiritually blind and not understanding the significance of what Jesus is doing. If your readers would not understand what it means to “not see” in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “so that looking, they may not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	12	e33y	figs-quotesinquotes	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν	1		Mark is quoting Jesus, who is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. For clarity, you could also indicate the source of the words that Jesus is quoting. Alternate translation: “so that as the prophet Isaiah said, though they see, they will not perceive, and though they hear, they will not understand” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes)
 MRK	4	12	p9yr	figs-metaphor	μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	so that they would not turn	Here, **turn** means to “repent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state it in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that they would not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ MRK	4	16	ty3q	figs-metaphor	καὶ οὗτοί εἰσιν ὁμοίως οἱ
 MRK	4	16	d7ep	figs-genericnoun	οὗτοί	1		See the note on **these** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	4	16	gdq7	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones which the sower sowed on the rocky soil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	4	17	p5fr	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς	1	They have no root in themselves	This is a comparison to young plants that have very shallow roots. This metaphor means that the people were first excited when they received the word, but they were not strongly devoted to it. If your readers would not understand what **they have no root in themselves** means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they did not allow the word to transform their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	4	17	s5mh	figs-hyperbole	οὐκ&ῥίζαν	1	no root	They have **no root** in themselves is an exaggeration to emphasize how small the roots were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	4	17	s5mh	figs-hyperbole	οὐκ & ῥίζαν	1	no root	They have **no root** in themselves is an exaggeration to emphasize how small the roots were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	4	17	t21w	figs-idiom	σκανδαλίζονται	1	they are caused to stumble	The phrase **they fall away** is an idiom which means to stop believing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they no longer believe in God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	4	18	uu9b	figs-metaphor	ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι	1	others are the ones sown among the thorns	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed among the thorny plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	18	wlab	figs-genericnoun	ἄλλοι	1		See note about **others** on [4:15](../04/15.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -259,17 +259,17 @@ MRK	4	19	s7s7	figs-metaphor	εἰσπορευόμεναι, συνπνίγουσ
 MRK	4	19	f4ip	figs-metaphor	ἄκαρπος γίνεται	1	it becomes unfruitful	Here, **unfruitful** means that God’s word in this person will not produce the desired results. In the Bible, a person who produces good works is spoken of as “fruitful” and a person who does not produce good works is spoken of as “unfruitful.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the person does not do good works, showing that they follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	20	axh1	figs-metaphor	ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες	1	these are the ones sown in the good soil	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this metaphor plainly. Alternative translation: “those people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the good soil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	20	d3r7	figs-ellipsis	ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100	This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 30 grains, some produce 60 grains, and some produce 100 grains” or “some produce 30 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 100 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	4	20	tdwj	translate-numbers	τριάκοντα&ἑξήκοντα&ἑκατόν	1	30 … 60 … 100	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+MRK	4	20	tdwj	translate-numbers	τριάκοντα & ἑξήκοντα & ἑκατόν	1	30 … 60 … 100	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 MRK	4	21	zzw7		αὐτοῖς	1	And he was saying to them	Here, **to them** refers back to the Twelve and others around Jesus in verse [10](../mrk/04/10.md). Alternate translation: “to the Twelve and others with him”
 MRK	4	21	nn7e	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην?	1	The lamp does not come in order to be put under a basket, or under the bed, does it?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket or under a bed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	4	21	dkq7	figs-doublet	ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην	1		Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases, as modeled by the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	4	22	y5kn	figs-litotes	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-MRK	4	22	kc6k	figs-parallelism	οὐ&ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	nothing is hidden … and nothing secret has happened	These two phrases, **nothing is hidden** and **nothing secret has happened**, both have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Absolutely everything that is hidden will be revealed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+MRK	4	22	kc6k	figs-parallelism	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	nothing is hidden … and nothing secret has happened	These two phrases, **nothing is hidden** and **nothing secret has happened**, both have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Absolutely everything that is hidden will be revealed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	4	23	k1a8		εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear	See how you translated this in [4:9](../04/09.md)
 MRK	4	24	r2r1		ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	he was saying to them	See how you translated this phrase in [4:21](../04/21.md)
 MRK	4	24	zis1	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	In that measure you use	This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express Mark’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The one who thinks carefully about the things I have said, God will allow him to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	4	24	c4xp	figs-activepassive	μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	it will be measured to you, and it will be added to you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will measure that amount for you, and he will add even more to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	4	25	i24l	figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται αὐτῷ&ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο	1	to him will be given … even what he has will be taken away from him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	4	25	i24l	figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται αὐτῷ & ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο	1	to him will be given … even what he has will be taken away from him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	4	26	n1mq	figs-parables	οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Jesus tells his listeners a parable to explain **the kingdom of God**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 MRK	4	26	r5n7	figs-simile	ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	As a man who may throw his seed	Jesus begins a parable that continues through verse 29. In this parable, he compares the **kingdom of God** to a man who **throws the seed** on the ground. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express the meaning of **throws the seed** plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God: just as a farmer plants seed by scattering it over his field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 MRK	4	26	htar	figs-genericnoun	ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1		The word **man** is not speaking of any specific person but any people who scatter seed. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “As a farmer scatters seed upon the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ MRK	5	1	gt8a	figs-go	ἦλθον	1	They came	Your language may say “went” ra
 MRK	5	1	vsc7	translate-names	τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	the Gerasenes	The name **Gerasenes** refers to the people who live in Gerasa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	5	2	pf16	figs-idiom	ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1	with an unclean spirit	This is an idiom meaning that the man is controlled by the unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “whom an unclean spirit controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	5	4	nsol	writing-background	διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι	1		This verse and the next verse function as background information to tell the reader about this man who was controlled by an evil spirit. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-MRK	5	4	da4x	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸν πολλάκις&δεδέσθαι	1	He had been bound many times	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people had bound him many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	5	4	da4x	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸν πολλάκις & δεδέσθαι	1	He had been bound many times	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people had bound him many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	5	4	nep6	figs-activepassive	τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι	1	his shackles were shattered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	5	4	fk7t	translate-unknown	πέδαις	1	shackles	Here, **shackles** are pieces of metal that people wrap around the arms and legs of prisoners. The shackles are then attached with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move far. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	5	6	y6c2	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ	1	And seeing Jesus from a distance	After **having seen Jesus**, the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ MRK	5	39	a3ih	figs-rquestion	τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε?
 MRK	5	39	dzrk	figs-ellipsis	τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1		The words **The child** are assumed in the second phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The child is not dead, but the child is sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	5	39	g83c	figs-explicit	τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	The child has not died, but is sleeping	Jesus is using **is sleeping** to indicate that the death of child is only temporary. That is, although the child had died, Jesus intends to make her alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “The child will not remain dead, but she has died for a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	5	41	hx3c	translate-transliterate	ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ!	1	Talitha, koum!	This is an Aramaic phrase which Jesus spoke to the little girl in her language. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-MRK	5	42	pt5t	translate-numbers	ἦν&ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1	she was 12 years of age	Alternate translation: “she was twelve years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+MRK	5	42	pt5t	translate-numbers	ἦν & ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1	she was 12 years of age	Alternate translation: “she was twelve years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 MRK	5	42	m49c	figs-explicit	καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1		Mark includes the information about her age to help his readers understand how **the little girl** immediately **rose up** and began **walking**. She was able to get up and walk because she was old enough to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking. She was able to do this because she was 12 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	5	43	n29k	figs-quotations	καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν	1	and he told them to give her something to eat	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and he told them, ‘Give her something to eat’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 MRK	6	intro	kl7n			0		# Mark 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Anointed with oil”<br><br>In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The historic present<br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, 49 and 55. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ MRK	6	1	mi7z	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ
 MRK	6	1	lpci	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς	1		Your language may say “came” rather than **went** or “went” rather than **comes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came out from there and went to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	6	2	y4xj	figs-activepassive	τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ	1	what is this wisdom that has been given to him?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	6	3	s3wl	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς?	1	Is this not the carpenter, the son of Mary and the brother of James and Joses and Judas and Simon? And are his sisters not here with us?	Those who were in the synagogue with Jesus are asking all of these questions to emphasize that they know who Jesus is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-MRK	6	3	tlub	translate-names	Ἰακώβου&Ἰωσῆτος&Ἰούδα&Σίμωνος	1	James … Joses … Judas … Simon	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MRK	6	3	tlub	translate-names	Ἰακώβου & Ἰωσῆτος & Ἰούδα & Σίμωνος	1	James … Joses … Judas … Simon	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	6	3	d2g7	figs-synecdoche	ἐν αὐτῷ	1		The people in the synagogue were not **offended** by who Jesus was. They were offended by what he was teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “by what he said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	6	4	l436	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος	1	A prophet is not without honor, except	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “A prophet is always honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 MRK	6	4	b42w	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ	1		If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only place that a prophet is not honored is” or “A prophet is honored everywhere except” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ MRK	6	15	fgy3	figs-explicit	ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλεία
 MRK	6	15	n8sq	figs-quotations	ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But some were saying that he is Elijah, while others were saying that he is like one of the prophets who lived long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 MRK	6	16	ym2w	figs-metonymy	ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα	1	whom I beheaded	Here, Herod uses the word **I** to refer to himself. Although he says here that he beheaded John, his soldiers beheaded John at his command. The word **I** is a metonym for Herod’s soldiers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom I commanded my soldiers to behead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	6	16	n6nq	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	has been raised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	6	17	vpr7	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς&ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ	1	Herod himself, having sent, seized John and he bound him in prison	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state clearly that **Herod** sent his soldiers to put **John** in **prison**. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	6	17	vpr7	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ	1	Herod himself, having sent, seized John and he bound him in prison	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state clearly that **Herod** sent his soldiers to put **John** in **prison**. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	6	17	ojtd	grammar-connect-time-background	γὰρ	1		Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Herod was saying that John rose from the dead. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “He was saying this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	6	17	sf6r	translate-names	τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the wife of his brother Philip	The word **Philip** is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	6	18	e2ex	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1		Herod put John into prison because he was saying **It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother**. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “Herod told his soldiers to arrest John because he was saying, ‘God’s law does not allow you to marry the wife of your brother’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ MRK	6	19	x35v	figs-metonymy	ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι	1
 MRK	6	20	k13z	figs-doublet	εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον	1		The word **righteous** and the word **holy** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that John was a very righteous man. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “because he knew that he was a very righteous man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	6	21	m54q	figs-metonymy	Ἡρῴδης τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν, τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ	1	Herod prepared his birthday dinner for his officials	Here, the name **Herod** actually means his servants, whom Herod would have commanded to prepare the meal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “Herod had his servants prepare a dinner for his officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	6	22	a1d7		εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος	1	the daughter of Herodias herself	We know from verse 17 that Herod married **Herodias** after she divorced his brother. Herodias’ daughter, who danced for Herod, was Herod’s niece and step-daughter. There are a few possible reasons why Mark refers to her as **his daughter Herodias**. Mark could: (1) be referring to Herod’s daughter-in-law as if she were Herod’s daughter’s to emphasize how close they were. Alternate translation: “And his daughter by Herodias” (2) be speaking about the daughter by using the name of her better-known mother, Herodias.
-MRK	6	25	caz0		εὐθὺς&μετὰ σπουδῆς&ἐξαυτῆς	1		The words **immediately**, **with haste**, and **at once** all communicate a sense of urgency. Make sure to communicate this urgency in your language.
+MRK	6	25	caz0		εὐθὺς & μετὰ σπουδῆς & ἐξαυτῆς	1		The words **immediately**, **with haste**, and **at once** all communicate a sense of urgency. Make sure to communicate this urgency in your language.
 MRK	6	25	ap2w	figs-explicit	δῷς μοι	1	a platter	The implication is that the daughter of Herodias wants King Herod to have someone cut off John the Baptizer’s head and then give it to her. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you cut off John’s head and bring it to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	6	26	c1gn	figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους	1	because of his oath and those reclining at table with him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state clearly the content of the **oaths**, and the relationship between the **oaths** and the dinner guests. Alternate translation: “because his dinner guests had heard him make the oaths that he would give her anything she asked for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	6	34	j1td	figs-simile	ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα	1	they were like sheep not having a shepherd	Jesus compares the people to **sheep**, which are confused and vulnerable when they do not have their **shepherd** to lead them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were confused when they did not have someone to lead them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ MRK	6	52	m53m	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις	1	about the loaves
 MRK	6	52	t1qb	figs-metaphor	ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη	1	their heart had been hardened	Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if **their heart had been hardened**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternately, you could use plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “they had become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	6	52	m7yv	grammar-collectivenouns	αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία	1		In this verse, the word **heart** is singular in form, but it refers to all of their hearts as a group. If this would confuse your readers, you could use the plural form. Alternate translation: “their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 MRK	6	53	p316	translate-names	Γεννησαρὲτ	1	Gennesaret	The word **Gennesaret** is the name of the region to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MRK	6	55	d9k9		περιέδραμον&ἤκουον	1	they ran throughout … they were hearing	Both occurrences of the word **they** in this verse refer to the people who recognized Jesus, not to the disciples.
+MRK	6	55	d9k9		περιέδραμον & ἤκουον	1	they ran throughout … they were hearing	Both occurrences of the word **they** in this verse refer to the people who recognized Jesus, not to the disciples.
 MRK	6	56	gi6y		ἐτίθεσαν	1	they were putting	Here, **they** refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples.
 MRK	6	56	y6hs	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	the sick	The phrase **the sick** refers to sick people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	6	56	bqzf	figs-parallelism	εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς	1		These three phrases mean basically the same thing. The second and third emphasize the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “any village and city, or even in the rural area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ MRK	7	5	ugom	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Why do your disciples n
 MRK	7	5	j7ht	figs-synecdoche	ἄρτον	1	bread	Here, **bread** represents food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	7	6	oavh	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν Ἠσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them, ‘Isaiah prophesied well about you hypocrites when God wrote through him that people honor him with their lips, but their desires are for other things’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	7	6	ep7u	figs-metonymy	τοῖς χείλεσίν	1	with their lips	Here, **lips** is used to signify speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	7	6	zgt9	figs-metonymy	ἡ&καρδία αὐτῶν	1	but their heart is far from me	The word **heart** means inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	7	6	zgt9	figs-metonymy	ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν	1	but their heart is far from me	The word **heart** means inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	6	xtab	figs-idiom	ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	but their heart is far from me	The expression **their heart is far from me** is a way that God is saying that the people are not truly devoted to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” or “but they are not truly devoted to me” or “but they are not really committed to honoring me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	7	8	hnw4	figs-metaphor	κρατεῖτε	1	you hold fast to	Here, to **hold fast to** something means to adhere to something consistently. If your readers would not understand what **hold fast** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you cling to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	7	9	e3qv	figs-irony	καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε	1	How well you reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition!	Jesus says **You do well at rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition** to rebuke his listeners for forsaking God’s **commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You think you have done well by rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your own traditions, but what you have done is not good at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ MRK	7	10	d4sd	figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ εἶπεν, τίμα τ
 MRK	7	11	cd57	translate-transliterate	κορβᾶν	1	is Corban	**Corban** is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it, using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 MRK	7	11	ev2r	grammar-connect-time-background	ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον	1	that is, a gift	The author says **that is, a gift** to provide background information to his audience, who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “meaning ‘a gift’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	7	14	u3nk	figs-doublet	ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε	1	Listen to me, all of you, and understand	The words **Listen** and **understand** are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take heed to what I am about to say to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-MRK	7	15	gk5i	figs-explicit	οὐδέν&ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	nothing from outside the man	Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person can eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	7	15	gk5i	figs-explicit	οὐδέν & ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	nothing from outside the man	Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person can eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	7	15	ms5c	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά	1	the things that come out from the man	By using the phrase **the things that come out from the man**, Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	7	17	l7d7	writing-endofstory	καὶ ὅτε	1	And	Here, the phrase **And when** is being used as a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 MRK	7	18	z8w1	figs-rquestion	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?	1	Are you also thus without understanding?	Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -438,8 +438,8 @@ MRK	7	34	lbw4	translate-transliterate	ἐφφαθά	1	Ephphatha	**Ephphatha** is
 MRK	7	35	yg15	figs-idiom	ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί	1	his ears were opened	The phrase **his ears were opened** means that the man was enabled to hear. Alternate translation: “Jesus opened his ears, and he was able to hear” or “he was able to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	7	35	yj4j	figs-activepassive	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	the band of his tongue was released	The phrase **his tongue was released** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus took away what prevented his tongue from speaking” or “Jesus loosened his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	7	35	gssm	figs-idiom	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **the band of his tongue was released** means he became able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was freed and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	7	36	eb2y	figs-ellipsis	ὅσον&αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ	1	as much as he ordered them	This refers to Jesus ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	7	37	dh17	figs-metonymy	τοὺς κωφοὺς&ἀλάλους	1	the deaf … the mute	The phrase **the deaf** and the phrase **the mute** both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	7	36	eb2y	figs-ellipsis	ὅσον & αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ	1	as much as he ordered them	This refers to Jesus ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	7	37	dh17	figs-metonymy	τοὺς κωφοὺς & ἀλάλους	1	the deaf … the mute	The phrase **the deaf** and the phrase **the mute** both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	intro	ry56			0		# Mark 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Bread<br><br>When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.<br><br>Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to expand before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### “Adulterous generation”<br><br>When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The historic present<br><br>To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples [Mark 8:17–21](./17.md) and rebuking the people [Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” [Mark 8:35–37](../08/35.md)
 MRK	8	1	rmd8	writing-newevent	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	In those days	The phrase **In those days** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events in the story that Mark has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MRK	8	1	sgv6	figs-extrainfo	μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	Following this, Jesus explains why the crowd did not have **anything to eat**. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ MRK	8	12	sn5a		ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	hav
 MRK	8	12	s8xl	figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	in his spirit	The phrase **in his spirit** means “within himself” or “to himself.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	8	12	g4lz	figs-rquestion	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον?	1	Why does this generation seek for a sign?	Jesus asks **Why does this generation seek for a sign** to show that they have not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	8	12	l335	figs-synecdoche	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον	1	Why does this generation seek for	When Jesus speaks of **this generation**, he is referring to some of the people who lived at that time and who were not following God. He was not speaking of every single person alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Why do you Pharisees ask for a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-MRK	8	12	a2x2	figs-activepassive	εἰ δοθήσεται&σημεῖον	1	if a sign will be given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	8	12	a2x2	figs-activepassive	εἰ δοθήσεται & σημεῖον	1	if a sign will be given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	8	12	q4wh	figs-idiom	εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον	1		The phrase **if a sign will be given to this generation …** is an idiom which means that a sign certainly will not be given. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	8	13	i2se	writing-pronouns	ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, πάλιν ἐμβὰς	1	having left them, having boarded a boat again	Jesus’ was not the only one who left; his disciples were with him also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left them and got into the boat again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	8	13	u1qk	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πέραν	1	to the other side	The phrase **to the other side** is referring to **the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -527,12 +527,12 @@ MRK	9	5	w6vs	writing-participants	ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγ
 MRK	9	5	iqc9	figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	it is good for us to be here	Here, the pronoun **us** could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case **us** would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	9	5	k3y1	translate-unknown	σκηνάς	1	shelters	These **shelters** were simple, temporary places with roofs under which to sit or sleep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	9	6	r3bn	writing-background	οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο	1	For he did not know what to say, for they were terrified	This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-MRK	9	6	f8hn		ἔκφοβοι&ἐγένοντο	1	they were terrified	Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”
-MRK	9	7	e3id		ἐγένετο&ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς	1	came, overshadowing them	Alternate translation: “appeared and covered them”
+MRK	9	6	f8hn		ἔκφοβοι & ἐγένοντο	1	they were terrified	Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”
+MRK	9	7	e3id		ἐγένετο & ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς	1	came, overshadowing them	Alternate translation: “appeared and covered them”
 MRK	9	7	x4mv	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης	1	a voice came from the cloud	Mark speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from the cloud to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification)
 MRK	9	7	ybu6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱός μου	1	my Son	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus. Here, the word **Son** describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	9	7	lg0e	figs-yousingular	ἀκούετε	1		**Listen** is a command or instruction God gave to Peter, James, and John. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-MRK	9	8	hq73	writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι&εἶδον	1	they no longer saw	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	9	8	hq73	writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι & εἶδον	1	they no longer saw	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	9	q2qv	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1		The first occurrence of the word **they** in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	9	pdmm	writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	9	w1nf	writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται	1		Here, the pronoun **them** and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **they** all refer to Peter, James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -552,8 +552,8 @@ MRK	9	12	toik	figs-activepassive	καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τ
 MRK	9	12	i3j7	figs-activepassive	ἐξουδενηθῇ	1	would be despised	If it would be more natural in your language, you could state the phrase **would be despised** in active form. Alternate translation: “that people would hate him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	13	k3kj	figs-explicit	ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἤθελον	1	they did whatever they wanted to him	If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating explicitly what the Jewish people did to Elijah. Alternate translation: “our leaders treated him very badly, just as they wanted to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	9	14	n8fd		ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	having come to the disciples	Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the other disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain”
-MRK	9	14	qsp3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς&αὐτούς	1		Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	9	15	qhc3	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&προστρέχοντες&αὐτόν	1		All three occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	9	14	qsp3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς	1		Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	9	15	qhc3	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν	1		All three occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	16	w679	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς	1		Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crowd” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	17	a2j6		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md).
 MRK	9	17	eluu		πνεῦμα	1		See how you translated the word **spirit** in [Mark 1:23](../mrk/01/23.md).
@@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ MRK	9	28	zwjp		εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον	1		Alter
 MRK	9	28	sd45		κατ’ ἰδίαν	1	by himself	Alternate translation: “privately”
 MRK	9	29	pdk2	figs-doublenegatives	τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ	1	This kind comes out by nothing except by prayer and fasting	The words **nothing** and **except** are both negative words. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This kind can be cast out only by prayer and fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 MRK	9	29	v2s7	figs-explicit	τοῦτο τὸ γένος	1	This kind	Here, the phrase **This kind** refers to a kind of unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This kind of unclean spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	9	29	kh4w	figs-go	τοῦτο τὸ γένος&δύναται ἐξελθεῖν	1		Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “This kind is able to go out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	9	29	kh4w	figs-go	τοῦτο τὸ γένος & δύναται ἐξελθεῖν	1		Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “This kind is able to go out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	9	29	yrzf	figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῇ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **prayer** by using a verb form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	29	l6ok	figs-abstractnouns	νηστείᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fasting**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **fasting** in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	9	31	f4gm		ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
@@ -608,8 +608,8 @@ MRK	9	35	jzl5	figs-metaphor	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, 
 MRK	9	35	ioiu	figs-nominaladj	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important in God’s sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	9	35	um58	translate-ordinal	πρῶτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	9	35	jqo3	figs-ellipsis	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	9	35	z9x2	figs-declarative	ἔσται&ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-MRK	9	35	t526		πάντων&πάντων	1	of all … of all	Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
+MRK	9	35	z9x2	figs-declarative	ἔσται & ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+MRK	9	35	t526		πάντων & πάντων	1	of all … of all	Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
 MRK	9	36	qqcu	writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **their** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	9	37	h242		ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων	1	one of these little children	Alternate translation: “a child such as this one”
 MRK	9	37	ul12	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person. Alternate translation: “on my behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ MRK	9	47	okc3	figs-metonymy	ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλ
 MRK	9	47	h4dv	figs-explicit	μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **enter into the kingdom of God** is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. This phrase has a similar meaning to the phrase “to enter into life” which was used in [Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md) and [Mark 9:45](../mrk/09/45.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s kingdom and live with him forever with only one eye” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
 MRK	9	47	t7uv	figs-hyperbole	μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		When Jesus speaks of entering **into the kingdom of God with one eye** he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	9	47	r2gn	figs-activepassive	βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν	1	to be thrown into hell	See how you translated the phrase **to be thrown into Gehenna** in [Mark 9:45](../mrk/09/45.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	9	49	mr5y	figs-activepassive	πᾶς&πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	everyone will be salted with fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **will be salted** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	9	49	mr5y	figs-activepassive	πᾶς & πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	everyone will be salted with fire	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **will be salted** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	9	49	ma3s	figs-metaphor	πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	will be salted with fire	Here, **fire** is a metaphor for suffering, and putting salt on people is a metaphor for purifying them, so **will be salted with fire** is a metaphor for being purified through suffering. Alternate translation: “will be made pure in the fire of suffering” or “will suffer in order to be purified, as a sacrifice is purified with salt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	9	50	rb7r		ἄναλον γένηται	1	may become unsalty	Alternate translation: “loses its salty taste”
 MRK	9	50	fqb8	figs-rquestion	ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε?	1	with what will you season it?	By using the question **with what will you season it?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form to emphasize a truth that he wants his listeners to understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ MRK	10	intro	bq25			0		# Mark 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formattin
 MRK	10	1	qq93	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται	1	having gotten up, he goes from that place	Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him, and they were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	1	goki	figs-go	ἔρχεται	1		Your language may say “comes” rather than **goes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	10	1	j5wa		καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1	and the other side of the Jordan River	Alternate translation: “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River”
-MRK	10	1	s6fy	figs-go	συνπορεύονται&ὄχλοι πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “the crowds went together to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+MRK	10	1	s6fy	figs-go	συνπορεύονται & ὄχλοι πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “the crowds went together to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	10	1	vzb4		εἰώθει	1	he had been accustomed to do	Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he usually did”
 MRK	10	5	m73x	figs-metonymy	τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν	1	your hardness of heart	Here, **heart** refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	10	5	xqzb	figs-idiom	τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν	1	your hardness of heart	The phrase **hardness of heart** is an idiom which describes stubbornly choosing to resist God’s will and desires and instead choosing one’s own will and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase “the hardness of their heart” in [Mark 3:5](../mrk/03/05.md). Alternate translation: “your stubbornness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -705,9 +705,9 @@ MRK	10	28	hcv3	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamatio
 MRK	10	29	m1w3		ἢ ἀγροὺς	1	or lands	Alternate translation: “or the land that he owns”
 MRK	10	30	sjhg	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ	1	who may not receive	The phrase **not receive** in this verse, when combined with the phrase “no one” in the previous verse, creates a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you can state the entire sentence positively. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 MRK	10	30	heb4		ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ	1	in this time	Alternate translation: “in this present age”
-MRK	10	31	y2lu	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ&ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1		Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
+MRK	10	31	y2lu	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1		Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
 MRK	10	31	ym7t	figs-metaphor	ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	who are first will be last, and the last first	Here, Jesus is using the words **first** and **last** metaphorically. See how you translated these words in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	10	32	hq7y	figs-explicit	οἱ&ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who are following behind	Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	32	hq7y	figs-explicit	οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who are following behind	Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	32	k1nn	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	10	33	pv4w	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 MRK	10	33	qkq9	figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1		When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -715,21 +715,21 @@ MRK	10	33	s1hp	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παρα
 MRK	10	33	ha2g	figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be handed over** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	10	33	ohsf	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	10	33	ils2		παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	deliver him to the Gentiles	Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles”
-MRK	10	34	ccd3	figs-123person	αὐτῷ&αὐτῷ&αὐτὸν&ἀναστήσεται	1	they will mock	In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+MRK	10	34	ccd3	figs-123person	αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀναστήσεται	1	they will mock	In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
 MRK	10	34	t0lt	writing-pronouns	ἐμπαίξουσιν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to “the Gentiles” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will mock him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	10	34	xv2g	figs-explicit	ἀναστήσεται	1	he will rise	The phrase **he will rise** refers to rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” or “he will rise from his grave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	10	35	li9k	figs-exclusive	θέλομεν&αἰτήσωμέν&ἡμῖν	1	we desire … for us … we may ask	Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	10	35	li9k	figs-exclusive	θέλομεν & αἰτήσωμέν & ἡμῖν	1	we desire … for us … we may ask	Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	10	35	ch2r		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md).
 MRK	10	36	he8f	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	10	37	xwf8	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ	1		The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “And James and John said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-MRK	10	37	n1fv	figs-exclusive	δὸς ἡμῖν&καθίσωμεν	1		Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+MRK	10	37	n1fv	figs-exclusive	δὸς ἡμῖν & καθίσωμεν	1		Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 MRK	10	37	bb98	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	in your glory	The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “beside you when you rule in your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	37	kyg6	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** in another way such as using a verbal form of the word. Alternate translation: “next to you when you are glorified” or “sit by you when you are glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	10	38	v1bf		οὐκ οἴδατε	1	You do not know	Alternate translation: “You do not understand”
 MRK	10	38	yvu8	figs-idiom	πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω	1	to drink the cup which I am drinking	The phrase **to drink the cup** is an idiom which refers to suffering some experience which is difficult to undergo or experience. In the Bible, suffering is often referred to as “drinking from a cup.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “suffer as I will suffer” or “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering from which I will drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	10	38	pax6	figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι	1		The phrase **to be baptized with the baptism** is a metaphor which refers to being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering and trials overwhelm a person. Here this metaphor for suffering refers specifically to Jesus’ future suffering in Jerusalem and his death by crucifixion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	10	38	hlue	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι	1		The phrase **I am being baptized** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	10	39	r3pm	writing-pronouns	οἱ&αὐτοῖς	1	We are able	Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+MRK	10	39	r3pm	writing-pronouns	οἱ & αὐτοῖς	1	We are able	Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	10	39	hc1g	figs-idiom	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε	1	you will drink	**The cup that I drink** is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	10	39	c15v	figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1		In this verse Jesus continues to use **baptism** to mean something more. See how you translated Jesus’ symbolic use of baptism in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	10	39	humc	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1		The phrase **I am being baptized** and the phrase **you will be baptized** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form as modeled by the UST or you can express the meaning in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -739,12 +739,12 @@ MRK	10	41	ad19	figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες	1	When heard about this	The w
 MRK	10	41	i48d	figs-explicit	οἱ δέκα	1		Here, **the ten** refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	42	sbk8		προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	having summoned them, Jesus	Alternate translation: “after Jesus called his disciples to him, he”
 MRK	10	42	zfr3	figs-abstractnouns	κατεξουσιάζουσιν	1	exercise authority over	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	10	43	zfz6	figs-explicit	οὐχ οὕτως&ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	But it is not this way among you	The phrase **it is not this way among you** means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you.” The phrase refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than do the Gentile rulers” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	10	43	zfz6	figs-explicit	οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	But it is not this way among you	The phrase **it is not this way among you** means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you.” The phrase refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than do the Gentile rulers” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	10	43	fc3m		μέγας γενέσθαι	1	to become great	Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected”
 MRK	10	43	gfun	figs-declarative	ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **will be your servant** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md) where it occurs with the same meaning and in a similar context. Alternate translation: “must be your servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	10	44	e7sn	figs-metaphor	εἶναι πρῶτος	1	to be first	Here, **to be first** means being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	10	44	qzo8	figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [10:43](../10/43.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-MRK	10	44	u5yb	figs-hyperbole	ἔσται&δοῦλος	1		Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	10	44	u5yb	figs-hyperbole	ἔσται & δοῦλος	1		Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	10	45	ctta	figs-123person	καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
 MRK	10	45	pmk3	figs-go	οὐκ ἦλθεν	1		Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	10	45	a3fr	figs-activepassive	διακονηθῆναι	1	For even the Son of Man did not come to be served	The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ MRK	11	intro	xg3t			0		# Mark 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formattin
 MRK	11	1	ch4j	figs-go	ἐγγίζουσιν	1	And when they come to Jerusalem, to Bethphage and Bethany, to the Mount of Olives	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	11	1	g1fy	translate-names	Βηθφαγὴ	1	Bethphage	The word **Bethphage** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	11	2	bi22	figs-go	ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην	1	opposite us	Your language may say “Come” rather than **Go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Come into the village” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-MRK	11	2	si41	figs-youdual	ὑμῶν&εὑρήσετε	1		Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual)
+MRK	11	2	si41	figs-youdual	ὑμῶν & εὑρήσετε	1		Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual)
 MRK	11	2	r41g	translate-unknown	πῶλον	1	a colt	The term **colt** refers to a young donkey. If your readers would not be familiar with what a donkey is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	11	2	yw78	figs-gendernotations	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1	on which no man has yet sat	Although the term **man** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense, that includes both men and women. He means that “no one” had yet sat on the donkey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “no person has yet sat” or “no one has yet sat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	11	2	zloo	figs-metonymy	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1		Jesus is using the term **sat** to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person has ever ridden” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy)
@@ -804,10 +804,10 @@ MRK	11	12	zr8n	figs-go	ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανί
 MRK	11	13	y447	figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	11	13	yg5n	figs-go	ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν	1	if perhaps he could find anything on it	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	11	13	j6cq	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα	1	he found nothing except leaves	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-MRK	11	13	g76z		ὁ&καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων	1	the season	Alternate translation: “it was not the time of year for figs”
+MRK	11	13	g76z		ὁ & καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων	1	the season	Alternate translation: “it was not the time of year for figs”
 MRK	11	14	u3bk	figs-apostrophe	εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	he said to it, “No one will ever eat fruit from you again.”	Jesus is addressing an object that he knows cannot hear him, the fig tree, in order to teach his listeners something. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing this fact by talking about the fig tree. Alternate translation: “Jesus said regarding the fig tree that no one would ever eat fruit from it again” or “Jesus said regarding the fig tree that no one would ever eat fruit from it again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 MRK	11	14	b362	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	he said to it	The phrase **to eternity** is a Jewish expression which means “forever.” In this context it specifically means “ever again.” Mark assumed his readers would be familiar with this expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of the expression **to eternity** explicitly. Alternate translation: “ever again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	14	ij5h	figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι&ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	his disciples heard it	The phrase **no one will any longer** is a double negative. Jesus uses a double negative here for emphasis. If is would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea using only one negative statement and show the emphasis some other way. Alternate translation: “Surely, no one will eat from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+MRK	11	14	ij5h	figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι & ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	his disciples heard it	The phrase **no one will any longer** is a double negative. Jesus uses a double negative here for emphasis. If is would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea using only one negative statement and show the emphasis some other way. Alternate translation: “Surely, no one will eat from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 MRK	11	15	hj7z	figs-go	ἔρχονται εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	coming	Your language may say “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	11	15	c2wl	figs-synecdoche	ἱερὸν	1		See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	11	15	hoym		ἐκβάλλειν	1		Alternate translation: “to throw out” or “to force out” or “to drive out”
@@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ MRK	11	17	t9x9	figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1		If your readers mi
 MRK	11	17	qeix	figs-metaphor	οἶκός μου	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his **house** because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	11	17	t1ho	figs-metaphor	οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to a place where people would pray as a **house of prayer**. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	11	17	npdf	figs-activepassive	οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται	1		The phrase **will be called** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is probably best to say that people will call God’s temple a house of prayer, although it is also possible to say that God will call it that as well. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” or “Everyone will call my temple a house of prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	11	17	qvxz	figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῆς&πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “pray,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	17	qvxz	figs-abstractnouns	προσευχῆς & πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “pray,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	17	dpt1	figs-metaphor	σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	But you have made it a den of robbers	God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s den or lair. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “a place where thieves gather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	11	18	k6dv		ἐζήτουν πῶς	1	they were seeking a way	Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way that”
 MRK	11	19	h4hg		ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο	1	when evening came	Alternate translation: “in the evening”
@@ -840,10 +840,10 @@ MRK	11	23	y76p	figs-metonymy	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ 
 MRK	11	23	doeg	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ	1		The phrase **not doubt** is a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 MRK	11	23	fzp5		ἔσται αὐτῷ	1	it will be for him	Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”
 MRK	11	24	pn9x		διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Because of this, I say to you	Alternate translation: “For this reason, I say to you”
-MRK	11	24	c61c	figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν&προσεύχεσθε&ἐλάβετε&ὑμῖν	1		In this verse, all four occurrences of the word **you** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	24	c61c	figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν & προσεύχεσθε & ἐλάβετε & ὑμῖν	1		In this verse, all four occurrences of the word **you** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	11	24	abke	figs-yousingular	πιστεύετε	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word **believe** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	11	24	tu5z	figs-explicit	ἔσται ὑμῖν	1	it will be yours	In the phrase **it will be to you**, the implication is that God will provide what is asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	11	25	m2aw	figs-yousingular	στήκετε&ἔχετε&ὑμῶν&ὑμῖν&ὑμῶν	1		In this verse all occurrences of the word **you** and **your** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	11	25	m2aw	figs-yousingular	στήκετε & ἔχετε & ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν	1		In this verse all occurrences of the word **you** and **your** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	11	25	m7xi	figs-explicitinfo	ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι	1	when you stand praying	It is common in Hebrew culture to **stand** when **praying** to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If it would be helpful in your culture, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “when you are praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 MRK	11	25	f6ex	figs-explicit	εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος	1	if you have something against anyone	Here, **have something against anyone** refers to any anger, unforgiveness, or grudge a person holds **against** another person for offending or sinning against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	11	25	ttxg	figs-yousingular	ἀφίετε	1		In this verse, the first occurrence of the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ MRK	11	25	jjs9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** intr
 MRK	11	25	omze	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	27	alh5	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ	1	as he is walking around in the temple	The phrase, **he is walking around in the temple** means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard. Jesus was not walking in the temple, since only priests were allowed inside the temple building. See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	11	28	se9b	figs-parallelism	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς	1	By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them?	The question **By what authority do you do these things**, and the question **who gave you this authority** could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?”
-MRK	11	28	ooxp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ&ἐξουσίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	11	28	ooxp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ & ἐξουσίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	29	erqp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	11	29	aak2		ἕνα λόγον	1		Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question”
 MRK	11	30	vpgv		τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1		Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?”
@@ -867,8 +867,8 @@ MRK	11	31	nu1m	figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	From heaven	See how you tr
 MRK	11	32	tczm	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 MRK	11	32	aus1	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’	The phrase **From men** refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	11	32	v2gs	figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	From men	See how you translated the phrase **From men** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-MRK	11	32	b5qb	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’&	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-MRK	11	32	z93u	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’&	The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	11	32	b5qb	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’ & 	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	32	z93u	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’ & 	The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	11	32	z998	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν	1	They were afraid of the crowd	The author of the Gospel of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	11	32	dqlt	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 MRK	11	32	x4bo	figs-explicit	ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον	1		Here, the word **all** refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ MRK	12	1	qa93	writing-participants	ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύ
 MRK	12	1	l2i2	translate-unknown	ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς	1	leased the vineyard to vine growers	As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use his vineyard in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	12	1	fd71		γεωργοῖς	1		While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”
 MRK	12	2	s83v	figs-explicit	τῷ καιρῷ	1	at the season	This refers to the time of harvest. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made clear, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	2	su2e		γεωργοὺς&γεωργῶν	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
+MRK	12	2	su2e		γεωργοὺς & γεωργῶν	1		See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md).
 MRK	12	2	oxoo	figs-metaphor	καρπῶν	1		The word **fruit** could be: (1) literal. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	3	c321	figs-metaphor	ἀπέστειλαν κενόν	1	with nothing	Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Here, the word **empty** means that they did not give him any of the fruit from the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what it means to be **empty** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	4	jhi3		καὶ ἠτίμασαν	1		Alternate translation: “and humiliated” or “badly mistreated”
@@ -930,7 +930,7 @@ MRK	12	17	fl4l	figs-metonymy	τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρ
 MRK	12	17	la16	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ	1	and the things of God, to God	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	18	edcn	writing-background	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		Mark provides this background information about the Sadducees to help readers understand what happens in this episode. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who belong to a sect which denies the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	12	18	y8yo	writing-participants	καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		Mark uses the words **Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, come to him** to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, then came to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-MRK	12	18	ss09	figs-distinguish	Σαδδουκαῖοι&οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+MRK	12	18	ss09	figs-distinguish	Σαδδουκαῖοι & οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1		This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 MRK	12	18	rdl7	figs-explicit	οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	who say there is no resurrection	The word **resurrection** refers to becoming alive again after being dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	18	ax25	figs-synecdoche	λέγοντες	1		Mark may be using the singular **saying** to mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group. You could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	12	19	w3ev		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md).
@@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ MRK	12	21	hx1q	translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1		If your language does not u
 MRK	12	22	wjq8	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	the seven	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	22	l3dg	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	the seven did not leave offspring	See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	23	w4wu		ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife?	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a **resurrection**. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
-MRK	12	23	c4p5	figs-ellipsis	οἱ&ἑπτὰ	1		The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	23	c4p5	figs-ellipsis	οἱ & ἑπτὰ	1		The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	24	zp2p	figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	12	24	sie3	figs-activepassive	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the Scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	12	24	i8il		τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the power of God	Alternate translation: “how powerful God is”
@@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ MRK	12	26	re82	figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς
 MRK	12	27	dgc9	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	the God of the dead, but of the living	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	27	xxzs	figs-nominaladj	ζώντων	1		Jesus is using the adjective **living** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “people who are alive” or “people whom he has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	27	v7ui	figs-activepassive	πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	the God of the dead, but of the living	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You misunderstand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	12	28	zqy4	writing-participants	καὶ&εἷς τῶν γραμματέων	1		Mark uses the statement **And one of the scribes** to introduce this new character into the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “one of the scribes” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to him as something like “A man who taught the Jewish laws,” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+MRK	12	28	zqy4	writing-participants	καὶ & εἷς τῶν γραμματέων	1		Mark uses the statement **And one of the scribes** to introduce this new character into the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “one of the scribes” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to him as something like “A man who taught the Jewish laws,” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 MRK	12	28	b3yh	figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν	1		Here, Mark is using the word **seen** to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	28	q1u5	figs-metaphor	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	he asked him	Here, the scribe is using the word **first** to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	28	kftz	translate-ordinal	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ MRK	12	29	mmtb		Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1		The phrase **the Lord our Go
 MRK	12	30	thj7	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1		Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	12	30	xjng	figs-merism	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	from your whole heart … from your whole soul … from your whole mind … from your whole strength	Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring to the entirety of a person by listing different parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with the entirety of your being” or “completely, with your entire person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 MRK	12	30	q49v	figs-metaphor	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1	from your whole heart, and from your whole soul	Here, the **heart** represents the desires and motives. Alternate translation: “with all your desires” or “zealously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	30	m8hi		ἐξ&ἐξ&ἐξ&ἐξ	1		Alternate translation: “with”
+MRK	12	30	m8hi		ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ	1		Alternate translation: “with”
 MRK	12	30	x3n5	figs-abstractnouns	ψυχῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “essence” or “being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	12	30	ln0t	figs-abstractnouns	διανοίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	12	30	mii2	figs-abstractnouns	ἰσχύος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power” or “ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ MRK	12	38	rwxq	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1		In the original language in wh
 MRK	12	38	yhfv	figs-metonymy	βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων	1		Jesus says **Watch out** to warn about the influence of certain people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	38	nxy9	translate-symaction	τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν	1		In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in **long robes** was to assert one’s right to high status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 MRK	12	38	mu5a	figs-explicit	ἀσπασμοὺς	1		The implication is that these would be respectful **greetings** in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “respectful greetings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	12	39	mwmf	figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας&πρωτοκλισίας	1		Both uses of the word **first** here mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	12	39	mwmf	figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας	1		Both uses of the word **first** here mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	40	jtw4	figs-metonymy	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	They devour the houses of the widows	Jesus speaks of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	40	j27b	figs-metaphor	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	the houses of the widows	Jesus says that the scribes are **devouring** or eating up the possessions of widows. He means that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	40	r3ht		καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι	1		Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they are offering long prayers”
@@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ MRK	12	40	qm52	figs-metonymy	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερ
 MRK	12	40	h36x	figs-explicit	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	will receive greater condemnation	The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	41	r69x	writing-background	καὶ	1	Connecting Statement:	Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help his readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	12	41	nohd	writing-newevent	καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου, ἐθεώρει πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον; καὶ πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά	1		This background information introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “after Jesus sat down he was watching the crowd put money into the offering box and noticing that there were many rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-MRK	12	41	p2kp	figs-metonymy	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου&τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	the temple offering box	Mark is speaking of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God. He associates the boxes with **the treasury**, the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	12	41	p2kp	figs-metonymy	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου & τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	the temple offering box	Mark is speaking of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God. He associates the boxes with **the treasury**, the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	41	w4xc	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 MRK	12	41	jgkw	figs-nominaladj	πλούσιοι	1		Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people,” as the UST does. Alternate translation: “wealthy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	41	rl1l	figs-ellipsis	πολλά	1		Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@ MRK	12	42	n29e	translate-bmoney	ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	are a quadr
 MRK	12	43	ipl1	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 MRK	12	43	q124		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **Truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
 MRK	12	43	ih0m	figs-metaphor	ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ	1		Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, using it to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	12	43	n8z5	figs-explicit	πάντων&τῶν βαλλόντων	1	all of those putting into	In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	12	43	n8z5	figs-explicit	πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων	1	all of those putting into	In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	43	n7su		γαζοφυλάκιον	1	having called	See how you translated the term **offering box** in [12:41](../12/41.md).
 MRK	12	44	c7jj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the reason for what Jesus said in [12:43](../12/43.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MRK	12	44	ihuq		ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον	1		Alternate translation: “had a lot of money but only gave a small portion of it”
@@ -1069,27 +1069,27 @@ MRK	13	5	fe42	writing-pronouns	λέγειν αὐτοῖς	1	to say to them	The
 MRK	13	5	qekc	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Be careful** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	13	6	z63u	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	in my name	Here Jesus uses the word **name** to mean identity and the authority that comes with the identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	13	6	cee7	figs-quotesinquotes	πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Many will come in my name claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-MRK	13	6	pbz4	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ&πολλοὺς	1		Here both uses of the word **Many** refer to “many people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	6	pbz4	figs-explicit	πολλοὶ & πολλοὺς	1		Here both uses of the word **Many** refer to “many people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	6	wv12	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	they will lead many astray	The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	7	fl5h		πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	you may hear of wars and rumors of wars	The phrase **wars and rumors of wars** could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
 MRK	13	7	d1k9	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	but the end is not yet	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	7	mi4d	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	the end	Here, **the end** implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	8	ydrb	figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται&ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-MRK	13	8	rlxf	figs-genericnoun	ἐγερθήσεται&ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1		The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-MRK	13	8	oyrd	figs-metonymy	ἐγερθήσεται&ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1		The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	13	8	xln4	figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται&ἐπ’	1	will rise against	The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	13	8	ydrb	figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+MRK	13	8	rlxf	figs-genericnoun	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1		The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+MRK	13	8	oyrd	figs-metonymy	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1		The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	13	8	xln4	figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’	1	will rise against	The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	8	e2ln	figs-ellipsis	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	kingdom against kingdom	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	8	hz6g	figs-genericnoun	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	13	8	wpd3	figs-metonymy	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		The term **kingdom** represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	13	8	pcyi	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **These things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	8	dz8g	figs-metaphor	ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα	1	These are the beginnings of birth pains	Jesus uses the metaphor of **birth pains** because, in the same way that the pain of childbirth is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually be replaced by joy when Christ returns. Because childbirth occurs in all cultures, you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” or “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to give birth to a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	13	9	nuti	figs-metaphor	βλέπετε&ἑαυτούς	1		Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK	13	9	c2cl	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε&ἑαυτούς	1	But you, watch yourselves	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **watch yourselves** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you, watch yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MRK	13	9	nuti	figs-metaphor	βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς	1		Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MRK	13	9	c2cl	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς	1	But you, watch yourselves	In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **watch yourselves** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you, watch yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	13	9	ulws	figs-rpronouns	βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς	1		Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to draw the disciples’ attention to themselves, because he now transitions away from telling them about general signs and begins telling them about specific trials that they will personally encounter. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But give heed to yourselves personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 MRK	13	9	mbr5	writing-pronouns	παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς	1		The pronoun **They** refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will deliver you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	13	9	voih	figs-activepassive	δαρήσεσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will beat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	9	zdp8	figs-activepassive	σταθήσεσθε	1	you will be beaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	13	9	gbb4	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ&σταθήσεσθε	1	you will be made to stand before	Here, **made to stand before** means to be put on trial and judged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	13	9	gbb4	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ & σταθήσεσθε	1	you will be made to stand before	Here, **made to stand before** means to be put on trial and judged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	13	9	v23p	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μαρτύριον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you can express the same idea in another way as the UST does or use a verb form such as “testify.” Alternate translation: “to testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	13	9	qq6r		εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1		Alternate translation: “to testify about me to them”
 MRK	13	9	y6p6	writing-pronouns	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	for a testimony to them	The pronoun **them** refers to the **governors** and **kings** mentioned in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ MRK	13	11	a9b6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1
 MRK	13	12	toqp	figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1		Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	12	py9u	figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς	1	brother will deliver brother to death	Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	12	m6iq	figs-gendernotations	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν	1		Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters will deliver their siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-MRK	13	12	utyk	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον&θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the same idea with a verb form. Alternate translation: “be killed … have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	13	12	utyk	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον & θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the same idea with a verb form. Alternate translation: “be killed … have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	13	12	b9ux	figs-ellipsis	πατὴρ τέκνον	1	a father, his child	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “a father will deliver up his child to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	12	hrhw	figs-gendernotations	πατὴρ τέκνον	1		Although the term **father** is masculine, Jesus is probably using the word here in a generic sense that includes both fathers and mothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “parents, their children” or “fathers and mothers will deliver their children to the authorities to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 MRK	13	12	vjcw	figs-explicit	ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1		Here, **children will rise up against parents and put them to death** probably does not mean that children will directly murder their parents. Rather, this probably means that children will deliver their parents to people in positions of authority and then these people will have their parents killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1112,13 +1112,13 @@ MRK	13	12	r66s	translate-symaction	ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ
 MRK	13	13	pk3g	figs-activepassive	ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων	1	you will be hated by everyone	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	13	w8pz	figs-hyperbole	ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων	1		Here, **everyone** is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize to his disciples the fact that many people will hate them because they believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	13	13	jhp6	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	because of my name	Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person, their name. Jesus is using the phrase **my name** to refer to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	13	13	w28q	figs-activepassive	ὁ&ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται	1	the one who endures to the end, that one will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	13	13	c33n	figs-explicit	ὁ&ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	the one who endures to the end	Here, **endured** represents having continued to be faithful to God even while suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	13	w28q	figs-activepassive	ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται	1	the one who endures to the end, that one will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	13	13	c33n	figs-explicit	ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	the one who endures to the end	Here, **endured** represents having continued to be faithful to God even while suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	13	vcz4		ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος	1	to the end	The phrase **to the end** could mean: (1) to the end of one’s life. Alternate translation: “who endures to the point of death” or “who endures till death” (2) until the end of time. This meaning means that believers must endure and keep on enduring until the time when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “who keeps on enduring to the very end” (3) to the end of that time of hardship and persecution. Alternate translation: “who endures until the time of testing is over”
 MRK	13	14	d4nw	figs-explicit	τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως	1	the abomination of desolation	The phrase **the abomination of desolation** is from the book of Daniel. Jesus’ audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	14	vx3c	figs-explicit	ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ	1	standing where it should not be	Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	14	ck7a		ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω	1	let the reader understand	The phrase **Let the one reading understand** is not Jesus speaking. Mark added this to get the readers’ attention so that they would pay attention to this warning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show that this is not part of Jesus’ direct speech by putting brackets around this phrase, as the UST and ULT do, or you could show your readers in some other way that is natural in your language.
-MRK	13	15	m1hq	figs-explicit	ὁ&ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ	1	on the housetop	Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the person who is on top of their roof should escape immediately and not enter their house to get anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	13	15	m1hq	figs-explicit	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ	1	on the housetop	Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the person who is on top of their roof should escape immediately and not enter their house to get anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	16	y1e9	translate-unknown	ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω	1	let the one in the field not turn back to the things behind	The word **cloak** refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coat” or “outer garment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	13	17	bi8n	figs-idiom	ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις	1	to those having in the womb	The phrase **having in the womb** is an idiom meaning the woman is with child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	17	bv9z	figs-explicit	ταῖς θηλαζούσαις	1		This does not mean babies who are nursing but rather refers to women who provide their milk for their babies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “mothers who are nursing their babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1130,8 +1130,8 @@ MRK	13	19	l5u9	figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις	1		If your language does not use
 MRK	13	19	e98e		οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη	1	such as these have not happened	Alternate translation: “of a kind that has not yet happened” or “which will be worse than any type of suffering that has happened”
 MRK	13	19	r1ly	figs-abstractnouns	ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	13	19	c5sz	figs-ellipsis	οὐ μὴ γένηται	1	may certainly not happen	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “there will never be days like these again” or “after this tribulation, there will never again be a tribulation like it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	13	20	y7g6	figs-idiom	μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν&ἐκολόβωσεν	1	did not cut short the days	The words **cut short** form an idiom which means “to shorten.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “did not shorten … he shortened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	13	20	el7g	figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας&τὰς ἡμέρας	1		See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “that time … that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	13	20	y7g6	figs-idiom	μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν & ἐκολόβωσεν	1	did not cut short the days	The words **cut short** form an idiom which means “to shorten.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “did not shorten … he shortened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	13	20	el7g	figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας & τὰς ἡμέρας	1		See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “that time … that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	20	kda6	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	no flesh would be saved	Jesus is describing people by reference to something associated with them, the **flesh** they are made of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no one would be saved” or “no people would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	13	20	dosx	figs-activepassive	εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark makes clear that “the Lord” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “because the Lord will shorten the day, not everyone will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	20	q8hm	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	for the sake of the elect	Here, the phrase **be saved** refers to being saved from physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone would die” or “no one would survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ MRK	14	3	bf84	translate-names	Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ	1	of Simon th
 MRK	14	3	hh81		λεπροῦ	1		See how you translated the term “leper” in [1:40](../01/40.md).
 MRK	14	3	sh4s	translate-unknown	κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ	1	as he is reclining at table	In this culture, the manner of eating at a feast or dinner party was to lie on a couch and prop oneself up with the left arm on some pillows. Alternate translation: “while he is lying on a banqueting couch to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	3	nl8f	translate-unknown	ἀλάβαστρον	1		The word **alabaster** is the name of a soft, white stone. People stored precious and valuable items in jars made from alabaster. Alternate translation: “a jar made of soft, white stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-MRK	14	3	hk2p	translate-unknown	μύρου&πολυτελοῦς	1	an alabaster jar	This **oil** had fragrant additives. To make a themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Alternate translation: “of expensive oil with perfume in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	14	3	hk2p	translate-unknown	μύρου & πολυτελοῦς	1	an alabaster jar	This **oil** had fragrant additives. To make a themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Alternate translation: “of expensive oil with perfume in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	3	fqa9	translate-unknown	μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1	of very costly anointing-oil of pure nard	The **perfumed oil** was made from the roots of a **nard** plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” If your readers would not be familiar with **nard** plants, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of highly valued scented oil made from spikenard roots” or “containing costly perfumed oil distilled from the nard roots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	3	rw4f	figs-possession	μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1		In this phrase, the second occurrence of the word **of** is used to describe **perfumed oil** that is “made from” **very precious pure nard**. If this use of the possessive **of** would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “containing very precious perfumed oil of pure nard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 MRK	14	3	yb3w		πολυτελοῦς	1		Alternate translation: “very precious”
@@ -1217,7 +1217,7 @@ MRK	14	4	v57p	figs-rquestion	εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ
 MRK	14	4	g9qw	figs-ellipsis	εἰς τί	1		Mark’s quotation is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For what reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	14	4	gjmg	translate-unknown	μύρου	1		See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	5	xfzs	translate-unknown	τὸ μύρον	1		See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-MRK	14	5	y113	figs-activepassive	ἠδύνατο&τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι	1	this perfume was able to be sold	Mark wants to show his readers that those present were mainly concerned about money. If your readers would not understand this use of the passive form here, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we could have sold this perfume” or “she could have sold this perfume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	14	5	y113	figs-activepassive	ἠδύνατο & τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι	1	this perfume was able to be sold	Mark wants to show his readers that those present were mainly concerned about money. If your readers would not understand this use of the passive form here, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we could have sold this perfume” or “she could have sold this perfume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	5	t4p8	translate-bmoney	δηναρίων τριακοσίων	1	300 denarii	See how you translated the word **denarii** in [6:37](../06/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	14	5	h62k	figs-nominaladj	δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	given to the poor	Here, the adjective **poor** is being used as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the money given to people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	5	k83q	figs-explicit	δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	given to the poor	Here, the word **given** refers to giving the money which could be made from the sale of the perfumed oil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1225,7 +1225,7 @@ MRK	14	5	kmpd		καὶ ἐνεβριμῶντο αὐτῇ	1		Alternate translat
 MRK	14	6	r9wt	figs-rquestion	τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε?	1	Why are you troubling her?	With the question **Why are you causing trouble for her?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form here to rebuke the guests who are troubling this woman regarding what she has done for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not trouble her!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	14	6	f4yj	figs-abstractnouns	καλὸν ἔργον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **work**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	7	tc3j	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πτωχοὺς	1	the poor	See how you translated the phrase **the poor** in [14:5](../14/05.md). Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	14	9	vr3w		ἀμὴν&λέγω ὑμῖν	1	truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
+MRK	14	9	vr3w		ἀμὴν & λέγω ὑμῖν	1	truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
 MRK	14	9	ysc5	figs-activepassive	ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	wherever the gospel may be preached	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	9	ljh1	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται	1	what she has done will also be spoken of	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “my followers will also speak of what she has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	9	u2ar	figs-abstractnouns	μνημόσυνον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **remembrance**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST, or you can express the same idea in another way that is natural in your language.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1241,7 +1241,7 @@ MRK	14	11	f7ek	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτει	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Ju
 MRK	14	11	jrym	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1		The second occurrence of the pronoun **him** in this verse refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	12	vxax	figs-explicit	τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν Ἀζύμων	1		This was the **first day** of the seven-day festival described in [14:1](../14/01.md). You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “on the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	12	bel5	figs-metonymy	φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα	1	you may eat the Passover	Jesus’ disciples are using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover** to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	14	13	suny	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς&ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+MRK	14	13	suny	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 MRK	14	13	cijy		καὶ ἀπαντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων	1		Alternate translation: “and you will see a man carrying a jug of water”
 MRK	14	13	a7xg	translate-unknown	κεράμιον ὕδατος	1	bearing a pitcher of water	Here, **pitcher of water** means not a small serving **pitcher**, but a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	14	i344	figs-quotesinquotes	εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω	1	The Teacher says, “Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?”	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “tell the owner of the house that the Teacher wants to know where the guest room is where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ MRK	14	19	f13p	figs-doublenegatives	μήτι	1	Surely not I?	The phrase **Surely
 MRK	14	20	n1tv	figs-nominaladj	εἷς τῶν δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “He is one of the twelve of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	14	20	htn4	figs-explicit	ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον	1	who is dipping with me into the bowl	Part of the Passover meal involved **dipping** bread into a flavored sauce called haroseth sauce. Mark assumes that his readers will know this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “dipping his bread into the bowl with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	21	cif4	figs-123person	ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ; οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “For I, the Son of Man, am going away just as Scripture says about me, but woe to that man by whom I will be betrayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-MRK	14	21	h35q		Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
+MRK	14	21	h35q		Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
 MRK	14	21	q5l3	figs-euphemism	ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	For the Son of Man is going away just as it has been written about him	Jesus uses the phrase **going away** to refer to his death. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die just as the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MRK	14	21	hl6z	figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here, Mark uses **it is written** to mean that it is prophesied in the Old Testament Scriptures. Mark assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	21	b13q	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “people” did it. Alternate translation: “men inspired by God have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1304,14 +1304,14 @@ MRK	14	29	j961	figs-idiom	σκανδαλισθήσονται	1		See how you tran
 MRK	14	29	div5	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐγώ	1	Even if all will fall away, yet not I	In the phrase **not I**, Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will not fall away” or “I will not forsake you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	14	30	z2q9		ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly I say to you	See how you translated the statement **Truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
 MRK	14	30	i4g3	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	the rooster crows	See how you translated the similar phrase “rooster crowing” in [13:35](../13/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-MRK	14	31	z9le	figs-explicit	ὡσαύτως&καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον	1	they all also were speaking in the same manner	The phrase **they all also were speaking in the same manner** means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+MRK	14	31	z9le	figs-explicit	ὡσαύτως & καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον	1	they all also were speaking in the same manner	The phrase **they all also were speaking in the same manner** means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	32	deg7	writing-pronouns	ἔρχονται	1	they come to a place	The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus and his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	32	ni66	figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” or “they go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	14	34	eyw3	figs-synecdoche	ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	My soul is	By using the phrase **My soul**, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	14	34	krj1	figs-abstractnouns	ψυχή μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	34	ic1g	figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	even to the point of death	Jesus is using the phrase **even to death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even to death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	14	35	nk8l	figs-explicit	εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν	1	if it is possible	Alternate translation: “if possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	14	35	wc6d	figs-idiom	παρέλθῃ&ἡ ὥρα	1	the hour might pass	Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	14	35	wc6d	figs-idiom	παρέλθῃ & ἡ ὥρα	1	the hour might pass	Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	14	35	gj74	figs-metonymy	παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1		Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the **hour** itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that **the hour might pass**, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	36	c11w	translate-transliterate	Ἀββά	1	Abba	The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father** and which the Jews used to address their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers, who did not know Aramaic. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Mark does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 MRK	14	36	t9r2	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	Father	The word **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1321,16 +1321,16 @@ MRK	14	37	ja6d	writing-pronouns	εὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς καθεύδο
 MRK	14	37	kp33	figs-rquestion	Σίμων, καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι?	1	Simon, are you asleep? Were you not able to stay alert for one hour?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to rebuke **Peter** for falling asleep. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	14	38	hi36	figs-abstractnouns	προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **temptation**, you can express the idea behind it with a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “pray, so that nothing will tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	38	zrp4	figs-explicit	προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1	so that you may not enter into temptation	The implications are that the disciples will soon experience the **temptation** to abandon Jesus in order to save themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “pray that when the Jewish leaders come to arrest me and you are tempted to try to save yourselves by running away or denying that you know me, you will not sin by doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	14	38	c1je	figs-metonymy	τὸ&πνεῦμα	1	The spirit … the flesh	Jesus is describing the inner part of a person (which includes their desires and will) by association with their **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated **spirit** in [2:8](../02/08.md), where **spirit** is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “The inner self” or “The inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MRK	14	38	djxc	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&πνεῦμα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **spirit**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+MRK	14	38	c1je	figs-metonymy	τὸ & πνεῦμα	1	The spirit … the flesh	Jesus is describing the inner part of a person (which includes their desires and will) by association with their **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated **spirit** in [2:8](../02/08.md), where **spirit** is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “The inner self” or “The inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+MRK	14	38	djxc	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & πνεῦμα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **spirit**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	38	gt2n	figs-ellipsis	πρόθυμον	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK	14	38	b909		ἡ&σὰρξ ἀσθενής	1		Here, the word **flesh** could: (1) include the meaning of both option 2 and option 3 and therefore **flesh** would refer to both the weakness of the human body and also to the deficiency of human desire and ability to do what is right. Alternate translation: “the body and your spiritual strength is weak” (2) refer to the human “body.” Alternate translation: “the body is weak” (3) refer to the sinful part of human nature that prefers to seek comfort and seek what it desires rather than obey God and do the things that please him. Alternate translation: “the sinful human nature is weak”
+MRK	14	38	b909		ἡ & σὰρξ ἀσθενής	1		Here, the word **flesh** could: (1) include the meaning of both option 2 and option 3 and therefore **flesh** would refer to both the weakness of the human body and also to the deficiency of human desire and ability to do what is right. Alternate translation: “the body and your spiritual strength is weak” (2) refer to the human “body.” Alternate translation: “the body is weak” (3) refer to the sinful part of human nature that prefers to seek comfort and seek what it desires rather than obey God and do the things that please him. Alternate translation: “the sinful human nature is weak”
 MRK	14	39	l9nj		τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών	1	having said the same thing	Alternate translation: “and said the same thing he had prayed the first time”
 MRK	14	40	zkb2	grammar-connect-logic-result	εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the three disciples’ eyes were weighed down, he found them sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MRK	14	40	bgyj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1		Here, the pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in a way that would make that clear in your language. Alternate translation: “the three disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	40	vwlx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** indicates that what follows is the reason that Jesus found the disciples sleeping. Use a natural way in your language to show this connection. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-MRK	14	40	ht2p	figs-idiom	ἦσαν&αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	for their eyes were weighed down	The phrase **their eyes were weighed down** is an idiom meaning “they were very tired.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were very sleepy” or “they were very tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-MRK	14	40	hayg	figs-activepassive	ἦσαν&αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tiredness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” or “their sleepiness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	14	40	ht2p	figs-idiom	ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	for their eyes were weighed down	The phrase **their eyes were weighed down** is an idiom meaning “they were very tired.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were very sleepy” or “they were very tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	14	40	hayg	figs-activepassive	ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tiredness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” or “their sleepiness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	41	x7qd	translate-ordinal	ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον	1	he comes the third time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the third time** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he comes yet again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	14	41	jo0t	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in a way that would make that clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to his three disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	41	lw7w	figs-rquestion	καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε	1	Are you still sleeping and resting?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to rebuke his disciples for falling asleep and resting. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1377,12 +1377,12 @@ MRK	14	56	quw1	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἴσαι αἱ μαρτυρίαι ο
 MRK	14	57	vulz		ἐψευδομαρτύρουν	1		See how you translated the word **testifying** in [14:56](../14/56.md).
 MRK	14	58	nbvu	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, τὸν χειροποίητον, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “We heard him saying that he will destroy this temple made with hands and in three days will build another made without hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	14	58	f82e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	We heard him saying	The pronoun **We** refers to the people who falsely testified against Jesus. It does not include the people to whom they are speaking. If your language requires you to mark such forms, **We** would be exclusive here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-MRK	14	58	e94y	figs-synecdoche	τὸν χειροποίητον&ἀχειροποίητον	1	made with hands … made without hands	Here, Jesus uses the word **hands** to mean “men”. Jesus uses one part of a person to refer to the entire person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “made by men … made without man’s help” or “built by men … which will be built without man’s help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+MRK	14	58	e94y	figs-synecdoche	τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον	1	made with hands … made without hands	Here, Jesus uses the word **hands** to mean “men”. Jesus uses one part of a person to refer to the entire person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “made by men … made without man’s help” or “built by men … which will be built without man’s help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	14	58	hm5e	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλον	1	I will build another	By saying **another**, Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word “temple” from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	14	58	v4ny	figs-extrainfo	ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω	1		By saying **another made without hands**, Jesus is referring to his body which God would bring back to life after **three days**. Because this is a direct quote of something that Jesus said, you should keep this information implicit in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	14	59	atbz	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ μαρτυρία	1		See how you translated the word **testimony** in [14:55](../14/55.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	14	60	d7i8		καταμαρτυροῦσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the word **testifying** in [14:56](../14/56.md).
-MRK	14	61	p8b5	figs-doublet	ὁ&ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν	1		The phrases **he was silent** and the phrase **did not answer** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus did not respond to any of the false accusations that were being made against him. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “he did not reply to anything that was said against him at all!” or “Jesus did not reply to a single thing that was said against him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+MRK	14	61	p8b5	figs-doublet	ὁ & ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν	1		The phrases **he was silent** and the phrase **did not answer** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus did not respond to any of the false accusations that were being made against him. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “he did not reply to anything that was said against him at all!” or “Jesus did not reply to a single thing that was said against him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 MRK	14	61	o27t	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ	1	the Son of the Blessed One	Here, the title **the Blessed One** is a way of referring to God, so when the **high priest** asks Jesus if he is **the Son of the Blessed One**, he is asking Jesus if he is “the Son of God.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	62	c212		τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **the Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
 MRK	14	62	yhhk	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ MRK	14	69	v5kr	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	This one is from among them	The p
 MRK	14	70	qjgs	writing-pronouns	ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		See how you translated the phrase **from among them** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	14	71	ce6r	figs-explicit	ἀναθεματίζειν	1	to curse	Here, the phrase **to curse** means “to invoke a curse from God upon oneself.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to invoke God’s curse upon himself if what he was saying was not true” or “to ask God to curse him if what he was saying was false” or “to invoke God’s destruction upon himself if what he was saying was false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	71	vihe	figs-explicit	ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε	1		Here, the phrase **to swear** means “to subject oneself to an oath” or “to put oneself under an oath.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to swear by saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” or “to promise by making an oath and saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	14	72	i7u2	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν&ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	immediately a rooster crowed	See how you translated the similar phrase in [13:35](../13/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+MRK	14	72	i7u2	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν & ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	immediately a rooster crowed	See how you translated the similar phrase in [13:35](../13/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 MRK	14	72	ja3e	translate-ordinal	ἐκ δευτέρου	1	a second time	The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **a second time** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	14	72	cfno	figs-metonymy	ῥῆμα	1		Mark is using the term **word** to describe what Jesus had said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	72	trxc		τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ	1		Alternate translation: “you will say three times that you do not know me”
@@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ MRK	15	1	v2yf		παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ	1	handed him over to Pilate	Al
 MRK	15	2	kn7i	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει	1		Together the two words **answering** and **says** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “responding to him, says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 MRK	15	2	dh6n	figs-idiom	σὺ λέγεις	1	You say so	**You say so** is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what Pilate has said is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is as you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	15	3	b9sj	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς πολλά	1		Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the chief priests were accusing Jesus of many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-MRK	15	3	ue18		κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ&πολλά	1	were accusing him of many things	Alternate translation: “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things”
+MRK	15	3	ue18		κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά	1	were accusing him of many things	Alternate translation: “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things”
 MRK	15	4	s2as		οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν?	1	Do you not answer at all?	Alternate translation: “Are you not going to respond to anything they have said?”
 MRK	15	5	way9		ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη	1	so that Pilate was amazed	Alternate translation: “But Jesus made no further reply”
 MRK	15	6	ul19	writing-background	κατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν, ἀπέλυεν αὐτοῖς ἕνα δέσμιον, ὃν παρῃτοῦντο	1	Now	The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line as Mark shifts to telling background information about Pilate’s tradition of releasing a prisoner at feasts. Mark is providing background information in this verse to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “It was Pilate’s custom to release to them a prisoner of their choice during the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1452,14 +1452,14 @@ MRK	15	19	a8a9	figs-irony	τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύν
 MRK	15	20	styv		πορφύραν	1		See how you translated the word **purple** in [15:17](../15/17.md).
 MRK	15	20	dp33		ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν	1		Alternate translation: “then they led him out of the city” or “required Jesus to carry his cross and then led Jesus out of the city” or “made Jesus carry his cross and led Jesus out of the city”
 MRK	15	20	euk7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus was **led out**, namely that **they might crucify him**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-MRK	15	21	cj4l		ἀγγαρεύουσιν&ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	they forced him to carry his cross	According to Roman law, a solider could force a man he came upon along the road to carry a load. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross.
+MRK	15	21	cj4l		ἀγγαρεύουσιν & ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	they forced him to carry his cross	According to Roman law, a solider could force a man he came upon along the road to carry a load. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross.
 MRK	15	21	s4j3		ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ	1	from the country	Alternate translation: “from outside the city”
-MRK	15	21	rtz2	translate-names	Σίμωνα&Ἀλεξάνδρου&Ῥούφου	1	Simon … Alexander … Rufus	The words **Simon**, **Alexander**, and **Rufus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+MRK	15	21	rtz2	translate-names	Σίμωνα & Ἀλεξάνδρου & Ῥούφου	1	Simon … Alexander … Rufus	The words **Simon**, **Alexander**, and **Rufus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	15	21	n1oz	figs-go	ἐρχόμενον	1		Your language may say “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	15	21	cyn6	writing-background	τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου	1	they pressed into service a certain passerby, Simon of Cyrene (the father of Alexander and Rufus), coming from the country	The phrase **the father of Alexander and Rufus** is background information about the man whom the soldiers forced to carry Jesus’ cross. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	15	21	d3i2	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which **they pressed into service a certain passerby, Simon of Cyrene**, namely **so that** they could require him to **carry** Jesus’ **cross**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 MRK	15	22	w6c7	translate-transliterate	Γολγοθᾶν, τόπον ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπος	1	Connecting Statement:	The word **Golgotha** is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant **Place of a Skull**. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-MRK	15	22	e49p	figs-extrainfo	Γολγοθᾶν&Κρανίου Τόπος	1	Place of a Skull	Matthew says in [Matt 27:33](../mat/27/33.md) that **Golgotha** was “a place called Golgotha,” so it is clear that this was the name of a location, but the reason why this place was called **Place of a Skull** is not known. It could have been called **Place of a Skull** because the appearance of this place resembled a skull or because it was the site of so many executions, in which case the name **Skull** is being used as metonymy to refer to death. Because the reason that this location was called **Place of a Skull** is unknown, you should translate this phrase in a way that allows for either meaning, as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+MRK	15	22	e49p	figs-extrainfo	Γολγοθᾶν & Κρανίου Τόπος	1	Place of a Skull	Matthew says in [Matt 27:33](../mat/27/33.md) that **Golgotha** was “a place called Golgotha,” so it is clear that this was the name of a location, but the reason why this place was called **Place of a Skull** is not known. It could have been called **Place of a Skull** because the appearance of this place resembled a skull or because it was the site of so many executions, in which case the name **Skull** is being used as metonymy to refer to death. Because the reason that this location was called **Place of a Skull** is unknown, you should translate this phrase in a way that allows for either meaning, as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 MRK	15	22	m1dd	figs-activepassive	ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	of a Skull	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	15	23	e9xd	figs-explicit	ἐσμυρνισμένον οἶνον	1	wine having been mixed with myrrh	If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain that **myrrh** was a pain-relieving medicine. Alternate translation: “wine mixed with a pain-relieving medicine called myrrh” or “wine mixed with a pain-relieving drug called myrrh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	15	23	ld7e	figs-activepassive	ἐσμυρνισμένον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ MRK	15	33	q1gh	translate-ordinal	ὥρας ἕκτης	1	the sixth hour	The Jews
 MRK	15	33	m67d	translate-ordinal	ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης	1		The phrase **the ninth hour** refers to “three o’clock in the afternoon”, approximately nine hours after sunrise. The term **ninth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the ninth hour** as “three o’clock in the afternoon,” as modeled by the UST, or in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in [15:25](../15/25.md), and the phrase “the sixth hour” earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “until three hours after noon” or “for three hours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 MRK	15	33	jvf0	figs-go	ἐγένετο	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	15	34	r6tj	translate-ordinal	τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ	1	at the ninth hour	See how you translated the phrase **the ninth hour** in [15:33](../15/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-MRK	15	34	azt0	figs-idiom	ἐβόησεν&φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		The expression **cried out with a loud voice** is an idiom that means Jesus raised the volume of his **voice**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+MRK	15	34	azt0	figs-idiom	ἐβόησεν & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		The expression **cried out with a loud voice** is an idiom that means Jesus raised the volume of his **voice**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	15	34	ls1n	translate-transliterate	Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει? ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου, εἰς τί ἐγκατέλιπές με	1	Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani	Jesus statement **Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani** is an Aramaic phrase. Jesus is quoting from [Psalm 22:1](../psa/22/01.md). Mark uses Greek letters to express the sounds of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant **My God, my God, why have you forsaken me**. In your translation you could spell this phrase the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 MRK	15	34	qw71		ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	is translated	See how you translated the phrase **which is translated** in [15:22](../15/22.md).
 MRK	15	35	apg3	figs-explicit	καί τινες τῶν παρεστηκότων, ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον	1	And some of those who had been standing by, having heard him, were saying	If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that some of the people standing by misunderstood what Jesus said, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ MRK	15	39	hue4		ἐξέπνευσεν	1		See how you translated the phrase **bre
 MRK	15	39	ariw		ἀληθῶς	1		See how you translated the word **Truly** in [3:28](../03/28.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly”
 MRK	15	39	nqv8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	The title **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MRK	15	40	gkgi	translate-versebridge	ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη	1		If it would be more natural in your language to first give background information about these women before listing individual names, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to the end of verse 41. You would then present the combined verses as 40–41, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
-MRK	15	40	zc9b	writing-background	Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ&Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ	1	(the mother of James the younger and of Joses)	Because **Mary** was a very common name at this time and because Mark refers to two different women with the name **Mary** in this verse, he provides this background information to help readers know to which **Mary** he is referring in each case. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+MRK	15	40	zc9b	writing-background	Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ & Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ	1	(the mother of James the younger and of Joses)	Because **Mary** was a very common name at this time and because Mark refers to two different women with the name **Mary** in this verse, he provides this background information to help readers know to which **Mary** he is referring in each case. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 MRK	15	40	z5ra	translate-names	Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ	1		The word **James** is the name a man. This man is probably referred to as **the younger** here to distinguish him from other men named **James**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	15	40	wdrq	translate-names	Ἰωσῆ	1		The word **Joses** is the name a man. This **Joses** was not the same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in [6:3](../06/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 MRK	15	40	qa0q	translate-names	Σαλώμη	1		The word **Salome** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
index 029bbb8840..30ce43ed80 100644
--- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
@@ -3,11 +3,11 @@ LUK	front	intro	uk55			0		# Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n## Part 1: Gen
 LUK	1	intro	f1b5			0		# Luke 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)<br>2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5–25)<br>3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26–38)<br>4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39–56)<br>5. John the Baptist is born (1:57–80)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46–55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68–79.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “He will be called John”<br><br>Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name.
 LUK	1	1	qhd9	figs-activepassive	περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων	1	concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	1	hyp6	figs-exclusive	ἐν ἡμῖν	1	among us	Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-LUK	1	2	hud2	figs-metonymy	οἱ&αὐτόπται&γενόμενοι	1	who … were eyewitnesses	The term **eyewitnesses** describes people who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such people by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	1	2	z9dq	figs-metonymy	ὑπηρέται&τοῦ λόγου	1	servants of the word	Here, **word** describes the things that the people who brought the message conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “servants of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	1	2	l000	figs-metaphor	ὑπηρέται&τοῦ λόγου	1	servants of the word	The people who brought this message were actually serving God by doing that. But Luke describes them as **servants of the word**, as if they were serving the message from God. Alternate translation: “served God by telling people his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	2	hud2	figs-metonymy	οἱ & αὐτόπται & γενόμενοι	1	who … were eyewitnesses	The term **eyewitnesses** describes people who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such people by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	1	2	z9dq	figs-metonymy	ὑπηρέται & τοῦ λόγου	1	servants of the word	Here, **word** describes the things that the people who brought the message conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “servants of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	1	2	l000	figs-metaphor	ὑπηρέται & τοῦ λόγου	1	servants of the word	The people who brought this message were actually serving God by doing that. But Luke describes them as **servants of the word**, as if they were serving the message from God. Alternate translation: “served God by telling people his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	3	fud1	writing-background	παρηκολουθηκότι ἄνωθεν πᾶσιν ἀκριβῶς	1	having carefully investigated everything from the beginning	Luke provides this background information to explain that he was careful to find out exactly what happened. He probably talked to different people who saw what happened to make sure that what he wrote down about these events was correct. Alternate translation: “because I have conducted careful research and interviews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-LUK	1	3	l001	figs-youformal	σοι&κράτιστε Θεόφιλε	1	you … most excellent Theophilus	If your language has a formal form of **you** that it uses to address a superior respectfully, it would be appropriate to use that form here. There are many other places in the book of Luke where your language might use formal **you**, and these notes will not address all of them. Rather, as you translate, use formal and informal **you** in the way that would be most natural in your language. The notes will address a few cases where a careful decision should be made between the two forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
+LUK	1	3	l001	figs-youformal	σοι & κράτιστε Θεόφιλε	1	you … most excellent Theophilus	If your language has a formal form of **you** that it uses to address a superior respectfully, it would be appropriate to use that form here. There are many other places in the book of Luke where your language might use formal **you**, and these notes will not address all of them. Rather, as you translate, use formal and informal **you** in the way that would be most natural in your language. The notes will address a few cases where a careful decision should be made between the two forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
 LUK	1	3	nr63		κράτιστε Θεόφιλε	1	most excellent Theophilus	Luke is dedicating this work to **Theophilus**, and within his dedication, this is the conventional personal greeting. If it would be more customary in your language and culture, you could put this greeting in [1:1](../01/01.md) at the start of the dedication, at the very beginning of the book. Alternate translation: “To most excellent Theophilus”
 LUK	1	3	vhj8		κράτιστε	1	most excellent	Luke uses the term **most excellent** to address Theophilus in a way that shows honor and respect. This may mean that Theophilus was an important government official. In your translation, it would be appropriate to use the form of address that your culture uses for people of high status. Alternate translation: “Honorable”
 LUK	1	3	h7q1	translate-names	Θεόφιλε	1	Theophilus	The name **Theophilus** means “friend of God.” It may describe this man’s character, or it may have been his actual name. Most translations treat it as a name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ LUK	1	4	l002	figs-activepassive	ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων	1	the things
 LUK	1	4	l003	figs-explicit	ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων	1	the things that you have been taught	Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that he means what he has been **taught** about Jesus. Alternate translation: “what people have taught you about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	5	gb16	writing-newevent	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου βασιλέως τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	In the days of Herod, king of Judea	This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “During the time when King Herod ruled over Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	1	5	l004	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	In the days of	Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “During the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	1	5	a4q9	writing-participants	ἐγένετο&ἱερεύς τις	1	there was a certain priest	This phrase introduces a new character in a story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	1	5	a4q9	writing-participants	ἐγένετο & ἱερεύς τις	1	there was a certain priest	This phrase introduces a new character in a story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	1	5	l228	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἐφημερίας Ἀβιά	1	from the division of Abijah	Luke assumes that his readers will know that this expression refers one of the different groups of priests who each served in the temple for a certain number of days at a time, and that the name of the group means that Abijah was the ancestor of these priests. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the group of priests who were descended from Abijah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	5	gzw1	translate-names	Ἀβιά	1	Abijah	**Abijah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	1	5	d3ua	figs-metaphor	γυνὴ αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων Ἀαρών	1	his wife was from the daughters of Aaron	Here, the word **daughters** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his wife was a descendant of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -28,18 +28,18 @@ LUK	1	7	l010	figs-idiom	ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν τα
 LUK	1	7	l011	figs-idiom	ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῶν	1	they had both advanced in their days	Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time, the lifetimes of Zechariah and Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “they had both grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	8	jr7f	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase marks a shift from the background information that Luke has been providing about the participants to the first event in their story. If your language has a similar expression that it uses to introduce an event, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	1	8	l012	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν, ἐν τῇ τάξει τῆς ἐφημερίας αὐτοῦ	1	in his performing as priest in the order of his division	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the results that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because it was his group’s turn, Zechariah was serving as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	1	8	vyl8	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν&ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	in his performing as priest before God	The expression **before God**, that is, “in front of God,” means that Zechariah was offering his service as a priest in the presence of God. Alternate translation: “while Zechariah was serving God as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	8	vyl8	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν & ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	in his performing as priest before God	The expression **before God**, that is, “in front of God,” means that Zechariah was offering his service as a priest in the presence of God. Alternate translation: “while Zechariah was serving God as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	8	abc1	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν	1	in his performing as priest	The pronoun **his** refers to Zechariah. Alternate translation: “while Zechariah was serving as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	1	8	wed9	writing-background	ἐν τῇ τάξει τῆς ἐφημερίας αὐτοῦ	1	in the order of his division	This is background information that explains why Zechariah was serving as a priest at this time. Alternate translation: “because it was his group’s turn to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	1	9	vq5g	writing-background	κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἱερατείας, ἔλαχε	1	according to the custom of the priesthood, he came up by lot	Luke is providing background information about how the priests selected members of their group to perform specific duties. Alternate translation: “The priests chose him in their customary way, by casting a lot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	1	9	pa9c	translate-unknown	ἔλαχε	1	came up by lot	A **lot** was a marked stone that was thrown or rolled on the ground in order to help decide something. The priests believed that God would guide the lot and show them which priest he wanted them to choose for a particular duty. If your culture has a similar object, you could use the word for that in your language here. Alternate translation: “by casting a marked stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	1	9	l013	grammar-connect-logic-result	τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	to enter into the temple of the Lord to burn incense	The ULT puts these phrases in the chronological order of what Zechariah needed to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put them in logical order instead. Alternate translation: “to burn incense, and so he went into the temple to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	1	9	ph9z	translate-unknown	τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι	1	to burn incense	The word **incense** describes a substance that gives off a sweet smell when it is burned. The priests were to burn it as an offering to God each morning and evening on a special altar inside the temple. If your language has a word for this substance, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to burn a substance that would create a sweet smell as an offering to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	1	10	bjl6	figs-hyperbole	πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος&τοῦ λαοῦ	1	the whole crowd of the people	This expression, if taken literally, could mean every single one of the Jews, but it is actually a generalization that Luke is using to emphasize how big this crowd was. Alternate translation: “A large number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	1	10	bjl6	figs-hyperbole	πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος & τοῦ λαοῦ	1	the whole crowd of the people	This expression, if taken literally, could mean every single one of the Jews, but it is actually a generalization that Luke is using to emphasize how big this crowd was. Alternate translation: “A large number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	1	10	ntl8	figs-explicit	ἔξω	1	outside	The word **outside** refers implicitly to the enclosed area or courtyard that surrounded the temple. Alternate translation: “in the courtyard outside the temple building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	10	uwu7	figs-metaphor	τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ θυμιάματος	1	at the hour of the incense offering	The word **hour** means “time.” This could mean either the morning or evening time for the incense offering. Alternate translation: “when it was time to offer the incense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	11	b8b7	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	Then	The word **Then** indicates that the event it introduces took place at the same time as the event the story has just related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “right at that time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
-LUK	1	11	c8ss	figs-idiom	ὤφθη&αὐτῷ	1	appeared to him	When Luke says that the angel **appeared**, this does not mean that Zechariah simply saw the angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Zechariah. Alternate translation: “suddenly was there with Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	1	11	c8ss	figs-idiom	ὤφθη & αὐτῷ	1	appeared to him	When Luke says that the angel **appeared**, this does not mean that Zechariah simply saw the angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Zechariah. Alternate translation: “suddenly was there with Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	12	r3aa	figs-parallelism	ἐταράχθη Ζαχαρίας ἰδών, καὶ φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	Zechariah was troubled … fear fell on him	The two phrases **Zechariah was troubled** and **fear fell on him** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize how afraid Zechariah was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “When he saw him, Zechariah became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	1	12	d1zm	figs-explicit	ἰδών	1	when he saw him	The implication is that Zechariah was afraid because the angel appeared glorious and powerful. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. (Luke has just said that Zechariah was righteous and blameless, so it would be good not to leave your readers with the impression that he had done something wrong and was afraid that the angel was going to punish him for it.) Alternate translation: “when he saw how glorious and powerful the angel was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	12	l014	figs-metaphor	φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	fear fell upon him	Luke is using the expression **fell upon** to speak of fear as if it attacked and overcame Zechariah. Alternate translation: “this made him very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ LUK	1	17	w32h	figs-personification	ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέ
 LUK	1	17	qe48	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα	1	to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children	The angel uses the relationship between **fathers** and **children** to represent all relationships. Luke relates in [3:10–14](../03/10.md) how John encouraged reconciliation in a variety of different relationships. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	1	17	l024	figs-explicit	ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα	1	to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children	It is assumed that readers will know that this is what the prophet Malachi had said Elijah would do before the Lord came. The implication in context is that John will fulfill this prophecy by using the same empowerment that Elijah had. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships, just as the prophet Malachi said Elijah would do before the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	17	l025	figs-explicit	ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων	1	to turn … the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous	Gabriel is using the term **wisdom** in the Old Testament sense as a moral term that refers to choosing the way in life that God has shown to be best. The people who make this choice are **righteous**, meaning that God considers them to be living in the right way. Alternate translation: “to lead people who are disobeying God to choose his ways and become people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	1	17	j49j	figs-nominaladj	ἀπειθεῖς&δικαίων	1	the disobedient … of the righteous	Gabriel is using the adjectives **disobedient** and **righteous** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are disobeying God … people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	1	17	j49j	figs-nominaladj	ἀπειθεῖς & δικαίων	1	the disobedient … of the righteous	Gabriel is using the adjectives **disobedient** and **righteous** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are disobeying God … people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	1	17	ujs1	figs-explicit	λαὸν κατεσκευασμένον	1	a people prepared	You could state explicitly in your translation what the people will be prepared to do. Alternate translation: “a people who will be prepared to believe his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	18	asn2	figs-explicit	κατὰ τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο	1	How will I know this	Zechariah is implicitly asking for a sign as proof. Alternate translation: “What sign can you show me to prove that this will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	18	l026	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For	The word **For** introduces the reason why Zechariah wants a sign. He and his wife are both too old to have children, so he is finding it hard to believe what the angel has told him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ LUK	1	25	w8yq	figs-exclamations	οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν Κύριο
 LUK	1	25	z1xr	figs-explicit	οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν Κύριος	1	Thus the Lord has done for me	It is implicit that Elizabeth is referring to the fact that the **Lord** has allowed her to become pregnant. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “What a marvelous thing the Lord has done for me by allowing me to become pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	25	pn2a	figs-idiom	ἐπεῖδεν	1	he looked upon me	Here, the expression **looked upon** is an idiom that means “shown regard for” or “treated well.” Alternate translation: “he treated me kindly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	25	lx3p	figs-explicit	ἀφελεῖν ὄνειδός μου ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	to take away my disgrace among people	By **disgrace**, Elizabeth means the shame she felt because she was not able to have children. Alternate translation: “so that I no longer have to feel ashamed when I am around other people because I cannot have children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	1	26	v9w2	figs-explicit	ἐν&τῷ μηνὶ τῷ ἕκτῳ	1	in the sixth month	Luke assumes that readers will recognize that this does not mean the **sixth month** of the year, but the **sixth month** of Elizabeth’s pregnancy. If you think there could be some confusion about this, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Elizabeth had been pregnant for six months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	1	26	v9w2	figs-explicit	ἐν & τῷ μηνὶ τῷ ἕκτῳ	1	in the sixth month	Luke assumes that readers will recognize that this does not mean the **sixth month** of the year, but the **sixth month** of Elizabeth’s pregnancy. If you think there could be some confusion about this, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Elizabeth had been pregnant for six months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	26	l035	translate-ordinal	τῷ μηνὶ τῷ ἕκτῳ	1	the sixth month	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “month 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	1	26	rl4c	figs-activepassive	ἀπεστάλη ὁ ἄγγελος Γαβριὴλ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the angel Gabriel was sent from God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God sent the angel Gabriel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	27	l038	writing-participants	ἀνδρὶ, ᾧ ὄνομα Ἰωσὴφ	1	a man whose name was Joseph	This introduces **Joseph** as a new character in the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ LUK	1	29	l042	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ	1	by his words	Luke is usin
 LUK	1	29	ytx7		διελογίζετο ποταπὸς εἴη ὁ ἀσπασμὸς οὗτος	1	she was considering what kind of greeting this might be	Alternate translation: “she wondered why an angel would greet her in this way”
 LUK	1	30	l043	grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ φοβοῦ, Μαριάμ; εὗρες γὰρ χάριν παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Do not be afraid, Mary, for you have found favor with God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “God is showing you his kindness, Mary, so you do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	1	30	d3rx	figs-imperative	μὴ φοβοῦ	1	Do not be afraid	While the angel speaks these words in the form of a command, he is actually telling Mary something that he thinks will help and encourage her. Alternate translation: “You do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-LUK	1	30	a3eb	figs-activepassive	εὗρες&χάριν παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	you have found favor with God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is showing you his kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	1	30	a3eb	figs-activepassive	εὗρες & χάριν παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	you have found favor with God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is showing you his kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	31	l044	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ	1	And behold	As in [1:20](../01/20.md), **behold** is a term that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	31	fi5q	figs-explicitinfo	συνλήμψῃ ἐν γαστρὶ, καὶ τέξῃ υἱόν	1	you will conceive in your womb and bear a son	The phrase **conceive in your womb** might seem to express unnecessary extra information, and so if you represent all of it in your language, that might not seem natural. However, the details are important here. The expression emphasizes that Jesus was a human son born of a human mother. So be sure to translate this expression in a way that conveys that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 LUK	1	31	l045	figs-declarative	καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν	1	you will call his name Jesus	As in [1:13](../01/13.md), Gabriel is using a statement as a command in order to tell Mary what to do. Alternate translation: “you are to name him Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
@@ -118,9 +118,9 @@ LUK	1	32	l048	figs-idiom	Υἱὸς Ὑψίστου κληθήσεται	1	He 
 LUK	1	32	hl55	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς Ὑψίστου κληθήσεται	1	He … will be called the Son of the Most High	Gabriel is not saying only that **Son of the Most High** is a title by which Jesus will be known. Instead, just as the previous verse described how Jesus was a human son born of a human mother, his statement here indicates that Jesus was also the divine Son of a divine Father. You may want to show this by employing capitalization or whatever other convention your language uses to indicate divinity. Alternate translation: “He will be the Son of the Most High” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 LUK	1	32	ip26	figs-activepassive	Υἱὸς Ὑψίστου κληθήσεται	1	He … will be called the Son of the Most High	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “He will be the Son of the Most High” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	32	z74z	figs-idiom	Ὑψίστου	1	the Most High	This is an idiomatic way of referring to God, as the fuller expression “the Most High God” in [8:38](../08/38.md) shows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the phrase that way in order to explain its meaning. Or, you could simply reproduce the phrase in the simpler form in which it occurs here in order to show your readers one of the ways in which the people of this time referred to God. Alternate translation: “the Most High God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	1	32	lwd9	figs-metonymy	δώσει αὐτῷ&τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	will give to him the throne of his father David	The **throne** represents a king’s authority to rule. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as king as his ancestor David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	1	32	l049	figs-metaphor	δώσει αὐτῷ&τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	will give to him the throne of his father David	Here, the term **father** means “ancestor,” but since a line of kings is in view, it also indicates that Jesus will be a successor to David. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as a successor to his ancestor David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	1	33	l050	figs-parallelism	βασιλεύσει&εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας; καὶ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἔσται τέλος	1	he will reign … to the ages, and there will be no end of his kingdom	These two phrases mean similar things. Gabriel uses them together to emphasize how certain it is that Jesus will always rule. Because Gabriel is making a proclamation, he is speaking in a form much like poetry. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and**, in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “he will rule … forever, yes, his kingship will always continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+LUK	1	32	lwd9	figs-metonymy	δώσει αὐτῷ & τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	will give to him the throne of his father David	The **throne** represents a king’s authority to rule. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as king as his ancestor David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	1	32	l049	figs-metaphor	δώσει αὐτῷ & τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	will give to him the throne of his father David	Here, the term **father** means “ancestor,” but since a line of kings is in view, it also indicates that Jesus will be a successor to David. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as a successor to his ancestor David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	33	l050	figs-parallelism	βασιλεύσει & εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας; καὶ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἔσται τέλος	1	he will reign … to the ages, and there will be no end of his kingdom	These two phrases mean similar things. Gabriel uses them together to emphasize how certain it is that Jesus will always rule. Because Gabriel is making a proclamation, he is speaking in a form much like poetry. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and**, in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “he will rule … forever, yes, his kingship will always continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	1	33	l051	figs-metaphor	τὸν οἶκον Ἰακὼβ	1	the house of Jacob	In this expression, the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person, in this case Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people descended from Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	33	l053	figs-idiom	εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	to the ages	This is an idiom. The term **ages** means long periods of time. Alternate translation: “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	33	q516	figs-litotes	τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἔσται τέλος	1	there will be no end of his kingship	This is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “his kingship will always continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ LUK	1	43	tiu4	figs-123person	ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Κυρίου μου	1	the mo
 LUK	1	44	uq3j	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ γὰρ	1	For behold	The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. This phrase alerts Mary to pay attention to Elizabeth’s surprising statement that follows. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	44	h54t	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐγένετο ἡ φωνὴ τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ σου εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου	1	as soon as the sound of your greeting was in my ears	Elizabeth is using the term **ears** to mean hearing, and hearing means recognition. Alternate translation: “as soon as I heard your voice and realized that it was you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	44	u9db	figs-metaphor	ἐσκίρτησεν ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει	1	leaped for joy	As in [1:41](../01/41.md), **leaped** is a figurative way of referring to sudden movement. Alternate translation: “moved suddenly because he was so happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	1	45	kf73	figs-123person	ἡ πιστεύσασα&τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ Κυρίου	1	she who believed … the things that were spoken to her from the Lord	Elizabeth is speaking to Mary, and these phrases describe Mary, but Elizabeth nevertheless speaks of her in the third person. She does this perhaps as a sign of respect, since she has just identified Mary as “the mother of my Lord.” Alternate translation: “you who believed … the message that the Lord sent you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK	1	45	kf73	figs-123person	ἡ πιστεύσασα & τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ Κυρίου	1	she who believed … the things that were spoken to her from the Lord	Elizabeth is speaking to Mary, and these phrases describe Mary, but Elizabeth nevertheless speaks of her in the third person. She does this perhaps as a sign of respect, since she has just identified Mary as “the mother of my Lord.” Alternate translation: “you who believed … the message that the Lord sent you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	1	45	gc1e	figs-activepassive	ἔσται τελείωσις τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ Κυρίου	1	that there would be a fulfillment of the things that were spoken to her from the Lord	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “that the Lord would do everything he sent the angel to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	45	g8rc	figs-explicit	ἔσται τελείωσις τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ Κυρίου	1	that there would be a fulfillment of the things that were spoken to her from the Lord	Here, instead of the word “by,” Elizabeth uses the word **from** because Mary actually heard the angel Gabriel speak (see [1:26](../01/26.md)), but the things he spoke ultimately came from the Lord. Alternate translation: “that the Lord would do everything he sent the angel to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	46	vxj4	figs-synecdoche	μεγαλύνει ἡ ψυχή μου	1	My soul magnifies	The word **soul** refers to the inmost part of a person. Here, Mary uses it to refer to all of herself. Mary is saying that her worship comes from deep inside her. Alternate translation: “From the depths of my being, I praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -198,12 +198,12 @@ LUK	1	55	qc9k	figs-metaphor	καθὼς ἐλάλησεν πρὸς τοὺς π
 LUK	1	55	by4a	figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ	1	to his seed	The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	55	l072	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	to the age	This is an idiom. See how you translated the similar expression in [1:33](../01/33.md). Alternate translation: “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	56	l073	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **and** to indicate that the event of Mary returning home happened after the event of Mary staying with Elizabeth for three months. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-LUK	1	56	nt87	writing-pronouns	ἔμεινεν&Μαριὰμ σὺν αὐτῇ ὡς μῆνας τρεῖς, καὶ ὑπέστρεψεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς	1	Mary stayed with her about three months, and returned to her house	The first instance of the word **her** in this verse refers to Elizabeth, and the second instance refers to Mary. Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Mary returned to her own home. She did not stay for three months, leave for a time, and then return to Elizabeth’s home. Alternate translation: “Mary stayed with Elizabeth for about three months, and then Mary went back to her own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	1	56	nt87	writing-pronouns	ἔμεινεν & Μαριὰμ σὺν αὐτῇ ὡς μῆνας τρεῖς, καὶ ὑπέστρεψεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς	1	Mary stayed with her about three months, and returned to her house	The first instance of the word **her** in this verse refers to Elizabeth, and the second instance refers to Mary. Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Mary returned to her own home. She did not stay for three months, leave for a time, and then return to Elizabeth’s home. Alternate translation: “Mary stayed with Elizabeth for about three months, and then Mary went back to her own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	1	57	hfk3	grammar-connect-time-sequential	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to indicate that this event took place after the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 LUK	1	57	l074	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθη ὁ χρόνος	1	the time was fulfilled	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the time came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	57	dd2i		τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν	1	for her to deliver	Your language may require you to state the object of **deliver**. Alternate translation: “for her to deliver her baby” or “for her to have her baby”
-LUK	1	58	j2xc	figs-metaphor	ἐμεγάλυνεν&τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς	1	had magnified his mercy to her	Luke speaks as if God had made his mercy bigger towards Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	1	58	l075	figs-explicit	ἐμεγάλυνεν&τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς	1	had magnified his mercy to her	The implication is that God’s great kindness to Elizabeth was to enable her to have a baby. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her by enabling her to have a baby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	1	58	j2xc	figs-metaphor	ἐμεγάλυνεν & τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς	1	had magnified his mercy to her	Luke speaks as if God had made his mercy bigger towards Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	58	l075	figs-explicit	ἐμεγάλυνεν & τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς	1	had magnified his mercy to her	The implication is that God’s great kindness to Elizabeth was to enable her to have a baby. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her by enabling her to have a baby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	59	f4ul	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	1	59	l076	translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ὀγδόῃ	1	on the eighth day	This expression refers to **the eighth day** of the baby’s life, reckoning the day he was born as the first day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this expression according to the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “when the baby was one week old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	1	59	gm1k	translate-ordinal	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ὀγδόῃ	1	on the eighth day	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@@ -213,35 +213,35 @@ LUK	1	60	l077	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ αὐτο
 LUK	1	60	l078	figs-activepassive	κληθήσεται	1	he will be called	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “we are going to name him John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	61	t4e7	figs-explicit	οὐδείς ἐστιν ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, ὃς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	There is no one among your relatives who is called by this name	The expression **this name** means specifically the name John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the actual name in your translation. Alternate translation: “None of your relatives is named John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	61	l079	figs-activepassive	καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	is called by this name	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “has the name John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	1	62	ium2	figs-explicit	ἐνένευον&τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	they made signs to his father	Zechariah may have been unable both to speak and to hear, but Gabriel only told him that he would be unable to speak, so it is more likely that the people simply assumed he could not hear because he was not speaking. If you think your readers might wonder why the people made signs to Zechariah, you could offer an explanation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah was not speaking, the people thought he could not hear either, so they made signs to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	1	62	ium2	figs-explicit	ἐνένευον & τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	they made signs to his father	Zechariah may have been unable both to speak and to hear, but Gabriel only told him that he would be unable to speak, so it is more likely that the people simply assumed he could not hear because he was not speaking. If you think your readers might wonder why the people made signs to Zechariah, you could offer an explanation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah was not speaking, the people thought he could not hear either, so they made signs to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	62	w3kq	figs-activepassive	τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό	1	as to what he wanted him to be called	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “to ask him what name he wanted to give the baby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	63	gn28	figs-explicit	αἰτήσας	1	asking for	It may be helpful to suggest how Zechariah was **asking**, since he could not speak. Alternate translation: “making signs with his hands to show that he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	63	qu93	translate-unknown	πινακίδιον	1	a writing tablet	This was a wooden **tablet** covered with wax. A person would use a stylus (that is, something with a sharp point) to write in the wax. The wax could later be smoothed out and the tablet could be used again. If your readers might not recognize this object, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something to write on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	1	64	sdg1	figs-parallelism	ἀνεῴχθη&τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ&καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ	1	his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed	These two phrases mean the same thing. Luke uses them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “he became able to speak once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-LUK	1	64	l080	figs-metonymy	ἀνεῴχθη&τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ&καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ	1	his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed	Each of these phrases describes the act of speaking by referring to something associated with speech coming into action, specifically, the mouth opening and the tongue moving about freely. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	1	64	mi2u	figs-activepassive	ἀνεῴχθη&τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ&καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ	1	his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. You could also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” or “God enabled him to speak once again” or, if you want to use the figurative language, “God opened his mouth and freed his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	1	64	sdg1	figs-parallelism	ἀνεῴχθη & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ & καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ	1	his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed	These two phrases mean the same thing. Luke uses them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “he became able to speak once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+LUK	1	64	l080	figs-metonymy	ἀνεῴχθη & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ & καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ	1	his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed	Each of these phrases describes the act of speaking by referring to something associated with speech coming into action, specifically, the mouth opening and the tongue moving about freely. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	1	64	mi2u	figs-activepassive	ἀνεῴχθη & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ & καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ	1	his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. You could also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” or “God enabled him to speak once again” or, if you want to use the figurative language, “God opened his mouth and freed his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	65	l081	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	The word **And** introduces the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	1	65	qw1j	figs-personification	ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος	1	fear came on all those who lived around them	As in [1:12](../01/12.md), Luke here describes **fear** as if it were something that could actively come upon people. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	1	65	l082	figs-idiom	ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος, τοὺς περιοικοῦντας αὐτούς	1	fear came on all those who lived around them	In this context, **fear** does not mean to be afraid, but to have respect and reverence. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	65	l083	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος	1	fear came on all those who lived around them	It may be helpful to state clearly why the people responded in this way. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe of God because of what he had done in the lives of Zechariah and Elizabeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	1	65	g7uh	figs-hyperbole	πάντας&τοὺς περιοικοῦντας αὐτούς&ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ὀρεινῇ	1	all those who lived around them … throughout all the hill country	Here Luke uses the word **all** twice as an generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived around them … widely throughout that area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	1	65	g7uh	figs-hyperbole	πάντας & τοὺς περιοικοῦντας αὐτούς & ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ὀρεινῇ	1	all those who lived around them … throughout all the hill country	Here Luke uses the word **all** twice as an generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived around them … widely throughout that area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	1	65	pz97	figs-activepassive	διελαλεῖτο πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	all these matters were being talked about	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people talked about all these matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	66	c7xf	figs-ellipsis	ἔθεντο πάντες οἱ ἀκούσαντες, ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	all who heard stored in their hearts	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need to be complete. Alternate translation: “all who heard these things stored them in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	1	66	l6lt	figs-metaphor	ἔθεντο&ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	stored in their hearts	Luke is speaking of **hearts** as places where thoughts and memories can be stored safely. His expression describes people thinking things over carefully in order to understand them and retain them. Alternate translation: “thought carefully about these matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	66	l6lt	figs-metaphor	ἔθεντο & ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	stored in their hearts	Luke is speaking of **hearts** as places where thoughts and memories can be stored safely. His expression describes people thinking things over carefully in order to understand them and retain them. Alternate translation: “thought carefully about these matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	66	dgq4	figs-rquestion	τί ἄρα τὸ παιδίον τοῦτο ἔσται?	1	What then will this child become?	The people who said this were likely not asking a question, expecting someone to tell them what the child would become. Rather, they were making a statement about what the events of the child’s birth had led them to believe about his destiny. So you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What a great man this child will become!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	1	66	xm9c	figs-metaphor	χεὶρ Κυρίου ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	the hand of the Lord was with him	In this expression, the **hand** represents strength and power. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	1	67	lvd6	figs-activepassive	Ζαχαρίας&ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit filled Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	1	67	l084	figs-metaphor	Ζαχαρίας&ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit	Luke speaks as if **Zechariah** were a container that the **Holy Spirit** **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	67	lvd6	figs-activepassive	Ζαχαρίας & ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit filled Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	1	67	l084	figs-metaphor	Ζαχαρίας & ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit	Luke speaks as if **Zechariah** were a container that the **Holy Spirit** **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	67	fs5y	writing-quotations	ἐπροφήτευσεν λέγων	1	prophesied, saying	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “prophesied, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 LUK	1	68	l085	figs-personification	ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	the God of Israel	Luke is referring to the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	1	68	jx5n	figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	the God of Israel	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the relationship between God and Israel more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the God whom the people of Israel worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	1	68	d67v	figs-idiom	ἐπεσκέψατο&τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ	1	he has visited … his people	Here, the term **visited** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he has come to help … his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	1	68	d67v	figs-idiom	ἐπεσκέψατο & τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ	1	he has visited … his people	Here, the term **visited** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he has come to help … his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	69	l086	figs-metaphor	ἤγειρεν κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν	1	he has raised up a horn of salvation for us	In this context, **raised up** means brought into existence or enabled to act. Alternate translation: “he has brought us a horn of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	69	g11u	figs-metonymy	ἤγειρεν κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν	1	he has raised up a horn of salvation for us	An animal’s **horn** is associated with its strength, and so Zechariah is using the term as a symbol for a ruler by association with the power and authority a ruler has. Alternate translation: “he has brought us a ruler who will have the power to save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	1	69	fb9f	figs-metonymy	ἐν οἴκῳ Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ	1	in the house of his servant David	David’s **house** represents his family and all of his descendants. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of his servant David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	1	69	l087	figs-explicit	ἐν οἴκῳ Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ	1	in the house of his servant David	The implication is that as a descendant of **David**, this ruler will be an eligible successor to him as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “who is from the royal line of his servant David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	1	69	l088	figs-metaphor	Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ	1	in the house of his servant David	David was not actually a **servant**, he was a king. Here the emphasis in the word **servant** is on how David served God faithfully in that capacity. Alternate translation: “who is from the royal line of David, who served him faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	1	70	x1q1	figs-metonymy	ἐλάλησεν διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων&προφητῶν αὐτοῦ	1	he spoke by the mouth of his holy prophets	God speaking by the **mouth** of the **prophets** represents God inspiring them to say what he wanted them to say. Alternate translation: “he inspired his holy prophets to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	1	70	x1q1	figs-metonymy	ἐλάλησεν διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & προφητῶν αὐτοῦ	1	he spoke by the mouth of his holy prophets	God speaking by the **mouth** of the **prophets** represents God inspiring them to say what he wanted them to say. Alternate translation: “he inspired his holy prophets to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	1	70	l089	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ αἰῶνος	1	from an age	This is an idiom. See how you translated the similar expression in [1:33](../01/33.md). Alternate translation: “a long time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	71	d13g	figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίαν ἐξ ἐχθρῶν ἡμῶν	1	salvation from our enemies	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save” or “rescue.” It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will save us from our enemies” or “He will rescue us from our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	1	71	aye3	figs-doublet	ἐξ ἐχθρῶν ἡμῶν, καὶ ἐκ χειρὸς πάντων τῶν μισούντων ἡμᾶς	1	from our enemies and from the hand of all those who hate us	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Zechariah may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “from the domination of our enemies who hate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -259,17 +259,17 @@ LUK	1	75	l5n2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσ
 LUK	1	75	tn5i	figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	before him	This is an idiom that means “in his presence,” and that suggests being in relationship with God. Alternate translation: “in relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	75	l093	figs-idiom	πάσαις ταῖς ἡμέραις ἡμῶν	1	all our days	Here Zechariah uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “for our whole lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	76	f6r1	figs-explicit	καὶ σὺ δέ, παιδίον	1	And indeed, you, child	Zechariah uses this phrase to begin his direct address to his son. In your translation, you could indicate the change from Zechariah talking about God to Zechariah talking to John in the way that is most appropriate and natural in your language. It may be clearest to indicate this change explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Zechariah said to his son John, ‘And as for you, my child’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	1	76	l094	figs-idiom	προφήτης&κληθήσῃ	1	you … will be called a prophet	As in [1:32](../01/32.md), to **be called** is an idiom that means “to be.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Zechariah is not saying that John will simply have the reputation of being a prophet. Alternate translation: “you … will be a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	1	76	h2vh	figs-activepassive	προφήτης&κληθήσῃ	1	you … will be called a prophet	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will be a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	1	76	l094	figs-idiom	προφήτης & κληθήσῃ	1	you … will be called a prophet	As in [1:32](../01/32.md), to **be called** is an idiom that means “to be.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Zechariah is not saying that John will simply have the reputation of being a prophet. Alternate translation: “you … will be a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	1	76	h2vh	figs-activepassive	προφήτης & κληθήσῃ	1	you … will be called a prophet	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will be a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	1	76	bb3g	figs-idiom	Ὑψίστου	1	of the Most High	See how you translated the expression **the Most High** in [1:32](../01/32.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “of the Most High God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	1	76	de7t	figs-idiom	προπορεύσῃ&ἐνώπιον Κυρίου	1	you will go before the Lord	As in [1:17](../01/17.md), to **go before** is an idiom that indicates that before the Lord comes, John will announce to the people that the Lord is going to come to them. Alternate translation: “you will announce that the Lord is coming,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	1	76	de7t	figs-idiom	προπορεύσῃ & ἐνώπιον Κυρίου	1	you will go before the Lord	As in [1:17](../01/17.md), to **go before** is an idiom that indicates that before the Lord comes, John will announce to the people that the Lord is going to come to them. Alternate translation: “you will announce that the Lord is coming,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	76	l095	figs-metaphor	ἑτοιμάσαι ὁδοὺς αὐτοῦ	1	to prepare his paths	Zechariah is using the imagery of **paths** to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message and believe it. Alternate translation: “to get the people ready for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	77	l096	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν σωτηρίας τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ, ἐν ἀφέσει ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν	1	to give the knowledge of salvation to his people through the forgiveness of their sins	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **salvation** and **forgiveness** with the verbs “save” and “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to teach God’s people that he wants to save them by forgiving their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	1	77	t6d3	figs-metonymy	τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν σωτηρίας τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ	1	to give the knowledge of salvation to his people	The phrase **to give … knowledge** is a figurative description of teaching. Alternate translation: “to teach God’s people that he wants to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	1	78	z861	figs-metaphor	ἀνατολὴ ἐξ ὕψους	1	the sunrise from heaven	Zechariah speaks of the coming of the Savior as if it will be a sunrise that will light up the earth. Alternate translation: “the Savior who comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	78	l097	figs-metonymy	ἐξ ὕψους	1	from heaven	Zechariah uses the term **on high** to refer to God by association, since the abode of God if considered to be far above us in heaven. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	1	78	l098	figs-idiom	ἐπισκέψεται ἡμᾶς	1	will visit us	As in [1:68](../01/68.md), **visit** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will come to help us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	1	79	sh2q	figs-metaphor	ἐπιφᾶναι τοῖς&καθημένοις	1	to shine on those who are sitting	As in [1:78](../01/78.md), light represents truth. Just as Zechariah described the Savior as like a sunrise in that verse, here he is describing the spiritual truth that the Savior will bring as if it will light up the earth. Alternate translation: “to show the truth to people who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	1	79	sh2q	figs-metaphor	ἐπιφᾶναι τοῖς & καθημένοις	1	to shine on those who are sitting	As in [1:78](../01/78.md), light represents truth. Just as Zechariah described the Savior as like a sunrise in that verse, here he is describing the spiritual truth that the Savior will bring as if it will light up the earth. Alternate translation: “to show the truth to people who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	1	79	l099	figs-idiom	τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις	1	on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death	Here **sitting** in a place is an idiom that means to be in that place. Alternate translation: “on people who are in darkness, yes, even in deep darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	79	k46q	figs-idiom	τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις	1	on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death	The **shadow of death** is an idiom that describes deep darkness. Alternate translation: “on people who are in darkness, yes, even in deep darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	1	79	l100	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις	1	on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death	Since light represents truth, **darkness** represents the absence of spiritual truth. Alternate translation: “on people who do not know the truth, who do not know it at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ LUK	2	14	p1fm		δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις Θεῷ	1	Glory in the highest t
 LUK	2	14	y2b3		ἐν ἀνθρώποις εὐδοκίας	1	among men of good pleasure	This could refer to: (1) God’s **good pleasure** with people. Alternate translation: “among people with whom God is pleased” (2) people who show **good pleasure** or “good will” to one another. Alternate translation: “among people of good will”
 LUK	2	14	l121	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	men	Here, the term **men** has a generic meaning that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	2	15	au2m	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to mark a shift in the story, to what the shepherds did after the angels left. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-LUK	2	15	s4js	figs-exclusive	διέλθωμεν&ἴδωμεν&ἡμῖν	1	Let us … go … let us see … to us	The shepherds are speaking to one another, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **us**, use the inclusive form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	2	15	s4js	figs-exclusive	διέλθωμεν & ἴδωμεν & ἡμῖν	1	Let us … go … let us see … to us	The shepherds are speaking to one another, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **us**, use the inclusive form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	2	16	l122	figs-hendiadys	ἦλθον σπεύσαντες	1	they went hastening	The two verbs **went** and **hastening** express a single idea. The word **hastening** tells how they **went**. Alternate translation: “they went quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	2	16	rdi2	translate-unknown	κείμενον ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ	1	lying in the manger	See how you translated the term **manger** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “lying in a box that holds hay for animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	2	17	n2qz	figs-activepassive	τοῦ ῥήματος τοῦ λαληθέντος αὐτοῖς	1	the message that had been told to them	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “what the angels had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -378,16 +378,16 @@ LUK	2	26	psf8	figs-activepassive	ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον
 LUK	2	26	l138	figs-idiom	μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον πρὶν	1	he would not see death before	To **see death** is an idiom that means “to die.” Alternate translation: “that he would not die before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	2	26	e6vu	figs-litotes	μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον πρὶν	1	he would not see death before	Here, Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “he would live until” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 LUK	2	27	k53l	figs-idiom	ἦλθεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι	1	he came in the Spirit	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he came as the Holy Spirit directed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	2	27	uqr6	figs-go	ἦλθεν&εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	he came … into the temple	Your language may say “went” in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “he went … into the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+LUK	2	27	uqr6	figs-go	ἦλθεν & εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	he came … into the temple	Your language may say “went” in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “he went … into the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 LUK	2	27	y8la	figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	into the temple	Since only priests could enter the **temple** building, this means the **temple** courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	2	27	wt3r	writing-participants	τοὺς γονεῖς	1	the parents	This means the **parents** of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use their names here. Alternate translation: “Mary and Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	2	27	h444	figs-explicit	τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	for them to do according to the custom of the law concerning him	The phrase **to do according to the custom of the law** refers to the ceremony of dedication that Luke described in [2:22–25](../02/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to perform the ceremony of dedication that the law of God required” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	2	28	l139	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	and	Luke uses the word **and** to indicate that this event took place after the event he has just described. That is, Simeon took Jesus in his arms after his parents brought him into the temple for the dedication ceremony. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 LUK	2	28	y5g6	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸς ἐδέξατο αὐτὸ εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας	1	he took him into his arms	If it would be helpful in your language, you could specify by name the people to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Simeon picked up the baby Jesus and held him in his arms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	2	29	l140	figs-declarative	νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου&ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1	You are now dismissing your servant in peace	Simeon is actually using this statement to make a request. Alternate translation: “Now please let me die in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+LUK	2	29	l140	figs-declarative	νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου & ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1	You are now dismissing your servant in peace	Simeon is actually using this statement to make a request. Alternate translation: “Now please let me die in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 LUK	2	29	m6eg	figs-123person	νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου	1	you are … dismissing your servant	Simeon refers to himself as God’s **servant** in order to show humility and respect. Alternate translation: “Now please let me die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	2	29	g3wn	figs-euphemism	νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου	1	you are … dismissing your servant	Simeon uses a mild expression to refer to death. Alternate translation: “Now please let me die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-LUK	2	29	l141	figs-youformal	σου&σου	1	your … your	Here, the word **your** is singular because Simeon is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of **your** that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form here and in [2:30](../02/30.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md), and the corresponding formal form for “you” in [2:31](../02/31.md). However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who knows God well, as Simeon did, to address God using the informal form. Use your best judgment about what form to use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
+LUK	2	29	l141	figs-youformal	σου & σου	1	your … your	Here, the word **your** is singular because Simeon is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of **your** that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form here and in [2:30](../02/30.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md), and the corresponding formal form for “you” in [2:31](../02/31.md). However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who knows God well, as Simeon did, to address God using the informal form. Use your best judgment about what form to use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
 LUK	2	29	e8fk	figs-metonymy	κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου	1	according to your word	Simeon is referring to the promise that God made that he would live to see the Messiah. Simeon describes that promise by association with the **word** or saying by which God made it. Alternate translation: “as you promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	2	30	b7i6	figs-synecdoche	εἶδον οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου	1	my eyes have seen	Simeon uses one part of himself, his **eyes**, to represent all of himself in the act of seeing. Alternate translation: “I have personally seen” or “I, myself, have seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	2	30	ekw3	figs-metonymy	τὸ σωτήριόν σου	1	your salvation	This expression refers by association to the person who would bring **salvation**, that is, the infant Jesus, whom Simeon was holding. Alternate translation: “the Savior whom you have sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -468,8 +468,8 @@ LUK	3	1	l167	writing-newevent	ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτ
 LUK	3	1	l168	translate-ordinal	ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ	1	in the fifteenth year	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “in year 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	3	1	l169	writing-participants	Τιβερίου Καίσαρος	1	Tiberius Caesar	As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **Caesar** is the title of the emperor of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Tiberius, who ruled the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	3	1	l170	translate-names	Τιβερίου	1	Tiberius	**Tiberius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	3	1	v22w	translate-names	Ποντίου Πειλάτου&Ἡρῴδου&Φιλίππου&Λυσανίου	1	Pontius Pilate … Herod … Philip … Lysanias	These are the names of men. Here, the **Herod** mentioned is not the same one as in [1:5](../01/05.md). Rather, it is his son. Luke makes further mention of him many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	3	1	uv8h	translate-names	τῆς Ἰουδαίας&τῆς Γαλιλαίας&τῆς Ἰτουραίας καὶ Τραχωνίτιδος&τῆς Ἀβειληνῆς	1	Judea … Galilee … Ituraea and Trachonitis … Abilene	These are names of territories. Like **Galilee**, the name **Judea** occurs many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	3	1	v22w	translate-names	Ποντίου Πειλάτου & Ἡρῴδου & Φιλίππου & Λυσανίου	1	Pontius Pilate … Herod … Philip … Lysanias	These are the names of men. Here, the **Herod** mentioned is not the same one as in [1:5](../01/05.md). Rather, it is his son. Luke makes further mention of him many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	3	1	uv8h	translate-names	τῆς Ἰουδαίας & τῆς Γαλιλαίας & τῆς Ἰτουραίας καὶ Τραχωνίτιδος & τῆς Ἀβειληνῆς	1	Judea … Galilee … Ituraea and Trachonitis … Abilene	These are names of territories. Like **Galilee**, the name **Judea** occurs many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	3	1	l171	translate-unknown	τετραρχοῦντος	1	tetrarch	In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “ruler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	3	2	d3m8	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καϊάφα	1	during the high priesthood of Annas and Caiaphas	Usually there would only have been one high priest, but at this point the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea, and there had been some intrigue surrounding **Annas**. One Roman official had appointed him some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law **Caiaphas** high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. It would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible for your readers. Alternate translation: “while Annas and Caiaphas were both serving as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	3	2	dg8p	figs-personification	ἐγένετο ῥῆμα Θεοῦ	1	the word of God came	Luke speaks of God’s message as if it were a living thing that could come to a person at God's bidding. Alternate translation: “God gave a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ LUK	3	5	s66m	figs-activepassive	καὶ πᾶν ὄρος καὶ βουνὸς
 LUK	3	5	l178	figs-metaphor	ἔσται τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείαν, καὶ αἱ τραχεῖαι εἰς ὁδοὺς λείας	1	the crooked roads will become straight, and the rough roads will become smooth	This too is both a continuation of the figurative description of making a good road and a description of the effects that the coming of the Lord will have on people. Something that is **crooked** becoming **straight** and something that is **rough** becoming **smooth** can be seen as metaphors for repentance and a change in a person’s way of life. And so we recommend once again that you translate the words directly and not provide a plain explanation in the text of your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	6	l179	figs-metonymy	πᾶσα σὰρξ	1	all flesh	Luke is describing people by reference to something associated with them, the flesh they are made of. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	3	6	l180	figs-metaphor	ὄψεται	1	will see	The term **see** is a figurative way of referring to recognition and understanding. Alternate translation: “will recognize” or “will understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	3	6	du1b	figs-abstractnouns	ὄψεται&τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	will see the salvation of God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “will understand how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+LUK	3	6	du1b	figs-abstractnouns	ὄψεται & τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	will see the salvation of God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “will understand how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	3	6	l181	figs-quotesinquotes	τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the salvation of God	After this phrase, Isaiah ends his quotation from the person who is calling out in the wilderness. If you decided in [3:4](../03/04.md) to mark these words as a second-level quotation, indicate the end of that quotation here with whatever convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	3	6	l182	figs-quotemarks	τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the salvation of God	After this phrase, Luke also ends his quotation from the book of Isaiah. If you decided in [3:4](../03/04.md) to mark this as a first-level quotation, indicate that ending here with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a first-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 LUK	3	7	sxn9	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	to be baptized by him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for him to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ LUK	3	7	b724	figs-idiom	γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν	1	Offspring of viper
 LUK	3	7	l183	translate-unknown	γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν	1	Offspring of vipers	If your readers would not recognize the name **vipers**, which refers to dangerous poisonous snakes, you could state something more general. Alternate translation: “You are evil, like poisonous snakes” or “You are evil, like poisonous animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	3	7	mcq5	figs-rquestion	τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς?	1	Who warned you to flee from the coming wrath?	John is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the people in the crowds to tell him who warned them. Instead, he is using the question form to challenge the people to think about what they believe baptism will do for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “you could not escape from God’s wrath just by being baptized!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	3	7	g7tw	figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς	1	from the coming wrath	John is using the word **wrath** to refer to God’s punishment. This is by association with the way that punishment is an expression of God’s **wrath** or displeasure over sin. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that God is sending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	3	8	pz16	figs-metaphor	ποιήσατε&καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας	1	produce fruits worthy of repentance	John is comparing a person’s behavior to **fruits**. Just as a plant is expected to produce fruit that is appropriate for that kind of plant, a person who says that he has repented is expected to live righteously. Alternate translation: “do the good things that will show that you have stopped sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	3	8	pz16	figs-metaphor	ποιήσατε & καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας	1	produce fruits worthy of repentance	John is comparing a person’s behavior to **fruits**. Just as a plant is expected to produce fruit that is appropriate for that kind of plant, a person who says that he has repented is expected to live righteously. Alternate translation: “do the good things that will show that you have stopped sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	8	l184	figs-abstractnouns	ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας	1	worthy of repentance	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **repentance** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “that will show that you have stopped sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	3	8	l185	figs-quotesinquotes	μὴ ἄρξησθε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ	1	do not begin to say within yourselves, ‘We have Abraham as our father’	**We have Abraham as our father** is a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting John’s words to the crowd, and John is quoting something that the crowds might wrongly think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “do not try to reassure yourselves with the thought that Abraham is your father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	3	8	l186	figs-metaphor	πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ	1	We have Abraham as our father	Here, **Father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -507,16 +507,16 @@ LUK	3	8	pft3	figs-explicit	πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ	1	We
 LUK	3	8	gbp2	figs-metaphor	δύναται ὁ Θεὸς ἐκ τῶν λίθων τούτων ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	God is able to raise up children for Abraham from these stones	The expression **raise up** is a spatial metaphor. It envisions that if God did turn the stones into people who were descendants of Abraham, then the people would be standing up in front of everyone, no longer lying in the riverbed as the stones were. Alternate translation: “God is able create descendants for Abraham out of these stones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	8	l189	figs-metaphor	τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	children for Abraham	Here, the word **children** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants for Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	8	pi82		ἐκ τῶν λίθων τούτων	1	from these stones	John was probably referring to actual **stones** lying along the Jordan River. Alternate translation: “from these stones here”
-LUK	3	9	r5pa	figs-activepassive	ἤδη&ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται	1	the ax is already set against the root of the trees	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the person who is going to cut down the tree has already placed his ax against the roots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	3	9	l190	figs-metaphor	ἤδη&ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται	1	the ax is already set against the root of the trees	This is a figurative way of saying that punishment is just about to begin. Alternate translation: “God is even now getting his punishment ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	3	9	l8it	figs-activepassive	πᾶν&δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν, ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται	1	every tree that does not produce good fruit is chopped down and thrown into the fire	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with active forms. Alternate translation: “this person will chop down every tree that does not produce good fruit and throw it into the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	3	9	l191	figs-metaphor	πᾶν&δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν, ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται	1	every tree that does not produce good fruit is chopped down and thrown into the fire	This is a figurative way of describing punishment. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish every person who does not do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	3	10	ak6i	figs-quotemarks	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν&λέγοντες	1	kept asking him, saying	Luke uses the word **saying** to introduce his quotation of what the crowds were asking John. Here and throughout the book, if you indicate the quotation in some other way, such as with quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, you do not need to represent this word in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+LUK	3	9	r5pa	figs-activepassive	ἤδη & ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται	1	the ax is already set against the root of the trees	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the person who is going to cut down the tree has already placed his ax against the roots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	3	9	l190	figs-metaphor	ἤδη & ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται	1	the ax is already set against the root of the trees	This is a figurative way of saying that punishment is just about to begin. Alternate translation: “God is even now getting his punishment ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	3	9	l8it	figs-activepassive	πᾶν & δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν, ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται	1	every tree that does not produce good fruit is chopped down and thrown into the fire	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with active forms. Alternate translation: “this person will chop down every tree that does not produce good fruit and throw it into the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	3	9	l191	figs-metaphor	πᾶν & δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν, ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται	1	every tree that does not produce good fruit is chopped down and thrown into the fire	This is a figurative way of describing punishment. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish every person who does not do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	3	10	ak6i	figs-quotemarks	ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν & λέγοντες	1	kept asking him, saying	Luke uses the word **saying** to introduce his quotation of what the crowds were asking John. Here and throughout the book, if you indicate the quotation in some other way, such as with quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, you do not need to represent this word in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 LUK	3	11	g3ip	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	So answering he said to them	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that John responded to the question that the crowds asked. Alternate translation: “So he responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	3	11	vuk3	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔχων βρώματα, ὁμοίως ποιείτω	1	let him do the same	The implication is that anyone who has extra food should share it, just as a person with an extra tunic should share that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if anyone has extra food, he should share that as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	3	12	pp3s	figs-activepassive	ἦλθον&βαπτισθῆναι	1	came to be baptized	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “came because they wanted John to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	3	12	pp3s	figs-activepassive	ἦλθον & βαπτισθῆναι	1	came to be baptized	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “came because they wanted John to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	3	12	l192		Διδάσκαλε	1	Teacher	This is a respectful title. You can translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use,
-LUK	3	13	v9ls	figs-explicit	μηδὲν πλέον&πράσσετε	1	Collect nothing more	The implication is that tax collectors had been demanding more money than they should have been collecting. John tells them to stop doing that. Alternate translation: “Do not demand extra money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	3	13	v9ls	figs-explicit	μηδὲν πλέον & πράσσετε	1	Collect nothing more	The implication is that tax collectors had been demanding more money than they should have been collecting. John tells them to stop doing that. Alternate translation: “Do not demand extra money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	3	13	m136	figs-activepassive	παρὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον ὑμῖν	1	than what you have been ordered	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “beyond what the Romans have authorized you to collect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	3	14	w2d8	figs-exclusive	τί ποιήσωμεν καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	And us, what should we do?	The soliders are speaking about themselves, as opposed to others, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **we** and “us,” use the exclusive form here. You could make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “How about us soldiers? What must we do?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	3	14	l3mz	figs-explicit	μηδὲ συκοφαντήσητε	1	do not accuse falsely	The implication is that soldiers were making false charges against people in order to extort money from them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do not accuse anyone falsely in order to get money from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -526,20 +526,20 @@ LUK	3	15	pgp3	grammar-connect-time-background	προσδοκῶντος δὲ τ
 LUK	3	15	l194	figs-explicit	προσδοκῶντος δὲ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	And the people were expecting	The implication is that the people were expecting the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now the people were expecting the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	3	15	czb7	figs-metaphor	διαλογιζομένων πάντων ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	wondering in their hearts	Here, Luke uses the term **hearts** to represent the people’s minds. Alternate translation: “all wondering in their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	16	fn1u	figs-explicit	ἀπεκρίνατο λέγων πᾶσιν ὁ Ἰωάννης	1	John answered, saying to them all	John’s statement clearly implies that John himself is not the Messiah. It may be helpful to state this explicitly for your readers. Alternate translation: “John clarified that he was not the Messiah by saying to them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	3	16	l195	figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίνατο λέγων&ὁ Ἰωάννης	1	John answered, saying	Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that John responded to what the people were wondering about him. Alternate translation: “John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	3	16	l195	figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίνατο λέγων & ὁ Ἰωάννης	1	John answered, saying	Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that John responded to what the people were wondering about him. Alternate translation: “John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	3	16	wj3h		ἐγὼ μὲν ὕδατι βαπτίζω ὑμᾶς	1	I … baptize you with water	Alternate translation: “I indeed baptize you using water” or “I indeed baptize you by means of water”
 LUK	3	16	k3hg	figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ	1	I am not worthy to untie the strap of his sandals	Untying the straps of **sandals** was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that he is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	3	16	jjp1	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πυρί	1	He will baptize you with the Holy Spirit and with fire	John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak of spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the **Holy Spirit**, who purifies them. Alternate translation: “He will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	3	16	c1an	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει&πυρί	1	He will baptize you … with fire	The word **fire** is intended, and it suggests a fuller metaphor. Jesus will not immerse people in actual fire. Be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “He will baptize you … to purify you, as precious metals are purified in fire” or “He will baptize you … clear away your sins, as fire clears away underbrush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	3	16	c1an	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει & πυρί	1	He will baptize you … with fire	The word **fire** is intended, and it suggests a fuller metaphor. Jesus will not immerse people in actual fire. Be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “He will baptize you … to purify you, as precious metals are purified in fire” or “He will baptize you … clear away your sins, as fire clears away underbrush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	17	jzm4	figs-metaphor	οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	whose winnowing fork is in his hand	John is saying that the Messiah will come prepared to judge people right away. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here in your translation. Alternate translation: “He will already be prepared to judge people, just like a farmer who is ready to thresh grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	3	17	l196	figs-idiom	οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	whose winnowing fork is in his hand	The phrase **in his hand** is an idiom that means he has the tool all ready to use. Alternate translation: “He has his winnowing fork ready to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	3	17	b1ap	translate-unknown	πτύον	1	winnowing fork	This is a tool for tossing wheat into the air to separate the wheat grain from the chaff. The heavier grain falls back down, and the wind blows away the unwanted chaff. This tool is similar to a pitchfork. If you have a similar tool in your culture, you could use the word for it here. Otherwise, you could use a phrase that would express the meaning. Alternate translation: “tool for threshing grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	3	17	gf8n	translate-unknown	διακαθᾶραι τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ	1	to thoroughly clear off his threshing floor	The threshing floor was the place where wheat was stacked in preparation for threshing. To **clear off** the floor is to finish threshing all the grain. Alternate translation: “to completely thresh all of his grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	3	17	gt3q	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ συναγαγεῖν τὸν σῖτον εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην αὐτοῦ	1	and to gather the wheat into his storehouse	John continues to speak to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The **wheat** is the part of the crop that is useful. It represents people who are obedient to God, who will be welcomed into his presence. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will welcome those who are obedient to God, just as a farmer stores good grain in his barn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 LUK	3	17	ky8j	figs-exmetaphor	τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ	1	but he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire	John continues to speak to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The **chaff** is the husk that surrounds the grain. It is not useful for anything, so people burn it up. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “but he will punish those who are disobedient to God, just as a farmer burns up the useless chaff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-LUK	3	18	tyj9		πολλὰ&καὶ ἕτερα παρακαλῶν	1	also exhorting many other things	Alternate translation: “saying many other things to warn them”
+LUK	3	18	tyj9		πολλὰ & καὶ ἕτερα παρακαλῶν	1	also exhorting many other things	Alternate translation: “saying many other things to warn them”
 LUK	3	19	l197	writing-background	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the term **But** to introduce some background information to the story. In this verse and the next one, he tells what later happened to John. This had not yet happened at this time. When Luke says in [3:21](../03/21.md) that Jesus was baptized, he means that John was still there and that John baptized Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-LUK	3	19	jj3q	translate-unknown	ὁ&Ἡρῴδης ὁ τετράρχης	1	Herod the tetrarch	See how you translated the term **tetrarch** in [3:1](../03/01.md) Alternate translation: “Herod, who ruled the region of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+LUK	3	19	jj3q	translate-unknown	ὁ & Ἡρῴδης ὁ τετράρχης	1	Herod the tetrarch	See how you translated the term **tetrarch** in [3:1](../03/01.md) Alternate translation: “Herod, who ruled the region of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	3	19	l198	figs-activepassive	ἐλεγχόμενος ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ περὶ Ἡρῳδιάδος, τῆς γυναικὸς τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	having been rebuked by him concerning Herodias, the wife of his brother	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could make clear who did the action. Alternate translation: “because John had rebuked him for marrying Herodias, his brother’s former wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	3	19	cu4v	figs-explicit	ἐλεγχόμενος ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ περὶ Ἡρῳδιάδος, τῆς γυναικὸς τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	having been rebuked by him concerning Herodias, the wife of his brother	The implication is that Herod’s brother was still alive. That made this marriage a violation of the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because John had rebuked him for marrying Herodias, his brother’s former wife, while his brother was still alive. That was something which the law of Moses forbade” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	3	20	p2xw	figs-synecdoche	κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ	1	he locked John up in prison	Herod did not do this by himself, Rather, as a ruler, he probably ordered his soldiers to lock John up. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “He had his soldiers lock John up in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -576,9 +576,9 @@ LUK	4	1	v18k	figs-activepassive	ἤγετο ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι	1	was l
 LUK	4	2	bls8	figs-verbs	ἡμέρας τεσσεράκοντα πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	for 40 days being tempted by the devil	The Greek verb indicates that the temptation continued throughout the **40 days**. You can make this clear in your translation, as UST does: “While he was there, the devil kept tempting him for 40 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	4	2	hg5p	figs-activepassive	ἡμέρας τεσσεράκοντα πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	for 40 days being tempted by the devil	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days the devil kept tempting him” or “For 40 days the devil kept trying to persuade him disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	4	2	k47d	writing-pronouns	καὶ οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲν	1	he did not eat anything	Make sure that it is clear in your translation that the word **he** refers to Jesus, not to the devil. Alternate translation: “Jesus did not eat anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	4	3	bg52	figs-explicit	εἶπεν&ὁ διάβολος	1	the devil said	The **devil** either holds a stone in his hand or points to a nearby stone. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The devil picked up a stone and said” or “The devil pointed to a stone and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	4	3	bg52	figs-explicit	εἶπεν & ὁ διάβολος	1	the devil said	The **devil** either holds a stone in his hand or points to a nearby stone. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The devil picked up a stone and said” or “The devil pointed to a stone and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	3	l202	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰπὲ τῷ λίθῳ τούτῳ, ἵνα γένηται ἄρτος	1	If you are the Son of God, speak to this stone so that it might become bread	The devil is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the **stone** will only become **bread** if Jesus is the **Son of God**. The devil is speaking as if it is uncertain who Jesus is in order to challenge him to do this miracle to prove that he really is the **Son of God**. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are the Son of God by commanding this stone to become bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-LUK	4	3	y7yf	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς&τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. Even the devil knew its significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+LUK	4	3	y7yf	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. Even the devil knew its significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 LUK	4	4	l203	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And	The word **And** introduces a contrast between the devil wanting Jesus to turn the stone into bread and Jesus refusing to do that. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 LUK	4	4	kde3	figs-explicit	ἀπεκρίθη πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, γέγραπται	1	Jesus to answered him, “It is written”	Jesus clearly implies in his answer that he is rejecting the devil’s challenge. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. Alternate translation: “Jesus replied, ‘No, I will not do that, because it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	4	l204	figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται, ὅτι οὐκ ἐπ’ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	It is written, ‘Man will not live on bread alone’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “It is written that man will not live on bread alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ LUK	4	5	wm17	figs-explicit	ἀναγαγὼν αὐτὸν	1	he led him up	The i
 LUK	4	5	jxi9	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν στιγμῇ χρόνου	1	in an instant of time	In your language, it might seem that the phrase **an instant of time** expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “in an instant” or “in a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 LUK	4	6	l206	figs-activepassive	ἐμοὶ παραδέδοται	1	it has been handed over to me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God has given me authority over all these kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	4	6	dcx6	figs-explicit	ἐμοὶ παραδέδοται	1	it has been handed over to me	The word **it** likely refers back to the singular antecedent **all this authority**, that is, the authority over these kingdoms. So the word you use to translate **it** should agree with **authority** in gender and number and in any other distinctions that your language marks. Alternate translation: “God has given me authority over all these kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	4	7	g7h9	figs-explicit	σὺ&ἐὰν προσκυνήσῃς ἐνώπιον ἐμοῦ	1	if you will bow in worship before me	The implication is that the devil wants visible, direct worship that will be an official act of submission. Alternate translation: “If you will bow down in worship directly in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	4	7	g7h9	figs-explicit	σὺ & ἐὰν προσκυνήσῃς ἐνώπιον ἐμοῦ	1	if you will bow in worship before me	The implication is that the devil wants visible, direct worship that will be an official act of submission. Alternate translation: “If you will bow down in worship directly in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	7	l207		ἐνώπιον	1	before	Here, the term **before** means “in front of.”
 LUK	4	7	uca7		ἔσται σοῦ πᾶσα	1	it will all be yours	Alternate translation: “I will give you all of these kingdoms”
 LUK	4	8	v8ca	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ	1	answering, Jesus said to him	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the offer that the devil made. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ LUK	4	8	xj35	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	It is written	If it would b
 LUK	4	8	bch3	figs-declarative	Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου προσκυνήσεις καὶ αὐτῷ μόνῳ λατρεύσεις	1	You will worship the Lord your God, and you will serve only him	Here, the Scriptures are using a statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must worship the Lord your God, and you must serve only him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 LUK	4	8	q8ni	figs-youcrowd	προσκυνήσεις	1	You will worship	Here, it may not be clear whether to use the singular or plural form of **You** because this is a short quotation from the Scriptures and the context is not given. The word is actually singular because, even though Moses said this to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was supposed to obey this command. So in your translation, use the singular form of **You**, if your language marks that distinction. In general these notes will not discuss whether **You** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context. But they will address ambiguous cases such as this one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	4	9	g2n5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν ἐντεῦθεν κάτω	1	If you are the Son of God, throw yourself down from here	The devil is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that Jesus will be able to jump safely from this great height if he really is the **Son of God**. The devil is speaking as if it is uncertain who Jesus is in order to challenge him to do this miracle to prove that he really is the **Son of God**. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are the Son of God by jumping safely from this great height” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-LUK	4	9	j9nx	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς&τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. Even the devil knew its significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+LUK	4	9	j9nx	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. Even the devil knew its significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 LUK	4	9	i81s	figs-explicit	βάλε σεαυτὸν ἐντεῦθεν κάτω	1	throw yourself down from here	The exact location of the part of the temple that Luke describes is uncertain. However, the implication is that it was one of the places on the temple roof from which people would fall several hundred feet into the Kidron Valley if they jumped or slipped off. Make sure it is clear in your translation that this would ordinarily have been a deadly fall. Alternate translation: “jump from this great height” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	10	l209	figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται γὰρ, ὅτι τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ ἐντελεῖται περὶ σοῦ, τοῦ διαφυλάξαι σε	1	For it is written, ‘He will give orders to his angels regarding you, to protect you’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For it is written that he will give orders to his angels regarding you, to protect you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	4	10	f5dn	figs-explicit	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	For it is written	The devil implies that his quote from the Psalms means that if Jesus really is the Son of God, he will not be hurt if he jumps from this great height. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You will not be hurt, because it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ LUK	4	13	nc2c	figs-explicit	συντελέσας πάντα πειρασμὸν
 LUK	4	13	qqd7	figs-explicit	ἄχρι καιροῦ	1	until an opportune time	New Testament Greek had two words for time. The first referred to chronological time, that is, the passage of time. The second word referred to the right time to do something. ULT is using the phrase **an opportune time** to translate that second word. If your language makes this same distinction, use the corresponding word in your own translation. Alternate translation: “until the time was right to try again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	14	yfc3	writing-newevent	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	4	14	ht5k	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	in the power of the Spirit	This phrase means that God, by the Holy **Spirit**, was empowering Jesus in a special way, enabling him to do things that ordinary humans could not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Spirit was giving him the power to do extraordinary things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	4	14	dhj7	figs-personification	φήμη ἐξῆλθεν&περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	news about him went out	Luke speaks of this **news** as if it were something that could **go out** actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	4	14	dhj7	figs-personification	φήμη ἐξῆλθεν & περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	news about him went out	Luke speaks of this **news** as if it were something that could **go out** actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	4	14	hah9		καθ’ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου	1	throughout the entire surrounding region	Alternate translation: “everywhere around Galilee”
 LUK	4	15	ik8g	figs-activepassive	δοξαζόμενος ὑπὸ πάντων	1	being praised by all	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as everyone spoke about him in a good way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	4	16	l214	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
@@ -629,9 +629,9 @@ LUK	4	17	x52a	translate-unknown	βιβλίον τοῦ προφήτου Ἠσα
 LUK	4	17	w5s9	figs-activepassive	τὸν τόπον οὗ ἦν γεγραμμένον	1	the place where it was written	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the place where the scroll recorded the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	4	18	h1rm	figs-metaphor	Πνεῦμα Κυρίου ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	The Spirit of the Lord is upon me	As in [2:25](../02/25.md), **upon** is a spatial metaphor that means that the Spirit of God is with someone in a special way. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of the Lord is with me in a special way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	4	18	q96y	figs-metaphor	ἔχρισέν με	1	he has anointed me	In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person when they were given the authority to assume an office or do a special task. Isaiah uses anointing to indicate that God has appointed him to his work. Jesus applies these words to himself as well. Alternate translation: “he has appointed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	4	18	l6ac	figs-nominaladj	πτωχοῖς&τυφλοῖς	1	the poor … the blind	Luke is using the adjectives **poor** and **blind** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these expressions with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are poor … people who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	4	18	l6ac	figs-nominaladj	πτωχοῖς & τυφλοῖς	1	the poor … the blind	Luke is using the adjectives **poor** and **blind** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these expressions with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are poor … people who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	4	18	a9wn		κηρύξαι αἰχμαλώτοις ἄφεσιν	1	to proclaim freedom to the captives	Alternate translation: “to tell people who are being held captive that they can go free”
-LUK	4	18	mzp4		κηρύξαι&τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν	1	to proclaim … recovery of sight to the blind	Alternate translation: “to tell people who are blind that they will be able to see again”
+LUK	4	18	mzp4		κηρύξαι & τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν	1	to proclaim … recovery of sight to the blind	Alternate translation: “to tell people who are blind that they will be able to see again”
 LUK	4	18	utq5	figs-activepassive	ἀποστεῖλαι τεθραυσμένους ἐν ἀφέσει	1	to set free those who are oppressed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “to rescue people whom others are treating harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	4	19	z262	figs-idiom	κηρύξαι ἐνιαυτὸν Κυρίου δεκτόν	1	to proclaim the favorable year of the Lord	Luke is using the term **year** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “to announce that this is the time when the Lord will show his kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	4	20	sm11	figs-explicit	πτύξας τὸ βιβλίον	1	rolling up the scroll	A **scroll** was closed by rolling it like a tube to protect the writing inside it. Alternate translation: “closing the scroll by rolling it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ LUK	4	37	l239	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **An
 LUK	4	37	xca8	figs-personification	ἐξεπορεύετο ἦχος περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	news about him went out	Luke speaks of this **news** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. As in [4:14](../04/14.md), this expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people began to spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	4	38	jn3a	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Then	Luke uses the word **Then** to introduce a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	4	38	l240	writing-participants	Σίμωνος	1	Simon	Luke is introducing a new character into the story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state a little bit more about him here to help them recognize him later. Alternate translation: “a man named Simon, who would become one of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	4	38	tf3d		πενθερὰ&τοῦ Σίμωνος	1	Simon’s mother-in-law	This means the mother of Simon’s wife. In your translation, you could use the term or expression in your own language for this relationship.
+LUK	4	38	tf3d		πενθερὰ & τοῦ Σίμωνος	1	Simon’s mother-in-law	This means the mother of Simon’s wife. In your translation, you could use the term or expression in your own language for this relationship.
 LUK	4	38	lls1	figs-idiom	ἦν συνεχομένη πυρετῷ μεγάλῳ	1	was suffering with a high fever	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “was very sick with a high fever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	4	38	cp21		ἦν συνεχομένη πυρετῷ μεγάλῳ	1	was suffering with a high fever	You can express this in the way your language and culture would. Alternate translation: “was so sick that her skin was hot”
 LUK	4	38	z3qz	figs-explicit	ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν περὶ αὐτῆς	1	they asked him concerning her	Implicitly this means they asked Jesus to heal her from the **fever**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they asked Jesus to heal her” or “they asked Jesus to cure her fever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -703,13 +703,13 @@ LUK	4	39	ed8r		ἐπετίμησεν τῷ πυρετῷ, καὶ ἀφῆκεν
 LUK	4	39	qtn7	figs-idiom	διηκόνει αὐτοῖς	1	began to serve them	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “and began to prepare food for Jesus and the other people in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	4	40	l242	figs-explicit	δύνοντος δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου	1	when the sun was setting	The implication is that the people waited until sunset because that marked the end of the Sabbath, and they could then do the “work” of bringing the sick to Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. Alternate translation: “when the sun was setting and the Sabbath day was ending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	40	zpk9		τὰς χεῖρας ἐπιτιθεὶς	1	laying his hands on	Alternate translation: “placing his hands”
-LUK	4	41	bp7b	figs-explicit	ἐξήρχετο&καὶ δαιμόνια	1	demons also came out	The implication is that Jesus made the **demons** leave the people they were controlling. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus also forced demons to come out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	4	41	bp7b	figs-explicit	ἐξήρχετο & καὶ δαιμόνια	1	demons also came out	The implication is that Jesus made the **demons** leave the people they were controlling. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus also forced demons to come out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	4	41	ag15	figs-hendiadys	κραυγάζοντα καὶ λέγοντα	1	crying out, and saying	Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The verb **crying out** tells how they were **saying** what follows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “screaming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	4	41	dik3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-LUK	4	42	rt5n		γενομένης&ἡμέρας	1	when it became day	Alternate translation: “at sunrise” or “at dawn”
+LUK	4	42	rt5n		γενομένης & ἡμέρας	1	when it became day	Alternate translation: “at sunrise” or “at dawn”
 LUK	4	42	d1pr		ἔρημον τόπον	1	a solitary place	Alternate translation: “a deserted place” or “a place where there were no people”
 LUK	4	42	l243		κατεῖχον αὐτὸν τοῦ μὴ πορεύεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	they restrained him not to go away from them	Alternate translation: “they tried to keep him from leaving them”
-LUK	4	43	l244	figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελίσασθαί&τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	proclaim the gospel about the kingdom of God	See the discussion of this concept in Part 2 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of Luke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “announce the good news that God is going to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+LUK	4	43	l244	figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελίσασθαί & τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	proclaim the gospel about the kingdom of God	See the discussion of this concept in Part 2 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of Luke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “announce the good news that God is going to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	4	43	sjy1	figs-metonymy	ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν	1	to other cities	Jesus actually means the people who live in these **cities**. He is describing them by reference to something associated with them, the cities where they live. Alternate translation: “to the people in many other cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	4	43	b45z	figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην	1	for this I was sent	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is the reason why God sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	4	44	s5mb	figs-explicit	τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	in Judea	Since Jesus is in Galilee in this part of the Gospel of Luke, the term **Judea** here probably refers to the entire region where the Jews lived at that time. Alternate translation: “where the Jews lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ LUK	5	7	n2fp		κατένευσαν τοῖς μετόχοις	1	they signaled to
 LUK	5	7	pr7m	figs-explicit	βυθίζεσθαι αὐτά	1	they began to sink	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the reason for this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they began to sink because the fish were so heavy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	5	8	r8j9	translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τοῖς γόνασιν Ἰησοῦ	1	he fell down at the knees of Jesus	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Peter did not fall down accidentally. Rather, bowing or lying down in front of Jesus was a sign of humility and respect. Alternate translation: “he bowed down in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	5	8	j67m	figs-gendernotations	ἀνὴρ ἁμαρτωλός	1	a sinful man	Here, **man** means “adult male,” not the more general “human being.” So Peter is not saying generally, “I am a sinful person.” He really does mean, “I personally am a sinful man.” Be sure that this is clear in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-LUK	5	9	l246	figs-personification	θάμβος&περιέσχεν αὐτὸν καὶ πάντας τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ	1	amazement had seized him and all those with him	Luke describes Peter’s **amazement** as if it were something that could actively take hold of him. Alternate translation: “he and the other fishermen were completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	5	9	l246	figs-personification	θάμβος & περιέσχεν αὐτὸν καὶ πάντας τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ	1	amazement had seized him and all those with him	Luke describes Peter’s **amazement** as if it were something that could actively take hold of him. Alternate translation: “he and the other fishermen were completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	5	9	c2eh	figs-explicit	τῇ ἄγρᾳ τῶν ἰχθύων	1	the catch of fish	The implication is that this was a very large **catch**. Alternate translation: “the great number of fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	5	10	k4ft	writing-participants	κοινωνοὶ τῷ Σίμωνι	1	partners with Simon	Luke provides this information to introduce these new participants in the story. Alternate translation: “who were Simon’s partners in the fishing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	5	10	u6zs	figs-metaphor	ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν	1	you will be catching men	Jesus is using the image of **catching** fish to describe gathering people to follow him. Alternate translation: “you will gather people for me” or “you will persuade people to become my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -748,10 +748,10 @@ LUK	5	14	l249	figs-explicit	μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν	1	to tell no one	The im
 LUK	5	14	v1wn	figs-explicit	προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου καθὼς προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς	1	offer a sacrifice for your cleansing, as Moses commanded	Jesus assumes that the man will know that the law required a person who had been healed from a skin disease to make a specific sacrifice. This made the person ceremonially clean and they could participate once again in community religious activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “offer the sacrifice that Moses commanded so that you could become ceremonially clean once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	5	14	jk14	figs-explicit	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	for a testimony to them	A priest would have to examine the man and certify that he had been healed before he would be allowed to offer this sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to certify for everone that you have been healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	5	14	nz37	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	them	The word **them** could mean either “the priests,” which is the interpretation that UST follows, or “all the people.” You could express either as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	5	15	ng3z	figs-personification	διήρχετο&μᾶλλον ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	the word about him spread even more	Luke speaks of this **word** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. This expression means that more and more people told others about what Jesus was doing. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	5	15	ng3z	figs-personification	διήρχετο & μᾶλλον ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	the word about him spread even more	Luke speaks of this **word** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. This expression means that more and more people told others about what Jesus was doing. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	5	15	q4t2	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	the word about him	Luke uses the term **word** to describe the news about Jesus that people spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	5	15	l250	figs-activepassive	θεραπεύεσθαι	1	to be healed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for Jesus to heal them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	5	16	l251		αὐτὸς&ἦν ὑποχωρῶν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις καὶ προσευχόμενος	1	he was withdrawing into the deserted places and praying	This expression **was withdrawing** indicates habitual action. Alternate translation: “he often withdrew to places where there were no other people so that he could pray”
+LUK	5	16	l251		αὐτὸς & ἦν ὑποχωρῶν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις καὶ προσευχόμενος	1	he was withdrawing into the deserted places and praying	This expression **was withdrawing** indicates habitual action. Alternate translation: “he often withdrew to places where there were no other people so that he could pray”
 LUK	5	16	sv6f		ταῖς ἐρήμοις	1	deserted places	Alternate translation: “places where there were no other people”
 LUK	5	17	mb8m	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	5	17	l252	figs-hyperbole	ἐκ πάσης κώμης τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Ἰουδαίας	1	from every village of Galilee and Judea	Luke generalizes by saying **every** in order to emphasize from how many different villages these religious leaders came. Alternate translation: “from villages throughout Galilee and Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ LUK	5	21	ie5h	figs-explicit	διαλογίζεσθαι	1	to debate	These men wer
 LUK	5	21	l258	figs-quotemarks	λέγοντες	1	saying	Luke uses the word **saying** to introduce his quotation of what the religious leaders were thinking. If you indicate the quotation in some other way, such as with quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, you do not need to represent this word in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 LUK	5	21	a86c	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὃς λαλεῖ βλασφημίας?	1	Who is this who speaks blasphemies?	These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view, he would be speaking **blasphemies**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man is speaking blasphemies!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	5	21	s21n	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας εἰ μὴ μόνος ὁ Θεός?	1	Who can forgive sins but God alone?	Once again the religious leaders are using a question form for emphasis, and you can translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one can forgive sins but God alone!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-LUK	5	22	z4k5	figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς&τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν	1	knowing their thoughts	This phrase indicates that they were reasoning silently, so the implication is that Jesus sensed what they were thinking. Alternate translation: “sensing what they were thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	5	22	z4k5	figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς & τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν	1	knowing their thoughts	This phrase indicates that they were reasoning silently, so the implication is that Jesus sensed what they were thinking. Alternate translation: “sensing what they were thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	5	22	l259	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς	1	answering said to them	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the religious leaders were thinking. Alternate translation: “responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	5	22	et8f	figs-rquestion	τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν?	1	Why are you debating in your hearts?	Jesus does not expect the religious leaders to explain why they are thinking these things. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that they should not be thinking them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be thinking these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	5	22	p2hj	figs-metaphor	διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	debating in your hearts	The term **hearts** represents the thoughts of these people. Alternate translation: “are you thinking these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -846,13 +846,13 @@ LUK	6	4	l282		ὡς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θε
 LUK	6	4	l283	figs-metaphor	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the house of God	Jesus is describing the tabernacle as the **house of God**. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	4	yyh2	translate-unknown	τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως	1	the bread of the presence	The phrase **the bread of the presence** refers to loaves of bread that were placed on a table in the temple as an offering to God. They represented how the people of Israel lived in the **presence** of God. Alternate translation: “the bread that was offered to God” or “the bread that showed God lived among the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	6	4	l284		οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ μόνους τοὺς ἱερεῖς	1	which is not lawful to eat, except only for the priests	It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The law says that only the priests can eat that bread”
-LUK	6	5	h453	figs-123person	ἐστιν&ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man is	Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-LUK	6	5	l285	figs-explicit	ἐστιν&ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man is	See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	6	5	h453	figs-123person	ἐστιν & ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man is	Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK	6	5	l285	figs-explicit	ἐστιν & ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man is	See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	6	5	xy9h	figs-metaphor	Κύριός ἐστιν τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	is Lord of the Sabbath	The title **Lord** describes Jesus’ authority over the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “has authority over the Sabbath” or, if you translated in the first person, “have authority over the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	6	p1ee	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	6	6	d44q	writing-participants	ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ	1	there was a man there	This expression introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	6	6	t77y	translate-unknown	ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ ἡ δεξιὰ ἦν ξηρά	1	his right hand was withered	This means that the man’s **hand** was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “his right hand was shriveled” or “his right hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	6	7	q3sh	writing-pronouns	παρετηροῦντο&αὐτὸν	1	were watching him	The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, not to the man with the withered hand. Alternate translation: “were watching Jesus carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	6	7	q3sh	writing-pronouns	παρετηροῦντο & αὐτὸν	1	were watching him	The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, not to the man with the withered hand. Alternate translation: “were watching Jesus carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	6	7	c1qe	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα εὕρωσιν κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ	1	so that they might find to accuse him	Luke is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Alternate translation: “because they wanted to find something that they could accuse him of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	6	8	d7zu	figs-explicit	στῆθι εἰς τὸ μέσον	1	stand in the midst	The implication is that Jesus wanted this man to stand where everyone could see him. Alternate translation: “stand here where everyone can see you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	6	9	j8y7	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτούς	1	to them	The pronoun **them** refers to the scribes and Pharisees. Alternate translation: “to the scribes and Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -861,8 +861,8 @@ LUK	6	9	dc6f		ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι	1	to do goo
 LUK	6	10	abcb	writing-pronouns	περιβλεψάμενος πάντας αὐτοὺς, εἶπεν αὐτῷ	1	he looked around at them all and said to him	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, and **him** refers to the man with the withered hand. Alternate translation: “Jesus looked around at them all and said to the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	6	10	x77k	figs-imperative	ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρά σου	1	Stretch out your hand	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can stretch out your hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	6	10	hce1	figs-activepassive	ἀποκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ	1	his hand was restored	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his hand became healthy again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	6	11	l286	figs-activepassive	αὐτοὶ&ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας	1	they were filled with rage	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	6	11	l287	figs-personification	αὐτοὶ&ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας	1	they were filled with rage	Luke speaks of the **rage** of the scribes and Pharisees as if it were something that could actively fill them. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	6	11	l286	figs-activepassive	αὐτοὶ & ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας	1	they were filled with rage	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	6	11	l287	figs-personification	αὐτοὶ & ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας	1	they were filled with rage	Luke speaks of the **rage** of the scribes and Pharisees as if it were something that could actively fill them. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	6	11	l288	figs-explicit	τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	what they might do to Jesus	The implication is that these religious leaders perceived Jesus as a threat and they wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	6	12	e4s7	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	6	12	gzn1	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Here Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -871,9 +871,9 @@ LUK	6	12	l7by	figs-explicit	ἐξελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ ὄρ
 LUK	6	13	vep8		ὅτε ἐγένετο ἡμέρα	1	when day came	Alternate translation: “the next morning”
 LUK	6	13	j9w7	writing-pronouns	ἐκλεξάμενος ἀπ’ αὐτῶν δώδεκα	1	he chose 12 from them	The pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “he chose 12 of those disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	6	13	zgh6		οὓς καὶ ἀποστόλους ὠνόμασεν	1	whom he also named apostles	The term **apostles** comes from a Greek word that originally meant “messengers” or “delegates.” It took on a specialized meaning within the community of Jesus’ followers to mean the 12 men whom Jesus chose to be his authoritative representatives. Many languages have borrowed the Greek word to use in this sense. But if your language has developed its own special term for this role, use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he appointed them to be apostles”
-LUK	6	14	l290	translate-names	Σίμωνα&Πέτρον&Ἀνδρέαν&Ἰάκωβον&Ἰωάννην&Φίλιππον&Βαρθολομαῖον	1	Simon … Peter … Andrew … James … John … Philip … Bartholomew	These are seven men’s names. (The second name is a nickname for the first man.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	6	14	l290	translate-names	Σίμωνα & Πέτρον & Ἀνδρέαν & Ἰάκωβον & Ἰωάννην & Φίλιππον & Βαρθολομαῖον	1	Simon … Peter … Andrew … James … John … Philip … Bartholomew	These are seven men’s names. (The second name is a nickname for the first man.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	6	14	zdq3	writing-pronouns	Ἀνδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his brother Andrew	The pronoun **his** refers to Simon. Alternate translation: “Simon’s brother, Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	6	15	l291	translate-names	Μαθθαῖον&Θωμᾶν&Ἰάκωβον Ἁλφαίου&Σίμωνα	1	Matthew … Thomas … James … Alphaeus … Simon	These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	6	15	l291	translate-names	Μαθθαῖον & Θωμᾶν & Ἰάκωβον Ἁλφαίου & Σίμωνα	1	Matthew … Thomas … James … Alphaeus … Simon	These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	6	15	l292	figs-explicit	Μαθθαῖον	1	Matthew	**Matthew** is often identified with the man named Levi whom Jesus calls to follow him in [5:27](../05/27.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	6	15	et48	translate-names	Ζηλωτὴν	1	the Zealot	The term **Zealot** could be: (1) a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	6	16	g24m	figs-explicit	ὃς ἐγένετο προδότης	1	who became a traitor	It may be helpful to explain what **traitor** means in the context of this story. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -881,7 +881,7 @@ LUK	6	17	i5gv	writing-pronouns	μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	with them	In this contex
 LUK	6	17	l295	figs-hyperbole	ἀπὸ πάσης	1	from all	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “from throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	6	18	dpj5	figs-activepassive	ἰαθῆναι	1	to be healed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for Jesus to heal them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	6	18	wfm9	figs-activepassive	καὶ οἱ ἐνοχλούμενοι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων ἐθεραπεύοντο	1	And those who were troubled by unclean spirits were being healed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “Jesus also drove evil spirits out of the people they were controlling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	6	19	l296	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος&πάντας	1	the whole crowd … everyone	In this case these terms are not generalizations, and so you can translate them directly, rather than with explanatory words such as “most” or “many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	6	19	l296	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος & πάντας	1	the whole crowd … everyone	In this case these terms are not generalizations, and so you can translate them directly, rather than with explanatory words such as “most” or “many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	6	19	y2cl	figs-personification	δύναμις παρ’ αὐτοῦ ἐξήρχετο καὶ ἰᾶτο πάντας	1	power was coming out from him and healing everyone	Luke speaks of this **power** as if it were something that could actively come out of Jesus and heal people. Alternate translation: “Jesus was using the power that God gave him to heal everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	6	20	l297	figs-idiom	αὐτὸς ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ	1	he lifted up his eyes	This is an idiom that means “he looked,” but it means that he looked carefully and considerately. Alternate translation: “he gazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	6	20	ymg7	figs-idiom	μακάριοι	1	Blessed are	This expression indicates that God is giving favor to people and that their situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “God will bless” or “How good it is for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -913,18 +913,18 @@ LUK	6	25	l306	figs-hendiadys	πενθήσετε καὶ κλαύσετε	1	mourn
 LUK	6	26	tn96	figs-idiom	οὐαὶ	1	woe to you	See how you translated this phrase in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “How terrible it is for you” or “Trouble will come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	6	26	j9yy	figs-gendernotations	ὅταν ὑμᾶς καλῶς εἴπωσιν πάντες οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1	when all men speak well of you	Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “when all people speak well of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	6	26	l307	figs-hyperbole	ὅταν ὑμᾶς καλῶς εἴπωσιν πάντες οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1	when all men speak well of you	The term **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “when most people speak well of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-LUK	6	26	y29d	figs-metaphor	κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ&ἐποίουν τοῖς ψευδοπροφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν	1	their fathers did according to the same things to the false prophets	Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “their ancestors also spoke well of the false prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	6	26	y29d	figs-metaphor	κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ & ἐποίουν τοῖς ψευδοπροφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν	1	their fathers did according to the same things to the false prophets	Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “their ancestors also spoke well of the false prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	27	l5rz	writing-participants	ἀλλὰ ὑμῖν λέγω τοῖς ἀκούουσιν	1	But I say to you who are listening	Jesus uses this phrase to broaden his audience to the entire crowd, beyond his disciples. At the same time, the phrase also calls everyone to focus their attention on what Jesus is about to say. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Now I want all of you to listen carefully to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	6	27	pz5r	figs-parallelism	ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑμῶν, καλῶς ποιεῖτε τοῖς μισοῦσιν ὑμᾶς	1	love your enemies and do good to those who hate you	These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus is using repetition to emphasize the importance of what he is saying. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase specifies in what way followers of Jesus are to **love** their enemies. They are to do this in a practical way by helping them. Alternate translation: “do good things for people even if they are hostile to you” or “show love to your enemies who hate you by doing things to help them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	6	28	c83m	figs-parallelism	εὐλογεῖτε τοὺς καταρωμένους ὑμᾶς, προσεύχεσθε περὶ τῶν ἐπηρεαζόντων ὑμᾶς	1	Bless those who curse you and pray for those who mistreat you	These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus is using repetition to emphasize the importance of what he is saying. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Instead, you could combine them into a single phrase. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase specifies one way in which followers of Jesus can **Bless** people who mistreat them. They can pray for them. Alternate translation: “Ask God to bless people who say and do bad things to you” or “Say good things to people who say bad things to you, and even if someone treats you badly, pray that God will help them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	6	29	a7ri	figs-hypo	τῷ τύπτοντί σε ἐπὶ τὴν σιαγόνα, πάρεχε καὶ τὴν ἄλλην	1	To the one who strikes you on the cheek, offer also the other	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone hits you on one side of your face. Then turn your face so that he could also strike the other side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	6	29	l308	figs-youcrowd	σε&σου	1	you … your	Even though Jesus is still speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is now addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK	6	29	l308	figs-youcrowd	σε & σου	1	you … your	Even though Jesus is still speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is now addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	6	29	d5qi		ἐπὶ τὴν σιαγόνα	1	on the cheek	Alternate translation: “on one side of your face”
 LUK	6	29	eq83	figs-explicit	πάρεχε καὶ τὴν ἄλλην	1	offer also the other	It may be helpful to state the implicit purpose of this action. Alternate translation: “turn your face so that he could also strike the other side, to show that you do not want to fight and you are not resisting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	6	29	l309	figs-hypo	ἀπὸ τοῦ αἴροντός σου τὸ ἱμάτιον, καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα μὴ κωλύσῃς	1	from the one who takes away your cloak, also do not withhold your tunic	Jesus is using another hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “suppose someone takes away your cloak. Then give him your tunic as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	6	29	ic4n	figs-litotes	καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα μὴ κωλύσῃς	1	also do not withhold your tunic	Here Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “give him your tunic as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 LUK	6	30	d8y6	figs-hypo	παντὶ αἰτοῦντί σε, δίδου	1	Give to everyone who asks you	Jesus is using another hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone asks you for something. Then give it to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	6	30	l310	figs-youcrowd	σε&σὰ	1	you … yours	Even though Jesus is speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is addressing another individual situation here, so **you** and **yours** are singular in this verse. If the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK	6	30	l310	figs-youcrowd	σε & σὰ	1	you … yours	Even though Jesus is speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is addressing another individual situation here, so **you** and **yours** are singular in this verse. If the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	6	30	ts8c	figs-hypo	ἀπὸ τοῦ αἴροντος τὰ σὰ, μὴ ἀπαίτει	1	from the one who takes away what is yours, do not ask for it back	Jesus is using another hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “suppose someone takes away something that is yours. Then do not demand that he give it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	6	31	te6e		καθὼς θέλετε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς ὁμοίως	1	as you desire that men would do to you, do the same to them	In some languages it might be more natural to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You should treat people in the way that you would want them to treat you”
 LUK	6	31	l311	figs-gendernotations	καθὼς θέλετε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1	as you desire that men would do to you	Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “what you wish people would do for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -953,7 +953,7 @@ LUK	6	38	ryf8	figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	it will be give
 LUK	6	38	q8sq	figs-metaphor	μέτρον καλὸν, πεπιεσμένον σεσαλευμένον ὑπερεκχυννόμενον, δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν	1	a good measure—pressed down, shaken together, spilling over—they will pour into your lap	Jesus is comparing someone to a grain merchant who measures out very generously. He could mean either God or other people. The word **they** is indefinite, so it does not necessarily refer to people rather than to God. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Like a generous grain merchant who presses down the grain and shakes it together and pours in so much that it fills a container and spills over, God will give you a generous amount” or “Like a generous grain merchant who presses down the grain and shakes it together and pours in so much that it fills a container and spills over, people will give you a generous amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	38	l320	figs-activepassive	πεπιεσμένον σεσαλευμένον ὑπερεκχυννόμενον, δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν	1	pressed down, shaken together, spilling over—they will pour into your lap	These are all passive verb forms in Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate them with active verbal phrases. See the alternate translation in the previous note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	6	38	l321	translate-unknown	τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν	1	your lap	This is a reference to the way people in this culture would form a pocket or carrying pouch from the folds of the front of their robes. If you readers would not be familiar with this practice, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the folds of your robe” or “a container” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	6	38	fp26	figs-activepassive	ᾧ&μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἀντιμετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	with the measure by which you measure, it will be measured back to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will measure. This could mean: (1) “God will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others.” (2) “people will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	6	38	fp26	figs-activepassive	ᾧ & μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἀντιμετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	with the measure by which you measure, it will be measured back to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will measure. This could mean: (1) “God will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others.” (2) “people will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	6	39	bw7f	figs-parables	εἶπεν δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς	1	Then he also told them a parable	Jesus is giving a brief illustration that teaches something true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then he gave them this illustration to help them understand better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	6	39	l322	figs-gendernotations	μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν?	1	A blind man is not able to guide a blind man, is he?	Here the word translated **blind man** is masculine, but Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “Can one person who is blind guide another person who is blind?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	6	39	l323	figs-doublenegatives	μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν?	1	A blind man is not able to guide a blind man, is he?	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Can one person who is blind really guide another person who is blind?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -962,15 +962,15 @@ LUK	6	39	nm4v	figs-metaphor	τυφλὸς	1	blind man	The **blind** person repre
 LUK	6	39	f4xj	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον ἐμπεσοῦνται?	1	Would not both fall into a pit?	Jesus is using this question as well as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Both of them would certainly fall into a ditch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	6	40	ipr9	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον	1	A disciple is not above his teacher	The word **above** creates a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “A disciple is not better than his teacher” or “A disciple is not greater than his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	40	l324	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον	1	A disciple is not above his teacher	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what this implicitly means. Alternate translation: “A disciple does not know more than his teacher” or “A disciple is not wiser than his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	6	40	a6ym	figs-activepassive	κατηρτισμένος&πᾶς	1	everyone having been fully trained	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “every disciple whose teacher has fully taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	6	41	l7vj	figs-rquestion	τί&βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς?	1	why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother, but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye?	Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not look at the speck in your brother’s eye while ignoring the log in your own eye!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-LUK	6	41	jpt3	figs-metaphor	τί&βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother	This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “you should not criticize the less important faults of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	6	41	l325	figs-youcrowd	βλέπεις&σου&τῷ ἰδίῳ&οὐ κατανοεῖς	1	you look … your … you do not notice … your own	Even though Jesus is still speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation here, so **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK	6	40	a6ym	figs-activepassive	κατηρτισμένος & πᾶς	1	everyone having been fully trained	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “every disciple whose teacher has fully taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	6	41	l7vj	figs-rquestion	τί & βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς?	1	why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother, but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye?	Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not look at the speck in your brother’s eye while ignoring the log in your own eye!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+LUK	6	41	jpt3	figs-metaphor	τί & βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother	This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “you should not criticize the less important faults of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	6	41	l325	figs-youcrowd	βλέπεις & σου & τῷ ἰδίῳ & οὐ κατανοεῖς	1	you look … your … you do not notice … your own	Even though Jesus is still speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation here, so **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	6	41	j1r5	translate-unknown	τὸ κάρφος	1	the speck of wood	If your readers would not be familiar with **the speck of wood**, in your translation you could use a phrase that describes the smallest thing that commonly falls into a person’s eyes in your culture, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the grain of sand” or “the tiny object” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	6	41	ud6q	figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	of your brother	The term **brother** refers to a fellow believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	41	l326	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	your brother	This fellow believer could be either a man or a woman, so be sure that this is clear in your translation, for example, by using both the masculine and feminine forms of the word for “believer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	6	41	ssu3	figs-metaphor	τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς	1	but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye	This phrase is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “while ignoring your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	6	41	l327	figs-hyperbole	τὴν&δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ	1	the log that is in your own eye	A **log** could not literally go into a person’s eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize his point and make it memorable. Alternate translation: “your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	6	41	l327	figs-hyperbole	τὴν & δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ	1	the log that is in your own eye	A **log** could not literally go into a person’s eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize his point and make it memorable. Alternate translation: “your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	6	41	h9a4	translate-unknown	δοκὸν	1	the log	You could translate this with the term for the kind of long, large piece of **wood** that people in your culture would encounter. Or if your readers would not be familiar with **wood**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “beam” or “plank” or “large object” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	6	42	l345	figs-youcrowd	πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου	1	How can you say to your brother	Jesus is speaking to his disciples and the crowd, but he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular here. (The terms **you**, **your**, and **yourself** are also singular throughout the rest of this verse, because either Jesus is addressing an individual situation, or one person is addressing another in fictional dialogue.) If the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	6	42	rkk6	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν	1	How can you say	Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool, not to ask for information. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -983,8 +983,8 @@ LUK	6	42	l332	figs-metaphor	τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμ
 LUK	6	43	ezb4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For	Jesus uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for what he said in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	6	43	u159	figs-litotes	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν δένδρον καλὸν ποιοῦν καρπὸν σαπρόν; οὐδὲ πάλιν δένδρον σαπρὸν ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλόν	1	For there is no good tree that produces rotten fruit, nor, on the other hand, any rotten tree that produces good fruit	Jesus is twice using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “For a healthy tree naturally produces good fruit and, on the other hand, an unhealthy tree naturally produces bad fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 LUK	6	43	pi3u	figs-metaphor	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν δένδρον καλὸν ποιοῦν καρπὸν σαπρόν; οὐδὲ πάλιν δένδρον σαπρὸν ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλόν	1	For there is no good tree that produces rotten fruit, nor, on the other hand, any rotten tree that produces good fruit	This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “For a person of good character naturally says and does helpful things but, on the other hand, a person of bad character naturally says and does harmful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	6	44	z1vz	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστον&δένδρον ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται	1	each tree is known by its own fruit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “people recognize a tree by the fruit that it bears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	6	44	l335	figs-metaphor	ἕκαστον&δένδρον ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται	1	each tree is known by its own fruit	This phrase is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “each person’s words and actions reveal his or her character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	6	44	z1vz	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστον & δένδρον ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται	1	each tree is known by its own fruit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “people recognize a tree by the fruit that it bears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	6	44	l335	figs-metaphor	ἕκαστον & δένδρον ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται	1	each tree is known by its own fruit	This phrase is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “each person’s words and actions reveal his or her character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	44	l336	figs-parallelism	οὐ γὰρ ἐξ ἀκανθῶν συλλέγουσιν σῦκα, οὐδὲ ἐκ βάτου σταφυλὴν τρυγῶσιν	1	they do not gather figs from a thornbush, nor do they gather grapes from a briar bush	These two phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis and to capture the interest of his listeners. You do not need to put both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Instead, you could combine them into a single general expression. Alternate translation: “people do not collect the kind of fruit that grows on a tree or a vine from a small, thorny bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	6	44	ns81	translate-unknown	ἀκανθῶν	1	a thornbush	The word **thornbush** refers to a kind of plant that has sharp protective spines on its stem. If your readers would not know what a **thornbush** is, in your translation you could use the name of another plant that does not produce edible fruit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	6	44	ux87	translate-unknown	βάτου	1	a briar bush	The term **briar bush** refers to a kind of plant that has thorny stems growing in dense clusters. If your readers would not know what a **briar bush** is, in your translation you could use the name of another plant that does not produce edible fruit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -994,8 +994,8 @@ LUK	6	45	i93l	figs-metaphor	τῆς καρδίας	1	of his heart	In this expres
 LUK	6	45	gpn9	figs-metaphor	προφέρει τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	produces what is good	Producing what is **good**, the way a tree would produce fruit, is a metaphor for doing what is good. Alternate translation: “does what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	6	45	l337	figs-ellipsis	ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	from evil	For rhetorical purposes, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning can be inferred from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “from the evil treasure of his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	6	45	y2cj	figs-metaphor	ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	from evil	Once the meaning is inferred, it is clear that Jesus is speaking of the **evil** thoughts of a wicked person as if they were treasures stored deep inside that person, and of the **heart** to represent the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “from the evil things that he keeps deep inside himself” or “from the evil things that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	6	45	l338	figs-metaphor	ἐκ&περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	3	out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks	In this expression as well, the **heart** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling is expressed in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	6	45	jc6z	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ&περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	3	out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks	The phrase **his mouth** represents the person as a whole, in the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling comes out in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+LUK	6	45	l338	figs-metaphor	ἐκ & περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	3	out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks	In this expression as well, the **heart** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling is expressed in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	6	45	jc6z	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ & περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	3	out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks	The phrase **his mouth** represents the person as a whole, in the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling comes out in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	6	46	a4av		τί δέ με καλεῖτε Κύριε, Κύριε, καὶ οὐ ποιεῖτε ἃ λέγω?	1	And why do you call me, ‘Lord, Lord,’ but not do what I say?	The repetition of these words indicates that these people regularly called Jesus **Lord**. Alternate translation: “And why are you always calling me ‘Lord’ when you do not do what I tell you?’”
 LUK	6	47	wwu5		πᾶς ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρός με, καὶ ἀκούων μου τῶν λόγων καὶ ποιῶν αὐτούς, ὑποδείξω ὑμῖν τίνι ἐστὶν ὅμοιος	1	Everyone who is coming to me and hearing my words, and doing them, I will show you what he is like	If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the last phrase to the beginning of the verse. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what every person is like who comes to me and hears my words and puts them into practice”
 LUK	6	47	l339	figs-metonymy	μου τῶν λόγων	1	my words	Jesus uses the term **words** to refer to the teachings he is giving by using words. Alternate translation: “my teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1009,7 +1009,7 @@ LUK	6	48	d3gs		προσέρηξεν	1	flowed against	Alternate translation: “c
 LUK	6	48	h75u	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἴσχυσεν σαλεῦσαι αὐτὴν	1	could not shake it	Jesus is describing what the waters would do at first to represent what they would ultimately do if they could. This meaning is clear from what he says in the next verse. Alternate translation: “it could not destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	6	48	tu5j	figs-activepassive	διὰ τὸ καλῶς οἰκοδομῆσθαι αὐτήν	1	because it had been built well	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “because the person had built it well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	6	49	sjf5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Jesus uses the word **But** to draw a strong contrast to the previous person who built with a foundation. Alternate translation: “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-LUK	6	49	l347	figs-ellipsis	ὁ&ἀκούσας καὶ μὴ ποιήσας	1	the one who hears and does not do	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from [6:47](../06/47.md). Alternate translation: “anyone who hears my teachings but does not put them into practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+LUK	6	49	l347	figs-ellipsis	ὁ & ἀκούσας καὶ μὴ ποιήσας	1	the one who hears and does not do	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from [6:47](../06/47.md). Alternate translation: “anyone who hears my teachings but does not put them into practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	6	49	wg4w	figs-simile	ὅμοιός ἐστιν	1	he is like	Jesus says this to introduce the simile that follows in the rest of the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 LUK	6	49	l342	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδομήσαντι οἰκίαν	1	a man who built a house	Here Jesus is using **man** in the generic sense. Alternate translation: “a person who built a house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	6	49	yu5r	translate-unknown	ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν χωρὶς θεμελίου	1	on the ground without a foundation	The phrase **on the ground without a foundation** refers to the same method of building as in [6:48](../06/48.md). You could describe this more fully in your translation. Alternatively, if the people of your culture would not be familiar with that building method, you could use the same image for creating a stable building that you used there in your translation. Alternate translation: “without digging down first to create a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1028,12 +1028,12 @@ LUK	7	4	y6vt	writing-pronouns	ἄξιός ἐστιν	1	He is worthy	Here the pr
 LUK	7	5	cny7	figs-exclusive	τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν	1	our nation	Here, **our nation** refers to the Jewish people. Since the elders are speaking to Jesus as a fellow Jew, the word **our** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. Alternate translation: “our people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	7	6	l350	grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	And	Here, **And** could mean: (1) Jesus went with the elders because they pleaded with him. Alternate translation, as in UST: “So” (2) Jesus went with the elders after they pleaded with him. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	7	6	s5xg		ἐπορεύετο	1	went on his way	Alternate translation: “went along”
-LUK	7	6	el4w	figs-litotes	ἤδη&αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας	1	when he was … not far away from the house	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “when he was already near the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+LUK	7	6	el4w	figs-litotes	ἤδη & αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας	1	when he was … not far away from the house	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “when he was already near the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 LUK	7	6	i6kv		μὴ σκύλλου	1	do not trouble yourself	The centurion is speaking politely to Jesus through these friends. Alternate translation: “I do not want to make you go out of your way”
 LUK	7	6	ez29	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς	1	that you would come under my roof	The phrase **come under my roof** is an idiom that means “come into my house.” If your language has an idiom that means “come into my dwelling,” consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	7	7	m9ue	figs-metonymy	εἰπὲ λόγῳ	1	speak with a word	The centurion recognized that Jesus could heal the servant just by speaking. He understood Jesus did not need to travel all the way to his home. The term **word** expresses the means by which Jesus would speak. Alternate translation: “just give a command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	7	7	m6v8		ὁ παῖς μου	1	my servant	This is not the same word for **servant** that Luke and the centurion use in the rest of this passage. This word ordinarily means “boy.” This may indicate that the servant was young, or it may show the centurion’s affection for him. Alternate translation: “my young servant” or “my dear servant”
-LUK	7	8	tkd5	figs-activepassive	καὶ&ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός εἰμι ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος, ἔχων ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας	1	I also am a man placed under authority, having soldiers under me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I also have someone in authority over me, and I have soldiers under me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	7	8	tkd5	figs-activepassive	καὶ & ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός εἰμι ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος, ἔχων ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας	1	I also am a man placed under authority, having soldiers under me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I also have someone in authority over me, and I have soldiers under me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	8	q2ep	figs-metaphor	ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν	1	under me	This is a spatial metaphor that describes the authority relationship. Alternate translation: “under my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	7	8	mdd5		τῷ δούλῳ μου	1	my servant	Here the word that ULT translates as **servant** is the typical word for a servant, as in [7:2](../07/02.md) and [7:3](../07/03.md). It is not the word that usually means “boy,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md).
 LUK	7	9	tpz9	writing-pronouns	ἐθαύμασεν αὐτόν	1	he marveled at him	The pronoun **him** refers to the centurion. Alternate translation: “he was amazed at the centurion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1058,11 +1058,11 @@ LUK	7	14	quy9	translate-unknown	τῆς σοροῦ	1	the bier	The **bier** was
 LUK	7	14	lex4	figs-imperative	ἐγέρθητι	1	arise	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “your life is restored, so get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	7	15	er34		ὁ νεκρὸς	1	the dead man	The man was not still **dead**. He was now alive. It may be helpful to state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he man came back to life, no longer being dead, and”
 LUK	7	15	l360	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν τῇ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	he gave him to his mother	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, and **him** and **his** refer to the young man. Alternate translation: “Jesus returned the young man to his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	7	16	rf1k	figs-personification	ἔλαβεν&φόβος πάντας	1	fear seized all of them	Luke speaks of this **fear** as if it were something that could actively take hold of everyone in the crowd. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	7	16	rf1k	figs-personification	ἔλαβεν & φόβος πάντας	1	fear seized all of them	Luke speaks of this **fear** as if it were something that could actively take hold of everyone in the crowd. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	7	16	l361	figs-idiom	προφήτης μέγας ἠγέρθη ἐν ἡμῖν	1	A great prophet has been raised among us	Here, **raised** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “God has caused one of us to become a great prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	7	16	jf1j	figs-activepassive	προφήτης μέγας ἠγέρθη ἐν ἡμῖν	1	A great prophet has been raised among us	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has caused one of us to become a great prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	16	wn5b	figs-idiom	ἐπεσκέψατο	1	God has visited his people	Here, **visited** is an idiom, as in [1:68](../01/68.md) and [1:78](../01/78.md). Alternate translation: “has come to help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	7	17	g4zt	figs-personification	ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος οὗτος&περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	this word about him went out	Luke speaks of this **word** (that is, those sayings) as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. His expression means that people said these things about Jesus to other people, and those people then repeated them to still more people. Alternate translation: “people spread these sayings about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	7	17	g4zt	figs-personification	ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος οὗτος & περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	this word about him went out	Luke speaks of this **word** (that is, those sayings) as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. His expression means that people said these things about Jesus to other people, and those people then repeated them to still more people. Alternate translation: “people spread these sayings about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	7	18	r11g	writing-newevent	ἀπήγγειλαν Ἰωάννῃ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ πάντων τούτων	1	his disciples reported to John concerning all these things	This sentence introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John told him about all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	7	18	r11x	writing-newevent	οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his disciples	The term **his** refers to John the Baptist, not to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	7	18	l362	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννῃ	1	John	Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to **John** the Baptist. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1080,10 +1080,10 @@ LUK	7	21	a7sm	figs-ellipsis	ἐθεράπευσεν πολλοὺς ἀπὸ ν
 LUK	7	21	l370	figs-hendiadys	νόσων, καὶ μαστίγων	1	sicknesses and afflictions	The phrase **sicknesses and afflictions** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **afflictions** describes the effect of the **sicknesses** on the people who had them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “sicknesses that they were suffering from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	7	21	l371		τυφλοῖς πολλοῖς ἐχαρίσατο βλέπειν	1	to many blind people he granted to see	Alternate translation: “he enabled many blind people to see again”
 LUK	7	22	lcm2	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς	1	answering he said to them	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that after healing and delivering many people, Jesus responded to the question that John’s messengers had asked him. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded to the messengers whom John had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-LUK	7	22	l372	figs-youdual	πορευθέντες&εἴδετε	1	you have gone … you have seen	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, **you** would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, the word would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-LUK	7	22	fvz7	figs-activepassive	λεπροὶ καθαρίζονται&νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται, πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζονται	1	lepers are being cleansed … the dead are being raised back to life, the poor are being told the gospel	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express all of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “people who had leprosy no longer have that disease … people who were dead are coming back to life, poor people are hearing the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	7	22	l372	figs-youdual	πορευθέντες & εἴδετε	1	you have gone … you have seen	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, **you** would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, the word would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+LUK	7	22	fvz7	figs-activepassive	λεπροὶ καθαρίζονται & νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται, πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζονται	1	lepers are being cleansed … the dead are being raised back to life, the poor are being told the gospel	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express all of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “people who had leprosy no longer have that disease … people who were dead are coming back to life, poor people are hearing the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	22	l373	figs-explicit	λεπροὶ καθαρίζονται	1	lepers are being cleansed	As in [5:12](../05/12.md), since the lepers were unclean because of their leprosy, the implication is that Jesus healed them from the disease. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “people who had leprosy no longer have that disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	7	22	qbe3	figs-nominaladj	κωφοὶ&νεκροὶ&πτωχοὶ	1	the deaf … the dead … the poor	Luke is using these adjectives as nouns. If your language does not use adjectives that way, you can translate them with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who were deaf … people who were dead … poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	7	22	qbe3	figs-nominaladj	κωφοὶ & νεκροὶ & πτωχοὶ	1	the deaf … the dead … the poor	Luke is using these adjectives as nouns. If your language does not use adjectives that way, you can translate them with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who were deaf … people who were dead … poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	7	23	y4px	figs-activepassive	μακάριός ἐστιν ὃς ἐὰν μὴ σκανδαλισθῇ ἐν ἐμοί	1	blessed is anyone who is not offended by me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God will bless the person who always continues to trust me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	23	i7zh	figs-litotes	μὴ σκανδαλισθῇ ἐν ἐμοί	1	who is not offended by me	Here Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “who continues to trust me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 LUK	7	24	abcd	writing-pronouns	ἤρξατο λέγειν	1	he began to say	Here the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus began to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1102,13 +1102,13 @@ LUK	7	26	r7ud	figs-idiom	περισσότερον προφήτου	1	more than a
 LUK	7	27	cg3r	figs-activepassive	οὗτός ἐστιν περὶ οὗ γέγραπται	1	This is he concerning whom it is written	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “This is the one about whom one of the prophets wrote” or “John is the one about whom the prophet Malachi wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	27	wt2m	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	God, speaking through the prophet Malachi, uses the term **Behold** to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Now pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	7	27	s8hg	figs-metaphor	πρὸ προσώπου σου	1	before your face	Here, **face** means the front of a person. Alternate translation, as in UST: “ahead of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	7	27	cc5u	figs-you	σου&σου	1	your … you	The words **your** and **you** are singular in both cases because God is speaking to the Messiah individually in the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	7	27	cc5u	figs-you	σου & σου	1	your … you	The words **your** and **you** are singular in both cases because God is speaking to the Messiah individually in the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	7	27	l378	figs-metaphor	ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου ἔμπροσθέν σου	1	who will prepare your way before you	As in [3:4](../03/04.md), to make a **way** or a road is a figurative expression that means to help people get ready for the coming of the Messiah. Alternate translation: “who will help people get ready for you to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	7	28	yz6b		λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus uses this phrase to focus the crowd’s attention on what he will say next. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully”
 LUK	7	28	rr11	figs-idiom	ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν	1	among those born of women	The phrase **those born of women** is an idiom that refers to all people. Alternate translation: “of all the people who have ever lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	7	28	hfqf	figs-activepassive	ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν	1	among those born of women	If you would like to retain the idiom but your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “among those whom women have borne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	7	28	gfz7	figs-litotes	μείζων&Ἰωάννου οὐδείς ἐστιν	1	no one is greater than John	Here Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative term together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “John is the greatest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-LUK	7	28	c33u	figs-nominaladj	ὁ&μικρότερος	1	the least	Jesus is using the adjective **least** as a noun in order to indicate a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the least important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	7	28	gfz7	figs-litotes	μείζων & Ἰωάννου οὐδείς ἐστιν	1	no one is greater than John	Here Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative term together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “John is the greatest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+LUK	7	28	c33u	figs-nominaladj	ὁ & μικρότερος	1	the least	Jesus is using the adjective **least** as a noun in order to indicate a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the least important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	7	28	l379	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	in the kingdom of God	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “whose life God is ruling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	7	28	r81b	figs-explicit	μείζων αὐτοῦ ἐστιν	1	is greater than he	The implication is that being part of the kingdom of God is greater than any human distinctive. So anyone who is part of God’s kingdom is greater than even John, whom Jesus said was the greatest person who had ever lived before the coming of the kingdom. Alternate translation: “is greater than John is because they are part of something greater than anything that is human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	7	29	idv8	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐδικαίωσαν τὸν Θεόν, βαπτισθέντες τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	declared God to be righteous, having been baptized with the baptism of John	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because they had come to John for baptism, declared God to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1132,12 +1132,12 @@ LUK	7	34	l382	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son o
 LUK	7	34	s1um	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγετε, ἰδοὺ, ἄνθρωπος φάγος καὶ οἰνοπότης, φίλος τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν	1	you say, ‘Behold, a man, a glutton and a drunkard, a friend of tax collectors and of sinners!’	Luke is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting what the Pharisees were saying about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that he eats and drinks too much and that he is a friend of tax collectors and sinners” or (if you used the first person for the title “Son of Man”) “you say that I eat and drink too much and that I am a friend of tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	7	34	l383	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Now this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	7	34	am9s		ἄνθρωπος φάγος	1	a man, a glutton	Alternate translation: “a man who is a glutton” or “a man who eats too much”
-LUK	7	34	chu4		ἄνθρωπος&οἰνοπότης	1	a man, … a drunkard	Alternate translation: “a man who is a drunkard” or “a man who drinks too much alcohol”
+LUK	7	34	chu4		ἄνθρωπος & οἰνοπότης	1	a man, … a drunkard	Alternate translation: “a man who is a drunkard” or “a man who drinks too much alcohol”
 LUK	7	35	ba4g	writing-proverbs	ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1	wisdom is justified by all her children	This appears to be a proverb, a short popular saying of the culture, that Jesus applied to this situation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the saying is true that wisdom is justified by all her children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
 LUK	7	35	l384	figs-idiom	ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1	wisdom is justified by all her children	This proverb likely uses a Hebrew idiom in which the “sons” or **children** of a thing share its qualities. Alternate translation: “wisdom is justified by people who are wise themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	7	35	l385	figs-activepassive	ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1	wisdom is justified by all her children	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “wise people recognize when someone else is following a wise course” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	36	fd2c	writing-newevent	ἠρώτα δέ τις αὐτὸν τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἵνα φάγῃ μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Then one of the Pharisees requested him to eat with him	This phrase introduces a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-LUK	7	36	lhd4	writing-participants	τις&τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	one of the Pharisees	This phrase also introduces the Pharisee into the story. In [7:40](../07/40.md), Jesus addresses him as Simon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give his name here, as UST does. Alternate translation: “a Pharisee named Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	7	36	lhd4	writing-participants	τις & τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	one of the Pharisees	This phrase also introduces the Pharisee into the story. In [7:40](../07/40.md), Jesus addresses him as Simon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give his name here, as UST does. Alternate translation: “a Pharisee named Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	7	36	dy31	translate-unknown	κατεκλίθη	1	he reclined to eat	See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). It was the custom in this culture for dinner guests to eat while lying comfortably around the table on banqueting couches. Alternate translation: “he took his place at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	7	37	l386	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	7	37	a9iu	writing-participants	γυνὴ ἥτις ἦν ἐν τῇ πόλει	1	there was a woman in the city	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was woman who lived in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ LUK	7	44	s7g6	translate-symaction	στραφεὶς πρὸς τὴν γυνα
 LUK	7	44	l395	figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτην τὴν γυναῖκα?	1	Do you see this woman?	Jesus does not expect Simon to tell him whether he can **see** the **woman**. Rather, he is using the question as a teaching tool, to focus Simon’s attention on her as an example of showing love and gratitude. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I want you to consider this woman.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	7	44	mw7d	figs-explicit	ὕδωρ μοι ἐπὶ πόδας οὐκ ἔδωκας	1	You did not give me water for my feet	It was a basic responsibility of a host to provide **water** and a towel for guests to wash and dry their **feet** after walking on dusty roads. Alternate translation: “You did not provide me with anything to wash my feet, as a considerate host would have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	7	44	mw58	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὐκ ἔδωκας; αὕτη δὲ	1	You did not give … but she	In this verse and the next two verses, Jesus uses such phrases to contrast Simon’s lack of courtesy with the woman’s extreme actions of gratitude. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-LUK	7	44	am5z	figs-explicit	αὕτη&τοῖς δάκρυσιν ἔβρεξέν μου τοὺς πόδας	1	she has wet my feet with her tears	The woman used **her tears** in place of the missing water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she has wet my feet with her tears in place of the water you did not provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	7	44	am5z	figs-explicit	αὕτη & τοῖς δάκρυσιν ἔβρεξέν μου τοὺς πόδας	1	she has wet my feet with her tears	The woman used **her tears** in place of the missing water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she has wet my feet with her tears in place of the water you did not provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	7	44	ld62	figs-explicit	καὶ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς ἐξέμαξεν	1	and wiped them with her hair	The woman used **her hair** in place of the missing towel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and she has dried my feet with her hair in place of the towel you did not provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	7	45	xj92	figs-explicit	φίλημά μοι οὐκ ἔδωκας	1	You did not give me a kiss	It was customary in this culture for a host to greet a guest with a **kiss** on the cheek. Simon did not do this for Jesus. Alternate translation: “You did not greet me with a kiss on the cheek, as a welcoming host would have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	7	45	r2jj	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ διέλιπεν καταφιλοῦσά μου τοὺς πόδας	1	has not stopped kissing my feet	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stopped**. Alternate translation: “has continued to kiss my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ LUK	7	47	clu2	figs-activepassive	ἀφέωνται αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αὐ
 LUK	7	47	l396	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἠγάπησεν πολύ	1	for she loved much	The implication is that her display of love was the evidence that her sins were forgiven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “We can tell this because she has shown that she greatly loves the one who forgave her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	7	47	jql4		ὅτι ἠγάπησεν πολύ	1	for she loved much	Your language may require you to state the object of **loved**. Alternate translation: “because she greatly loves the one who forgave her”
 LUK	7	47	qd9q	figs-explicit	ᾧ δὲ ὀλίγον ἀφίεται, ὀλίγον ἀγαπᾷ	1	the one to whom little is forgiven loves little	In this sentence Jesus states a general principle. However, he is saying implicitly that Simon specifically has shown very little love for him. A further implication is that **one to whom little is forgiven** is actually someone who thinks he is better than others and mistakenly thinks he does not need to be forgiven for very much. Alternate translation: “a person like you who thinks that God has only had to forgive him for a few things does not show much love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	7	47	l397	figs-activepassive	ᾧ&ὀλίγον ἀφίεται	1	the one to whom little is forgiven	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “the person who thinks that God has only had to forgive him for a few things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	7	47	l397	figs-activepassive	ᾧ & ὀλίγον ἀφίεται	1	the one to whom little is forgiven	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “the person who thinks that God has only had to forgive him for a few things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	48	c7hj	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῇ	1	Then he said to her	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to Simon. The word **her** refers to the woman. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said to the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	7	48	lq5v	figs-activepassive	ἀφέωνταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	Your sins are forgiven	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	7	49	enw4		συνανακείμενοι	1	reclining with him to eat	Alternate translation: “who were eating together with him”
@@ -1199,8 +1199,8 @@ LUK	8	1	l403	translate-names	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	Alternatively, even
 LUK	8	2	g99l	figs-activepassive	αἳ ἦσαν τεθεραπευμέναι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν καὶ ἀσθενειῶν	1	who had been healed from evil spirits and diseases	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus had set free from evil spirits and healed of diseases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	2	n4x6	figs-activepassive	Μαρία ἡ καλουμένη Μαγδαληνή	1	Mary who was called Magdalene	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Mary, who people called Magdalene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	2	l404	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἧς δαιμόνια ἑπτὰ ἐξεληλύθει	1	from whom seven demons had gone out	The **demons** did not go **out** on their own. It may be helpful to say explicitly that Jesus drove them out. Alternate translation: “from whom Jesus had driven out seven demons” or “whom Jesus had set free from seven demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	8	3	tfz5	translate-names	Ἰωάννα&Σουσάννα	1	Joanna … Susanna	**Joanna** and **Susanna** are the names of two women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	8	3	w9kl	translate-names	Χουζᾶ&Ἡρῴδου	1	Chuza … Herod	**Chuza** and **Herod** are the names of two men. See how you translated the name Herod in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	8	3	tfz5	translate-names	Ἰωάννα & Σουσάννα	1	Joanna … Susanna	**Joanna** and **Susanna** are the names of two women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	8	3	w9kl	translate-names	Χουζᾶ & Ἡρῴδου	1	Chuza … Herod	**Chuza** and **Herod** are the names of two men. See how you translated the name Herod in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	8	3	l405		ἐπιτρόπου Ἡρῴδου	1	Herod’s manager	Alternate translation: “the man who managed King Herod’s household affairs”
 LUK	8	3	k9m5	figs-idiom	διηκόνουν αὐτοῖς	1	serving them out of their possessions	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “were personally providing what Jesus and his 12 apostles needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	8	4	r1qk	writing-pronouns	ἐπιπορευομένων πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	coming to him	Here the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “coming to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ LUK	8	10	xtu6		βλέποντες μὴ βλέπωσιν	1	Seeing, they may not
 LUK	8	10	k4es		ἀκούοντες μὴ συνιῶσιν	1	hearing, they may not understand	Some languages may need to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “though they hear instruction, they will not understand the truth”
 LUK	8	11	vp8a		ἔστιν δὲ αὕτη ἡ παραβολή	1	the parable is this	Alternate translation: “this is what the story means”
 LUK	8	11	hb1t	figs-metonymy	ὁ σπόρος ἐστὶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The seed is the word of God	Jesus uses the term **word** to refer to the message from God that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “The seed represents the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	8	12	xsa7	figs-metaphor	οἱ&παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν εἰσιν οἱ ἀκούσαντες	1	the ones along the path are those who have heard	Jesus begins to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “The seeds that fell along the path represent people who hear the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	8	12	xsa7	figs-metaphor	οἱ & παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν εἰσιν οἱ ἀκούσαντες	1	the ones along the path are those who have heard	Jesus begins to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “The seeds that fell along the path represent people who hear the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	8	12	h969	figs-metaphor	εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts	The parable represented this as a bird snatching away seeds. Try to use words in your language that retain that image. Alternate translation: “but then the devil comes and snatches the message away from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	8	12	jb9t	figs-metaphor	εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts	The word **hearts** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “the devil comes and keeps them from understanding and appreciating the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	8	12	l413	figs-explicit	εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts	Based on the figurative meaning of the parable, the implication is that these people did not appreciate the message deeply, just as seeds could not go down deep into the hard-packed soil of the path. And so the devil would be able to break up their superficial awareness and concentration by distracting them with everyday concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the devil distracts them and they forget about the message they heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ LUK	8	13	l415	figs-metonymy	μετὰ χαρᾶς δέχονται τὸν λό
 LUK	8	13	bm51		ἐν καιρῷ πειρασμοῦ	1	in a time of testing	Alternate translation: “when they experience hardship”
 LUK	8	13	e5rw	figs-metonymy	ἀφίστανται	1	they go away	Jesus is using the way such people **go away** from the community of believers to mean that they stop believing. Alternate translation: “they stop believing” or “they stop being disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	8	14	k4u4	figs-metaphor	τὸ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας πεσόν, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ	1	And the ones that fell among the thorns, these are the ones	Jesus continues to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “In the parable, the seeds that fell among the thorns represent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	8	14	y3ue	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ μεριμνῶν, καὶ πλούτου, καὶ ἡδονῶν τοῦ βίου&συνπνίγονται	1	they are choked by cares and riches and pleasures of this life	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the cares and riches and pleasures of this life choke them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	8	14	y3ue	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ μεριμνῶν, καὶ πλούτου, καὶ ἡδονῶν τοῦ βίου & συνπνίγονται	1	they are choked by cares and riches and pleasures of this life	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the cares and riches and pleasures of this life choke them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	14	uut6		μεριμνῶν	1	cares	Alternate translation: “things that people worry about”
 LUK	8	14	b384		ἡδονῶν τοῦ βίου	1	pleasures of this life	Alternate translation: “the things in this life that people enjoy”
 LUK	8	14	xhv7	figs-metaphor	οὐ τελεσφοροῦσιν	1	they do not produce mature fruit	The phrase **mature fruit** means spiritual maturity that is evidenced by godly character and loving actions. Alternate translation: “they do not mature into people of godly character who act out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1251,19 +1251,19 @@ LUK	8	15	pbi7	figs-metaphor	ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ	1
 LUK	8	15	i51s	figs-metaphor	καρποφοροῦσιν ἐν ὑπομονῇ	1	bear fruit with endurance	Here, **fruit** means spiritual maturity that is evidenced by godly character and loving actions. Alternate translation: “because they persevere, they mature into people of godly character who act out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	8	16	n86n	figs-parables	οὐδεὶς δὲ λύχνον ἅψας	1	And no one lights a lamp	After Jesus finished explaining the story about the seeds, he gave his disciples another example to illustrate that God wants them to understand spiritual truths. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave them another example. ‘No one lights a lamp’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	8	16	l417	figs-ellipsis	οἱ εἰσπορευόμενοι	1	those who enter	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “those who enter the room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	8	17	n5ca	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ&ἐστιν κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ φανερὸν γενήσεται	1	nothing is hidden that will not become visible	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything that is hidden will become visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+LUK	8	17	n5ca	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ φανερὸν γενήσεται	1	nothing is hidden that will not become visible	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything that is hidden will become visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	8	17	iv9q	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον ὃ οὐ μὴ γνωσθῇ καὶ εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθῃ	1	nor secret that will not be known and come into visibility	If it would be helpful in your language, you could also translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and everything that is secret will be known and become visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	8	17	l418	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον ὃ οὐ μὴ γνωσθῇ καὶ εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθῃ	1	nor secret that will not be known and come into visibility	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “and God will reveal every secret and make it visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	17	l419	figs-doublet	οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον ὃ οὐ μὴ γνωσθῇ καὶ εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθῃ	1	nor secret that will not be known and come into visibility	The phrases **be known** and **come into visibility** mean similar things. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and God will clearly reveal every secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	8	18	l420		βλέπετε οὖν πῶς ἀκούετε	1	so be careful how you listen	The phrase **be careful** does not mean that listening is dangerous. Rather, it means that people should listen carefully, because, as Jesus has just said, God wants to reveal spiritual secrets. Alternate translation: “so make sure that you listen well” or “so listen carefully and reflect on what you hear”
-LUK	8	18	l421	figs-explicit	ὃς ἂν&ἔχῃ, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	whoever has, it will be given to him	The implication in context is that the phrase **whoever has, it will be given to him** refers to understanding and believing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever seeks sincerely to understand will be given more understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	8	18	bq9f	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἂν&ἔχῃ, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	whoever has, it will be given to him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whoever seeks sincerely to understand will understand better” or “God will give greater understanding to anyone who seeks sincerely to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	8	18	l421	figs-explicit	ὃς ἂν & ἔχῃ, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	whoever has, it will be given to him	The implication in context is that the phrase **whoever has, it will be given to him** refers to understanding and believing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever seeks sincerely to understand will be given more understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	8	18	bq9f	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἂν & ἔχῃ, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	whoever has, it will be given to him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whoever seeks sincerely to understand will understand better” or “God will give greater understanding to anyone who seeks sincerely to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	18	l422	figs-explicit	καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ ἔχῃ, καὶ ὃ δοκεῖ ἔχειν ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	whoever does not have, even what he thinks he has will be taken away from him	The implication once again is that the phrase **whoever does not have, even what he thinks he has will be taken away from him** refers to understanding and believing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But whoever does not have understanding, even what understanding he thinks he has will be taken away from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	18	ihh9	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ ἔχῃ, καὶ ὃ δοκεῖ ἔχειν ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	whoever does not have, even what he thinks he has will be taken away from him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whoever presumes that he already understands will understand less and less” or “God will not give greater understanding to anyone who presumes that he already understands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	19	l423	grammar-connect-time-sequential	δὲ	1	Then	Luke uses **Then** to introduce a new event and to indicate that it came after the event he has just described. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 LUK	8	19	dw3m	translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	his brothers	These were Jesus' younger **brothers**. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you can use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-LUK	8	20	wr4t	figs-activepassive	ἀπηγγέλη&αὐτῷ	1	it was reported to him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The subject should be plural, since in the next verse Jesus responds to “them.” Alternate translation: “people told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	8	20	l424	figs-you	σου&σου&σε	1	your … your … you	Since the person who said this was speaking to Jesus alone, **your** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	8	20	wr4t	figs-activepassive	ἀπηγγέλη & αὐτῷ	1	it was reported to him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The subject should be plural, since in the next verse Jesus responds to “them.” Alternate translation: “people told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	8	20	l424	figs-you	σου & σου & σε	1	your … your … you	Since the person who said this was speaking to Jesus alone, **your** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	8	20	un5d		ἰδεῖν θέλοντές σε	1	wanting to see you	Alternate translation: “and they would like to see you”
 LUK	8	21	l425	figs-hendiadys	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς	1	But answering he said to them	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the information that people gave him. Alternate translation: “But Jesus responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	8	21	b97u	figs-metaphor	μήτηρ μου καὶ ἀδελφοί μου, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀκούοντες καὶ ποιοῦντες	1	My mother and my brothers are those who hear and do the word of God	Jesus means that people who believe and obey the message from God become like a family to one another. Alternate translation: “Those who hear the word of God and obey it are like a mother and brothers to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ LUK	8	22	l427	figs-idiom	ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	on one of those
 LUK	8	22	l428	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ αὐτὸς ἐνέβη εἰς πλοῖον καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, διέλθωμεν εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς λίμνης	1	both he and his disciples got into a boat, and he said to them, “Let us go over to the other side of the lake”	It seems unlikely that Jesus and his disciples would have gotten into a boat before they were planning to sail somewhere. So here Luke is probably describing the result before the reason. If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to his disciples, ‘Let us go over to the other side of the lake.’ So they all got into a boat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	8	22	w1pk	translate-names	τῆς λίμνης	1	the lake	This means the Lake of Genneseret, which is also called the Sea of Galilee. But since Jesus would have referred to it simply as **the lake** while he and his disciples were on it, you do not need to use the proper name in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	8	22	btk8	figs-idiom	ἀνήχθησαν	1	they put out	This expression means that they began to travel across the lake in their boat. Alternate translation: “they headed out across the lake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	8	23	vh2v		πλεόντων&αὐτῶν	1	as they voyaged	The term **voyaged** means that Jesus and the disciples traveled by water. Alternate translation: “as they traveled across the lake”
+LUK	8	23	vh2v		πλεόντων & αὐτῶν	1	as they voyaged	The term **voyaged** means that Jesus and the disciples traveled by water. Alternate translation: “as they traveled across the lake”
 LUK	8	23	sf8z	writing-pronouns	ἀφύπνωσεν	1	he fell asleep	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus began to sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	8	23	mdb5	figs-idiom	κατέβη λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου εἰς τὴν λίμνην	1	a windstorm came down on the lake	Luke says **came down** because these winds blew down from the hills surrounding the lake. Alternate translation: “very strong winds suddenly began to blow on the lake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	8	23	l429	figs-metonymy	συνεπληροῦντο	1	they were being filled	Luke says **they**, meaning the disciples, to refer by association to the boat they were in. Alternate translation: “the boat was being filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1291,12 +1291,12 @@ LUK	8	25	f2wp		τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν	1	Who then is this	This is
 LUK	8	25	l434	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὕδατι	1	the water	The disciples are describing the violent waves that had threatened the boat by reference to **the water** that these waves arose from. Alternate translation: “the waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	8	26	f17p	translate-names	τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	the region of the Gerasenes	The name **Gerasenes** refers to people from the city of Gerasa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	8	26	p9zp		ἀντιπέρα τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1	opposite Galilee	Alternate translation: “on the other side of the lake from Galilee”
-LUK	8	27	l435	figs-ellipsis	ἐξελθόντι&αὐτῷ	1	when he came out	Here Luke is writing in a compact way. He means that Jesus **came out** of the boat. Alternate translation: “when Jesus got out of the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+LUK	8	27	l435	figs-ellipsis	ἐξελθόντι & αὐτῷ	1	when he came out	Here Luke is writing in a compact way. He means that Jesus **came out** of the boat. Alternate translation: “when Jesus got out of the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	8	27	hjh5	writing-participants	ἀνήρ τις ἐκ τῆς πόλεως	1	a certain man from the city	This phrase introduces a new character in a story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “a man who was from the city of Gerasa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	8	27	ji6p		ἔχων δαιμόνια	1	who had demons	Alternate translation: “who was controlled by demons” or “whom demons controlled”
 LUK	8	27	xhw7	writing-background	καὶ χρόνῳ ἱκανῷ	1	And for a long time	Luke uses this phrase to introduce background information about the man who had demons. Alternate translation: “Now for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	8	27	we6n	translate-unknown	τοῖς μνήμασιν	1	the tombs	The term **the tombs** refers to places in which people laid to rest the bodies of loved ones who have died. In this context it may possibly mean caves cut into the rock or small buildings that the man could use for shelter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	8	28	ip59	writing-pronouns	ἰδὼν&τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	when he saw Jesus	The verb **having seen** refers to the man who had demons. Alternate translation: “when the man whom the demons controlled saw Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	8	28	ip59	writing-pronouns	ἰδὼν & τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	when he saw Jesus	The verb **having seen** refers to the man who had demons. Alternate translation: “when the man whom the demons controlled saw Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	8	28	n4ex		ἀνακράξας	1	he cried out	Alternate translation: “he screamed” or “he shrieked”
 LUK	8	28	fak9	translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν αὐτῷ	1	fell down before him	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the man did not fall down accidentally. Rather, bowing or lying down in front of Jesus was a sign of humility and respect for him. Alternate translation: “respectfully bowed down at Jesus’ feet” or “respectfully lay down on the ground in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	8	28	m21e	figs-idiom	φωνῇ μεγάλῃ εἶπεν	1	said in a loud voice	This is an idiom that means the man raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “shouted out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ LUK	8	30	p31w	translate-names	λεγεών	1	Legion	Translate the word **Legion*
 LUK	8	31	qcn1		παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν	1	they were begging him	Alternate translation: “the demons kept begging Jesus”
 LUK	8	31	l441	translate-unknown	τὴν Ἄβυσσον	1	the abyss	The term **abyss** literally means a bottomless pit, and here it describes a place of punishment. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate the term with an explanatory phrase, as UST does, saying “the deep pit where God punishes demons.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	8	32	b3vt	writing-background	ἦν δὲ ἐκεῖ ἀγέλη χοίρων ἱκανῶν βοσκομένη ἐν τῷ ὄρει	1	Now a large herd of pigs was there feeding on the hillside	Luke supplies this background information to help readers understand what happens next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-LUK	8	32	q8w5		ἦν&ἐκεῖ&βοσκομένη ἐν τῷ ὄρει	1	was there feeding on the hillside	Alternate translation: “was nearby eating grass on the side of a hill”
+LUK	8	32	q8w5		ἦν & ἐκεῖ & βοσκομένη ἐν τῷ ὄρει	1	was there feeding on the hillside	Alternate translation: “was nearby eating grass on the side of a hill”
 LUK	8	32	l442	writing-pronouns	παρεκάλεσαν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιτρέψῃ αὐτοῖς εἰς ἐκείνους εἰσελθεῖν	1	they begged him to permit them go into them	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could clarify who and what these pronouns refer to. Alternate translation: “the demons begged Jesus to let them go into the pigs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	8	32	l443		καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς	1	And he gave them permission	Luke does not say specifically why Jesus allowed the demons to go into the pigs. But Jesus did not necessarily do so because the demons begged him. He may have had other reasons of his own. So it would probably be best to translate this in a neutral way, as ULT and UST both do, rather than beginning with a word such as “So,” which would imply that Jesus agreed to this because the demons begged him.
 LUK	8	33	na38	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξελθόντα δὲ τὰ δαιμόνια	1	Then the demons came out	The term translated as **Ehen** could mean that the demons came of out the man because Jesus told them they could go into the pigs. You could begin this sentence with the word **So**, as UST does, to show that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1323,10 +1323,10 @@ LUK	8	33	ja6x	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἀπεπνίγη	1	and was drowned	If
 LUK	8	34	l444	figs-merism	εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς	1	in the city and in the countryside	Here Luke uses a figure of speech to refer to that whole region by naming the two constituent parts of it. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 LUK	8	34	l445	figs-explicit	εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς	1	in the city and in the countryside	You could also translate this more literally. The implication is that this means the city of Gerasa, since Luke says in [8:29](../08/29.md) that Jesus and his disciples came to the region where this city was located. Alternate translation: “in the city of Gerasa and in the surrounding countryside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	35	l446	figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθον	1	they went out	Here, as well as in the other two instances in this verse, **they** refers to the people of that region, as in [8:37](../08/37.md). The term **went out** indicates the remote area where the man had been living. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express those things explicitly. Alternate translation: “people from all over that region went out to that remote area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	8	35	ju71		εὗραν&τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀφ’ οὗ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐξῆλθεν	1	found the man from whom the demons had gone out	Alternate translation: “saw the man whom the demons had left”
+LUK	8	35	ju71		εὗραν & τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀφ’ οὗ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐξῆλθεν	1	found the man from whom the demons had gone out	Alternate translation: “saw the man whom the demons had left”
 LUK	8	35	l447	figs-activepassive	ἱματισμένον	1	clothed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “wearing clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	8	35	w3tq		σωφρονοῦντα	1	being sound-minded	Alternate translation: “behaving normally”
-LUK	8	35	x9lp	figs-idiom	καθήμενον&παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	sitting at the feet of Jesus	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “sitting on the ground in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	8	35	x9lp	figs-idiom	καθήμενον & παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	sitting at the feet of Jesus	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “sitting on the ground in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	8	35	j89t	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν	1	they were afraid	The implication is that they were afraid of what else such a powerful person as Jesus might do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of what else Jesus might do, since they recognized what great power he had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	36	xtf3	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἰδόντες	1	those who had seen	Alternate translation: “those who had seen what had happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	8	36	kv18	figs-activepassive	ἐσώθη ὁ δαιμονισθείς	1	the one who had been possessed by demons had been saved	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “Jesus had delivered the man from the demons who had controlled him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@ LUK	8	37	l450	figs-personification	φόβῳ μεγάλῳ συνείχοντο
 LUK	8	37	l451	figs-synecdoche	αὐτὸς δὲ ἐμβὰς, εἰς πλοῖον	1	he got into the boat	Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples got into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	8	37	ue8c	figs-explicit	ὑπέστρεψεν	1	to return	The implication is that Jesus and his disciples were going to **return** to Galilee. Alternate translation: “to go back across the lake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	38	s25w	figs-events	δὲ	1	And	The events in this verse and the next verse happened before Jesus left in the boat. It may be helpful to state that clearly at the beginning here. Alternate translation (followed by comma): “Before Jesus and his disciples left,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-LUK	8	38	l452	figs-quotations	ἐδεῖτο&αὐτοῦ&εἶναι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	begged him to be with him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a direct quotation, as UST does, breaking the sentence here. Alternate translation: “pleaded with Jesus, ‘Let me go with you!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+LUK	8	38	l452	figs-quotations	ἐδεῖτο & αὐτοῦ & εἶναι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	begged him to be with him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a direct quotation, as UST does, breaking the sentence here. Alternate translation: “pleaded with Jesus, ‘Let me go with you!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 LUK	8	38	abce	writing-pronouns	ἀπέλυσεν δὲ αὐτὸν	1	he sent him away	The pronoun**he** refers to Jesus, and the word **him** refers to the man. Alternate translation: “Jesus sent the man away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	8	39	zl3v	figs-metonymy	τὸν οἶκόν σου	1	your house	Jesus is using the word **house** to mean the people who live in the man’s **house**. Alternate translation: “your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	8	39	c9nh		διηγοῦ ὅσα σοι ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεός	1	describe all that God has done for you	Alternate translation: “tell them everything about what God has done for you”
@@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ LUK	8	44	vwe6	translate-unknown	ἥψατο τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ 
 LUK	8	45	c3wm	figs-explicit	οἱ ὄχλοι συνέχουσίν σε καὶ ἀποθλίβουσιν	1	the crowds are crowding around and pressing against you	By saying this, Peter was implying that anyone could have touched Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “there are many people crowding around you and pressing in against you, so any one of them might have touched you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	45	l461	figs-doublet	συνέχουσίν σε καὶ ἀποθλίβουσιν	1	crowding around and pressing against you	These two expressions mean similar things. Peter is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “pressing against you from every side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	8	46	u6am	figs-explicit	ἥψατό μού τις	1	Someone touched me	The implication is that Jesus means someone reached out and **touched** him intentionally. He is not referring to the accidental jostling of the crowd. Alternate translation: “Someone deliberately touched me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	8	46	zmu9	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ&ἔγνων δύναμιν ἐξεληλυθυῖαν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	I know power has gone out from me	Jesus did not lose power or become weak. Rather, he recognized that power had gone out from him and healed someone. Alternate translation: “I felt power go out from me and heal someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	8	46	zmu9	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ & ἔγνων δύναμιν ἐξεληλυθυῖαν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	I know power has gone out from me	Jesus did not lose power or become weak. Rather, he recognized that power had gone out from him and healed someone. Alternate translation: “I felt power go out from me and heal someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	47	cwn4	figs-explicit	ὅτι οὐκ ἔλαθεν	1	that she could not hide	The implication is that she could not hide the fact that she had touched Jesus deliberately. Alternate translation: “that she could not keep it a secret that she was the one who had touched Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	47	vua6	figs-explicit	τρέμουσα ἦλθεν	1	she came trembling	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the implicit reason why she was **trembling**. Alternate translation: “she came trembling with fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	47	vxl7	translate-symaction	προσπεσοῦσα αὐτῷ	1	fell down before him	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the woman did not fall down accidentally. Rather, bowing or lying down in front of Jesus was a sign of humility and respect for him. Alternate translation: “respectfully bowed down in front of Jesus” or “respectfully lay down on the ground in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1384,15 +1384,15 @@ LUK	8	50	l467	figs-activepassive	σωθήσεται	1	she will be saved	If it wo
 LUK	8	51	gl9g	figs-synecdoche	ἐλθὼν δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	when he came to the house	Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group that was coming with Jesus, which included his disciples and Jairus and likely others. Alternate translation: “When they arrived at the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	8	51	qal2	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἀφῆκεν εἰσελθεῖν τινα σὺν αὐτῷ, εἰ μὴ	1	he did not allow anyone … except	If, in your language, it would appear that Luke was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Jesus only allowed to enter with him (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 LUK	8	51	i4v1		τὸν πατέρα τῆς παιδὸς	1	the father of the child	The phrase **the father of the child** refers to Jairus. Alternate translation: “Jairus, the girl’s father”
-LUK	8	52	tt9v	translate-symaction	ἔκλαιον&πάντες καὶ ἐκόπτοντο αὐτήν	1	they were all wailing and mourning for her	This was the customary way of showing grief in that culture. The term that ULT translates as **mourning** could mean that the people were pounding on their chests as a sign of grief, although Luke uses a much more specific expression to say that directly in [18:13](../18/13.md). If you think your readers might not understand the significance of these actions, you could explain generally what the people were doing. Or you could describe the actions and say why the people were doing them. Alternate translation: “they were all loudly expressing their grief” or “all the people there were wailing and pounding on their chests to show how sad they were that the girl had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-LUK	8	52	l468		οὐ&ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	she has not died, but sleeps	Alternate translation: “she is not dead, she is only sleeping”
+LUK	8	52	tt9v	translate-symaction	ἔκλαιον & πάντες καὶ ἐκόπτοντο αὐτήν	1	they were all wailing and mourning for her	This was the customary way of showing grief in that culture. The term that ULT translates as **mourning** could mean that the people were pounding on their chests as a sign of grief, although Luke uses a much more specific expression to say that directly in [18:13](../18/13.md). If you think your readers might not understand the significance of these actions, you could explain generally what the people were doing. Or you could describe the actions and say why the people were doing them. Alternate translation: “they were all loudly expressing their grief” or “all the people there were wailing and pounding on their chests to show how sad they were that the girl had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+LUK	8	52	l468		οὐ & ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	she has not died, but sleeps	Alternate translation: “she is not dead, she is only sleeping”
 LUK	8	53	nu8w	writing-pronouns	κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ, εἰδότες ὅτι ἀπέθανεν	1	laughed at him, knowing that she had died	Alternate translation: “they laughed at Jesus because they knew that Jairus’s daughter had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	8	54	e7zt	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸς&κρατήσας τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς	1	he, taking hold of her hand	Alternate translation: “Jesus took hold of the girl’s hand and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	8	54	e7zt	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸς & κρατήσας τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς	1	he, taking hold of her hand	Alternate translation: “Jesus took hold of the girl’s hand and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	8	54	l469	figs-imperative	ἔγειρε	1	arise	This was not a command that the girl was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused her to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “your life is restored, so get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	8	55	k6w2	figs-explicit	ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῆς	1	her spirit returned	The people of this time considered life to be the result of the spirit coming into a person. You could express this in the way that would be most meaningful in your culture. Alternate translation: “she started breathing again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	8	56	c6mp		μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν	1	to tell no one	If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the subject positive. Alternate translation: “not to tell anyone”
 LUK	9	intro	uc1r			0		# Luke 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1–9)<br>2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10–17)<br>3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18–27)<br>4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28–36)<br>5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37–43)<br>6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44–50)<br>7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51–62)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Elijah<br><br>God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).<br><br>### “Receiving”<br><br>This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
-LUK	9	1	l470	figs-nominaladj	συνκαλεσάμενος&τοὺς δώδεκα	1	when he had called the Twelve together	See how you translated this phrase in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **the Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he had called together his 12 apostles” or “when he had called together the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	9	1	l470	figs-nominaladj	συνκαλεσάμενος & τοὺς δώδεκα	1	when he had called the Twelve together	See how you translated this phrase in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **the Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he had called together his 12 apostles” or “when he had called together the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	9	1	l471	translate-names	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	9	1	zqq6	figs-doublet	δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν	1	power and authority	The words **power** and **authority** mean similar things. Luke uses them together to show that Jesus gave his 12 disciples both the ability and the right to heal people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this phrase with a combination of words that includes both of these ideas. Alternate translation: “the right to use power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	9	1	fuj7		πάντα τὰ δαιμόνια	1	all the demons	This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: “every demon” or “every kind of demon”
@@ -1435,7 +1435,7 @@ LUK	9	11	l483	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1
 LUK	9	12	btc8	writing-background	ἡ δὲ ἡμέρα ἤρξατο κλίνειν	1	And the day began to end	Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now it was getting towards the end of the day” or “Now the end of the day was approaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	9	12	l484	figs-nominaladj	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	See how you translated this term in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “his 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	9	12	l485	translate-names	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, **the Twelve**, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	9	13	l486	figs-litotes	οὐκ εἰσὶν&πλεῖον ἢ	1	There are not more than	The disciples are expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “There are only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+LUK	9	13	l486	figs-litotes	οὐκ εἰσὶν & πλεῖον ἢ	1	There are not more than	The disciples are expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “There are only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 LUK	9	13	tay4	translate-unknown	ἄρτοι πέντε	1	five loaves	This means **loaves** of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. Alternate translation: “five loaves of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	9	13	vuc1	figs-irony	εἰ μήτι πορευθέντες, ἡμεῖς ἀγοράσωμεν εἰς πάντα τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον βρώματα	1	unless we go and buy food for all these people	The disciples are not making a serious suggestion here. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. Alternate translation: “and we certainly cannot go and buy food for all these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 LUK	9	14	c9z5	figs-explicit	ὡσεὶ ἄνδρες πεντακισχίλιοι	1	about 5,000 men	Luke assumes that readers will know that this number does not include the women and children who were likely also present. (This is not a case where a masculine term includes women.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “about 5,000 men, not counting the women and children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ LUK	9	17	l5ml	figs-activepassive	ἔφαγον καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν
 LUK	9	17	l487	translate-unknown	κόφινοι	1	baskets	Here, **baskets** refers to containers made of woven material. In biblical times, baskets were often made from strong plant materials, such as peels of wood or reeds that grew near the water. If your readers would not be familiar with baskets, you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “containers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	9	18	y5a5	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	9	18	l91t		προσευχόμενον κατὰ μόνας	1	praying alone	The disciples were with Jesus, but he was praying personally and privately by himself. Alternate translation: “praying by himself”
-LUK	9	19	l488	figs-hendiadys	οἱ&ἀποκριθέντες εἶπαν	1	answering they said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that the disciples responded to the question that Jesus asked them. Alternate translation: “they responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	9	19	l488	figs-hendiadys	οἱ & ἀποκριθέντες εἶπαν	1	answering they said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that the disciples responded to the question that Jesus asked them. Alternate translation: “they responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	9	19	f2kh	figs-ellipsis	Ἰωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν, ἄλλοι δὲ, Ἠλείαν, ἄλλοι δὲ	1	John the Baptist, but others Elijah, and others	The disciples are answering Jesus in a compressed way, leaving out words that a sentence would ordinarily need to be complete. Alternate translation: “Some say that you are John the Baptist, but others say that you are Elijah, and others say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	9	19	ewu4	figs-explicit	ὅτι προφήτης τις τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη	1	that one of the ancient prophets has risen	It may be helpful to clarify how this answer relates to Jesus’ question. Alternate translation: “that you are one of the prophets from long ago who has come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	19	x3px	figs-explicit	ἀνέστη	1	has risen	This means **risen** from the dead. Alternate translation: “has come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1494,13 +1494,13 @@ LUK	9	31	g28p	figs-activepassive	οἳ ὀφθέντες ἐν δόξῃ	1	who w
 LUK	9	31	cur1	figs-euphemism	τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ	1	his departure	Luke is using a polite way of referring to Jesus’ death. Alternate translation: “how Jesus would leave this world” or “how Jesus would die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 LUK	9	31	l502		ἣν ἤμελλεν πληροῦν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	which he was about to fulfill in Jerusalem	Alternate translation: “which was soon going to happen in Jerusalem”
 LUK	9	32	i29n	writing-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information about what Peter, James, and John were doing while Jesus was speaking with Moses and Elijah. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-LUK	9	32	f8ip	figs-activepassive	ὁ&Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ	1	Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “sleep was weighing heavily upon Peter and James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	9	32	l503	figs-personification	ὁ&Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ	1	Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep	Luke speaks of **sleep** as if it were something that could be like a weight pressing down on a person. Alternate translation: “Peter and James and John all felt very sleepy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	9	32	f8ip	figs-activepassive	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ	1	Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “sleep was weighing heavily upon Peter and James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	9	32	l503	figs-personification	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ	1	Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep	Luke speaks of **sleep** as if it were something that could be like a weight pressing down on a person. Alternate translation: “Peter and James and John all felt very sleepy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	9	32	tw7e	figs-explicit	εἶδον τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	they saw his glory	As in [2:9](../02/09.md), the implication is that this **glory** manifested visibly as a bright light. Alternate translation: “they saw brilliant light shining around Jesus” or “they saw a very bright light coming from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	32	tsj6		καὶ τοὺς δύο ἄνδρας τοὺς συνεστῶτας αὐτῷ	1	and the two men who were standing with him	The phrase **the two men** refers to Moses and Elijah. Alternate translation: “and they also saw Moses and Elijah”
 LUK	9	33	l504	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new development within this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	9	33	npk9	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῷ διαχωρίζεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	as they were going away from him	The pronoun **they** refers to Moses and Elijah, not to the disciples. Alternate translation: “as Moses and Elijah were about to leave Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	9	33	l505	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς&ποιήσωμεν	1	for us … let us make	Since Peter wants to make it possible for Moses and Elijah to stay, when he says **for us**, he likely means “all six of us.” So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” use the inclusive form in that case. However, when Peter says **let us**, he is likely referring to himself and to James and John, so use the exclusive form of “us” in that case. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	9	33	l505	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ποιήσωμεν	1	for us … let us make	Since Peter wants to make it possible for Moses and Elijah to stay, when he says **for us**, he likely means “all six of us.” So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” use the inclusive form in that case. However, when Peter says **let us**, he is likely referring to himself and to James and John, so use the exclusive form of “us” in that case. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	9	33	mby6	translate-unknown	σκηνὰς	1	tents	The term **tents** means simple, temporary places in which to sit or sleep. Peter probably had in mind that he and the other two disciples would build them from the materials available on the mountain such as tree branches. Alternate translation: “shelters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	9	33	l506		μὴ εἰδὼς ὃ λέγει	1	not knowing what he says	To call attention to a development in the story, Luke uses the present tense in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “he did not know what he was saying”
 LUK	9	34	ct1w	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ λέγοντος	1	as he was saying this	Alternate translation: “While Peter was saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ LUK	9	36	l507		ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνὴν	1	when the voice
 LUK	9	36	l508	figs-idiom	εὑρέθη Ἰησοῦς μόνος	1	Jesus was found alone	The term **found** is an idiom that means “could be found” or “was there.” Alternate translation: “only Jesus was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	9	36	l509	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη Ἰησοῦς μόνος	1	Jesus was found alone	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state **Jesus was found alone** with an active form. Alternate translation: “only Jesus was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	9	36	v9uy	figs-doublet	αὐτοὶ ἐσίγησαν, καὶ οὐδενὶ ἀπήγγειλαν	1	they were silent and told no one	These two phrases mean the same thing. (The Greek verb in the first phrase does not always mean to make no sound. It can also mean to keep a secret.) Luke uses the two phrases together for emphasis. In your translation, you could also use repetition for emphasis, or, If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “they kept it a secret and did not tell anyone” or “they said nothing about it to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-LUK	9	36	l510	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδενὶ ἀπήγγειλαν&οὐδὲν	1	told no one … anything	Luke uses a double negative in Greek for emphasis here, “told no one … nothing.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning, “told someone … something.” If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+LUK	9	36	l510	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδενὶ ἀπήγγειλαν & οὐδὲν	1	told no one … anything	Luke uses a double negative in Greek for emphasis here, “told no one … nothing.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning, “told someone … something.” If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	9	36	l511	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	in those days	Here Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	9	37	q5f5	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	9	38	l512	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1531,7 +1531,7 @@ LUK	9	41	l518	figs-rquestion	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ διεστ
 LUK	9	41	apa3	figs-doublet	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη	1	O unbelieving and perverted generation	The terms **unbelieving** and **perverted** mean similar things. Jesus uses them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	9	41	qk1w	figs-you	ἕως πότε ἔσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς καὶ ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	until when will I be with you and bear with you?	In both cases here, **you** is plural in Greek because Jesus is addressing a **generation** that is made up of many people. However, **generation** is a collective noun, and if your language would treat a collective noun as singular in a context like this, you could use the singular form of **you**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	9	41	ls7b	figs-you	προσάγαγε ὧδε τὸν υἱόν σου	1	Bring your son here	Jesus is now speaking to the father of the boy, and so **your** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	9	42	l519	writing-pronouns	ἔτι&προσερχομένου αὐτοῦ	1	while he was coming	The pronoun **he** refers to the boy, not to the father. Alternate translation: “while the boy was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	9	42	l519	writing-pronouns	ἔτι & προσερχομένου αὐτοῦ	1	while he was coming	The pronoun **he** refers to the boy, not to the father. Alternate translation: “while the boy was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	9	43	hz1l	figs-explicit	ἐξεπλήσσοντο δὲ πάντες ἐπὶ τῇ μεγαλειότητι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	they all marveled at the majesty of God	Jesus performed the miracle, but the crowd recognized that **God** was the power behind the healing. Alternate translation: “Then they were all amazed that God would work so powerfully through Jesus in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	43	d61c	writing-pronouns	πᾶσιν οἷς ἐποίει	1	everything that he was doing	The word **he** refers to Jesus, not to God the Father. Alternate translation: “everything Jesus was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	9	44	gah9	figs-idiom	θέσθε ὑμεῖς εἰς τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	You put these words in your ears	Jesus is using an idiom to tell his disciples to pay careful attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully to this and remember it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ LUK	9	44	ygr3	figs-123person	ὁ γὰρ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου μ
 LUK	9	44	l520	figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου μέλλει παραδίδοσθαι	1	the Son of Man is going to be handed over	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “someone is going to betray me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	44	l521	figs-metaphor	εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων	1	into the hands of men	The term **hands** represent power and control. Alternate translation: “to his enemies, who will have power over him” or (if you translated in the first person) “to my enemies, who will have power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	9	44	l522	figs-explicit	εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων	1	into the hands of men	It may be helpful to make explicit who these **men** are. Alternate translation: “to his enemies, who will have power over him” or (if you translated in the first person) “to my enemies, who will have power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	9	45	l523	figs-metonymy	τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο&περὶ τοῦ ῥήματος τούτου	1	this word … about this word	Luke uses the term **word** to describe what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “this saying … about this saying” or “this statement … about this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	9	45	l523	figs-metonymy	τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο & περὶ τοῦ ῥήματος τούτου	1	this word … about this word	Luke uses the term **word** to describe what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “this saying … about this saying” or “this statement … about this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	9	45	ub1r	figs-activepassive	ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	it was hidden from them	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God hid its meaning from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	9	46	dh3w	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	among them	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the pronoun **them** does not include Jesus. He was not arguing, along with the disciples, about who was the **greatest**. Alternate translation: “among the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	9	46	l524		τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν	1	which of them might be the greatest	Alternate translation: “which one of them was the greatest”
@@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ LUK	9	48	mav1	figs-metaphor	ἐμὲ δέχεται	1	welcomes me	This is a meta
 LUK	9	48	awc6	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	the one who sent me	Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that this means God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	48	zw5t	figs-gendernotations	οὗτός ἐστιν μέγας	1	he is great	Here Jesus uses the pronoun **he** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that is the person whom God considers to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	9	49	uwr3	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ Ἰωάννης εἶπεν	1	Then answering John said	Together **answering** and **said** mean that John responded to what Jesus had just said. Alternate translation: “Then John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-LUK	9	49	bj41	figs-exclusive	εἴδομέν&μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1	we saw … with us	When John says **we**, he is speaking of himself and some other disciples who spoke to this man, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language uses that form. However, when John says **us**, he seems to be referring to the disciples and Jesus traveling together, and since he is speaking to Jesus, **us** would be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	9	49	bj41	figs-exclusive	εἴδομέν & μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1	we saw … with us	When John says **we**, he is speaking of himself and some other disciples who spoke to this man, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language uses that form. However, when John says **us**, he seems to be referring to the disciples and Jesus traveling together, and since he is speaking to Jesus, **us** would be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	9	49	py8i	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	in your name	The term **name** is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with them. This expression means the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	9	49	l526	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἀκολουθεῖ μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1	he does not follow with us	In this case, to **follow** Jesus does not seem to mean to be one of his disciples, as in [5:27](../05/27.md), since this man was acting in Jesus’ **name**. Rather, in this context it seems to refer to traveling together in this group with Jesus. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	9	50	hw85	figs-litotes	μὴ κωλύετε	1	Do not prevent him	Jesus is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -1569,14 +1569,14 @@ LUK	9	53	n62j	figs-explicit	ὅτι τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἦν π
 LUK	9	54	a8sf	figs-metaphor	ἰδόντες	1	saw	The verb **having seen** represents notice and attention. Alternate translation: “having recognized that the Samaritans were not going to accommodate Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	9	54	y4rq	figs-explicit	θέλεις εἴπωμεν πῦρ καταβῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀναλῶσαι αὐτούς?	1	do you want us to tell fire to come down from heaven and consume them?	James and John suggested this method of judgment because they knew that this was how the prophets such as Elijah had called down judgment upon people who rejected God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you want us to tell fire to come down from heaven to consume them, as Elijah did?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	54	l533	figs-exclusive	θέλεις εἴπωμεν	1	do you want us to tell	By **us**, James and John mean themselves, but not Jesus, so **us** is exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-LUK	9	55	pj6b	writing-pronouns	στραφεὶς&ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς	1	he turned and rebuked them	The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Jesus did not condemn the Samaritans, as the disciples expected. Alternate translation: “Jesus turned around and rebuked James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	9	55	pj6b	writing-pronouns	στραφεὶς & ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς	1	he turned and rebuked them	The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Jesus did not condemn the Samaritans, as the disciples expected. Alternate translation: “Jesus turned around and rebuked James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	9	57	l534		τις	1	someone	This was not one of the disciples. Alternate translation: “a certain person”
 LUK	9	58	yq5n	figs-merism	αἱ ἀλώπεκες φωλεοὺς ἔχουσιν, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατασκηνώσεις	1	The foxes have dens, and the birds of the sky have nests	Jesus is using a figure of speech. By naming a creature that lives on land and a creature that flies in the air, Jesus is referring to all creatures. Alternate translation: “Every creature has a place to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 LUK	9	58	anv9	translate-unknown	αἱ ἀλώπεκες φωλεοὺς ἔχουσιν	1	The foxes have dens	The word **foxes** describes land animals that are similar to small dogs. The word **dens** refers to holes that these animals dig in the ground as shelters. If your readers would not be familiar with this animal and its habits, you could describe them in general terms. Alternate translation: “Little animals live in holes in the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	9	58	c88m	figs-explicitinfo	τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατασκηνώσεις	1	the birds of the sky, nests	In your language, it might seem that this phrase expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. However, you could also use an action clause to keep the sense of **sky**, to complement the idea of “ground” in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “birds live in nests” or “birds that fly in the air live in nests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 LUK	9	58	ls02	figs-ellipsis	τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατασκηνώσεις	1	the birds of the sky, nests	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “birds live in nests” or “birds that fly in the air live in nests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	9	58	r7vq	figs-123person	ὁ&Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	2	the Son of Man	**Jesus** is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-LUK	9	58	l535	figs-explicit	ὁ&Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	2	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	9	58	r7vq	figs-123person	ὁ & Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	2	the Son of Man	**Jesus** is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK	9	58	l535	figs-explicit	ὁ & Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	2	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	58	l536	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ	1	does not have anywhere to lay his head	Jesus implies that if this person were to follow him, he too might not have a home. Alternate translation: “does not have a home anywhere, so if you become his disciple, expect that you will not have a home either” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a home anywhere, so if you become my disciple, expect that you will not have a home either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	9	58	l537	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ	1	does not have anywhere to lay his head	This expression means “does not have anywhere to sleep,” by association with something that a person does in order to sleep, **lay** down his **head**. And a place to sleep, by association, means a home, since that is where people sleep. Alternate translation: “does not have a home anywhere” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a home anywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	9	58	ff62	figs-hyperbole	οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ	1	does not have anywhere to lay his head	Jesus actually did find places to sleep wherever he went to teach and heal, but he says that he has no such place at all to emphasize that he has no permanent home. Alternate translation: “does not have a permanent home” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a permanent home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ LUK	10	5	zk69	figs-metonymy	εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ	1	Peace b
 LUK	10	5	l563	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ	1	Peace be to this house	This was an idiomatic expression, based on the Hebrew concept of “shalom,” that was both a greeting and a blessing. Alternate translation: “I greet all of you in this household and I wish for God to bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	10	6	x5e4	figs-idiom	υἱὸς εἰρήνης	1	a son of peace	The expression **son of** refers to a person who shares the qualities of something. Alternate translation: “a person who wants peace with God and with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	10	6	pq5j	figs-metaphor	ἐπαναπαήσεται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν	1	your peace will rest upon him	Here, **upon** creates a spatial metaphor. It means that this person will experience the peace that God gives in a special and lasting way. Alternate translation: “he will deeply experience the peace that you wish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	10	6	it4v	figs-ellipsis	εἰ&μή γε	1	if not	It may be helpful to restate the entire phrase. Alternate translation: “if there is no one there who wants peace with God and with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+LUK	10	6	it4v	figs-ellipsis	εἰ & μή γε	1	if not	It may be helpful to restate the entire phrase. Alternate translation: “if there is no one there who wants peace with God and with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	10	6	zpx9	figs-personification	ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἀνακάμψει	1	it will return to you	Jesus describes **peace** as a living thing that could choose to leave one person and go to another person. Alternate translation: “you will experience that peace yourselves instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	10	7	ki3k		ἐν αὐτῇ δὲ τῇ οἰκίᾳ μένετε	1	remain in that house	Jesus was not saying that they should stay in the house all the time and never leave it, but that they should make it their base of operations for as long as they were in that place. Alternate translation: “stay at that house”
 LUK	10	7	l564	figs-idiom	τὰ παρ’ αὐτῶν	1	what is from them	This phrase is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the food and drink that they provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ LUK	10	7	u3vs	writing-proverbs	ἄξιος γὰρ ὁ ἐργάτης τοῦ 
 LUK	10	7	kd8i		μὴ μεταβαίνετε ἐξ οἰκίας εἰς οἰκίαν	1	Do not move around from house to house	This expression describes staying in different houses rather than making one house the base of operations the whole time. Jesus is repeating his earlier instruction, **remain in that house**, for emphasis. Jesus is not saying that these disciples cannot go to meet with people in other homes. Alternate translation: “As I said, stay at that house”
 LUK	10	8	k8yb	writing-pronouns	καὶ δέχωνται ὑμᾶς	1	and they receive you	The pronoun **they** refers to the people living in this city. Alternate translation: “if the people there welcome you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	10	8	wd2x	figs-activepassive	ἐσθίετε τὰ παρατιθέμενα ὑμῖν	1	eat what is served to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “eat whatever food the people of that city serve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	10	9	ws6g	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς&ἀσθενεῖς	1	the sick	Jesus is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the people who are sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	10	9	ws6g	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς & ἀσθενεῖς	1	the sick	Jesus is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the people who are sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	10	9	l565	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῇ	1	in it	Alternate translation: “who live in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	10	9	l566	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγετε αὐτοῖς, ἤγγικεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	say to them, ‘The kingdom of God has come close to you’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “tell them that the kingdom of God has come close to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	10	9	e1he	figs-abstractnouns	ἤγγικεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The kingdom of God has come close to you	The idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** can be expressed with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God is close in location, that is, its activities are happening nearby. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God is close in time, that is, it will begin soon. Alternate translation: “God will soon begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1639,19 +1639,19 @@ LUK	10	11	fdk3	figs-abstractnouns	ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ 
 LUK	10	12	hhl1		λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι	1	I say to you that	Jesus says this to emphasize that what he is about to tell these disciples is very important. Alternate translation: “Take special note that”
 LUK	10	12	l568	figs-idiom	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ	1	on that day	Jesus is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	10	12	m7ch	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ	1	on that day	Jesus expected his disciples to understand that he was referring to the time when God will bring final judgment. Alternate translation: “when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	10	12	qg62	figs-metonymy	Σοδόμοις&ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city	Jesus uses the name of the city, **Sodom**, to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	10	12	l569	figs-explicit	Σοδόμοις&ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city	Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the city of **Sodom** because the people in it were so wicked. The implication is that it must therefore be an extremely serious offense to reject the messengers of the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom, even though he destroyed their city because they were so wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	10	12	qg62	figs-metonymy	Σοδόμοις & ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city	Jesus uses the name of the city, **Sodom**, to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	10	12	l569	figs-explicit	Σοδόμοις & ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city	Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the city of **Sodom** because the people in it were so wicked. The implication is that it must therefore be an extremely serious offense to reject the messengers of the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom, even though he destroyed their city because they were so wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	13	sf42	figs-apostrophe	οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά!	1	Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida!	Jesus is speaking to two cities that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about those cities. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the disciples whom he is sending out. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Chorazin and Bethsaida are two of the cities whose people God will judge severely for rejecting my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 LUK	10	13	l570	figs-idiom	οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά!	1	Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida!	See how you translated this phrase in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “how terrible it will be for you, Chorazin and Bethsaida!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	10	13	l571	figs-metonymy	οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά!	1	Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida!	Jesus is using the names of these cities to refer to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “How terrible it will be for you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	10	13	l572	figs-you	οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά!	1	Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida!	Jesus is addressing an individual city in each of these phrases, so **you** is singular in both cases. However, if you decide to translate this as “you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida,” then **you** would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	10	13	l573	translate-names	Χοραζείν&Βηθσαϊδά!	1	Chorazin … Bethsaida	**Chorazin** and **Bethsaida** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	10	13	mvq5	figs-hypo	ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν&μετενόησαν	1	For if the mighty works that happened in you had happened in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago	Jesus is describing a situation that might have happened in the past but actually did not. He is doing this to express disappointment and regret about what is happening in the present. Be sure to translate this in such a way that your readers will know that this event actually did not happen but they will understand why Jesus is imagining it. Alternate translation: “I can well imagine that if the people of Tyre and Sidon had witnessed the miracles that I performed for you, they would have repented a long time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	10	13	l574	figs-explicit	ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν&μετενόησαν	1	For if the mighty works that happened in you had happened in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago	Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the cities of **Tyre** and **Sidon** because the people in them were so wicked. So the implication is similar to the one about the people of Sodom. Alternate translation: “God destroyed the cities of Tyre and Sidon because they were so wicked. But even the people who lived in those cities would have repented if they had seen the miracles I did in Chorazin and Bethsaida. So the people of Chorazin and Bethsaida certainly should have repented as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	10	13	l573	translate-names	Χοραζείν & Βηθσαϊδά!	1	Chorazin … Bethsaida	**Chorazin** and **Bethsaida** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+LUK	10	13	mvq5	figs-hypo	ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν & μετενόησαν	1	For if the mighty works that happened in you had happened in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago	Jesus is describing a situation that might have happened in the past but actually did not. He is doing this to express disappointment and regret about what is happening in the present. Be sure to translate this in such a way that your readers will know that this event actually did not happen but they will understand why Jesus is imagining it. Alternate translation: “I can well imagine that if the people of Tyre and Sidon had witnessed the miracles that I performed for you, they would have repented a long time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+LUK	10	13	l574	figs-explicit	ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν & μετενόησαν	1	For if the mighty works that happened in you had happened in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago	Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the cities of **Tyre** and **Sidon** because the people in them were so wicked. So the implication is similar to the one about the people of Sodom. Alternate translation: “God destroyed the cities of Tyre and Sidon because they were so wicked. But even the people who lived in those cities would have repented if they had seen the miracles I did in Chorazin and Bethsaida. So the people of Chorazin and Bethsaida certainly should have repented as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	13	l575	figs-metonymy	Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι	1	Tyre and Sidon	Jesus uses the names of these cities to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	10	13	l577	figs-youdual	αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν	1	the mighty works that happened in you	Since Jesus is addressing two cities, **you** would be dual here if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 LUK	10	13	it4x	translate-symaction	ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ καθήμενοι μετενόησαν	1	they would have repented … sitting in sackcloth and ashes	Jesus is saying that the people of Tyre and Sidon would have performed these actions, which are signs of humility and sorrow, to show that they were very sorry for committing their sins. Alternate translation: “they would have shown how sorry they were for their sins … by sitting on the ground wearing rough clothes and putting ashes on their heads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-LUK	10	14	l578	figs-metonymy	Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται&ἢ ὑμῖν	1	it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you	Jesus uses the names of these cities, **Tyre** and **Sidon**, to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	10	14	l578	figs-metonymy	Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται & ἢ ὑμῖν	1	it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you	Jesus uses the names of these cities, **Tyre** and **Sidon**, to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	10	14	ikt3	figs-explicit	Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται ἐν τῇ κρίσει ἢ ὑμῖν	1	it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you	Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the cities of Tyre and Sidon because the people in them were so wicked. The implication, as in the case of Sodom, is that it must therefore be an extremely grave offense to reject the messengers of the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon, even though he destroyed their cities because they were so wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	14	l579	figs-explicit	Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται ἐν τῇ κρίσει ἢ ὑμῖν	1	it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you	It may be helpful to state clearly the reason why God will judge Chorazin and Bethsaida. Alternate translation: “because you did not repent and believe in me even though you saw me do miracles, God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	14	txw5	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ κρίσει	1	at the judgment	The disciples would have understood that Jesus was referring to the time when God will bring final judgment. Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ LUK	10	15	bjh5	figs-activepassive	ἕως τοῦ ᾍδου καταβήσῃ	1
 LUK	10	15	l588	figs-explicit	ἕως τοῦ ᾍδου καταβήσῃ	1	You will be brought down as far as Hades	It may be helpful to state clearly the reason why God will judge Capernaum. Alternate translation: “God is going to punish you severely because you did not repent and believe in me, even though you saw me do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	16	i786	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἀκούων ὑμῶν, ἐμοῦ ἀκούει	1	The one who listens to you listens to me	You could translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “When someone listens to you, it is as if they were listening to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	10	16	q56b	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἀθετῶν ὑμᾶς, ἐμὲ ἀθετεῖ	1	the one who rejects you rejects me	You could also translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “when someone rejects you, it is as if they were rejecting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	10	16	g3fx	figs-metaphor	ὁ&ἐμὲ ἀθετῶν, ἀθετεῖ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	3	the one who rejects me rejects the one who sent me	You could also translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “when someone rejects me, it is as if they were rejecting the one who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	10	16	g3fx	figs-metaphor	ὁ & ἐμὲ ἀθετῶν, ἀθετεῖ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	3	the one who rejects me rejects the one who sent me	You could also translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “when someone rejects me, it is as if they were rejecting the one who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	10	16	eus8	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	the one who sent me	This refers implictly to God, who appointed Jesus for this special task. Alternate translation: “God who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	17	m7nh	figs-explicit	ὑπέστρεψαν δὲ οἱ ἑβδομήκοντα δύο	1	then the 72 returned	Some languages will need to say that the 72 actually went out first, as UST does. Alternate translation: “So the 72 disciples went out and did as Jesus had told them to do, and then they returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	17	prj8	translate-textvariants	ἑβδομήκοντα δύο	1	72	As in [10:1](../10/01.md), see the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to say **72** or “70” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
@@ -1701,8 +1701,8 @@ LUK	10	22	e47e	figs-activepassive	πάντα μοι παρεδόθη ὑπὸ τ
 LUK	10	22	l600	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς γινώσκει τίς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς, εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ	1	no one knows who the Son is except the Father	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only the Father knows who the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 LUK	10	22	six4		γινώσκει τίς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς	1	knows who the Son is	Here, the Greek word translated **knows** means to know from personal experience. God the Father knows Jesus in this way. Alternate translation: “is acquainted with the Son” or “is acquainted with me”
 LUK	10	22	xm3s	figs-123person	γινώσκει τίς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς	1	knows who the Son is	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “knows who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-LUK	10	22	fp68	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς&ὁ Πατήρ	1	the Son … the Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-LUK	10	22	rkt2	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς γινώσκει&τίς ἐστιν ὁ Πατὴρ, εἰ μὴ ὁ Υἱὸς	1	no one knows … who the Father is except the Son	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only the Son knows … who the Father is” or “only I know … who the Father is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+LUK	10	22	fp68	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς & ὁ Πατήρ	1	the Son … the Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+LUK	10	22	rkt2	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς γινώσκει & τίς ἐστιν ὁ Πατὴρ, εἰ μὴ ὁ Υἱὸς	1	no one knows … who the Father is except the Son	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only the Son knows … who the Father is” or “only I know … who the Father is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 LUK	10	22	zg14		γινώσκει	1	knows … who the Father is	Here the Greek word translated **knows** means to know from personal experience. Jesus knows God his Father in this way. Alternate translation: “is acquainted with”
 LUK	10	22	evw3		ᾧ ἐὰν βούληται ὁ Υἱὸς ἀποκαλύψαι	1	to whomever the Son desires to reveal him	Alternate translation: “whoever the Son wants to introduce the Father to” or (if you translated in the first person) “whoever I want to introduce the Father to”
 LUK	10	23	yd5s	figs-explicit	καὶ στραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς κατ’ ἰδίαν, εἶπεν	1	And having turned around to the disciples, he said privately	The implication is that a crowd was present when the 72 disciples returned to report to Jesus what they had done, and that this crowd heard what Jesus told them and what he prayed to God. But now Jesus is speaking only to the disciples in a way that the crowd will not be able to hear him. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said, in the direction of his disciples so that only they could hear him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ LUK	10	31	xiu7	figs-explicit	ἀντιπαρῆλθεν	1	he passed by on the ot
 LUK	10	32	z3ct	writing-participants	καὶ Λευείτης	1	a Levite also	This expression introduces a new character in the parable. Alternate translation: “there was also a Levite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	10	32	l617	figs-ellipsis	καὶ Λευείτης	1	a Levite also	Jesus is leaving out some words, but they can be inferred from the rest of the story. Alternate translation: “there was also a Levite traveling on that road who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	10	32	lf3l	figs-explicit	καὶ Λευείτης	1	a Levite also	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that a **Levite** was someone who served in the temple. This detail is important to the story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “there was also a Levite, someone who served in the temple, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	10	32	l618	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁμοίως&καὶ Λευείτης κατὰ τὸν τόπον, ἐλθὼν καὶ ἰδὼν ἀντιπαρῆλθεν	1	likewise a Levite also, when he came to the place and saw him, passed by on the other side	Since Levites served in the temple, the audience would assume that this Levite would help the injured man. Since he did not, this phrase could be introduced with a contrasting word to call attention to this unexpected result. Alternate translation: “likewise a Levite also came to the place, but when he saw him, he walked past him on the other side of the road” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+LUK	10	32	l618	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁμοίως & καὶ Λευείτης κατὰ τὸν τόπον, ἐλθὼν καὶ ἰδὼν ἀντιπαρῆλθεν	1	likewise a Levite also, when he came to the place and saw him, passed by on the other side	Since Levites served in the temple, the audience would assume that this Levite would help the injured man. Since he did not, this phrase could be introduced with a contrasting word to call attention to this unexpected result. Alternate translation: “likewise a Levite also came to the place, but when he saw him, he walked past him on the other side of the road” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 LUK	10	32	l619	figs-explicit	ἀντιπαρῆλθεν	1	passed by on the other side	The implication is that the Levite did not help the man. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he did not help the injured man, but instead walked past him on the other side of the road” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	33	z3xt	writing-participants	Σαμαρείτης δέ τις	1	But a certain Samaritan	This expression introduces a new character in the parable. Alternate translation: “But there was also a Samartian who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	10	33	cyp5	figs-explicit	Σαμαρείτης δέ τις	1	But a certain Samaritan	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that Jews and Samaritans were bitter enemies. This detail is important to the story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But there was a Samaritan, whose people were enemies of the Jews, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1763,11 +1763,11 @@ LUK	10	35	z9w5	translate-bmoney	δύο δηνάρια	1	two denarii	See how you
 LUK	10	35	nu6t		τῷ πανδοχεῖ	1	the inn-keeper	Alternate translation: “the person who was in charge of the inn”
 LUK	10	35	f5dz	figs-hypo	ὅ τι ἂν προσδαπανήσῃς, ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ ἐπανέρχεσθαί με ἀποδώσω σοι	1	whatever more you might spend, when I return, I will repay you	The Samaritan is describing a hypothetical situation and saying what he would do if the condition were true. Alternate translation: “if you need to spend more than this, then I will repay you when I return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	10	36	pa6a		τίς τούτων τῶν τριῶν πλησίον δοκεῖ σοι γεγονέναι, τοῦ ἐμπεσόντος εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς?	1	Which of these three do you think became a neighbor to the one who fell among the robbers?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as two questions. Alternate translation: “What do you think? Which of these three men acted like a neighbor to the man whom the robbers attacked?”
-LUK	10	36	v31w		πλησίον&γεγονέναι	1	became a neighbor	Alternate translation: “acted like a neighbor”
+LUK	10	36	v31w		πλησίον & γεγονέναι	1	became a neighbor	Alternate translation: “acted like a neighbor”
 LUK	10	36	kv4z	figs-idiom	τοῦ ἐμπεσόντος εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς	1	the one who fell among the robbers	As in [10:30](../10/30.md), be sure it is clear in your translation that this does not mean that the man fell down accidentally. Rather, this is an idiom. Alternate translation: “to the man whom the robbers attacked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	10	37	ig9x	figs-explicit	πορεύου καὶ σὺ ποίει ὁμοίως	1	You go and do likewise	The implication is that the lawyer has given the correct answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could also indicate what **do likewise** means. Alternate translation: “You are right. In the same way, you should also be a neighbor to people who need your help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	10	38	kv4q	writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ τῷ πορεύεσθαι αὐτοὺς	1	And as they were traveling along	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event. Alternate translation: “The next thing that happened on their journey was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-LUK	10	38	l621	figs-synecdoche	αὐτὸς εἰσῆλθεν&ὑπεδέξατο αὐτόν	1	he entered … welcomed him	Luke says **he** and **him**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “they entered … welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+LUK	10	38	l621	figs-synecdoche	αὐτὸς εἰσῆλθεν & ὑπεδέξατο αὐτόν	1	he entered … welcomed him	Luke says **he** and **him**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “they entered … welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	10	38	i17j	writing-participants	γυνὴ δέ τις ὀνόματι Μάρθα	1	and a certain woman named Martha	This introduces **Martha** as a new character. Your language may have its own way of introducing new people. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “There was a woman named Martha who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	10	39	l623	writing-participants	καὶ τῇδε ἦν ἀδελφὴ καλουμένη Μαριάμ	1	And she had a sister called Mary	This introduces **Mary** as a new character. Alternate translation: “Now Martha had a sister whose name was Mary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	10	39	l624	figs-activepassive	καλουμένη Μαριάμ	1	called Mary	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whose name was Mary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1784,7 +1784,7 @@ LUK	10	41	l630	figs-doublet	μεριμνᾷς καὶ θορυβάζῃ περ
 LUK	10	41	l631	figs-activepassive	μεριμνᾷς καὶ θορυβάζῃ περὶ πολλά	1	you are … troubled about many things	If you do not combine the term for **troubled** with the word **anxious** into a single phrase, you could state **you are anxious and troubled** with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are anxious and letting too many things bother you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	10	42	hqt4	figs-hyperbole	ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία	1	but one thing is necessary	Jesus says **one thing** as an overstatement for emphasis. Other things actually are necessary for life, but this is the most important one. Alternate translation: “but one thing is more important than all the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	10	42	l632	figs-explicit	ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία	1	but one thing is necessary	The implication is that this most important thing is what Jesus is teaching about God, and that Martha should have been concentrating on that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but one thing, what I am teaching about God, is more important than all the others, and you should have been concentrating on that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	10	42	l633		Μαριὰμ&τὴν ἀγαθὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο	1	Mary has chosen the good part	While Jesus spoke just earlier about “one thing” as opposed to “many things,” here he seems to contrast only two things, **the good part** with another part, perhaps not “the bad part,” but at least the part that is not to be preferred. This likely refers to the two activities that Mary and Martha have chosen to pursue while Jesus is present in their home. Alternate translation: “Mary has chosen the better activity”
+LUK	10	42	l633		Μαριὰμ & τὴν ἀγαθὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο	1	Mary has chosen the good part	While Jesus spoke just earlier about “one thing” as opposed to “many things,” here he seems to contrast only two things, **the good part** with another part, perhaps not “the bad part,” but at least the part that is not to be preferred. This likely refers to the two activities that Mary and Martha have chosen to pursue while Jesus is present in their home. Alternate translation: “Mary has chosen the better activity”
 LUK	10	42	nzn8	figs-activepassive	ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς	1	which will not be taken away from her	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. This could mean: (1) “I will not take that opportunity away from her.” (2) “God will not let her lose what she has gained from listening to me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	11	intro	j6le			0		# Luke 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus teaches about prayer (11:1–13)<br>2. Jesus teaches about driving out demons and other subjects (11:14–36)<br>3. Jesus criticizes the Pharisees and experts in the law (11:37–54)<br><br>ULT sets the lines in 11:2–4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The Lord’s Prayer<br><br>When Jesus’ followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.<br><br>### Jonah<br><br>Jonah was an Old Testament prophet whom God sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell the people there to repent. When he went and preached to them, they did repent. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, that is, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. The Bible speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, that is, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### Washing<br><br>The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash those things, but they would wash them anyway. They did that because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that their ancestors had added, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])<br><br>## Important textual issues in this chapter<br><br>### Bread and stone, fish and snake<br><br>In 11:11, some ancient manuscripts have a longer reading, which also is found in Matthew 7:9. It says, “Which father among you, if your son asks for a loaf of bread, will give him a stone? Or a fish, will give him a snake?” ULT uses the shorter reading, which mentions just the fish and snake. This shorter reading is well attested to in many other ancient manuscripts. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 LUK	11	1	fl3j	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ LUK	11	2	l638	figs-youformal	σου	1	your	Here, **your** is singular because Je
 LUK	11	3	q89w	figs-imperative	δίδου ἡμῖν	1	Give us	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	11	3	l639	figs-exclusive	δίδου ἡμῖν	1	Give us	Jesus teaches his disciples to speak to God in the plural because he wants them to pray together in community about the matters he describes. Since the word **us** would refer to the people praying, but not to God, it would be exclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	11	3	s6qp	figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον	1	our daily bread	Jesus refers to **bread**, one common food, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK	11	4	iid7	figs-imperative	ἄφες ἡμῖν&μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς	1	forgive us … may you not lead us	These are imperatives, but they should be translated as polite requests rather than as commands. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” in each case to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please forgive us … please do not lead us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+LUK	11	4	iid7	figs-imperative	ἄφες ἡμῖν & μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς	1	forgive us … may you not lead us	These are imperatives, but they should be translated as polite requests rather than as commands. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” in each case to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please forgive us … please do not lead us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	11	4	wi99	figs-metaphor	παντὶ ὀφείλοντι ἡμῖν	1	everyone who owes us	Jesus uses the image of being in debt to describe having sinned against a person. Alternate translation: “everyone who has sinned against us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	4	db55		μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν	1	may you not lead us into temptation	You could state this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “please lead us away from temptation”
 LUK	11	5	l640	figs-hypo	τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἕξει φίλον, καὶ πορεύσεται πρὸς αὐτὸν μεσονυκτίου	1	Which of you will have a friend, and will go to him at midnight	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach his disciples. Alternate translation: “Suppose one of you went to the house of a friend in the middle of the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
@@ -1816,8 +1816,8 @@ LUK	11	7	vhf7	figs-hyperbole	οὐ δύναμαι ἀναστὰς	1	I am not ab
 LUK	11	8	zl2k	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Even though Jesus began this hypothetical situation by asking “which of you,” that is, “which one of you,” here he is addressing all of the disciples together, not the hypothetical single disciple who might go to a friend’s house at midnight. So here, the word **you** is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	11	8	prx6	figs-abstractnouns	διά γε τὴν ἀναίδειαν αὐτοῦ	1	yet because of his persistence	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **persistence** with a verb such as “continue.” Alternate translation: “because you continue to ask him urgently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	11	8	l647		ἐγερθεὶς	1	he will rise up	Alternate translation: “getting out of bed”
-LUK	11	9	j4ef	figs-you	ὑμῖν λέγω&ὑμῖν&εὑρήσετε&ὑμῖν	1	I say to you … to you … you will find … to you	In the first instance in this verse, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the disciples. In the next three instances, even though Jesus is describing what could be an individual situation of a person praying to God, **you** is also plural because Jesus is still speaking to the disciples as a group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	11	9	l648	figs-explicit	αἰτεῖτε&ζητεῖτε	1	ask … seek	It might be customary in your language to say what a person would be asking for and seeking, and from whom. Alternate translation: “keep asking God for what you need … keep seeking what you need from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	11	9	j4ef	figs-you	ὑμῖν λέγω & ὑμῖν & εὑρήσετε & ὑμῖν	1	I say to you … to you … you will find … to you	In the first instance in this verse, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the disciples. In the next three instances, even though Jesus is describing what could be an individual situation of a person praying to God, **you** is also plural because Jesus is still speaking to the disciples as a group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	11	9	l648	figs-explicit	αἰτεῖτε & ζητεῖτε	1	ask … seek	It might be customary in your language to say what a person would be asking for and seeking, and from whom. Alternate translation: “keep asking God for what you need … keep seeking what you need from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	9	i7j9	figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	it will be given to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” or “you will receive it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	11	9	l1f6	translate-unknown	κρούετε	1	knock	To **knock** at a door means to hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	11	9	l649	figs-metaphor	κρούετε	1	knock	Jesus is using the expression **knock** to mean getting someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “seek God’s attention in prayer” or “let God know you are depending on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1836,7 +1836,7 @@ LUK	11	12	r52w	figs-rquestion	ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσ
 LUK	11	12	l658	figs-hypo	ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ σκορπίον?	1	Or also he will ask for an egg, he will give him a scorpion?	Jesus is also using a hypothetical situation to teach. You could translate his words that way. Alternate translation: “Or suppose a son asked for an egg to eat. His father would not give him a scorpion instead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	11	12	e8hr	translate-unknown	σκορπίον	1	scorpion	A **scorpion** is a small animal related to the spider. It has two claws and a poisonous stinger in its tail. If your readers would not be familiar with scorpions, you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a poisonous stinging animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	11	12	ls05	figs-explicit	σκορπίον	1	a scorpion	In this culture, people did not eat scorpions. So Jesus is saying that a father would not give a son something the son could not eat if the son asked for something that he could eat. If people do eat scorpions in your culture, you could use the name of something that they do not eat, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something he cannot eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	11	13	g99r	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε	1	if you who are evil know	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	11	13	g99r	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε	1	if you who are evil know	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	11	13	aww7	figs-rquestion	πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, δώσει Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν?	1	how much more will the Father who is from heaven give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “your Heavenly Father will even more certainly give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	11	14	uyu1	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 LUK	11	14	afa8	figs-explicit	ἦν ἐκβάλλων δαιμόνιον κωφόν	1	he was driving out a mute demon	The **demon** itself was not unable to speak. Rather, it was preventing the man whom it was controlling from speaking. Alternate translation: “Jesus was driving out a demon that was causing a man to be unable to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1854,8 +1854,8 @@ LUK	11	17	rc4h	figs-metonymy	οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει	1	hou
 LUK	11	17	ze6p	figs-metaphor	πίπτει	1	falls	This image of a house collapsing depicts the destruction of a family when the members fight against each other. Alternate translation: “will ruin the family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	18	jd5t	figs-rquestion	εἰ δὲ καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη, πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ?	1	But if Satan is also divided against himself, how will his kingdom stand?	Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But if Satan is divided against himself, then his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	11	18	l663	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ δὲ καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη, πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ?	1	But if Satan is also divided against himself, how will his kingdom stand?	Jesus is also using a conditional statement to teach. Specifically, he is suggesting a condition that is not true in order to show by the results of the condition that it is certainly not true. Alternate translation: “Suppose Satan and all the other members of his kingdom are fighting among themselves. In that case, his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-LUK	11	18	i74u	figs-synecdoche	εἰ&καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη	1	if Satan is … divided against himself	Here Jesus uses the person of **Satan** to refer to all of the demons who follow Satan, as well as to Satan himself. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are also fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK	11	18	l664	figs-activepassive	εἰ&καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη	1	if Satan is … divided against himself	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are also fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	11	18	i74u	figs-synecdoche	εἰ & καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη	1	if Satan is … divided against himself	Here Jesus uses the person of **Satan** to refer to all of the demons who follow Satan, as well as to Satan himself. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are also fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+LUK	11	18	l664	figs-activepassive	εἰ & καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη	1	if Satan is … divided against himself	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are also fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	11	18	l665	figs-metaphor	πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ?	1	how will his kingdom stand?	Jesus asks how a **kingdom** could **stand** as if it were a building or a person. Alternate translation: “how can his kingdom last?” or “then his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	18	vnt9	figs-explicit	ὅτι λέγετε, ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλειν με τὰ δαιμόνια	1	For you say I drive out the demons by Beelzebul	The implication is that if Jesus is doing this, then Satan’s kingdom is divided against itself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may also be helpful to say who people considered **Beelzebul** to be. Alternate translation: “You are saying that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of the demons. That would mean that Satan is divided against himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	19	i48v	figs-rquestion	εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν?	1	But if I drive out the demons by Beelzebul, by whom do your sons drive them out?	Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I am making demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, then your followers must be using that same power.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1863,7 +1863,7 @@ LUK	11	19	l667	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Β
 LUK	11	19	l668	figs-explicit	εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν?	1	But if I drive out the demons by Beelzebul, by whom do your sons drive them out?	The implication is that the people challenging Jesus would not say that their own followers were using the power of **Beelzebul**, and so they should agree that he is not using that power himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If I am making demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, then your followers must be using that same power. But you do not believe that is true about them. So it must not be true about me, either.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	19	l670	figs-metaphor	οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν	1	your sons	Here, Jesus uses the word **sons** to mean “followers.” Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	19	bs8x	figs-explicit	αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν κριταὶ ἔσονται	1	they will be your judges	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your own followers will say that you are wrong for claiming that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, because they know that they are not using that power themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	11	20	l671	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	11	20	l671	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	11	20	y643	figs-metonymy	ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ	1	the finger of God	This phrase refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	11	20	ja3u	figs-abstractnouns	ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the kingdom of God has come to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	11	21	e4d1	figs-parables	ὅταν ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος	1	When the strong man who is fully armed	To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand. ‘When a strong man who has all his weapons’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@@ -1891,8 +1891,8 @@ LUK	11	25	l681	figs-explicit	εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κ
 LUK	11	26	wqq4	figs-nominaladj	γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου, χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1	the last things of that man become worse than the first things	Here the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition of that person is worse than his original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	11	26	l682	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου	1	that man	Here Jesus is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	11	27	m86m	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-LUK	11	27	pk7m	figs-idiom	ἐπάρασά&φωνὴν&εἶπεν	1	lifting up her voice, said	The idiom **lifting up her voice** means that the woman spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “said in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	11	27	l683	figs-hendiadys	ἐπάρασά&φωνὴν&εἶπεν	1	lifting up her voice, said	The phrase **lifting up her voice** tells how the woman **said** what she did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two terms. Alternate translation: “shouted out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	11	27	pk7m	figs-idiom	ἐπάρασά & φωνὴν & εἶπεν	1	lifting up her voice, said	The idiom **lifting up her voice** means that the woman spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “said in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	11	27	l683	figs-hendiadys	ἐπάρασά & φωνὴν & εἶπεν	1	lifting up her voice, said	The phrase **lifting up her voice** tells how the woman **said** what she did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two terms. Alternate translation: “shouted out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	11	27	vjt7	figs-synecdoche	μακαρία ἡ κοιλία ἡ βαστάσασά σε, καὶ μαστοὶ οὓς ἐθήλασας	1	Blessed is the womb that bore you and the breasts at which you nursed	The woman who is shouting out to Jesus is using some of a woman’s body to refer to the whole woman. Alternate translation: “How good it is for the woman who gave birth to you and nursed you” or “How happy the woman must be who gave birth to you and nursed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	11	27	l684		μακαρία ἡ κοιλία ἡ βαστάσασά σε, καὶ μαστοὶ οὓς ἐθήλασας	1	Blessed is the womb that bore you and the breasts at which you nursed	While this woman is speaking about the mother of Jesus, she is actually pronouncing a blessing on him. Alternate translation: “I bless you, because this world is a better place because your mother brought you into it”
 LUK	11	28	c7e8		μενοῦν, μακάριοι	1	Rather, blessed are	Jesus is not saying that his mother is not blessed. He is saying that the people he is about to describe are even more **blessed**. Alternate translation: “It is even better for”
@@ -1904,13 +1904,13 @@ LUK	11	29	q19q	figs-explicit	σημεῖον ζητεῖ	1	It seeks a sign	If it
 LUK	11	29	l686	grammar-connect-exceptions	σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ	1	a sign will not be given to it except the sign of Jonah	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “God will only give it the sign of Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 LUK	11	29	s29w	figs-activepassive	σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ	1	a sign will not be given to it	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God will not give it a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	11	29	ft6z		τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ	1	the sign of Jonah	Alternate translation: “a miracle like the one that God did for Jonah”
-LUK	11	30	vj9m	figs-explicit	καθὼς&ἐγένετο Ἰωνᾶς τοῖς Νινευείταις σημεῖον, οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1	as Jonah became a sign to the Ninevites, so also will the Son of Man be to this generation	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly in what way Jesus will be a sign to this generation the way Jonah was a sign to the Ninevites. Alternate translation: “God did a miracle to show the people who lived long ago in the city of Nineveh that Jonah was his prophet. He brought Jonah out alive after he had been inside the great fish for three days. In the same way, God will do a miracle to show the people living at this time that I have come from him. He will bring me out alive after I have been in the grave for three days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	11	30	vj9m	figs-explicit	καθὼς & ἐγένετο Ἰωνᾶς τοῖς Νινευείταις σημεῖον, οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1	as Jonah became a sign to the Ninevites, so also will the Son of Man be to this generation	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly in what way Jesus will be a sign to this generation the way Jonah was a sign to the Ninevites. Alternate translation: “God did a miracle to show the people who lived long ago in the city of Nineveh that Jonah was his prophet. He brought Jonah out alive after he had been inside the great fish for three days. In the same way, God will do a miracle to show the people living at this time that I have come from him. He will bring me out alive after I have been in the grave for three days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	30	l687	translate-names	τοῖς Νινευείταις	1	the Ninevites	**Ninevites** describes the people who lived in the ancient city of Nineveh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	11	30	il7p	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	11	30	l732	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	30	ax7q	figs-metonymy	τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1	to this generation	Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “to the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	11	31	t1mw	translate-names	βασίλισσα νότου	1	The Queen of the South	This means the Queen of Sheba. Sheba was a kingdom south of Israel. Alternate translation: “The Queen of Sheba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	11	31	bx3c	translate-symaction	ἐγερθήσεται&μετὰ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	will stand up … with the men of this generation	In this culture, a person would **stand up** to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that this will be the reason for her action. Alternate translation: “will stand up … to give testimony before God against the people who lived at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+LUK	11	31	bx3c	translate-symaction	ἐγερθήσεται & μετὰ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	will stand up … with the men of this generation	In this culture, a person would **stand up** to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that this will be the reason for her action. Alternate translation: “will stand up … to give testimony before God against the people who lived at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	11	31	l688		ἐν τῇ κρίσει	1	in the judgment	Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges people”
 LUK	11	31	l689	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	the men of this generation	Here Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “the people who lived at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	11	31	rnq9	figs-idiom	ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς	1	she came from the ends of the earth	This is an idiom that means she came from very far away. Alternate translation: “she traveled a great distance” or “she came from a faraway place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ LUK	11	31	cwa7	figs-123person	πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε	1	greate
 LUK	11	31	p75h	figs-explicit	πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε	1	greater than Solomon is here	It may be helpful to state explicitly that these people have not listened to Jesus. Alternate translation: “even though I, who am greater than Solomon, am here, the people of this time have not listened to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	32	pkh5	figs-explicit	ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται	1	The men of Nineveh	It may be helpful to state explicitly that **Nineveh** refers to the ancient city of **Nineveh**. Alternate translation: “The people who lived in the ancient city of Nineveh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	32	g456	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες	1	The men	Here, **men** is generic and includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “The people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-LUK	11	32	l693	translate-symaction	ἀναστήσονται&μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	will rise up … with this generation	Here, **rise up** means to stand up. In this culture, people would stand up to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that this will be the reason for their action. Alternate translation: “will stand up … to give testimony before God against the people who lived at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+LUK	11	32	l693	translate-symaction	ἀναστήσονται & μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	will rise up … with this generation	Here, **rise up** means to stand up. In this culture, people would stand up to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that this will be the reason for their action. Alternate translation: “will stand up … to give testimony before God against the people who lived at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	11	32	l694		ἐν τῇ κρίσει	1	in the judgment	Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges people”
 LUK	11	32	uwp5		τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	this generation	Alternate translation: “the people who lived at this time”
 LUK	11	32	l695	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Jesus uses the term **behold** to get the crowd to focus its attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1937,7 +1937,7 @@ LUK	11	34	l700	figs-youcrowd	σου	1	your	Even though Jesus is speaking to the
 LUK	11	34	rm2n	figs-exmetaphor	ὅταν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς ᾖ, καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φωτεινόν ἐστιν	1	When your eye is healthy, your whole body is also illuminated	Jesus is drawing an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “When your eye is healthy, it lets light into your whole body. In the same way, if you are willing to obey God, you will understand and live by his message for every part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 LUK	11	34	td49	figs-exmetaphor	ἐπὰν δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ, καὶ τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινόν	1	But when it is bad, your body is also dark	Jesus continues to draw an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy, it does not let light into any of your body. In the same way, if you are not willing to obey God, you will not understand and live by his message for any part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 LUK	11	34	l701		ἐπὰν δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ	1	But when it is bad	In this context, Jesus is using the term **evil** to contrast with **healthy**, so it means “unhealthy.” Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy”
-LUK	11	35	z96u	figs-exmetaphor	σκόπει&μὴ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστίν	1	beware that the light that is in you is not darkness	Jesus continues to draw an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “it would be dangerous for you to think that you could see clearly if you actually could not. In the same way, be careful not to think that you understand and live by God’s message if you really do not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+LUK	11	35	z96u	figs-exmetaphor	σκόπει & μὴ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστίν	1	beware that the light that is in you is not darkness	Jesus continues to draw an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “it would be dangerous for you to think that you could see clearly if you actually could not. In the same way, be careful not to think that you understand and live by God’s message if you really do not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 LUK	11	36	g336	figs-simile	ἔσται φωτεινὸν ὅλον, ὡς ὅταν ὁ λύχνος τῇ ἀστραπῇ φωτίζῃ σε	1	it will all be illuminated, as when the lamp with its brightness illuminates you	Jesus now uses a simile to connect the illustration of the lamp with the extended metaphor of the eye. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of the simile. Alternate translation: “light will come into your whole body. In the same way, if you are willing to obey God, you will be able to understand his message and live by it completely, just as a lamp shines a bright light that allows you to see yourself and everything around you clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 LUK	11	37	h6zz	writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι	1	and when he had spoken	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “And when Jesus had finished saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	11	37	l702		ἐρωτᾷ αὐτὸν Φαρισαῖος	1	a Pharisee asks him	To call attention to a development in the story, Luke uses the present tense in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Pharisee asked him”
@@ -1958,7 +1958,7 @@ LUK	11	42	ans4	figs-explicit	ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ ἡδύοσμον,
 LUK	11	42	p71g	translate-unknown	τὸ ἡδύοσμον, καὶ τὸ πήγανον	1	the mint and the rue	These are the names of herbs. People put just a little bit of their leaves into their food to give it flavor. If your readers would not know what **mint** and **rue** are, you could use the name of herbs that they would know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	11	42	l25z	figs-hyperbole	πᾶν λάχανον	1	every garden herb	This does not mean every **herb** that exists, but every **herb** that the Pharisees were growing in their gardens. Alternate translation: “every other herb in your gardens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	11	42	yk7d		τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the justice and the love of God	Alternate translation: “to make sure that people are treated fairly and compassionately, as God would want”
-LUK	11	42	l707		ταῦτα&κἀκεῖνα	1	these things, and … those things	By **these things**, Jesus means the justice and the love of God. By **those things**, he means devotional practices such as tithing. Your language may have its own way of expressing distinctions like this. Alternate translation: “the latter, and … the former”
+LUK	11	42	l707		ταῦτα & κἀκεῖνα	1	these things, and … those things	By **these things**, Jesus means the justice and the love of God. By **those things**, he means devotional practices such as tithing. Your language may have its own way of expressing distinctions like this. Alternate translation: “the latter, and … the former”
 LUK	11	42	myv2	figs-doublenegatives	κἀκεῖνα μὴ παρεῖναι	1	and not to neglect those things	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative, which consists of a negative particle and a negative verb, as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “while making sure to express your devotion to God as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	11	43	w6pv	figs-idiom	τὴν πρωτοκαθεδρίαν	1	the first seats	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the best seats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	11	43	sz72	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς	1	the greetings	The implication is that people would greet the Pharisees in public by addressing them with honorary titles. Alternate translation: “for people to greet you with special titles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1969,7 +1969,7 @@ LUK	11	44	l709	figs-gendernotations	καὶ οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ περ
 LUK	11	44	h9x7	figs-explicit	οὐκ οἴδασιν	1	do not know it	The implication is that if the Jews walked over a grave, they would become ceremonially unclean because they had come close to a dead body. Unmarked graves would cause them to do that accidentally. Alternate translation: “do not realize that and so become ceremonially unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	44	l710	figs-metaphor	οὐκ οἴδασιν	1	do not know it	Jesus is using the implied ceremonial uncleanness to represent not doing what pleases God. He has just said in [11:42](../11/42.md) that this is really a matter of showing love and justice to others. Alternate translation: “without realizing it and so, because they follow your teaching, they do not do the things that God wants them to do most” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	45	l711		ἀποκριθεὶς δέ τις τῶν νομικῶν λέγει αὐτῷ	1	Then answering one of the lawyers says to him	To call attention to a development in the story, Luke uses the present tense in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Then one of the experts in the Jewish law who was there said to him”
-LUK	11	45	l712	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς&τις τῶν νομικῶν λέγει	1	answering … says	Together the two verbs **answering** and **says** mean that this lawyer was responding to what Jesus had said about the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “one of the lawyers responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	11	45	l712	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & τις τῶν νομικῶν λέγει	1	answering … says	Together the two verbs **answering** and **says** mean that this lawyer was responding to what Jesus had said about the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “one of the lawyers responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	11	45	u1vv	writing-participants	τις τῶν νομικῶν	1	one of the lawyers	This phrase introduces a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “one of the experts in the Jewish law who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	11	45	l713	translate-unknown	τις τῶν νομικῶν	1	one of the lawyers	See how you translated “lawyer” in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “one of the experts in the Jewish law who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	11	45	l714		Διδάσκαλε	1	Teacher	**Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
@@ -1982,18 +1982,18 @@ LUK	11	46	mws4	figs-hyperbole	αὐτοὶ ἑνὶ τῶν δακτύλων ὑ
 LUK	11	47	l717	figs-gendernotations	πατέρες	1	fathers	Jesus is using the term **fathers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	11	48	drs1	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖτε καὶ συνευδοκεῖτε τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν πατέρων ὑμῶν	1	you bear witness and consent to the works of your fathers	The implication is that the Pharisees and experts in the law are not really honoring the prophets whom their ancestors killed when they build elaborate tombs for them. Rather, their ancestors began the job by actually killing them, and now they are finishing the job by burying them. Alternate translation: “you show that you approve of and agree with what your ancestors did when you bury the prophets to finish the job of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	48	l718	figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ὑμῶν	1	your fathers	Jesus is using the term **fathers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-LUK	11	48	l719	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς&οἰκοδομεῖτε	1	you are building	The implication is that the Pharisees and law experts are building tombs for the prophets, as [11:47](../11/47.md) says explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are building tombs for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	11	48	l719	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς & οἰκοδομεῖτε	1	you are building	The implication is that the Pharisees and law experts are building tombs for the prophets, as [11:47](../11/47.md) says explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are building tombs for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	49	by5w		διὰ τοῦτο	1	For this reason	The expression **Because of this** refers to the way that the current generation was effectively continuing the actions of its ancestors, who had killed the prophets. Alternate translation: “Because you are just as hostile to the prophets as your ancestors were”
 LUK	11	49	c97g	figs-personification	καὶ ἡ σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ εἶπεν	1	the wisdom of God said	Jesus speaks of God’s **wisdom** as if it were able to speak by itself. Alternate translation: “God in his wisdom also said” or “God also wisely said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	11	49	lda4	figs-explicit	ἀποστελῶ εἰς αὐτοὺς προφήτας καὶ ἀποστόλους, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποκτενοῦσιν καὶ διώξουσιν	1	I will send to them prophets and apostles, and some of them they will kill and persecute	Jesus is saying that God was not so foolish or naïve as to think that the Israelites would welcome the message of the prophets and apostles. God in his wisdom knew that they would oppose his messengers. But he sent them anyway, because their message was necessary and important. Alternate translation: “I am going to send prophets and apostles to them with my message, even though I know they will persecute and kill some of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	49	w1fh	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκτενοῦσιν καὶ διώξουσιν	1	kill and persecute	Here, Jesus may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **persecute** may be telling why and how the people would **kill** the prophets. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “persecute even to the point of killing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	11	50	pi6u	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἐκζητηθῇ τὸ αἷμα πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	that the blood of all the prophets that has been shed from the foundation of the world may be required from this generation	The implication seems to be that God will also send prophets to the people living at this time because the people’s violent persecution of the prophets will constitute a conscious, deliberate rejection of God’s message that will provide grounds for definitive judgment. That is because the people of this time should know better than to persecute the prophets, based on the prominent bad example of their own ancestors. Alternate translation: “so that the people living at this time, who should have known better, can be held accountable for the blood that people have shed of all the prophets since the beginning of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	11	50	l720	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἐκζητηθῇ τὸ αἷμα πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	that … may be required from this generation	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God can hold the people living at this time accountable for the blood of all the prophets that people shed from the foundation of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	11	50	l721	figs-activepassive	τὸ αἷμα&τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον	1	the blood … that has been shed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “the blood … that people have shed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	11	50	l721	figs-activepassive	τὸ αἷμα & τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον	1	the blood … that has been shed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “the blood … that people have shed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	11	50	d1rf	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον	1	the blood … that has been shed	Jesus uses the term **the blood … that has been shed** to refer to the deaths of **the prophets** by association with their **blood.** Alternate translation: “the deaths of all the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	11	50	l722		ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου	1	from the foundation of the world	Alternate translation: “since the beginning of the world” or “since God made the world”
 LUK	11	50	l723	figs-metonymy	τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	this generation	Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	11	51	l724	figs-metonymy	αἵματος Ἂβελ&αἵματος Ζαχαρίου	1	the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah	Jesus uses the terms **the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah** to refer to the deaths of these men by association with the shedding of their blood. Alternate translation: “the death of Abel … the death of Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	11	51	l724	figs-metonymy	αἵματος Ἂβελ & αἵματος Ζαχαρίου	1	the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah	Jesus uses the terms **the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah** to refer to the deaths of these men by association with the shedding of their blood. Alternate translation: “the death of Abel … the death of Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	11	51	jes7	translate-names	Ζαχαρίου	1	Zechariah	**Zechariah** is the name of a man. It is not the same man as father of John the Baptist, whose story Luke tells at the beginning of this book. Rather, Jesus means the priest whom King Joash ordered the officials of Judah to stone to death in the temple courtyard after he rebuked the people of Judah for worshipping idols. See [2 Chronicles 24:21](../2ch/24/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	11	51	l726	figs-metaphor	τοῦ οἴκου	1	the house	Jesus calls the temple the **house**, meaning the “house of God,” since God’s presence was in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	51	l727	figs-activepassive	ἐκζητηθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	it will be required from this generation	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will hold the people living at this time accountable for all these deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2016,9 +2016,9 @@ LUK	12	1	x38n		ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς α
 LUK	12	1	f5b9	figs-metaphor	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης, τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἥτις ἐστὶν ὑπόκρισις	1	Guard yourselves from the yeast of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy	Jesus is describing the influence of **the Pharisees** by comparing its spread throughout the community to the way **yeast** spreads through a whole batch of dough or batter. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you do not become hypocrites like the Pharisees, whose behavior is influencing everyone around them, just as yeast spreads through a whole batch of dough” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	1	l736	translate-unknown	ζύμης	1	yeast	The word **yeast** refers to a substance that causes fermentation and expansion within a batch of dough or batter. If your readers would not be familiar with yeast, you could use the name of a substance that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “leaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	2	m1ti	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	But	**But** connects the statement it introduces to the previous statement about the hypocrisy of the Pharisees. In your translation, you could use the term that would show this connection in the way that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-LUK	12	2	e5w4	figs-parallelism	οὐδὲν&συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται	1	nothing is concealed that will not be revealed and hidden that will not be known	These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus uses them together to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if including both phrases might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “people will learn about everything that others try to hide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-LUK	12	2	l737	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν&συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται	1	nothing is concealed that will not be revealed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything that is now concealed will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-LUK	12	2	g46e	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲν&συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται	1	nothing is concealed that will not be revealed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms in place of the two passive forms here, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will reveal everything that people are now concealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	12	2	e5w4	figs-parallelism	οὐδὲν & συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται	1	nothing is concealed that will not be revealed and hidden that will not be known	These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus uses them together to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if including both phrases might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “people will learn about everything that others try to hide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+LUK	12	2	l737	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν & συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται	1	nothing is concealed that will not be revealed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything that is now concealed will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+LUK	12	2	g46e	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲν & συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται	1	nothing is concealed that will not be revealed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms in place of the two passive forms here, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will reveal everything that people are now concealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	2	l738	figs-ellipsis	καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται	1	and hidden that will not be known	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and nothing is hidden that will not be known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	12	2	l739	figs-doublenegatives	καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται	1	and hidden that will not be known	Supplying **nothing** from earlier in the sentence shows that this is a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and everything that is now hidden will be known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	12	2	l740	figs-activepassive	καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται	1	and hidden that will not be known	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms in place of the two passive forms here, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “and God will let everyone know about everything that people are now hiding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2032,7 +2032,7 @@ LUK	12	3	rmx8	translate-unknown	ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων	1	upon the house
 LUK	12	4	m6t7		λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, τοῖς φίλοις μου	1	But I say to you, my friends	Jesus readdresses his disciples to mark a shift in his speech to a new topic, about not being afraid. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you, friends”
 LUK	12	4	l743	figs-metonymy	τὸ σῶμα	1	the body	Jesus speaks about a person by association with **the body**, which is mortal. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	12	4	vc8j		μὴ ἐχόντων περισσότερόν τι ποιῆσαι	1	do not have anything more to do	Alternate translation: “cannot cause any more harm”
-LUK	12	5	fsr4	figs-explicit	φοβήθητε τὸν&ἔχοντα ἐξουσίαν	1	Fear the one who … has authority	The expression **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Fear God, who … has authority” or “Fear God, because he … has authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	12	5	fsr4	figs-explicit	φοβήθητε τὸν & ἔχοντα ἐξουσίαν	1	Fear the one who … has authority	The expression **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Fear God, who … has authority” or “Fear God, because he … has authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	5	us3x		μετὰ τὸ ἀποκτεῖναι, ἔχοντα ἐξουσίαν	1	after having killed	Jesus is not suggesting that God actively kills each person. Alternate translation: “who, after a person dies, has authority”
 LUK	12	5	l744	translate-names	Γέενναν	1	Gehenna	**Gehenna** is the Greek name for a place, the Valley of Hinnom just outside Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	12	5	ric8	figs-metaphor	Γέενναν	1	Gehenna	Jesus uses the name of this place, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2065,10 +2065,10 @@ LUK	12	10	l759	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the
 LUK	12	10	l760	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	10	px39	figs-activepassive	ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	it will be forgiven him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	10	p9g7	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται	1	it will not be forgiven	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will not extend forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	12	11	f2j9	figs-explicit	ὅταν&εἰσφέρωσιν ὑμᾶς	1	when they bring you	The implication is that the opponents of Jesus would do this to his disciples. Alternate translation: “when my opponents bring you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	12	11	f2j9	figs-explicit	ὅταν & εἰσφέρωσιν ὑμᾶς	1	when they bring you	The implication is that the opponents of Jesus would do this to his disciples. Alternate translation: “when my opponents bring you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	11	c1rk	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὰς συναγωγὰς	1	to the synagogues	Jesus is referring to local Jewish tribunals by reference to the place where they met, in **synagogues**. Alternate translation: “to be tried by local Jewish tribunals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	12	11	gm94	figs-doublet	τὰς ἀρχὰς, καὶ τὰς ἐξουσίας	1	the rulers, and the authorities	These two terms mean similar things. Jesus may be using them together for emphasis. He is referring to officials of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the officials whom the Romans have appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-LUK	12	12	l761		τὸ&Ἅγιον Πνεῦμα διδάξει ὑμᾶς&ἃ δεῖ εἰπεῖν	1	the Holy Spirit will teach you … what is necessary to say	Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will tell you … what to say” or “the Holy Spirit will give you … the words to say”
+LUK	12	12	l761		τὸ & Ἅγιον Πνεῦμα διδάξει ὑμᾶς & ἃ δεῖ εἰπεῖν	1	the Holy Spirit will teach you … what is necessary to say	Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will tell you … what to say” or “the Holy Spirit will give you … the words to say”
 LUK	12	12	gz6v	figs-idiom	ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	in that hour	Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “in that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	12	13	i2vi	writing-participants	εἶπεν δέ τις ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου αὐτῷ	1	Then someone from the crowd said to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “Then a man who was there in the crowd said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	12	13	l762		Διδάσκαλε	1	Teacher	**Teacher** is a respectful title. You can translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
@@ -2078,10 +2078,10 @@ LUK	12	14	hmn6	figs-rquestion	τίς με κατέστησεν κριτὴν ἢ
 LUK	12	14	l763	figs-doublet	κριτὴν ἢ μεριστὴν	1	a judge or a mediator	These two terms mean similar things. Jesus may be using them together for emphasis as he rebukes this man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate them with a single word that would carry the meaning of both terms. Alternate translation: “an arbitrator” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	12	14	l764	figs-hendiadys	κριτὴν ἢ μεριστὴν	1	a judge or a mediator	Jesus could also be using these two words to express a single idea. The term **mediator** may explain for what purpose a person was appointed as a **judge**, specifically, to settle disputes. Alternate translation: “a judge who settles disputes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	12	14	l765	figs-youdual	ὑμᾶς	1	you	The term **you** refers to the man and his brother. It would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-LUK	12	15	me49	figs-explicit	εἶπεν&πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he said to them	The implication is that Jesus said what follows to the whole crowd, which included the man who asked about the inheritance. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	12	15	me49	figs-explicit	εἶπεν & πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he said to them	The implication is that Jesus said what follows to the whole crowd, which included the man who asked about the inheritance. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	15	l766	figs-metaphor	ὁρᾶτε	1	See	Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate a need for caution. Alternate translation: “Watch out” or “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	15	ckn2	figs-abstractnouns	πάσης πλεονεξίας	1	all covetousness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the urge to have more things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-LUK	12	15	l767		τῷ περισσεύειν τινὶ&ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ	1	the abounding to him of his possessions	Alternate translation: “the number of things he has”
+LUK	12	15	l767		τῷ περισσεύειν τινὶ & ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ	1	the abounding to him of his possessions	Alternate translation: “the number of things he has”
 LUK	12	16	d37q	figs-parables	εἶπεν δὲ παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτοὺς	1	Then he spoke to them a parable	Jesus now gives a brief illustration to teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then he told them this story to help them understand this teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	12	16	gc9i	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	to them	The pronoun **them** refers to the whole crowd, to which Jesus is continuing to speak. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	12	16	nkw9		εὐφόρησεν	1	yielded abundantly	Alternate translation: “produced a very good harvest”
@@ -2100,17 +2100,17 @@ LUK	12	20	xgr9	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν 
 LUK	12	20	vyn1	figs-rquestion	ἃ δὲ ἡτοίμασας, τίνι ἔσται?	1	what you have prepared, whose will it be?	God does not expect the man to tell him who will inherit his things. Rather, God is using the question as a teaching tool, to make the man realize that he could not count on possessing those things, and so he was wrong to put his confidence in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “the things you have stored up will belong to someone else!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	12	21	m47i		ὁ θησαυρίζων	1	the one who stores up treasure	Alternate translation: “a person who saves up valuable things”
 LUK	12	21	fst9	figs-metaphor	μὴ εἰς Θεὸν πλουτῶν	1	is not rich toward God	Jesus uses the term **rich** to mean using one’s time and possessions for the things that are important to God. Alternate translation: “has not invested in the things that matter to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	12	22	ihk2	figs-explicit	εἶπεν&πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ	1	he said to his disciples	Since Peter asks in [12:41](../12/41.md) whether Jesus has been speaking only to the disciples, or also to the crowd as well, the implication is that Jesus did not say these things to his disciples privately, as in [12:1–12](../12/01.md), but rather to them publicly so that the crowd could also hear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, as the crowd was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	12	22	ihk2	figs-explicit	εἶπεν & πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ	1	he said to his disciples	Since Peter asks in [12:41](../12/41.md) whether Jesus has been speaking only to the disciples, or also to the crowd as well, the implication is that Jesus did not say these things to his disciples privately, as in [12:1–12](../12/01.md), but rather to them publicly so that the crowd could also hear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, as the crowd was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	22	vim6	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1	For this reason	By **this** Jesus means the lesson of the story, that it is foolish to be overly concerned about having a lot of food and possessions. Alternate translation: “In light of what this story teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	22	cy4e		λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε	1	I say to you, do not worry	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I want you to know that you should not worry”
 LUK	12	22	u1cf		τῷ σώματι τί ἐνδύσησθε	1	about your body, what you will wear	Alternate translation: “about having clothes to put on your body”
 LUK	12	23	l775	figs-ellipsis	ἡ γὰρ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστιν τῆς τροφῆς, καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἐνδύματος	1	life is more than food, and the body than clothes	Jesus leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Life is more than food, and the body is more than clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	12	23	y4qa		ἡ γὰρ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστιν τῆς τροφῆς, καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἐνδύματος	1	life is more than food, and the body than clothes	This is a general statement of value. Alternate translation: “There is more to life than the food you eat, and there is more to the body than the clothes that you wear”
 LUK	12	24	zx97	translate-unknown	τοὺς κόρακας	1	the ravens	The word **ravens** refers to large black birds, and it can apply either to crows or to actual **ravens**. If your readers would not be familiar with either of those birds, you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “the birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	12	24	l776	figs-doublet	οὐκ&ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη	1	neither storeroom nor barn	These two words mean similar things. Jesus may be using them together to express a general meaning. Alternate translation: “no place to store food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-LUK	12	24	y4t1	translate-unknown	οὐκ&ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη	1	neither storeroom nor barn	These are places where food is stored. If your readers would not be familiar with either term, you could use a more general one. Alternate translation: “no place to store food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+LUK	12	24	l776	figs-doublet	οὐκ & ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη	1	neither storeroom nor barn	These two words mean similar things. Jesus may be using them together to express a general meaning. Alternate translation: “no place to store food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+LUK	12	24	y4t1	translate-unknown	οὐκ & ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη	1	neither storeroom nor barn	These are places where food is stored. If your readers would not be familiar with either term, you could use a more general one. Alternate translation: “no place to store food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	24	i238	figs-exclamations	πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὑμεῖς διαφέρετε τῶν πετεινῶν!	1	How much more valuable you are than the birds!	This is an exclamation, not a question. Jesus uses the exclamation to emphasize the point he wants his listeners to realize. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You need to realize how much more valuable people are to God than birds.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-LUK	12	25	lsx8	figs-rquestion	τίς&ἐξ ὑμῶν μεριμνῶν, δύναται ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ προσθεῖναι πῆχυν?	1	which of you by being anxious is able to add a cubit to his lifespan?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “no one can make his life any longer by being anxious!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+LUK	12	25	lsx8	figs-rquestion	τίς & ἐξ ὑμῶν μεριμνῶν, δύναται ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ προσθεῖναι πῆχυν?	1	which of you by being anxious is able to add a cubit to his lifespan?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “no one can make his life any longer by being anxious!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	12	25	n286	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ προσθεῖναι πῆχυν	1	add a cubit to his lifespan	Jesus is speaking of the **lifespan** as if it were measured in length rather than in time. Alternate translation: “make his life any longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	25	l777	translate-unknown	πῆχυν	1	a cubit	A **cubit** is a measure of length equal to about half a meter or about a foot and a half. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this length using the measure that is customary your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	25	l778	figs-explicit	πῆχυν	1	a cubit	The implication may be that since a **cubit** is a relatively short distance, it represents only a short time. Alternate translation: “even a little bit” or “even a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2122,8 +2122,8 @@ LUK	12	27	s8d3	translate-unknown	τὰ κρίνα	1	the lilies	The word **lilies
 LUK	12	27	u3mf	translate-unknown	οὐδὲ νήθει	1	neither do they spin	In this context, to **spin** means to make thread or yarn for cloth. It does not mean to turn in a circle while standing in one place. If your readers might be confused by the term, you could explain the meaning with a phrase. Alternate translation: “and they do not make thread for cloth” or “and they do not make yarn for cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	27	l781		λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν	1	But I say to you, not even Solomon	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that not even Solomon”
 LUK	12	27	nug5	figs-abstractnouns	Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ	1	Solomon in all his glory	The abstract noun **glory** could mean: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth.” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-LUK	12	28	rur9	figs-metaphor	εἰ&ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	12	28	l783	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	12	28	rur9	figs-metaphor	εἰ & ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	12	28	l783	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	12	28	l784	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον	1	the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	While Jesus uses a term that typically means **grass**, in this context he must implicitly mean wild plants in general, since he is referring back to the wild lilies he has just mentioned. So you could express this with a general term in your translation. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	28	l785	translate-unknown	ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον	1	the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	It would be particularly appropriate to use a general term in your translation if your readers would not know what **grass** is. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	28	t9am	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον	1	the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “the grass in the field, which exists today, but tomorrow someone throws it into an oven” or, if you decided to say “plants,” “the wild plants, which exist today, but tomorrow someone throws them into an oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2132,7 +2132,7 @@ LUK	12	28	l787	figs-ellipsis	πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς	1	how much more
 LUK	12	28	gr4m	figs-exclamations	πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς	1	how much more you	This is an exclamation, not a question. Jesus is emphasizing that God will certainly take care of people even better than he takes care of grass. Alternate translation: “God will certainly clothe you even better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 LUK	12	29	q67w		ὑμεῖς μὴ ζητεῖτε τί φάγητε, καὶ τί πίητε	1	do not seek what you might eat and what you might drink	The word **seek** has a specific meaning here. It does not mean to look for these things because they have been lost. Alternate translation: “do not concentrate on what you will eat and drink”
 LUK	12	30	g8jy	figs-explicit	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κόσμου	1	all the nations of the world	The term **nations** means non-Jewish people groups. The term **all** is not a generalization for emphasis. Jesus is saying that this is the way of life for any group that does not know God. Alternate translation: “all the people groups who do not know God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	12	30	ns35	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὑμῶν&ὁ Πατὴρ	1	your Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+LUK	12	30	ns35	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὑμῶν & ὁ Πατὴρ	1	your Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 LUK	12	31	gvj9		ζητεῖτε τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ	1	seek his kingdom	As in [12:29](../12/29.md), the word **seek** has a specific meaning here. Alternate translation: “concentrate on God’s kingdom”
 LUK	12	31	jni1	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	these things will be added to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will also give you these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	31	l788	figs-explicit	ταῦτα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	these things will be added to you	In context, the expression **these things** refers to food and clothing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God will also give you the food and clothing that you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2147,10 +2147,10 @@ LUK	12	33	h6qw		θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον	1	unfailing treasure	Y
 LUK	12	33	t1fb	figs-metonymy	ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει	1	where thief does not come near	Jesus speaks of a thief coming **near** to wealth to mean stealing it. Alternate translation: “where no thief ever steals anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	12	33	e2nj	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει	1	nor moth destroy	Jesus leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and where no moth ever destroys anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	12	33	u258	translate-unknown	σὴς	1	moth	A **moth** is a small insect that eats holes in fabric. If your readers would not know what a **moth** is, you could use the name of a different insect they would recognize that destroys materials, such as an ant or termite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	12	34	ad29	figs-metaphor	ὅπου&ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν, ἐκεῖ καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται	1	where your treasure is, there your heart will be also	Jesus speaks of a person’s **heart** and **treasure** being in the same location. Alternate translation: “the things you value are the things you will think about and try to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	12	34	l790	figs-metaphor	ὅπου&ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν	1	where your treasure is	Jesus uses the word **treasure** to mean what a person values. Alternate translation: “the things you value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	12	34	ad29	figs-metaphor	ὅπου & ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν, ἐκεῖ καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται	1	where your treasure is, there your heart will be also	Jesus speaks of a person’s **heart** and **treasure** being in the same location. Alternate translation: “the things you value are the things you will think about and try to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	12	34	l790	figs-metaphor	ὅπου & ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν	1	where your treasure is	Jesus uses the word **treasure** to mean what a person values. Alternate translation: “the things you value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	34	r26g	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται	1	your heart will be also	Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “are the things you will think about and want to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	12	34	l791	figs-you	ὑμῶν&ὑμῶν	1	your … your	Jesus is speaking of each individual person’s values and desires, but **your** is plural because he is addressing the disciples as a group. You could use the singular form of **your** in your translation if that is what your language would do in a context like this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	12	34	l791	figs-you	ὑμῶν & ὑμῶν	1	your … your	Jesus is speaking of each individual person’s values and desires, but **your** is plural because he is addressing the disciples as a group. You could use the singular form of **your** in your translation if that is what your language would do in a context like this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	12	35	c4j1	figs-parables	ἔστωσαν ὑμῶν αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι	1	Let your loins be girded	To help his disciples understand what he has been teaching, Jesus provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave his disciples this illustration to help them understand. ‘Wrap the lower part of your robe around your hips’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	12	35	nk2x	translate-unknown	ἔστωσαν ὑμῶν αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι	1	let your loins be girded	People in this culture wore long flowing robes. They would wrap the lower part of the robe around their hips to keep it out of the way while they engaged in physical activity. Alternate translation: “Wrap the lower part of your robe around your hips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	35	l792	figs-activepassive	ἔστωσαν ὑμῶν αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι	1	let your loins be girded	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Wrap the lower part of your robe around your hips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2169,7 +2169,7 @@ LUK	12	37	xiv7		οὓς ἐλθὼν, ὁ Κύριος εὑρήσει γρηγ
 LUK	12	37	l801		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	12	37	s3yd	figs-explicit	παρελθὼν, διακονήσει αὐτοῖς	1	he will come and serve them	The implication is that, because the servants were faithful in their tasks and they were ready to serve their master when he arrived, the master will now reward them by serving them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will come and serve them as a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	38	l802		κἂν ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ κἂν ἐν τῇ τρίτῃ φυλακῇ ἔλθῃ	1	Even if he comes in the second, or even in the third watch	Alternate translation: “Even if he comes in the second or third watch of the night”
-LUK	12	38	x25s	translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ&φυλακῇ	1	in the second … watch	The **second watch** of the night was from 9:00 PM until midnight. Alternate translation: “late at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+LUK	12	38	x25s	translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ & φυλακῇ	1	in the second … watch	The **second watch** of the night was from 9:00 PM until midnight. Alternate translation: “late at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	38	qa35	translate-unknown	κἂν ἐν τῇ τρίτῃ φυλακῇ	1	or even in the third watch	The **third watch** was from midnight until 3:00 AM. Alternate translation: “or even after midnight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	38	l803		καὶ εὕρῃ οὕτως, μακάριοί εἰσιν ἐκεῖνοι	1	and finds them thus, blessed are those	Alternate translation: “how good it will be for servants whom he finds waiting for him” or “how good it will be for servants who are ready when he returns”
 LUK	12	39	l804		τοῦτο δὲ γινώσκετε	1	But understand this	Jesus says this to encourage his disciples to think carefully about what he is going to tell them. Alternate translation: “Now I want you to think carefully about this”
@@ -2194,8 +2194,8 @@ LUK	12	43	h35t		ὃν ἐλθὼν, ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσε
 LUK	12	44	i2cq		ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	12	44	y47s		ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὐτοῦ καταστήσει αὐτόν	1	he will appoint him over all his possessions	Alternate translation: “he will put him in charge of all of his property”
 LUK	12	45	cu5k	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, χρονίζει ὁ κύριός μου ἔρχεσθαι	1	But if that servant says in his heart, ‘My master delays to return’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if that servant thinks to himself that his master is going to come back later than he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	12	45	l812	figs-hypo	ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ&καὶ ἄρξηται	1	But if that servant says in his heart … and begins	The illustration that Jesus is using involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose that servant thinks to himself … and suppose he begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	12	45	aku7	figs-metaphor	εἴπῃ&ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	says in his heart	Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation: “thinks to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	12	45	l812	figs-hypo	ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ & καὶ ἄρξηται	1	But if that servant says in his heart … and begins	The illustration that Jesus is using involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose that servant thinks to himself … and suppose he begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+LUK	12	45	aku7	figs-metaphor	εἴπῃ & ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	says in his heart	Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation: “thinks to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	45	l813		χρονίζει ὁ κύριός μου ἔρχεσθαι	1	My master delays to return	Alternate translation: “My master is going to come back later than he said”
 LUK	12	45	juc5	figs-merism	τοὺς παῖδας καὶ τὰς παιδίσκας	1	the male servants and the female servants	Jesus is using the two types of servants to mean all of the master’s servants. Alternate translation: “all the other servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 LUK	12	46	l814	figs-hypo	ἥξει ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου ἐκείνου	1	the master of that servant will arrive	If you translated the previous verse as a hypothetical condition, you could translate this verse as the result of that condition. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then the master of that servant will arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
@@ -2210,8 +2210,8 @@ LUK	12	47	aj41		τὸ θέλημα τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ	1	the will
 LUK	12	47	im3v	figs-activepassive	δαρήσεται πολλάς	1	will be beaten much	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “his master will punish him severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	48	l819	figs-hypo	ὁ δὲ μὴ γνοὺς, ποιήσας δὲ ἄξια πληγῶν, δαρήσεται ὀλίγας	1	But the one who did not know, and did things worthy of blows will be beaten little	Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation. It may be helpful to use two sentences if you translate it that way. Alternate translation: “But suppose a servant did not know what his master wanted him to do, and suppose he did things that deserved punishment. Then his master would punish him lightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	12	48	nn9c	figs-activepassive	δαρήσεται ὀλίγας	1	will be beaten little	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “his master would punish him lightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	12	48	qg96	figs-parallelism	παντὶ&ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν	1	everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him, and to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him	These two clauses mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “if someone entrusts many resources to a person, he will expect that person to produce much from those resources” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-LUK	12	48	ehu9	figs-activepassive	παντὶ&ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ	1	everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will require more of everyone to whom he has given much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	12	48	qg96	figs-parallelism	παντὶ & ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν	1	everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him, and to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him	These two clauses mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “if someone entrusts many resources to a person, he will expect that person to produce much from those resources” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+LUK	12	48	ehu9	figs-activepassive	παντὶ & ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ	1	everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will require more of everyone to whom he has given much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	48	ir7m	figs-activepassive	ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν	1	to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will ask even more of the one to whom he has given much property to care for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	49	qy62	figs-metaphor	πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	I came to throw fire upon the earth	Jesus is speaking of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52–53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	49	l820	figs-metonymy	τὴν γῆν	1	the earth	Jesus says **the earth** to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2219,16 +2219,16 @@ LUK	12	49	ygv3	figs-exclamations	τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη	1	how
 LUK	12	49	ygx3	figs-metaphor	τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη	1	how I wish that it were already kindled	This exclamation continues the metaphor of **fire** as conflict. Alternate translation: “how I wish that people were already taking sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	12	49	l821	figs-activepassive	ἤδη ἀνήφθη	1	it were already kindled	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the fire were already burning” or “people were already taking sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	50	k4e8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Jesus uses the word **But** to indicate that he cannot do what the previous sentence describes until after he does what this sentence describes. Alternate translation: “But first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-LUK	12	50	hn1j	figs-metaphor	βάπτισμα&ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι	1	I have a baptism to be baptized with	Jesus speaks of **baptism** to describe how he must suffer. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “I must be overwhelmed by suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	12	50	l822	figs-activepassive	βάπτισμα&ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι	1	I have a baptism to be baptized with	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “suffering must overwhelm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	12	50	hn1j	figs-metaphor	βάπτισμα & ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι	1	I have a baptism to be baptized with	Jesus speaks of **baptism** to describe how he must suffer. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “I must be overwhelmed by suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	12	50	l822	figs-activepassive	βάπτισμα & ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι	1	I have a baptism to be baptized with	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “suffering must overwhelm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	50	r2yj	figs-exclamations	πῶς συνέχομαι ἕως ὅτου τελεσθῇ	1	how I am distressed until it is completed	This exclamation emphasizes how distressed Jesus is. Alternate translation: “I am terribly distressed and will continue to be distressed until my suffering is completed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 LUK	12	50	l823	figs-activepassive	πῶς συνέχομαι	1	how I am distressed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “this suffering will continue to distress me terribly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	50	l824	figs-activepassive	ἕως ὅτου τελεσθῇ	1	until it is completed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “until I have endured all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	12	51	s32r	figs-rquestion	δοκεῖτε ὅτι εἰρήνην παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ?	1	Do you think that I came to give peace on the earth?	Jesus is not asking the people in the crowd to tell him what they think. He is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not think that I came to bring peace on the earth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	12	51	l825	figs-metonymy	δοκεῖτε ὅτι εἰρήνην παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ	1	Do you think that I came to give peace on the earth	Jesus says **the earth** to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “Do you think that I came to make peace between people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	12	51	l826	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην&δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ	1	to give peace on the earth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to make people get along with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-LUK	12	51	l827	figs-ellipsis	οὐχί&ἀλλ’ ἢ διαμερισμόν	1	No … but rather division	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “No … I came to bring division instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	12	51	np4v	figs-abstractnouns	οὐχί&ἀλλ’ ἢ διαμερισμόν	1	No … but rather division	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **division** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “No … my coming will cause people to oppose each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+LUK	12	51	l826	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην & δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ	1	to give peace on the earth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to make people get along with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+LUK	12	51	l827	figs-ellipsis	οὐχί & ἀλλ’ ἢ διαμερισμόν	1	No … but rather division	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “No … I came to bring division instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+LUK	12	51	np4v	figs-abstractnouns	οὐχί & ἀλλ’ ἢ διαμερισμόν	1	No … but rather division	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **division** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “No … my coming will cause people to oppose each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	12	51	l828		λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus uses this expression to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples and the crowd. Alternate translation: “I want you to understand”
 LUK	12	52	vrt5	figs-metonymy	πέντε ἐν ἑνὶ οἴκῳ	1	five in one house	Jesus uses the term **house** to refer to people who live together in a house, that is, to a family. Alternate translation: “five members of the same family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	12	52	l829	figs-activepassive	διαμεμερισμένοι	1	divided	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who will take sides against one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2250,7 +2250,7 @@ LUK	12	56	y3yj	figs-rquestion	τὸν καιρὸν δὲ τοῦτον, πῶς
 LUK	12	57	w8rz	figs-rquestion	τί δὲ καὶ ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν, οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον?	1	And why do you not even judge for yourselves what is right?	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You ought to discern on your own what is right.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	12	58	y75j	figs-hypo	ὡς γὰρ ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου ἐπ’ ἄρχοντα	1	For as you are going with your adversary to the magistrate	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the crowd. Alternate translation: “Suppose you owed someone money, and suppose they were taking you to court to collect it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	12	58	l838	figs-parables	ὡς γὰρ ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου ἐπ’ ἄρχοντα	1	For as you are going with your adversary to the magistrate	This hypothetical situation is also an illustration designed to help the people understand that they should be welcoming Jesus. Just as the debtor is going to be judged imminently, God is going to judge them imminently based on their responses to Jesus, and so they should make a positive response now, before it is too late. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave the crowd this illustration to help them understand. ‘Suppose you owed someone money, and suppose he was taking you to court to collect it’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
-LUK	12	58	f1ea	figs-youcrowd	ὑπάγεις&σου&σε	1	you are going … your … you	Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular throughout this verse. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK	12	58	f1ea	figs-youcrowd	ὑπάγεις & σου & σε	1	you are going … your … you	Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular throughout this verse. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	12	58	t4v8	translate-unknown	τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου	1	your adversary	In the context of this story, the term **adversary** means specifically an opponent in a legal proceeding. You could translate it with the equivalent term in your language. Alternatively, since the next verse indicates that the **adversary** is trying to collect a debt, you could describe him in a way that indicates that. Alternate translation: “your opponent” or “your creditor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	58	e7hz	translate-unknown	ἄρχοντα	1	the magistrate	A **magistrate** is a general term for a person in legal authority. You can translate it with the equivalent general term in your language. Alternate translation: “the official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	58	b7sh	figs-activepassive	ἀπηλλάχθαι ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	to be released from him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to settle the matter out of court” or “to have him forgive your debt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2261,8 +2261,8 @@ LUK	12	59	l841	figs-youcrowd	λέγω σοι	1	I say to you	Even though Jesus is
 LUK	12	59	i124	translate-bmoney	καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον λεπτὸν	1	the very last lepton	A **lepton** was the smallest and least valuable coin in circulation in this place and time. It was equivalent to about a tenth of an hour’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “the very last penny” or “every bit of money that your creditor demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 LUK	13	intro	xaa2			0		# Luke 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus teaches with parables (13:1–30)<br>2. Jesus speaks about Herod and Jerusalem (13:31–35)<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Unknown events<br><br>The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about, but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written. These events are Pilate executing some Galileans in the temple, 13:1–2, and 18 people being killed when a tower collapsed in Jerusalem, 13:4. In your translation, you should tell your readers no more than what Luke tells about what happened. Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last” (Luke 13:30)
 LUK	13	1	t1fi	grammar-connect-time-background	δέ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	13	1	l842	writing-participants	παρῆσαν&τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ, ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ	1	some were present at that time who were reporting to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “there were some people present at that time who were telling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	13	1	wg2k	figs-explicit	παρῆσαν&τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ	1	at that time	This implicitly means while Jesus was still teaching the crowds, as Luke said he was doing in [11:54](../11/54.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while he was still teaching the crowds, some of them were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	13	1	l842	writing-participants	παρῆσαν & τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ, ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ	1	some were present at that time who were reporting to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “there were some people present at that time who were telling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	13	1	wg2k	figs-explicit	παρῆσαν & τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ	1	at that time	This implicitly means while Jesus was still teaching the crowds, as Luke said he was doing in [11:54](../11/54.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while he was still teaching the crowds, some of them were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	13	1	l843	figs-metaphor	ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν	1	whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices	Luke is speaking about this event to indicate that the **blood** of the Galileans was shed at the same time as the blood of their animal **sacrifices**. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate had killed while they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	13	1	fj2c	figs-metonymy	ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν	1	whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices	Luke uses the term **blood** to refer to the death of these Galileans. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate had killed while they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	13	1	l844	figs-metonymy	ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν	1	whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices	Pilate likely did not kill these Galileans personally. Rather, he ordered his soldiers to kill them. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate’s soldiers had killed as they were offering sacrifices at the temple” or “whom Pilate had ordered his soldiers to kill as they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2286,12 +2286,12 @@ LUK	13	6	x42j	figs-activepassive	συκῆν εἶχέν τις πεφυτευμ
 LUK	13	6	l851	translate-unknown	συκῆν	1	a fig tree	A **fig tree** is a type of fruit tree that is common in the land of Israel. If your readers would not know what a fig tree is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a fruit tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	13	6	l852	writing-background	ἦλθεν ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν αὐτῇ, καὶ οὐχ εὗρεν	1	he came seeking fruit on it, but did not find any	This is background information that helps listeners understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “he went to see if there were any figs on the tree, but there were none” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	13	6	l853	figs-go	ἦλθεν ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	he came seeking fruit on it	Here your language might use a form of “go” rather than a form of “come.” Alternate translation: “he went to see if there were any figs on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-LUK	13	7	l854	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν&πρὸς τὸν ἀμπελουργόν, ἰδοὺ, τρία ἔτη ἀφ’ οὗ ἔρχομαι ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν τῇ συκῇ ταύτῃ, καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκω. ἔκκοψον αὐτήν, ἵνα τί καὶ τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ?	1	he said to the gardener, ‘Behold, for three years I came seeking fruit on this fig tree and did not find any. Cut it down. Why is it even idling the ground?’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told the gardener to pay attention, that he had been coming for three years to look for fruit on the fig tree, but he had not found any, and so the gardener should cut the tree down because it was keeping the ground from being productive.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+LUK	13	7	l854	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & πρὸς τὸν ἀμπελουργόν, ἰδοὺ, τρία ἔτη ἀφ’ οὗ ἔρχομαι ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν τῇ συκῇ ταύτῃ, καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκω. ἔκκοψον αὐτήν, ἵνα τί καὶ τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ?	1	he said to the gardener, ‘Behold, for three years I came seeking fruit on this fig tree and did not find any. Cut it down. Why is it even idling the ground?’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told the gardener to pay attention, that he had been coming for three years to look for fruit on the fig tree, but he had not found any, and so the gardener should cut the tree down because it was keeping the ground from being productive.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	13	7	l855	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	The man uses the term **behold** to get the gardener to pay attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	13	7	hg35	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί καὶ τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ?	1	Why is it even idling the ground?	The man uses the question form to emphasize that the tree is useless and that the gardener should cut it down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not let it keep the ground from being productive any longer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	13	7	l856	figs-metaphor	καὶ τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ	1	idling the ground	The man speaks of the tree as if it were keeping the ground from working, since the ground would be productive if a different tree that actually was bearing fruit were in its place. Alternate translation: “is it even keeping the ground from being productive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	13	8	pm3j		ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτῷ	1	But answering he says to him	To call attention to a development in the story, Jesus uses the present tense in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “But he responded”
-LUK	13	8	l857	figs-hendiadys	ὁ&ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει	1	answering he says	Together the terms **answering** and **says** mean that the gardener responded to what his master told him to do. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	13	8	l857	figs-hendiadys	ὁ & ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει	1	answering he says	Together the terms **answering** and **says** mean that the gardener responded to what his master told him to do. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	13	8	l2ks		ἄφες αὐτὴν καὶ τοῦτο τὸ ἔτος	1	leave it this year also	Alternate translation: “wait one more year before cutting down the tree”
 LUK	13	8	st4w	translate-unknown	βάλω κόπρια	1	put on manure	The word **manure** means animal dung. In some places people mix it into the ground to make the soil more fertile for plants and trees. If your readers would not be familiar with this practice, you could explain it, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “mix animal dung into the soil to enrich it” or “fertilize it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	13	9	w5qh	figs-ellipsis	κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον	1	If indeed it bears fruit in the coming one	The gardener does not specify what he thinks the master should do with the tree if it does bear fruit, but you can supply that information from the context. Alternate translation: “If the tree has figs on it next year, then you can allow it to keep growing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -2306,12 +2306,12 @@ LUK	13	12	l860	figs-idiom	γύναι	1	Woman	Unlike the term **man** in [12:14](
 LUK	13	12	h6ne	figs-declarative	ἀπολέλυσαι τῆς ἀσθενείας σου	1	you are released from your weakness	By saying this, Jesus healed the woman. You could express this in your translation with a statement that shows that Jesus was causing this to happen. Alternate translation: “I now set you free from your weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 LUK	13	12	l29y	figs-activepassive	γύναι, ἀπολέλυσαι τῆς ἀσθενείας σου	1	you are released from your weakness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I now set you free from your weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	13	13	k3k1	figs-activepassive	ἀνωρθώθη	1	she was straightened up	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she stood up straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	13	14	d8ir	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς&δὲ ὁ ἀρχισυνάγωγος, ἀγανακτῶν ὅτι τῷ Σαββάτῳ ἐθεράπευσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ἔλεγεν	1	answering … said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that the synagogue leader spoke in response to the healing he had just witnessed. Alternate translation: “the synagogue ruler, being indignant because Jesus had healed on the Sabbath, responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	13	14	d8ir	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & δὲ ὁ ἀρχισυνάγωγος, ἀγανακτῶν ὅτι τῷ Σαββάτῳ ἐθεράπευσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ἔλεγεν	1	answering … said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that the synagogue leader spoke in response to the healing he had just witnessed. Alternate translation: “the synagogue ruler, being indignant because Jesus had healed on the Sabbath, responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	13	14	l861		ἓξ ἡμέραι εἰσὶν ἐν αἷς δεῖ ἐργάζεσθαι	1	There are six days in which it is necessary to work	Alternate translation: “You must only do work on the first six days of the week”
-LUK	13	14	ai1f	figs-activepassive	ἐν αὐταῖς&ἐρχόμενοι θεραπεύεσθε	1	come and be healed on them	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “come and have Jesus heal you on those days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	13	14	ai1f	figs-activepassive	ἐν αὐταῖς & ἐρχόμενοι θεραπεύεσθε	1	come and be healed on them	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “come and have Jesus heal you on those days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	13	14	qap4		τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	the day of the Sabbath	Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day”
 LUK	13	15	l862		ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord	Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
-LUK	13	15	k7p8	figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη&αὐτῷ&καὶ εἶπεν	1	answered him and said	Together the two words **answered** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the synagogue ruler. Alternate translation: “responded to the synagogue ruler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	13	15	k7p8	figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη & αὐτῷ & καὶ εἶπεν	1	answered him and said	Together the two words **answered** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the synagogue ruler. Alternate translation: “responded to the synagogue ruler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	13	15	u6zr	figs-explicit	ὑποκριταί	1	Hypocrites	Jesus is speaking directly to the synagogue ruler, but the plural form indicates that he is including other religious leaders as well. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You and your fellow religious leaders are hypocrites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	13	15	xt5y	figs-rquestion	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν τῷ Σαββάτῳ οὐ λύει τὸν βοῦν αὐτοῦ, ἢ τὸν ὄνον ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης, καὶ ἀπαγαγὼν ποτίζει?	1	Does not each of you on the Sabbath untie	Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. He is not asking his listeners to tell him whether they would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “On the Sabbath, each one of you unties his ox or donkey from the stall and leads it away to drink.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	13	15	ha7b	translate-unknown	τὸν βοῦν αὐτοῦ, ἢ τὸν ὄνον	1	his ox or donkey	These are domesticated animals. If your readers would not be familiar with what an **ox** or a **donkey** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “his farm animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2343,16 +2343,16 @@ LUK	13	21	wms4	figs-explicit	ζύμῃ	1	yeast	Jesus assumes that his listeners
 LUK	13	21	wz5u	translate-unknown	ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία	1	three seahs of flour	The term **seahs** is the plural of “seah,” a dry measure equivalent to nearly eight liters or two gallons. You can express this quantity in terms of a measure that your culture uses, or you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a large amount of flour” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	13	21	l873	figs-activepassive	ἐζυμώθη ὅλον	1	it was all leavened	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the yeast caused all of it to rise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	13	22	bh87	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ διεπορεύετο κατὰ πόλεις καὶ κώμας	1	And he was traveling through cities and villages	Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now he was traveling through cities and villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	13	23	l874	writing-participants	εἶπεν&τις αὐτῷ	1	someone said to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “someone in one of those places asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	13	23	l874	writing-participants	εἶπεν & τις αὐτῷ	1	someone said to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “someone in one of those places asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	13	23	l875	figs-idiom	εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σῳζόμενοι?	1	if the ones who are being saved are few?	This was an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “is God going to save only a few people?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	13	23	yf6h	figs-activepassive	εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σῳζόμενοι?	1	if the ones who are being saved are few?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “is God going to save only a few people?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	13	23	l876	figs-explicit	ὁ&εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he said to them	The implication is that a crowd had gathered to meet Jesus as he went through this place on his journey, and that the questioner was one person in the crowd. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus replied to this person and to the whole crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	13	23	l876	figs-explicit	ὁ & εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he said to them	The implication is that a crowd had gathered to meet Jesus as he went through this place on his journey, and that the questioner was one person in the crowd. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus replied to this person and to the whole crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	13	24	i39q	figs-metaphor	ἀγωνίζεσθε εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τῆς στενῆς θύρας	1	Struggle to enter through the narrow door	Jesus is speaking about God’s kingdom as if people had to go through a small doorway with great difficulty to enter it. Alternate translation: “Work hard to overcome every difficulty that would keep you from entering God’s kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	13	24	l877		λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is telling the crowd. Alternate translation: “you must understand”
 LUK	13	24	l878	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Even though Jesus is answering an individual’s question, he is talking to the whole crowd, so the word **you** is plural. The implied **you** in the command to **struggle** earlier in this verse is also plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	13	24	x137	figs-explicit	πολλοί&ζητήσουσιν εἰσελθεῖν καὶ οὐκ ἰσχύσουσιν	1	many … will seek to enter, but will not be able	The implication is that they will not be able to enter because it is so difficult. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many of the people who try to enter the kingdom of God … will not be able to, because it is so difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	13	24	x137	figs-explicit	πολλοί & ζητήσουσιν εἰσελθεῖν καὶ οὐκ ἰσχύσουσιν	1	many … will seek to enter, but will not be able	The implication is that they will not be able to enter because it is so difficult. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many of the people who try to enter the kingdom of God … will not be able to, because it is so difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	13	25	b35z	figs-exmetaphor	ἀφ’ οὗ ἂν ἐγερθῇ ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης καὶ ἀποκλείσῃ τὴν θύραν	1	After the master of the house gets up and closes the door	Jesus extends the metaphor of the **door** by speaking of God at the time of final judgment as if God were the owner of a house and the people he is addressing were outside the house trying to get in. Alternate translation: “After God has admitted everyone who is going to enter his kingdom and is not letting anyone else in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-LUK	13	25	gk3c	figs-you	ἄρξησθε&ὑμῖν&ὑμᾶς	1	you will begin … you … you	Even though Jesus is answering an individual’s question, he is talking to the whole crowd, so the word **you** is plural in all of these cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	13	25	gk3c	figs-you	ἄρξησθε & ὑμῖν & ὑμᾶς	1	you will begin … you … you	Even though Jesus is answering an individual’s question, he is talking to the whole crowd, so the word **you** is plural in all of these cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	13	25	l879	figs-quotesinquotes	κρούειν τὴν θύραν λέγοντες, κύριε, ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν	1	knock on the door, saying, ‘Lord, open for us’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “knock on the door and ask the Lord to open it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	13	25	jqh7	translate-unknown	κρούειν τὴν θύραν	1	knock on the door	See how you translated the word “knock” in [11:9](../11/09.md). Alternate translation: “call out” or “cough” or “clap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	13	25	l880	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	us	The people knocking on the door mean themselves but not the owner of the house, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **us,** use the exclusive form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -2362,12 +2362,12 @@ LUK	13	25	l883	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς, πόθεν ἐστέ
 LUK	13	25	l884	figs-parallelism	οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς, πόθεν ἐστέ	1	I do not know you, where you are from	The owner is also using repetition for emphasis. If this would not be clear in your language and your readers might wonder why he was saying the same thing twice, you could translate this with a single phrase that expresses the basic meaning. Alternate translation: “I do not know who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	13	26	l885	figs-quotesinquotes	ἄρξεσθε λέγειν, ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν, καὶ ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις ἡμῶν ἐδίδαξας	1	you will begin to say, ‘We ate and drank in your sight, and you taught in our streets’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you will begin to tell him that you shared meals with him and he taught in the streets of your town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	13	26	l886	figs-metaphor	ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν	1	we ate and drank before you	Here, **before** means “in the presence” of another person. Alternate translation: “You were with us when we ate and drank” or “We ate and drank together with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	13	26	l887	figs-merism	ἐφάγομεν&καὶ ἐπίομεν	1	ate and drank	The people are using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “We shared meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+LUK	13	26	l887	figs-merism	ἐφάγομεν & καὶ ἐπίομεν	1	ate and drank	The people are using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “We shared meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 LUK	13	26	l888	figs-you	σου	1	you	Since the people are addressing the owner alone, the pronoun **you** would be singular here, and also in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, **you taught**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	13	26	l889	figs-exclusive	ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις ἡμῶν	1	in our streets	Within the extended metaphor, the people are addressing Jesus, who was not from their town, but who taught them as he traveled through. So the people would consider the streets to be theirs but not his, and **our** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	13	27	l890	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐρεῖ λέγων ὑμῖν, οὐκ οἶδα πόθεν ἐστέ; ἀπόστητε ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ, πάντες ἐργάται ἀδικίας	1	he will speak, saying to you, ‘I do not know where you are from. Get away from me, all you workers of unrighteousness’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he will reply that he does not know where you are from, and he will tell you to go away because you are evildoers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	13	27	l891	figs-explicitinfo	ἐρεῖ λέγων ὑμῖν	1	he will speak, saying to you	In your language, it might seem that this phrase expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “he will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-LUK	13	27	l892	figs-you	ὑμῖν&πάντες	1	you … all you	Since the owner of the house is speaking to the people outside, **you** would be plural in these instances. The implied “you” in the command to **get away** would also be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	13	27	l892	figs-you	ὑμῖν & πάντες	1	you … all you	Since the owner of the house is speaking to the people outside, **you** would be plural in these instances. The implied “you” in the command to **get away** would also be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	13	27	l893	figs-explicit	οὐκ οἶδα πόθεν ἐστέ	1	I do not know where you are from	This is a shorter version of what the house owner says at first. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the implicit meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “I do not know who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	13	27	n39n		ἀπόστητε ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	Get away from me	Alternate translation: “Go away from here”
 LUK	13	27	l894		ἐργάται ἀδικίας	1	workers of unrighteousness	Alternate translation: “you evildoers”
@@ -2398,7 +2398,7 @@ LUK	13	32	l908	figs-synecdoche	ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσ
 LUK	13	32	l909	figs-explicit	ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον	1	I am driving out demons and performing healings today and tomorrow	The implication is that Jesus is saying he knows he does not need to be afraid of Herod’s deadly intentions, even though he is in territory that Herod rules, because God will keep him safe while he carries out his ministry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that for now, with God’s protection, I can safely carry on my ministry even in Herod’s territory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	13	32	l910	figs-idiom	τῇ τρίτῃ	1	on the third day	In this culture, **the third day** meant “the day after tomorrow.” Jesus is using the expression as an idiom. Alternate translation: “at a short time in the future” or “soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	13	32	l911	figs-activepassive	τελειοῦμαι	1	I will be finished	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying he will soon complete his work of teaching and healing. Alternate translation: “I will complete my ministry” (2) this expression refers to someone reaching a goal or destination. Alternate translation: “I will finish traveling through Herod’s territory and reach Jerusalem” (3) Jesus is referring to a goal or destination, and mean that he will reach the end of his life. Alternate translation: “I will give my life as a sacrifice” (4) the expression describes someone reaching maturity or perfection of character, and if that is what it means here, it would describe the character that Jesus demonstrated when he gave his life as the Savior. Alternate translation: “I will demonstrate supreme love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	13	33	p9za		πλὴν δεῖ με&πορεύεσθαι	1	Nevertheless, it is necessary for me to journey	Alternate translation: “But I must keep traveling”
+LUK	13	33	p9za		πλὴν δεῖ με & πορεύεσθαι	1	Nevertheless, it is necessary for me to journey	Alternate translation: “But I must keep traveling”
 LUK	13	33	l912	figs-idiom	σήμερον καὶ αὔριον καὶ τῇ ἐχομένῃ	1	today, and tomorrow, and the following day	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “now and in the time just ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	13	33	nbk7	figs-irony	οὐκ ἐνδέχεται προφήτην ἀπολέσθαι ἔξω Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	it is not possible for a prophet to perish outside of Jerusalem	This could also mean “it is not acceptable.” Either way, Jesus is speaking ironically. The Jewish leaders claimed to serve God, and yet their ancestors killed many of God’s prophets in Jerusalem. Jesus knew that they would kill him there too. Alternate translation: “it is in Jerusalem that the Jewish leaders have killed so many of God’s messengers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 LUK	13	34	cac7	figs-apostrophe	Ἰερουσαλὴμ, Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Jerusalem, Jerusalem	Jesus is addressing something he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. Alternate translation: “I am very upset with the city of Jerusalem” or, if you decide to use the second person (see later note), “I am very upset with you, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
@@ -2419,7 +2419,7 @@ LUK	13	35	l920	figs-pastforfuture	ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑ
 LUK	13	35	w1v2	figs-metaphor	ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν	1	your house has been left to you	Jesus speaks of the city of Jerusalem as if it were a **house** in which its people lived. Alternate translation: “your city will be left to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	13	35	l921	figs-activepassive	ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν	1	your house has been left to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God is going to leave your city to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	13	35	l922	figs-explicit	ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν	1	your house has been left to you	The implications of this statement are that God will no longer consider that Jerusalem belongs to him, as a holy city where he dwells in his temple, and that God will therefore not protect the people of Jerusalem from their enemies. Alternate translation: “God will not protect you from your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	13	35	l923	figs-you	ὑμῖν&ὑμῶν&ὑμῖν	1	your … you … you	Jesus is now speaking directly to the people who live in Jerusalem, so **your** and **you** would be plural. The pronoun **you** would also be a plural pronoun in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, “you say.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	13	35	l923	figs-you	ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν	1	your … you … you	Jesus is now speaking directly to the people who live in Jerusalem, so **your** and **you** would be plural. The pronoun **you** would also be a plural pronoun in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, “you say.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	13	35	l924		λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is telling the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	13	35	x4y6		οὐ μὴ με ἴδητέ ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε	1	you will certainly not see me until it comes when you say	If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the next time you see me, you will say”
 LUK	13	35	l925	figs-idiom	ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε	1	until it comes when you say	The expression **it comes** means “the time comes.” You could express that in your translation, or, if your language does not speak of time as “coming,” you can use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “until the time comes when you say” or “until the time when you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2445,8 +2445,8 @@ LUK	14	4	x4lq	writing-pronouns	ἐπιλαβόμενος	1	taking hold of him	Al
 LUK	14	5	l934	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	14	5	rr5z	figs-rquestion	τίνος ὑμῶν υἱὸς ἢ βοῦς εἰς φρέαρ πεσεῖται, καὶ οὐκ εὐθέως ἀνασπάσει αὐτὸν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	Of which of you will a son or an ox fall into a well, and he will not immediately pull him out on the Sabbath day	Jesus does not expect these religious leaders to tell him whether they would do this. Rather, he is using the question form as a teaching tool. He wants these religious leaders to recognize that on the Sabbath day, they themselves would do something to address a situation of suffering and need. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “If one of you had a son who fell into a well on the Sabbath, surely you would pull him out immediately. You would even do the same thing for your ox.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	14	6	cti5		καὶ οὐκ ἴσχυσαν ἀνταποκριθῆναι πρὸς ταῦτα	1	And they were not able to give an answer to these things	Alternate translation: “And there was nothing they could say in response”
-LUK	14	7	l935	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν&πρὸς τοὺς κεκλημένους παραβολήν, ἐπέχων πῶς τὰς πρωτοκλισίας ἐξελέγοντο, λέγων	1	he was speaking a parable … noticing how they were choosing the first places	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of the phrases in this verse, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jesus noticed that those whom the leader of the Pharisees had invited to the meal were trying to sit in the seats for honored guests, so he gave them an illustration, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	14	7	u86b	figs-parables	ἔλεγεν&παραβολήν	1	he was speaking a parable	In this instance, Luke is not using the term **parable** to mean a brief story that teaches something true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Jesus used a hypothetical situation as an illustration to get the guests at this meal to consider how they should behave at feasts. Alternate translation: “he gave an illustration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+LUK	14	7	l935	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔλεγεν & πρὸς τοὺς κεκλημένους παραβολήν, ἐπέχων πῶς τὰς πρωτοκλισίας ἐξελέγοντο, λέγων	1	he was speaking a parable … noticing how they were choosing the first places	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of the phrases in this verse, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jesus noticed that those whom the leader of the Pharisees had invited to the meal were trying to sit in the seats for honored guests, so he gave them an illustration, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+LUK	14	7	u86b	figs-parables	ἔλεγεν & παραβολήν	1	he was speaking a parable	In this instance, Luke is not using the term **parable** to mean a brief story that teaches something true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Jesus used a hypothetical situation as an illustration to get the guests at this meal to consider how they should behave at feasts. Alternate translation: “he gave an illustration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	14	7	em4u	figs-activepassive	τοὺς κεκλημένους	1	those who were invited	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who had done the action. Alternate translation: “those whom this Pharisee had invited to the meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	7	yd4g	figs-metaphor	τὰς πρωτοκλισίας	1	the first places	The term **first** represents being important and honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you could use that in your translation. Otherwise, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the seats closest to the host” or “the seats for honored guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	14	8	l936	figs-hypo	ὅταν κληθῇς ὑπό τινος εἰς γάμους, μὴ κατακλιθῇς	1	When you are invited by someone to a wedding feast, do not recline to eat	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the guests at this meal. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone invites you to a wedding celebration. Then you should not take your place at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
@@ -2474,7 +2474,7 @@ LUK	14	11	eki7	figs-activepassive	ὑψωθήσεται	1	will be exalted	If it
 LUK	14	12	p9hc		τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν	1	the one who had invited him	Alternate translation: “to the Pharisee who had invited him to his house for a meal”
 LUK	14	12	v4uk	figs-you	ὅταν ποιῇς	1	when you make	Even though this is general advice for everyone listening, the word **you** is singular here, and **you** and **your** are singular in all of [14:12–14](../14/12.md), because Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisee who invited him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	14	12	gmh6	figs-hyperbole	μὴ φώνει	1	do not invite	Jesus is probably not telling his host never to invite such people. Rather, this is likely a generalization that means he should invite others as well. Alternate translation: “do not invite only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-LUK	14	12	l945	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου&τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου	1	your brothers … your relatives	The term **brothers** probably refers to close family members, while the term **relatives** likely indicates more distant members of an extended family. Alternate translation: “your close family members … other relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	14	12	l945	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου & τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου	1	your brothers … your relatives	The term **brothers** probably refers to close family members, while the term **relatives** likely indicates more distant members of an extended family. Alternate translation: “your close family members … other relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	14	12	l946	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου	1	your brothers	If **brothers** is a figurative term, then Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your close family members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	14	12	l947		μήποτε καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀντικαλέσωσίν σε	1	lest they also invite you in return	Alternate translation: “because they might feel an obligation to invite you to a banquet of their own”
 LUK	14	12	l948		γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι	1	and repayment happen to you	Your language may require you to say who would make this happen. Alternate translation: “they would repay you”
@@ -2482,7 +2482,7 @@ LUK	14	13	uc5f		κάλει	1	invite	It may be helpful to add “also” in your
 LUK	14	13	abcf	figs-nominaladj	πτωχούς, ἀναπείρους, χωλούς, τυφλούς	1	the poor, the crippled, the lame, and the blind	Jesus is using these adjectives as nouns to refer to groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are poor, people with disabilities, people who are handicapped, and people who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	14	14	vpt9	figs-activepassive	μακάριος ἔσῃ	1	you will be blessed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	14	r6cp	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἀνταποδοῦναί σοι	1	they do not have to repay you	This expression does not mean that these people would not have a social obligation to return hospitality, the way others would. Rather, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “they do not have the means to repay you” or “they cannot invite you to a banquet in return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	14	14	z4tv	figs-activepassive	ἀνταποδοθήσεται&σοι	1	it will be repaid to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will repay you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	14	14	z4tv	figs-activepassive	ἀνταποδοθήσεται & σοι	1	it will be repaid to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will repay you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	14	rd75		ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει τῶν δικαίων	1	in the resurrection of the righteous	Alternate translation: “when God brings righteous people back to life”
 LUK	14	15	cm12	grammar-connect-time-background	δέ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 LUK	14	15	h4wu	writing-participants	τις τῶν συνανακειμένων	1	one of those who reclined to eat	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “another one of the guests at that meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -2506,7 +2506,7 @@ LUK	14	18	l955	figs-idiom	ἐρωτῶ σε ἔχε με παρῃτημένον
 LUK	14	18	l956	figs-activepassive	ἔχε με παρῃτημένον	1	have me excused	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “excuse me from attending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	19	d9p2	figs-explicit	ἕτερος εἶπεν	1	another said	See how you translated this phrase in [14:18](../14/18.md). Alternate translation: “another guest told the servant to give this message to his master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	14	19	l957	figs-quotesinquotes	ζεύγη βοῶν ἠγόρασα πέντε καὶ πορεύομαι δοκιμάσαι αὐτά; ἐρωτῶ σε ἔχε με παρῃτημένον	1	‘I have bought five pairs of oxen, and I am going to try them out. I ask you to have me excused’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that he had just bought five pairs of oxen and that he was going to try them out, so he wanted to be excused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	14	19	cd9b	translate-unknown	ζεύγη βοῶν&πέντε	1	five pairs of oxen	**Oxen** are large cattle. In this culture, they were used in pairs to pull farming tools such as plows. Alternate translation: “five pairs of oxen to work in my fields” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+LUK	14	19	cd9b	translate-unknown	ζεύγη βοῶν & πέντε	1	five pairs of oxen	**Oxen** are large cattle. In this culture, they were used in pairs to pull farming tools such as plows. Alternate translation: “five pairs of oxen to work in my fields” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	14	19	l958	figs-idiom	ἐρωτῶ σε ἔχε με παρῃτημένον	1	I ask you to have me excused	See how you translated this phrase in [14:18](../14/18.md). Alternate translation: “Please accept my apology for not being able to attend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	14	19	l959	figs-activepassive	ἔχε με παρῃτημένον	1	have me excused	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “excuse me from attending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	20	lf9h	figs-explicit	ἕτερος εἶπεν	1	another said	See how you translated this phrase in [14:18](../14/18.md). Alternate translation: “Another guest told the servant to give this message to his master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2524,7 +2524,7 @@ LUK	14	23	n9x7	figs-metonymy	φραγμοὺς	1	hedges	The word **hedges** desc
 LUK	14	23	w5w6	figs-activepassive	ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος	1	so that my house may be filled	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that guests may fill my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	24	i5lt	figs-declarative	λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου	1	For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper	The master is using a future statement to express the result he desires from the instructions he has just given his servants. Alternate translation: “For I say to you that I do not want any of those men who were invited to taste of my supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 LUK	14	24	v5m6	figs-you	λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου	1	For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper	While the word **you** is singular in [14:21–23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	14	24	ooz4		λέγω&ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	The master says this to emphasize what he is telling his servants. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
+LUK	14	24	ooz4		λέγω & ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	The master says this to emphasize what he is telling his servants. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	14	24	l965	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου	1	For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The master told all of his servants that he did not want any of the men he had invited to taste his supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	14	24	liz5	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων	1	those men	Here, the word for **men** means “male adults,” not people in general. So it would be appropriate to use a specifically masculine term in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	14	24	n867	figs-activepassive	τῶν κεκλημένων	1	who were invited	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom I invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2532,9 +2532,9 @@ LUK	14	24	hl7q	figs-metonymy	γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου	1	wi
 LUK	14	24	l984	figs-hyperbole	γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου	1	will taste of my supper	Alternatively, the master may be making an extreme statement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “will get even a taste of the dinner that I have prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	14	24	l966		μου τοῦ δείπνου	1	my supper	By this expression, the master does not mean his own meal, but the dinner that he has prepared for others. Alternate translation: “the dinner that I have prepared”
 LUK	14	25	l967	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	14	25	gv94	writing-newevent	συνεπορεύοντο&αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί	1	large crowds were journeying with him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Jesus is no longer at the dinner at the home of the Pharisee. He has resumed his journey to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could introduce this new situation more fully. Alternate translation: “Jesus then continued on his way to Jerusalem, and large crowds were traveling with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+LUK	14	25	gv94	writing-newevent	συνεπορεύοντο & αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί	1	large crowds were journeying with him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Jesus is no longer at the dinner at the home of the Pharisee. He has resumed his journey to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could introduce this new situation more fully. Alternate translation: “Jesus then continued on his way to Jerusalem, and large crowds were traveling with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	14	26	l968	figs-idiom	εἴ τις ἔρχεται πρός με,	1	If anyone comes to me	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	14	26	l969	figs-doublenegatives	εἴ τις&οὐ μισεῖ&οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής	1	If anyone … does not hate … he is not able to be my disciple	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only someone who … loves me more than … is able to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+LUK	14	26	l969	figs-doublenegatives	εἴ τις & οὐ μισεῖ & οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής	1	If anyone … does not hate … he is not able to be my disciple	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only someone who … loves me more than … is able to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	14	26	l985	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	and	Jesus uses the word **and** to introduce a contrast. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 LUK	14	26	rmt8	figs-hyperbole	οὐ μισεῖ	1	does not hate	Jesus is using the word **hate** as an exaggeration to say that his disciples are not to love other people and themselves more than they love Jesus. Alternate translation: “does not love me more than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	14	27	pm44	figs-doublenegatives	ὅστις οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἔρχεται ὀπίσω μου, οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής	1	Whoever does not carry his cross and come after me is not able to be my disciple	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Whoever wants to be my disciple must carry his cross and follow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -2560,7 +2560,7 @@ LUK	14	32	p5h6		τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην	1	the things for peace	Alternate
 LUK	14	33	is32	figs-doublenegatives	πᾶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὃς οὐκ ἀποτάσσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ ὑπάρχουσιν, οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής	1	every one of you who does not renounce all the things that he himself possesses is not able to be my disciple	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “only those of you who give up all that you have are able be my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	14	33	f2he		ὃς οὐκ ἀποτάσσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ ὑπάρχουσιν	1	who does not renounce all the things that he himself possesses	Alternate translation: “who is not willing to give up everything he owns”
 LUK	14	34	tz7c	figs-parables	καλὸν οὖν τὸ ἅλας	1	Salt then is good	To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave the crowd this illustration to help them understand. ‘Salt is certainly useful’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
-LUK	14	34	l979	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν&καὶ τὸ ἅλας μωρανθῇ	1	if the salt … is made tasteless	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “if something indeed causes salt to lose its flavor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	14	34	l979	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν & καὶ τὸ ἅλας μωρανθῇ	1	if the salt … is made tasteless	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “if something indeed causes salt to lose its flavor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	34	l980	figs-activepassive	ἐν τίνι ἀρτυθήσεται	1	with what will it be seasoned	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what can make it salty again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	14	34	cz52	figs-rquestion	ἐν τίνι ἀρτυθήσεται?	1	with what will it be seasoned?	Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. He does not expect the crowd to tell him how the flavor of salt can be restored. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “nothing can make it salty again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	14	35	bp1b	translate-unknown	εἰς κοπρίαν	1	for the manure pile	See how you translated this phrase in [13:8](../13/08.md). Alternate translation: “to use as fertilizer” or “to add to the compost heap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2570,17 +2570,17 @@ LUK	14	35	c5fb	figs-123person	ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέ
 LUK	14	35	l981	figs-you	ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	The one who has ears to hear, let him hear	If you choose to translate this in the second person, **you** would be plural, since Jesus is speaking to the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	15	intro	p1ba			0		# Luke 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus tells parables about a lost sheep, a lost coin, and a lost son (15:1–32)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The parable of the prodigal son<br><br>The story that Jesus tells in Luke 15:11–32 is known as The Parable of the Prodigal Son, although he does not give the story that title himself. Most interpreters understand the father in the story to represent God (the Father), the sinful younger son to represent those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son to represent the Pharisees. In the story, the older son becomes angry at the father for forgiving the younger son’s sins. He will not even go in to the party that the father is giving to welcome the younger son home. Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think that only they were good and not forgive other people’s sins. Jesus was teaching them that they would never become part of God’s kingdom if they continued to think that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])<br><br>### Sinners<br><br>When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins such as stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables (15:4–7, 15:8–10, and 15:11–32) to teach that the people who acknowledge that they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	15	1	yj6b	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	15	1	l982	writing-participants	ἦσαν&αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ	1	all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. These people were part of the crowd that Luke described generally in [14:25](../14/25.md). Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	15	1	ss52	figs-hyperbole	ἦσαν&αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ	1	all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him	The word **all** is an overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	15	1	l982	writing-participants	ἦσαν & αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ	1	all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. These people were part of the crowd that Luke described generally in [14:25](../14/25.md). Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	15	1	ss52	figs-hyperbole	ἦσαν & αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ	1	all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him	The word **all** is an overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	15	2	l986	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to indicate the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	15	2	l987	writing-participants	διεγόγγυζον οἵ τε Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς	1	both the Pharisees and the scribes were grumbling	Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. While these may not be exactly the same individuals whom Jesus encountered in places such as [5:17–30](../05/17.md), the members of this group in general function as the same character throughout the story. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees and scribes were there, and they were grumbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	15	2	dd9b		οὗτος ἁμαρτωλοὺς προσδέχεται	1	This one receives sinners	Alternate translation: “This man lets sinners into his presence” or “This man associates with sinners”
 LUK	15	2	ec2r	figs-explicit	οὗτος	1	This one	This expression implicitly means Jesus. Alternate translation: “This man” or “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	15	3	l988	grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to indicate the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	15	3	ill7	figs-parables	εἶπεν&πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην	1	he spoke this parable to them	Alternate translation: “Jesus told this story to the Pharisees and scribes to help them understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+LUK	15	3	ill7	figs-parables	εἶπεν & πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην	1	he spoke this parable to them	Alternate translation: “Jesus told this story to the Pharisees and scribes to help them understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	15	4	pxm3	figs-rquestion	τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ ἀπολέσας ἐξ αὐτῶν ἓν, οὐ καταλείπει τὰ ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καὶ πορεύεται ἐπὶ τὸ ἀπολωλὸς, ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό?	1	Which man among you, having 100 sheep and having lost one of them, will not leave the 99 in the wilderness and go after the lost one until he finds it?	Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “If one of you had 100 sheep and lost one of them, he would certainly leave the other 99 sheep in the wilderness and go looking for the sheep that had wandered off until he found it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	15	4	l989	figs-hypo	τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ ἀπολέσας ἐξ αὐτῶν ἓν, οὐ καταλείπει	1	Which man among you, having 100 sheep and having lost one of them, will not leave	Jesus is offering the Pharisees and scribes an illustration that involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose one of you had 100 sheep and you lost one of them. Then would you not certainly leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	15	4	m048	figs-123person	τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα&ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό	1	Which man among you, having 100 sheep … until he finds it	Since Jesus begins the parable by asking, “Which man among you,” some languages would continue the parable in the second person. Alternate translation: “Which one of you, if you had 100 sheep … until you found it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK	15	4	m048	figs-123person	τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα & ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό	1	Which man among you, having 100 sheep … until he finds it	Since Jesus begins the parable by asking, “Which man among you,” some languages would continue the parable in the second person. Alternate translation: “Which one of you, if you had 100 sheep … until you found it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	15	4	l990	figs-gendernotations	τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	Which man among you	This could mean: (1) while all of the Pharisees and scribes who are grumbling are probably men, Jesus is describing what any person, man or woman, would likely do in this situation, and he is telling the parable for the whole crowd to hear. So the term **man** here may be generic. Alternate translation: “Which person among you” (2) since Jesus speaks in his next parable of a woman doing something, he may be using a man and a woman in paired examples to offer a comprehensive teaching about the kingdom of God. In that case, the term **man** here would not be generic. Alternate translation: “Which of you men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	15	5	l992	figs-123person	καὶ εὑρὼν, ἐπιτίθησιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους αὐτοῦ χαίρων	1	And having found it, he lays it on his shoulders, rejoicing	If you decided in the previous verse that your language would continue this parable in the second person, use the second person here as well. Alternate translation: “Once you found it, you would very happily lay it across your shoulders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	15	5	xwa5	figs-explicit	ἐπιτίθησιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους αὐτοῦ	1	he lays it on his shoulders	This is the way a shepherd carries a sheep. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he lays it across his shoulders to carry it home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2600,7 +2600,7 @@ LUK	15	10	l998		λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize
 LUK	15	10	m8zl	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before the angels of God	The term **before** means “in the presence” of someone. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God’s angels” or “among the angels of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	15	11	ib6s	figs-parables	εἶπεν δέ	1	Then he said	To help the Pharisees and scribes understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides a further illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the Pharisees and scribes this story to help them understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	15	11	c2t6	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπός τις εἶχεν δύο υἱούς	1	A certain man had two sons	Jesus uses this phrase to introduce the main characters in the parable. Alternate translation: “There was a man who had two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	15	12	l999	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν&τῷ πατρί, Πάτερ, δός μοι τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος τῆς οὐσίας	1	said to his father, ‘Father, give me the portion of the wealth that falls to me’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “told his father that he wanted the share of the estate that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+LUK	15	12	l999	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & τῷ πατρί, Πάτερ, δός μοι τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος τῆς οὐσίας	1	said to his father, ‘Father, give me the portion of the wealth that falls to me’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “told his father that he wanted the share of the estate that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	15	12	y6uq	figs-imperative	δός μοι	1	give me	The son wanted his father to give him his inheritance immediately. If your language has a command form that indicates that the speaker wants something done immediately, it would be appropriate to use that form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	15	12	m000	figs-idiom	τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος τῆς οὐσίας	1	the portion of the wealth that falls to me	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the part of your wealth that you intend to leave to me when you die” or “the share of the estate that I would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	15	12	m001	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	And	Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation (as in UST): “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -2618,11 +2618,11 @@ LUK	15	15	rxt4		βόσκειν χοίρους	1	to feed pigs	Alternate translati
 LUK	15	16	m8zd	figs-activepassive	ἐπεθύμει χορτασθῆναι	1	he was longing to be satisfied	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he wished he could satisfy his hunger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	15	16	pd3c	translate-unknown	κερατίων	1	carob pods	These are the husks of the beans that grow on the **carob** tree. If your readers would not be familiar with this tree, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “bean husks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	15	16	m003		καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐδίδου αὐτῷ	1	and no one gave to him	This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: “because no one was giving him anything else to eat” or “but his master would not allow him to eat even those”
-LUK	15	17	x4jc	figs-idiom	εἰς ἑαυτὸν&ἐλθὼν	1	coming to himself	This idiom means that he became able to understand his situation clearly and realized that he had made a terrible mistake. Alternate translation: “realizing the situation he was in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	15	17	x4jc	figs-idiom	εἰς ἑαυτὸν & ἐλθὼν	1	coming to himself	This idiom means that he became able to understand his situation clearly and realized that he had made a terrible mistake. Alternate translation: “realizing the situation he was in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	15	17	m004	figs-quotesinquotes	ἔφη, πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύονται ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι	1	he said, ‘How many hired servants of my father have more than enough bread, but I am perishing from hunger here’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told himself that all of his father’s hired servants had more than enough food to eat, but he was perishing from hunger where he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	15	17	xw1a	figs-exclamations	πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύονται ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι	1	How many hired servants of my father have more than enough bread, but I am perishing from hunger here	This is an exclamation, not a question. Alternate translation: “All of my father’s hired servants have more than enough food to eat, but I am perishing from hunger here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 LUK	15	17	m005	figs-synecdoche	ἄρτων	1	bread	The young man is using one kind of food, **bread**, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK	15	17	tal2	figs-hyperbole	λιμῷ&ἀπόλλυμαι	1	I am perishing from hunger	This could mean: (1) it is a figurative overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “have so little to eat” (2) the young man has literally been starving. Alternate translation: “am about to die of starvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	15	17	tal2	figs-hyperbole	λιμῷ & ἀπόλλυμαι	1	I am perishing from hunger	This could mean: (1) it is a figurative overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “have so little to eat” (2) the young man has literally been starving. Alternate translation: “am about to die of starvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	15	18	m006	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀναστὰς, πορεύσομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου, καὶ ἐρῶ αὐτῷ, Πάτερ, ἥμαρτον εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου	1	I will get up and go to my father, and I will say to him, Father, I have sinned against heaven and before you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “He decided that he would leave that place and go to his father and tell him that he had sinned against God and directly against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	15	18	m007	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	get up	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “I will leave this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	15	18	m4pj	figs-euphemism	τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	heaven	In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@@ -2643,13 +2643,13 @@ LUK	15	21	m014	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιόν	1	before	The term **before** means
 LUK	15	21	qxg5	figs-activepassive	οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι υἱός σου	1	I am no longer worthy to be called your son	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “I am no longer worthy for you to call me your son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	15	21	m015	figs-idiom	κληθῆναι	1	to be called	This expression could also be an idiom that means “to be.” See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32.md), [1:76](../01/76.md), and [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	15	22	m016	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν δὲ ὁ πατὴρ πρὸς τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ, ταχὺ ἐξενέγκατε στολὴν τὴν πρώτην, καὶ ἐνδύσατε αὐτόν, καὶ δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὑποδήματα εἰς τοὺς πόδας	1	But the father said to his servants, ‘Bring quickly the best robe, and put it on him, and put a ring on his hand, and sandals on his feet’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But the father told his servants quickly to bring the best robe they had and put it on his son, and to put a ring on his hand and sandals on his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	15	22	m017	figs-you	ἐξενέγκατε&ἐνδύσατε&δότε	1	bring … clothe … put	Since the father is speaking to a number of servants, the implied “you” in these imperatives would be plural. Your language may need to show that distinction explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	15	22	nlx9	translate-symaction	στολὴν τὴν πρώτην&δακτύλιον&ὑποδήματα	1	the first robe … a ring … sandals	By having his servants put these things on his son, the father was showing that he was welcoming his son back as a member of the family in good standing. These were all signs of status, authority, and privilege. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in some way in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+LUK	15	22	m017	figs-you	ἐξενέγκατε & ἐνδύσατε & δότε	1	bring … clothe … put	Since the father is speaking to a number of servants, the implied “you” in these imperatives would be plural. Your language may need to show that distinction explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	15	22	nlx9	translate-symaction	στολὴν τὴν πρώτην & δακτύλιον & ὑποδήματα	1	the first robe … a ring … sandals	By having his servants put these things on his son, the father was showing that he was welcoming his son back as a member of the family in good standing. These were all signs of status, authority, and privilege. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in some way in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	15	22	b3hv	figs-metaphor	στολὴν τὴν πρώτην	1	the first robe	As in [14:7](../14/07.md), here the word **first** means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best robe we have” or “the festive garment we save for special occasions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	15	22	m018	figs-synecdoche	δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ	1	put a ring on his hand	The father says **hand** to mean one part of the hand, a finger. Alternate translation: “put a ring on his finger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	15	22	xat6	translate-unknown	ὑποδήματα	1	sandals	In this culture, poorer people went barefoot, while more affluent people wore **sandals**. They are a type of open footwear, typically made of leather, consisting of a sole that is held onto the foot with straps. The modern equivalent in many cultures where the poor go barefoot and the more affluent have footwear would be shoes. Alternate translation: “shoes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	15	23	m019	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ φέρετε τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν, θύσατε, καὶ φαγόντες εὐφρανθῶμεν	1	And bring the fattened calf, slaughter it, and let us eat and celebrate	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He also told his servants to bring the calf they had been fattening and butcher it so that they could have a celebration feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	15	23	m020	figs-you	φέρετε&θύσατε	1	bring … slaughter	Since the father is speaking to a number of servants, the implied “you” in these imperatives would be plural. Your language may need to show that distinction explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	15	23	m020	figs-you	φέρετε & θύσατε	1	bring … slaughter	Since the father is speaking to a number of servants, the implied “you” in these imperatives would be plural. Your language may need to show that distinction explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	15	23	ll8j	translate-unknown	μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν	1	the fattened calf	A **calf** is a young cow. People would give one of their calves special food so that it would grow well, and then, when they wanted to have a special feast, they would butcher and eat that calf. If your readers would not know what a **calf** or a cow is, or if a description of eating a cow would be offensive to them, you could use a general expression here. Alternate translation: “the young animal we have been making fat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	15	23	t3cu	figs-explicit	θύσατε	1	kill	In this context, the term **kill** means to slaughter an animal and prepare its meat to be eaten. The implication is that the servants were also to cook the meat for the feast that the father wanted to have. Alternate translation: “butcher and cook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	15	23	m021	figs-hendiadys	φαγόντες εὐφρανθῶμεν	1	let us eat and celebrate	The phrase **eat and celebrate** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **eat** indicates how the father wants to **celebrate** his son’s homecoming. Alternate translation: “celebrate by having a feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -2660,7 +2660,7 @@ LUK	15	24	izx2	figs-metaphor	ἦν ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη	1	he
 LUK	15	24	m024	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη	1	he has been found	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “I have found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	15	24	m025	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ἤρξαντο εὐφραίνεσθαι	1	And they began to celebrate	**Then** introduces the results of what the previous sentence described. The servants carried out the father’s orders and prepared a feast, and the people in the household then began to enjoy it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	15	25	jd7l	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	15	25	bk6d	figs-explicit	ἦν&ἐν ἀγρῷ	1	was in the field	The implication was that he was out in the field because he was working there. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was out working in the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	15	25	bk6d	figs-explicit	ἦν & ἐν ἀγρῷ	1	was in the field	The implication was that he was out in the field because he was working there. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was out working in the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	15	25	m026	figs-explicit	ὡς ἐρχόμενος	1	as he came	Alternate translation: “as he came back home from the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	15	25	m027	figs-metonymy	ἤκουσεν συμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν	1	he heard music and dancing	The older son could not literally hear **dancing**, so Jesus is using the term **heard** in that case. Alternate translation: “he heard music and the sound of people dancing” or “he heard music and could tell that people were dancing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	15	26	m028	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. When the older son heard these sounds, he wondered what was going on, so he called for a servant and asked him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -2673,7 +2673,7 @@ LUK	15	27	r8py	translate-unknown	τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν	1
 LUK	15	27	m033		ὅτι ὑγιαίνοντα αὐτὸν ἀπέλαβεν	1	because he has received him in good health	Alternate translation: “because his son has come home safely”
 LUK	15	28	m034	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὁ δὲ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ἐξελθὼν, παρεκάλει αὐτόν	1	and his father came out and entreated him	Here Jesus uses the term **and** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “so his father came outside and pleaded with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	15	29	m035	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ, ἰδοὺ, τοσαῦτα ἔτη δουλεύω σοι, καὶ οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν σου παρῆλθον, καὶ ἐμοὶ οὐδέποτε ἔδωκας ἔριφον, ἵνα μετὰ τῶν φίλων μου εὐφρανθῶ	1	But answering he said to his father, ‘Behold, for so many years I am slaving for you, and I have never disregarded your command, and you never gave a young goat to me so that I might celebrate with my friends’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he responded to his father that even though he had been slaving for him for so many years and had never disobeyed one of his commands, his father had never given him a young goat so that he could celebrate with his friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	15	29	m036	figs-hendiadys	ὁ&ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν	1	answering he said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the older son said what follows in response to his father’s pleadings. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	15	29	m036	figs-hendiadys	ὁ & ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν	1	answering he said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the older son said what follows in response to his father’s pleadings. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	15	29	m037	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	The older son uses **Behold** to get his father to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	15	29	f8w9	figs-metaphor	δουλεύω σοι	1	I am slaving for you	To emphasize how hard he believes he has worked for his father, the older son describes himself as a slave. You could translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “I have been working like a slave for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	15	29	m038	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν σου παρῆλθον	1	I have never disregarded your command	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I have always done what you told me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -2690,14 +2690,14 @@ LUK	15	31	b5s3	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, τέκνο
 LUK	15	31	m042		τέκνον	1	Child	The father is using the word **Child** as a term of affection. Alternate translation: “My dear son”
 LUK	15	31	m043		σὺ πάντοτε μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἶ	1	you are always with me	Alternate translation: “I appreciate the way you have stayed here and helped me”
 LUK	15	32	m044	figs-quotesinquotes	εὐφρανθῆναι δὲ καὶ χαρῆναι ἔδει, ὅτι ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος, νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἔζησεν, καὶ ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη	1	But it was proper to celebrate and to rejoice, for this brother of yours was dead, and lived, and he had been lost, and was found	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he insisted that it was right to have a celebration for his brother, since it was as if he had died and come back to life, and as if he had been lost and had been found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	15	32	m045	figs-hendiadys	εὐφρανθῆναι&καὶ χαρῆναι	1	celebrate and rejoice	The phrase **celebrate and rejoice** expresses a single idea emphatically by using two similar words connected with **and**. Alternate translation: “celebrate joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	15	32	m045	figs-hendiadys	εὐφρανθῆναι & καὶ χαρῆναι	1	celebrate and rejoice	The phrase **celebrate and rejoice** expresses a single idea emphatically by using two similar words connected with **and**. Alternate translation: “celebrate joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	15	32	c35s		ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος	1	this brother of yours	The older son had referred to “this son of yours,” but the father wants him to recognize him as his **brother**. Alternate translation: “your very own brother”
 LUK	15	32	due5	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος, νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἔζησεν	1	this brother of yours was dead, and lived	See how you translated this figurative expression in [15:24](../15/24.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if your very own brother had died and come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	15	32	v55y	figs-metaphor	ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη	1	he had been lost, and was found	See how you translated this figurative expression in [15:24](../15/24.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if he had been missing and we found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	15	32	m046	figs-activepassive	καὶ εὑρέθη	1	and was found	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “we found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	16	intro	qz3g			0		# Luke 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus tells a parable about a household manager (16:1–15)<br>2. Jesus gives further teachings (16:16–18)<br>3. Jesus tells a parable about a rich man who died (16:19–31)
 LUK	16	1	m047	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	16	1	p54g	writing-participants	ἔλεγεν&καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς	1	he also said to his disciples	Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. Jesus directed the previous three parables to the Pharisees and scribes, although **the disciples**may have been part of the crowd that was listening. He directs this next parable to **the disciples**. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to his disciples, who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	16	1	p54g	writing-participants	ἔλεγεν & καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς	1	he also said to his disciples	Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. Jesus directed the previous three parables to the Pharisees and scribes, although **the disciples**may have been part of the crowd that was listening. He directs this next parable to **the disciples**. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to his disciples, who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	16	1	r6ck	figs-parables	ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς	1	And he also said to his disciples	One theme of the story of the two sons was the use of possessions. To help his disciples understand something further about that, Jesus tells them a brief story that provides an illustration. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Jesus then told his disciples an illustrative story” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	16	1	k6jv	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος, ὃς εἶχεν οἰκονόμον	1	There was a certain rich man who had a manager	This introduces the main characters in the parable. Alternate translation: “There once was a rich man who employed a manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	16	1	blp5	figs-activepassive	οὗτος διεβλήθη αὐτῷ ὡς	1	he was reported to him as	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “people reported to the rich man that his manager was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2708,7 +2708,7 @@ LUK	16	2	m050	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν αὐτῷ, τί τοῦτο ἀκ
 LUK	16	2	p7y7	figs-rquestion	τί τοῦτο ἀκούω περὶ σοῦ?	1	What is this I hear about you?	The rich man is not looking for information. He is using the question form to scold the manager. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I have heard what you are doing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	16	2	q433		ἀπόδος τὸν λόγον τῆς οἰκονομίας σου	1	Give a report of your management	Alternate translation: “Turn over your financial records” or “Set your records in order to pass on to someone else”
 LUK	16	2	m051		οὐ γὰρ δύνῃ ἔτι οἰκονομεῖν	1	you are no longer able to manage	Alternate translation: “since you cannot be my financial manager any longer”
-LUK	16	3	m052	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν&ἐν ἑαυτῷ&τί ποιήσω, ὅτι ὁ κύριός μου ἀφαιρεῖται τὴν οἰκονομίαν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ? σκάπτειν οὐκ ἰσχύω; ἐπαιτεῖν αἰσχύνομαι	1	said to himself, ‘What should I do, since my master is taking away the management from me? I am not strong enough to dig, and I am ashamed to beg’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “asked himself what he should do, since his master was taking the management job away from him. He realized that he was not strong enough to dig ditches, and that he would be ashamed to beg for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+LUK	16	3	m052	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & ἐν ἑαυτῷ & τί ποιήσω, ὅτι ὁ κύριός μου ἀφαιρεῖται τὴν οἰκονομίαν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ? σκάπτειν οὐκ ἰσχύω; ἐπαιτεῖν αἰσχύνομαι	1	said to himself, ‘What should I do, since my master is taking away the management from me? I am not strong enough to dig, and I am ashamed to beg’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “asked himself what he should do, since his master was taking the management job away from him. He realized that he was not strong enough to dig ditches, and that he would be ashamed to beg for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	16	3	kng1	figs-explicit	ὁ κύριός μου	1	my master	The expression **my master** refers to the rich man. The manager was not a slave, although he was financially dependent on the rich man for his housing, food, etc. Alternate translation: “my employer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	16	3	t3kj	figs-synecdoche	σκάπτειν οὐκ ἰσχύω	1	I am not strong to dig	The manager is saying that he is not strong enough to work all day digging ditches in the ground. He is likely using this one kind of manual work to represent all work that would require sustained physical exertion. Alternate translation: “I am not strong enough to do manual labor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	16	4	m053	figs-quotesinquotes	ἔγνων τί ποιήσω, ἵνα ὅταν μετασταθῶ ἐκ τῆς οἰκονομίας, δέξωνταί με εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὐτῶν	1	I know what I will do, so that when I am removed from the management, they will welcome me into their houses	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He realized that there was something he could do so that when his master took away his management job, his master’s debtors would welcome him into their houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -2750,7 +2750,7 @@ LUK	16	13	msb6	figs-explicit	δυσὶ κυρίοις	1	two masters	The implicat
 LUK	16	13	u1lk	figs-parallelism	ἢ γὰρ τὸν ἕνα μισήσει, καὶ τὸν ἕτερον ἀγαπήσει; ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται, καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει	1	for either he will hate the one and he will love the other, or else he will be devoted to one and he will despise the other	Jesus is basically saying the same thing in two different ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these statements. Alternate translation: “for he is certain to love and serve one of them much better than the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	16	13	ba2m		ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται	1	be devoted to one	Alternate translation: “love the first master very strongly”
 LUK	16	13	dd9z		τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει	1	despise the other	Alternate translation: “he will hold the second master in contempt” or “he will hate the second master”
-LUK	16	13	pw7q	figs-you	οὐ δύνασθε&δουλεύειν	1	You are not able to serve	Even though Jesus has been describing the situation of an individual servant, as he draws this application, he is addressing his disciples as a group, so **you** is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	16	13	pw7q	figs-you	οὐ δύνασθε & δουλεύειν	1	You are not able to serve	Even though Jesus has been describing the situation of an individual servant, as he draws this application, he is addressing his disciples as a group, so **you** is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	16	14	taq3	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 LUK	16	14	m067	writing-participants	οἱ Φαρισαῖοι	1	the Pharisees	Here Luke reintroduces **the Pharisees** as participants in the story, but they have been present all along. Jesus told them the three parables in [15:3–32](../15/03.md), and they have since been listening to what Jesus has been teaching his disciples. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees who were present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	16	14	lbq9		φιλάργυροι ὑπάρχοντες	1	who were lovers of money	Alternate translation: “who loved having money” or “who were very greedy for money”
@@ -2777,7 +2777,7 @@ LUK	16	17	t33k	figs-metaphor	πεσεῖν	1	to fall	Jesus uses the term **fall*
 LUK	16	18	m077	figs-explicit	πᾶς ὁ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ	1	Everyone who divorces his wife	Here Jesus is implicitly giving an example of something in the law that is still valid. Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that the Pharisees allowed divorce, and he is teaching that they should not do that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example, you Pharisees allow divorce. But that is not what God wants. Anyone who divorces his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	16	18	j8fn		πᾶς ὁ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ	1	Everyone who divorces his wife	Alternate translation: “Anyone who divorces his wife” or “Any man who divorces his wife”
 LUK	16	18	i544		μοιχεύει	1	commits adultery	Alternate translation: “is guilty of adultery”
-LUK	16	18	sq24		ὁ&γαμῶν	2	the one who marries	Alternate translation: “any man who marries”
+LUK	16	18	sq24		ὁ & γαμῶν	2	the one who marries	Alternate translation: “any man who marries”
 LUK	16	18	m078	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἀπολελυμένην ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς γαμῶν	1	one divorced from her husband	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a woman whose husband has divorced her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	16	19	kd1x	figs-parables	δέ	1	Now	Jesus uses the term **Now** to introduce a story that will help people understand better what he has been teaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Here is an illustration to help you understand:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	16	19	r67p	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπος δέ τις ἦν πλούσιος	1	there was a certain rich man	This introduces one of the characters in the parable. It is not clear whether this is a real person, or simply a person in a story that Jesus is telling in order to make a point. You may need to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “There once was a rich man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -2814,11 +2814,11 @@ LUK	16	25	we9w	figs-nominaladj	τὰ ἀγαθά σου	1	the good of yours	Abra
 LUK	16	25	rv17		ὁμοίως	1	likewise	Abraham is referring to the fact that both men received something while they lived on earth. He is not saying that what they received was the same. Alternate translation: “while he was living received”
 LUK	16	25	hwc8	figs-nominaladj	τὰ κακά	1	the bad	Abraham is using the adjective **bad** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. It is plural. Alternate translation: “bad things” or “things that caused him to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	16	25	g4js	figs-activepassive	παρακαλεῖται	1	he is comforted	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he is comfortable” or “he is receiving things that make him happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	16	25	cn8i	figs-activepassive	σὺ&ὀδυνᾶσαι	1	you are tormented	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are suffering greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	16	25	cn8i	figs-activepassive	σὺ & ὀδυνᾶσαι	1	you are tormented	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are suffering greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	16	26	m087	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις, μεταξὺ ἡμῶν καὶ ὑμῶν χάσμα μέγα ἐστήρικται, ὅπως οἱ θέλοντες διαβῆναι ἔνθεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς μὴ δύνωνται, μηδὲ ἐκεῖθεν πρὸς ἡμᾶς διαπερῶσιν	1	And with all these things, between us and you a great chasm has been put in place, so that those who want to cross over from here to you are not able, and none may cross over from there to us	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Abraham also told him that God had placed a huge pit between them, so that no one who wanted to cross over to where the rich man was, and no one who wanted to come over from there to where Abraham was, would be able to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	16	26	af4h	figs-idiom	καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις	1	And with all these things	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “In addition to this reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	16	26	m088	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	Abraham means himself and the people who are with him, but not the rich man, so **us** is exclusive in both instances in this verse, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-LUK	16	26	m089	figs-you	ὑμῶν&ὑμᾶς	1	you … you	Even though Abraham is speaking to the rich man individually, he is referring to all of the people who are in Hades with him, so **you** is plural in both instances in this verse. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	16	26	m088	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	Abraham means himself and the people who are with him, but not the rich man, so **us** is exclusive in both instances in this verse, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	16	26	m089	figs-you	ὑμῶν & ὑμᾶς	1	you … you	Even though Abraham is speaking to the rich man individually, he is referring to all of the people who are in Hades with him, so **you** is plural in both instances in this verse. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	16	26	tu5w	figs-activepassive	χάσμα μέγα ἐστήρικται	1	a great chasm has been set in place	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has placed a huge pit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	16	26	sg6d	figs-ellipsis	μηδὲ ἐκεῖθεν πρὸς ἡμᾶς διαπερῶσιν	1	and that they may not go across from there to us	Abraham is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that those who want to come across from where you are to where we are will not be able to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	16	27	abcj	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν δέ, ἐρωτῶ οὖν σε Πάτερ, ἵνα πέμψῃς αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου	1	Then he said, ‘I beg you then, Father, that you would send him to the house of my father	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So the rich man then begged Abraham, addressing him respectfully as his ancestor, to send Lazarus to his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -2856,16 +2856,16 @@ LUK	17	2	k9xl	figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίσῃ	1	he should trap	See how you t
 LUK	17	2	xm7x	figs-metaphor	τῶν μικρῶν τούτων	1	these little ones	This could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically **little** compared to adults. Alternate translation: “these children who believe in me” (2) a figurative reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “these new believers” or (3) a figurative reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “these common people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	17	3	m104	figs-explicit	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς	1	Pay attention to yourselves	Since Jesus is teaching about how important it is not to sin and not to encourage others to sin, the implication is that this statement means that he wants his disciples to help one another not to sin. Alternate translation: “Help one another not to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	17	3	m105	figs-you	προσέχετε	1	Pay attention	The implied “you” in this imperative is plural, since Jesus is speaking to his disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	17	3	m106	figs-youcrowd	σου&ἐπιτίμησον&ἄφες	1	your … rebuke … forgive	The word **your** and the implied “you” in the imperatives **rebuke** and **forgive** are singular, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK	17	3	m106	figs-youcrowd	σου & ἐπιτίμησον & ἄφες	1	your … rebuke … forgive	The word **your** and the implied “you” in the imperatives **rebuke** and **forgive** are singular, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	17	3	hyn8	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ἁμάρτῃ ὁ ἀδελφός σου, ἐπιτίμησον αὐτῷ	1	If your brother sins, rebuke him	Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation in order to tell his disciples what they should do if it takes place. Alternate translation: “Suppose a fellow believer were to sin. Then you should rebuke him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 LUK	17	3	kkp3	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἀδελφός σου	1	your brother	Jesus is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	17	3	m107	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφός σου	1	your brother	Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	17	3	p35i		ἐπιτίμησον αὐτῷ	1	rebuke him	Alternate translation: “correct him” or “tell him strongly that what he did was wrong”
 LUK	17	3	m108	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	καὶ ἐὰν μετανοήσῃ, ἄφες αὐτῷ	1	and if he repents, forgive him	Jesus is describing another hypothetical situation in order to tell his disciples what they should do if it takes place. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And suppose that believer were to repent. Then you should forgive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 LUK	17	4	x8a3	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	καὶ ἐὰν ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας ἁμαρτήσῃ εἰς σὲ, καὶ ἑπτάκις ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς σὲ, λέγων μετανοῶ, ἀφήσεις αὐτῷ	1	And if he sins against you seven times in the day, and seven times returns to you, saying, ‘I repent,’ you will forgive him	Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation in order to tell his disciples what they should do if it takes place. Alternate translation: “Suppose a fellow believer were to sin against you seven times in the same day. And suppose each time he came to you and said, ‘I am sorry.’ Then you would have to forgive him each time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-LUK	17	4	k5va	figs-idiom	ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας&καὶ ἑπτάκις	1	seven times in the day, and seven times	The number **seven** in the Bible represents a large or sufficient quantity. Alternate translation: “many times in the same day, and each time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	17	4	k5va	figs-idiom	ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας & καὶ ἑπτάκις	1	seven times in the day, and seven times	The number **seven** in the Bible represents a large or sufficient quantity. Alternate translation: “many times in the same day, and each time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	17	4	m109		τῆς ἡμέρας	1	in the day	Alternate translation: “in the same day”
-LUK	17	4	m110	figs-youcrowd	σὲ&σὲ&ἀφήσεις	1	you … you … you will forgive	The word **you** is singular in this verse, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK	17	4	m110	figs-youcrowd	σὲ & σὲ & ἀφήσεις	1	you … you … you will forgive	The word **you** is singular in this verse, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 LUK	17	4	m111	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς σὲ, λέγων μετανοῶ, ἀφήσεις αὐτῷ	1	returns to you, saying, ‘I repent,’ you will forgive him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “comes to you and says that he is sorry, you must forgive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	17	4	m112	figs-declarative	ἀφήσεις αὐτῷ	1	you will forgive him	Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction and command. Alternate translation: “you must forgive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 LUK	17	5	s4dy		οἱ ἀπόστολοι	1	the apostles	This means the 12 disciples whom Jesus appointed as his authoritative representatives in [6:13](../06/13.md). See how you translated the term there.
@@ -2873,7 +2873,7 @@ LUK	17	5	m114		τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	the Lord	Here Luke is referring to Jesus by a
 LUK	17	5	pji3	figs-imperative	πρόσθες ἡμῖν πίστιν	1	Increase faith to us	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request, rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give us more faith” or “Please help us to trust God better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	17	6	m115		ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord	Here Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
 LUK	17	6	m116	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐλέγετε ἂν τῇ συκαμίνῳ ταύτῃ	1	If you had faith like a mustard seed, you would say to this mulberry tree	Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation. He is asserting that if the condition is true, then the result will necessarily follow. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that if you had faith like a mustard seed, you could say to this mulberry tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-LUK	17	6	m117	figs-you	ἔχετε&ἐλέγετε&ὑμῖν	1	you had … you would say … you	Even though Jesus is describing something that an individual might do, **you** is plural in this verse because he is speaking to his 12 apostles in response to their request. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	17	6	m117	figs-you	ἔχετε & ἐλέγετε & ὑμῖν	1	you had … you would say … you	Even though Jesus is describing something that an individual might do, **you** is plural in this verse because he is speaking to his 12 apostles in response to their request. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	17	6	ep7z	figs-simile	εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως	1	If you had faith like a mustard seed	A **mustard seed** is a very small seed. Jesus is using this seed in a simile to mean a very small amount. Alternate translation: “If you had even a tiny amount of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 LUK	17	6	m118	translate-unknown	κόκκον σινάπεως	1	a mustard seed	If your readers would not be familiar with a **mustard seed**, you could use the name of another small seed with which they would be familiar, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a very small seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	17	6	i31l	translate-unknown	τῇ συκαμίνῳ ταύτῃ	1	mulberry tree	Jesus likely uses a **mulberry tree** as an example because it has an extensive root system that makes it very difficult to uproot. If your readers would not be familiar with this tree, you could use the name of another type of tree with extensive roots that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “to this firmly rooted tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2883,7 +2883,7 @@ LUK	17	6	g53n	figs-idiom	ὑπήκουσεν ἂν ὑμῖν	1	it would listen
 LUK	17	7	dk3q	figs-rquestion	τίς δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν δοῦλον ἔχων, ἀροτριῶντα ἢ ποιμαίνοντα, ὃς εἰσελθόντι ἐκ τοῦ ἀγροῦ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ, εὐθέως παρελθὼν ἀνάπεσε?	1	But which of you is it, having a servant plowing or tending sheep, who will say to him, having come in from the field, ‘Come immediately and recline to eat’?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But none of you who had a servant who was out plowing or tending sheep would say to him when he came in from the field, ‘Come immediately and recline to eat’!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	17	7	m120	figs-hypo	τίς δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν δοῦλον ἔχων, ἀροτριῶντα ἢ ποιμαίνοντα, ὃς εἰσελθόντι ἐκ τοῦ ἀγροῦ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ, εὐθέως παρελθὼν ἀνάπεσε?	1	But which of you is it, having a servant plowing or tending sheep, who will say to him, having come in from the field, ‘Come immediately and recline to eat’?	Jesus is using an illustration that involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose one of you had a servant who was out plowing or tending sheep. You would not say to him when he came in from the field, ‘Come immediately and recline to eat.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	17	7	m121	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰσελθόντι ἐκ τοῦ ἀγροῦ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ, εὐθέως παρελθὼν ἀνάπεσε	1	will say to him, having come in from the field, ‘Come immediately and recline to eat’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “would tell him as soon as he came in from the field to sit right down and have his own supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	17	7	va34	figs-explicit	δοῦλον&ἀροτριῶντα ἢ ποιμαίνοντα	1	a servant plowing or tending sheep	It may be helpful to say explicitly that the land and sheep hypothetically belong to the person who is being asked to consider what he would do in this situation. Alternate translation: “a servant who had been out plowing your land or taking care of your sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	17	7	va34	figs-explicit	δοῦλον & ἀροτριῶντα ἢ ποιμαίνοντα	1	a servant plowing or tending sheep	It may be helpful to say explicitly that the land and sheep hypothetically belong to the person who is being asked to consider what he would do in this situation. Alternate translation: “a servant who had been out plowing your land or taking care of your sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	17	7	m122	translate-unknown	ἀνάπεσε	1	recline to eat	See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). Alternate translation: “and sit down to eat” or “and sit down and have your supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	17	8	iw9j	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ, ἑτοίμασον τί δειπνήσω, καὶ περιζωσάμενος διακόνει μοι, ἕως φάγω καὶ πίω; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα φάγεσαι καὶ πίεσαι σύ?	1	will he not say to him, ‘Prepare something I may eat, and girding yourself, serve me while I eat and drink, and after these things you will eat and drink’?	Jesus uses a second question as a further teaching tool, to emphasize how a person actually would treat a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “he would certainly say to him, ‘Prepare something for me to eat, and then wrap your robe around your hips so you could serve me while I eat and drink, and after that you yourself can eat and drink’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	17	8	m123	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐχὶ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ, ἑτοίμασον τί δειπνήσω, καὶ περιζωσάμενος διακόνει μοι, ἕως φάγω καὶ πίω; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα φάγεσαι καὶ πίεσαι σύ?	1	will he not say to him, ‘Prepare something I may eat, and girding yourself, serve me while I eat and drink, and after these things you will eat and drink’?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he would certainly tell the servant to prepare something for him to eat, and then to wrap his robe around his hips so he could serve him while he ate and drank, and that only after doing that the servant himself could eat and drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -2934,7 +2934,7 @@ LUK	17	19	m196	figs-explicit	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	Your
 LUK	17	19	m146	figs-personification	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	Your faith has saved you	Jesus speaks of the leper’s **faith** as if it had actively saved him. Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have received salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	17	20	lvu1	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐπερωτηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων πότε ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	And having been asked by the Pharisees when the kingdom of God was coming	Luke uses this phrase to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens next. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Now when some Pharisees asked Jesus when the kingdom of God was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 LUK	17	20	m147	figs-quotations	ἐπερωτηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων πότε ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	And having been asked by the Pharisees when the kingdom of God was coming	If it would be helpful in your language, you could present this as a direct quotation rather than as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Now some Pharisees asked Jesus, ‘When is the kingdom of God coming?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-LUK	17	20	m148	figs-activepassive	ἐπερωτηθεὶς&ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	having been asked by the Pharisees	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was the recipient of the action. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees asked Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	17	20	m148	figs-activepassive	ἐπερωτηθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	having been asked by the Pharisees	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was the recipient of the action. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees asked Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	17	20	m149	figs-abstractnouns	πότε ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	when the kingdom of God was coming	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “when God would begin to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	17	20	m150	figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς καὶ εἶπεν	1	he answered them and said	Together the two words **answered** and **said** mean that Jesus said what follows in response to the question that the Pharisees asked him. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	17	20	yc3i	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ μετὰ παρατηρήσεως	1	The kingdom of God is not coming with observation	Jesus uses the word **observation** to mean things that people can observe. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is not coming with signs that people can observe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2945,7 +2945,7 @@ LUK	17	21	m154	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ γὰρ	1	For behold	Jesus is using the
 LUK	17	21	xj7z	figs-you	ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1	the kingdom of God is within you	This could mean: (1) the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of what people believe and decide within themselves. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is inside of you” (2) since the word **you** is plural here, Jesus may be saying that the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of something that happens within communities of people. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is in your midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	17	21	xpi7	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1	the kingdom of God is within you	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God is ruling inside of you” or “God is ruling in your midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	17	22	x3y2	figs-idiom	ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ὅτε	1	The days will come when	Jesus is using the term **Days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “There will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	17	22	v2i3	figs-idiom	ἐπιθυμήσετε&ἰδεῖν	1	you will desire to see	Jesus is using the term **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “you will want very much to experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	17	22	v2i3	figs-idiom	ἐπιθυμήσετε & ἰδεῖν	1	you will desire to see	Jesus is using the term **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “you will want very much to experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	17	22	ly8x	figs-metonymy	μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	one of the days of the Son of Man	Jesus is using his title **the Son of Man** to refer to the time when he will rule as king. Alternate translation: “one of the days when the Son of Man will rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	17	22	m155	figs-synecdoche	μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	one of the days of the Son of Man	Jesus is using one of these **days** to refer to the whole time that it belongs to. Alternate translation: “the time when the Son of Man will rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	17	22	z11c	figs-123person	τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	of the days of the Son of Man	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “of my days as the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -2953,7 +2953,7 @@ LUK	17	22	m156	figs-explicit	τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ 
 LUK	17	22	x7sq	figs-idiom	καὶ οὐκ ὄψεσθε	1	but you will not see it	Jesus is using the term **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “but you will not experience it yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	17	23	dp8g	figs-explicit	ἐροῦσιν ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐκεῖ, ἤ, ἰδοὺ, ὧδε	1	they will say to you, ‘Behold, there!’ or ‘Behold, here!’	The implication in context is that Jesus is speaking of the Son of Man or Messiah. Alternate translation: “people will say to you, ‘Look, the Messiah is over there!’ or, ‘Look, the Messiah is over here!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	17	23	m157	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐροῦσιν ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐκεῖ, ἤ, ἰδοὺ, ὧδε	1	they will say to you, ‘Behold, there!’ or ‘Behold, here!’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “people will tell you that the Messiah is over in one place or with them in another place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	17	23	m158	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ&ἰδοὺ	1	Behold … Behold	These people would be using the term **behold** to get others to focus their attention on what they were saying. Alternate translation: “Hey … Hey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	17	23	m158	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ & ἰδοὺ	1	Behold … Behold	These people would be using the term **behold** to get others to focus their attention on what they were saying. Alternate translation: “Hey … Hey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	17	23	m159	figs-doublet	μὴ ἀπέλθητε μηδὲ διώξητε	1	Do not go out or run after them	The expressions **go out** and **run after** mean similar things. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “Do not go where they tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	17	23	kjy2	figs-explicit	μὴ ἀπέλθητε μηδὲ διώξητε	1	Do not go out or run after them	The implication is that people would **go** to look for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not go where they tell you to look for the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	17	24	m160		ἡ ἀστραπὴ ἀστράπτουσα ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν εἰς τὴν ὑπ’ οὐρανὸν λάμπει	1	just as the lightning flashing from a place under the sky shines to a place under the sky	Alternate translation: “lightning that flashes lights up the sky from one end to the other”
@@ -2962,10 +2962,10 @@ LUK	17	24	m161	translate-textvariants	οὕτως ἔσται ὁ Υἱὸς τ
 LUK	17	24	m162	figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	so will the Son of Man be	The implication is that **so will the Son of Man be** refers to the future reign of Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. (If you have chosen to represent the phrase “in his day” in your translation, the alternate translation offered here would be expressing that as explicit meaning.) Alternate translation: “it will be like that when the Son of Man comes to reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	17	24	m163	figs-123person	οὕτως ἔσται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	so will the Son of Man be	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “so will I, the Son of Man, be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	17	24	m164	figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	so will the Son of Man be	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “so will I, the Messiah, be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	17	25	csa3	figs-123person	δεῖ αὐτὸν&παθεῖν	1	it is necessary for him to suffer	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK	17	25	csa3	figs-123person	δεῖ αὐτὸν & παθεῖν	1	it is necessary for him to suffer	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	17	25	dp8a	figs-activepassive	ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	be rejected by this generation	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “the people of this generation must reject him” or, if you translated with the first person, “the people of this generation must reject me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	17	25	m165	figs-metonymy	τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης	1	this generation	Jesus is using the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	17	26	d2ne		καθὼς ἐγένετο&οὕτως ἔσται καὶ	1	just as it happened … so it will also be	Alternate translation: “just as people were doing certain things … so people will be doing the same things”
+LUK	17	26	d2ne		καθὼς ἐγένετο & οὕτως ἔσται καὶ	1	just as it happened … so it will also be	Alternate translation: “just as people were doing certain things … so people will be doing the same things”
 LUK	17	26	v1sr	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Νῶε	1	in the days of Noah	Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when Noah was living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	17	26	ktl1	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	in the days of the Son of Man	Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Son of Man is about to return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	17	26	m167	figs-123person	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	in the days of the Son of Man	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “in my days as the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -3037,7 +3037,7 @@ LUK	18	4	m199	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν ο
 LUK	18	4	bh3q	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	men	The judge is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	18	5	m200	figs-quotesinquotes	διά γε τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην, ἐκδικήσω αὐτήν, ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με	1	yet because this widow causes me trouble, I will vindicate her, so that she will not beat me up by coming to the end	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse): “because this widow bothered him, he would give a fair ruling in her case, so that she would not wear him out by coming incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	18	5	v9uu		παρέχειν μοι κόπον	1	causes me trouble	Alternate translation: “bothers me”
-LUK	18	5	cf4e	figs-metaphor	μὴ&ὑπωπιάζῃ με	1	she will not beat me up	The judge speaks of the wearying effect of the widow’s constant pleas as if they were physically pummeling him. Alternate translation: “she will not wear me out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	18	5	cf4e	figs-metaphor	μὴ & ὑπωπιάζῃ με	1	she will not beat me up	The judge speaks of the wearying effect of the widow’s constant pleas as if they were physically pummeling him. Alternate translation: “she will not wear me out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	18	5	ub29	figs-idiom	εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη	1	by coming to the end	The expression **to the end** is an idiom that means “perpetually” or “forever.” Alternate translation: “by coming to me incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	18	6	m201		ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord	Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
 LUK	18	6	t9mg	figs-idiom	ἀκούσατε τί ὁ κριτὴς τῆς ἀδικίας λέγει	1	Listen to what the unrighteous judge says	**Listen to** is an idiom that means “think about.” Jesus says this to get his disciples to reflect on what the judge said at the end of the parable. He is not introducing a further statement from the judge. Translate this in such a way that your readers will understand that Jesus has already related what the judge said. Alternate translation: “Think about what the unjust judge said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -3053,7 +3053,7 @@ LUK	18	8	m205	figs-explicit	πλὴν	1	Nevertheless	The reference of the word *
 LUK	18	8	inw3	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐλθὼν	1	when the Son of Man comes	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “when I, the Son of Man, come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	18	8	m206	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐλθὼν	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “when I, the Messiah, come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	18	8	m207	figs-explicit	τὴν πίστιν	1	faith	When Jesus asks whether he will find **faith** on the earth, he may be referring implicitly to the kind of persevering trust in God that would lead a person to continue praying even when the answer was delayed. (UST offers another possible interpretation of this word.) Alternate translation: “this kind of persevering faith” or “this kind of persevering trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	18	9	n2b5	figs-parables	εἶπεν δὲ καὶ πρός τινας&τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην	1	Then he also spoke this parable to some	Jesus now tells a brief story to correct some wrong attitudes that he realized certain people had. The story is designed teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told this story to correct certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+LUK	18	9	n2b5	figs-parables	εἶπεν δὲ καὶ πρός τινας & τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην	1	Then he also spoke this parable to some	Jesus now tells a brief story to correct some wrong attitudes that he realized certain people had. The story is designed teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told this story to correct certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 LUK	18	9	pmp1	writing-participants	πρός τινας	1	to some	Luke uses this phrase to introduce some new characters, but he does not say specifically who these people were. (The story that Jesus tells suggests that they may have been Pharisees.) Alternate translation: “to some people who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	18	9	b6zy		τοὺς πεποιθότας ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῖς, ὅτι εἰσὶν δίκαιοι	1	who were persuaded in themselves that they were righteous	Alternate translation: “who had convinced themselves that they were righteous” or “who considered themselves to be righteous”
 LUK	18	9	rs6q		καὶ ἐξουθενοῦντας τοὺς λοιποὺς	1	who disdained others	Alternate translation: “and who thought they were superior to other people”
@@ -3077,27 +3077,27 @@ LUK	18	13	m216	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, ὁ Θεός, ἱλάσθητί 
 LUK	18	13	mx5p	figs-imperative	ὁ Θεός, ἱλάσθητί μοι, τῷ ἁμαρτωλῷ	1	God, have mercy on me, the sinner	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “God, please be merciful to me, I confess that I am a sinner” or “God, please forgive me for the many sins I have committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	18	14	m217		λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	18	14	s1yr	figs-explicit	κατέβη οὗτος δεδικαιωμένος εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, παρ’ ἐκεῖνον	1	this one went down to his house justified rather than that one	The implication is that the tax collector was right with God because God forgave his sin when he prayed humbly and repentantly. Alternate translation: “the tax collector was right with God when he went home, rather than the Pharisee, because God forgave his sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	18	14	m218		οὗτος&παρ’ ἐκεῖνον	1	this one … rather than that one	Alternate translation: “the latter … rather than the former” or “the tax collector … rather than the Pharisee”
+LUK	18	14	m218		οὗτος & παρ’ ἐκεῖνον	1	this one … rather than that one	Alternate translation: “the latter … rather than the former” or “the tax collector … rather than the Pharisee”
 LUK	18	14	m219	figs-activepassive	δεδικαιωμένος	1	justified	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **justified** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	18	14	m220	figs-idiom	κατέβη&εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	went down to his house	When Jesus says that this man **went down** to his house, he likely means that he returned home from Jerusalem, since the city was up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	18	14	m220	figs-idiom	κατέβη & εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	went down to his house	When Jesus says that this man **went down** to his house, he likely means that he returned home from Jerusalem, since the city was up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	18	14	qrg3	figs-explicit	παρ’ ἐκεῖνον	1	rather than that one	The implication is that the Pharisee was not right with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but the Pharisee was not right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	18	14	n7xr	figs-activepassive	ταπεινωθήσεται	1	will be humbled	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will humble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	18	14	uuc5	figs-activepassive	ὑψωθήσεται	1	will be exalted	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	18	14	m221	figs-metaphor	ὑψωθήσεται	1	will be exalted	Jesus is using a spatial metaphor to describe someone who is honored as if he were high up. Alternate translation: “God will honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	18	15	m260	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	18	15	abcm	writing-pronouns	προσέφερον&αὐτῷ καὶ τὰ βρέφη	1	they were bringing even the infants to him	Here, **they** refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “people were bringing their children to Jesus, even their newborns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	18	15	abcm	writing-pronouns	προσέφερον & αὐτῷ καὶ τὰ βρέφη	1	they were bringing even the infants to him	Here, **they** refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “people were bringing their children to Jesus, even their newborns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	18	15	m222	translate-symaction	ἵνα αὐτῶν ἅπτηται	1	so that he might touch them	If Jesus would **touch** the babies, this would express God’s love for them and convey God’s blessing to them. Alternate translation: “so that he could put his hands on them and bless them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	18	15	kxd9	figs-explicit	ἐπετίμων αὐτοῖς	1	they were rebuking them	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “tried to stop the parents from bringing their children to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	18	16	y3qg	writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς προσεκαλέσατο αὐτὰ λέγων	1	But Jesus summoned them, saying	Alternate translation: “But Jesus called the children to come to him, telling his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	18	16	j8x3	figs-verbs	ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά	1	Permit the little children to come to me, and do not forbid them	The verb in the first phrase indicates a one-time action, while the verb in the second phrase indicates an ongoing action. Alternate translation: “Allow these children to come to me, and do not ever forbid children to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
-LUK	18	16	u7sq	figs-simile	τῶν&τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of such is the kingdom of God	It becomes clear in [18:17](../18/17.md) that this is simile. You could express it as one here. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists of people who are like these little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-LUK	18	16	m223	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν&τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of such is the kingdom of God	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “people who are like children will let God rule their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+LUK	18	16	u7sq	figs-simile	τῶν & τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of such is the kingdom of God	It becomes clear in [18:17](../18/17.md) that this is simile. You could express it as one here. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists of people who are like these little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+LUK	18	16	m223	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν & τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of such is the kingdom of God	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “people who are like children will let God rule their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	18	17	p5lq		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃς ἂν	1	Truly I say to you, whoever	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that whoever”
 LUK	18	17	m224	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	receive the kingdom of God	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “does not let God rule over him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	18	17	ar8e	figs-simile	ὡς παιδίον	1	like a child	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the basis of this comparison. Alternate translation: “with trust and humility like a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 LUK	18	17	m225		οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν	1	will certainly not enter into it	Alternate translation: “will not let God rule over him at all”
 LUK	18	18	a5qz	writing-participants	καὶ ἐπηρώτησέν τις αὐτὸν ἄρχων	1	And a certain ruler asked him	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “Then a Jewish leader came up to Jesus and asked him a question” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	18	18	d6kf		τί ποιήσας&κληρονομήσω	1	doing what will I inherit	Alternate translation: “what do I need to do to inherit”
+LUK	18	18	d6kf		τί ποιήσας & κληρονομήσω	1	doing what will I inherit	Alternate translation: “what do I need to do to inherit”
 LUK	18	18	xrs8	figs-metaphor	κληρονομήσω	1	will I inherit	The ruler is using the term **inherit** to mean coming into possession of something. Alternate translation: “will I receive” or “will I obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	18	19	fxi2	figs-rquestion	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	Why do you call me good? No one is good except God alone	Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. He is not asking the ruler to explain why he used this term. Jesus is also not denying that he is God. Rather, he is challenging the ruler to reflect on whether, in light of God’s holiness, he should consider any human being to be **good**. The ruler apparently considers Jesus to be a **good** human being, and he wants to know how he can be **good** enough himself to earn God’s approval. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement, and it may be helpful to combine that statement with the next sentence in the verse. Alternate translation: “You should not consider any human being to be good, since no one is good except God alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	18	20	m226	figs-explicit	τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας	1	You know the commandments	The implication is that Jesus is saying this in response to the ruler’s question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As for what God expects from us, you know what he has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3109,7 +3109,7 @@ LUK	18	22	t2cw		ἔτι ἕν σοι λείπει	1	One thing is still lacking t
 LUK	18	22	d3ar		πάντα ὅσα ἔχεις, πώλησον	1	Sell all that you have	Alternate translation: “Sell all your possessions” or “Sell everything that you own”
 LUK	18	22	c4s5	figs-nominaladj	πτωχοῖς	1	distribute to the poor	Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	18	22	hy6a	figs-metaphor	δεῦρο, ἀκολούθει μοι	1	come, follow me	As in [5:27](../05/27.md), to **follow** Jesus means to be one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “come with me as my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	18	23	m228	writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ ἀκούσας ταῦτα&ἐγενήθη	1	But he, hearing these things, became	Alternate translation: “But when the ruler heard what Jesus said, he became” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	18	23	m228	writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ ἀκούσας ταῦτα & ἐγενήθη	1	But he, hearing these things, became	Alternate translation: “But when the ruler heard what Jesus said, he became” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	18	24	m229	translate-textvariants	ἰδὼν δὲ αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Then Jesus, looking at him	Many manuscripts have two additional Greek words here, so that this says, “Then Jesus, seeing him having become sad.” See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to represent those words in your translation. Alternate translation (if you choose to represent them): “Then Jesus, noticing how sad the ruler had become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 LUK	18	24	qcm7	figs-exclamations	πῶς δυσκόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες, εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσπορεύονται	1	How difficultly those who have riches are entering into the kingdom of God	This is an exclamation, not a question. Alternate translation: “It is so very difficult for those who are rich to enter the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 LUK	18	24	m230	figs-abstractnouns	πῶς δυσκόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες, εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσπορεύονται	1	How difficultly those who have riches are entering into the kingdom of God	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “It is so very difficult for those who are rich to allow God to rule their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -3122,7 +3122,7 @@ LUK	18	26	vu3z	figs-rquestion	καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι?	1	A
 LUK	18	26	m233	figs-activepassive	καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι?	1	And who is able to be saved?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could specify the agent. Alternate translation: “Then God is not going to save anyone!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	18	27	ms9b	figs-nominaladj	τὰ ἀδύνατα παρὰ ἀνθρώποις, δυνατὰ παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ ἐστιν	1	The impossible with men is possible with God	Jesus is using the adjectives **impossible** and **possible** as nouns to describe types of things. The terms are plural. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these terms with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “The things that are impossible for people to do are possible for God to do” or “God is able to do the things that people are not able to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	18	28	m235	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	Peter uses the term **Behold** to get Jesus to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	18	28	znu6	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν&ἠκολουθήσαμέν	1	we have left … we have followed	Peter is referring to himself and his fellow disciples, but not to Jesus, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **we**, use the exclusive form in both of these cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	18	28	znu6	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν & ἠκολουθήσαμέν	1	we have left … we have followed	Peter is referring to himself and his fellow disciples, but not to Jesus, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **we**, use the exclusive form in both of these cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	18	28	yk9b		πάντα	1	everything	This is not hyperbole. Peter and the others did leave behind **everything** they had in order to become Jesus’ disciples. Alternate translation: “all our possessions”
 LUK	18	28	m236	translate-textvariants	πάντα	1	everything	Some manuscripts say “our own possessions” here instead of “everything.” See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide which reading to use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 LUK	18	28	m262	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἠκολουθήσαμέν σοι	1	and we have followed you	As in [18:22](../18/22.md), to follow Jesus means to be one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “in order to become your disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3130,9 +3130,9 @@ LUK	18	29	vz2w		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	Jesus says
 LUK	18	29	sk6z	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν	1	there is no one who has left	A double negative statement begins in this verse and concludes in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the entire double negative statement as a positive statement. Alternate translation, beginning here: “anyone who has left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	18	29	m237	figs-abstractnouns	εἵνεκεν τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	for the sake of the kingdom of God	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “in order to allow God to rule over his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	18	30	s6rp	figs-doublenegatives	ὃς οὐχὶ μὴ ἀπολάβῃ	1	who will by no means not receive	This is the conclusion of the double negative statement that began in the previous verse with “there is no one who has left.” If you started to translate it there as a positive statement, you could finish that translation here. Alternate translation: “will certainly receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-LUK	18	30	m238	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ&ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ	1	in this time … in the age that is coming	Jesus is using the word **time** in the same figurative sense as the word **age** in [16:8](../16/08.md), to mean the long period of time defined by the duration of the created world; by association, it means the world itself. Here, Jesus is using the word **age** similarly to mean the new world that God will introduce after the end of this present world. Alternate translation: “in this present world … in the world to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	18	30	m238	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ & ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ	1	in this time … in the age that is coming	Jesus is using the word **time** in the same figurative sense as the word **age** in [16:8](../16/08.md), to mean the long period of time defined by the duration of the created world; by association, it means the world itself. Here, Jesus is using the word **age** similarly to mean the new world that God will introduce after the end of this present world. Alternate translation: “in this present world … in the world to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	18	30	d3xa	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	and in the age that is coming, eternal life	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. you could supply these words from what he says earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and they will also receive eternal life in the world to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	18	31	pwk9		παραλαβὼν&τοὺς δώδεκα	1	he took the Twelve aside	Alternate translation: “Jesus took the Twelve to a place away from other people where they would be alone”
+LUK	18	31	pwk9		παραλαβὼν & τοὺς δώδεκα	1	he took the Twelve aside	Alternate translation: “Jesus took the Twelve to a place away from other people where they would be alone”
 LUK	18	31	m239	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	See how you translated this term in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “his 12 apostles” or “the 12 men he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	18	31	m240	translate-names	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	18	31	g4yx	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	Jesus uses the term **Behold** to get his disciples to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3160,7 +3160,7 @@ LUK	18	34	qx2n	figs-activepassive	τὰ λεγόμενα	1	the things that were
 LUK	18	35	w3sw	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	18	35	dyf9	writing-participants	τυφλός τις	1	a certain blind man	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “there was a blind man who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	18	36	t35v		τί εἴη τοῦτο	1	what this might be	Alternate translation: “what was happening”
-LUK	18	37	ckr3	writing-pronouns	ἀπήγγειλαν&αὐτῷ	1	they reported to him	Here, **they** is indefinite. It does not refer to particular individuals. Alternate translation: “people in the crowd told the blind man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	18	37	ckr3	writing-pronouns	ἀπήγγειλαν & αὐτῷ	1	they reported to him	Here, **they** is indefinite. It does not refer to particular individuals. Alternate translation: “people in the crowd told the blind man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	18	37	ku9j	translate-names	Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος	1	Jesus the Nazarene	The people call **Jesus** **the Nazarene** because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	18	38	u9ct	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	18	38	yaj2		ἐβόησεν	1	cried out	Alternate translation: “he called out” or “he shouted”
@@ -3228,7 +3228,7 @@ LUK	19	13	t82q	translate-bweight	ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς δέκα μνᾶς
 LUK	19	13	m281	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, πραγματεύσασθαι ἐν ᾧ ἔρχομαι	1	said to them, ‘Conduct business while I go’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “told them to trade with the money while he was away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	13	vwp2		πραγματεύσασθαι	1	Conduct business	Alternate translation: “Trade with this money” or “Use this money to earn more money”
 LUK	19	13	m282		ἐν ᾧ ἔρχομαι	1	in that I go	Alternate translation: “while I am gone.”
-LUK	19	14	i998	figs-hyperbole	οἱ&πολῖται αὐτοῦ	1	his citizens	This means “the people of his country.” It suggests that all the people hated him, and that may be a generalization. In your translation, you may wish to say “many people of his country,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	19	14	i998	figs-hyperbole	οἱ & πολῖται αὐτοῦ	1	his citizens	This means “the people of his country.” It suggests that all the people hated him, and that may be a generalization. In your translation, you may wish to say “many people of his country,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	19	14	j9v1		πρεσβείαν	1	a delegation	Alternate translation: “a group of people to represent them”
 LUK	19	14	m283	figs-explicit	ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ λέγοντες	1	after him, saying	The implication is that the citizens gave the delegation this message for the emperor who was going to appoint the nobleman as king. Alternate translation: “after him to tell the emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	19	14	m284	figs-quotesinquotes	ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ λέγοντες, οὐ θέλομεν τοῦτον βασιλεῦσαι ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	after him, saying, ‘We do not want this one to rule over us’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “after him to tell the emperor that they did not want this nobleman to be their king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -3237,7 +3237,7 @@ LUK	19	15	s9a7		λαβόντα τὴν βασιλείαν	1	having received the
 LUK	19	15	s2x2	figs-activepassive	καὶ εἶπεν φωνηθῆναι αὐτῷ	1	he commanded to be called to him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he told some of his other servants to bring in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	19	15	m285	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἀργύριον	1	the silver	Jesus is speaking of the money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	19	15	xc6s		τί διεπραγματεύσαντο	1	what they had gained by doing business	Alternate translation: “how much money they had earned with the money he had given them”
-LUK	19	16	iy7i	figs-quotesinquotes	παρεγένετο&ὁ πρῶτος λέγων, Κύριε, ἡ μνᾶ σου, δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς	1	the first came and said, ‘Master, your mina has earned ten minas’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the first servant came and told him that he had used his mina to earn ten more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+LUK	19	16	iy7i	figs-quotesinquotes	παρεγένετο & ὁ πρῶτος λέγων, Κύριε, ἡ μνᾶ σου, δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς	1	the first came and said, ‘Master, your mina has earned ten minas’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the first servant came and told him that he had used his mina to earn ten more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	16	m286	figs-nominaladj	ὁ πρῶτος	1	the first	Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the first servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	19	16	mf96	translate-ordinal	ὁ πρῶτος	1	the first	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “servant number one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	19	16	ejx9	figs-personification	ἡ μνᾶ σου, δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς	1	your mina has earned ten minas	The servant is speaking of the **mina** as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me to earn ten more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -3250,7 +3250,7 @@ LUK	19	17	m288	figs-imperative	ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω
 LUK	19	18	zsr1	figs-quotesinquotes	ἦλθεν ὁ δεύτερος λέγων, ἡ μνᾶ σου, Κύριε, ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς	1	the second came and said, ‘Your mina, master, has made five minas’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the second servant came and told him that he had used his mina to make five more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	18	m289	figs-nominaladj	ὁ δεύτερος	1	the second	Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	19	18	ic7p	translate-ordinal	ὁ δεύτερος	1	the second	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “servant number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-LUK	19	18	irh6	figs-personification	ἡ μνᾶ σου&ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς	1	Your mina … has made five minas	The servant is speaking of the mina as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me … to earn five more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+LUK	19	18	irh6	figs-personification	ἡ μνᾶ σου & ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς	1	Your mina … has made five minas	The servant is speaking of the mina as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me … to earn five more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	19	18	d811	translate-bweight	μνᾶ	1	mina	See how you translated **mina** in [19:13](../19/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 LUK	19	19	abcr	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν δὲ καὶ τούτῳ, καὶ σὺ ἐπάνω γίνου πέντε πόλεων	1	So he also said to this one, ‘And you will be over five cities’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So the king similarly told this second servant that he was making him the ruler of five cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	19	jxa9	figs-imperative	σὺ ἐπάνω γίνου πέντε πόλεων	1	you be over five cities	The new king speaks this as a command, but it is not one that the servant is capable of obeying on his own. Rather, the king is using the command form to appoint the servant to a position of authority. Alternate translation: “I am making you the ruler of five cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
@@ -3272,12 +3272,12 @@ LUK	19	22	m295	figs-metaphor	αἴρων ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκα, καὶ θερ
 LUK	19	23	m296	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ διὰ τί οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν, κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν, σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα?	1	And for what reason did you not put my silver in a bank, and when I returned, I would have collected it with interest?	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The king told him that in that case, he should have put his money in the bank so that he could have collected it with interest when he returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	23	spx7	figs-rquestion	καὶ διὰ τί οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν, κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν, σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα?	1	And for what reason did you not put my silver in a bank, and when I returned, I would have collected it with interest?	The king is not asking the servant to explain why he did not do this. Rather, he is using the question form to rebuke the servant. Alternate translation: “Even if I were like that, you had no reason not to put my money in the bank so that I could have collected it with interest when I returned!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	19	23	m297	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	The king uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what he said in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Even if I was like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	19	23	e1yh	translate-unknown	οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν&σὺν τόκῳ	1	put my silver in a bank … with interest	A **bank** is an institution that accepts deposits of money and uses them to make loans. It pays an **interest** premium on the deposits and charges an **interest** premium on the loans. If your culture does not have banks, or if your culture does not allow interest payments, you could translate this in a different way that would be meaningful to your readers. Alternate translation: “did you not let someone borrow my money … with a share of the profits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+LUK	19	23	e1yh	translate-unknown	οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν & σὺν τόκῳ	1	put my silver in a bank … with interest	A **bank** is an institution that accepts deposits of money and uses them to make loans. It pays an **interest** premium on the deposits and charges an **interest** premium on the loans. If your culture does not have banks, or if your culture does not allow interest payments, you could translate this in a different way that would be meaningful to your readers. Alternate translation: “did you not let someone borrow my money … with a share of the profits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	19	23	m298	figs-metonymy	μου τὸ ἀργύριον	1	my silver	The king is speaking of the money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “my money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	19	23	c8ca		σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα	1	I would have collected it with interest	Alternate translation: “I could have gotten that amount back plus the interest it would have earned” or “I would have gained a profit from it”
 LUK	19	24	h1nn	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τοῖς παρεστῶσιν εἶπεν, ἄρατε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ τὴν μνᾶν, καὶ δότε τῷ, τὰς δέκα μνᾶς ἔχοντι	1	And he said to those standing by, ‘Take the mina away from him and give it to the one who has the ten minas’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And the king told his attendants to take the mina away from this servant and give it to the one who had the ten minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	24	aj1c		τοῖς παρεστῶσιν	1	those standing by	The phrase **the ones standing by** refers to the king’s attendants, who would stand nearby him waiting to carry out any instructions that he gave. Alternate translation: “to his attendants”
-LUK	19	24	zh5s	translate-bweight	τὴν μνᾶν&τὰς δέκα μνᾶς	1	the mina … the ten minas	See how you translated the term **mina** in [19:13](../19/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
+LUK	19	24	zh5s	translate-bweight	τὴν μνᾶν & τὰς δέκα μνᾶς	1	the mina … the ten minas	See how you translated the term **mina** in [19:13](../19/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 LUK	19	25	m299	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And	The word **And** introduces a contrast between what the king wanted and what the attendants thought they should do. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 LUK	19	25	m300	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπαν αὐτῷ, Κύριε, ἔχει δέκα μνᾶς	1	they said to him, ‘Master, he has ten minas’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the attendants objected to the king that that servant already had ten minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	25	m7ql	figs-exclamations	ἔχει δέκα μνᾶς	1	he has ten minas	You could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “he already has ten minas!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -3288,7 +3288,7 @@ LUK	19	26	m302		λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	The king says this to emphasi
 LUK	19	26	m303	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1	you	The word **you** is plural because the king is speaking to his servants as a group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	19	26	f5hn	figs-explicit	παντὶ τῷ ἔχοντι, δοθήσεται	1	to everyone who has, it will be given	The king means implicitly that what a servant **has** is the money he earned by using his mina faithfully. Alternate translation: “I will entrust more money to everyone who uses the money wisely that I have already given him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	19	26	m304	figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται	1	it will be given	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will entrust more money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	19	26	ab42	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ&τοῦ μὴ ἔχοντος, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται	1	from the one who does not have, even what he has will be taken away	The king means implicitly that a servant **not having** is a servant who did not use his mina faithfully to earn more money. Alternate translation: “If someone does not use the money wisely that I have given him, I will take even that small amount away from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	19	26	ab42	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ & τοῦ μὴ ἔχοντος, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται	1	from the one who does not have, even what he has will be taken away	The king means implicitly that a servant **not having** is a servant who did not use his mina faithfully to earn more money. Alternate translation: “If someone does not use the money wisely that I have given him, I will take even that small amount away from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	19	26	d1g9	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται	1	even what he has will be taken away	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will take even that small amount away from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	19	27	m305	figs-quotesinquotes	πλὴν τοὺς ἐχθρούς μου τούτους, τοὺς μὴ θελήσαντάς με βασιλεῦσαι ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἀγάγετε ὧδε καὶ κατασφάξατε αὐτοὺς ἔμπροσθέν μου	1	But these enemies of mine, the ones who did not want me to reign over them, bring them here and kill them before me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The king then commanded his servants to bring in his enemies, the ones who had not wanted him to reign over them, and kill them in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	19	27	u44z		τοὺς ἐχθρούς μου τούτους	1	these enemies of mine	Since the enemies were not right there, instead of **these**, some languages would say “those,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “those enemies of mine”
@@ -3299,7 +3299,7 @@ LUK	19	29	y9q8	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	L
 LUK	19	29	q1wn	translate-names	Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βηθανίαν	1	Bethphage and Bethany	**Bethphage** and **Bethany** are the names of two small cities near Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	19	29	lj69	figs-activepassive	τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλαιῶν	1	the hill that is called Olivet	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	19	29	m307	translate-names	τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλαιῶν	1	the hill that is called Olivet	You could also translate this entire expression as a proper name. **Olivet** is the name of a hill or mountain. Alternate translation: “the Mount of Olives” or “Olive Tree Mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	19	30	m308	figs-youdual	ὑπάγετε&ἐν ᾗ εἰσπορευόμενοι εὑρήσετε&λύσαντες&ἀγάγετε	1	Go … entering, you will find … Untie … bring	Since Jesus is speaking to two of his disciples, **you** as a pronoun and as implied in the participle and imperative verbs would be in the dual form, if your language uses the dual form. Otherwise, all of those things would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+LUK	19	30	m308	figs-youdual	ὑπάγετε & ἐν ᾗ εἰσπορευόμενοι εὑρήσετε & λύσαντες & ἀγάγετε	1	Go … entering, you will find … Untie … bring	Since Jesus is speaking to two of his disciples, **you** as a pronoun and as implied in the participle and imperative verbs would be in the dual form, if your language uses the dual form. Otherwise, all of those things would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 LUK	19	30	m309		τὴν κατέναντι κώμην	1	the village opposite	Alternate translation: “that village right ahead of us”
 LUK	19	30	qq5c	translate-unknown	πῶλον	1	a colt	The term **colt** refers to a young donkey. If your readers would not be familiar with what a donkey is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	19	30	m310	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένον	1	tied up	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whose owner has tied its reins securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3307,7 +3307,7 @@ LUK	19	30	w1yp	figs-gendernotations	ἐφ’ ὃν οὐδεὶς πώποτε 
 LUK	19	30	m311	figs-metonymy	ἐφ’ ὃν οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἀνθρώπων ἐκάθισεν	1	on which no one of men has ever sat	Jesus is using the term **sat** to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. Alternate translation: “that no person has ever ridden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	19	31	px4k	figs-hypo	ἐάν τις ὑμᾶς ἐρωτᾷ, διὰ τί λύετε? οὕτως ἐρεῖτε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει	1	if anyone asks you, ‘Why are you untying it?’ thus you will say, ‘The Lord has need of it’	Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation that could occur. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone asks you, ‘Why are you untying it?’ Then you should tell him, ‘The Lord needs to use it’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	19	31	emu8	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐάν τις ὑμᾶς ἐρωτᾷ, διὰ τί λύετε? οὕτως ἐρεῖτε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει	1	if anyone asks you, ‘Why are you untying it?’ thus you will say, ‘The Lord has need of it’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “if anyone asks you why you are untying it, tell them that the Lord needs to use it’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	19	31	m312	figs-youdual	ὑμᾶς&διὰ τί λύετε?&ἐρεῖτε	1	you … ‘Why are you untying it?’ … you will say	Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in all of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+LUK	19	31	m312	figs-youdual	ὑμᾶς & διὰ τί λύετε? & ἐρεῖτε	1	you … ‘Why are you untying it?’ … you will say	Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in all of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 LUK	19	31	m313	figs-declarative	ἐρεῖτε	1	you will say	Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. Alternate translation: “you are to say” or “you should say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 LUK	19	31	m314		ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord	The disciples are to refer to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
 LUK	19	32	hdd8	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι	1	the ones who were sent	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the two disciples whom Jesus sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3348,7 +3348,7 @@ LUK	19	41	v3pq	figs-explicit	ὡς ἤγγισεν, ἰδὼν τὴν πόλι
 LUK	19	41	k4l2	figs-metonymy	ἔκλαυσεν ἐπ’ αὐτήν	1	he wept over it	Luke is using the city of Jerusalem to mean the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he wept over the people who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	19	42	g1ee	figs-apostrophe	εἰ ἔγνως	1	If you had known	Starting here and through [19:44](../19/44.md), Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem. He is doing this to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about the people who live there. Alternate translation: “I wish that you people of Jerusalem knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 LUK	19	42	m334	figs-idiom	εἰ ἔγνως	1	If you had known	Jesus is using what sounds like a conditional statement to express a wish. Alternate translation: “I wish that you knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	19	42	q8fm	figs-you	ἔγνως&καὶ σὺ&σου	1	you had known … even you … your	The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in your translation, you could use plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	19	42	q8fm	figs-you	ἔγνως & καὶ σὺ & σου	1	you had known … even you … your	The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in your translation, you could use plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	19	42	m335	figs-idiom	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ταύτῃ	1	in this day	Jesus is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	19	42	m336	figs-explicit	τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην	1	the things towards peace	The implication is that Jesus is speaking about people being at **peace** with God. Alternate translation: “the things that enable people to be at peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	19	42	tgs6	figs-metonymy	ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σου	1	they have been hidden from your eyes	The term **eyes** means the ability to see. Alternate translation: “you are not able to see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -3356,13 +3356,13 @@ LUK	19	42	m337	figs-activepassive	ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σο
 LUK	19	43	y3g2	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For	Jesus uses the word **For** to introduce the reason why he wishes the people of Jerusalem had known “the things toward peace,” as he said in the previous verse. Because they have not known them, their city will be surrounded by armies and destroyed. Alternate translation: “I wish you had known those things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	19	43	tib4	figs-idiom	ἥξουσιν ἡμέραι ἐπὶ σὲ	1	the days will come upon you	This is an idiom that indicates that the people of Jerusalem will experience difficult times. If your language do not say that a particular time will **come**, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “you are going to experience difficult times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	19	43	m338	figs-idiom	ἡμέραι	1	days	Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to specific times. Alternate translation: “times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	19	43	n88i	figs-you	σὲ&σου&σοι&σε&σε	1	you … your … you … you … you	The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in [19:42](../19/42.md), you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	19	43	n88i	figs-you	σὲ & σου & σοι & σε & σε	1	you … your … you … you … you	The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in [19:42](../19/42.md), you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	19	43	e7xp	translate-unknown	χάρακά	1	a barricade	The term **barricade** refers to a wooden wall with pointed stakes at the top that the enemies would make to keep people from getting out of the city. Your language may have a term for an enclosure like this. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a palisade” or “a fence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	19	44	m339	figs-metaphor	ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε	1	they will dash you to the ground	Jesus is speaking. To **dash** something **to the ground** means to pick it up and throw it forcefully aganist the ground in order to destroy it. But the enemies of Jerusalem are not going to do this literally to the city. So Jesus means that they will destroy it completely. Alternate translation: “they will completely destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	19	44	p7qg	figs-apostrophe	ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε	1	they will dash you to the ground	As the first note to [19:42](../19/42.md) explains, Jesus is addressing the city of Jerusalem. If it would be unusual in your language for someone to speak to a city that could not hear or understand him, you could explain the meaning of what Jesus is saying. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Jerusalem will completely destroy that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 LUK	19	44	m340	figs-idiom	καὶ τὰ τέκνα σου ἐν σοί	1	and your children within you	To **dash** people **to the ground** means to kill them. Alternate translation: “and they will kill your children within you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
 LUK	19	44	m341	figs-metaphor	τὰ τέκνα σου ἐν σοί	1	your children within you	Jesus speaks of the people who live in Jerusalem as if the city were their mother and they were her **children**. Here as well you could explain the meaning of what Jesus is saying, if someone in your language would not speak directly to a city. Alternate translation: “the people who live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	19	44	m342	figs-you	σε&σου&σοί&σοί&ἔγνως&σου	1	you … your … you … you … you did not know … your	The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in [19:42](../19/42.md), you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK	19	44	m342	figs-you	σε & σου & σοί & σοί & ἔγνως & σου	1	you … your … you … you … you did not know … your	The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in [19:42](../19/42.md), you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	19	44	f51h	figs-hyperbole	οὐκ ἀφήσουσιν λίθον ἐπὶ λίθον ἐν σοί	1	they will not leave stone upon stone in you	This is a figurative overstatement to emphasize how completely the enemies will destroy the city. Alternate translation: “they will destroy the walls and buildings you have built of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	19	44	xv9n	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἔγνως τὸν καιρὸν τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς σου	1	you did not know the time of your visitation	Here, **visitation** is idiomatic, with the same meaning as the word “visit” in [1:68](../01/68.md), [1:78](../01/78.md), and [7:16](../07/16.md). Alternate translation: “you did not recognize that God had sent me to help you, his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	19	45	xq47	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to indicate that this event came after the event he has just described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -3380,20 +3380,20 @@ LUK	19	47	m345	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πρῶτοι τοῦ λαοῦ	1	the first
 LUK	19	47	m346	figs-metaphor	οἱ πρῶτοι τοῦ λαοῦ	1	the first of the people	The term **first** represents being significant or important. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the people” or “many prominent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	19	48	m347	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders were trying to do and what they were able to do. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 LUK	19	48	m348		οὐχ εὕρισκον τὸ τί ποιήσωσιν	1	they were not finding that which they might do	Alternate translation: “they were not able to find a way to kill Jesus”
-LUK	19	48	m349	figs-hyperbole	ὁ λαὸς&ἅπας	1	all the people	Luke is using the term **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so many of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	19	48	m349	figs-hyperbole	ὁ λαὸς & ἅπας	1	all the people	Luke is using the term **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so many of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	19	48	pnf9	figs-metaphor	ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων	1	were hanging on him listening	Luke speaks of the people **hanging** on Jesus to emphasize how closely they were listening to what he said. Alternate translation: “were paying close attention to him to hear what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	intro	h6in			0		# Luke 20 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus answers a question about his authority (20:1–8)<br>2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who rented a vineyard to farmers (20:9–19)<br>3. Jesus answers a question about paying taxes to Caesar (20:20–26)<br>4. Jesus answers a question about marriage and the resurrection (20:27–40)<br>5. Jesus asks a challenging question about the Messiah (20:41–44)<br>6. Jesus warns about the scribes (20:45–47)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in [20:17](../20/17.md) and [20:42–43](../20/42.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Questions that seem to have no good answer<br><br>In [20:4](../20/04.md), Jesus asks the Pharisees a question that seems to have no good answer. His goal is to show them that they should have recognized John the Baptist as someone who came with God’s authority. So he asks them who gave John the authority to baptize. They could not answer, because any answer they gave would show that they should have respected John [20:5–6](../20/05.md).<br><br>In [20:22](../20/22.md), the Pharisees ask Jesus a question that seems to have no good answer. They thought that they would get Jesus in trouble either with the Roman government or the Jewish people when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar. If he said “yes,” then the Jewish people would be angry with him for telling them to pay taxes to a foreign government. If he said “no,” then the religious leaders could tell the Romans that Jesus was teaching the people to break the Roman laws. But Jesus gave them an answer they had not anticipated, and instead everyone respected the wisdom of Jesus even more.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, [Luke 20:41–44](../20/41.md), Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.”
 LUK	20	1	h8gv	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	20	1	vtg4	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	20	1	m350	writing-participants	ἐπέστησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς σὺν τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις	1	the chief priests and the scribes approached with the elders	Luke uses this statement to reintroduce these characters into the story. He mentioned their activity in opposition to Jesus as background information in [19:47–48](../19/47.md), but here he brings them back into the main action of the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	20	2	m351	figs-imperative	εἰπὸν ἡμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, ἢ τίς ἐστιν ὁ δούς σοι τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην	1	Tell us by what authority you are doing these things, or who the one is who gave you this authority	The Jewish leaders are using an imperative to ask a question, so you could translate this as a question. It may be helpful to make it two sentences. Alternate translation: “Tell us, by what authority are you doing these things? Or who is the one who gave you this authority?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-LUK	20	3	qn89	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς&εἶπεν	1	answering he said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus said what follows in response to the question from the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	20	3	qn89	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν	1	answering he said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus said what follows in response to the question from the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	20	3	ku6a		ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ λόγον καὶ εἴπατέ μοι	1	I also will ask you a word, and you say to me	Jesus begins his response with a statement, but then he gives a command, **you say to me**. It might be helpful to make the statement one sentence and the command another sentence, leading into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will also ask you a question. Now you tell me”
 LUK	20	3	m352		λόγον	1	a word	Here Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question”
 LUK	20	4	uph3		τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	The baptism of John, was it from heaven or from men?	Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. However, this is not a rhetorical question that could be translated as a statement, for example, “Surely you must admit that God, not people, gave John the authority to baptize.” This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer, because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?”
 LUK	20	4	z7cg	figs-euphemism	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. That seems to be what Jesus is doing here. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 LUK	20	4	m353	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	Here Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-LUK	20	5	mn6x		οἱ&συνελογίσαντο πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1	they reasoned among themselves	Alternate translation: “they discussed with each other what they should say”
+LUK	20	5	mn6x		οἱ & συνελογίσαντο πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1	they reasoned among themselves	Alternate translation: “they discussed with each other what they should say”
 LUK	20	5	m354	figs-hypo	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	If we should say, ‘From heaven,’ he will say, ‘For what reason did you not believe him?’	The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then why did you not believe him’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	20	5	z599	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ?	1	If we should say, ‘From heaven,’ he will say, ‘For what reason did you not believe him?’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	20	5	m4l7	figs-euphemism	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	See how you translated this expression in [20:4](../20/04.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@@ -3403,7 +3403,7 @@ LUK	20	6	m356	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	See how you translate
 LUK	20	6	m357	figs-hyperbole	ὁ λαὸς ἅπας	1	the whole people	For emphasis, the Jewish leaders speak as if every single person in the Jewish nation believed that John was God’s prophet and would stone them if they said otherwise. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	20	6	m358	figs-idiom	ὁ λαὸς ἅπας	1	the … people	This was a customary way of speaking of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	20	6	nns5	figs-explicit	καταλιθάσει ἡμᾶς	1	stone us	The implication is that the people would do this as a punishment for blasphemy, for saying that one of God’s prophets had only human authority. Alternate translation: “will kill us by throwing stones at us, as punishment for blasphemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	20	6	m359	figs-activepassive	πεπεισμένος&ἐστιν	1	it is persuaded	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. If you translated **the … people** as “the Jewish people,” this would be plural. Alternate translation: “they firmly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	20	6	m359	figs-activepassive	πεπεισμένος & ἐστιν	1	it is persuaded	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. If you translated **the … people** as “the Jewish people,” this would be plural. Alternate translation: “they firmly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	20	7	ia28	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	20	7	w2bc	figs-quotations	ἀπεκρίθησαν, μὴ εἰδέναι πόθεν	1	they answered that they did not know from where	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they replied, ‘We do not know where it came from’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 LUK	20	7	eeg7	figs-ellipsis	πόθεν	1	from where	Luke leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from [20:4](../20/04.md). Alternate translation: “where John’s authority to baptize came from” or “who gave John the authority to baptize people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -3413,18 +3413,18 @@ LUK	20	9	m360	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν ἀμπ
 LUK	20	9	s8tt	translate-unknown	ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς	1	rented it to farmers	As the rest of the story shows, the man **rented** the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	20	9	y37s		γεωργοῖς	1	farmers	While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers”
 LUK	20	10	wm51	figs-explicit	καιρῷ	1	at the time	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what time this was. Alternate translation: “at the time at which they had agreed to give him a share of the crop” or “at harvest time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	20	10	m361		γεωργοὺς&γεωργοὶ	1	farmers … farmers	See how you translated **farmers** in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers”
+LUK	20	10	m361		γεωργοὺς & γεωργοὶ	1	farmers … farmers	See how you translated **farmers** in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers”
 LUK	20	10	kr7j	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος	1	of the fruit of the vineyard	The word **fruit** could be: (1) intended literally. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	20	10	m362	figs-explicit	οἱ&γεωργοὶ ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν, δείραντες κενόν	1	the farmers sent him away, having beaten him, empty	It may be helpful to state explicitly that the farmers did this after the servant arrived, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	20	10	isk1	figs-metaphor	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν&κενόν	1	sent him away empty	Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	20	10	m362	figs-explicit	οἱ & γεωργοὶ ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν, δείραντες κενόν	1	the farmers sent him away, having beaten him, empty	It may be helpful to state explicitly that the farmers did this after the servant arrived, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	20	10	isk1	figs-metaphor	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν & κενόν	1	sent him away empty	Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	11	r72a		ἀτιμάσαντες	1	treated him shamefully	Alternate translation: “humiliated him”
 LUK	20	11	vxh2	figs-metaphor	ἐξαπέστειλαν κενόν	1	sent him away empty	See how you translated this phrase in [20:10](../20/10.md). Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	12	m363	figs-nominaladj	τρίτον	1	a third	Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “a third servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	20	12	lr3h	translate-ordinal	τρίτον	1	a third	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “servant number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-LUK	20	12	ub4g		οἱ&καὶ τοῦτον τραυματίσαντες	1	they also wounded that one	Alternate translation: “they injured that servant as well”
+LUK	20	12	ub4g		οἱ & καὶ τοῦτον τραυματίσαντες	1	they also wounded that one	Alternate translation: “they injured that servant as well”
 LUK	20	12	h32a	figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον	1	threw him out	Jesus is likely speaking when he says that the farmers **threw** this servant out of the vineyard. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “chased him off the property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	13	m364		ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος	1	the lord of the vineyard	Alternate translation: “the owner of the vineyard” or “the man who had planted the vineyard”
-LUK	20	13	kt8i	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν&τί ποιήσω? πέμψω τὸν υἱόν μου τὸν ἀγαπητόν; ἴσως τοῦτον ἐντραπήσονται	1	said, ‘What should I do? I will send my beloved son. Perhaps they will respect him.’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “asked himself what he should do. He decided to send his beloved son, hoping that the farmers would respect him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+LUK	20	13	kt8i	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & τί ποιήσω? πέμψω τὸν υἱόν μου τὸν ἀγαπητόν; ἴσως τοῦτον ἐντραπήσονται	1	said, ‘What should I do? I will send my beloved son. Perhaps they will respect him.’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “asked himself what he should do. He decided to send his beloved son, hoping that the farmers would respect him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	20	13	m365		ἴσως τοῦτον ἐντραπήσονται	1	Perhaps they will respect him	In this context, the term that ULT translates as **perhaps** indicates something that is not certain but should be expected. If your language has a word or phrase that indicates the same thing, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “They ought to respect him”
 LUK	20	14	ib2b	figs-explicit	ἰδόντες δὲ αὐτὸν, οἱ γεωργοὶ	1	But when the farmers saw him	It may be helpful to state explicitly that this happened after the owner sent his son and he arrived. Alternate translation: “So the owner sent his son. But when he arrived and the farmers saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	20	14	m366		οἱ γεωργοὶ	1	the farmers	See how you translated **farmers** in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “the vine growers” or “the grape farmers”
@@ -3447,7 +3447,7 @@ LUK	20	17	bh2r	figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the head of the corner
 LUK	20	18	d7n2	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ πεσὼν ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν λίθον, συνθλασθήσεται	1	Everyone who falls on that stone will be broken to pieces	Jesus is applying the metaphor from the psalm to himself. He is speaking of people who reject him as Messiah as if they would fall over a stone and be injured. Jesus’ words are a direct allusion to the figurative language of Scripture, and he does not explain the metaphor to the people who are listening. So it would not be appropriate to change them into a plain explanation of the metaphor, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	18	n3n5	figs-activepassive	συνθλασθήσεται	1	will be broken to pieces	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will break up into pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	20	18	fdu6	figs-metaphor	ἐφ’ ὃν δ’ ἂν πέσῃ, λικμήσει αὐτόν	1	and on whomever it may fall, it will crush him	Jesus is making a further application of the metaphor from the psalm to himself. He is speaking of the Messiah judging those who reject him as if he were a large stone that would crush them. Once again it would not be appropriate to change Jesus’ words, which allude directly to the figurative language of Scripture, into a plain explanation of the metaphor. However, you could explain the meaning of the metaphor in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	20	19	vbf7	figs-metonymy	ἐζήτησαν&ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	sought to lay hands on him	The expression **to lay hands on** means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of the person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “looked for a way to arrest Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	20	19	vbf7	figs-metonymy	ἐζήτησαν & ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	sought to lay hands on him	The expression **to lay hands on** means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of the person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “looked for a way to arrest Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	20	19	u4tz	figs-idiom	ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	in that hour	Here Luke uses the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “right at that time” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	20	19	m372	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν λαόν	1	and they feared the people	Luke uses the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and this reason why they were not able to do. Alternate translation: “but they were afraid of what the people might do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 LUK	20	19	u4ta	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν λαόν	1	they feared the people	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that the religious leaders did not arrest Jesus, even though they wanted to, and why they did not. Alternate translation: “but they knew that the people respected Jesus and they were afraid of what the people might do if they did arrest him, so they did not arrest him right then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3500,21 +3500,21 @@ LUK	20	31	d5tq	figs-explicit	ὁ τρίτος ἔλαβεν αὐτήν	1	the th
 LUK	20	31	m394	figs-nominaladj	ὁ τρίτος	1	the third	Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	20	31	ky9p	translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1	the third	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	20	31	f1fj	figs-explicit	ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ οἱ ἑπτὰ, οὐ κατέλιπον τέκνα, καὶ ἀπέθανον	1	and likewise the seven also left no children, and died	The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the rest of the seven brothers married this widow, but they all died before they had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	20	33	avu1		ἐν τῇ&ἀναστάσει	1	in the resurrection	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
+LUK	20	33	avu1		ἐν τῇ & ἀναστάσει	1	in the resurrection	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
 LUK	20	33	m395	figs-hypo	οὖν	1	Therefore	This introduces the question that the Sadducees had planned all along to ask Jesus about the hypothetical situation they were describing. If you said “Suppose” in the previous three verses, you could begin this sentence with “Then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	20	33	m396		οἱ&ἑπτὰ ἔσχον αὐτὴν γυναῖκα	1	the seven had her as wife	Alternate translation: “each of the seven were married to her”
+LUK	20	33	m396		οἱ & ἑπτὰ ἔσχον αὐτὴν γυναῖκα	1	the seven had her as wife	Alternate translation: “each of the seven were married to her”
 LUK	20	34	nlu3	figs-idiom	οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου γαμοῦσιν καὶ γαμίσκονται	1	The sons of this age marry and are given in marriage	In this culture, the idiom was to say that men married their wives and that women were given in marriage to their husbands by their parents. If your culture does not use different expressions like that, you could use a single term here. Alternate translation: “The people of this present world get married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	20	34	m397	figs-activepassive	οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου γαμοῦσιν καὶ γαμίσκονται	1	The sons of this age marry and are given in marriage	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can state who does the action in the second case. Alternate translation: “In this present world, men marry wives and parents give their daughters in marriage to husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	20	34	n91c	figs-idiom	οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1	the sons of this age	The term **sons of** is an idiom that means the people in view share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of living in the present world. Alternate translation: “The people of this present world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	20	34	m398	figs-gendernotations	οἱ υἱοὶ	1	the sons	Jesus is using the word **sons** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “The people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	20	34	m399	figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1	this age	As in [16:8](../16/08.md), here the term **age** means specifically the long period of time defined by the duration of the world; by association, it means the world itself. Alternate translation: “this present world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	20	35	m8m9	figs-activepassive	οἱ&καταξιωθέντες&οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	those who are considered worthy … neither marry nor are given in marriage	As in [20:34](../20/34.md), if your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can specify the agent in the second case. Alternate translation: “among the people whom God considers worthy … the men will not marry wives and parents will not give their daughters in marriage to husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	20	35	m400	figs-activepassive	οἱ&καταξιωθέντες	1	those who are considered worthy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “the people whom God considers worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	20	35	m8m9	figs-activepassive	οἱ & καταξιωθέντες & οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	those who are considered worthy … neither marry nor are given in marriage	As in [20:34](../20/34.md), if your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can specify the agent in the second case. Alternate translation: “among the people whom God considers worthy … the men will not marry wives and parents will not give their daughters in marriage to husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	20	35	m400	figs-activepassive	οἱ & καταξιωθέντες	1	those who are considered worthy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “the people whom God considers worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	20	35	m401	figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἰῶνος ἐκείνου, τυχεῖν καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τῆς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	to obtain that age and resurrection that is from the dead	Jesus is using the word **age** in the same figurative sense as in [18:30](../18/30.md), to mean the new world that God will introduce after the end of this present world. See how you translated the expression there. Alternate translation: “to live in his new world when he brings back to life the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	20	35	ct9h	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τῆς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	to obtain … the resurrection that is from the dead	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when he brings back to life the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	20	35	m3gm	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	the dead	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	20	35	rh62	figs-idiom	οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	neither marry nor are given in marriage	If your culture does not use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you may have you translated this with a single term in [20:34](../20/34.md). If so, you could do the same thing here. Alternate translation: “will not get married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	20	36	lk28	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ&ἀποθανεῖν ἔτι δύνανται	1	neither are they able to die anymore	The implication is that these people will not need to get married and have children anymore in order to carry on the human race, because they will not die. Alternate translation: “they will not need to have children anymore, since they will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	20	36	lk28	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ & ἀποθανεῖν ἔτι δύνανται	1	neither are they able to die anymore	The implication is that these people will not need to get married and have children anymore in order to carry on the human race, because they will not die. Alternate translation: “they will not need to have children anymore, since they will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	20	36	m402	figs-explicit	ἰσάγγελοι γάρ εἰσιν	1	for they are like the angels	Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that angels do not die. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they will be like the angels, who do not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	20	36	m403	figs-gendernotations	υἱοί εἰσιν Θεοῦ	1	they are sons of God	Here Jesus is using the term **sons** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “they are God’s own children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	20	36	btb3	figs-idiom	τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοὶ ὄντες	1	being sons of the resurrection	Jesus is using the term **sons** in this second case to mean people who share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of God bringing them back to life after they have died. Alternate translation: “since God has brought them back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -3526,17 +3526,17 @@ LUK	20	37	m406	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῆς βάτου	1	at the bush	Jesus is
 LUK	20	37	nx7f	figs-verbs	λέγει	1	he calls	In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “he called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	20	37	pqm8	figs-explicit	τὸν Θεὸν Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Θεὸν Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Θεὸν Ἰακώβ	1	the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob	The implication is that God would not have identified himself as the God of these men if they were not alive. This must mean that God brought them back to life after they died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	20	38	tdq7	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce a teaching about God that will help the Sadducees understand how God’s description of himself at the burning bush proves that God raises people from the dead. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	20	38	u1y5	figs-parallelism	Θεὸς&οὐκ ἔστιν νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	not … of the dead, but of the living	The two phrases **not … of the dead** and **of the living** mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can express this idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is the God of living people only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+LUK	20	38	u1y5	figs-parallelism	Θεὸς & οὐκ ἔστιν νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	not … of the dead, but of the living	The two phrases **not … of the dead** and **of the living** mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can express this idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is the God of living people only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 LUK	20	38	m408	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	the dead	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	20	38	dxi9	figs-nominaladj	ζώντων	1	the living	Jesus is using the adjective **living** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who are alive” or “people whom he has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	20	38	i6am	figs-explicit	πάντες γὰρ αὐτῷ ζῶσιν	1	for all are alive to him	Interpreters understand this statement in various ways. One likely possibility is that Jesus is saying implicitly that after people die, while they are **dead** as far as other people are concerned, they are **alive** as far as God is concerned. That is because their spirits live on after death, and God is still able to relate to their spirits. Alternate translation: “because even after people die, God is still able to relate to them as living spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	20	39	n5nq	writing-participants	ἀποκριθέντες δέ τινες τῶν γραμματέων εἶπαν	1	Then answering some of the scribes said	Luke uses this statement to reintroduce these characters into the story. Alternate translation: “There were some scribes listening to what Jesus was saying, and they responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	20	39	m409	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθέντες&τινες τῶν γραμματέων εἶπαν	1	answering … said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that these scribes responded to the teaching that Jesus gave in answer to the question that the Sadducees asked. Alternate translation: “some of the scribes responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	20	39	m409	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθέντες & τινες τῶν γραμματέων εἶπαν	1	answering … said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that these scribes responded to the teaching that Jesus gave in answer to the question that the Sadducees asked. Alternate translation: “some of the scribes responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	20	39	m410		Διδάσκαλε	1	Teacher	**Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
-LUK	20	40	m411	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκέτι&ἐτόλμων ἐπερωτᾶν αὐτὸν οὐδέν	1	they no longer dared to ask him anything	Here Luke uses a double negative in Greek for emphasis, saying **no longer** and “nothing.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning, “they still dared to ask him something.” If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-LUK	20	40	vjx9	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι&ἐτόλμων ἐπερωτᾶν αὐτὸν οὐδέν	1	they no longer dared to ask him anything	The implication in context is that Jesus’ enemies were afraid that if they continued to ask him difficult questions, his wise answers would continue to show how much more he understood than they did. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were afraid to ask him any more difficult questions, because they realized he would give more wise answers that would show how much more he understood than they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	20	40	i6sv	writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι&ἐτόλμων	1	they no longer dared	It is unclear whether **they** refers to the scribes, the Sadducees, or everyone who had been trying to trap Jesus with difficult questions. It may be best to translate this with a general statement. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ enemies no longer dared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	20	41	t981	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν&πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he said to them	As in [20:40](../20/40.md), it is unclear to whom the pronoun **them** refers. It may be best to translate it with a general statement here as well. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to those who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	20	40	m411	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκέτι & ἐτόλμων ἐπερωτᾶν αὐτὸν οὐδέν	1	they no longer dared to ask him anything	Here Luke uses a double negative in Greek for emphasis, saying **no longer** and “nothing.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning, “they still dared to ask him something.” If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+LUK	20	40	vjx9	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι & ἐτόλμων ἐπερωτᾶν αὐτὸν οὐδέν	1	they no longer dared to ask him anything	The implication in context is that Jesus’ enemies were afraid that if they continued to ask him difficult questions, his wise answers would continue to show how much more he understood than they did. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were afraid to ask him any more difficult questions, because they realized he would give more wise answers that would show how much more he understood than they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	20	40	i6sv	writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι & ἐτόλμων	1	they no longer dared	It is unclear whether **they** refers to the scribes, the Sadducees, or everyone who had been trying to trap Jesus with difficult questions. It may be best to translate this with a general statement. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ enemies no longer dared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	20	41	t981	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he said to them	As in [20:40](../20/40.md), it is unclear to whom the pronoun **them** refers. It may be best to translate it with a general statement here as well. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to those who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	20	41	mda6	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν τὸν Χριστὸν εἶναι Δαυεὶδ Υἱόν?	1	How do they say that the Christ is the son of David?	This does not seem to be a rhetorical question that Jesus is using as a teaching tool. Rather, it seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer. They had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	20	41	sq2g	writing-pronouns	λέγουσιν	1	they say	Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. He does not have specific individuals in mind. Alternate translation: “do people say that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	20	41	b7rb	figs-metaphor	Δαυεὶδ Υἱόν	1	the son of David	Here Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3560,7 +3560,7 @@ LUK	20	45	m420	figs-hyperbole	παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ	1	all the people	L
 LUK	20	46	m421	figs-metonymy	προσέχετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων	1	Beware of the scribes	Jesus says **Beware** to warn about the influence of these people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	20	46	ang2	translate-symaction	θελόντων περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς	1	who desire to walk in long robes	In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in a long robe was to assert wealth and status. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	20	46	m422	figs-explicit	φιλούντων ἀσπασμοὺς	1	love greetings	The implication is that these would be respectful greetings, in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “loving to be greeted respectfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	20	46	m423	figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας&πρωτοκλισίας	1	the first seats … the first places	As in [14:7](../14/07.md), **first** here means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	20	46	m423	figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας	1	the first seats … the first places	As in [14:7](../14/07.md), **first** here means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	47	m424	figs-metonymy	οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	They devour the houses of widows	Jesus speaks of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	20	47	c7yv	figs-metaphor	οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	They devour the houses of widows	Jesus says that the scribes **devour** or eat up the possessions of widows to mean that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	20	47	g67x		προφάσει μακρὰ προσεύχονται	1	for a pretext they pray at length	Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they offer long prayers”
@@ -3569,7 +3569,7 @@ LUK	20	47	zpx5	figs-explicit	οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερ
 LUK	21	intro	ny7d			0		# Luke 21 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (21:1–4)<br>2. Jesus tells his disciples what will happen before he returns (21:5–38)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “the times of the nations”<br><br>The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as “the times of the nations.” In this expression, the term “nations” means people groups who are not Jews, that is, the Gentiles. So this expression meant the time when the Gentiles ruled over the Jews.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. There is a paradox in this chapter. Jesus tells his disciples in [21:16](../21/16.md), “they will put to death some of you,” but then, in [21:18](../21/18.md), he tells them, “not even a hair of your head will perish.” As a note to [21:18](../21/18.md) explains, Jesus means this second statement in a spiritual sense.
 LUK	21	1	k2zb	writing-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	21	1	m425	writing-newevent	εἶδεν τοὺς βάλλοντας εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον τὰ δῶρα αὐτῶν πλουσίους	1	he saw the rich who were putting their gifts into the treasury	This background information that Luke provides introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he noticed that there were some rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-LUK	21	1	m428	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς&πλουσίους	1	the rich	Jesus is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	21	1	m428	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς & πλουσίους	1	the rich	Jesus is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	21	1	nf4c	figs-explicit	τὰ δῶρα	1	gifts	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the **gifts** were. Alternate translation: “gifts of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	21	1	unv2	figs-metonymy	τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	the treasury	Luke is describing the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God by association with the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed, the **treasury**. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	21	2	xrk2	writing-participants	εἶδεν δέ τινα χήραν πενιχρὰν	1	And he saw a certain poor widow	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There was also a poor widow there, and Jesus saw her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -3590,7 +3590,7 @@ LUK	21	6	ajx2		οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ	1	sto
 LUK	21	6	dps1	figs-hyperbole	οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ	1	stone upon stone will not be left	See how you translated the similar expression “they will not leave stone upon stone” in [19:44](../19/44.md). Here as well this is a figurative overstatement to emphasize how completely the enemies of the Jews will destroy the temple. Alternate translation: “your enemies will completely destroy this building of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	21	6	m431		ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται	1	which will not be torn down	If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this statement in positive form and make it a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Every stone will be torn down”
 LUK	21	6	m432	figs-activepassive	ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται	1	which will not be torn down	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a separate sentence with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. (In the alternate translation that is suggested here, “they” would mean “your enemies,” and “it” would mean “this building of stone,” as in the alternate translation in the last note to the previous phrase in this verse.) Alternate translation: “They will tear it all down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	21	7	rix4	writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτησαν&αὐτὸν	1	they asked him	The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus’ disciples, and the word **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples asked Jesus” or “Jesus’ disciples asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	21	7	rix4	writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτησαν & αὐτὸν	1	they asked him	The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus’ disciples, and the word **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples asked Jesus” or “Jesus’ disciples asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	21	7	m433		Διδάσκαλε	1	Teacher	**Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use.
 LUK	21	7	a11j	figs-explicit	πότε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα γίνεσθαι	1	when therefore will these things be, and what will be the sign when these things are about to happen	The phrase **these things** refers implicitly to what Jesus has just said about enemies destroying the temple. Alternate translation: “then when will the temple be destroyed, and how will we know that our enemies are about to destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	21	8	bbri	figs-quotesinquotes	βλέπετε μὴ πλανηθῆτε; πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ἐγώ εἰμι, καί, ὁ καιρὸς ἤγγικεν	1	Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying, ‘I am he,’ and, ‘The time has come near.’	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying that they are the Messiah. They will also say that the time has come near.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -3623,8 +3623,8 @@ LUK	21	12	m441	figs-metonymy	ἀπαγομένους ἐπὶ	1	bringing you bef
 LUK	21	12	cwq9	figs-metonymy	ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	for the sake of my name	Here, **name** represents Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you are my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	21	13	d98x		ἀποβήσεται ὑμῖν εἰς μαρτύριον	1	It will turn out for you for a testimony	Alternate translation: “This will give you an opportunity to speak about how you believe in me”
 LUK	21	14	q1s1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὖν	1	But	**But** is usually translated “therefore” because it typically introduces a result or conclusion from something that has just been said. However, in some cases, including this one, the term instead indicates a contrast with what has just been said. Knowing they would be put on trial, Jesus’ disciples would naturally want to think about how to defend themselves, but Jesus is telling them, by contrast, not to do that. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-LUK	21	14	he8s	figs-metaphor	θέτε&ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	put in your hearts	Jesus speaks of his disciples’ **hearts** as if they were containers in which the disciples could put the resolution he describes. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” or “decide firmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	21	14	m442	figs-metaphor	θέτε&ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	put in your hearts	Jesus is using the disciples’ **hearts** to represent their minds. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	21	14	he8s	figs-metaphor	θέτε & ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	put in your hearts	Jesus speaks of his disciples’ **hearts** as if they were containers in which the disciples could put the resolution he describes. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” or “decide firmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	21	14	m442	figs-metaphor	θέτε & ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	put in your hearts	Jesus is using the disciples’ **hearts** to represent their minds. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	21	14	usf9	figs-explicit	μὴ προμελετᾶν ἀπολογηθῆναι	1	not to prepare to be defended	The implication is that Jesus’ disciples would be thinking about how to defend themselves against their enemies’ accusations. Alternate translation: “not to try to figure out ahead of time what you should say in order to defend yourself against the accusations of your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	21	14	m443	figs-activepassive	ἀπολογηθῆναι	1	to be defended	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to defend yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	21	15	m788	translate-versebridge	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus is giving the reason why his disciples should do what he told them in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could combine [21:14](../21/14.md) and [21:15](../21/15.md), putting all of [21:15](../21/15.md) first, followed by all of [21:14](../21/14.md). You could begin [21:15](../21/15.md) with “Since” and have no introductory word for [21:14](../21/14.md), or you could have no introductory word for [21:15](../21/15.md) and begin [21:14](../21/14.md) with “So.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
@@ -3632,7 +3632,7 @@ LUK	21	15	z6ua	figs-metonymy	στόμα καὶ σοφίαν	1	a mouth and wisdo
 LUK	21	15	gm5t	figs-hendiadys	στόμα καὶ σοφίαν	1	a mouth and wisdom	The phrase **a mouth and wisdom** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **wisdom** describes what kind of speech Jesus will give the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “wise things to say” or “wise responses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	21	15	d3zh	figs-doublenegatives	ᾗ οὐ δυνήσονται ἀντιστῆναι ἢ ἀντειπεῖν, πάντες οἱ ἀντικείμενοι ὑμῖν	1	that all the ones opposing you will not be able to resist or contradict	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the negative word **not** combined with the negative verbs **resist** and **contradict** as a single positive statement. (See note just below explaining that these two verbs likely form a doublet.) Alternate translation: “that all of your adversaries will have to agree are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	21	15	m444	figs-doublet	ἀντιστῆναι ἢ ἀντειπεῖν	1	to resist or contradict	The terms **resist** and **contradict** mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single, equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to deny” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-LUK	21	16	xc2s	figs-activepassive	παραδοθήσεσθε&καὶ ὑπὸ γονέων, καὶ ἀδελφῶν, καὶ συγγενῶν, καὶ φίλων	1	you will be delivered even by parents, and brothers, and relatives, and friends	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “even your parents, brothers, relatives, and friends will turn you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	21	16	xc2s	figs-activepassive	παραδοθήσεσθε & καὶ ὑπὸ γονέων, καὶ ἀδελφῶν, καὶ συγγενῶν, καὶ φίλων	1	you will be delivered even by parents, and brothers, and relatives, and friends	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “even your parents, brothers, relatives, and friends will turn you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	21	16	m445	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφῶν	1	brothers	Here, the term **brothers** has a generic sense that includes both brothers and sisters. Alternate translation: “siblings” or “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	21	16	ue17	writing-pronouns	θανατώσουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	they will put to death some of you	The pronoun **they** could mean: (1) “the authorities will kill some of you.” (2) “those who turn you in will kill some of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	21	17	m446	figs-activepassive	ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων	1	you will be hated by all	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3654,14 +3654,14 @@ LUK	21	21	m455		οἱ ἐν ταῖς χώραις, μὴ εἰσερχέσθω
 LUK	21	22	vs2g	figs-idiom	ἡμέραι ἐκδικήσεως αὗταί εἰσιν	1	these are days of vengeance	Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “this will be the time when God punishes this city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	21	22	m456	figs-abstractnouns	ἡμέραι ἐκδικήσεως αὗταί εἰσιν	1	these are days of vengeance	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **vengeance** with a verb such as “punish.” Alternate translation: “this will be the time when God punishes this city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	21	22	eba2	figs-activepassive	τοῦ πλησθῆναι πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα	1	to fulfill all the things that have been written	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “when all the things that the prophets wrote in the Scriptures will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	21	22	m457	figs-hyperbole	τοῦ&πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα	1	all the things that have been written	Here, **all** has a limited meaning. It does not mean everything that the prophets wrote about every subject. Rather, it means specifically **all** that the prophets wrote about this particular event. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets wrote in the Scriptures about how Jerusalem would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	21	22	m457	figs-hyperbole	τοῦ & πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα	1	all the things that have been written	Here, **all** has a limited meaning. It does not mean everything that the prophets wrote about every subject. Rather, it means specifically **all** that the prophets wrote about this particular event. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets wrote in the Scriptures about how Jerusalem would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	21	23	m458	figs-idiom	ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις	1	the ones having in the womb	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	21	23	e1pj		ταῖς θηλαζούσαις	1	the ones nursing	This does not mean babies who are nursing. Alternate translation: “to the mothers who are nursing their babies”
 LUK	21	23	m459	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	in those days	Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	21	23	m460	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus uses the word **For** to introduce the reason why it will be very difficult for pregnant women and nursing mothers at this time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the sentence that this word introduces first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that the other sentence in the verse describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	21	23	m461	figs-parallelism	ἔσται&ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ	1	there will be great distress upon the land and wrath to this people	If the word **land** means the people who live in the land (see note below), then these two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “God will angrily punish the people who live in this land by making them suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-LUK	21	23	mzp3	figs-metonymy	ἔσται&ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	there will be great distress upon the land	The term **land** could be: (1) a figurative reference to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (2) literal. Alternate translation: “there will be physical disasters in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	21	23	m462	figs-abstractnouns	ἔσται&ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	there will be great distress upon the land	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **distress** with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+LUK	21	23	m461	figs-parallelism	ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ	1	there will be great distress upon the land and wrath to this people	If the word **land** means the people who live in the land (see note below), then these two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “God will angrily punish the people who live in this land by making them suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+LUK	21	23	mzp3	figs-metonymy	ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	there will be great distress upon the land	The term **land** could be: (1) a figurative reference to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (2) literal. Alternate translation: “there will be physical disasters in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	21	23	m462	figs-abstractnouns	ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	there will be great distress upon the land	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **distress** with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	21	23	iw4r	figs-metonymy	καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ	1	and wrath to this people	Jesus is using the word **wrath** to mean what God will do in his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “and God will angrily punish this people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	21	24	lmj8	figs-metonymy	πεσοῦνται	1	they will fall	Here, **fall** means to die by association with the way that people who die **fall** to the ground. Alternate translation: “they will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	21	24	m463	figs-metaphor	στόματι μαχαίρης	1	by the mouth of the sword	Here, the term **mouth** may be a figurative way of saying “edge” or “end,” by analogy to the way that the mouth of an animal is typically at one end of the animal. Alternate translation: “by the edge of the sword” or “when soldiers kill them with their swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3682,8 +3682,8 @@ LUK	21	26	m471	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	Here Jesus is using
 LUK	21	26	m472	figs-hendiadys	ἀπὸ φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας	1	from fear and expectation	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The term **fear** describes what the **expectation** of people will be like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from fearful expectation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	21	26	az37		τῶν ἐπερχομένων τῇ οἰκουμένῃ	1	the things that are coming upon the inhabited world	Alternate translation: “of the things that are happening in the world” or “of the things that are happening to the world”
 LUK	21	26	m473	grammar-connect-logic-result	αἱ γὰρ δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευθήσονται	1	for the powers of the heavens will be shaken	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this statement first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that the rest of the verse describes. You could begin this statement with “Since,” or you could have no introductory word for it and introduce the rest of the verse with “and so.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	21	26	wn9g	figs-idiom	αἱ&δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευθήσονται	1	the powers of the heavens will be shaken	The phrase **the powers of the heavens** is most likely an idiomatic reference back to the sun, moon, and stars, which Jesus mentioned at the beginning of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the sun, moon, and stars will be shaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	21	26	m474	figs-activepassive	αἱ&δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευθήσονται	1	the powers of the heavens will be shaken	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will shake the sun, moon, and stars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	21	26	wn9g	figs-idiom	αἱ & δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευθήσονται	1	the powers of the heavens will be shaken	The phrase **the powers of the heavens** is most likely an idiomatic reference back to the sun, moon, and stars, which Jesus mentioned at the beginning of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the sun, moon, and stars will be shaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	21	26	m474	figs-activepassive	αἱ & δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευθήσονται	1	the powers of the heavens will be shaken	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will shake the sun, moon, and stars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	21	27	m475	writing-pronouns	ὄψονται	1	they will see	The pronoun **they** refers to the people of the nations, about whom Jesus has been speaking since [21:25](../21/25.md). Alternate translation: “the people of the nations will see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	21	27	k9pr	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	21	27	m476	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3702,7 +3702,7 @@ LUK	21	31	y81z		ταῦτα	1	these things	Alternate translation: “the signs I
 LUK	21	31	t1ca	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the kingdom of God is near	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God will soon begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	21	32	gsh9		ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	21	32	h921	figs-metonymy	ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη	1	this generation	Jesus uses the term **generation** to refer to the people who were born in a certain generation. This could mean: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening.” (2) “the people who are alive now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	21	32	m3il		οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ&ἕως ἂν	1	will certainly not pass away until	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will still be alive when”
+LUK	21	32	m3il		οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ & ἕως ἂν	1	will certainly not pass away until	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will still be alive when”
 LUK	21	32	lrs1	figs-euphemism	οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ	1	will certainly not pass away	Jesus is referring to death as passing away. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 LUK	21	32	m481		πάντα γένηται	1	all	Alternate translation: “all of these things happen”
 LUK	21	33	t53u	figs-merism	ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται	1	The heaven and the earth will pass away	Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
@@ -3717,11 +3717,11 @@ LUK	21	34	x8jh	figs-personification	ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφν
 LUK	21	34	r486	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη	1	and that sudden day will come upon you	The implication is that this is why Jesus is telling his disciples to pay attention to themselves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for if you are not careful, that day you are not expecting will come upon you” or “for if you are not careful, that day will come upon you suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	21	34	q6ph	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη	1	and that sudden day will come upon you	This implicitly means the day when Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “and the day when I return, which you will not be expecting, will come upon you” or “and the day when I return will come upon you suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	21	35	m483	figs-simile	ὡς παγίς	1	like a trap	Jesus says that just as a **trap** closes on an animal when the animal is not expecting it, so he will return when people are not expecting it. Alternate translation: “as when a trap closes suddenly on an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-LUK	21	35	qh1b		ἐπεισελεύσεται&ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς καθημένους	1	it will come upon all	Alternate translation: “it will affect all the people sitting”
+LUK	21	35	qh1b		ἐπεισελεύσεται & ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς καθημένους	1	it will come upon all	Alternate translation: “it will affect all the people sitting”
 LUK	21	35	m484	figs-metaphor	τοὺς καθημένους	1	who are sitting	Jesus speaks of **sitting** to mean “living.” Alternate translation: “who are living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	21	35	ry3f	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ πρόσωπον πάσης τῆς γῆς	1	on the face of the whole earth	Jesus speaks of the surface of the **earth** as if it were the outward part or **face** of a person. Alternate translation: “on the surface of the whole earth” or “all over the entire earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	21	36	auh8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Jesus uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast with what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-LUK	21	36	m4l4	figs-hyperbole	ἀγρυπνεῖτε&ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ	1	stay awake in every time	The expression **in every time** means “all the time” or “always.” Jesus is using it, as a generalization. Alternate translation: “always continue to watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+LUK	21	36	m4l4	figs-hyperbole	ἀγρυπνεῖτε & ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ	1	stay awake in every time	The expression **in every time** means “all the time” or “always.” Jesus is using it, as a generalization. Alternate translation: “always continue to watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	21	36	m485	figs-metaphor	ἀγρυπνεῖτε	1	stay awake	Jesus is using this expression in a figurative sense. Alternate translation: “stay alert” or “watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	21	36	m486	figs-explicit	ἀγρυπνεῖτε	1	stay awake	The implication is that Jesus is telling his disciples to do this so that they will not be surprised when he returns. Alternate translation: “watch for the signs of my coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	21	36	m487	figs-metaphor	καὶ σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	and to stand before the Son of Man	Here, **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. Alternate translation: “and to stand in the presence of the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3745,7 +3745,7 @@ LUK	22	2	m496	writing-background	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to int
 LUK	22	2	n9v6	figs-explicit	τὸ πῶς ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν	1	how they might kill him	These leaders did not have the authority to kill Jesus themselves. Rather, they were hoping to get others to kill him. Alternate translation: “how they might cause Jesus to be put to death” or “how they could have Jesus killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	2	aij5	figs-explicit	ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν	1	for they were fearing the people	These leaders were not trying to have Jesus killed because they were afraid of **the people**. Rather, they were **seeking how** to have him killed, by implication quietly, because they were afraid that the people would make a great disturbance if they did this publicly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “quietly, because they were afraid that the people would riot if they did it publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	2	m497	figs-explicit	τὸν λαόν	1	the people	This means specifically the great crowds of people who had been coming to hear Jesus teach, as Luke describes in [21:38](../21/38.md). Alternate translation: “the many people who were coming to hear him teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	22	3	r65v		εἰσῆλθεν&εἰς	1	entered into	This was probably very similar to demon possession. Alternate translation: “took control of”
+LUK	22	3	r65v		εἰσῆλθεν & εἰς	1	entered into	This was probably very similar to demon possession. Alternate translation: “took control of”
 LUK	22	3	m500	figs-activepassive	τὸν καλούμενον Ἰσκαριώτην	1	the one called Iscariot	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom people called Iscariot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	3	m501	figs-nominaladj	ὄντα ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα	1	who was from the number of the Twelve	See how you translated this phrase in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “who was one of the 12 disciples whom Jesus had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	22	3	m502	translate-names	τῶν δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -3760,11 +3760,11 @@ LUK	22	7	rqi1	figs-metonymy	ἔδει θύεσθαι τὸ Πάσχα	1	it was n
 LUK	22	8	abcs	writing-pronouns	ἀπέστειλεν	1	he sent	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	22	8	m504	figs-youdual	πορευθέντες, ἑτοιμάσατε	1	Going, prepare	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, **you** as implied in the participle and imperative verb would be in the dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 LUK	22	8	nkz4	figs-explicit	πορευθέντες	1	Going	The implication is that Jesus is sending Peter and John into the city of Jerusalem to do this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Your language might translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Go into the city of Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	22	8	e4ev	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν&ἵνα φάγωμεν	1	us … that we may eat	Peter and John would be part of the group that would eat the meal, so the terms **us** and **we** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	22	8	e4ev	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἵνα φάγωμεν	1	us … that we may eat	Peter and John would be part of the group that would eat the meal, so the terms **us** and **we** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	22	8	m505	figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	the Passover	Jesus is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	9	j52e	figs-exclusive	θέλεις ἑτοιμάσωμεν	1	do you wish that we should prepare it	Jesus was not part of the group that would prepare the meal, so the word **we** does not include Jesus and it would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	22	9	s8yw	figs-verbs	ἑτοιμάσωμεν	1	that we should prepare it	Peter and John are speaking as a group of two, so this verb would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
-LUK	22	10	um6z	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς&ὑμῶν&ὑμῖν&ἀκολουθήσατε	1	them … you … you … follow	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** and the implied **you** in the imperative verb would all be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+LUK	22	10	um6z	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν & ἀκολουθήσατε	1	them … you … you … follow	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** and the implied **you** in the imperative verb would all be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 LUK	22	10	c13w	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	Jesus uses the word **Behold** to tell Peter and John to pay close attention to what he is saying and to do exactly what he tells them. It may be helpful to explain the meaning of the word more fully and to do so as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Now pay close attention to these instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	22	10	i45e		συναντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος, κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων	1	a man carrying a pitcher of water will meet you.	Alternate translation: “you will see a man carrying a pitcher of water”
 LUK	22	10	a677	translate-unknown	κεράμιον ὕδατος	1	a pitcher of water	This means not a small serving **pitcher**, but a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -3783,14 +3783,14 @@ LUK	22	15	hue3	figs-explicitinfo	ἐπιθυμίᾳ ἐπεθύμησα	1	With d
 LUK	22	15	m509	figs-metonymy	τοῦτο τὸ Πάσχα	1	this Passover	Jesus is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “this Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	15	s1sj	figs-metonymy	πρὸ τοῦ με παθεῖν	1	before I suffer	Jesus is referring to his death by association with the way that he will **suffer** much pain and shame as he is dying. Alternate translation: “before I experience a painful death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	16	m510	translate-versebridge	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus is giving the reason why he has been so eager to share this Passover meal with his disciples, as he said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could combine [22:15](../22/15.md) and [22:16](../22/16.md), putting all of [22:16](../22/16.md) first, followed by all of [22:15](../22/15.md). This would require saying “this Passover meal” in [22:16](../22/16.md) and **it** in [22:15](../22/15.md). You could have no introductory word for [22:16](../22/16.md) and begin [22:15](../22/15.md) with “And so.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-LUK	22	16	gbj7		λέγω&ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
+LUK	22	16	gbj7		λέγω & ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	22	16	m511	figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ φάγω αὐτὸ	1	I will certainly not eat it	Since Jesus is just about to eat a Passover meal, he means implicitly that he will not eat such a meal again until the later time he describes. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not eat it again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	16	k28r	figs-activepassive	ἕως ὅτου πληρωθῇ ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	until when it is fulfilled in the kingdom of God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. This could mean: (1) “until people celebrate this feast in the kingdom of God.” (2) “until God gives this feast its full meaning when he establishes his kingdom.” (3) “until I die as the true Passover sacrifice and establish the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	17	l5e6	figs-metonymy	δεξάμενος ποτήριον	1	he took a cup	Luke is using the term **cup** to mean what it contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “Jesus picked up a cup of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	17	d7pc		εὐχαριστήσας	1	having given thanks	Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “when he had given thanks to God”
 LUK	22	17	xvm7	figs-metonymy	διαμερίσατε εἰς ἑαυτούς	1	divide it among yourselves	Jesus meant that the apostles were to divide up the contents of the cup, not the cup itself. Alternate translation: “share the wine that is in this cup among yourselves” or “each of you drink some wine from this cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	18	m512	translate-versebridge	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus is giving the reason why he wants his disciples to share the wine, as he told them to do in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-LUK	22	18	m78n		λέγω&ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus is using this phrase to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
+LUK	22	18	m78n		λέγω & ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus is using this phrase to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
 LUK	22	18	h5tl	figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου	1	of the fruit of the vine	Jesus is referring to the juice that people squeeze from grapes that grow on grapevines as if it were the **fruit** or grapes themselves. Wine is made from fermented grape juice. Alternate translation: “wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	18	crv5	figs-personification	ἕως οὗ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἔλθῃ	1	until the kingdom of God comes	Jesus is speaking of the **kingdom of God** as if it could actively come on its own. Alternate translation: “until God establishes his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	22	18	m513	figs-abstractnouns	ἕως οὗ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἔλθῃ	1	until the kingdom of God comes	See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “until God begins to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -3803,15 +3803,15 @@ LUK	22	19	d8r1	figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου	1	Th
 LUK	22	19	lc9m	figs-activepassive	τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον	1	which is given for you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “which I am giving for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	19	cxy5	figs-explicit	τοῦτο ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν	1	Do this in my remembrance	Jesus seems to be telling his disciples implicitly that he wants them to re-enact this part of the meal regularly in the future in order to remember him. Alternate translation: “When you meet together, break and share bread like this in order to remember me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	20	m517	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ ποτήριον	1	And the cup	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And he took the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	22	20	z3cx	figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον&τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον	1	the cup … This cup	In each case, the term **cup** means what the **cup** contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “the cup of wine … The wine in this cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	22	20	z3cx	figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον & τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον	1	the cup … This cup	In each case, the term **cup** means what the **cup** contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “the cup of wine … The wine in this cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	20	gc8h	figs-explicit	ἡ καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου	1	the new covenant in my blood	In the Hebrew culture, covenants were customarily ratified through animal sacrifices that involved shedding the blood of the animals. Here, Jesus is likely alluding to that practice in light of his impending sacrificial death. Alternate translation: “the new covenant that will be ratified when I shed my blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	20	v4d3	figs-activepassive	τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον	1	which is poured out for you	Jesus is referring to the way his blood is going to be **poured out** when he dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which I will pour out for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	21	swj1	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Jesus is using the term **behold** to get his disciples to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	22	21	g6ks	figs-synecdoche	ἡ χεὶρ τοῦ παραδιδόντος με μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης	1	the hand of the one betraying me is with me on the table	Jesus is using one part of this person, his **hand**, to represent the entire person. There is significance to the part that Jesus chooses. With the same hand with which Judas has just received the bread and wine, he will receive the money for betraying Jesus. Alternate translation: “the man who is going to betray me is sharing this meal with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	22	21	m518	figs-metonymy	μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης	1	is with me on the table	Jesus is using the shared location of the **table** to mean sharing the meal that is being served on the **table**. Alternate translation: “sharing this meal with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	22	wtj2	translate-versebridge	ὅτι	1	For	Jesus is giving the reason why one of his disciples is going to betray him, as he said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-LUK	22	22	mk3q	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς μὲν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&πορεύεται	1	the Son of Man indeed goes	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, indeed go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-LUK	22	22	m519	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς μὲν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&πορεύεται	1	the Son of Man indeed goes	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, indeed go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	22	22	mk3q	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς μὲν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & πορεύεται	1	the Son of Man indeed goes	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, indeed go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK	22	22	m519	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς μὲν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & πορεύεται	1	the Son of Man indeed goes	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, indeed go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	22	m520	figs-euphemism	πορεύεται	1	goes	Jesus is speaking about his impending death in a discreet way. Alternate translation: “is going to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 LUK	22	22	p2qa	figs-activepassive	κατὰ τὸ ὡρισμένον	1	according to what has been determined	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “as God has determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	22	wy2s	figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ παραδίδοται	1	through whom he is betrayed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who betrays him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “who betrays me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3825,11 +3825,11 @@ LUK	22	25	m523	figs-activepassive	καλοῦνται	1	are called	If it would b
 LUK	22	25	m524	translate-names	εὐεργέται	1	Benefactors	This is a title that several rulers of this time had given themselves. Your language may have an equivalent title. If not, you could express the meaning with an equivalent expression, as UST does. Alternate translation: “the Good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	22	26	ne9r		ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως	1	But you be not thus	Alternate translation: “But you should not act like that”
 LUK	22	26	m525		ὁ μείζων ἐν ὑμῖν, γενέσθω ὡς ὁ νεώτερος	1	let the greater among you become like the younger	As the last note to [22:24](../22/24.md) discusses, your language might naturally use the superlative form of these adjectives rather than the comparative form. Alternate translation: “let the greatest one among you become like the youngest one”
-LUK	22	26	m526	figs-nominaladj	ὁ μείζων&ὁ νεώτερος	1	the greater … the younger	Jesus is using the adjectives **greater** and **younger** as nouns to describe types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “the greatest one … the youngest one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	22	26	m526	figs-nominaladj	ὁ μείζων & ὁ νεώτερος	1	the greater … the younger	Jesus is using the adjectives **greater** and **younger** as nouns to describe types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “the greatest one … the youngest one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	22	26	cdq7	figs-metonymy	ὁ νεώτερος	1	the younger	This culture respected older people and followed them as leaders. Jesus is referring to a person who was less important and influential by association with the fact that this would be the case if they were younger. Alternate translation: “the least important one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	26	y4n1		ὁ διακονῶν	1	the one who serves	Alternate translation: “a servant”
 LUK	22	27	mw2l	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why his disciples should do what he told them in the previous verse. The reason is that he is already setting a personal example of this himself. Alternate translation: “After all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	22	27	jt7r	figs-rquestion	τίς&μείζων, ὁ ἀνακείμενος ἢ ὁ διακονῶν?	1	who is greater, the one who reclines to eat, or the one who serves?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I want you to think about who is greater, the person who is dining, or the who is serving the food.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+LUK	22	27	jt7r	figs-rquestion	τίς & μείζων, ὁ ἀνακείμενος ἢ ὁ διακονῶν?	1	who is greater, the one who reclines to eat, or the one who serves?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I want you to think about who is greater, the person who is dining, or the who is serving the food.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	22	27	n3dl	translate-unknown	ὁ ἀνακείμενος	1	the one who reclines to eat	See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). It was the custom in this culture for dinner guests to eat while lying comfortably around the table on banqueting couches. Alternate translation: “the person who is dining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	22	27	lu3a	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ὁ ἀνακείμενος?	1	Is it not the one who reclines to eat?	Jesus is using a further question to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You must agree that it is the person who is dining.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	22	27	qbn6	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν εἰμι ὡς ὁ διακονῶν	1	But I am in the midst of you as one who serves	Jesus is likely referring to the example that he has set at this meal. This would include serving the bread to the disciples, which Luke describes in [22:19](../22/19.md). [John 13:4–5](../jhn/13/04.md) also records that before this meal, Jesus washed the disciples feet, which a household servant would ordinarily have done. Alternate translation: “But I have been acting like a servant here at this meal with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3841,7 +3841,7 @@ LUK	22	29	ii65	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is a
 LUK	22	30	m528	figs-metonymy	ἵνα ἔσθητε καὶ πίνητε ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης μου	1	so that you may eat and drink at my table	Jesus may simply be referring to the way he and his disciples will renew their table fellowship in the kingdom of God, as he described in [22:16](../22/16.md). But he may also be referring to his disciples becoming important officials in his kingdom, since such officials would have their meals at the king’s **table**. Alternate translation: “so that you may be important officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	30	m529	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου	1	in my kingdom	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule” and a concrete noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “when I rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	22	30	us1j	translate-symaction	καθῆσθε ἐπὶ θρόνων	1	sit on thrones	Rulers have **thrones** that symbolize their authority. These special seats are signs of status and power. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in some way in your translation. Alternate translation: “sit on royal thrones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-LUK	22	30	m530	figs-metonymy	τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς&τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	the 12 tribes of Israel	Here Jesus uses the term **tribes** to refer to the people who belong to those **tribes**. Alternate translation: “the people of the 12 tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	22	30	m530	figs-metonymy	τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς & τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	the 12 tribes of Israel	Here Jesus uses the term **tribes** to refer to the people who belong to those **tribes**. Alternate translation: “the people of the 12 tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	31	t8qd		Σίμων, Σίμων	1	Simon, Simon	Jesus says the name of this disciple twice to show him that what he is about to say to him is very important. Your language may have a way of addressing someone to show this same thing. Alternate translation: “Now Simon”
 LUK	22	31	m532	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Jesus uses the term **behold** to get Simon to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	22	31	m534		ἐξῃτήσατο	1	has asked	Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “has asked God for permission”
@@ -3849,7 +3849,7 @@ LUK	22	31	m535	translate-unknown	ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸ
 LUK	22	31	qyy7	figs-simile	ἐξῃτήσατο ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον	1	has asked to sift you as wheat	Jesus is using this comparison to say that Satan wants to put the disciples through difficult experiences in order to show that many of them are not unconditionally loyal to Jesus. You could use this same comparison in your translation, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “to shake you as if he were separating grain from its husks in a sieve” or “to test you to show that many of you will not stay loyal to me when threatened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 LUK	22	31	m536	figs-explicit	ἐξῃτήσατο ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον	1	has asked to sift you as wheat	The implication is that God has given Satan permission to do this, and that is why Jesus is giving this warning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to test you to show that many of you are not unconditionally loyal to me, and God has given him permission to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	31	dmw8	figs-you	ὑμᾶς	1	you	Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is referring to all of the apostles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK	22	32	m537		ἐγὼ&ἐδεήθην	1	I have asked	Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. In this context the verb has a strong sense. Alternate translation: “I have prayed to God” or “I have pleaded with God”
+LUK	22	32	m537		ἐγὼ & ἐδεήθην	1	I have asked	Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. In this context the verb has a strong sense. Alternate translation: “I have prayed to God” or “I have pleaded with God”
 LUK	22	32	pd1t	figs-you	ἐγὼ δὲ ἐδεήθην περὶ σοῦ	1	you … your … you … you … your	Jesus is addressing Simon specifically, and so the terms **you** and **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	22	32	zp8w	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μὴ ἐκλίπῃ ἡ πίστις σου	1	that your faith may not fail	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the negative word **not** combined with the negative verb **fail** as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that you will continue to have faith” or “that you will continue to trust me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	22	32	qxk7	figs-metaphor	ποτε ἐπιστρέψας	1	when you have turned back	This expression refers to resuming a previous course of action. Alternate translation: “when you are once more openly loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3868,11 +3868,11 @@ LUK	22	35	m544	figs-metonymy	ἄτερ βαλλαντίου, καὶ πήρας,
 LUK	22	35	m545	figs-doublenegatives	μή τινος ὑστερήσατε?	1	you did not lack anything, did you?	The first word of this question in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding, **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Alternate translation: “did you lack anything?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 LUK	22	35	cv68	figs-rquestion	μή τινος ὑστερήσατε?	1	you did not lack anything, did you?	Even though Jesus already knows the answer to this question and he is using it as a teaching tool, in this case he does want the disciples to reply. If you translated his words as a statement, for example, “I know that you did not lack anything,” then the disciples might seem to be interrupting him by speaking uninvited. Since Jesus did want them to speak, it would probably be most appropriate to present his words in the form of a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	22	35	tb51	figs-ellipsis	οὐθενός	1	Nothing	Luke may be summarizing the disciples’ response briefly, or the disciples themselves may have responded this briefly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could expand on what this means. Alternate translation: “We did not lack anything” or “We had everything we needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	22	36	h7j7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἔχων βαλλάντιον&ὁ μὴ ἔχων&μάχαιραν	1	the one who has a money bag … the one who does not have a sword	Jesus was not referring to a specific one of the disciples who had a money bag or did not have a sword. Alternate translation: “anyone who has a money bag … anyone who does not have a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-LUK	22	36	m546	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔχων βαλλάντιον&ὁ μὴ ἔχων&μάχαιραν	1	the one who has a money bag … the one who does not have a sword	Jesus is giving these instructions specifically to his disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in your translation. Alternate translation: “any one of you who has a money bag … any one of you who does not have a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	22	36	h7j7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἔχων βαλλάντιον & ὁ μὴ ἔχων & μάχαιραν	1	the one who has a money bag … the one who does not have a sword	Jesus was not referring to a specific one of the disciples who had a money bag or did not have a sword. Alternate translation: “anyone who has a money bag … anyone who does not have a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+LUK	22	36	m546	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔχων βαλλάντιον & ὁ μὴ ἔχων & μάχαιραν	1	the one who has a money bag … the one who does not have a sword	Jesus is giving these instructions specifically to his disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in your translation. Alternate translation: “any one of you who has a money bag … any one of you who does not have a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	36	q717	translate-unknown	τὸ ἱμάτιον	1	cloak	See how you translated **cloak** in [19:35](../19/35.md). Alternate translation: “coat” or “outer garment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	22	37	n73l	translate-versebridge	γὰρ	1	For	Jesus is giving the reason why the disciples should now be concerned about providing for and protecting themselves, as he said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-LUK	22	37	m547		λέγω&ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell the disciples. Alternate translation: “indeed”
+LUK	22	37	m547		λέγω & ὑμῖν	1	I say to you	Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell the disciples. Alternate translation: “indeed”
 LUK	22	37	g4l7	figs-activepassive	τοῦτο τὸ γεγραμμένον	1	this that is written	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “what a prophet wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	37	m548	figs-explicit	τοῦτο τὸ γεγραμμένον	1	this that is written	Jesus may be assuming that his disciples know the source and subject of this passage. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it more specifically. Alternate translation: “what Isaiah wrote about the Messiah in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	37	u9jx	figs-activepassive	δεῖ τελεσθῆναι	1	must be accomplished in me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. The meaning of **accomplished** is the same as for the word “fulfilled” in [1:1](../01/01.md), [1:20](../01/20.md), and many other places in the book, even though the Greek verb is different. Alternate translation: “must happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3889,12 +3889,12 @@ LUK	22	40	m552	figs-explicit	προσεύχεσθε μὴ εἰσελθεῖν 
 LUK	22	41	sp1s	figs-idiom	ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν	1	about the throw of a stone	This is an idiom that means “about as far as someone can throw a stone.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could represent this with a general expression or with an estimated measurement. Alternate translation: “a short distance” or “about 30 meters” or “about 100 feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	22	41	m553	translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα	1	having put down his knees	As Jesus indicates in his parable in [18:11](../18/11.md), the customary posture of prayer in this culture was standing. By kneeling down, Jesus indicated that he was praying urgently about a serious matter. Alternate translation: “after kneeling down to show the urgency of his request” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	22	42	y51l	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-LUK	22	42	m554	figs-youformal	εἰ βούλει&τὸ σὸν	1	if you are willing … yours	Use your best judgment about whether the formal or informal forms of **you** and **yours** would be more natural in your language here. Jesus is speaking as an adult son would to a father with whom he had a close relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
+LUK	22	42	m554	figs-youformal	εἰ βούλει & τὸ σὸν	1	if you are willing … yours	Use your best judgment about whether the formal or informal forms of **you** and **yours** would be more natural in your language here. Jesus is speaking as an adult son would to a father with whom he had a close relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
 LUK	22	42	ic7y	figs-metaphor	παρένεγκε τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	remove this cup from me	Jesus is referring to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a cup of bitter-tasting liquid that he would have to drink. Alternate translation: “please spare me from these sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	22	42	m555	figs-imperative	παρένεγκε τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	remove this cup from me	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please spare me from these sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	22	42	zw2y	figs-imperative	πλὴν μὴ τὸ θέλημά μου, ἀλλὰ τὸ σὸν γινέσθω	1	But let not my will, but yours, happen	This is another imperative that should be translated as a request rather than as a command. Alternate translation: “However, please do what is according to your will, rather than what is according to my will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	22	43	m556	translate-textvariants	Ὤφθη δὲ αὐτῷ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ ἐνισχύων αὐτόν	1	And an angel from heaven appeared to him, strengthening him	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The note below discusses a translation issue in this verse, for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-LUK	22	43	m557	figs-idiom	Ὤφθη&αὐτῷ	1	appeared to him	**Appeared** does not mean that the angel simply seemed to be there, or that Jesus saw the angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Jesus. Alternate translation: “came there to be with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+LUK	22	43	m557	figs-idiom	Ὤφθη & αὐτῷ	1	appeared to him	**Appeared** does not mean that the angel simply seemed to be there, or that Jesus saw the angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Jesus. Alternate translation: “came there to be with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	22	44	m558	translate-textvariants	Καὶ γενόμενος ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ ἐκτενέστερον προσηύχετο. καὶ Ἐγένετο ὁ ἱδρὼς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ θρόμβοι αἵματος καταβαίνοντες ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	And being in agony, he was praying more earnestly, and his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The two notes below discusses translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 LUK	22	44	m559		ἐκτενέστερον προσηύχετο	1	he was praying more earnestly	This could mean: (1) Luke is using the comparative form of the adjective **earnest**, which has an adverbial sense here, with a superlative meaning. Alternate translation: “he was praying most earnestly” or “he was praying very fervently” (2) the word has an actual comparative sense. Alternate translation: “he began to pray even more earnestly than he had been praying before”
 LUK	22	44	m560	figs-simile	Ἐγένετο ὁ ἱδρὼς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ θρόμβοι αἵματος καταβαίνοντες ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground	This could mean one of two things. The first is more likely. (1) It could describe the appearance of the drops. This would mean that Jesus had been under such stress that the small blood vessels that fed his sweat glands ruptured, and his sweat became mixed with blood. (This is a rare but well-document medical condition known as hematohidrosis.) Alternate translation: “his sweat became mixed with blood and it fell to the ground in drops” (2) It could describe the way in which the drops of sweat fell to the ground. Alternate translation: “he began to sweat so intensely that the sweat formed drops and fell to the ground as blood drops do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -3920,8 +3920,8 @@ LUK	22	49	m570	figs-idiom	εἰ πατάξομεν ἐν μαχαίρῃ	1	if we
 LUK	22	49	m571	figs-synecdoche	εἰ πατάξομεν ἐν μαχαίρῃ	1	if we will strike with the sword	The disciples may be asking specifically not about what weapon to use, but generally whether they should fight back to prevent Jesus from being arrested. In that case they would be using one kind of weapon, a **sword**, to mean fighting in general. The disciples said in [22:38](../22/38.md) that they had two swords, but they could also have resisted by further means. Alternate translation: “should we fight to defend you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	22	49	gv81	figs-explicit	εἰ πατάξομεν ἐν μαχαίρῃ	1	if we will strike with the sword	Alternatively, the disciples may implicitly be asking whether this was the kind of occasion for which Jesus told them in [22:38](../22/38.md) that they should have swords. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you told us we should have swords; should we use them now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	50	b4ij	writing-participants	εἷς τις ἐξ αὐτῶν	1	a certain one of them	Luke uses this phrase to bring one of the characters into the story into the center of the action, but he does not identify the person by name. John indicates in his Gospel that it was Peter, but since Luke does not name him here, it would not be appropriate to use his name in your translation. Alternate translation: “one of the disciples who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK	22	50	f2fm	figs-explicit	ἐπάταξεν&τὸν δοῦλον τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	struck the servant of the high priest	The implication is that this disciple did this with a sword. Alternate translation: “struck the servant of the high priest with a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	22	51	m572	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς&ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν	1	answering Jesus said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the disciple had just done. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	22	50	f2fm	figs-explicit	ἐπάταξεν & τὸν δοῦλον τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	struck the servant of the high priest	The implication is that this disciple did this with a sword. Alternate translation: “struck the servant of the high priest with a sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	22	51	m572	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν	1	answering Jesus said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the disciple had just done. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	22	51	rcp5	figs-idiom	ἐᾶτε ἕως τούτου	1	Allow up to this	This is an idiom. It is in the form of a positive statement, but it actually has a strong negative meaning. Alternate translation: “No more of this” or “Do not do anything more like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	22	51	c6pz	figs-explicit	ἁψάμενος τοῦ ὠτίου, ἰάσατο αὐτόν	1	touching his ear, he healed him	It may be necessary to explain what it means that Jesus touched the servant’s **ear**, since it had been cut off. Alternate translation: “Jesus put the servant’s ear back in place and healed it” or “Jesus touched the servant at the place where his ear had been cut off and restored it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	52	m573	figs-explicit	στρατηγοὺς τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	captains of the temple	See how you translated this phrase in [22:4](../22/04.md). Alternate translation: “captains of the temple guard” or “temple military officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3937,8 +3937,8 @@ LUK	22	53	m577	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σκότους
 LUK	22	54	mtp8	figs-explicit	ἤγαγον	1	they led him away	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “they led Jesus away from the place where they had arrested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	54	m578	writing-background	ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἠκολούθει μακρόθεν	1	And Peter was following from a distance	Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now Peter followed the group there, staying some distance away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	22	54	m579	figs-explicit	ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἠκολούθει μακρόθεν	1	And Peter was following from a distance	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why Peter followed **from a distance**. Alternate translation: “Now Peter followed the group there, staying some distance away so that he would not be recognized and arrested himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	22	55	b3x7	writing-pronouns	περιαψάντων&πῦρ	1	they having kindled a fire	Here the pronoun **they** does not mean the same thing as in the previous verse. Luke is not saying that the leaders and soldiers who had arrested Jesus built this fire. Rather, Luke is using the word **they** in an indefinite sense. Alternate translation: “some people had started a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	22	55	m580	writing-participants	περιαψάντων&πῦρ	1	they having kindled a fire	Luke is using this phrase to introduce some new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “some of the people who were there at the high priest’s house had started a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK	22	55	b3x7	writing-pronouns	περιαψάντων & πῦρ	1	they having kindled a fire	Here the pronoun **they** does not mean the same thing as in the previous verse. Luke is not saying that the leaders and soldiers who had arrested Jesus built this fire. Rather, Luke is using the word **they** in an indefinite sense. Alternate translation: “some people had started a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	22	55	m580	writing-participants	περιαψάντων & πῦρ	1	they having kindled a fire	Luke is using this phrase to introduce some new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “some of the people who were there at the high priest’s house had started a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	22	55	m581	figs-explicit	πῦρ	1	a fire	Implicitly, the purpose of the **fire** was to keep the people warm during the cool night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a fire to keep warm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	55	qx64	figs-explicit	ἐν μέσῳ τῆς αὐλῆς	1	in the middle of the courtyard	Luke assumes that his readers will know that in this culture, the courtyard of a house had walls around it, but no roof. You may wish to clarify this for your readers. This was an outdoor fire. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the open courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	55	m8ew		μέσος αὐτῶν	1	in the midst of them	Alternate translation: “there together with them”
@@ -3961,7 +3961,7 @@ LUK	22	60	ck93		ἄνθρωπε	1	Man	See how you translated **Man** in [22:58](
 LUK	22	60	al3s	figs-idiom	οὐκ οἶδα ὃ λέγεις	1	I do not know what you are saying	This is an idiom that means that Peter completely disagrees with the man. Alternate translation: “what you are saying is not true at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	22	60	p6c5	writing-pronouns	ἔτι λαλοῦντος αὐτοῦ	1	while he was still speaking	The pronoun **he** refers to Peter, not to the other man. Alternate translation: “while Peter was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	22	60	lt62	translate-unknown	ἐφώνησεν ἀλέκτωρ	1	a rooster crowed	See how you translated the similar phrase in [22:34](../22/34.md). You may have decided to use a general expression there. Alternate translation: “the birds began to sing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-LUK	22	61	gdp5		ὁ Κύριος&τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the Lord … the Lord	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus”
+LUK	22	61	gdp5		ὁ Κύριος & τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the Lord … the Lord	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus”
 LUK	22	61	dpk1	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ῥήματος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Luke is using the term **word** to describe what Jesus had said using words. Alternate translation: “the statement Jesus had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	22	61	kkq8	translate-unknown	ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	a rooster crows	See how you translated this phrase in [22:60](../22/60.md) and the similar phrase in [22:34](../22/34.md). You may have decided to use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the birds begin to sing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	22	61	ui26	figs-explicit	σήμερον	1	today	See how you translated **today** in [22:34](../22/34.md). The Jewish day started at sundown and continued to the next evening. Jesus had spoken the previous evening about what would happen shortly before dawn or at dawn, so this was still the same day. Alternate translation: “in the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3982,11 +3982,11 @@ LUK	22	67	br8y		λέγοντες	1	saying	It may be helpful to begin a new sente
 LUK	22	67	h12k		εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, εἰπὸν ἡμῖν	1	If you are the Christ, tell us	This sounds like a conditional statement, but it is actually an imperative. Alternate translation: “Tell us whether you are the Messiah”
 LUK	22	67	g8iy	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ὑμῖν εἴπω, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε	1	If I told you, you would certainly not believe	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to avoid answering the question directly, since that might give the elders a reason to say that he was guilty of blasphemy for claiming to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Suppose I said that I was the Messiah. Then you would certainly not believe me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	22	68	l7nz	figs-hypo	ἐὰν δὲ ἐρωτήσω, οὐ μὴ ἀποκριθῆτε	1	and if I questioned you, you would certainly not answer	Jesus is using a further hypothetical situation to avoid answering the question directly, in order not to give the elders a reason to say that he was guilty of blasphemy. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And suppose I asked you whether you thought I was the Messiah. Then you would certainly not tell me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-LUK	22	68	m591	figs-explicit	ἐὰν&ἐρωτήσω	1	if I questioned you	The implicit meaning is that Jesus would **question** them about whether they thought he was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “suppose I asked you whether you thought I was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	22	68	m591	figs-explicit	ἐὰν & ἐρωτήσω	1	if I questioned you	The implicit meaning is that Jesus would **question** them about whether they thought he was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “suppose I asked you whether you thought I was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	22	69	z3ea		ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν	1	from now on	Alternate translation: “after this”
 LUK	22	69	p8kt	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	Here Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	22	69	m592	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	22	69	m593	figs-activepassive	ἔσται&καθήμενος	1	will be seated	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	22	69	m593	figs-activepassive	ἔσται & καθήμενος	1	will be seated	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	22	69	nka9	translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	at the right hand of the power of God	To sit at the **right hand … of God** means to receive great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to the all-powerful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	22	69	h4n3	figs-hendiadys	τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the power of God	This expression is like a hendiadys, in which two nouns are used together and one of them describes the other. Alternate translation: “the powerful God” or “the all-powerful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	22	70	udh2	figs-explicit	σὺ οὖν εἶ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Therefore are you the Son of God	The council asked this question because they wanted Jesus to confirm explicitly their understanding that he was saying he was the Son of God. Alternate translation: “So when you said that, did you mean that you are the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3994,43 +3994,43 @@ LUK	22	70	l4j7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1
 LUK	22	70	jtr9	figs-idiom	ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1	You are saying that I am	This is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what the elders are asking about is true. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is just as you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	22	71	u3m3	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι ἔχομεν μαρτυρίας χρείαν?	1	What further need do we have of a witness?	The elders are using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We have no further need for testimony!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	22	71	m594	figs-explicit	τί ἔτι ἔχομεν μαρτυρίας χρείαν?	1	What further need do we have of a witness?	The implications are that no further testimony is needed to prove a charge of blasphemy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We have no further need for testimony to prove a charge of blasphemy!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	22	71	m595	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν&αὐτοὶ&ἠκούσαμεν	1	do we have … we ourselves have heard	The elders are speaking to one another about themselves, so **we** and **ourselves** would be exclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	22	71	m595	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν & αὐτοὶ & ἠκούσαμεν	1	do we have … we ourselves have heard	The elders are speaking to one another about themselves, so **we** and **ourselves** would be exclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	22	71	m596	grammar-connect-logic-result	αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	For we ourselves have heard from his own mouth	If it would be helpful in your language, you put this phrase before the previous phrase, as UST does, since this phrase gives the reason for the conclusion that the previous phrase states. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	22	71	lpm4	figs-metonymy	ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	we … have heard from his own mouth	The elders are using the expression **his own mouth** to refer to what Jesus has just said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “we … have heard what he just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	22	71	m597	figs-explicit	αὐτοὶ&ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	we … have heard from his own mouth	The implications are that what Jesus has just said proves a charge of blasphemy by itself, because Jesus has claimed to be equal with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we ourselves have heard him say that he is equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	22	71	m597	figs-explicit	αὐτοὶ & ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	we … have heard from his own mouth	The implications are that what Jesus has just said proves a charge of blasphemy by itself, because Jesus has claimed to be equal with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we ourselves have heard him say that he is equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	intro	p6wq			0		# Luke 23 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1–25)<br>2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26–49)<br>3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50–56)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”<br><br>The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.<br><br>### The tomb<br><br>The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”<br><br>There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).<br><br>(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”<br><br>## Important textual issues in this chapter<br><br>### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)<br><br>This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.<br><br>### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)<br><br>This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.<br><br>If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 LUK	23	1	pi3d	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to indicate that this event came after the events he has just described. Alternate translation (as in UST): “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 LUK	23	1	sgf1	figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν	1	the whole multitude of them	The word **whole** is a generalization. Luke says in [23:51](../23/51.md) that at least one member of the Sanhedrin did not agree that Jesus was guilty of blasphemy and should be punished. Alternate translation: “the many members of the ruling council who wanted to condemn Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	23	1	mvn9	figs-metonymy	ἀναστὰν	1	rose up	This means literally that they “stood up” or “stood to their feet,” but by extension it means that they adjourned the meeting and left the meeting place. Alternate translation: “ended the meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	23	1	k4aa	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τὸν Πειλᾶτον	1	to Pilate	The implication is that the Jewish leaders brought Jesus to Pilate because they wanted Pilate to judge him. Alternate translation: “to Pilate so that Pilate would judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	2	m599	figs-explicit	κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ	1	to accuse him	The chief priests and scribes accused Jesus of doing wrong things because they wanted Pilate to kill Jesus. But they were accusing him falsely, because Jesus had never done what they accused him of doing. For example, in [20:25](../20/25.md), Jesus had specifically said that the Jews could pay taxes to the Roman government. To make sure that your readers are not confused, you could state explicitly that these accusations were false. Alternate translation: “to accuse him falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	2	mtc8	figs-exclusive	εὕρομεν&τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν	1	we found … our nation	The terms **We** and **our** refer only the members of the Jewish ruling council who are speaking, not to Pilate or any of the other people nearby. So in your translation, use the exclusive forms of these words, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	23	2	mtc8	figs-exclusive	εὕρομεν & τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν	1	we found … our nation	The terms **We** and **our** refer only the members of the Jewish ruling council who are speaking, not to Pilate or any of the other people nearby. So in your translation, use the exclusive forms of these words, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	23	2	im4v	figs-metaphor	διαστρέφοντα τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν	1	misleading our nation	The Jewish leaders speak of Jesus as if he were a guide who was leading someone in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “encouraging our people to do things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	23	2	xsa4		κωλύοντα φόρους&διδόναι	1	forbidding to give tribute	Alternate translation: “telling them not to pay taxes”
+LUK	23	2	xsa4		κωλύοντα φόρους & διδόναι	1	forbidding to give tribute	Alternate translation: “telling them not to pay taxes”
 LUK	23	2	l68k	figs-metonymy	Καίσαρι	1	to Caesar	See how you translated **Caesar** in [20:22](../20/22.md). The Jewish leaders are referring to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: “to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	23	3	m600	figs-hendiadys	ὁ&ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ ἔφη	3	answering him he said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+LUK	23	3	m600	figs-hendiadys	ὁ & ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ ἔφη	3	answering him he said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 LUK	23	3	ve4s	figs-idiom	σὺ λέγεις	1	You say so	Like the similar expression in [22:70](../22/70.md), this is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what Pilate has said is true. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is as you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	23	4	fx7d	writing-participants	καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους	1	and the crowds	Luke uses this phrase subtly within the narrative to introduce these new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “and to the crowds that had gathered there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	23	4	s8fi	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εὑρίσκω αἴτιον ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τούτῳ	1	I find no cause in this man	Pilate means implicitly **no cause** to convict Jesus of a crime and punish him. Alternate translation: “I do not find this man to be guilty of anything” or “I find no grounds for conviction in this man’s case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	5	m601	writing-pronouns	οἱ&ἐπίσχυον	1	they were insisting	The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders who had brought Jesus to Pilate for trial. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders kept insisting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	23	5	m601	writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἐπίσχυον	1	they were insisting	The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders who had brought Jesus to Pilate for trial. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders kept insisting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	5	yy6w	figs-metaphor	ἀνασείει τὸν λαὸν	1	He stirs up the people	The Jewish leaders speak as if Jesus were stirring a pot and putting in motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. They mean that he is encouraging rebellion. Alternate translation: “He encourages the people to rebel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	23	5	cr78		καὶ ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἕως ὧδε	1	beginning from Galilee as far as here	It might be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “He began causing trouble in Galilee, and he has done so all the way to here”
-LUK	23	6	vvp6	figs-explicit	Πειλᾶτος&ἀκούσας	1	when Pilate heard this	As the rest of the verse shows, this refers implicitly to Pilate hearing that Jesus had begun teaching in Galilee. Alternate translation: “when Pilate heard that Jesus had begun to teach in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	23	6	vvp6	figs-explicit	Πειλᾶτος & ἀκούσας	1	when Pilate heard this	As the rest of the verse shows, this refers implicitly to Pilate hearing that Jesus had begun teaching in Galilee. Alternate translation: “when Pilate heard that Jesus had begun to teach in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	6	px94	figs-quotations	ἐπηρώτησεν εἰ ὁ ἄνθρωπος Γαλιλαῖός ἐστιν	1	he asked whether the man was a Galilean	If it would be helpful in your language, you could represent this as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 LUK	23	6	dr1s	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	the man	The term **the man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	7	cbn1	figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ὅτι	1	when he learned that	The implication is that the Jewish leaders answered Pilate’s question and confirmed that Jesus came from Galilee. Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders confirmed to Pilate that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	7	mn6i	figs-explicit	ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου ἐστὶν	1	he was under the authority of Herod	The implication is that Jesus was under Herod’s authority because Herod was the ruler of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was under the authority of Herod, since Herod ruled over Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	7	ay2i	figs-explicit	ἀνέπεμψεν αὐτὸν πρὸς Ἡρῴδην	1	he sent him to Herod	The implication seems to be that Pilate used these grounds to get someone else to decide Jesus’ case. He did not want to decide it himself, because he would either have to release someone the Jewish leaders wanted condemned or else condemn someone he knew was innocent. Alternate translation: “he referred Jesus’ case to Herod so that he would not have to decide it himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	7	ys2n	figs-idiom	ἐν ταύταις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	23	8	z3zz	writing-pronouns	θέλων ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν&διὰ τὸ ἀκούειν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	he had been desiring to see him … because he had heard about him	In these phrases, **he** refers to Herod and **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “wanting to see Jesus … because he had heard about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	23	8	z3zz	writing-pronouns	θέλων ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν & διὰ τὸ ἀκούειν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	he had been desiring to see him … because he had heard about him	In these phrases, **he** refers to Herod and **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “wanting to see Jesus … because he had heard about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	8	b424	figs-activepassive	ἤλπιζέν τι σημεῖον ἰδεῖν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ γινόμενον	1	he was hoping to see some sign happen by him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Herod wanted to see Jesus perform a miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	23	9	hbp3	figs-metonymy	ἐπηρώτα&αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς	1	he questioned him in many words	Luke is using the term **words** to refer to what Herod said as he questioned Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod asked Jesus many questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	23	9	hbp3	figs-metonymy	ἐπηρώτα & αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς	1	he questioned him in many words	Luke is using the term **words** to refer to what Herod said as he questioned Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod asked Jesus many questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	23	9	c8li		οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίνατο αὐτῷ	1	he answered him nothing	If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the object positive here. Alternate translation: “Jesus did not say anything in reply”
 LUK	23	10	lpu6		ἵστήκεισαν	1	stood by	Alternate translation: “were standing there”
 LUK	23	10	hn8g		εὐτόνως κατηγοροῦντες αὐτοῦ	1	vehemently accusing him	Alternate translation: “insisting strongly that Jesus was guilty of doing wrong”
-LUK	23	11	m602		ἐξουθενήσας&αὐτὸν	1	despised him	This does not mean that Herod hated Jesus, but that he treated him as if he were worthless. Alternate translation: “humiliated him”
+LUK	23	11	m602		ἐξουθενήσας & αὐτὸν	1	despised him	This does not mean that Herod hated Jesus, but that he treated him as if he were worthless. Alternate translation: “humiliated him”
 LUK	23	11	qt1c	figs-explicit	περιβαλὼν ἐσθῆτα λαμπρὰν	1	Putting elegant clothing around him	Herod and his soldiers did this to mock Jesus and to make fun of him, so be sure that your readers do not get the impression that they did this to honor or care for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Dressing him mockingly in beautiful clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	12	b6f1	figs-explicit	ἐγένοντο&φίλοι ὅ τε Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μετ’ ἀλλήλων	1	both Herod and Pilate became friends with each other on that day	Luke does not say specifically why these two men **became friends**. This could mean: (1) Pilate had shown Herod courtesy by respecting his jurisdiction over Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because Pilate had respectfully sent Jesus to Herod to judge him” (2) they realized that they agreed in their opinion about Jesus. They both felt that he was not guilty of doing wrong, but they also felt they could mistreat him as a way of asserting their power and authority over someone the people considered a leader. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because they had both responded to Jesus in the same way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	23	12	b6f1	figs-explicit	ἐγένοντο & φίλοι ὅ τε Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μετ’ ἀλλήλων	1	both Herod and Pilate became friends with each other on that day	Luke does not say specifically why these two men **became friends**. This could mean: (1) Pilate had shown Herod courtesy by respecting his jurisdiction over Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because Pilate had respectfully sent Jesus to Herod to judge him” (2) they realized that they agreed in their opinion about Jesus. They both felt that he was not guilty of doing wrong, but they also felt they could mistreat him as a way of asserting their power and authority over someone the people considered a leader. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because they had both responded to Jesus in the same way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	12	x7r8	grammar-connect-logic-result	προϋπῆρχον γὰρ ἐν ἔχθρᾳ ὄντες πρὸς αὑτούς	1	for they were previously being in hostility between themselves	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this clause first in the verse, as UST does, since it gives the reason for the results that the rest of the verse describes. These two men had to become **friends** because they had not been **friends** previously. Alternate translation, as the beginning of the verse, replacing “Then”: “Before this Herod and Pilate had been enemies, but now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	23	13	d7gn	writing-participants	τὸν λαὸν	1	the people	This is a further reference reintroducing these participants, whom Luke first introduced subtly in 23:4. It is not likely that Pilate asked a crowd to gather. Instead, the crowd was probably still there waiting to see what would happen to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the crowd of people that was still there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	23	14	dh77	figs-explicit	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον	1	said to them, “You brought this man to me”	By **this man**, Pilate means Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “said to them about Jesus, ‘You brought this man to me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -4045,48 +4045,48 @@ LUK	23	15	bn7l	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνέπεμψεν γὰρ αὐτ
 LUK	23	15	i2ba	figs-exclusive	πρὸς ἡμᾶς	1	to us	Pilate means that Herod sent Jesus back not just to him and his soldiers, but also to the Jewish leaders who were the accusers in this trial. Since Pilate is speaking specifically to those leaders (he says in the previous verse, “You brought this man to me”), the word **us** includes the addressees. So it would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	23	15	gs4m	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲν ἄξιον θανάτου ἐστὶν πεπραγμένον αὐτῷ	1	nothing worthy of death has been done by him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he has not done anything to deserve being put to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	23	16	p5wa	figs-explicit	παιδεύσας οὖν αὐτὸν, ἀπολύσω	1	Therefore, having punished him, I will release him	Your readers may find this hard to understand. Since Pilate had found Jesus not guilty, he should have released him without punishing him. The implications are that Pilate punished Jesus anyway, even though he knew he was innocent, to try to satisfy the Jewish leaders. However, since Luke does not provide this explanation in his book, you probably should not add it to your translation. But you could make explicit that Pilate is saying he is not going to execute Jesus. Alternate translation: “So I will not execute him, but whip him, and then let him go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	16	m606	figs-synecdoche	παιδεύσας&αὐτὸν	1	having punished him	Pilate will not administer this punishment personally. Rather, he will have his soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “after having my soldiers whip him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+LUK	23	16	m606	figs-synecdoche	παιδεύσας & αὐτὸν	1	having punished him	Pilate will not administer this punishment personally. Rather, he will have his soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “after having my soldiers whip him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	23	17	m607	translate-textvariants	Ἀνάγκην δὲ εἶχεν ἀπολύειν αὐτοῖς κατὰ ἑορτὴν ἕνα	1	And he had obligation to release one to them at every feast	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in the verse, for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 LUK	23	17	m608	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	This verse uses the word **But** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what is happening. In the previous verse, Pilate was saying that Jesus would be the prisoner he was obligated to release. But in the next verse, the crowd shouts for him to release a different man instead. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK	23	17	m609	writing-pronouns	Ἀνάγκην&εἶχεν	1	he had obligation	The pronoun **he** refers to Pilate. Alternate translation: “Pilate was obligated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	23	17	m609	writing-pronouns	Ἀνάγκην & εἶχεν	1	he had obligation	The pronoun **he** refers to Pilate. Alternate translation: “Pilate was obligated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	17	m610	figs-nominaladj	ἕνα	1	one	This verse is using the adjective **one** as a noun. In context, the term clearly means **one** prisoner. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the noun for clarity, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	23	17	m611	figs-synecdoche	κατὰ ἑορτὴν	1	at every feast	This verse uses the general term **feast** to mean one feast in particular, Passover. Alternate translation: “during each Passover celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK	23	18	v7pf	writing-pronouns	ἀνέκραγον&πανπληθεὶ	1	they cried out all together	The pronoun **they** refers to the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	23	18	v7pf	writing-pronouns	ἀνέκραγον & πανπληθεὶ	1	they cried out all together	The pronoun **they** refers to the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	18	ib9q	figs-imperative	αἶρε τοῦτον	1	Take away this one	This is an imperative, but since the crowd cannot command Pilate to do this, you could translate it as an expression of what they want. Alternate translation: “We want you to execute this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	23	18	m612	figs-imperative	ἀπόλυσον δὲ ἡμῖν τὸν Βαραββᾶν	1	but release to us Barabbas	This is another imperative, and since the crowd cannot command Pilate to do this either, you could also translate it as an expression of what they want. Alternate translation: “and we want you to set Barabbas free instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-LUK	23	18	i6pj	figs-exclusive	ἀπόλυσον&ἡμῖν	1	release to us	When the people in the crowd say **us**, they are referring to themselves only, not to Pilate and his soldiers as well. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **us,** you would use the exclusive form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	23	18	i6pj	figs-exclusive	ἀπόλυσον & ἡμῖν	1	release to us	When the people in the crowd say **us**, they are referring to themselves only, not to Pilate and his soldiers as well. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **us,** you would use the exclusive form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	23	19	vd6b	writing-background	ὅστις ἦν διὰ στάσιν τινὰ γενομένην ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ φόνον, βληθεὶς ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1	He had been put in prison for a certain rebellion that happened in the city, and for murder	Luke provides this background information to explain to his readers who Barabbas was. Alternate translation: “Now Barabbas was a man whom the Romans had put in prison because he had led a rebellion in Jerusalem and he had killed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-LUK	23	19	qdv7	figs-activepassive	ὅστις ἦν&βληθεὶς ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1	He had been put in prison	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “The Romans had put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	23	19	qdv7	figs-activepassive	ὅστις ἦν & βληθεὶς ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1	He had been put in prison	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “The Romans had put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	23	19	zl1f	figs-explicit	διὰ στάσιν τινὰ γενομένην ἐν τῇ πόλει	1	for a certain rebellion that happened in the city	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that Barabbas led this rebellion against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “because he had led a rebellion in Jerusalem against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	20	vbp4	writing-pronouns	πάλιν&προσεφώνησεν αὐτοῖς	1	again addressed them	The pronoun **them** refers to the religious leaders who had accused Jesus and the crowd that was shouting for him to be executed. Alternate translation: “spoke again to the religious leaders and to the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	23	20	vbp4	writing-pronouns	πάλιν & προσεφώνησεν αὐτοῖς	1	again addressed them	The pronoun **them** refers to the religious leaders who had accused Jesus and the crowd that was shouting for him to be executed. Alternate translation: “spoke again to the religious leaders and to the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	20	t1i2	grammar-connect-logic-result	θέλων ἀπολῦσαι τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	desiring to release Jesus	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this phrase before the previous one, as UST does, since it gives the reason why Pilate spoke to the leaders and the crowd again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	23	21	m614	translate-unknown	σταύρου, σταύρου αὐτόν	1	Crucify, crucify him	As a note to [14:27](../14/27.md) explains, the Romans executed some criminals by nailing them to a wooden beam with crossbar and setting the beam upright so that the criminals would slowly suffocate. That was what it meant to **crucify** someone. Alternate translation: “Nail him to a cross! Execute him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	23	21	m615	figs-imperative	σταύρου, σταύρου αὐτόν	1	Crucify, crucify him	This is an imperative, but since the crowd cannot command Pilate to do this, you could translate it as an expression of what they want. Alternate translation: “We want you to nail him to a cross to execute him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-LUK	23	22	iz5v	translate-ordinal	ὁ&τρίτον εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he spoke to them a third time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “Pilate spoke to the crowd again, for time number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+LUK	23	22	iz5v	translate-ordinal	ὁ & τρίτον εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς	1	he spoke to them a third time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “Pilate spoke to the crowd again, for time number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	23	22	ck75	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν οὗτος?	1	For what evil has this one done?	Pilate does not expect the crowd to tell him what Jesus has done wrong. Rather, he is using the question form to emphasize to the crowd that Jesus is innocent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is no reason to execute this man, because he has not done anything wrong!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	23	22	de5a		οὐδὲν αἴτιον θανάτου εὗρον ἐν αὐτῷ	1	No cause for death have I found in him	Alternate translation: “I have not found any grounds to convict him of a crime for which he should be executed”
 LUK	23	22	mij1	figs-explicit	παιδεύσας οὖν αὐτὸν, ἀπολύσω	1	Therefore, having punished him, I will release him	See the note to this same sentence in [23:16](../23/16.md). Pilate should have released Jesus without punishment, because he was innocent. It seems that Pilate decided to punish Jesus anyway to try to satisfy the Jewish leaders. However, since Luke does not provide this explanation in his book, you probably should not add it to your translation. But you could make explicit that Pilate is saying he is not going to execute Jesus. Alternate translation: “So I will not execute him, but whip him, and then let him go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	22	m616	figs-synecdoche	παιδεύσας&αὐτὸν, ἀπολύσω	1	having punished him, I will release him	Pilate is not going to administer this punishment personally. Rather, he will have his soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “I will have my soldiers whip him, and then I will release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+LUK	23	22	m616	figs-synecdoche	παιδεύσας & αὐτὸν, ἀπολύσω	1	having punished him, I will release him	Pilate is not going to administer this punishment personally. Rather, he will have his soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “I will have my soldiers whip him, and then I will release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	23	23	sni4	figs-metonymy	φωναῖς μεγάλαις	1	with loud voices	Luke is describing the shouts of the crowd by reference to the **voices** that the people used to make them. Alternate translation: “with loud shouts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	23	23	pst8	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸν σταυρωθῆναι	1	for him to be crucified	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “that Pilate have his soldiers crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	23	23	pgz9	figs-personification	κατίσχυον αἱ φωναὶ αὐτῶν	1	their voices prevailed	Luke speaks of the **voices** as if they were a living thing that actively overcame Pilate’s reluctance. Alternate translation: “the crowd kept shouting until they convinced Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	23	24	m617	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Because the people in the crowd overcame his reluctance with their shouts, Pilate agreed to do what they wanted. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	23	24	tfw2		γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν	1	for their demand to happen	Alternate translation: “to do what the crowd was demanding”
-LUK	23	25	nwd3	figs-explicit	τὸν&βεβλημένον εἰς φυλακὴν	1	the one who had been put in prison	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that this means Barabbas. Alternate translation: “Barabbas, whom the Romans had put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	23	25	nwd3	figs-explicit	τὸν & βεβλημένον εἰς φυλακὴν	1	the one who had been put in prison	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that this means Barabbas. Alternate translation: “Barabbas, whom the Romans had put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	25	t66f	figs-activepassive	βεβλημένον εἰς φυλακὴν	1	who had been put in prison	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans had put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	23	25	z8v8	figs-personification	τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν παρέδωκεν τῷ θελήματι αὐτῶν	1	he handed over Jesus to their will	Luke speaks of the **will** of the people as if it were a living thing into whose custody Pilate delivered Jesus. Alternate translation: “but he ordered his soldiers to do to Jesus what the crowd had demanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	23	26	s9kc		ὡς ἀπήγαγον αὐτόν	1	as they led him away	Alternate translation: “while the soldiers were leading Jesus away from where Pilate had judged him”
-LUK	23	26	ysu3	figs-explicit	ἐπιλαβόμενοι Σίμωνά&ἐπέθηκαν	1	seizing Simon … they put	Luke assumes that his readers will know that Roman soldiers had the authority to compel people to carry their loads. Be sure that your translation does not suggest that the soldiers arrested Simon or that he had done anything wrong. Alternate translation: “making use of their authority, they conscripted Simon … and put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	23	26	ysu3	figs-explicit	ἐπιλαβόμενοι Σίμωνά & ἐπέθηκαν	1	seizing Simon … they put	Luke assumes that his readers will know that Roman soldiers had the authority to compel people to carry their loads. Be sure that your translation does not suggest that the soldiers arrested Simon or that he had done anything wrong. Alternate translation: “making use of their authority, they conscripted Simon … and put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	26	m618	writing-background	Σίμωνά, τινα Κυρηναῖον ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ	1	Simon, a certain Cyrenean coming from the country	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could treat this information about this man, where he was from, and what he was doing as background information and put it first in the verse, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	23	26	m619	writing-participants	Σίμωνά, τινα Κυρηναῖον	1	Simon, a certain Cyrenean	Luke uses this phrase to introduce this new character into the story. Alternate translation: “a man named Simon, who was from the city of Cyrene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	23	26	m620	translate-names	Κυρηναῖον	1	Cyrenean	The term **Cyrenean** is a name that refers to a person who is from the city of Cyrene. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	23	26	i5ua		ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ	1	coming from the country	Alternate translation: “who was coming into Jerusalem from the countryside”
 LUK	23	26	fub3		ἐπέθηκαν αὐτῷ τὸν σταυρὸν	1	they put the cross on him	Alternate translation: “the soldiers put the cross on his shoulders”
 LUK	23	26	y3p6		ὄπισθεν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	to carry behind Jesus	Alternate translation: “and made him walk along behind Jesus carrying it”
-LUK	23	27	ad9f		ἠκολούθει&αὐτῷ πολὺ πλῆθος τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ γυναικῶν	1	a great crowd of the people was following him, and of women	The women were part of the large crowd. They were not in a separate crowd of their own. Alternate translation: “a great crowd of people, which included women, was following him”
+LUK	23	27	ad9f		ἠκολούθει & αὐτῷ πολὺ πλῆθος τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ γυναικῶν	1	a great crowd of the people was following him, and of women	The women were part of the large crowd. They were not in a separate crowd of their own. Alternate translation: “a great crowd of people, which included women, was following him”
 LUK	23	27	s7gx	writing-background	καὶ γυναικῶν αἳ ἐκόπτοντο καὶ ἐθρήνουν αὐτόν	1	and of women who were mourning and wailing for him	Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next, when Jesus speaks to these women. It might be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now the crowd included women who were mourning and wailing for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 LUK	23	27	m621	translate-symaction	ἐκόπτοντο	1	mourning	See the note to **mourning** at [8:52](../08/52.md), and see how you translated this word there. It could mean that the women were pounding on their chests as a sign of grief, as was customary in this culture, or it could mean more generally that they were expressing their sorrow over what was happening to Jesus. Alternate translation: “pounding on their chests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-LUK	23	27	bp3x		ἠκολούθει&αὐτῷ	1	was following him	Here, the word **following** is not figurative. It does not mean that these people were Jesus’ disciples. Alternate translation: “were walking along behind him”
+LUK	23	27	bp3x		ἠκολούθει & αὐτῷ	1	was following him	Here, the word **following** is not figurative. It does not mean that these people were Jesus’ disciples. Alternate translation: “were walking along behind him”
 LUK	23	28	nl38	figs-metaphor	θυγατέρες Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Daughters of Jerusalem	As in [13:34](../13/34.md), Jesus is describing people who live in Jerusalem as if they were the children of the city and it was their mother. Alternate translation: “You women who live in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	23	28	wi15	figs-explicit	ἐφ’ ἑαυτὰς κλαίετε, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν	1	weep for yourselves and for your children	Jesus does not say specifically why the women should weep for themselves and for their children, but the implication from what he says in [23:31](../23/31.md) is that they should weep because even worse things are going to happen to them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “weep for yourselves and for your children, because even worse things are going to happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	29	s9uj	translate-versebridge	ὅτι	1	For	Jesus is giving the reason why the women of Jerusalem should weep for themselves and their children, as he told them to do in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
@@ -4100,9 +4100,9 @@ LUK	23	30	te1i	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	τότε	1	Then	Here, **Then**
 LUK	23	30	u1x1	writing-pronouns	ἄρξονται λέγειν	1	they will begin to say	Here Jesus is likely using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense, as in the previous verse. He probably does not have specific individuals in mind. However, the general reference may be to the people of Jerusalem, as UST suggests. Alternate translation: “people will begin to say” or “the people of Jerusalem will begin to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	30	m624	figs-apostrophe	λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς; καὶ τοῖς βουνοῖς, καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	to say to the mountains, ‘Fall on us,’ and to the hills, ‘Cover us’	Jesus is saying that at this time people will address something they know cannot hear them in order to express in a strong way what they are feeling. Alternate translation: “to say that they wished the mountains would fall on them and the hills would cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 LUK	23	30	m625	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς; καὶ τοῖς βουνοῖς, καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	to say to the mountains, ‘Fall on us,’ and to the hills, ‘Cover us’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to tell the mountains to fall on them and the hills to cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	23	30	m626	figs-imperative	πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς&καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	Fall on us … Cover us	This is an imperative, but since the people cannot order the mountains and hills to do this, they would be using the imperative to express their wishes. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us … We wish you would cover us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-LUK	23	30	m627	figs-explicit	πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς&καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	Fall on us … Cover us	The people do not want the mountains and hills to fall on them to harm them, but rather to protect them. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us to protect us … We wish you would cover us to protect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	23	30	m628	figs-exclusive	πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς&καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	Fall on us … Cover us	When the people say **us**, they are referring to themselves only, not to the mountains and hills as well. So here, use the exclusive form of **us** if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	23	30	m626	figs-imperative	πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς & καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	Fall on us … Cover us	This is an imperative, but since the people cannot order the mountains and hills to do this, they would be using the imperative to express their wishes. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us … We wish you would cover us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+LUK	23	30	m627	figs-explicit	πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς & καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	Fall on us … Cover us	The people do not want the mountains and hills to fall on them to harm them, but rather to protect them. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us to protect us … We wish you would cover us to protect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	23	30	m628	figs-exclusive	πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς & καλύψατε ἡμᾶς	1	Fall on us … Cover us	When the people say **us**, they are referring to themselves only, not to the mountains and hills as well. So here, use the exclusive form of **us** if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	23	31	nkk3	figs-metaphor	ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται?	1	For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry?	This is a figure of speech based on the idea that dry wood catches fire much more easily than moist wood. The fire, in turn, represents terrible things that people will experience. Jesus is saying that under the present relatively stable conditions, it was difficult for his enemies to arrest him and sentence him to death. In the future, conditions will become so desperate and chaotic that people will be able to do much worse things much more easily. He is probably referring to what conditions will be like during the siege and destruction of Jerusalem, which he described in [21:20–24](../21/20.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, and you could represent the metaphor itself as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “If people are able to do this when conditions are good, what will they do when conditions become very bad?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	23	31	y238	figs-rquestion	ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται?	1	For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry?	Jesus does not expect the women to tell him what people will do in the future. Rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since people are doing this when conditions are good, they will certainly do much worse when conditions become very bad!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	23	31	m629	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν	1	they do these things	Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. Alternate translation: “people are doing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -4112,8 +4112,8 @@ LUK	23	31	m632	translate-unknown	ξύλῳ	1	tree	A **tree** is a large plant wi
 LUK	23	31	zt5s	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ	1	in the dry	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when the wood is dry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	23	31	m633	figs-nominaladj	ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ	1	in the dry	Jesus is using the adjective **dry** as a noun. In context, the term means **dry** wood. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the noun for clarity. Alternate translation: “with dry wood” or “when the wood is dry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	23	32	m634	writing-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-LUK	23	32	w8yj	figs-activepassive	ἤγοντο&καὶ ἕτεροι κακοῦργοι δύο σὺν αὐτῷ	1	others, two criminals, were also being led away with him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “with him the soldiers were also leading away two other men, who were criminals,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	23	32	m635	figs-verbs	ἤγοντο&καὶ ἕτεροι κακοῦργοι δύο	1	others, two criminals, were also being led away	If your language does use passive verb forms, and if it also uses a dual form, this verb should be in the dual form if it is passive, since the two criminals would be the subject. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+LUK	23	32	w8yj	figs-activepassive	ἤγοντο & καὶ ἕτεροι κακοῦργοι δύο σὺν αὐτῷ	1	others, two criminals, were also being led away with him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “with him the soldiers were also leading away two other men, who were criminals,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	23	32	m635	figs-verbs	ἤγοντο & καὶ ἕτεροι κακοῦργοι δύο	1	others, two criminals, were also being led away	If your language does use passive verb forms, and if it also uses a dual form, this verb should be in the dual form if it is passive, since the two criminals would be the subject. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	23	32	m636	writing-participants	ἤγοντο δὲ καὶ ἕτεροι κακοῦργοι δύο	1	And others, two criminals, were also being led away	Luke uses this phrase to introduce these new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “And there were two other men, who were criminals, who were also being led away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 LUK	23	32	m2nh	figs-distinguish	ἕτεροι κακοῦργοι δύο	1	others, two criminals	This does not mean “two other criminals,” which would imply that Jesus was also a criminal. Jesus was innocent, even though the Romans were treating him as if he were a criminal. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “two other men, who actually were criminals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 LUK	23	32	m637	figs-activepassive	ἀναιρεθῆναι	1	to be put to death	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that they could execute them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -4153,10 +4153,10 @@ LUK	23	40	m653	figs-nominaladj	ὁ ἕτερος	1	the other	Luke is using the a
 LUK	23	40	nk1r	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν Θεόν, ὅτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ?	1	Do you not even fear God, since you are under the same judgment?	The second criminal does not expect the first criminal to tell him whether he fears God. Rather, the second criminal is using the question form to rebuke the first criminal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You ought to fear God, since you are dying on a cross just as he is!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	23	40	m654	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν Θεόν, ὅτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ?	1	Do you not even fear God, since you are under the same judgment?	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could bring out the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “You ought to fear God and show more respect for this godly man, since you are dying on a cross just as he is, and you will soon have to face God and answer for your actions!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	40	m655	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ	1	you are under the same judgment	The second criminal is using the word **judgment** to mean the punishment to which the first criminal was sentenced when the Romans pronounced **judgment** on him. Alternate translation: “you are being executed on a cross just as he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	23	41	qyp6	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἐπράξαμεν&ἀπολαμβάνομεν	1	we … we are receiving … we did	The second criminal, speaking to the first criminal, is using the term **we** to mean himself and the first criminal. So **we** would be inclusive in all these cases, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-LUK	23	41	m656	figs-verbs	ἡμεῖς&ἐπράξαμεν&ἀπολαμβάνομεν	1	we … we are receiving … we did	Since the term **we** refers to two people here, it would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
-LUK	23	41	i4gm	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς&δικαίως	1	we justly	The second criminal is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we are receiving this punishment justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-LUK	23	41	m657	figs-nominaladj	ἄξια&ὧν ἐπράξαμεν	1	worthy of what we did	The second criminal is using the adjective **worthy** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a just punishment for what we did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+LUK	23	41	qyp6	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἐπράξαμεν & ἀπολαμβάνομεν	1	we … we are receiving … we did	The second criminal, speaking to the first criminal, is using the term **we** to mean himself and the first criminal. So **we** would be inclusive in all these cases, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	23	41	m656	figs-verbs	ἡμεῖς & ἐπράξαμεν & ἀπολαμβάνομεν	1	we … we are receiving … we did	Since the term **we** refers to two people here, it would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+LUK	23	41	i4gm	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς & δικαίως	1	we justly	The second criminal is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we are receiving this punishment justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+LUK	23	41	m657	figs-nominaladj	ἄξια & ὧν ἐπράξαμεν	1	worthy of what we did	The second criminal is using the adjective **worthy** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a just punishment for what we did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	23	41	nu35	figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	this one	The second criminal is using the adjective **this** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person, Jesus. ULT supplies the noun **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	23	42	mht9	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἔλεγεν	1	And he said	The pronoun **he** refers to the second criminal, who continues speaking, now to Jesus. Alternate translation: “The second criminal then said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	23	42	j9d9	figs-idiom	μνήσθητί μου	1	remember me	As in [1:72](../01/72.md), the word **remember** here describes Jesus thinking about this second criminal and considering what action he can take on his behalf. It does not suggest that Jesus would forget about him. Alternate translation: “do what you could to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -4187,7 +4187,7 @@ LUK	23	47	p6lh	figs-explicit	ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης	1	the centurion	The i
 LUK	23	47	m667	figs-explicit	τὸ γενόμενον	1	the thing having happened	This expression is singular and so it refers to the immediately preceding event, the death of Jesus. (The expression is plural in the next verse, where it refers to all of the events of the crucifixiion.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “how Jesus had entrusted his spirit to God when he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	47	m668		ἐδόξαζεν τὸν Θεὸν λέγων	1	glorified God, saying	This means that the centurion **glorified God** by what he said. Alternate translation: “brought honor to God by saying”
 LUK	23	47	c2ti		ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος δίκαιος ἦν	1	this man was righteous	Alternate translation: “this man had not done anything wrong”
-LUK	23	48	gt8y	figs-explicit	συνπαραγενόμενοι&ἐπὶ τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην	1	that had come together for this spectacle	The term **spectacle** describes something that people would look at. It refers here to the crucifixion of Jesus and the two criminals. Alternate translation: “who had gathered to watch the crucifixions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	23	48	gt8y	figs-explicit	συνπαραγενόμενοι & ἐπὶ τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην	1	that had come together for this spectacle	The term **spectacle** describes something that people would look at. It refers here to the crucifixion of Jesus and the two criminals. Alternate translation: “who had gathered to watch the crucifixions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	48	whs7	figs-explicit	ὑπέστρεφον	1	returned	The implication is that the people in the crowds **returned** to their homes. Alternate translation: “returned to their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	23	48	ft9q	translate-symaction	τύπτοντες τὰ στήθη	1	beating their breasts	As in [18:13](../18/13.md), this was a physical expression of great sorrow. Alternate translation: “hitting their chests to express their great sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	23	49	m669	figs-nominaladj	πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ	1	all the ones acquainted with him	Luke is using the adjective **acquainted** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “all the people who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -4225,11 +4225,11 @@ LUK	23	56	m681	translate-unknown	ἀρώματα καὶ μύρα	1	spices and o
 LUK	23	56	uzk9		ἡσύχασαν	1	they rested	Alternate translation: “the women did not do any work”
 LUK	23	56	tk6s		κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν	1	according to the commandment	Alternate translation: “as Moses had commanded in the law”
 LUK	24	intro	r5qx			0		# Luke 24 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. The women go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (24:1–12)<br>2. Two disciples meet Jesus on a journey to Emmaus (24:13–35)<br>3. Jesus, risen from the dead, appears to his disciples (24:36–53)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The loyalty of the women<br><br>Many of Luke’s original readers would have thought that women were less important than men. But Luke carefully demonstrates that some women who loved Jesus very much showed him greater loyalty than the twelve disciples did. While the disciples ran away and hid, the women lovingly cared for Jesus’ body, and as a result, they were the first to learn that he had risen from the dead.<br><br>### Resurrection<br><br>Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38–43](../24/38.md)).<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “the third day”<br><br>This expression occurs three times in this chapter, in [24:7](../24/07.md), [24:21](../24/21.md), and [24:46](../24/46.md). See the explanation of this expression in the note to Luke [18:33](../18/33.md). In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” By that way of reckoning time, since Jesus died on a Friday, when he rose from the dead on a Sunday, that was the “third day.”<br><br>### Two men in bright shining robes<br><br>Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about angels in white clothing speaking with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Matthew and John call them angels, while Mark and Luke call them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human form. Luke and John write about both angels, while Matthew and Mark write about only one of them. It would be best to translate each of these passages as it appears in ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1–2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md))
-LUK	24	1	m682	figs-explicit	τῇ&μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	on the first of the week	This implicitly means the **first** day of the week. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	24	1	r62f	translate-ordinal	τῇ&μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	on the first of the week	Here Luke is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+LUK	24	1	m682	figs-explicit	τῇ & μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	on the first of the week	This implicitly means the **first** day of the week. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	24	1	r62f	translate-ordinal	τῇ & μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	on the first of the week	Here Luke is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	24	1	m683	figs-idiom	ὄρθρου βαθέως	1	deeply at dawn	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “at the first light of dawn” or “as dawn was just beginning to break” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	24	1	qg7a	writing-pronouns	ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθαν	1	they came to the tomb	The pronoun **they** refers to the women whom Luke describes in [23:55–56](../23/55.md). Alternate translation: “these women returned to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-LUK	24	2	jq9p		εὗρον&τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον	1	they found the stone rolled away	Alternate translation: “they saw that the stone had been rolled away”
+LUK	24	2	jq9p		εὗρον & τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον	1	they found the stone rolled away	Alternate translation: “they saw that the stone had been rolled away”
 LUK	24	2	l6uk	figs-activepassive	τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον	1	the stone rolled away	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	24	2	t4mf	figs-explicit	τὸν λίθον	1	the stone	Luke assumes that his readers will know that this was a large, cut, round stone that was big enough to completely block the entrance to the tomb. It had been put in place to seal off the entrance, and it would have required several people to move it. Alternate translation: “the large stone that had been put in place at the entrance to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	3	m684		εἰσελθοῦσαι	1	having entered	Alternate translation: “once they entered the tomb”
@@ -4237,7 +4237,7 @@ LUK	24	3	elq2	figs-explicit	οὐχ εὗρον τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Κυρί
 LUK	24	4	bmt4	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 LUK	24	4	m685	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	2	and	Luke uses the word **and** to indicate that this event, the appearance of the two men, came after the events he has just described, the women discovering that the tomb was empty and wondering about that. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 LUK	24	4	m686	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	24	5	c11i	writing-pronouns	ἐμφόβων&γενομένων αὐτῶν&εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτάς	1	as they became terrified … they said to them	The first instance of **they** refers to the women, while the second instance refers to the men. Alternate translation: “as the women became terrified … the men said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	24	5	c11i	writing-pronouns	ἐμφόβων & γενομένων αὐτῶν & εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτάς	1	as they became terrified … they said to them	The first instance of **they** refers to the women, while the second instance refers to the men. Alternate translation: “as the women became terrified … the men said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	24	5	n5xf	translate-symaction	κλινουσῶν τὰ πρόσωπα εἰς τὴν γῆν	1	bowed their faces toward the ground	Looking down at **the ground** was a gesture of respect towards these men. Alternate translation: “respectfully lowered their gaze” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	24	5	abcw	figs-verbs	εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτάς	1	they said to them	If your language uses dual forms for verbs, use that form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	24	5	fs3y	figs-rquestion	τί ζητεῖτε τὸν ζῶντα μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν?	1	Why are you seeking the living among the dead?	The men do not expect the women to tell them why they are looking for a living person in a tomb. Rather, the men are using the question form to make an announcement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be looking for Jesus here, because he is no longer dead, he is alive again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -4247,8 +4247,8 @@ LUK	24	6	awf1	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	has been raised	If it would be
 LUK	24	6	s8k5		μνήσθητε ὡς ἐλάλησεν ὑμῖν	1	Remember how he spoke to you	Alternate translation: “Remember that he said to you”
 LUK	24	6	m689	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1	you	The word **you** is plural. It refers to the women, and possibly also to Jesus’ disciples. If your language has a form of **you** that includes both the addressees and a larger group besides, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 LUK	24	6	m690		ὑμῖν, ἔτι ὢν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ	1	to you, still being in Galilee	Alternate translation: “to you when he was still in Galilee”
-LUK	24	7	sj3u	figs-quotations	λέγων&ὅτι	1	saying that	These words introduce an indirect quotation. You could also translate what follows as a direct quotation, as UST does. However, that would be a quotation within a quotation, and you may wish to avoid that by leaving what follows as an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-LUK	24	7	pl6b	figs-activepassive	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&παραδοθῆναι	1	for the Son of Man to be delivered	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone to betray the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	24	7	sj3u	figs-quotations	λέγων & ὅτι	1	saying that	These words introduce an indirect quotation. You could also translate what follows as a direct quotation, as UST does. However, that would be a quotation within a quotation, and you may wish to avoid that by leaving what follows as an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+LUK	24	7	pl6b	figs-activepassive	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & παραδοθῆναι	1	for the Son of Man to be delivered	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone to betray the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	24	7	m691	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	When Jesus said this, he was referring to himself in the third person. If you decide to represent this as a direct quotation, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 LUK	24	7	m692	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “him, the Messiah” or, if you are translating as a direct quotation in the first person, “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	7	e4ca	figs-metaphor	εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων ἁμαρτωλῶν	1	into the hands of sinful men	As in [9:44](../09/44.md), **hands** here represent power and control. Alternate translation: “and give sinful men power over him” or, if you are translating as a direct quotation in the first person, “and give sinful men power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -4288,7 +4288,7 @@ LUK	24	15	m710		ἐγγίσας, συνεπορεύετο αὐτοῖς	1	appro
 LUK	24	16	q6nk	figs-synecdoche	οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν	1	But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him	Luke uses one part of the men, their **eyes**, to speak of the capacity of the men themselves to recognize Jesus. Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	24	16	m711	figs-metaphor	οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν	1	But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him	Luke uses the term **held**, as if someone were physically holding back the eyes, to mean “restrained.” Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	24	16	m712	figs-activepassive	οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν	1	But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	24	17	xak8	figs-youdual	αὐτούς&ἀντιβάλλετε&περιπατοῦντες&ἐστάθησαν	1	them … you are exchanging … you are walking … they stood still	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, all of these expressions would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (Your language might even put the adjective **gloomy**, which is plural in Greek, in the dual, since it describes the two men.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+LUK	24	17	xak8	figs-youdual	αὐτούς & ἀντιβάλλετε & περιπατοῦντες & ἐστάθησαν	1	them … you are exchanging … you are walking … they stood still	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, all of these expressions would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (Your language might even put the adjective **gloomy**, which is plural in Greek, in the dual, since it describes the two men.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 LUK	24	17	m713	figs-metonymy	οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	these words that you are exchanging with each other	Jesus is using the term **words** to describe what the men had been saying using words. Alternate translation: “these things that you have been saying to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	17	m714		ἐστάθησαν, σκυθρωποί	1	they stood still, gloomy	Alternate translation: “they stopped walking and looked sad”
 LUK	24	18	m715	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἷς ὀνόματι Κλεοπᾶς εἶπεν	1	Then, answering, one named Cleopas said	Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Cleopas responded to what Jesus asked him. Alternate translation: “Then one named Cleopas responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -4297,23 +4297,23 @@ LUK	24	18	qx7m	figs-rquestion	σὺ μόνος παροικεῖς Ἰερουσ
 LUK	24	18	m717	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῇ	1	in her	Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	24	18	m718	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in these days	Cleopas is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” or “recently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	24	19	aj5c	figs-explicit	ποῖα	1	What kind	This implicitly means, “**What kind** of things?” But by asking about the quality of the events, rather than just the fact of the events (“What things?”), Jesus is acknowledging that they must have been very special. Alternate translation: “What kind of things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	24	19	m719	figs-verbs	οἱ&εἶπαν	1	they said	Since two men are speaking, this would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+LUK	24	19	m719	figs-verbs	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	they said	Since two men are speaking, this would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	24	19	m720	translate-names	Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Ναζαρηνοῦ	1	Jesus the Nazarene	The term **Nazarene** is a name that refers to a person who is from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated his name in [18:37](../18/37.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	24	19	m721	figs-idiom	ἀνὴρ, προφήτης	1	a man, a prophet	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about a person in an honorable way. Alternate translation: “a distinguished prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	24	19	m722	figs-metonymy	δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ	1	powerful in work and word	The two men are using the term **work** to describe the things that Jesus did, and the term **word** to describe the things that Jesus said. Alternate translation: “who did great miracles and taught profound things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	19	x25r	figs-metaphor	ἐναντίον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ	1	in front of God and all the people	This expression means “while God and all the people were watching.” In the case of **God**, it means that God gave Jesus the power to do miracles and to teach profound things. In the case of **the people**, it means that the miracles and teachings of Jesus amazed the people when they saw and heard them. Alternate translation: “as God empowered him, to the amazement of all the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	24	19	m723	figs-hyperbole	παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ	1	all the people	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “great crowds of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 LUK	24	20	m724	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	This is a reference to the Jewish leaders, and the two men likely recognize Jesus as a fellow Jew, so the word **our** would be inclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-LUK	24	20	e5zt	figs-metonymy	παρέδωκαν αὐτὸν&εἰς κρίμα θανάτου	1	delivered him to a judgment of death	The men are using the **judgment of death**, that is, the death sentence that the Romans passed on Jesus, to represent the Romans themselves. Alternate translation: “turned him over to the Romans, who sentenced him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	24	20	e5zt	figs-metonymy	παρέδωκαν αὐτὸν & εἰς κρίμα θανάτου	1	delivered him to a judgment of death	The men are using the **judgment of death**, that is, the death sentence that the Romans passed on Jesus, to represent the Romans themselves. Alternate translation: “turned him over to the Romans, who sentenced him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	20	m725	figs-synecdoche	καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν	1	and crucified him	The men speak as if their **chief priests** and **rulers** crucified Jesus themselves. They are speaking, describing all of the people who were responsible for the crucifixion of Jesus, including the crowds, Pilate, and the Roman soldiers by reference to the Jewish leaders, who set the process in motion by stirring up the crowds and persuading Pilate. Alternate translation: “so that he was crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK	24	21	ei9t	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἠλπίζομεν	1	we were hoping	The men are speaking of themselves and likely their fellow disciples as well, but not of Jesus, so **we** would be exclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	24	21	ei9t	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἠλπίζομεν	1	we were hoping	The men are speaking of themselves and likely their fellow disciples as well, but not of Jesus, so **we** would be exclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	24	21	ljb1	figs-metaphor	ὁ μέλλων λυτροῦσθαι τὸν Ἰσραήλ	1	the one who was going to redeem Israel	See how you translated the similar expression in [2:38](../02/38.md). The word **redeem** means literally to “buy back,” for example, to buy someone’s freedom from slavery, but the men are using it in a figurative sense here. Alternate translation: “the person who was going to bring God’s blessings and favor back to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	24	21	m726	figs-personification	τὸν Ἰσραήλ	1	Israel	The men are speaking of all the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 LUK	24	21	d52i	figs-idiom	ἀλλά γε καὶ σὺν πᾶσιν τούτοις	1	But indeed also with all these things	The men are speaking in an idiomatic way for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And besides all this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	24	21	sg3g	figs-explicit	τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει, ἀφ’ οὗ ταῦτα ἐγένετο	1	he is spending this third day since these things happened	By saying **he is spending this third day**, the men are referring to Jesus as if he were alive. However, they are actually saying how long he has been dead. They are going to tell how the women reported that his grave was empty, and they find it unbelievable that anyone who had been dead that long would have gotten up out of the grave. See how you translated the expression **the third day** in 9:22, and express this in the way that your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “the Romans put him to death on the day before yesterday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	21	xqc3	translate-ordinal	τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει, ἀφ’ οὗ ταῦτα ἐγένετο	1	he is spending this third day since these things happened	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “this is day three since these things happened to him” or, depending on how your culture reckons time, “this is day two since these things happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 LUK	24	22	a3j9		γυναῖκές τινες ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	some women among us	Alternate translation: “some women in our group”
-LUK	24	22	m727	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	The men are speaking of themselves and their fellow disciples, but not of Jesus, so **us** would be exclusive in both instances here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	24	22	m727	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	The men are speaking of themselves and their fellow disciples, but not of Jesus, so **us** would be exclusive in both instances here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	24	22	du1v		γενόμεναι ὀρθριναὶ ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον	1	having been at the tomb early	The men are using this expression to refer to the **women**, not to themselves. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here and continue it into the next verse. Alternate translation: “They went to his tomb early this morning”
 LUK	24	23	m728		καὶ μὴ εὑροῦσαι τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ, ἦλθαν	1	and not finding his body, they came	If you began a new sentence at the end of the previous verse, you could continue it here. Alternate translation: “but they did not find his body, so they came to us”
 LUK	24	24	m729		τινες τῶν σὺν ἡμῖν	1	some of those with us	Alternate translation: “some of the men in our group”
@@ -4328,12 +4328,12 @@ LUK	24	25	m735	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προ
 LUK	24	26	n85k	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ταῦτα ἔδει παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν καὶ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ?	1	Was it not necessary for the Christ to suffer these things, and to enter into his glory?	Jesus is using the question form to remind the disciples about what the prophets said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “The Messiah had to suffer these things in order to enter into his glory!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	24	26	m736	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	and to enter into his glory	This is not a second thing that it was necessary for the Messiah to do. Rather, this is the result for which it was necessary for the Messiah to do the first thing. Alternate translation: “in order to enter into his glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	24	26	f8es	figs-abstractnouns	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	to enter into his glory	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to receive a glorious position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-LUK	24	27	g4t7	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσέως&τῶν προφητῶν	1	Moses … the prophets	Luke is using the name **Moses** to refer to the part of Scripture that Moses wrote, and the term **the prophets** to refer to the part of Scripture that they wrote. Alternate translation: “the writings of Moses … the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+LUK	24	27	g4t7	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσέως & τῶν προφητῶν	1	Moses … the prophets	Luke is using the name **Moses** to refer to the part of Scripture that Moses wrote, and the term **the prophets** to refer to the part of Scripture that they wrote. Alternate translation: “the writings of Moses … the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	27	m737		καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	and from all the prophets	The term **beginning** applies just to the writings of Moses. Jesus began with that part of Scripture, and he then continued teaching from the writings of the prophets. Alternate translation: “and then from all the writings of the prophets” or “and continuing with all the writings of the prophets”
 LUK	24	28	m738	figs-verbs	ἤγγισαν εἰς τὴν κώμην οὗ ἐπορεύοντο	1	they drew near to the village where they were going	The first **they** refers to Jesus and the two disciples, while the second **they** refers only to the two disciples, so **they were going** would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	24	28	cdj2	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς προσεποιήσατο πορρώτερον πορεύεσθαι	1	he acted as if he would travel farther	This means that the two disciples understood from Jesus’ actions that he was continuing on to another destination. Perhaps he kept walking on the road when they turned off to enter Emmaus. There is no indication that Jesus deceived them with words. Alternate translation: “Jesus seemed to be heading farther down the road” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	29	m739	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word **And** to introduce a contrast between what it appeared Jesus was going to do and what the two disciples wanted him to do. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-LUK	24	29	m740	figs-verbs	παρεβιάσαντο&ἡμῶν&αὐτοῖς	1	they urged … us … them	This verb, as well as these two pronouns, would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form, since they apply to the two disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+LUK	24	29	m740	figs-verbs	παρεβιάσαντο & ἡμῶν & αὐτοῖς	1	they urged … us … them	This verb, as well as these two pronouns, would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form, since they apply to the two disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	24	29	pn4d	figs-ellipsis	παρεβιάσαντο αὐτὸν	1	they urged him	Luke is telling this story in a concise way, and he does not say what the two disciples urged Jesus to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply that information from the context. Alternate translation: “they urged him to stay overnight in the house with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	24	29	m741	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	us	The men are speaking of themselves but not of Jesus, so **us** would be exclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	24	29	s6ps	figs-parallelism	πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστὶν, καὶ κέκλικεν ἤδη ἡ ἡμέρα	1	it is toward evening and the day has already declined	These two phrases mean the same thing. The two disciples are likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “it is already getting dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -4347,15 +4347,15 @@ LUK	24	30	m745	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	them	The pronoun **them** would
 LUK	24	31	h4yr	figs-metonymy	αὐτῶν δὲ διηνοίχθησαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ	1	their eyes were opened	Here, **eyes** represents understanding of what one is seeing. Alternate translation: “God enabled them to understand what they had been seeing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	31	m746	figs-activepassive	αὐτῶν δὲ διηνοίχθησαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ	1	their eyes were opened	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God enabled them to understand what they had been seeing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	24	31	yev2	figs-idiom	αὐτὸς ἄφαντος ἐγένετο ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	he became invisible from them	Here Luke uses an unusual expression, saying that Jesus **became invisible**. It does not mean that Jesus remained in the room but could not be seen. Rather, it means that he left suddenly and so the two disciples did not see him any more. Alternate translation: “suddenly they did not see him any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	24	32	m747	figs-verbs	εἶπαν&ἡμῶν&ἡμῖν&ἡμῖν	1	they said … our … us … us	This verb, as well as these three pronouns, would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form, since they all apply to the two disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+LUK	24	32	m747	figs-verbs	εἶπαν & ἡμῶν & ἡμῖν & ἡμῖν	1	they said … our … us … us	This verb, as well as these three pronouns, would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form, since they all apply to the two disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	24	32	inw4	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν ὡς ἐλάλει ἡμῖν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς Γραφάς?	1	Was not our heart burning, as he spoke to us on the way, as he opened to us the Scriptures?	The two men are not asking each other for information about what happened. Rather, they are using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “As he was talking to us as we traveled along and explaining the Scriptures, it was so exciting, it was as if we were on fire inside!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	24	32	m748	figs-metaphor	οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν	1	Was not our heart burning	The men are using the metaphor of a **heart burning** to describe their excitement at hearing Jesus explain the Scriptures. You could indicate this meaning in your translation and represent the metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “It was so exciting, it was as if we were on fire inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	24	32	m749	figs-explicit	οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν	1	Was not our heart burning	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate why the men found it so exciting when Jesus explained the Scriptures to them, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	32	m750	figs-possession	οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν	1	Was not our heart burning	If it would be unusual in your language for two people to speak as if they had one **heart**, if you decide to use this metaphor in your translation, you could make it plural, or dual if your language uses that form. Alternate translation: “Were not our hearts burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 LUK	24	32	m751	figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν	1	our heart	The men are using the term **heart** to mean the inner part of a person. Alternate translation: “inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	24	32	m752	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῖν&ἡμῖν	1	our … us … us	The men are speaking to each other about themselves, so these pronouns would be inclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+LUK	24	32	m752	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῖν & ἡμῖν	1	our … us … us	The men are speaking to each other about themselves, so these pronouns would be inclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 LUK	24	32	xy6p	figs-metaphor	ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς Γραφάς	1	as he opened to us the Scriptures	Jesus did not open a book or a scroll. The term **opened** means “explained.” Alternate translation: “while he explained the Scriptures to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	24	33	qi47	figs-verbs	ἀναστάντες&ὑπέστρεψαν&εὗρον	1	rising up … they returned … they found	These verbs would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form, since they describe actions of the two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+LUK	24	33	qi47	figs-verbs	ἀναστάντες & ὑπέστρεψαν & εὗρον	1	rising up … they returned … they found	These verbs would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form, since they describe actions of the two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 LUK	24	33	ar2c	figs-idiom	ἀναστάντες	1	rising up	As in [24:12](../24/12.md), this expression is an idiom that means to take initiative. It does not necessarily mean that the men had been sitting or lying down and then stood up. Alternate translation: “starting out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	24	33	m753	figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	that same hour	Luke is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	24	33	m754	figs-activepassive	εὗρον ἠθροισμένους τοὺς ἕνδεκα καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	they found the Eleven having been gathered, and those with them	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the 11 apostles had gathered together with some other disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -4366,7 +4366,7 @@ LUK	24	34	m756	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord has
 LUK	24	34	m757	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	and	The apostles and disciples use the word **and** to introduce the reason why they know that Jesus has been raised from the dead. It is because Simon Peter has seen him. Alternate translation: “for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 LUK	24	34	m758	figs-activepassive	ὤφθη Σίμωνι	1	he has been seen by Simon	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “Simon has seen him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	24	34	m759	translate-names	Σίμωνι	1	Simon	This means the same man whom Luke often calls Peter in this book. So that your readers will know that this is the same man, you could use both of his names here. Alternate translation: “Simon Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-LUK	24	35	m760	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ&αὐτοῖς	1	they … them	These pronouns refer to the two men who returned from Emmaus. They would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK	24	35	m760	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ & αὐτοῖς	1	they … them	These pronouns refer to the two men who returned from Emmaus. They would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 LUK	24	35	fb1r	figs-ellipsis	τὰ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ	1	the things on the way	Luke is telling this story in a concise way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express more fully what this means. Alternate translation: “what had happened on their journey” or “how Jesus had joined them as they traveled and what they had talked about with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 LUK	24	35	mnn2	figs-activepassive	ὡς ἐγνώσθη αὐτοῖς	1	how he was made known to them	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “how they recognized Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	24	35	y3f8	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of the bread	Luke is using **the breaking of the bread** to represent something associated with it. Alternate translation: “at the time when he broke the bread” or “by the way that he broke the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -4374,9 +4374,9 @@ LUK	24	36	m761	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	they	The pronoun **they** refers
 LUK	24	36	rt8d	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἔστη	1	he himself stood	Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize the surprise of Jesus actually appearing to this group. Alternate translation: “none other than Jesus himself stood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 LUK	24	36	q7yl		ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	in the midst of them	Alternate translation: “among them” or “in their group”
 LUK	24	36	pnl1	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	As the note to the similar phrase in [10:5](../10/05.md) explains, this was an idiomatic expression, based on the Hebrew word and concept of “shalom,” that was both a greeting and a blessing. Alternate translation: “I greet all of you and I wish for God to bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK	24	37	i2tu	grammar-connect-logic-result	πτοηθέντες&καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι, ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν	1	being frightened and becoming terrified, they thought they were seeing a spirit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “they thought they were seeing a spirit, and so they were frightened and became terrified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK	24	37	m762	figs-activepassive	πτοηθέντες&καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι, ἐδόκουν	1	being frightened and becoming terrified, they thought	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being frightened** with an active form. Alternate translation: “they were afraid and became terrified, because they thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK	24	37	kf17	figs-doublet	πτοηθέντες&καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι	1	being frightened and becoming terrified	These expressions mean similar things. Luke may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “becoming very frightened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+LUK	24	37	i2tu	grammar-connect-logic-result	πτοηθέντες & καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι, ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν	1	being frightened and becoming terrified, they thought they were seeing a spirit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “they thought they were seeing a spirit, and so they were frightened and became terrified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+LUK	24	37	m762	figs-activepassive	πτοηθέντες & καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι, ἐδόκουν	1	being frightened and becoming terrified, they thought	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being frightened** with an active form. Alternate translation: “they were afraid and became terrified, because they thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	24	37	kf17	figs-doublet	πτοηθέντες & καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι	1	being frightened and becoming terrified	These expressions mean similar things. Luke may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “becoming very frightened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 LUK	24	37	z4q5	figs-explicit	ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν	1	they thought they were seeing a spirit	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why they thought this. Alternate translation: “they thought that they were seeing a ghost, because they did not yet understand truly that Jesus was alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	37	q9rf		πνεῦμα	1	a spirit	In this context, the term **spirit** refers to the spirit of a dead person. Alternate translation: “a ghost”
 LUK	24	38	jj1h	figs-rquestion	τί τεταραγμένοι ἐστέ, καὶ διὰ τί διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν?	1	Why are you troubled, and why are doubts arising in your heart?	Jesus is using the question form to challenge and reassure his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not need to be upset, and you do not need to have doubts in your minds!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -4391,8 +4391,8 @@ LUK	24	39	a12n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ψηλαφήσατέ με καὶ 
 LUK	24	39	m770	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἴδετε	1	and see	Here, **see** does not literally mean to look at something. Rather, it means to determine something. Alternate translation: “to determine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	24	39	tf2v	figs-merism	σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα	1	flesh and bones	Jesus is describing the human body by referring to two of its major components. Alternate translation: “a physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 LUK	24	40	qm9p	figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖρας καὶ τοὺς πόδας	1	his hands and his feet	As in [24:39](../24/39.md), this means the nail marks from crucifixion in Jesus’ **hands** and **feet**. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in his hands and feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK	24	41	m771	figs-doublet	ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐτῶν&καὶ θαυμαζόντων	1	And as they were still disbelieving and wonderingg	These two terms mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “And as they were still finding it very hard to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-LUK	24	41	m772	figs-explicit	ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐτῶν&καὶ θαυμαζόντων	1	And as they were still disbelieving and wondering	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the disciples were **disbelieving and wondering** about. Alternate translation: “And as they were still finding it very hard to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK	24	41	m771	figs-doublet	ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐτῶν & καὶ θαυμαζόντων	1	And as they were still disbelieving and wonderingg	These two terms mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “And as they were still finding it very hard to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+LUK	24	41	m772	figs-explicit	ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐτῶν & καὶ θαυμαζόντων	1	And as they were still disbelieving and wondering	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the disciples were **disbelieving and wondering** about. Alternate translation: “And as they were still finding it very hard to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	24	41	hr4f	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	from the joy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “happy.” Alternate translation: “because they were so happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	24	41	m773		τι βρώσιμον	1	anything eatable	Alternate translation: “anything to eat”
 LUK	24	43	tyh4	figs-explicit	ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ἔφαγεν	1	he ate it before them	Jesus did this to prove that he had a physical body, because a spirit or ghost would not be able to eat food. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that this was the reason. Alternate translation: “he had them watch him eat it, to prove that he had a physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -4400,7 +4400,7 @@ LUK	24	43	j8qf	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ἔφαγεν	1	he ate
 LUK	24	44	m774	figs-metonymy	οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι μου, οὓς ἐλάλησα πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	These are my words that I spoke to you	Jesus is using the term **words** to refer to what he said using words. Alternate translation: “It is just as I told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	44	tfk8		ἔτι ὢν σὺν ὑμῖν	1	when I was still with you	Alternate translation: “when I was with you before”
 LUK	24	44	q7x8	figs-merism	πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως, καὶ τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ ψαλμοῖς, περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	all the things written about me in the law of Moses, and in the prophets, and in the Psalms	Jesus is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming their main components. Alternate translation: “everything that the Scriptures say about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-LUK	24	44	g76a	figs-activepassive	πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα&περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	all the things having been written about me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everything that Scripture says about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+LUK	24	44	g76a	figs-activepassive	πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα & περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	all the things having been written about me	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everything that Scripture says about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 LUK	24	44	m776	translate-names	ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως, καὶ τοῖς προφήταις	1	in the law of Moses, and in the prophets	Jesus is describing the first and second parts of the Hebrew Scriptures by reference to the people who wrote them. You could also use the proper names for these parts. Alternate translation: “in the Law and the Prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	24	44	m777	figs-synecdoche	καὶ ψαλμοῖς	1	in the Psalms	Jesus is using the name of the largest book in the third part of the Hebrew Scriptures, **Psalms**, to represent that entire part, which was known as “the Writings.” Alternate translation: “and the Writings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 LUK	24	44	m778	figs-activepassive	δεῖ πληρωθῆναι	1	must be fulfilled	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. If you do that, it would be appropriate to put this phrase before **all the things**. Alternate translation: “God would make happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -4422,7 +4422,7 @@ LUK	24	49	m2lm	figs-explicit	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρός
 LUK	24	49	ynm2	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός μου	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 LUK	24	49	m784	figs-imperative	ὑμεῖς δὲ καθίσατε	1	But you stay	This is an emphatic imperative. Alternate translation: “But be sure that you stay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 LUK	24	49	m785	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ πόλει	1	in the city	This implicitly means Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	24	49	c4iv	figs-metaphor	ἕως οὗ ἐνδύσησθε&δύναμιν	1	until you put on power	Jesus speaks of this **power** as if it were clothing that the disciples would **put on**. Alternate translation: “until you receive power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK	24	49	c4iv	figs-metaphor	ἕως οὗ ἐνδύσησθε & δύναμιν	1	until you put on power	Jesus speaks of this **power** as if it were clothing that the disciples would **put on**. Alternate translation: “until you receive power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	24	49	l46b	figs-metonymy	ἐξ ὕψους	1	from heaven	Jesus uses the term **heaven** to refer to God by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	24	50	cm9a	translate-symaction	ἐπάρας τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ	1	lifting up his hands	This was something that Jewish priests did when they blessed people. Alternate translation: “lifting up his hands in spiritual authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 LUK	24	51	dzr3	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
index ebeae389c6..91b0079cbf 100644
--- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 JHN	front	intro	t6za			0		# Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Gospel of John\n\n1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1–18)\n2. John the Baptizer baptizes Jesus, and Jesus chooses 12 disciples (1:19–51)\n3. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2–11)\n4. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12–19)\n\n    * Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1–11)\n    * Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12–19)\n    * Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20–36)\n    * The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37–50)\n    * Jesus teaches his disciples (13–16)\n    * Jesus prays for himself and his disciples (17)\n    * Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1–19:15)\n    * Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16–42)\n5. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1–29)\n6. John says why he wrote his Gospel (20:30–31)\n7. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)\n\nMore detailed outlines are in the General Notes for each chapter.\n\n### What is the Gospel of John about?\n\nThe Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his Gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” ([20:31](../20/31.md)). John’s Gospel repeatedly emphasizes that Jesus is God in human form.\n\nJohn’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their Gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other Gospels.\n\nJohn wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the Gospel of John?\n\nThis book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the apostle John was the author. Further evidence that the apostle John wrote this Gospel is the fact that his name does not occur once within the book. Instead, this Gospel contains the phrases “the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “the other disciple” in places where the other Gospels indicate that John was present ([13:23–25](../13/23.md); [19:26–27](../19/26.md); [20:2–8](../20/02.md); [21:7](../21/07.md), [20–24](../21/20.md)). The apostle John most likely referred to himself in this manner because he wanted to humbly say that he had a very close relationship with Jesus. He was part of Jesus’ inner circle of disciples who became the “pillars” of the early church ([Galatians 2:9](../../gal/02/09.md)).\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?\n\nJohn wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?\n\nIn the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13–14](../../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.\n\nJews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])\n\nTranslating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.\n\n### What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?\n\nWhile other New Testament writers use terms like “mighty works” or “wonders” to refer to the miracles that Jesus did, John prefers to use the term “sign.” The miracles John calls “signs” were significant displays of divine power. John called them signs to emphasize that an important purpose of Jesus’ miracles was to prove that Jesus was God and that what Jesus said about himself was true. John said that in his Gospel he only wrote about some of the signs that Jesus did. John said, “these have been written so that you would believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and so that believing, you would have life in his name” ([20:30–31](../20/30.md)).\n\n### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?\n\nJohn often used the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. John also spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.\n\nMany translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” ([6:56](../06/56.md)). The UST uses the idea of “will be united with me, and I will be united with them,” but translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.\n\nIn the passage, “my words remain in you” ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.\n\n### What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?\n\nJohn occasionally used words or phrases that could have two meanings (double entendre) in the language in which he originally wrote this Gospel. For example, the phrase translated “born again” in the ULT could also mean “born from above” ([3:3](../03/03.md), [7](../03/07.md)). In such cases, you may want to choose one meaning and put the other meaning in a footnote.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?\n\nThe following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translators’ region that include these verses, then the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not originally in John’s Gospel.\n\n* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord went down into the pool and stirred up the water at certain times, and whoever then first stepped in after the water was stirred was healed from whatever disease he suffered from.” (5:3–4)\n* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” ([8:59](../08/59.md))\n\nThe following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.\n\n* The story of the adulterous woman ([7:53](../07/53.md)–[8:11](../08/11.md)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 JHN	1	intro	k29b			0		# John 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus is God (1:1–5)\n2. John the Baptist was Jesus’ witness (1:6–8)\n3. Summary of Jesus’ ministry on earth (1:9–13)\n4. Jesus is God in the flesh (1:14–18)\n5. John the Baptist prepares the way for Jesus (1:19–34)\n6. Jesus meets Andrew, Peter, Philip, and Nathaniel (1:35–51)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:23](../01/23.md), which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “The Word”\n\nJohn uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([1:1](../01/01.md), [14](../01/14.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])\n\n### Light and Darkness\n\nIn [1:4–9](../01/04.md), John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. John applies that light metaphor to Jesus in order to show that Jesus is God’s truth and goodness displayed in a human body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### “Children of God”\n\nPeople are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. “Children” in this usage does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have to their father at any age. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Metaphors\n\nJohn uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of “the Word” to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “In the beginning”\n\nSome languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([1:51](../01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	1	1	er9g	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν	1	In the beginning	This phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. It does not refer to time in the distant past. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before the beginning of the universe there was” or “Before the universe began there was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	1	z59q	figs-explicit	ὁ λόγος, καὶ ὁ λόγος&καὶ Θεὸς ἦν ὁ λόγος	1	the Word	Here, **the Word** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is the Word, and Jesus … and Jesus was God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	1	z59q	figs-explicit	ὁ λόγος, καὶ ὁ λόγος & καὶ Θεὸς ἦν ὁ λόγος	1	the Word	Here, **the Word** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is the Word, and Jesus … and Jesus was God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	2	u6xx	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Word” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	2	k8cf		ἐν ἀρχῇ	1		Here this phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. See how you translated this phrase in verse [1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “before the beginning of the universe” or “before the universe began”
 JHN	1	3	gm5g	figs-activepassive	πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο	1	All things were made through him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God made all things through him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ JHN	1	4	ffbw	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ	1		Here, **the life** refers to t
 JHN	1	4	dpeb	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Here John uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the true and good things God has for men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	4	saci	figs-possession	τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		John uses **of** to indicate to whom the **light** is given. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the light given to men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	1	4	jzwk	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	1	5	dgin	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς&φαίνει	1		John uses **the light shines** to refer to God’s truth and goodness being revealed as if it were a light shining. This truth and goodness was revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “God reveals his truth and goodness” or “God’s truth and goodness is like a light that shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	1	5	y5ry	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ&καὶ ἡ σκοτία	1	The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness did not overcome it	Here John uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. It is the spiritual **darkness** of the people in the world who do not love Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “in the false and evil world, and that evil world” or “in the evil world that is like a dark place, and that dark place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	5	dgin	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς & φαίνει	1		John uses **the light shines** to refer to God’s truth and goodness being revealed as if it were a light shining. This truth and goodness was revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “God reveals his truth and goodness” or “God’s truth and goodness is like a light that shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	5	y5ry	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ & καὶ ἡ σκοτία	1	The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness did not overcome it	Here John uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. It is the spiritual **darkness** of the people in the world who do not love Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “in the false and evil world, and that evil world” or “in the evil world that is like a dark place, and that dark place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	5	w9ni		αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν	1		Here the word translated **overcome** could also be translated as “understand.” It could mean: (1) the evil forces in the world did not conquer God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer it” (2) the people in the world who don’t know God do not understand his truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not comprehend it” (3) the evil forces of this world neither conquered nor understood God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer or comprehend it”
 JHN	1	5	yv8l	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν	1		Here, **it** refers to the light mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “did not overcome the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	6	qa1s	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “whom God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -24,17 +24,17 @@ JHN	1	7	mtlb	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to John the Bapt
 JHN	1	7	mht8	figs-metaphor	περὶ τοῦ φωτός	1	testify about the light	Here John uses **light** to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	7	cdl5		δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **through him** indicates the means by which everyone might believe in the light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of him”
 JHN	1	8	pn9t	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		**That one** here refers to John the Baptist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	1	8	kbwh	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς&τοῦ φωτός	1		See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	8	kbwh	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς & τοῦ φωτός	1		See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	9	xe1z	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν, ὃ	1	The true light	Here John uses **light** to refer to Jesus as the one who both reveals the truth about God and is himself that truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who truly embodied God’s truth, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	9	rbsj	figs-metaphor	ὃ φωτίζει πάντα ἄνθρωπον	1		Here, John uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which reveals the true and good things of God to all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	9	u00s	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	1	10	c2ne	writing-pronouns	ἦν&δι’ αὐτοῦ&αὐτὸν	1		**He** and **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was … through Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	10	c2ne	writing-pronouns	ἦν & δι’ αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1		**He** and **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was … through Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	10	io8w	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Here, **world** refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	10	krcb	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1		Here, **world** refers to the universe God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	10	b93e	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ ὁ κόσμος αὐτὸν οὐκ ἔγνω	1	He was in the world, and the world was made through him, and the world did not know him	Here, **and** introduces a contrast between what was expected, that the world would recognize its Creator, and what happened, that the world did to do that. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the world did not know him” or “yet the world did not know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JHN	1	10	ke5s	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	2	the world did not know him	Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	10	t1qv		οὐκ ἔγνω	1		Alternate translation: “did not acknowledge”
-JHN	1	11	jvgs	figs-explicit	τὰ ἴδια&οἱ ἴδιοι	1		Here, **his own** could refer to: (1) his own people, the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “his fellow Jews … his fellow Jews” (2) his own creation. Alternate translation: “the people he created … the people he created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	1	11	jvgs	figs-explicit	τὰ ἴδια & οἱ ἴδιοι	1		Here, **his own** could refer to: (1) his own people, the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “his fellow Jews … his fellow Jews” (2) his own creation. Alternate translation: “the people he created … the people he created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	11	h13y	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1		Here, **and** introduces a contrast between what was expected, that his own people would know their Messiah, and what happened, that his own people did not do that. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JHN	1	11	va1w		αὐτὸν οὐ παρέλαβον	1	receive him	Here, **receive** means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. Alternate translation: “did not accept him” or “did not welcome him”
 JHN	1	12	pvtl	figs-infostructure	ὅσοι δὲ ἔλαβον αὐτόν, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τέκνα Θεοῦ γενέσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “But as many as received him and believed in his name, he gave to them the authority to become children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ JHN	1	12	x4f9		ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν	1	he gave the righ
 JHN	1	12	uc6e	figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1	children of God	Here John uses **children** to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not state the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “like children who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	12	jp3y	figs-metonymy	πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	believed in his name	Here John uses **name** to refer to Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	1	13	no4j	figs-explicit	οἳ	1		Here **the ones** here refers to the children of God mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	13	ygxb	figs-metaphor	οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων&ἐγεννήθησαν	1		John uses **born** to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	1	13	k24g	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων&ἐγεννήθησαν	1		Here, **bloods** refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	13	ygxb	figs-metaphor	οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων & ἐγεννήθησαν	1		John uses **born** to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	13	k24g	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων & ἐγεννήθησαν	1		Here, **bloods** refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	13	it6r		ἐξ	1		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
 JHN	1	13	jtjr	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	13	oj53		ἐκ	1		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ JHN	1	16	b9r1	figs-abstractnouns	χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος	1	grace af
 JHN	1	16	avst		χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος	1		Here, **after** could mean: (1) the second “grace” replaces the first “grace,” which is the most common use for this word. This meaning could indicate that the first “grace” refers to “the law” and the second “grace” refers to “Grace and truth” in the next verse. Alternate translation: “grace in place of grace” or “grace instead of grace” (2) the second “grace” is in addition to the first “grace.” Alternate translation: “grace in addition to” or “grace upon grace”
 JHN	1	17	iata	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη, ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐγένετο	1		John placed the two sentences in this verse next to each other without any connecting word in order to show a contrast between the law of Moses and the grace and truth of Jesus. This does not mean that the law of Moses did not have grace and truth. Rather, John is indicating that the grace and truth revealed by Jesus is more complete than that revealed in the law of Moses. Although God revealed himself and his will through the law of Moses, he did so much more clearly though Jesus, who is God in human form. Alternate translation: “the law was given through Moses. In contrast, grace and truth came about through Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JHN	1	17	xsbj	figs-activepassive	ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God gave the law through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	1	17	kup2	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ νόμος&ἐδόθη	1		The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to the many laws and instructions that God gave to the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the group of laws was given” or “God’s laws were given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+JHN	1	17	kup2	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ νόμος & ἐδόθη	1		The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to the many laws and instructions that God gave to the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the group of laws was given” or “God’s laws were given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	1	17	vm1h	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious and faithful character” or “Kind acts and true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	1	18	vf9q		μονογενὴς Θεὸς	1		Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase **the One and Only** is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “the Unique God” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “the Only Begotten God”
 JHN	1	18	r1la		μονογενὴς Θεὸς	1		Here, **God** indicates that Jesus, who is called **the One and Only**, is God. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the One and Only, who is God”
@@ -96,9 +96,9 @@ JHN	1	21	iv9d		τί οὖν?	1	What are you then?	Alternate translation: “If y
 JHN	1	21	vk6r		Ἠλείας	1		**Elijah** was a prophet whom the Jews expected to return to earth shortly become the arrival of the Messiah.
 JHN	1	21	h2dv	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	21	nhx9	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης	1		Here, **the Prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	22	t8ib	writing-pronouns	εἶπαν&αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites said to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	1	22	t8ib	writing-pronouns	εἶπαν & αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites said to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	1	22	wbd9	figs-ellipsis	τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	1	22	x8wz	figs-exclusive	δῶμεν&ἡμᾶς	1	we may give … us	Here, **we** and **us** refer to the priests and Levites, not to John. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JHN	1	22	x8wz	figs-exclusive	δῶμεν & ἡμᾶς	1	we may give … us	Here, **we** and **us** refer to the priests and Levites, not to John. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	1	22	fmc8		ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν	1		Alternate translation: “so that we might tell your answer”
 JHN	1	22	sa3t	figs-explicit	τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς	1	they said to him	This phrase refers to the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those leaders in Jerusalem who sent us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	23	x314	figs-quotemarks	φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου	1		In these phrases, John quotes from the Old Testament book of Isaiah ([Isaiah 40:3](../../isa/40/03.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -115,13 +115,13 @@ JHN	1	25	u7is	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης	1		Here, **the Prophet** refers
 JHN	1	26	la26	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	26	aupp	writing-quotations	ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰωάννης λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “John answered them, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	1	27	x2ki	figs-explicit	ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος	1	who comes after me	Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase **coming after me** means that John’s ministry has already started and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who starts his ministry after I have done so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	27	y7v5	figs-metaphor	μου&οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος	1	me, the strap of whose sandal I am not worthy to untie	Untying sandals was the work of a slave or servant. John the Baptist uses this expression figurative to refer to the most unpleasant work of a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “me. I am not even worthy to untie the strap of his sandal” or “me, whom I am not worthy to serve in even the most unpleasant way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	1	27	y7v5	figs-metaphor	μου & οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος	1	me, the strap of whose sandal I am not worthy to untie	Untying sandals was the work of a slave or servant. John the Baptist uses this expression figurative to refer to the most unpleasant work of a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “me. I am not even worthy to untie the strap of his sandal” or “me, whom I am not worthy to serve in even the most unpleasant way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	28	r4ty	writing-background		0	General Information:	This verse provides background information about the setting of the story that is recorded in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	1	28	u0iq	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to the events that were described in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	28	f5he	translate-names	πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1		Here, **beyond the Jordan** refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	28	ryi1	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	29	bt67	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τῇ ἐπαύριον	1		**The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in [1:19–28](../01/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The day after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-JHN	1	29	aqo3	figs-pastforfuture	βλέπει&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	1	29	aqo3	figs-pastforfuture	βλέπει & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	29	fpj6	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		John the Baptist uses the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	29	gi3s	figs-explicit	ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **Lamb of God** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behold, Jesus, the Lamb of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	29	j397	figs-metaphor	Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Lamb of God	John the Baptist uses a metaphor here to refer to Jesus as God’s perfect sacrifice. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]]) Since **Lamb of God** is an important title for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a plain explanation in the text of your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -152,15 +152,15 @@ JHN	1	38	hlee	figs-ellipsis	θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς ἀκολουθ
 JHN	1	38	qxej	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	38	kkey		ποῦ μένεις	1		Alternate translation: “where are you spending the night”
 JHN	1	38	so66	figs-explicit	ποῦ μένεις?	1		This question is the answer to the question Jesus just asked in the previous sentence. It is a way for the two men to imply that they would like to have a private conversation with Jesus at the place where he was staying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “where are you staying? We would like to speak with you privately.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	39	lio4	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει αὐτοῖς&μένει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	1	39	lio4	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει αὐτοῖς & μένει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	39	k5m2		μένει	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.
 JHN	1	39	ydqg	figs-explicit	τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην	1		Here, **that day** refers to the day the two disciples left John the Baptist to follow Jesus, as indicated in verse [35](../01/35.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same day that they left John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	1	39	tb9j		ὥρα&δεκάτη	1	tenth hour	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, **the tenth hour** indicates a time in the late afternoon, before dark, at which it would be too late to start traveling to another town. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “about 4:00 PM”
+JHN	1	39	tb9j		ὥρα & δεκάτη	1	tenth hour	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, **the tenth hour** indicates a time in the late afternoon, before dark, at which it would be too late to start traveling to another town. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “about 4:00 PM”
 JHN	1	40	x8g8			0	General Information:	Verses [40–42] give background information about Andrew and how he brought his brother Peter to Jesus.
 JHN	1	40	f6b9	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	40	jmyp		Σίμωνος Πέτρου	1		**Simon** was also called **Peter** by Jesus, as recorded in verse [42](../01/42.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”
 JHN	1	41	xpi4	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**This one** here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	1	41	vfsj	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	1	41	vfsj	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	41	rxox	figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which means Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	1	41	ek1a	figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός	1		John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the title “Messiah” means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Christ’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	42	xwc7	writing-pronouns	ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν	1		**He** here refers to Andrew and **him** refers to Simon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew brought Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ JHN	1	43	cmi8	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τῇ ἐπαύριον	1		**The n
 JHN	1	43	qzfk	figs-pastforfuture	καὶ εὑρίσκει Φίλιππον, καὶ λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	43	ejkg	figs-idiom	ἀκολούθει μοι	1		In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	1	44	i5bm	writing-background		0		This verse provides background information about **Philip**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	1	45	m8j1	translate-names	Φίλιππος&Ναθαναὴλ&Μωϋσῆς&Ἰησοῦν&Ἰωσὴφ	1		These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+JHN	1	45	m8j1	translate-names	Φίλιππος & Ναθαναὴλ & Μωϋσῆς & Ἰησοῦν & Ἰωσὴφ	1		These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	1	45	faz3	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν Ναθαναὴλ, καὶ λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	45	ci52	figs-ellipsis	οἱ προφῆται	1		Here, John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	46	s2kg	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ	1	Nathaniel said to him	Here, **him** refers to Philip. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nathaniel said to Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ JHN	1	51	z4a7	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		The
 JHN	2	intro	jav2			0		# John 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus’ first sign: he turns water into wine (2:1–12)<br>2. Jesus causes controversy in the Temple (2:13–22)<br>3. Jesus’ ministry in Jerusalem at Passover (2:23–25)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Wine<br><br>The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.<br><br>### Driving out the money changers<br><br>Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel. As the Son of God, it was his Father’s temple that was being used inappropriately for making money. Therefore, he had the authority to drive out those who were misusing the temple.<br><br>### “He knew what was in man”<br><br>Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he is the Son of Man and the Son of God. Because he is the Son of God, he has supernatural insight into what other people were thinking and could correctly judge their intentions.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “His disciples remembered”<br><br>John used this phrase to stop telling the main historical narrative and to tell about something that happened much later. The Jewish authorities spoke to Jesus right after he scolded the sellers in the temple in ([2:16](../02/16.md)). Jesus’ disciples remembered what the prophet had written long ago and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body after Jesus became alive again ([2:17](../02/17.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md)).
 JHN	2	1	rl16	writing-background		0		Jesus and his disciples were invited to a wedding. This verse gives background information about the setting of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	2	1	vw9e	writing-newevent	τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ	1	Three days later	This phrase introduces a new event. The **third day** could refer to: (1) the third day from when Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him in [1:43](../01/43.md). According to the Jewish way of counting days, the first day would have been the day in [1:43](../01/43.md), making **the third day** occur two days afterward. Alternate translation: “two days after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel” (2) the day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him in [1:43](../01/43.md). In this case, the first day would have occurred in [1:35](../01/35.md) and the second day in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “on the day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	2	2	xm3r	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθη&καὶ ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον	1	Jesus and his disciples were invited to the wedding	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they also invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	2	2	xm3r	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθη & καὶ ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον	1	Jesus and his disciples were invited to the wedding	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they also invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	2	3	kt44	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	2	3	spbw	figs-declarative	οἶνον οὐκ ἔχουσιν	1		Jesus’ mother is using a declarative statement to give an indirect request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “They ran out of wine. Could you do something to solve this problem?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JHN	2	3	mge0		οἶνον	1		Regarding the drinking of **wine** in Jewish culture, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter.
@@ -214,9 +214,9 @@ JHN	2	7	hv80	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense i
 JHN	2	7	byc0	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **them** refers to the servants at the wedding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	2	7	vt75		ἕως ἄνω	1	to the brim	The **brim** is the top edge of the water pot. Alternate translation: “to the very top”
 JHN	2	8	xbw3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	2	8	y52q	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς&οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1		Here, **them** and **they** refer to the servants at the wedding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants … And the servants carried it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	2	8	y52q	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν	1		Here, **them** and **they** refer to the servants at the wedding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants … And the servants carried it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	2	8	h9gr		τῷ ἀρχιτρικλίνῳ	1	the head waiter	The term **head waiter** refers to the person in charge of the servants who served the food and drink at meals and feasts.
-JHN	2	9	t0zb		ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος&ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος	1		See how you translated this term in the previous verse.
+JHN	2	9	t0zb		ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος & ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος	1		See how you translated this term in the previous verse.
 JHN	2	9	yg44	writing-background		0		John provides this background information about who knew where the wine came from in order to emphasize the veracity of this miracle. The head waiter did not know that the wine was originally water from the water pots. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	2	9	xfwq	figs-pastforfuture	φωνεῖ	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	2	10	qoch	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ἄνθρωπος	1		**Every man** here is an exaggeration that refers to something being a common practice. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “A man usually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ JHN	2	21	b440	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν	1		Here, **t
 JHN	2	22	oznm	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** indicates that in this verse John is giving the result of Jesus making the statement in [2:19](../02/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this about his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	2	22	jejg	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	2	22	nxug		ἐμνήσθησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, John is speaking about something that happened long after the event described in the previous verses. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter.
-JHN	2	22	ewi1	figs-explicit	τοῦτο&τῷ λόγῳ ὃν εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	this statement	Here, **this** and **the word** refer back to Jesus’ statement in [2:19](../02/19.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this statement about his body … the word about his body that Jesus had spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	2	22	ewi1	figs-explicit	τοῦτο & τῷ λόγῳ ὃν εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	this statement	Here, **this** and **the word** refer back to Jesus’ statement in [2:19](../02/19.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this statement about his body … the word about his body that Jesus had spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	2	22	gq2w	figs-genericnoun	τῇ Γραφῇ	1	believed	John is speaking of **the Scripture** in general, not of one particular book within the Bible. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	2	23	kvn6	writing-newevent	ὡς δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	Now when he was in Jerusalem	**Now** here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after the previous events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	2	23	n807		ἐν τῷ Πάσχα ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ	1		These two phrases could refer to: (1) two different parts of the festival, **the Passover** referring to the first day of **the festival**, and **the festival** referring to the Festival of Unleavened Bread that begins at Passover and was one week long. Alternate translation: “at the Passover, during the Festival of Unleavened Bread” (2) the same event. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival”
@@ -260,11 +260,11 @@ JHN	2	23	ipd6	grammar-connect-logic-result	θεωροῦντες αὐτοῦ τ
 JHN	2	23	u65n		τὰ σημεῖα	1	the signs that he did	See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
 JHN	2	24	cm49		οὐκ ἐπίστευεν αὑτὸν αὐτοῖς	1		Although many people were believing in him, Jesus knew that their belief was superficial and only lasted as long as he performed miracles for them. Therefore, he did not trust them the way he trusted his true disciples. Alternate translation: “did not trust them as true disciples” or “did not believe their belief in him”
 JHN	2	24	f2n7	figs-gendernotations	τὸ αὐτὸν γινώσκειν πάντας	1		Although the word **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “he knew all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	2	25	et23	figs-gendernotations	περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου&τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ	1	about man, for he knew what was in man	Although both instances of the word **man** are masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “about mankind … what was in mankind” or “about people … what was in people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+JHN	2	25	et23	figs-gendernotations	περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ	1	about man, for he knew what was in man	Although both instances of the word **man** are masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “about mankind … what was in mankind” or “about people … what was in people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	2	25	lxro	figs-explicit	τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ	1		This refers to the inner thoughts and desires of people, which some cultures refer to as “the heart.” (See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter.) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “what people think” or “the thoughts and desires people have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	intro	i7a7			0		# John 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Jesus teaches Nicodemus about being born again (3:1–21)\n2. John the Baptist testifies about Jesus (3:22–36)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Light and Darkness\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong, and to begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### The kingdom of God\n\nThe kingdom of God is a concept that is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when Jesus returns and rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is God ruling and people embracing God’s rule over their lives. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])\n\n### Born again\n\nA major idea in this chapter is the spiritual new birth that Jesus says is necessary in order for someone to enter the kingdom of God [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Jesus also uses the following expressions to refer to being born again: “born from water and the Spirit” ([3:4](../03/04.md)) and “born from the Spirit” ([3:6,8](../03/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” twice in this chapter ([3:13–14](../03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	1	yl6f	writing-newevent	δὲ	1		**Now** here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related in the previous chapter. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	3	1	s9p9	writing-participants	ἦν&ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, Νικόδημος ὄνομα αὐτῷ,	1	Now	Here, **there was a man** is used to introduce Nicodemus as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The phrase **from the Pharisees** identifies him as member of a strict Jewish religious sect. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Nicodemus, who was a member of a strict Jewish religious group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+JHN	3	1	s9p9	writing-participants	ἦν & ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, Νικόδημος ὄνομα αὐτῷ,	1	Now	Here, **there was a man** is used to introduce Nicodemus as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The phrase **from the Pharisees** identifies him as member of a strict Jewish religious sect. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Nicodemus, who was a member of a strict Jewish religious group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 JHN	3	1	fz6f	figs-explicit	ἄρχων τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		This phrase means that Nicodemus was a member of the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a member of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	2	sxo1	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**This one** here refers to Nicodemus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nicodemus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	2	n84a	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -294,14 +294,14 @@ JHN	3	8	wh4z	figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here, **the Spirit** re
 JHN	3	9	g4ji	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέσθαι?	1	How can these things be?	This question could be: (1) a genuine question that shows that Nicodemus is confused. Alternate translation: “How are these things possible” (2) a rhetorical question Nicodemus uses to add emphasis to the statement. Alternate translation: “These things cannot be!” or “These things are impossible!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	3	9	phe2	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	10	gw2h	figs-rquestion	σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ταῦτα οὐ γινώσκεις?	1	Are you a teacher of Israel, and yet you do not understand these things?	Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. He is not asking Nicodemus a question in order to get information. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a teacher of Israel, so I am surprised you do not understand these things!” or “You are a teacher of Israel, so you should understand these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	3	10	gbu5	figs-you	σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος&οὐ γινώσκεις	1	Are you a teacher … yet you do not understand	The word **you** is singular and refers to Nicodemus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are you, Nicodemus, the teacher … you do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	3	10	gbu5	figs-you	σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος & οὐ γινώσκεις	1	Are you a teacher … yet you do not understand	The word **you** is singular and refers to Nicodemus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are you, Nicodemus, the teacher … you do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	3	10	ljiy	figs-explicit	ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here, **the teacher** indicates that Nicodemus was recognized as a master teacher and religious authority in the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the renowned religious teacher in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	10	vx3u	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated this phrase is the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	11	jt1f	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	3	11	upi7	figs-exclusive	ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν&τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν	1	we speak	When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JHN	3	11	upi7	figs-exclusive	ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν & τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν	1	we speak	When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	3	11	j1k1	figs-you	οὐ λαμβάνετε	1	you do not accept	The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders do not welcome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	3	12	y4e9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-JHN	3	12	pt4x	figs-you	ὑμῖν&οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν&πιστεύσετε	1	I told you … you do not believe … how will you believe if I tell you	Throughout this verse, **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews … you Jews do not believe, how will you believe if I tell you” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders … you Jewish leaders do not believe, how will you believe if I tell you” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	3	12	pt4x	figs-you	ὑμῖν & οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν & πιστεύσετε	1	I told you … you do not believe … how will you believe if I tell you	Throughout this verse, **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews … you Jews do not believe, how will you believe if I tell you” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders … you Jewish leaders do not believe, how will you believe if I tell you” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	3	12	mf2x	figs-explicit	τὰ ἐπίγεια	1		Here, **earthly things** refers to what Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Those things are called **earthly** because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	12	c6ia	figs-rquestion	πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε?	1	how will you believe if I tell you about heavenly things?	Jesus uses a question to emphasize the disbelief of Nicodemus and the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly will not believe if I tell you about heavenly things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	3	12	dfqi	figs-explicit	τὰ ἐπουράνια	1		Here, **heavenly things** refers to things that take place in heaven or are related to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “truths about what takes place in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -309,11 +309,11 @@ JHN	3	13	ld0m	figs-123person	ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς	1
 JHN	3	13	ocj0	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus uses it to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate this title directly into your language. On the other hand, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what it means. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	14	tb3s	figs-simile	καὶ καθὼς Μωϋσῆς ὕψωσεν τὸν ὄφιν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	Just as Moses lifted up the serpent in the wilderness, so must the Son of Man be lifted up	In this verse, John records Jesus comparing his crucifixion to Moses lifting up a bronze snake. John assumes that his readers will know that Jesus is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, the Israelites complained against God, and God punished them by sending poisonous snakes to kill them. God then told Moses to make a bronze snake and raise it up on a pole so that whoever was bitten by one of the poisonous snakes and looked at the bronze snake would not die. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “And just as Moses lifted up the bronze serpent on a pole when the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 JHN	3	14	f9yi	figs-activepassive	ὑψωθῆναι δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	in the wilderness	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for people to lift up the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	14	savl	figs-123person	ὑψωθῆναι&τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man, to be lifted up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	14	savl	figs-123person	ὑψωθῆναι & τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man, to be lifted up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	14	krir	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	15	e9ls	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** indicates that Jesus is stating the purpose for which he would be crucified. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	3	16	vg6z	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that Jesus is giving a reason why the statement in the previous two verses is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	3	16	h4ht		οὕτως&ἠγάπησεν ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1		Here, **so** could refer to: (1) the manner in which God loved the world. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God loved the world in this way” (2) the degree to which God loved the world. Alternate translation: “God loved the world so much” (3) both the manner in which and the degree to which God loved the world. For this interpretation, see the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “in this way God loved the world so much”
+JHN	3	16	h4ht		οὕτως & ἠγάπησεν ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1		Here, **so** could refer to: (1) the manner in which God loved the world. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God loved the world in this way” (2) the degree to which God loved the world. Alternate translation: “God loved the world so much” (3) both the manner in which and the degree to which God loved the world. For this interpretation, see the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “in this way God loved the world so much”
 JHN	3	16	uxc2	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	God so loved the world	Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	3	16	jen2	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	loved	Here, **that** introduces the result of what the previous clause stated. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	3	16	fqk7	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τὸν μονογενῆ	1		Here, **One and Only Son** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his One and Only Son, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -322,14 +322,14 @@ JHN	3	16	qpc9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν τὸν μονο
 JHN	3	17	k8rf	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that Jesus is giving a reason why the statement in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God gave his One and Only Son because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	3	17	b7vf	figs-parallelism	οὐ γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς τὸν Υἱὸν εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ἵνα κρίνῃ τὸν κόσμον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα σωθῇ ὁ κόσμος δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	For God did not send the Son into the world in order to condemn the world, but in order to save the world through him	These two clauses mean nearly the same thing, said twice for emphasis, first in the negative and then in the positive. Use whatever form your language uses for emphasis. Alternate translation: “For God truly sent his Son into the world so that he might save it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 JHN	3	17	haut	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	3	17	mjjg	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν&δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me … through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	17	mjjg	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν & δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me … through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	17	amqn	figs-explicit	τὸν κόσμον	1		Here, **world** refers to the universe God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	17	f5o9	writing-pronouns	ἵνα κρίνῃ	1		Here, **he** refers to God; it does not refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that God might condemn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	17	zv1i		ἵνα κρίνῃ τὸν κόσμον	1		The word translated **condemn** means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. Alternate translation: “so that he might judge the world as guilty”
-JHN	3	17	ynyh	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον&ὁ κόσμος	2		Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world … the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	3	17	ynyh	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον & ὁ κόσμος	2		Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world … the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	3	17	kuow	figs-activepassive	ἵνα σωθῇ ὁ κόσμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	17	exd0		δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		This phrase indicates the means by which God would save the world. Alternate translation: “by means of him”
-JHN	3	18	zl5p		οὐ κρίνεται&ἤδη κέκριται	1		The word translated **condemn** means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. See how you translated this term in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “is not judged as guilty … has already been judged as guilty”
+JHN	3	18	zl5p		οὐ κρίνεται & ἤδη κέκριται	1		The word translated **condemn** means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. See how you translated this term in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “is not judged as guilty … has already been judged as guilty”
 JHN	3	18	x14j	writing-pronouns	εἰς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	18	tmz7	figs-activepassive	ὁ πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν οὐ κρίνεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God does not condemn the one who believes in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	18	t21p	figs-activepassive	ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων, ἤδη κέκριται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “but God has already condemned the one who does not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -337,17 +337,17 @@ JHN	3	18	ps4n	figs-metonymy	μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομ
 JHN	3	18	q8ku		τοῦ μονογενοῦς Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase **One and Only** is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “of the Unique Son of God” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “of the Only Begotten Son of God”
 JHN	3	18	eb54	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	3	19	z9d2		ἡ κρίσις	1		Here, **judgment** could refer to: (1) a verdict a judge pronounces in a court trial. Alternate translation: “the verdict” (2) the reason for a condemning judgment. Alternate translation: “the basis for condemnation”
-JHN	3	19	t9z5	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον&ἢ τὸ φῶς	1	The light has come into the world	Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this term in those places where **the light** also refers to Jesus in the [1:7–9](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, has come into the world … than Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	3	19	gh4i	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον&ἢ τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. Alternate translation: “I, the light, have come into the world … than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	19	t9z5	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον & ἢ τὸ φῶς	1	The light has come into the world	Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this term in those places where **the light** also refers to Jesus in the [1:7–9](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, has come into the world … than Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	3	19	gh4i	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον & ἢ τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. Alternate translation: “I, the light, have come into the world … than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	19	fvvg	figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	3	19	h4nk	figs-metaphor	ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι&τὸ σκότος	1	men loved the darkness	Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “men loved evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	3	19	h4nk	figs-metaphor	ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι & τὸ σκότος	1	men loved the darkness	Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “men loved evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	20	velv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates another reason why men love the darkness, as stated in the previous verse. People who do evil things hate the light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	3	20	bus8		πᾶς&ὁ φαῦλα πράσσων	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does evil things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does evil”
-JHN	3	20	cg3i	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς, καὶ&πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		See how you translated **the light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, and … to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	3	20	s49o	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς, καὶ&πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. Alternate translation: “me, the light, and … to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	20	bus8		πᾶς & ὁ φαῦλα πράσσων	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does evil things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does evil”
+JHN	3	20	cg3i	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς, καὶ & πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		See how you translated **the light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, and … to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	3	20	s49o	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς, καὶ & πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. Alternate translation: “me, the light, and … to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	20	u25p	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἐλεγχθῇ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	so that his deeds will not be exposed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the light might not expose his deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	21	q77t		ὁ&ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does true things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does the truth”
-JHN	3	21	kpb9	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ&ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who does true things” or “the one who does what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JHN	3	21	q77t		ὁ & ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		This phrase refers to someone who habitually does true things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does the truth”
+JHN	3	21	kpb9	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ & ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who does true things” or “the one who does what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	3	21	ud15	figs-metaphor	ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		See how you translated **the light** in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “comes to Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	21	k8wr	figs-123person	ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς	1		Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. See how you translated this expression in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	21	l7ax	figs-activepassive	φανερωθῇ αὐτοῦ τὰ ἔργα	1	plainly seen that his deeds	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the light might reveal his deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ JHN	3	23	m4yg	figs-explicit	ὁ Ἰωάννης	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesu
 JHN	3	23	x1ge	translate-names	Αἰνὼν	1	Aenon	**Aenon** is the name of a town near the Jordan River close to Samaria. **Aenon** is the Aramaic word for springs of water, which explains John’s comment in the next clause about there being much water there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	3	23	e5v2	translate-names	τοῦ Σαλείμ	1	Salim	**Salim** is the name of a town near the Jordan River close to Samaria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	3	23	ukz2	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	were being baptized	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that John the Baptist did it. Alternate translation: “John was baptizing them” or “he was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	24	v13x	figs-activepassive	οὔπω&ἦν βεβλημένος&ὁ Ἰωάννης	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Mark 6:17](../../mrk/06/17.md) implies that Herod did it. Alternate translation: “Herod had not yet thrown John”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	3	24	v13x	figs-activepassive	οὔπω & ἦν βεβλημένος & ὁ Ἰωάννης	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Mark 6:17](../../mrk/06/17.md) implies that Herod did it. Alternate translation: “Herod had not yet thrown John”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	25	fuq2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου	1	a dispute	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **dispute**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the disciples of John began arguing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	3	25	ft8r	figs-activepassive	ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου μετὰ Ἰουδαίου	1	Then there arose a dispute between some of John’s disciples and a Jew	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then John’s disciples and a Jew began to dispute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	25	qzq7	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1		Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” or “of John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -372,38 +372,38 @@ JHN	3	28	l9yt	figs-you	αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς	1	You yourselves	Here, **You**
 JHN	3	28	p92u	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι εἶπον, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, ἀλλ’, ὅτι ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that I said that I am not the Christ but that I have been sent before that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	3	28	nf9l	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου	1	I have been sent before him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God sent me before that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	3	28	vguf	writing-pronouns	ἐκείνου	1		Here, **that one** refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Christ” in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	3	29	p569	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην, νυμφίος ἐστίν&τοῦ νυμφίου&τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου	1	The bride belongs to the bridegroom	John the Baptist uses **bride** and **bridegroom** to refer to people who believe in Jesus and Jesus himself, respectively. Since these are important terms for Christians and for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a plain explanation in the text of your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words with similes. Alternate translation: “The one who is like one who has a bride is like a bridegroom … of the one who is like a bridegroom … of the voice of one who is like a bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	3	29	p569	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην, νυμφίος ἐστίν & τοῦ νυμφίου & τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου	1	The bride belongs to the bridegroom	John the Baptist uses **bride** and **bridegroom** to refer to people who believe in Jesus and Jesus himself, respectively. Since these are important terms for Christians and for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a plain explanation in the text of your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words with similes. Alternate translation: “The one who is like one who has a bride is like a bridegroom … of the one who is like a bridegroom … of the voice of one who is like a bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	29	nd5o	figs-123person	ὁ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου, ὁ ἑστηκὼς καὶ ἀκούων αὐτοῦ, χαρᾷ χαίρει	1		John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “But I am the friend of the bridegroom, and I stood and heard him, and I rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	29	nfvx	figs-doublet	χαρᾷ χαίρει	1		These words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy John had because Jesus had come. Alternate translation: “rejoices greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	3	29	wkb8	figs-activepassive	αὕτη&ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται	1	This, then, is my joy made complete	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I rejoice greatly” or “I rejoice with complete joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	3	29	hnw2	figs-123person	αὕτη&ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ	1	my joy	Here, **my** refers to John the Baptist, the one who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this joy that I, John, have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	3	29	wkb8	figs-activepassive	αὕτη & ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται	1	This, then, is my joy made complete	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I rejoice greatly” or “I rejoice with complete joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	3	29	hnw2	figs-123person	αὕτη & ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ	1	my joy	Here, **my** refers to John the Baptist, the one who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this joy that I, John, have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	30	kn9s	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν	1	He must increase	Here, **that one** refers to Jesus, whom John the Baptist called “the bridegroom” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “It is necessary for Jesus to increase” or “It is necessary for the bridegroom to increase” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	3	30	u5e0	figs-metaphor	αὐξάνειν&ἐλαττοῦσθαι	1		John the Baptist uses **increase** to refer to growing in importance and influence, while **decrease** refers to diminishing in importance and influence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be more influential … to be less influential” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	3	31	wu2j	figs-doublet	ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν&ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John repeats himself to emphasize that Jesus is greater than every person and every thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and include words that show emphasis. Alternate translation: “The one who comes from heaven is certainly above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	3	31	qd7t	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν&ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1	He who comes from above is above all	Both of these phrases refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who comes from above, is above all things … Jesus, the one who comes from heaven, is above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	3	30	u5e0	figs-metaphor	αὐξάνειν & ἐλαττοῦσθαι	1		John the Baptist uses **increase** to refer to growing in importance and influence, while **decrease** refers to diminishing in importance and influence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be more influential … to be less influential” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	3	31	wu2j	figs-doublet	ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν & ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John repeats himself to emphasize that Jesus is greater than every person and every thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and include words that show emphasis. Alternate translation: “The one who comes from heaven is certainly above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+JHN	3	31	qd7t	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν & ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1	He who comes from above is above all	Both of these phrases refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who comes from above, is above all things … Jesus, the one who comes from heaven, is above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	31	ksp5	figs-metonymy	ἄνωθεν	1		Here John the Baptist uses **above** to refer to heaven, the place where God dwells. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	3	31	on9v	figs-metaphor	ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	1		John the Baptist uses **above** to refer to having superior status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	31	mhk9	figs-123person	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς γῆς, ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν, καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ	1	He who is from the earth is from the earth and speaks about the earth	Here, John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person, but the statement is also true for all humans other than Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who is from the earth, am from the earth and speak from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	3	31	p05h	figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν	1		This phrase refers to having an earthly origin, which is the case for John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “originates from the earth” or “has an earthly origin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	31	ar7r	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ	1		This phrase refers to speaking based on an earthly perspective, which is the perspective of John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and speaks from an earthly perspective” or “and speaks as someone from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	31	yj2t	figs-metaphor	ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν	2		John the Baptist uses **above** to refer to having superior status. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	3	32	c5yt	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ&μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ	1	He testifies about what he has seen and heard	**He** and **his** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus testifies about that which he has seen and heard … Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	32	c5yt	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ & μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ	1	He testifies about what he has seen and heard	**He** and **his** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus testifies about that which he has seen and heard … Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	32	umek	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν	1		This phrase refers to what Jesus saw and heard while he was in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “which he has seen and heard in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	32	kqi1	figs-hyperbole	τὴν μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ, οὐδεὶς λαμβάνει	1	no one accepts his testimony	Here, John the Baptist exaggerates to emphasize that only a few people believed Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “very few people receive his testimony” or “it seems like no one receives his testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	3	33	k36d	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λαβὼν αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1	He who has received his testimony	This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who has received his testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	3	33	ygba	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1		Here, **his** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	3	33	g5x4	translate-unknown	ἐσφράγισεν	1	has confirmed	This expression refers to placing a **seal** on a document in order to certify that what is written in the document is true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seal]]) Here this meaning is extended to refer to certifying that God is true. If your readers would not be familiar with this practice of sealing documents, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “has certified” or “has attested” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	3	34	rr83	figs-explicit	ὃν&ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	For the one whom God has sent	This phrase refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	3	34	rr83	figs-explicit	ὃν & ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	For the one whom God has sent	This phrase refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	34	p9wt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous sentence is true. We know that Jesus speaks the words of God because God has given him the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “We know this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	3	34	bnx8	writing-pronouns	οὐ&δίδωσιν	1	For he does not give the Spirit by measure	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	3	34	hmky	figs-ellipsis	οὐ&ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, especially this discussion of God giving to his Son in the next verse. Alternate translation: “he does not give the Spirit to him by measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	3	34	cdia	figs-litotes	οὐ&ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		This clause is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he certainly gives the Spirit without measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-JHN	3	35	hmk4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ&Υἱόν	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	3	34	bnx8	writing-pronouns	οὐ & δίδωσιν	1	For he does not give the Spirit by measure	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	3	34	hmky	figs-ellipsis	οὐ & ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, especially this discussion of God giving to his Son in the next verse. Alternate translation: “he does not give the Spirit to him by measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	3	34	cdia	figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		This clause is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he certainly gives the Spirit without measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+JHN	3	35	hmk4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ & Υἱόν	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	3	35	ha4e	figs-idiom	πάντα δέδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ	1	given … into his hand	Here, giving **into his hand** means putting under his power or control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “has given him control over everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	3	36	u1ks	figs-genericnoun	ὁ πιστεύων	1	He who believes	This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-JHN	3	36	ob32	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν&τῷ Υἱῷ	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	3	36	hpte	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&ἀπειθῶν	2		This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone who disobeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-JHN	3	36	joql		ὁ&ἀπειθῶν	2		The word translated **disobeys** can also be translated “does not believe.” Alternate translation: “the one who does not believe”
+JHN	3	36	ob32	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν & τῷ Υἱῷ	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	3	36	hpte	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & ἀπειθῶν	2		This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone who disobeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+JHN	3	36	joql		ὁ & ἀπειθῶν	2		The word translated **disobeys** can also be translated “does not believe.” Alternate translation: “the one who does not believe”
 JHN	3	36	ni86	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν	1		John the Baptist uses **see** metaphorically to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not experience life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	3	36	pzf5	figs-explicit	οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life, as indicated by the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will not see eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	36	zy7u	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	the wrath of God stays on him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God will continue to be angry against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -422,17 +422,17 @@ JHN	4	6	vwdf	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ὁ οὖν Ἰησοῦς	1		**The
 JHN	4	6	lovl	grammar-connect-logic-result	κεκοπιακὼς	1		This clause indicates the reason why Jesus sat by the well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he had grown weary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	4	6	mwi2	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας	1		This phrase indicates the reason why Jesus had grown weary. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	4	6	yjzo		ὥρα ἦν ὡς ἕκτη	1		In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, **the sixth hour** indicates a time in the middle of the day, when it would be the hottest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “about noon” or “about 12:00 PM”
-JHN	4	7	kswz	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	4	7	kswz	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	7	g82d	figs-imperative	δός μοι πεῖν	1	Give me some water	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give me to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JHN	4	7	urgd	figs-ellipsis	δός μοι πεῖν	1		Here, John records Jesus leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “Give me something to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	4	8	u29c	grammar-connect-logic-result	οἱ γὰρ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπεληλύθεισαν	1	For his disciples had gone	This phrase indicates the reason why Jesus asked the woman for water. The disciples had gone away and taken the tools for drawing water with them, so that Jesus could not draw the water himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because his disciples had gone away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	4	9	dpoh	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	9	xdw7	figs-rquestion	πῶς σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ὢν, παρ’ ἐμοῦ πεῖν αἰτεῖς γυναικὸς Σαμαρείτιδος οὔσης?	1	How is it that you, being a Jew, are asking … for something to drink?	The woman is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe that you, being a Jew, are asking a Samaritan woman for a drink!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	4	9	px8w		οὐ&συνχρῶνται	1	have no dealings with	Alternate translation: “do not associate with” or “have nothing to do with”
-JHN	4	10	redz	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ᾔδεις τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι&σὺ ἂν ᾔτησας αὐτὸν	1		Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that the woman does not know the gift of God or who he is. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “You surely do not know the gift of God and who it is who is saying to you … Otherwise, you would have asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+JHN	4	9	px8w		οὐ & συνχρῶνται	1	have no dealings with	Alternate translation: “do not associate with” or “have nothing to do with”
+JHN	4	10	redz	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ᾔδεις τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι & σὺ ἂν ᾔτησας αὐτὸν	1		Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that the woman does not know the gift of God or who he is. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “You surely do not know the gift of God and who it is who is saying to you … Otherwise, you would have asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	4	10	i9eg		τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **the gift of God** refers to the “living water” that Jesus mentions at the end of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s gift of living water”
 JHN	4	10	ed4r	figs-possession	τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Jesus uses **of** to describe a **gift** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	4	10	oywu	figs-123person	τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι&ᾔτησας αὐτὸν, καὶ ἔδωκεν	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “who I am who is saying to you … would have asked me, and I would have given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	4	10	oywu	figs-123person	τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι & ᾔτησας αὐτὸν, καὶ ἔδωκεν	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “who I am who is saying to you … would have asked me, and I would have given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	4	10	ua0b	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ λέγων σοι, δός μοι πεῖν,	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who is asking you to give him a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	4	10	zub5	figs-extrainfo	ὕδωρ ζῶν	1	living water	The phrase **living water** usually refers to moving or flowing water. However, Jesus uses **living water** here to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, the woman does not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to her in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	4	11	pf7q	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ JHN	4	11	nwln		τὸ ὕδωρ τὸ ζῶν	1		See how you translated **the liv
 JHN	4	12	di9q	figs-rquestion	μὴ σὺ μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἰακώβ, ὃς ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν τὸ φρέαρ, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν, καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ θρέμματα αὐτοῦ?	1	You are not greater, are you, than our father Jacob … cattle?	The woman is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly not greater than our father Jacob, who gave us the well and drank from it himself, and his sons and his cattle!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	4	12	sj7n	figs-ellipsis	ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν	1	drank from it	Here, John records the woman leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “drank water from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	4	13	leu7		διψήσει πάλιν	1	will be thirsty again	Alternate translation: “will need to drink water again”
-JHN	4	14	udxp	figs-exmetaphor	ὃς δ’ ἂν πίῃ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος οὗ ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει&τὸ ὕδωρ ὃ δώσω αὐτῷ γενήσεται ἐν αὐτῷ πηγὴ ὕδατος, ἁλλομένου εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Jesus speaks about receiving the Holy Spirit by continuing the metaphor of water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “but whoever is like one who drinks from the water that I will give him will be like one who never thirsts … the water that I will give him will become like a fountain of water in him, resulting in eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	4	14	udxp	figs-exmetaphor	ὃς δ’ ἂν πίῃ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος οὗ ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει & τὸ ὕδωρ ὃ δώσω αὐτῷ γενήσεται ἐν αὐτῷ πηγὴ ὕδατος, ἁλλομένου εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Jesus speaks about receiving the Holy Spirit by continuing the metaphor of water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “but whoever is like one who drinks from the water that I will give him will be like one who never thirsts … the water that I will give him will become like a fountain of water in him, resulting in eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	15	vzoy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	15	iz1p		κύριε	1	Sir	The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	4	15	hd9f		ἀντλεῖν	1	draw water	Here, **draw** refers to taking water out of a well using a container that can hold water. Alternate translation: “get water” or “pull water up from the well”
@@ -460,12 +460,12 @@ JHN	4	21	tisq		γύναι	1		Here, **woman** refers to the Samaritan woman. If i
 JHN	4	21	eccs	figs-metonymy	ἔρχεται ὥρα	1		Here, **hour** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	4	21	ff27	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρί	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	4	21	nu5m	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ	1	you will worship the Father	Here, **this mountain** refers to Mount Gerizim. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	22	guu4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς&οὐκ οἴδατε	1	You worship what you do not know. We worship what we know	**You** is plural here in this verse and refers to the Samaritan people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Samaritan people … you all do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	4	22	c54u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&οἴδαμεν	1		**We** here is exclusive. Jesus is only referring to himself and the Jewish people. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “We Jewish people … we all know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JHN	4	22	guu4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς & οὐκ οἴδατε	1	You worship what you do not know. We worship what we know	**You** is plural here in this verse and refers to the Samaritan people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Samaritan people … you all do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	22	c54u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & οἴδαμεν	1		**We** here is exclusive. Jesus is only referring to himself and the Jewish people. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “We Jewish people … we all know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	4	22	i2df	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἡ σωτηρία ἐκ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐστίν	1	for salvation is from the Jews	The phrase **from the Jews** indicates that the Jewish people were the people group from which **salvation** came. This is true because the Savior Jesus was from the Jewish people. This phrase does not mean that the Jewish people themselves will save others from their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for salvation comes from among the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	22	yj1y	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ σωτηρία	1	salvation is from the Jews	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	4	23	bs1p	figs-metonymy	ἔρχεται ὥρα	1		See the discussion of **an hour is coming** in the General Notes to this chapter and see how you translated this phrase in verse [21](../04/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	4	23	k1gf	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Πατρὶ&ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	4	23	k1gf	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Πατρὶ & ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	4	23	fb51		ἐν πνεύματι	1	in spirit and truth	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Alternate translation: “with their spirits” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit”
 JHN	4	23	utt7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	in … truth	Here, **truth** refers to thinking correctly of what is true about God, which is revealed in the Bible. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in spirit and in accordance with God’s Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	4	24	pfdv		ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.
@@ -497,24 +497,24 @@ JHN	4	35	y5d7	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Jesus using the term **Behold** to cal
 JHN	4	35	coiv	figs-idiom	ἐπάρατε τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν	1		This phrase, **lift up your eyes**, is a common idiom in the Bible that is used to describe the act of looking at something or direct one’s own attention toward something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “look” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	4	35	tyw3	figs-metaphor	θεάσασθε τὰς χώρας	1	look up and see the fields, for they are already ripe for harvest	Jesus uses the word **fields** to refer to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a simile or plainly. Alternate translation: “see these people who are like fields” or “see these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	4	35	oq29	figs-metaphor	λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν ἤδη	1		Jesus uses the phrase **white for harvest** to say that people are ready to receive the message of Jesus, like fields that are ready to be harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, you could convey the meaning with a simile or do it plainly. Alternate translation: “they are like a field that is ready to be harvested” or “they are already ready to believe my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	4	36	rd63	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ θερίζων&καὶ ὁ θερίζων	1		Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **harvesting** crops is used to refer to the act of proclaiming Jesus’ message to those who are ready to receive it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one who is proclaiming the message to those who are being saved is like one who is harvesting … and the one who is like a harvester” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	4	36	rd63	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ θερίζων & καὶ ὁ θερίζων	1		Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **harvesting** crops is used to refer to the act of proclaiming Jesus’ message to those who are ready to receive it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one who is proclaiming the message to those who are being saved is like one who is harvesting … and the one who is like a harvester” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	36	qtf8	figs-exmetaphor	μισθὸν, λαμβάνει	1		Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Those who proclaim Jesus’ message are described as those who receive **wages** for their labor. Here, **wages** refers to the joy those who proclaim the message will receive, as indicated by the last clause in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “has great joy that is like wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	36	qc31	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ συνάγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	and gathers fruit for everlasting life	Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Jesus uses the phrase**fruit for eternal life** to refer to people who believe his message and are forgiven for their sins, so that they can have eternal life with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a simile. Alternate translation: “and the people who believe the message and receive eternal life are like the fruit that the one who is harvesting gathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	36	nuku	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ σπείρων	1		Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **sowing** seed is used to refer to the act of preparing people to receive Jesus’ message. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is preparing people to receive the message is like one who is sowing seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-JHN	4	37	w4xn	figs-explicit	ἐν&τούτῳ	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the statements in the rest of this verse and the next verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I am about to say,” (2) the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I have just said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	37	w4xn	figs-explicit	ἐν & τούτῳ	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the statements in the rest of this verse and the next verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I am about to say,” (2) the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I have just said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	37	rqe7	figs-exmetaphor	ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων	1	One sows, and another harvests	Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **sowing** is used to refer to preparing people to receive the message of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “One preparing people to receive the message is like one sowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	37	eqwf	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ θερίζων	1		Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvesting** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “the one proclaiming the message to those who are receiving it is like one harvesting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-JHN	4	38	cpob	figs-you	ὑμᾶς&ὑμεῖς&ὑμεῖς	1		In this verse **you** is plural and refers to the disciples to whom Jesus is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you who are my disciples … you … you disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	38	cpob	figs-you	ὑμᾶς & ὑμεῖς & ὑμεῖς	1		In this verse **you** is plural and refers to the disciples to whom Jesus is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you who are my disciples … you … you disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	4	38	tu2y	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν	1		Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvest** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “I sent you to successfully proclaim my message like those who harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	4	38	lq36	figs-explicit	ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεκοπιάκατε	1		This phrase refers to those who received Jesus’ message when his disciples proclaimed it to them. Although the disciples did not prepare those people to receive the message, they enjoyed the benefits of seeing those people trust in Jesus for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people whom you previously did not prepare to receive the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	38	fbcv	figs-explicit	ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασιν	1		**Others** here refers to those people who prepared people to receive Jesus’ message before Jesus’ disciples successfully proclaimed that message to them. This would include Jesus, John the Baptist, and possibly the Old Testament prophets as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Others such as myself and the prophets have labored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	38	slw4		ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἰσεληλύθατε	1	you have entered into their labor	Here, **entered into** means to have joined others or participated with others in doing something. Alternate translation: “you have joined in doing their work”
-JHN	4	39	nbcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ&τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης	1		Here, **that city** refers to the Samaritan city of Sychar. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Sychar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	39	nbcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ & τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης	1		Here, **that city** refers to the Samaritan city of Sychar. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Sychar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	39	qda3	figs-hyperbole	εἶπέν μοι πάντα ἃ ἐποίησα	1	He told me everything that I have done	Here, **all things** is an exaggeration. The woman was impressed by how much Jesus knew about her. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “He told me many things that I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	4	40	w3ck	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν&αὐτὸν&ἔμεινεν	1		In this verse **him** and **he** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus … Jesus … Jesus stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	4	40	w3ck	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν & ἔμεινεν	1		In this verse **him** and **he** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus … Jesus … Jesus stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	41	qrj5	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Here, **word** refers to the message that Jesus proclaimed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	4	42	u7ev	writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1		Here, **they** refers to the Samaritans from Sychar. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the local Samaritans said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	4	42	ciyt	figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν&ἀκηκόαμεν&οἴδαμεν	1		**We** throughout this verse refers to the Samaritan townspeople who came to Jesus apart from the Samaritan woman, so the pronoun would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JHN	4	42	ciyt	figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν & ἀκηκόαμεν & οἴδαμεν	1		**We** throughout this verse refers to the Samaritan townspeople who came to Jesus apart from the Samaritan woman, so the pronoun would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	4	42	fpdj	writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1		Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	42	k4cz	figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	world	Here, **world** refers to everyone throughout the world who believes in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the believers in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	4	43	n1mk	writing-newevent	μετὰ δὲ τὰς δύο ἡμέρας	1		This phrase introduces a new event that happened after the events the story has just related. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After he had spent two days in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -527,20 +527,20 @@ JHN	4	45	inup	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτε οὖν	1		Here, **therefore*
 JHN	4	45	ews8		ἐδέξαντο αὐτὸν οἱ Γαλιλαῖοι	1		Since this verse gives the result of Jesus saying in the previous verse that a prophet was not honored in his own country, it is important to indicate that welcoming Jesus was not the same as honoring him. They **welcomed him** because he did miracles, not because they honored him as a prophet. Alternate translation: “the Galileans only welcomed him”
 JHN	4	45	lm4g	grammar-connect-logic-result	πάντα ἑωρακότες	1		This clause indicates the reason why the Galileans welcomed Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they had seen all the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	4	45	r65x	figs-hyperbole	πάντα ἑωρακότες	1		Here, **all** is an exaggeration that refers to the Galileans having seen many of Jesus’ miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “having seen many of the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	4	45	v9la	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ&εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν	1	at the festival	Here, **the festival** refers the Passover festival, as indicated in [2:12–25](../02/12.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival … to the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	4	45	v9la	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ & εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν	1	at the festival	Here, **the festival** refers the Passover festival, as indicated in [2:12–25](../02/12.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival … to the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	4	46	ffm3	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1	Now	**Then** indicates that the events which the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus entered Galilee and the Galileans welcomed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 JHN	4	46	bp3w	writing-participants	καὶ ἦν τις βασιλικὸς	1	royal official	This phrase introduces a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression **royal official** identifies this man as someone who was in the service of the king. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man who was a government official who served the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 JHN	4	47	brcf	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		**He** here refers to the royal official. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	47	eqga	writing-pronouns	ἤμελλεν	1		Here, **he** refers to the royal official’s son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the official’s son was about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	48	u73r	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἴδητε, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε	1	Unless you see signs and wonders, you will not believe	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only if you see signs and wonders will you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	4	48	hlts	figs-you	ἴδητε&πιστεύσητε	1		The word **you** is plural in this verse. This means that Jesus was not only speaking to the royal official, but also to the other people who were there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all would see … you all would … believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	4	48	hlts	figs-you	ἴδητε & πιστεύσητε	1		The word **you** is plural in this verse. This means that Jesus was not only speaking to the royal official, but also to the other people who were there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all would see … you all would … believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	4	48	n3ot	figs-hendiadys	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **wonders** describes the character of Jesus’ miraculous **signs**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “wonderful miraculous signs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 JHN	4	49	ui6f	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	49	y3vi		κύριε	1		The royal official calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. See how you translated this word in [4:11](../04/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	4	49	ycdt	figs-imperative	κατάβηθι	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “please come down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JHN	4	50	n5mo	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	4	50	cbtv	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, **The man** refers to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	4	50	uwa3	figs-metonymy	ἐπίστευσεν&τῷ λόγῳ	1	believed the word	Here, **word** refers to all that Jesus said to the man. It does not refer to one specific word that Jesus said. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believed the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	4	50	uwa3	figs-metonymy	ἐπίστευσεν & τῷ λόγῳ	1	believed the word	Here, **word** refers to all that Jesus said to the man. It does not refer to one specific word that Jesus said. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believed the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	4	51	a5gw	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	While	In this verse **he**, **his**, and **him** refer to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	4	51	h5h4	figs-quotations	λέγοντες, ὅτι ὁ παῖς αὐτοῦ ζῇ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. You will also need to adjust the sentence to indicate to whom they are speaking. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘Your son lives’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 JHN	4	52	x2ta	figs-quotations	ἐπύθετο οὖν τὴν ὥραν παρ’ αὐτῶν ἐν ᾗ κομψότερον ἔσχεν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “So he asked from them, ‘In what hour did he begin to improve?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -554,20 +554,20 @@ JHN	4	54	jvfs		σημεῖον	1		See how you translated the term **sign** in [2
 JHN	5	intro	qe17			0		# John 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus’ third sign: he heals a paralyzed man (5:1–9)\n2. Jewish leaders oppose Jesus’ ministry (5:10–18)\n3. Jesus says he is equal with God (5:19–30)\n4. Jesus’ witnesses are John the Baptist, Jesus’ works, God, and the Scriptures (5:31–47)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Healing water\n\nMany of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were “stirred up.” The man Jesus healed in this chapter was one of those people ([5:2–7](../05/02.md)).\n\n### Testimony\n\nIn the Bible, a testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. In this chapter, Jesus tells the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was ([5:34–37](../05/34.md)). This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do ([5:44–47](../05/44.md)).\n\n### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus mentions two resurrections, the resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment ([5:28–29](../05/28.md)). Regarding the resurrection of life, God will make some people alive again, and they will live with him forever, because he gives them his grace. Regarding the resurrection of judgment, God will make some people alive again and they will live apart from him forever, because he will treat them justly.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man\n\nJesus refers to himself in this chapter as the “Son” ([5:19](../05/19.md)), the “Son of God” ([5:25](../05/25.md)), and the “Son of Man” ([5:27](../05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([5:27](../05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	1	urn9	writing-background		0		[Verses 1–4](../05/01.md) give background information about the setting of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	5	1	ea65	writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1	After this	This phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	5	1	z4th		ἀνέβη&εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	went up to Jerusalem	**Jerusalem** is located on the top of a hill. Therefore, roads to **Jerusalem** went **up**. If your language has a different word for going up a hill than for walking on level ground or going down a gill, you should use it here.
+JHN	5	1	z4th		ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	went up to Jerusalem	**Jerusalem** is located on the top of a hill. Therefore, roads to **Jerusalem** went **up**. If your language has a different word for going up a hill than for walking on level ground or going down a gill, you should use it here.
 JHN	5	2	h3w5		κολυμβήθρα	1	pool	This **pool** was a large manmade hole in the ground that people filled with water and used for bathing. Sometimes they lined these pools with tiles or stones.
 JHN	5	2	w377	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστὶ	1		When John says **in Hebrew** in his Gospel, he refers to the language spoken by the Jews during his time. This language is now called Jewish Aramaic. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jewish Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	2	dt12	translate-names	Βηθζαθά	1	Bethesda	**Bethesda** is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	5	2	luz3		στοὰς	1	roofed porches	These **porches** were structures with roofs that had at least one wall missing and were attached to the sides of buildings.
 JHN	5	5	r1gt	writing-participants	ἦν δέ τις ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ	1		This verse introduces the man lying beside the pool as a new character to the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-JHN	5	5	bez8	figs-explicit	ἦν&ἐκεῖ	1	was there	Here, **there** refers being at the pool called Bethesda in verse [2](../05/02.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “was at the Bethesda pool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	5	bez8	figs-explicit	ἦν & ἐκεῖ	1	was there	Here, **there** refers being at the pool called Bethesda in verse [2](../05/02.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “was at the Bethesda pool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	6	w97q	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	he said to him	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	5	7	aeu3		κύριε	1	Sir, I do not have	The man calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	5	7	ny5f	figs-activepassive	ὅταν ταραχθῇ τὸ ὕδωρ	1	when the water is stirred up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, verse [4](../05/04.md) indicates who the man believed was doing the action. Alternate translation: “when an angel moves the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	5	7	kul6		εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν	1	into the pool	See how you translated **pool** in verse [2](../05/02.md).
 JHN	5	7	u93g		ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει	1	another steps down before me	The man believed that only the first person to enter the water after the water stirred would be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “another goes down before me and is healed”
 JHN	5	8	eqe4	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Get up	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	5	9	i4tk	writing-background	δὲ&ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Now that day	John uses the word **Now** to show that the words that follow provide background information for a new event in the story that takes place in [verses 10–13](../05/10.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The day on which Jesus healed the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+JHN	5	9	i4tk	writing-background	δὲ & ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Now that day	John uses the word **Now** to show that the words that follow provide background information for a new event in the story that takes place in [verses 10–13](../05/10.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The day on which Jesus healed the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	5	10	ja3x	figs-synecdoche	ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	So the Jews said to him who was healed	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	5	10	qydu	figs-activepassive	τῷ τεθεραπευμένῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “to the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	5	10	xd9b		Σάββατόν ἐστιν	1	It is the Sabbath	Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “It is a Sabbath day”
@@ -576,13 +576,13 @@ JHN	5	11	en3v		ὁ ποιήσας με ὑγιῆ	1	He who made me healthy	Alter
 JHN	5	11	kpkd	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐκεῖνός μοι εἶπεν, ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that one said to me to pick up my mat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	5	12	r7nx	writing-pronouns	ἠρώτησαν αὐτόν	1	They asked him	**They** here refers to the Jewish leaders and **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish leaders asked the man who was healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	12	kryx	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ εἰπών σοι, ἆρον	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who told you to pick it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-JHN	5	13	qtsj	figs-activepassive	ὁ&ἰαθεὶς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	5	13	qtsj	figs-activepassive	ὁ & ἰαθεὶς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	5	13	tijo	figs-ellipsis	τίς ἐστιν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “who it was who had healed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	5	13	sgx1	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὄχλου ὄντος ἐν τῷ τόπῳ	1		This could refer to: (1) the reason why Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “because a crowd was in the place” (2) the time when Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “while a crowd was in the place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	5	13	qzpi	grammar-collectivenouns	ὄχλου	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	5	14	rl0k	writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1		**After these things** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events which the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	5	14	h1ri	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρίσκει	1	Jesus found him	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	5	14	qo3z	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&αὐτῷ	1		Here, **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	14	qo3z	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ	1		Here, **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	14	h39z	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1	See	Jesus uses the term **Behold** to call the man’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	5	15	auad	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [5:10](../05/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	5	16	efg2	writing-background	καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν Σαββάτῳ.	1	Now	The writer uses the phrase **And because of this** to show that previous verse gave background information for what John will now present. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Jews began to persecute Jesus because he was doing these things on the Sabbath.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -600,24 +600,24 @@ JHN	5	19	f2qp	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** indicates th
 JHN	5	19	xu0e	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **them** refers to the Jewish leaders who wanted to kill Jesus and made accusations against him in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	19	rr9q	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	5	19	c9in	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to a group of Jewish leaders, **you** is plural here and through [5:47](../05/47.md). If your language does not have a different form for plural **you**, you can use another way to express it. Alternate translation: “I say to you Jews” or “I say to you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	5	19	iuc7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς&Πατέρα	1	Son … Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	5	19	x9sl	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς&καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς&ποιεῖ	1	whatever the Father is doing, the Son does these things also.	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If this would confuse your readers, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	5	19	iuc7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς & Πατέρα	1	Son … Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	19	x9sl	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς & καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς & ποιεῖ	1	whatever the Father is doing, the Son does these things also.	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If this would confuse your readers, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	19	mc1f	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching and ability to do miracles. His teaching and miracles could only have authority if they came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	19	ymuo	figs-metaphor	τι βλέπῃ τὸν Πατέρα ποιοῦντα	1		Jesus uses **see** to refer to knowing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he would perceive the Father doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	5	20	t3b4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ&Πατὴρ&τὸν Υἱὸν	1	For the Father loves the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	20	t3b4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ & Πατὴρ & τὸν Υἱὸν	1	For the Father loves the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	20	lk5n	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν	1		As in the previous verse, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	20	x8ac	figs-metaphor	δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ&δείξει αὐτῷ	1	loves	Jesus uses **shows** and **show** to refer to revealing or making something known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he reveals to him … he will reveal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	5	20	x8ac	figs-metaphor	δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ & δείξει αὐτῷ	1	loves	Jesus uses **shows** and **show** to refer to revealing or making something known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he reveals to him … he will reveal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	5	20	rtb6	writing-pronouns	δείξει αὐτῷ	1		Here, **he** refers to God the Father and **him** refers to Jesus the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father will reveal to the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	5	20	zlr7	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων&ἔργα	1	you will be amazed	Here, **works** refers specifically to miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater miracles than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	20	y4yy	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων&ἔργα	1		Here, **these** refers to the miracles that Jesus had already performed by the time he spoke these words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater works than these miracles I have already performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	21	s6te	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ&Υἱὸς	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	5	21	xzu4	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιεῖ&οὓς θέλει ζῳοποιεῖ	1	life	The phrase **makes them alive** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “makes them have eternal life … makes whom he desires have eternal life” (2) physical life, in which case it would repeat the idea of “raises the dead” in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “makes them live again … makes alive again whom he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	20	zlr7	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων & ἔργα	1	you will be amazed	Here, **works** refers specifically to miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater miracles than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	20	y4yy	figs-explicit	μείζονα τούτων & ἔργα	1		Here, **these** refers to the miracles that Jesus had already performed by the time he spoke these words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater works than these miracles I have already performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	21	s6te	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ & Υἱὸς	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	21	xzu4	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιεῖ & οὓς θέλει ζῳοποιεῖ	1	life	The phrase **makes them alive** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “makes them have eternal life … makes whom he desires have eternal life” (2) physical life, in which case it would repeat the idea of “raises the dead” in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “makes them live again … makes alive again whom he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	21	c96p	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς	1		As in the previous two verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “I, the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	22	b2l6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ&τῷ Υἱῷ	1	For the Father judges no one, but he has given all judgment to the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	22	b2l6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ & τῷ Υἱῷ	1	For the Father judges no one, but he has given all judgment to the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	22	sc4t	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν κρίσιν	1		Here, **judgment** refers to the legal authority to judge people as guilty or innocent. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power to judge others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	5	22	dtxw	figs-123person	τῷ Υἱῷ	1		As in the previous three verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	23	iqn7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν&τὸν Πατέρα. ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν, οὐ τιμᾷ τὸν Πατέρα	1		**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	5	23	p2kj	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν&ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν	1		As in the previous four verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	5	23	iqn7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν & τὸν Πατέρα. ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν, οὐ τιμᾷ τὸν Πατέρα	1		**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	23	p2kj	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν & ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν	1		As in the previous four verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	23	j7vc	figs-explicit	τὸν Πατέρα, τὸν πέμψαντα αὐτόν	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, the Father who sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	24	w6wu	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	5	24	rsqh	figs-you	λέγω ὑμῖν	1		Since Jesus is speaking to a group of Jewish leaders, **you** is plural here and through [5:47](../05/47.md). If your language does not have a different form for plural **you**, you can use another way to express it. Alternate translation: “I say to you Jews” or “I say to you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -632,13 +632,13 @@ JHN	5	25	kosy	figs-metonymy	ἔρχεται ὥρα	1		See the discussion of **a
 JHN	5	25	l2xy	figs-explicit	οἱ νεκροὶ	1		Here, **the dead** could refer to: (1) people who are spiritually dead. Alternate translation: “the spiritually dead” (2) people who are physically dead. Alternate translation: “the physically dead” (3) both the spiritually dead and physically dead. In this case, **an hour that is coming** would refer to the future resurrection of the dead while **is now** would refer to those spiritually dead people who were listening to Jesus when he spoke these words. Alternate translation: “the spiritually dead and physically dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	25	d81y	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	25	croa	figs-123person	τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “of me, the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	25	voy8	figs-explicit	ἀκούσουσιν&οἱ ἀκούσαντες	1		Here, **heard** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated “hearing” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “will heed … those who have heeded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	25	voy8	figs-explicit	ἀκούσουσιν & οἱ ἀκούσαντες	1		Here, **heard** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated “hearing” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “will heed … those who have heeded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	25	k1ii	figs-explicit	ζήσουσιν	1		This could refer to: (1) having eternal life. Alternate translation: “will have eternal life” (2) physical life, as in being resurrected after death. Alternate translation: “will become alive again” (3) both eternal life and physical life. Alternate translation: “will have eternal life and become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	26	x136	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ&τῷ Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	5	26	f5vq	figs-explicit	ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ&ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	life	Here, the phrases **has life** and **have life** refer to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the source of life … the right to be the source of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	26	yv7o	figs-123person	τῷ Υἱῷ&ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	5	27	pr1c	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ&ἐστίν	1	the Father has given the Son authority to carry out judgment	The first occurrence of **he** refers to God the Father, but **him** and the second occurrence of **he** refer to the Son of Man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father gave the Son … the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	5	27	xlln	figs-123person	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ&Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	5	26	x136	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ & τῷ Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	26	f5vq	figs-explicit	ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ & ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	life	Here, the phrases **has life** and **have life** refer to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the source of life … the right to be the source of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	5	26	yv7o	figs-123person	τῷ Υἱῷ & ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	5	27	pr1c	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐστίν	1	the Father has given the Son authority to carry out judgment	The first occurrence of **he** refers to God the Father, but **him** and the second occurrence of **he** refer to the Son of Man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father gave the Son … the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	27	xlln	figs-123person	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν	1		As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	27	h9em	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαν ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κρίσιν ποιεῖν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authority** and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “he authorized him to act as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	5	27	g58f	figs-explicit	Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου	1	Son of Man	See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	28	sr8j	figs-explicit	μὴ θαυμάζετε τοῦτο	1	Do not be amazed at this	Here, **this** refers to the Son of Man’s authority to give eternal life and to carry out judgment, as stated in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not be amazed that the Father has given the Son this authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -664,8 +664,8 @@ JHN	5	35	w4w3	figs-metaphor	ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιό
 JHN	5	35	o2j5	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ	1		Jesus uses the word **light** to refer to John the Baptist’s teaching. In the way that light enables people to see in the dark, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “in his teaching” or “in his teaching that was like a light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	5	35	i0l5	figs-metonymy	πρὸς ὥραν	1		Here, **hour** refers to a short amount of time. It does not mean a 60-minute period of time or a specific point in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	5	36	ll75		γὰρ	1		Here, **for** indicates that what follows is an explanation of the “testimony” Jesus has mentioned in the previous clause. Alternate translation: “that testimony is”
-JHN	5	36	rt6j		τὰ&ἔργα	1	the works that the Father has given me to accomplish … that the Father has sent me	Here, **works** could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “the miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “the miracles and teaching”
-JHN	5	36	dvr9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ&ὅτι ὁ Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	5	36	rt6j		τὰ & ἔργα	1	the works that the Father has given me to accomplish … that the Father has sent me	Here, **works** could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “the miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “the miracles and teaching”
+JHN	5	36	dvr9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ & ὅτι ὁ Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	5	36	yz3u	figs-personification	αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιῶ, μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	the very works that I do, testify about me	Here Jesus is speaking of **works** as though they were a person who could **testify** about who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this plainly. Alternate translation: “the very works that I do—are evidence for who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	5	37	p157	figs-rpronouns	ὁ πέμψας με Πατὴρ, ἐκεῖνος μεμαρτύρηκεν	1	The Father who sent me has himself testified	The reflexive pronoun **himself** emphasizes that it is the Father, not someone less important, who has testified about who Jesus is. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than the Father himself who sent me has testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	5	37	qjg1	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με Πατὴρ	1		Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ JHN	5	38	rc2n	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Here, **w
 JHN	5	38	dfn1	figs-metaphor	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔχετε ἐν ὑμῖν μένοντα	1	You do not have his word remaining in you	Here Jesus is speaking of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could remain inside people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not live according to his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	5	38	uj90	figs-123person	ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος, τούτῳ	1		This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “me, the one whom he has sent, me whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	5	39	xi22	figs-explicit	ἐν αὐταῖς ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν	1	in them you have eternal life	Some Jews in Jesus’ time believed that a person could earn their way to heaven by studying the Scriptures and doing good deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will get eternal life if you study them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	5	39	bmc3	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐταῖς&ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ	1		In this verse, **them**, **these**, and **the ones** all refer to the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state some of these words explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the Scriptures … these Scriptures are the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	5	39	bmc3	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐταῖς & ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ	1		In this verse, **them**, **these**, and **the ones** all refer to the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state some of these words explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the Scriptures … these Scriptures are the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	5	39	fzbf	figs-personification	ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ ἐμοῦ	1		Here Jesus is speaking of the Scriptures as though they were a person who is **testifying** about who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this plainly. Alternate translation: “these indicate who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	5	40	dzm2	figs-explicit	οὐ θέλετε ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1	you are not willing to come to me	Here, **come** does not mean to merely come near Jesus, but it means to follow him and be his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are not willing to come and by my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	5	40	xuxj	figs-explicit	ζωὴν ἔχητε	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ JHN	5	44	g7qd	figs-ellipsis	πιστεῦσαι	1	believe	John records Jesus lea
 JHN	5	44	rn78		δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες	1		Here, **receiving** could refer to: (1) the time they are receiving glory. Alternate translation: “while receiving glory from one another” (2) a causal statement. Alternate translation: “since receiving glory from one another”
 JHN	5	45	kk5q	figs-metonymy	ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε	1		**Moses** here could refer to: (1) the person named Moses who gave the Israelites the law of Moses. (2) the law of Moses itself. Alternate translation: “Moses accuses you in the law, the very law in which you have hoped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	5	46	m9sq	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ γὰρ ἐπιστεύετε Μωϋσεῖ, ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί	1		John records Jesus making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jewish leaders do not truly believe Moses. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you must not believe Moses since you do not believe me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-JHN	5	47	kxa6	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&οὐ πιστεύετε	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	5	47	kxa6	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & οὐ πιστεύετε	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	5	47	b8dd	figs-rquestion	πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε?	1	If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words?	Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	5	47	x7h9	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν	1	my words	Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	intro	xe4t			0		# John 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)\n2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)\n3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### King\n\nThe king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.\n\n## Important Metaphors in this Chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nBread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n\n### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood\n\nWhen Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Parenthetical ideas\n\nSeveral times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -699,13 +699,13 @@ JHN	6	2	ebel	grammar-collectivenouns	ὄχλος πολύς	1		See how you trans
 JHN	6	2	g6zm		σημεῖα	1	signs	See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
 JHN	6	4	ri55	writing-background	ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ Πάσχα, ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Now the Passover, the Jewish festival, was near	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when the events happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This event took place near the time of the Passover, the festival of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	5	thts	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1		**Then** here could mean: (1) what follows is the next event in the story. Alternate translation: “Next” (2) what follows is the result of what happened in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-JHN	6	5	cxta	figs-idiom	ἐπάρας&τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς	1		Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:35](../04/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	6	5	cxta	figs-idiom	ἐπάρας & τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς	1		Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:35](../04/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	5	v4hi	grammar-collectivenouns	πολὺς ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	6	5	pzhc	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	6	6	cj58	writing-background	τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγεν πειράζων αὐτόν; αὐτὸς γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἔμελλεν ποιεῖν	1	But Jesus said this to test Philip, for he himself knew what he was going to do	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to explain why Jesus asked Philip where to buy bread. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now he said this at that time to test him, for he himself knew what he was going to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	6	sr0p	grammar-connect-logic-goal	πειράζων αὐτόν	1		Here John is stating the purpose for which Jesus asked Philip the question in the previous verse. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he could test Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	6	6	rrco	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1		Here, **him** refers to Philip. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	6	6	uk6t	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&ᾔδει	1	for he himself knew	Here, John uses the reflexive pronoun **himself** to make clear that the word **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+JHN	6	6	uk6t	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & ᾔδει	1	for he himself knew	Here, John uses the reflexive pronoun **himself** to make clear that the word **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	6	7	z3gj	translate-bmoney	διακοσίων δηναρίων ἄρτοι	1	Two hundred denarii worth of bread	The word **denarii** is the plural form of “denarius.” It was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “The amount of bread that cost 200 days’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 JHN	6	8	i0cw	translate-names	Σίμωνος Πέτρου	1		See how you translated the name **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	6	8	diq0	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -724,9 +724,9 @@ JHN	6	12	leym	figs-activepassive	ἐνεπλήσθησαν	1		If your language d
 JHN	6	12	z5o3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	6	12	qp1n	figs-quotations	λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, συναγάγετε	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he says to his disciples to gather up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 JHN	6	13	h64z	translate-unknown	κοφίνους	1		Here, **baskets** refers to large baskets that were used for carrying food and goods while traveling. If your language has a word for this kind of basket, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “large traveling baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	6	14	d7lp	figs-gendernotations	οἱ&ἄνθρωποι	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+JHN	6	14	d7lp	figs-gendernotations	οἱ & ἄνθρωποι	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, John uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	6	14	gmat		ἰδόντες ὃ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον	1		This clause could refer to: (1) the time that they said the words which follow in the verse. Alternate translation: “at the time they saw the sign he did” (2) the reason that they said what follows in the verse. Alternate translation: “because they saw the sign he did”
-JHN	6	14	nlw1	figs-explicit	ὃ&σημεῖον	1	this sign	Here, **sign** refers to the Jesus miraculously feeding the large crowd that was described in verses [5–13](../06/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sign of miraculously feeding the large crowd that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	14	nlw1	figs-explicit	ὃ & σημεῖον	1	this sign	Here, **sign** refers to the Jesus miraculously feeding the large crowd that was described in verses [5–13](../06/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sign of miraculously feeding the large crowd that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	14	g8zb	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	the prophet	Here, **the Prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Prophet whom God said he would send into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	15	rfbr		γνοὺς ὅτι μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσθαι	1		This clause could refer to: (1) the time that Jesus decided to withdraw. Alternate translation: “at the time he realized that they were about to come” (2) the reason that Jesus decided to withdraw. Alternate translation: “because he realized that they were about to come”
 JHN	6	15	hg4f	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς μόνος	1		Here John uses the reflexive pronoun **himself** to emphasize that Jesus was completely alone. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “completely alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -735,12 +735,12 @@ JHN	6	16	tmzf	figs-explicit	τὴν θάλασσαν	1		Here and throughout this
 JHN	6	17	fkj2	writing-background	καὶ σκοτία ἤδη ἐγεγόνει, καὶ οὔπω ἐληλύθει πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	It was dark by this time, and Jesus had not yet come to them	In these clauses John provides background information about the situation in order to help readers understand what happens in this story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	6	18	q5f7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἥ τε θάλασσα ἀνέμου μεγάλου πνέοντος διηγείρετο	1		The first clause about the wind indicates the reason the **sea was being aroused** in the second clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because a strong wind was blowing, the sea was being aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	6	18	pms3	figs-metaphor	διηγείρετο	1		John uses **aroused** to refer to the wind causing the sea to become turbulent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was being stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	6	18	z381	figs-activepassive	ἥ&θάλασσα&διηγείρετο	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was causing the sea to be aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	6	18	z381	figs-activepassive	ἥ & θάλασσα & διηγείρετο	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was causing the sea to be aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	6	19	xx7d	translate-unknown	ἐληλακότες	1	they had rowed	The boats used on the Sea of Galilee usually had positions for two, four, or six people who sat together and **rowed** with oars on each side of the boat. If your readers would not be familiar with rowed boats, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having propelled the boat through the water by using oars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	6	19	sgf4	translate-bdistance	ὡς σταδίους εἴκοσι πέντε ἢ τριάκοντα	1	about twenty-five or thirty stadia	The word **stadia** is the plural of “stadium,” which is a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about four and a half or five and a half kilometers” or “about three or three and a half miles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 JHN	6	19	diko	figs-pastforfuture	θεωροῦσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	6	20	tjg9	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	6	21	qtw5	figs-explicit	ἤθελον&λαβεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον	1	they were willing to receive him into the boat	It is implied that Jesus got **into the boat**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gladly received him into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	21	qtw5	figs-explicit	ἤθελον & λαβεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον	1	they were willing to receive him into the boat	It is implied that Jesus got **into the boat**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gladly received him into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	22	v8cn	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	6	22	ho60	figs-explicit	πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης	1		Here, **the other side of the sea** refers to the side of the Sea of Galilee where Jesus had fed the crowd. It does not refer to the side of the Sea of Galilee that he and his disciples arrived at in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the side of the sea where Jesus performed the miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	22	mhjh	figs-explicit	πλοιάριον ἄλλο οὐκ ἦν ἐκεῖ, εἰ μὴ ἕν	1		Here, **one** refers to the boat that the disciples had taken to cross the Sea of Galilee. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “there was no other boat there except the one that the disciples had taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -758,11 +758,11 @@ JHN	6	26	l9ws		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02
 JHN	6	26	yef5	figs-activepassive	ἐχορτάσθητε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “filled yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	6	27	hmfw	figs-extrainfo	τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Here Jesus is using the word **food** to refer to himself, because he is the source of salvation, the One who gives **eternal life** to all who trust him. Jesus lasts forever, and so does the **eternal life** that he gives. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	27	plfi	figs-ellipsis	τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		John records Jesus leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “work for the food that endures to eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	6	27	w74i	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&δώσει; τοῦτον	1		These two expressions are all refer to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will give … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	6	27	w74i	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & δώσει; τοῦτον	1		These two expressions are all refer to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will give … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	27	czb3	figs-distinguish	ἣν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑμῖν δώσει	1	eternal life which the Son of Man will give you	This phrase could give further information about: (1) “the food that endures to eternal life.” Alternate translation: “that is, the food the Son of Man will give you” (2) “eternal life.” Alternate translation: “that is, the life the Son of Man will give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-JHN	6	27	b94w	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&ὁ Πατὴρ&ὁ Θεός	1	Son of Man … God the Father	**Son of Man** and **God the Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	6	27	b94w	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & ὁ Πατὴρ & ὁ Θεός	1	Son of Man … God the Father	**Son of Man** and **God the Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	27	bric	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	27	gf9q	figs-idiom	τοῦτον&ἐσφράγισεν	1		To “**set** a **seal**” on something means to place a mark on it in order to show to whom it belongs or to certify its authenticity. Here, the phrase is used as an idiom and could mean: (1) that the Father approves of the Son in every way. Alternate translation: “has affirmed his approval of him” (2) that the Son belongs to the Father. Alternate translation: “has affirmed that the Son belongs to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JHN	6	27	gf9q	figs-idiom	τοῦτον & ἐσφράγισεν	1		To “**set** a **seal**” on something means to place a mark on it in order to show to whom it belongs or to certify its authenticity. Here, the phrase is used as an idiom and could mean: (1) that the Father approves of the Son in every way. Alternate translation: “has affirmed his approval of him” (2) that the Son belongs to the Father. Alternate translation: “has affirmed that the Son belongs to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	29	he3q	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα πιστεύητε εἰς ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, Jesus says which **work** one must do in order to receive “the food that endures to eternal life” that was mentioned in verse [27](../06/27.md). This **work** is not any kind of labor or deed that can be done, but it is faith in Jesus, which is a gift from God ([Ephesians 2:8–9](../eph/02/08.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is the work of God that is required to receive the food that endures to eternal life: that you believe in the one whom that one has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	29	aevl	figs-123person	ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	29	z1u9	writing-pronouns	ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -780,8 +780,8 @@ JHN	6	32	xwqx	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν	1		T
 JHN	6	32	ega4	figs-extrainfo	ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν τὸν ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸν ἀληθινόν	1	it is my Father who is giving you the true bread from heaven	Here Jesus is using **true bread** to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	32	c73l	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	32	an7w	figs-synecdoche	ἄρτον	2		See how you translated the word **bread** earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	6	33	ri0m	figs-extrainfo	ὁ&ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1		Here Jesus is using **bread** to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-JHN	6	33	sajx	figs-possession	ὁ&ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This phrase could mean: (1) the bread came from God. Alternate translation: “the bread that God gives” (2) the bread belongs to God. Alternate translation: “God’s bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	6	33	ri0m	figs-extrainfo	ὁ & ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1		Here Jesus is using **bread** to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	6	33	sajx	figs-possession	ὁ & ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This phrase could mean: (1) the bread came from God. Alternate translation: “the bread that God gives” (2) the bread belongs to God. Alternate translation: “God’s bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	6	33	sfbk	figs-extrainfo	ὁ καταβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1		This phrase refers to Jesus. However, the crowd does not understand this and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	33	rrf5	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	gives life to the world	Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	33	k897	figs-metonymy	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	the world	Here, **the world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -793,14 +793,14 @@ JHN	6	35	hvpi	figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to eterna
 JHN	6	35	lgpu	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε	1		Jesus speaks about the person who trusts in him by continuing the metaphor of food that he began in verse [32](../06/32.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one coming to me will be like a person who never gets hungry, and the one believing in me will be like a person who never gets thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	6	35	fpgo	figs-doublet	ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε	1		These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that anyone who trusts in Jesus will never lack spiritual satisfaction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “The one who trusts me will certainly never lack spiritual satisfaction again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	6	35	a7my	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ	1		Here, **coming** does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The one coming to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	35	kh35	figs-litotes	οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ&οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε	1		John records Jesus using a figure of speech twice in the same verse to express a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “will always be full … will always have his thirst quenched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+JHN	6	35	kh35	figs-litotes	οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ & οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε	1		John records Jesus using a figure of speech twice in the same verse to express a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “will always be full … will always have his thirst quenched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 JHN	6	37	vpz8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	6	37	n6bk	figs-explicit	πρὸς ἐμὲ ἥξει&τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρός ἐμὲ	1		In this verse, **come** and **coming** do not mean to merely come near Jesus, but they mean to believe in him and be his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will come to be my disciples … the one coming to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	37	n6bk	figs-explicit	πρὸς ἐμὲ ἥξει & τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρός ἐμὲ	1		In this verse, **come** and **coming** do not mean to merely come near Jesus, but they mean to believe in him and be his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will come to be my disciples … the one coming to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	37	i92s	figs-litotes	τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρός ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ ἐκβάλω ἔξω	1	he who comes to me I will certainly not throw out	Jesus is using a figure of speech here to expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I will keep everyone who comes to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 JHN	6	38	z84i	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Connecting Statement:	**For** introduces the reason why Jesus will not throw out anyone who comes to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	6	38	cpi9	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1	him who sent me	Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	39	uqjy	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1		Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	39	x5c1	figs-litotes	πᾶν ὃ&μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	I would lose not one of all those	Jesus is using a figure of speech here to expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I should keep all of them whom he has given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+JHN	6	39	x5c1	figs-litotes	πᾶν ὃ & μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	I would lose not one of all those	Jesus is using a figure of speech here to expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I should keep all of them whom he has given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 JHN	6	39	p8s0	writing-pronouns	μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ	1		Here, **it** refers to the whole group of believers as a whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly or use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “I would not lose from the group of believers … but will raise that group up” or “I would not lose from them … but will raise them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	6	39	j7q6	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ	1	will raise them up	Here, to **raise** up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will cause them to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	39	npma	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -819,7 +819,7 @@ JHN	6	44	zis9	figs-explicit	ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1		Here, **come** does
 JHN	6	44	jb73	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	44	k7ld	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	44	rr2m		ἑλκύσῃ αὐτόν	1	draws	Alternate translation: “would pull him” or “would drag him”
-JHN	6	44	um43	figs-gendernotations	αὐτόν&αὐτὸν	1		Although the pronoun **him** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+JHN	6	44	um43	figs-gendernotations	αὐτόν & αὐτὸν	1		Although the pronoun **him** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	6	44	s6b5	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν	1	raise him up	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 40](../06/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	44	g2ia	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) See how you translated this phrase in verse [40](../06/40.md). Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	45	j1af	figs-activepassive	ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις	1	It is written in the prophets	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ JHN	6	45	wnjr	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐν τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ 
 JHN	6	45	fken	figs-activepassive	ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will teach all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	6	45	orme	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	45	xmzr	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται πρὸς ἐμέ	1		Here, **comes** does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “comes to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	46	i9mp	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα&ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	6	46	i9mp	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα & ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	46	lcz8	figs-123person	ὁ ὢν παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ; οὗτος ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα	1		John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the who is from God—I have seen the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	47	de5y	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	6	47	t8lk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ πιστεύων	1	he who believes	John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me” or “the one believing that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ JHN	6	48	iih2	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς
 JHN	6	49	uh76	figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν	1	Your fathers	Jesus uses **fathers** to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers” or “Your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	49	mr3u	figs-explicit	ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ τὸ μάννα	1	died	See how you translated this expression in verse [31](../06/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	50	sa53	figs-exmetaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ, καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	This is the bread	Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to express that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one must **eat** **bread** to sustain physical life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am this bread that comes down from heaven, just as one must eat bread to live, so must one believe in me in order to not die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-JHN	6	50	y1x9	figs-123person	οὗτός ἐστιν&αὐτοῦ	1		John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	6	50	y1x9	figs-123person	οὗτός ἐστιν & αὐτοῦ	1		John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	50	gse5	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἄρτος	1		See how you translated this term in verse [48](../06/48.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	50	lfwm	figs-metaphor	ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ	1		Here Jesus uses **eat** to refer to believing in him for salvation. What Jesus said plainly in verse [47](../06/47.md) he says here. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “might believe in me as one eats bread to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	50	v212	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	not die	Here Jesus uses **die** to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might not die spiritually” or “might not experience spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -848,8 +848,8 @@ JHN	6	51	k4bo	figs-metonymy	σάρξ μού	1		Here, John records Jesus using **
 JHN	6	51	ee9d	figs-extrainfo	ὁ ἄρτος	2		Here Jesus is using the **bread** metaphor slightly differently from how he has used it previously. Here it refers specifically to his physical body, which he would sacrifice on the cross to pay for the sins of those who believe in him. Since Jesus says this explicitly at the end of the verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	51	c5z3	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the eternal life of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	51	nb41	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς	1	for the life of the world	Here, **the world** is used to refer to the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for the life of the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	6	52	v6g7	figs-synecdoche	οὖν&οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	6	52	q5nw	writing-quotations	ἐμάχοντο&πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “then the Jews began to argue among themselves, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	6	52	v6g7	figs-synecdoche	οὖν & οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	6	52	q5nw	writing-quotations	ἐμάχοντο & πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “then the Jews began to argue among themselves, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	6	52	fj5p	figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται οὗτος ἡμῖν δοῦναι τὴν σάρκα φαγεῖν?	1	How can this man give us his flesh to eat?	Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they are reacting negatively to what Jesus has said about **his flesh**. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no way that this one is able to give us his flesh to eat!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	6	52	llc0	figs-metonymy	τὴν σάρκα	1		Here, John records the Jews using **flesh** to refer to Jesus’ whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	53	q8jl	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -862,20 +862,20 @@ JHN	6	54	hc5d	figs-extrainfo	ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ
 JHN	6	54	etdh	figs-doublet	ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα, ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		As in the previous verse, these two phrases, **eat the flesh** and **drink his blood**, mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the one eating my flesh and drinking my blood surely has eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	6	54	ym6w	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν	1	raise him up	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 40](../06/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	6	54	qia5	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	at the last day	Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) See how you translated this phrase in verse [39](../06/39.md). Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	55	tw5g	figs-extrainfo	σάρξ μου&αἷμά μου	1		Here Jesus is using the phrases **my flesh** and **my blood** to refer to believing in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-JHN	6	55	cik2	figs-extrainfo	ἡ&σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις	1	my flesh is true food … my blood is true drink	Here Jesus is using the phrases **true food** and **true drink** to say that he, Jesus, gives life to those who trust in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-JHN	6	55	j4ud	figs-doublet	ἡ&σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις	1		As in the previous two verses, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “my flesh is indeed true food, and my blood is indeed true drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+JHN	6	55	tw5g	figs-extrainfo	σάρξ μου & αἷμά μου	1		Here Jesus is using the phrases **my flesh** and **my blood** to refer to believing in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	6	55	cik2	figs-extrainfo	ἡ & σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις	1	my flesh is true food … my blood is true drink	Here Jesus is using the phrases **true food** and **true drink** to say that he, Jesus, gives life to those who trust in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	6	55	j4ud	figs-doublet	ἡ & σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις	1		As in the previous two verses, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “my flesh is indeed true food, and my blood is indeed true drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	6	56	eaoy	figs-extrainfo	ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα	1		See how you translated this phrase in verse [54](../06/54.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	56	u3w4	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐμοὶ μένει	1	remains in me	Here, and frequently in John’s Gospel, **remains in** indicates being united in a continuous personal relationship with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. See the discussion of this expression in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “has a close relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	56	rjpa	figs-ellipsis	κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Here, John records Jesus leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be confusing in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I remain in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	57	y334	figs-explicit	ὁ ζῶν Πατὴρ	1		Here, **living** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. This is also how Jesus used **living** in verse [51](../06/51.md). See how you translated **living** in verse [51](../06/51). Alternate translation: “the Father who causes life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	57	krma	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ&Πατέρα	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	6	57	krma	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ & Πατέρα	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	6	57	oczm	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν Πατέρα	1		Here, **live** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. It does not mean to merely be alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I cause life because of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	57	nhp9	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν Πατέρα	1		Here, **because of the Father** indicates the reason why Jesus has the ability to cause life. God the Father gave Jesus the ability to cause others to live. Jesus explained this concept in [5:25–26](../05/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I cause life because the Father has enabled me to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	57	dba2	figs-extrainfo	καὶ ὁ τρώγων με	1	so he who eats me	Jesus is using **eating me** to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. See how you translated similar expressions in verses [53–56](../06/53.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	57	e6op	figs-explicit	κἀκεῖνος ζήσει δι’ ἐμέ	1		Here, **live** refers to having eternal life. It does not refer to being the source of life, as **living** and **live** are used previously in this verse. If this shift in meaning might confuse your readers, you could state the difference explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will also have eternal life because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	58	m2nz	figs-123person	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς	1	This is the bread that has come down from heaven	John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	6	58	kv16	figs-extrainfo	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος&τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον	1		Jesus is continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer to himself. Just as **bread** is necessary for our physical life, Jesus is necessary for our spiritual life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	6	58	kv16	figs-extrainfo	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος & τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον	1		Jesus is continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer to himself. Just as **bread** is necessary for our physical life, Jesus is necessary for our spiritual life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	6	58	i9ih	figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες	1	the fathers	Here Jesus uses**fathers** to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ancestors” or “the forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	6	58	r174	figs-ellipsis	οὐ καθὼς ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθανον	1		John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “this bread is not just as the bread that the fathers ate and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	58	lb07	figs-explicit	ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθανον	1		The phrase **ate and died** does not mean that the people died immediately after eating the bread. If this wording would confuse your readers, you could translate it in a way that shows a time gap between eating and drinking. Alternate translation: “the fathers ate and still died at a later time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -888,21 +888,21 @@ JHN	6	60	wf67	figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1		Here, **wo
 JHN	6	60	lmcv	figs-explicit	σκληρός	1		Here, **hard** refers to something that causes a negative reaction because it is harsh or unpleasant. It does not refer to something that is difficult to understand, but something that is difficult to accept. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “hard to accept” or “offensive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	60	cp3k	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν?	1		Here the disciples use the question form for emphasis. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “no one is able to listen to it!” or “it is too hard to listen to!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	6	61	rn8i	figs-explicit	εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	Does this offend you?	This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what his disciples were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	61	g3z7	figs-explicit	περὶ τούτου&τοῦτο	1		In this verse, **this** refers to what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these teachings … what I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	61	g3z7	figs-explicit	περὶ τούτου & τοῦτο	1		In this verse, **this** refers to what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these teachings … what I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	61	j2gj	figs-you	ὑμᾶς	1		Here and throughout [verses 61–71](../06/61.md) **you** is plural and refers to Jesus’ disciples. If your language distinguishes between singular and plural second person pronouns, you should use the plural form of **you**. Alternate translation: “you disciples of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	6	62	r33r	figs-ellipsis	ἐὰν&θεωρῆτε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον?	1		Here, John records Jesus using only one part of a conditional sentence. He leaves out the second part of the conditional sentence for emphasis. Many languages need to have both parts of a conditional sentence in order to make the sentence complete. If this is true for your language, you could supply the second clause from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if you would see the Son of Man going up to where he was before, would it offend you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	6	62	r33r	figs-ellipsis	ἐὰν & θεωρῆτε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον?	1		Here, John records Jesus using only one part of a conditional sentence. He leaves out the second part of the conditional sentence for emphasis. Many languages need to have both parts of a conditional sentence in order to make the sentence complete. If this is true for your language, you could supply the second clause from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if you would see the Son of Man going up to where he was before, would it offend you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	6	62	v4tr	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον	1		Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	6	62	ibnq	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	62	uxe0	figs-explicit	ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον	1		This phrase refers to heaven, where Jesus was **before** he came down to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to heaven, where I used to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	63	nx51	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν	1		Here, **making alive** refers to giving eternal life, not physical life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Spirit is the one giving eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	63	ygqi	figs-explicit	ἡ σὰρξ	1		Here, **the flesh** could refer to: (1) human nature, as in the UST. (2) Jesus’ body. Alternate translation: “my flesh” (3) both human nature and Jesus’ body. “your nature and my flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	63	y558	figs-explicit	οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν	1	profits	Here, **profit** means to be beneficial or useful. It does not mean to earn money. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “has no benefit” or “is no help at all”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	6	63	fy9p	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα&ζωή ἐστιν	1		Here, **words** stands for the teachings that Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The teachings … these teachings are life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	6	63	fy9p	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα & ζωή ἐστιν	1		Here, **words** stands for the teachings that Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The teachings … these teachings are life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	63	plw8		πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1		This could mean: (1) from the Spirit. Alternate translation: “are from the Spirit” (2) about the Spirit. Alternate translation: “are about the Spirit”
 JHN	6	63	gb29		καὶ ζωή ἐστιν	1		This could mean: (1) give life. Alternate translation: “and they give life” (2) about life. Alternate translation: “and they are about life”
 JHN	6	63	dz25	figs-explicit	ζωή	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	64	ey1e	writing-background	ᾔδει γὰρ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὁ Ἰησοῦς, τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ παραδώσων αὐτόν	1	For Jesus knew from the beginning who were the ones … who it was who would betray him	In this sentence John gives background information to explain why Jesus said the earlier part of this verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus said this because he knew from the start who did not believe and who would later betray him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	6	64	rlhr	figs-explicit	οἳ οὐ πιστεύουσιν&οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες	1		The implied object of **believe** and **believing** is Jesus or Jesus’ teaching. If your language requires an object for these words, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who do not believe in me … the ones not believing in me” or “who do not believe what I say … the ones not believing what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	6	64	rlhr	figs-explicit	οἳ οὐ πιστεύουσιν & οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες	1		The implied object of **believe** and **believing** is Jesus or Jesus’ teaching. If your language requires an object for these words, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who do not believe in me … the ones not believing in me” or “who do not believe what I say … the ones not believing what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	65	e9ex	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to the information Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because of the disbelief I have just told you about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	65	c3cl	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐλθεῖν πρός με	1	no one can come to me unless it is granted to him by the Father	See how you translated the identical phrase in verse [44](../06/44.md). Alternate translation: “no one is able to come to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	6	65	ckfz	writing-pronouns	ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronoun **it** refers to the ability to come to Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ability to come to me would be have been granted to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -943,17 +943,17 @@ JHN	7	6	n5bj	figs-metonymy	ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμὸς οὔπω πάρεσ
 JHN	7	6	z9gv	figs-yousingular	ὁ ὑμέτερος	1		All instances of “you” and **your** in verses [6–8](../07/06.md) are plural. They only refer to Jesus’ brothers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 JHN	7	6	shs9		ὁ δὲ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος πάντοτέ ἐστιν ἕτοιμος	1	your time is always ready	Alternate translation: “but any time is good for you”
 JHN	7	7	h7kv	figs-metonymy	οὐ δύναται ὁ κόσμος μισεῖν ὑμᾶς	1	The world cannot hate you	**The world** here refers to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All the people in the world are not able to hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	7	7	s92r	writing-pronouns	μισεῖ&περὶ αὐτοῦ&τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1		In this verse, **it** refers to the people in **the world**. If you translated **the world** with a plural noun, then you should change these pronouns to plural form as well. Alternate translation: “they hate&about them&their works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	7	7	s92r	writing-pronouns	μισεῖ & περὶ αὐτοῦ & τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1		In this verse, **it** refers to the people in **the world**. If you translated **the world** with a plural noun, then you should change these pronouns to plural form as well. Alternate translation: “they hate & about them & their works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	7	7	e5hq		ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ πονηρά ἐστιν	1	I testify about it that its works are evil	Alternate translation: “I tell them that what they are doing is evil”
 JHN	7	8	ax6v	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε	1		John records Jesus saying **go up** to refer to going to Jerusalem, because that city is at a higher elevation than Galilee, which is where Jesus and his brothers were at this time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate where they would go. Alternate translation: “You go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	8	evk6	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐμὸς καιρὸς οὔπω πεπλήρωται	1	my time has not yet been fulfilled	This phrase means the same as “My time is not yet come” in verse [6](../07/06.md). See how you translated this phrase there. Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to go to Jerusalem” or “Now is not the right time for me to publicly reveal myself as the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	10	jz6l	translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	when his brothers had gone up to the festival	See how you translated this phrase in verse [3](../07/03.md). Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	7	10	z4ym	figs-explicit	καὶ αὐτὸς ἀνέβη	1	he also went up	See how you translated “go up” in verse [8](../07/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	10	rw5v	figs-doublet	οὐ φανερῶς, ἀλλὰ ὡς ἐν κρυπτῷ	1	not publicly but in secret	These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus did not want to attract public attention in Jerusalem. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “very secretly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	7	11	i6cl	figs-synecdoche	οἱ&Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	7	11	i6cl	figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	7	11	er5u	figs-explicit	ποῦ ἐστιν ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **that one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “Where is that so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	12	qc8f	figs-explicit	γογγυσμὸς	1		Although the word translated **murmuring** usually refers to grumbling or complaining, here it refers to speaking quietly, without a negative meaning. Some people in **the crowd** were discussing who Jesus was and didn’t want the religious leaders to hear them. If your word for **murmuring** only has a negative connotation in your language, use a different neutral expression. Alternate translation: “quiet discussion” or “whispering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	12	glq8	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῖς ὄχλοις&τὸν ὄχλον	1		Here, **crowds** refers to several different groups of people, while **crowd** refers to a group of people in general. See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the groups of people … the group of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+JHN	7	12	glq8	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῖς ὄχλοις & τὸν ὄχλον	1		Here, **crowds** refers to several different groups of people, while **crowd** refers to a group of people in general. See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the groups of people … the group of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	7	12	c27a	figs-metaphor	πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον	1	he leads the crowds astray	Here the people use **leads** **astray** to refer to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he misleads the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	7	13	yyiv	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that the people had for the Jewish leaders. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of their fear that the Jews would harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	7	13	n8bb	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -964,14 +964,14 @@ JHN	7	15	obtt	figs-explicit	ἐθαύμαζον	1		The word translated **marvele
 JHN	7	15	e7ve	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἶδεν, μὴ μεμαθηκώς?	1		The Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they were surprised and annoyed by how much knowledge Jesus had about Scripture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He certainly cannot know so much about the scriptures, not being educated!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	15	k8wh	figs-explicit	οὗτος	1		Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	15	oqzy	figs-explicit	μὴ μεμαθηκώς	1		Here, the Jewish leaders use **educated** to refer to receiving a Jewish religious education, which would include studying the Hebrew scriptures and Jewish religious traditions. This does not mean that they thought Jesus didn’t know how to read or write. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “not being trained in our scriptures and doctrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	15	z0db	writing-quotations	ἐθαύμαζον&οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews marveled, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	7	15	z0db	writing-quotations	ἐθαύμαζον & οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews marveled, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	7	16	h7mr	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με	1	of him who sent me	Here, **the one having sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	7	17	vlcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν&ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is with God’s authority … only with my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	17	vlcd	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν & ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is with God’s authority … only with my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	18	u5h6	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of what the person is speaking. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	18	z5bx	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰδίαν ζητεῖ; ὁ δὲ ζητῶν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτὸν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “seeks to make himself glorious, but the one seeking to make the one who sent him glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	18	xf9j	figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he is not wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	19	c7xq	figs-rquestion	οὐ Μωϋσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὸν νόμον, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον?	1	Did not Moses give you the law?	Jesus is using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It was Moses who gave you the law, but none of you obeys the law!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	7	19	c85j	grammar-collectivenouns	τὸν νόμον&ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον	1		See how you translated **the law** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+JHN	7	19	c85j	grammar-collectivenouns	τὸν νόμον & ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον	1		See how you translated **the law** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	7	19	iwv8		ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον	1	keeps the law	Here, **does the law** means to keep, follow, or obey **the law**. If this use of **does** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obeys the law”
 JHN	7	19	bfd2	figs-rquestion	τί με ζητεῖτε ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Why do you seek to kill me?	Jesus is using the form of a question to emphasize that the Jewish leaders who want to **kill** him for breaking the law of Moses are themselves breaking that law. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You break the law yourselves and yet you want to kill me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	20	hdud	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -1033,13 +1033,13 @@ JHN	7	37	ayn6	figs-metaphor	ἐρχέσθω πρός με καὶ πινέτω	1
 JHN	7	38	u9cx	figs-infostructure	ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή	1	He who believes in me, just as the scripture says	If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “As the scripture says about anyone who believes in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	7	38	wtl7	figs-quotesinquotes	καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “rivers of living water will flow from the stomach of the one believing in me, just as the scripture says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	7	38	q926	figs-personification	εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή	1		Here Jesus uses **scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the prophets spoke in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-JHN	7	38	uw2q	figs-metaphor	ποταμοὶ&ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος	1	rivers of living water will flow	Here Jesus uses **rivers** to refer to a constant and abundant flow of **living water**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “An abundance of living water will flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	7	38	uw2q	figs-metaphor	ποταμοὶ & ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος	1	rivers of living water will flow	Here Jesus uses **rivers** to refer to a constant and abundant flow of **living water**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “An abundance of living water will flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	7	38	yt75	figs-extrainfo	ὕδατος ζῶντος	1	living water	Jesus uses **living water** here to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, since John explains this meaning in the next verse, you do not need to explain it further here. See how you translated **living water** in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	7	38	y1zb	figs-explicit	ὕδατος ζῶντος	1		Here, **living** is used to mean “giving eternal life” or “causing people to live forever.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of water that gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	38	ebk7	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) the person who believes in Jesus. This meaning is used in most Bible translations and assumes that a new sentence begins at the beginning of this verse. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “his” (2) Jesus. This meaning is used in some ancient church writings and assumes that the sentence at the end of the previous verse continues into through **the one believing in me** in this verse. Alternate translation: “my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	7	38	cx1q	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ	1	from his stomach	Here the **stomach** is used to refer to the non-physical part of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside of him” or “from his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	7	39	i8wx	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John gives information to clarify what Jesus was talking about in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	7	39	qbr1	figs-explicit	οὔπω&ἦν Πνεῦμα	1	the Spirit had not yet been given	John implies here that **the Spirit** would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	7	39	qbr1	figs-explicit	οὔπω & ἦν Πνεῦμα	1	the Spirit had not yet been given	John implies here that **the Spirit** would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	39	n599	figs-explicit	οὐδέπω ἐδοξάσθη	1		Here the word **glorified** could refer to: (1) the time when Jesus would die on the cross and rise from the dead (see John [12:23](../12/23.md)). Alternate translation: “had not yet been crucified and resurrected” (2) the time when Jesus would ascend to his Father in heaven. [Acts 1–2](../act/01/01.md) records the Holy Spirit coming after Jesus went up to heaven. Alternate translation: “had not yet returned to God in glory” (3) both the crucifixion, resurrection, and ascension of Jesus. Alternate translation: “had not yet been glorified by his death, resurrection, and return to heaven” See the discussion of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	40	xvts	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1		**Then** here indicates that what follows is the continuation of the narrative from [verse 38](../07/38.md), which John had interrupted with background information in [verse 39](../07/39.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could show reference to earlier events by translating this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus had said this about the Holy Spirit,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 JHN	7	40	schi	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -1048,9 +1048,9 @@ JHN	7	40	shq8	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης	1	This is indeed the prophet	Se
 JHN	7	41	alq3	figs-rquestion	μὴ γὰρ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ὁ Χριστὸς ἔρχεται?	1	Does the Christ come from Galilee?	These people are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the Christ surely does not come from Galilee!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	42	n8nb	figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ, καὶ ἀπὸ Βηθλέεμ, τῆς κώμης ὅπου ἦν Δαυεὶδ, ἔρχεται ὁ Χριστός?	1	Have the scriptures not said that the Christ will come from the descendants of David and from Bethlehem, the village where David was?	The people are using the form of a question to add emphasis. This group of people does not believe Jesus is the Messiah, because they do not think he came from Bethlehem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating the words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The scriptures surely say that the Christ will come from the seed of David and from Bethlehem, the village where David was!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	7	42	ep4z	figs-personification	οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν	1	Have the scriptures not said	**Scripture** here is referred to as though it were a person who could speak. If this use of **said** might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Have the prophets not said in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-JHN	7	43	h7d3	figs-abstractnouns	σχίσμα&ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **division**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the crowd was divided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JHN	7	43	h7d3	figs-abstractnouns	σχίσμα & ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **division**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the crowd was divided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	7	43	lf5r	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-JHN	7	44	yv80	writing-pronouns	τινὲς&ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		Here, **them** refers to the people in the crowd with whom Jesus had just spoken, particularly those who were opposed to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his opponents in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	7	44	yv80	writing-pronouns	τινὲς & ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		Here, **them** refers to the people in the crowd with whom Jesus had just spoken, particularly those who were opposed to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his opponents in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	7	44	rc64	figs-idiom	οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 30](../07/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	7	47	z95z	figs-explicit	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε?	1	Have you also been deceived?	The **Pharisees** ask this question in a way that expects a negative response but also expresses uncertainty about that response. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response with uncertainty, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “Could it be possible that you have also been deceived?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	47	i47o	figs-activepassive	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He has not also deceived you, has he?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1073,8 +1073,8 @@ JHN	7	53	s5fi	translate-textvariants		0	General Information:	The best early text
 JHN	8	intro	e667			0		# John 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus forgives the adulterous woman [8:1–11](../08/01.md)\n2. Jesus says he is the light of the world (8:12–20)\n3. Jesus says he came from above (8:21–30)\n4. Jesus says he frees people from sin (8:31–36)\n5. Jesus describes the true children of Abraham and the children of Satan (8:37–47)\n6. Jesus is greater than Abraham (8:48–59)\n\nTranslators may wish to include a note at [verse 1](../08/01.md) to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate [verses 8:1–11](../08/01.md). [Verses 7:53–8:11](../07/53.md) are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. Those ancient texts which do have these verses also have many differences between them, which are additional evidence that these verses were not originally in the Gospel of John. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in John’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nGenerally in John’s Gospel, light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. Similar to the discussion of light in [1:4–9](../01/04.md), in [8:12](../08/12.md) Jesus applies the light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. Jesus calls himself the Light of the World because he is the one who enables people to know God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]])\n\n### I AM\n\nJohn records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase three times in this chapter ([8:24](../08/24.md), [28](../08/28.md), [58](../08/58.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([8:28](../08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	8	1	mkz2	translate-textvariants		0	General Information:	The best early texts do not have [7:53–8:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 JHN	8	12	m4ma	writing-newevent		0		In this verse Jesus begins speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple some time after the events of [John 7:1–52](../07/01.md). John does not mark the beginning of this new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	8	12	pvpr	writing-quotations	πάλιν&αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν&λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	8	12	k5ib	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου&ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς τῆς ζωῆς	1	I am the light of the world	Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. See the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	8	12	pvpr	writing-quotations	πάλιν & αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν & λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	8	12	k5ib	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου & ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς τῆς ζωῆς	1	I am the light of the world	Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. See the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	12	yc5p	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	the world	Here, **world** refers to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	12	zf41	figs-idiom	ὁ ἀκολουθῶν ἐμοὶ	1	he who follows me	Here, **following** means to become Jesus’ disciple and obey his teachings. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “the one who becomes my disciple” or “the one who obeys me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	8	12	tse3	figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ περιπατήσῃ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ	1	will not walk in the darkness	Here Jesus uses the phrase **walk in the darkness** to refer to living a sinful life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “may certainly not live as if he were living in the darkness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1089,12 +1089,12 @@ JHN	8	16	ys2e	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ	1		If your langua
 JHN	8	16	jb2f		ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ ἀληθινή ἐστιν	1	my judgment is true	Here, Jesus is contrasting the nature of the Pharisees’ **judgment** with the nature of his own **judgment**. Alternate translation: “my judgment is right” or “my judgment is according to what is true”
 JHN	8	16	ev1r	figs-explicit	μόνος οὐκ εἰμί	1	I am not alone	Here, Jesus implies that he is **not alone** when he judges people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not alone in how I judge” or “I do not judge alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	16	cbrc	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	16	r7dx	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ&Πατήρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	8	16	r7dx	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ & Πατήρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	8	17	r2r8	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Moses” did it. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	8	17	l6ln	figs-explicit	δύο ἀνθρώπων ἡ μαρτυρία ἀληθής ἐστιν	1	the testimony of two men is true	Here, Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to [Deuteronomy 19:15](../deu/19/15.md), a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If it would be helpful to your readers, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the testimony of two men agrees, then it is valid” or “if two men say something that agrees, then it should be considered to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	18	gfd3	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1	the Father who sent me bears witness about me	In addition to Jesus himself, God **the Father** also **testifies about** Jesus. Jesus thus implies that his testimony is true, because there are two witnesses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Father, who sent me, also brings evidence about me. So you should believe that what we tell you is true” or “my Father, who sent me, also testifies about me. Therefore, my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	18	ayl5	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ	1		Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in verse [16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	18	ycc8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ&Πατήρ	2	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	8	18	ycc8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ & Πατήρ	2	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	8	19	o66t	figs-explicit	οὔτε ἐμὲ οἴδατε, οὔτε τὸν Πατέρα μου. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου ἂν ᾔδειτε	1		In this verse, **know** refers to knowing who Jesus and God actually are, not just knowing information about them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know neither who I am nor who my Father is; if you had known who I am, you would have known who my Father is also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	19	b26z	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	8	19	wcd1	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου ἂν ᾔδειτε.	1		Here, Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Pharisees do not know who he really is and do not really know God. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you do not know me, because if you did, you would also know my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
@@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ JHN	8	20	xa7h	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα	1		Here, **these wor
 JHN	8	20	witr	translate-unknown	τῷ γαζοφυλακίῳ	1		A **treasury** is the place where treasures are stored. In Jesus’ time, the temple **treasury** referred to a place in the courtyard that had containers for receiving money offerings. If your readers would not be familiar with this use of **treasury**, you could give a fuller description. Alternate translation: “the place where people gave money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	8	20	b11j	figs-metonymy	οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ	1	his hour had not yet come	Here, the word **hour** is used to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this phrase in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	21	ls93	writing-newevent	εἶπεν οὖν πάλιν αὐτοῖς	1		**Then again** here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “At another time he again said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	8	21	lxox	figs-extrainfo	ἐγὼ ὑπάγω&ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω	1		Two times in this verse Jesus uses **go away** to refer to his death and return to God in heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	8	21	lxox	figs-extrainfo	ἐγὼ ὑπάγω & ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω	1		Two times in this verse Jesus uses **go away** to refer to his death and return to God in heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	8	21	d70v	figs-genericnoun	ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ὑμῶν	1		Here, **sin** is singular. This could refer to one: (1) the specific sin of rejecting Jesus as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “in your sin of unbelief” (2) sinfulness in general. Alternate translation: “in your state of sinfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	8	21	m0w8	figs-infostructure	ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You are not able to come to where I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	8	22	a4p4	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews said	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -1116,13 +1116,13 @@ JHN	8	23	tg9d	figs-explicit	τῶν κάτω	1		Here, John records Jesus using *
 JHN	8	23	a7ny	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἐκ τῶν ἄνω εἰμί	1	I am from above	The phrase **from the things above** could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “I came from the things above” (2) the place where the subject belongs, which is heaven. Alternate translation: “I belong to the things above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	23	qlv4	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἐκ τῶν ἄνω εἰμί	1		Here, John records Jesus using **the things above** to refer to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	23	svn1	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς ἐκ τούτου τοῦ κόσμου ἐστέ, ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		The phrase **from this world** could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You come from this world; I do not come from this world” (2) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “You belong to this world; I do not belong to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	23	w3vx	figs-metonymy	τούτου τοῦ κόσμου&τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here, **this world** refers to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this sinful world … this sinful world” or “this world that opposes God … this world that opposes God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	8	24	jgw4		ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν&ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν	1	you will die in your sins	This phrase **you will die in your sins** is different from the similar statement in verse [21](../08/21.md) because **sins** is plural in this verse but singular in that verse. Therefore, make sure that you translate **sins** differently than how you translated “sin” in verse [21](../08/21.md).
+JHN	8	23	w3vx	figs-metonymy	τούτου τοῦ κόσμου & τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here, **this world** refers to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this sinful world … this sinful world” or “this world that opposes God … this world that opposes God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	8	24	jgw4		ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν & ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν	1	you will die in your sins	This phrase **you will die in your sins** is different from the similar statement in verse [21](../08/21.md) because **sins** is plural in this verse but singular in that verse. Therefore, make sure that you translate **sins** differently than how you translated “sin” in verse [21](../08/21.md).
 JHN	8	24	he1k	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι	1	that I AM	This could mean: (1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM” in [Exodus 3:14](../exo/03/14.md). Alternate translation: “that I am the I AM” (2) Jesus expects the people to understand that he is referring to what he already has already said about himself in the previous verse: “that I am from above” See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	25	t7tv	writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1	They said	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	8	25	c106	figs-rquestion	τὴν ἀρχὴν ὅ τι καὶ λαλῶ ὑμῖν?	1		Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has already told the Jewish leaders who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am who I have been telling you I am since the beginning!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	26	f9pp	figs-infostructure	ἀλλ’ ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν, κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases and make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “But I will say to the world the things that I heard from him who sent me. He is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	8	26	n3gf	figs-extrainfo	ὁ πέμψας με&παρ’ αὐτοῦ	1		These phrases refer to God. However, since the Jewish leaders did not understand what Jesus meant when he used these phrases, you do not need to explain their meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	8	26	n3gf	figs-extrainfo	ὁ πέμψας με & παρ’ αὐτοῦ	1		These phrases refer to God. However, since the Jewish leaders did not understand what Jesus meant when he used these phrases, you do not need to explain their meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	8	26	ivk5		ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν	1		Here, **true** means to be truthful or to speak only the truth. If this use of **true** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is truthful” or “the one who sent me tells the truth”
 JHN	8	26	xj8y	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα	1		Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these things** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	26	lsc7	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	these things I say to the world	Here, John records Jesus using **the world** to refer to the people who live in **the world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1137,28 +1137,28 @@ JHN	8	28	vq9k	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	καθὼς ἐδίδαξέν με 
 JHN	8	29	w9cl	figs-explicit	ὁ πέμψας με	1	He who sent me	Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	29	vai4	figs-metaphor	μετ’ ἐμοῦ	1		Here Jesus uses **with me** to refer to God’s help. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “helping me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	30	ld9x	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος	1	As Jesus was saying these things	Here, John is describing something that happened at the same time as the other clause in the sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “At the time Jesus was saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
-JHN	8	31	tgat	figs-synecdoche	τοὺς&Ἰουδαίους	1		In [verses 31–59](../08/31.md) **those Jews** could refer to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “those Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “those Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	8	31	tgat	figs-synecdoche	τοὺς & Ἰουδαίους	1		In [verses 31–59](../08/31.md) **those Jews** could refer to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “those Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “those Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	8	31	f79h	figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1		In [verses 31–59](../08/31.md) Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he could be speaking to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	8	31	g752	figs-idiom	μείνητε ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τῷ ἐμῷ	1	remain in my word	The phrase **remain in my word** means to obey what **Jesus** said. If this might confuse your readers, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	8	32	esz8	figs-personification	ἡ ἀλήθεια ἐλευθερώσει ὑμᾶς	1	the truth will set you free	Jesus speaks of **truth** as though it were a person who could **free** someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “knowing the truth will cause you to be free” or “if you obey the truth, God will set you free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-JHN	8	32	xf9m	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν&ἡ ἀλήθεια	1	the truth	Here, **the truth** refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true about God … those true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]).
+JHN	8	32	xf9m	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν & ἡ ἀλήθεια	1	the truth	Here, **the truth** refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true about God … those true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]).
 JHN	8	33	n34n	figs-rquestion	πῶς σὺ λέγεις, ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε	1	how can you say, ‘You will be set free’?	The Jews are using the question form here to emphasize their shock at what Jesus has said. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We do not need to be set free!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	33	s6jz	figs-quotesinquotes	πῶς σὺ λέγεις, ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “how can you say that we will be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	8	34	i2pn	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	8	34	jg3z	figs-metaphor	δοῦλός ἐστιν τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	is the slave of sin	Here Jesus uses the word **slave** to refer to someone who cannot stop sinning. This implies that **sin** is like a master for the person who sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile instead. Alternate translation: “is like a slave to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	8	35	nfyp	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&δοῦλος οὐ μένει&ὁ Υἱὸς μένει	1		Jesus is speaking of slaves and sons in general, not of one particular **slave** and **son**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “slaves do not remain … sons remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+JHN	8	35	nfyp	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & δοῦλος οὐ μένει & ὁ Υἱὸς μένει	1		Jesus is speaking of slaves and sons in general, not of one particular **slave** and **son**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “slaves do not remain … sons remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	8	35	sg4a	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	in the house	Here, Jesus uses **house** to refer to the family that lives inside the **house**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a permanent member of a family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	35	mknn	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		This clause is in contrast to the previous clause. Although slaves do not remain permanent members of the family who owns them, sons are permanent family members. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the son remains into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JHN	8	35	j73t	figs-ellipsis	ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	8	36	n6fp	figs-explicit	ἐὰν&ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε	1	if the Son sets you free, you will be truly free	It is implied that Jesus is talking about freedom from sin. Alternate translation: “if the Son sets you free from sin, you will truly be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	36	w3q1	figs-123person	ἐὰν&ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ	1	if the Son sets you free	Unlike the generic use of **son** in the previous verse, here Jesus uses **the Son** to refer to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “if I, the Son, free you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	8	36	mapu	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν&ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ	1		Here Jesus uses **frees** to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	8	36	n6fp	figs-explicit	ἐὰν & ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε	1	if the Son sets you free, you will be truly free	It is implied that Jesus is talking about freedom from sin. Alternate translation: “if the Son sets you free from sin, you will truly be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	36	w3q1	figs-123person	ἐὰν & ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ	1	if the Son sets you free	Unlike the generic use of **son** in the previous verse, here Jesus uses **the Son** to refer to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “if I, the Son, free you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	8	36	mapu	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν & ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ	1		Here Jesus uses **frees** to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	36	nqcr	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus, **the Son** of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	8	36	ak0s	figs-metaphor	ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε	1		Here Jesus uses **free** to refer to people no longer being controlled by their sinful desires and thus able to avoid sinning. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “you will truly no longer be controlled by sin” or “you will truly be able to refrain from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	37	orw8	figs-idiom	ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς οὐ χωρεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν	1		This phrase **has no place in you** is an idiom that means to truly accept or believe something. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a similar idiom in your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not receive my words in your hearts” or “you reject my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	8	37	ph1q	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς	1	my word	Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	38	m62y	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Πατρὶ	1	I say what I have seen with my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	8	38	f9yu	figs-extrainfo	καὶ ὑμεῖς&ἃ ἠκούσατε παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς, ποιεῖτε	1	you also do what you heard from your father	In this clause, Jesus uses the phrase **the father** to refer to the devil. Despite using the same words as in the previous clause, here Jesus is not referring to God. However, since Jesus did not yet reveal what he meant when he used this phrase, but was speaking ambiguously, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+JHN	8	38	f9yu	figs-extrainfo	καὶ ὑμεῖς & ἃ ἠκούσατε παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς, ποιεῖτε	1	you also do what you heard from your father	In this clause, Jesus uses the phrase **the father** to refer to the devil. Despite using the same words as in the previous clause, here Jesus is not referring to God. However, since Jesus did not yet reveal what he meant when he used this phrase, but was speaking ambiguously, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	8	39	qp2r	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ	1	father	Here the people use **father** to refer to their ancestor. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our forefather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	39	wg9n	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	8	39	v7og	figs-metaphor	τέκνα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ	1		Here Jesus uses **children** to mean “descendants.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descendants of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1183,9 +1183,9 @@ JHN	8	44	x11i	figs-explicit	ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **it** refers
 JHN	8	46	y3gz	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας?	1	Which one of you convicts me of sin?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	46	kh6a	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω	1	If I speak the truth	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	8	46	ibp1	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι?	1	why do you not believe me?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to scold the Jews for their unbelief. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no reason for not believing me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	8	47	lien	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ&ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ	1		The phrase **from God** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	47	lien	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ & ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ	1		The phrase **from God** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	47	nmmq	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Although **He** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “A person who is from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JHN	8	47	njo6	figs-metaphor	ἀκούει&ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀκούετε	1		Here, **hears** and **hear** mean to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated **hear** in verse [43](../08/43.md). Alternate translation: “heeds … you do not heed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	8	47	njo6	figs-metaphor	ἀκούει & ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀκούετε	1		Here, **hears** and **hear** mean to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated **hear** in verse [43](../08/43.md). Alternate translation: “heeds … you do not heed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	47	l7gy	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the words of God	Here, Jesus uses **words** to refer to what God has said. See how you translated **words** in [5:47](../05/47.md). Alternate translation: “the things that God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	48	vu1h	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews	Here, **The Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	8	48	cic5	figs-rquestion	οὐ καλῶς λέγομεν ἡμεῖς ὅτι Σαμαρείτης εἶ σὺ, καὶ δαιμόνιον ἔχεις?	1	Do we not truly say that you are a Samaritan and have a demon?	**The Jews** are using a rhetorical question here to accuse Jesus and to dishonor him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly say rightly that you are a Samaritan and have a demon!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1213,18 +1213,18 @@ JHN	8	54	ab13	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1		**Father** is an i
 JHN	8	54	lomt	figs-quotesinquotes	ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐστιν	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “about whom you say that he is your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	8	55	c3bm	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1		Here Jesus uses **word** to refer what God has said. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	56	wofu	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν	1		See how you translated this phrase in verse [39](../08/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	8	56	vb1v	figs-metaphor	ἴδῃ&εἶδεν	1		Here Jesus uses **see** to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he might experience … he experienced it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	8	56	vb1v	figs-metaphor	ἴδῃ & εἶδεν	1		Here Jesus uses **see** to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he might experience … he experienced it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	56	tyu5	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἐμήν	1	my day	Here Jesus uses **my day** to refer to the time when Jesus came to earth. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my coming” or “the time when I would come to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	56	hv5g	figs-metaphor	εἶδεν καὶ ἐχάρη	1	he saw it and was glad	This phrase could mean: (1) Abraham literally **saw** a prophetic vision of Jesus coming to earth. Alternate translation: “he foresaw my coming through revelation from God and was glad” (2) when his son Isaac was born, Abraham metaphorically **saw** that God was beginning to fulfill the covenant that would culminate in Jesus coming to earth. Alternate translation: “he perceived my coming when God gave him a son, and he was glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	57	yzf9	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews said to him	See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 31](../08/31.md). Alternate translation: “the Judeans” or “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	8	57	r1ek	figs-rquestion	πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἑώρακας?	1	You are not yet fifty years old, and you have seen Abraham?	Here, **the Jews** opposing Jesus are using this question to express their shock that Jesus claims to have seen Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are less than fifty years old! You could not possibly have seen Abraham!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	58	rnw4	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	8	58	k4tp	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ εἰμί	1	I AM	See how you translated **I am** verse [24](../08/24.md) and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	59	bxs5	figs-explicit	ἦραν&λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	Then they picked up stones to throw at him	The Jews opposing **Jesus** are outraged at what **Jesus** said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they **picked up stones** in order to kill him by stoning because he had made himself equal to God (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/stone]]). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they picked up stones in order to kill him, because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	8	59	bxs5	figs-explicit	ἦραν & λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	Then they picked up stones to throw at him	The Jews opposing **Jesus** are outraged at what **Jesus** said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they **picked up stones** in order to kill him by stoning because he had made himself equal to God (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/stone]]). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they picked up stones in order to kill him, because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	59	qwe6	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1		**Jesus** and his Jewish opponents were in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	9	intro	hq31			0		# John 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus’ sixth sign: he heals a blind man (9:1–12)\n2. The Pharisees question the formerly blind man whom Jesus healed (9:13–34)\n3. Jesus speaks with the formerly blind man and some Pharisees (9:35–41)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Who sinned?”\n\nMany of the Jews in Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he, his parents, or someone else in his family had sinned. The rabbis even taught that it was possible for a baby to sin while still in the womb. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### “A sinner”\n\nThe Pharisees call some people in this chapter “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### “He does not keep the Sabbath”\n\nThe Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by healing the blind man. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Important Metaphors in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### Seeing and being blind\n\nJesus uses the healing of the blind man as a metaphor for spiritual blindness. Just as a blind man cannot see the physical world, a man who is spiritually blind does not recognize God’s truth, which includes his sinfulness and need for salvation. The blind man in this story is first healed from his physical blindness ([9:6–7](../09/06.md)), then from his spiritual blindness ([9:38](../09/38.md)). By contrast, the Pharisees are not physically blind but are spiritually blind. Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they have seen him do great miracles that only someone sent from God could do, but they still refuse to believe that God sent him or that they are sinners who need to repent ([9:39–40](../09/39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([9:35](../09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	9	1	un4h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Now	**And** here shows that John intended for the events in this chapter to be directly connected to what Jesus said in the previous chapter. In [chapter 8](../08/01.md), Jesus said that he is the Light of the World. In this chapter, Jesus demonstrates that he is the Light of the World by giving physical sight and spiritual light to a blind man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-JHN	9	2	hf1y	writing-quotations	ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν&λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	9	2	hf1y	writing-quotations	ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν & λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	9	2	w44c	figs-explicit	τίς ἥμαρτεν, οὗτος ἢ οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ?	1	who sinned, this man or his parents … blind?	This question reflects the ancient Jewish belief that sin caused illnesses and other deformities. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “Teacher, we know that sin causes a person to be blind. Whose sin caused this man to be born blind? did this man himself sin, or was it his parents who sinned?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	2	zzh8	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that he might be blind when his mother bore him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	3	q69k	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα φανερωθῇ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Here, John records Jesus leaving out some information that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he was born blind so that the works of God might be revealed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ JHN	9	4	rloj	figs-metaphor	ἔρχεται νὺξ	1		Here Jesus uses **Night**.
 JHN	9	5	f2xu	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1	in the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	5	dd8k	figs-metaphor	φῶς εἰμι τοῦ κόσμου	1	light of the world	See how you translated this clause in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “I am the one who is like a light and who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	6	y3s4	figs-explicit	ἐποίησεν πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ πτύσματος	1	made mud with the saliva	Jesus used his fingers to mix the dirt and **saliva** into **mud**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt and saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	7	ily8	figs-explicit	νίψαι&ἐνίψατο	1	wash … washed	Here, Jesus wanted the blind man to **wash** the mud off of his eyes in the pool and that is what the man did. Jesus did not want him to bathe or **wash** his whole body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and wash your eyes … washed his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	7	ily8	figs-explicit	νίψαι & ἐνίψατο	1	wash … washed	Here, Jesus wanted the blind man to **wash** the mud off of his eyes in the pool and that is what the man did. Jesus did not want him to bathe or **wash** his whole body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and wash your eyes … washed his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	7	haum	figs-possession	τὴν κολυμβήθραν τοῦ Σιλωάμ	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe a **pool** that is called **Siloam**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the pool named Siloam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	9	7	ror0	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which means ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	7	ri9h	writing-background	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1	which is translated “Sent”	In this clause John provides a brief break in the storyline in order to explain to his readers what **Siloam** means. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which means ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ JHN	9	10	m97n	figs-activepassive	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀ
 JHN	9	10	yy53	figs-metonymy	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί	1	Then how were your eyes opened?	Here, **eyes** **opened** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	11	nii1	figs-activepassive	ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰησοῦς	1	smeared it on my eyes	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom we call Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	11	a42y	figs-explicit	πηλὸν ἐποίησεν	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 6](../09/06.md). Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt with saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	11	b5zf	figs-explicit	νίψαι&καὶ νιψάμενος	1		See how you translated **wash** in [verse 7](../09/07.md). Alternate translation: “wash your eyes … and having washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	11	b5zf	figs-explicit	νίψαι & καὶ νιψάμενος	1		See how you translated **wash** in [verse 7](../09/07.md). Alternate translation: “wash your eyes … and having washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	11	ajxb	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνέβλεψα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sight**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	9	13	cu14	figs-pastforfuture	ἄγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	9	14	dl48	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1277,10 +1277,10 @@ JHN	9	19	npf9	figs-activepassive	τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη	1		If your lang
 JHN	9	20	pg6a	figs-activepassive	τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was blind when his mother bore him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	21	ahky	figs-explicit	ἡλικίαν ἔχει	1		The phrase **full maturity** describes a person who is an adult and is legally responsible for himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is an adult” or “is a full-grown man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	22	yq73	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the man’s parents being afraid of the Jewish leaders. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	9	22	k2iw	figs-synecdoche	τοὺς Ἰουδαίους&οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	they were afraid of the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	9	22	k2iw	figs-synecdoche	τοὺς Ἰουδαίους & οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	they were afraid of the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	9	22	yjv9	figs-metaphor	ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται	1	he would be thrown out of the synagogue	Here John uses **put out of the synagogue** to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were **put out of the synagogue**, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “he would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	23	go77	figs-explicit	ἡλικίαν ἔχει	1	he would be thrown out of the synagogue	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 21](../09/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	24	h1tl		ἐφώνησαν&τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	they called the man	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders introduced in ([verse 18](../09/18.md))
+JHN	9	24	h1tl		ἐφώνησαν & τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	they called the man	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders introduced in ([verse 18](../09/18.md))
 JHN	9	24	bkx6	figs-idiom	δὸς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Give glory to God	This is an idiom that Jewish people used when commanding someone to take an oath. It first appears in [Joshua 7:19](../jos/07/19.md) when Joshua orders Achan to confess his sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Speak the truth before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	9	24	ww3t	figs-explicit	οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	this man	Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this man** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	25	sr93	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1	that man	Here, **that one** refers to the man who had been blind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the man who had been blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1290,17 +1290,17 @@ JHN	9	27	rpav	figs-irony	μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε αὐτοῦ μ
 JHN	9	28	h7hy	figs-explicit	ἐκείνου	1		Here John records the Jewish leaders saying **that one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “of that so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	28	z2tn	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ Μωϋσέως ἐσμὲν μαθηταί	1	but we are disciples of Moses	Here, the pronoun **we** is exclusive. The Jewish leaders are speaking only of themselves. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “but we true Jews are disciples of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	9	29	b8id	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1		Here John records the Jewish leaders saying **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	29	vv43	figs-explicit	τοῦτον&πόθεν ἐστίν	1	where this one is from	Here, the Jewish leaders use **from** to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came **from** God, but they say that they do not know where he came **from**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “where this one gets his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	29	vv43	figs-explicit	τοῦτον & πόθεν ἐστίν	1	where this one is from	Here, the Jewish leaders use **from** to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came **from** God, but they say that they do not know where he came **from**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “where this one gets his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	30	d9uh	figs-exclamations	ἐν τούτῳ γὰρ τὸ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε	1		If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation and you may need to make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “This is amazing! You do not know” or “How remarkable! You do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 JHN	9	30	i3gm	figs-explicit	πόθεν ἐστίν	1	that you do not know where he is from	See how you translated **from** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “where he gets his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	30	lent	figs-metonymy	ἤνοιξέν μου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused me to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	9	31	e7ec	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτωλῶν&οὐκ ἀκούει&τούτου ἀκούει	1	does not listen to sinners … listens to him	Here, **hear** and **hears** mean paying attention to or listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to **hear** what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does not heed sinners … he heeds this one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	31	e7ec	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτωλῶν & οὐκ ἀκούει & τούτου ἀκούει	1	does not listen to sinners … listens to him	Here, **hear** and **hears** mean paying attention to or listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to **hear** what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does not heed sinners … he heeds this one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	32	b2xt	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἠκούσθη	1	it has never been heard that anyone opened	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one has ever heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	9	32	hstv	figs-metonymy	ἠνέῳξέν&ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “caused one having been born blind to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	9	32	hstv	figs-metonymy	ἠνέῳξέν & ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “caused one having been born blind to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	9	32	bzxd	figs-activepassive	τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of one who was blind when his mother bore him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	33	tt5e	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο ποιεῖν οὐδέν	1	If this man were not from God, he could do nothing	Here, the formerly blind man uses a double negative sentence pattern to emphasize the positive fact that Jesus must be **from God**. If this double-negative pattern would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only a man from God would be able to do anything like that!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	9	33	pyin	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ	1	If this man were not from God, he could do nothing	The formerly blind man is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He has concluded that Jesus must have come **from God** because he healed him. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If this one were not from God, but he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-JHN	9	33	sd3s	figs-explicit	μὴ ἦν&παρὰ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated **from God** in [verse 16](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “did not have God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	9	33	sd3s	figs-explicit	μὴ ἦν & παρὰ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated **from God** in [verse 16](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “did not have God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	33	ry9j	figs-explicit	οὐδέν	1		Here, **anything** does not mean “anything at all.” It means **anything** like the miraculous signs that Jesus was performing, particularly his healing of this man who was born blind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “anything like healing a man blind from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	34	da3z	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος, καὶ σὺ διδάσκεις ἡμᾶς?	1	You were completely born in sins, and you are teaching us?	The Jewish leaders are using a question to emphasize their belief that this man was not qualified to question their opinion. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You were completely born in sins, and you are not qualified to teach us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	34	wo1z	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος	1	You were completely born in sins	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Your mother bore you completely in sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ JHN	9	39	t9vo	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντε
 JHN	9	40	d8mm	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν?	1	Are we also blind?	Several **Pharisees** are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think that they are spiritually blind. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely are not also blind!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	40	c8zs	figs-metaphor	μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν?	1	Are we also blind?	Here the Pharisees use **blind** to refer to not knowing God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “We are not also ignorant of God’s truth, are we?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	41	rh3l	figs-metaphor	εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν	1	If you were blind, you would have no sin	See how you translated **blind** in [verses 39–40](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “If you did not know God’s truth, you would have no sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	9	41	bj0s	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν&ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1	If you were blind, you would have no sin	In these two phrases, Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … You are still sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	9	41	bj0s	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν & ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1	If you were blind, you would have no sin	In these two phrases, Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … You are still sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	41	jmq7	figs-metaphor	λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1		See how you translated **see** in [verse 39](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “you say, ‘We know God’s truth.’ Your sin remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	41	ch0y	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that you see, so your sin remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	10	intro	e8mb			0		# John 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus tells the Parable of the Sheep Pen (10:1–6)\n2. Jesus says he is the gate of the sheep pen (10:7–10)\n3. Jesus says he is the Good Shepherd (10:11–18)\n4. The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (10:19–21)\n5. Jesus says he is God at the Festival of Dedication (10:22–42)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Blasphemy\n\nBlasphemy is when a person claims that he is God or claims that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by throwing stones at them until they died. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they picked up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nParables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. People who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message ([10:1–6](../10/01.md)).\n\n### Sheep\n\nJesus spoke metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people are similar to sheep in that they also are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]])\n\n### Sheep pen\n\nA sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep for periods of time, such as over night. There were large sheep pens in which multiple flocks were kept, and also smaller sheep pens for a single flock. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them. In [10:1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus uses the sheep pen as a metaphor for the people of Israel. Out of the “sheep pen” of the Jewish people, Jesus calls his first “sheep.”\n\n### Laying down and taking up life\n\nJesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could: (1) lay down on the ground, which is a metaphor for dying, or (2) pick up again, which is a metaphor for becoming alive again.
@@ -1329,11 +1329,11 @@ JHN	10	1	gzd8	figs-parables		0	General Information:	In [verses 1–5](../10/01.m
 JHN	10	1	ab9x			0	Connecting Statement:	In [verses 1–21](../10/01.md), Jesus continues to speak to the Pharisees whom he was speaking with at the end of the last chapter. This section continues the story which began in [9:35](../09/35.md).
 JHN	10	1	i3tj	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	10	1	xq1f	translate-unknown	αὐλὴν τῶν προβάτων	1	sheep pen	A **sheep pen** is an enclosed or fenced area where a shepherd keeps his sheep. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a roofless space surrounded by walls or a fence. Alternate translation: “walled area for protecting the sheep” or “place where sheep are kept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	10	1	zz7x	figs-explicit	κλέπτης&καὶ λῃστής	1	a thief and a robber	The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. A **thief** is a person who steals by stealth, but a **robber** is a person who steals by force or violence. For this reason, you may want to use “or” instead of **and** between these two terms. Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	10	2	ib4y	figs-possession	ποιμήν&τῶν προβάτων	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe a **shepherd** who takes care of **the sheep**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherd who cares for the sheep” or “the shepherd in charge of the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+JHN	10	1	zz7x	figs-explicit	κλέπτης & καὶ λῃστής	1	a thief and a robber	The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. A **thief** is a person who steals by stealth, but a **robber** is a person who steals by force or violence. For this reason, you may want to use “or” instead of **and** between these two terms. Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	10	2	ib4y	figs-possession	ποιμήν & τῶν προβάτων	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe a **shepherd** who takes care of **the sheep**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherd who cares for the sheep” or “the shepherd in charge of the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	10	3	uy2v	translate-unknown	ὁ θυρωρὸς	1	The gatekeeper opens for him	A **gatekeeper** is a person who guards the sheep pen and opens the gate for the shepherd. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a person who guards an entrance. Alternate translation: “The gate guard” or “The person guarding the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	10	3	q48q	figs-ellipsis	ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει	1	The gatekeeper opens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	10	3	ploz	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ&τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ&τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ	1		In this verse, **this one**, **his**, and **he** refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	10	3	ploz	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ & τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ & τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ	1		In this verse, **this one**, **his**, and **he** refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	10	3	db3c	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούει	1	The sheep hear his voice	Here, **hear** could mean: (1) all the sheep in the pen **hear** the shepherd’s **voice**, but not all of them respond to it, as in the ULT. This meaning implies that there are multiple flocks in the sheep pen. (2) the sheep that belong to the shepherd heed or obey his **voice**. This implies that **the sheep** are identical with **his own sheep**. Alternate translation: “the sheep heed his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	3	zxsd	figs-explicit	τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ κατ’ ὄνομα	1		Here, **his own sheep** are designated as a separate group among **the sheep** of the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he calls his own sheep by name out from among all the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	4	n1ta	figs-explicit	ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν πορεύεται	1	he goes ahead of them	Shepherds in Jesus’ culture led their sheep by walking in front of them. If people who take care of livestock in your culture do not do this, you might need to state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he leads them to pasture by walking in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1346,8 +1346,8 @@ JHN	10	7	nj4k	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα	1	I am the gate	Here
 JHN	10	7	wk8s	figs-possession	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe himself as a **gate** that is for **the sheep** to use. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “I am the gate for the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	10	7	posn	figs-metaphor	τῶν προβάτων	1	I am the gate of the sheep	Here, Jesus uses **sheep** to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “of those who follow me like sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	8	k4z6	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ὅσοι ἦλθον πρὸ ἐμοῦ	1	Everyone who came before me	**Everyone** here is an exaggeration that refers to the majority of Israel’s leaders, including the Pharisees and other Jewish leaders. Not every leader of Israel throughout history was wicked, but most were. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Most leaders who came before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JHN	10	8	hqq3	figs-metaphor	κλέπται&καὶ λῃσταί	1	a thief and a robber	Here Jesus uses **thief** and **robber** to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “like a thief and a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	8	o7ou	figs-explicit	κλέπται&καὶ λῃσταί	1	a thief and a robber	The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. See how you translated this expression in [verse 1](../10/01.md). Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	10	8	hqq3	figs-metaphor	κλέπται & καὶ λῃσταί	1	a thief and a robber	Here Jesus uses **thief** and **robber** to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “like a thief and a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	10	8	o7ou	figs-explicit	κλέπται & καὶ λῃσταί	1	a thief and a robber	The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. See how you translated this expression in [verse 1](../10/01.md). Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	8	z4hb	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα	1		In this verse, Jesus uses **sheep** to refer specifically to the Jewish people who believed in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sheep who follow me” or “the sheep, my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	8	xa5u	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἤκουσαν αὐτῶν	1		Here, **hear** means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to **hear** what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not heed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	9	yp3g	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα	1	I am the gate	Here Jesus uses the word **gate** to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../10/07.md). Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1369,18 +1369,18 @@ JHN	10	11	llr4	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ τίθησιν	1
 JHN	10	11	p4tv	figs-metaphor	τῶν προβάτων	1	lays down his life	See how you translated **sheep** in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	12	ym8w	figs-metaphor	ὁ μισθωτὸς	1	The hired servant	Jesus uses the phrase **hired servant** to refer to the Jewish leaders and teachers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of your leaders is like a hired servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	12	n6ci	figs-activepassive	ὁ μισθωτὸς	1	The hired servant	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man whom someone hired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	10	12	bbwn	translate-unknown	τὸν λύκον&ὁ λύκος	1	The hired servant	A **wolf** is a fierce wild dog that is known for attacking and devouring livestock. If your readers would not be familiar with this animal, you could use the name of a fierce predator or wild dog in your area that commonly eats farmers’ livestock, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the fierce predator … that predator” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	10	12	ue4m	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα&τὰ πρόβατα	1	abandons the sheep	See how you translated **sheep** in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	10	12	bbwn	translate-unknown	τὸν λύκον & ὁ λύκος	1	The hired servant	A **wolf** is a fierce wild dog that is known for attacking and devouring livestock. If your readers would not be familiar with this animal, you could use the name of a fierce predator or wild dog in your area that commonly eats farmers’ livestock, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the fierce predator … that predator” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+JHN	10	12	ue4m	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα & τὰ πρόβατα	1	abandons the sheep	See how you translated **sheep** in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	12	j3rc	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ὁ λύκος ἁρπάζει αὐτὰ καὶ σκορπίζει	1		This clause describes two events. The first event causes the second event. When **the wolf** attacks and **seizes** a sheep, the other sheep scatter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “the wolf seizes a sheep, and the rest of the sheep scatter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 JHN	10	13	ra00	figs-activepassive	μισθωτός	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	10	13	szr8	figs-metaphor	οὐ μέλει αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν προβάτων	1	does not care for the sheep	Jesus compares a **hired man** who abandons **the sheep** to the Jewish leaders and teachers who do not care for God’s people. See how you translated **sheep** in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “he is not concerned about the sheep, just like your leaders are not concerned about God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	14	fg93	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός	1	I am the good shepherd	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “I am like a good shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	15	qr9g	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ&τὸν Πατέρα	1	The Father knows me, and I know the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	10	15	qr9g	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ & τὸν Πατέρα	1	The Father knows me, and I know the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	15	pn9w	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχήν μου τίθημι	1	I lay down my life for the sheep	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	10	15	mwpf	figs-metaphor	τῶν προβάτων	1	I lay down my life for the sheep	See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	y3g7	figs-metaphor	ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **other sheep** to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	la1v	figs-metaphor	τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **sheep pen** to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	16	v95z	figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖνα&ἀγαγεῖν	1	I have other sheep	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	10	16	v95z	figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖνα & ἀγαγεῖν	1	I have other sheep	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	10	16	kq11	figs-metaphor	τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσιν	1	I have other sheep	Here, **hear** refers to listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “they will heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	w86n	figs-metaphor	μία ποίμνη	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **flock** to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a **flock** of **sheep**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	bobi	figs-metaphor	εἷς ποιμήν	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **shepherd** to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@ JHN	10	17	kpr5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is
 JHN	10	17	wc4l	figs-euphemism	ἐγὼ τίθημι τὴν ψυχήν μου	1	I lay down my life so that I may take it again	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	10	17	s9ck	figs-metaphor	ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν	1	so that I may take it again	Jesus refers to becoming alive again as if life were an object that he could **take up**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that I might cause myself to be alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	18	z4xh	figs-metaphor	οὐδεὶς ἦρεν αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1		Here Jesus refers to his life as if it were an object that someone could take away. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “No one is causing me to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	18	rnj4	figs-euphemism	ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν&θεῖναι αὐτήν	1	I lay it down of myself	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die … to voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+JHN	10	18	rnj4	figs-euphemism	ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν & θεῖναι αὐτήν	1	I lay it down of myself	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die … to voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	10	18	j945	figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1	I lay it down of myself	The reflexive pronoun **myself** is used here to emphasize that Jesus voluntarily lays down his own life. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I myself lay it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	10	18	lo79	figs-metaphor	πάλιν λαβεῖν αὐτήν	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “to cause myself to be alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	18	s13n	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός μου	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ JHN	10	25	cb95	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		Here, **works** could refer to:
 JHN	10	25	e7zh	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου	1	in the name of my Father	Here, **name** could mean: (1) Jesus performed miracles by means of God’s authority. Alternate translation: “through my Father’s authority” (2) Jesus performed miracles as God’s representative. Alternate translation: “as my Father’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	10	25	bqz1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός μου	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	25	n34x	figs-personification	ταῦτα μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	these testify concerning me	Jesus speaks of his **works** as though they were a person who could testify and offer proof in a court of law. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these offer proof concerning me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-JHN	10	26	als6	figs-metaphor	οὐκ&ἐκ τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν	1	not my sheep	Jesus uses **sheep** to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not my followers” or “not my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	10	26	als6	figs-metaphor	οὐκ & ἐκ τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν	1	not my sheep	Jesus uses **sheep** to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not my followers” or “not my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	27	rdw7	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἐμὰ	1	My sheep hear my voice	See how you translated **My sheep** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “My followers” or “My disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	27	xakd	figs-metaphor	τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούουσιν	1		Here, **hear** means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 16](../10/16.md). Alternate translation: “heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	27	f7y8	figs-idiom	ἀκολουθοῦσίν μοι	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1424,7 +1424,7 @@ JHN	10	30	xok8	figs-explicit	ἕν ἐσμεν	1	I and the Father are one	Here,
 JHN	10	30	rs4j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	I and the Father are one	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	31	fl8i	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Then the Jews took up stones	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	10	31	a42t	figs-explicit	ἵνα λιθάσωσιν αὐτόν	1		**The Jews** opposing Jesus are outraged at what Jesus said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they wanted to kill him with stones because he had made himself equal to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might stone him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	10	32	uvdo	figs-explicit	πολλὰ ἔργα καλὰ&αὐτῶν ἔργον	1		See how you translated **works** in [verse 25](../10/25.md). Alternate translation: “many good miracles … of those miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	10	32	uvdo	figs-explicit	πολλὰ ἔργα καλὰ & αὐτῶν ἔργον	1		See how you translated **works** in [verse 25](../10/25.md). Alternate translation: “many good miracles … of those miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	32	kttb		ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός	1		This phrase could refer to: (1) the source of the **good works**. Alternate translation: “originating from the Father” (2) the one who enabled the **good works**. Alternate translation: “given to me by the Father”
 JHN	10	32	t5q8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	Jesus answered them, “I have shown you many good works from the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	32	tx8h	figs-irony	διὰ ποῖον αὐτῶν ἔργον, ἐμὲ λιθάζετε?	1	For which of those works are you stoning me?	Here Jesus is using irony. Jesus knows the Jewish leaders do not want to stone him because he has done **good works**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your certainly are not stoning me because of those works!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@@ -1469,8 +1469,8 @@ JHN	11	1	s5im	writing-participants	ἦν δέ τις ἀσθενῶν Λάζαρ
 JHN	11	1	p19k	translate-kinship	Μάρθας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆς	1		Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in [verse 5](../11/05.md) suggests that **Martha** was the oldest and **Lazarus** was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for **sister** depending on birth order, use the word for an older **sister** here. Alternate translation: “her older sister Martha” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	2	c6r9	figs-events	ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν Κύριον μύρῳ, καὶ ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς	1	It was Mary who anointed the Lord … her hair	Here, John refers to an event that would happen at a time following the events recorded in this chapter ([12:1–8](../12/01.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this as a future event. Alternate translation: “Now it was Mary who would later anoint the Lord with myrrh and wipe his feet with her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 JHN	11	2	xlio	translate-kinship	ὁ ἀδελφὸς Λάζαρος	1		Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in [verse 5](../11/05.md) suggests that Martha was the oldest and **Lazarus** was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for **brother** depending on birth order, use the word for a younger **brother** here. Alternate translation: “younger brother Lazarus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-JHN	11	3	ue08	writing-quotations	ἀπέστειλαν&αἱ ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the sisters sent to him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	11	3	i2ar	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν&πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	sent for Jesus	Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	11	3	ue08	writing-quotations	ἀπέστειλαν & αἱ ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the sisters sent to him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	11	3	i2ar	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν & πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	sent for Jesus	Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	3	g1im	figs-declarative	Κύριε, ἴδε, ὃν φιλεῖς ἀσθενεῖ	1		Here, the **sisters** are using a present statement to make a request indirectly. They tell Jesus that Lazarus is **sick**, because they want Jesus to come and heal him. If this use of a statement is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “Sir, behold, he whom you love is sick and needs your help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JHN	11	3	czm1	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		Here, **behold** means to take notice of something or pay attention to something. It is used here to emphasize the urgency of the words that follow. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “take notice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	11	4	nk3g	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον	1	This sickness is not to death	Here, **not to** indicates that what follows is not the result of the **sickness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This sickness will not result in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1496,7 +1496,7 @@ JHN	11	13	h3kl	writing-background		0		In this verse John briefly stops telling t
 JHN	11	13	tt6v	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1		Here, **those ones** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	11	13	leg3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	13	pf8u	figs-possession	τῆς κοιμήσεως τοῦ ὕπνου	1		John is using **of** to describe **sleep** that is **slumber**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sleep that is actually sleep” or “natural sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	11	14	azy3		τότε&εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς παρρησίᾳ	1	Then Jesus said to them plainly	Here, **plainly** means to say something clearly without using and metaphors or others figures of speech. Because the disciples did not understand the metaphor Jesus told them in [verse 11](../11/11.md), he told them the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to them in words that they could understand”
+JHN	11	14	azy3		τότε & εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς παρρησίᾳ	1	Then Jesus said to them plainly	Here, **plainly** means to say something clearly without using and metaphors or others figures of speech. Because the disciples did not understand the metaphor Jesus told them in [verse 11](../11/11.md), he told them the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to them in words that they could understand”
 JHN	11	15	c4wj		δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	for your sakes	Alternate translation: “for your benefit” or “for your good”
 JHN	11	15	ar2j	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα πιστεύσητε	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. You may also need to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “for I allowed this to happen so that you may believe in me” or “for I let Lazarus die so that you may believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	16	ymy6	translate-names	Δίδυμος	1	Didymus	**Didymus** is the name of a man. It is a Greek word that means “twin” and is Thomas’ other name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1529,12 +1529,12 @@ JHN	11	27	au1i	figs-explicit	ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενο
 JHN	11	28	yd61	translate-kinship	τὴν ἀδελφὴν	1	she went away and called her sister Mary	See how you translated **sister** in [verse 5](../11/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	28	zs2t	figs-explicit	διδάσκαλος	1	Teacher	Here, **Teacher** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Teacher, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	30	k5hy	writing-background	οὔπω δὲ ἐληλύθει ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν κώμην	1	Now Jesus had not yet come into the village	Here John provides a brief break in the story to give background information regarding the location of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “At that time Jesus had not yet come into the village” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	11	31	zpe9		οἱ&Ἰουδαῖοι	1		See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
+JHN	11	31	zpe9		οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1		See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
 JHN	11	31	q0iv	figs-distinguish	οἱ ὄντες μετ’ αὐτῆς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ καὶ παραμυθούμενοι αὐτήν	1		This phrase is making a distinction between **the Jews** who were **comforting** **Mary** in her **house** and those who were not doing so. It is not giving us further information about **the Jews**. If this might confuse your readers, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “the Jews, that is, those Jews who were with her in the house and comforting her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 JHN	11	32	zmp7	figs-explicit	ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας	1	fell down at his feet	Here, **fell down** means that Mary voluntarily threw herself down on the ground in front of Jesus to show the respect that she had for him. The phrase does not mean that **Mary** involuntarily **fell down**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “she prostrated herself at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	32	sn74	writing-quotations	ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας, λέγουσα αὐτῷ	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	11	32	j2wr		Κύριε, εἰ ἦς ὧδε, οὐκ ἄν μου ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός	1	my brother would not have died	See how you translated this sentence in [11:21](../11/21.md).
-JHN	11	33	ct82		τοὺς&Ἰουδαίους	1		See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
+JHN	11	33	ct82		τοὺς & Ἰουδαίους	1		See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
 JHN	11	33	qef6	figs-doublet	ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι καὶ ἐτάραξεν ἑαυτόν	1	he was deeply moved in his spirit and was troubled	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John combines these phrases to express the intense emotional distress that Jesus was feeling. Alternate translation: “he was very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	11	33	s5uz	figs-explicit	ἐνεβριμήσατο	1	he was deeply moved in his spirit and was troubled	The word translated **deeply disturbed** could mean: (1) Jesus was experiencing very intense negative emotions, in which case the meaning would be similar to **troubled**. Alternate translation: “he was deeply moved” (2) Jesus was angry or indignant, which is what the word means in other books in the Bible. Alternate translation: “he was outraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	33	w7f8	figs-explicit	ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι	1	he was deeply moved in his spirit and was troubled	Here, **spirit** refers to Jesus’ **spirit**. It does not refer to the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deeply disturbed within himself” or “he was deeply disturbed inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1545,7 +1545,7 @@ JHN	11	37	b3at	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὗτος, ὁ ἀνοί
 JHN	11	37	a76u	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ	1	opened the eyes	See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “who caused the blind man to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	11	38	e72n		ἐμβριμώμενος ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 33](../11/33.md).
 JHN	11	38	xu7k	writing-background	ἦν δὲ σπήλαιον, καὶ λίθος ἐπέκειτο ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	Now it was a cave, and a stone lay against it	John provides a brief break in the story to describe the tomb where the people had entombed Lazarus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The place Lazarus was entombed was a cave that had a stone laying against it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	11	39	hevw	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	11	39	hevw	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	39	l2pd	translate-kinship	ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1	Martha, the sister of Lazarus	**Martha** was Lazarus’ oldest **sister**. If your language uses different words for **sister** depending on birth order, use the word for a older or oldest **sister** here. Alternate translation: “the oldest sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	39	lt1d	figs-explicit	τεταρταῖος γάρ ἐστιν	1		This means that it has been **four days** since Lazarus **died**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for he has been dead for four days” or “for it has been four days since he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	40	c082	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -1570,7 +1570,7 @@ JHN	11	48	kq4z	figs-explicit	πάντες πιστεύσουσιν εἰς αὐ
 JHN	11	48	hr3p	figs-synecdoche	ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι	1	the Romans will come	The Jewish leaders use **the Romans** to refer to the Roman army. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Roman soldiers will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	48	ah4r	figs-explicit	καὶ ἀροῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν τόπον	1	take away both our place and our nation	Here, **place** could mean: (1) the Jewish temple, as in the UST. (2) the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “and will take away both our city, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	48	zy0k	figs-explicit	τὸ ἔθνος	1		Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jewish nation” or “the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	11	49	efq8	writing-participants	εἷς&τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, Καϊάφας	1	a certain man among them	This phrase introduces **Caiaphas** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man among them named Caiaphas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+JHN	11	49	efq8	writing-participants	εἷς & τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, Καϊάφας	1	a certain man among them	This phrase introduces **Caiaphas** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man among them named Caiaphas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 JHN	11	49	lj6b	figs-hyperbole	ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε οὐδέν	1	You know nothing	Here, **Caiaphas** uses an exaggeration in order to insult his hearers. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows contempt. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what is happening” or “You speak as though you know nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	11	50	fvry	figs-explicit	καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται	1		Caiaphas implies that the Roman army would kill all of the people of the Jewish **nation** if Jesus is allowed to live and cause a rebellion. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Romans would not kill all the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	50	zh9n	figs-synecdoche	καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται	1	than that the whole nation perishes	Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and all the people of our nation would not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -1588,17 +1588,17 @@ JHN	11	54	bnd8	figs-synecdoche	παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν το
 JHN	11	54	s9km	figs-metaphor	παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1		Here John uses **walked openly** to mean “walked around where everyone could see him.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “walked around where all the Jews could see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	11	54	cg66		τὴν χώραν	1	the country	Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”
 JHN	11	54	h5jk	figs-explicit	κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν	1	There he stayed with the disciples	Jesus and his disciples **stayed** in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stayed**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	11	55	qd5y		ἀνέβησαν&εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	went up to Jerusalem	The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated **went up** in [7:10](../07/10.md).
+JHN	11	55	qd5y		ἀνέβησαν & εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	went up to Jerusalem	The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated **went up** in [7:10](../07/10.md).
 JHN	11	55	rsgm		τῆς χώρας	1		Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”
 JHN	11	56	a5kt	figs-events		0	General Information:	The event in [verse 57](../11/57.md) occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of [verse 57](../11/57.md) before the text of this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-JHN	11	56	kc75	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν&τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	They were looking for Jesus	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration, as described in the previous verse. If this use of **they** might be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people who came to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration were looking for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	11	56	kc75	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν & τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	They were looking for Jesus	Here, **they** refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration, as described in the previous verse. If this use of **they** might be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people who came to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration were looking for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	11	56	y3xz	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1		The people were standing in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	56	i7en	figs-idiom	τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν	1	What do you think? That he will not come to the festival?	This is an idiom used to ask for someone’s opinion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “What is your opinion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	11	56	p2wz	figs-rquestion	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1	What do you think? That he will not come to the festival?	The people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think Jesus will **come** to the **Passover** festival. The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since the Jewish leaders wanted to kill him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will certainly not come to the festival!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	11	56	x6im	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1		The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	57	glb6	figs-events	δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	Now the chief priests	This event occurs before that of the previous verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of this verse before the text of [verse 56](../11/56.md). Another option would be to clearly state that this verse refers to an earlier event. Alternate translation: “Earlier, the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 JHN	12	intro	qzv4			0		# John 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Mary pours perfume on Jesus (12:1–11)\n2. Jesus enters Jerusalem (12:12–19)\n3. Some Greeks come to Jesus (12:20–26)\n4. Jesus predicts his death (12:27–36)\n5. John explains the Jews’ rejection of Jesus (12:37–43)\n6. Jesus says that he is God (12:44–50)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry sections in [12:38](../12/38.md) and [40](../12/40.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Mary poured perfume on Jesus’ feet\n\nThe Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. However, they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.\n\n### The donkey and the colt\n\nJesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal, which was a common practice for kings. The kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. So by riding on a donkey Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel.\n\n### Glory\n\nScripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In [12:16](../12/16.md) John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection and possibly his return to heaven as well.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [12:35–36, 46](../12/35.md), Jesus uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good, and darkness represents what is false and evil. He applies that light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in [12:25](../12/25.md): “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in [12:26](../12/26.md) Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	12	1	s1v2	writing-newevent	οὖν&πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα	1	Six days before the Passover	John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, six days before the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+JHN	12	1	s1v2	writing-newevent	οὖν & πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα	1	Six days before the Passover	John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, six days before the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	12	1	z1jp	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	had raised from the dead	Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “had caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	12	2	m6al	translate-unknown	τῶν ἀνακειμένων	1	had raised from the dead	At a relaxed meal such as this one, it was the custom in this culture for host and guests to eat while lying down comfortably around a table that was close to the ground. You could translate this by using the expression in your language for the customary posture at a meal. Alternate translation: “those sitting down at the table to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	12	3	c8kf	translate-bweight	λίτραν μύρου	1	a litra of perfume	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **litra** is about one third of a kilogram or three quarters of a pound. If your language does not measure liquids by weight, you may refer to its volume equivalent, which would be about half a liter. You might also refer to the container that could hold that amount. Alternate translation: “about half a liter of perfume” or “a one-half liter bottle of perfume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
@@ -1611,16 +1611,16 @@ JHN	12	5	e8d7	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί τοῦτο τὸ μύρον οὐκ 
 JHN	12	5	dx9e	translate-bmoney	τριακοσίων δηναρίων	1	denarii	The word **denarii** is the plural form of “denarius.” It was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “for 300 days’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 JHN	12	5	tted	figs-nominaladj	πτωχοῖς	1		Judas is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JHN	12	6	ri5l	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the story to explain why Judas made the statement in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	12	6	sl8u	figs-infostructure	εἶπεν&τοῦτο, οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν πτωχῶν ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “he said this because he was a thief, not because it was a concern to him about the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+JHN	12	6	sl8u	figs-infostructure	εἶπεν & τοῦτο, οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν πτωχῶν ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “he said this because he was a thief, not because it was a concern to him about the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	12	6	mgm8	figs-nominaladj	τῶν πτωχῶν	1		See how you translated **the poor** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JHN	12	6	qoun	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	12	6	ol4t	figs-activepassive	τὰ βαλλόμενα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people gave him to put in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	7	z6s7	figs-ellipsis	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1		This could mean: (1) Jesus is stating the purpose for which Mary did not sell the perfume. In this case he would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. This translation would require supplying those words from Judas’ objection in [verse 5](../12/05.md) and making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (2) Jesus is giving the purpose for his command in the previous clause. In this case he would be implying that there was some leftover perfumed oil which Mary could later put on his dead body. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	12	7	dcn3	figs-explicit	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1	Allow her to keep what she has for the day of my burial	If Jesus is stating the reason why Mary had the perfume, then Jesus is implying that Mary’s actions can be understood as anticipating his death and **burial**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You may need to add a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it to prepare my body for burial, as she had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	8	wo1a	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς γὰρ πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus’ statement in this verse implies that Mary acted properly by pouring the expensive perfume on him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “She acted appropriately, because you always have the poor with you, but you do not always have me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	8	r82p	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς&πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus implies that there will always be opportunities to help **the poor**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you always have the poor with you that you can help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	8	r82p	figs-explicit	τοὺς πτωχοὺς & πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	You will always have the poor with you	Jesus implies that there will always be opportunities to help **the poor**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you always have the poor with you that you can help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	8	b6lf	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πτωχοὺς	1	You will always have the poor with you	See how you translated **the poor** in the [verse 6](../12/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-JHN	12	8	qctd	figs-you	ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν&ἔχετε	1		In this verse every occurrence of **you** is plural and refers to the disciples and those who were with Jesus at the dinner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	12	8	qctd	figs-you	ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν & ἔχετε	1		In this verse every occurrence of **you** is plural and refers to the disciples and those who were with Jesus at the dinner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	12	8	kn28	figs-explicit	ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε	1	But you will not always have me	Jesus implies that he will not always be with them, because he will die. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I will not always be here with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	9	qm36	writing-background	οὖν	1	Now	**Then** is used here to mark a break in the main storyline. This break continues until the end of [verse 11](../12/11.md). In this verse John gives background information about a new group of people that has come to Bethany. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	12	9	i6mn	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -1642,7 +1642,7 @@ JHN	12	13	hf0a	figs-quotemarks	ὡσαννά! εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρ
 JHN	12	13	lzn9	figs-explicit	ὡσαννά	1	Hosanna	**Hosanna** is the Greek pronunciation of an expression in the Hebrew language that means “Please save!” It is a quotation from part of [Psalm 118:25](../psa/118/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Save us now!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	13	w7ty	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	comes in the name of the Lord	Here, **name** refers to a person’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	14	dbc5	writing-background		0		In [verses 14–16](../12/14.md) John interrupts the story to give background information about how Jesus fulfilled an Old Testament prophecy about the Messiah riding on a **donkey**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	12	14	b9ry	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν&ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον, ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτό	1		John implies that Jesus will ride the **donkey** into Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having found a young donkey, sat on it, riding it into the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	14	b9ry	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν & ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον, ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτό	1		John implies that Jesus will ride the **donkey** into Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having found a young donkey, sat on it, riding it into the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	14	lqyy	writing-quotations	καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον	1	as it was written	This phrase introduces a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament which occur in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote in the Old Testament” or “as it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	12	14	h6xz	figs-activepassive	καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον	1	as it was written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as prophets wrote in the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	15	ts1f	figs-quotemarks		0		This verse is a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -1653,10 +1653,10 @@ JHN	12	16	xdm7	figs-activepassive	ὅτε ἐδοξάσθη Ἰησοῦς	1	whe
 JHN	12	16	u9hf	figs-explicit	ἐδοξάσθη	1	when Jesus was glorified	Here, **glorified** could refer to: (1) when Jesus became alive again after he was killed. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life” (2) when Jesus returned to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus went back to heaven” (3) both Jesus’ resurrection and return to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life and went back to heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	16	w0hx	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα ἦν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα	1	when Jesus was glorified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets have written these things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	17	nr1j	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-JHN	12	17	wyrv	figs-explicit	ἐμαρτύρει&ὁ ὄχλος ὁ ὢν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **the crowd** refers to the group of Jews who had seen Jesus raise Lazarus from the dead at Bethany in Chapter 11. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one crowd testified that they had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	17	wyrv	figs-explicit	ἐμαρτύρει & ὁ ὄχλος ὁ ὢν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **the crowd** refers to the group of Jews who had seen Jesus raise Lazarus from the dead at Bethany in Chapter 11. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one crowd testified that they had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	17	cq7a		ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../12/01.md).
 JHN	12	18	h0l2	figs-explicit	ὁ ὄχλος	1	they heard that he had done this sign	Here, **the crowd** refers to a group of people who were coming out of Jerusalem to see Jesus as he came. This is a different **crowd** than the crowd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a second crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	18	czmv	figs-explicit	τοῦτο&τὸ σημεῖον	2	this sign	This phrase refers to Jesus raising Lazarus from the dead, an event that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this sign, bringing a dead man back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	18	czmv	figs-explicit	τοῦτο & τὸ σημεῖον	2	this sign	This phrase refers to Jesus raising Lazarus from the dead, an event that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this sign, bringing a dead man back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	18	v2nx		τὸ σημεῖον	1	this sign	See how you translated **sign** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”
 JHN	12	19	c43j	figs-explicit	θεωρεῖτε ὅτι οὐκ ὠφελεῖτε οὐδέν	1	Look, you can do nothing	The Pharisees imply here that it might be impossible to stop Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “It seems like we can do nothing to stop him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	19	i5uq	figs-hyperbole	ἴδε, ὁ κόσμος ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν	1	see, the world has gone after him	The Pharisees use **the world** as an exaggeration to express their shock that so many people have come out to follow Jesus. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows shock. Alternate translation: “Behold, it seems like everyone has gone after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1672,7 +1672,7 @@ JHN	12	21	rfff	writing-quotations	ἠρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1
 JHN	12	21	c8qt		κύριε	1		Speaking to **Philip**, the Greeks called him **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	12	21	xgoj	figs-declarative	θέλομεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἰδεῖν	1		The Greeks are using a statement to make a request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “may we see Jesus?” or “could you take us to see Jesus?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JHN	12	22	e9vn	figs-explicit	λέγει τῷ Ἀνδρέᾳ	1		**Philip** tells **Andrew** about the Greeks’ request to see **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “relates to Andrew what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	22	vzih	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται&καὶ λέγει&ἔρχεται&καὶ λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	12	22	vzih	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται & καὶ λέγει & ἔρχεται & καὶ λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	12	22	b9re	figs-explicit	λέγουσιν τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		**Philip** and **Andrew** tell **Jesus** about the Greeks’ request to see him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “speak to Jesus about what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	23	dkmf	writing-quotations	ἀποκρίνεται αὐτοῖς λέγων	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “answered them by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	12	23	jl9u	figs-metonymy	ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα	1	The hour has come for the Son of Man to be glorified	See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 4 and see how you translated this phrase in [4:21](../04/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1690,13 +1690,13 @@ JHN	12	26	i8ky	figs-explicit	ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ἐκεῖ καὶ 
 JHN	12	26	wx3m	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	the Father will honor him	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	12	27	ytv9	figs-rquestion	τί εἴπω, Πάτερ, σῶσόν με ἐκ τῆς ὥρας ταύτης?	1	what should I say? ‘Father, save me from this hour’?	Here Jesus uses a rhetorical question to emphasize what he will not do. Although Jesus desires to avoid crucifixion, he chooses to be obedient to God and let himself be killed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will not say, ‘Father, save me from this hour!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	12	27	bx1j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	12	27	hmv9	figs-metonymy	τῆς ὥρας ταύτης&τὴν ὥραν ταύτην	1	this hour	In this verse **this hour** refers to the time when Jesus would suffer and die on the cross. See how you translated **hour** in [verse 23](../12/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	12	27	hmv9	figs-metonymy	τῆς ὥρας ταύτης & τὴν ὥραν ταύτην	1	this hour	In this verse **this hour** refers to the time when Jesus would suffer and die on the cross. See how you translated **hour** in [verse 23](../12/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	27	ktpa	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦτο	1	this hour	Here, **this reason** refers to Jesus’ suffering and death on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in order to suffer and die,” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	28	t69i	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	12	28	v2fk	figs-metonymy	δόξασόν σου τὸ ὄνομα&καὶ ἐδόξασα&δοξάσω	1	glorify your name	In this verse, **name** and **it** refer to God himself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “glorify yourself … I have both glorified myself … I will glorify myself”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	12	28	r6qk	figs-metaphor	ἦλθεν&φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	a voice came from heaven	Here John refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that **came from heaven**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	29	dnsk	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ&ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-JHN	12	30	kd86	figs-metonymy	οὐ&ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν	1		Here, Jesus refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that came down from heaven (see [verse 28](../12/28.md)). If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God did not speak this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	12	28	v2fk	figs-metonymy	δόξασόν σου τὸ ὄνομα & καὶ ἐδόξασα & δοξάσω	1	glorify your name	In this verse, **name** and **it** refer to God himself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “glorify yourself … I have both glorified myself … I will glorify myself”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	12	28	r6qk	figs-metaphor	ἦλθεν & φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	a voice came from heaven	Here John refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that **came from heaven**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	12	29	dnsk	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ & ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+JHN	12	30	kd86	figs-metonymy	οὐ & ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν	1		Here, Jesus refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that came down from heaven (see [verse 28](../12/28.md)). If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God did not speak this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	31	hlcg	figs-abstractnouns	νῦν κρίσις ἐστὶν τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	Now is the judgment of this world	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Now God will judge this world”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	12	31	fc6r	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	Now is the judgment of this world	Here, **this world** is used to refer to all the people in the **world**. See how you translated **world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	31	pv51	figs-explicit	νῦν ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω	1	Now will the ruler of this world be thrown out	Here, **ruler of this world** refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now Satan will be thrown out”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1709,15 +1709,15 @@ JHN	12	33	b1zu	writing-background		0	General Information:	In this verse John exp
 JHN	12	34	swpp	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	12	34	su0r	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ νόμου	1		The crowd is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the law, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated this use of **the law** in [10:34](../10/34.md). Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	12	34	mx1k	figs-explicit	δεῖ ὑψωθῆναι τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	The Son of Man must be lifted up	Here, the phrase **lifted up** means “crucified.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the Son of Man to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	34	jzfm	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου&ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	34	jzfm	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	34	t386	figs-explicit	τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Who is this Son of Man?	This could mean: (1) they are asking to know the identity of **the Son of Man**. Alternate translation: “What is the identity of this Son of Man?” (2) they are asking to know what Jesus means when he says, ‘Son of Man.’ Alternate translation: “What kind of Son of Man are you talking about?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	35	l2w4	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν&ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε	1		Jesus uses **light** to refer to refer to himself. He is “the Light of the World” who reveals God’s truth and goodness the way a **light** reveals a person’s surroundings. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “The one who reveals God’s truth and goodness will be with you … while you have him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	35	k6td	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν&ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε	1		Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these phrases in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the light, will be with you … while you have me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	12	35	l2w4	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν & ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε	1		Jesus uses **light** to refer to refer to himself. He is “the Light of the World” who reveals God’s truth and goodness the way a **light** reveals a person’s surroundings. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “The one who reveals God’s truth and goodness will be with you … while you have him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	12	35	k6td	figs-123person	τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν & ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε	1		Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these phrases in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the light, will be with you … while you have me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	12	35	ughp	figs-metaphor	περιπατεῖτε	1		Jesus uses **Walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. He is telling the crowd to live and act according to the example that he has shown them while he has been with them. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behave righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	35	e715	figs-personification	ἵνα μὴ σκοτία ὑμᾶς καταλάβῃ	1		Jesus uses **darkness** as though it were a person who could **overtake** someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you do not act sinfully, as if the darkness of sin had taken control of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	12	35	veok	figs-metaphor	σκοτία	1		Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated this term in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	35	h0q9	figs-metaphor	ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ	1		Jesus uses this phrase to refer to a person who lives a sinful life and behaves sinfully. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who lives sinfully” or “the one who does not behave righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	36	j1rs	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς&εἰς τὸ φῶς	1	While you have the light, believe in the light so that you may be sons of light	Both occurrences of **the light** here refer to Jesus. See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	12	36	j1rs	figs-metaphor	τὸ φῶς & εἰς τὸ φῶς	1	While you have the light, believe in the light so that you may be sons of light	Both occurrences of **the light** here refer to Jesus. See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	36	xu4p	figs-idiom	υἱοὶ φωτὸς	1	While you have the light, believe in the light so that you may be sons of light	Here, **sons of light** is an idiom that refers to people who live according to God’s truth and goodness, which Jesus has revealed to them. Here, **sons** does not refer specifically to male children and **light** does not refer to Jesus. If this expression would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “people who share in God’s truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	12	37	s1wh	writing-background		0	General Information:	In [verses 37–43](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	12	37	g1z3		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
@@ -1733,7 +1733,7 @@ JHN	12	39	cskd	writing-quotations	ὅτι πάλιν εἶπεν Ἠσαΐας	1
 JHN	12	40	q8k8	figs-quotemarks	τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ, καὶ στραφῶσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 6:10](../../isa/06/10.md). It is a prophecy that God told Isaiah to speak against the Jewish people because they kept rejecting God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	12	40	opz8	figs-metaphor	τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς	1		Here John quotes Isaiah using **blinded their eyes** to refer to causing people to not be able to understanding what they see. Although the Jews saw Jesus’ many miracles, most of them did not understand that those miracles proved that Jesus was sent by God. If this use of **blinded** and **eyes** would confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “He has caused them to not be able to understand” or “He has made them like those who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	40	wac6	figs-metaphor	ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν	1		John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **hardened their heart** to refer to causing the Jewish people to become stubborn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made them stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	40	zs9l	grammar-collectivenouns	αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν&τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		Both occurrences of the singular noun **heart** in this verse refer to all of the hearts of the people as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “their hearts … with their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+JHN	12	40	zs9l	grammar-collectivenouns	αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν & τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		Both occurrences of the singular noun **heart** in this verse refer to all of the hearts of the people as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “their hearts … with their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	12	40	v6ic	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς	1		John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **see with their eyes** here to refer to people understanding something that they **see**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might not see and perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	40	btbb	figs-metaphor	νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **understand with their heart** to refer to the Jewish people truly understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might fully understand” or “might understand deep within themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	40	h99a	figs-metaphor	καὶ στραφῶσιν	1	and turn	John quotes Isaiah using **turn** to mean “repent,” which means to stop sinning and start obeying the Lord. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they would repent” or “and they would stop sinning and obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1742,27 +1742,27 @@ JHN	12	41	q2x6	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1		If your lan
 JHN	12	42	srml	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀρχόντων	1		Here, **rulers** refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) See how you translated **rulers** in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “the members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	42	hdh1	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται	1	so that they would not be banned from the synagogue	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the Pharisees would not ban them from the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	42	jl6b	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται	1		John uses **put out of the synagogue** to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attended services at the synagogue. When people were put out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “they would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	43	fx72	figs-explicit	ἠγάπησαν&τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἤπερ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	Here, **loved** refers to preferring one thing over something else. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they preferred the glory of men more than the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	43	fx72	figs-explicit	ἠγάπησαν & τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἤπερ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	Here, **loved** refers to preferring one thing over something else. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they preferred the glory of men more than the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	43	cqqw	figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	John is using **of** to describe **glory** that is given by **men**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the glory that is given by men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	12	43	pib1	figs-gendernotations	τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both **men** and women. Alternate translation: “the glory of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	12	43	oyf8	figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God	John is using **of** to describe **glory** that is given by **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the glory that is given by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	12	44	t7cq	writing-newevent	δὲ	1		**Now** here introduces a new event that happened at some time after the events in [verses 20–36](../12/20.md). The story does not say how long after the previous events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “At another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-JHN	12	44	d27w	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦς&ἔκραξεν καὶ εἶπεν	1	Jesus cried out and said	John uses **cried out** to imply that Jesus was speaking loudly to a crowd of people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried out and said to a crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	44	d27w	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦς & ἔκραξεν καὶ εἶπεν	1	Jesus cried out and said	John uses **cried out** to imply that Jesus was speaking loudly to a crowd of people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried out and said to a crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	44	kcnd	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one having sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	45	s6xx	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one having sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	46	wib3	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ φῶς εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυθα	1	I have come as a light	Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to himself. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12). Alternate translation: “I have come as the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	12	46	nggy	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	I have come as a light	Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	46	i31g	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ μὴ μείνῃ	1	may not remain in the darkness	Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated **darkness** in [verse 35](../12/35.md) and also see the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “might not remain in sin and evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	12	47	vehn	figs-metonymy	μου&τῶν ῥημάτων	1		Here, **words** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	12	47	vehn	figs-metonymy	μου & τῶν ῥημάτων	1		Here, **words** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	47	xlyd	figs-explicit	καὶ μὴ φυλάξῃ	1		Here, **keep** means to obey. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “but does not obey them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	47	xvq6	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω αὐτόν&ἵνα κρίνω τὸν κόσμον	1	If anyone hears my words but does not keep them, I do not judge him; for I have not come to judge the world, but to save the world	In this verse, the word **judge** implies condemnation. Jesus did not come to condemn people to be eternally punished in hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not condemn him … so that I might condemn the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	12	47	xvq6	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω αὐτόν & ἵνα κρίνω τὸν κόσμον	1	If anyone hears my words but does not keep them, I do not judge him; for I have not come to judge the world, but to save the world	In this verse, the word **judge** implies condemnation. Jesus did not come to condemn people to be eternally punished in hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not condemn him … so that I might condemn the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	47	u4o4	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	-1		See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	12	48	wtwv		τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	on the last day	See how you translated **my words** in the previous verse.
-JHN	12	48	uxjk		τὸν κρίνοντα&κρινεῖ	1	on the last day	See how you translated this **judge** in the previous verse.
-JHN	12	48	c76d	figs-personification	τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν&ὁ λόγος ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος κρινεῖ αὐτὸν	1	on the last day	Jesus refers to his **word** as though it were a person who could judge someone. He means that his teachings will be used as the criterion by which God will judge those who have rejected Jesus. If this might be confusing to your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one by which he will be judged. The word which I have spoken, this will be the standard by which you will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+JHN	12	48	uxjk		τὸν κρίνοντα & κρινεῖ	1	on the last day	See how you translated this **judge** in the previous verse.
+JHN	12	48	c76d	figs-personification	τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν & ὁ λόγος ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος κρινεῖ αὐτὸν	1	on the last day	Jesus refers to his **word** as though it were a person who could judge someone. He means that his teachings will be used as the criterion by which God will judge those who have rejected Jesus. If this might be confusing to your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one by which he will be judged. The word which I have spoken, this will be the standard by which you will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	12	48	b1ds	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	on the last day	See how you translated this phrase in [6:39](../06/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	49	ovmm	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of what Jesus spoke. See how you translated this phrase in [7:17](../07/17.md). Alternate translation: “by my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	12	49	ybm5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ&Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	12	49	ybm5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ & Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	12	49	l77y	figs-doublet	τί εἴπω, καὶ τί λαλήσω	1		Here, **what I should speak** could refer to: (1) the manner in which Jesus **should speak**. Alternate translation: “what I should say and the manner in which I should say it” (2) the same meaning as **what I should say**, in which case the two phrases would be a doublet used for emphasis and could be combined into one clause. Alternate translation: “exactly what I should say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	12	50	tar2	figs-explicit	οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ	1	I know that his command is eternal life	Here, **his command** refers to the teachings that God commanded Jesus to speak, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that what he commanded me to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	12	50	q9cr	figs-explicit	ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν	1	I know that his command is eternal life	This phrase means that what God commanded Jesus to say gives **eternal life** to those who believe it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his command gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1777,13 +1777,13 @@ JHN	13	2	iq56	translate-names	Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη
 JHN	13	3	qtr3	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδὼς	1	Father	Here, the word **knowing** could mean: (1) the rest of this verse is the reason why Jesus did the result that John describes in the next verse. Alternate translation: “because he knew” (2) this verse provides a contrast between who Jesus is and what he would do in the next verse. Alternate translation: “although he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	13	3	fd2t	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	13	3	x8hc	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας	1	had given everything over into his hands	Here, John uses **hands** to refer to power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	13	4	t7cu	figs-pastforfuture	ἐγείρεται&τίθησιν	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	13	4	t7cu	figs-pastforfuture	ἐγείρεται & τίθησιν	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	4	nm8h	figs-explicit	ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to the table. Here, **gets up** means that Jesus went from lying on his side on a couch next to the table where he was eating **supper** to standing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he gets up from the table where he was eating supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	4	a9yt		τίθησιν τὰ ἱμάτια	1	He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing	Here, **outer clothing** refers to clothing that is worn over undergarments. It does not refer to a coat that would be worn over a person’s regular clothing. Use the term in your language for the regular clothing that people wear on top of their underwear.
 JHN	13	4	gfe4	figs-explicit	λαβὼν λέντιον	1		Here, **towel** refers to piece of cloth that is long enough to wrap around Jesus’ waist and still has enough leftover cloth to wipe the disciples’ feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken a long towel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	5	qfqd	figs-pastforfuture	βάλλει	1	began to wash the feet of the disciples	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	5	adm9	figs-activepassive	ᾧ ἦν διεζωσμένος	1	began to wash the feet of the disciples	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he had tied around himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	13	6	hevx	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται&λέγει	1	Lord, are you going to wash my feet?	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	13	6	hevx	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται & λέγει	1	Lord, are you going to wash my feet?	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	6	bz27	figs-rquestion	Κύριε, σύ μου νίπτεις τοὺς πόδας?	1	Lord, are you going to wash my feet?	**Peter** is using a rhetorical question here to show that he does not want Jesus to wash his feet. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, it is not right for you to wash my feet!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	13	7	o7nf	figs-explicit	μετὰ ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ crucifixion and resurrection. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after the events that are about to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	8	oy8j	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -1820,15 +1820,15 @@ JHN	13	18	wr0c	figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρνα
 JHN	13	19	qd39	figs-ellipsis	ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I tell you this now before it happens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	19	gg19	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	I AM	See how you translated **I am** in [8:24](../08/24.md), and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for Chapter 8. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	20	di3t	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	13	20	zcyh	figs-doublet	ὁ λαμβάνων&λαμβάνει&λαμβάνων&λαμβάνει	1		In this verse, **receiving** and **receives** mean to accept or welcome a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in [1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+JHN	13	20	zcyh	figs-doublet	ὁ λαμβάνων & λαμβάνει & λαμβάνων & λαμβάνει	1		In this verse, **receiving** and **receives** mean to accept or welcome a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in [1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	20	ksfj	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one having sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	21	bq84	figs-explicit	ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι	1	troubled	See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:33](../11/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	21	j7x1	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	13	23	xvi8	figs-explicit	εἷς ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ&ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	One of his disciples, whom Jesus loved	This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the discussion in the General Notes for this chapter. If this phrase would be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved” or “John, one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	13	23	xvi8	figs-explicit	εἷς ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ & ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	One of his disciples, whom Jesus loved	This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the discussion in the General Notes for this chapter. If this phrase would be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved” or “John, one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	23	z8ze	translate-unknown	ἀνακείμενος	1	lying down at the table	During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to a table. If your readers would not be familiar with this meal practice, you could use a general expression for sitting to have a meal. Alternate translation: “seated at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	13	23	p2ee	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Jesus’ side	In Jesus’ culture, lying with one’s head **against** the side of another person when having a meal was considered to be a sign that the two people had a very close friendship. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “closely beside Jesus as a close friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	24	eido	figs-explicit	τούτῳ	1	Jesus’ side	Here, **this one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	25	iqcj	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος&λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here, **that one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in [verse 23](../13/23.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that disciple whom Jesus loved says” or “I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	13	25	iqcj	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος & λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here, **that one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in [verse 23](../13/23.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that disciple whom Jesus loved says” or “I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	25	kqza	figs-explicit	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	[Verse 28](../13/28.md) indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next, because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	25	b22k	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	26	qpj8	translate-names	Ἰούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:71](../06/71.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1848,7 +1848,7 @@ JHN	13	31	gd4y	figs-123person	ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρ
 JHN	13	31	o91a	figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	31	n421	figs-activepassive	ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	13	32	i7yz	translate-textvariants		0		In some Bibles, this verse begins with the clause, “If God has been glorified in him”. However, these words are not in most of the oldest ancient manuscripts. Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JHN	13	32	bfxt	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&αὐτόν	1	God will glorify him in himself, and he will glorify him immediately	Both occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the Son of Man, Jesus. If this use of **him** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man … the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	13	32	bfxt	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτόν	1	God will glorify him in himself, and he will glorify him immediately	Both occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the Son of Man, Jesus. If this use of **him** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man … the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	13	32	uaj7	figs-rpronouns	ὁ Θεὸς δοξάσει αὐτὸν ἐν αὐτῷ	1	God will glorify him in himself, and he will glorify him immediately	The word **himself** here refers to God and is used to emphasize that God is the one who would **glorify** Jesus. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “God himself will glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	13	33	zki6	figs-metaphor	τεκνία	1	Little children	Jesus is using the phrase **Little children** to describe the disciples to whom he is speaking. He loves them as if they were his own children. If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “You dear disciples who are like children to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	13	33	lp65	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	as I said to the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -1858,7 +1858,7 @@ JHN	13	34	nmf5	figs-declarative	καθὼς ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς, ἵνα
 JHN	13	35	kyd9	figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	everyone	Here, Jesus uses **everyone** as an exaggeration that refers only to those people who would see how the disciples loved each other. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	13	36	s0gc	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	37	xpt1	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	13	37	ye6m	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχήν μου&θήσω	1	lay down my life	See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+JHN	13	37	ye6m	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχήν μου & θήσω	1	lay down my life	See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	13	38	qp88	figs-rquestion	τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θήσεις?	1	Will you lay down your life for me?	**Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. He knows that Peter is not really willing to **lay down** his life for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You will certainly not lay down your life for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	13	38	juha	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1		Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	38	sp7p		οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ ἀρνήσῃ με τρίς	1	the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this negative statement as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you will surely deny me three times before the rooster crows”
@@ -1888,12 +1888,12 @@ JHN	14	8	fy8b	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense
 JHN	14	8	kum1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα	1	Lord, show us the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	9	q2iy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip?	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	14	9	mr1a	figs-rquestion	τοσοῦτον χρόνον μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωκάς με, Φίλιππε?	1	I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip?	**Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So long a time I am with you, and you should know me, Philip!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	14	9	vx5b	figs-you	ὑμῶν&σὺ	1		The first occurrence of **you** in this verse is plural, but the second occurrence is singular. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	14	9	vx5b	figs-you	ὑμῶν & σὺ	1		The first occurrence of **you** in this verse is plural, but the second occurrence is singular. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	14	9	l3s8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	Whoever has seen me has seen the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	9	x1uh	figs-rquestion	πῶς σὺ λέγεις, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα?	1	How can you say, ‘Show us the Father’?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should not say, ‘Show us the Father!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	14	10	hc1z	figs-rquestion	οὐ πιστεύεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν?	1	Do you not believe … in me?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should believe that I am in the Father, and the Father is in me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	14	10	li33	figs-idiom	ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν	1	Do you not believe … in me?	See how you translated this expression in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	14	10	e4se	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρὶ&ὁ Πατὴρ&Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	14	10	e4se	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρὶ & ὁ Πατὴρ & Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	10	wh9w	figs-you	τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν	1	The words that I say to you	Here, **you** is plural. Jesus shifts from speaking to Philip to speaking to all of his disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	14	10	pgk6	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα	1	The words that I say to you I do not speak from my own authority	Here, **words** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The message” or “The teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	14	10	seon	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ	1		See how you translated **from myself** in [5:30](../05/30.md). Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1908,7 +1908,7 @@ JHN	14	12	cn14	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is
 JHN	14	13	bn30	figs-ellipsis	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	13	n2id	figs-idiom	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Here, **ask in my name** could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself were requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “whatever you ask with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	14	13	i138	figs-activepassive	ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ	1	so that the Father will be glorified in the Son	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case **in the Son** would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	14	13	j6nh	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ&Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	14	13	j6nh	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ & Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	13	zr8g	figs-123person	ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ	1	Son	Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this phrase in the first person. Alternate translation: “in me, the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	14	14	sgk6	figs-idiom	ἐάν τι αἰτήσητέ με ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	If you ask me anything in my name	See how you translated **in my name** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	14	15	bws1	figs-explicit	τὰς ἐντολὰς τὰς ἐμὰς τηρήσετε	1		Here, **keep** means to obey. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will obey my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1945,9 +1945,9 @@ JHN	14	24	c3ju	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	The word	Here, **word** refers to
 JHN	14	24	d7ay	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸς	1	that you hear	Here, **mine** refers to the source of what Jesus has said. What Jesus has said did not come from himself, but from God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not come from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	24	ke2f	figs-possession	τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe the source of **the word**. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has come from the Father who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	14	24	az71	figs-explicit	τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός	1		Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase3 in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	14	24	jhdc	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ&Πατρός	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	14	24	jhdc	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ & Πατρός	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	26	lbgf	figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Παράκλητος, τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ πέμψει ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα, καὶ ὑπομνήσει ὑμᾶς πάντα ἃ εἶπον ὑμῖν.	1	Father	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse. Alternate translation: “Now the Helper will teach you everything, and he will remind you of everything that I said to you. He is the Holy Spirit, whom the Father will send in my name.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	14	26	n7ez		ὁ&Παράκλητος	1	Father	See how you translated **the Helper** in [verse 16](../14/16.md).
+JHN	14	26	n7ez		ὁ & Παράκλητος	1	Father	See how you translated **the Helper** in [verse 16](../14/16.md).
 JHN	14	26	hk8n	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	26	jjhy	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Father	Here, **in my name** could mean: (1) as the representative of Jesus or in place of Jesus. Alternate translation: “as my representative” or “in place of me” (2) with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	14	26	ig83	figs-hyperbole	πάντα	1		Here, **everything** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses for emphasis. He means that the **Holy Spirit** would teach the disciples all that they needed to know about what he had taught them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “everything that you need to know about what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1961,13 +1961,13 @@ JHN	14	28	s8bx	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν, ὑπάγω
 JHN	14	28	ayiy	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν	1		Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that at this point his disciples don’t truly love him in the way that they should. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you loved me, but you don’t, you would be glad, but your aren’t” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	14	28	s3t3	figs-explicit	πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα	1	I am going to the Father	Here Jesus implies that he will return to his **Father**. Alternate translation: “I am going back to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	28	gtk5	figs-explicit	ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν	1	the Father is greater than I	Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the role of the Father is superior to the role that I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	14	28	ymq4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα&ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	14	28	ymq4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα & ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	29	cj9y	figs-ellipsis	εἴρηκα ὑμῖν	1	Father	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	30	ah3s	figs-explicit	ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων	1	ruler of this world	Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this phrase in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	30	ea6m	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν	1	ruler … is coming	Here, **has nothing in me** means that Satan has no control over Jesus and cannot make him do anything. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is not able to control me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	31	n3et	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀλλ’ ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Πατέρα, καὶ καθὼς ἐνετείλατο μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὕτως ποιῶ	1		Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. The first event that is done to accomplish this purpose could be: (1) a phrase Jesus left out that can be supplied from the context of the previous verses. Alternate translation: “but the ruler of this world is coming so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” or “but these things will happen so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” (2) what is stated later in the sentence, in which case the order of the clauses must be changed. Alternate translation: “but just as the Father commanded me, thus I do so that the world might know that I love the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JHN	14	31	jhq1	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	in order that the world will know	See how you translated **the world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	14	31	r9ub	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα&ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	14	31	r9ub	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα & ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	intro	k9jd			0		# John 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus says he is the vine (15:1–8)\n2. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (15:9–17)\n3. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Vine\n\nJesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. The vine of the grape plant takes water and minerals from the ground and gives them to the leaves and grapes that are on the branches. Without the vine, the branches, grapes, and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/vine]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/grape]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Remain in me”\n\nJesus uses the word “remain” as a metaphor. He is speaking of a believer being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. In ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea of “my words remain in you” as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.
 JHN	15	1	aws2			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here,” at the end of the previous chapter ([John 14:31](../14/31.md)).
 JHN	15	1	fen5	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή	1	I am the true vine	Jesus uses the **true vine** to refer to himself. As a **vine** is the source of life for its branches, so Jesus causes people to live in a way that pleases God and brings other people to believe in Jesus. Since the **vine** is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should translate the words directly or use a simile and not provide a plain explanation in the text of your translation. Alternate translation: “I am like a true vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1975,13 +1975,13 @@ JHN	15	1	puzl	translate-unknown	ἡ ἀληθινή	1		The word translated **vin
 JHN	15	1	hqj7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	1	w2d4	figs-metaphor	ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν	1	my Father is the gardener	Jesus uses **farmer** to refer to God. Just as a **farmer** takes care of the**vine** to ensure it is as fruitful as possible, so God takes care of his people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	1	t4ne		ὁ γεωργός	1	my Father is the gardener	While **farmer** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to someone who takes care of grapevines and grows grapes. Alternate translation: “vine grower” or “grape farmer”
-JHN	15	2	p311	figs-exmetaphor	πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν&καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον&ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ	1	He takes away every branch in me that does not bear fruit	Jesus speaks about people who claim to be his disciples but are not by continuing the metaphor of a vine. In this paragraph, Jesus uses **branch** to refer to both true and false disciples. He also uses **bearing fruit**, **bears fruit**, and **bear more fruit** to refer to living in a manner that pleases God, especially demonstrating the Christian qualities called the “fruit of the Spirit” in [Galatians 5:22–23](../../gal/05/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Everyone who claims to be my disciple but does not please God is like a branch in me that does not bear fruit … and every person who pleases God is like a branch that bears fruit … so that he might be like a branch that bears more fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+JHN	15	2	p311	figs-exmetaphor	πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν & καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον & ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ	1	He takes away every branch in me that does not bear fruit	Jesus speaks about people who claim to be his disciples but are not by continuing the metaphor of a vine. In this paragraph, Jesus uses **branch** to refer to both true and false disciples. He also uses **bearing fruit**, **bears fruit**, and **bear more fruit** to refer to living in a manner that pleases God, especially demonstrating the Christian qualities called the “fruit of the Spirit” in [Galatians 5:22–23](../../gal/05/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Everyone who claims to be my disciple but does not please God is like a branch in me that does not bear fruit … and every person who pleases God is like a branch that bears fruit … so that he might be like a branch that bears more fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 JHN	15	2	wt8w		αἴρει αὐτό	1	takes away	Alternate translation: “he cuts it off of the vine and takes it away” or “he breaks it off of the vine and throws it away”
 JHN	15	2	enrh		καθαίρει αὐτὸ	1	takes away	The word translated **prunes** could mean: (1) to remove excess parts from a plant. Alternate translation: “he trims it” (2) to cause something to become clean. Alternate translation: “he cleans it” (3) to remove excess parts from a plant in order to make it clean. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “he prunes it so that it will be clean”
 JHN	15	3	xn3j	figs-metaphor	ἤδη ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε	1	You are already clean because of the message that I have spoken to you	The word translated **clean** is related to the word translated “prunes” in the previous verse. Here Jesus uses **clean** to imply that the branches have already been cleaned by pruning off the excess parts. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “You are like branches that have already been pruned and are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	3	ls0g	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	You are already clean because of the message that I have spoken to you	Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	15	3	l5zz	figs-you	ὑμεῖς&ὑμῖν	1	you	The words **You** and **you** in this verse are plural and refer to the disciples of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	15	4	qvv9	figs-explicit	μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν&ἐν ἐμοὶ μένητε	1	Remain in me, and I in you	See how you translated a similar phrase in [6:56](../06/56.md). See also the discussion of **Remain in me** in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	15	3	l5zz	figs-you	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν	1	you	The words **You** and **you** in this verse are plural and refer to the disciples of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	15	4	qvv9	figs-explicit	μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν & ἐν ἐμοὶ μένητε	1	Remain in me, and I in you	See how you translated a similar phrase in [6:56](../06/56.md). See also the discussion of **Remain in me** in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	5	mw4t	figs-metaphor	ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος; ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα	1	I am the vine, you are the branches	See how you translated **vine** in [verse 1](../15/01.md) and “branch” in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	5	r4di	figs-explicit	ὁ μένων ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	He who remains in me and I in him	See how you translated this similar expression in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	5	hzh4	figs-metaphor	οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν	1	he bears much fruit	See how you translated **bears fruit** in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2003,8 +2003,8 @@ JHN	15	8	wpa6	figs-metaphor	καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε	1	that you be
 JHN	15	8	vtg5		γένησθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί	1	are my disciples	Alternate translation: “show that you are my disciples” or “demonstrate that you are my disciples”
 JHN	15	9	nf5v	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	As the Father has loved me, I have also loved you	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	9	d32z	figs-metaphor	μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ	1	Remain in my love	Jesus uses **Remain in** to refer to continuing in a certain state. Jesus is commanding his disciples to continue being in a close and loving relationship with him by obeying his commands. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Continue having a loving relationship with me” or “Live in a way that enables you to continue experiencing my love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	15	10	thg9	figs-explicit	τηρήσητε&τετήρηκα	1	If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love	Here, **keep** and **kept** refer to obeying. See how you translated this word in [14:15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	15	10	cu4e	figs-metaphor	μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ μου&μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love	See how you translated the similar clause in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	15	10	thg9	figs-explicit	τηρήσητε & τετήρηκα	1	If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love	Here, **keep** and **kept** refer to obeying. See how you translated this word in [14:15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	15	10	cu4e	figs-metaphor	μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ μου & μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love	See how you translated the similar clause in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	10	k1nm	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	my Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	11	rcv8		ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ ἐν ὑμῖν ᾖ	1	I have spoken these things to you so that my joy will be in you	Alternate translation: “I have told you these things so that you will have the same kind of joy that I have”
 JHN	15	11	r1p1	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πληρωθῇ	1	so that your joy will be complete	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you will be completely joyful” or “so that you will be joyful to the fullest extent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2021,19 +2021,19 @@ JHN	15	17	rib2		ταῦτα	1		Here, **These things** could refer to: (1) the co
 JHN	15	18	ntzw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ	1	the world	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	15	18	d5ff	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	19	aj8s	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε	1	the world	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-JHN	15	19	x6q8	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου&ὁ κόσμος&τοῦ κόσμου&τοῦ κόσμου&ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	15	19	x6q8	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου & ὁ κόσμος & τοῦ κόσμου & τοῦ κόσμου & ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	19	ayo7	figs-infostructure	ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ ἐστέ, ἀλλ’ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, διὰ τοῦτο μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “But because you are not from the world, this world hates you, but I chose you from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	15	20	v53s	figs-metonymy	μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν	1	Remember the word that I said to you	Here, Jesus uses **word** to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	20	wzg6	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ	1	Remember the word that I said to you	See how you translated this phrase in [13:16](../13/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	15	20	a8kw	figs-metonymy	εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν&τηρήσουσιν	1	Remember the word that I said to you	See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	15	20	a8kw	figs-metonymy	εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν & τηρήσουσιν	1	Remember the word that I said to you	See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	21	eh1v	figs-metonymy	ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	because of my name	Here, **all these things** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	21	z35m	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	because of my name	Here, Jesus uses **my name** to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of **name** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	21	hs9x	figs-explicit	τὸν πέμψαντά με	1		Here, **the one having sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	22	m75h	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς	1	If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that he did come and speak to the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not come and spoken to them, but I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	15	22	uble	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin	Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:41](../09/41.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	15	22	uj4o	figs-explicit	ἁμαρτίαν&ἁμαρτίας	1	If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin	Here, Jesus uses **sin** to refer specifically to the **sin** of rejecting Jesus and his teachings. It does not refer to **sin** in general, because everyone is guilty of **sin**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sin of rejecting me and my teachings … sin of rejecting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	15	22	uj4o	figs-explicit	ἁμαρτίαν & ἁμαρτίας	1	If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin	Here, Jesus uses **sin** to refer specifically to the **sin** of rejecting Jesus and his teachings. It does not refer to **sin** in general, because everyone is guilty of **sin**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sin of rejecting me and my teachings … sin of rejecting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	23	u9u7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	15	24	bd47	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν&δὲ	1	If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Because I have done the works that no one else did among them, they have sin, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+JHN	15	24	bd47	figs-doublenegatives	εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν & δὲ	1	If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Because I have done the works that no one else did among them, they have sin, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	15	24	rnt4	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He has done **works that no one else did** among the people. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, but I did, they would have no sin, but they do have sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	15	24	v23s	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν	1	they would have no sin	See how you translated this phrase in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	15	24	z6we	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἑωράκασιν	1		The object of the verb **seen** could be: (1) **the works** referred to earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen the works” (2) Jesus and the **Father**, referred to at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen me and my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ JHN	15	25	rod8	figs-activepassive	πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ
 JHN	15	25	j2m2	figs-synecdoche	τῷ νόμῳ	1	law	Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the **law**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated a similar expression in [10:34](../10/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	15	25	jhqg	figs-quotemarks	ἐμίσησάν με δωρεάν	1	law	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 35:19](../../psa/35/19.md) or [69:4](../../psa/69/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	15	26	eexc	figs-explicit	ὁ Παράκλητος	1		See how you translated **Helper** in [14:16](../14/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	15	26	tpw6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός&Πατρὸς	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	15	26	tpw6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός & Πατρὸς	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	26	tzi9	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the Spirit of truth	See how you translated **the Spirit of Truth** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	27	ew2v	figs-metonymy	ἀρχῆς	1	the beginning	Here Jesus uses **beginning** to refer to the first days of his ministry. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	16	intro	wb8v			0		# John 16 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)\n2. Jesus describes the work of the Holy Spirit (16:5–15)\n3. Jesus says that he will return to his Father (16:16–28)\n4. Jesus says that his disciples will soon abandon him (16:29–33)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Holy Spirit\n\nJesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. He is also the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n### “The hour is coming”\n\nJesus used the words, “the hour is coming,” to begin prophecies about events that were about to occur. He is not referring to the 60 minute hour, but to a point in time when these prophecies will be fulfilled. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([16:2](../16/02.md)) lasted for many years. However, “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([16:32](../16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Simile\n\nJesus said that just as a woman is in pain when she gives birth to a baby, so also his followers would be sad when he died. But just as the woman is happy after the baby is born, so also his followers would be happy when Jesus became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -2064,7 +2064,7 @@ JHN	16	5	c542	figs-explicit	καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐρωτᾷ
 JHN	16	5	cq44	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐρωτᾷ με, ποῦ ὑπάγεις	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asks me where I am going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	16	6	zhlg	figs-metaphor	ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν	1	sadness has filled your heart	Jesus speaks of **sadness** as if it were a thing that could fill someone. If this use of **sadness** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your heart is very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	16	6	kr4d	figs-metaphor	ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν	1	sadness has filled your heart	See how you translated **heart** in [14:1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	16	7	g3ze	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν&μὴ ἀπέλθω, ὁ Παράκλητος οὐκ ἐλεύσεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	if I do not go away, the Comforter will not come to you	If it would be more natural in your language, you can translate this double negative expression in a positive form. Alternate translation: “the Helper will come to you only if I go away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+JHN	16	7	g3ze	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν & μὴ ἀπέλθω, ὁ Παράκλητος οὐκ ἐλεύσεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	if I do not go away, the Comforter will not come to you	If it would be more natural in your language, you can translate this double negative expression in a positive form. Alternate translation: “the Helper will come to you only if I go away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	16	7	d1zd		Παράκλητος	1	Comforter	See how you translated **Helper** in [14:26](../14/26.md).
 JHN	16	8	bpu5	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that one** refers to the Holy Spirit, who is called “the Helper” in the previous verse. If this use of **that one** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	16	8	i78r	figs-metonymy	κόσμον	1	world	See how you translated **world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2074,7 +2074,7 @@ JHN	16	9	v4hk		περὶ ἁμαρτίας μέν, ὅτι οὐ πιστεύο
 JHN	16	10	t4qe	figs-explicit	περὶ δικαιοσύνης	1	about righteousness, because I am going to the Father, and you will no longer see me	See how you translated the phrase **about righteousness** in [verse 8](../16/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	10	r121	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	16	10	fmk5	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι θεωρεῖτέ με	1	Father	Jesus uses this phrase to imply that anyone who could **see** him saw true righteousness. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will no longer see my righteous example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	16	11	l71y	figs-explicit	περὶ&κρίσεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **about judgment** in [verse 8](../16/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	16	11	l71y	figs-explicit	περὶ & κρίσεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **about judgment** in [verse 8](../16/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	11	x2z1	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	the ruler of this world	Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	11	dp4r	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God has judged the ruler of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	16	11	llxw	figs-pastforfuture	κέκριται	1		This could mean: (1) Satan has already been condemned to future judgment. Alternate translation: “has already been condemned” (2) Satan’s future judgment is so certain that Jesus uses the past tense. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2120,8 +2120,8 @@ JHN	16	26	vf63	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	you will ask in m
 JHN	16	26	s8a5	figs-explicit	οὐ λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐρωτήσω τὸν Πατέρα	1		Here Jesus implies that he will not have to **ask the Father** on behalf of his disciples, because they can ask God directly after Jesus becomes alive again. If this statement would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not say to you that I will need to ask the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	16	26	cy76	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	16	27	b49q	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	I came from the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	16	28	wyz7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς&τὸν Πατέρα	1	I came from the Father … going to the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	16	28	l3zb	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸν κόσμον&ἀφίημι τὸν κόσμον	1	world	Here, **world** refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the earth … I am leaving the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	16	28	wyz7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς & τὸν Πατέρα	1	I came from the Father … going to the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	16	28	l3zb	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸν κόσμον & ἀφίημι τὸν κόσμον	1	world	Here, **world** refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the earth … I am leaving the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	16	29	sol1	figs-pastforfuture	λέγουσιν	1	world	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	16	29	i23p	figs-parables	παροιμίαν	1	world	See how you translated this word in [verse 25](../16/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
 JHN	16	30	u18y	figs-explicit	οὐ χρείαν ἔχεις, ἵνα τίς σε ἐρωτᾷ	1	world	By saying that Jesus does not need anyone to ask him questions, his disciples are implying that Jesus already knows what people will ask him before they ask. Since he already knows what they will ask him, he does not need them to ask him. If this statement would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so, now you finally place your trust in me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2132,7 +2132,7 @@ JHN	16	32	yza2	figs-activepassive	σκορπισθῆτε	1	you will be scattere
 JHN	16	32	zjnx		εἰς τὰ ἴδια	1		Alternate translation: “each of you to his own place” or “every one of you to his own place”
 JHN	16	32	k3br	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father is with me	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	16	33	k6d6	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε	1	so that you will have peace in me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** in another way. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience a peaceful feeling in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	16	33	wraa	figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχητε&θλῖψιν ἔχετε	1	so that you will have peace in me	Here, Jesus speaks of **peace** and **troubles** as if they were objects that someone can possess. If these uses of **peace** and **troubles** might confuse your readers, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “you might be peaceful … you experience troubles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	16	33	wraa	figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχητε & θλῖψιν ἔχετε	1	so that you will have peace in me	Here, Jesus speaks of **peace** and **troubles** as if they were objects that someone can possess. If these uses of **peace** and **troubles** might confuse your readers, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “you might be peaceful … you experience troubles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	16	33	ysh6	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	so that you will have peace in me	Here, **in me** refers to being united with Jesus or having a close relationship with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of your relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	16	33	z7wj	figs-metonymy	ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον	1	I have conquered the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	intro	nb2a			0		# John 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This chapter is one long prayer that can be divided into three parts according to the topics of Jesus’ prayer requests:<br>1. Jesus prays for himself (17:1–5)<br>2. Jesus prays for his disciples (17:6–19)<br>3. Jesus prays for all Christians (17:20–26)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, bright light that visually represents how great God is. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([17:1](../17/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])<br><br>### Jesus is eternal<br><br>Jesus existed before God created the world ([17:5](../17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [1:1](../01/01.md).<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Prayer<br><br>Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([3:16](../03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that might seem to be commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be honored.
@@ -2140,17 +2140,17 @@ JHN	17	1	uf8z			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story from the previous
 JHN	17	1	an1o	figs-explicit	ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν	1		Here, **these things** refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in [chapters 13–16](../13/01.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “described what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	1	b4pj	figs-idiom	ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ	1	he lifted up his eyes to the heavens	See how you translated this idiom in [6:5](../06/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	17	1	k7tb	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	heavens	Here, **heaven** refers to the sky. The Jews believed that **heaven**, the place where God dwells, was located above the sky. If this use of **heaven** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “beyond the sky toward God in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	17	1	l8sa	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ&Υἱὸς	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	17	1	l8sa	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ & Υἱὸς	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	17	1	jup7	figs-metonymy	ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα	1	the hour has come	Here, Jesus uses **hour** to refer to the time when Jesus would suffer and die. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time for me to suffer and die has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	1	ya24	figs-imperative	δόξασόν	1	the hour has come	**Glorify** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please glorify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-JHN	17	1	bk1m	figs-123person	σου τὸν Υἱόν&ὁ Υἱὸς	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	17	1	bk1m	figs-123person	σου τὸν Υἱόν & ὁ Υἱὸς	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	17	2	jzlt	grammar-connect-logic-result	καθὼς ἔδωκας αὐτῷ ἐξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός	1		Here, **since** indicates that this clause is the reason for the request given in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you gave him authority over all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JHN	17	2	cpi0	figs-123person	αὐτῷ&αὐτῷ&δώσῃ	1	all flesh	Throughout this verse Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	17	2	cpi0	figs-123person	αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & δώσῃ	1	all flesh	Throughout this verse Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	17	2	vbt4	figs-metonymy	πάσης σαρκός	1	all flesh	Jesus is describing people by referring to something associated with them, the **flesh** that they are made of. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “over all human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	3	i5pm		αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἡ αἰώνιος ζωὴ	1	all flesh	The clause could mean: (1) the rest of the verse describes what **eternal life** is. Alternate translation: “Now this is what it means to have eternal life” (2) the rest of the verse describes the means by which one receives eternal life. Alternate translation: “Now this is how people live forever”
 JHN	17	3	zmsw	figs-123person	ὃν ἀπέστειλας, Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν	1	all flesh	Jesus uses **the one you sent** and **Jesus Christ** to refer to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	17	4	h4hu	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔργον&ὃ δέδωκάς μοι	1	the work that you have given me to do	Here, Jesus uses **work** to refer to Jesus’ entire ministry while on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ministry that you have given me here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	17	5	k9ra	figs-explicit	δόξασόν με σύ, Πάτερ, παρὰ σεαυτῷ, τῇ δόξῃ ᾗ εἶχον&παρὰ σοί	1	Father, glorify me … with the glory that I had with you before the world was made	Here, **with yourself** and **with you** refer to Jesus and God the **Father** being physically near to each other. If this use of **with** might be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Father, glorify me at your side with the glory that I had at your side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	17	4	h4hu	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔργον & ὃ δέδωκάς μοι	1	the work that you have given me to do	Here, Jesus uses **work** to refer to Jesus’ entire ministry while on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ministry that you have given me here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	17	5	k9ra	figs-explicit	δόξασόν με σύ, Πάτερ, παρὰ σεαυτῷ, τῇ δόξῃ ᾗ εἶχον & παρὰ σοί	1	Father, glorify me … with the glory that I had with you before the world was made	Here, **with yourself** and **with you** refer to Jesus and God the **Father** being physically near to each other. If this use of **with** might be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Father, glorify me at your side with the glory that I had at your side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	5	g8at	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	17	5	ximp	figs-imperative	δόξασόν	1	Father	Here, **glorify** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please glorify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JHN	17	5	xhph	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ δόξῃ	1	Father	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with the glorious characteristics” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2162,7 +2162,7 @@ JHN	17	8	bzvc	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα	1	kept your word	See how you tra
 JHN	17	9	ndb1	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	I do not pray for the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	10	mql5	figs-activepassive	δεδόξασμαι ἐν αὐτοῖς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	17	10	q0tm	figs-explicit	ἐν αὐτοῖς	1		This could mean: (1) **all things** are the means by which Jesus is glorified. Alternate translation: “by means of them” (2) Jesus is glorified **in all things**. Alternate translation: “within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	17	11	viya	figs-pastforfuture	οὐκέτι εἰμὶ&πρὸς σὲ ἔρχομαι	1		Here Jesus uses **am** in the present tense to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will no longer … I am about to come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	17	11	viya	figs-pastforfuture	οὐκέτι εἰμὶ & πρὸς σὲ ἔρχομαι	1		Here Jesus uses **am** in the present tense to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will no longer … I am about to come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	17	11	bk2h	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ εἰσίν	1	in the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this world with people who oppose you, but they are in this hostile world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	11	kp1d	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	17	11	dvel	figs-imperative	τήρησον	1		Here, **keep** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
@@ -2177,7 +2177,7 @@ JHN	17	12	blz4	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	so t
 JHN	17	13	p71q	figs-metonymy	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	the world	See how you translated **the world** in [verse 11](../17/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	13	jp4v	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἔχωσιν τὴν χαρὰν τὴν ἐμὴν, πεπληρωμένην ἐν ἑαυτοῖς	1	so that they will have my joy fulfilled in themselves	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that I might give them my full joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	17	14	bc1y	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον σου	1	I have given them your word	See how you translated **your word** in [verse 6](../17/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	17	14	qf43	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος&ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου&ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου	1	the world … because they are not of the world … I am not of the world	Here, **the world** refers to the people in **the world** who oppose God. If this use of **the world** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who oppose you … from those who oppose you … I am not from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	17	14	qf43	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος & ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου & ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου	1	the world … because they are not of the world … I am not of the world	Here, **the world** refers to the people in **the world** who oppose God. If this use of **the world** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who oppose you … from those who oppose you … I am not from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	14	wz9e	figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου	1		The phrase **from the world** could refer to: (1) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “they do not belong to the world, just as I do not belong to the world” (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “they did not come from the world, just as I did not come from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	15	hg22	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this use of **world** in [verse 11](../17/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	17	15	s3vp	figs-explicit	τηρήσῃς αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	keep them from the evil one	Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you would keep them from Satan, the evil one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2190,7 +2190,7 @@ JHN	17	19	zam3	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἐγὼ ἁγιάζω ἐ
 JHN	17	19	z4z8	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὦσιν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	so that they themselves may also be set apart in truth	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they may also sanctify themselves in truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	17	19	x08k	figs-explicit	ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	so that they themselves may also be set apart in truth	The phrase **in truth** could refer to: (1) the means by which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “sanctified by means of truth” (2) the nature or degree of their sanctification. Alternate translation: “truly sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	20	n7mp	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτῶν	1	those who will believe in me through their word	Here, **word** refers to the message that Jesus and his disciples proclaimed. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through their message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	17	21	jwiu	figs-explicit	ἵνα&ἵνα	1		The first **that** in this verse indicates one of Jesus’ prayer requests, namely, that all those who believe in Jesus would be united to each other. The second **that** indicates another prayer request, namely, that all those who believe in Jesus would be united to Jesus and God the Father. If this would not be clear in your language, you could make these two prayer requests more explicit by making them into two sentences. Alternate translation: “I request that … I also request that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	17	21	jwiu	figs-explicit	ἵνα & ἵνα	1		The first **that** in this verse indicates one of Jesus’ prayer requests, namely, that all those who believe in Jesus would be united to each other. The second **that** indicates another prayer request, namely, that all those who believe in Jesus would be united to Jesus and God the Father. If this would not be clear in your language, you could make these two prayer requests more explicit by making them into two sentences. Alternate translation: “I request that … I also request that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	17	21	s8a1	figs-doublet	σύ, Πάτερ, ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν σοί	1	they will all be one, just as you, Father, are in me, and I am in you. May they also be in us	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “you, Father, and I are completely joined together as one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	17	21	yt2w	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πάτερ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	17	21	v6i7		ἵνα ὁ κόσμος πιστεύῃ ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας	1		Here, **so that** could indicate: (1) that what follows is the purpose for believers to be united to Jesus and God the Father, as in the UST. (2) that what follows is the result of believers being united to Jesus and God the Father. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “with the result that the world would believe that you have sent me”
@@ -2231,7 +2231,7 @@ JHN	18	8	xdp8	figs-ellipsis	ἐγώ εἰμι	1		See how you translated **I am**
 JHN	18	9	l8as	writing-background		0		In this verse John provides some background information about Jesus fulfilling Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	9	zpbq	figs-activepassive	ἵνα πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὃν εἶπεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This happened in order to fulfill the word that he had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	18	9	bjp9	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος ὃν εἶπεν	1	This was in order to fulfill the word that he said	Here, **the word** refers to what Jesus said while praying to God the Father in [17:12](../17/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had said when he was praying to his Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	18	10	betq	translate-names	Σίμων&Πέτρος	1		See how you translated **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+JHN	18	10	betq	translate-names	Σίμων & Πέτρος	1		See how you translated **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	18	10	yq44	figs-explicit	μάχαιραν	1		The word translated **sword** here refers to a small sword that is similar to a dagger or long knife. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a dagger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	10	fe37	translate-names	Μάλχος	1	Malchus	**Malchus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	18	11	ghz6	figs-rquestion	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό?	1	Should I not drink the cup that the Father has given me?	**Jesus** is using the form of a question to add emphasis to his statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I should certainly drink the cup that the Father has given to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -2244,9 +2244,9 @@ JHN	18	14	kzvh	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the main sto
 JHN	18	14	xq5l	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1		See how you translated **to the Jews** in [verse 12](../18/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	18	14	fkx1		συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ	1		See how you translated the similar clause in [11:50](../11/50.md).
 JHN	18	14	uqs5	figs-ellipsis	συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ	1		Caiaphas is leaving out a clause that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from his original statement in [11:50](../11/50.md). Alternate translation: “it would be better for one man to die on behalf of the people than to let the Romans kill all of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	18	15	xshi	figs-explicit	ἠκολούθει&τῷ Ἰησοῦ&ἄλλος μαθητής. ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ, καὶ συνεισῆλθεν	1		Here, **another disciple** and **that disciple** could refer to: (1) the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. This interpretation would mean that these phrases would be similar to the phrase “the other disciple, whom Jesus loved” that occurs in ([20:2](../20/02.md)). Alternate translation: “I, another disciple, followed Jesus. Now I was known to the high priest, and I entered” (2) an unknown disciple. Alternate translation: “a certain disciple, followed Jesus. Now that other disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	15	xshi	figs-explicit	ἠκολούθει & τῷ Ἰησοῦ & ἄλλος μαθητής. ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ, καὶ συνεισῆλθεν	1		Here, **another disciple** and **that disciple** could refer to: (1) the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. This interpretation would mean that these phrases would be similar to the phrase “the other disciple, whom Jesus loved” that occurs in ([20:2](../20/02.md)). Alternate translation: “I, another disciple, followed Jesus. Now I was known to the high priest, and I entered” (2) an unknown disciple. Alternate translation: “a certain disciple, followed Jesus. Now that other disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	15	hch7	figs-activepassive	ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ	1	Now that disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered with Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now the high priest knew that disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	18	15	sr05	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ&τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	Now that disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered with Jesus	In verses 15–23, **the high priest** refers to Annas, which is indicated in [verse 13](../18/13.md). It does not refer to Caiaphas. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the high priest Annas … of Annas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	15	sr05	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ & τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	Now that disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered with Jesus	In verses 15–23, **the high priest** refers to Annas, which is indicated in [verse 13](../18/13.md). It does not refer to Caiaphas. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the high priest Annas … of Annas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	16	o10j	figs-explicit	ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ ἄλλος	1		See how you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	16	utf4	figs-activepassive	ὅς ἦν γνωστὸς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	So the other disciple, who was known to the high priest	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the high priest knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	18	17	xw8d	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	-1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ JHN	18	17	r82l	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν
 JHN	18	18	hbw6	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about the people who were warming themselves around the fire. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	18	g8xj	figs-infostructure	ἵστήκεισαν δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται, ἀνθρακιὰν πεποιηκότες, ὅτι ψῦχος ἦν, καὶ ἐθερμαίνοντο	1	Now	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Now because it was cold, the servants and the officers had made a charcoal fire and were standing there, warming themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	18	18	bbe9	figs-explicit	οἱ δοῦλοι	1	Now the servants and the officers were standing there, and they had made a charcoal fire, for it was cold, and they were warming themselves	Here, **the servants** refers to the personal **servants** of the high priest. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the servants of the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	19	e8h3	figs-explicit	ὁ&ἀρχιερεὺς	1	The high priest	According to [18:13](../18/13.md) the **high priest** here is Annas. He would later send Jesus to Caiaphas in [verse 24](../18/24.md). If this use of **high priest** might confuse your readers, you could state who the person is explicitly. Alternate translation: “Annas, the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	19	e8h3	figs-explicit	ὁ & ἀρχιερεὺς	1	The high priest	According to [18:13](../18/13.md) the **high priest** here is Annas. He would later send Jesus to Caiaphas in [verse 24](../18/24.md). If this use of **high priest** might confuse your readers, you could state who the person is explicitly. Alternate translation: “Annas, the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	20	h2kj	figs-metonymy	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	I have spoken openly to the world	Here Jesus uses **the world** to refer to all of the people in the world. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	18	20	ltlp	figs-hyperbole	ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Here, **to the world** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to emphasize that he spoke publicly. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “I have spoken openly to the people” or “I have spoken openly for everyone to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	18	20	s4k6	figs-genericnoun	ἐν συναγωγῇ	1		Jesus is speaking of synagogues in general, not of one particular **synagogue**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “in synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -2266,7 +2266,7 @@ JHN	18	22	ri22	writing-quotations	ἔδωκεν ῥάπισμα τῷ Ἰησο
 JHN	18	22	szv3	figs-rquestion	οὕτως ἀποκρίνῃ τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ?	1	Is that how you answer the high priest?	The officer is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation, and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not answer the high priest in this manner!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	23	d76y		μαρτύρησον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ	1	testify about the wrong	Alternate translation: “tell me what I said that was wrong”
 JHN	18	23	r8dy	figs-rquestion	εἰ δὲ καλῶς, τί με δέρεις?	1	if rightly, why do you hit me?	**Jesus** is using the form of a question to add emphasis to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but if rightly, you should not strike me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	18	24	mojw	figs-explicit	ὁ Ἅννας&πρὸς Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα	1	if rightly, why do you hit me?	For political reasons both **Annas** and **Caiaphas** were high priests at this time. See how you translated these names in [verse 13](../18/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	18	24	mojw	figs-explicit	ὁ Ἅννας & πρὸς Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα	1	if rightly, why do you hit me?	For political reasons both **Annas** and **Caiaphas** were high priests at this time. See how you translated these names in [verse 13](../18/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	25	ki76	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	Now	**Now** here indicates that John is changing topics to return to the story about Peter in the high priest’s courtyard. [Verses 25–27](../18/25.md) describe what Peter was doing in the courtyard while the high priest was questioning Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “In the meantime,” or “While Jesus was being questioned,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 JHN	18	25	l2bj	figs-rquestion	μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ εἶ?	1	Are you not also one of his disciples?	Someone in the high priest’s courtyard is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes **Peter** is one of Jesus’ **disciples**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly also from the disciples of this man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	26	oka8	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐγώ σε εἶδον ἐν τῷ κήπῳ μετ’ αὐτοῦ?	1		One of the high priest’s **servants** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes **Peter** is one of Jesus’ disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I surely saw you in the garden with him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -2296,7 +2296,7 @@ JHN	18	34	liov	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ	1		Here, **from** indicate
 JHN	18	35	kfq5	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἐγὼ Ἰουδαῖός εἰμι?	1	I am not a Jew, am I?	**Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he was not interested in Jewish religious disagreements. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Well I am certainly not a Jew, and I have no interest in these matters!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	18	35	en38	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος τὸ σὸν	1	Your own people	Here, **nation** refers to the people who were part of the Jewish **nation**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	18	36	wsd9	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	-1	My kingdom is not of this world	See how you translated **from this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	36	gq19	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου&τοῦ κόσμου τούτου&ἐντεῦθεν	1	My kingdom is not of this world	In this verse, Jesus uses **this world** and **here** to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of **this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	18	36	gq19	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου & τοῦ κόσμου τούτου & ἐντεῦθεν	1	My kingdom is not of this world	In this verse, Jesus uses **this world** and **here** to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of **this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	18	36	bf3i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἦν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμή, οἱ ὑπηρέται οἱ ἐμοὶ ἠγωνίζοντο ἄν, ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	My kingdom is not of this world	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If my kingdom were from this world, but it is not, my servants would fight so that I would not be handed over to the Jews, but they do not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	18	36	s2lq	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	so that I would not be given over to the Jews	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that someone would not have handed me over to the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	18	36	pu8j	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2314,7 +2314,7 @@ JHN	18	38	rma7	figs-synecdoche	τοὺς Ἰουδαίους	1	the Jews	Here, **
 JHN	18	38	h1b8	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ	1		**Pilate** speaks of **guilt** as if it were an object that can be inside a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “I find no evidence that he is guilty of any crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	18	39	nhqn	figs-explicit	ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν	1		Pilate implies that he would **release** a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	39	fm16	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Πάσχα	1		Here, **the Passover** refers to the entire **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	18	40	xdxz	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν&πάλιν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	18	40	xdxz	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν & πάλιν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	18	40	a7pl	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	18	40	qy3p	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	Here the Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	40	h11k	writing-background	ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής	1	Now Barabbas was a robber	In this sentence John provides background information about **Barabbas**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -2333,7 +2333,7 @@ JHN	19	5	t9wn	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀκάνθινον στέφανον καὶ
 JHN	19	5	i2ay	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	6	pgs5	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	6	ha6y	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	19	6	bzm0	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ&οὐχ εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ αἰτίαν	1		See how you translated a similar clause in [verse 4](../19/04.md) and [18:38](../18/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	19	6	bzm0	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & οὐχ εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ αἰτίαν	1		See how you translated a similar clause in [verse 4](../19/04.md) and [18:38](../18/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	7	x7bg	figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews answered him	Here, **The Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../-01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	7	vr7p	figs-idiom	Υἱὸν Θεοῦ ἑαυτὸν ἐποίησεν	1	he has to die because he claimed to be the Son of God	Here, **made himself** is an idiom that refers to pretending to be something they think he is not. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “he pretended to be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	19	7	xt93	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸν Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -2349,7 +2349,7 @@ JHN	19	11	i7nu	figs-activepassive	εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι 
 JHN	19	11	vc79	figs-ellipsis	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	11	kbrx	figs-metaphor	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of **sin** might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	12	a39p	figs-explicit	ἐκ τούτου	1	At this answer	Here, **this** refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	12	q1vq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ&Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	19	12	q1vq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	12	r8va	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1		The Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	12	p6j4	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	12	g9xj		οὐκ εἶ φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος	1	you are not a friend of Caesar	Alternate translation: “you do not support Caesar” or “you are opposing the emperor”
@@ -2369,17 +2369,17 @@ JHN	19	15	vi6h	figs-explicit	ἆρον! ἆρον!	1	Should I crucify your King?
 JHN	19	15	krld	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	15	tlj2	figs-explicit	τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω	1	Should I crucify your King?	Pilate uses **I** to imply that he would order his soldiers to crucify Jesus. Pilate himself did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Should I command my soldiers to crucify your king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	15	osy8	figs-irony	λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Πειλᾶτος, τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω?	1	Should I crucify your King?	**Pilate** does not believe that Jesus is a king. He actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “Pilate says to them in a mocking manner, ‘Should I crucify your king’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-JHN	19	16	t3yb	writing-pronouns	τότε&παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1	Then Pilate gave Jesus over to them to be crucified	In this verse, the pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the Roman soldiers who would crucify Jesus. These pronouns do not refer to “the chief priests” in the previous verse because they did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	19	16	t3yb	writing-pronouns	τότε & παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1	Then Pilate gave Jesus over to them to be crucified	In this verse, the pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the Roman soldiers who would crucify Jesus. These pronouns do not refer to “the chief priests” in the previous verse because they did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	19	16	dw2m	figs-activepassive	ἵνα σταυρωθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the soldiers might crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	16	j6jg	figs-explicit	ἀπήγαγον	1		The phrase **led him away** implies that the soldiers led Jesus away in order crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and led him away to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	17	qv6j	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸν λεγόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπον, ὃ λέγεται Ἑβραϊστὶ, Γολγοθᾶ	1	to the place called “The Place of a Skull,”	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the place that the people called ‘The Place of a Skull,’ which the Jews call ‘Golgotha’ in Hebrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	17	mwy4	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστὶ	1	to the place called “The Place of a Skull,”	See how you translated this phrase in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	17	hs8e		Γολγοθᾶ	1		Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word using Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning earlier in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.
 JHN	19	18	fb84	figs-ellipsis	μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους δύο	1	with him two other men	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they also crucified two others with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	19	19	cx5s	figs-explicit	ἔγραψεν&καὶ τίτλον ὁ Πειλᾶτος, καὶ ἔθηκεν ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	John uses **Pilate** to imply that **Pilate** ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate also commanded his soldiers to write a title on a sign and put it on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	19	cx5s	figs-explicit	ἔγραψεν & καὶ τίτλον ὁ Πειλᾶτος, καὶ ἔθηκεν ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	John uses **Pilate** to imply that **Pilate** ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate also commanded his soldiers to write a title on a sign and put it on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	19	ziak	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	Here, **the cross** refers specifically to **the cross** on which Jesus was crucified. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	19	gk8e	figs-activepassive	ἦν&γεγραμμένον, Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων.	1	There it was written: JESUS OF NAZARETH, THE KING OF THE JEWS	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that person wrote on it these words: Jesus the Nazarene, the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	20	ke3t	figs-activepassive	ὁ τόπος&ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the place where they crucified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	19	19	gk8e	figs-activepassive	ἦν & γεγραμμένον, Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων.	1	There it was written: JESUS OF NAZARETH, THE KING OF THE JEWS	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that person wrote on it these words: Jesus the Nazarene, the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JHN	19	20	ke3t	figs-activepassive	ὁ τόπος & ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the place where they crucified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	20	k3mp	figs-explicit	τῆς πόλεως	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	Here, **the city** refers to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city called Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	20	mgb7	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἦν γεγραμμένον Ἑβραϊστί, Ῥωμαϊστί, Ἑλληνιστί	1	The sign was written in Hebrew, in Latin, and in Greek	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who prepared the sign wrote the words in three languages: Hebrew, Latin, and Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	20	bzub	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστί	1		See how you translated this phrase, **in Hebrew**, in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2393,17 +2393,17 @@ JHN	19	23	s74c	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα	1	also the tunic	The
 JHN	19	23	lis8	writing-background	δὲ	1		There is a break from the main storyline that begins with the word **Now** and continues to the end of the next verse. In this break John tells us how this event fulfills Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	19	23	sk7l	figs-activepassive	ὑφαντὸς δι’ ὅλου	1	also the tunic	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had woven it in one piece” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	24	ks7m	figs-ellipsis	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will **cast lots** and the winner will receive the shirt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	19	24	umc2	translate-unknown	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ&ἔβαλον κλῆρον	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The term **lots** refers to objects with different markings on various sides that were used to decide randomly among several possibilities. They were tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with **lots**, you could use a general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “we should gamble for it … gambled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+JHN	19	24	umc2	translate-unknown	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ & ἔβαλον κλῆρον	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The term **lots** refers to objects with different markings on various sides that were used to decide randomly among several possibilities. They were tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with **lots**, you could use a general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “we should gamble for it … gambled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	19	24	us8x	writing-quotations	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 22:18](../../psa/22/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “This happened so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	24	j1f9	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα	1	so that the scripture would be fulfilled which said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled the scripture that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	24	yrxw	figs-quotemarks	διεμερίσαντο τὰ ἱμάτιά μου ἑαυτοῖς, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον	1	so that the scripture would be fulfilled which said	In these phrases, John quotes [Psalm 22:19](../../psa/22/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	19	25	octl	figs-possession	τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		John is using **of** to describe **the cross** on which the soldiers had crucified Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the cross on which Jesus was crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JHN	19	26	gkf1	figs-explicit	τὸν μαθητὴν&ὃν ἠγάπα	1	the disciple whom he loved	See how you translated a similar phrase in [13:23](./13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	26	gkf1	figs-explicit	τὸν μαθητὴν & ὃν ἠγάπα	1	the disciple whom he loved	See how you translated a similar phrase in [13:23](./13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	26	mva3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	26	cxlv		γύναι	1	Woman, see, your son	See how you translated **Woman** in [2:4](../02/04.md).
 JHN	19	26	t7tc	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ὁ υἱός σου	1	Woman, see, your son	Here, Jesus uses **son** to indicate that he wants his disciple, John, to be like a **son** to his mother. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the man who will act like a son to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	27	a8x3	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	See, your mother	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	19	27	iz8j	figs-explicit	τῷ μαθητῇ&ἔλαβεν ὁ μαθητὴς αὐτὴν εἰς τὰ ἴδια	1	See, your mother	In this verse, **the disciple** and **his** refer to John, who calls himself “the disciple whom he loved” in the previous verse and who is the author of this Gospel. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved … that disciple took her into his own home” or “to me … I took her into my own home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	27	iz8j	figs-explicit	τῷ μαθητῇ & ἔλαβεν ὁ μαθητὴς αὐτὴν εἰς τὰ ἴδια	1	See, your mother	In this verse, **the disciple** and **his** refer to John, who calls himself “the disciple whom he loved” in the previous verse and who is the author of this Gospel. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved … that disciple took her into his own home” or “to me … I took her into my own home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	27	qc7d	figs-metaphor	ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου	1	See, your mother	Here, Jesus uses **mother** to indicate that he wants his **mother** to be like a **mother** to his disciple, John. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Here is the woman to whom you will be like a mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	27	q615	figs-metonymy	ἀπ’ ἐκείνης τῆς ὥρας	1	From that hour	Here, **hour** refers to a point in time. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	19	28	uynk	writing-newevent	μετὰ τοῦτο	1	knowing that everything was now completed	**After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -2413,7 +2413,7 @@ JHN	19	28	wh4n	figs-activepassive	τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ	1		If your l
 JHN	19	28	w999	writing-quotations	ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here John uses **that the scripture might be completed** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:21](../../psa/69/21.md)).If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	28	ezfy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	29	x1cy	figs-activepassive	σκεῦος ἔκειτο ὄξους μεστόν	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Someone had placed there a container full of sour wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	29	x8z8	figs-explicit	ὄξους&τοῦ ὄξους	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	Here, **sour wine** refers to the inexpensive **wine** that common people in Jesus’ culture would usually drink to quench thirst. Therefore, the person who gave Jesus this **sour wine** was acting kindly and responding to what he had said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of common wine … of that wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	29	x8z8	figs-explicit	ὄξους & τοῦ ὄξους	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	Here, **sour wine** refers to the inexpensive **wine** that common people in Jesus’ culture would usually drink to quench thirst. Therefore, the person who gave Jesus this **sour wine** was acting kindly and responding to what he had said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of common wine … of that wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	29	gh7n	figs-explicit	σπόγγον οὖν μεστὸν τοῦ ὄξους ὑσσώπῳ περιθέντες	1	A container full of sour wine was placed there	John implies that someone dipped the **sponge** into the container full of sour wine so that the **sponge** would be **full of the sour wine**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so having dipped a sponge in the container so that it was full of sour wine, they put it on a hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	29	y2eg	translate-unknown	σπόγγον	1	a sponge	A **sponge** is a small object that can soak up and hold liquid that comes out of it when the **sponge** is squeezed. If your readers would not be familiar with this thing, you could use the name of something your readers would use for soaking up liquid, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something to soak up liquid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	19	29	mg3t	translate-unknown	ὑσσώπῳ	1	on a hyssop staff	Here, **hyssop** refers to the stalk from a plant that grows in Israel. Matthew and Mark called this stalk a “reed” in [Matthew 27:48](../../mat/27/48.md) and [Mark 15:36](../../mrk/15/36.md). If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a plant in your area that has stalks or reeds, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a reed of a plant called hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ JHN	19	30	u8xq	figs-explicit	τὸ ὄξος	1	He bowed his head and gave up his
 JHN	19	30	vq53	figs-activepassive	τετέλεσται	1	He bowed his head and gave up his spirit	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The thing Jesus **finished** could be: (1) all the work that God had sent Jesus to the world to do. This interpretation would connect this phrase to the statement Jesus made in [17:4](../17/04.md) when he said that he had “completed the work” that God had given him to do. Alternate translation: “I finished all that I came here to do” (2) all the Old Testament prophecies about what Jesus would do the first time he came to the earth. This interpretation would connect this phrase to the statement in verse 28, “knowing that all things had already been completed, so that the scripture might be completed.” Alternate translation: “I completed all that the scripture has said about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	30	vz56	figs-idiom	παρέδωκεν τὸ πνεῦμα	1	He bowed his head and gave up his spirit	This clause is an idiom that means “willingly die.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he allowed himself to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	19	31	jtq9	figs-infostructure	οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ (ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ Σαββάτου), ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πειλᾶτον, ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν	1	the Jews	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Then, because it was the day of preparation, the Jews asked Pilate that the men’s legs would be broken and they would be taken away, so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was an especially important day)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	19	31	zuk9	figs-synecdoche	οἱ&Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	19	31	zuk9	figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	19	31	c49h	figs-explicit	παρασκευὴ	1	day of preparation	Here, **day of preparation** refers to the day when the Jewish people prepared for both the Passover festival and the Sabbath. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../19/14.md). Alternate translation: “the day when the Jews prepared for both the Passover festival and the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	31	h3j1	figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ	1	day of preparation	According to Jewish religious law, dead bodies could not remain on crosses during the Sabbath. Therefore, the Jewish leaders wanted Pilate to order his soldiers to execute the three men on crosses and remove their bodies before the Sabbath began at sundown. If this clause might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, which the Jewish law forbids” or “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath and thereby violate Jewish law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	31	oeeb	figs-genericnoun	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		John is speaking of the three crosses on which the men were hanging. He is not referring to one particular **cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “on the three crosses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -2430,22 +2430,22 @@ JHN	19	31	f96h	figs-activepassive	ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τ
 JHN	19	31	gz48	figs-explicit	κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν	1	to break their legs and to remove them	The Jewish leaders wanted Pilate’s soldiers to break the legs of the men who were hanging on crosses because doing that would cause the men to die quickly. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “their legs would be broken so that they would die quickly and their bodies could be taken away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	32	q2yq	figs-activepassive	τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συνσταυρωθέντος αὐτῷ	1	who had been crucified with Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the other man with whom they had crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	35	p17b	writing-background		0		This verse is a break from the main storyline in which John provides some background information about himself. John is telling readers that they can trust what he has written because he saw these events happen. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	19	35	bs5s	figs-123person	ὁ ἑωρακὼς&αὐτοῦ&ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει	1	The one who saw this	These phrases refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	19	35	bs5s	figs-123person	ὁ ἑωρακὼς & αὐτοῦ & ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει	1	The one who saw this	These phrases refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	19	35	c9q7	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε	1	so that you would also believe	John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	36	wid6	writing-background		0	General Information:	[Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN	19	36	uyvo	writing-quotations	ἐγένετο&ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	19	36	l8zi	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο&ταῦτα	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	36	uyvo	writing-quotations	ἐγένετο & ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+JHN	19	36	l8zi	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο & ταῦτα	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	36	qwl5	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the words that someone wrote in scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	36	bm8y	figs-quotemarks	ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	19	36	b1kx	figs-activepassive	ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ	1	Not one of his bones will be broken	This is a quotation from [Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md). If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one will break even one of his bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	37	h4kq	writing-quotations	ἑτέρα Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Here John uses **another scripture says** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Zechariah 12:10](../../zec/12/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the prophet Zechariah wrote in another scripture that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	37	lnmt	figs-quotemarks	ὄψονται εἰς ὃν ἐξεκέντησαν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Zechariah 12:10](../../zec/12/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-JHN	19	38	ca0b	writing-newevent	μετὰ&ταῦτα	1		**After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+JHN	19	38	ca0b	writing-newevent	μετὰ & ταῦτα	1		**After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	19	38	xtva	figs-explicit	Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας	1	Joseph of Arimathea	Since [Luke 23:50](../../luk/23/50.md) indicates that **Joseph** was a member of the Sanhedrin, he was likely dwelling in Jerusalem. Therefore, John would mean here that **Joseph** was originally **from Arimathea**. **Joseph** had not come **from Arimathea** to Jerusalem for this occasion. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph, who was originally from Arimathea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	38	d3hz	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας	1	Joseph of Arimathea	**Arimathea** was a city in Judea. Alternate translation: “Joseph who was from the city called Arimathea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	19	38	e3ap	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that **Joseph** felt for the Jewish leaders. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because he feared the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	19	38	h7ra	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	19	38	t22g	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ&ἦρεν τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Joseph** wanted to **take away the body of Jesus** in order to bury it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that he might take away the body of Jesus in order to bury it … took away and buried his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	38	t22g	figs-explicit	ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ & ἦρεν τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Joseph** wanted to **take away the body of Jesus** in order to bury it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that he might take away the body of Jesus in order to bury it … took away and buried his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	38	ojo8	figs-explicit	ἐπέτρεψεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος	1	if he could take away the body of Jesus	John implies that **Pilate** gave **Joseph** permission to take away Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate gave him permission to take away the body of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	39	mjy8	translate-names	Νικόδημος	1	Nicodemus	**Nicodemus** was one of the Pharisees who respected Jesus. See how you translated this name in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	19	39	gqkc	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν νυκτὸς τὸ πρῶτον	1	Nicodemus	This clause refers to the meeting between Jesus and Nicodemus that is described in [chapter 3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who had met Jesus before when he visited him at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2458,30 +2458,30 @@ JHN	19	41	uib1	figs-activepassive	ἦν δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου 
 JHN	19	41	qd1a	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος	1	in which no person had yet been buried	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in which people had not yet buried anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	41	bx6g	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος	1	in which no person had yet been buried	The phrase **no one had yet** translates two negative words in Greek. John uses them together to emphasize that the tomb had never been used. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	19	42	nr4r	figs-explicit	διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	According to Jewish law, no one could work after sundown on **the day of preparation** because sundown marked the beginning of the Sabbath and Passover. This meant that they had to bury Jesus’ body quickly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because the Passover and Sabbath were about to begin that evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	42	c70e	figs-infostructure	ἐκεῖ&διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ μνημεῖον, ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “they laid Jesus there because of the day of preparation of the Jews and because the tomb was close by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+JHN	19	42	c70e	figs-infostructure	ἐκεῖ & διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ μνημεῖον, ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “they laid Jesus there because of the day of preparation of the Jews and because the tomb was close by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	19	42	jsyu	figs-explicit	τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../19/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	42	jtfz	figs-euphemism	ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews	John is referring to putting Jesus’ dead body in a tomb as laying him down. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant, and it accurately describes the Jewish burial practice of laying a dead body on a table inside the tomb. See how you translated a similar expression in [11:34](../11/34.md). Alternate translation: “they entombed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 JHN	20	intro	nm1y			0		# John 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Mary Magdalene, Peter, and John go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (20:1–10)\n2. Mary Magdalene meets Jesus (20:11–18)\n3. Ten disciples meet Jesus (20:19–25)\n4. Thomas meets Jesus (20:26–29)\n5. John states the purpose for this Gospel (20:30–31)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tomb\n\nThe tomb in which Jesus was buried ([20:1](../20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could look inside or enter.\n\n### “Receive the Holy Spirit”\n\nIf your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by blowing air out of his mouth, and that Jesus was referring to the Holy Spirit, not his breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Rabboni\n\nJohn used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word. Then he explained that the word means “Teacher.” You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of the Aramaic word.\n\n### Jesus’ resurrection body\n\nWe do not know what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew he was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet and pierced his side. However, he could also walk through solid walls and doors and sometimes people didn’t recognize him. It is best not to say more than what the ULT says about Jesus’ resurrection body.\n\n### Two angels in white\n\nMatthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human forms. Two of the Gospel authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT rather than trying to make the passages all state the exact same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1–2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
-JHN	20	1	a8vl	figs-explicit	τῇ&μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	first day of the week	John uses **first** to imply the **first** day of the week. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	1	sb4m	translate-ordinal	τῇ&μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	first day of the week	Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-JHN	20	1	gqn8	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται&βλέπει	1	first day of the week	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	20	1	a8vl	figs-explicit	τῇ & μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	first day of the week	John uses **first** to imply the **first** day of the week. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	1	sb4m	translate-ordinal	τῇ & μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	first day of the week	Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+JHN	20	1	gqn8	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται & βλέπει	1	first day of the week	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	1	bdw5	figs-activepassive	βλέπει τὸν λίθον ἠρμένον	1	she saw the stone rolled away	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “sees that someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	20	2	wn0k	figs-pastforfuture	τρέχει&ἔρχεται&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	20	2	wn0k	figs-pastforfuture	τρέχει & ἔρχεται & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	2	g2rn	figs-explicit	μαθητὴν ὃν ἐφίλει ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	disciple whom Jesus loved	This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the General Notes to Chapter 13. See also how you translated similar phrases in [13:23](../13/23.md) and [18:15](../18/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	2	jm40	figs-123person	αὐτοῖς	1	disciple whom Jesus loved	If you translated **the other disciple whom Jesus loved** with a first person form earlier in the verse, then you will need to use the first person plural “us” here. Alternate translation: “to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	2	igzt	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	disciple whom Jesus loved	If you translated **the other disciple whom Jesus loved** with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the pronoun **them** here would be in the dual form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	20	2	mkmh	figs-synecdoche	τὸν Κύριον&αὐτόν	1	disciple whom Jesus loved	Here Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s body … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	20	2	mkmh	figs-synecdoche	τὸν Κύριον & αὐτόν	1	disciple whom Jesus loved	Here Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s body … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	20	2	xd3w	figs-exclusive	οὐκ οἴδαμεν ποῦ ἔθηκαν αὐτόν	1		When Mary says **we**, she is speaking of herself and some women who came to the tomb with her. These women are mentioned in [Matthew 28:1](../../mat/28/01.md); [Mark 16:1](../../mrk/16/01.md); and [Luke 24:1](../../luk/24/01.md), [10](../../luk/24/10.md), [24](../../luk/24/24.md). Since she is not speaking of the two disciples, **we** is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	20	3	d6g3	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄλλος μαθητής	1	the other disciple	See how you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	3	ci46	figs-verbs	ἐξῆλθεν&ἤρχοντο	1		If you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the verbs **went out** and **went** would be in the dual form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+JHN	20	3	ci46	figs-verbs	ἐξῆλθεν & ἤρχοντο	1		If you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the verbs **went out** and **went** would be in the dual form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 JHN	20	3	g0ky	writing-pronouns	ἤρχοντο	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the pronoun **they** here would be in the dual form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	20	3	jgzx	figs-123person	ἤρχοντο	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** in the previous verse with a first person singular form, then you will need to use the first person plural “we” here. Alternate translation: “we went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	20	4	c5kr	figs-123person	ἔτρεχον&οἱ δύο ὁμοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς προέδραμεν τάχειον	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in [verse 2](../20/02.md), then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “we were running together, and I quickly ran ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	20	4	c5kr	figs-123person	ἔτρεχον & οἱ δύο ὁμοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς προέδραμεν τάχειον	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in [verse 2](../20/02.md), then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “we were running together, and I quickly ran ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	4	sc6u	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς	1	the other disciple	See how you translated **the other disciple** in [verse 2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	5	jbbz	figs-123person	βλέπει&οὐ μέντοι εἰσῆλθεν	1	linen cloths	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in the previous verse, then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “I saw … but I did not enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	20	5	jbbz	figs-123person	βλέπει & οὐ μέντοι εἰσῆλθεν	1	linen cloths	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in the previous verse, then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “I saw … but I did not enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	5	wm6r	figs-pastforfuture	βλέπει	1	linen cloths	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	5	m9qn	translate-unknown	ὀθόνια	1	linen cloths	Wrapping a dead body in strips of cloth was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for Chapter 19. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the linen cloths in which they had wrapped Jesus’ body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	20	6	gw25	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται&θεωρεῖ	1	linen cloths	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	20	6	gw25	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται & θεωρεῖ	1	linen cloths	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	6	rjux	figs-123person	αὐτῷ	1	linen cloths	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in [verse 4](../20/04.md), then you will need to use the first person “me” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	6	ys3b	translate-unknown	ὀθόνια	1	linen cloths	See how you translated **linen cloths** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	20	7	qt5a	figs-activepassive	τὸ σουδάριον, ὃ ἦν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ	1	cloth that had been on his head	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the cloth that someone had put on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2489,30 +2489,30 @@ JHN	20	7	lw33	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		The pronoun **his** refers to Jes
 JHN	20	7	v9yg	translate-unknown	ὀθονίων	1		See how you translated **linen cloths** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	20	7	yc78	figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ χωρὶς ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ἕνα τόπον	1	but was folded up in a place by itself	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but someone had folded it up in one place by itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	8	vl84	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς	1	the other disciple	See how you translated **the other disciple** in [verse 2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	8	b7h5	figs-123person	εἰσῆλθεν&καὶ εἶδεν καὶ ἐπίστευσεν	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in this verse, then you will need to use the first person throughout this verse. Alternate translation: “went in, and I saw and believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN	20	8	b7h5	figs-123person	εἰσῆλθεν & καὶ εἶδεν καὶ ἐπίστευσεν	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in this verse, then you will need to use the first person throughout this verse. Alternate translation: “went in, and I saw and believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	20	8	ww3z	figs-ellipsis	εἶδεν	1	he saw and believed	John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he saw the linen cloths where Jesus’ body had lain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	8	eydm	figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1	he saw and believed	John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	9	jywe	writing-background	γὰρ	1	they still did not know the scripture	**For** here indicates that this verse provides background information about the kind of belief that was mentioned in the previous clause. **For** here does not indicate a reason or cause. At that time, the disciples believed Jesus had risen from the dead only because the tomb was empty. They still did not understand that the scriptures said Jesus would rise from the dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “But even then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	20	9	u5q9	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	rise	Here, **rise from the dead** is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “become alive after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	20	10	p5um	figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθον&πάλιν πρὸς αὑτοὺς	1	went back home again	Since the disciples were staying within walking distance of Jesus’ tomb, the **homes** they went to must have been in Jerusalem. They did not go back to their homes in Galilee. Alternate translation: “went back to where they were staying in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	20	10	p5um	figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθον & πάλιν πρὸς αὑτοὺς	1	went back home again	Since the disciples were staying within walking distance of Jesus’ tomb, the **homes** they went to must have been in Jerusalem. They did not go back to their homes in Galilee. Alternate translation: “went back to where they were staying in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	11	kmzj	figs-explicit	Μαρία	1		**Mary** here refers to **Mary** Magdalene. See how you translated this **Mary** in [19:25](../19/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	12	bl51	figs-pastforfuture	θεωρεῖ	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	12	p9aw	figs-explicit	δύο ἀγγέλους ἐν λευκοῖς	1	She saw two angels in white	Here, **white** refers to the color of the clothing that the angels were wearing. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “two angels in white clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	12	vzkb	figs-explicit	ἕνα πρὸς τῇ κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἕνα πρὸς τοῖς ποσίν, ὅπου ἔκειτο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	She saw two angels in white	Here, **at the head** and **at the feet** refer to the locations in the tomb where Jesus’ head and feet used to be. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one at the place of his head and one at the place of his feet where the body of Jesus had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	12	r6yy	figs-activepassive	ἔκειτο	1	She saw two angels in white	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	20	13	v5uj	figs-pastforfuture	λέγουσιν&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	20	13	v5uj	figs-pastforfuture	λέγουσιν & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	13	hjqb		γύναι	1		See how you translated the similar use of **Woman** in [2:4](../02/04.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md).
-JHN	20	13	hmx8	figs-synecdoche	τὸν Κύριόν μου&αὐτόν	1	Because they took away my Lord	Here, Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Lord’s body … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JHN	20	15	le9x	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγει	1	Jesus said to her	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	20	13	hmx8	figs-synecdoche	τὸν Κύριόν μου & αὐτόν	1	Because they took away my Lord	Here, Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Lord’s body … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	20	15	le9x	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγει	1	Jesus said to her	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	15	jti2		γύναι	1		See how you translated the word **Woman** in the previous verse.
-JHN	20	15	ml7c	figs-synecdoche	αὐτόν&αὐτόν&αὐτὸν	1		Here, Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Lord’s body … it … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+JHN	20	15	ml7c	figs-synecdoche	αὐτόν & αὐτόν & αὐτὸν	1		Here, Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Lord’s body … it … it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	20	15	a5z2	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ αὐτὸν ἀρῶ	1	I will take him away	Here Mary Magdalene implies that she would **take** Jesus’ body **away** and bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I will take him away and bury him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	20	16	p9v0	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	20	16	p9v0	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	16	kepb	figs-infostructure	Ἑβραϊστί, Ραββουνεί (ὃ λέγεται, Διδάσκαλε)	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “‘Rabboni’ (which means ‘Teacher’ in Hebrew)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	20	16	dgjf	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστί	1		See how you translated **in Hebrew** in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	16	k468		Ραββουνεί	1	Rabboni	Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word with Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning later in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.
 JHN	20	17	dzs7	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	20	17	q3x5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα&τὸν Πατέρα μου&Πατέρα ὑμῶν	1	my Father and your Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+JHN	20	17	q3x5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα & τὸν Πατέρα μου & Πατέρα ὑμῶν	1	my Father and your Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	20	17	whh9	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου	1	brothers	Jesus used the word **my brothers** here to refer to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my disciples, who are like brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	17	dokk	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπὲ αὐτοῖς, ἀναβαίνω πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν	1	brothers	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “say to them that I go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	20	17	hogb	figs-pastforfuture	ἀναβαίνω	1	I will go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God	Here Jesus uses the present tense **I go up** to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will go up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2526,13 +2526,13 @@ JHN	20	19	e7cb	figs-activepassive	τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων 
 JHN	20	19	g8bu	figs-possession	διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	See how you translated this phrase in [19:38](../19/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	20	19	qsmq	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	for fear of the Jews	Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	20	19	zj7j	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	This is an idiomatic expression, based on the Hebrew word and concept of “shalom.” It was both a greeting and a blessing. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I greet all of you and I wish for God to bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	20	20	bk9f	figs-metonymy	ἔδειξεν τὰς χεῖρας&αὐτοῖς	1	he showed them his hands and his side	John uses **his hands** to refer to the nail marks from crucifixion that were in Jesus’ **hands**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he showed them the nail marks in his hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	20	20	bk9f	figs-metonymy	ἔδειξεν τὰς χεῖρας & αὐτοῖς	1	he showed them his hands and his side	John uses **his hands** to refer to the nail marks from crucifixion that were in Jesus’ **hands**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he showed them the nail marks in his hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	20	a444	figs-metonymy	τὴν πλευρὰν	1	he showed them his hands and his side	John uses **his side** to refer to the wound that a Roman soldier made in Jesus’ **side** with a spear. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spear wound in his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	20	nb0v	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἰδόντες τὸν Κύριον	1	he showed them his hands and his side	This could refer to: (1) the time when the disciples rejoiced, as in the UST. (2) the reason why the disciples rejoiced. Alternate translation: “because they saw the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	20	21	ylp8	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	See how you translated **Peace to you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	20	21	env3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	20	21	hw1z	figs-infostructure	καθὼς ἀπέσταλκέν με ὁ Πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1	Father	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I send you just as the Father has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	20	21	vhzq	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέσταλκέν με&κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world, so I send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	21	vhzq	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέσταλκέν με & κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world, so I send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	22	vjs8	translate-symaction	ἐνεφύσησεν	1		When Jesus **breathed on them**, he did this symbolic action in order to show that he would give his disciples the **Holy Spirit** in the near future. If this would be helpful to your readers, you could explain its significance. Alternate translation: “he breathed on them as a symbolic action” or “he breathed on them to symbolically show that he was going to give them the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 JHN	20	22	avgi	figs-explicit	ἐνεφύσησεν	1		Here, **breathed on** refers to Jesus blowing air out of his mouth. It does not refer to the normal act of inhaling and exhaling air into one’s lungs. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he blew air on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	22	v9el	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2556,7 +2556,7 @@ JHN	20	27	tax6	figs-metonymy	τὴν πλευράν μου	1		Jesus uses **my si
 JHN	20	27	ncc3	figs-doublet	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	Do not be unbelieving, but believe	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus wants Thomas to believe that he has become alive again. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you absolutely must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	20	27	n4pi	figs-ellipsis	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	believe	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	29	zgv1	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	20	29	q81m	figs-ellipsis	πεπίστευκας&πιστεύσαντες	1	you have believed	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	29	q81m	figs-ellipsis	πεπίστευκας & πιστεύσαντες	1	you have believed	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	29	sax7	figs-activepassive	μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες	1	you have believed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	29	q9fb	figs-ellipsis	μὴ ἰδόντες	1	who have not seen	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	30	yd1j	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	In [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
@@ -2564,7 +2564,7 @@ JHN	20	30	azxu		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated the term **signs** in [2
 JHN	20	30	xz6j	figs-activepassive	ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ	1	signs that have not been written in this book	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	31	zlc5	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	31	am9l	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται	1	but these have been written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	20	31	mlqg	figs-you	πιστεύητε&ἔχητε	1	but these have been written	In this verse **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN	20	31	mlqg	figs-you	πιστεύητε & ἔχητε	1	but these have been written	In this verse **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	20	31	p5k4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	20	31	uem2	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύοντες	1	life in his name	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	31	ip1i	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	life	Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2577,7 +2577,7 @@ JHN	21	2	et5h	writing-background		0	General Information:	[Verses 2–3](../21/02
 JHN	21	2	b421	figs-activepassive	Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος	1	with Thomas called Didymus	See how you translated this phrase in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	21	2	m4gx	translate-names	Κανὰ τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1		See how you translated **Cana of Galilee** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	21	2	xyiv	figs-explicit	οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου	1		This phrase refers to the disciples John and James, whom Jesus called “sons of thunder” in [Mark 3:17](../../mrk/03/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and I, the sons of Zebedee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	21	3	pqlw	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	3	pqlw	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγουσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	3	zow1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		When the disciples say **We**, they are speaking of themselves without Peter, so **We** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	21	3	p8f0	figs-go	ἐρχόμεθα	1		Your language may state “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 JHN	21	3	l2s6	figs-explicit	ἐνέβησαν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον	1		Here, **got in a boat** implies that they also took the boat out on the Sea of Tiberias in order to fish. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “got into a boat and went fishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2600,28 +2600,28 @@ JHN	21	9	oi9d	grammar-collectivenouns	ὀψάριον ἐπικείμενον, 
 JHN	21	10	pwch	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	11	f7mi	figs-explicit	ἀνέβη οὖν Σίμων Πέτρος	1	Simon Peter then went up	Here, **went up** means that Simon Peter went back to the boat. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Simon Peter went up into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	11	lsh9	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐσχίσθη τὸ δίκτυον	1	Simon Peter then went up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the fish did not tear the net” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	21	12	tq70	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&ἐστιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	12	tq70	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & ἐστιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	12	jvsm	figs-quotations	ἐξετάσαι αὐτόν, σὺ τίς εἶ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “to ask him who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-JHN	21	13	x5pq	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται&λαμβάνει&δίδωσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	13	x5pq	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται & λαμβάνει & δίδωσιν	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	14	tp3i	translate-ordinal	τρίτον	1	the third time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time number 3.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 JHN	21	14	nz9d	figs-activepassive	ἐφανερώθη	1	the third time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “showed himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	21	14	q55e	figs-activepassive	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	the third time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	21	14	y94q	figs-idiom	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	the third time	Here, **raised from the dead** is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. See how you translated a similar phrase in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “having become alive after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	21	15	avdf	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγει&λέγει	1	do you love me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	21	15	xwxd	figs-explicit	ἀγαπᾷς με&φιλῶ σε	1	the third time	The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this in your translation. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with great esteem … I love you with affection” or “do you love me deeply… I love you like a friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	21	15	avdf	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγει & λέγει	1	do you love me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	15	xwxd	figs-explicit	ἀγαπᾷς με & φιλῶ σε	1	the third time	The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this in your translation. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with great esteem … I love you with affection” or “do you love me deeply… I love you like a friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	15	t1uj	figs-explicit	πλέον τούτων	1		Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the other disciples who were there with Jesus and Peter. This meaning would indicate Jesus is asking Peter if he loves Jesus more than the other disciples love him. Alternate translation: “more than these disciples love me” (2) the fish, boat, and other equipment that were used for catching fish, which was Peter’s former job. Alternate translation: “more than these fishing tools” or “more than your former job” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	15	qja3	figs-metaphor	βόσκε τὰ ἀρνία μου	1	Feed my lambs	Jesus uses **Feed my lambs** to refer to providing for the spiritual needs of people who trust in Jesus. Here Jesus is commanding Peter to take care of other believers in the same way that Jesus took care of them while he was with them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	21	16	szk8	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγει&λέγει	1	do you love me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	16	szk8	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγει & λέγει	1	do you love me	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	16	p9vr	translate-ordinal	δεύτερον	1	do you love me	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time number 2.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-JHN	21	16	rfew	figs-explicit	ἀγαπᾷς με&φιλῶ σε	1	do you love me	The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	21	16	rfew	figs-explicit	ἀγαπᾷς με & φιλῶ σε	1	do you love me	The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	16	vk16	figs-metaphor	ποίμαινε τὰ πρόβατά μου	1	Take care of my sheep	This sentence has the same meaning as “Feed my lambs” in the previous verse. See how you translated that similar sentence there. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd takes care of lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	21	17	cysn	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&λέγει&λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	17	cysn	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & λέγει & λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	17	fj84	translate-ordinal	τὸ τρίτον	-1	He said to him a third time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “time number 3 … time number 3.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-JHN	21	17	kmch	figs-explicit	φιλεῖς με&φιλεῖς με&φιλῶ σε	1		The three occurrences of **love** in this verse are all the same word in the original language. However, this word is different from the word Jesus used for **love** in the previous two verses when he asked Peter, “Do you love me?” You should use the same word for **love** in this verse that you used for Peter’s responses in the previous two verses when he said, “You know that I love you.” See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with affection … Do you love me with affection … I love you with affection” or “do you love me like a friend … Do you love me like a friend … I love you like a friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	21	17	kmch	figs-explicit	φιλεῖς με & φιλεῖς με & φιλῶ σε	1		The three occurrences of **love** in this verse are all the same word in the original language. However, this word is different from the word Jesus used for **love** in the previous two verses when he asked Peter, “Do you love me?” You should use the same word for **love** in this verse that you used for Peter’s responses in the previous two verses when he said, “You know that I love you.” See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with affection … Do you love me with affection … I love you with affection” or “do you love me like a friend … Do you love me like a friend … I love you like a friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	17	ayds	figs-quotations	εἶπεν αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον, φιλεῖς με	1	He said to him a third time	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked him the third time if he loved him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 JHN	21	17	p8aa	figs-metaphor	βόσκε τὰ προβάτια μου	1	Feed my sheep	This sentence has the same meaning as “Feed my lambs” in verse 15 and “Take care of my sheep” in the previous verse. See how you translated those similar sentences in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	21	18	sqb7	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	21	18	bqps	figs-metonymy	ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν&ζώσει σε	1		Although **gird** means to put on a belt, Jesus uses it in this verse to refer to putting on clothes. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you used to dress yourself … will dress you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN	21	18	bqps	figs-metonymy	ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν & ζώσει σε	1		Although **gird** means to put on a belt, Jesus uses it in this verse to refer to putting on clothes. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you used to dress yourself … will dress you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	21	18	qltf	figs-explicit	ἐκτενεῖς τὰς χεῖράς σου	1	Truly, truly	Here, **stretch out** means to extend one’s hands away from one’s sides. This describes the posture of someone who is being crucified. It does not mean that the **hands** themselves stretch. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will extend your hands out from your sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	19	ys3m	writing-background	τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ δοξάσει τὸν Θεόν	1	Now	**Now** here indicates that in this sentence John is giving background information in order to explain what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	21	19	kpf6	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2639,19 +2639,19 @@ JHN	21	22	tef8	figs-explicit	ἔρχομαι	1	I come	Jesus uses **come** here t
 JHN	21	22	tf23	figs-rquestion	τί πρὸς σέ?	1	what is that to you?	**Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to mildly rebuke Peter. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “that has nothing to do with you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	21	22	dvts	figs-idiom	μοι ἀκολούθει	1		See how you translated this sentence in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	21	23	wmzo	figs-metonymy	οὗτος ὁ λόγος	1		Here, **this word** refers to what **the brothers** say about John’s future in the next clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the following report about John’s future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	21	23	np23	figs-metaphor	ἐξῆλθεν&οὗτος ὁ λόγος	1		John uses **spread** to refer to **this word** being repeated among the believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this word was repeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN	21	23	np23	figs-metaphor	ἐξῆλθεν & οὗτος ὁ λόγος	1		John uses **spread** to refer to **this word** being repeated among the believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this word was repeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	21	23	c2cr	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JHN	21	23	chsq	figs-explicit	ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος	1		Here, **that disciple** refers to the apostle John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	21	23	wb7e	figs-pastforfuture	οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει&ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει	1	the brothers	John is using the present tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will not die … that he will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+JHN	21	23	wb7e	figs-pastforfuture	οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει & ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει	1	the brothers	John is using the present tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will not die … that he will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	21	23	cs14	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	the brothers	The pronoun **him** here refers to Peter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	21	23	elmi	writing-pronouns	ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει&αὐτὸν	1	the brothers	The pronouns **he** and **him** here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JHN	21	23	elmi	writing-pronouns	ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει & αὐτὸν	1	the brothers	The pronouns **he** and **him** here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	21	23	qxqr		ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ	1		See how you translated this sentence in the previous verse.
 JHN	21	24	s5bp	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	In [verses 24–25](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 JHN	21	24	d6t5	figs-123person	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων, καὶ ὁ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν	1	the disciple	In this verse John is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am the disciple who testifies about these things and who wrote these things, and we know that my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	21	24	f7ww	figs-explicit	τούτων&ταῦτα	1	who testifies about these things	In this verse, **these things** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	21	24	f7ww	figs-explicit	τούτων & ταῦτα	1	who testifies about these things	In this verse, **these things** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	21	24	h5i9	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	Here the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	21	24	l03o	figs-extrainfo	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	Here, **we** could refer to: (1) John and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, as in [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1 John 1:2–7](../../1jn/01/02.md). Alternate translation: “We eyewitnesses of Jesus’ life know” (2) the elders in the church at Ephesus where John lived at the end of his life. Alternate translation: “We elders of the church at Ephesus know” However, since who **we** refers to is uncertain, it would be best not to explain the meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	21	25	l3hz	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν γράφηται καθ’ ἕν	1	If each one were written down	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone wrote down each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	21	25	i9n8	figs-hyperbole	οὐδ’ αὐτὸν&τὸν κόσμον χωρήσειν τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία	1	even the world itself could not contain the books	John exaggerates to emphasize that Jesus did very many good things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to show this emphasis. Alternate translation: “a very large amount of books about these miracles would be written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+JHN	21	25	i9n8	figs-hyperbole	οὐδ’ αὐτὸν & τὸν κόσμον χωρήσειν τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία	1	even the world itself could not contain the books	John exaggerates to emphasize that Jesus did very many good things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to show this emphasis. Alternate translation: “a very large amount of books about these miracles would be written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	21	25	h3zw	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	even the world itself could not contain the books	Here, **the world** refers to either the surface of the earth or the universe. Either meaning would achieve John’s purpose. If your language does not have a general expression for **world**, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “the whole earth” or “the whole universe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	21	25	xn87	figs-activepassive	τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία	1	the books that would be written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the books that someone would write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv
index 31d69c8604..9cda67b842 100644
--- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ ACT	1	intro	vyg9			0		# Acts 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<
 ACT	1	1	q9ep	figs-explicit	τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην	1	I made the first account	Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	1	1	a000		ὦ Θεόφιλε	1	O Theophilus	Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
 ACT	1	1	ryj5	translate-names	Θεόφιλε	1	Theophilus	**Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	1	1	a001	figs-explicitinfo	περὶ πάντων&ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-ACT	1	1	a002	figs-hyperbole	περὶ πάντων&ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	1	1	a001	figs-explicitinfo	περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT	1	1	a002	figs-hyperbole	περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	1	2	a003	figs-idiom	ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας	1	until that day when	While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	1	2	n435	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη	1	he was taken up	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	1	2	a424	figs-explicit	ἀνελήμφθη	1	he was taken up	Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -21,12 +21,12 @@ ACT	1	4	a009	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	of the Father
 ACT	1	4	tj6r	figs-quotations	ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου	1	which you heard from me	In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	1	4	d3kr	figs-you	ἠκούσατέ	1	you heard	Here, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In [1:6](../01/06.md), “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 ACT	1	5	fnq5	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1	John	Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	1	5	a075	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς&ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	1	5	dzj1	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς&βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	you will be baptized	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	1	5	a075	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	1	5	dzj1	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	you will be baptized	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	1	5	a010	figs-litotes	οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας	1	after these not many days	Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	1	6	n9wt	writing-pronouns	οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν	1	They therefore having assembled, they were asking him	In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	1	6	a011	figs-idiom	εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time	This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	1	6	f7uj	figs-abstractnouns	εἰ&ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	1	6	f7uj	figs-abstractnouns	εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	1	7	a012	figs-explicit	οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι	1	It is not for you to know	Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	1	7	y1fu	figs-doublet	χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς	1	the times or the seasons	The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	1	7	a013	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ ACT	1	10	a017	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο	1	and behold
 ACT	1	10	a018	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	and	Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 ACT	1	10	a019	figs-explicit	ἄνδρες δύο	1	two men	These were actually angels. Luke calls them **men** because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	1	10	a020		ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς	1	white clothes	In this context, the word **white** likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
-ACT	1	11	a021	figs-explicit	οἳ&εἶπαν	1	they said	This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	1	11	a022	figs-verbs	οἳ&εἶπαν	1	they said	If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+ACT	1	11	a021	figs-explicit	οἳ & εἶπαν	1	they said	This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	1	11	a022	figs-verbs	οἳ & εἶπαν	1	they said	If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
 ACT	1	11	gpg3	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Men, Galileans	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	1	11	a024	figs-rquestion	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	why do you stand looking into heaven?	The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	1	11	a025	figs-idiom	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες	1	why do you stand looking	The expression **stand** means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	1	11	a026	figs-explicit	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν&ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν	1	who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven	In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	1	11	a026	figs-explicit	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν	1	who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven	In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	1	11	a027	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς	1	who has been taken up	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	1	11	cue7		ὃν τρόπον	1	in which manner	Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
 ACT	1	12	x2nk	writing-pronouns	ὑπέστρεψαν	1	they returned	The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ ACT	1	12	a030	figs-idiom	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	having a journey
 ACT	1	12	p19g	translate-unknown	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	having a journey of a Sabbath	The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	1	13	vis2	figs-explicit	ὅτε εἰσῆλθον	1	when they arrived	The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	1	13	zt12	translate-unknown	εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες	1	they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression **upper chamber** describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	1	13	a032	figs-idiom	Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου&Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου	1	James of Alphaeus … Judas of James	These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	1	13	a033	translate-names	Ἰάκωβος&Ἁλφαίου&Ἰούδας&Ἰακώβου	1	James … Alphaeus … Judas … James	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	1	13	a032	figs-idiom	Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου	1	James of Alphaeus … Judas of James	These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	1	13	a033	translate-names	Ἰάκωβος & Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου	1	James … Alphaeus … Judas … James	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	1	13	a034	translate-names	Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς	1	Simon the Zealot	**Simon** is the name of a man, and **Zealot** is another name by which he was known. (1) **Zealot** could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) **Zealot** could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
 ACT	1	14	z6cf		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
 ACT	1	14	a035	figs-explicit	γυναιξὶν	1	the women	Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in [Luke 8:2–3](../luk/08/02.md) and [23:49](../luk/23/49.md). Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ ACT	1	19	a057	figs-hyperbole	γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς
 ACT	1	19	a058	figs-activepassive	ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο	1	Therefore that field was called	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	1	19	mxf3	translate-transliterate	Ἁκελδαμάχ	1	Akeldama	**Akeldama** is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **Field of Blood**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 ACT	1	20	mz13	figs-quotemarks	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	For it is written	Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ACT	1	20	d7pk	figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται&ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT	1	20	ip5w	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται&ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	it is written in the book of Psalms	If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	1	20	d7pk	figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT	1	20	ip5w	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	it is written in the book of Psalms	If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	1	20	g30d	figs-imperative3p	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1		If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	1	20	crk3	figs-imperative	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ACT	1	20	hiul	figs-123person	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1		It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -108,19 +108,19 @@ ACT	1	20	uctm	figs-imperative3p	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λα
 ACT	1	20	jdsg	figs-imperative	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ACT	1	20	elz8	figs-123person	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1		It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	1	21	t916	translate-versebridge		0		To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-ACT	1	21	xz69	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν&ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	1	21	xz69	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	1	21	zuf7	figs-idiom	εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us	Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	1	22	qb8j	figs-abstractnouns	ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου	1	beginning from the baptism of John	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	1	22	a061	figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς	1	the day on which	While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	1	22	a062	writing-pronouns	ἀνελήμφθη&τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	he was taken up … his resurrection	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	1	22	a062	writing-pronouns	ἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	he was taken up … his resurrection	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	1	22	yi3a	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	he was taken up from us	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	1	22	a063	figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν&σὺν ἡμῖν	1	from us … with us	When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	1	22	a063	figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν	1	from us … with us	When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	1	22	mrx7	figs-nominaladj	ἕνα τούτων	1	one of these is	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	1	22	g3n9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	of his resurrection	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	1	23	lz7y	writing-pronouns	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	1	23	a064	figs-nominaladj	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	1	23	a065	translate-symaction	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	1	23	a066	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ&Βαρσαββᾶν&Ἰοῦστος	1	Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus	**Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	1	23	a066	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος	1	Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus	**Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	1	23	s1ff	figs-activepassive	τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος	1	the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	1	23	a067	translate-names	Μαθθίαν	1	Matthias	**Matthias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	1	24	a068	translate-versebridge		0		Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
@@ -166,24 +166,24 @@ ACT	2	5	stq9	figs-hyperbole	παντὸς ἔθνους	1	every nation	The word
 ACT	2	5	a086	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν	1	under heaven	The expression **under heaven** is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	6	bpj7	figs-activepassive	συνεχύθη	1	was confused	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	6	u9hc	writing-pronouns	ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν	1	each one was hearing them speaking in his own language	The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	2	7	m8kd	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο&καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were … amazed and were marveling	The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	2	7	a087	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο&πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were all amazed and were marveling	The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	2	7	m8kd	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were … amazed and were marveling	The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT	2	7	a087	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were all amazed and were marveling	The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	7	a088	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	2	7	wnk2	figs-rquestion	οὐχ&ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	are not all these who are speaking Galileans?	The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT	2	7	wnk2	figs-rquestion	οὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	are not all these who are speaking Galileans?	The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	2	8	hzm8	figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?	1	And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born?	The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	2	8	a090	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	The speakers are using the word translated **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	2	8	a091	figs-explicit	πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος	1	how are we hearing, each	Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	2	8	a092	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἡμῶν	1	we … our	The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	2	8	a092	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν	1	we … our	The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	2	8	wb5t	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	in which we were born	The speakers say that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	8	a093	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	in which we were born	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	2	9	f1ve	translate-names	Πάρθοι&Μῆδοι&Ἐλαμεῖται	1	Parthians … Medes … Elamites	These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	2	9	dm23	translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν&Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον&Ἀσίαν	1	Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia	These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	2	10	tmb4	translate-names	Φρυγίαν&Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον&Λιβύης	1	Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya	These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	2	9	f1ve	translate-names	Πάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται	1	Parthians … Medes … Elamites	These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	2	9	dm23	translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν	1	Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia	These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	2	10	tmb4	translate-names	Φρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης	1	Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya	These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	2	11	w8jy		Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι	1	both Jews and proselytes	The term **proselytes** describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase **both Jews and proselytes** could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in [2:9–11](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
-ACT	2	11	jnp7	translate-names	Κρῆτες&Ἄραβες	1	Cretans and Arabians	These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	2	11	jnp7	translate-names	Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες	1	Cretans and Arabians	These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	2	11	a097	figs-nominaladj	τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the great things of God	The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	2	12	el2f	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο&πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed	The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	2	12	a098	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο&πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο&λέγοντες	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying	These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	2	12	el2f	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed	The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT	2	12	a098	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying	These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	12	a099	figs-idiom	τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι	1	What does this want to be	The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What does this mean?” or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	13	a100	figs-activepassive	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	They are filled with sweet wine	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	13	fg59	figs-explicit	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	They are filled with sweet wine	The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ ACT	2	14	qp16	figs-metonymy	ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	t
 ACT	2	15	a106	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	2	15	a107	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1	these	The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	2	15	a108	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For	Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	2	15	a109		ἔστιν&ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
-ACT	2	15	h28q	figs-explicit	ἔστιν&ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	2	15	a109		ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
+ACT	2	15	h28q	figs-explicit	ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	15	a110	translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	the third hour of the day	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 ACT	2	16	f9hz	figs-activepassive	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	16	ktw9	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel	The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -215,13 +215,13 @@ ACT	2	17	u2d1	figs-metaphor	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μ
 ACT	2	17	a114	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	on all flesh	God refers to **flesh** to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	2	17	a115	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται	1	and your sons and your daughters will prophesy, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will dream dreams	If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	2	17	a116	figs-exclusive	ὑμῶν	-1	your	If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of **your** as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	2	17	a117	figs-gendernotations	οἱ νεανίσκοι&οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	young men … old men	God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ACT	2	17	a117	figs-gendernotations	οἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	young men … old men	God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	2	18	uwd7	figs-quotations	καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν	1	And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	2	18	nd34		ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου	1	on my male servants and on my female servants	If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
 ACT	2	18	a118	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	in those days	Here, **days** means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	2	18	wz2i	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ&ἐπὶ&ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit	See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	2	18	wz2i	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit	See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	19	a119	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ δώσω	1	And I will give	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT	2	19	a120		δώσω τέρατα&καὶ σημεῖα	1	I will give wonders … and signs	Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
+ACT	2	19	a120		δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα	1	I will give wonders … and signs	Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
 ACT	2	19	a121		ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω	1	in the heaven above	Since God specifies in the next verse that these **wonders** will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated **heaven** likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
 ACT	2	19	p5zi	figs-possession	ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ	1	vapor of smoke	Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ACT	2	20	ylv7	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ ACT	2	20	a123	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται
 ACT	2	20	a124	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	2	20	a125	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	20	f34k	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	God is speaking as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	2	20	swb2	figs-doublet	ἡμέραν&τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	the great and remarkable day	The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT	2	20	swb2	figs-doublet	ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	the great and remarkable day	The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	2	20	lc4g	figs-idiom	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord comes	This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	20	a126	figs-123person	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord comes	In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	2	21	a127	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ ACT	2	24	vuf4	figs-personification	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ 
 ACT	2	25	dd5a	figs-quotesinquotes	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	2	25	a143	writing-pronouns	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved	The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	2	25	a144	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	2	25	a145	figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ&λέγει εἰς αὐτόν	1	David says about him	Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what **David says** in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	2	25	a145	figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν	1	David says about him	Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what **David says** in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	25	n2ls	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιόν μου	1	before me	The phrase **before me**, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	25	tqak	figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1		The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	2	25	a146	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	at my right	Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -281,14 +281,14 @@ ACT	2	26	a151	figs-personification	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκην
 ACT	2	26	a152	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	27	m3ij	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	2	27	a153	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ACT	2	27	whi3	figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις&οὐδὲ δώσεις&σου	1	you will not abandon … nor will you allow your	The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
+ACT	2	27	whi3	figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου	1	you will not abandon … nor will you allow your	The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
 ACT	2	27	a154	figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	The Messiah says **my soul** to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	2	27	a156	figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	27	rld3	figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	2	27	a157	figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	to see decay	Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	27	l5cd	figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	to see decay	The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	28	a158	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT	2	28	a159	figs-youformal	ἐγνώρισάς&πληρώσεις&σου	1	You made known … you will fill … your	The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
+ACT	2	28	a159	figs-youformal	ἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου	1	You made known … you will fill … your	The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
 ACT	2	28	xhi3	figs-metaphor	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς	1	You made known to me the paths of life	The Messiah speaks of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	28	ej5m	figs-metaphor	πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης	1	you will fill me with gladness	The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	28	y7gf	figs-metaphor	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	with your face	Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -299,10 +299,10 @@ ACT	2	29	wh97	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ	1	the pat
 ACT	2	29	vtc6	figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	he was buried	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	29	a162	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης	1	to this day	Peter is using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	30	a163	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	2	30	a164	figs-explicit	προφήτης&ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς	1	being a prophet and having known	Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	2	30	a164	figs-explicit	προφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς	1	being a prophet and having known	Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	30	x11q	figs-metonymy	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne	Peter is using the word **loins** to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	2	30	hq71	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne	When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	2	31	a165	writing-pronouns	ἐλάλησεν&ἐνκατελείφθη&αὐτοῦ	1	he spoke … was he abandoned … his	The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	2	31	a165	writing-pronouns	ἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ	1	he spoke … was he abandoned … his	The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	2	31	a166	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	2	31	tn4b	figs-activepassive	οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην	1	neither was he abandoned to Hades	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	31	a167	figs-explicit	τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the Christ	**Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -313,13 +313,13 @@ ACT	2	32	udn1	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός	1	God has raised up	As
 ACT	2	32	kw6a	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	2	33	a171	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word **Therefore**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	2	33	kij2	figs-activepassive	τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	having been exalted to the right of God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	2	33	c9mr	figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ&τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	2	33	a172	figs-explicit	τῇ δεξιᾷ&τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	2	33	c9mr	figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	2	33	a172	figs-explicit	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	33	a173	figs-possession	τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου	1	the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ACT	2	33	a174	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 ACT	2	33	c1dr	writing-pronouns	ἐξέχεεν	1	he has poured out	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	2	33	wsg9	figs-metaphor	ἐξέχεεν	1	he has poured out	Peter says that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	2	34	m7fy	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει&αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right	The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT	2	34	m7fy	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right	The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	2	34	i8wu	figs-explicit	εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord said to my Lord	**The Lord** means God here, and **my Lord** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	34	a175	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	at my right	Here the adjective **right** is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	2	34	kvn8	figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	at my right	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -329,24 +329,24 @@ ACT	2	36	a177	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter is using th
 ACT	2	36	msqt	figs-imperative3p	γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1		If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	2	36	tgbf	figs-123person	γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1		It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	2	36	pnp5	figs-metaphor	πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	all the house of Israel	Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	2	37	s85q	figs-activepassive	ἀκούσαντες&κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	hearing this, they were pierced in the heart	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	2	37	s85q	figs-activepassive	ἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	hearing this, they were pierced in the heart	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	37	xan1	writing-pronouns	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	2	37	w1ma		κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
 ACT	2	37	l15x	figs-metaphor	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Luke is speaking. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	37	zls6	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	37	a178	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	37	a179	figs-exclusive	τί ποιήσωμεν	1	what should we do	The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	2	38	a180	figs-you	μετανοήσατε&βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν&τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν&λήμψεσθε	1	Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive	The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+ACT	2	38	a180	figs-you	μετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε	1	Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive	The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 ACT	2	38	cmb7	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθήτω	1	be baptized	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	38	geb2	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus Christ	Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express your allegiance to Jesus Christ as your Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	2	38	a181	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν	1	for the forgiveness of your sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	2	39	a182	figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	the promise is	Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	2	39	a183	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν&καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	2	39	a184	figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν&καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	2	39	a183	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	2	39	a184	figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	39	v8vi	figs-explicit	πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν	1	to all who are at a distance	Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in [11:18](../11/18.md). So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	39	a185	figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	the Lord our God	By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	2	39	a186	figs-idiom	ἂν προσκαλέσηται	1	may call	Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	2	40	a187	figs-metonymy	ἑτέροις&λόγοις πλείοσιν	1	with many other words	Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	2	40	a187	figs-metonymy	ἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν	1	with many other words	Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	2	40	v6ip	figs-hendiadys	διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς	1	he testified and urged them	Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	2	40	a188	figs-activepassive	σώθητε	1	Be saved	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	40	wtd5	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	from this perverse generation	The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -354,17 +354,17 @@ ACT	2	40	a189	figs-explicit	τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύ
 ACT	2	41	k1kj	writing-endofstory	οὖν	1	Therefore	Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	2	41	r9qz	figs-idiom	ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	having received his word	Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	2	41	a190	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	2	41	kz64	figs-activepassive	οἱ&ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	2	41	kz64	figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	41	sv5j	figs-synecdoche	ψυχαὶ	1	souls	Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	2	41	a47f	figs-activepassive	προσετέθησαν	1	were added	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	2	42	a191	figs-abstractnouns	ἦσαν&προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	2	42	a191	figs-abstractnouns	ἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	2	42	gc59	figs-synecdoche	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of bread	Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	2	42	a192	figs-explicit	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of bread	By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	2	43	a193	figs-personification	ἐγίνετο&πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ACT	2	43	gi9v	figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο&πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	2	43	a194	figs-hyperbole	ἐγίνετο&πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	2	43	ys3y	figs-explicit	πολλά&τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles	Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	2	43	q6dm	figs-doublet	πολλά&τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	many wonders and signs	The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT	2	43	a193	figs-personification	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	2	43	gi9v	figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	2	43	a194	figs-hyperbole	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	2	43	ys3y	figs-explicit	πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles	Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	2	43	q6dm	figs-doublet	πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	many wonders and signs	The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	2	44	u8qk		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
 ACT	2	44	jy2w	figs-hyperbole	εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά	1	had all things in common	Luke may be saying **all** as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	2	45	h8tn	figs-doublet	τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον	1	they were selling their properties and their possessions	The words **properties** and **possessions** mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ ACT	2	45	f74s	writing-pronouns	καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ	1	they we
 ACT	2	45	n9hi		πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	to all, as anyone might have need	Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
 ACT	2	46	in43		καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	and, continuing unanimously	The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
 ACT	2	46	a427	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	2	46	q1ge	figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές&κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	breaking bread in each house	See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	2	46	q1ge	figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	breaking bread in each house	See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	2	46	i2yk	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	with exultation and sincerity of heart	Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	2	46	a195	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	with exultation and sincerity of heart	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	2	47	z6ig	figs-hyperbole	αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν	1	praising God and having favor with the whole people	Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ ACT	3	2	a200	figs-activepassive	τὴν λεγομένην	1	that is called	If i
 ACT	3	2	a201	translate-names	Ὡραίαν	1	Beautiful	**Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	3	2	a202	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	3	3	a203	figs-explicit	ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν	1	asked to receive alms	The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	3	4	xq4u		ἀτενίσας&Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	Peter, looking intently at him with John, said	This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
+ACT	3	4	xq4u		ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	Peter, looking intently at him with John, said	This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
 ACT	3	4	e3c6	figs-exclusive	βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Look at us	Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	3	6	x6bm	figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον	1	silver and gold	Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	3	6	zi9t	figs-explicit	ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι	1	but what I have, this I give to you	What happens next in the story shows that by **what I have**, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ ACT	3	8	abc1	writing-pronouns	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ ε
 ACT	3	8	q13i	figs-explicitinfo	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1		Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	3	8	zp7x	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	3	9	a208	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	all the people	The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	3	10	zy7h		ἐπεγίνωσκον&αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ&καθήμενος	1	they recognized him, that he was the one sitting	Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
+ACT	3	10	zy7h		ἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος	1	they recognized him, that he was the one sitting	Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
 ACT	3	10	p2zh	translate-names	τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ	1	the Beautiful Gate	This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	3	10	a209	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	3	10	j6zf	figs-doublet	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -415,9 +415,9 @@ ACT	3	11	rj43	figs-activepassive	τῇ καλουμένῃ	1	that is called	If i
 ACT	3	12	ndi3	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	3	12	uyg1	figs-rquestion	τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ	1	why do you marvel at this?	Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	3	12	j6ld	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?	1	Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness?	Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	3	12	g4y1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν&ἰδίᾳ	1	at us … our own	By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	3	12	g4y1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ	1	at us … our own	By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	3	12	mwd9	figs-hendiadys	ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ	1	by our own power or godliness	Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-ACT	3	13	q8q2	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ&Ἰσαὰκ&Ἰακώβ	1	Abraham … Isaac … Jacob	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	3	13	q8q2	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ	1	Abraham … Isaac … Jacob	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	3	13	a213	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	3	13	kmqw	figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1		The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could state “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	3	13	a214		τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν	1	his Servant Jesus	See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
@@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ ACT	3	14	a219	figs-doublet	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy
 ACT	3	14	a220	figs-explicit	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	3	14	s6qj	figs-activepassive	ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν	1	for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	3	15	a221	figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκτείνατε	1	you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	3	15	ljn8	figs-explicit	τὸν&Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	the Originator of Life	Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	3	15	ljn8	figs-explicit	τὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	the Originator of Life	Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	3	15	a222	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	3	15	jwb1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	3	15	a223	writing-pronouns	ἡμεῖς	1	we	If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun **we** here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	3	16	abc2	figs-infostructure	ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong	Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ACT	3	16	qt8w	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ&τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	3	16	a224	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ&τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	Peter is using the **name** of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	3	16	qt8w	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	3	16	a224	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	Peter is using the **name** of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	3	16	abc3	writing-pronouns	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	the faith that is through him has given to him	The first instance of the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	3	16	a225	figs-personification	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην	1	the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health	Peter is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	3	17	v45t		καὶ νῦν	1	And now	Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
@@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ ACT	3	20	yzr6	figs-activepassive	τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμ
 ACT	3	21	vgn8	figs-personification	ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι	1	whom it is necessary for heaven to receive	Peter is speaking of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	3	21	x2f3	figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων	1	the times of the restoration of all things	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	3	21	a2m8	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ αἰῶνος	1	from the age	The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	3	21	a12i	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων&αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of his holy prophets	Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	3	21	a12i	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of his holy prophets	Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	3	22	a232	figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	3	22	a249	translate-textvariants	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	The Lord our God	Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 ACT	3	22	a250	figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	The Lord our God	Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ ACT	3	23	t8a5	figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ 
 ACT	3	23	a237	figs-declarative	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ACT	3	23	a238	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις	1	every soul that	Moses is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	3	23	a239	figs-idiom	ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου	1	does not listen to that prophet	Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	3	24	u6x3	figs-hyperbole	πάντες&οἱ προφῆται	1	all the prophets	Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	3	24	u6x3	figs-hyperbole	πάντες & οἱ προφῆται	1	all the prophets	Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	3	24	xp9h		ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς	1	from Samuel and those after him	Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
 ACT	3	24	m9pr	figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	these days	Peter is using the word **days** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	3	24	a241	figs-explicit	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	these days	Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ ACT	3	26	z5q6		τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	his Servant	See the discussion
 ACT	3	26	x8ss	figs-metaphor	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	by turning each of you from your wickedness	Here, **turning** someone **from** something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	3	26	a248	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	by turning each of you from your wickedness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	4	intro	pv3a			0		# Acts 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Unity<br><br>The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.<br><br>### “Signs and wonders”<br><br>This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)<br><br>The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “no other name” (4:12)<br><br>“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
-ACT	4	1	abc4	writing-pronouns	λαλούντων&αὐτῶν	1	as they were speaking	The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	4	1	abc4	writing-pronouns	λαλούντων & αὐτῶν	1	as they were speaking	The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	1	ew3l	figs-explicit	ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	the captain of the temple	The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	1	m74s	figs-explicit	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	1	d3tv	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -505,13 +505,13 @@ ACT	4	3	h5f9	figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη	1	since it was al
 ACT	4	4	a257	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	4	4	a258	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	4	4	bm1f	figs-gendernotations	ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν	1	the number of the men	Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ACT	4	4	qd8g	figs-explicit	ἐγενήθη&ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	became about 5,000	The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	4	4	qd8g	figs-explicit	ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	became about 5,000	The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	5	lw2d	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	4	5	cdj1	figs-explicit	συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together	Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	5	j6p8	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	their rulers and elders and scribes	The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	5	i9tj	figs-activepassive	συναχθῆναι	1	were gathered together	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	6	a259	figs-explicit	Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας	1	Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas	Luke describes Annas as **the high priest**, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	4	6	l44n	translate-names	Ἅννας&Καϊάφας&Ἰωάννης&Ἀλέξανδρος	1	Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander	These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	4	6	l44n	translate-names	Ἅννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος	1	Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander	These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	4	6	a260		ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ	1	as many as were from the high priestly family	Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
 ACT	4	7	abc6	writing-pronouns	στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο	1	having set them in their midst, they asked them	The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	7	t1eq	figs-doublet	ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?	1	By what power or in what name have you done this?	The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ ACT	4	8	a262	figs-metaphor	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁ
 ACT	4	8	a263	figs-merism	ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι	1	Rulers of the people and elders	Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 ACT	4	8	a264	figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	of the people	Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	9	pq85	figs-irony	εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well	Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-ACT	4	9	je6d	figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς&ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	we are being questioned	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	4	9	je6d	figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	we are being questioned	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	9	b92n	figs-activepassive	οὗτος σέσωσται	1	he was made well	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	10	q9ss	figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1		If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	4	10	snd5	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel	The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -538,8 +538,8 @@ ACT	4	11	c1bh	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμ
 ACT	4	11	f1nx	figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the head of the corner	The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	4	12	a268	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	there is no salvation in anyone else	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	4	12	tq3z	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	there is no salvation in anyone else	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	4	12	l66w	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ&ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον	1	there is no other name under heaven given	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	4	12	iz7k	figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ&ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον&ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	there is no other name … by which we must be saved	Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	4	12	l66w	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον	1	there is no other name under heaven given	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	4	12	iz7k	figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	there is no other name … by which we must be saved	Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	4	12	jm25	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	under heaven	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	4	12	a269	figs-gendernotations	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	among men	Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	4	12	gg8h	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	by which we must be saved	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -549,10 +549,10 @@ ACT	4	13	t6kc	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν
 ACT	4	13	qaa5	figs-explicit	καταλαβόμενοι	1	realizing	The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	13	xn39	writing-pronouns	ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν	1	they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus	Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	13	erv7	figs-doublet	ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται	1	they were uneducated and ordinary men	The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	4	14	h3cy	figs-activepassive	τόν&ἄνθρωπον&τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	the man who had been healed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	4	14	h3cy	figs-activepassive	τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	the man who had been healed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	14	a270	writing-pronouns	σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον	1	standing with them, they had nothing	The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	14	fq4w	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν	1	they had nothing to say in opposition	The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	4	15	ql31	writing-pronouns	κελεύσαντες&αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves	The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	4	15	ql31	writing-pronouns	κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves	The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	15	a272	figs-metonymy	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	the Sanhedrin	Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	4	16	p4g6	figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?	1	What should we do to these men?	This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	4	16	jn12	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	everyone who lives in Jerusalem	This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -567,13 +567,13 @@ ACT	4	18	a277	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	So	Luke uses the word trans
 ACT	4	18	a278	writing-pronouns	καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν	1	summoning them, they commanded them	The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	18	a279	figs-doublet	μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν	1	neither to speak nor to teach	The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	4	18	a280	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus	Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	4	19	a281	figs-hendiadys	ὁ&Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-ACT	4	19	a282	figs-explicit	ὁ&Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	4	19	a281	figs-hendiadys	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT	4	19	a282	figs-explicit	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	19	jf1d	figs-metonymy	εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Whether it is right before God	Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	4	19	a283	figs-idiom	ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to listen to you rather than to God	Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	4	20	a284	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter and John are using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	4	20	hf3u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν	1	we … we have seen and heard	Peter and John are using the word **we** to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	4	20	a285	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ δυνάμεθα&ἡμεῖς&μὴ λαλεῖν	1	we are not able not to speak	You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	4	20	hf3u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν	1	we … we have seen and heard	Peter and John are using the word **we** to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	4	20	a285	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν	1	we are not able not to speak	You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	4	21	y5y1	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	having warned them further, they released them	The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	21	z2bx	figs-explicit	διὰ τὸν λαόν	1	on account of the people	The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	21	jbl6	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν	1	they were all glorifying God	Here, **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ ACT	4	23	a288	figs-activepassive	ἀπολυθέντες	1	having been released
 ACT	4	23	a289	figs-go	ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους	1	they came to their own people	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 ACT	4	23	j2cx	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους	1	their own people	The phrase **their own people** refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	23	a290	figs-merism	οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	the chief priests and the elders	As Peter does in [4:8](../04/08.md), here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-ACT	4	24	j3ap	writing-pronouns	οἱ&ἀκούσαντες&ἦραν	1	having heard, they raised	The phrase **having heard** refers to the other believers, but the pronoun **they** seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus ([4:29](../04/29.md)). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	4	24	j3ap	writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν	1	having heard, they raised	The phrase **having heard** refers to the other believers, but the pronoun **they** seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus ([4:29](../04/29.md)). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	4	24	a291		ἦραν φωνὴν	1	they raised their voice	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
 ACT	4	24	zu28	figs-idiom	ἦραν φωνὴν	1	they raised their voice	The expression **they raised their voice** is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	4	24	a292		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
@@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ ACT	4	26	w2by	figs-parallelism	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τ
 ACT	4	26	w64b	figs-idiom	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς	1	The kings of the earth took their stand	The expression **took their stand** describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	4	26	a299	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν	1	the rulers were gathered	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	26	a300		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
-ACT	4	26	yv19	figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου&τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the Lord … his Christ	Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	4	26	yv19	figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the Lord … his Christ	Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	27	b1g9	figs-activepassive	συνήχθησαν	1	were gathered together	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	27	nuc1	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	in this city	The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	4	27	ca33		παῖδά	1	Servant	Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah”
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ ACT	4	35	vv4z	translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας
 ACT	4	35	a322	figs-activepassive	διεδίδετο	1	it was being distributed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	35	ps4s	figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	to each one, according as anyone had need	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	4	36	uc2a	writing-participants	Ἰωσὴφ δὲ	1	Then Joseph	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT	4	36	a323	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ&Βαρναβᾶς	1	Joseph … Barnabas	**Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	4	36	a323	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς	1	Joseph … Barnabas	**Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	4	36	a324	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	who was called Barnabas by the apostles	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	36	a325	figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	4	36	a326	figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ ACT	5	1	ysl9	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	**Ananias** is the name o
 ACT	5	1	a332	writing-participants	σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ	1	with Sapphira his wife	Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	5	1	a333	translate-names	Σαπφείρῃ	1	Sapphria	**Sapphira** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	5	2	a334	figs-explicit	ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	he kept back from the price	The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could state why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	2	xm1t		συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι&ἔθηκεν	1	his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid	It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
+ACT	5	2	xm1t		συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν	1	his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid	It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
 ACT	5	2	dy8b	figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν	1	he laid it at the feet of the apostles	This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in [4:37](../04/37.md). Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	5	3	grr9	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?	1	why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land?	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	5	3	pqd4	figs-metaphor	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	why has Satan filled your heart	Peter is speaking of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ ACT	5	4	a339	figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σο
 ACT	5	4	a340	figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Peter speaks of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	5	4	a341	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	You have not lied to men, but to God	Ananaias actually has **lied to men**, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	4	a342	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	to men	Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ACT	5	5	a343	figs-metonymy	ἀκούων δὲ&τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	And hearing these words	Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	5	5	a343	figs-metonymy	ἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	And hearing these words	Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	5	cc5y	figs-euphemism	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	falling down, expired	The word translated **expired** means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 ACT	5	5	a344	figs-events	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	falling down, expired	Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 ACT	5	5	a345	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	great fear came upon all who heard	Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -690,34 +690,34 @@ ACT	5	6	a348	translate-unknown	συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	wrapped him
 ACT	5	7	a349	figs-idiom	ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ	1	And an interval of about three hours happened, and	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	5	7	ry54	writing-pronouns	ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ	1	his wife	The pronoun **his** refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	5	7	k3c9	figs-explicit	τὸ γεγονὸς	1	what had happened	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	8	a350		ἀπεκρίθη&πρὸς αὐτὴν	1	said to her	The word translated **said** means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
+ACT	5	8	a350		ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν	1	said to her	The word translated **said** means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
 ACT	5	8	a351	figs-youdual	ἀπέδοσθε	1	you sold	Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-ACT	5	8	bcf6	figs-explicit	τοσούτου&ναί, τοσούτου	1	for so much … yes, for so much	This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	5	8	bcf6	figs-explicit	τοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου	1	for so much … yes, for so much	This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	9	v7sw	figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?	1	How is it that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord?	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	5	9	hc22	figs-activepassive	συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν	1	it was agreed together by you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	5	9	w1lb	figs-you	ὑμῖν&σου&σε	1	by you … your … you	The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+ACT	5	9	w1lb	figs-you	ὑμῖν & σου & σε	1	by you … your … you	The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 ACT	5	9	pg1e		πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	to test the Spirit of the Lord	Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
 ACT	5	9	a352	figs-metonymy	πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	to test the Spirit of the Lord	Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	9	a353	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες	1	Behold, the feet	Peter says **Behold** to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	5	9	xj1l	figs-metonymy	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door	Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	9	a354	figs-explicit	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door	Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	9	a355	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε	1	and they will carry you out	The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will **carry** her **out** to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	10	s7en	figs-euphemism	ἔπεσεν&πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-ACT	5	10	a356	figs-events	ἔπεσεν&πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-ACT	5	10	nwb9	figs-metonymy	ἔπεσεν&πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	she fell down at his feet	This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	5	10	s7en	figs-euphemism	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+ACT	5	10	a356	figs-events	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
+ACT	5	10	nwb9	figs-metonymy	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	she fell down at his feet	This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	10	a357	figs-explicit	οἱ νεανίσκοι	1	the young men	See how you translated this expression in [5:6](../05/06.md). However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these **young men** were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	11	vym8	writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	And	This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	5	11	a358	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα	1	great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things	Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	5	12	c2e7	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce background information in [5:12–16](../05/12.md) that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-ACT	5	12	sri8	figs-metonymy	διὰ&τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles	Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	5	12	sri8	figs-metonymy	διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles	Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	12	ux3n	figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	signs and wonders	The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	5	12	aud2	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν&πάντες	1	they were all	The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	5	12	aud2	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν & πάντες	1	they were all	The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	5	12	a359		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
 ACT	5	12	k99k	translate-names	τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος	1	the Porch of Solomon	This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in [3:11](../03/11.md), which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	5	13	a360	figs-explicit	τῶν&λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς	1	none of the others	The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	5	13	a360	figs-explicit	τῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς	1	none of the others	The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	13	a361	figs-explicit	ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	dared to join them	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	14	a362	figs-metonymy	προσετίθεντο&τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	5	14	m9wx	figs-activepassive	προσετίθεντο&τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	5	14	a362	figs-metonymy	προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	5	14	m9wx	figs-activepassive	προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	14	oxni	writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	5	15	a364	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	so that	Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	5	15	l9bs	writing-pronouns	ἐκφέρειν	1	they … carried	The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -730,15 +730,15 @@ ACT	5	16	fu1a	figs-activepassive	ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτ
 ACT	5	16	lyc7	figs-activepassive	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	who were all healed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	16	a369	figs-hyperbole	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	who were all healed	It does not appear that **all** is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat **all** as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	5	17	x2ed	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the word **But** to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ACT	5	17	f9ye	figs-events	ἀναστὰς&ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-ACT	5	17	pc45	figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς&ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	5	17	f9ye	figs-events	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
+ACT	5	17	pc45	figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	17	a370	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	rising up	Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	5	17	a371	figs-explicit	πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων	1	all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees)	The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	17	a372	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	were filled with jealousy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	5	17	a373	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	were filled with jealousy	Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	5	18	j58p	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	they laid hands on the apostles	The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	18	a374	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	they laid hands on the apostles	The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	5	19	wd37	writing-pronouns	ἐξαγαγών&αὐτοὺς	1	bringing them out	The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	5	19	wd37	writing-pronouns	ἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς	1	bringing them out	The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	5	20	qm16	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the angel says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	20	z1x3	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	all the words of this life	The angel is using the term **words** to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	20	a375		τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	of this life	Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
@@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ ACT	5	25	c1am	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες	1	standing
 ACT	5	26	e24h	writing-pronouns	τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν	1	Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them	The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	5	27	iq7w	writing-pronouns	ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς	1	And having brought them	The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	5	28	a385		παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν	1	We commanded you with a command	For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
-ACT	5	28	f7pz	figs-you	ὑμῖν&πεπληρώκατε&ὑμῶν&βούλεσθε	1	you … you have filled … your … you desire	In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+ACT	5	28	f7pz	figs-you	ὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε	1	you … you have filled … your … you desire	In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 ACT	5	28	g2hi	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	in this name	The high priest is using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	28	a386	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε	1	behold, you have filled	The high priest says **behold** to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	5	28	j4kr	figs-metaphor	πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν	1	you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching	The high priest is speaking of the city of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ ACT	5	28	a387	figs-metaphor	βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμ
 ACT	5	28	a388	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	By **us**, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	5	28	ym1k	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα	1	the blood	The high priest is using the term **blood** to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	5	28	a389	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1	this man	The phrase **this man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	29	a390	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς&Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	answering, Peter and the apostles said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT	5	29	a390	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	answering, Peter and the apostles said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	5	29	di9u	figs-explicit	Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Peter and the apostles said	Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	29	a391	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	men	Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	5	30	a392	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	of our fathers	Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -789,19 +789,19 @@ ACT	5	31	q1il	figs-personification	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Israel	Peter is referring to
 ACT	5	32	a398	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	5	32	a399	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	5	32	yml6	figs-explicit	ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	whom God has given to those obeying him	Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	33	abx6	writing-pronouns	οἱ&ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them	The pronoun **they** refers to the council members and the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	5	34	i2rr	writing-participants	τις&Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ	1	a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	5	33	abx6	writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them	The pronoun **they** refers to the council members and the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	5	34	i2rr	writing-participants	τις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ	1	a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	5	34	a401	translate-names	Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel	**Gamaliel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	5	34	a402	writing-background	νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	a law teacher, honored by all the people	Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 ACT	5	34	fpr4	figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	honored by all the people	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	34	a403	figs-hyperbole	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	honored by all the people	The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	5	34	a404	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	rising up	Here, **rising up** means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	5	34	xk6g	figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω&τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	commanded to put the apostles outside	Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	5	34	xk6g	figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	commanded to put the apostles outside	Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	34	a405	figs-nominaladj	βραχὺ	1	for a little	Luke is using the adjective **little** as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	5	35	a406	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τε	1	And	Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 ACT	5	35	a407	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	5	35	ae1u	figs-explicit	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν	1	pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men	Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could state that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	5	36	a408	figs-idiom	πρὸ&τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	before these days	Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	5	36	a408	figs-idiom	πρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	before these days	Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	5	36	a409	translate-names	Θευδᾶς	1	Theudas	**Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	5	36	uaj6	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	rose up	In this context, **rose up** means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	5	36	b3nl	figs-idiom	λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν	1	saying himself to be somebody	In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -825,11 +825,11 @@ ACT	5	38	zh1d		ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη 
 ACT	5	38	a418	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	Gamaliel is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts **from men** here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	5	38	uql8	figs-activepassive	καταλυθήσεται	1	it will be destroyed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	39	a419	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were **from God**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ACT	5	39	j819	writing-pronouns	εἰ&ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	if it is from God	Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	5	39	j819	writing-pronouns	εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	if it is from God	Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	5	39	a420	figs-explicit	μήποτε	1	lest	It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	5	39	a421	figs-activepassive	καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε	1	you may even be found	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	39	a422	figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῆτε	1	be found	The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	5	39	cyp1	figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν&αὐτῷ	1	they were persuaded by him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	5	39	cyp1	figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ	1	they were persuaded by him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	5	40	z31c	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	5	40	p6lz	figs-synecdoche	προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν	1	summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them	The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	5	40	fca9	figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	to speak in the name of Jesus	The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ ACT	5	42	kyp6	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests
 ACT	5	42	x424	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι	1	they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	6	intro	z5r5			0		# Acts 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Acts [6:7](../06/07.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The distribution to the widows<br><br>The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “His face was like the face of an angel”<br><br>No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
 ACT	6	1	f8br	writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Now in those days	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	6	1	cg5t	figs-idiom	ἐν&ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	6	1	cg5t	figs-idiom	ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	6	1	e7vb	translate-names	τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν	1	of the Hellenists	**Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	6	1	s4qy	figs-activepassive	παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν	1	their widows were being overlooked in the daily service	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	6	1	rde8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ	1	in the daily service	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -852,14 +852,14 @@ ACT	6	2	jm17	figs-metaphor	καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ
 ACT	6	2	w9re	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	6	2	fwk6	figs-metaphor	διακονεῖν τραπέζαις	1	to serve tables	To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	6	3	lcyx	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	6	3	p1yz	figs-activepassive	ἄνδρας&μαρτυρουμένους	1	men being attested	The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	6	3	p1yz	figs-activepassive	ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους	1	men being attested	The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	6	3	mgid	figs-metaphor	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	full of the Spirit and of wisdom	The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	6	3	pxe5	figs-abstractnouns	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	full of the Spirit and of wisdom	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	6	3	i27a	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης	1	over this task	When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	6	4	b3bj	figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου	1	of the word	The apostles are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	6	5	wh9t	figs-metonymy	ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους	1	the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude	Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	6	5	jayc	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	And	Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	6	5	ajq1	translate-names	Στέφανον&Φίλιππον&Πρόχορον&Νικάνορα&Τίμωνα&Παρμενᾶν&Νικόλαον	1	Stephen … Philip … Prochorus … Nicanor … Timon … Parmenas … Nicolaus	These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	6	5	ajq1	translate-names	Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον	1	Stephen … Philip … Prochorus … Nicanor … Timon … Parmenas … Nicolaus	These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	6	5	vsyk	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	6	5	yqsj	figs-abstractnouns	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	6	5	cg5s	translate-names	Ἀντιοχέα	1	an Antiochian	The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -871,14 +871,14 @@ ACT	6	7	ueie	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	th
 ACT	6	7	jg8y	figs-synecdoche	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	became obedient to the faith	Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	6	7	qq3l	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	became obedient to the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	6	8	et2j	writing-participants	Στέφανος δὲ	1	Now Stephen	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT	6	8	pzr0	figs-metaphor	Στέφανος&πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	6	8	h8sg	figs-hendiadys	Στέφανος&πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-ACT	6	8	xscq	figs-abstractnouns	Στέφανος&πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	6	8	pzr0	figs-metaphor	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	6	8	h8sg	figs-hendiadys	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT	6	8	xscq	figs-abstractnouns	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	6	8	m0zh	figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα	1	great wonders and signs	The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	6	9	d74m	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησαν	1	rose up	Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	6	9	nei0	figs-activepassive	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	the synagogue called Freedmen	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	6	9	k88n	figs-explicit	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	the synagogue called Freedmen	The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	6	9	e7b0	translate-names	Κυρηναίων&Ἀλεξανδρέων&Κιλικίας&Ἀσίας	1	of the Cyrenians … of the Alexandrians … Cilicia … Asia	The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	6	9	e7b0	translate-names	Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας	1	of the Cyrenians … of the Alexandrians … Cilicia … Asia	The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	6	10	v5ia	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι	1	they were not able to stand against	In this context, the expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	6	10	fnb2	figs-hendiadys	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke	Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	6	10	psha	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -904,27 +904,27 @@ ACT	7	2	pt4h	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here and throughout this chapter, Step
 ACT	7	2	w1ya	figs-metaphor	τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ	1		Stephen is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	3	uksj	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	7	3	kgef	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to God, while the pronoun **him** refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	7	4	pfg3	writing-pronouns	κατῴκησεν&αὐτοῦ&μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν	1		The pronouns **his** and **him** and the first instance of the word **he** refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word **he** refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	7	4	pfg3	writing-pronouns	κατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν	1		The pronouns **his** and **him** and the first instance of the word **he** refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word **he** refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	4	pfg4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	you	The word **you** is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-ACT	7	5	tnsm	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ&ἐπηγγείλατο&αὐτῷ&αὐτοῦ&αὐτόν&οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ	1		The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	7	5	tnsm	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ	1		The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	5	ax1j		οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	he did not give him an inheritance in it	Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
 ACT	7	5	qff6	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός	1	not even a stride of a foot	This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	7	5	u6iw	figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν&καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	to him for a possession, and to his seed after him	The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	7	5	j09v	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν&καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	7	5	u6iw	figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	to him for a possession, and to his seed after him	The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	7	5	j09v	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	7	6	orw2	figs-quotations	ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT	7	6	tn6b	figs-explicit	ἐλάλησεν&οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	God spoke to him like this	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	7	6	tn6b	figs-explicit	ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	God spoke to him like this	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	6	jymv	writing-pronouns	ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν	1		Stephen is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could state “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	7	k8pz	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	7	7	f7fw	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος	1	I will judge the nation	Here, **nation** refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	7	7	q7y6	writing-pronouns	ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν	1	the nation that will enslave him	As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	7	8	iwfx	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ&ἐγέννησεν	1		The first instance of the pronoun **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of the pronoun **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	7	8	iwfx	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν	1		The first instance of the pronoun **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of the pronoun **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	8	mwc9	figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς	1	God gave him the covenant of circumcision	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	7	8	g67f	translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ&τὸν Ἰακώβ	1		These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	7	8	g67f	translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ	1		These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	7	8	ams1	figs-ellipsis	καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Jacob of the 12 patriarchs	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	7	8	gaww	figs-explicit	τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word **patriarchs** to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	9	n981	translate-kinship	οἱ πατριάρχαι	1	the patriarchs	Here the word **patriarchs** refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 ACT	7	9	tik7	figs-explicit	ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	sold him into Egypt	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	7	9	w1is	figs-idiom	ἦν&μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	was with him	When Stephen says that God **was with** Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	7	9	w1is	figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	was with him	When Stephen says that God **was with** Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	10	kxgk	writing-pronouns	ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1		In these phrases the word **he** refers to God and the words **him** and **his** refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	10	bfoo	figs-abstractnouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **favor** and **wisdom** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	7	10	vpir	figs-idiom	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1		Here the phrase **before Pharaoh** may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ ACT	7	10	s5vk	figs-metonymy	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1		The phrase **before
 ACT	7	10	nycs	writing-pronouns	κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1		In these phrases the words **he** and **his** refer to Pharaoh and the word **him** refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	10	yr7m	figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	over Egypt	The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	7	10	pb4p	figs-metonymy	ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	over all his household	The word **household** refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	7	11	p42j	figs-personification	ἦλθεν&λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	came a famine	Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	7	11	p42j	figs-personification	ἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	came a famine	Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	7	11	frd4	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	7	11	p37v	figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	12	pia8	figs-explicit	ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	grain	Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -942,16 +942,16 @@ ACT	7	13	a5f3	figs-nominaladj	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1		Stephen is using th
 ACT	7	13	ce2b	translate-ordinal	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	On their second time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 ACT	7	13	m37e	figs-activepassive	ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	was made known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	13	jxk8	figs-activepassive	φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ	1	the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh	The phrase **became known** is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	7	14	aam5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀποστείλας&Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ	1	sending them back	Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ACT	7	14	aam5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ	1	sending them back	Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ACT	7	14	wl32	figs-idiom	ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε	1		Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	15	zasp	figs-idiom	κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1		Stephen says that Jacob **went down** because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	15	w2sm	figs-explicit	ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	he and our fathers died	Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they **died** as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	15	fe56	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	he and our fathers	Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	16	slg3	figs-activepassive	μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	they were carried over … and laid	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	16	la8a	figs-metonymy	τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	for a price in silver	Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	7	17	tuq2	figs-events	καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας&ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied	In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
-ACT	7	17	kh8g	figs-personification	καθὼς&ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1		Stephen is speaking of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ACT	7	17	tlh9	figs-explicit	καθὼς&ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	the time of the promise … approached	Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	7	17	tuq2	figs-events	καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied	In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
+ACT	7	17	kh8g	figs-personification	καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1		Stephen is speaking of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	7	17	tlh9	figs-explicit	καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	the time of the promise … approached	Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	17	s2oe	figs-hendiadys	ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1		Stephen is using the two words **increased** and **multiplied** together to express a single idea. The word **multiplied** tells in what way the people **increased**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	7	18	whe7	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	there arose over Egypt another king	When Stephen says that this next king **arose**, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	18	g2wq	figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	over Egypt	The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -965,14 +965,14 @@ ACT	7	20	nib6	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ	1		Stephen
 ACT	7	20	q66s	writing-participants	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	At that time Moses was born	Here Stephen introduces **Moses** into his story. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	7	20	cz9w	figs-activepassive	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	20	cd5z	figs-idiom	ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ	1	he was beautiful to God	This could mean: (1) that Moses was **beautiful** in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very **beautiful**. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	7	20	pnb1	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνετράφη&ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός	1	was nourished	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	7	20	pnb1	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός	1	was nourished	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	21	w3iu	figs-activepassive	ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	But when he was exposed	Moses **was exposed** because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	21	el3b	figs-metaphor	ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν	1		This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus [2:1-10](../exo/02/01.md).) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	22	c9nw	figs-activepassive	ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	Moses was educated	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	22	att9	figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	in all the wisdom of the Egyptians	Stephen says **all** as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	7	22	m3dm		δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ	1	mighty in his words and works	Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
-ACT	7	23	o4cg	figs-idiom	ὡς&ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1		This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	7	23	b9gd	figs-activepassive	ὡς&ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	7	23	o4cg	figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1		This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	7	23	b9gd	figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	23	ckxj	figs-idiom	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1		The expression **it came up on his heart** means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	23	fj9s	figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	it came into his heart	Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	7	23	x493	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel	Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ ACT	7	25	hrsh	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1		Stephen is using the
 ACT	7	25	f6sn	figs-abstractnouns	δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	7	25	nhb9	figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	by his hand was giving salvation to them	Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	7	26	t2vc	figs-explicit	αὐτοῖς	1	to them as they were quarreling	It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	7	26	qyc2	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς&αὐτοὺς&ἐστε&ἀδικεῖτε	1		Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of **them** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+ACT	7	26	qyc2	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε	1		Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of **them** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 ACT	7	26	mpc7	figs-abstractnouns	συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην	1	he urged them to peace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	7	26	kyde	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	7	26	zzt4	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες	1	Men, you are brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -999,17 +999,17 @@ ACT	7	28	vow8	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλει
 ACT	7	28	hk1g	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you?	The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	7	28	qfxh	figs-quotesinquotes	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	7	28	jxka		ὃν τρόπον	1		Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
-ACT	7	29	l149	figs-explicit	ἔφυγεν&Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	General Information:	The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	7	29	l149	figs-explicit	ἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	General Information:	The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	29	rbhm	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1		Stephen is using the term **word** to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	7	29	q8qv	figs-explicit	οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο	1	at this statement	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	30	zx1c	figs-idiom	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	And when 40 years were past	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	30	qci0	figs-activepassive	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	7	30	veft	figs-idiom	ὤφθη αὐτῷ&ἄγγελος	1		The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	7	30	f7yu	figs-explicit	ὤφθη αὐτῷ&ἄγγελος	1	an angel appeared	Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	7	30	veft	figs-idiom	ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος	1		The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	7	30	f7yu	figs-explicit	ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος	1	an angel appeared	Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	31	q6w6	figs-explicit	ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα	1	he marveled at the sight	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses **admired the sight** because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	31	uk7u	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου	1	and as he approached to look at it	Stephen is speaking of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	7	32	b26o	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT	7	33	bpml	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν&αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT	7	33	bpml	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	7	33	x7cd	translate-symaction	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	Untie the sandals	In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	7	33	rxnj	figs-explicit	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	33	xl9p		τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **sandals**. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
@@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ ACT	7	36	gz9r	figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	during 40 years
 ACT	7	36	n75x	translate-names	Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ	1		Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, **the Red Sea**, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	7	37	k710	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	7	37	vykp	figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ	1		Stephen is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	7	37	b4sg	figs-idiom	προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει&ὡς ἐμέ	1	will raise up a prophet	Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	7	37	b4sg	figs-idiom	προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ	1	will raise up a prophet	Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	37	j2rx	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	from among your brothers	Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	38	fd25	writing-pronouns	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος	1	This is the one	**This is the one** refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	38	z1z7	figs-infostructure	μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1		It might be more natural to put the information about **Mount Sinai** next to the information about Moses receiving **living words**. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -1050,20 +1050,20 @@ ACT	7	41	ux1j	figs-explicit	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	they made an image of
 ACT	7	41	v6tx	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1		Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	41	hjp0	writing-pronouns	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	41	hh77	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands	Stephen describes what he also calls the **calf** and the **idol** as **the works of their hands** by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	7	42	d3dd	figs-metaphor	ἔστρεψεν&ὁ Θεὸς	1	God turned away	Stephen is speaking as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	7	42	d3dd	figs-metaphor	ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς	1	God turned away	Stephen is speaking as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	42	u7lx	figs-metaphor	τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	the host of heaven	Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	42	ya6v	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	42	f314	figs-explicit	βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	the book of the prophets	This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	42	w38i	figs-quotemarks	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1		This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	7	42	o5ly	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1		The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	7	42	gd1b	figs-rquestion	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel?	Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of **Israel** that they did not really worship Him **in the wilderness** with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	7	42	q9rr	figs-yousingular	μὴ&προσηνέγκατέ	1		**You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	7	42	q9rr	figs-yousingular	μὴ & προσηνέγκατέ	1		**You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	7	42	tck0	figs-merism	σφάγια καὶ θυσίας	1		In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 ACT	7	42	j4q8	figs-metaphor	οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	O house of Israel	Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	43	zek5		καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος.	1		The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
 ACT	7	43	h20h	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1		**And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../07/42.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ACT	7	43	q85n	figs-irony	ἀνελάβετε&μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-ACT	7	43	gxh2	figs-yousingular	ἀνελάβετε&ὑμῶν&ἐποιήσατε&ὑμᾶς	1		As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	7	43	q85n	figs-irony	ἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+ACT	7	43	gxh2	figs-yousingular	ἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς	1		As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	7	43	im7e	figs-explicit	τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ	1	the tabernacle of Molech	The **tabernacle of Molech** was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	43	cq47	figs-explicit	τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν	1	the star of your god Rephan	The Israelites were not carrying around an actual **star**, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	43	gm4g	figs-explicit	τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε	1	and the images that you made	The word **images** refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ ACT	7	44	masq	figs-explicit	διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ
 ACT	7	44	avqh	figs-explicit	τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the **pattern** for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	45	uqca	figs-pronouns	ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1		The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	45	qjov		διαδεξάμενοι	1		The phrase **having received … in turn** translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
-ACT	7	45	n2sc		εἰσήγαγον&μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them	When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
+ACT	7	45	n2sc		εἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them	When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
 ACT	7	45	e3gu	figs-explicit	εἰσήγαγον	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	45	eww5	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Stephen is using the term **nations** to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	7	45	spm5	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers	Stephen is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ ACT	7	51	zp55	figs-metonymy	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τ
 ACT	7	51	esfc	figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1		Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	7	51	jslb	figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1		Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	7	51	zgon	figs-hyperbole	ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε	1		The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	7	51	w164	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς&ὑμῶν&ὑμεῖς	1		The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	7	51	w164	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς	1		The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	7	51	d2v8	figs-ellipsis	ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς	1		Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	7	52	x7kf	figs-rquestion	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute?	Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	7	52	eiw2	figs-hyperbole	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1		Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1124,7 +1124,7 @@ ACT	7	52	agd9		οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς
 ACT	7	53	axhl	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1		The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	7	53	t92q	figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1		The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	7	53	euw5	figs-explicit	εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων	1	the law as ordained by angels	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	7	54	ef2g	figs-activepassive	ἀκούοντες&ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Now hearing these things	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	7	54	ef2g	figs-activepassive	ἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Now hearing these things	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	7	54	u4l7	figs-idiom	διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	they were cut to their hearts	Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	54	ae9s	translate-symaction	ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	they ground their teeth at him	This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	7	55	dlux	figs-metaphor	πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1		Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1139,9 +1139,9 @@ ACT	7	56	aqp8	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Son o
 ACT	7	56	imoa	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	7	56	cr19	figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase **at the right of God** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	7	56	rvwp	translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus **standing** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “the Son of Man, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	7	57	p4cg	translate-symaction	κράξαντες&φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	they covered their ears	The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	7	57	wtwk	figs-idiom	κράξαντες&φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	7	57	hm0q		κράξαντες&φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
+ACT	7	57	p4cg	translate-symaction	κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	they covered their ears	The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT	7	57	wtwk	figs-idiom	κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	7	57	hm0q		κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
 ACT	7	57	t287		ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1		This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
 ACT	7	58	ks1u	figs-metaphor	ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	throwing him outside the city	Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	7	58	teas	figs-explicit	οἱ μάρτυρες	1		These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ ACT	7	58	wy7n	translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	outer garments	These **out
 ACT	7	58	sx2p	figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας	1	at the feet	The expression **at the feet** means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	59	fxhz	figs-hendiadys	ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **calling out** tells how Stephen was **saying** what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	7	59	k2el	figs-imperative	δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	receive my spirit	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT	7	60	u86q	translate-symaction	θεὶς&τὰ γόνατα	1	But having knelt down on his knees	Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT	7	60	u86q	translate-symaction	θεὶς & τὰ γόνατα	1	But having knelt down on his knees	Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	7	60	hi24	figs-idiom	ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	7	60	dfjs	figs-imperative	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ACT	7	60	tvf8	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	do not hold this sin against them	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -1159,15 +1159,15 @@ ACT	8	intro	q9d9			0		# Acts 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<
 ACT	8	1	ez88	writing-background	Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ	1	there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles	Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 ACT	8	1	i1tc	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1		Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	8	1	vc8x	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	that day	Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	8	1	xp25	figs-activepassive	πάντες&διεσπάρησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	8	1	u5pi	figs-hyperbole	πάντες&διεσπάρησαν	1	they were all scattered	The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	8	1	xp25	figs-activepassive	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	8	1	u5pi	figs-hyperbole	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1	they were all scattered	The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	8	1	k5a2	figs-explicit	πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	except the apostles	The implication is that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	2	tp9e	translate-versebridge	συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	General Information:	It may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-ACT	8	2	sjc8	figs-explicit	συνεκόμισαν&τὸν Στέφανον	1	devout men	The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	8	2	sjc8	figs-explicit	συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον	1	devout men	The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	3	yd2i		κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους	1	according to the houses	Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
-ACT	8	3	w6vk	figs-explicit	κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους&τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	men and women	Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	8	4	n52l	figs-nominaladj	οἱ&διασπαρέντες	1		Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	8	4	ymy5	figs-activepassive	οἱ&διασπαρέντες	1	had been scattered	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	8	3	w6vk	figs-explicit	κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	men and women	Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	8	4	n52l	figs-nominaladj	οἱ & διασπαρέντες	1		Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	8	4	ymy5	figs-activepassive	οἱ & διασπαρέντες	1	had been scattered	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	8	4	su6i	figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	5	gz5m	figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	went down to the city of Samaria	Luke speaks of Philip **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	8	5	f45b	figs-idiom	τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	the city of Samaria	This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1181,14 +1181,14 @@ ACT	8	7	un6b	figs-infostructure	πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων π
 ACT	8	7	pehe	figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἐχόντων	1		Luke is using the participle **having**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **those** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	8	7	xb2n		ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα	1	having unclean spirits	Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
 ACT	8	7	nz7y	figs-idiom	βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	8	7	v8uj	figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ&παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	8	7	imbh	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ&παραλελυμένοι	1		Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	8	7	anq3	figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ&παραλελυμένοι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	8	7	v8uj	figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	8	7	imbh	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι	1		Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	8	7	anq3	figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	8	8	s8bm	grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1		Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	8	8	z5z3	figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο&πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	And there was much joy in that city	The phrase **that city** refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	8	8	r0nz	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο&πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	8	8	z5z3	figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	And there was much joy in that city	The phrase **that city** refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	8	8	r0nz	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	8	9	jm7n	writing-background	ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων	1		Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	8	9	bed1	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ&τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	But … a certain man named Simon	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	8	9	bed1	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	But … a certain man named Simon	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	8	9	cx7a	translate-names	Σίμων	1	the city	**Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	8	10	mvcm	writing-pronouns	ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1		The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	8	10	evt7	figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	they all … were paying attention	Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1209,20 +1209,20 @@ ACT	8	13	v91t	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς	1	having been baptized	If
 ACT	8	13	rnr3	figs-irony	θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας	1		The word that ULT translates as **works** here is the same word that it translates as “power” in [8:10](../08/10.md). It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that **works** of power that are truly **great** are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 ACT	8	13	d4yb	figs-doublet	τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις	1		The terms **signs** and **works** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	8	14	s7lr	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard	Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	8	14	lk9b	figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες&ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT	8	14	uwxo	figs-exclamations	ἀκούσαντες&ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+ACT	8	14	lk9b	figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT	8	14	uwxo	figs-exclamations	ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ACT	8	14	ju21	figs-metonymy	ἡ Σαμάρεια	1	Samaria	Luke is using the word **Samaria** by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	14	e682	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	had received	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	15	af1n	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν	1	who, having come down	The pronoun **who** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	8	15	hd1w	figs-youdual	οἵτινες	1		Since the pronoun **who** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 ACT	8	15	hk1m	figs-idiom	καταβάντες	1	having come down	Luke speaks of Philip **having come down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	8	15	bun9	figs-go	καταβάντες	1	prayed for them	Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-ACT	8	16	d2z9	figs-metaphor	οὐδέπω&ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	8	16	d2z9	figs-metaphor	οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	8	16	l4ez	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	8	16	qmjp	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω&ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT	8	16	bpzz	writing-pronouns	οὐδέπω&ἦν&ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	8	16	rn3c	figs-metonymy	μόνον&βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, **the name of the Lord Jesus** represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	8	16	m1nw	figs-activepassive	μόνον&βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	they had only been baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	8	16	qmjp	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	8	16	bpzz	writing-pronouns	οὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	8	16	rn3c	figs-metonymy	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, **the name of the Lord Jesus** represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	8	16	m1nw	figs-activepassive	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	they had only been baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	8	17	bsll	writing-pronouns	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον	1		The first instance of the pronoun **they** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** and the second instance of **they** stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	8	17	bldf	figs-youdual	ἐπετίθεσαν	1		Since this instance of the pronoun **they** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in [8:18](../08/18.md) and “they” and “the ones” in [8:25](../08/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 ACT	8	17	q7gd	translate-symaction	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	they were laying their hands on them	Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1239,20 +1239,20 @@ ACT	8	22	sa6s	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτη
 ACT	8	22	ppk5	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	the intention of your heart	Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	8	22	pe2u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you	Peter is using the conditional word **if** to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ACT	8	22	lq4i	figs-activepassive	ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	8	23	tf3s	translate-unknown	εἰς&χολὴν πικρίας	1		The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	8	23	kpu6	figs-metonymy	εἰς&χολὴν πικρίας	1		Peter is using the **gall** plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	8	23	d3v7	figs-metaphor	εἰς&χολὴν πικρίας	1	in the poison of bitterness	Peter is describing **bitterness** as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	8	23	tf3s	translate-unknown	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1		The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT	8	23	kpu6	figs-metonymy	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1		Peter is using the **gall** plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	8	23	d3v7	figs-metaphor	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	in the poison of bitterness	Peter is describing **bitterness** as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	8	23	j696	figs-metaphor	σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας	1	the bond of unrighteousness	Peter speaks of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	8	24	n5cw	figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς&εἰρήκατε	1		Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
+ACT	8	24	n5cw	figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε	1		Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 ACT	8	24	v2wy	figs-imperative	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ACT	8	24	hwc6	writing-pronouns	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1		Simon is stating the pronoun **You**, which is already implied in the verb **pray**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	8	24	u1a4		ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	so that nothing of which you have spoken may happen to me	Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
 ACT	8	24	sk5w	figs-explicit	μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	nothing … of which you have spoken	Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	25	nzvg	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1		Luke is using the word translated **Then** to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-ACT	8	25	p3rj	figs-explicit	οἱ&διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1		The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	8	25	uz15	figs-nominaladj	οἱ&διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες	1	when they had testified	Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	8	25	p3rj	figs-explicit	οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1		The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	8	25	uz15	figs-nominaladj	οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες	1	when they had testified	Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	8	25	ww9k	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	spoken the word of the Lord	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	8	25	eu66	figs-metonymy	πολλάς&κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	to many villages of the Samaritans	The term **villages** refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	8	25	eu66	figs-metonymy	πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	to many villages of the Samaritans	The term **villages** refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	26	mbj9	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	8	26	w1nk	figs-idiom	ἀνάστηθι	1	Arise and go	Here the word **arise** means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	8	26	le2c	figs-idiom	τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν	1	that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza	The angel speaks of the road **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ ACT	8	29	llh1	figs-metonymy	πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ 
 ACT	8	30	ffh7	figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην	1	reading Isaiah the prophet	Luke is using the phrase **Isaiah the prophet** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	30	x98i	figs-explicit	ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις	1	Do you understand what you are reading?	The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	31	r5g2	figs-rquestion	πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με?	1	how would I be able, unless someone will guide me?	The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	8	31	zx9h	figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν&τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him	The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	8	31	zx9h	figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him	The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	32	nd93	figs-explicit	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1		This a quotation from Isaiah [53:7–8](../isa/53/07.md). It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	32	bgk9	figs-abstractnouns	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slaughter**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	8	32	kh97	figs-activepassive	ἤχθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1288,46 +1288,46 @@ ACT	8	33	idk8	figs-activepassive	αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζ
 ACT	8	34	agq5	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν	1		Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	8	34	htb2	figs-idiom	δέομαί σου	1	I am begging you	The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	8	34	pa3m	writing-pronouns	ἑτέρου τινός	1		In this context, the pronoun **other** means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	8	35	j7xw	figs-metonymy	ἀνοίξας&τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1		By association with the way a person would be **opening his mouth** in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	8	35	j7xw	figs-metonymy	ἀνοίξας & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1		By association with the way a person would be **opening his mouth** in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	35	uw21	figs-explicit	τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης	1	this scripture	By **this scripture**, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	8	35	xg4i	figs-metonymy	εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		Luke is using the name **Jesus** by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	8	36	ip13	figs-metonymy	τι ὕδωρ&ὕδωρ	1	they were going along the road	Luke and the official are using the word **water** to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	8	36	ip13	figs-metonymy	τι ὕδωρ & ὕδωρ	1	they were going along the road	Luke and the official are using the word **water** to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	36	muz2	figs-rquestion	τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι?	1	What is preventing me from being baptized?	This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in [8:37](../08/37.md) by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	8	36	wb9j	figs-activepassive	με βαπτισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	8	37	ov75	translate-textvariants	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ	1		As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 ACT	8	37	qj5i	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1		Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	8	37	djq2	figs-activepassive	σωθήσει	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	8	37	e3uu	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς&εἶπεν	1		Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT	8	37	e3uu	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν	1		Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	8	38	l8wl	figs-metonymy	ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα	1	he commanded the chariot to stop	Luke is using the term **chariot** by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	8	38	nn00	writing-pronouns	ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν	1		The pronoun **he** stands for Philip, and the pronoun **him** stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	8	39	xp52	grammar-connect-time-sequential	γὰρ	1	the eunuch did not see him anymore	While the word translated **for** often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead **went on his way**. Rather, the word **for** seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-ACT	8	40	r1x7	figs-explicit	Φίλιππος&εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	Philip was found at Azotus	The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	8	40	bbws	figs-activepassive	Φίλιππος&εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	8	40	r1x7	figs-explicit	Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	Philip was found at Azotus	The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	8	40	bbws	figs-activepassive	Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	8	40	arh5		διερχόμενος	1	passed through	Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
 ACT	8	40	zfn6	figs-hyperbole	τὰς πόλεις πάσας	1	to all the cities	Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	8	40	yf7i	translate-names	Ἄζωτον&Καισάρειαν	1		**Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	8	40	yf7i	translate-names	Ἄζωτον & Καισάρειαν	1		**Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	9	intro	jm6x			0		# Acts 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>In [9:1](../09/01.md), the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.<br><br>In [9:32](../09/32.md), the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.<br><br>Acts [9:31](../09/31.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”<br><br>The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.<br><br>### “The Way”<br><br>No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.<br><br>### “the church”<br><br>Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word **church** in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “the Lord”<br><br>Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### What Saul saw when he met Jesus<br><br>It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
 ACT	9	1	r4n5	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	General Information:	Luke uses the word translated **But** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	9	1	anb6	figs-hendiadys	ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς	1	still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples	Luke is using the two words **threat** and **murder** together to express a single idea. The word **murder** tells what kind of **threat** Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	9	1	lrre	figs-metonymy	ἐμπνέων	1		Luke is using the term **breathing** by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	9	2	wyfp	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ&εὕρῃ&ἀγάγῃ	1		The pronoun **him** refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun **he** refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	9	2	wyfp	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & εὕρῃ & ἀγάγῃ	1		The pronoun **him** refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun **he** refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	9	2	zu6j	translate-unknown	ἐπιστολὰς	1		See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these **letters** were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	9	2	v9lw	figs-metonymy	εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς	1	to the synagogues	Luke is using the terms **Damascus** and **synagogues** by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	2	thuy	translate-names	τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας	1		As the General Notes to this chapter explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	9	2	mma1	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	9	2	grch	figs-synecdoche	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1		Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	9	2	a6z4	figs-explicit	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem	The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	9	3	jf4g	figs-explicit	ἐν&τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	as he was traveling	Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	9	3	jf4g	figs-explicit	ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	as he was traveling	Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	3	by55	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	it happened that	Luke uses the phrase **it happened that** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	9	3	dm6c		αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	there shone on him a light from heaven	Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
 ACT	9	3	gua8		ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
 ACT	9	4	y4u4	figs-explicit	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	he fell to the ground	Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	4	c9l4	figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	why are you persecuting me?	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	9	5	jaq2	writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε?	1	Who are you, Lord?	Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is **Lord**. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	9	5	abc0	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν&ὁ	1	he	The first instance of **he** stands for Saul, and the second instance of **he** stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	9	5	q8ge		εἶ&σὺ	1		Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular.
+ACT	9	5	abc0	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & ὁ	1	he	The first instance of **he** stands for Saul, and the second instance of **he** stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	9	5	q8ge		εἶ & σὺ	1		Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular.
 ACT	9	6	fbi6	figs-activepassive	λαληθήσεταί σοι	1	it will be told to you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	9	8	puw3	figs-activepassive	ἀνεῳγμένων&τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	his eyes being opened	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	9	8	puw3	figs-activepassive	ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	his eyes being opened	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	9	8	dgg8	writing-pronouns	εἰσήγαγον	1	he was seeing nothing	The pronoun **they** stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in [9:8](../09/08.md). Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	9	9	fhn6		ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων	1	he was … without sight	Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
 ACT	9	9	t8uc	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν	1	neither ate nor drank	This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. [9:11](../09/11.md) says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1350,18 +1350,18 @@ ACT	9	14	gk5o	figs-synecdoche	δῆσαι	1		Ananias is using one part of the ar
 ACT	9	14	hi6x	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1		Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	9	14	t3fl	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	who call upon your name	Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	14	ampz	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1		Here, the expression **calling on** means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	9	15	jmt7	figs-possession	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς&μοι	1	this one is a chosen instrument of mine	The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ACT	9	15	jmt7	figs-possession	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι	1	this one is a chosen instrument of mine	The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ACT	9	15	gk29	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	9	15	ndxu	figs-metaphor	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς&μοι	1		The Lord describes Saul as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	9	15	ndxu	figs-metaphor	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι	1		The Lord describes Saul as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	9	15	z5fj	figs-metaphor	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	who will carry my name	The Lord says that Saul will **carry** his **name**, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	9	15	h8vw	figs-metonymy	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1		Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	15	wh8c	figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν	1		The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in [4:25](../04/25.md). Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	15	bbfd	figs-synecdoche	βασιλέων	1		The Lord is using **kings**, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	9	15	uq9b	figs-metaphor	υἱῶν&Ἰσραήλ	1		The Lord is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	9	15	uq9b	figs-metaphor	υἱῶν & Ἰσραήλ	1		The Lord is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	9	16	kty3	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	for my name	Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	17	s8ms	figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	And Ananias departed, and entered into the house	It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	17	my6m	translate-symaction	ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	having laid his hands on him	When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../09/02.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	9	17	q61x	figs-yousingular	σοι&ἤρχου&ἀναβλέψῃς	1		All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	9	17	q61x	figs-yousingular	σοι & ἤρχου & ἀναβλέψῃς	1		All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	9	17	cah9	figs-metaphor	Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1		**Brother** is a figurative title that Ananias is using for **Saul**. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	9	17	cxu4	figs-nominaladj	ὁ ὀφθείς σοι	1		Ananias is using the participle **having appeared**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	9	17	ptg0	figs-go	ᾗ ἤρχου	1		Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -1373,7 +1373,7 @@ ACT	9	19	rxfi	figs-activepassive	ἐνισχύθη	1		If your language does not
 ACT	9	20	rc49	figs-pronouns	ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The personal pronoun **he** refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 ACT	9	20	w65r	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 ACT	9	21	xid8	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες	1	all who were hearing	Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	9	21	a8j8	figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἀκούοντες&ὁ πορθήσας&τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους	1		Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	9	21	a8j8	figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἀκούοντες & ὁ πορθήσας & τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους	1		Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	9	21	f4fd	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς?	1	Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name?	The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	9	21	ctg3	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	this name	By **this name** the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	21	l82i	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1		Here, the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1381,18 +1381,18 @@ ACT	9	21	zuoi	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομ
 ACT	9	21	i512	figs-activepassive	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	9	21	pnrp	figs-synecdoche	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1		Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	9	22	r1np	figs-explicit	καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	was stirring up the Jews	Saul was not intentionally **stirring up the Jews**. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	9	23	cg9k	figs-idiom	ὡς&ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1		As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	9	23	nyh4	figs-activepassive	ὡς&ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	9	23	cg9k	figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1		As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	9	23	nyh4	figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	9	23	g74c	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	9	23	g6gw	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1		The pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	9	24	gnm1	figs-infostructure	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1		This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of **But** in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ACT	9	24	lv62	figs-activepassive	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	But their plan became known to Saul	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	9	24	cy9n	figs-explicit	παρετηροῦντο&τὰς πύλας&ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν	1	indeed they were watching the gates	The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	9	24	cy9n	figs-explicit	παρετηροῦντο & τὰς πύλας & ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν	1	indeed they were watching the gates	The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	24	b0gv	figs-metonymy	τὰς πύλας	1		Luke is using **the gates** to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	24	aezc	figs-merism	ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς	1		Luke is using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 ACT	9	25	lc8m	figs-explicit	οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his disciples	These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	26	e38m	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν	1	but they were all afraid of him	Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	9	27	abca	writing-pronouns	Βαρναβᾶς&ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ&ἐπαρρησιάσατο	1	told them	The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	9	27	abca	writing-pronouns	Βαρναβᾶς & ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ & ἐπαρρησιάσατο	1	told them	The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	9	27	n9f1	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus	Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Saul **had spoken boldly** with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	28	cgb1	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1		Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	9	28	m5rs	writing-pronouns	ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	he was with them	The pronoun **he** refers to Saul. The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1414,7 +1414,7 @@ ACT	9	32	m9sg	figs-hyperbole	διὰ πάντων	1	throughout the whole region
 ACT	9	32	ad7g	figs-idiom	κατελθεῖν	1	to come down	Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	9	32	tckc	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα	1		Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	9	32	g5c4	translate-names	Λύδδα	1	in Lydda	**Lydda** is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	9	33	hzd7		εὗρεν&ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	he found there a certain man	The word **found** does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
+ACT	9	33	hzd7		εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	he found there a certain man	The word **found** does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
 ACT	9	33	jnc4	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν	1	a certain man named Aeneas	Luke uses this sentence to introduce **Aeneas** as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	9	33	owf3	translate-names	Αἰνέαν	1		**Aeneas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	9	33	uj5f	writing-background	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	lying in a bed … who was paralyzed	In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1432,12 +1432,12 @@ ACT	9	36	gwr4	translate-names	Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη 
 ACT	9	36	z8la	figs-activepassive	λέγεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	9	36	q2rn	figs-metaphor	πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν	1	full of good works	Luke speaks of **Dorcas** as if she were a container that was **full** of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	9	37	mg72	figs-explicit	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	And it happened that in those days	The phrase **in those days** refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	9	37	y8sx	figs-explicit	λούσαντες&αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν	1	having washed her	This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	9	37	y8sx	figs-explicit	λούσαντες & αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν	1	having washed her	This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	37	znj4	figs-explicit	ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ	1	they laid her in an upper room	This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	37	lbrl	translate-unknown	ὑπερῴῳ	1		In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large, sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	9	38	qlp8	figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	9	38	pukn	figs-youdual	παρακαλοῦντες	1		Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, **urging** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-ACT	9	39	k1se	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς&Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς	1	to the upper room	Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	9	39	k1se	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς & Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς	1	to the upper room	Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	9	39	tdrr	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς	1		This first instance of **them** in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of **them** would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 ACT	9	39	me79	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι	1	all the widows	Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	9	39	piu7	figs-explicit	χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς	1	widows	It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these **coats and garments** to help these **widows** because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1445,7 +1445,7 @@ ACT	9	39	y6q5	figs-euphemism	μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα	1	while being with
 ACT	9	40	yp2u	translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα	1	put out all of them	Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	9	40	wr7h	figs-imperative	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1		This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah restores you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
 ACT	9	40	k28m	translate-symaction	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1		Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	9	41	r7n6	figs-explicit	δοὺς&αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	having given his hand to her, he raised her up	The implication is that Peter extended his **hand** to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	9	41	r7n6	figs-explicit	δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	having given his hand to her, he raised her up	The implication is that Peter extended his **hand** to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	9	41	b73s	figs-infostructure	τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας	1	the saints and the widows	These **saints** and **widows** were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ACT	9	41	ex8e	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἁγίους	1		Luke is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	9	42	nda9	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης	1	And this became known throughout all Joppa	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1492,10 +1492,10 @@ ACT	10	14	z7r5	figs-exclamations	μηδαμῶς	1	Not at all	**Not at all** is
 ACT	10	14	ewlu	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	10	14	p0bf	figs-doublet	κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1		The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	10	14	a2jj	figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean	The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	10	15	as42	figs-personification	φωνὴ πάλιν&πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	10	15	as42	figs-personification	φωνὴ πάλιν & πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	10	15	xs5s	figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	What God has cleansed	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	10	15	st9c	writing-pronouns	σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1		The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	10	16	rlr9	figs-explicit	τοῦτο&ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	10	16	rlr9	figs-explicit	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	10	16	ej9h	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	10	17	d4zi		ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν	1	Peter was very confused … about	Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
 ACT	10	17	n6da	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	behold	Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1509,9 +1509,9 @@ ACT	10	20	ndju	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1		Here the term **arising** means th
 ACT	10	20	ym1x	figs-explicit	κατάβηθι	1	go down	The implication is that Peter is to **go down** from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	10	20	wx4n	figs-explicit	πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	go with them. Do not hesitate	It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	10	20	j3iy	figs-explicit	μηδὲν διακρινόμενος	1		This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	10	22	rva1	figs-quotesinquotes	οἱ&εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT	10	22	i4zh	writing-pronouns	οἱ&εἶπαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	10	22	ue5z	figs-synecdoche	οἱ&εἶπαν	1		One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	10	22	rva1	figs-quotesinquotes	οἱ & εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT	10	22	i4zh	writing-pronouns	οἱ & εἶπαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	10	22	ue5z	figs-synecdoche	οἱ & εἶπαν	1		One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	10	22	wvl1	figs-doublet	φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	fearing God	The word **righteous** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	10	22	hrta	figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1		Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	10	22	hihl	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου	1		If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1520,7 +1520,7 @@ ACT	10	22	e15o	figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1		The messengers are using the term
 ACT	10	23	shs5	figs-explicit	εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν	1	he hosted them	The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	10	23	ycoi	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1		Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	10	23	t7cz	figs-metaphor	τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	some of the brothers who were from Joppa	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	10	24	c3s6		τῇ&ἐπαύριον	1	the following day	The **next day** means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
+ACT	10	24	c3s6		τῇ & ἐπαύριον	1	the following day	The **next day** means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
 ACT	10	25	b4pn	translate-symaction	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας	1	and falling down at his feet	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Cornelius did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	10	26	s7n5	figs-declarative	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι	1	Get up! I too am a man myself	Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ACT	10	27	f9x6	writing-pronouns	συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν	1		The pronoun **him** refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun **he** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1549,14 +1549,14 @@ ACT	10	31	xd0x	figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον	1		Here the word **before** is being u
 ACT	10	32	jjnn	figs-quotesinquotes	πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	10	32	ci31	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	summon Simon who is called Peter	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	10	32	u1t6	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ξενίζεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	10	32	jhzt	translate-textvariants	μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα&παρὰ θάλασσαν	1		Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ACT	10	33	p5ee	figs-yousingular	σέ&σύ&σοι	1	immediately	The word **you** is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	10	32	jhzt	translate-textvariants	μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα & παρὰ θάλασσαν	1		Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ACT	10	33	p5ee	figs-yousingular	σέ & σύ & σοι	1	immediately	The word **you** is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	10	33	ruf3	writing-politeness	σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος	1	and you did well in coming	This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	10	33	lzie	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		Cornelius is using the word **we** to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	10	33	ry21	figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	Cornelius is using the word **before**. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	10	33	xt4x	figs-activepassive	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	that you have been instructed by the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	10	33	jc88	translate-textvariants	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ACT	10	34	cyn8	figs-explicitinfo	ἀνοίξας&Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	And Peter opened his mouth and said	It might seem that the expression **opening his mouth … said** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT	10	34	cyn8	figs-explicitinfo	ἀνοίξας & Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	And Peter opened his mouth and said	It might seem that the expression **opening his mouth … said** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	10	34	iii7		προσωπολήμπτης	1	God is not one who shows partiality	Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
 ACT	10	34	ha31	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός	1	In truth	As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	10	35	b5cr		ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	fears	Here, **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
@@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ ACT	10	36	ht1z	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Peter is using the term **wor
 ACT	10	36	anlh	figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ	1		Peter is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	10	36	ok9b	figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	10	36	md1l		πάντων	1	he is Lord of all	The word **all** could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
-ACT	10	37	wecw	figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ&ῥῆμα	1		Peter is using the term **word** to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	10	37	wecw	figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ & ῥῆμα	1		Peter is using the term **word** to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	10	37	ch65	figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	throughout all Judea	Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	10	37	sq2i		μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης	1	after the baptism that John proclaimed	Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them”
 ACT	10	38	seli	figs-infostructure	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1		It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -1596,7 +1596,7 @@ ACT	10	43	y6d1	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	th
 ACT	10	44	cz7x	figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον	1	the Holy Spirit fell	Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/16.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
 ACT	10	44	wf7u	figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	all of those who were listening	While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also **listening** to his message, the word **all** refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	10	44	o839	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	10	45	j6wt	figs-nominaladj	οἱ&πιστοὶ	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit	Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	10	45	j6wt	figs-nominaladj	οἱ & πιστοὶ	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit	Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	10	45	qlpu	figs-metonymy	ἐκ περιτομῆς	1		Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify these **faithful** people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	10	45	g161	figs-activepassive	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	10	45	mqs8	figs-metaphor	ἐκκέχυται	1	was poured out	Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1608,19 +1608,19 @@ ACT	10	47	u5d5	figs-rquestion	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦ
 ACT	10	47	vuax	figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1		Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb **withhold** and the negative particle **not**. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	10	47	df24	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ὕδωρ	1		Peter is using **water**, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	10	47	kwv5	figs-activepassive	τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	10	48	l8ci	figs-explicit	προσέταξεν&αὐτοὺς&βαπτισθῆναι	1		The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	10	48	z4fh	figs-activepassive	προσέταξεν&αὐτοὺς&βαπτισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	10	48	l8ci	figs-explicit	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1		The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	10	48	z4fh	figs-activepassive	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	10	48	ax6x	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι	1	be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ	Here, **in the name** is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in [10:43](../10/43.md). See how you translated the similar expression in [2:48](../02/48.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	intro	hva5			0		# Acts 11 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”<br><br>Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “the Lord”<br><br>In verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius<br><br>In Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47.
 ACT	11	1	ab75	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	11	1	f1md	figs-metaphor	οἱ&ἀδελφοὶ	2	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	11	1	f1md	figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	2	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	11	1	w3rx	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	had received the word of God	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter, by using words, shared with Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	11	2	kb4m	figs-idiom	ἀνέβη&εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	came up to Jerusalem	Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	11	2	kb4m	figs-idiom	ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	came up to Jerusalem	Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	2	yar6	figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	those from the circumcision	As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely to have been strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	11	3	pcce	figs-quotations	λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς.	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	11	3	zmou	figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς	1		This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these **men**. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	3	ah7v	figs-metonymy	ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας	1	uncircumcised men	The phrase **men having foreskins** refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	11	4	aakb	figs-explicitinfo	ἀρξάμενος&Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς	1		Luke is using the word **beginning** to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT	11	4	aakb	figs-explicitinfo	ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς	1		Luke is using the word **beginning** to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	11	5	dtt5	figs-activepassive	καθιεμένην	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	6	lbh4	figs-explicit	καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky	From Peter’s response in [11:8](../11/08.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in [10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “… and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	7	gm0m	figs-personification	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1		Peter speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1635,8 +1635,8 @@ ACT	11	8	j0rv	figs-synecdoche	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέπ
 ACT	11	9	at0t	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “from heaven and told me that I must not make common what God had cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	11	9	b24j	figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1		If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	11	9	txbl	writing-pronouns	σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1		The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	11	10	xrq6	figs-explicit	τοῦτο&ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in [10:16](../10/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	11	10	s2ik	figs-activepassive	ἀνεσπάσθη&ἅπαντα	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	11	10	xrq6	figs-explicit	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in [10:16](../10/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	11	10	s2ik	figs-activepassive	ἀνεσπάσθη & ἅπαντα	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	11	ias8	figs-exclusive	ἦμεν	1	General Information:	The term **we** refers to Peter and the others in the house in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	11	11	b2qv	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς	1	behold	Peter is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on how soon after his vision ended these **three men** arrived. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “right then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	11	11	k44j		ἐξαυτῆς	1	right away	Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
@@ -1647,18 +1647,18 @@ ACT	11	12	w6ia	figs-explicit	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	into th
 ACT	11	13	mwzd	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		The term **us** refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	11	13	few6	figs-activepassive	Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	Simon, who is called Peter	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in [10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	14	rwpw	figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1		The angel is using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	11	14	fnjz	figs-yousingular	σὲ&σωθήσῃ σὺ&σου	1		All the instances of the words **you** and **your** in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	11	14	fnjz	figs-yousingular	σὲ & σωθήσῃ σὺ & σου	1		All the instances of the words **you** and **your** in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	11	14	p3gk	figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	14	hpr2	figs-metonymy	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	all your household	Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	11	15	a8jw	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν&τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν	1	as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them	Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT	11	15	a8jw	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν	1	as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them	Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	11	15	ak2p	figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning	Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/16.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	11	15	qdon	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	11	15	qy12	figs-exclusive	ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	General Information:	Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	11	15	th4m	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	in the beginning	By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	16	xd9t	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ῥήματος	1		Peter is using the term **word** to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	11	16	ett3	writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	11	16	wwnl	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς&βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to Chapter 1, and see how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	11	16	v116	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς&βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	11	16	wwnl	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to Chapter 1, and see how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	11	16	v116	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	17	pe42	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	11	17	y7ag	figs-explicit	τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν	1	the same gift	Peter is referring to the **gift** of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the gift of the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us when we believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	17	u3nu	figs-rquestion	ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God?	Peter is using the question form to convince his listeners that God wanted him to accept the Gentile believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1668,7 +1668,7 @@ ACT	11	18	xlpt	writing-pronouns	ἡσύχασαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers
 ACT	11	18	nr7g	figs-idiom	ἡσύχασαν	1	they became quiet	This is an idiom that means they no longer argued. Alternate translation: “they no longer argued with Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	18	z3fy	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν	1	God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **repentance** and **life**, you could express the same idea in other ways. Here the term **life** refers to everlasting life. Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles as well to repent and live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	11	19	bwb8	writing-newevent	οὖν	1	Then	Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	11	19	whm6	figs-activepassive	οἱ&διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ	1	those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the **persecution** that Luke describes in [8:1](../08/01.md), which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	11	19	whm6	figs-activepassive	οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ	1	those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the **persecution** that Luke describes in [8:1](../08/01.md), which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	19	w3wq	translate-names	Φοινίκης	1		The word **Phoenicia** is the name of a region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	11	19	ig50	translate-names	Κύπρου	1		The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in [4:36](../04/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	11	19	zbml	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1679,13 +1679,13 @@ ACT	11	20	tz12	translate-names	Κυρηναῖοι	1		The word **Cyrenians** is
 ACT	11	20	mww9	figs-explicit	τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	and spoke also to Greeks	Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls **Greeks** were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	21	ebxq	writing-politeness	χεὶρ Κυρίου	1		In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says **the Lord**. In [4:29–30](../04/29.md), the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	11	21	aj5g	figs-metonymy	χεὶρ	1	The hand of the Lord was with them	Here, the **hand** represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	11	21	bfm5	figs-idiom	ἦν&μετ’ αὐτῶν	1		When Luke says that God **was with** the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	11	21	bfm5	figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτῶν	1		When Luke says that God **was with** the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	21	n9pq	figs-metaphor	ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	turned to the Lord	Luke speaks of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically **turned to the Lord**. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	11	21	qcn3	writing-politeness	ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1		In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	11	22	i7vs	figs-explicitinfo	ἠκούσθη&ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1	the ears of the church	In your language, the expression **was heard in the ears** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT	11	22	i7vs	figs-explicitinfo	ἠκούσθη & ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1	the ears of the church	In your language, the expression **was heard in the ears** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	11	22	kcb8	figs-activepassive	ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “The church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	22	rdhr	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	11	22	oa8h	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν&ἐξαπέστειλαν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	11	22	oa8h	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & ἐξαπέστειλαν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	11	23	b7w7	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	saw the grace that is of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	11	23	bz6w	figs-metonymy	τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας	1	with purpose of heart	Here the **heart** represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	11	24	b9a8	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1696,43 +1696,43 @@ ACT	11	24	e57t	figs-metonymy	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	a considerable crowd was added
 ACT	11	25	yhl6	writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθεν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	11	26	qzml	writing-pronouns	εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	11	26	z36c		ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year”
-ACT	11	26	w4dz	figs-activepassive	αὐτοῖς&συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	they were gathered together with the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	11	26	x8gx	figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι&πρώτως&τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people first called the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	11	26	w4dz	figs-activepassive	αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	they were gathered together with the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	11	26	x8gx	figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι & πρώτως & τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people first called the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	11	26	w0sz	translate-names	Χριστιανούς	1		The word **Christians** is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	11	26	r6sl		πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ	1	first in Antioch	Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
 ACT	11	27	h6zw	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	11	27	kep8	figs-idiom	ἐν ταύταις&ταῖς ἡμέραις	1		Luke is using the word **days** to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	11	27	kep8	figs-idiom	ἐν ταύταις & ταῖς ἡμέραις	1		Luke is using the word **days** to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	27	d8bb	figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	came down from Jerusalem to Antioch	Luke says that these prophets **came down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	28	q3tl	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	and indicated by the Spirit that	Here, **having arisen** means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	11	28	w18f	figs-hyperbole	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην	1		The term **whole** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	11	28	pd2t	figs-explicit	τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	over the whole world	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **world**, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	28	jmc5	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου	1	in the days of Claudius	The expression **upon Claudius** refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	11	28	fjyk	translate-names	Κλαυδίου	1		The word **Claudius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	11	29	rk9z	figs-explicit	τῶν&μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν&πέμψαι	1	just as anyone prospered	The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	11	29	up7a	figs-metaphor	τοῖς&ἀδελφοῖς	1	to the brothers living in Judea	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	11	29	rk9z	figs-explicit	τῶν & μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν & πέμψαι	1	just as anyone prospered	The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	11	29	up7a	figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς	1	to the brothers living in Judea	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	11	30	taw4	figs-explicit	πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους	1		Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **elders** who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	11	30	l8i8	figs-synecdoche	διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	by the hand of Barnabas and Saul	Here, the **hand**, one part of a person, represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take it to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	11	30	rq2w		διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1		If you retain the figurative word **hand** in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul”
 ACT	12	intro	f66j			0		# Acts 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25-30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod.
 ACT	12	1	ti1y	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	12	1	f2gr	figs-explicit	κατ’ ἐκεῖνον&τὸν καιρὸν	1	about that time	The phrase **that time** implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	12	1	zy6y	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλεν&τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	laid hands on	The expression **laid on hands** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. See how you translated it in [5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	12	1	og4q	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλεν&τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1		Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest **some from the church**. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	12	2	r1zv	figs-synecdoche	ἀνεῖλεν&Ἰάκωβον	1	he killed James	It was probably not Herod himself who **killed James**. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to execute James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	12	1	f2gr	figs-explicit	κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν	1	about that time	The phrase **that time** implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	12	1	zy6y	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	laid hands on	The expression **laid on hands** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. See how you translated it in [5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	12	1	og4q	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1		Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest **some from the church**. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	12	2	r1zv	figs-synecdoche	ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον	1	he killed James	It was probably not Herod himself who **killed James**. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to execute James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	12	3	v4ag	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	12	3	ly66	translate-names	ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	the days of unleavened bread	The phrase **Unleavened Bread** is the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. If your readers would not be familiar with the food known as “bread” or the substance known as “leaven,” you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “the days of Special Food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	12	4	tza2	writing-pronouns	ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν	1		The pronouns **whom** refers to Peter, and the pronoun **he** refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	12	4	pps1	translate-unknown	τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν	1	to four squads of soldiers	These **quaternions** were groups of four **soldiers** each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	12	4	i23a	figs-idiom	βουλόμενος&ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	he was intending to bring him out to the people	The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	12	5	xpcx	figs-activepassive	ὁ&Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	12	5	f8qc	figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ&ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	12	4	i23a	figs-idiom	βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	he was intending to bring him out to the people	The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	12	5	xpcx	figs-activepassive	ὁ & Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	12	5	f8qc	figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	12	6	km83	figs-explicit	προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν	1	Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night	Here, the word translated **to bring him out** is slightly different from the word translated that same way in [12:4](../12/04.md). It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	12	6	g2bh	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν	1	bound with two chains	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	12	7	i7g3	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος	1	behold	Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this **angel** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	12	9	wqct	figs-quotations	οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; ἐδόκει δὲ	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’ He was thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	12	9	p9ty	figs-activepassive	τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου	1	what is done by the angel is real	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the angel was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	12	9	s9j0	figs-quotations	ἐδόκει&ὅραμα βλέπειν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT	12	10	r7gy	figs-explicit	διελθόντες&πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	But when they had passed by the first guard and the second	The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	12	9	s9j0	figs-quotations	ἐδόκει & ὅραμα βλέπειν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT	12	10	r7gy	figs-explicit	διελθόντες & πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	But when they had passed by the first guard and the second	The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	12	10	e36s	figs-ellipsis	καὶ δευτέραν	1	and the second	The word **guard** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	12	11	wlb6	figs-idiom	ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν	1	And when Peter had come to himself	The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	12	11	ue4k	figs-metonymy	χειρὸς	1	delivered me from the hand of Herod	Here, **hand** represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1740,11 +1740,11 @@ ACT	12	11	p739	figs-abstractnouns	πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας το
 ACT	12	11	sl07	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		Luke is likely using the phrase **the Jewish people** to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	12	12	ux4v	figs-activepassive	τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου	1	of John, who was called Mark	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	12	12	c1ur	figs-nominaladj	ἱκανοὶ	1		Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	12	13	pfn7	translate-unknown	κρούσαντος&αὐτοῦ	1	when he knocked	To “knock” at a door means to tap or hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT	12	13	pfn7	translate-unknown	κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	when he knocked	To “knock” at a door means to tap or hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	12	13	c634	translate-unknown	τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	at the door of the gate	Here, the word **gate** probably describes an entrance from the street to a courtyard in front of the house. If houses in your culture have a similar entrance, in your translation you could use the name for it in your language. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	12	13	vbjj	translate-names	Ῥόδη	1		The word **Rhoda** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	12	14	y2ff	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	from joy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	12	15	j2kx	writing-pronouns	οἱ&εἶπαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	12	15	j2kx	writing-pronouns	οἱ & εἶπαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	12	15	qa8m	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ	1	It is his angel	Some Jews believed in guardian angels, and the people inside thehouse may have thought that Peter’s **angel** had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you saw was Peter’s guardian angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	12	16	wwg1	figs-synecdoche	ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1		While the word **they** refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	12	17	fr3y	figs-explicit	Ἰακώβῳ	1		Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by **James**, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1757,26 +1757,26 @@ ACT	12	19	blx5	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1		The pronoun **him** refers to Pe
 ACT	12	19	pz6v	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν	1	And Herod, having searched for him	It was probably not Herod himself who **searched for** Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	12	19	br16	figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	And having gone down	Luke speaks of Herod **having gone down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	12	20	aip7	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	12	20	l5gl	writing-pronouns	ἦν&θυμομαχῶν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	12	20	osyv	translate-names	Τυρίοις&Σιδωνίοις	1		**Tyrians** is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and **Sidonians** is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	12	20	mpgk	figs-go	ὁμοθυμαδὸν&παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-ACT	12	20	gxs4	figs-synecdoche	ὁμοθυμαδὸν&παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	they went to him together	It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	12	20	oln5		ὁμοθυμαδὸν&παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The word **unanimously** indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”
+ACT	12	20	l5gl	writing-pronouns	ἦν & θυμομαχῶν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	12	20	osyv	translate-names	Τυρίοις & Σιδωνίοις	1		**Tyrians** is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and **Sidonians** is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	12	20	mpgk	figs-go	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+ACT	12	20	gxs4	figs-synecdoche	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	they went to him together	It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	12	20	oln5		ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The word **unanimously** indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”
 ACT	12	20	qsg4	translate-names	Βλάστον	1	Blastus	The word **Blastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	12	20	qqj9	translate-unknown	τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως	1		This phrase indicates that **Blastus** was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	12	20	l5r1	figs-abstractnouns	ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην	1	they asked for peace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	12	20	j253	figs-activepassive	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	their food for their country was from the king’s country	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	12	20	dy51	figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	their food	The implication is that Herod had stopped supplying food to the people of Tyre and Sidon because he was angry with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply, and Herod had cut off that supply because he was angry with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	12	21	e3w9	figs-explicit	τακτῇ&ἡμέρᾳ	1	on a set day	The implication is that this was the **day** on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	12	21	e3w9	figs-explicit	τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ	1	on a set day	The implication is that this was the **day** on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	12	21	kv7g	translate-symaction	ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	in royal clothing	Putting on this **royal clothing**, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the **throne** were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	12	21	g6ir		καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	sitting on the throne	The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
 ACT	12	22	feyy	figs-synecdoche	Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου	1		The people are using one part of Herod, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	12	23	iw57	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	he did not give the glory to God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ACT	12	23	d419	figs-activepassive	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	becoming worm-eaten, he died	The word translated **worm-eaten** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word **worm-eaten** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	12	23	pjbw	figs-explicit	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1		It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel **struck** Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word **struck** is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	12	24	sv8l	figs-hendiadys	ὁ&λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1		Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The verb **being multiplied** tells in what way the word of God was **increasing**, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-ACT	12	24	m1sw	figs-personification	ὁ&λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	the word of God increased and was multiplied	Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ACT	12	24	wn8m	figs-metonymy	ὁ&λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	12	24	sv8l	figs-hendiadys	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1		Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The verb **being multiplied** tells in what way the word of God was **increasing**, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT	12	24	m1sw	figs-personification	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	the word of God increased and was multiplied	Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	12	24	wn8m	figs-metonymy	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	12	24	iwr1	figs-activepassive	ἐπληθύνετο	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	12	25	j2un	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1		Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	12	25	rt9o	figs-explicit	Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1		This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they **returned** to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1791,14 +1791,14 @@ ACT	13	1	ccel	translate-names	Μαναήν	1		The word **Manaen** is the name of
 ACT	13	1	o8jb	translate-names	Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος	1		The word **Lucius** is the name of a man. The word **Cyrenian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	13	1	u48c	translate-unknown	σύντροφος	1	one brought up with Herod the tetrarch	In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the **foster brother** of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	13	1	hxh6	translate-unknown	Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου	1		In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. **Herod the tetrarch** ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in Chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	13	2	m70r	figs-idiom	λειτουργούντων&αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		The expression **ministering to** means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	13	2	m70r	figs-idiom	λειτουργούντων & αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		The expression **ministering to** means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	2	kox1	writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	13	2	ifb9		ἀφορίσατε	1	Set apart	Alternate translation: “Set apart”
 ACT	13	2	j6ym	figs-extrainfo	εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς.	1		The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the **work** of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in Chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ACT	13	3	l0cj	writing-pronouns	νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν	1		The pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **them** refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase **having fasted and prayed** refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	3	ku45	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς	1	laid their hands on them	The believers in Antioch **laid their hands** on Barnabas and Saul as a symbolic action to show that they were sending them on their mission with the blessing and support of the whole church and that they were entrusting them to God’s care. Alternate translation: “placed their hands on them as a sign of blessing and support and as a way of entrusting them to God’s care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	13	3	p1us	figs-explicit	ἀπέλυσαν	1	they sent them off	While in this context the term **released** basically means “sent off,” the implication is that the believers in Antioch were freeing Barnabas and Saul of all of their responsibilities in the church so that they could go on the mission on which the Holy Spirit was sending them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gave them the freedom to go on their new mission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	13	4	abcj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ&ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	they, having been sent out	The pronoun **they** refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	13	4	abcj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	they, having been sent out	The pronoun **they** refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	4	pisj	figs-activepassive	ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had sent them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	13	4	iyh8	figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	went down	Luke says that Barnabas and Saul **went down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	4	d1q5	translate-names	Σελεύκιαν	1	Seleucia	The word **Seleucia** is the name of a city that is on the seacoast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ ACT	13	22	bsp6	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς 
 ACT	13	22	akg6	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου	1		In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel [13:14](../1sa/13/14.md) and Psalm [89:20](../psa/089/020.md).) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	13	22	dbu5	figs-idiom	εὗρον	1	I have found	While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word **found** does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	22	mp53	figs-idiom	ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου	1	a man according to my heart	This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	13	23	xj5a	figs-infostructure	τούτου&ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	From the descendants of this one	This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ACT	13	23	xj5a	figs-infostructure	τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	From the descendants of this one	This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ACT	13	23	vnz7	figs-metaphor	τοῦ σπέρματος	1		The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	23	l50d	writing-pronouns	τούτου	1		The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	23	kc76	figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	brought to Israel	Here, **Israel** refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1893,8 +1893,8 @@ ACT	13	26	v6r3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	about
 ACT	13	27	s64d	writing-pronouns	τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1		The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	27	psk5	figs-explicit	τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	did not recognize this one	Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	13	27	ri1f	figs-metonymy	τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν	1	the voices of the prophets	Paul is using the word **voices** to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	13	27	m4tz	figs-activepassive	τὰς&ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	that are read	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	13	27	i6jo	figs-explicit	τὰς&ἀναγινωσκομένας	2		Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of **the prophets** on each **Sabbath** in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	13	27	m4tz	figs-activepassive	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	that are read	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	13	27	i6jo	figs-explicit	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	2		Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of **the prophets** on each **Sabbath** in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	13	28	v3hw	writing-pronouns	ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν	1	General Information:	Here the word **they** refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	28	iect	figs-activepassive	ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	13	29	sq1j	figs-activepassive	πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα	1	And when they had completed all that had been written about him	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets had written about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1915,17 +1915,17 @@ ACT	13	33	dy6w	translate-textvariants	τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	for
 ACT	13	33	t176	figs-metaphor	τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1		If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	33	d95n	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	by raising up Jesus	Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	33	y3tz	figs-activepassive	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	As it is also written in the second Psalm	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	13	33	h9ir	translate-ordinal	τῷ ψαλμῷ&τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	the second Psalm	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+ACT	13	33	h9ir	translate-ordinal	τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	the second Psalm	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 ACT	13	33	ljnl	figs-quotemarks	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1		Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Psalm 2 as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	13	33	c1pn	figs-parallelism	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “You are my Son, yes, today I have fathered you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ACT	13	33	tla1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός&γεγέννηκά σε	1	Son … I have fathered you	**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-ACT	13	34	zhjq	writing-pronouns	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν&εἴρηκεν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to God, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus …God has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	13	33	tla1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε	1	Son … I have fathered you	**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+ACT	13	34	zhjq	writing-pronouns	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν & εἴρηκεν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to God, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus …God has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	34	je9s	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν	1		As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “he brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	34	h3nj	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	13	34	ipb9	figs-quotemarks	δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά	1		This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and ultimately the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	13	34	q3kq	figs-nominaladj	τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά	1	the holy and sure blessings	Paul is using the adjectives **holy** and **trustworthy** as nouns. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the trustworthy promises that God made to David as the ancestor of the Holy One” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	13	35	r1ev	figs-explicit	ἐν ἑτέρῳ	1	On account of this he also says in another place	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **another place**, he means another place in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in another place in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	13	35	gl8s	writing-pronouns	καὶ&λέγει	1	he also says	Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun **he** refers to God, as in [13:34](../13/34.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	13	35	gl8s	writing-pronouns	καὶ & λέγει	1	he also says	Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun **he** refers to God, as in [13:34](../13/34.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	35	d4px	figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1		The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	13	35	jvpy	figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1		This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ACT	13	35	hvt8	figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	You will not allow your Holy One to see decay	Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1935,11 +1935,11 @@ ACT	13	36	nwy9	figs-activepassive	προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατ
 ACT	13	36	f5s2	figs-metaphor	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1		Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	36	la5s	figs-idiom	εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	saw decay	Paul is using the word **saw** to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	36	okfp	figs-explicit	διαφθοράν	1		Here, the term **decay** refers to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	13	37	bmw3	writing-pronouns	ὃν&ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	But he whom	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	13	37	bmw3	writing-pronouns	ὃν & ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	But he whom	The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	37	n9pl	figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	God raised up	The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	37	j52x	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	did not see decay	Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	37	g3ie	figs-explicit	διαφθοράν	1		The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	13	38	yg35	figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν&ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	let it be known to you	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+ACT	13	38	yg35	figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	let it be known to you	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	13	38	f917	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1		This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	38	qy18	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word **brothers** as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	38	an8q	writing-pronouns	τούτου	1		The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1954,15 +1954,15 @@ ACT	13	40	osou	figs-personification	μὴ ἐπέλθῃ	1		Paul is speaking of
 ACT	13	41	kk1j	figs-quotemarks	ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1		This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	13	41	jveu	figs-metonymy	ἴδετε	1		Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	13	41	xcdg	figs-activepassive	ἀφανίσθητε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	13	41	dvn1	figs-metonymy	ἔργον ἐργάζομαι&ἔργον	1	am doing a work	God is using the word **work** to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	13	41	dvn1	figs-metonymy	ἔργον ἐργάζομαι & ἔργον	1	am doing a work	God is using the word **work** to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	13	41	nm2q	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν	1	in your days	God is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	42	ax8v	writing-pronouns	ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν	1	And as they were leaving	Here the pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	42	f3sw	writing-pronouns	παρεκάλουν	1	they begged them	Here the pronoun **they** refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	42	w9h6	figs-activepassive	λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	13	42	y4p9	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	these same words	Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	13	43	a58z	figs-activepassive	λυθείσης&τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	And when the synagogue meeting had ended	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the synagogue meeting ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	13	43	a58z	figs-activepassive	λυθείσης & τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	And when the synagogue meeting had ended	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the synagogue meeting ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	13	43	sws7	translate-unknown	προσηλύτων	1	proselytes	These **proselytes** were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “converts to Judaism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	13	43	mygk	figs-idiom	ἠκολούθησαν&τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ	1		In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	13	43	mygk	figs-idiom	ἠκολούθησαν & τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ	1		In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	43	fv15	figs-abstractnouns	προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to continue in the grace of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	13	44	vq3y	figs-metonymy	σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις	1	almost the whole city was gathered together	The **city** represents the people in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	13	44	h40t	figs-activepassive	συνήχθη	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1972,8 +1972,8 @@ ACT	13	45	j4zq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Luke is using
 ACT	13	45	qrh2	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	they were filled with jealousy	For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	45	m1an	figs-activepassive	τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις	1	the things that were said by Paul	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	13	46	d08v	figs-activepassive	λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	13	46	jn55	figs-metonymy	ὑμῖν&ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you	Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	13	46	as6q	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν&πρῶτον	1	It was necessary for	Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people, and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people, and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	13	46	jn55	figs-metonymy	ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you	Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	13	46	as6q	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν & πρῶτον	1	It was necessary for	Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people, and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people, and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	13	46	lly5	figs-metaphor	ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν	1	Since you reject it	Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	46	ms36	figs-irony	οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς	1	judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life	Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you judge yourselves not worthy of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 ACT	13	46	kzm1	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Paul and Barnabas are using the term **behold** to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1983,13 +1983,13 @@ ACT	13	47	tx94	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean th
 ACT	13	47	xbiw	figs-quotemarks	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1		This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	13	47	v8au	figs-simile	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς	1	as a light	Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a **light** that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 ACT	13	47	za1q	figs-yousingular	σε	1		The word **you** is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ACT	13	47	t5sp	figs-abstractnouns	εἶναί&εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	13	47	t5sp	figs-abstractnouns	εἶναί & εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	13	47	ismw	figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1		This phrase is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	48	e9ag	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	glorified the word of the Lord	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	13	48	jct2	figs-activepassive	τεταγμένοι	1	as many as were appointed to eternal life	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	13	49	qh9z	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	13	49	fpkr	figs-activepassive	διεφέρετο&ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	13	50	u8rm	figs-synecdoche	οἱ&Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	13	49	fpkr	figs-activepassive	διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	13	50	u8rm	figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	13	50	ef21	figs-metaphor	παρώτρυναν	1		Luke says that the Jewish leaders **stirred up** these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	13	50	f5yd		τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας	1		Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue”
 ACT	13	50	wmm5	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πρώτους	1	the leading men	Luke is using the adjective **principal** as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word **ones** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -1998,12 +1998,12 @@ ACT	13	50	cq9h	figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν 
 ACT	13	50	kzzk	figs-metonymy	τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1		Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia by association with the way that it had **boundaries** and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	13	51	abco	writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	But when they had shaken off	The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	13	51	xi1z	translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them	This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	13	52	dp5k	figs-explicit	οἵ&μαθηταὶ	1	the disciples	Here, **the disciples** implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	13	52	dp5k	figs-explicit	οἵ & μαθηταὶ	1	the disciples	Here, **the disciples** implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	13	52	hhgj	figs-metaphor	ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1		Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that **joy** and **the Holy Spirit** had **filled**. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	14	intro	rsg2			0		# Acts 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.<br>- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.<br>- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “the word of his grace”<br><br>The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>### Zeus and Hermes<br><br>In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”<br><br>Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.
 ACT	14	1	hk1z	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that Iconium	Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	14	1	f4sq	figs-explicit	λαλῆσαι	1	spoke in such a way	It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	14	2	wc4x		οἱ&ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews who were disobedient	Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
+ACT	14	2	wc4x		οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews who were disobedient	Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
 ACT	14	2	n2pp	figs-metaphor	ἐπήγειραν	1	stirred up the souls of the Gentiles	Luke says that these Jews**stirred up** the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	14	2	k8mv	figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	the souls	Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their **souls**, to mean all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	14	2	fu13	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2013,18 +2013,18 @@ ACT	14	3	f2xh	figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ	1	who is testifying to the word of h
 ACT	14	3	wcn5	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	to the word of his grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	14	3	c2cv	figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands	The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	14	3	p9iq	figs-metonymy	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	by their hands	Here, **hands** represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	14	4	btu3	figs-activepassive	ἐσχίσθη&τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	the population of the city was divided	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	14	4	btu3	figs-activepassive	ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	the population of the city was divided	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	14	4	q1xc	figs-ellipsis	σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	with the apostles	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	14	5	q6g2	figs-hendiadys	ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς	1	to mistreat and stone them	Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **stone** tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to **mistreat** Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “to put them to death by stoning them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	14	6	tpl1	translate-names	τῆς Λυκαονίας	1	of Lycaonia	The word **Lycaonia** is the name of a district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	14	6	tl4q	translate-names	Δέρβην	1	Derbe	The word**Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	14	8	wb5k	writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ&ἐκάθητο	1	a certain man sat	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT	14	8	kz7d	figs-metonymy	ἀδύνατος&τοῖς ποσὶν	1	powerless in his feet	Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	14	8	wb5k	writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο	1	a certain man sat	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	14	8	kz7d	figs-metonymy	ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν	1	powerless in his feet	Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	14	8	tca1	figs-metonymy	χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	lame from the womb of his mother	Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lame from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	14	9	di49	figs-pronouns	οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν	1	He looked intently at him	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 ACT	14	9	xak4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	he has faith to be saved	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	14	9	uwov	figs-activepassive	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean **healed**.) Alternate translation: “he could trust Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	14	10	i2kz	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν&ἥλατο	1		The first instance of the pronoun **He** refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	14	10	i2kz	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & ἥλατο	1		The first instance of the pronoun **He** refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	14	10	tect	figs-imperative	ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός	1		This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
 ACT	14	10	sagd	figs-explicitinfo	ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός!	1		It might seem that the expression **Arise upon your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	14	10	v1kz	figs-explicit	ἥλατο	1	he jumped up	The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2054,24 +2054,24 @@ ACT	14	15	lw9o	figs-merism	ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, κ
 ACT	14	16	vpt5	figs-metaphor	πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	to go their own ways	This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	14	17	kig8	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν	1	he did not leave himself without witness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	14	17	c1se	figs-explicitinfo	οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς	1		It might seem that the expression **rains from the sky** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “providing rain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-ACT	14	17	ps9z	figs-synecdoche	ἐμπιπλῶν&τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	filling your hearts with food and gladness	Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, meaning their desires, to mean their entire beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	14	17	ps9z	figs-synecdoche	ἐμπιπλῶν & τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	filling your hearts with food and gladness	Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, meaning their desires, to mean their entire beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	14	17	en5y	figs-hendiadys	τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **gladness** tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	14	19	wmc2	figs-explicit	πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	persuaded the crowds	It may be helpful to state explicitly what they **persuaded the crowds** to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn violently against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	14	20	aqx3	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&εἰσῆλθεν&ἐξῆλθεν	1	he entered into the city	The pronouns **him** and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	14	20	aqx3	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & εἰσῆλθεν & ἐξῆλθεν	1	he entered into the city	The pronouns **him** and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	14	21	lint	figs-nominaladj	μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς	1		Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	14	22	ek9l	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	They were strengthening the souls of the disciples	Luke is using one part of the disciples, their **souls**, to represent their entire beings as believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	14	22	zkd2	figs-abstractnouns	παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	and encouraging them to continue in the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	14	22	d9ic	figs-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.”	You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	14	22	ci6q	figs-abstractnouns	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	14	22	wu1c	figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is necessary for us to enter	By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and the believers to whom they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	14	23	pk5l	writing-pronouns	χειροτονήσαντες&παρέθεντο&πεπιστεύκεισαν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	14	23	pk5l	writing-pronouns	χειροτονήσαντες & παρέθεντο & πεπιστεύκεισαν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	14	23	mqp9		κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν	1	And when they had appointed for them elders in every church	Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers”
 ACT	14	23	n81l	writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	14	25	t513	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	And when they had spoken the word in Perga	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	14	25	h8sh	figs-idiom	κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν	1	they went down to Attalia	Luke says that Paul and Barnabas **went down** to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	14	26	f2cg	figs-activepassive	ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	where they had been commended to the grace of God	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	14	26	p2gd	figs-abstractnouns	ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had asked God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	14	27	vcd3	writing-pronouns	ἀνήγγελλον&αὐτῶν&ἤνοιξεν	1		The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun **he** refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	14	27	vcd3	writing-pronouns	ἀνήγγελλον & αὐτῶν & ἤνοιξεν	1		The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun **he** refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	14	27	qcl8	figs-idiom	ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν	1		In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God **had done** something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership **with** God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do by working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	14	27	vymy	figs-possession	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1		Here, the possessive form describes not a **door** consisting of **faith** but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ACT	14	27	b4id	figs-metaphor	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles	Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2085,9 +2085,9 @@ ACT	15	1	pm8h	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε	1	Unless
 ACT	15	1	lwbi	figs-activepassive	οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	2	abcr	figs-litotes	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	not a little dispute and debate	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	15	2	f9nd	figs-doublet	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως	1	not a little dispute and debate	The terms **dispute** and **debate** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	15	2	w6tc	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτοὺς&ἔταξαν&ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	15	2	ek6a	figs-idiom	ἀναβαίνειν&εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	to go up … in Jerusalem	Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	15	3	av5y	figs-activepassive	οἱ&προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	15	2	w6tc	writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτοὺς & ἔταξαν & ἐξ αὐτῶν	1		The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	15	2	ek6a	figs-idiom	ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	to go up … in Jerusalem	Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	15	3	av5y	figs-activepassive	οἱ & προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	3	aia5	figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	who had been sent by the church	Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	3	rk37	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	announcing the conversion of the Gentiles	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **conversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how some of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	15	3	nje7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	they brought great joy to all the brothers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2098,7 +2098,7 @@ ACT	15	4	jblr	figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀπο
 ACT	15	4	a2x1	figs-idiom	ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	with them	See how you translated this same expression in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	15	5	zcv0		πεπιστευκότες	1		Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus”
 ACT	15	5	crr7	translate-symaction	ἐξανέστησαν	1		These believers **stood up** to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	15	5	efe5	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς&παραγγέλλειν	1		Both instances of the pronoun **them** refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in [15:3](../15/03.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	15	5	efe5	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & παραγγέλλειν	1		Both instances of the pronoun **them** refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in [15:3](../15/03.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	15	6	gqt1	figs-activepassive	συνήχθησάν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	6	ugu6	figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν περὶ	1	to see about this matter	Here the phrase **to see about** is an idiom that means “to consider.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	15	6	vcsc	figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2106,7 +2106,7 @@ ACT	15	7	zhco	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς Πέτρος	1		Peter stood u
 ACT	15	7	c2q7	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	15	7	s6ap	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1		This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	15	7	a6q9	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	15	7	wct8	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς&ὑμῖν	1		Both occurrences of **you** are plural since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	15	7	wct8	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν	1		Both occurrences of **you** are plural since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	15	7	hk4g	writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1		For emphasis, Peter is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	15	7	ftl9	figs-idiom	ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων	1		Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	15	7	s3wb	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	by my mouth	Peter is using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2121,7 +2121,7 @@ ACT	15	9	ase1	figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρ
 ACT	15	9	yi8r	figs-metonymy	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1		Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	10	rfr4		νῦν οὖν τί	1	Now	**Now** in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me, therefore: Why”
 ACT	15	10	zaz6	figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι?	1	why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear?	Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	15	10	ha45	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμεῖς	1		Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	15	10	ha45	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς	1		Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	15	10	n2bv		τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν	1		Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
 ACT	15	10	qpyd	figs-metaphor	ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι	1		Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	15	10	bdfu		τὸν τράχηλον	1		Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks”
@@ -2142,14 +2142,14 @@ ACT	15	14	pnr9	figs-metonymy	λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	for
 ACT	15	15	am6y	figs-metonymy	οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν	1	this agrees with the words of the prophets	James is using the term **words** to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	15	j4f5	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	just as it is written	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	16	m3lq	figs-quotemarks	μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω	1		See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ACT	15	16	h9um	writing-pronouns	ἀναστρέψω&ἀνοικοδομήσω&ἀνοικοδομήσω	1		The pronoun **I** refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	15	16	h9um	writing-pronouns	ἀναστρέψω & ἀνοικοδομήσω & ἀνοικοδομήσω	1		The pronoun **I** refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	15	16	wqi6	figs-metaphor	ἀναστρέψω	1		God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	15	16	fhdr	figs-parallelism	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ACT	15	16	f5wf	figs-metaphor	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it	God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	15	16	u0r6	figs-activepassive	τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	17	hkw1	figs-gendernotations	κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	remnant of men	Although the term **men** is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ACT	15	17	pe4l	figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν&τὸν Κύριον	1	may seek the Lord	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-ACT	15	17	sm79	figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν&τὸν Κύριον	1	the remnant of men may seek the Lord	God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	15	17	pe4l	figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	may seek the Lord	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+ACT	15	17	sm79	figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	the remnant of men may seek the Lord	God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	15	17	s6de	figs-explicitinfo	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1		It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	15	17	tu21	figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	17	c8gm	figs-metonymy	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	my name	See how you translated the similar expression in [15:14](../15/14.md). (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2164,7 +2164,7 @@ ACT	15	20	j2rl	figs-explicit	τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵμα
 ACT	15	20	brc2	figs-nominaladj	καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1		James is using the adjective **strangled** as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	15	20	h27f	figs-metonymy	τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1		James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	21	si1h	figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath	James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshiping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	15	21	zd7t	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς&ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει&ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	Moses	James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	15	21	zd7t	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς & ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει & ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	Moses	James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	21	wp1s	figs-activepassive	ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	21	xg5n	figs-explicit	κατὰ πόλιν	1	in every city	The expression **by city** means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	15	22	hp6j	figs-metonymy	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	the whole church	Here the word **church** describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2175,8 +2175,8 @@ ACT	15	22	s6d8	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1		Luke is using the t
 ACT	15	23	k6cq	figs-metonymy	γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν	1		Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** to mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	23	xz3f	figs-youdual	χειρὸς αὐτῶν	1		Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
 ACT	15	23	e4g2		οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν	1	The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings	This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
-ACT	15	23	kp51	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὶ&ἀδελφοῖς	1	brothers … brothers	The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	15	24	g8m9	figs-exclusive	ἠκούσαμεν&ἡμῶν&οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1		Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	15	23	kp51	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὶ & ἀδελφοῖς	1	brothers … brothers	The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	15	24	g8m9	figs-exclusive	ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμῶν & οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1		Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	15	24	p1tl	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	that certain ones	The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word **some** refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	15	24	hbw5	figs-metonymy	λόγοις	1		The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	24	bxq8	figs-synecdoche	ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls	The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to whom they are writing, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2186,13 +2186,13 @@ ACT	15	26	dinn	figs-metaphor	παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐ
 ACT	15	26	t7vw	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	27	y972	figs-nominaladj	ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά	1		The letter is using the adjective **same** as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds **thing** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	15	27	xw8l	figs-explicit	διὰ λόγου	1	they are reporting to you the same thing in words	The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	15	28	l9z6	figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον&βάρος	1	to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things	The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	15	28	l9z6	figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον & βάρος	1	to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things	The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	15	28	bx90	figs-activepassive	μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	29	nt7s	figs-nominaladj	εἰδωλοθύτων	1	things sacrificed to idols	The letter is using the adjective **sacrificed**, with the qualifier **to idols**, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	15	29	vcc6	figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	blood	See how you translated **blood** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	15	29	rt55	figs-nominaladj	πνικτῶν	1	things strangled	See how you translated **the strangled** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	15	29	buy9	figs-imperative	ἔρρωσθε	1	Farewell	This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT	15	30	usz6	figs-activepassive	οἱ&ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον	1	when they were dismissed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	15	30	usz6	figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον	1	when they were dismissed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	30	c3uk	figs-pronouns	οἱ	1	So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch	The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 ACT	15	30	t55a	figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	they came down to Antioch	Luke says that these four men **came down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	15	30	oh4g	figs-go	κατῆλθον	1		You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -2201,7 +2201,7 @@ ACT	15	31	k1mr	writing-pronouns	ἐχάρησαν	1	they rejoiced	The pronoun **
 ACT	15	31	e4gf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει	1	because of the encouragement	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	15	32	r65l	figs-explicit	καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες	1	also being prophets themselves	When Luke says **also**, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were [13:1](../13/01.md). You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	15	32	e2en	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	15	32	frea	figs-metonymy	διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ&καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	15	32	frea	figs-metonymy	διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ & καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	32	j99g	figs-metaphor	ἐπεστήριξαν	1	strengthened them	Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	15	33	v6im	figs-activepassive	ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	they were sent away with peace from the brothers	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	33	wzw4	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2215,9 +2215,9 @@ ACT	15	36	ib2j	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	let us visit the bro
 ACT	15	36	ua1f	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	36	k08n	writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	15	36	y9i9	figs-ellipsis	πῶς ἔχουσιν	1	how they are	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT	15	38	a5nn	figs-litotes	Παῦλος&ἠξίου&μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	Paul thought it wise not to take along him	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT	15	38	a5nn	figs-litotes	Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	Paul thought it wise not to take along him	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	15	39	u97a	figs-activepassive	ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων; τόν τε Βαρναβᾶν παραλαβόντα τὸν Μᾶρκον, ἐκπλεῦσαι εἰς Κύπρον	1	And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other	If your language does not use the passive form **to be separated**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they separated from each other and Barnabas, taking Mark with him, sailed away to Cyprus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	15	40	l2uq	figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς&ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	15	40	l2uq	figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	15	40	tt2w	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χάριτι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	15	40	xkjo	writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	15	41	cbat	writing-pronouns	διήρχετο	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2225,47 +2225,47 @@ ACT	15	41	e3ym	figs-synecdoche	διήρχετο	1	he went through	Luke says **he
 ACT	15	41	s7yf	figs-metonymy	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1		Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	15	41	tbv3	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	strengthening the churches	Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	intro	e7z2			0		# Acts 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.<br>- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi<br>- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Timothy’s circumcision<br><br>Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.
-ACT	16	1	m5tb	figs-synecdoche	κατήντησεν&καὶ	1		Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	16	1	rhut	figs-idiom	κατήντησεν&καὶ	1		Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	16	1	km5q	figs-go	κατήντησεν&καὶ	1	Paul also came down	If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+ACT	16	1	m5tb	figs-synecdoche	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1		Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	16	1	rhut	figs-idiom	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1		Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	16	1	km5q	figs-go	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1	Paul also came down	If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 ACT	16	1	u3vr	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	1	f49m	writing-participants	μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος	1		Luke is using the phrase **a certain disciple** to introduce **Timothy** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	16	1	mc9i	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖ	1		By **there**, Luke means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	1	wxl8	figs-explicit	γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς	1	a believing Jewish woman	By **believing**, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	1	vh73	figs-idiom	πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος	1		Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	16	2	t1lu	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν.	1	He was well spoken of by the brothers	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	16	2	rez2	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ τῶν&ἀδελφῶν	1	by the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	16	2	rez2	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν	1	by the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	3	p6z8	figs-explicit	περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν	1	he circumcised him	It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	3	bdd6	writing-pronouns	τοῦτον	1		The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	16	3	za93	figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις	1	because of the Jews who were in those places	By **those places**, Luke means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	3	hk2l	figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν	1	for they all knew that his father was a Greek	Luke assumes that his readers will know that **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	16	3	pybf	figs-hyperbole	ᾔδεισαν&ἅπαντες	1		Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	16	4	n46i	writing-pronouns	διεπορεύοντο&παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going … they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	16	3	pybf	figs-hyperbole	ᾔδεισαν & ἅπαντες	1		Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	16	4	n46i	writing-pronouns	διεπορεύοντο & παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going … they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	16	4	bu6r	figs-ellipsis	αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν	1	for them to keep	Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	16	4	gpi3	figs-activepassive	τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	16	5	q8v9	figs-activepassive	αἱ&ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	16	6	dhmn	grammar-connect-logic-result	διῆλθον&τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT	16	6	g97e	translate-names	τὴν Φρυγίαν&Γαλατικὴν χώραν&τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	Phrygia	The word **Phrygia** is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in [2:10](../02/10.md). The word **Galatian** describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word **Asia** is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	16	5	q8v9	figs-activepassive	αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	16	6	dhmn	grammar-connect-logic-result	διῆλθον & τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ACT	16	6	g97e	translate-names	τὴν Φρυγίαν & Γαλατικὴν χώραν & τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	Phrygia	The word **Phrygia** is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in [2:10](../02/10.md). The word **Galatian** describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word **Asia** is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	16	6	qk0k	figs-infostructure	τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν	1		Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ACT	16	6	ue3k	figs-activepassive	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	6	d56g	figs-extrainfo	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1		Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ACT	16	6	h4u4	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	16	7	b1xq	translate-names	Μυσίαν&Βιθυνίαν	1	Mysia … Bithynia	The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	16	7	b1xq	translate-names	Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν	1	Mysia … Bithynia	The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	16	7	b539	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ	1	the Spirit of Jesus	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	8	s6l1	figs-idiom	κατέβησαν	1	they came down to the city of Troas	Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	16	8	xq6n	figs-go	κατέβησαν	1	they came down	In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 ACT	16	9	cm2u	figs-idiom	διαβὰς	1	Coming over into Macedonia	The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	16	9	tzxh	figs-idiom	ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις	1		Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	16	10	q0c7	writing-pronouns	εἶδεν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	16	10	fg5h	figs-explicit	ἐζητήσαμεν&προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	16	10	e884	figs-exclusive	ἐζητήσαμεν&προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1		Luke is using the pronouns **we** and **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	16	10	fg5h	figs-explicit	ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	16	10	e884	figs-exclusive	ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1		Luke is using the pronouns **we** and **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	16	10	iu0e	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	16	11	q2pr	translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην&Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Samothrace … Neapolis	The word **Samothrace** is the name of an island, and the word **Neapolis** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	16	11	q2pr	translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Samothrace … Neapolis	The word **Samothrace** is the name of an island, and the word **Neapolis** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	16	11	ojte	figs-ellipsis	τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν	1		Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the next day we sailed to Neapolis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	16	12	c8ox	figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους	1		Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and from there we traveled overland to Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	16	12	thk7	figs-explicit	κολωνία	1		Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **colony** he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	12	tl9f	figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	a colony	In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	16	14	n952	writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία&ἤκουεν	1	a certain woman named Lydia	Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	16	14	n952	writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία & ἤκουεν	1	a certain woman named Lydia	Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	16	14	se6e	translate-names	Λυδία	1		The word **Lydia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	16	14	qj86	figs-metonymy	πορφυρόπωλις	1	a seller of purple	Luke is using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	16	14	c6n8	translate-names	Θυατείρων	1	of Thyatira	The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ ACT	16	14	cyk3	figs-idiom	σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν	1	worshiping God	Her
 ACT	16	14	rd4r	figs-metaphor	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to	Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	14	s9ju	figs-metonymy	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	opened the heart	Here, the **heart** represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	16	14	a74y	figs-activepassive	τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	what was being said by Paul	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	16	15	f38e	figs-explicit	ὡς&ἐβαπτίσθη	1		The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	16	15	f38e	figs-explicit	ὡς & ἐβαπτίσθη	1		The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	15	g7e9	figs-activepassive	ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη	1	And when she was baptized, and her household	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	15	lv50	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1		Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	16	15	s799	figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	her household	Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2287,7 +2287,7 @@ ACT	16	16	ymt9	figs-metonymy	πνεῦμα Πύθωνα	1	a spirit of divination
 ACT	16	16	h2c5	translate-names	Πύθωνα	1		The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	16	17	tni9	figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	the way of salvation	This woman is speaking as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	17	gsbj	figs-abstractnouns	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	16	18	lj79	figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας&εἶπεν	1	But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	16	18	lj79	figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας & εἶπεν	1	But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	18	qi1k	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus Christ	Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	16	18	u4z8	figs-idiom	ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	it came out that same hour	In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes; it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	16	19	r1a1	figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν	1	when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone	The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2297,22 +2297,22 @@ ACT	16	20	wn77	figs-metonymy	ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1		The masters of the
 ACT	16	20	dkz2	figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	These men are stirring up our city	The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	16	21	gna6	figs-doublet	παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	to accept nor to practice	The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	16	22	f03y	figs-metaphor	συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος	1		Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	16	22	r1gr	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν&αὐτῶν&ἐκέλευον	1		The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	16	22	r1gr	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & ἐκέλευον	1		The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	16	22	at6i	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	commanding them to be beaten with rods	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	16	23	dsr3	figs-idiom	πολλάς&ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	when they had laid many blows upon them	This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	16	23	dsr3	figs-idiom	πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	when they had laid many blows upon them	This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	16	23	la4h	figs-metaphor	ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν	1		Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	24	jug6	translate-unknown	ξύλον	1	stocks	The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	16	24	z12w	figs-metaphor	ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν	1		Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	16	26	q7z1	figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	26	m4ye	figs-synecdoche	σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	the foundations of the prison	Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	16	26	s6mu	figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν&αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	all the doors were opened	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	16	26	s6mu	figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	all the doors were opened	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	26	p393	figs-activepassive	πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη	1	the chains of everyone were unfastened	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	26	b540	figs-explicit	πάντων	1		Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all** he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	27	cwt5	figs-explicit	ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, νομίζων ἐκπεφευγέναι τοὺς δεσμίους	1	he was about to kill himself	Luke assumes that his readers will know that death was the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	27	viov	figs-activepassive	ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	28	ljy6	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1		By **we**, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	16	28	s2s2	figs-imperative	μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT	16	29	pe66	figs-explicit	αἰτήσας&φῶτα	1	having called for lights	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	16	29	pe66	figs-explicit	αἰτήσας & φῶτα	1	having called for lights	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	29	bb6t	translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ	1	fell down before Paul and Silas	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “he knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	16	30	u132	figs-activepassive	ἵνα σωθῶ	1	what must I do in order to be saved	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	16	31	m801	writing-pronouns	οἱ	1		The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2329,8 +2329,8 @@ ACT	16	36	qrw0	figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους	1		Luke is using the term **
 ACT	16	36	f76u	figs-imperative	ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1		The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ACT	16	36	noc2	figs-abstractnouns	πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	16	37	b4jm	figs-explicit	πρὸς αὐτούς	1	said to them	The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	16	37	xmqz	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς&ἔβαλαν&ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν&ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1		The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	16	37	v4yk	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς&ἔβαλαν&ἡμᾶς&ἡμᾶς	1		By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	16	37	xmqz	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν & ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1		The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	16	37	v4yk	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς	1		By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	16	37	qq1u	figs-rquestion	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν?	1	they cast us out secretly? No indeed!	Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	16	37	b7cc	figs-metonymy	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ	1	They have beaten us in public	The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	16	37	b5a3	figs-ellipsis	οὔ γάρ	1		Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -2338,9 +2338,9 @@ ACT	16	37	jr2j	figs-rpronouns	ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ, ἡμᾶς ἐξα
 ACT	16	37	sw3a	figs-imperative3p	ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1		If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they lead us out” or “they should lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	16	37	x82d	figs-extrainfo	ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1		It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ACT	16	38	ldfi	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1		Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	16	38	ym2u	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν&ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans	Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	16	38	lqs5	figs-quotations	ἐφοβήθησαν&ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT	16	39	q59h	writing-pronouns	παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς&ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	16	38	ym2u	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans	Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	16	38	lqs5	figs-quotations	ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT	16	39	q59h	writing-pronouns	παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς & ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	16	39	a7yq	figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς	1		Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	16	40	y14i	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1		Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	16	40	ylk9	figs-metonymy	τὴν Λυδίαν	1	the house of Lydia	Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2352,13 +2352,13 @@ ACT	17	intro	gj4c			0		# Acts 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formattin
 ACT	17	1	e4w5	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	17	1	kll1	translate-names	τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν	1	Amphipolis and Apollonia	The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	17	1	o19x	figs-explicitinfo	συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-ACT	17	2	mkn6	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς&αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	17	2	mkn6	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	17	3	lt8q	figs-hendiadys	διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with **and**. The phrase **fully opening them** tells how Paul was **demonstrating** from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “by opening the Scriptures fully, demonstrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	17	3	ir9q	figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	He is fully opening	Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	17	3	ipb2	figs-idiom	ἀναστῆναι	1	to rise	Luke is using the word **rise** to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	17	3	b9qi	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	17	4	es2u	figs-activepassive	τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	some from them were persuaded	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	17	4	t21z	figs-idiom	τῶν&σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	of worshiping Greeks	Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	17	4	t21z	figs-idiom	τῶν & σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	of worshiping Greeks	Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	17	4	ye8v	figs-litotes	οὐκ ὀλίγαι	1	not a few of the leading women	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	17	5	clcz	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	17	5	ie1f	translate-unknown	τῶν ἀγοραίων	1	of the marketplace	The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in [16:20](../16/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2371,17 +2371,17 @@ ACT	17	6	x90b	figs-hyperbole	οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατ
 ACT	17	8	ixmb	writing-pronouns	ἐτάραξαν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	17	9	ya44	translate-unknown	τὸ ἱκανὸν	1	after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them	A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	17	9	eq4y	writing-pronouns	ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	17	10	qy5c	figs-metaphor	οἱ&ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	17	10	qy5c	figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	17	10	m75m	figs-explicitinfo	τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	17	11	k2st	writing-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	17	11	alq1	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι&τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ	1		Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	17	11	alq1	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι & τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ	1		Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	17	11	gu6s	figs-metonymy	εὐγενέστεροι	1	these were more open-minded than	Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	17	11	hle3	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	received the word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	17	11	uh8a	figs-hyperbole	μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας	1	with all readiness	Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	17	11	qrnm	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	17	11	g8an	figs-ellipsis	εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως	1	these things were so	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	17	12	abcv	figs-litotes	ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι	1	not a few men	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ACT	17	13	ybos	figs-activepassive	καὶ&κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	17	13	ybos	figs-activepassive	καὶ & κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	17	13	dijk	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	17	13	wjq3	figs-doublet	σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	troubled the crowds	The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	17	14	ael8	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2394,7 +2394,7 @@ ACT	17	16	s011	figs-activepassive	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐ
 ACT	17	16	we78	figs-metonymy	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols	Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	17	17	jkj8	figs-idiom	τοῖς σεβομένοις	1	those who were worshiping	See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	17	17	ec14	translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ	1	in the marketplace	See how you translated the similar expression in [16:19](../16/19.md). Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	17	18	ru6a	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&δοκεῖ&εὐηγγελίζετο	1		The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	17	18	ru6a	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & δοκεῖ & εὐηγγελίζετο	1		The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	17	18	l7le	translate-names	τῶν Ἐπικουρίων	1	of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers	The word **Epicurean** is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	17	18	f976	translate-names	Στοϊκῶν	1	Stoic philosophers	The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal, loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	17	18	g4bv	figs-idiom	ὁ σπερμολόγος	1	What is this babbler wanting to say?	These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2404,12 +2404,12 @@ ACT	17	19	b56g	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	to the
 ACT	17	19	aciu	figs-rquestion	δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή?	1		This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	17	19	g9gb	figs-exclusive	δυνάμεθα	1		By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	17	19	n250	figs-activepassive	ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	17	20	lay8	figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα&τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	For you are bringing some strange things to our ears	The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objects that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	17	20	lay8	figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα & τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	For you are bringing some strange things to our ears	The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objects that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	17	20	us7g	figs-metonymy	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1		The philosophers are referring to hearing by association with the **ears**, which people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	17	20	fs5g	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&βουλόμεθα	1		By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	17	20	fs5g	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & βουλόμεθα	1		By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	17	20	fe4p	figs-idiom	τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι	1		The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	17	21	ujgi	writing-background	δὲ	1		Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	17	21	dn1t	figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι&πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι&ηὐκαίρουν	1	And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there	Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	17	21	dn1t	figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι & πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι & ηὐκαίρουν	1	And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there	Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	17	21	d8yb	translate-names	Ἀθηναῖοι	1	the Athenians	The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	17	21	ij4e	figs-hyperbole	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν	1	spent their time in nothing other than	Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “made it their favorite leisure activity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	17	21	wr1r	figs-explicit	τι καινότερον	1	to tell something or to listen to something new	This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2435,14 +2435,14 @@ ACT	17	27	s2xs	figs-explicit	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν	1		Paul means impli
 ACT	17	27	jae5	figs-metaphor	ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him	Paul is speaking as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	17	27	p8hk	figs-litotes	οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ	1	Yet he is not far from each one of us	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	17	27	onm4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	17	28	tkd3	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&γένος	1	General Information:	The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	17	28	o4vy	figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν&ἐσμέν	1		Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	17	28	tkd3	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & γένος	1	General Information:	The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	17	28	o4vy	figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν & ἐσμέν	1		Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	17	28	jxph	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν.	1		Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (see next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	17	28	rpaz	figs-quotemarks	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν	1		Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	17	28	ii2n	figs-doublet	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν	1		The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “For he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ACT	17	28	cbd9	figs-activepassive	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν	1	For in him	If your language does not use the passive form **are moved**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For ‘he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	17	28	lil5	figs-metaphor	τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν.	1		Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	17	29	k9ws	figs-metaphor	γένος&ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	are God’s offspring	Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people, and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	17	29	k9ws	figs-metaphor	γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	are God’s offspring	Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people, and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	17	29	czi9	figs-nominaladj	τὸ θεῖον	1	the divine being	Paul is using the adjective **Divine** as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	17	29	xfp9	figs-metonymy	χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ	1		Paul is referring to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	17	29	q4q2	figs-possession	χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου	1	images of the skill and imagination of man	Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human **skill** and **imagination** but to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -2461,7 +2461,7 @@ ACT	17	32	c4sm	writing-endofstory		0		This is the end of the part of the story a
 ACT	17	32	jlm5		ἀκούσαντες	1	when they heard of	These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.
 ACT	17	32	sn6j		οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον	1	some mocked him	These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
 ACT	17	34	nb26	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-ACT	17	34	nysg	figs-gendernotations	τινὲς&ἄνδρες	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of **Damaris** shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ACT	17	34	nysg	figs-gendernotations	τινὲς & ἄνδρες	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of **Damaris** shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	17	34	hlgu	figs-infostructure	κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν	1		The people Luke describes here **believed** before they were **joined** to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ACT	17	34	vcx3	figs-activepassive	κολληθέντες αὐτῷ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	17	34	psh8	translate-names	Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης	1	Dionysius the Areopagite	The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2485,7 +2485,7 @@ ACT	18	6	pacx	figs-synecdoche	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφ
 ACT	18	6	ezpo	figs-yousingular	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1		The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ACT	18	6	vwpg		τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1		Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads”
 ACT	18	6	aq99	figs-metaphor	καθαρὸς ἐγώ	1		Paul is speaking as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	18	7	v8xg	figs-idiom	τινὸς&σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	who worships God	See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	18	7	v8xg	figs-idiom	τινὸς & σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	who worships God	See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	18	7	vs6y	translate-names	Τιτίου Ἰούστου	1	Titius Justus	The words **Titius Justus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	18	8	lj2t	translate-names	Κρίσπος	1	Crispus	The word **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	18	8	zc89	writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
@@ -2520,7 +2520,7 @@ ACT	18	16	d6nh	figs-metonymy	ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ 
 ACT	18	17	x9w5	translate-names	Σωσθένην	1	Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue	The word **Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	18	17	ju3w	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον	1		Since Luke says in [18:8](../18/08.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	18	17	mj77	figs-explicit	ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος	1	But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat	This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	18	17	cyk6	figs-hyperbole	πάντες&ἔτυπτον	1	they all, having seized	Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	18	17	cyk6	figs-hyperbole	πάντες & ἔτυπτον	1	they all, having seized	Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	18	18	j0we	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς	1		Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ACT	18	18	et8c	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	left the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	18	18	x25w	translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1		The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2529,8 +2529,8 @@ ACT	18	18	ceor	figs-infostructure	εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1		Luke seems
 ACT	18	18	cf3c	figs-extrainfo	εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1		Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add any information in your translation about why Paul made it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ACT	18	18	c8z0	translate-unknown	εὐχήν	1		This **vow** was a promise that a person in this culture made to God that he would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. A person might do this to express his sincerity about something he was praying for, to acknowledge something that God had done for him, or to consecrate himself to deeper devotion to God for a time. In your translation, you may be able to use the word for a comparable practice in your culture. Alternate translation: “made a special promise to God not to cut his hair for a time in order to be more devoted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	18	19	abcx	writing-pronouns	κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ	1	he left them	The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun **them** refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	18	19	eqi4	figs-idiom	κατήντησαν&εἰς Ἔφεσον	1		Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	18	20	u44s	writing-pronouns	ἐρωτώντων&αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	18	19	eqi4	figs-idiom	κατήντησαν & εἰς Ἔφεσον	1		Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	18	20	u44s	writing-pronouns	ἐρωτώντων & αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	18	22	gyy4	figs-idiom	κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	having landed at Caesarea	Luke says that Paul had **come down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	18	22	bvw4	figs-explicit	ἀναβὰς	1		Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **having gone up**. he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	18	22	r26z	figs-idiom	ἀναβὰς	1	having gone up	Luke says that Paul had **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2539,7 +2539,7 @@ ACT	18	22	n3rh	figs-idiom	κατέβη	1	he went down	Luke says that Paul **went
 ACT	18	23	plys	figs-metonymy	διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν	1		Luke means that Paul visited **in succession** the churches in **the region of Galatia and Phrygia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	18	23	s2hd	figs-hyperbole	στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς	1		Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	18	24	xqy7	writing-background	δέ	1	Now	Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Apollos** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	18	24	n2b4	writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος&τις	1	a certain Jew named Apollos	Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish man** to introduce **Apollos** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	18	24	n2b4	writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος & τις	1	a certain Jew named Apollos	Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish man** to introduce **Apollos** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	18	24	gsal	figs-nominaladj	Ἰουδαῖος	1		Luke is using the adjective **Jewish** as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds **man** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	18	24	di14	translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρεὺς	1	an Alexandrian by birth	The word **Alexandrian** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	18	24	qn7z	figs-idiom	κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον	1		Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2551,7 +2551,7 @@ ACT	18	25	jwol	writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Luke is referring to J
 ACT	18	25	ift8	figs-metonymy	ζέων τῷ πνεύματι	1	and being fervent in spirit	Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	18	25	lr1h	figs-possession	τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	the baptism of John	Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ACT	18	26	ga6v	figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the way of God	Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	18	27	c2sq	writing-pronouns	βουλομένου&αὐτοῦ	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	18	27	c2sq	writing-pronouns	βουλομένου & αὐτοῦ	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	18	27	ll36	figs-idiom	διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	to pass over into Achaia	Luke uses the expression **pass over** here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	18	27	v2i6	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	18	27	f99p	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος	1	those who had believed by grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2572,7 +2572,7 @@ ACT	19	5	ueh1	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized
 ACT	19	5	g2dm	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus	Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	19	6	gk8l	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας	1	when Paul had laid his hands on them	Paul **laid** his **hands** on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:17](../08/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	19	6	udyf	figs-metaphor	ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1		Luke is speaking as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	19	6	j4n8	figs-explicit	ἐλάλουν&γλώσσαις	1	and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy	The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	19	6	j4n8	figs-explicit	ἐλάλουν & γλώσσαις	1	and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy	The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	19	7	e7kj	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	And they were about 12 men in all	Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	19	8	qv8z	writing-pronouns	ἐπαρρησιάζετο	1	having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months	The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	19	8	yky2	figs-hendiadys	διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων	1	reasoning and persuading them	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **reasoning** tells how Paul was **persuading** people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -2599,16 +2599,16 @@ ACT	19	13	fgq4	translate-unknown	ἐξορκιστῶν	1	exorcists	These **exor
 ACT	19	13	s12u	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα	1	the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	19	13	vqt1	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	by the Jesus	The exorcists are referring to Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	19	14	cwzb	writing-background	δέ	1		Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	19	14	emgz	writing-participants	ἦσαν&τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες	1		Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	19	14	emgz	writing-participants	ἦσαν & τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες	1		Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	19	14	cb8p	translate-names	Σκευᾶ	1	of Sceva	The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	19	15	fhzn	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθὲν&τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν	1		Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT	19	15	fhzn	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθὲν & τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν	1		Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	19	15	lrky	figs-explicit	τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν	1		Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By **the evil spirit**, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	19	15	nsl1	figs-rquestion	ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ?	1	but who are you?	The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	19	15	vqwh	writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς&τίνες ἐστέ?	1		The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	19	15	vqwh	writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς & τίνες ἐστέ?	1		The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	19	16	lu7u	figs-explicit	ἀμφοτέρων	1	them	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	19	17	mx62	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1		Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-ACT	19	17	jodu	figs-activepassive	τοῦτο&ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν&τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	19	17	fd5m	figs-hyperbole	τοῦτο&ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν&τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον	1		Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	19	17	jodu	figs-activepassive	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	19	17	fd5m	figs-hyperbole	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον	1		Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	19	17	h0lq	figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1		Luke is speaking of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	19	17	w1su	figs-hyperbole	ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1		Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	19	17	j85h	figs-activepassive	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2622,14 +2622,14 @@ ACT	19	20	es71	figs-personification	τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξ
 ACT	19	20	lbg9	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1		Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	19	20	t49m	writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	19	21	de4f	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
-ACT	19	21	q18b	figs-idiom	ὡς&ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι&πορεύεσθαι	1	this was completed, Paul	The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	19	21	q18b	figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι & πορεύεσθαι	1	this was completed, Paul	The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	19	21	rdz4	figs-idiom	δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν	1	it is necessary for me also to see Rome	In this context, the word **see** means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	19	22	cy6f	translate-names	Ἔραστον	1	Erastus	The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	19	23	nb3p	figs-litotes	τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	there was no small disturbance	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	19	23	rwf2	translate-names	τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	the Way	As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	19	24	cg16	writing-participants	τις&ἀργυροκόπος&παρείχετο	1	a certain silversmith named Demetrius	Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	19	24	cg16	writing-participants	τις & ἀργυροκόπος & παρείχετο	1	a certain silversmith named Demetrius	Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	19	24	opb9	translate-names	Δημήτριος	1		The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	19	24	y5ae	writing-background	τις&ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1		Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+ACT	19	24	y5ae	writing-background	τις & ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1		Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 ACT	19	24	wg95	figs-extrainfo	ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1		Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ACT	19	24	nwt7	translate-unknown	ἀργυροκόπος	1	a silversmith	A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	19	24	p58m	figs-litotes	οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν	1	brought in not a little business	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -2647,24 +2647,24 @@ ACT	19	29	t7xs	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγ
 ACT	19	29	u42d	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1		Luke is speaking of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	19	29	u51d	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confusion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	19	29	ej3q	translate-unknown	τὸ θέατρον	1	into the theater	The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	19	29	d6r9	translate-names	Γάϊον&Ἀρίσταρχον	1	Gaius … Aristarchus	The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	19	29	d6r9	translate-names	Γάϊον & Ἀρίσταρχον	1	Gaius … Aristarchus	The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	19	31	o6qt	translate-names	τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν	1		The word **Asiarchs** is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	19	31	we87	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&αὐτὸν&παρεκάλουν&ἑαυτὸν	1		The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	19	31	we87	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & παρεκάλουν & ἑαυτὸν	1		The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	19	31	r183	figs-idiom	δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1		The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	19	33	ukaw	figs-explicit	συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον	1		The implication is that some people **instructed Alexander** about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	19	33	jr85	translate-names	Ἀλέξανδρον	1	Alexander	The word **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	19	33	j1mi	translate-symaction	κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα	1	motioned with his hand	This likely means that Alexander was **waving his hand** to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	19	33	tlq7	figs-explicit	ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ	1	to give a defense	The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	19	34	tyx6	figs-quotations	ἐπιγνόντες&ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν,	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT	19	34	u1hp	figs-metaphor	φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς&κραζόντων	1	there was one voice from all of them	Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	19	34	tyx6	figs-quotations	ἐπιγνόντες & ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν,	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT	19	34	u1hp	figs-metaphor	φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς & κραζόντων	1	there was one voice from all of them	Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	19	35	sy9m	translate-unknown	ὁ γραμματεὺς	1	the town clerk	This **city clerk** was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	19	35	n4qz		φησίν	1		To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
 ACT	19	35	gox9	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι	1		This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	19	35	mtsc	figs-ellipsis	τίς γάρ ἐστιν	1		The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT	19	35	sd3s	figs-rquestion	τίς&ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?	1	what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven?	The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	19	35	k8dy	figs-doublenegatives	τίς&ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	who does not know	The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT	19	35	gqr7	figs-hyperbole	τίς&ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1		A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	19	35	zzmv	figs-gendernotations	τίς&ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ACT	19	35	sd3s	figs-rquestion	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?	1	what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven?	The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT	19	35	k8dy	figs-doublenegatives	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	who does not know	The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	19	35	gqr7	figs-hyperbole	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1		A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	19	35	zzmv	figs-gendernotations	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	19	35	hiw3	writing-politeness	τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος	1	temple keeper	The term **temple keeper** was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	19	35	afd1	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	of that which is fallen down from heaven	The city clerk is using the adjective **Zeus-fallen** as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word **image** to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	19	35	fdfk	translate-names	τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1		The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2690,11 +2690,11 @@ ACT	20	intro	u91c			0		# Acts 20 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formattin
 ACT	20	2	edb8	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	had exhorted them with many words	The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the **regions** of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	20	3	ah5w	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	by the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	20	3	bdq6	figs-idiom	γνώμης τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας.	1		The expression **of a resolution** means that Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved to return through Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	20	3	jypq		αὐτῷ&μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1		Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
-ACT	20	4	dw6j	translate-names	Σώπατρος Πύρρου&Σεκοῦνδος,&Τυχικὸς&Τρόφιμος	1	were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus	These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	20	3	jypq		αὐτῷ & μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1		Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
+ACT	20	4	dw6j	translate-names	Σώπατρος Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος	1	were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus	These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	20	4	dpyn	figs-possession	Σώπατρος Πύρρου	1		Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ACT	20	4	w4n1	translate-names	Βεροιαῖος&Θεσσαλονικέων&Δερβαῖος&Ἀσιανοὶ	1	from Berea … from Derbe	The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	20	4	w8j6	translate-names	Ἀρίσταρχος&Γάϊος	1	Aristarchus … Gaius	The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	20	4	w4n1	translate-names	Βεροιαῖος & Θεσσαλονικέων & Δερβαῖος & Ἀσιανοὶ	1	from Berea … from Derbe	The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	20	4	w8j6	translate-names	Ἀρίσταρχος & Γάϊος	1	Aristarchus … Gaius	The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	20	5	y35x	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns **us** and **we** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	20	5	gb5f	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1		The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	20	5	o1bl	figs-explicit	ἡμᾶς	1		Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2706,18 +2706,18 @@ ACT	20	7	ls6u	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to
 ACT	20	7	zff8	figs-synecdoche	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	to break bread	Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	20	7	ckiy	figs-explicit	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1		By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	20	7	j888	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	and so he continued his message	Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	20	8	t6on	figs-explicit	ἦσαν&λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι	1		The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	20	8	t6on	figs-explicit	ἦσαν & λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι	1		The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	20	8	ak8z	translate-unknown	ὑπερῴῳ	1	upper room	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	20	8	cshh	figs-activepassive	ἦμεν συνηγμένοι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	20	9	ju64	translate-names	Εὔτυχος	1	Eutychus	The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	20	9	v5q7	translate-unknown	ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος	1	on the window	This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	20	9	tsp4	figs-activepassive	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ&κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	was falling into a deep sleep	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	20	9	abcz	figs-personification	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ&κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	having been overcome by sleep	Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	20	9	tsp4	figs-activepassive	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	was falling into a deep sleep	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	20	9	abcz	figs-personification	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	having been overcome by sleep	Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	20	9	kh3h		τριστέγου	1	third story	In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two stories above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers.
 ACT	20	9	jp89	figs-activepassive	ἤρθη νεκρός	1	and was picked up dead	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	20	9	z1wf	figs-explicit	ἤρθη νεκρός	1		The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they lifted him from the ground, but he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	20	10	uban	figs-activepassive	μὴ θορυβεῖσθε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	20	10	gfol	figs-metaphor	ἡ&ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1		Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	20	10	gfol	figs-metaphor	ἡ & ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1		Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	20	11	w5w8	figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος	1	had broken bread	Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	20	11	upkb	figs-explicit	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος	1		By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	20	11	av7m	writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθεν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2746,12 +2746,12 @@ ACT	20	19	e6k7	figs-ellipsis	καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντ
 ACT	20	19	y5iw	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	of the Jews	Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	20	20	sscz	figs-hyperbole	ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1		Paul says **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	20	20	nu7h	figs-doublenegatives	ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative particle **not**. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT	20	21	sqf9	figs-ellipsis	διαμαρτυρόμενος&τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT	20	21	sqf9	figs-ellipsis	διαμαρτυρόμενος & τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	20	21	w7mv	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	20	21	x552	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Paul is using the pronoun **our** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	20	22	hcs0	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	20	22	vam4	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος&τῷ Πνεύματι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	20	22	n99n	figs-metaphor	δεδεμένος&τῷ Πνεύματι	1		Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	20	22	vam4	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	20	22	n99n	figs-metaphor	δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι	1		Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	20	22	um41	grammar-connect-exceptions	τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς	1		Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 ACT	20	22	a9j1	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῇ	1	not knowing what will happen to me in it	The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	20	23	u26j	figs-personification	δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν	1		Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -2770,19 +2770,19 @@ ACT	20	26	rab4	figs-idiom	ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ	1		This is an
 ACT	20	26	e546	figs-metonymy	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	I am innocent from the blood of all	Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	20	26	rs87	figs-explicit	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1		Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	20	27	g1vx	translate-versebridge		0		In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-ACT	20	27	qa9y	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι&ὑμῖν	1	For I did not hold back from declaring to you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	20	27	qa9y	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν	1	For I did not hold back from declaring to you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	20	27	jl2w	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν	1		Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	20	28	u52d	figs-metaphor	τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God	Paul is speaking as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	20	28	hjh6	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	his own blood	Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their **blood** when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	20	28	cx69	figs-pronouns	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood	The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 ACT	20	28	r66x	figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1		This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	20	28	ybzd	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	20	29	ka6u	figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται&λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock	Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	20	29	ka6u	figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock	Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	20	30	cbq1	figs-rpronouns	καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “From within your very own group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ACT	20	30	esme	figs-metaphor	ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα	1		In this context, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	20	30	yn8u	figs-activepassive	διεστραμμένα	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	20	30	ftf4	figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	to draw away the disciples after them	Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically **draw away** people **after them** as they themselves left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follow their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	20	31	hs1m	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην&νουθετῶν	1	I did not stop admonishing	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **stop**. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	20	31	hs1m	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν	1	I did not stop admonishing	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **stop**. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	20	31	rvh6	figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	with tears	Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	20	31	rt1h	figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1	for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day	Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 ACT	20	31	fc3b	figs-hyperbole	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1		Paul says **night and day** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -2797,10 +2797,10 @@ ACT	20	33	o5jp	figs-doublenegatives	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ 
 ACT	20	33	yl6k	figs-metonymy	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου	1		Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** and **gold** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	20	33	ipq5	figs-merism	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ	1	no one’s silver, gold, or clothing	In this culture, owning expensive **clothing** was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 ACT	20	34	f5a3	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε	1	You yourselves know	Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-ACT	20	34	ja5v	figs-personification	ταῖς χρείαις μου&ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	these hands ministered to my needs and to those who	Paul is speaking of his **hands** as if they were a living thing that **ministered** to his **needs**, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	20	34	ja5v	figs-personification	ταῖς χρείαις μου & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	these hands ministered to my needs and to those who	Paul is speaking of his **hands** as if they were a living thing that **ministered** to his **needs**, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	20	34	izuu	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT	20	35	zibu	figs-ellipsis	πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι&δεῖ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT	20	35	pvrm	figs-hyperbole	πάντα&ὅτι&δεῖ	1		Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	20	35	zibu	figs-ellipsis	πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι & δεῖ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT	20	35	pvrm	figs-hyperbole	πάντα & ὅτι & δεῖ	1		Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	20	35	b6o1	figs-nominaladj	πάντα	1		Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	20	35	d1bh	figs-metonymy	ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1		Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might **take hold** of a person who was **weak** to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	20	35	tr1d	figs-rpronouns	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν	1		Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -2813,7 +2813,7 @@ ACT	20	38	npay	figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει	1		Luke is usin
 ACT	20	38	bs3s	figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	they were never going to see his face again	In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	20	38	m0wr	figs-quotations	εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	21	intro	gh1j			0		# Acts 21 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.<br><br>The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “They are all determined to keep the law”<br><br>The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.<br><br>### Nazarite vow<br><br>The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).<br><br>### Gentiles in the temple<br><br>The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
-ACT	21	1	s3h3	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς&ἤλθομεν	1	we … we came	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	21	1	s3h3	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἤλθομεν	1	we … we came	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	21	1	a428	figs-activepassive	ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	having been parted from them	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	1	e5y6	translate-names	Κῶ	1	Cos	The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	21	1	p6ss	translate-names	Ῥόδον	1	Rhodes	The word **Rhodes** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2821,22 +2821,22 @@ ACT	21	1	x7kg	translate-names	Πάταρα	1	Patara	The word **Patara** is the n
 ACT	21	2	nz9k	figs-personification	πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην	1	a ship crossing over to Phoenicia	Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **crossing over** the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	21	3	vkr2	figs-idiom	καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον	1	having left it behind on the port side	The expression **leaving it behind on the port side** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	21	3	a429	figs-idiom	κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον	1	came down to Tyre	Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	21	3	a430	figs-synecdoche	ἐκεῖσε&τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	there the ship was unloading its cargo	Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	21	3	a430	figs-synecdoche	ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	there the ship was unloading its cargo	Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	21	3	hwx8	figs-personification	τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	the ship was unloading its cargo	Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	21	4	y35m	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον	1	who were saying to Paul	The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	21	4	a431	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	to set foot in Jerusalem	The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	21	5	a432	figs-idiom	ὅτε&ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	when it happened that we had completed the days	Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	21	5	a432	figs-idiom	ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	when it happened that we had completed the days	Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	21	5	a433	figs-hyperbole	πάντων	1	everyone	Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	21	5	q8xl	translate-symaction	θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι	1	having knelt down on the shore and having prayed	The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	21	6	a434	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1	those	The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	21	7	hy6e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἐμείναμεν	1	we … we stayed	Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT	21	7	hy6e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἐμείναμεν	1	we … we stayed	Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	21	7	z4nt	translate-names	Πτολεμαΐδα	1	Ptolemais	The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	21	7	ff1s	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	21	8	ay52	figs-explicit	ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1	from the seven	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the Seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	21	8	vi48	grammar-honorifics	τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	the Evangelist	Luke is using the title **evangelist** to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]])
 ACT	21	9	cv8b	writing-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the **daughters** of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	21	9	rcf4	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ&ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες	1	to this one were four daughters	The pronoun **this** refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	21	10	n3i8	writing-participants	κατῆλθέν τις&προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	a certain prophet, Agabus by name	Luke is using the phrase **a certain prophet** to introduce **Agabus** as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT	21	9	rcf4	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ & ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες	1	to this one were four daughters	The pronoun **this** refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	21	10	n3i8	writing-participants	κατῆλθέν τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	a certain prophet, Agabus by name	Luke is using the phrase **a certain prophet** to introduce **Agabus** as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	21	10	f9cb	translate-names	Ἅγαβος	1	Agabus	The word **Agabus** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	21	10	a435	figs-idiom	κατῆλθέν τις ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	came down from Judea	Luke says that Agabus **came down** from Judea because that province is higher in elevation than Caesarea. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “arrived from up in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	21	11	a436	translate-symaction	ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου, δήσας ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας	1	having taken the belt of Paul, having bound his own feet and hands	Agabus bound his own feet and hands with Paul’s belt as a symbolic action to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having taken the belt of Paul and bound his own feet and hands to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -2846,29 +2846,29 @@ ACT	21	11	s92d	figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	into the hands
 ACT	21	11	b59g	figs-synecdoche	ἐθνῶν	1	of the Gentiles	Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Gentiles**, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	21	12	a437	figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἐντόπιοι	1	the locals	Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	21	12	a438	figs-explicit	παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς	1	were urging him	Luke means implicitly that this **urging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	21	12	a439	figs-idiom	τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν&εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	not to go up to Jerusalem	Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	21	12	a439	figs-idiom	τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	not to go up to Jerusalem	Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	21	13	uwt2	figs-rquestion	τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν?	1	What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart?	Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	21	13	bj76	figs-metaphor	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	breaking my heart	Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	21	13	k34w	figs-metonymy	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	breaking my heart	In this context, the **heart** represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	21	13	p5e5	figs-activepassive	οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι	1	not only to be bound	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not only for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	13	q35x	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	for the name of the Lord Jesus	This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to the Lord Jesus” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	21	14	hwc5	figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου&αὐτοῦ	1	he was not being persuaded	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	21	14	hwc5	figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ	1	he was not being persuaded	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	14	zl98	figs-explicit	μὴ πειθομένου	1	he was not being persuaded	Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	21	14	as1i	figs-imperative3p	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω	1	Let the will of the Lord happen	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May the will of the Lord happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	21	15	a440	figs-idiom	ἀνεβαίνομεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	we went up to Jerusalem	Luke says that he and his traveling companions **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring in your language to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	21	16	k9kr	writing-participants	τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	a certain Cypriot, an early disciple	Luke is using the phrase **a certain early disciple** to introduce **Mnason** as a new participant in the story. The phrase **early disciple** introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Cypriot who was one of the first believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT	21	16	zd9i	translate-names	Μνάσωνί&Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason … Cypriot	The word **Mnason** is the name of a man. The word **Cypriot** is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	21	16	zd9i	translate-names	Μνάσωνί & Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason … Cypriot	The word **Mnason** is the name of a man. The word **Cypriot** is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	21	16	a441	figs-activepassive	παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν	1	with whom we would be hosted	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	17	d3gj	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοί	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	21	20	a1hk	writing-pronouns	οἱ&ἐδόξαζον&εἶπόν&αὐτῷ	1	they were glorifying … they said to him	The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	21	20	a1hk	writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν & αὐτῷ	1	they were glorifying … they said to him	The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	21	20	a442	figs-metaphor	θεωρεῖς	1	you see	Paul does not physically **see** these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	21	20	xki4	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφέ	1	brother	James and the elders using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	21	20	c5pu	writing-pronouns	ὑπάρχουσιν	1	they are	In this instance the pronoun **they** refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	21	20	a443	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ζηλωταὶ τοῦ νόμου ὑπάρχουσιν	1	they are all zealous for the law	James and the elders say **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they are very zealous for the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	21	21	pyg8	figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν&περὶ σοῦ	1	they have been told about you	James and the elders mean implicitly that people **have been told** this about Paul even though it is not true. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even though it is not true, they have been told about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	21	21	pyg8	figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν & περὶ σοῦ	1	they have been told about you	James and the elders mean implicitly that people **have been told** this about Paul even though it is not true. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even though it is not true, they have been told about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	21	21	e5s4	figs-activepassive	κατηχήθησαν	1	they have been told	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	21	21	sdl3	figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν&ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	apostasy from Moses	James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with **Moses**, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	21	21	a444	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποστασίαν&ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	apostasy from Moses	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	21	21	sdl3	figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	apostasy from Moses	James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with **Moses**, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	21	21	a444	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	apostasy from Moses	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	21	21	knt4	figs-metaphor	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	not to walk in the customs	James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	21	21	u56t	figs-explicit	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	not to walk in the customs	By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	21	22	a445	figs-ellipsis	τί οὖν ἐστιν	1	What therefore is it	James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -2884,9 +2884,9 @@ ACT	21	24	a449	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν 
 ACT	21	24	a450	figs-idiom	ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν	1	there is nothing in the things they have been told about you	The expression **there is nothing in** these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	21	24	nu9v	figs-activepassive	κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ	1	they have been told about you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	24	a451	figs-rpronouns	καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον	1	also keeping the law yourself	James and the elders are using the word **yourself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-ACT	21	25	a452	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν&φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς	1	we sent that they should guard	James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT	21	25	bpb5	figs-nominaladj	τό&εἰδωλόθυτον&πνικτὸν	1	the idol-sacrificed … the strangled	James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	21	25	wjd2	figs-metonymy	τό&εἰδωλόθυτον&πνικτὸν	1	the idol-sacrificed … the strangled	James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	21	25	a452	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς	1	we sent that they should guard	James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT	21	25	bpb5	figs-nominaladj	τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν	1	the idol-sacrificed … the strangled	James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	21	25	wjd2	figs-metonymy	τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν	1	the idol-sacrificed … the strangled	James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	21	25	nu0i	figs-explicit	πνικτὸν	1	the strangled	God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	21	26	cr14	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἄνδρας	1	the men	Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	21	26	a453	figs-explicit	ἁγνισθεὶς	1	having been purified	Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2909,9 +2909,9 @@ ACT	21	28	jc9q	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	into the temple	The Je
 ACT	21	28	a461	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἱερὸν	1	the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	21	29	t2z7	translate-versebridge		0		In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid their hands on him, shouting, ‘Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 ACT	21	29	h1uu	translate-names	Τρόφιμον	1	Trophimus	The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	21	30	st3f	figs-metonymy	ἐκινήθη&ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	the whole city was excited	Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	21	30	upl8	figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη&ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	the whole city was excited	Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	21	30	a462	figs-activepassive	ἐκινήθη&ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	the whole city was excited	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	21	30	st3f	figs-metonymy	ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	the whole city was excited	Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	21	30	upl8	figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	the whole city was excited	Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	21	30	a462	figs-activepassive	ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	the whole city was excited	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	30	a463	figs-metonymy	ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	outside of the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	21	30	mmaa	figs-activepassive	ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	the doors were shut	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	30	xd6r	figs-explicit	ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	the doors were shut	The implication is that the gatekeepers **shut** the **doors** to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2928,22 +2928,22 @@ ACT	21	33	xd9w	figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι ἁλύσεσι 
 ACT	21	33	zi4l	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι	1	commanded him to be bound	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	33	y6zw	figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς	1	he was asking who he might be and what he had done	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking, ‘Who is this? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	21	33	fi22	figs-explicit	ἐπυνθάνετο	1	he was asking	Luke means implicitly that the commander **was asking** the people in the crowd these questions, not that he was asking them of Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was asking the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	21	34	k35e	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ&αὐτὸν	1	he … him	The pronoun **he** refers to the commander, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	21	34	k35e	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1	he … him	The pronoun **he** refers to the commander, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	21	34	a466	figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀσφαλὲς	1	the certain	Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth about Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	21	34	qcc6	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	ordered him to be brought	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	35	h9n7	figs-activepassive	βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν	1	he was carried by the soldiers	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers carried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	35	a467	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν βίαν τοῦ ὄχλου	1	because of the violence of the crowd	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the crowd was so violent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	21	36	kax6	figs-euphemism	αἶρε αὐτόν	1	Take him away	The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a mild way of referring to this in your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-ACT	21	37	j9xk	figs-activepassive	μέλλων&εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος	1	as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	21	37	j9xk	figs-activepassive	μέλλων & εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος	1	as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	21	37	a468		ὁ Παῦλος λέγει	1	Paul says	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said”
 ACT	21	37	a469	figs-quotations	ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ?	1	Paul says to the chiliarch, “If it is permitted for me to say something to you?”	Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	21	37	p5cd	figs-rquestion	Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις?	1	Do you know Greek?	The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT	21	38	xx2w	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?	1	Are you not then the Egyptian&?	The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT	21	38	xx2w	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?	1	Are you not then the Egyptian & ?	The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	21	38	p2ym	translate-transliterate	τῶν σικαρίων	1	of the Sicarii	The term **Sicarii** is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 ACT	21	39	a470	translate-names	Ταρσεὺς	1	a Tarsian	The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	21	39	a471	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης	1	a not undistinguished city	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	21	39	a139	figs-imperative	ἐπίτρεψόν μοι	1	allow me	This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT	21	40	qp2q	writing-pronouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος&αὐτοῦ	1	when he had allowed	The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	21	40	qp2q	writing-pronouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	when he had allowed	The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	21	40	rk1y	translate-symaction	κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	motioned with his hand to the people	This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	22	intro	gq5g			0		# Acts 22 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “In the Hebrew language”<br><br>Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.<br><br>### “The Way”<br><br>No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen.
 ACT	22	1	lrs0	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	Men, brothers and fathers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2958,13 +2958,13 @@ ACT	22	3	iz4g	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν	1	according to th
 ACT	22	3	lqk7	figs-metaphor	πατρῴου	1	of our fathers	Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	22	3	dbl4		καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον	1	just as all of you are today	Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way that all of you are today”
 ACT	22	4	dr8c	figs-abstractnouns	ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα ἄχρι θανάτου	1	who persecuted this Way unto death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who persecuted this Way to the point of killing those who belonged to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	22	4	a474	writing-pronouns	ὃς&ἐδίωξα	1	who persecuted	Paul is using the pronoun **who** to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	22	4	a474	writing-pronouns	ὃς & ἐδίωξα	1	who persecuted	Paul is using the pronoun **who** to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	22	4	jy3z	figs-metonymy	ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	this Way	Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called the Way. Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to the group called the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	22	4	bk4c	translate-names	ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	this Way	As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	22	5	v2km	writing-politeness	μαρτυρεῖ μοι	1	testifies for me	Paul is speaking politely of the high priest as if it may be assumed that he will willingly testify to what he knows to be true. Use a form in your language that implicitly suggests good will on the part of someone. Alternate translation: “will tell you about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	22	5	a475	figs-metonymy	τὸ πρεσβυτέριον	1	the elderhood	Paul is referring to the Sanhedrin by association with the way it was composed of the elders of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	22	5	in72	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	22	5	y82b	figs-activepassive	ἄξων&τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	going to bring back bound to Jerusalem those who were there	If your language does not use the passive form **bound**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to bind those who were there and bring them back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	22	5	y82b	figs-activepassive	ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	going to bring back bound to Jerusalem those who were there	If your language does not use the passive form **bound**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to bind those who were there and bring them back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	5	ht9f	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν	1	in order that they might be punished	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that they might receive punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	6	w4l7	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	It happened to me that	Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	22	7	a476	figs-quotesinquotes	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις?	1	a voice saying to me, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me?’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “someone addressing me by name and asking me why I was persecuting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@@ -2972,7 +2972,7 @@ ACT	22	7	d6nd	figs-synecdoche	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	a voice sayi
 ACT	22	7	a477	figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	why are you persecuting me?	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	22	8	a478	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὃν σὺ διώκεις	1	And I answered, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And he said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	22	8	a479	writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε	1	Who are you, Lord	Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	22	9	h95h	figs-idiom	τὴν&φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	they did not hear the voice	In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../09/07.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	22	9	h95h	figs-idiom	τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	they did not hear the voice	In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../09/07.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	22	10	a480	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι	1	But I said, ‘What should I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Arising, go into Damascus, and there it will be told to you about all that has been appointed to you to do.’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	22	10	a91a	figs-activepassive	σοι λαληθήσεται	1	it will be told to you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	10	a481	figs-activepassive	πάντων ὧν τέτακταί	1	all that has been appointed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ ACT	22	13	un4g	figs-metaphor	Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Saul, brother	Ananias
 ACT	22	13	a484	figs-imperative	ἀνάβλεψον	1	look up	In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would **look up** as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
 ACT	22	13	x3kc	figs-idiom	ἀνάβλεψον	1	look up	The expression **look up** can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	22	13	se47	figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	in the same hour	In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right at that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	22	13	x4s0	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ&ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν	1	And … I looked up to him	Paul means implicitly that when he **looked up** at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	22	13	x4s0	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ & ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν	1	And … I looked up to him	Paul means implicitly that when he **looked up** at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	22	14	a485	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	And he said, ‘The God of our fathers appointed you to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	22	14	a486	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων	1	fathers	Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	22	14	a487	figs-nominaladj	τὸν Δίκαιον	1	the Righteous One	Ananias is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun to mean a particular person who is righteous. ULT adds the word **one** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One who is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -3016,10 +3016,10 @@ ACT	22	22	a498	figs-metonymy	τούτου τοῦ λόγου	1	this word	This co
 ACT	22	22	a499	figs-metaphor	ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες	1	they lifted up their voice, saying	Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally **lifted up** its **voice**. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	22	22	a500		τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	their voice	If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of “lifting up a voice” but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”
 ACT	22	22	ta8z	figs-metonymy	αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	Remove such a one from the earth	The crowd is referring to Paul’s death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	22	22	a501	figs-explicit	οὐ&καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν	1	it was not right for him to live	The crowd meant implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	22	22	a501	figs-explicit	οὐ & καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν	1	it was not right for him to live	The crowd meant implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	22	23	b6a7	translate-symaction	ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια	1	casting off their outer garments	When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	22	23	a502	translate-symaction	κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα	1	throwing dust into the air	This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were **throwing dust into the air** to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT	22	24	h6gp	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν&εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	ordered him to be brought	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	22	24	h6gp	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	ordered him to be brought	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	24	sth6		τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	the fortress	This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [21:34](../21/34.md).
 ACT	22	24	og3n	figs-activepassive	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanding him to be examined by scourges	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	24	pz47	figs-metonymy	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanding him to be examined by scourges	The commander did not want **scourges** to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, **scourges**, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -3031,11 +3031,11 @@ ACT	22	25	a505	figs-explicit	ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκα
 ACT	22	26	pca7	figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	What are you about to do?	The centurion is using the question form to warn the commander that he should not have Paul whipped. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	22	26	a506	figs-synecdoche	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	What are you about to do?	The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	22	26	a507	figs-explicit	Ῥωμαῖός	1	a Roman	As in the previous verse, here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	22	27	pe31	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&ὁ	1	to him … he	The pronouns **them**, **him**, and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	22	27	pe31	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & ὁ	1	to him … he	The pronouns **them**, **him**, and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	22	28	dr2w	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money	The commander is saying implicitly that he does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	22	28	r79c	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	I bought this citizenship with a large sum of money	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **citizenship**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	22	28	a508	figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ&καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	I indeed was born	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT	22	28	rly1	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ&καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	I indeed was born	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	22	28	a508	figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	I indeed was born	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT	22	28	rly1	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	I indeed was born	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	29	a509	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθη	1	was afraid	The implication is that the commander **was afraid** that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	22	30	a510	figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀσφαλὲς	1	the certain	Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	22	30	kx58	figs-explicit	ἔλυσεν αὐτόν	1	he released him	This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3070,7 +3070,7 @@ ACT	23	9	a520	figs-explicit	εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτ
 ACT	23	9	a521	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος?	1	And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel?	These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	23	10	f568	figs-activepassive	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Paul be torn apart by them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	23	10	tqhu	figs-hyperbole	μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	lest Paul be torn apart by them	Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	23	11	i9w5	figs-idiom	τῇ&ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	on the following night	This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	23	11	i9w5	figs-idiom	τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	on the following night	This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	23	11	a522	writing-politeness	ὁ Κύριος	1	the Lord	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	23	11	r4q4	figs-explicit	εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι	1	to testify in Rome	Jesus assumes that Paul will know that he means Paul will **testify** about him in Rome. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	23	12	a523	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -3080,14 +3080,14 @@ ACT	23	14	a525	figs-explicitinfo	ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμε
 ACT	23	14	a526	figs-synecdoche	μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι	1	to eat nothing	Since the men actually swore that they would **eat** or drink nothing, they are using one part of their oath to represent all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat and drink nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	23	15	u8xm	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	23	15	a527	figs-imperative	ἐμφανίσατε	1	make it appear	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT	23	16	a531	figs-metonymy	ἀκούσας&τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	hearing the ambush	Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	23	16	a531	figs-metonymy	ἀκούσας & τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	hearing the ambush	Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	23	16	w6fe	translate-kinship	ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου	1	the son of the sister of Paul	Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or “the nephew of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 ACT	23	17	a528	figs-imperative	ἄπαγε	1	take	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT	23	18	abd0	writing-pronouns	ὁ&παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	taking him, he brought him	The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	23	18	abd0	writing-pronouns	ὁ & παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	taking him, he brought him	The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	23	18	lrs3		φησίν	1	says	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
 ACT	23	19	a530	translate-symaction	ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	taking hold of his hand	The chiliarch **taking hold** of the **hand** of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a **private** location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	23	20	uv6r	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	The Jews	Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, **The Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	23	21	a532	figs-activepassive	σὺ&μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς	1	may you not be persuaded by them	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	23	21	a532	figs-activepassive	σὺ & μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς	1	may you not be persuaded by them	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	23	21	a533	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν	1	the promise from you	By the word **promise**, Paul’s nephew is referring to the commander agreeing to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin the next day and actually bringing him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	23	22	a534	figs-quotations	παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ	1	commanding him to tell no one that “you have reported these things to me”	Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	23	23	mgi9	translate-numbers	δεξιολάβους διακοσίους	1	200 spearmen	Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -3100,30 +3100,30 @@ ACT	23	26	zf93	figs-123person	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίσ
 ACT	23	26	yk79	figs-ellipsis	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix	As was also the convention in this culture, the letter-writer leaves it unstated but understood that he is writing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply those words. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	23	26	vg8y	translate-names	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας	1	Claudius Lysias	The words **Claudius Lysias** are the name of the commander. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	23	26	u2ih	writing-politeness	τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	to the most excellent Governor Felix	The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to the Honorable Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	23	27	yy0e	figs-activepassive	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, καὶ μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν&ἐξειλάμην	1	This man, having been seized by the Jews and about to be killed by them … I rescued	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Learning that the Jews had seized this man and that they were about to kill him … I rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	23	27	yy0e	figs-activepassive	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, καὶ μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν & ἐξειλάμην	1	This man, having been seized by the Jews and about to be killed by them … I rescued	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Learning that the Jews had seized this man and that they were about to kill him … I rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	23	27	zr7l	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	The commander is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	23	27	a538	figs-explicit	Ῥωμαῖός	1	a Roman	Here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	23	28	a539	figs-extrainfo	κατήγαγον	1	I took him down	The commander says that he took Paul ** down** to the Sanhedrin because he brought him down the steps from the Roman fortress to the temple courtyard. It may not be necessary to reproduce this detail in your translation. Alternate translation: “I brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ACT	23	29	zt4f	figs-activepassive	ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν; μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα	1	whom I found being accused about questions of their law but having no accusation worthy of death or chains	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I found that the Jews were accusing him about questions of their law, but they were not accusing him of anything worthy of death or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	23	29	wsh2	figs-metonymy	θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν	1	death or chains	The commander is using the word **death** to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used **chains** to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “of being put to death or being put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	23	30	i2ji	figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης&μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι	1	when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	23	30	i2ji	figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης & μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι	1	when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	23	31	ny4k	figs-activepassive	κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	according to what had been commanded to them	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	23	31	ifs1	translate-names	τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα	1	Antipatris	The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	23	32	abd1	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ, ὑπέστρεψαν	1	they returned … him	The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	23	33	abx1	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ	1	who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him	The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	23	34	dtx1	figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	having asked what province he was from	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT	23	35	mga2	figs-activepassive	κελεύσας&φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	commanding him to be guarded	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	23	35	mga2	figs-activepassive	κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	commanding him to be guarded	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	24	intro	j74u			0		# Acts 24 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Respect<br><br>Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Governmental leaders<br><br>The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	24	1	a540	writing-participants	ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός	1	a certain orator, Tertullus	Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 ACT	24	1	f3vx	translate-unknown	ῥήτορος	1	an orator	In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	24	1	xm6c	translate-names	Τερτύλλου τινός	1	Tertullus	The word **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	24	1	a541	figs-idiom	κατέβη	1	came down	Luke says that these men **came down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	24	2	a542	figs-activepassive	κληθέντος&αὐτοῦ	1	when he had been summoned	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	24	2	a542	figs-activepassive	κληθέντος & αὐτοῦ	1	when he had been summoned	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	24	2	a543	writing-pronouns	κατηγορεῖν	1	to accuse him	The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	24	2	e6zg	figs-exclusive	τυγχάνοντες	1	we are obtaining	By **we**, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	24	2	qw1r	writing-pronouns	σοῦ&σῆς	1	you … your	Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	24	2	qw1r	writing-pronouns	σοῦ & σῆς	1	you … your	Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	24	2	a544	figs-explicit	τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ	1	for this people	Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people** he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	24	3	a545	figs-hyperbole	πάντῃ&πανταχοῦ&πάσης	1	every way … everywhere … all	Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	24	3	a545	figs-hyperbole	πάντῃ & πανταχοῦ & πάσης	1	every way … everywhere … all	Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	24	3	q3fj	writing-politeness	κράτιστε Φῆλιξ	1	most excellent Felix	The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	24	3	r5jl	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας	1	with all thankfulness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **thankfulness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	24	4	tyq8	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	to us	By **us**, Tertullus means himself and the Jewish leaders on whose behalf he is speaking. He does not mean Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking. So use the exclusive form of “us” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -3149,15 +3149,15 @@ ACT	24	16	a554	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀνθρώπους	1	men	Although
 ACT	24	17	p92m	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	24	17	lrs4	figs-go	παρεγενόμην	1	I came	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 ACT	24	17	ryk6	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου	1	to my nation	Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish **nation** live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	24	17	a555	figs-explicit	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων&καὶ προσφοράς	1	bringing alms and offerings	By **alms** Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings** he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	24	17	a555	figs-explicit	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων & καὶ προσφοράς	1	bringing alms and offerings	By **alms** Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings** he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	24	18	a556	writing-pronouns	ἐν αἷς	1	in which	The pronoun **which** refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, ending verse 17 with a period. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	24	19	a557	figs-ellipsis	τινὲς&ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει&παρεῖναι	1	certain Jews from Asia—who ought to be present	As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT	24	19	a557	figs-ellipsis	τινὲς & ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει & παρεῖναι	1	certain Jews from Asia—who ought to be present	As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	24	20	a558	figs-imperative3p	αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν	1	let these themselves say	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may these themselves say” or “these themselves should say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	24	20	ag5d	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ οὗτοι	1	these themselves	These pronouns refer to the Jewish leaders who have come to Caesarea to accuse Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jewish leaders who have come here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	24	20	a559	figs-metonymy	στάντος μου ἐπὶ τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	when I stood before the Sanhedrin	Paul is referring to what he said to the Sanhedrin to defend himself by association with the way he **stood** in front of the council as he said it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I defended myself at a meeting of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	24	21	a560	figs-quotesinquotes	ἢ περὶ μιᾶς ταύτης φωνῆς, ἧς ἐκέκραξα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἑστὼς, ὅτι περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν.	1	{other} than regarding this one utterance that I shouted out standing among them, ‘Concerning the resurrection of the dead I am being judged by you today!’”	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “other than that when I was standing among them, I shouted that I was being judged by them that day concerning the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	24	21	ds1s	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	concerning the resurrection of the dead	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because I believe that God will make those who have died alive again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	24	21	d2lm	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι&ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	I am being judged by you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	24	21	d2lm	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι & ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	I am being judged by you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	24	22	z5f9	figs-idiom	καταβῇ	1	may come down	Felix says **may come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	24	23	a561	figs-doublenegatives	μηδένα κωλύειν	1	to forbid none	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **none** and the negative verb **forbid**. Alternate translation: “to allow all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	24	23	a562	figs-explicit	τῶν ἰδίων αὐτοῦ	1	of his own	By **his own**, Luke implicitly means Paul’s **own** friends. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of his friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3165,7 +3165,7 @@ ACT	24	24	qy9y	translate-names	Δρουσίλλῃ	1	Drusilla	The word **Drusill
 ACT	24	24	xmq5	translate-names	οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ	1	being a Jewess	The word **Jewess** is the name for a woman who is Jewish. Alternate translation: “who was a Jewish woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	24	25	a563	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	he	The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	24	26	h4v7	figs-activepassive	χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	money would be given to him by Paul	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul would give him money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	24	27	a564	figs-idiom	διετίας&πληρωθείσης	1	two years being fulfilled	Luke is describing this time period in the way in which his culture and language spoke about time. The expression can refer to any period of time between one year and two years in length. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “after a couple of years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	24	27	a564	figs-idiom	διετίας & πληρωθείσης	1	two years being fulfilled	Luke is describing this time period in the way in which his culture and language spoke about time. The expression can refer to any period of time between one year and two years in length. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “after a couple of years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	24	27	ur2y	translate-names	Πόρκιον Φῆστον	1	Porcius Festus	The words **Porcius Festus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	24	27	p59c	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who were hostile to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	24	27	gln6	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένον	1	bound	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in bonds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3176,25 +3176,25 @@ ACT	25	1	a567	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιβὰς	1	having set foot	Luke is using one
 ACT	25	1	a568	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ	1	in the province	By **the province**, Luke implicitly means the province of Judea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	25	1	zz4l	figs-idiom	ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας	1	went up from Caesarea to Jerusalem	Luke says that Festus **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	25	2	a569	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the first of the Jews	Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most prominent of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT	25	3	w8um	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ&αὐτὸν&αὐτὸν	1	him … him … him	The pronoun **him** refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	25	3	w8um	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν	1	him … him … him	The pronoun **him** refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	25	3	pg8x	figs-explicit	ἐνέδραν ποιοῦντες ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	making an ambush to kill him along the way	It was the Jewish leaders who were secretly **making an ambush**. This was not part of what they were **requesting** Festus to do. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But the Jewish leaders were secretly preparing an ambush to kill Paul along the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	25	4	v5f9	figs-quotations	ὁ&Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea but that he himself was about to depart soon	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT	25	4	v5f9	figs-quotations	ὁ & Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea but that he himself was about to depart soon	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	25	4	a570	figs-activepassive	τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον	1	Paul was being held	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was holding Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	25	4	a571	figs-explicit	ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	to depart	Festus means implicitly that he is **about to depart** from Jerusalem and travel to Caesarea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to depart Jerusalem for Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	25	5	a54h	figs-nominaladj	οἱ&ἐν ὑμῖν&δυνατοὶ	1	the powerful among you	Festus is using the adjective **powerful** as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, **powerful** means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT	25	5	a54h	figs-nominaladj	οἱ & ἐν ὑμῖν & δυνατοὶ	1	the powerful among you	Festus is using the adjective **powerful** as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, **powerful** means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	25	5	a572	figs-idiom	συνκαταβάντες	1	having come down together	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Festus says **come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	25	5	nei6	figs-imperative3p	κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ	1	let them accuse him	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they accuse him” or “they should accuse him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	25	6	a573	figs-litotes	ἡμέρας, οὐ πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα	1	not more than eight or ten days	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “less than eight or ten days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	25	6	qv24	translate-symaction	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	having sat in the judgment seat	Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	25	6	j7c5	figs-activepassive	τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι	1	Paul to be brought to him	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his soldiers to bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	25	7	v4v8	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ&αὐτὸν	1	he … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT	25	7	v4v8	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1	he … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	25	7	e7g2		πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα	1	many and serious charges	It may be more natural in your language not to use the word **and** between these adjectives. Alternate translation: “many serious charges” or “many charges that were all serious”
 ACT	25	8	a574	figs-synecdoche	εἰς Καίσαρά	1	against Caesar	Paul is using the leader of the Roman government to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	25	9	b49x	figs-synecdoche	θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	wanting to do a favor for the Jews	Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who were opposing Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	25	9	a575	figs-metaphor	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	to lay down a favor for the Jews	Luke is speaking as if the Festus wanted to **lay down** a favor physically for the Jewish leaders, as if they would pick it up and leave something else for him in its place. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to do a favor for the Jewish leaders that they would later return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	25	9	l560	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς τῷ Παύλῳ εἶπεν	1	answering Paul, said	Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Festus responded to Paul. Alternate translation: “Festus responded to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	25	9	qe8h	figs-idiom	εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς	1	having gone up to Jerusalem	Festus says **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	25	9	wi2d	figs-activepassive	εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα&ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	to Jerusalem, to be judged there before me about these things	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	25	9	wi2d	figs-activepassive	εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα & ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	to Jerusalem, to be judged there before me about these things	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	25	10	u1ef	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι	1	I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar	Paul is referring to Caesar’s authority to judge him by association with the **judgment seat** where Caesar sat when he judged cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	25	10	a576	figs-synecdoche	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι	1	I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar	Paul is using **Caesar**, the leader of the Roman government, to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	25	10	p78y	figs-activepassive	οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	where it is necessary for me to be judged	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where it is necessary for someone to judge me”; or, if you translated the previous phrase as “I am being judged by the Roman government”: “which is the authority that ought to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3215,21 +3215,21 @@ ACT	25	17	hm6g	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄ
 ACT	25	19	d1qm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας	1	their own religion	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **religion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their religious beliefs” or “their beliefs about God and spiritual things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	25	20	l564	figs-quotations	ἔλεγον εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων	1	asked if he might be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked, ‘Might you be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	25	20	y9bv	figs-activepassive	κρίνεσθαι	1	and be judged	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have me judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	25	21	ie7x	figs-activepassive	τοῦ&Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν	1	appealed that he be kept	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when Paul asked that I keep him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	25	21	ie7x	figs-activepassive	τοῦ & Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν	1	appealed that he be kept	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when Paul asked that I keep him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	25	21	l570	writing-politeness	τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ	1	of the August one	Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “of His Majesty the Emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	25	21	ceq2	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν	1	I commanded him to be kept	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I commanded the guards to keep him in custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	25	22	l565	figs-rpronouns	ἐβουλόμην καὶ αὐτὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀκοῦσαι	1	I myself was also wanting to hear this man	Agrippa is using the reflexive pronoun **myself** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I too would certainly want to hear this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ACT	25	22	l566		φησίν	1	he says	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “he said”
 ACT	25	23	at4t	figs-activepassive	ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος	1	Paul was brought	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	25	24	l567	figs-gendernotations	πάντες οἱ&ἄνδρες	1	all the men	Although the term **men** is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are **present**, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ACT	25	24	l567	figs-gendernotations	πάντες οἱ & ἄνδρες	1	all the men	Although the term **men** is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are **present**, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ACT	25	24	l571	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	with us	By **us**, Festus means himself and King Agrippa but not the rest of the crowd to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	25	24	n8qj	figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐνέτυχόν μοι	1	the whole multitude of the Jews petitioned me	Festus says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the multitude of the Jews petitioned me urgently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	25	24	l568	figs-quotations	βοῶντες μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	shouting that he ought not to live any longer	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “shouting, ‘He ought not to live any longer!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	25	24	yv2q	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	he ought not to live any longer	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he ought not to live no longer.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	25	25	g856	writing-politeness	τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	to the August one	Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to His Majesty The Empeor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	25	26	l569	writing-politeness	τῷ κυρίῳ	1	to the lord	Festus is referring to the emperor by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to our lord the emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	25	26	fe2n	figs-yousingular	ὑμῶν&σοῦ	1	of you … you	Here the first instance of **you** is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ACT	25	27	txs6	figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον&μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ&σημᾶναι	1	it seems unreasonable to me, sending a prisoner and not to state	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **unreasonable**. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	25	26	fe2n	figs-yousingular	ὑμῶν & σοῦ	1	of you … you	Here the first instance of **you** is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT	25	27	txs6	figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι	1	it seems unreasonable to me, sending a prisoner and not to state	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **unreasonable**. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	26	intro	e2q6			0		# Acts 26 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))<br><br>Paul told King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and said that the governor should not punish him for that.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
 ACT	26	1	l573	figs-activepassive	ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι	1	it is permitted to you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I permit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	26	1	wme6	translate-symaction	ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα	1	stretching out his hand	This could mean: (1) that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (2) that as Paul spoke, he used hand gestures to emphasize the points he was making. Alternate translation: “gesturing with his hand as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -3248,7 +3248,7 @@ ACT	26	6	l576	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Pa
 ACT	26	6	l577	figs-exclusive	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	26	7	hnf1	figs-metonymy	τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν	1	our 12 tribes	Paul is referring to the people of Israel by association with the way that nation was historically composed of 12 tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	26	7	l578	figs-exclusive	τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν	1	our 12 tribes	By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT	26	7	l579	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ&λατρεῦον	1	serving in earnestness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	26	7	l579	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ & λατρεῦον	1	serving in earnestness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	26	7	kzg4	figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1	night and day	Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to refer to continuous activity throughout a full day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually” or, if you translated **serving in earnestness** as “serving earnestly”: “and continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 ACT	26	7	a580	figs-activepassive	ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	I am being accused by the Jews	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews are accusing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	26	7	c4lm	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	by the Jews	Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by these Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -3259,10 +3259,10 @@ ACT	26	8	ukk6	figs-idiom	νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	raises the dead	Here,
 ACT	26	8	l582	figs-nominaladj	νεκροὺς	1	the dead	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	26	9	r4df	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of Jesus	While in such contexts the word **name** often represents the person who has that name, Paul is describing a time when he did not believe that Jesus was still alive. So here the word **name** seems to represent the reputation and influence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the reputation and influence of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	26	10	b581	figs-metonymy	τῶν ἁγίων	1	of the saints	Paul is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “of the believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT	26	10	b582	figs-synecdoche	ἀναιρουμένων&αὐτῶν	1	when they were being executed	Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his **vote** in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	26	10	nys7	figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων&αὐτῶν	1	when they were being executed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	26	10	b582	figs-synecdoche	ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν	1	when they were being executed	Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his **vote** in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	26	10	nys7	figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν	1	when they were being executed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	26	10	l584	figs-explicit	κατήνεγκα ψῆφον	1	I cast my vote against them	The implication is that Paul **cast his vote** as a member of the Sanhedrin. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “as a member of the Sanhedrin, I cast my vote against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	26	11	b584	figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς&τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	punishing them in all the synagogues	Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT	26	11	b584	figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς & τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	punishing them in all the synagogues	Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	26	12	ajp6	figs-hendiadys	μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς	1	with authority and a commission	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **authority** tells what kind of **commission** the **chief priests** gave Paul. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “with an authoritative commission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 ACT	26	14	l585	figs-quotesinquotes	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me? It is hard for you to kick against a goad.’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, calling me twice by name, asking me why I was persecuting him, and telling me it was hard for me to kick against a goad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	26	14	sip5	figs-personification	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με	1	I heard a voice speaking to me	Paul is speaking of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “I heard someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -3270,7 +3270,7 @@ ACT	26	14	du3t	figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	why are you persecutin
 ACT	26	14	zsi2	figs-metaphor	σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	It is hard for you to kick against a goad	The voice is speaking as if Paul were literally kicking against a **goad**, that is, a sharp object that people use to prod an animal. The voice means that by opposing Jesus and persecuting believers, Paul is hurting himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are hurting yourself by what you are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	26	15	l586	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα, τίς εἶ, κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς, ὃν σὺ διώκεις	1	And I said, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And the Lord said, ‘I am Jesus, whom you are persecuting	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I asked the Lord who he was, and the Lord said that he was Jesus, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	26	15	l587	writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε	1	Who are you, Lord	When Paul replied to the voice, he was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, in your translation you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	26	15	l588	writing-politeness	ὁ&Κύριος εἶπεν	1	the Lord said	In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT	26	15	l588	writing-politeness	ὁ & Κύριος εἶπεν	1	the Lord said	In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	26	16	l589	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὤφθην σοι, προχειρίσασθαί σε ὑπηρέτην καὶ μάρτυρα, ὧν τε εἶδές με ὧν τε ὀφθήσομαί σοι	1	But get up and stand on your feet, because for this I have appeared to you, to appoint you a servant and a witness both of the things in which you have seen me and of the things in which I will be shown to you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He told me to get up and stand on my feet, because for this he had appeared to me, to appoint me a servant and a witness both of the things in which I had seen him and of the things in which he would be shown to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	26	16	a590	figs-explicitinfo	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου	1	get up and stand on your feet	It might seem that the expression **get up and stand on your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “stand up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	26	16	a591	figs-activepassive	ὀφθήσομαί σοι	1	I will be shown to you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3289,22 +3289,22 @@ ACT	26	20	fei4	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1
 ACT	26	20	h1v2	figs-abstractnouns	ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας	1	doing deeds worthy of repentance	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “doing deeds that showed that they had truly repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	26	21	tl6t	figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who opposed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	26	22	t8f4	figs-merism	μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ	1	to both small and great	Paul is referring to people of every kind by naming two extremes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to people of every kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-ACT	26	22	f6py	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς&ὧν	1	nothing except the things	If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke **nothing** and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+ACT	26	22	f6py	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν	1	nothing except the things	If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke **nothing** and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 ACT	26	23	pe9h	figs-explicit	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim	Paul could be saying that this is what Moses and the prophets said about the Messiah. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They addressed the question as to whether the Christ would be a sufferer, as to whether he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	26	23	l597	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim	Paul could be speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility even though he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now since the Christ was a sufferer, since he was the first from the resurrection of the dead, then he was going to proclaim light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ACT	26	23	p9t8	figs-abstractnouns	πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	the first from the resurrection of the dead	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the first person whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	26	23	sc5f	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	of the dead	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	26	23	z2ms	figs-metaphor	φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	was going to proclaim light	Paul is saying that the truth that Jesus proclaimed about God was like a **light** that allowed people to see. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was going to proclaim the truth about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	26	23	a595	figs-explicit	τῷ&λαῷ	1	to the people	By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	26	24	a596		ὁ Φῆστος&φησιν	1	Festus says	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said”
+ACT	26	23	a595	figs-explicit	τῷ & λαῷ	1	to the people	By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	26	24	a596		ὁ Φῆστος & φησιν	1	Festus says	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said”
 ACT	26	24	tk27	figs-personification	τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει	1	Great learning is turning you to insanity	Festus is speaking of **learning** as if it were a living thing that was **turning** Paul from sanity to insanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have become insane from learning so much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	26	25	dur9	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μαίνομαι	1	I am not insane	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **insane**. Alternate translation: “I am completely sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ACT	26	25	a6pb	writing-politeness	κράτιστε Φῆστε	1	most excellent Festus	The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Honorable Governor Festus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
 ACT	26	25	a597	figs-possession	ἀληθείας καὶ σωφροσύνης ῥήματα	1	words of truth and of sanity	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the character of the **words** he is **speaking**. Alternate translation: “words that are true and sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ACT	26	26	cs7b	writing-politeness	πρὸς ὃν καὶ παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ	1	to whom indeed, speaking boldly, I am talking	Paul recognizes that he is being very outspoken in response to King Agrippa’s invitation to speak for himself, so he implicitly apologizes. In your translation, you could use a comparable expression from your language and culture. Alternate translation: “and I hope that he will pardon me for speaking so boldly as I talk to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT	26	26	tta8	figs-doublenegatives	λανθάνειν&αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν	1	I am not persuaded that any of these things at all eludes him	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that not any of these things eludes him.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT	26	26	v1uu	figs-activepassive	οὐ&ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	this has not been done in a corner	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	26	26	xqr1	figs-litotes	οὐ&ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	this has not been done in a corner	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT	26	26	tta8	figs-doublenegatives	λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν	1	I am not persuaded that any of these things at all eludes him	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that not any of these things eludes him.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT	26	26	v1uu	figs-activepassive	οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	this has not been done in a corner	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	26	26	xqr1	figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	this has not been done in a corner	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	26	26	i5wg	figs-metaphor	ἐν γωνίᾳ	1	in a corner	Paul is speaking as if Jesus might have done things secretly, as if he had done them **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “secretly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	26	27	a4a2	figs-rquestion	πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις?	1	Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa?	Paul asks this question to challenge **King Agrippa** to recognize that if he believes what the prophets wrote, then he should believe that Jesus rose from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should believe what I am saying about Jesus since you believe the prophets, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ACT	26	28	y8qq	figs-rquestion	ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι?	1	In little are you persuading me to make me a Christian?	Agrippa is using the question form to challenge Paul. He is asserting that what Paul has said so far is not sufficiently persuasive. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian with so little proof.” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian in such a short time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -3321,7 +3321,7 @@ ACT	27	1	s6ny	writing-participants	ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰ
 ACT	27	1	un2s	translate-names	Ἰουλίῳ	1	Julius	The word **Julius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	1	d22f	translate-names	σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	of the Augustan regiment	The **Augustan regiment** was the name of the military unit from which this centurion came. Some versions translate this as the “Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	2	efe4	translate-names	Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	Adramyttium	The word ** Adramyttium ** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	27	2	dnr9	figs-metonymy	πλοίῳ&μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	a ship … being about to sail	Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	27	2	dnr9	figs-metonymy	πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	a ship … being about to sail	Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	27	2	h3uy	translate-names	Ἀριστάρχου	1	Aristarchus	The word **Aristarchus** is the name of a man who came from Macedonia but who had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	3	a602	figs-idiom	κατήχθημεν εἰς Σιδῶνα	1	we came down to Sidon	As the General Notes to this chapter explain, Luke says that he and the other travelers **came down** to Sidon because that was the customary way in this culture of describing people arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	3	rp73	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν	1	to receive their care	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **care**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -3332,7 +3332,7 @@ ACT	27	6	j4cf	figs-metonymy	πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον
 ACT	27	6	fdq2	translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρῖνον	1	from Alexandria	The word **Alexandrian** is the name for someone or something that comes from the city of Alexandria. See how you translated it in [18:24](../18/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	7	zzw1	figs-explicit	ἐν ἱκαναῖς δὲ ἡμέραις, βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον	1	sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the ship was **sailing slowly** and **with difficulty** because it was sailing into the wind. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus because we were sailing into the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	27	7	pye5	translate-names	τὴν Κνίδον	1	Cnidus	The word **Cnidus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	27	7	mq4n	translate-names	τὴν Κρήτην&Σαλμώνην	1	Crete … Salmone	The word **Crete** is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in [2:11](../02/11.md). The word **Salmone** is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	27	7	mq4n	translate-names	τὴν Κρήτην & Σαλμώνην	1	Crete … Salmone	The word **Crete** is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in [2:11](../02/11.md). The word **Salmone** is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	8	b604	writing-pronouns	παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν	1	sailing along it	The pronoun **it** refers the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing along the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	27	8	p4ri	figs-explicit	μόλις	1	with difficulty	The implication is that even under the shelter of the island of Crete, the winds were still so strong as to make sailing to the west difficult. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with difficulty because the winds from the west were strong even there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	27	8	a64y	translate-names	Καλοὺς Λιμένας	1	Fair Havens	The word **Fair Havens** is the name of a port on the south coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -3342,14 +3342,14 @@ ACT	27	9	u6x5	figs-metonymy	τὴν νηστείαν	1	the fast	Luke is referrin
 ACT	27	9	a606	writing-pronouns	παρῄνει ὁ Παῦλος	1	Paul was warning them	The pronoun **them** refers to the centurion and to the pilot and owner of the ship, as verse 11 makes clear. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was warning Julius and the pilot and the owner of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	27	10	p29v	figs-metaphor	θεωρῶ	1	I see	Paul is speaking as if he could literally **see** the things he describes. He means that God has revealed them to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has revealed to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	27	10	nx9c	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν	1	the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **injury** and **loss**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “on this voyage, many of us will be injured and we will lose many valuable things. We will not only lose the cargo and the ship, we will lose our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	27	11	b1kz	figs-activepassive	ὁ&ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	the centurion was being persuaded more by the pilot and by the captain than by the things being spoken by Paul	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	27	11	b1kz	figs-activepassive	ὁ & ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	the centurion was being persuaded more by the pilot and by the captain than by the things being spoken by Paul	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	11	a607	figs-explicit	τῷ ναυκλήρῳ	1	by the captain	Here the word **captain** could mean: (1) someone who was in command of the ship. Alternate translation: “the ship’s commander” (2) someone who owned the ship and was in command of it. However, while this is a common meaning of the word, it is unlikely in this context. We learn from the story that this ship was carrying grain from Egypt to Italy and so it would have belonged to the emperor’s own fleet. Alternate translation: “the shipowner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	27	12	jmi3	translate-unknown	λιμένος	1	harbor	A **harbor** is a place on the coast whose location and shape allow ships to come safely close to the land. If your language does not have a term for such a place, you could use a general description in your translation. Alternate translation: “place of access to the shore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT	27	12	z1lf	translate-unknown	παραχειμασίαν&παραχειμάσαι	1	wintering … to winter there	The terms **wintering** and **to winter** mean to stay in a place that is safe during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT	27	12	z1lf	translate-unknown	παραχειμασίαν & παραχειμάσαι	1	wintering … to winter there	The terms **wintering** and **to winter** mean to stay in a place that is safe during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	12	k2ti	translate-names	Φοίνικα	1	Phoenix	The word **Phoenix** is the name of a port city on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	12	a608	figs-idiom	βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind	This expression means that the Phoenix harbor provided access for ships to sail out in the directions that the winds coming from the **southwest** and the **northwest** blew. That is, ships would sail out to the northeast and southeast from the harbor, and they would enter the harbor from the northeast or southeast. Your language and culture may have a comparable expression of its own that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could describe this in general terms. Alternate translation: “looking down the northwest wind and down the southwest wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	12	x6vl	figs-metaphor	βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind	Luke is speaking as if the harbor of Phoenix was literally **looking** in these directions. He means that it gave access for ships to sail in those directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “giving access for sailing to the northeast or to the southeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	27	12	gyd2	translate-unknown	λίβα&χῶρον	1	the southwest … the northwest	These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The **southwest** is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the **northwest** is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT	27	12	gyd2	translate-unknown	λίβα & χῶρον	1	the southwest … the northwest	These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The **southwest** is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the **northwest** is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	13	xx67	translate-unknown	ἄραντες	1	having raised {the anchor}	An **anchor** is a heavy object that is attached to a rope that is tied to a ship. The ship’s crew tosses the anchor into the water and it sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. The crew raises the anchor out of the water when it is time for the ship to travel. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. Alternate translation: “having weighed anchor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	13	a603	writing-pronouns	παρελέγοντο	1	they were sailing	The pronoun **they** refers to the crew of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the crew was sailing the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	27	14	m2xe	figs-litotes	μετ’ οὐ πολὺ	1	not long after	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “after a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -3357,11 +3357,11 @@ ACT	27	14	g1ek	translate-transliterate	ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλ
 ACT	27	14	lrs7	figs-activepassive	ὁ καλούμενος	1	called	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the sailors called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	14	tz2k	writing-pronouns	αὐτῆς	1	it	The pronoun **it** refers to the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	27	15	a609	figs-activepassive	συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the wind seized the ship, so that we were not able to face into the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	27	15	a610	figs-personification	συναρπασθέντος&τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind	Luke is speaking of the **wind** as if it were a living thing that **seized** the **ship**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT	27	15	a610	figs-personification	συναρπασθέντος & τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind	Luke is speaking of the **wind** as if it were a living thing that **seized** the **ship**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	27	15	a611	figs-metaphor	ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	to face into the wind	Luke is speaking as if the ship literally had a **face** that it could turn towards the wind. Your language may have an expression that suits this context and that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to bear up against the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	27	15	w1hl	figs-activepassive	ἐφερόμεθα	1	we were driven along	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind drove us along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	27	16	c4cg	figs-idiom	νησίον&τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	running under a certain island called Cauda	The expression **running under** is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	27	16	a612	figs-activepassive	νησίον&τι&καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	a certain island called Cauda	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	27	16	c4cg	figs-idiom	νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	running under a certain island called Cauda	The expression **running under** is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	27	16	a612	figs-activepassive	νησίον & τι & καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	a certain island called Cauda	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	16	aq56	translate-names	Καῦδα	1	Cauda	The word **Cauda** is the name of a small island located off the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	16	h9z2	translate-unknown	τῆς σκάφης	1	of the lifeboat	A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that crews sometimes tow behind their larger ship and sometimes bring up onto the ship and tie down. They use the smaller boat for various reasons, including escaping from the larger ship if it is sinking. If your language does not have a term for a smaller boat like this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the smaller utility boat that the ship was towing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	17	tx1f	figs-idiom	βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον	1	they were using helps, undergirding the ship	The word **helps** is a nautical term that means ropes or cables. The word **undergirding** describes the process of running ropes or cables around the bottom of a ship so that the ship will not come apart during a storm. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were tying ropes around the bottom of the ship so that it would not come apart during the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -3371,53 +3371,53 @@ ACT	27	17	dvv4	translate-names	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	the Syrtis	The word **Syrt
 ACT	27	17	l615	translate-unknown	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	the Syrtis	Quicksand, which the word **Syrtis** describes, is sand that is saturated with water. It does not support the weight of a person, so sailors cannot get out of a ship to free it if the ship gets stuck in quicksand. If your readers would not be familiar with quicksand, you could describe it generally in your translation. Alternate translation: “the large mass of waterlogged sand off the north coast of Africa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	17	l8kl	translate-unknown	χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος	1	lowering the gear	The term **gear** could mean: (1) the sails of the ship and the rigging that the sailors uses to raise and lower the sails. If this is the meaning, then Luke is saying that without sails, the sailors could not steer the ship and it had to go wherever the wind drove it. Alternate translation: “taking down the sails” (2) a sea anchor, that is, some object that the sailors would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow the ship down. If this is the meaning, then the sailors lowered this sea anchor in the hopes that the storm would end before they reached the quicksand. Alternate translation: “putting a sea anchor into the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	17	g7rw	figs-activepassive	ἐφέροντο	1	they were being driven along	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was driving them along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	27	18	fx4m	figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς&χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν	1	we being exceedingly storm-tossed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	27	18	fx4m	figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν	1	we being exceedingly storm-tossed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	18	nd5h	figs-idiom	ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο	1	they were doing a jettison	The word **jettison** is a nautical term that describes sailors throwing the cargo of a ship (the goods that the ship is transporting) into the sea to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent it from sinking. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were throwing the cargo of the ship into the sea to make the ship lighter to try to keep it from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	19	l617	figs-idiom	τῇ τρίτῃ	1	on the third day	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” So here, **the third day** means two days after the sailors tied ropes around the ship and one day after the sailors threw the cargo overboard. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “on the day after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	19	a641	translate-ordinal	τῇ τρίτῃ	1	on the third day	If you retain this idiom but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 ACT	27	19	vm2k	figs-explicit	τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν	1	they threw the equipment of the ship {overboard}	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sailors **threw the equipment … overboard** in a desperate effort to make the ship even lighter. In this context, **equipment** refers to everything the sailors needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates that they had given up on sailing the ship and were hoping just to survive. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they became so desperate that they threw overboard everything they needed to sail the ship, hoping just to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	27	19	l616	figs-synecdoche	αὐτόχειρες	1	with their own hands	Luke is using one part of the sailors, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of throwing the cargo overboard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	27	20	if7a	figs-explicit	μήτε&ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	neither sun nor stars appearing for many days	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the **sun** and **stars** did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	27	20	p2wd	figs-litotes	χειμῶνός&οὐκ ὀλίγου	1	no small storm	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT	27	20	if7a	figs-explicit	μήτε & ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	neither sun nor stars appearing for many days	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the **sun** and **stars** did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT	27	20	p2wd	figs-litotes	χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου	1	no small storm	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	27	20	lrs6	figs-personification	ἐπικειμένου	1	lying upon us	Luke is speaking of the storm as if they were a living thing that was **lying upon** the ship. He means that the storm continued to buffet the ship without ever letting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continually buffeting the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	27	20	mnj5	figs-activepassive	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the same ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we finally lost all hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	20	l618	figs-abstractnouns	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we finally stopped hoping that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	27	20	l619	figs-hyperbole	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away	Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it finally became very difficult to hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT	27	21	d1le	figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς&ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	as there had been much abstinence	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abstinence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	27	21	zns2	translate-symaction	σταθεὶς&ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	having stood up in the midst of them	Paul **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT	27	21	d1le	figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς & ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	as there had been much abstinence	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abstinence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	27	21	zns2	translate-symaction	σταθεὶς & ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	having stood up in the midst of them	Paul **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ACT	27	21	bc1x	figs-doublet	τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν	1	this injury and loss	The terms **injury** and **loss** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “such a great loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	27	22	djh4	figs-ellipsis	ἀποβολὴ&ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	there will be no loss of life among you, only of the ship	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT	27	22	djh4	figs-ellipsis	ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	there will be no loss of life among you, only of the ship	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ACT	27	23	a620	figs-parallelism	τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗ εἰμι, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω	1	of the God whose I am and whom I serve	The phrases **whose I am** and **whom I serve** mean similar things. Paul is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the God I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ACT	27	24	a621	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, μὴ φοβοῦ, Παῦλε; Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι, καὶ ἰδοὺ, κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ Θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ	1	saying, ‘Do not be afraid, Paul. It is necessary for you to stand before Caesar, and behold, God has graciously granted to you all the ones sailing with you.’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The angel told me that I should not be afraid, because it was necessary for me to stand before Caesar, and behold, God had graciously granted to me all the ones sailing with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	27	24	a622	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The angel is using the term **behold** to focus Paul’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	27	24	z1j8	figs-synecdoche	Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι	1	You must stand before Caesar	The angel is using one aspect of the trial process, the fact that an accused person would **stand before** a judge, to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must appear in Caesar’s court so that he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	27	25	r9t8	figs-activepassive	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι	1	according to the way it was told to me	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	27	26	vmp6	figs-idiom	εἰς νῆσον&τινα&ἐκπεσεῖν	1	to fall upon some island	The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	27	26	vmp6	figs-idiom	εἰς νῆσον & τινα & ἐκπεσεῖν	1	to fall upon some island	The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	27	rrm5	translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ	1	the fourteenth night	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “night 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 ACT	27	27	la7u	figs-activepassive	διαφερομένων ἡμῶν	1	as we were being driven about	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was driving us about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	27	afs6	translate-names	τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ	1	the Hadria	The word **Hadria** is the term that people of this culture used to describe the open Mediterranean Sea between Italy and Malta on the west and Greece and Crete on the east. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	27	27	a623	figs-personification	προσάγειν τινὰ αὐτοῖς χώραν	1	some land to be approaching them	Luke is speaking of this **land** as if it were a living thing that was **approaching** the sailors on the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were approaching some land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	27	28	ruj1	figs-idiom	βολίσαντες	1	taking soundings	The expression **taking soundings** is a nautical term that describes sailors determining the depth of the water. Sailors measure this by dropping a marked line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	27	28	tq53	translate-numbers	ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι&ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	20 fathoms&15 fathoms	A **fathom** is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-ACT	27	29	a624	figs-idiom	κατὰ&ἐκπέσωμεν	1	we might fall upon a rugged place	The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on **some rugged place**. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	27	28	tq53	translate-numbers	ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι & ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	20 fathoms & 15 fathoms	A **fathom** is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+ACT	27	29	a624	figs-idiom	κατὰ & ἐκπέσωμεν	1	we might fall upon a rugged place	The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on **some rugged place**. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	29	q4am	figs-idiom	πρύμνης	1	the stern	The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	30	rr89	figs-idiom	πρῴρης	1	the bow	The word **bow** is a nautical term that means the front of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the front of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	31	sz8y	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	you are not able to be saved	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to save yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	32	a625	figs-idiom	ἐκπεσεῖν	1	fall away	The expression **fall away** is a nautical term that in this context could mean: (1) that the soldiers let the lifeboat fall into the water where none of the sailors could get into it, because it was no longer tied to the ship. Alternate translation: “fall into the water” (2) that the soldiers let the lifeboat, which was already in the water, drift away where none of the sailors could get into it. Alternate translation: “drift away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	27	33	j5yg	translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες&διατελεῖτε	1	Anxiously waiting for a fourteenth day today, you are continuing	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is now day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-ACT	27	33	a626	figs-doublet	ἄσιτοι&μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι	1	fasting, having eaten nothing	The expressions **fasting** and **having eaten nothing** mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT	27	34	a627	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο&πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει	1	this is for your salvation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	27	34	j3qx	figs-synecdoche	οὐδενὸς&ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	a hair from the head of none of you will perish	Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a **hair** from his **head**, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	27	36	zt9q	figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι&γενόμενοι πάντες	1	they were all encouraged	The phrase **were … encouraged** is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated **encouraged** is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	27	37	ynq3	writing-background	ἤμεθα&αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	we, all the souls in the ship, were 276	This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT	27	37	a628	figs-synecdoche	αἱ&ψυχαὶ	1	the souls	Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their **souls**, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT	27	38	a629	figs-activepassive	κορεσθέντες&τροφῆς	1	having been satisfied with food	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	27	33	j5yg	translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες & διατελεῖτε	1	Anxiously waiting for a fourteenth day today, you are continuing	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is now day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+ACT	27	33	a626	figs-doublet	ἄσιτοι & μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι	1	fasting, having eaten nothing	The expressions **fasting** and **having eaten nothing** mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT	27	34	a627	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο & πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει	1	this is for your salvation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT	27	34	j3qx	figs-synecdoche	οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	a hair from the head of none of you will perish	Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a **hair** from his **head**, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	27	36	zt9q	figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι & γενόμενοι πάντες	1	they were all encouraged	The phrase **were … encouraged** is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated **encouraged** is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	27	37	ynq3	writing-background	ἤμεθα & αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	we, all the souls in the ship, were 276	This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+ACT	27	37	a628	figs-synecdoche	αἱ & ψυχαὶ	1	the souls	Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their **souls**, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	27	38	a629	figs-activepassive	κορεσθέντες & τροφῆς	1	having been satisfied with food	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	39	a643	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον	1	they were not recognizing	Here and in the rest of this verse and in the next verse, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were not recognizing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT	27	39	vdk2	translate-unknown	κόλπον&τινα	1	a certain bay	A **bay** is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this kind of area. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT	27	39	vdk2	translate-unknown	κόλπον & τινα	1	a certain bay	A **bay** is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this kind of area. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	40	ntr9	figs-idiom	τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων	1	the bands of the rudders	The words **bands** and **rudders** are nautical terms. The **rudders** were large pieces of wood at the back of the ship that the sailors used for steering the ship. The **bands** were ropes or cords that held the rudders out of the water while anchors were holding the ship in one place. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the ropes that held out of the water the pieces of wood that the sailors used to steer the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	40	cn2w	translate-unknown	τὸν ἀρτέμωνα	1	the topsail	A sail is a large piece of cloth that catches the wind in order to propel a ship through the water. A **topsail** is a sail that sailors place at the top of a mast on a ship. A mast is a vertical pole with cross-poles that hold sails. Alternate translation: “the sail that sailors put at the top of a pole, high above the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	27	40	pa1k	figs-idiom	κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν	1	they were heading to the beach	In this context, the expression **they were heading** is a nautical term that describes a ship moving in a specific direction. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were steering the ship toward the beach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	27	41	a630	figs-idiom	περιπεσόντες&εἰς	1	having fallen into	The expression **having fallen into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	27	41	a630	figs-idiom	περιπεσόντες & εἰς	1	having fallen into	The expression **having fallen into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	41	y22n	figs-idiom	τόπον διθάλασσον	1	a place between two seas	The expression **a place between two seas** is a nautical term that describes a sandbar that extends out from the land. A sandbar forms when a sea current coming from one direction flows across a sea current coming from another direction. This causes the sand under the water to pile up, making the water shallow and dangerous for ships. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “a sandbar extending out from the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	27	41	a631	figs-activepassive	ἡ δὲ πρύμνα ἐλύετο ὑπὸ τῆς βίας	1	the stern was being loosed by the violence	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the violence was breaking up the stern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	27	41	a632	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τῆς βίας	1	the violence	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is referring to the **violence** of the waves that were hitting the **stern** of the ship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by the violence of the waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -3427,7 +3427,7 @@ ACT	28	intro	w8yn			0		# Acts 28 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formattin
 ACT	28	1	j1yf	figs-activepassive	διασωθέντες	1	having been brought safely through	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it seems that Luke means to say that it was God. Alternate translation: “after God had brought us safely through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	1	a635	figs-activepassive	Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται	1	the island was called Malta	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the island Malta” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	1	f8y4	translate-names	Μελίτη	1	Malta	The word **Malta** is the name of an island located south of the island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT	28	2	e7w6	figs-idiom	οἵ&βάρβαροι	1	the barbarians	Luke is using the word **barbarians** in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	28	2	e7w6	figs-idiom	οἵ & βάρβαροι	1	the barbarians	Luke is using the word **barbarians** in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	28	2	r7jy	figs-litotes	οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν	1	no ordinary benevolence	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary benevolence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 ACT	28	3	g4ad	translate-unknown	ἔχιδνα	1	a viper	A **viper** is a dangerous poisonous snake. If your readers would not recognize this name, you could use the name of another poisonous snake they might recognize or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a snake whose venom was poisonous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ACT	28	4	ma1b	translate-names	ἡ δίκη	1	Justice	The word **Justice** is the name of a false god who the people of this time believed would avenge crimes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -3456,7 +3456,7 @@ ACT	28	15	a639	figs-explicit	κἀκεῖθεν	1	From there	By **there**, Luke
 ACT	28	15	a640	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	15	k754	figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	having heard the things about us	The implication is that these believers had heard from the believers in Puteoli while Paul and his companions were staying with them that they were on their way to Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having learned from the believers in Puteoli that we were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	28	15	m9tz	figs-metaphor	ἔλαβε θάρσος	1	took courage	Here, **courage** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could **take**. Alternate translation: “became encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	28	15	se8v	translate-names	Ἀππίου Φόρου&Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν	1	the Forum of Appius … Three Taverns	The phrase **the Forum of Appius** is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase **Three Taverns** is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT	28	15	se8v	translate-names	Ἀππίου Φόρου & Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν	1	the Forum of Appius … Three Taverns	The phrase **the Forum of Appius** is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase **Three Taverns** is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	28	16	te8v	figs-activepassive	ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ	1	Paul was allowed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman officials allowed Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	16	a642	figs-explicit	καθ’ ἑαυτὸν	1	by himself	Since there was a **soldier** with Paul who was **guarding him**, Luke does not mean that Paul stayed all **by himself**. Rather, he means that the Roman authorities allowed Paul to live in a rented house (as verse 30 indicates) rather than putting him in prison. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in a rented house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	28	17	vf7r	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -3465,14 +3465,14 @@ ACT	28	17	e1dd	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is
 ACT	28	17	a615	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	28	17	a664	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθεσι τοῖς πατρῴοις	1	to the fathers’ customs	Paul is using the term **fathers’** to describe customs that have been passed down among the Jews through the generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ancestral customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	17	g55i	figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	the people	By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT	28	17	hgk4	figs-activepassive	ἐγώ&δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην	1	I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	28	17	hgk4	figs-activepassive	ἐγώ & δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην	1	I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	17	x3r2	figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖρας	1	the hands	Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	28	18	fed7	figs-metonymy	τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί	1	there was no reason in me for death	Paul is referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to deserve the death penalty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	28	19	lr96	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	28	19	n6vf	figs-activepassive	ἠναγκάσθην	1	I was forced	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my concern for my safety forced me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	19	e7gr	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ἔθνους μου	1	my nation	Paul is referring by association to the people of the Jewish **nation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	28	20	a616	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	the hope of Israel	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Israel is hoping for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	28	20	b1fd	figs-metonymy	εἵνεκεν&τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	on account of the hope of Israel	Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had **hope** for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	28	20	b1fd	figs-metonymy	εἵνεκεν & τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	on account of the hope of Israel	Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had **hope** for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	28	20	n3s7	figs-personification	τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	of Israel	Paul is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ACT	28	20	a617	figs-activepassive	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	I am bound with this chain	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this chain is binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	20	pgr8	figs-synecdoche	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	I am bound with this chain	Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chain** with which he is bound, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Romans are keeping me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -3485,33 +3485,33 @@ ACT	28	22	a619	figs-hyperbole	πανταχοῦ	1	everywhere	The Jewish leaders
 ACT	28	23	a645	figs-nominaladj	πλείονες	1	more	Luke is using the adjective **more** as a noun to mean the larger number of people who came to hear Paul speak. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “more people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ACT	28	23	dg5f	figs-abstractnouns	διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	testifying about the kingdom of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “testifying about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ACT	28	23	peu1	figs-merism	ἀπό τε τοῦ νόμου Μωϋσέως, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	both from the Law of Moses and the Prophets	Luke is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming two of their major parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from passages throughout the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-ACT	28	24	pmd6	figs-activepassive	οἱ&ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	some were convinced by the things being said	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT	28	25	n7pm	figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος&ῥῆμα ἓν	1	having spoken one word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	28	24	pmd6	figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	some were convinced by the things being said	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	28	25	n7pm	figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος & ῥῆμα ἓν	1	having spoken one word	Luke is using the term **word** to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ACT	28	25	a646	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	your fathers	Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	26	qj7q	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all.”	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation inside the first one. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to go to the people of Israel and tell them that by hearing they would hear but they would not understand at all and that seeing they would see but they would not perceive at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	28	26	a647	figs-quotemarks	λέγων, πορεύθητι	1	saying, ‘Go	This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	28	26	a648	figs-quotemarks	εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ	1	say, “By hearing	This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ACT	28	26	pax8	figs-idiom	ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε&βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see	Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	28	26	pax8	figs-idiom	ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε & βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see	Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	28	26	a649	figs-parallelism	ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You will become aware of what is happening around you but you will not understand the significance of what is happening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ACT	28	26	s1ti	figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε&καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	but you will not understand at all … but you will not perceive at all	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ACT	28	26	s1ti	figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	but you will not understand at all … but you will not perceive at all	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ACT	28	26	a650	figs-quotemarks	οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	you will not perceive at all.”	This is the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with a closing third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ACT	28	27	fz42	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν, καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and they might hear with their ears, and they might understand with their heart and turn back, and I would heal them	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to say that because the heart of that people had been thickened, and with their ears they had hardly heard, and they had shut their eyes. Otherwise they might have seen with their eyes, and they might have heard with their ears, and they might have understood with their heart and turned back, and God would have healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 ACT	28	27	a651	figs-parallelism	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes	These three phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “For this people is stubbornly refusing to use its senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ACT	28	27	ts5a	figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη&ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	the heart of this people has been thickened	Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	28	27	ts5a	figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη & ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	the heart of this people has been thickened	Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	27	a652	figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία	1	the heart	Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	27	a653		ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	the heart of this people	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts of these people”
-ACT	28	27	ngve	figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία&τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	the heart … with their heart	Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT	28	27	ngve	figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία & τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	the heart … with their heart	Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	27	a654	figs-activepassive	ἐπαχύνθη	1	has been thickened	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has become thick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	27	f5m4	figs-metaphor	καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes	Isaiah is speaking as if the people of Israel have become unable to hear and have **shut their eyes** so that they will not see. He means that they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	28	27	a655	figs-explicitinfo	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν&ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς&τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν	1	with their ears they have hardly heard … they might see with their eyes … they might hear with their ears	It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT	28	27	a655	figs-explicitinfo	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν & ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς & τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν	1	with their ears they have hardly heard … they might see with their eyes … they might hear with their ears	It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 ACT	28	27	a656	figs-parallelism	ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν	1	they might see with their eyes, and they might hear with their ears	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they might use their senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ACT	28	27	q8c2	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	turn back	Isaiah is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	27	vb9f	figs-metaphor	ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	I would heal them	This does not mean God would only **heal** the people physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. Alternate translation: “I would heal them and forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	28	27	a657	figs-quotemarks	ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	I would heal them.’”	This is the end of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with closing second-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ACT	28	28	a658	figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν&ἔστω	1	let it be known to you	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+ACT	28	28	a658	figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν & ἔστω	1	let it be known to you	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 ACT	28	28	e8hb	figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who has done the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent me to proclaim this salvation of his to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	28	b2za	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this salvation of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT	28	28	d18n	figs-idiom	αὐτοὶ&ἀκούσονται	1	they will hear	In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT	28	28	d18n	figs-idiom	αὐτοὶ & ἀκούσονται	1	they will hear	In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	28	29	a659	translate-textvariants		0		As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 ACT	28	30	c56e	writing-endofstory	ἐνέμεινεν δὲ διετίαν ὅλην ἐν ἰδίῳ μισθώματι	1	And he stayed for two whole years in his own rented house	This is the beginning of information that Luke presents to bring the story of the book of Acts to a close. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 ACT	28	30	a660	writing-pronouns	ἐνέμεινεν	1	he stayed	The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
index f06d5bfdf4..1c8b481f52 100644
--- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
@@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ ROM	1	8	bphf	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1		If your language
 ROM	1	8	efqs	figs-activepassive	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	1	8	k7qf	figs-hyperbole	ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Here, **the whole world** is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ROM	1	9	c7pa	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For God is my witness	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	1	9	twht	figs-infostructure	μάρτυς&μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	For God is my witness	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence, if you need to do so. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	1	9	dx6p	figs-distinguish	μάρτυς&μού&ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	in my spirit	This phrase gives further information about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness, and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	1	9	ll1e	figs-abstractnouns	μάρτυς&μού	1	in my spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **witness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	1	9	twht	figs-infostructure	μάρτυς & μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	For God is my witness	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence, if you need to do so. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	1	9	dx6p	figs-distinguish	μάρτυς & μού & ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	in my spirit	This phrase gives further information about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness, and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	1	9	ll1e	figs-abstractnouns	μάρτυς & μού	1	in my spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **witness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	9	ydnc	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1		Here, **spirit** refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	1	9	ih0v	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1		Here, **in** indicates the means by which Paul served God and **gospel** refers specifically to proclaiming the **gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	1	9	o66d	figs-possession	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** that is about God’s **Son**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ ROM	1	14	lio6	figs-merism	σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1		Here P
 ROM	1	14	q728	figs-doublet	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	1	15	h9zv	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως	1		**So** here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	1	16	oa6m	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	1	16	mm2f	figs-litotes	οὐ&ἐπαισχύνομαι	1	I am not ashamed of the gospel	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ROM	1	16	nvkv	figs-metonymy	οὐ&ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	I am not ashamed of the gospel	Here, **gospel** refers specifically to the preaching of the **gospel** that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	1	16	mm2f	figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι	1	I am not ashamed of the gospel	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ROM	1	16	nvkv	figs-metonymy	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	I am not ashamed of the gospel	Here, **gospel** refers specifically to the preaching of the **gospel** that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	1	16	f5x9	figs-possession	δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	for the Jew first and for the Greek	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** as the powerful way that **God** saves people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	1	16	sz5b	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	first	Here, **for** indicates that **salvation** is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	1	16	merb	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ	1	first	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ ROM	1	16	dwtm	figs-genericnoun	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλ
 ROM	1	16	u8on	figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον	1		The phrase **the Jew first** means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that **the Jew** is better or has a high status than **the Greek**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews, who first heard the gospel,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	1	16	al16	figs-explicit	Ἕλληνι	1		Here, **the Greek** refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	1	17	of98	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	1	17	wfsc	figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη&Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	1	17	h38h	figs-metaphor	δικαιοσύνη&Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	God’s righteousness is revealed from faith to faith	Paul speaks about **the righteousness of God** as if it were an object that could be **revealed**. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	1	17	qr31	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη&Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul is using the possessive form **of God** that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	1	17	gsl5	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη&Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way in which God causes people to become righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	1	17	wfsc	figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	1	17	h38h	figs-metaphor	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	God’s righteousness is revealed from faith to faith	Paul speaks about **the righteousness of God** as if it were an object that could be **revealed**. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	1	17	qr31	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul is using the possessive form **of God** that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	1	17	gsl5	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way in which God causes people to become righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	17	ii3m	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	For in it	The pronoun **it** here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	1	17	jl9i	figs-idiom	ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν	1		Here, **from faith to faith** describes how **the righteousness of God is revealed**. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, in the way that the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	1	17	igg9	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it has been written	Here Paul uses **just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Habakkuk 2:4](../hab/02/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ ROM	1	17	oih2	figs-quotemarks	ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζή
 ROM	1	17	a9y7	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		Here, **live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	1	17	e7eu	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	2		See how you translated **faith** in [verse 5](../01/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	18	c69s	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	**For** indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	1	18	r15v	figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλύπτεται&ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	For the wrath of God is revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	1	18	r15v	figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλύπτεται & ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	For the wrath of God is revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	1	18	wzy3	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	the wrath of God is revealed from heaven against all ungodliness and unrighteousness of people	Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	1	18	kjen	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **ungodliness** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	18	fz23	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, **ungodliness and unrighteousness of men** refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ ROM	1	18	rztp	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men*
 ROM	1	18	g3qm	figs-distinguish	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1		This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called **men** in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of **men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	1	18	k4ql	figs-personification	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1		Here Paul speaks of **truth** as if it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	1	19	jd85	figs-activepassive	τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	1	19	r6ef	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς&αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, **them**, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout [verses 19–32](../01/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	1	20	fo6q	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ&ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ&καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **qualities**, **power**, and **nature**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	1	19	r6ef	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, **them**, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout [verses 19–32](../01/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	1	20	fo6q	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ & ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ & καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **qualities**, **power**, and **nature**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	20	szu6	figs-metaphor	καθορᾶται	1	For his invisible qualities … have been clearly seen	Paul uses **seen** to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	1	20	abdl	figs-activepassive	καθορᾶται	1	For his invisible qualities … have been clearly seen	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	1	20	uvc1	figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	world	Paul uses **the world** figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -184,20 +184,20 @@ ROM	1	29	t4qm	figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένους	1	They are full of e
 ROM	1	29	uqks	figs-abstractnouns	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ;	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness**, **wickedness**, **covetousness**, and **malice**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	29	a7s3	figs-metaphor	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1		Paul uses **full of** to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container **full of** the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is **full of** something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	1	29	dzda	figs-abstractnouns	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **envy**, **murder**, **strife**, **deceit**, and **evil intent**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	1	30	f4tt	figs-nominaladj	θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας&ἀπειθεῖς	1	slanderers	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ROM	1	30	th8q	figs-abstractnouns	καταλάλους&ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	inventing ways of doing evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slanderers** and **inventors**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	1	30	f4tt	figs-nominaladj	θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας & ἀπειθεῖς	1	slanderers	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	1	30	th8q	figs-abstractnouns	καταλάλους & ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	inventing ways of doing evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slanderers** and **inventors**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	30	qq50	figs-possession	ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **inventors** who invent **evil things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “they invent evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	1	31	i7ix	figs-nominaladj	ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας	1		Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	1	32	cxx8	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δικαίωμα	1	They understand the righteous regulations of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **decree**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	32	ytu6	figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **the righteous decree** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “what God decrees is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	1	32	z12q	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	are deserving of death	Here, **that** indicates that what follows is the content of the **the righteous decree of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	1	32	iqg1	writing-pronouns	τὰ τοιαῦτα&αὐτὰ&τοῖς πράσσουσιν	1	who do them	The pronouns **such things** and **things** and **them** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [verses 28–31](../01/28/md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	1	32	iqg1	writing-pronouns	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτὰ & τοῖς πράσσουσιν	1	who do them	The pronouns **such things** and **things** and **them** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [verses 28–31](../01/28/md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	1	32	p9e9	figs-nominaladj	ἄξιοι θανάτου	1		Paul is using the adjective **worthy** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	1	32	t0ls	figs-abstractnouns	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	1	32	awth	figs-explicit	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1		Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	intro	dse2			0		# Romans 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)<br>    * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)<br>    * All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)<br><br>In this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “The Law”<br><br>In this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the Law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>In [verses 1–5](../02/01.md) Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	2	1	y6ts	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1		**Therefore** here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in [1:18–32](../01/18.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	1	d7pj	figs-youcrowd	εἶ&κρίνεις&σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις&πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων	1	Therefore you are without excuse	Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	2	1	d7pj	figs-youcrowd	εἶ & κρίνεις & σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις & πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων	1	Therefore you are without excuse	Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	2	1	atxo		ἀναπολόγητος	1	Therefore you are without excuse	See how you translated this phrase in [1:20](../01/20.md).
 ROM	2	1	md5e	figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	you	**O man** here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	2	1	x3mi	grammar-collectivenouns	ἄνθρωπε	1	you are	Here, **man** is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -205,32 +205,32 @@ ROM	2	1	n2mu	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** introduces a
 ROM	2	1	jt4b	writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾧ	1	you person, you who judge	The word translated **that which** is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	2	1	ybp2	figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἕτερον	1	for what you judge in another you condemn in yourself	Here, **the other** refers to any other person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	2	1	nz11	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “this is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	1	wumc	writing-pronouns	τὰ&αὐτὰ	1		The phrase **the same things** refers to acts for which people judge one another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	2	1	wumc	writing-pronouns	τὰ & αὐτὰ	1		The phrase **the same things** refers to acts for which people judge one another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	2	2	jr4i	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	But we know	Here, **we** could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	2	2	qca8	figs-possession	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the judgment** that **God** does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	2	kfy1	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	God’s judgment is according to truth when it falls on those	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **judgment** and **truth**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	2	lfqn	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	God’s judgment is according to truth when it falls on those	This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	2	2	j46f		τοὺς&πράσσοντας	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32/.md).
+ROM	2	2	j46f		τοὺς & πράσσοντας	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32/.md).
 ROM	2	2	mjao	figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα	1		Here, **such things** refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	3	zwg7	figs-rquestion	λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	person	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	2	3	jct9	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		The pronoun **this** refers to the final clause of this verse **that you will escape from the judgment of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	2	3	ysys	figs-infostructure	τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	2	3	rk75	figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	you who judge those who practice such things although you do the same things	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-ROM	2	3	mo4p	figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα&αὐτά	1		The phrases **such things** and **the same things** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). See how you translated **such things** in [verse 2](../02/02.md) and **the same things** in [verse 1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	2	3	mo4p	figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτά	1		The phrases **such things** and **the same things** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). See how you translated **such things** in [verse 2](../02/02.md) and **the same things** in [verse 1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	3	bd82	figs-personification	ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of **judgment** as if it were a person from whom someone could **escape**. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	2	3	hpej	figs-explicit	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 2](../02/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	4	pex3	figs-rquestion	ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει?	1	Or do you think so little of the riches of his goodness, his delayed punishment, and his patience … repentance?	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that **the kindness of God leads** them **to repentance**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the wealth of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	2	4	v9yf	figs-youcrowd	καταφρονεῖς&σε	1		In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated **you** in [verses 1](../02/01.md) and [3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	2	4	v9yf	figs-youcrowd	καταφρονεῖς & σε	1		In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated **you** in [verses 1](../02/01.md) and [3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	2	4	w537	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	Do you think so little of the riches … patience	Paul speaks of God’s **kindness and forbearance and patience** as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	2	4	swj9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	Do you not know that his goodness is meant to lead you to repentance?	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience**, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	2	4	pplt	figs-possession	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας&τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience** that characterize **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	2	4	pplt	figs-possession	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας & τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience** that characterize **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	4	acip	figs-personification	τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1		Paul speaks of **the kindness of God** as if it were a person who could lead someone **to repentance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	2	4	u0io	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1		Here, **to repentance** is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of **the kindness of God**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	2	4	jamv	figs-abstractnouns	μετάνοιάν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	5	agl8	figs-metaphor	κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου	1	But it is to the extent of your hardness and unrepentant heart	Paul speaks of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	2	5	v6z1	figs-metonymy	ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν	1		Here, **heart** refers to a person’s will or inner being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	5	fv4k	figs-metaphor	θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν	1	you are storing up for yourself wrath	Here Paul speaks of **wrath** as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	2	5	s7cs	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν&ὀργῆς	1	you are storing up for yourself wrath	Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	2	5	s7cs	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν & ὀργῆς	1	you are storing up for yourself wrath	Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	5	pck0	figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul assumes that his readers will know that both **the day of wrath** and **the revelation of the righteous judgment of God** refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	5	uz3k	figs-possession	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **wrath** and by **the revelation of the righteous judgment of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	5	ay1h	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath**, **revelation**, and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts, when he reveals how righteously he judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -240,16 +240,16 @@ ROM	2	6	frov	figs-quotations	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ 
 ROM	2	6	jwcx	figs-metaphor	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1		Here Paul uses **pay back** to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	2	6	gj1q	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	to every person according to his actions	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deeds**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	7	ylpm			0	General Information:	In [verses 7–10](../02/07.md) Paul explains what he means when he said in [verse 6](../02/06.md) that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.”
-ROM	2	7	rrbf	figs-infostructure	τοῖς&καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	2	7	rrbf	figs-infostructure	τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	2	7	gec6	figs-ellipsis	ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	seeking	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	2	7	sqdo	figs-metaphor	τοῖς&ζητοῦσιν	1		Paul uses **seeking** to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain **glory and honor and incorruptibility**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	2	7	zyff		τοῖς&καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ&ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Here, **according to** could indicate: (1) the means by which these people **are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility**. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people **everlasting life**. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life”
+ROM	2	7	sqdo	figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ζητοῦσιν	1		Paul uses **seeking** to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain **glory and honor and incorruptibility**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	2	7	zyff		τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ & ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Here, **according to** could indicate: (1) the means by which these people **are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility**. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people **everlasting life**. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life”
 ROM	2	7	d2gw	figs-abstractnouns	καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	7	ub51	figs-abstractnouns	δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν	1	praise, honor, and incorruptibility	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory**, **honor**, and **incorruptibility**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	8	j1e6	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἐριθείας	1	wrath and fierce anger will come	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ambition**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	8	fcb4	figs-doublet	καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	disobey the truth but obey unrighteousness	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	2	8	xhtm	figs-personification	ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1		Here Paul speaks of **the truth**as if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and he speaks of **unrighteousness** as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that these people reject what God says is true and right by **disobeying** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	2	8	m7pm	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ&τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to what is true … to what is unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	2	8	m7pm	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ & τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to what is true … to what is unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	8	ytny	figs-ellipsis	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the [verse 6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “wrath and anger are what God pays back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	2	8	exor	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ	1		Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	8	wa6f	figs-abstractnouns	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	self-seeking	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **anger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -262,27 +262,27 @@ ROM	2	9	msox	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the term **man**
 ROM	2	9	n7q4	figs-nominaladj	τὸ κακόν	1	has practiced evil	Paul is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	2	9	a9s5	figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος	1	to the Jew first	This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	9	csnc	figs-explicit	Ἕλληνος	1	to the Jew first	See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	2	10	i9tg	figs-abstractnouns	δόξα&καὶ τιμὴ	1	practices good	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	2	10	i9tg	figs-abstractnouns	δόξα & καὶ τιμὴ	1	practices good	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	10	t2od	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνη	1	practices good	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, **peace** could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	10	ib56	figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	first	Paul is using the adjective **good** as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	2	10	u06j	figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	2	11	eol0	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ&ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **favoritism**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	2	11	eol0	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **favoritism**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	12	wkx8	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For as many as have sinned	**For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 12–16](../02/12.md) gives the reason for the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	12	ecsk	figs-explicit	ὅσοι&ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον	1		Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, whom he calls “the Greek” in [verses 9–10](../02/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	2	12	t3qs	grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνόμως&ἀνόμως&νόμῳ&νόμου	1		The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	2	12	m6cy	figs-idiom	ἀνόμως&ἀνόμως	1	as many as have sinned	Here, **without the law** refers to not knowing God’s **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	2	12	ecsk	figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον	1		Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, whom he calls “the Greek” in [verses 9–10](../02/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	2	12	t3qs	grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως & νόμῳ & νόμου	1		The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	2	12	m6cy	figs-idiom	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως	1	as many as have sinned	Here, **without the law** refers to not knowing God’s **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	2	12	qkh4	figs-metonymy	καὶ ἀπολοῦνται	1		Here Paul uses **perish** to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	12	jwvz	figs-explicit	ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον	1		Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	12	w4cp	figs-activepassive	διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	2	12	a0k4	figs-explicit	διὰ νόμου	1		Here, **by** indicates that **the law** is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	13	sw8x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	13	a8ra	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου&νόμου	1		See how you translated **the law** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	2	13	eg4h	figs-metaphor	οὐ&δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	who are righteous before God	Paul uses **with God** here to describe **righteous** people as if they were located in the presence of **God**. He means that God makes them right with himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	2	13	a8ra	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1		See how you translated **the law** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	2	13	eg4h	figs-metaphor	οὐ & δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	who are righteous before God	Paul uses **with God** here to describe **righteous** people as if they were located in the presence of **God**. He means that God makes them right with himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	2	13	c1bu	figs-activepassive	οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται	1	who will be justified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	2	14	q2id	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	they do not have the law	**For** here indicates that [verses 14–16](../02/14.md) give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in [verse 12](../02/12.md). [Verses 14–16](../02/14.md) explain why **Gentiles** who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	14	vlum	figs-metaphor	τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα&νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες	1		Paul speaks of these people as if they own or possess **the law**. He means that they are unaware of the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in [verse 12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	2	14	zhmw	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον&τοῦ νόμου&νόμον	1		See how you translated **the law** in [verse 12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	2	14	h53h	figs-abstractnouns	φύσει&ποιῶσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **nature**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	2	14	vlum	figs-metaphor	τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα & νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες	1		Paul speaks of these people as if they own or possess **the law**. He means that they are unaware of the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in [verse 12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	2	14	zhmw	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & τοῦ νόμου & νόμον	1		See how you translated **the law** in [verse 12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	2	14	h53h	figs-abstractnouns	φύσει & ποιῶσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **nature**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	14	atda	figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ νόμου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rules within the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	14	symg	figs-personification	ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος	1		Here Paul speaks of **Gentiles** as if they were **a law**. Paul means that the non-Jewish people still have their own rules about what is right and wrong that are also part of God’s **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	2	15	xl6v	figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	By this they show	Paul speaks of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the law of Moses as if they were showing **the work of the law** to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ ROM	2	15	v60q	figs-activepassive	γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαι
 ROM	2	15	ja5s	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1		See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	15	jmeo	figs-genericnoun	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	bears witness to them, and their own thoughts either accuse or defend them	Paul uses the singular **conscience** figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	2	15	z28q	figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	bears witness to them, and their own thoughts either accuse or defend them	Here Paul speaks of **conscience** as if it were a person **bearing witness** in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	2	15	ub8t	figs-distinguish	συνμαρτυρούσης&καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1		This clause explains what **bearing witness** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	2	15	ub8t	figs-distinguish	συνμαρτυρούσης & καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1		This clause explains what **bearing witness** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	2	15	qk53	figs-personification	καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1		Here Paul speaks of **thoughts** as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	2	16	o6kx	figs-metonymy	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here, **day** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	16	c5fp	figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς	1	on the day when God will judge	Paul assumes that his readers will know that **the day when God will judge** refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in [verses 2](../02/02.md) and [5](../02/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ ROM	2	19	nk76	figs-rpronouns	πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸ
 ROM	2	19	wi7z	figs-metaphor	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	you yourself are a guide to the blind, a light to those who are in darkness	Paul uses **guide** to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses **blind** to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are the only ones who can teach others what is true about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	2	19	beop	figs-abstractnouns	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **guide**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can guide blind men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	19	ql0b	figs-gendernotations	τυφλῶν	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	2	19	j76c	figs-doublet	ὁδηγὸν&τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	2	19	j76c	figs-doublet	ὁδηγὸν & τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	2	19	xlge	figs-metaphor	φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1		Here Paul uses **light** to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses **those in darkness** figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a **light** shines on people who are in a dark place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	2	20	ymey	grammar-connect-logic-result	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	2	20	pf6v	figs-doublet	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -333,17 +333,17 @@ ROM	2	23	grr3	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι	1	You who bo
 ROM	2	23	ob98	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgression**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	24	yp4l	figs-infostructure	τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	2	24	z54i	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things that I have said about you are true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	24	lk5n	figs-quotemarks	τὸ&ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		In this clause Paul quotes part of [Isaiah 52:5](../isa/52/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	2	24	c4sk	figs-possession	τὸ&ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the **name** that belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that **God** is a **name**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	2	24	mvwq	figs-synecdoche	τὸ&ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses **the name of God** figuratively to refer to**God** himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	2	24	ccm9	figs-activepassive	τὸ&ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	2	24	m2bq	grammar-connect-logic-result	τὸ&ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	2	24	lk5n	figs-quotemarks	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		In this clause Paul quotes part of [Isaiah 52:5](../isa/52/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	2	24	c4sk	figs-possession	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the **name** that belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that **God** is a **name**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	2	24	mvwq	figs-synecdoche	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses **the name of God** figuratively to refer to**God** himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ROM	2	24	ccm9	figs-activepassive	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	2	24	m2bq	grammar-connect-logic-result	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	2	24	pg0g	figs-explicit	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1		Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes **the Gentiles** to blaspheme **the name of God**. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	24	e144	figs-yousingular	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **you** is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural **you** in [verses 17–27](../02/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	2	24	edrf	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	2	24	end9	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	2	25	vdu7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that [verses 25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in [verse 12](../02/12.md). Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	25	vp6o	figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴ&ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	2	25	vp6o	figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴ & ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	25	wm24	figs-ellipsis	ὠφελεῖ	1		Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	2	25	pqhz	figs-possession	παραβάτης νόμου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	25	xq62	figs-hyperbole	ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	your circumcision becomes uncircumcision	Here, **your circumcision becomes uncircumcision** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to **practice the law**. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s **law** is no longer physically circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -353,10 +353,10 @@ ROM	2	26	nf3j	figs-idiom	φυλάσσῃ	1	keeps the requirements of the law	Her
 ROM	2	26	mkhr	figs-possession	τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **requirements** found in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	2	26	be71	figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	will not his uncircumcision be considered as circumcision?	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what **the law** requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	2	26	rjb5	figs-activepassive	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	2	26	gjuy	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ&περιτομὴν	1		See how you translated **uncircumcision** and **circumcision** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	2	26	gjuy	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ & περιτομὴν	1		See how you translated **uncircumcision** and **circumcision** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	27	rkxz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1		**And** here could indicate that what follows is continuing the rhetorical question in the previous verse. If you choose to the translate the passage in this way, then replace the ending exclamation point with a question mark. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	2	27	lqz2	grammar-connect-logic-result	κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα	1	And will not the one who is naturally uncircumcised condemn you … the law?	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	2	27	tpno	figs-nominaladj	ἡ&ἀκροβυστία	1	And will not the one who is naturally uncircumcised condemn you … the law?	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	2	27	tpno	figs-nominaladj	ἡ & ἀκροβυστία	1	And will not the one who is naturally uncircumcised condemn you … the law?	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	2	27	h2lj	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **nature**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	2	27	zwh8	figs-idiom	τελοῦσα	1		Here, **fulfilling** is an idiom that refers to fully obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is fully obedient to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	2	27	sv4b	figs-explicit	διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς	1		Here, **through** could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the **letter and circumcision**. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the **letter and circumcision**. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ ROM	2	27	q795	figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην νόμου	1		If your langua
 ROM	2	28	g2vh	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in [verses 25–27](../02/25.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	2	28	lfuj	figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖός	1		Here Paul uses **Jew** to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, as Abraham did. **Jew** here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	28	rohy	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ φανερῷ	1		Here, **visibly** refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	2	28	n34i	figs-metonymy	ἡ&περιτομή	1	flesh	Here Paul uses **circumcision** to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../jer/04/04.md)). Here, **circumcision** does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	2	28	n34i	figs-metonymy	ἡ & περιτομή	1	flesh	Here Paul uses **circumcision** to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../jer/04/04.md)). Here, **circumcision** does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	2	28	s44m	figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	flesh	Paul uses **the flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	2	29	b6ag	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος	1		The word translated **secretly** refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	2	29	u7b6	figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖος	1		Here Paul uses **Jew** in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -390,12 +390,12 @@ ROM	3	1	l79f	figs-possession	τῆς περιτομῆς	1		Paul is using the po
 ROM	3	2	eq3o	figs-explicit	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	It is great in every way	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	2	rri9	figs-ellipsis	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	It is great in every way	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision are great in every way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	3	2	kzlh	figs-hyperbole	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1		**Great in every way** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ROM	3	2	f2fa	figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν&ὅτι	1		Here, **indeed first, that** could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	3	2	f2fa	figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν & ὅτι	1		Here, **indeed first, that** could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	2	mrej	figs-activepassive	ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	2	jkgk	figs-metonymy	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **the sayings of God** could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God recorded in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	2	qide	figs-possession	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, the possessive form **of God** could refer to: (1) **sayings** that came from **God**. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) **says** that are about **God**. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	3	d9k3	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	3	3	mclv	figs-rquestion	τί&εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1		In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	3	3	mclv	figs-rquestion	τί & εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1		In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	3	3	fd0w	figs-quotemarks	τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1		In this verse Paul is speaking as if he himself were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	3	i36p	writing-pronouns	τινες	1		The pronoun **some** refers to some Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	3	3	pkae	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unfaithfulness** or **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -403,24 +403,24 @@ ROM	3	3	moq7	figs-possession	τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is u
 ROM	3	4	djn7	figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	4	z465	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	**May it never be** is an exclamation that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	3	4	kz4j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Instead, let be found	**Instead** here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	3	4	ld9h	figs-imperative	γινέσθω&ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής	1	let God be found to be true	Here, **let God be true** is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ROM	3	4	nud9	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς&ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	even though every man is a liar	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **liar**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	3	4	fesk	figs-ellipsis	πᾶς&ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1		Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	3	4	hfdf	figs-gendernotations	πᾶς&ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	3	4	ld9h	figs-imperative	γινέσθω & ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής	1	let God be found to be true	Here, **let God be true** is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM	3	4	nud9	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	even though every man is a liar	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **liar**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	3	4	fesk	figs-ellipsis	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1		Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	3	4	hfdf	figs-gendernotations	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	3	4	te39	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	As it has been written	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	3	4	b8gv	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	As it has been written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	4	f0oq	figs-quotemarks	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	As it has been written	This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 51:4](../psa/051/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	4	xli0	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅπως	1		**So that** indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in [Psalm 51:4](../psa/051/004.md), which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	3	4	h0ne	figs-yousingular	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1		In this sentence, **you** and **your** refer to God and are singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	3	4	lnnr	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῇς&ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	3	4	lnnr	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῇς & ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	4	tj8g	figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου	1		Paul records David using **words** to describe the things that God said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	5	gw3a	grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1		In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. **But** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	3	5	putf	figs-quotemarks	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1		In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	3	5	hjyp	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν?	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-ROM	3	5	y6vv	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἐροῦμεν	1		Here, **our** and **we** are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	3	5	hjyp	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν?	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+ROM	3	5	y6vv	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἐροῦμεν	1		Here, **our** and **we** are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	3	5	y0r5	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness** or **righteousness**, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	5	ho67	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1		In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	3	5	v30z	figs-infostructure	εἰ&ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	3	5	v30z	figs-infostructure	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	3	5	e9ux	figs-metonymy	τὴν ὀργήν	1		Here Paul uses **wrath** to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of **wrath** in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	5	j631	figs-aside	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	I am using a human argument	Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge **the righteousness of God**. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as seen in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
 ROM	3	5	sd4g	figs-idiom	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1		Here, the phrase **according to men** is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -430,23 +430,23 @@ ROM	3	6	x1y3	figs-rquestion	πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμ
 ROM	3	6	lnp3	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	the world	Here Paul uses **world** to refer to the people who live in the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	7	htfa			0	General Information:	In [verses 7–9](../03/07.md), Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in [verse 6](../03/06.md). A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument.
 ROM	3	7	b9k1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	But if the truth of God through my lie provides abundant praise for him, why am I still being judged as a sinner?	**But** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in [verse 5](../03/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	3	7	c2u5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	But if the truth of God through my lie provides abundant praise for him, why am I still being judged as a sinner?	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my lie abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+ROM	3	7	c2u5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	But if the truth of God through my lie provides abundant praise for him, why am I still being judged as a sinner?	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my lie abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 ROM	3	7	xysz	figs-infostructure	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	3	7	j9ji	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	7	lbji	figs-possession	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the truth** that characterizes **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	3	7	fa7j	figs-exclusive	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι&κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς	1		Here Paul uses **my** and **I** to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	3	7	fa7j	figs-exclusive	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι & κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς	1		Here Paul uses **my** and **I** to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	3	7	o3po	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lie**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	7	je41	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **to** indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	3	7	h61j	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	7	yv5j	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1		In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	3	7	iiqc	figs-activepassive	ἔτι κἀγὼ&κρίνομαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God keep on judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	3	7	iiqc	figs-activepassive	ἔτι κἀγὼ & κρίνομαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God keep on judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	7	pgus	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτωλὸς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sinner**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	8	vw1x	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	as we are falsely reported to say	**And** here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in [verse 6](../03/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	3	8	kb9d	figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά?	1	as we are falsely reported to say	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	3	8	wr3g	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μὴ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	3	8	pr4u	figs-rquestion	μὴ&ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά	1		In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	3	8	pr4u	figs-rquestion	μὴ & ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά	1		In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	3	8	o3pz	figs-aside	καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν	1		Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
-ROM	3	8	veic	figs-exclusive	βλασφημούμεθα&ἡμᾶς	1		When Paul says **we** and **us**, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	3	8	veic	figs-exclusive	βλασφημούμεθα & ἡμᾶς	1		When Paul says **we** and **us**, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	3	8	klaa	figs-activepassive	βλασφημούμεθα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	8	vbpa	figs-quotations	μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ROM	3	8	pe2c	figs-aside	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1		Paul is saying this as an aside to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” are the ones who deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses as in the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
@@ -467,14 +467,14 @@ ROM	3	10	ju1k	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ ε
 ROM	3	10	yt5d	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not even one** person is **righteous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	3	10	bscu	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1		Paul is using the singular adjectives **none righteous** and **one** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	3	11	b0m7	figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1		This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:2](../psa/014/002.md) and [Psalm 53:3](../psa/053/003.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	3	11	kqs5	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν&οὐκ ἔστιν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **none** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no man … There are no man” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	3	11	kqs5	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν & οὐκ ἔστιν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **none** as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no man … There are no man” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	3	11	h9e9	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων	1	There is no one who understands	Here, **who understands** refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	11	mn84	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1		Here, Paul quotes David using **seeks** to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	12	lg0i	figs-quotemarks	πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	They have all turned away	This sentence is quotation of [Psalm 14:3](../psa/014/003.md) and [Psalm 53:4](../psa/053/004.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	12	cen3	figs-metaphor	ἐξέκλιναν	1	They have all turned away	Paul quotes David using **turned away** to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refused to live the way God requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	12	a72h	figs-explicit	ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν	1	They have all turned away	Here, **useless** implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they benefit neither God nor humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	12	na87	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not even one** type of person can continually do **kindness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one is doing kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ROM	3	12	v9ed	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ&ἑνός	1		See how you translated **none** and **one** in [verse 10](../03/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	3	12	v9ed	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ & ἑνός	1		See how you translated **none** and **one** in [verse 10](../03/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	3	12	b3g1	figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kindness**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	13	xr4g	figs-quotemarks	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν	1		These two sentences are a quotation from [Psalm 5:10](../psa/005/010.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	3	13	c7rh	figs-parallelism	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1		These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -503,27 +503,27 @@ ROM	3	18	frt1	figs-possession	φόβος Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessi
 ROM	3	18	m89o	figs-idiom	ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1		Here,**before their eyes** is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	19	lrdp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		**Now** here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about **the law** and “the righteousness of God” in [verses 1–9](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	3	19	gc8t	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1		Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	3	19	e8h2	figs-personification	ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει&λαλεῖ	1	whatever the law says, it speaks	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	3	19	n399	figs-metonymy	ὁ νόμος&τῷ νόμῳ	1	the ones who are under the law	Here Paul uses **the law** to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in [verses 10–18](../03/10.md) Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	3	19	e8h2	figs-personification	ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει & λαλεῖ	1	whatever the law says, it speaks	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	3	19	n399	figs-metonymy	ὁ νόμος & τῷ νόμῳ	1	the ones who are under the law	Here Paul uses **the law** to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in [verses 10–18](../03/10.md) Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	19	b0g5	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1		Paul uses **those with the law** to refer to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	19	end8	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what **the law says**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	3	19	cy5r	figs-idiom	πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ	1		Here, **every mouth may be shut** is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God, because everyone has sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human being can excuse himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	19	js71	figs-activepassive	φραγῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	19	w12y	figs-synecdoche	πᾶς ὁ κόσμος	1	the whole world held accountable to God	Paul uses**all the world** figuratively to refer to **all** the people living in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	3	19	wwq3	figs-explicit	ὑπόδικος γένηται&τῷ Θεῷ	1		The phrase **may become accountable to God** means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “may fall under God's judgment of guilt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	3	19	wwq3	figs-explicit	ὑπόδικος γένηται & τῷ Θεῷ	1		The phrase **may become accountable to God** means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “may fall under God's judgment of guilt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	20	ezbo	grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1		Here. **because** introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	3	20	vzot	figs-activepassive	οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	20	xs9x	figs-synecdoche	σὰρξ	1	flesh	Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	3	20	d6vi	figs-personification	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου&διὰ&νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1		In this verse Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them **full awareness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	3	20	d6vi	figs-personification	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου & διὰ & νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1		In this verse Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them **full awareness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	3	20	w5qb	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	3	20	i7zi	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου&νόμου	1		In this verse **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	3	20	i7zi	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1		In this verse **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	3	20	llh9	figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **before him** is an idiom meaning “in his presence.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	3	20	xgpp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **full awareness** and **sin**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	20	aety	figs-possession	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **full awareness** about the **sin** a person has committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	3	20	jdw9	figs-explicit	διὰ&νόμου	1		Here, **through law** indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	3	20	jdw9	figs-explicit	διὰ & νόμου	1		Here, **through law** indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	21	fqz4	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1		**But now** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about **the law** in [2:1–3:20](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	3	21	y3te	figs-infostructure	νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	now	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	3	21	e5ky	figs-explicit	νόμου&τοῦ νόμου	1	now	While the first occurrence of **the law** in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this difference by using **the law** and **the Law** respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws that God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	3	21	e5ky	figs-explicit	νόμου & τοῦ νόμου	1	now	While the first occurrence of **the law** in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this difference by using **the law** and **the Law** respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws that God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	21	nlj0	figs-possession	χωρὶς νόμου	1		Here, **apart from the law** could mean: (1) **apart from** doing what **the law** requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what **the law** says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	21	e4qe	figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	apart from the law the righteousness of God has been made known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	21	qkis	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -531,11 +531,11 @@ ROM	3	21	gvca	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νό
 ROM	3	21	tnf8	figs-personification	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	It was witnessed by the Law and the Prophets	Here Paul uses **the Law and the Prophets** as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	3	21	bgyx	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1		Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, **the Law and the Prophets**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	3	22	pec5	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **but** indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	3	22	cvhy	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη&Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	3	22	cvhy	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	22	q4m1	figs-possession	διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **faith in Jesus Christ** is a possessive form that indicates **faith** that is associated with **Jesus Christ**. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	22	c4mg	figs-ellipsis	τοὺς πιστεύοντας	1		Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	3	22	o6qe	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, **for** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why **the righteousness of God** is **for all those who believe**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	3	22	daa3	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ&ἐστιν διαστολή	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	3	22	daa3	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολή	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	23	x1hu	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	3	23	akn9	figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1		Here Paul uses the adjective **all** as a noun that refers to **all** the people who have ever existed or ever will exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	3	23	jbe9	figs-metaphor	ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul speaks of **all** people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain **the glory of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ ROM	3	24	atij	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆ
 ROM	3	24	hyeb	figs-explicit	ἀπολυτρώσεως	1		The word translated as **redemption** refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	24	lno6	figs-metaphor	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, Paul speaks of **redemption** as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	25	ci0v	figs-metaphor	ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον	1		Here Paul uses **presented** as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was **presented** to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	3	25	t2d8	figs-abstractnouns	ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως&εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **propitiation**, **faith**, **demonstration**, or **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	3	25	t2d8	figs-abstractnouns	ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως & εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **propitiation**, **faith**, **demonstration**, or **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	25	m159	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι	1	in his blood	Here Paul uses **his blood** to refer to Jesus’ death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	3	25	ieq9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἔνδειξιν	1	disregard	Here, **for** indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God **presented** Jesus as **a propitiation**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to demonstrate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	3	25	ze9m	figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1		See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ ROM	3	27	mvs0	figs-metaphor	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1		Here Paul sp
 ROM	3	27	pub7	figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boasting**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	27	px29	figs-explicit	ἐξεκλείσθη	1		In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	27	eufl	figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλείσθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	3	27	v3ut	figs-ellipsis	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?&διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	On what grounds? Of works? No, but on the grounds of faith	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person is made righteous through a law of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	3	27	v3ut	figs-ellipsis	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? & διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	On what grounds? Of works? No, but on the grounds of faith	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person is made righteous through a law of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	3	27	dpny	figs-rquestion	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?	1		In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in [verses 21–26](../03/21.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	3	27	bgyy	figs-possession	τῶν ἔργων?	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that is characterized by **works**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	27	h9wb	figs-explicit	οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1		In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -579,13 +579,13 @@ ROM	3	27	mlcq	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1		If your language does not use
 ROM	3	28	qe9p	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	3	28	jtqq	figs-exclusive	λογιζόμεθα	1		Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in [verse 9](../03/09.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	3	28	t8um	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	a person is justified by faith	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	3	28	ph88	figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦσθαι&ἄνθρωπον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	3	28	ph88	figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦσθαι & ἄνθρωπον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	3	28	jb14	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	3	28	s747	figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων νόμου	1	without works of the law	See how you translated “apart from the law” in [verse 21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	28	ycx2	figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	1	without works of the law	Paul is using the possessive form to refer to **the works** that God requires in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	29	hdbq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		**Or** here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	3	29	ineu	figs-ellipsis	οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	3	29	m8eo	figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν&ἐθνῶν	1		See how you translated **Gentiles** in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	3	29	m8eo	figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν & ἐθνῶν	1		See how you translated **Gentiles** in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	29	ch7p	figs-rquestion	Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	3	29	rq5m	figs-explicit	ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1		In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	3	29	gp74	figs-exclamations	ναὶ	1		**Yes** is an exclamation that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -593,9 +593,9 @@ ROM	3	30	vur7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ	1		Paul uses **if** as
 ROM	3	30	qdiu	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἴπερ	1		This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation: “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	3	30	ux30	figs-metaphor	εἷς ὁ Θεός	1		Paul speaks of **God** as if he were a number. He means that **God** is the **one** and only true **God** for both Jews and Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	3	30	rjxp	figs-distinguish	ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1		This phrase gives further information about **who** our **God** is. It is not making a distinction between the one true **God** and false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and he will justify the uncircumcision through the same faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	3	30	kw62	grammar-collectivenouns	περιτομὴν&ἀκροβυστίαν	1	he will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through faith	The words **circumcision** and **uncircumcision** are singular nouns that refer to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	3	30	gk5d	figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν&ἀκροβυστίαν	1	he will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through faith	Here Paul uses **the circumcision** to refer to the Jews by associating them with **circumcision**, and he uses **the uncircumcision** figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with **uncircumcision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	3	30	s9i4	figs-possession	ἐκ πίστεως&διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 26](../03/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	3	30	kw62	grammar-collectivenouns	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	he will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through faith	The words **circumcision** and **uncircumcision** are singular nouns that refer to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	3	30	gk5d	figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	he will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through faith	Here Paul uses **the circumcision** to refer to the Jews by associating them with **circumcision**, and he uses **the uncircumcision** figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with **uncircumcision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	3	30	s9i4	figs-possession	ἐκ πίστεως & διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 26](../03/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	3	31	vj40	grammar-connect-words-phrases	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	we uphold	Here, **then** indicates that this sentence is the response that a Jew might have made to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	3	31	y6qx	figs-rquestion	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	we uphold the law	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	3	31	nzr7	figs-exclusive	οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	we uphold	Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews on whose behalf Paul is speaking. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -615,27 +615,27 @@ ROM	4	1	ot88	figs-infostructure	εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν πρ
 ROM	4	1	fk5t	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1		See how you translated **according to the flesh** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	4	2	pmua	figs-quotemarks	εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1		These clauses continue the the statements that a Jew might have to against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	2	ka9b	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason for the statement in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	2	oe12	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	4	2	wvmh	figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ&ἐδικαιώθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	4	2	oe12	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	4	2	wvmh	figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ & ἐδικαιώθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	2	sibe	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων	1		Paul assumes that his readers would understand that **works**means “works of the law” as in [3:28](../03/28.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	2	mefy	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν	1		In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	2	me3d	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν.	1		What follows the word **but** here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however, not from God’s perspective!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	4	2	z9wx	figs-metaphor	πρὸς Θεόν	1		Paul speaks of **Abraham** as if he were located in the presence of **God**. He means that Abraham could not **boast** to God about his **righteousness** if it was **righteous by works**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	3	w9i5	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For what does the scripture say	**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	3	hih3	figs-rquestion	τί&ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	4	3	g1wz	figs-personification	τί&ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses **say** as if **the scripture** were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	4	3	r9te	writing-quotations	τί&ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?	1		Here Paul uses **what does the scripture say** to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	4	3	hih3	figs-rquestion	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	4	3	g1wz	figs-personification	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses **say** as if **the scripture** were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	4	3	r9te	writing-quotations	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?	1		Here Paul uses **what does the scripture say** to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	4	3	xdtx	figs-explicit	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here, **the scripture** refers specifically to the quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md) that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	3	smc6	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	it was counted to him as righteousness	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God credited it to him as righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	3	az65	writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη	1	it was counted to him as righteousness	The pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that **Abraham believed God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was credited” or “his trust in God was credited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	3	qked	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	4	ihul	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		**Now** here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	4	4	oojx	figs-extrainfo	τῷ&ἐργαζομένῳ	1		Here, **the one who works** refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (see [verse 2](../04/02.md)). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+ROM	4	4	oojx	figs-extrainfo	τῷ & ἐργαζομένῳ	1		Here, **the one who works** refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (see [verse 2](../04/02.md)). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 ROM	4	4	dsl8	figs-activepassive	ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν	1	what he is paid is not counted as a gift	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	4	4	xo4x		κατὰ χάριν&κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1		Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation”
-ROM	4	4	ossx	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ χάριν&κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **obligation**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “as something gifted … as something owed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	4	xo4x		κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1		Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation”
+ROM	4	4	ossx	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **obligation**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “as something gifted … as something owed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	5	ynp2	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		**Now** here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	4	5	j3ir	figs-explicit	τῷ&μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ	1		Here, **the one who does not work** refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	5	j3ir	figs-explicit	τῷ & μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ	1		Here, **the one who does not work** refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	5	fezj	figs-explicit	τὸν δικαιοῦντα	1		Here, **the one who justifies** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	5	tovp	figs-nominaladj	τὸν ἀσεβῆ	1		Paul is using the singular adjective phrase **the ungodly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	4	5	va3e	figs-activepassive	λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	his faith is counted as righteousness	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “God credited his faith as righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -649,8 +649,8 @@ ROM	4	6	lilj	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does
 ROM	4	6	o260	figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων	1		See how you translated this phrase in [3:28](../03/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	4	7	zqwl	figs-quotemarks	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		This verse is the beginning of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	7	dur6	figs-parallelism	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	whose lawless deeds are forgiven … whose sins are covered	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how **Blessed** these people are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ROM	4	7	lq4w	figs-abstractnouns	ὧν&αἱ ἀνομίαι&ὧν&αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **lawless deeds** and **sins**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	4	7	d4f4	figs-activepassive	ἀφέθησαν&ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	4	7	lq4w	figs-abstractnouns	ὧν & αἱ ἀνομίαι & ὧν & αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **lawless deeds** and **sins**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	7	d4f4	figs-activepassive	ἀφέθησαν & ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	7	hj2w	figs-ellipsis	ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1		Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	4	7	hqfm	figs-metaphor	ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1		Paul quotes David using **covered** to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	8	jjov	figs-quotemarks	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1		The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -660,10 +660,10 @@ ROM	4	8	y21b	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίαν	1		If your language does not u
 ROM	4	8	jdrm	figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ λογίσηται	1		Paul quotes David using **count** to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	8	yxh2	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1		The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	4	9	qtgb	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Then** here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [verses 6–8](../04/06.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	9	g4f6	figs-rquestion	ὁ μακαρισμὸς&οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	4	9	alrb	figs-explicit	ὁ μακαρισμὸς&οὗτος	1		Here, **this blessedness** refers to the joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in [verses 6–8](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	4	9	jmym	figs-metaphor	ὁ μακαρισμὸς&οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν&ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1		Paul speaks of **blessedness** as if it were an object that could be put **upon** someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	4	9	dn7v	grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν περιτομὴν&τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1		See how you translated these words in [3:30](../03/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	4	9	g4f6	figs-rquestion	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	4	9	alrb	figs-explicit	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος	1		Here, **this blessedness** refers to the joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in [verses 6–8](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	9	jmym	figs-metaphor	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν & ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1		Paul speaks of **blessedness** as if it were an object that could be put **upon** someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	4	9	dn7v	grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν περιτομὴν & τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1		See how you translated these words in [3:30](../03/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	4	9	mrsm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed, ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	4	9	w2xt	figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1		Here Paul uses **we** exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	4	9	o51f	writing-quotations	λέγομεν	1		Paul uses **we say** here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md), which Moses wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -671,12 +671,12 @@ ROM	4	9	m3uh	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πί
 ROM	4	10	trz4	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ?	1		In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was credited to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was credited to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	4	10	unuf	grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1		Here, **then** introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “How, as a result,” or “So then, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	4	10	uj5i	figs-idiom	πῶς	1		**How** here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	4	10	bw38	writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη&οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ	1		In this verse the pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith credited … His faith was not in circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	4	10	bw38	writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη & οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ	1		In this verse the pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith credited … His faith was not in circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	10	p5rp	figs-activepassive	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη	1	It was not in circumcision, but in uncircumcision	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God credit it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	10	wbta	figs-ellipsis	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1		Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it credited being in circumcision, or was it credited being in uncircumcision? It was not credited in circumcision, but it was credited in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	4	10	zj6b	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	4	11	unmg	figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς&ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ&δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	4	11	d564	figs-possession	σημεῖον&περιτομῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the sign** that is **circumcision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	4	11	unmg	figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς & ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ & δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	11	d564	figs-possession	σημεῖον & περιτομῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the sign** that is **circumcision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	4	11	rjhr	figs-distinguish	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1		This phrase gives further information about **the sign of circumcision**. Circumcision is not only a **sign**, but also a **seal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	4	11	wm54	figs-possession	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a seal** that proves **the righteousness** to be real. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	4	11	n31z	figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that comes from **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -689,28 +689,28 @@ ROM	4	11	hm61	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι α
 ROM	4	11	y88e	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1		See how you translated **counted** in [verses 3–5](../04/03.md) and [9–10](../04/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	11	ehib	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	12	v9bu	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς	1	And he became the father of the circumcision	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	4	12	u8j3	figs-explicit	πατέρα περιτομῆς&τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	And he became the father of the circumcision	Paul uses **father of circumcision** to indicate that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people. They are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in [2:29](../02/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual representative of those who are physically and spiritually circumcised … our spiritual representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	12	u8j3	figs-explicit	πατέρα περιτομῆς & τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	And he became the father of the circumcision	Paul uses **father of circumcision** to indicate that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people. They are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in [2:29](../02/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual representative of those who are physically and spiritually circumcised … our spiritual representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	12	krkf	figs-explicit	τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1		Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are **not only** circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same **faith** in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	4	12	s9jt	figs-idiom	καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς&πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	who follow in the steps of faith of our father Abraham	Here, **follow in the steps** is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	4	12	btrd	figs-possession	τῆς&πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the faith** that **our father Abraham** had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	4	12	s9jt	figs-idiom	καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	who follow in the steps of faith of our father Abraham	Here, **follow in the steps** is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	4	12	btrd	figs-possession	τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the faith** that **our father Abraham** had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	4	12	u5ur	figs-exclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1		Here, **our** refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in [3:9](../03/09.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	4	12	ykdc	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1		Here, **in uncircumcision** has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	13	i6xc	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in [verses 11–12](../04/11.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	13	e0a3	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐπαγγελία&τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **promise** and **heir**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	13	e0a3	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐπαγγελία & τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **promise** and **heir**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	13	yqxx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		Here, the world translated **or** indicates that **the promise** is **to Abraham** and **his seed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	4	13	ew13	figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ	1		Here Paul uses **seed** to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	13	ct1f	figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1		Here **the world** could refer to: (1) all the land of **the world**. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	4	13	pjyt	figs-explicit	οὐ&διὰ νόμου&ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1		Here the word translated as **through** indicates the means by which God gave **the promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	13	pjyt	figs-explicit	οὐ & διὰ νόμου & ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1		Here the word translated as **through** indicates the means by which God gave **the promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	13	kquo	figs-explicit	νόμου	1		See how you translated **the law** in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	13	iqsm	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνης πίστεως	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../04/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	4	14	hba4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that [verses 14–15](../04/14.md) give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	14	n0x6	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-ROM	4	14	ksui	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι&ἡ πίστις&ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1		See how you translated “heir”, **the law**, and **faith** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	14	n0x6	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+ROM	4	14	ksui	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι & ἡ πίστις & ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1		See how you translated “heir”, **the law**, and **faith** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	14	k4ip	figs-explicit	κληρονόμοι	1		Here, **heirs** refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	14	w977	figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι	1		Here, **from the law** refers to those who try to obey the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	14	hxvd	figs-metaphor	κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1		Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that **faith** would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeying**the law** allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	15	v1ow	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	4	15	qma4	figs-personification	ὁ&νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the **law** causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	4	15	qma4	figs-personification	ὁ & νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the **law** causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	4	15	h1x1	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1		See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	4	15	px0m	figs-metaphor	οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις	1		Paul speaks of **the law** and **transgression** as if they were located in a specific place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	15	t0wx	figs-abstractnouns	παράβασις	1		See how you translated the same use of **transgression** in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -733,13 +733,13 @@ ROM	4	17	ibwm	figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here Paul uses a q
 ROM	4	17	iju4	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it is written	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	4	17	sjm0	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	17	peaf	figs-quotemarks	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	I have made you	In this clause Paul quotes [Genesis 17:5](../gen/17/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	4	17	mxm5	writing-pronouns	τέθεικά σε&ἐπίστευσεν	1	I have made you	The pronoun **I** refers to **God**, and **you** and **he** refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	4	17	mxm5	writing-pronouns	τέθεικά σε & ἐπίστευσεν	1	I have made you	The pronoun **I** refers to **God**, and **you** and **he** refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	17	n6l7	figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Paul quotes God using **father** to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise **many nations**. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large number of people from **many nations** who trust in God as does Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	17	ph37	figs-explicit	κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,	1	in the presence of God whom he trusted, who gives life to the dead	Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	4	17	ifwu	figs-metaphor	κατέναντι&Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses **in the presence of** to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with **God**. Paul means that **God** personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from **many nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	4	17	s67j	figs-distinguish	οὗ ἐπίστευσεν&τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1		These clauses give further information about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	4	17	ifwu	figs-metaphor	κατέναντι & Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses **in the presence of** to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with **God**. Paul means that **God** personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from **many nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	4	17	s67j	figs-distinguish	οὗ ἐπίστευσεν & τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1		These clauses give further information about **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	4	17	tg2e	figs-metaphor	καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1		Paul speaks of **the things not existing** as if **God** were calling to them. Paul means that **God** creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in [Genesis 1:3–27](../gen/01/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking, creates things that did not previously exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	4	18	emih	writing-pronouns	ὃς&αὐτὸν&σου	1		The pronouns **who** and **he** and **your** refer to Abraham, not God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	4	18	emih	writing-pronouns	ὃς & αὐτὸν & σου	1		The pronouns **who** and **he** and **your** refer to Abraham, not God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	18	g8fm	figs-idiom	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	In hope he believed against hope	Here, **against hope** is an idiom meaning “despite what seemed hopeless.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	4	18	auah	figs-abstractnouns	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	18	n62i	figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -761,23 +761,23 @@ ROM	4	19	qil5	figs-metaphor	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρ
 ROM	4	19	yx92	figs-explicit	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1		Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	20	qn5h	figs-infostructure	εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	4	20	kicf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s **faith** in **the promise of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nonetheless," or “In fact,”
-ROM	4	20	o3zu	figs-explicit	εἰς&τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The word translated as **toward** could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	4	20	o3zu	figs-explicit	εἰς & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The word translated as **toward** could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	20	qcod	figs-possession	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the promise** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	4	20	wgmc	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	20	ep2z	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	did not hesitate in unbelief	Here, **did not waver** and **unbelief** form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in believing” or “his belief did not waver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	4	20	th2x	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ&τῇ πίστει	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unbelief** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	20	th2x	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & τῇ πίστει	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unbelief** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	20	zdj5	figs-activepassive	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	he was strengthened in faith	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	20	a4g4	figs-metaphor	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1		Paul speaks of Abraham’s **faith** as if it were something in which a person could be **strengthened**. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	4	20	ew3r	figs-abstractnouns	δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	21	y2sh	figs-activepassive	πληροφορηθεὶς	1	He was fully convinced	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	4	21	plbf	writing-pronouns	ἐπήγγελται&ἐστιν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to God, not Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	4	21	plbf	writing-pronouns	ἐπήγγελται & ἐστιν	1		The pronoun **he** refers to God, not Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	21	j12r	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἐπήγγελται	1		Here, **what he had promised** refers to the promise Paul describes in [verse 13](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	4	22	ympp	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1		Here, **therefore** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	4	22	wlnh	figs-quotemarks	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	22	i56a	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Therefore this was also counted to him as righteousness	See how you translated this in [verse 3](../04/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	4	23	zdc0	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγράφη&δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	Therefore this was also counted to him as righteousness	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was credited to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	4	23	r65c	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&αὐτῷ	1	only for his benefit	The pronouns **his** and **him** refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	4	23	bfiw	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγράφη&δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	4	23	zdc0	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	Therefore this was also counted to him as righteousness	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was credited to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	4	23	r65c	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ	1	only for his benefit	The pronouns **his** and **him** refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	4	23	bfiw	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	23	bmlm		δι’ αὐτὸν	1		Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him”
 ROM	4	23	ae1u	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,	1		This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	4	23	jft0	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1		See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -789,37 +789,37 @@ ROM	4	24	mujr		λογίζεσθαι	1		See how you translated **credited** in th
 ROM	4	24	artt	figs-explicit	τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		This clause refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	4	24	i6vl	figs-idiom	ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν	1		Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	4	24	iq69	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		Here, the phrase translated **the dead ones** refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	4	25	irue	writing-pronouns	ὃς&ἡμῶν&τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1		Here the pronoun **who** refers to Jesus, and **our** refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	4	25	cca1	figs-activepassive	ὃς παρεδόθη&ἠγέρθη	1	who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	4	25	irue	writing-pronouns	ὃς & ἡμῶν & τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1		Here the pronoun **who** refers to Jesus, and **our** refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	4	25	cca1	figs-activepassive	ὃς παρεδόθη & ἠγέρθη	1	who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	4	25	b999	figs-metaphor	ὃς παρεδόθη	1		Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be **given up** to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	4	25	op41	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν&διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespasses** and **justification**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	4	25	op41	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν & διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespasses** and **justification**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	4	25	imvc	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in [verses 23–24](../04/23.md). Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus **was given up**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	4	25	gmbd	figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη	1		See how you translated **raised** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	4	25	hzop	grammar-connect-logic-goal	διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being **raised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	5	intro	i1dt			0		# Romans 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)<br>    * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)<br>    * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)<br>    * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)<br>    * The blessings of justification (5:1–11)<br>    * Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The second Adam<br><br>Adam was the first man. He was created by God and called the first “son” of God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	5	1	age4	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in [1:18](../01/18.md)–[4:25](../04/25.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	5	1	xmp3	grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες&ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “we can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	5	1	xmp3	grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες & ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “we can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	1	xott	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	5	1	wbwx	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1		See how you translated this phrase in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	1	ldru	translate-textvariants	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1		Some ancient copies say “we have peace,” which makes sense, since [verses 1–5](../05/01.md) are a list of blessings that belong to those people who have been **justified by faith**. If the reading **let us have peace** is correct, this phrase may be indicating Paul’s desire that his fellow believers continue to experience the peace they have with God. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 ROM	5	1	kjpb	figs-imperative	ἔχωμεν	1		Paul uses the phrase **let us have peace** to exhort his Christian readers to continue living peacefully with God. It is not a command. This phrase does not imply that those who have been **justified by faith** do not yet have peace with God. Use a form in your language that communicates an exhortation. Alternate translation: “we must continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ROM	5	1	hi12	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	1	o2yr	figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1		Paul speaks of these people as if they could possess or own **peace**. He means that they can live peacefully with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “let us live in a peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	5	1	s6xd	figs-exclusive	ἔχωμεν&ἡμῶν	1	we … our	Here and throughout this chapter, **us** and **our** inclusively refer to all those **having been justified by faith** in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “let us believers have … our” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	5	1	s6xd	figs-exclusive	ἔχωμεν & ἡμῶν	1	we … our	Here and throughout this chapter, **us** and **our** inclusively refer to all those **having been justified by faith** in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “let us believers have … our” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	5	1	xaeg	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **through** indicates that **our Lord Jesus Christ** is the means by which believers have **peace with God**. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have **peace with God**, as briefly mentioned in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” or “which was caused by our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	2	slyh	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **access**, **faith**, or **grace**, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “through whom we also access and stand in how gracious God is by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	2	tsbo	writing-pronouns	οὗ	1		The pronoun **whom** refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	5	2	i50u	figs-exclusive	καὶ&ἐσχήκαμεν&ἑστήκαμεν&καυχώμεθα	1		The pronoun **we** in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	5	2	i50u	figs-exclusive	καὶ & ἐσχήκαμεν & ἑστήκαμεν & καυχώμεθα	1		The pronoun **we** in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	5	2	af0n	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1		Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	2	dxcu	figs-abstractnouns	καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	2	zp5p	figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using possessive forms to describe how **glory** relates to **God**. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in [3:23](../03/23.md). Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	3	q5p7	writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	Not only this	The pronoun **this** here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	5	3	c644	figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν	1		Here, **in our sufferings** could mean: (1) believers can **boast** about their **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	3	xeak	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1		Here, **knowing** indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are the reasons why believers can **boast in our sufferings**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	5	3	c0rl	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν&ἡ θλῖψις&ὑπομονὴν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings**, **suffering**, and **endurance**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer, it … a way to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	3	c0rl	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν & ἡ θλῖψις & ὑπομονὴν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings**, **suffering**, and **endurance**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer, it … a way to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	3	lo57	figs-metaphor	ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται	1		Paul speaks of **endurance** as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when Christians trust in God while **suffering**, they develop greater **endurance** than they had before experiencing **suffering**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “this suffering helps us know how to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	4	w7c2	figs-ellipsis	ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and this character produces hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	5	4	dt8w	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&ὑπομονὴ	1		See how you translated **endurance** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	4	dt8w	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ὑπομονὴ	1		See how you translated **endurance** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	4	gjvh	figs-abstractnouns	δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ	1		The word translated **character** refers specifically to the mental and moral qualities of someone who has been approved by God because they have successfully endured testing. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **character**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “qualities of which God approves, and the approved qualities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	4	eh9c	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίδα	1		See how you translated **hope** in [verse 2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	5	u4xh	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us, that hope does not disappoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -829,12 +829,12 @@ ROM	5	5	dc95	figs-activepassive	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυ
 ROM	5	5	clmb	figs-possession	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **love** relates to **God**. Here, **the love of God** could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “our love for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	5	glt1	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1		See how you translated this word in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	5	6	x5eg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	we	**For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 6–8](../05/06.md) explains “the love of God” in [verse 5](../05/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	6	a7s7	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι&ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1		In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
-ROM	5	6	xqr3	figs-explicit	ἔτι&ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1		Here, **weak** means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	5	6	a7s7	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1		In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+ROM	5	6	xqr3	figs-explicit	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1		Here, **weak** means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	6	xl85	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν	1		Here, **ungodly ones** refers to the **we** mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on behalf of us ungodly ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	7	o92c	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here,**For** introduces an explanation, by contrast, of how surprising it is that Christ would die on behalf of ungodly sinners, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	7	h089	figs-hypo	μόλις γὰρ&τις ἀποθανεῖται&γὰρ&τάχα τις	1		Paul uses **someone** twice in this verse in two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-ROM	5	7	x60d	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ&τάχα τις	2		What follows the word **though** here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although **someone will hardly die** for **a righteous person**, **someone** might possibly be willing to die for a **good person**. Although Paul does not state the difference between **a righteous person** and **a good person**, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to willingly die on behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+ROM	5	7	h089	figs-hypo	μόλις γὰρ & τις ἀποθανεῖται & γὰρ & τάχα τις	1		Paul uses **someone** twice in this verse in two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+ROM	5	7	x60d	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ & τάχα τις	2		What follows the word **though** here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although **someone will hardly die** for **a righteous person**, **someone** might possibly be willing to die for a **good person**. Although Paul does not state the difference between **a righteous person** and **a good person**, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to willingly die on behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	5	7	mqyq	figs-metaphor	καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν	1		Paul speaks of dying as if it were a **dare** or challenge for **someone** to overcome. He means that **someone** would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	8	qh0h	figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτοῦ	1		Paul uses the word **his own** to emphasize how much **God** loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	5	8	vh6y	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ ROM	5	9	nvs3	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	blood	See ho
 ROM	5	9	jbaz	figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	5	9	bev3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὀργῆς	1	his wrath	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **the wrath**, you could use a different expression. Here, **the wrath** refers specifically to “the day of wrath”, which is mentioned in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “when God finally judges sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	10	wply	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	10	mz06	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ἐχθροὶ ὄντες	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since, being enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	5	10	mz06	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐχθροὶ ὄντες	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since, being enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	5	10	rnc5	figs-activepassive	κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	we were reconciled to God through the death of his Son	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the death of his Son reconciled us to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	5	10	cu3c	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 ROM	5	10	o1m6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1		Here, **much more** strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of **having been reconciled** with **God**. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -866,18 +866,18 @@ ROM	5	11	xjes	figs-abstractnouns	νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβ
 ROM	5	12	hjx4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ τοῦτο	1		The phrase **For this reason** indicates that what follows in [verses 12–21](../05/12.md) is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human **sin** and God’s grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	12	wf9f	figs-metaphor	ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν	1	through one man sin entered … death entered through sin	Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **death** as if they were objects that could enter a place or spread within people. Paul means that the way God intended for **the world** and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by **sin** and **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as through one man sin began to exist in the world, and that sin would result in that man’s death, so also all men born after that man would die too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	12	pa8s	figs-explicit	δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1		Paul uses the phrase **one man** to refer to Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in [verse14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “through the first man, Adam,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	5	12	smc2	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία&τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως&ὁ θάνατος	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sin** and **death**, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	12	smc2	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία & τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως & ὁ θάνατος	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sin** and **death**, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	12	uxcs	figs-ellipsis	διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and through sin death entered into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	5	12	xhbv	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	5	12	jy25	writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ᾧ πάντες ἥμαρτον	1		Here the pronoun **which** could refer to: (1) the fact that Paul states in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “because of this fact, namely, that all sinned” (2) the **one man** mentioned earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “because of the one man, all sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	5	12	si2i	figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1		Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	5	13	at4i	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 13–14](../05/13.md) explains what came before it. Here it explains how death and **sin** existed before the **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	13	e6bx	figs-ellipsis	ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου&μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … as that was when there was no law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	5	13	abjg	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου&νόμου	1		In this verse **law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews. See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	5	13	v51t	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία&ἁμαρτία	1		See how you translated **sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	13	e6bx	figs-ellipsis	ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου & μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … as that was when there was no law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	5	13	abjg	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1		In this verse **law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews. See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	5	13	v51t	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία	1		See how you translated **sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	13	uyd4	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ	1		Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that could exist in a place. Paul means that people sinned **in the world** before God gave his laws to Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people sinned in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	5	13	juq7	figs-activepassive	ἁμαρτία&οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	but there is no accounting for sin when there is no law	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	5	13	izno		ἁμαρτία&οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2		Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins”
+ROM	5	13	juq7	figs-activepassive	ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	but there is no accounting for sin when there is no law	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	5	13	izno		ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2		Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins”
 ROM	5	13	v5l9	grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1		Here, **being** could indicate: (1) the reason why **sin is not charged**. Alternate translation: “because there was no law” (2) the time when **sin is not charged**. Alternate translation: “when there was no law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	13	j04c	figs-explicit	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1		Here, **no law** implies that God had not yet given people his laws that could help them identify what sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being no law to identify to people what sin is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	14	bd3q	figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς	1	death ruled from Adam until Moses	Here Paul speaks of **death** as if it were a king who **ruled** **over** people. Paul means that nobody could prevent themselves from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human from Adam until Moses could escape dying, even those” or “human life from Adam until Moses inevitably ended in death, even the lives of those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -888,53 +888,53 @@ ROM	5	14	skns	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς πα
 ROM	5	14	k2w7	figs-possession	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the likeness** relates to the **transgression**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	14	e4ze	figs-metaphor	Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1		Paul speaks of **Adam** as if he were a model or **pattern**. Paul means that **Adam**’s role is similar to the role of **the one who is coming** because both people do things that affect all human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of the one who is coming” or “Adam, who models the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	14	mu4s	figs-explicit	τοῦ μέλλοντος	1		The phrase **the one who is coming** refers to Jesus. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who would come in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus, who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus, who was destined to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	5	15	x37x	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα&τὸ χάρισμα&τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι&ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **trespass**, **gracious gift**, **grace**, and **gift**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	15	x37x	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & τὸ χάρισμα & τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **trespass**, **gracious gift**, **grace**, and **gift**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	15	ieb0	figs-infostructure	οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the gracious gift is not like the trespass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	5	15	sful	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of the difference between the **trespass** and the **gracious gift**. Use a connection word or other way to indicate that the second sentence of this verse explains the first one. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You see,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	15	yxej	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gracious gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	5	15	kdhb	figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the trespass** that was committed by the **one** man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	5	15	e9me	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ&τοὺς πολλοὺς	1		Here Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	5	15	e9me	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ & τοὺς πολλοὺς	1		Here Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	5	15	h6c3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1		Here, **how much more** strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of **the trespass** of Adam and the **grace of God** that comes through **Jesus Christ**. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	15	tfhj	figs-infostructure	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “abounded to the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	5	15	ejxz	figs-possession	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	15	wn36	figs-possession	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the grace** that comes from **the one man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	16	ns9a	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	5	16	rmpt	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δώρημα&τὸ δὲ χάρισμα	1		See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	16	rmpt	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δώρημα & τὸ δὲ χάρισμα	1		See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	16	ok2k	figs-ellipsis	ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the same as what came through one who sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	5	16	muum	figs-explicit	ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1		Here, **one who sinned** refers to Adam, as mentioned in [verses 12–15](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one who sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	5	16	ub9s	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&κρίμα	2		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	16	ub9s	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & κρίμα	2		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	16	eusx	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1		Here, **one** refers to the **one** sin Adam committed. It does not refer to Adam himself, as the previous **one** does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Adam’s trespass” or “from the sin Adam committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	16	xza3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1		Here, **from one** could indicate: (1) that **the judgment** happened after the **one** trespass. Alternate translation: “after one” (2) that **the judgment** happened because of the **one** trespass. Alternate translation: “because of one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	5	16	t4t8	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κατάκριμα&παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation**, **trespasses**, and **justification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	16	t4t8	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κατάκριμα & παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation**, **trespasses**, and **justification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	16	s82t	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς κατάκριμα	1		Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **judgment**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “to the resulting condemnation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	16	m5k4	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων	1		Here, **from many trespasses** could indicate: (1) that **the gracious gift** happened after **many trespasses**. Alternate translation: “after many trespasses” (2) that **the gracious gift** happened because of **many trespasses**. Alternate translation: “because of many trespasses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	16	jarb	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαίωμα	1		Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **gracious gift**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “to the resulting justification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	17	n5zx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces a further explanation of the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift, as discussed in [verses15–16](../05/15.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	17	mhtc	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	5	17	lcyd	figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	5	17	whbf	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ ἑνὸς&τοῦ ἑνός&τοῦ ἑνὸς	1		See how you translated the first occurrence of **one** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ROM	5	17	yvq5	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος&τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης&ἐν ζωῇ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	17	whbf	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑνός & τοῦ ἑνὸς	1		See how you translated the first occurrence of **one** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	5	17	yvq5	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος & τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης & ἐν ζωῇ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	17	kz6z	figs-personification	ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν	1	death ruled	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 14](../05/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	5	17	mtr9	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνός	1	death ruled	Here, **through** indicates that **the one** is the reason why **death ruled**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	17	lf7t	grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verses 10](../05/10.md) and [15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	5	17	hfvt	figs-infostructure	ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through the one man Jesus Christ will … rule in life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	5	17	xy6h	figs-metaphor	οἱ&ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν	1		Paul speaks of these people as if they were kings who **rule** in a location called **life**. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they **will rule** with **Jesus Christ** while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	5	17	xy6h	figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν	1		Paul speaks of these people as if they were kings who **rule** in a location called **life**. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they **will rule** with **Jesus Christ** while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	17	nr25	figs-distinguish	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες	1		This clause describes the people who will **rule in life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of the grace and the gift of the righteousness as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	5	17	fodc	figs-possession	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος&λαμβάνοντες	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **abundance** that relates to **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	5	17	fodc	figs-possession	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος & λαμβάνοντες	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **abundance** that relates to **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	17	o8c3	figs-possession	τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **righteousness** is a **gift**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gift, which is that of being made righteous,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	17	ehbk	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **through** indicates that **the one, Jesus Christ** is the reason why his people will **rule in life**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	17	uifs	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The phrase **the one, Jesus Christ** refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to **rule in life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what the one, Jesus Christ has done for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	18	e7cq	figs-ellipsis	ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, as one man trespassed and this trespass caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteously and this act caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	5	18	mccf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		**So then** indicates that what follows in [verses 18–21](../05/18.md) summarizes the ideas of [verses 12–17](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	18	sfwg	grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’&δι’	1		See how you translated **through** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	5	18	z0jq	figs-abstractnouns	παραπτώματος&κατάκριμα&δικαίωσιν	1		See how you translated **trespass**, **condemnation**, and **justification** in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	18	sfwg	grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ & δι’	1		See how you translated **through** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	5	18	z0jq	figs-abstractnouns	παραπτώματος & κατάκριμα & δικαίωσιν	1		See how you translated **trespass**, **condemnation**, and **justification** in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	18	n8pr	figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους	-1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated **all men** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	5	18	bcm2	figs-possession	δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **justification** relates to **life**. This could mean: (1) **justification** that leads to **life**. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) **justification** that is **life**. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	5	18	bmey	figs-explicit	ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	19	hj69	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	19	sjek	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ&οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated the similar connective words **just as** and **so also** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	19	rgji	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ&διὰ	1		See how you translated **through** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	5	19	z8r8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου&τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	19	sjek	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated the similar connective words **just as** and **so also** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	5	19	rgji	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1		See how you translated **through** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	5	19	z8r8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου & τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	19	qpsm	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, **the one man** refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of **one man** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	19	q8lj	figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused the many to become sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	5	19	huig	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοί	-1		See how you translated **the many** in [verse 15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -943,17 +943,17 @@ ROM	5	19	bhra	figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑν
 ROM	5	19	haks	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς	2		Here, **the one** refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in [verse 17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	20	lah6	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμος	1		See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	5	20	w958	figs-personification	παρεισῆλθεν	1	the law came in	The word translated **slipped in** can refer to sneaking in unnoticed, as in [Jude 1:4](../jud/01/04.md). Paul may be stressing how the coming of **the law** was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	5	20	ttcw	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα&ἡ ἁμαρτία&ἡ χάρις	1		See how you translated **trespass** in [verses 15–18](../05/15.md), **sin** in [verses 12–13](../05/12.md), and **grace** in [verses 15](../05/15.md) and [17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	5	20	relk	figs-metaphor	πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα&ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις	1		Paul speaks of **the trespass**, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	5	20	ttcw	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἡ χάρις	1		See how you translated **trespass** in [verses 15–18](../05/15.md), **sin** in [verses 12–13](../05/12.md), and **grace** in [verses 15](../05/15.md) and [17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	20	relk	figs-metaphor	πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα & ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις	1		Paul speaks of **the trespass**, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	20	wbh3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα	1		This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving **the law**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	5	20	godn	figs-metaphor	οὗ	1		Here Paul uses **where** to refer to **sin** and **grace** as if they were located somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	5	21	ycy7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God caused grace to abound, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	5	21	ymxy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ&οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [verse 19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	5	21	leu9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ&ἡ χάρις&δικαιοσύνης&ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		See how you translated **sin** and **grace** in the previous verse, **death** and **righteousness** in [verse 17](../05/17.md), and **eternal life** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	5	21	ymxy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [verse 19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	5	21	leu9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ & ἡ χάρις & δικαιοσύνης & ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		See how you translated **sin** and **grace** in the previous verse, **death** and **righteousness** in [verse 17](../05/17.md), and **eternal life** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	5	21	wmy8	figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	as sin ruled in death	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that everyone was controlled by their sinful desires. While death **ruled** in [verse 14](../05/14.md), **sin ruled** after God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone was controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	5	21	wuh2	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ	1	as sin ruled in death	Here, **in death** could refer to: (1) the location in which **sin ruled**. Alternate translation: “in the place where death exists” (2) the means by which **sin ruled**. Alternate translation: “by means of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	5	21	kc21	figs-personification	χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	as sin ruled in death	Here Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that God’s **grace** allows people to become righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is might make people become righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	5	21	bk72	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ&διὰ	1		See how you translated **through** in the [verses 17–19](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	5	21	bk72	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1		See how you translated **through** in the [verses 17–19](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	21	c9nj	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **grace** ruling **through righteousness**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “resulted in eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	5	21	axr9	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1		The phrase **Jesus Christ our Lord** refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have **eternal life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ our Lord has done for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	intro	v522			0		# Romans 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)<br>    * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)<br>    * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>In this chapter Paul frequently uses the metaphor of the relationship between slaves and their masters. He speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were slaves to sin and the death it causes ([6:6](../06/06.md), [16–17](../06/16.md), [20](../06/20.md)). He also speaks figuratively of Christians as if God has freed them from being enslaved to sin and has himself or righteousness as their master ([6:18](../06/18.md), [22](../06/22.md)). Because Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, they should instead serve God and live in a way that glorifies him ([6:12–14](../06/12.md), [19](../06/19.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/servant]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>In [verses 1–3](../06/01.md), [15–16](../06/15.md), and [21](../06/21.md) Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to answer objections that people might make about what he is saying.<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “baptized into Christ Jesus” in [verse 3](../06/03.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ ROM	6	1	fxgw	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1		Here, **then** indicat
 ROM	6	1	pvg3	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	What then will we say? Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound?	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address rumors some people may have been spreading that misrepresent his teachings. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that we should continue in the sin so that the grace might increase!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	6	1	t8tl	figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	we say	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	6	1	fj9e	figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν	1	we say	Here, **we** includes all those of whom Paul spoke as those “who were baptized into Christ Jesus,” as mentioned in [6:3](../06/03.md), so **we** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	6	1	ngpt	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ&ἡ χάρις	1		See how you translated **sin** and **grace** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	1	ngpt	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & ἡ χάρις	1		See how you translated **sin** and **grace** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	1	sa16	figs-metaphor	ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1		Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a location. He is referring to the idea of people continuing to live sinfully after they have become Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	1	ju6f	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1		Paul speaks here of **grace** as if it were an object that could **increase** in amount, as he also does in [5:20](../05/20.md). He is referring to the idea of Christians experiencing the power or influence of **grace** in their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “so that we can experience more grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	1	f5qt	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1		The phrase **so that** here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the supposed purpose for which someone would **sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -978,9 +978,9 @@ ROM	6	4	m43r	grammar-connect-logic-result	συνετάφημεν οὖν	1		If i
 ROM	6	4	f4va	figs-metaphor	συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ	1	We were buried, then, with him through baptism into death	Paul speaks of Christians as if they **were buried** with Jesus when they were baptized. Paul mentions burial because it emphasizes that Jesus did indeed die. Here he means that Christians are indeed united with Christ’s **death** and share in its spiritual benefits. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We are indeed united, then, with Christ’s death” or “We are so united, then, with Christ’s death that it is as if we were really buried with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	4	vva7	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	We were buried, then, with him through baptism into death	Here, **through** indicates that the following phrase is the means by which Christians **were buried** with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the baptism into his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	4	kmn3	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	We were buried, then, with him through baptism into death	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	6	4	y71v	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον&τῆς δόξης&ζωῆς	1		See how you translated **death** in [6:3](../06/03.md), **glory** in [5:2](../05/02.md), and **life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	4	y71v	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον & τῆς δόξης & ζωῆς	1		See how you translated **death** in [6:3](../06/03.md), **glory** in [5:2](../05/02.md), and **life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	4	k1el	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted **baptism**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	6	4	kado	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ&οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	6	4	kado	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1		See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	6	4	z6zk	figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1		The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being **raised** from the dead, as Christ was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 ROM	6	4	dpy2	figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	6	4	t47r	figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father, so also we might walk in newness of life	See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -988,12 +988,12 @@ ROM	6	4	ce9z	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		See how you translated this phras
 ROM	6	4	gblc	figs-possession	διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **glory** that comes from or characterizes **the Father**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through the glory from the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	6	4	y29w	figs-explicit	τῆς δόξης	1		Here, **the glory** refers specifically to God’s glorious power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the glorious power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	4	r3hn	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-ROM	6	4	gtns	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς&περιπατήσωμεν	1		Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	6	4	gtns	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & περιπατήσωμεν	1		Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	4	hyab	figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **life** that is characterized by **newness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with a new life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	6	5	msbq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	6	5	jdzp	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	6	5	p6xk	figs-metaphor	σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection	Here Paul speaks of **death** as if it were something with which Christians could be physically **planted together**. He means that by being baptized, Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we participate in Christ’s death through baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	6	5	z8wa	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ&τῆς ἀναστάσεως	1	we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **likeness** and **resurrection**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	5	z8wa	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ & τῆς ἀναστάσεως	1	we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **likeness** and **resurrection**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	5	hg5y	figs-explicit	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection	Here Paul implies that **likeness of his death** refers to the “baptism” referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death that is represented by baptism” or “in baptism, which represents dying with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	5	kfvs	figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα	1	we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection	Here Paul speaks of **resurrection** as if it were something of which Christians could **become part**. He means that Christians will one day rise from the dead like Christ did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we will also certainly be resurrected like Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	6	fhvh	figs-activepassive	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1003,10 +1003,10 @@ ROM	6	6	n6o6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **in order that** intro
 ROM	6	6	jpge	figs-activepassive	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	the body of sin	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might nullify the body of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	6	6	jw00	figs-metaphor	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	the body of sin	Paul speaks of **the body of sin** as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled. He means that Christ’s crucifixion removed the ability of sinful desires to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God might completely end how living sinfully controls people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	6	l6pd	figs-possession	τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	the body of sin	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the body** is related to **sin**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **the body of sin** could refer to: (1) how humans tend to **sin**. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	6	6	l3zm	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας&ἁμαρτίᾳ	1		See how you translated **sin** in [verse 1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	6	l3zm	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & ἁμαρτίᾳ	1		See how you translated **sin** in [verse 1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	6	c5ie	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν	1		Here, **for** could indicate: (1) God’s purpose for nullifying **the body of sin**. Alternate translation: “in order for it to no longer enslave” (2) the result of **the body of sin** being **nullified**. Alternate translation: “causing it to no longer enslave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	6	6	rpax	figs-metaphor	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1		Paul speaks of **the body of sin** as if it could **enslave** people. Here he means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for it to no longer make us live sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	6	7	f893	figs-explicit	ὁ&ἀποθανὼν	1		Here Paul implies that **the one having died** is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” ([6:2](../06/02.md)) to be **freed from** living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	6	7	f893	figs-explicit	ὁ & ἀποθανὼν	1		Here Paul implies that **the one having died** is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” ([6:2](../06/02.md)) to be **freed from** living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	7	qvgd	figs-metaphor	δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1		Paul continues the metaphor of **sin** enslaving people from the previous verse. Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were something that people need to be **freed from**. He means that the desire to **sin** that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer has to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	7	hoqm	figs-activepassive	δεδικαίωται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has freed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	6	7	geua	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας	1		See how you translated **sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1028,10 +1028,10 @@ ROM	6	10	j7bl	writing-pronouns	ὃ	2	For in regard to the death that he died to
 ROM	6	10	z4yb	figs-explicit	ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here, **to God** implies that Christ now lives for the sake of glorifying God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he lives for the sake of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	11	zjjv	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1	In the same way, you also must consider	Throughout [verses 11–23](../06/11.md), the pronouns **you** and “your” are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers at Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	6	11	dw6l	figs-metaphor	εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	dead to sin	See how you translated “died to sin” in [verse 2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	6	11	bjxg	figs-explicit	ζῶντας&τῷ Θεῷ	1	dead to sin	See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	6	11	bjxg	figs-explicit	ζῶντας & τῷ Θεῷ	1	dead to sin	See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	11	nkvd	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	dead to sin	See how you translated this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	12	pp2t	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	do not let sin rule in your mortal body	**Therefore** here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating how he wants his readers to act in response to what he said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	6	12	s6h1	figs-personification	μὴ&βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	do not let sin rule in your mortal body	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a king who rules over a place called **mortal body**. By *(*do not let sin rule**, Paul means that Christians should not allow **sin** to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of **rule** in [5:21](../05/21.md). Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	12	s6h1	figs-personification	μὴ & βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	do not let sin rule in your mortal body	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a king who rules over a place called **mortal body**. By *(*do not let sin rule**, Paul means that Christians should not allow **sin** to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of **rule** in [5:21](../05/21.md). Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	12	z1ia	figs-genericnoun	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι,	1	in your mortal body	Although **body** here is a singular noun, Paul is referring to the bodies of his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a plural form. Alternate translation: “in your mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	6	12	cm8d	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	in your mortal body	Here, **body** could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “in you” or “in your whole being” (2) the physical human body. Alternative translation: “in your physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	6	12	r462	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Here **to** indicates that what follows is the result of letting **sin rule**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to obey its lusts” or “resulting in you obeying your lusts”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1039,19 +1039,19 @@ ROM	6	12	yg9l	figs-personification	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς 
 ROM	6	12	zs9g	figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lusts**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	12	kh3w	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The pronoun **its** refers to **mortal body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	6	13	wt07	figs-infostructure	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses in order to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not keep presenting your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members as tools of righteousness to God. And present yourselves to God, as living from dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	6	13	mxto	figs-metaphor	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ&καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1		Paul speaks of body parts as if they were **tools** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	6	13	mxto	figs-metaphor	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1		Paul speaks of body parts as if they were **tools** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	13	qncn	figs-possession	ὅπλα ἀδικίας	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	6	13	hlzf		ὅπλα&ὅπλα	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The word translated as **tools** often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”
-ROM	6	13	dq4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικίας&δικαιοσύνης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness** and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is unrighteous … of what is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	13	hlzf		ὅπλα & ὅπλα	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The word translated as **tools** often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”
+ROM	6	13	dq4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικίας & δικαιοσύνης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness** and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is unrighteous … of what is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	13	wq3m	figs-metaphor	παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul speaks of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give yourselves to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	13	px9k	figs-simile	ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now **dead to sin, but alive to God**, as mentioned in [verse 11](../06/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 ROM	6	13	vk76	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 4](../06/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	6	13	amyo	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	6	13	dz8u	figs-possession	ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης	1	in order that you may obey its lusts	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	6	14	xfz1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	6	14	u36f	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἁμαρτία&ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	6	14	gez3	figs-personification	ἁμαρτία&ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 12](../06/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	6	14	bl09	figs-declarative	ἁμαρτία&οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+ROM	6	14	u36f	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	6	14	gez3	figs-personification	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 12](../06/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	14	bl09	figs-declarative	ἁμαρτία & οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ROM	6	14	caqv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges his readers to not allow **sin** to **lord over** them. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	14	a0dz	figs-personification	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Do not allow sin to rule over you	Paul speaks of **law** and **grace** as if they were rulers **under** whose authority people have to live. He means that Christians are no longer controlled by the requirements of the **law**, which resulted in people sinning more, as stated in [5:20](../05/20.md). By contrast, Christians now serve the gracious God, as is explained in [verses 15–23](../06/15.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for the law no longer controls you, but you are now controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	14	eibi	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1		See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -1059,45 +1059,45 @@ ROM	6	14	ypqx	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ χάριν	1		Here, **grace** refers specif
 ROM	6	15	yk81	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1		Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [verses 1–14](../06/01.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md), [4:1](../04/01.md), and [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	15	zxb8	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	What then? Shall we sin because we are not under law, but under grace? May it never be	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question form here to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	6	15	rtts	figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	What then? Shall we sin because we are not under law, but under grace? May it never be	In these two sentences, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	6	15	t4cc	figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον&ὑπὸ χάριν	1	May it never be	See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	15	t4cc	figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον & ὑπὸ χάριν	1	May it never be	See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	15	t52x	figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he posed earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	15	c77g	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	6	16	n5j4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε—ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	6	16	hn6y	writing-pronouns	ᾧ&ᾧ	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	The pronoun translated **what** here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	6	16	g6zz	figs-metaphor	παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους&δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Paul speaks of people as if they could offer themselves as **slaves** to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	6	16	hn6y	writing-pronouns	ᾧ & ᾧ	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	The pronoun translated **what** here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	6	16	g6zz	figs-metaphor	παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους & δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Paul speaks of people as if they could offer themselves as **slaves** to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	6	16	psrr	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοήν	1		Here, **for** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are **presenting** themselves as **slaves**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	6	16	zim4	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοήν&ὑπακοῆς	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	16	zim4	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοήν & ὑπακοῆς	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	16	h0ar	figs-personification	ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **sin** and **obedience** are spoken of as if they were masters that **slaves** would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to **sin** or a desire to obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	6	16	gtzd	figs-possession	ἁμαρτίας&ὑπακοῆς	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that belong to **sin** or **obedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	6	16	cyct	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας&δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	See how you translated **sin** in [verse 1](../06/01.md) and **righteousness** in [verse 13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	6	16	zfgc	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς θάνατον&εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	6	16	gtzd	figs-possession	ἁμαρτίας & ὑπακοῆς	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that belong to **sin** or **obedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	6	16	cyct	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	See how you translated **sin** in [verse 1](../06/01.md) and **righteousness** in [verse 13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	16	zfgc	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς θάνατον & εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	16	d8gv	figs-explicit	εἰς θάνατον	1	whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	6	17	xj75	figs-exclamations	χάρις&τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here, **thanks be to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+ROM	6	17	xj75	figs-exclamations	χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here, **thanks be to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	6	17	tl5d	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1		Here, **that** indicates that the clause that follows provides a contrast between who Paul’s readers were before they became Christians and who they were after they had **listened from the heart** to true Christian **teaching**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even though you were slaves of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	6	17	yxt7	figs-personification	δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	For you were slaves of sin	See how you translated the similar phrase **of sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	6	17	uwcy	figs-personification	ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς&τύπον διδαχῆς	1	For you were slaves of sin	Here Paul speaks of **the pattern of teaching** as if it were a person who could be **listened** to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	17	uwcy	figs-personification	ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς & τύπον διδαχῆς	1	For you were slaves of sin	Here Paul speaks of **the pattern of teaching** as if it were a person who could be **listened** to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	17	ep7k	figs-explicit	ὑπηκούσατε	1	For you were slaves of sin	The word translated **listened** implies that the people who listened also responded by obeying what they heard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you clung” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	6	17	my2z	figs-idiom	ὑπηκούσατε&ἐκ καρδίας	1	but you have obeyed from the heart	Here, **from the heart** is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	6	17	my2z	figs-idiom	ὑπηκούσατε & ἐκ καρδίας	1	but you have obeyed from the heart	Here, **from the heart** is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	6	17	lugj	figs-personification	εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς	1	but you have obeyed from the heart	Here Paul speaks of **the pattern of teaching** as if it were a slave-master to which people are **given over to** as slaves when they become Christians. Paul means that Christians should submit to the authority of true Christian teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the pattern of teaching that you were submitted to” or “to the pattern of teaching that you were handed over to, as if you were its slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	17	pz14	figs-activepassive	ὃν παρεδόθητε	1	the pattern of teaching that you were given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave you over to” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	6	18	fcd1	figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1		Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **righteousness** as if they were slave-masters that people could be **enslaved** to. Paul means that his readers are no longer controlled by their sinful desires, but are controlled by the desire to live righteously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And having been freed from having to live sinfully, you now have to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	18	y2zg	figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε	1	You have been made free from sin	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “And God having freed you from sin, he enslaved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	6	18	twpq	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας&δικαιοσύνῃ	1	You have been made free from sin	See how you translated **sin** and **righteousness** in [verse 16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	18	twpq	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνῃ	1	You have been made free from sin	See how you translated **sin** and **righteousness** in [verse 16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	19	jlmd	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	19	puvh	figs-idiom	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Here, **as a man** is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	6	19	gt1n	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν&τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν&τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **weakness**, **uncleanness**, **lawlessness**, **righteousness**, and **sanctification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	19	gt1n	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν & τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **weakness**, **uncleanness**, **lawlessness**, **righteousness**, and **sanctification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	19	l4ah	figs-idiom	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Here, **flesh** is an idiom that refers to human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	6	19	psmw	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [verses 17–18](../06/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moreover,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	6	19	x2kt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ&οὕτως	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	See how you translated **just as** and **so** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	6	19	jbcz	figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν&παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Paul speaks of body parts as if they were **slaves** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 13](../06/13.md). Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	19	x2kt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	See how you translated **just as** and **so** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	6	19	jbcz	figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	because of the weakness of your flesh	Paul speaks of body parts as if they were **slaves** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 13](../06/13.md). Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	19	o0ta	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	presented the parts of your body as slaves to uncleanness and to evil	The phrase **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	20	s9pk	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	6	20	i1ze	figs-personification	ὅτε&δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	you were free from righteousness	Here, Paul speaks of **sin** and **righteousness** as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as **slaves** of **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	20	i1ze	figs-personification	ὅτε & δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	you were free from righteousness	Here, Paul speaks of **sin** and **righteousness** as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as **slaves** of **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	20	mu0y	figs-irony	ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1		Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of **free**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-ROM	6	21	x3bn	grammar-connect-logic-result	τίνα&καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	6	21	x3bn	grammar-connect-logic-result	τίνα & καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	21	kjl5	figs-rquestion	τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε	1	At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed?	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So you were not then having any fruit because of which things you are now ashamed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	6	21	vgam	figs-idiom	καρπὸν	1	At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed?	Here, **fruit** is an idiom that refers to a benefit or advantage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	6	21	pnbm	figs-explicit	ἐφ’ οἷς&ἐκείνων	1	At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed?	Here, **which things** and **those things** refer to sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	6	21	pnbm	figs-explicit	ἐφ’ οἷς & ἐκείνων	1	At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed?	Here, **which things** and **those things** refer to sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	21	j2ie	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed?	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **outcome** and **death**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “For those things finally result in you dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	21	tj21	figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed?	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [verse 16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	6	22	x8vw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δέ	1	But now that you have been made free from sin and are enslaved to God	**But now** introduces a contrast with the previous two verses, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated **now** refers to the time after the Roman believers became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what **now** refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -1105,15 +1105,15 @@ ROM	6	22	cqlf	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπ
 ROM	6	22	fmtc	figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	But now that you have been made free from sin and are enslaved to God	Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **God** as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, but are supposed to obey **God** instead. See a similar phrase in [verse 18](../06/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been freed from having to live sinfully and having begun to serve God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	6	22	z3ap	figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	But now that you have been made free from sin and are enslaved to God	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having freed you from sin and having enslaved you to himself” or “God having released you from being controlled by your sin and having caused you to serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	6	22	npf3	figs-idiom	ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν	1	you have your fruit for sanctification	See how you translated **fruit** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	6	22	a478	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ&τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	The result is eternal life	See how you translated **sanctification** in [verse 19](../06/19.md), **outcome** in [verse 21](../06/21.md), and **eternal life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	22	a478	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ & τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	The result is eternal life	See how you translated **sanctification** in [verse 19](../06/19.md), **outcome** in [verse 21](../06/21.md), and **eternal life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	6	22	lvhh	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	you have your fruit for sanctification	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../06/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	6	23	gacy	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For the wages of sin are death	**For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason for what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	6	23	ze3f	figs-personification	τὰ&ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	For the wages of sin are death	Here, Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could pay **wages**. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully, it results in eternal death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	6	23	juc4	figs-metaphor	τὰ&ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul speaks of **death** as if it were **wages** paid to those who **sin**. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	6	23	iyv3	figs-possession	τὰ&ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the wages** that come from **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	6	23	ze3f	figs-personification	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	For the wages of sin are death	Here, Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could pay **wages**. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully, it results in eternal death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	6	23	juc4	figs-metaphor	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul speaks of **death** as if it were **wages** paid to those who **sin**. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	6	23	iyv3	figs-possession	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the wages** that come from **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	6	23	pizh	figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	For the wages of sin are death	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [verses 16](../06/16.md) and [21](../06/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	6	23	slyb	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος; τὸ&χάρισμα&ζωὴ αἰώνιος	1	For the wages of sin are death	See how you translated **death** in [verse 21](../06/21.md), **gracious gift** in [5:15–16](../05/15.md), and **eternal life** in [verse 22](../06/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	6	23	cwkw	figs-possession	τὸ&χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gracious gift** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	6	23	slyb	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος; τὸ & χάρισμα & ζωὴ αἰώνιος	1	For the wages of sin are death	See how you translated **death** in [verse 21](../06/21.md), **gracious gift** in [5:15–16](../05/15.md), and **eternal life** in [verse 22](../06/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	6	23	cwkw	figs-possession	τὸ & χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gracious gift** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	6	23	jn66	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	For the wages of sin are death	Paul speaks of **eternal life** as if it were occupying space inside of **Christ Jesus**. Paul means that **eternal life** comes by being united to **Christ Jesus**, as stated in [verse 11](../06/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	intro	fl1y			0		# Romans 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)<br>    * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)<br>    * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)<br>    * Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)<br>    * The law is not sinful (7:7–12)<br>    * Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “The Law”<br><br>Throughout most of this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. However, in [verses 21–25](../07/21.md) Paul uses the word “law” in several different ways. Each of these different uses will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Marriage<br><br>Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all Jewish believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [verses 1](../07/01.md) and [4](../07/04.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	7	1	mk7w	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ?	1	do you not know, brothers … that the law controls a person for as long as he lives?	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the law of Moses his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know, brothers (for I am speaking to those who know the law), that the law is lord of the man for as long as he lives!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1121,18 +1121,18 @@ ROM	7	1	guk4	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term *
 ROM	7	1	s4su		(γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ)	1	brothers	Here Paul interrupts himself in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers in the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as done in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate this.
 ROM	7	1	j67x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	brothers	Here, **for** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it explains the reason why Paul expects these **brothers** to understand what he is saying. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I know you should understand this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	1	ajk4	writing-pronouns	λαλῶ	1	brothers	The pronoun **I** here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul (see [6:19](../06/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	7	1	k3h5	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον&ὁ νόμος	1	brothers	For every occurrence of **the law** in [verses 1–20](../07/01.md), translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	7	1	k3h5	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & ὁ νόμος	1	brothers	For every occurrence of **the law** in [verses 1–20](../07/01.md), translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	7	1	okz5	figs-personification	ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	brothers	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a king. Paul means that, like a king, **the law** must be obeyed by those who are obligated to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “like a king, the law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	7	1	r9fl	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου&ζῇ	1		Although **the man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person … that person lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ROM	7	1	r9fl	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & ζῇ	1		Although **the man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person … that person lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	7	2	as1h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of an example from God’s law that illustrates how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives,” as Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	7	2	j4sn	figs-genericnoun	ἡ&ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται&τοῦ ἀνδρός	1		Paul is speaking of Jewish **married** women and husbands in general, not of one particular **woman** or **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-ROM	7	2	hpn4	figs-activepassive	ἡ&ὕπανδρος γυνὴ&δέδεται νόμῳ&κατήργηται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	7	2	l6d9	figs-personification	ἡ&ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ&κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	the married woman is bound by law to the husband	Here Paul speaks of the **law** as if it were a person who could tie a **woman** to her **husband**. Paul means that the **law** of Moses requires a **married woman** to stay married to her **husband** only while he is alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his law that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	2	j4sn	figs-genericnoun	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται & τοῦ ἀνδρός	1		Paul is speaking of Jewish **married** women and husbands in general, not of one particular **woman** or **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+ROM	7	2	hpn4	figs-activepassive	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ & δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	7	2	l6d9	figs-personification	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	the married woman is bound by law to the husband	Here Paul speaks of the **law** as if it were a person who could tie a **woman** to her **husband**. Paul means that the **law** of Moses requires a **married woman** to stay married to her **husband** only while he is alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his law that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	2	ag23	figs-possession	τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	the married woman is bound by law to the husband	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the law** that is related to **the husband**. This phrase refers to the **law** already described in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that requires her to remain bound to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	7	3	w3yw	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	7	3	ss60	figs-infostructure	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει, ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “if she becomes married to another husband, the first husband being alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	7	3	jbvc	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς	1		In this clause Paul is describing something that was occurring during the same time period as what he describes in the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “at the same time that the husband is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
-ROM	7	3	ci5r	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνδρὸς&ὁ ἀνήρ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+ROM	7	3	ci5r	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνδρὸς & ὁ ἀνήρ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	7	3	r2m4	figs-activepassive	μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει	1	she will be called an adulteress	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law will title her an adulteress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	7	3	wg4k	figs-metaphor	ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου	1	she is free from the law	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were an object or person someone could be freed from. Paul means that **the law** that prohibited a woman from marrying **another husband** did not apply if her first husband died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase “she has been released from the law” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “she is no longer required to remain married to the first husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	4	kvqw	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		**So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in [verses 1–3](../07/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1161,63 +1161,63 @@ ROM	7	5	xed9	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι	1	to bear fru
 ROM	7	5	m071	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	to bear fruit for death	See how you translated **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	5	ub7z	figs-explicit	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	to bear fruit for death	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	6	mze7	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:22](../06/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	7	6	l8w4	figs-activepassive	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου&ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	we have been released from the law	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	7	6	j6i3	figs-personification	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου&ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	we have been released	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be **released** and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	6	l8w4	figs-activepassive	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	we have been released from the law	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	7	6	j6i3	figs-personification	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	we have been released	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be **released** and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	6	l2l3	figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	to that by which we were held	The phrase **that by which we were being held** refers to **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the law by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	6	vcok	figs-metaphor	ἀποθανόντες ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1		Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a location where Christians could die. Here, **died to** the law refers to the idea that Christians no longer have to obey the requirements of the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer being required to obey that by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	6	zafg	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the result of Christians **having died to** the law. Use the natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “the result being that we might serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	6	f9n4	figs-ellipsis	δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1		Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “we might serve God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	7	6	c1j8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν καινότητι&οὐ παλαιότητι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **newness** and **oldness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people**serve** God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	6	c1j8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν καινότητι & οὐ παλαιότητι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **newness** and **oldness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people**serve** God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	6	vhqd	figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι Πνεύματος	1		Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **newness** that is produced by **the Spirit**. Paul means that the Holy Spirit enables Christians to live in a new way that pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a new way that comes from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	7	6	rm8r	figs-possession	παλαιότητι γράμματος	1	the letter	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **oldness** that is determined by **the letter**. Paul means that Christians do not live in the old way that the law of Moses requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the old way that the letter requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	7	6	iozz	figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	the letter	Paul uses **the letter** to refer to **the law** which is written down with letters. See how you translated this word in [2:27](../02/27.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	7	7	k1jj	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	What will we say then?	**Then** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses, especially what he said in [verse 5](../07/05.md). See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	7	bnyx	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	What will we say then?	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in [verse 5](../07/05.md) because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that the law is sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	7	7	f3hc	figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	What will we say then?	In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a Jewish Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	7	7	zl8m	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία&τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	I would never have known sin, if it were not through the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	7	zl8m	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	I would never have known sin, if it were not through the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	7	erx6	figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	7	u8gm	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	7	7	y92j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what came before it. Here, **But** introduce  the contrast to the idea that **the law** is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	7	7	zzsf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of **the law**. See how you translated the same use of **For** in [verse 2](../07/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	7	7	g0np	figs-abstractnouns	τήν&ἐπιθυμίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **covetousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	7	g0np	figs-abstractnouns	τήν & ἐπιθυμίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **covetousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	7	refv	writing-quotations	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1		Here Paul uses **said** to indicate a quotation from **the law** that is written in the Old Testament ([Exodus 20:17](../exo/20/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	7	7	qb5v	figs-personification	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God **said** what was written down in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	7	8	mz77	figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν&λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν	1	But sin took the opportunity … brought about every lust	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could take an **opportunity** and produce **covetousness** within a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	8	mz77	figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν & λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν	1	But sin took the opportunity … brought about every lust	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could take an **opportunity** and produce **covetousness** within a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	8	fh6x	figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		Here, **the commandment** refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	8	w6ah	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **commandment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	8	zeb5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιθυμίαν	1		See how you translated **covetousness** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	7	8	r5i2	figs-personification	χωρὶς&νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά	1	without the law, sin is dead	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were something which could be **dead**. Paul means that his desire to **sin** would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	8	r5i2	figs-personification	χωρὶς & νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά	1	without the law, sin is dead	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were something which could be **dead**. Paul means that his desire to **sin** would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	9	cag9	figs-metaphor	χωρὶς νόμου	1		Here Paul speaks about the **law** as if it did not exist before he knew about it. Paul means that he was not aware of God’s law **at one time**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while unaware of the law” or “without knowledge of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	7	9	sz5q	figs-personification	ἐλθούσης&τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		Paul speaks of **the commandment** as if it were a person who could **come** to Paul. He means that he became aware of **the commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	9	sz5q	figs-personification	ἐλθούσης & τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		Paul speaks of **the commandment** as if it were a person who could **come** to Paul. He means that he became aware of **the commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	9	i90y	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἡ ἁμαρτία	1		See how you translated **commandment** and **sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	9	d4wm	figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		Here, **the commandment** could refer to: (1) all the commandments that make up God’s law. Alternate translation: “God’s commandments” (2) **the commandment** against coveting, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the commandment against coveting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	9	q9le	figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν	1	sin regained life	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could come **to life**. This could mean: (1) Paul’s desire to sin was stimulated, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin was stimulated” (2) Paul realized that he was sinning, as mentioned in [verse 7](../07/07.md). Alternate translation: “I became aware of my sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	7	10	ouxm	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ&ἀπέθανον	1	The commandment that was to bring life turned out to be death for me	Paul uses **died** here to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	7	10	ouxm	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἀπέθανον	1	The commandment that was to bring life turned out to be death for me	Paul uses **died** here to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	10	mzx2	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1	The commandment that was to bring life turned out to be death for me	See how you translated **commandment** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	10	jmso	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1		Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	10	yu1u	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν	1		Here, **for** indicates the purpose for **the commandment**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “the commandment that was intended to cause life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	7	10	a0rz	grammar-connect-logic-result	εὑρέθη μοι&αὕτη εἰς θάνατον	1		Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the result of **the commandment**. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal **death** for people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	7	10	hkce	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη&αὕτη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	7	10	jrrw	figs-metaphor	εὑρέθη&αὕτη	1		Here Paul speaks of **the commandment** as if it were an object that could be **found**. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	7	10	a0rz	grammar-connect-logic-result	εὑρέθη μοι & αὕτη εἰς θάνατον	1		Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the result of **the commandment**. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal **death** for people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	7	10	hkce	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	7	10	jrrw	figs-metaphor	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1		Here Paul speaks of **the commandment** as if it were an object that could be **found**. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	10	y97i	figs-explicit	θάνατον	1		Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	7	11	r582	figs-personification	ἡ&ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	For sin took the opportunity through the commandment and deceived me. Through the commandment it killed me	See how you translated this clause in [verse 8](../07/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	11	r582	figs-personification	ἡ & ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	For sin took the opportunity through the commandment and deceived me. Through the commandment it killed me	See how you translated this clause in [verse 8](../07/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	11	qi99	figs-personification	ἐξηπάτησέν με	1	sin	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could deceive people. Paul means that his desire to sin tricked him into thinking that he could become righteous by obeying **the commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to deceive myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	11	qljg	writing-pronouns	δι’ αὐτῆς	1	sin	The pronoun **it** refers to **the commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	7	11	f6sx	figs-personification	ἀπέκτεινεν	1	it killed me	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could kill people. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	12	h0li	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		**So then** indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. **So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in [verses 7–11](../07/07.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	12	i3ka	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1		See how you translated **commandment** in [verse 9](../07/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	13	us69	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	So	The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. **Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in [verses 7–12](../07/07.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	7	13	e1bx	figs-rquestion	τὸ&ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος?	1	did what is good become death to me?	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the law did not directly cause him to become spiritually dead. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely what is good did not become death to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	7	13	g451	figs-explicit	τὸ&ἀγαθὸν&διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1	what is good	Here, **what is good** refers to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s good laws … through those good laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	7	13	e1bx	figs-rquestion	τὸ & ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος?	1	did what is good become death to me?	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the law did not directly cause him to become spiritually dead. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely what is good did not become death to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	7	13	g451	figs-explicit	τὸ & ἀγαθὸν & διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1	what is good	Here, **what is good** refers to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s good laws … through those good laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	13	qwe9	figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος	1	become death to me	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it could **become death**. Paul is referring to the idea that God’s laws directly caused him to become spiritually dead. He rejects this idea in the next sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	7	13	ee64	figs-explicit	θάνατος&θάνατον	1	become death to me	In this verse **death** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	7	13	r84l	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος&ἡ ἁμαρτία&ἁμαρτία&θάνατον&ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** and **commandment** in [verse 11](../07/11.md) and **death** in [verse 10](../07/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	13	ee64	figs-explicit	θάνατος & θάνατον	1	become death to me	In this verse **death** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	7	13	r84l	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία & θάνατον & ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** and **commandment** in [verse 11](../07/11.md) and **death** in [verse 10](../07/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	13	hgm6	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	7	13	f9md	figs-infostructure	ἀλλὰ ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But sin produced death in me in order that it might be shown to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	7	13	qoe9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1		Here, **in order that** indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for **sin** **producing death**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “sin produced death in me for the purpose of showing itself to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	7	13	kvhi	figs-metaphor	φανῇ ἁμαρτία	1		Here Paul uses **shown** as if **sin** were an object that people could see. Paul means that God’s laws enable people to recognize what **sin** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might be recognized to be sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	13	e7r4	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1		Here, **through** indicates that **what is good** is the means by which sin is clearly understood to be sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	7	13	m4l5	figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία&μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον;	1	sin … brought about death in me	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could kill someone. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin … caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	13	m4l5	figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία & μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον;	1	sin … brought about death in me	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could kill someone. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin … caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	13	pnq6	figs-metaphor	μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	brought about death in me	Here Paul speaks of **death** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. He means that he was spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “killed me spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	13	cuct	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	brought about death in me	Here, **so that** indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating another purpose for **sin** **producing death**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for sin to become sinful beyond measure through the commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	7	13	a6zb	figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	through the commandment	Here, **through** indicates that **the commandment** is the means by which sin becomes **sinful beyond measure**. Paul means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1225,17 +1225,17 @@ ROM	7	13	clht	figs-personification	γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν
 ROM	7	13	oy2w	figs-idiom	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν	1		Here, **beyond measure** is an idiom that means “to a great degree” or “exceedingly.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar idiom from your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to an extreme degree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	7	14	k5mg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things I have just said are true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	14	quen	figs-explicit	ὁ νόμος πνευματικός ἐστιν	1		Here, **spiritual** means that the source of **the law** is God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law comes from God’s Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	7	14	vxn0	figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ&σάρκινός εἰμι	1		Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize the contrast between himself and **the law**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am fleshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+ROM	7	14	vxn0	figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ & σάρκινός εἰμι	1		Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize the contrast between himself and **the law**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am fleshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	7	14	big5	figs-explicit	σάρκινός	1		Here, **fleshly** refers to the weakness of sinful human nature, which is the inability to stop sinning without God’s help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually frail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	14	lx8f	figs-activepassive	πεπραμένος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sold myself into slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	7	14	sr9e	figs-metaphor	πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1		Here Paul speaks of himself as if he were a slave. Here, **sold into slavery** could refer to: (1) being influenced by one’s sinful human nature. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation even after becoming a Christian. Alternate translation: “being under the influence of my sinful nature” (2) being controlled by one’s desire to sin. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation before he became a Christian. Alternate translation: “being controlled by my desire to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	14	p9pi	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1		See how you translated the similar use of this phrase in [3:9](../03/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	7	15	udc8	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		***For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	7	15	u3av		ὃ&κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω	1	For what I do, I do not really understand	Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do”
+ROM	7	15	u3av		ὃ & κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω	1	For what I do, I do not really understand	Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do”
 ROM	7	15	gneb	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of “what I produce,” in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	7	15	e8ki	figs-ellipsis	οὐ&ὃ θέλω&ὃ μισῶ	2		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “what I do not want to do … what I hate to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	7	15	az2z	figs-hyperbole	οὐ&ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω&ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ.	2		The phrases **I practice** and **I do** are exaggerations that Paul uses to emphasize that he often does what he does not want to do. It does not mean that Paul always does these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I do not want, this I often practice … what I hate, this I often do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ROM	7	16	xho0	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ὃ οὐ θέλω	1	But if I do	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since what I do not want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	7	15	e8ki	figs-ellipsis	οὐ & ὃ θέλω & ὃ μισῶ	2		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “what I do not want to do … what I hate to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	7	15	az2z	figs-hyperbole	οὐ & ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω & ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ.	2		The phrases **I practice** and **I do** are exaggerations that Paul uses to emphasize that he often does what he does not want to do. It does not mean that Paul always does these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I do not want, this I often practice … what I hate, this I often do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ROM	7	16	xho0	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω	1	But if I do	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since what I do not want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	7	16	y26s	figs-hyperbole	ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1	But if I do	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ROM	7	16	q3b5	figs-ellipsis	σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός	1	I agree with the law	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I agree with the law and thus confess that it is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	7	17	x667	grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ δὲ	1	the sin that lives in me	**But now** indicates that this verse is the logical conclusion based on what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -1243,28 +1243,28 @@ ROM	7	17	k7ag	figs-rpronouns	οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι	1	t
 ROM	7	17	id6v	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ	1	the sin that lives in me	The pronoun **it** here refers to doing the sinful acts that he does not want to do, as mentioned in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful deeds that I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	7	17	f6n8	figs-personification	ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία	1	the sin that lives in me	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a person who could live inside of a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** causes him to do what he does not want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin deeply influences me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	18	nqhc	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	7	18	kf8z	figs-infostructure	οἶδα&ὅτι οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I know that good does not live in me, (that is, in my flesh)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	7	18	p0ma	figs-personification	οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί&ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1		Here Paul speaks of **good** as if it were a person who could **live** inside someone. He means that his sinful nature is not **good** at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there is nothing good about me … about my flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	7	18	kf8z	figs-infostructure	οἶδα & ὅτι οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I know that good does not live in me, (that is, in my flesh)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	7	18	p0ma	figs-personification	οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί & ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1		Here Paul speaks of **good** as if it were a person who could **live** inside someone. He means that his sinful nature is not **good** at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there is nothing good about me … about my flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	7	18	p1c1	figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκί μου	1	my flesh	Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to his sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	7	18	kyx9	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν&τὸ καλὸν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “any good thing …what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	18	kyx9	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & τὸ καλὸν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “any good thing …what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	18	ye8x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		**For** indicates that what follows this word relates to what came before it. **For** here indicates that the following sentence is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	7	18	gvev	figs-ellipsis	τὸ&θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the wanting to do good is present in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	7	18	h934	figs-metaphor	τὸ&θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1		Here Paul speaks of **wanting** as if it were a thing that could exist inside a person. Paul means that he truly wants to do something good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I truly want” or “I deeply desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	7	18	uxwb	figs-ellipsis	τὸ&κατεργάζεσθαι τὸ καλὸν οὔ	2		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the ability to produce the good is not in me” or “I am not able to produce the good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	7	18	gvev	figs-ellipsis	τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the wanting to do good is present in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	7	18	h934	figs-metaphor	τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1		Here Paul speaks of **wanting** as if it were a thing that could exist inside a person. Paul means that he truly wants to do something good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I truly want” or “I deeply desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	7	18	uxwb	figs-ellipsis	τὸ & κατεργάζεσθαι τὸ καλὸν οὔ	2		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the ability to produce the good is not in me” or “I am not able to produce the good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	7	19	xftc	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the good	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the last sentence of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	7	19	ri3b	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν&κακὸν	1	the good	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **evil**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “good deeds … evil deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	7	19	j69g	figs-ellipsis	ὃ θέλω&ἀγαθόν&ὃ οὐ θέλω κακὸν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the good I want to do … the evil I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	7	20	kfvj	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1		See how you translated this clause in [verse 16](../07/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	7	19	ri3b	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & κακὸν	1	the good	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **evil**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “good deeds … evil deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	19	j69g	figs-ellipsis	ὃ θέλω & ἀγαθόν & ὃ οὐ θέλω κακὸν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the good I want to do … the evil I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	7	20	kfvj	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1		See how you translated this clause in [verse 16](../07/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	7	20	sk9q		οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι αὐτὸ, ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία	1		See how you translated these clauses in [verse 17](../07/17.md).
 ROM	7	21	rqfu	figs-metaphor	εὑρίσκω	1	that evil is actually present in me	Here Paul speaks of a **law** as if it were an object that he could **find**. Paul means that he became aware of the **law** that is described in the rest of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I became aware that there was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	21	qae3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα	1	that evil is actually present in me	Here, **then** introduces a result clause. [Verses 21–25](../07/21.md) describe the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [verses 14–20](../07/14.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	7	21	y5vo	figs-explicit	τὸν νόμον	1	that evil is actually present in me	Here, **law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	21	xxq9	figs-infostructure	τῷ θέλοντι ἐμοὶ ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1	that evil is actually present in me	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that evil is present in me, in me, the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	7	21	mo4r	figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ&ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1		Here Paul speaks of **evil** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I … I do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	7	21	qn1r	figs-distinguish	τῷ θέλοντι&ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν	1		Here, **the one wanting to do good** is giving further information about **me**, which refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	7	21	hqp9	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καλὸν&τὸ κακὸν	1		See how you translated **good** and **evil** in [verse 19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	7	21	mo4r	figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ & ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1		Here Paul speaks of **evil** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I … I do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	7	21	qn1r	figs-distinguish	τῷ θέλοντι & ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν	1		Here, **the one wanting to do good** is giving further information about **me**, which refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+ROM	7	21	hqp9	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καλὸν & τὸ κακὸν	1		See how you translated **good** and **evil** in [verse 19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	7	22	mvod	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the inner man	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	7	22	x28l	figs-metaphor	συνήδομαι&τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law of God** as if it were a location in which a person could **delight**. He means that God’s laws cause him to **delight**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	7	22	x28l	figs-metaphor	συνήδομαι & τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law of God** as if it were a location in which a person could **delight**. He means that God’s laws cause him to **delight**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	22	nt65	grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the inner man	Here, **the law of God** refers to the laws that **God** gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says **the law**. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	7	22	m13q	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον	1	the inner man	Here, **the inner man** refers to a person’s mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner being” or “the mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	23	zp7t	figs-metaphor	βλέπω	1	a different principle in my body parts	Here Paul uses **see** to refer to noticing or perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1287,18 +1287,18 @@ ROM	7	25	sxn3	figs-personification	τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμ
 ROM	7	25	e163	figs-explicit	νοῒ	1		See how you translated **mind** in [1:28](../01/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	7	25	dzjl	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμῳ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 22](../07/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	7	25	cdkb	figs-ellipsis	τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but with the flesh, I serve the law of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	7	25	fm51	figs-metaphor	τῇ&σαρκὶ	1		Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to his sinful nature. See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	7	25	fm51	figs-metaphor	τῇ & σαρκὶ	1		Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to his sinful nature. See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	7	25	he4l	figs-metaphor	νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 23](../07/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	intro	ev4r			0		# Romans 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)<br>    * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)<br>    * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)<br>    * Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)<br>    * The law is not sinful (7:7–12)<br>    * Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25)<br>    * The Holy Spirit dwells in Christians (8:1–27)<br>    * Christians have confidence in God’s love (8:28–8:39)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verse 36](../08/36.md). Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Indwelling of the Spirit<br><br>In [verses 9–17](../08/09.md) and [26–27](../08/26.md) Paul says that the Holy Spirit dwells inside Christians to help them stop sinning and to intercede for them. The presence of the Holy Spirit within a person indicates that that person is a genuine Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>### Predestination<br><br>Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestined” in [verses 28–30](../08/28.md) and “elect” in [verse 33](../08/33.md). Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])<br><br>## Important Figure of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [verses 24](../08/24.md) and [31–35](../08/31.md) Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to emphasize that what he is saying is true. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>Paul uses the word “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses it to refer to sinful human nature. However, he uses the word “flesh” to refer to Christ’s physical body in [verse 3](../08/03.md). Every use of the word “flesh” will be discussed in the notes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [verses 12](../08/12.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	8	1	xq2y	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα	1		Here, **therefore now** marks the beginning of a new section in the letter. It also introduces a result clause that concludes what Paul discussed in chapters 5–7. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true, there is no condemnation at all” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true, there is no condemnation at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	1	xw65	figs-abstractnouns	κατάκριμα	1	There is therefore now no condemnation for those who are in Christ Jesus	See how you translated **condemnation** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	1	ti0g	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	2	whhz	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word relates to what came before it. **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	2	h1ka	figs-possession	ὁ&νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the law** that is characterized by **the Spirit of life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	8	2	vt9k	figs-explicit	ὁ&νόμος	1		Here, **the law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar use of **law** in [7:21](../07/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	2	h1ka	figs-possession	ὁ & νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the law** that is characterized by **the Spirit of life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	8	2	vt9k	figs-explicit	ὁ & νόμος	1		Here, **the law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar use of **law** in [7:21](../07/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	2	hq2t	figs-possession	τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1	the law of the Spirit of life in Christ Jesus	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** that produces **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit that produces life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	2	x8uu	figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	2	ep3n	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ζωῆς&τῆς ἁμαρτίας&τοῦ θανάτου	1		See how you translated **life** in [2:7](../02/07.md), **sin** in [5:20](../05/20.md), and **death** in [5:17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	2	ep3n	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ζωῆς & τῆς ἁμαρτίας & τοῦ θανάτου	1		See how you translated **life** in [2:7](../02/07.md), **sin** in [5:20](../05/20.md), and **death** in [5:17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	2	ionb	figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. See how you translated this use of **life** in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	2	irh6	figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ἠλευθέρωσέν σε	1		The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could refer to: (1) the means by which **the Spirit** set a person **free**. Alternate translation: “of life set you free in Christ Jesus” (2) a characteristic of **the life**. Alternate translation: “of the life that is in Christ Jesus set you free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	2	cgbe	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse and in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1306,10 +1306,10 @@ ROM	8	2	th4n	figs-metaphor	ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμ
 ROM	8	2	u82e	figs-metaphor	τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου	1	the law of sin and death	This could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature that results in death, as mentioned in [7:23–25](../07/23.md). Alternate translation: “the principle that is my sinful nature that leads to death” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in [7:5](../07/05.md) stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	2	jlq1	figs-explicit	τοῦ θανάτου	1	the law of sin and death	Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	3	mbh3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces what follows in this verse and the next verse as an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	8	3	n9mr	figs-infostructure	τὸ&ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “God did what the law was unable to do, in that it was weak through the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	8	3	n9mr	figs-infostructure	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “God did what the law was unable to do, in that it was weak through the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	8	3	z2ej	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦ νόμου	1		Here, **the law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says **the law**. See how you translated this expression in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-ROM	8	3	t8lj	figs-explicit	τὸ&ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου&ὁ Θεὸς	1	For what the law was unable to do because it was weak through the flesh, God did	Paul implies that **what the law was unable to do** was to make people righteous, which is the main theme of this book. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law was unable to make people righteous … but God did so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	3	j98t	figs-personification	τὸ&ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	For what the law was unable to do because it was weak through the flesh, God did	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who **was unable to do** something and was **weak**. Paul means that the laws God gave the Jews could not make people righteous, because people are naturally sinful and unable to obey those laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the law could not stop people from sinning, because sinful human nature prevented people from obeying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	8	3	t8lj	figs-explicit	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου & ὁ Θεὸς	1	For what the law was unable to do because it was weak through the flesh, God did	Paul implies that **what the law was unable to do** was to make people righteous, which is the main theme of this book. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law was unable to make people righteous … but God did so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	3	j98t	figs-personification	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	For what the law was unable to do because it was weak through the flesh, God did	Here Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who **was unable to do** something and was **weak**. Paul means that the laws God gave the Jews could not make people righteous, because people are naturally sinful and unable to obey those laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the law could not stop people from sinning, because sinful human nature prevented people from obeying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	8	3	g6g4	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει	1		This phrase is the reason why **the law was unable to do** what it was supposed to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “since it was weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	3	uzkh	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1		This phrase states the reason why **the law was weak**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “on account of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	3	etf2	figs-idiom	διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	through the flesh	Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of **flesh** in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ ROM	8	3	tc37	figs-ellipsis	τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας	1	He 
 ROM	8	3	csl8	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸν	1	Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 ROM	8	3	uf94	figs-possession	ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας	1	in the likeness of sinful flesh	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the likeness** that is characterized by **sinful flesh**. He means that Jesus had the same human **flesh** that sinful people have, although Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the same flesh  as that of sinful human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	3	xi5c	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας	1	Son	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **likeness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in flesh like sinful flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	3	v0h2	figs-synecdoche	σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας&τῇ σαρκί	1	he condemned sin in the flesh	Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. See how you translated this use of **flesh** in [2:28](../02/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ROM	8	3	v0h2	figs-synecdoche	σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας & τῇ σαρκί	1	he condemned sin in the flesh	Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. See how you translated this use of **flesh** in [2:28](../02/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	8	3	hfr2	figs-explicit	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	to be an offering for sin	This could mean: (1) Jesus was sent for the sake of doing away with sin. Alternate translation: “in order to do away with sin” (2) Jesus was an offering to pay for sin. Alternate translation: “as an offering for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	3	gid8	figs-personification	κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	to be an offering for sin	Here Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were a guilty person whom a judge could condemn. Paul means that God removed the power that sin had to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he canceled the power of sin” or “he destroyed how sin controls people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	8	3	es29	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	he condemned sin in the flesh	Here, **the flesh** refers specifically to Jesus’ body, which died on the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in his Son’s body on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1329,22 +1329,22 @@ ROM	8	4	w2aa	figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου	1	the req
 ROM	8	4	rttr	grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦ νόμου	1	the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us	Here, **the law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says **the law**. See how you translated this expression in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	8	4	bsp0	figs-distinguish	ἡμῖν, τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	we who walk not according to the flesh	This clause gives further information about **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “us, that is, those walking not according to the flesh, but according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	8	4	acc4	figs-metaphor	τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν	1	we who walk not according to the flesh	Here Paul uses **walking** to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those not behaving according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	4	grhf		κατὰ σάρκα&κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	we who walk not according to the flesh	Alternate translation: “determined by the flesh … determined by the Spirit” or “in conformity with the flesh … in conformity with the Spirit”
+ROM	8	4	grhf		κατὰ σάρκα & κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	we who walk not according to the flesh	Alternate translation: “determined by the flesh … determined by the Spirit” or “in conformity with the flesh … in conformity with the Spirit”
 ROM	8	4	bgg7	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1		Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of **flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	8	5	xzmt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	5	s5sb	figs-idiom	σάρκα&τῆς σαρκὸς	1		See how you translated **the flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	8	5	s5sb	figs-idiom	σάρκα & τῆς σαρκὸς	1		See how you translated **the flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	8	5	b9in	figs-idiom	τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς φρονοῦσιν	1		The phrase **set their minds on** is an idiom that refers to thinking carefully about something or being intent on doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are intent on doing the things of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	8	5	evgr	figs-possession	τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that are related to **the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the flesh” or “fleshly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	5	cqwa	figs-ellipsis	οἱ δὲ κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but those existing according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	8	5	x3o6	figs-ellipsis	τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “set their minds on the things of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	8	5	a2n5	figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that are related to **the Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	6	uc6w	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the mind set on the flesh … the mind set on the Spirit	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	8	6	vyw4	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&φρόνημα&τὸ&φρόνημα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mindset**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way of thinking … the way of thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	6	my98	figs-possession	τὸ&φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **mindset** that is focused on **the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	8	6	vyw4	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & φρόνημα & τὸ & φρόνημα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mindset**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way of thinking … the way of thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	6	my98	figs-possession	τὸ & φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **mindset** that is focused on **the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	6	b0wo	figs-idiom	τῆς σαρκὸς	1		See how you translated **the flesh** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	8	6	czmn	grammar-connect-logic-result	θάνατος	1		Here, **is** indicates that what follows is the result of **the mindset of the flesh**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “results in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	6	mbte	figs-explicit	θάνατος	1		Here, **death** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	6	oviz	figs-possession	τὸ&φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	2		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **mindset** that is focused on **the Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	8	6	oviz	figs-possession	τὸ & φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	2		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **mindset** that is focused on **the Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	6	q470	grammar-connect-logic-result	ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη	1		Here, **is** indicates that what follows is the result of **the mindset of the flesh**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “results in life and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	6	rqnl	figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **life** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “is living and being peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	6	fjk8	figs-explicit	ζωὴ	1		Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. See how you translated this use of **life** in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1352,38 +1352,38 @@ ROM	8	7	lsdo	grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1		Here, **because** indica
 ROM	8	7	gvcr	figs-possession	τὸ φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1		See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	7	fpt4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχθρα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hostility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is hostile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	7	pm7t	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	7	thq8	writing-pronouns	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ&δύναται	1		Here, **it** refers to **the mindset of the flesh** mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this mindset does not subject itself to … this mindset is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	8	7	thq8	writing-pronouns	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ & δύναται	1		Here, **it** refers to **the mindset of the flesh** mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this mindset does not subject itself to … this mindset is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	8	7	z2ih	figs-personification	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ γὰρ δύναται	1		Here Paul speaks of **the mindset of the flesh** as if it were a person who could **subject** himself to something. Paul means that the person who thinks with this **mindset** is unable to submit to God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who thinks this way does not subject himself to … for he is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	8	7	srp9	figs-personification	τῷ&νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law of God** as if it were a king or master to whom someone could **subject** himself. Paul is referring to someone obeying God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not obey the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	8	7	brde	grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ&νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [7:22](../07/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	8	7	srp9	figs-personification	τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται	1		Here Paul speaks of **the law of God** as if it were a king or master to whom someone could **subject** himself. Paul is referring to someone obeying God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not obey the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	8	7	brde	grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [7:22](../07/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	8	7	bhje	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		The word **for** indicates how what follows this word relates to what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	8	me7u	figs-metaphor	οἱ&ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες	1	Those who are in the flesh	See how you translated this phrase in [7:5](../07/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	8	me7u	figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες	1	Those who are in the flesh	See how you translated this phrase in [7:5](../07/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	9	vdhw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		**However** here indicates a strong contrast between people who have “the mindset of the flesh” referred to in the previous verse and the believers to whom Paul is writing this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	8	9	iybo	figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἐστὲ	1		Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize the contrast between his Christian readers and people who live **in the flesh**. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However, you are truly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	8	9	czm9	figs-metaphor	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	in the flesh	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	9	e54u	figs-metaphor	ἐν Πνεύματι	1	in the Spirit	Here Paul speaks of the Holy **Spirit** as if he were a location that someone could be **in**. He could mean: (1) believers are controlled by the Holy **Spirit**, which is how **in** is used earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “controlled by the Spirit” (2) believers are united with the Holy **Spirit**, which is how Paul used **in** in [verse 1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “united with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	9	p55f	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι&Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ&Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1		These phrases all refer to the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit of God … the Holy Spirit of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	9	p55f	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι & Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ & Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1		These phrases all refer to the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit of God … the Holy Spirit of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	9	y3vg	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		Here, **this one** refers to the person who **does not have the Spirit of Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	8	9	akl1	figs-possession	οὗτος οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who does not belong to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “this one does not belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	10	ntqo	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	8	10	q8be	figs-metaphor	Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If Christ is in you	Here Paul speaks of **you** as if **you** were a location that **Christ** could be **in**. See how you translated **in you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	10	q2q4	figs-infostructure	τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν, τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην	1	If Christ is in you	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is life because of righteousness even though the body is dead because of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	8	10	lae8	figs-genericnoun	τὸ&σῶμα νεκρὸν	1		Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “the bodies are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+ROM	8	10	lae8	figs-genericnoun	τὸ & σῶμα νεκρὸν	1		Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “the bodies are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	8	10	e6g9	figs-metaphor	τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν	1	the body is dead with respect to sin	Here Paul speaks of **the body** as if it were already **dead**. Paul means that the physical **body** of a Christian will still die **because of sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body will certainly die because of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	10	yb1b	figs-explicit	τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ	1	the spirit is alive with respect to righteousness	Here, **the Spirit is life** could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit gives a person eternal **life**. In this case **Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit** and **life** refers to eternal **life**. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit grants eternal life” (2) a believer’s **spirit** is alive. In this case **Spirit** refers to the spirits of individual believers. Alternate translation: “but the spirit is alive” or “but your spirits are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	10	ya21	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ δικαιοσύνην	1	the spirit is alive with respect to righteousness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of your righteous status” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	11	jlc9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	If the Spirit … lives in you	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	8	11	i618	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα&αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	If the Spirit … lives in you	These phrases refer to the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … his Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	11	b9pu	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν&ὁ ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	of him who raised	These phrases refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who raised Jesus from dead ones … God, who raised Christ Jesus from dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	11	jr6p	figs-idiom	ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν&ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	raised Jesus	See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	8	11	i618	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	If the Spirit … lives in you	These phrases refer to the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … his Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	11	b9pu	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ὁ ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	of him who raised	These phrases refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who raised Jesus from dead ones … God, who raised Christ Jesus from dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	11	jr6p	figs-idiom	ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	raised Jesus	See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	8	11	t27d	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιήσει καὶ τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν	1	mortal bodies	Paul uses **make alive** to imply that he is referring to the resurrection of Christians after they have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will also resurrect your mortal bodies after you have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	11	xi76	figs-explicit	διὰ&αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	mortal bodies	Here, **through** indicates the means by which God will **make** Christians **alive**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	11	xi76	figs-explicit	διὰ & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	mortal bodies	Here, **through** indicates the means by which God will **make** Christians **alive**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	11	e6t8	figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντος αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα ἐν ὑμῖν	1		Here, **who lives in you** gives further information about the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “his Spirit, that is, the Spirit who lives in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	8	12	mv1r	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then	**So then** indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. **So then** here indicates that what follows in [verses 12–17](../08/12.md) summarizes the ideas of [verses 5–11](../08/05.md). See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	8	12	qw5b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	8	12	e3j8	figs-metaphor	ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν	1	we are debtors	Here Paul speaks of Christians as if they are **debtors**. He means that Christians are obligated to live according to the Spirit and not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	12	fb3m	figs-ellipsis	οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ	1	but not to the flesh to live according to the flesh	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “we are not debtors to the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	8	12	ecoo	figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκὶ&τοῦ&σάρκα	1	but not to the flesh to live according to the flesh	Here Paul uses **the flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	12	ecoo	figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκὶ & τοῦ & σάρκα	1	but not to the flesh to live according to the flesh	Here Paul uses **the flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	12	dh1m	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν	1	but not to the flesh to live according to the flesh	Here, **to live** introduces an explanation of **the flesh**. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is, to live according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	8	12	gplu	figs-idiom	τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	8	13	dczr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -1396,16 +1396,16 @@ ROM	8	13	nwul	figs-explicit	τὰς πράξεις	1	but if by the Spirit you pu
 ROM	8	13	xihu	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος	1	but if by the Spirit you put to death the body’s actions	Paul is speaking of bodies in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	8	13	dr0e	figs-explicit	ζήσεσθε	1	but if by the Spirit you put to death the body’s actions	Here, **live** refers to living forever with God in heaven after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	14	utms	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	14	ojie	figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι&οὗτοι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as … these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	8	14	u8pv	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι&Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται	1	For as many as are led by the Spirit of God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many as the Spirit of God leads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	8	14	ojie	figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι & οὗτοι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as … these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	8	14	u8pv	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι & Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται	1	For as many as are led by the Spirit of God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many as the Spirit of God leads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	14	yz28	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι Θεοῦ	1	For as many as are led by the Spirit of God	See how you translated **the Spirit of God** in [verse 9](../08/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	14	gd1i	figs-gendernotations	υἱοί Θεοῦ	1	sons of God	Here Paul is using the term **sons** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	8	14	wrk1	figs-metaphor	υἱοί Θεοῦ	1	sons of God	Paul speaks of these people as if **God** were their physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	15	wpp9	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	8	15	zi1c	figs-explicit	πάλιν	1		Here, **again** indicates that Paul’s readers had **a spirit of slavery** before they became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a second time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	15	r57o	figs-explicit	πνεῦμα	1		Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) a person’s attitude or emotional state. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (2) a demonic spirit. Alternate translation: “a demonic spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	15	av67	figs-possession	πνεῦμα δουλείας&Πνεῦμα υἱοθεσίας	1		In both of these phrases Paul is using the possessive form to describe something that causes something else to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “a spirit that causes slavery … the Spirit that causes adoption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	8	15	iwyy	figs-abstractnouns	δουλείας&φόβον&υἱοθεσίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slavery**, **fear**, and **adoption**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of being a slave … you being afraid … of those who have been adopted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	15	av67	figs-possession	πνεῦμα δουλείας & Πνεῦμα υἱοθεσίας	1		In both of these phrases Paul is using the possessive form to describe something that causes something else to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “a spirit that causes slavery … the Spirit that causes adoption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	8	15	iwyy	figs-abstractnouns	δουλείας & φόβον & υἱοθεσίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slavery**, **fear**, and **adoption**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of being a slave … you being afraid … of those who have been adopted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	15	c43f	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς φόβον	1		Here, **leading to** indicates that **fear** is the result of receiving **a spirit of slavery**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “resulting in fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	15	ew0a	figs-explicit	Πνεῦμα	1		Here, **the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy **Spirit**, as indicated by the use of **Spirit** in the ULT. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (2) a person’s attitude or emotional state, as with the previous use of **spirit** in this verse. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	15	ecq3	figs-exclamations	Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	by which we cry	Here, **cry out** indicates that what follows is an emotional exclamation. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “O Abba! Father!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -1414,26 +1414,26 @@ ROM	8	15	ahnr	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	Abba, Father	**Fath
 ROM	8	16	mwbw	figs-explicit	τῷ Πνεύματι ἡμῶν	1		Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	16	aimw	figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses **children of God** to refer to people who have a father-child relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. Here, **children** does not refer to young people, but only to the relationship that people have with their fathers. If you translate **children** using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	17	agxk	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	8	17	izpd	figs-ellipsis	εἰ&τέκνα, καὶ κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if we are children, then we are also heirs: we are both heirs of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	8	17	izpd	figs-ellipsis	εἰ & τέκνα, καὶ κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if we are children, then we are also heirs: we are both heirs of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	8	17	hfwo	figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1		See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	17	fj7w	figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1	heirs of God	Paul uses **heirs** to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that they will receive everything that God has promised to give Christians. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who will receive what God has promised us: both those who receive those things from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	17	q751	figs-metaphor	συνκληρονόμοι&Χριστοῦ	1	we are joint heirs with Christ	Paul uses **joint heirs** to refer to Christians as if they, along with **Christ**, will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that God will give to Christians what he gives to Christ. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	17	q751	figs-metaphor	συνκληρονόμοι & Χριστοῦ	1	we are joint heirs with Christ	Paul uses **joint heirs** to refer to Christians as if they, along with **Christ**, will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that God will give to Christians what he gives to Christ. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	17	q6ka	writing-pronouns	συνπάσχομεν, ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν	1	we are joint heirs with Christ	The pronoun **him** here refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we suffering together with Christ so that we may also be glorified together with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	8	17	ggl6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	we are joint heirs with Christ	Paul uses **so that** here to state the goal for which Christians **suffer together with** Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	8	17	j6ia	figs-activepassive	καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν	1	that we may also be glorified with him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may also glorify us together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	18	i5nu	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in [verses 18–25](../08/18.md) gives further information about what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	8	18	f3sv	writing-pronouns	λογίζομαι	1	For	The pronoun **I** here refers to Paul (see [7:1](../07/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	8	18	b3b1	figs-activepassive	λογίζομαι&ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς	1	I consider that … are not worthy to be compared with	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	8	18	oj49	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ&τὴν&δόξαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things that make us suffer in this present time … the glorious situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	18	jjb8	figs-activepassive	μέλλουσαν&ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	will be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will make known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	8	18	b3b1	figs-activepassive	λογίζομαι & ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς	1	I consider that … are not worthy to be compared with	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	8	18	oj49	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ & τὴν & δόξαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things that make us suffer in this present time … the glorious situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	18	jjb8	figs-activepassive	μέλλουσαν & ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	will be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will make known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	19	qoj5	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	will be revealed	**For** indicates how what follows this word relates to what came before it. Here, it indicates that this verse gives additional support for what Paul said in [verse 17](../08/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	8	19	dn11	figs-idiom	ἡ&ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως&ἀπεκδέχεται	1	the eager expectation of the creation waits for	Here, **the eager expectation** is an idiom Paul uses to emphasize how **eagerly the creation** is waiting. He does not mean that **the eager expectation** itself is waiting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation is very eagerly expecting” or “the creation is eagerly expecting with much eagerness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	8	19	d911	figs-personification	ἡ&ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως&ἀπεκδέχεται	1	the eager expectation of the creation waits for	Here Paul speaks of **the creation** as if it were a person who eagerly expects something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation is eagerly expecting with eager expectation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	8	19	ulvv	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κτίσεως&τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the eager expectation of the creation waits for	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **creation** and **revelation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of the created things … the sons of God to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	19	dn11	figs-idiom	ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται	1	the eager expectation of the creation waits for	Here, **the eager expectation** is an idiom Paul uses to emphasize how **eagerly the creation** is waiting. He does not mean that **the eager expectation** itself is waiting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation is very eagerly expecting” or “the creation is eagerly expecting with much eagerness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ROM	8	19	d911	figs-personification	ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται	1	the eager expectation of the creation waits for	Here Paul speaks of **the creation** as if it were a person who eagerly expects something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation is eagerly expecting with eager expectation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	8	19	ulvv	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κτίσεως & τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the eager expectation of the creation waits for	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **creation** and **revelation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of the created things … the sons of God to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	19	dm6s	figs-activepassive	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	for the revealing of the sons of God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	19	sr2p	figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	sons of God	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	20	nh58	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For the creation was subjected to futility	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 20–22](../08/20.md) is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	20	zjl2	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ&ματαιότητι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **futility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to being futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	20	zjl2	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ματαιότητι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **futility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to being futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	20	gdfe	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κτίσις	1		See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	20	l9ab	figs-activepassive	ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη	1	For the creation was subjected to futility	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God subjugated the creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	20	yvl3	figs-personification	ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη, οὐχ ἑκοῦσα	1	not of its own will, but because of him who subjected it	Here Paul speaks of **the creation** as if it were a person who could be **subjected** to someone and could have a will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation were subjected against its will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ ROM	8	20	tof4	figs-abstractnouns	ἑλπίδι	1		See how you translated **hope*
 ROM	8	21	m3fi	figs-personification	αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς, εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	the creation itself will be delivered	Here Paul speaks of **the creation** as if it were a person who was enslaved to someone and needed to be **freed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation itself will no longer decay, but will experience the glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	8	21	l6qc	figs-activepassive	αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται	1	the creation itself will be delivered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will free the creation itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	21	ovn5	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κτίσις	1	the creation itself will be delivered	See how you translated **the creation** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	21	l3vw	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς&τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	from slavery to decay	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slavery**, **decay**, **freedom**, and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay … being free to experience what is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	21	l3vw	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς & τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	from slavery to decay	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slavery**, **decay**, **freedom**, and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay … being free to experience what is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	21	r2n9	figs-possession	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slavery** to **decay**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	21	ba5h	figs-metaphor	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς	1	from slavery to decay	Here Paul speaks of **decay** as if it could enslave someone. He means that **the creation** was certain to **decay**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being destined to decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	21	tx57	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν	1	that it will be brought into the freedom of the glory of the children of God	Here Paul speaks of **freedom** as if it were a location someone could enter **into**. Paul means that **the creation** will experience this **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1457,43 +1457,43 @@ ROM	8	23	qyic	figs-possession	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματο
 ROM	8	23	wutm	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν	1		Here Paul uses **firstfruits** to refer to the Holy **Spirit** as if they were the first crop that was harvested during the harvest season. Paul means that the Holy **Spirit** is the first part of the blessings that God gives Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	23	xun5	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	2		Paul uses the word **ourselves** here to emphasize that Christians also share in the suffering of the creation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our very selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	8	23	ch9t	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν	1		Here Paul uses **groan** to refer to the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	23	tiij	figs-abstractnouns	υἱοθεσίαν&τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1		See how you translated **adoption** in [verse 15](../08/15.md) and **redemption** in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	23	tiij	figs-abstractnouns	υἱοθεσίαν & τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1		See how you translated **adoption** in [verse 15](../08/15.md) and **redemption** in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	23	k1wy	figs-explicit	υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι	1		Here, **our adoption** refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	23	qsb9	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν	1		Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	8	24	oocv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is the reason why Christians “groan” and are “eagerly expecting” to be fully adopted and redeemed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “We do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	24	sv0h	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ&ἐλπίδι&ἐλπὶς&ἐλπίς	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	See how you translated the abstract noun **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	24	xwvy		τῇ&ἐλπίδι	1		Here, **in** could indicate: (1) that **hope** is associated with being **saved**. Alternate translation: “in association with this hope” (2) the means by which people are saved. In this case, **hope** would refer to faith. Alternate translation: “by this hope”
+ROM	8	24	sv0h	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ἐλπίδι & ἐλπὶς & ἐλπίς	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	See how you translated the abstract noun **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	24	xwvy		τῇ & ἐλπίδι	1		Here, **in** could indicate: (1) that **hope** is associated with being **saved**. Alternate translation: “in association with this hope” (2) the means by which people are saved. In this case, **hope** would refer to faith. Alternate translation: “by this hope”
 ROM	8	24	x4gi	figs-activepassive	ἐσώθημεν	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God saved us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	8	24	edze	figs-metaphor	βλεπομένη&βλέπει	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	Paul uses **seen** and **sees** here to refer to experiencing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being experienced … he experiences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	24	edze	figs-metaphor	βλεπομένη & βλέπει	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	Paul uses **seen** and **sees** here to refer to experiencing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being experienced … he experiences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	24	pgmc	figs-activepassive	βλεπομένη	1	For in this certain hope we were saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people can see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	24	rxxy	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	24	tks9	figs-rquestion	ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει?	1		Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the thrust of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For surely no one hopes for what he sees!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	8	25	ktqd	figs-metaphor	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν	1		See how you translated the similar use of “seen” and “sees” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	25	g2pm	figs-explicit	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν&ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1		Here, **what we do not see** and **it** refer to the “adoption” and “redemption” mentioned in [verse 23](../08/23.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the adoption and redemption that we do not see … we are eagerly expecting these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	25	g2pm	figs-explicit	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν & ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1		Here, **what we do not see** and **it** refer to the “adoption” and “redemption” mentioned in [verse 23](../08/23.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the adoption and redemption that we do not see … we are eagerly expecting these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	25	l91v	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ὑπομονῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while enduring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	26	bkwx	figs-ellipsis	συναντιλαμβάνεται&ὑπερεντυγχάνει	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “helps us … intercedes for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	8	26	bkwx	figs-ellipsis	συναντιλαμβάνεται & ὑπερεντυγχάνει	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “helps us … intercedes for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	8	26	h8jy	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in our weak condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	26	a6e1	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	8	26	k5pn	figs-infostructure	τὸ&τί προσευξώμεθα καθὸ δεῖ, οὐκ οἴδαμεν	2		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For we do not know the thing for which we should pray as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	8	26	k5pn	figs-infostructure	τὸ & τί προσευξώμεθα καθὸ δεῖ, οὐκ οἴδαμεν	2		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For we do not know the thing for which we should pray as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	8	26	fbjc	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Paul uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that Holy **Spirit** helps Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	8	26	jmp8		στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις	1	inexpressible groans	Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words”
-ROM	8	27	tq4n	figs-explicit	ὁ&ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	He who searches the hearts	Here, **the one who searches the hearts** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who searches the hearts,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	27	v184	figs-metaphor	ὁ&ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1		The phrase **searches the hearts** means “examines thoughts and emotions.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	27	tz5h	figs-metonymy	ὁ&ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1		See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	8	27	tq4n	figs-explicit	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	He who searches the hearts	Here, **the one who searches the hearts** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who searches the hearts,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	27	v184	figs-metaphor	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1		The phrase **searches the hearts** means “examines thoughts and emotions.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	27	tz5h	figs-metonymy	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1		See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	8	27	bioe	figs-possession	τὸ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the mindset** that belongs to the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s mindset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	8	27	rgcb	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ φρόνημα	1		See how you translated **mindset** in [8:6](../08/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	27	fgdd	figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεὸν	1		Here, **God** implies God’s will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	28	u0ev	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν&πρόθεσιν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **purpose**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	8	28	q3ce	figs-activepassive	τοῖς&κλητοῖς οὖσιν	2	for those who are called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	8	28	u0ev	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & πρόθεσιν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **purpose**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	28	q3ce	figs-activepassive	τοῖς & κλητοῖς οὖσιν	2	for those who are called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	29	m3vv	figs-explicit	οὓς προέγνω	1		Here, **foreknew** could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in [1 Peter 1:20](../1pe/01/20.md). Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	29	xhn2	figs-metaphor	συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	to be conformed to the image of his Son	Here, **image** refers to how Christians will one day resemble Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **image** in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “to be a similar form that is like his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	29	yuw2	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 ROM	8	29	ojxg	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Son	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that he might be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	8	29	r3vf	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	Son	The pronoun **he** refers to God’s **Son**, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	8	29	lf49	figs-metaphor	τὸ&πρωτότοκον	1	that he might be the firstborn	Here, **firstborn** could mean: (1) the most important person among God’s children. Alternate translation: “the person ranked first” (2) the first person to be resurrected. Alternate translation: “the first person to be resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	8	29	lf49	figs-metaphor	τὸ & πρωτότοκον	1	that he might be the firstborn	Here, **firstborn** could mean: (1) the most important person among God’s children. Alternate translation: “the person ranked first” (2) the first person to be resurrected. Alternate translation: “the first person to be resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	29	s552	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοῖς	1	among many brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	8	29	lxym	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοῖς	1	among many brothers	Here, **brothers** refers to Christians, whom Paul calls “joint heirs with Christ” in [verse 17](../08/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	8	30	hg3f	figs-explicit	ἐκάλεσεν&ἐκάλεσεν	1	Those whom he predestined	Here, **called** refers to God choosing people to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “chose to be his people … he chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	8	30	hg3f	figs-explicit	ἐκάλεσεν & ἐκάλεσεν	1	Those whom he predestined	Here, **called** refers to God choosing people to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “chose to be his people … he chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	30	g29g	figs-pastforfuture	ἐδόξασεν	1	these he also glorified	Paul uses the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will glorify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	8	31	uqou	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν	1		Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses. See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	8	31	xpu3	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in these two sentences to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say to these things: If God is for us, surely no one can be against us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1526,8 +1526,8 @@ ROM	8	36	clec	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you t
 ROM	8	36	f2de	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the sons of Korah. Alternate translation: “Just as the sons of Korah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	36	wegb	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1		In these clauses Paul quotes [Psalm 44:22](../psa/044/022.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	8	36	t67y	figs-yousingular	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ	1	For your benefit	Here, **your** is singular and refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For your sake, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	8	36	s7wj	figs-exclusive	θανατούμεθα&ἐλογίσθημεν	1	we are killed all day long	Here, **we** refers to the people who wrote this verse, so it would be exclusive. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	8	36	phxq	figs-activepassive	θανατούμεθα&ἐλογίσθημεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … They consider us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	8	36	s7wj	figs-exclusive	θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν	1	we are killed all day long	Here, **we** refers to the people who wrote this verse, so it would be exclusive. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	8	36	phxq	figs-activepassive	θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … They consider us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	36	h6v7	figs-hyperbole	θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1		The phrase **all day long** is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently these people were being killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are killed regularly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ROM	8	36	g3pi	figs-simile	ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1	We were considered as sheep for the slaughter	Here Paul compares to **sheep** those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We are considered by those who kill us to only be as valuable as the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 ROM	8	36	gmi0	figs-abstractnouns	σφαγῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slaughter**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1537,10 +1537,10 @@ ROM	8	37	iui3	figs-metaphor	ὑπερνικῶμεν	1	we are more than conquero
 ROM	8	37	wcm6	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	through the one who loved us	Here, **the one who loved us** could refer to: (1) Christ, as in [verse 35](../08/35.md). Alternate translation: “through Christ, who loved us” (2) God, as in [verse 39](../08/39.md). Alternate translation: “through God, who loved us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	38	fch1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	8	38	dgky	figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι	1	I have been convinced	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God convinced me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	8	38	ok7f	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος&ζωὴ&ἀρχαὶ&δυνάμεις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death**, **life**, **governments**, or **powers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead&being alive … those who govern … powerful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	8	38	ok7f	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος & ζωὴ & ἀρχαὶ & δυνάμεις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death**, **life**, **governments**, or **powers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead & being alive … those who govern … powerful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	8	38	js9q	figs-explicit	ἀρχαὶ	1	governments	Here, **governments** could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word ([1 Corinthians 15:24](../1co/15/24.md), [Ephesians 6:12](../eph/06/12.md)). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	8	38	q7ti	figs-explicit	δυνάμεις	1	nor powers	This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in [1 Corinthians 15:24](../1co/15/24.md) and [Ephesians 1:21](../eph/01/21.md). Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	8	39	ppaz	figs-metonymy	ὕψωμα&βάθος	1	nor powers	Here, **height** refers to everything that exists above a person, and **depth** refers to everything that exists below a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	8	39	ppaz	figs-metonymy	ὕψωμα & βάθος	1	nor powers	Here, **height** refers to everything that exists above a person, and **depth** refers to everything that exists below a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	8	39	ajct	figs-activepassive	τις κτίσις ἑτέρα	1	nor powers	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “any other thing that God has created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	8	39	sd7j	figs-metaphor	δυνήσεται ἡμᾶς χωρίσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	nor powers	See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 35](../08/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	8	39	fr5b	figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	nor powers	Here, **which** marks that Paul is giving further information about **the love of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the love of God in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ ROM	9	1	igs8	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		See how you translated the sim
 ROM	9	1	h9mp	figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς	1		Here Paul uses **conscience** as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	9	1	dsaj	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		Here, **in the Holy Spirit** indicates that **the Holy Spirit** is the one who guided Paul’s **conscience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the guidance of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	2	jx3a	figs-idiom	λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου	1	that for me there is great sorrow and unceasing pain in my heart	Here, **unceasing pain in my heart** is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am experiencing great and unceasing sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	9	2	jky1	figs-doublet	λύπη&μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη	1	great sorrow and unceasing pain	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense his emotions are. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “exceedingly great sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	9	2	jky1	figs-doublet	λύπη & μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη	1	great sorrow and unceasing pain	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense his emotions are. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “exceedingly great sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	9	3	sju1	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	9	3	b1g6	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **accursed**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “myself to be cursed” or “myself to be an accursed person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	3	rh5h	figs-activepassive	ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	For I could wish that I myself would be cursed and set apart from Christ for the sake of my brothers, those of my own race according to the flesh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God separating me from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1562,7 +1562,7 @@ ROM	9	3	eg9b	figs-metonymy	τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου	1	brothers	Here, **br
 ROM	9	3	gn5p	figs-distinguish	τῶν συγγενῶν μου, κατὰ σάρκα	1	brothers	This clause gives further information about **my brothers**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those of my own race according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	9	3	qckq	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	brothers	See how you translated **according to the flesh** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	9	4	p1ys	figs-distinguish	οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	They are Israelites	This phrase gives further information about “my brothers," mentioned in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those brothers of mine are Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	9	4	jfzg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ υἱοθεσία&ἡ δόξα&ἡ νομοθεσία&ἡ λατρεία&αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **adoption**, **glory**, **law-giving**, **service**, and **promises**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being adopted … glorious things … being given the law … serving … what has been promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	4	jfzg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ υἱοθεσία & ἡ δόξα & ἡ νομοθεσία & ἡ λατρεία & αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **adoption**, **glory**, **law-giving**, **service**, and **promises**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being adopted … glorious things … being given the law … serving … what has been promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	4	l6vs	figs-metaphor	ἡ υἱοθεσία	1	They have adoption	Here, **adoption** refers to the idea that the **Israelites** were like God’s children. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the status as God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	4	n2vu	figs-explicit	ἡ νομοθεσία	1		Here, **the law-giving** refers to God giving his laws to the Jews. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the giving of God’s laws to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	4	vu6j	figs-explicit	ἡ λατρεία	1		Here, **the service** refers to Jewish worship in the temple, which was a way of serving God. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “serving God in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1571,15 +1571,15 @@ ROM	9	5	q5w4	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1		See how you translated **accordi
 ROM	9	5	offl	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων	1		This clause refers to **the Christ**, mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection clearer. Alternate translation: “Christ is the one who is over all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	5	l07v	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων	1		The phrase **is over all** implies ruling as king **over all** things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who reigns over all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	5	blop	figs-explicit	Θεὸς, εὐλογητὸς	1		Here, **blessed God** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to Father God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the blessed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	9	6	equ8		οὐχ οἷον&ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	But it is not as though the promises of God have failed	Alternate translation: “it is not as if the word of God has failed” or “the word of God has not failed”
+ROM	9	6	equ8		οὐχ οἷον & ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	But it is not as though the promises of God have failed	Alternate translation: “it is not as if the word of God has failed” or “the word of God has not failed”
 ROM	9	6	vedq	figs-personification	ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks about **the word of God** as if it were a person who had not **failed**. He means that what God has said will certainly happen as he said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the word of God will remain unfulfilled” or “the word of God has proved false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	9	6	bmq6	figs-explicit	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **the word of God** refers to what God promised to do for Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s word of promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	6	r8se	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this sentence gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	9	6	wy8z	figs-explicit	οὐ&πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ	1	For it is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel	Here Paul uses the word **Israel** in two different ways. The phrase **all the ones from Israel** refers to all the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called **Israel**. However, the second occurrence of **Israel** refers to physical descendants of Jacob who trust in Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “not all the ones from physical Israel are part of spiritual Israel” or “not every physical Israelite is a true Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	9	6	wy8z	figs-explicit	οὐ & πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ	1	For it is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel	Here Paul uses the word **Israel** in two different ways. The phrase **all the ones from Israel** refers to all the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called **Israel**. However, the second occurrence of **Israel** refers to physical descendants of Jacob who trust in Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “not all the ones from physical Israel are part of spiritual Israel” or “not every physical Israelite is a true Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	7	s3rj	figs-ellipsis	οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα	1	Neither are all Abraham’s descendants truly his children	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Neither is it such a thing that all the children are seed of Abraham” or “Neither is it true that all the children are seed of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	9	7	m5av	figs-explicit	πάντες τέκνα	1	Neither are all Abraham’s descendants truly his children	Here, **children** refers specifically to “the children of Israel,” which is a name for the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the children of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	7	kpls	figs-metaphor	πάντες τέκνα	1		Here, **children** refers to someone’s descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	9	7	y86t	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ&σοι σπέρμα	1		Here, **seed** refers to refers to physical descendants of **Abraham** who trust in Jesus, as did the second occurrence of “Israel” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “true descendants of Abraham … your true seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	9	7	y86t	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ & σοι σπέρμα	1		Here, **seed** refers to refers to physical descendants of **Abraham** who trust in Jesus, as did the second occurrence of “Israel” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “true descendants of Abraham … your true seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	7	kbnn	writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1		**But** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	7	z2f3	figs-quotemarks	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	7	wam8	figs-yousingular	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1		Here, **your** refers to **Abraham**, and so, it is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham, in Isaac your seed will be called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -1593,9 +1593,9 @@ ROM	9	8	z5no	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	children of the
 ROM	9	8	h751	figs-explicit	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	children of the promise	Here, **the promise** refers to God’s promise to give Abraham descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the promise God made to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	8	p768	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1		See how you translated **seed** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	9	f4ap	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	9	9	ptfv	writing-quotations	ἐπαγγελίας&ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	this is the word of promise	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 18:10](../gen/18/10.md), [14](../gen/18/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “this is the word of promise that God spoke in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	9	9	up57	figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίας&ὁ λόγος	1	this is the word of promise	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that is a **promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word that was promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	9	9	vplh	figs-metonymy	ἐπαγγελίας&ὁ λόγος	1	this is the word of promise	Here, Paul used the term **word** to describe what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s spoken promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	9	9	ptfv	writing-quotations	ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	this is the word of promise	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 18:10](../gen/18/10.md), [14](../gen/18/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “this is the word of promise that God spoke in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	9	up57	figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος	1	this is the word of promise	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that is a **promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word that was promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	9	9	vplh	figs-metonymy	ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος	1	this is the word of promise	Here, Paul used the term **word** to describe what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s spoken promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	9	9	sufo	figs-quotemarks	κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον, ἐλεύσομαι, καὶ ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	this is the word of promise	This sentence is a quotation from [Genesis 18:10](../gen/18/10.md), [14](../gen/18/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	9	r9dw	writing-pronouns	ἐλεύσομαι	1	this is the word of promise	The pronoun **I** here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	9	hxl1	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	this is the word of promise	**And** indicates that what follows this word is related to what came before it. Here, **and** indicates that what follows is the result of what happened in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a result. Alternate translation: “and the result will be that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1606,9 +1606,9 @@ ROM	9	10	nqkc	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ καὶ Ῥεβέκκα	1	had conceived	P
 ROM	9	10	mb5q	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	our father	Here, **father** refers to **Isaac** as the ancestor of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “our forefather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	11	h16y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The words **for** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows gives further information about what Paul says in the previous verse and the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	9	11	ekxa	figs-explicit	γὰρ	1		Here Paul is referring to God choosing to bless Jacob instead of Esau, the twin sons of Rebekah and Isaac. However, he does not state this explicitly until [verse 13](../09/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God chose to bless only one of Rebekah’s two sons,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	9	11	luly	figs-ellipsis	μήπω&γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον	1		Paul is leaving out some words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “her sons not yet having been born, nor indeed having done anything good or bad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	9	11	luly	figs-ellipsis	μήπω & γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον	1		Paul is leaving out some words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “her sons not yet having been born, nor indeed having done anything good or bad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	9	11	h32d	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God chose only one of Rebekah’s sons. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	9	11	a1gz	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **purpose**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God had purposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	11	a1gz	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **purpose**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God had purposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	11	ts50	figs-abstractnouns	κατ’ ἐκλογὴν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **election**, you could express the same idea in another way. The context indicates that Paul is referring to **God** electing people. Alternate translation: “according to electing people” or “in relation to choosing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	12	ze3m	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τοῦ καλοῦντος	1		Here Paul is referring to the election of one of Rebekah’s sons, Jacob, as stated in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not elect Jacob by works, but by the one who calls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	12	h6uj	figs-explicit	ἔργων	1		Here, **works** refers to human actions in general. It does not refer to “the works of the law” because God had not yet given the law of Moses when Jacob and Esau lived. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1622,8 +1622,8 @@ ROM	9	12	b8px	figs-explicit	ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσ
 ROM	9	13	heon	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	13	mxfw	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Malachi, and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “It is just as God had Malachi write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	13	xt7t	figs-quotemarks	τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	This sentence is a quotation from [Malachi 1:2–3](../mal/01/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	9	13	jb9k	translate-names	Ἰακὼβ&Ἠσαῦ	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	**Jacob** and **Esau** are the names of men, the twin sons of Isaac and Rebekah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	13	jcfs	writing-pronouns	ἠγάπησα&ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	The pronoun **I** here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, loved … I hated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	13	jb9k	translate-names	Ἰακὼβ & Ἠσαῦ	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	**Jacob** and **Esau** are the names of men, the twin sons of Isaac and Rebekah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	9	13	jcfs	writing-pronouns	ἠγάπησα & ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	The pronoun **I** here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, loved … I hated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	13	y3zu	figs-hyperbole	ἐμίσησα	1	Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated	Paul quotes God using the word **hated** as an exaggeration to say that he did not love Esau and had completely rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I completely rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ROM	9	14	lf2k	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	What then will we say?	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [verses 6–13](../09/06.md). See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	9	14	m8xk	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ?	1	What then will we say?	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that God is truly unrighteous!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1634,33 +1634,33 @@ ROM	9	14	s1hm	figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	May it never be	In this sent
 ROM	9	14	jrp5	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	9	15	x9ri	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For he says to Moses	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it.  **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	9	15	k9i0	writing-quotations	τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει	1	For he says to Moses	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 33:19](../exo/33/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For he says to Moses that which is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	9	15	v2x6	writing-pronouns	λέγει&ἐλεήσω&ἐλεῶ&οἰκτειρήσω&οἰκτείρω	1	For he says to Moses	The pronouns **he** and **I** here refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … ‘I, God, will have mercy … I will have mercy … I, God, will have compassion … I will have compassion’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	15	v2x6	writing-pronouns	λέγει & ἐλεήσω & ἐλεῶ & οἰκτειρήσω & οἰκτείρω	1	For he says to Moses	The pronouns **he** and **I** here refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … ‘I, God, will have mercy … I will have mercy … I, God, will have compassion … I will have compassion’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	15	kq2c	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	For he says to Moses	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	15	c2t0	figs-quotemarks	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Exodus 33:19](../exo/33/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	15	f61q	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **mercy** and **compassion**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I will act mercifully to whomever I will act mercifully, and I will act compassionately to whomever I will act compassionately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	15	f1hi	figs-parallelism	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1		These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They emphasize that God does whatever he wants. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another form that emphasizes that God is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	9	16	y06j	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		**So then** indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of [verses 11–15](../09/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	9	16	hn5j	writing-pronouns	οὐ	1		Here, **it** refers to God acting mercifully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s mercy is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	9	16	d4f5	figs-possession	τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος, ἀλλὰ&Θεοῦ	1	it is not because of him who wills, nor because of him who runs	Paul is using the possessive form to describe what God’s mercy does or does not depend on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “depending on the one who wills, nor depending on the one who runs, but depending on God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	9	16	d4f5	figs-possession	τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος, ἀλλὰ & Θεοῦ	1	it is not because of him who wills, nor because of him who runs	Paul is using the possessive form to describe what God’s mercy does or does not depend on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “depending on the one who wills, nor depending on the one who runs, but depending on God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	16	ues3	figs-metaphor	τοῦ τρέχοντος	1	nor because of him who runs	Here Paul uses **the one who runs** to refer to a person who does good things to try to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who tries to gain favor” or “the one who works very hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	16	plbr	figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἐλεῶντος	1		This phrase gives further information about **God**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “he is the one who has mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	9	16	p1fn	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ ἐλεῶντος	1		See how you translated **mercy** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	17	st77	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For the scripture says	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it.  **For** here indicates that what follows is the another reason why what Paul said in [verse 14](../09/14.md) is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I said previously is also true, due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	9	17	x1cj	figs-personification	λέγει&ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	Here Paul uses **the scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information that God said to **Pharaoh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says to Pharaoh in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	9	17	e0r9	writing-quotations	λέγει&ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 9:16](../exo/09/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God said to Pharaoh in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	9	17	x1cj	figs-personification	λέγει & ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	Here Paul uses **the scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information that God said to **Pharaoh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says to Pharaoh in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	9	17	e0r9	writing-quotations	λέγει & ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	For the scripture says	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Exodus 9:16](../exo/09/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God said to Pharaoh in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	17	w1ki	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	For the scripture says	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	17	ipl3	figs-quotemarks	ὅτι εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐξήγειρά σε, ὅπως ἐνδείξωμαι ἐν σοὶ τὴν δύναμίν μου, καὶ ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Exodus 9:16](../exo/09/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	17	wfwo	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1		See how you translated **purpose** in [verse 11](../09/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	9	17	xu7s	writing-pronouns	ἐξήγειρά σε&ἐνδείξωμαι&μου	1	I … my	Here the pronouns **I** and **my** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, raised you up … I might demonstrate my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	17	xu7s	writing-pronouns	ἐξήγειρά σε & ἐνδείξωμαι & μου	1	I … my	Here the pronouns **I** and **my** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, raised you up … I might demonstrate my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	17	pz5x	figs-idiom	ἐξήγειρά σε	1	I raised you up	Paul quotes God using the phrase **raised you up** to refer to causing someone to become king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I caused you to become king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	9	17	nfv5	figs-yousingular	σε&σοὶ	1	you	Both occurrences of **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	9	17	ho3g	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως&ὅπως	1	you	Both occurrences of **so that** in this verse introduce purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	9	17	nfv5	figs-yousingular	σε & σοὶ	1	you	Both occurrences of **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ROM	9	17	ho3g	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως & ὅπως	1	you	Both occurrences of **so that** in this verse introduce purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	9	17	dp4p	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμίν μου	1		See how you translated **power** in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	17	wspw	figs-metaphor	ἐν σοὶ	1		Paul quotes God speaking of his **power** as if it were an object that could be **in** Pharaoh. He means that Pharaoh is the means by which God would show his power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by means of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	17	gps5	figs-activepassive	ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	so that my name might be proclaimed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	17	jp6i	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	my name	Here, **my name** represents God himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	9	18	qlty	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		**So then** indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of [verses 14–17](../09/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md) and in [verse 16](../09/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	9	18	jrj5	writing-pronouns	θέλει, ἐλεεῖ&θέλει, σκληρύνει	1	whom he wishes, he makes stubborn	In this verse **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has mercy … he wills … God wills … he hardens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	18	jrj5	writing-pronouns	θέλει, ἐλεεῖ & θέλει, σκληρύνει	1	whom he wishes, he makes stubborn	In this verse **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has mercy … he wills … God wills … he hardens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	18	bf3a	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεεῖ	1	whom he wishes, he makes stubborn	See how you translated **mercy** in [verse 15](../09/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	18	qzvz	figs-metaphor	σκληρύνει	1	whom he wishes, he makes stubborn	Here, **he hardens** refers to causing someone to become stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he causes to become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	19	z4j2	figs-yousingular	ἐρεῖς	1	You will say then to me	**You** here is singular and refers to a hypothetical person who opposes Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You people who oppose me will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -1668,7 +1668,7 @@ ROM	9	19	r6r7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν	1	You wil
 ROM	9	19	zt94	writing-pronouns	μοι	1		The pronoun **me** here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to me, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	19	bbe4	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν?	1	Why does he still find fault? For who has ever withstood his will?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that someone who opposes him might have to what he said in [verses 14–18](../09/14.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then he should not find fault with us! No one has ever been able to withstand his will!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	9	19	eqph	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Why does he still find fault? For who has ever withstood his will?	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [verses 14–18](../09/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	9	19	hqr7	writing-pronouns	μέμφεται&αὐτοῦ	1	he … his	In this verse the pronouns **he** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does God … find fault … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	19	hqr7	writing-pronouns	μέμφεται & αὐτοῦ	1	he … his	In this verse the pronouns **he** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does God … find fault … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	19	zioz	figs-metaphor	ἔτι μέμφεται	1		Here, **find fault** refers to blaming someone for doing something bad. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does he blame us for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	20	n1ti	figs-explicit	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1		In this verse Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions from his hypothetical opponent in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘O man’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	20	g7mn	figs-quotemarks	ὦ ἄνθρωπε, μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ? μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?	1		In this verse Paul is responding to the rhetorical questions from his hypothetical opponent in the previous verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -1686,15 +1686,15 @@ ROM	9	20	wcj3	figs-rquestion	τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως	1	Why did y
 ROM	9	21	e94a	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1	Does the potter not have the right … for daily use?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The potter surely has authority over the clay to make from the same lump not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	9	21	nsdy	figs-exmetaphor	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1		Paul speaks about God’s authority over people by using the metaphor of a **potter** and his **clay**. Paul means that God has the right to do whatever he wants with people, because he made them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Or does God not have authority over us like a potter has authority over the clay to make from the same lump not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 ROM	9	21	falq	translate-unknown	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1		A **potter** is a person who makes containers out of a type of soil called **clay** that becomes hard after it is heated. The **potter** takes a **lump** of **clay** and forms it into different kinds of containers that are used for various purposes. If your readers would not be familiar with **clay** containers, you could use the name of a different type of material that is used in your area to make containers, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “Or does the person who makes something not have authority over his materials to make from those materials not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ROM	9	21	lm6k	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος&εἰς ἀτιμίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “a vessel for what is honorable … for what is dishonorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	9	21	pe9t	figs-explicit	εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος&εἰς ἀτιμίαν	1		Here, **honor** and **dishonor** refer to how these vessels will be used. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a vessel for honorable use … for dishonorable use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	9	21	lm6k	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος & εἰς ἀτιμίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “a vessel for what is honorable … for what is dishonorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	21	pe9t	figs-explicit	εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος & εἰς ἀτιμίαν	1		Here, **honor** and **dishonor** refer to how these vessels will be used. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a vessel for honorable use … for dishonorable use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	22	gk5u			0	General Information:	[Verses 22–24](../09/22.md) are one long sentence. If you divide these verses into multiple sentences, as the UST does, then you may need to repeat some phrases in order to make the meaning clear.
 ROM	9	22	a9tl	figs-ellipsis	εἰ	1		Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, especially the idea in [verse 20](../09/20.md) that no one can speak against God. Alternate translation: “what can you say against God if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	9	22	afmb	figs-rquestion	εἰ	1		Here, **what if** indicates the beginning of one long rhetorical question that extends from [verse 22](../09/22.md) to [verse 24](../09/24.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	9	22	dzpq	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [verse 22](../09/22.md) to [verse 24](../09/24.md). Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	9	22	cqto	figs-infostructure	θέλων&ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction, willing to demonstrate his wrath and to make his power known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	9	22	bqkv	grammar-connect-logic-result	θέλων&ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν	1		This clause could indicate: (1) the reason why God **endured vessels of wrath**. Alternate translation: “as a result of being willing to demonstrate his wrath” (2) a contrast between God being **willing to demonstrate his wrath** and **enduring vessels of wrath**. Alternate translation: “even though he was willing to demonstrate his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	9	22	yyyp	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν&τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ&πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ&ὀργῆς&εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath**, **power**, **patience**, and **destruction**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how wrathful he is … how powerful he is … being very patient … for being wrathful against … for being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	22	cqto	figs-infostructure	θέλων & ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction, willing to demonstrate his wrath and to make his power known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	9	22	bqkv	grammar-connect-logic-result	θέλων & ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν	1		This clause could indicate: (1) the reason why God **endured vessels of wrath**. Alternate translation: “as a result of being willing to demonstrate his wrath” (2) a contrast between God being **willing to demonstrate his wrath** and **enduring vessels of wrath**. Alternate translation: “even though he was willing to demonstrate his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	9	22	yyyp	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν & τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ & πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ & ὀργῆς & εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath**, **power**, **patience**, and **destruction**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how wrathful he is … how powerful he is … being very patient … for being wrathful against … for being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	22	cj94	figs-activepassive	γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to make people know his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	22	we86	figs-metaphor	σκεύη ὀργῆς	1	containers of wrath	Paul refers to people as if they were **vessels**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people of wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	22	ba9v	figs-possession	σκεύη ὀργῆς	1	containers of wrath	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **vessels** that deserve **wrath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “vessels that deserve wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1703,23 +1703,23 @@ ROM	9	22	o4ub	figs-activepassive	κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλει
 ROM	9	22	bney	grammar-connect-logic-goal	κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	containers of wrath	The word **for** indicates that what follows this word connects to what came before it. Here, **for** indicates the purpose for which the **vessels of wrath** were **prepared**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “prepared for purpose of being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	9	22	webu	figs-explicit	εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	containers of wrath	Here, **destruction** refers to experiencing punishment forever in hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for experiencing eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	23	rtom	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1		Here, **and** indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in the previous verse. If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse here. Alternate translation: “What if God also endured vessels of wrath so that” or “God also endured vessels of wrath so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	9	23	u6tn	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα&εἰς	1		Here, **so that** and **for** indicate purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	9	23	ufj7	writing-pronouns	γνωρίσῃ&αὐτοῦ&προητοίμασεν	1	he … his	In this verse the pronouns **he** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God might make known … God’s … God prepared beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	23	u6tn	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα & εἰς	1		Here, **so that** and **for** indicate purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	9	23	ufj7	writing-pronouns	γνωρίσῃ & αὐτοῦ & προητοίμασεν	1	he … his	In this verse the pronouns **he** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God might make known … God’s … God prepared beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	23	o1fl	figs-activepassive	γνωρίσῃ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might make people know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	9	23	hgau	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν πλοῦτον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **riches**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the rich character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	9	23	iq94	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ&ἐλέους&εἰς δόξαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **mercy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how glorious he is … toward which he acts mercifully … for being glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	23	iq94	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ & ἐλέους & εἰς δόξαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **mercy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how glorious he is … toward which he acts mercifully … for being glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	23	ojeo	figs-possession	τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **glory** that is characterized by **wealth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his rich glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	23	she3	figs-possession	σκεύη ἐλέους	1	the riches of his glory upon	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **vessels** that will receive God’s **mercy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “vessels that will receive mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	23	v33r	figs-metaphor	σκεύη ἐλέους	1	containers of mercy	See how you translated **vessels** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	23	kuim	figs-distinguish	ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν	1	which he had previously prepared for glory	This clause gives further information about the **vessels of mercy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are the ones he prepared beforehand for glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	9	23	jcjx	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν	1		Here, **for** indicates the purpose for which the **vessels of mercy** were **prepared**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “prepared for the purpose of being glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	9	23	t41s	figs-explicit	εἰς δόξαν	1	which he had previously prepared for glory	Here, **glory** refers to experiencing **glory** forever with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for experiencing eternal glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	9	24	yowi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ&ἡμᾶς	1	also for us	Here, **even** indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in [verse 22](../09/22.md). If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verses here. Alternate translation: “What if even we are vessels of mercy” or “Even we are vessels of mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	9	24	yowi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ & ἡμᾶς	1	also for us	Here, **even** indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in [verse 22](../09/22.md). If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verses here. Alternate translation: “What if even we are vessels of mercy” or “Even we are vessels of mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	9	24	y6vp	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	also for us	Here, **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	9	24	t8rn	writing-pronouns	ἐκάλεσεν	1	called	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	24	zp1t	figs-distinguish	οὐ μόνον ἐξ Ἰουδαίων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐξ ἐθνῶν	1	called	This phrase gives further information about the people **whom** God **called**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not only from the Jews, but also from the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	9	25	eqc2	writing-quotations	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει	1		This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are quotations from an Old Testament book ([Hosea 2:23](../hos/02/23.md); [1:10](../hos/01/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “As he says also in the scripture written by Hosea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	9	25	ewb4	writing-pronouns	λέγει&καλέσω&μου&μου	1		Here, **he**, **I**, and **my** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … I, God, will call … my … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	9	25	ewb4	writing-pronouns	λέγει & καλέσω & μου & μου	1		Here, **he**, **I**, and **my** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … I, God, will call … my … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	25	is9f	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	9	25	f0rx	figs-quotemarks	καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου, καὶ τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Hosea 2:23](../hos/02/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	25	yy15	figs-activepassive	τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1	her beloved who was not beloved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I did not love, ‘One I love’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1746,7 +1746,7 @@ ROM	9	28	md3o	figs-metaphor	συντέμνων	1		Here, **cutting it short** ref
 ROM	9	28	x832	figs-quotemarks		0	the Lord will carry out his sentence on the earth	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Isaiah 10:22–23](../isa/10/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	9	29	gq8u	writing-quotations	καὶ καθὼς προείρηκεν Ἠσαΐας	1		This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 1:9](../isa/01/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And just as Isaiah has said beforehand in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	9	29	xem9	figs-quotemarks	εἰ μὴ Κύριος Σαβαὼθ ἐνκατέλιπεν ἡμῖν σπέρμα, ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 1:9](../isa/01/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	9	29	dl9x	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν&ἂν ἐγενήθημεν&ὡμοιώθημεν	1	us … we	In this verse **us** and **we** refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke, so **us** and **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	9	29	dl9x	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἂν ἐγενήθημεν & ὡμοιώθημεν	1	us … we	In this verse **us** and **we** refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke, so **us** and **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	9	29	iqy3	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	us … we	Here, **seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated **seed** in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	29	yicp	figs-explicit	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		Paul’s readers would have known that **Sodom** and **Gomorrah** were cities that God completely destroyed because the people who lived in them were very wicked ([Genesis 19](../gen/19/01.md)). If your readers might not be familiar with this story, you could state this explicitly or indicate this in a note. Alternate translation: “we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom, and we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	9	29	mkmt	figs-parallelism	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Israel could have been completely destroyed by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would have become just like Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -1755,10 +1755,10 @@ ROM	9	30	xv7y	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		The word **then** indicate
 ROM	9	30	m5l2	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	What will we say then?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in this sentence to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say this:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	9	30	ki4k	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι ἔθνη	1	That the Gentiles	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	9	30	bnl6	figs-distinguish	τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην	1	who were not pursuing righteousness	This clause gives further information about **the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not pursuing righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-ROM	9	30	x51u	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην&δικαιοσύνην&δικαιοσύνην	1		See how you translated this word in [6:13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	9	30	x51u	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην & δικαιοσύνην & δικαιοσύνην	1		See how you translated this word in [6:13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	30	gl4m	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	the righteousness by faith	See how you translated this phrase in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	31	z133	translate-names	Ἰσραὴλ	1	the righteousness by faith	See how you translated this name in [verse 27](../09/27.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	9	31	f18n	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον&νόμον	1		In this verse **law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews by dictating them to Moses. See how you translated this use of **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+ROM	9	31	f18n	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & νόμον	1		In this verse **law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews by dictating them to Moses. See how you translated this use of **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	9	31	x1o0	figs-possession	νόμον δικαιοσύνης	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that was for the purpose of **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a law for righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	31	gjmu	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνης	1		See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	9	32	y4pf	figs-ellipsis	διὰ τί?	1	Why not?	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1775,7 +1775,7 @@ ROM	9	33	uo7d	figs-quotemarks	ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθο
 ROM	9	33	m6ll	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Paul quotes Isaiah using the term **Behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	33	hmmn	writing-pronouns	τίθημι	1		In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	9	33	dy6x	figs-metonymy	ἐν Σιὼν	1	in Zion	Here, **Zion** refers to the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	9	33	mf6h	figs-metaphor	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου&αὐτῷ	1		Here, **stone of stumbling**, **rock of offense**, and **it** refer to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person who will be like a stone of stumbling and a rock of offense” or “a person who will cause people to stumble and will offend them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	9	33	mf6h	figs-metaphor	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου & αὐτῷ	1		Here, **stone of stumbling**, **rock of offense**, and **it** refer to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person who will be like a stone of stumbling and a rock of offense” or “a person who will cause people to stumble and will offend them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	9	33	u3dj	figs-doublet	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου	1	stone of stumbling and a rock of offense	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how offensive the Messiah would be to the Jews. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “a stone that causes great offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	9	33	h3tw	figs-possession	λίθον προσκόμματος	1	stone of stumbling and a rock of offense	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	9	33	c8t8	figs-possession	πέτραν σκανδάλου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **rock** that causes **offense**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rock that causes offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1783,26 +1783,26 @@ ROM	9	33	knfh	figs-abstractnouns	σκανδάλου	1		If your language does not
 ROM	9	33	tu4i	figs-activepassive	ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται	1	believes in it	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will not shame the one who believes on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	intro	c2li			0		# Romans 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)<br>    * Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)<br>    * God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)<br>    * God shows mercy to whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)<br>    * No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)<br>    * Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4)<br>    * Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21)<br><br>Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in [verse 8](../10/08.md).<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 18-20](../10/18.md) of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Jewish people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Different uses of “they,” “them,” and “their”<br><br>In [verses 1–4](../10/01.md), the pronouns “they,” “them,” and “their” always refer to the people of Israel. However, those pronouns refer to various things and people in [verses 5–21](../10/05.md), which will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	1	hj4b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	10	1	v3jp	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&εὐδοκία&ἡ δέησις&σωτηρίαν	1	my heart’s desire	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good pleasure**, **prayer**, and **salvation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the very pleasing thing … what I pray … them to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	10	1	v3jp	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & εὐδοκία & ἡ δέησις & σωτηρίαν	1	my heart’s desire	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good pleasure**, **prayer**, and **salvation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the very pleasing thing … what I pray … them to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	1	tq7k	figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας	1	my heart’s desire	Here, **heart** refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of my inner being” or “of my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	1	tmf2	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **them** in [verses 1–4](../10/01.md) refers to Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	2	y7qg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I feel this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	10	2	adka	figs-abstractnouns	ζῆλον&ἔχουσιν&οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **zeal** and **full knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are zealous … not by fully knowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	10	2	adka	figs-abstractnouns	ζῆλον & ἔχουσιν & οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **zeal** and **full knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are zealous … not by fully knowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	2	rjqd	figs-possession	ζῆλον Θεοῦ ἔχουσιν	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **zeal** that is directed toward **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “they have a zeal for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	10	2	pxyj	figs-ellipsis	οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they have zeal of God that is not according to full knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	10	3	e7p2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	10	3	bw97	figs-possession	τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην&τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated **the righteousness of God** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	10	3	bw97	figs-possession	τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated **the righteousness of God** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	10	3	dgjn	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιοσύνην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous on their own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	3	a6r4	figs-personification	τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν	1	They did not submit to the righteousness of God	Here Paul speaks of **the righteousness of God** as if it were a person to whom someone could **submit**. He means that they refused to attain righteousness in the way God requires, which is by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they refuse to receive the righteousness of God attained according to his way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	4	x1w8	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For Christ is the fulfillment of the law	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why the Jews were wrong to try to make themselves righteous, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “They were wrong to seek to establish their own righteousness because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	10	4	y30a	figs-explicit	τέλος&νόμου	1	For Christ is the fulfillment of the law	Here, **the completion of the law** could mean: (1) the end of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the end of the law” (2) the goal of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the goal of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	4	y30a	figs-explicit	τέλος & νόμου	1	For Christ is the fulfillment of the law	Here, **the completion of the law** could mean: (1) the end of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the end of the law” (2) the goal of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the goal of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	4	a9up	figs-abstractnouns	τέλος	1	For Christ is the fulfillment of the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **completion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is what completes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	4	y3sx	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1	For Christ is the fulfillment of the law	See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	10	4	nprh	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		Here, **for** could indicate that: (1) **righteousness** was the purpose for **the completion of the law**. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of becoming righteous” (2) **righteousness** was the result of **the completion of the law**. Alternate translation: “resulting in righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	10	4	f6pu	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	for righteousness for everyone who believes	See how you translated **righteousness** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	4	z3z9	figs-ellipsis	παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	for righteousness for everyone who believes	See how you translated **everyone who believes** in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	10	5	vsyn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	5	ozvf	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς&γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 18:5](../lev/18/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses writes in the Scriptures about the righteousness that is from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	5	ozvf	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς & γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 18:5](../lev/18/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses writes in the Scriptures about the righteousness that is from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	5	m8my	figs-pastforfuture	γράφει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **writes** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	5	qby2	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about being righteous based on the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	5	dufv	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md) and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -1812,8 +1812,8 @@ ROM	10	5	kt66	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	the righteousness that comes from the l
 ROM	10	5	e3po	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	the righteousness that comes from the law	Paul quotes Moses implying that the person must do all of **these things** perfectly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things perfectly” or “every single one of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	5	qkz4	figs-explicit	ζήσεται	1	will live	Here, **will live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “will live forever” (2) a mortal life that God blesses. Alternate translation: “will stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	5	gsls	writing-pronouns	αὐτῇ	1	will live	Here, **it** refers to the law of Moses, which was called **these things** earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	10	6	r3ey	writing-quotations	ἡ&ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 9:4](../deu/09/04.md); [30:12–14](../deu/30/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the righteousness by faith says thus in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	10	6	sr9z	figs-personification	ἡ&ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη&λέγει	1		Here, **righteousness** is described as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the real meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the righteousness by faith, Moses says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	10	6	r3ey	writing-quotations	ἡ & ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 9:4](../deu/09/04.md); [30:12–14](../deu/30/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the righteousness by faith says thus in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	6	sr9z	figs-personification	ἡ & ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη & λέγει	1		Here, **righteousness** is described as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the real meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the righteousness by faith, Moses says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	6	cgv8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη	1		See how you translated **righteousness** in [6:13](../06/13.md) and **by faith** in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	6	ksbr	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	6	ezma	figs-quotemarks	μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Deuteronomy 9:4](../deu/09/04.md) and [Deuteronomy 30:12](../deu/30/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -1834,53 +1834,53 @@ ROM	10	8	n63g	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	But what does it say?	Here Paul us
 ROM	10	8	hybn	figs-quotemarks	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	But what does it say?	In this sentence Paul quotes [Deuteronomy 30:14](../deu/30/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	8	kzb2	figs-metaphor	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	The word is near you	Paul quotes Moses speaking of the **word** as if it were an object that could be **near** or **in** someone. He means that God’s message could be easily known and spoken by Moses’ audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You can easily know and speak the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	10	8	sx8r	figs-metonymy	τὸ ῥῆμά	1	The word is near you	Paul quotes Moses using **word** to describe what God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	10	8	wpvg	figs-youcrowd	σου&σου&σου	1	The word is near you	Here Paul quotes Moses addressing the people of Israel as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of "your" in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	10	8	wpvg	figs-youcrowd	σου & σου & σου	1	The word is near you	Here Paul quotes Moses addressing the people of Israel as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of "your" in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	10	8	y6mq	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ στόματί σου	1	The word is … in your mouth	The phrase **in your mouth** refers to being able to say something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: "in what you say" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	8	zvx4	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	The word is … in your heart	See how you translated **heart** in [verse 1](../10/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	8	lh5d	figs-possession	τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως	1	the word of faith	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that is about **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word about faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	10	8	v7ho	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	the word of faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	8	o4oy	figs-exclusive	κηρύσσομεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and other Christians who **proclaim** the gospel, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	10	9	q5un	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	if with your mouth you confess Jesus as Lord	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows is an explanation of what “the word of faith” is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This word we proclaim is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	9	pawz	figs-youcrowd	ὁμολογήσῃς&σου&σου&σωθήσῃ	1	if with your mouth you confess Jesus as Lord	Paul addresses his readers as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular. See how you translated **you** and **your** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	10	9	pawz	figs-youcrowd	ὁμολογήσῃς & σου & σου & σωθήσῃ	1	if with your mouth you confess Jesus as Lord	Paul addresses his readers as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular. See how you translated **you** and **your** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	10	9	tz7r	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ στόματί σου	1	if with your mouth you confess Jesus as Lord	This phrase indicates the means by which a person confesses **Jesus is Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by using your mouth you confess, ‘Jesus is Lord’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	9	ie71	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	believe in your heart	See how you translated this phrase in [verses 6](../10/06.md) and [8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	9	zdf5	figs-idiom	αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	raised him from the dead	See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	10	9	c3cq	figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	you will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	10	iv0v	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here introduces the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	10	10	g7i1	figs-metonymy	καρδίᾳ&πιστεύεται	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	10	10	g3nf	figs-explicit	πιστεύεται&ὁμολογεῖται	1		The subjects of these phrases are implied from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one believes that God raised Jesus from the dead … one confesses that Jesus is Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	10	o3a7	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαιοσύνην&εἰς σωτηρίαν	1		Both occurrences of **to** in this verse indicate that what follows them are results. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “resulting in righteousness … resulting in salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM	10	10	g7i1	figs-metonymy	καρδίᾳ & πιστεύεται	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	10	10	g3nf	figs-explicit	πιστεύεται & ὁμολογεῖται	1		The subjects of these phrases are implied from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one believes that God raised Jesus from the dead … one confesses that Jesus is Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	10	o3a7	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαιοσύνην & εἰς σωτηρίαν	1		Both occurrences of **to** in this verse indicate that what follows them are results. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “resulting in righteousness … resulting in salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	10	10	h20k	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1		See how you translated this abstract noun in [verse 6](../10/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	10	10	xs8c	figs-explicit	στόματι&ὁμολογεῖται	1	with the mouth	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	10	xs8c	figs-explicit	στόματι & ὁμολογεῖται	1	with the mouth	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	10	uroy	figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίαν	1	with the mouth	See how you translated this abstract noun in [verse 1](../10/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	11	rlqi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	11	r6tf	writing-quotations	λέγει&ἡ Γραφή	1		This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 28:16](../isa/28/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	10	11	gu99	figs-personification	λέγει&ἡ Γραφή	1	For scripture says	Here Paul uses **the scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	10	11	r6tf	writing-quotations	λέγει & ἡ Γραφή	1		This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 28:16](../isa/28/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	11	gu99	figs-personification	λέγει & ἡ Γραφή	1	For scripture says	Here Paul uses **the scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	11	whdz	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Everyone who believes on him will not be put to shame	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	11	nv71	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται	1	Everyone who believes on him will not be put to shame	See how you translated this sentence in [9:33](../09/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	12	ygv8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces another explanation for what Paul said in [verse 10](../10/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	12	fvlg	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ&ἐστιν διαστολὴ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not distinguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	10	12	fvlg	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολὴ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not distinguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	12	z8p4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	10	12	j7vw	figs-possession	Κύριος πάντων	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **Lord** who rules over **all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Lord is ruling over all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	10	12	r2jx	figs-nominaladj	πάντων&πάντας	1	For there is no difference between Jew and Greek	Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “is of all people … all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ROM	10	12	r2jx	figs-nominaladj	πάντων & πάντας	1	For there is no difference between Jew and Greek	Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “is of all people … all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	10	12	p9py	figs-explicit	πλουτῶν	1	he is rich to all who call upon him	Here, **being rich** means to bless others generously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “generously giving blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	12	oe6l	figs-explicit	ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν	1		Here, **call on** implies calling out to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who call upon him to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	13	cxph	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	10	13	t4j7	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Joel 2:32](../jol/02/32.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For Joel wrote in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	10	13	gpyj	figs-quotemarks	πᾶς&ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Joel 2:32](../jol/02/32.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	13	gpyj	figs-quotemarks	πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1		In this sentence Paul quotes [Joel 2:32](../jol/02/32.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	13	qvbd	figs-nominaladj	πᾶς	1		See how you translated **all** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 ROM	10	13	n4yp	figs-explicit	ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1		See how you translated “call on” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	13	pe96	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	For everyone who calls on the name of the Lord will be saved	Here, **the name of the Lord** represents **the Lord** himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	10	13	rht3	figs-explicit	πᾶς&ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	For everyone who calls on the name of the Lord will be saved	Here Paul implies that **the Lord** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. However, since this sentence is a quotation from the Old Testament, you will need to state this outside of the quotation. Alternate translation: “all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord will be saved. This Lord is Jesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	13	js1b	figs-activepassive	πᾶς&ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	10	13	rht3	figs-explicit	πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	For everyone who calls on the name of the Lord will be saved	Here Paul implies that **the Lord** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. However, since this sentence is a quotation from the Old Testament, you will need to state this outside of the quotation. Alternate translation: “all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord will be saved. This Lord is Jesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	13	js1b	figs-activepassive	πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	14	utr4	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν? πῶς δὲ πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? πῶς δὲ ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using three rhetorical questions here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then surely they would not call on whom they have not believed! And surely they would not believe in whom they have not heard! And surely they would not hear without someone preaching!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	14	syzi	grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1		Here, **then** indicates that what follows in [verses 14–15](../10/14.md) is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	10	14	zqzi	writing-pronouns	ἐπικαλέσωνται&οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν&πιστεύσωσιν&οὐκ ἤκουσαν&ἀκούσωσιν	1		In this verse **they** refers to all people, both Jews and Gentiles, as stated in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would all people call … they have not believed … would all people believe in … they have not heard … would all people hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	10	14	zqzi	writing-pronouns	ἐπικαλέσωνται & οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν & πιστεύσωσιν & οὐκ ἤκουσαν & ἀκούσωσιν	1		In this verse **they** refers to all people, both Jews and Gentiles, as stated in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would all people call … they have not believed … would all people believe in … they have not heard … would all people hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	14	vww6	figs-explicit	ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν	1		See how you translated **call on** in [verse 12](../10/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	14	n02w	figs-explicit	ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν&οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1		These clauses refer to Jesus, whom Paul called the Lord in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom they have not believed … Jesus, whom they have not heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	14	mrl8	figs-ellipsis	οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν&ἀκούσωσιν&κηρύσσοντος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “whom they have not heard about … would they hear about him … someone preaching about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	10	14	n02w	figs-explicit	ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν & οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1		These clauses refer to Jesus, whom Paul called the Lord in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom they have not believed … Jesus, whom they have not heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	14	mrl8	figs-ellipsis	οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν & ἀκούσωσιν & κηρύσσοντος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “whom they have not heard about … would they hear about him … someone preaching about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	10	15	hcz3	figs-rquestion	πῶς δὲ κηρύξωσιν ἐὰν μὴ ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely they would not preach unless they would be sent!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	10	15	nqwf	writing-pronouns	κηρύξωσιν&ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	In this verse **they** refers to the people who **preach**, as mentioned at the end of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would those who preach be able to preach … those preachers would be sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	10	15	nqwf	writing-pronouns	κηρύξωσιν & ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	In this verse **they** refers to the people who **preach**, as mentioned at the end of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would those who preach be able to preach … those preachers would be sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	15	l0xu	figs-activepassive	ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	15	atg0	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	15	ylan	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	How beautiful are the feet of those who proclaim good news	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Isaiah wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1890,7 +1890,7 @@ ROM	10	16	gxqu	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	not all of them obeye
 ROM	10	16	hku8	writing-pronouns	οὐ πάντες	1	not all of them obeyed	Here, **them** could refer to (1) the Jews, who are the main topic of chapters 9–11. Alternate translation: “not all of the Jews” (2) all people, as in [verses 13–15](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “not everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	16	dqe6	figs-personification	ὑπήκουσαν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul speaks of **the gospel** as if it were a person who could be **obeyed**. Paul is referring to obeying the command to repent and believe the **gospel**, which is part of the **gospel** message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obeyed what God commanded in the gospel” or “believed the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 ROM	10	16	eze8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	not all of them obeyed	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that this sentence explains what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	10	16	o91x	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας&λέγει	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 53:1](../isa/53/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	16	o91x	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας & λέγει	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 53:1](../isa/53/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	16	e25r	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	not all of them obeyed	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	16	jvah	figs-quotemarks	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:1](../isa/53/01.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	16	j3se	figs-rquestion	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1	Lord, who has believed our message?	Isaiah is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, surely no one has believed our report!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1900,7 +1900,7 @@ ROM	10	17	hqcv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα	1	faith comes from hearing
 ROM	10	17	qdug	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις	1	faith comes from hearing	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what someone believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	17	wu5a	figs-explicit	ἡ πίστις	1	faith comes from hearing	Here, **this faith** refers to believing in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “believing in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	17	xab6	figs-ellipsis	ἐξ ἀκοῆς	1	faith comes from hearing	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is received by hearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	10	17	x765	figs-ellipsis	ἀκοῆς&ἀκοὴ	1	faith comes from hearing	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “hearing about Jesus … hearing about him is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ROM	10	17	x765	figs-ellipsis	ἀκοῆς & ἀκοὴ	1	faith comes from hearing	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “hearing about Jesus … hearing about him is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	10	17	nq87	figs-possession	ῥήματος Χριστοῦ	1	hearing by the word of Christ	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the word** that is about **Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	10	17	aunq	figs-abstractnouns	ῥήματος	1	hearing by the word of Christ	See how you translated this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	18	a8bk	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	hearing by the word of Christ	The word **But** introduces a contrast. Here, **But** indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -1917,31 +1917,31 @@ ROM	10	18	g4vd	figs-personification	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξ
 ROM	10	18	e2nx	figs-idiom	τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης	1		The phrase **the ends of the world** is an idiom that refers to every place on the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	10	19	n3q8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλὰ	1		The word **But** introduces a contrast, Here, **But** indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said [verse 17](../10/17.md) and also agrees with the statement in the previous verse. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression that shows the agreement between this verse and the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Furthermore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	10	19	uu9g	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1		The pronoun **I** here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	10	19	imik	figs-quotemarks	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω&ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting himself and then the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	10	19	imik	figs-quotemarks	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω & ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting himself and then the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	10	19	ib4m	figs-rquestion	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?	1	Moreover, I say, “Did Israel not know?”	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Israel most surely knew!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	10	19	zyw0	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here Paul uses the word **Israel** to refer to the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	10	19	dkcp	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ&οὐκ	1		The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them canceling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	10	19	dkcp	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ & οὐκ	1		The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them canceling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	10	19	k4gk	writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Deuteronomy 32:21](../deu/32/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	19	jjt3	figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1		This phrase means that Moses wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	19	yt4r	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	First Moses says, “I will provoke you … I will stir you up to anger.”	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	19	qvfa	figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	First Moses says, “I will provoke you … I will stir you up to anger.”	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I myself will make you jealous and angry by using a non-nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ROM	10	19	u7p4	writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς,&παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		In this sentence the pronoun **I** here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, myself will provoke you to jealousy … I will provoke you to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	10	19	u7p4	writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		In this sentence the pronoun **I** here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, myself will provoke you to jealousy … I will provoke you to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	19	fklp	figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς	1		God uses the word **myself** to emphasize who is provoking Israel to be jealous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am indeed the one who will provoke you to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-ROM	10	19	vxzz	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς&παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		In this verse **you** refers to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I myself will provoke you Israelites to jealousy … I will provoke you Israelites to anger.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	10	19	o0gr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς&παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **jealousy** and **anger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I myself will cause you to become jealous … I will cause you to become angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	10	19	vxzz	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		In this verse **you** refers to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I myself will provoke you Israelites to jealousy … I will provoke you Israelites to anger.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	19	o0gr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **jealousy** and **anger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I myself will cause you to become jealous … I will cause you to become angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	10	19	ve6t	figs-explicit	ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει	1	by what is not a nation	The phrase **a non-nation** refers to a group of people with whom God did not previously have a relationship. The meaning of **non-nation** is similar to “not my people” used in [9:25–26](../09/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by those people who did not belong to me” or “by those people whom I did not consider to be a nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	19	s3nz	figs-explicit	ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ	1	By means of a nation without understanding	Here, **senseless** means that these people do not know God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	20	mrwz	writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Then Isaiah was very bold when he says	Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:1](../isa/65/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	20	kig6	figs-pastforfuture	ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **is** and **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “was very bold, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-ROM	10	20	cv1x	figs-explicit	Ἠσαΐας&ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Then Isaiah was very bold when he says	This phrase means that **Isaiah** wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	10	20	cv1x	figs-explicit	Ἠσαΐας & ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Then Isaiah was very bold when he says	This phrase means that **Isaiah** wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	20	pp4f	figs-quotemarks	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting [Isaiah 65:1](../isa/65/01.md) from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	10	20	yoxf	writing-pronouns	εὑρέθην&ἐμὲ&ἐμφανὴς&ἐμὲ	1		In this verse the pronoun **I** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, was found … me; I, God, appeared … for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	10	20	yoxf	writing-pronouns	εὑρέθην & ἐμὲ & ἐμφανὴς & ἐμὲ	1		In this verse the pronoun **I** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, was found … me; I, God, appeared … for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	10	20	wona	figs-parallelism	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1		These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I was revealed to those people who did not even want to know me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ROM	10	20	fc4b	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρέθην&ἐμφανὴς	1	I was found by those who did not seek me	Paul quotes God using the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will be found … I will appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+ROM	10	20	fc4b	figs-pastforfuture	εὑρέθην & ἐμφανὴς	1	I was found by those who did not seek me	Paul quotes God using the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will be found … I will appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	20	u60f	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those who were not seeking me found me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	10	20	t78j	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1	I appeared	These two clauses refer to non-Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the non-Jews, who were not seeking me; I appeared to the non-Jews, who were not asking for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	10	21	pziq	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		The word **But** introduces a contrast. Here, **But** indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that makes this contrast clearer. Alternate translation: “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	10	21	afo5	writing-quotations	πρὸς&τὸν Ἰσραὴλ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:2](../isa/65/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “to Israel God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+ROM	10	21	afo5	writing-quotations	πρὸς & τὸν Ἰσραὴλ λέγει	1		Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:2](../isa/65/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “to Israel God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	10	21	ksjg	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1		See how you translated **Israel** in [verse 19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	10	21	tp8d	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	10	21	gtwp	figs-quotemarks	ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν, ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1		In these two sentences Paul is quoting [Isaiah 65:2](../isa/65/02.md) from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -1955,7 +1955,7 @@ ROM	11	1	p4zd	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸ
 ROM	11	1	b8tg	figs-explicit	τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1	did God reject his people?	Here, **his people** refers to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	1	wqu2	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be	See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	11	1	mls4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	May it never be	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** introduces the reason why what Paul said earlier in the verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	1	ra9c	figs-rpronouns	καὶ&ἐγὼ&εἰμί	1	May it never be	Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize that he is proof that God has not rejected the Israelites. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I, indeed, also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+ROM	11	1	ra9c	figs-rpronouns	καὶ & ἐγὼ & εἰμί	1	May it never be	Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize that he is proof that God has not rejected the Israelites. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I, indeed, also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	11	1	ewxc	figs-metaphor	σπέρματος	1	May it never be	Here, **seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated seed in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	2	wzs6	figs-explicit	τὸν λαὸν αὐτο	1	whom he foreknew	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	2	h4qe	figs-distinguish	ὃν προέγνω	1	whom he foreknew	This phrase gives further information about God’s **people**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the people whom he foreknew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@@ -1963,35 +1963,35 @@ ROM	11	2	k2al	figs-explicit	προέγνω	1	whom he foreknew	See how you transl
 ROM	11	2	cjp6	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	Do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleaded with God against Israel?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	2	q3lx	writing-quotations	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	they have killed	This sentence indicates that what follows in the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([1 Kings 19:10](../1ki/19/10.md), [14](../1ki/19/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel? He says in the scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	11	2	dd1e	figs-personification	τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1	what the scripture says	See how you translated **the scripture says** in [10:11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	11	2	z5lk	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει&ἐντυγχάνει	1	what the scripture says	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **says** and **pleads** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … he pleaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+ROM	11	2	z5lk	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & ἐντυγχάνει	1	what the scripture says	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **says** and **pleads** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … he pleaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	11	2	ki3n	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1		See how you translated **Israel** in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	3	rnut	figs-quotemarks		0	they have killed	This sentence is a quotation from [1 Kings 19:10](../1ki/19/10.md), [14](../1ki/19/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	11	3	fh9i	writing-pronouns	ἀπέκτειναν&κατέσκαψαν&ζητοῦσιν	1	they have killed	In this verse **they** refers to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel killed … they tore down … those people of Israel seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	11	3	fd5k	writing-pronouns	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος&μου	1	they have killed	In this verse **I** and **my** refer to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and only I, Elijah, was left behind … my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	3	fh9i	writing-pronouns	ἀπέκτειναν & κατέσκαψαν & ζητοῦσιν	1	they have killed	In this verse **they** refers to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel killed … they tore down … those people of Israel seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	3	fd5k	writing-pronouns	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος & μου	1	they have killed	In this verse **I** and **my** refer to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and only I, Elijah, was left behind … my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	3	ut1s	figs-activepassive	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	I alone am left	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I alone am remaining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	3	dhg7	figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	I alone am left	Here, **left behind** means that Elijah thought he remained alive and all the other **prophets** had been killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I alone remained alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	3	dv5u		ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου	1	seeking my life	The phrase **seek my life** refers to people trying to kill Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they want to kill me”
 ROM	11	4	rj4e	figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to get his audience to pay attention to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But pay attention to what the divine response says to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	4	ougb	writing-quotations	τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Here Paul uses this question to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 65:1](../isa/65/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does the divine response say to him in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	11	4	w8cl	figs-metonymy	τί λέγει&ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Paul speaks of **the divine response** as if it were a person who would **say** something. Paul is referring to God responding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what does God say in response” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	11	4	w8cl	figs-metonymy	τί λέγει & ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Paul speaks of **the divine response** as if it were a person who would **say** something. Paul is referring to God responding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what does God say in response” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	4	rvmy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	But what does God’s answer say to him?	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did … say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 ROM	11	4	x6e9	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	him	Here, **him** refers to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	4	w03b	translate-symaction	οὐκ ἔκαμψαν γόνυ τῇ Βάαλ	1	him	This action was an expression of worship in this culture. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have not worshiped Baal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 ROM	11	5	ce2r	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως οὖν	1		The word **then** indicates that what follows is a result. Here, **then** introduces the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated about Elijah in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, in the same way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	5	l6yu	figs-abstractnouns	λῖμμα&ἐκλογὴν χάριτος	1		See how you translated **remnant** in [9:27](../09/27.md), **election** in [9:11](../09/11.md), and **grace** in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	5	l6yu	figs-abstractnouns	λῖμμα & ἐκλογὴν χάριτος	1		See how you translated **remnant** in [9:27](../09/27.md), **election** in [9:11](../09/11.md), and **grace** in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	5	whv0	figs-possession	ἐκλογὴν χάριτος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **election** that is characterized by **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gracious election” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	11	6	qkgx	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	11	6	q6es	figs-ellipsis	χάριτι	1	But if it is by grace	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “election is by grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	11	6	b4tx	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι&ἔργων&χάρις&χάρις	1		See how you translated **grace** in [4:16](../04/16.md) and **works** in [9:12](../09/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	6	b4tx	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι & ἔργων & χάρις & χάρις	1		See how you translated **grace** in [4:16](../04/16.md) and **works** in [9:12](../09/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	6	rm7g	writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι	1		Here, **it** refers to “the election of grace” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the election of grace is no longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	6	a9l4	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι	1		Here, **no longer** indicates the logical conclusion of the preceding clause. It does not imply that election used to be **by works**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is logically not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	7	cksi	grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	What then?	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [9:30](../09/30.md)–[11:6](../11/06.md). If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	7	c69z	figs-ellipsis	τί οὖν	1	What then?	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “What should we conclude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	11	7	k94b	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν?	1	What then?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is what we should conclude:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	11	7	crpn	figs-explicit	ὃ&τοῦτο	1		**The thing** and **this** here refer to righteousness, as indicated in [9:30–31](../09/30.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The righteousness … this righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	11	7	crpn	figs-explicit	ὃ & τοῦτο	1		**The thing** and **this** here refer to righteousness, as indicated in [9:30–31](../09/30.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The righteousness … this righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	7	ctkj	figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1		See how you translated this name in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	11	7	xbkh	writing-pronouns	ἐπέτυχεν&οἱ&λοιποὶ	1		Here, **it** and **them** refer to the people of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel … the rest of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	11	7	rzet	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&ἐκλογὴ&οἱ&λοιποὶ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **elect** and **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who have been elected … the ones of them who remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	7	xbkh	writing-pronouns	ἐπέτυχεν & οἱ & λοιποὶ	1		Here, **it** and **them** refer to the people of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel … the rest of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	7	rzet	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ἐκλογὴ & οἱ & λοιποὶ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **elect** and **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who have been elected … the ones of them who remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	7	jib7	figs-activepassive	ἐπωρώθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The next verse indicates that God is the one who did the action. Alternate translation: “God hardened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	7	bp19	figs-metaphor	ἐπωρώθησαν	1		Here, **hardened** refers to being made stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were made stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	8	cv7s	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -2014,20 +2014,20 @@ ROM	11	10	j9ag	figs-activepassive	σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμ
 ROM	11	10	biqg	figs-metaphor	τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον	1		This clause refers to making people suffer like how slaves suffer by carrying heavy burdens on **their backs**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “make them suffer continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	10	p4s5	figs-quotemarks	παντὸς	1		The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 69:22–23](../psa/069/022.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	11	11	z8tw	grammar-connect-logic-result	λέγω οὖν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../11/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	11	dysl	writing-pronouns	μὴ ἔπταισαν&πέσωσιν&αὐτῶν&αὐτούς	1		In this verse the pronouns **they**, **their**, and **them** refer to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish people did not stumble … they might fall, did they … the Jewish people’s … the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	11	dysl	writing-pronouns	μὴ ἔπταισαν & πέσωσιν & αὐτῶν & αὐτούς	1		In this verse the pronouns **they**, **their**, and **them** refer to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish people did not stumble … they might fall, did they … the Jewish people’s … the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	11	r9hg	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν?	1	Did they stumble so as to fall?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely they did not stumble so that they might fall!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	11	y9x7	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἔπταισαν	1	Did they stumble so as to fall?	See how you translated “stumbled” in [9:32](../09/32.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	11	ai6y	figs-metaphor	πέσωσιν	1		Here, **fall** refers to being completely rejected by God forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might be eternally rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	11	qbx4	figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	May it never be	See how you translated this expression in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-ROM	11	11	a4kf	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ αὐτῶν παραπτώματι, ἡ σωτηρία&τὸ παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς	1		See how you translated **transgression** in [4:15](../04/15.md), **salvation** in [1:16](../01/16.md), and **jealousy** in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	11	a4kf	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ αὐτῶν παραπτώματι, ἡ σωτηρία & τὸ παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς	1		See how you translated **transgression** in [4:15](../04/15.md), **salvation** in [1:16](../01/16.md), and **jealousy** in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	11	f1jw		παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς	1	provoke … to jealousy	See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:19](../10/19.md).
-ROM	11	12	ew4i	figs-doublet	εἰ&τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1		Both of these clauses mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “if their transgression certainly resulted in wealth for the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ROM	11	12	ew4i	figs-doublet	εἰ & τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1		Both of these clauses mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “if their transgression certainly resulted in wealth for the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	11	12	v024	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	11	12	zibw	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν	1	if their failure is the riches of the world, and if their loss is the riches of the Gentiles	See how you translated **transgression** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	12	rnsk	figs-possession	πλοῦτος κόσμου	1	if their failure is the riches of the world, and if their loss is the riches of the Gentiles	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **wealth** that is for **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun “truth.” Alternate translation: “is wealth for the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	11	12	it9k	figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	the world	Here, **world** refers to the people living in the world, especially the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	11	12	hqch	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν&τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν	1	if their failure is the riches of the world, and if their loss is the riches of the Gentiles	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **loss** and **fullness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what they lost … how full they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	11	12	fxoo	figs-metaphor	τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν&τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν	1	the riches of the world	Here, **loss** refers to Israel’s failure to make themselves righteous, and **fullness** refers to the complete number of Israelites who will become righteous by trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their failure … their full number of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	11	12	hqch	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν & τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν	1	if their failure is the riches of the world, and if their loss is the riches of the Gentiles	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **loss** and **fullness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what they lost … how full they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	12	fxoo	figs-metaphor	τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν & τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν	1	the riches of the world	Here, **loss** refers to Israel’s failure to make themselves righteous, and **fullness** refers to the complete number of Israelites who will become righteous by trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their failure … their full number of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	12	dh1g	figs-possession	πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1	the riches of the world	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **wealth** that is for **the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “is wealth for the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	11	12	hsbv	figs-rquestion	πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν?	1	the riches of the world	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so much more will be their fullness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	12	b9fi	figs-explicit	πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν?	1	the riches of the world	Paul implies that there will be much more **wealth** when the full amount of Israelites believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in how much more wealth will their fullness result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2035,12 +2035,12 @@ ROM	11	13	r0jt	figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1		Here, **you** is plural and refers
 ROM	11	13	z6p4	figs-rpronouns	εἰμι ἐγὼ	1		Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize that he was **apostle to the Gentiles**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am the one who is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	11	13	ngfl	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν διακονίαν μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ministry**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how I minister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	14	ua2k	figs-abstractnouns	παραζηλώσω	1	I will provoke to jealousy	See how you translated this phrase in [10:19](../10/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	11	14	h1qe	figs-explicit	μου τὴν σάρκα&αὐτῶν	1	those who are of my own flesh	These phrases refer to Paul’s Jewish kinsmen who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jews, who are of my own flesh … my fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	11	14	h1qe	figs-explicit	μου τὴν σάρκα & αὐτῶν	1	those who are of my own flesh	These phrases refer to Paul’s Jewish kinsmen who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jews, who are of my own flesh … my fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	14	oxqg	figs-idiom	μου τὴν σάρκα	1	those who are of my own flesh	See how you translated **flesh** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	11	15	q99e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For if their rejection means the reconciliation of the world	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	11	15	es22	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	For if their rejection means the reconciliation of the world	See how you translated **if** in [verse 12](../11/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	11	15	ui3i	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν&ἡ πρόσλημψις	1	their rejection	In this verse **their** refers to Jews who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews’ … the Jewish people’s acceptance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	11	15	sy8u	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν&ἡ πρόσλημψις&ζωὴ	1	their rejection	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **rejection**, **acceptance**, and **life**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “them rejecting … them being accepted … to become alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	15	ui3i	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & ἡ πρόσλημψις	1	their rejection	In this verse **their** refers to Jews who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews’ … the Jewish people’s acceptance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	15	sy8u	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν & ἡ πρόσλημψις & ζωὴ	1	their rejection	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **rejection**, **acceptance**, and **life**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “them rejecting … them being accepted … to become alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	15	teab	grammar-connect-logic-result	καταλλαγὴ κόσμου	1	their rejection	Here, **is** indicates that the phrase that follows is the result of **their rejection**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “led to reconciliation of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	15	sdhl	figs-abstractnouns	καταλλαγὴ	1	their rejection	See how you translated **reconciliation** in [5:11](../05/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	15	m3fs	figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	the world	See how you translated **world** in [verse 12](../11/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2048,32 +2048,32 @@ ROM	11	15	em8m	figs-rquestion	τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζω
 ROM	11	15	ic9z	grammar-connect-logic-result	τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις	1		Here, **is** indicates that the phrase that follows is the result of **their acceptance**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “what would their acceptance lead to if not life from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	15	po4h	figs-metaphor	ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	the world	This phrase could refer to: (1) the final resurrection of all Christians that will take place after the whole Jewish remnant has believed in Jesus. Elsewhere in this letter, Paul uses a similar phrase to refer to Jesus’ resurrection. Alternate translation: “bringing the dead back to life” (2) the Jewish remnant changing from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive. Alternate translation: “eternally alive from being eternally dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	15	jn4l	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	the dead	See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	11	16	ao3u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&εἰ	1		See how you translated **if** in [verse 12](../11/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	11	16	bi5b	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸ φύραμα&καὶ οἱ κλάδοι	1		In these clauses Paul implies that **the lump of dough** and **the branches** are **also** holy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lump of dough is also holy … the branches are also holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	11	16	b2s5	figs-metaphor	εἰ&ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα;	1	If the firstfruits are reserved, so is the lump of dough	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the **firstfruits** to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men as if they were a **lump of dough** that was made from the grain as the **firstfruits**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the first of what has been offered to God, all of his descendants should also be considered an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	11	16	ao3u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & εἰ	1		See how you translated **if** in [verse 12](../11/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ROM	11	16	bi5b	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸ φύραμα & καὶ οἱ κλάδοι	1		In these clauses Paul implies that **the lump of dough** and **the branches** are **also** holy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lump of dough is also holy … the branches are also holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	11	16	b2s5	figs-metaphor	εἰ & ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα;	1	If the firstfruits are reserved, so is the lump of dough	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the **firstfruits** to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men as if they were a **lump of dough** that was made from the grain as the **firstfruits**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the first of what has been offered to God, all of his descendants should also be considered an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	16	dci1	figs-metaphor	εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι	1	If the root is reserved, so are the branches	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the **root** of a tree. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men as if they were **the branches** of that same tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the root of a tree, all of his descendants should also be considered branches of that tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	17	qkc0	figs-infostructure	εἰ	1	If the root is reserved, so are the branches	Here, **if** indicates that this verse and the next verse are one conditional sentence. You may need to adjust the words to divide these verses into separate sentences. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	11	17	imrh	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	If the root is reserved, so are the branches	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-ROM	11	17	slf6	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ&τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν, σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ συνκοινωνὸς τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου	1	But if some of the branches were broken off	Paul continues using the metaphor of a **tree** to speak about how God rejected unbelieving Jews and accepted non-Jews to be part of his people instead. The **olive tree** represents God’s people. The **branches** that **were broken off** represent Jews who don’t believe in Jesus. The **wild olive branch** represents non-Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The **richness** represents the blessings God gives his people. The **root** represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (as in the previous verse) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “if some of the Jews were rejected, like branches are broken off of a tree, and you, being foreigners were joined to God’s people as wild olive branches are grafted onto a tree, and you received the blessings of the first Israelites as part of God’s people, as branches receive the nutrients of the root of the olive tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-ROM	11	17	b8ic	figs-activepassive	τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν&ἐνεκεντρίσθης&συνκοινωνὸς&ἐγένου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context of chapters 9–11 indicates that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God broke off some of the branches … God grafted … God made to be partakers with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	11	17	slf6	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ & τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν, σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ συνκοινωνὸς τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου	1	But if some of the branches were broken off	Paul continues using the metaphor of a **tree** to speak about how God rejected unbelieving Jews and accepted non-Jews to be part of his people instead. The **olive tree** represents God’s people. The **branches** that **were broken off** represent Jews who don’t believe in Jesus. The **wild olive branch** represents non-Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The **richness** represents the blessings God gives his people. The **root** represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (as in the previous verse) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “if some of the Jews were rejected, like branches are broken off of a tree, and you, being foreigners were joined to God’s people as wild olive branches are grafted onto a tree, and you received the blessings of the first Israelites as part of God’s people, as branches receive the nutrients of the root of the olive tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+ROM	11	17	b8ic	figs-activepassive	τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν & ἐνεκεντρίσθης & συνκοινωνὸς & ἐγένου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context of chapters 9–11 indicates that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God broke off some of the branches … God grafted … God made to be partakers with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	17	qv65	figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	if you, a wild olive branch	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, non-Jewish Christians, **you** is singular throughout this verse. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
-ROM	11	17	z6hr	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς&συνκοινωνὸς	1	were grafted in among them	In this verse **them** refers to the Jewish people who believe in Jesus. It does not refer to the **branches** that **were broken off**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believing Jewish people … partakers with those Jews who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	17	z6hr	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & συνκοινωνὸς	1	were grafted in among them	In this verse **them** refers to the Jewish people who believe in Jesus. It does not refer to the **branches** that **were broken off**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believing Jewish people … partakers with those Jews who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	18	d81u	figs-infostructure	μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων	1	were grafted in among them	This is the end of a factual conditional sentence that began in the previous verse. You may need to adjust the words if you make this clause into a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Since this is true, do not boast over the branches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	11	18	gqd6	figs-exmetaphor	μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων. εἰ δὲ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ	1	do not boast over the branches	Paul continues using the metaphor of a tree from the previous two verses. Here, **branches** represents those Jews whom God rejected because they did not believe in Jesus. The **root** represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (like in [verse 16](../11/16.md)) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do not boast over the unbelieving Jews whom God rejected, like branches were broken off of a tree. But if you boast, you yourself do not sustain Gods people, like branches cannot sustain the root, but the first Israelites sustain you, like the root sustains the branches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-ROM	11	18	kd87	figs-youcrowd	κατακαυχᾶσαι&σὺ&βαστάζεις&σέ	1	do not boast over the branches	See how you translated **you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	11	18	kd87	figs-youcrowd	κατακαυχᾶσαι & σὺ & βαστάζεις & σέ	1	do not boast over the branches	See how you translated **you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	11	18	llz1	figs-explicit	οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ	1	it is not you who supports the root, but the root that supports you	Paul implies that Gentile believers who **boast** should remember that they are supported by the **root** of the faith of Abraham and the first Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “remember that you yourself do not support the root, but the root supports you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	19	w28y	figs-youcrowd	ἐρεῖς	1	Branches were broken off	See how you translated **you** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	11	19	uqji	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Branches were broken off	Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “in response to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	19	d21e	figs-quotemarks	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι, ἵνα ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	Branches were broken off	In this sentence Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Jewish Christian arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	11	19	mm6w	figs-exmetaphor	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι&ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	Branches were broken off	See how you translated **branches**, **broken off**, and **grafted in** in [verse 17](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-ROM	11	19	qk8c	figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι&ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 17](../11/17.md). Alternate translation: “God broke branches off … God might graft me in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	11	19	mm6w	figs-exmetaphor	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι & ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	Branches were broken off	See how you translated **branches**, **broken off**, and **grafted in** in [verse 17](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+ROM	11	19	qk8c	figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι & ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 17](../11/17.md). Alternate translation: “God broke branches off … God might graft me in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	19	p9ti	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	I might be grafted in	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	11	20	r80y	figs-explicit	καλῶς	1	their … they	This sentence introduces Paul’s response to the statement in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying that what you said is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	20	puj9	writing-pronouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	their … they	**They** and **their** in this verse refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The unbelieving Jews were broken off in unbelief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	20	lce6	figs-exmetaphor	ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	their … they	See how you translated **were broken off** in [verse 17](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 ROM	11	20	cvr0	grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	their … they	This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving Jews **were broken off**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to unbelief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	20	pw92	figs-youcrowd	σὺ&ἕστηκας&	1	their … they	See how you translated **you** in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
-ROM	11	20	v2ua	figs-metaphor	σὺ&ἕστηκας	1	but you stand firm because of your faith	Paul speaks of Gentile believers remaining part of God’s people as if they were standing **firm**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you yourself remain among God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	11	20	pw92	figs-youcrowd	σὺ & ἕστηκας & 	1	their … they	See how you translated **you** in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	11	20	v2ua	figs-metaphor	σὺ & ἕστηκας	1	but you stand firm because of your faith	Paul speaks of Gentile believers remaining part of God’s people as if they were standing **firm**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you yourself remain among God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	20	xtnu	figs-explicit	τῇ πίστει	1	but you stand firm because of your faith	The phrase **in faith** could indicate: (1) the means by which Gentile believers should **stand firm**. Alternate translation: “by means of faith” (2) the reason why Gentile believers should **stand firm**. Alternate translation: “because of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	20	qlmq	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1		See how you translated **faith** in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	20	rx22	figs-explicit	ὑψηλὰ	1		Here, **arrogant things** refers to the **arrogant** thoughts that a Gentile Christian might have against the Jews. Specifically, they might think that they are better than Jews who are not Christian, as indicated by the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “arrogantly against unbelieving Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2085,34 +2085,34 @@ ROM	11	21	ywgs	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται	1	For if God di
 ROM	11	21	m59a	figs-youcrowd	σοῦ	1	For if God did not spare the natural branches, neither will he spare you	See how you translated **you** in [verses 17–20](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	11	22	bfsu	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1	For if God did not spare the natural branches, neither will he spare you	Paul uses the term **See** to focus his audiences’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	22	i0r3	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	For if God did not spare the natural branches, neither will he spare you	Here, **then** indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the [verses 17–21](../11/17.md). Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	22	xdm3	figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα&ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ&ἀποτομία&χρηστότης Θεοῦ&τῇ χρηστότητι	1	the kind actions and the severity of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **kindness** and **severity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the kind character … the severe character of God … his severe character … the kind character of God … his kind character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	22	xdm3	figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα & ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ & ἀποτομία & χρηστότης Θεοῦ & τῇ χρηστότητι	1	the kind actions and the severity of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **kindness** and **severity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the kind character … the severe character of God … his severe character … the kind character of God … his kind character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	22	i3ok	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία	1	the kind actions and the severity of God	Here Paul speaks of God’s **severity** as if it were an object that could be **on** someone. He means that God punishes them severely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he severely punishes those who fell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	22	scf8	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πεσόντας	1	those who fell	Paul refers to the Jews who failed to trust God as if they were people who **fell**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those Jews who failed to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	22	fy84	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ	1	those who fell	Here Paul speaks of God’s **kindness** as if it were an object that could be **on** someone. He means that God acts kindly toward those who trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is kind to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	11	22	i4ue	figs-youcrowd	σὲ&ἐπιμένῃς&σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	those who fell	See how you translated **you** in [verses 17–21](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	11	22	i4ue	figs-youcrowd	σὲ & ἐπιμένῃς & σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	those who fell	See how you translated **you** in [verses 17–21](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	11	22	rw2i	figs-metaphor	ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι	1	those who fell	Here Paul speaks of God’s **kindness** as if it were a place in which someone could **continue** staying. He means that his readers should continue trusting in God’s kindness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you continue trusting in his kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	22	t4mk	figs-metaphor	καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	Otherwise you also will be cut off	Here Paul refers to his Gentile Christian audience as if they were branches that God could **cut off**. He means that God would reject them if they do not remain faithful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “you yourself also will be rejected” or “you yourself also will be rejected like a branch that is cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	22	l17i	figs-activepassive	καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will cut off you yourself also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	11	23	osvn	writing-pronouns	κἀκεῖνοι&μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ&αὐτούς	1		In this verse **those**, **they**, **their**, and **them** refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus at first but become believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jewish people … those Jews do not continue in their unbelief … those Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	23	osvn	writing-pronouns	κἀκεῖνοι & μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & αὐτούς	1		In this verse **those**, **they**, **their**, and **them** refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus at first but become believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jewish people … those Jews do not continue in their unbelief … those Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	23	k0i0	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1		See how you translated **continue in** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	23	lvk7	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	if they do not continue in their unbelief	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if they start believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	11	23	e68i	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	if they do not continue in their unbelief	See how you translated **unbelief** in [4:20](../04/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	11	23	zu7k	figs-metaphor	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται&ἐνκεντρίσαι αὐτούς	1	will be grafted in	Paul speaks of the Jews becoming part of God’s people as if they were branches that could be **grafted in** to a tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be joined to God’s people … to join them to his people” or “will be joined to God’s people, like a branch is grafted into a tree … to join them to his people, like a farmer grafts a branch into a tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	11	23	zu7k	figs-metaphor	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται & ἐνκεντρίσαι αὐτούς	1	will be grafted in	Paul speaks of the Jews becoming part of God’s people as if they were branches that could be **grafted in** to a tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be joined to God’s people … to join them to his people” or “will be joined to God’s people, like a branch is grafted into a tree … to join them to his people, like a farmer grafts a branch into a tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	23	lx11	figs-activepassive	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will graft in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	23	yxtp	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	24	onko	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	11	24	q1vp	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		See how you translated **if** in [verse 12](../11/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	11	24	s1a4	figs-exmetaphor	σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ	1	For if you were cut out of what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature were grafted into a good olive tree, how much more will these Jews, who are the natural branches, be grafted back into their own olive tree?	Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a **tree**, as he did in [verses 17–22](../11/17.md). Here, **a wild olive tree** represents all non-Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus, **cut off** represents being separated from unbelieving non-Jewish people, and **good olive tree** and **their own olive tree** represents God’s people. See how you translated **grafted into** in [verse 17](../11/17.md). Alternate translation: “you were separated from the nations, as a branch is cut off from what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature were joined to God’s people, as a branch is grafted into a good olive tree, how much more will these, who are according to nature like olive branches, be joined to their own people, like a branch is grafted back into its own olive tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 ROM	11	24	hl07	figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1		See how **you** translated you in [verses 17–22](../11/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
-ROM	11	24	dem3	figs-activepassive	σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου&ἐνεκεντρίσθης&οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God cut you off from what is by nature a wild olive tree … God grafted … will God graft these, who are according to nature, back into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	11	24	dem3	figs-activepassive	σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου & ἐνεκεντρίσθης & οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God cut you off from what is by nature a wild olive tree … God grafted … will God graft these, who are according to nature, back into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	24	ko5o	figs-rquestion	πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so much more will these, who are according to nature, be grafted back into their own olive tree!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ROM	11	24	ncwk	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι&τῇ ἰδίᾳ	1		Here, **they** and **their** refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews’ own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	24	ncwk	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι & τῇ ἰδίᾳ	1		Here, **they** and **their** refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews’ own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	24	yn21	figs-distinguish	οἱ κατὰ φύσιν	1		This phrase gives further information about the Jewish people whom God will rejoin to his people. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “they who are the people who are according to nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	11	25	jb0b	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what Paul says in [verses 25–32](../11/25.md) is the reason why he said what he did in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am telling you these things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	25	ye5w	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ&θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	I do not want you to be uninformed	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	11	25	q3i2	writing-pronouns	οὐ&θέλω	1	I	The pronoun **I** here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, do not want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	11	25	ykop	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς&μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι	1	I	Here, **you** and **yourselves** are plural and could refer to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses [verses 17–24](../11/17.md). Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ … you non-Jews might be wise not in yourselves” (2) all the unbelievers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “you believers in Jesus … you believers might not be wise in yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	11	25	evc9	figs-infostructure	οὐ&θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, ἀδελφοί, τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο, ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι, ὅτι πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν	1	I	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “in order that you, brothers, might not be wise in yourselves, I do not want you to be ignorant of this mystery, that a partial hardening has occurred in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM	11	25	ye5w	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	I do not want you to be uninformed	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	11	25	q3i2	writing-pronouns	οὐ & θέλω	1	I	The pronoun **I** here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, do not want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	25	ykop	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι	1	I	Here, **you** and **yourselves** are plural and could refer to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses [verses 17–24](../11/17.md). Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ … you non-Jews might be wise not in yourselves” (2) all the unbelievers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “you believers in Jesus … you believers might not be wise in yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ROM	11	25	evc9	figs-infostructure	οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, ἀδελφοί, τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο, ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι, ὅτι πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν	1	I	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “in order that you, brothers, might not be wise in yourselves, I do not want you to be ignorant of this mystery, that a partial hardening has occurred in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	11	25	aj7j	translate-unknown	τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο	1	I	Here Paul uses the word **mystery** to refer to God saving a remnant of Jews after he saves a certain amount of Gentiles. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use **mystery** to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ROM	11	25	w7lx	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Paul could be referring to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses [verses 17–24](../11/17.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow non-Jewish believers in Christ” (2) all the believers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	11	25	me1g	figs-idiom	μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι	1	in order that you will not be wise in your own thinking	Here, **wise in yourselves** refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is wiser than he really is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might not arrogantly think that you are wiser than you really are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2130,16 +2130,16 @@ ROM	11	26	dm4e	figs-metonymy	Σιὼν	1		See how you translated **Zion** in [9:
 ROM	11	26	at55	figs-metaphor	ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας	1	He will remove ungodliness	Paul quotes Isaiah speaking of **ungodly things** as if they were an object that someone could **turn away**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He will cause ungodly activity to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	26	bkr2	figs-metonymy	Ἰακώβ	1	from Jacob	Here, **Jacob** refers to the descendants of Jacob, who are also called Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	27	cie8	figs-quotemarks		0	from Jacob	This verse is a quotation of [Isaiah 59:20–21](../isa/59/20.md) and [27:9](../isa/27/09.md) in which God is speaking. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	11	27	q7e3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς&παρ’ ἐμοῦ&ἀφέλωμαι&αὐτῶν	1	from Jacob	The pronouns **I** and **me** here refer to God, and **them** and **their** refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the people of Israel … with me, God, … I take away Israel’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	27	q7e3	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & παρ’ ἐμοῦ & ἀφέλωμαι & αὐτῶν	1	from Jacob	The pronouns **I** and **me** here refer to God, and **them** and **their** refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the people of Israel … with me, God, … I take away Israel’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	27	ll39	figs-metaphor	ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	I will take away their sins	Paul quotes God speaking of **sins** as if they were objects that someone could **take away**. He means that people are forgiven for the **sins** they have done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will remove the guilt of their sins” or “I will forgive them for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	11	28	ctn9	figs-explicit	κατὰ&τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	As far as the gospel is concerned	Here Paul implies the Jewish people rejecting the **gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to the Jews rejecting the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	11	28	girf	writing-pronouns	ἐχθροὶ&ὑμᾶς&ἀγαπητοὶ&τοὺς πατέρας	1	As far as the gospel is concerned	The pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the people of Israel, and **your** refers to Gentile Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel are enemies … you non-Jews' … the people of Israel are beloved … their forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	28	ctn9	figs-explicit	κατὰ & τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	As far as the gospel is concerned	Here Paul implies the Jewish people rejecting the **gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to the Jews rejecting the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	11	28	girf	writing-pronouns	ἐχθροὶ & ὑμᾶς & ἀγαπητοὶ & τοὺς πατέρας	1	As far as the gospel is concerned	The pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the people of Israel, and **your** refers to Gentile Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel are enemies … you non-Jews' … the people of Israel are beloved … their forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	28	x6aa	figs-explicit	ἐχθροὶ	1	they are enemies for your sake	Paul implies that the Jewish people are **enemies** of God because they rejected the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	11	28	dr2q	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ&τὴν ἐκλογὴν	2	as far as election is concerned	See how you translated this phrase in [9:11](../09/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	28	dr2q	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ & τὴν ἐκλογὴν	2	as far as election is concerned	See how you translated this phrase in [9:11](../09/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	28	d82k	figs-activepassive	ἀγαπητοὶ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God loves them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	28	jas2	figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς πατέρας	1	they are beloved because of their forefathers	Here, **for the sake of their forefathers** refers to the promises that God made to **their forefathers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	29	nr47	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	11	29	p2sf	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ χαρίσματα&ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For the gifts and the call of God are unchangeable	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **gifts** and **calling**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously given … what has been called by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	29	p2sf	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ χαρίσματα & ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For the gifts and the call of God are unchangeable	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **gifts** and **calling**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously given … what has been called by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	29	mnqs	figs-possession	ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, **the calling of God** refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fact that God called them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	11	30	gmrm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said about the Jews in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	11	30	bj8g	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε	1	you were formerly disobedient	Here, **you** and **yourselves** are plural and refer to non-Jewish Christians, as in verses [verses 17–24](../11/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ yourselves were formerly disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -2147,17 +2147,17 @@ ROM	11	30	df91	figs-activepassive	ἠλεήθητε	1	you have received mercy be
 ROM	11	30	zk91	figs-abstractnouns	ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ	1	you have received mercy because of their disobedience	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **mercy** and **disobedience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “were shown how merciful God is in how disobedient these were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	30	iufr	grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ	1	you have received mercy because of their disobedience	Here, **in** indicates that what follows is one reason why God showed **mercy** to non-Jewish people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the disobedience of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	30	g3cn	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1	you	Here, **these** refers to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of these Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	11	31	wmub	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι&αὐτοὶ	1	you	Here, **these** and **they** refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	11	31	wmub	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι & αὐτοὶ	1	you	Here, **these** and **they** refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	11	31	enhi	figs-infostructure	ἠπείθησαν τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	you	The phrase **in your mercy** could be connected to: (1) the verb translated as **were disobedient**, as in the ULT. (2) the verb translated as **be shown mercy**. Alternate translation: “were disobedient so that, in your mercy, they might also now be shown mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	11	31	mwhx	grammar-connect-logic-result	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει	1	you	Here, **in** could indicate that what follows: (1) is one reason for the Jews being **disobedient**. Alternate translation: “because of your mercy” (2) is one purpose for the Jews being **disobedient**. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of your mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	11	31	qh7s	figs-explicit	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει	1	you	Here, **your mercy** refers to the **mercy** that God has shown to non-Jewish people whom he saves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the mercy that God has shown you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	11	31	kzgo	figs-yousingular	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει	1	you	Here, **your** is plural and refers to non-Jewish believers in Jesus. See how you translated **you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-ROM	11	31	dtmn	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει&καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in God acting mercifully to you … God might also now act mercifully to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	31	dtmn	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει & καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in God acting mercifully to you … God might also now act mercifully to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	31	cfgv	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	you	The phrase **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose. Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is one purpose for the disobedience of the Jews. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	11	31	onqo	figs-activepassive	καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might also now show them mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	11	32	wxjl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	you	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows in this verse is the conclusion to what Paul said in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In conclusion,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	11	32	t6cb	figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν&ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν	1	God has shut up all into disobedience	Here Paul refers to people whom God allows to disobey him as if they were prisoners **shut up** in a prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has allowed all people to be disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	11	32	obi0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπείθειαν&ἐλεήσῃ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **mercy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how disobedient they are … he might show how merciful he is toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	11	32	t6cb	figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν & ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν	1	God has shut up all into disobedience	Here Paul refers to people whom God allows to disobey him as if they were prisoners **shut up** in a prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has allowed all people to be disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	11	32	obi0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπείθειαν & ἐλεήσῃ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **mercy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how disobedient they are … he might show how merciful he is toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	33	veuz	figs-exclamations	ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1		**Oh** is an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “How amazing is the depth of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 ROM	11	33	ldc5	figs-abstractnouns	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **depth**, **wealth**, **wisdom**, and **knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how deeply wealthy and wise and knowledgeable is God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	33	x3kb	figs-metaphor	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1	Oh, the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and the knowledge of God!	Here Paul refers to God’s **wealth**, **wisdom**, and **knowledge** as if they were like a deep place. He means that God’s **wealth**, **wisdom**, and **knowledge** are truly great. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2167,8 +2167,8 @@ ROM	11	33	qb5r	figs-metaphor	ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα α
 ROM	11	33	urwo	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ	1	How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgments**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is how he judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	11	33	m755	figs-metaphor	ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering	Here Paul speaks of God’s **ways** as if they were objects that people cannot discover. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s **ways**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his ways are incomprehensible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	11	34	w1ck	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:13](../isa/40/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ROM	11	34	uh2x	figs-quotemarks	τίς&ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 40:13](../isa/40/13.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	11	34	r2wj	figs-rquestion	τίς&ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	Paul quotes Isaiah using this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has known the mind of the Lord or become his advisor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ROM	11	34	uh2x	figs-quotemarks	τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 40:13](../isa/40/13.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ROM	11	34	r2wj	figs-rquestion	τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor?	Paul quotes Isaiah using this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has known the mind of the Lord or become his advisor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	11	34	yy52	figs-metonymy	νοῦν Κυρίου	1	the mind of the Lord	Here, **mind** refers to what a person knows and thinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	11	35	wonz	writing-quotations	ἢ	1	the mind of the Lord	The word **Or** introduces another item. Here, **Or** indicates that what follows is Paul’s paraphrase of a verse in an Old Testament book ([Job 41:11](../job/41/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or, as is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	11	35	dc62	figs-quotemarks	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1		This sentence is a paraphrase of part of [Job 41:11](../job/41/11.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -2184,16 +2184,16 @@ ROM	11	36	rpx6	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα	1	To him be the glory
 ROM	11	36	ut8l	figs-idiom	εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	To him be the glory forever	Here, **to the ages** is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	12	intro	aky9			0		# Romans 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br>    * Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of [verse 20](../12/20.md), which are from the Old Testament.<br><br>Many scholars believe Paul uses the word **therefore** in [Romans 12:1](../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1–11. After having carefully explained the Christian gospel in chapters 1–11, Paul explains in chapters 12–16 how Christians should live in response to these great truths. In these chapters, Paul gives many different commands that are practical instructions for how Christians should behave. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Body of Christ<br><br>The body of Christ is an important metaphor used in the New Testament to refer to the church. Every Christian plays a unique and important function within the people of God. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	1	wklb	writing-pronouns	παρακαλῶ	1		The pronoun **I** here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	12	1	fwds	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς&ὑμῶν&ὑμῶν	1		The pronouns **you** and **your** here and throughout most of this chapter are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers … your … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ROM	12	1	fwds	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν & ὑμῶν	1		The pronouns **you** and **your** here and throughout most of this chapter are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers … your … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	12	1	xgcr	grammar-connect-logic-result	παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς	1		The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Here, **therefore** indicates that what follows in the rest of this letter is what Paul wants his readers to do in response to what he has written in chapters 1–11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a fuller expression. Alternate translation: “Since everything I have said is true, I urge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	12	1	kr1a	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	I urge you therefore, brothers, by the mercies of God	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	12	1	d50i	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν&θυσίαν ζῶσαν&τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν	1	I urge you therefore, brothers, by the mercies of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **compassions**, **sacrifice**, and **service**, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people serve God. Alternate translation: “what is compassionate … a living one that is sacrificed … which is how you reasonably serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	1	d50i	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν & θυσίαν ζῶσαν & τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν	1	I urge you therefore, brothers, by the mercies of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **compassions**, **sacrifice**, and **service**, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people serve God. Alternate translation: “what is compassionate … a living one that is sacrificed … which is how you reasonably serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	1	wuyl	figs-metaphor	παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν	1		Here Paul refers to a believer in Christ who obeys God as if that person were one of the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God as a **sacrifice**, except that this **sacrifice** is still **living**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive, as if you were a living sacrifice on the temple altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	1	w1mz	figs-synecdoche	τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν	1	to present your bodies a living sacrifice	Here, **bodies** refers to whole people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your whole selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	12	2	pyb6	figs-activepassive	μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε&μεταμορφοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not conform yourselves … let God transform you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	12	2	pyb6	figs-activepassive	μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε & μεταμορφοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not conform yourselves … let God transform you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	12	2	clc6		μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε	1	Do not be conformed to this world	Alternate translation: “do not become alike”
 ROM	12	2	d2qq	figs-metonymy	τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1		Here, **this age** refers to the attitudes and actions of the unbelievers who live during this period of time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the way people think and act in this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	12	2	na8p	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός&τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	but be transformed by the renewal of your mind	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **renewal** and **will**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by renewing the mind … thing that God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	2	na8p	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός & τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	but be transformed by the renewal of your mind	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **renewal** and **will**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by renewing the mind … thing that God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	2	c6ch	figs-metaphor	τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός	1	but be transformed by the renewal of your mind	Here Paul speaks of changing the way a person thinks as if that person’s mind is being renewed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the changing of how one thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	2	w34l	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ δοκιμάζειν ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which someone should **be transformed**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that you can approve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	12	3	cp9g	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -2205,27 +2205,27 @@ ROM	12	3	me4t		φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν	1	Instead, they
 ROM	12	3	m8z7	figs-explicit	ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως	1	just as God has given out to each one a certain amount of faith	Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) different degrees of **faith** in God that God gives believers. Alternate translation: “as God has given each of you an degree of ability to trust in him” (2) the spiritual gifts that result from faith and are given to believers in different degrees. Alternate translation: “as God has given each of you a degree of faith demonstrated in spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	12	4	zm8p	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul’s readers should “think with a sound mind,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You must do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	12	4	v2pi	figs-simile	καθάπερ	1	we have many members in one body	Here, **just as** indicates that what follows in this verse is a simile. Paul uses this simile to compare all believers in Christ to the parts of a human body. Since Paul explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to express the meaning plainly here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-ROM	12	4	v5iy		μέλη&μέλη	1	members	See how you translated members in [6:13](../06/13.md).
+ROM	12	4	v5iy		μέλη & μέλη	1	members	See how you translated members in [6:13](../06/13.md).
 ROM	12	4	v8bo	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχει πρᾶξιν	1	members	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **function**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “function for the same purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	5	sd03	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	are individually members of each other	Here, **we** refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	12	5	v93h	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	are individually members of each other	See how you translated the similar phrase in [6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	5	dhx8	figs-metaphor	τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη	1	are individually members of each other	Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human **body** are joined. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “and the individual believers are united to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	5	cutl		μέλη	1		See how you translated **members** in the previous verse.
-ROM	12	6	j3x5	figs-exclusive	ἔχοντες&ἡμῖν	1	We have different gifts according to the grace that was given to us	Here, **we** and **us** refer to all Christians, so they are inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	12	6	hrr1	figs-metaphor	ἔχοντες&χαρίσματα&διάφορα	1	We have different gifts according to the grace that was given to us	Paul speaks of the different abilities to serve other believers that God gives believers as being **gracious gifts** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have different spiritual abilities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	12	6	j3x5	figs-exclusive	ἔχοντες & ἡμῖν	1	We have different gifts according to the grace that was given to us	Here, **we** and **us** refer to all Christians, so they are inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	12	6	hrr1	figs-metaphor	ἔχοντες & χαρίσματα & διάφορα	1	We have different gifts according to the grace that was given to us	Paul speaks of the different abilities to serve other believers that God gives believers as being **gracious gifts** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have different spiritual abilities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	6	y267	figs-activepassive	κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the grace that God has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	12	6	tlk4	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν&προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **prophecy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously … being able to prophecy, according to what has been proportioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	6	tlk4	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν & προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **prophecy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously … being able to prophecy, according to what has been proportioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	6	zs97	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of prophecy, then that person must use that gift according to the proportion of his faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	12	6	bnk9	figs-explicit	κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως	1	let it be done according to the proportion of his faith	Here Paul uses **faith** in the same way he did in [verse 3](../12/03.md). See how you translated the clause “as God has distributed to each one a measure of faith” in that verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	12	7	todc	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε διακονίαν, ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ; εἴτε ὁ διδάσκων, ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of service, then that person must use that gift for serving; if God has given someone the gift to be the one teaching, then that person must use that gift for teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	12	7	wmuw	figs-abstractnouns	διακονίαν&τῇ διακονίᾳ&τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **service** and **teaching**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “serving others … serving others … teaching others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	7	wmuw	figs-abstractnouns	διακονίαν & τῇ διακονίᾳ & τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **service** and **teaching**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “serving others … serving others … teaching others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	8	m2as	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε ὁ παρακαλῶν, ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει; ὁ μεταδιδοὺς, ἐν ἁπλότητι; ὁ προϊστάμενος, ἐν σπουδῇ; ὁ ἐλεῶν, ἐν ἱλαρότητι	1	giving	Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of encouraging, then that person must use that gift for encouraging; if God has given someone the gift of giving, then that person must use that gift for generosity; if God has given someone the gift of leading, then that person must use that gift with diligence; if God has given someone the gift of showing mercy, then that person must use that gift with cheerfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	12	8	teso	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει&ἐν ἁπλότητι&ἐν σπουδῇ&ἐν ἱλαρότητι	1	giving	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **encouragement**, **generosity**, **diligence**, and **cheerfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by encouraging others … generously … diligently … cheerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	8	teso	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει & ἐν ἁπλότητι & ἐν σπουδῇ & ἐν ἱλαρότητι	1	giving	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **encouragement**, **generosity**, **diligence**, and **cheerfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by encouraging others … generously … diligently … cheerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	9	dmsa	figs-declarative	ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος; ἀποστυγοῦντες τὸ πονηρόν, κολλώμενοι τῷ ἀγαθῷ	1	giving	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “Love without hypocrisy, abhor the wicked, hold on to the good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ROM	12	9	o8z9	figs-doublenegatives	ἀνυπόκριτος	1	giving	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “sincere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ROM	12	9	iv5h	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ πονηρόν&τῷ ἀγαθῷ	1	Let love be without hypocrisy	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wicked** and **good**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “wicked things … good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	9	iv5h	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ πονηρόν & τῷ ἀγαθῷ	1	Let love be without hypocrisy	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wicked** and **good**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “wicked things … good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	10	mr8i	figs-declarative	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ εἰς ἀλλήλους φιλόστοργοι; τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι	1		Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in brotherly love, be affectionate to one another; in honor, outdo one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-ROM	12	10	ng86	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ&τῇ τιμῇ	1	Concerning love of the brothers, be affectionate	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **brotherly love** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in loving others as brothers … in honoring others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	10	ng86	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ & τῇ τιμῇ	1	Concerning love of the brothers, be affectionate	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **brotherly love** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in loving others as brothers … in honoring others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	10	ux2y	figs-gendernotations	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ	1	Concerning love of the brothers	Although the word **brotherly** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “in your love for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	12	11	iu2i	figs-declarative	τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες	1	Concerning diligence, do not be hesitant. Concerning the spirit, be eager. Concerning the Lord, serve him	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in diligence, do not be lazy; in the spirit, be eager; serve the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ROM	12	11	jhe7	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σπουδῇ	1	Concerning diligence, do not be hesitant. Concerning the spirit, be eager. Concerning the Lord, serve him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **diligence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in being diligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ ROM	12	12	wept	grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ ἐλπίδι	1	be patient in
 ROM	12	12	uv64	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες	1	be patient in suffering	Here, **in** indicates the situation in which someone should be **patient**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time of suffering, being patient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 ROM	12	13	vk5h	figs-declarative	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες, τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες	1	Share in the needs of the saints	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in the needs of the saints, share; pursue hospitality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ROM	12	12	xoy0	figs-explicit	τῇ προσευχῇ προσκαρτεροῦντες	1	be patient in suffering	Here, **in** indicates that **prayer** is what one needs to do persistently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in regard to prayer, persisting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	12	13	m53s	figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων&τὴν φιλοξενίαν	1	Share in the needs of the saints	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **needs** and **hospitality**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the things the saints need … hospitable actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	13	m53s	figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων & τὴν φιλοξενίαν	1	Share in the needs of the saints	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **needs** and **hospitality**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the things the saints need … hospitable actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	13	i3nm	figs-explicit	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες	1	Share in the needs of the saints	Here Paul implies sharing the things that a person has with those **saints** who have **needs**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sharing what you have to meet the needs of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	12	14	exd8	figs-doublet	εὐλογεῖτε καὶ μὴ καταρᾶσθε	1		These two commands mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must absolutely bless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	12	15	szpn	figs-declarative	χαίρειν μετὰ χαιρόντων, κλαίειν μετὰ κλαιόντων	1		Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “rejoice with those who rejoice; weep with those who weep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
@@ -2245,7 +2245,7 @@ ROM	12	16	ar7y	figs-idiom	μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες	1	Do no
 ROM	12	16	cc23	figs-explicit	τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι	1	accept lowly people	Here, **the lowly ones** could refer to: (1) people who are poor or are not respected by society. Alternate translation: “accepting people who do not seem important” (2) doings things that people think are humiliating or unimportant. Alternate translation: “accepting the lowly tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	12	16	h469	figs-idiom	μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς	1	Do not be wise in your own thoughts	See how you translated this expression in [11:25](../11/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	12	17	h2tz	figs-declarative	μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες, προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Repay no one evil for evil	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “repay no one evil for evil; give careful thought to good things in the sight of all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-ROM	12	17	ae3j	figs-abstractnouns	κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ&προνοούμενοι&ἐνώπιον	1	Repay no one evil for evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **thought**, and **sight**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things for evil things; thinking carefully about … as seen by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	17	ae3j	figs-abstractnouns	κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ & προνοούμενοι & ἐνώπιον	1	Repay no one evil for evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **thought**, and **sight**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things for evil things; thinking carefully about … as seen by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	17	hnte	figs-metaphor	μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες	1	Repay no one evil for evil	Here Paul uses **paying back** to refer to doing something **evil** to someone in response to the **evil** that person has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “doing something evil to no one for the evil that person has done to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	17	fzh8	figs-metaphor	καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Do good things in the sight of all people	Here Paul uses **sight** to refer to what people mentally perceive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do things that all men perceive to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	12	17	c8lw	figs-gendernotations	πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Do good things in the sight of all people	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ ROM	12	18	nzwf	figs-declarative	μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρ
 ROM	12	18	fbzh	figs-gendernotations	πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	12	19	e0hc	figs-declarative	μὴ ἑαυτοὺς ἐκδικοῦντες	1	give way to his wrath	Paul is using a statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “do not avenge yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 ROM	12	19	ew6x	figs-metonymy	δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ	1	give way to his wrath	Here, **wrath** refers to God’s punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give way to God’s punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM	12	19	zre0	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὀργῇ&ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις	1	give way to his wrath	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **vengeance**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to God being wrathful … I will avenge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	19	zre0	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὀργῇ & ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις	1	give way to his wrath	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **vengeance**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to God being wrathful … I will avenge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	19	tcwn	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	give way to his wrath	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	12	19	omjp	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	give way to his wrath	See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	12	19	ns3b	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Moses wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2265,35 +2265,35 @@ ROM	12	19	xo5r	figs-metaphor	ἀνταποδώσω	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I
 ROM	12	19	mco6	figs-ellipsis	ἀνταποδώσω	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	Moses quotes God leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will repay them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	12	20	n96q	writing-quotations	ἀλλὰ	1	Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay	**But** here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Proverbs 25:21–22](../pro/25/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	12	20	q7dq	figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.	1		This sentence is a quotation of [Proverbs 25:21–22](../pro/25/21.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	12	20	c4ig	figs-yousingular	ὁ ἐχθρός σου&σωρεύσεις	1		Here the pronouns **your** and **you** are singular and addressed as though to one person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plural forms here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ROM	12	20	c4ig	figs-yousingular	ὁ ἐχθρός σου & σωρεύσεις	1		Here the pronouns **your** and **you** are singular and addressed as though to one person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plural forms here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 ROM	12	20	uwbq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why what was said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	12	20	wce6	figs-idiom	ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	You will heap coals of fire on his head	This clause is an idiom. It could refer to: (1) a person feeling shame as a result of being helped by someone whom that person had harmed. Alternate translation: “you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you” (2) God very severely punishing the person who is being helped. Alternate translation: “you will give God a reason to judge him more harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ROM	12	21	q761	figs-personification	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν	1	Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil with good	Paul describes **evil** as if it were a person who could conquer someone or be conquered by someone. He is referring to someone doing evil in response to someone doing evil to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil cause you to do evil, but use good to prevent evil from influencing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	12	21	p7fd	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ κακοῦ&τῷ ἀγαθῷ&τὸ κακόν	1	Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **good**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things … evil things … good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	12	21	p7fd	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ κακοῦ & τῷ ἀγαθῷ & τὸ κακόν	1	Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **good**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things … evil things … good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	12	21	k8et	figs-activepassive	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil overcome you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	13	intro	l4q7			0		# Romans 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Submission to rulers<br><br>In [13:1–7](../13/01.md) Paul commands his readers to obey rulers and pay taxes. Some readers will find this difficult to accept, especially if they live in places where wicked rulers persecute the church. It is important to recognize that the Holy Spirit led Paul to write these words while the Roman government was persecuting Christians. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God. The only time a Christian should disobey governing authorities is when those rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do (for an example of such a situation, see [Acts 5:28–29](../act/05/28.md)).<br><br>### “The night advanced, and the day has come near”<br><br>In [13:11–14](../13/11.md) Paul tells his readers that they should behave like Jesus because Jesus is coming back soon. He calls the current time in which people do what is evil the “night,” and he calls the time when Jesus returns the “day.”
 ROM	13	1	i1kf	figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις ὑποτασσέσθω	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let every soul subject itself to governing authorities” or “Let everyone subject themselves to governing authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	13	1	b8nf	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ	1	Let every soul be obedient to	Paul uses **soul** here to refer to the whole life of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ROM	13	1	gkmd	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαις&ἐξουσία&οὖσαι	1	Let every soul be obedient to	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authorities** and **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those who are authorized to govern … authorized person … existing ones who are authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	13	1	wii2	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ&ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	there is no authority unless it comes from God	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	13	1	gkmd	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαις & ἐξουσία & οὖσαι	1	Let every soul be obedient to	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authorities** and **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those who are authorized to govern … authorized person … existing ones who are authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	1	wii2	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	there is no authority unless it comes from God	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	13	1	j3lr	figs-activepassive	αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν	1	The authorities that exist have been appointed by God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and God appointed the existing authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	13	2	ezg5	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		**So then** indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes ideas that were previously expressed. **So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	13	2	ui8y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ, τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ διαταγῇ&ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	that authority	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authority**, **command**, and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who are authorized … what God has commanded … will cause themselves to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	2	ui8y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ, τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ διαταγῇ & ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	that authority	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **authority**, **command**, and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who are authorized … what God has commanded … will cause themselves to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	13	2	vc3u	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ ἀνθεστηκότες	1	that authority	Here, **it** refers to **that authority** stated earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the ones who have opposed that authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	13	2	dsa3	figs-activepassive	ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	those who oppose it will receive judgment on themselves	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will cause God to bring judgment on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	13	2	y21s	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	those who oppose it will receive judgment on themselves	Here Paul speaks of **judgment** as if it were an object that one could **bring** and put **on** someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause God to judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	13	3	m3yf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	13	3	c2xa	figs-abstractnouns	φόβος&τὴν ἐξουσίαν&τὸ ἀγαθὸν&ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **terror**, **authority**, **good**, and **praise**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “terrifying … whom God has authorized … good things … you will be praised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	13	3	jt2z	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ,&τῷ κακῷ	1	to good deeds … to evil deeds	Here, **the good deed** and **the evil deed** refer to the people who do those deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who do the good deed … to those who do the evil deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	3	c2xa	figs-abstractnouns	φόβος & τὴν ἐξουσίαν & τὸ ἀγαθὸν & ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **terror**, **authority**, **good**, and **praise**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “terrifying … whom God has authorized … good things … you will be praised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	3	jt2z	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, & τῷ κακῷ	1	to good deeds … to evil deeds	Here, **the good deed** and **the evil deed** refer to the people who do those deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who do the good deed … to those who do the evil deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	13	3	z4sq	figs-rquestion	θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?	1	Do you desire to be unafraid of the one in authority?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Now this is how you can not fear the authority:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	13	3	nohi	figs-activepassive	ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1	Do you desire to be unafraid of the one in authority?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the authorities will praise you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	13	3	ahl9	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	you will receive his approval	Here, **from** indicates the reason why **you will have praise**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	13	4	w4s0	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	he does not carry the sword for no reason	The word **for** indicates that what follows explains what came before this word. Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	13	4	j4kb	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν&οὐ&φορεῖ&ἐστιν	1		In this verse the pronoun **he** refers to a person who rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ruler is … the ruler does not carry … the ruler is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	13	4	zgz2	figs-abstractnouns	Θεοῦ&διάκονός&τὸ ἀγαθόν&τὸ κακὸν&Θεοῦ&διάκονός&ὀργὴν&τὸ κακὸν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **servant**, **good**, **evil**, and **wrath**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who serves God … doing good … evil things … one who serves God … what is wrathful … evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	4	j4kb	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν & οὐ & φορεῖ & ἐστιν	1		In this verse the pronoun **he** refers to a person who rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ruler is … the ruler does not carry … the ruler is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	13	4	zgz2	figs-abstractnouns	Θεοῦ & διάκονός & τὸ ἀγαθόν & τὸ κακὸν & Θεοῦ & διάκονός & ὀργὴν & τὸ κακὸν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **servant**, **good**, **evil**, and **wrath**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who serves God … doing good … evil things … one who serves God … what is wrathful … evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	13	4	quy4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		The word **for** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** introduces the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	13	4	ink8	figs-litotes	οὐ&εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	he does not carry the sword for no reason	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ROM	13	4	s3vz	figs-metonymy	οὐ&τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	carry the sword	Here, **the sword** refers to a ruler’s authority to punish wicked people, which could include killing them with a sword. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he does not have the authority to punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ROM	13	4	ink8	figs-litotes	οὐ & εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	he does not carry the sword for no reason	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ROM	13	4	s3vz	figs-metonymy	οὐ & τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	carry the sword	Here, **the sword** refers to a ruler’s authority to punish wicked people, which could include killing them with a sword. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he does not have the authority to punish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	13	4	vx6b	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	3		The word **for** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	13	4	d61t	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὀργὴν	1	an avenger for wrath	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the purpose of **an avenger**. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	13	4	au7j	figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1	an avenger for wrath	See how you translated **wrath** in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2302,13 +2302,13 @@ ROM	13	5	jqz7	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1		See how you translated thi
 ROM	13	5	sxq1	figs-activepassive	ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	13	5	aq7p	figs-explicit	ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1		Paul implies that his readers should **be subjected** to the rulers described in [verses 1–4](../13/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be subjected to rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	13	5	q81v	figs-ellipsis	διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “because of the wrathful deeds they can do to you, but also because your conscience knows that you should do submit to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	13	5	ykg9	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν&τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is wrathful … what you know is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	5	ykg9	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν & τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is wrathful … what you know is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	13	5	bs1u	figs-metonymy	τὴν ὀργὴν	1	not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	13	6	x5i2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	13	6	r1jy	writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Because of this	Here, **this** could refer to: (1) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience” (2) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse, and the fact that rulers **are servants of God**. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience, and because rulers are servants of God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	13	6	hy4f	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For they are	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, **for** indicates that what follows is another reason why Christians should **pay taxes**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	13	6	ib5x	writing-pronouns	εἰσιν	1		Here, **they** refers to the rulers described in [verses 1–4](../13/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the rulers are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	13	6	gh12	figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργοὶ&Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	6	gh12	figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργοὶ & Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	13	6	e8ey	figs-distinguish	εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο προσκαρτεροῦντες	1		This clause gives additional information about the rulers, who are called **servants of God** in the previous clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “and these rulers are the ones persisting in this very thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	13	6	xmsa	figs-explicit	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this very thing** refers to serving God by ruling over people, as is indicated by Paul calling them **servants of God** in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	13	7	z9cn	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς ὀφειλάς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obligations**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you are obligated to pay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2332,7 +2332,7 @@ ROM	13	9	ytof	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1		Here Paul uses
 ROM	13	9	ylb1	writing-quotations	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1		Here Paul uses **this word** to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament ([Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “in this commandment in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	13	9	so4u	figs-quotemarks	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	13	10	vy62	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται	1	Love does not harm one’s neighbor	Here Paul speaks of love as if it were a person who could do some kind of **work**. He means that people who love other people do not do **evil** things to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People who love do not work evil to a neighbor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	13	10	xa4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον&κακὸν&πλήρωμα&νόμου&ἡ ἀγάπη	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love**, **evil**, and **fulfillment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Loving a neighbor … what is evil … loving others fulfills the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	10	xa4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον & κακὸν & πλήρωμα & νόμου & ἡ ἀγάπη	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love**, **evil**, and **fulfillment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Loving a neighbor … what is evil … loving others fulfills the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	13	10	l92e	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1		See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 ROM	13	11	okty	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο	1		Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “And do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	13	11	dxm0	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers back to all the commands Paul stated in [12:1](../12/01.md)–[13:10](../13/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these commands that I have given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2348,9 +2348,9 @@ ROM	13	11	ra5t	figs-explicit	ὅτε ἐπιστεύσαμεν	1		This phrase in
 ROM	13	11	rhdr	figs-ellipsis	ἐπιστεύσαμεν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	13	12	ahn4	figs-metaphor	ἡ νὺξ	1	The night has advanced	**The night** here refers the time period when people do evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This time when people act sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	13	12	dioj	figs-metaphor	προέκοψεν	1	The night has advanced	Here, **advanced** refers to the **night** being almost over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon be over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	12	p7xp	figs-explicit	ἡ&ἡμέρα	2	the day has come near	Paul speaks of the time when Jesus will return to earth as **the day**. This event is referred to as “the day of the Lord” elsewhere in the Bible and is related to Paul’s reference to a future “salvation” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	13	12	p7xp	figs-explicit	ἡ & ἡμέρα	2	the day has come near	Paul speaks of the time when Jesus will return to earth as **the day**. This event is referred to as “the day of the Lord” elsewhere in the Bible and is related to Paul’s reference to a future “salvation” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	13	12	v3m1	figs-metaphor	ἤγγικεν	1	the day has come near	Here Paul speaks of **the day** as if it were an object that could **come near** a person. He means that the time when Jesus returns will be soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	13	12	b4ed	figs-exclusive	ἀποθώμεθα&ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	the day has come near	In this verse **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	13	12	b4ed	figs-exclusive	ἀποθώμεθα & ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	the day has come near	In this verse **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	13	12	bb8t	figs-metaphor	ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Let us therefore put aside the works of darkness	Here, **put off** means to stop doing something, and **the works of the darkness** refers to evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	13	12	o888	figs-possession	τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Let us therefore put aside the works of darkness	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **works** that are characteristic of **the darkness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that are characteristic of the darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	13	12	y5n4	figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	let us put on the armor of light	Here, **put on** means to start doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us therefore start doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2360,7 +2360,7 @@ ROM	13	13	gv4q	figs-exclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Let us walk	Here, **u
 ROM	13	13	ketz	figs-metaphor	εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν	1	Let us walk appropriately, as in the day	Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us behave decently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	13	13	e6ij	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here Paul refers to the unashamed way that Christians are supposed to behave as if they were walking during **the day**, when people can see what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as if everyone can see what we are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	13	13	svuf	figs-ellipsis	μὴ κώμοις καὶ μέθαις, μὴ κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις, μὴ ἔριδι καὶ ζήλῳ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not walking in drunken celebrations or drunkenness; not walking in sexual immorality and uncontrolled lust, not walking in strife and jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	13	13	wd5c	figs-abstractnouns	κώμοις&μέθαις&κοίταις&ἀσελγείαις&ἔριδι&ζήλῳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **celebrations**, **drunkenness**, **immorality**, **lust**, **strife**, and **jealousy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being drunk while celebrating … being drunk … in acting sexually immorally … lusting uncontrollably … in quarreling with others … being jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	13	13	wd5c	figs-abstractnouns	κώμοις & μέθαις & κοίταις & ἀσελγείαις & ἔριδι & ζήλῳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **celebrations**, **drunkenness**, **immorality**, **lust**, **strife**, and **jealousy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being drunk while celebrating … being drunk … in acting sexually immorally … lusting uncontrollably … in quarreling with others … being jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	13	13	qes3	figs-doublet	κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις	1	in sexual immorality or in uncontrolled lust	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize all kinds of sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in every kind of sexually immoral act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	13	14	emp4	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	in sexual immorality or in uncontrolled lust	**But** here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing those things,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 ROM	13	14	sir6	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν	1	put on the Lord Jesus Christ	Paul speaks of **Christ** as if he were clothing that someone could **put on**. He means that people should behave like **Jesus** behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act like the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2368,15 +2368,15 @@ ROM	13	14	j795	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ 
 ROM	13	14	xre7	figs-metaphor	τῆς σαρκὸς	1	make no provision for the flesh	Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated a similar use of **flesh** in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	intro	kt8c			0		# Romans 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verse 11](../14/11.md) of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Weak in faith<br><br>Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith, and yet at the same time be “weak in faith” regarding some situations. This describes Christians whose faith is immature and who feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### Dietary restrictions<br><br>In the law of Moses, God forbade the Jews from eating the meat of some animals which God said were unclean. However, since Christians have been “made dead to the law” ([7:4](../07/04.md)), they are free to eat what they want. The Roman church to which Paul wrote this letter was made up of both Jews and Gentiles. Some of the Jewish believers were offended by the non-Jewish believers eating foods that God had previously forbidden in the law of Moses. The non-Jewish believers were also judging the Jewish believers for not eating those foods. Paul uses this situation to teach that Christians must use their freedom in a way that honors the Lord and shows love to other believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we” and “us” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	14	1	jf8v	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει	1	weak in faith	Here, **weak in the faith** refers to someone who does not have a mature **faith**, but feels guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. The word **weak** here does not refer to physical weakness. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose faith is not mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	14	1	bdy7	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει&διακρίσεις	1	weak in faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **judgments**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what he believes … judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	1	bdy7	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει & διακρίσεις	1	weak in faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **judgments**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what he believes … judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	14	1	p697	figs-ellipsis	μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	without giving judgment about arguments	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “not accepting that one for passing judgments on opinions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	14	1	i45s	grammar-connect-logic-goal	μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	without giving judgment about arguments	Here, **for** indicates that this clause is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “not for the purpose of passing judgments on opinions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	14	2	tuf5	figs-genericnoun	ὃς	1	One person has faith to eat anything	**One person** here does not refer to one particular person. It refers to any person who believes he can eat any food without sinning against God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “One type of person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 ROM	14	2	ii8g	figs-ellipsis	ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα	1	One person has faith to eat anything	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “One person believes that God has permitted people to eat any type of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	14	2	n2n6	figs-metaphor	ὁ&ἀσθενῶν	1	another who is weak eats only vegetables	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	2	n2n6	figs-metaphor	ὁ & ἀσθενῶν	1	another who is weak eats only vegetables	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	2	yhhy	figs-explicit	λάχανα ἐσθίει	1	another who is weak eats only vegetables	Here Paul implies that this person **eats** only **vegetables**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	3	n0xd	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐσθίων, τὸν μὴ ἐσθίοντα μὴ ἐξουθενείτω; ὁ δὲ μὴ ἐσθίων, τὸν ἐσθίοντα μὴ κρινέτω	1		Here, **the one eating** refers to the person mentioned in the previous verse who believes that he can eat any kind of food, and **the one not eating** refers to the person called “the one being weak” in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let the one who eats any type of food not despise the one who does not eat every type of food, and let the one who does not eat every type of food not judge the one who eats every type of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	3	pqrp	writing-pronouns	ὁ Θεὸς&αὐτὸν προσελάβετο	1		Although the pronoun **him** is singular, here it refers to both **the one eating** and **the one not eating**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has accepted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	14	3	pqrp	writing-pronouns	ὁ Θεὸς & αὐτὸν προσελάβετο	1		Although the pronoun **him** is singular, here it refers to both **the one eating** and **the one not eating**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has accepted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	14	4	q9bx	figs-rquestion	σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?	1	Who are you, you who judge a servant belonging to someone else?	Paul is using a question to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have no right to judge a household slave belonging to another!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	14	4	xq7r	figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	you, who judges	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	14	4	vaym	figs-metaphor	ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην	1	you, who judges	Paul speaks of any Christian as if he were a **household slave** who belongs **to another**. He means that all Christians belong to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who belongs to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2387,31 +2387,31 @@ ROM	14	4	ucto	figs-activepassive	σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γ
 ROM	14	5	x7j2		κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν	1	One person values one day above another. Another values every day equally	Alternate translation: “considers one day to be different from another day” or “considers one day to be more important than another day”
 ROM	14	5	vm8j		κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν	1		Alternate translation: “considers all days to be the same” or “considers no day to be more important than another day”
 ROM	14	5	m511	figs-explicit	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1	Let each person be convinced in his own mind	Paul implies that each person should be **convinced** about what he thinks honors the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let each one be fully convinced in his own mind that what he does honors the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	5	y5ea	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος&πληροφορείσθω	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let each one be completely certain” or “Let each one fully convince himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	5	y5ea	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος & πληροφορείσθω	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let each one be completely certain” or “Let each one fully convince himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	14	6	pfn6	figs-explicit	ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν	1	He who observes the day, observes it for the Lord	**The one regarding** refers to the person in the previous verse who “judges day from day”. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The one who regards one day as more important than another day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	6	esu5	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἐσθίων	1	he who eats	Here, **the one who eats** refers to the person in [verse 3](../14/03.md) who eats all kinds of food. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from [verse 3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “the one eating every kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ROM	14	6	f9tm	grammar-connect-logic-goal	Κυρίῳ&Κυρίῳ&Κυρίῳ	1	eats for the Lord	In this verse the phrase **for the Lord** indicates the purpose for which these people act in these ways. They do so in order to benefit or honor the Lord. Use the most natural way in your language to express a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-ROM	14	6	ad27	figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστεῖ&τῷ Θεῷ&καὶ εὐχαριστεῖ τῷ Θεῷ	1	He who does not eat	Here Paul speaks of expressing **thanks** as if words of gratitude were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he thanks God … he also thanks God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	6	f9tm	grammar-connect-logic-goal	Κυρίῳ & Κυρίῳ & Κυρίῳ	1	eats for the Lord	In this verse the phrase **for the Lord** indicates the purpose for which these people act in these ways. They do so in order to benefit or honor the Lord. Use the most natural way in your language to express a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	14	6	ad27	figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστεῖ & τῷ Θεῷ & καὶ εὐχαριστεῖ τῷ Θεῷ	1	He who does not eat	Here Paul speaks of expressing **thanks** as if words of gratitude were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he thanks God … he also thanks God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	6	jh8j	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων	1	He who does not eat	Here, **the one who not eating** refers to the person in [verse 3](../14/03.md) who only eats vegetables. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from [verse 3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “the one who eats does not eat every kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	14	7	t6q7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For none of us lives for himself	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	14	7	u9ar	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	none of us	Here, **us** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	14	7	txm3	figs-explicit	ἑαυτῷ&ἑαυτῷ	1	For none of us lives for himself	Here, **for himself** means to do something only to benefit oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of himself … for the benefit of himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	7	txm3	figs-explicit	ἑαυτῷ & ἑαυτῷ	1	For none of us lives for himself	Here, **for himself** means to do something only to benefit oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of himself … for the benefit of himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	7	c9ls	figs-ellipsis	οὐδεὶς	2	none dies for himself	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “none of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	14	8	gbxd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	none dies for himself	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	14	8	s3lb	figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν&ζῶμεν&ἀποθνῄσκωμεν&ἀποθνῄσκομεν&ζῶμεν&ἀποθνῄσκωμεν&ἐσμέν	1		In this verse **we** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	14	8	s3lb	figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν & ζῶμεν & ἀποθνῄσκωμεν & ἀποθνῄσκομεν & ζῶμεν & ἀποθνῄσκωμεν & ἐσμέν	1		In this verse **we** refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	14	8	xf7x	figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ	-1		Here, **for the Lord** means to do something only to benefit **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of the Lord … for the benefit of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	8	r1hh	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. **Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [verses 14–20](../14/14.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	14	9	pbyn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	14	10	xciu	figs-youcrowd	σὺ&κρίνεις&σου&σὺ&ἐξουθενεῖς&σου	1	why do you judge your brother? And you, why do you despise your brother?	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** and **your** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	14	10	xciu	figs-youcrowd	σὺ & κρίνεις & σου & σὺ & ἐξουθενεῖς & σου	1	why do you judge your brother? And you, why do you despise your brother?	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** and **your** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	14	10	db9a	figs-rquestion	τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?	1	why do you judge your brother? And you, why do you despise your brother?	Paul is using two questions here to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no right to judge your brother! And you also have no right to despise your brother!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 ROM	14	10	al55	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἀδελφόν	-1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated “brothers” in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	14	10	b497	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Christians should not judge each other. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do not judge others due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	14	10	jq85	figs-metaphor	πάντες&παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For we will all stand before the judgment seat of God	Here, **present ourselves before** refers to standing in front of a judge in order to be judged, and **the judgment seat of God** refers to the place where God judges. Paul means that all believers will be judged by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will all be judged by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	14	10	jq85	figs-metaphor	πάντες & παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For we will all stand before the judgment seat of God	Here, **present ourselves before** refers to standing in front of a judge in order to be judged, and **the judgment seat of God** refers to the place where God judges. Paul means that all believers will be judged by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will all be judged by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	11	pldr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For it is written,	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	14	11	mr7r	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	14	11	fel6	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	For it is written,	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote ([Isaiah 49:18](../isa/49/18.md) and [45:23](../isa/45/23.md)), you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	14	11	lvwr	figs-quotemarks	ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος, ὅτι ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1		This sentence contains quotations from [Isaiah 49:18](../isa/49/18.md) and [45:23](../isa/45/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-ROM	14	11	yeb5	writing-pronouns	ζῶ ἐγώ&ἐμοὶ	1	For it is written,	In this sentence **I** and **me** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As I, God, live … to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	14	11	yeb5	writing-pronouns	ζῶ ἐγώ & ἐμοὶ	1	For it is written,	In this sentence **I** and **me** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As I, God, live … to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	14	11	dxdt	figs-infostructure	ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος	1	For it is written,	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “The Lord says, ‘As I live,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	14	11	tf76	figs-explicit	ζῶ ἐγώ	1	As I live	This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate an oath. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	11	sb6q	figs-synecdoche	κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	to me every knee will bend, and every tongue will confess to God	Paul uses the words **knee** and **tongue** to refer to the entire person who is doing these acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person will bow down and every person will confess to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2427,12 +2427,12 @@ ROM	14	13	fgg7	figs-metaphor	τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα	1	but
 ROM	14	13	cx4s	figs-gendernotations	τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in [verse 10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	14	14	t7gc	figs-doublet	οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	Here, **know** and **am persuaded** mean very similar things. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am completely certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 ROM	14	14	qm09	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	Here, **in** could indicate: (1) the means by which Paul was persuaded. Alternate translation: “by means of the Lord Jesus” (2) Paul being united with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	14	erfx	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν κοινὸν&κοινὸν&κοινόν	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	The next verse indicates that here Paul is specifically referring to **unclean** foods, which were foods that Jews were forbidden to eat according to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no food is forbidden to be eaten … forbidden … it is forbidden food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	14	erfx	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν κοινὸν & κοινὸν & κοινόν	1	I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus	The next verse indicates that here Paul is specifically referring to **unclean** foods, which were foods that Jews were forbidden to eat according to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no food is forbidden to be eaten … forbidden … it is forbidden food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	14	fuk1	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	nothing is unclean by itself	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	14	14	mjc5		δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	by itself	Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is”
 ROM	14	15	vd20	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	by itself	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in [verse 13](../14/13.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: ““Do not place a stumbling block before your brother because, if on account of food,”” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	14	15	iw7w	figs-explicit	διὰ βρῶμα	1	If because of food your brother is hurt	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christians thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and [verses 2–6](../14/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or “because of what you eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	15	tfix	figs-youcrowd	σου&περιπατεῖς&σου	1		Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **your** and **you** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of "you" in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	14	15	tfix	figs-youcrowd	σου & περιπατεῖς & σου	1		Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **your** and **you** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of "you" in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	14	15	ln42	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	brother	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in [verse 10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	14	15	a4kj	figs-metaphor	λυπεῖται	1	brother	Here, **hurt** refers to experiencing emotional or spiritual offense or suffering. It does not refer to being physically injured. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is offended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	15	bj8v	figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς	1	you are no longer walking in love	Here Paul uses **walking** to refer to how people behave or live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See similar uses of “walk” in [6:4](../06/04.md), [8:4](../08/04.md), and [13:13](../13/13.md). Alternate translation: “you are no longer behaving according to love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2441,9 +2441,9 @@ ROM	14	15	sn7w	figs-explicit	τῷ βρώματί σου	1	you are no longer wal
 ROM	14	16	zgzz	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		The word **So** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. **So** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	14	16	rvtd	figs-abstractnouns	ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	14	16	h3af	figs-explicit	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1		Here, **good** could refer to: (1) the **good** things that God gives Christians. Alternate translation: “good things” (2) the freedom that Christians have to eat any food they want to eat. Alternate translation: “your freedom to eat anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	16	gl48	figs-activepassive	μὴ βλασφημείσθω&ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	So do not allow what you consider to be good to be spoken of as evil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not allow people to blaspheme your good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	16	gl48	figs-activepassive	μὴ βλασφημείσθω & ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	So do not allow what you consider to be good to be spoken of as evil	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not allow people to blaspheme your good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	14	17	v6jq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. dd**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	14	17	m0ya	figs-explicit	οὐ&ἐστιν	1		Here, **is not** indicates that what follows is what **the kingdom of God** does not consist of or is not concerned with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not consist of” or “is not concerned with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	17	m0ya	figs-explicit	οὐ & ἐστιν	1		Here, **is not** indicates that what follows is what **the kingdom of God** does not consist of or is not concerned with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not consist of” or “is not concerned with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	17	tyyq	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	14	17	j92k	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ	1	For the kingdom of God is not about food and drink, but about righteousness, peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness**, **peace**, and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is righteous and what is peaceful and what is joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	14	17	sdlj	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		Here, **in the Holy Spirit** could refer to: (1) the means by which Christians experience **righteousness and peace and joy**. Alternate translation: “by the Holy Spirit” (2) Christians being united with **the Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2453,9 +2453,9 @@ ROM	14	18	am8m	figs-activepassive	δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1
 ROM	14	18	gy7n	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	approved by people	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	14	19	q5fk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1		See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	14	19	xxgm	figs-metaphor	διώκωμεν	1		Here Paul refers to **the things of peace and the things of the building up** as if they were something that people could **pursue**. He is telling Christians to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us commit to doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	14	19	sfpg	figs-possession	τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης&καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that result in the **peace** and **the building up** of other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the things that result in peace and the things that result in building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	14	19	sfpg	figs-possession	τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης & καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that result in the **peace** and **the building up** of other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the things that result in peace and the things that result in building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	14	19	i3rv	figs-metaphor	τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	let us pursue the things of peace and the things that build up one another	Here, Paul speaks of helping other Christians become more spiritually mature as if one were **building up** a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things that help one another grow spiritually mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	14	20	p65h	figs-explicit	μὴ&κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **tear down** refers to undoing **the work** God has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not undo the work of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	20	p65h	figs-explicit	μὴ & κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **tear down** refers to undoing **the work** God has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not undo the work of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	20	zbd1	figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν βρώματος	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in [verses 2–6](../14/02.md), [13–17](../14/13.md). See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	20	r7u3	figs-explicit	πάντα μὲν καθαρά	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **things** refers to food and **clean** refers to something that God has permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All foods are indeed permitted by God to be eaten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	20	l75q	writing-pronouns	κακὸν	1	Do not destroy the work of God because of food	Here, **it** refers to the act of eating a food that someone believes God has not permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating those things is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2470,30 +2470,30 @@ ROM	14	21	o6kn	figs-activepassive	σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενε
 ROM	14	21	mnon	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενεῖ	1		Here, **weak** refers to being spiritually immature. See how you translated “weak in the faith” in [verse 1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	22	u1cf	figs-abstractnouns	σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	The faith you have	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The things that you yourself believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	14	22	hjk9	figs-explicit	σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	The faith you have	Here, **faith** refers to what Christians believe that God permits them to do, as mentioned in [verses 1–6](../14/01.md). If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The beliefs that your yourself have about what God permits you do to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	22	b3hi	figs-youcrowd	σὺ&ἔχεις&σεαυτὸν	1		Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** and **yourself** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+ROM	14	22	b3hi	figs-youcrowd	σὺ & ἔχεις & σεαυτὸν	1		Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, **you** and **yourself** here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 ROM	14	22	tkse	figs-explicit	κατὰ σεαυτὸν ἔχε ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This clause refers to keeping one’s beliefs between oneself and God, rather than telling other people about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “keep it between yourself and God” or “keep it between you and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	22	bi7e	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of people keeping what they believe **before God** as if they were standing in front of God. Paul means that people should keep private their beliefs about what God permits them to do, as if God is the only one who knows about those beliefs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	14	22	r53r	figs-explicit	ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Here, **judge** refers to feeling guilty or condemning oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the one who does not feel guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	22	odxh	figs-gendernotations	ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Although the terms **himself** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “oneself in what one approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	14	22	r8a1		ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves	Alternate translation: “with respect to what he approves” or “in regard to what he approves”
 ROM	14	23	zexs	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word But introduces a contrast. **But** here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ROM	14	23	s1ph	figs-activepassive	ὁ&διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται	1	He who doubts is condemned if he eats	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The person doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God condemns the one who passes judgment if he eats” (2) the person who eats. Alternate translation: “the one who passes judgment condemns himself if he eats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	14	23	wa8s	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ&διακρινόμενος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	14	23	dkcw	figs-explicit	ὁ&διακρινόμενος	1		This phrase refers to a person who has determined that eating certain foods is prohibited by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who judges that it is not right to eat certain foods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	14	23	s1ph	figs-activepassive	ὁ & διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται	1	He who doubts is condemned if he eats	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The person doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God condemns the one who passes judgment if he eats” (2) the person who eats. Alternate translation: “the one who passes judgment condemns himself if he eats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	14	23	wa8s	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ & διακρινόμενος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	23	dkcw	figs-explicit	ὁ & διακρινόμενος	1		This phrase refers to a person who has determined that eating certain foods is prohibited by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who judges that it is not right to eat certain foods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	23	b6t9	figs-explicit	ἐὰν φάγῃ	1		Paul implies that the person **eats** what that person believes God has forbidden to be eaten. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if he eats what he thinks God has forbidden him to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	23	l9ga	writing-pronouns	οὐκ	1		Here, **it** refers to eating food that someone believes God has forbidden to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating what one thinks is forbidden to eat is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	14	23	yr44	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	-1		In this verse **from** refers to what a person bases their actions on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on faith … based on faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	14	23	z696	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως&πίστεως	1		See how you translated the abstract noun **faith** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	14	23	z696	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως & πίστεως	1		See how you translated the abstract noun **faith** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	14	23	u80o	figs-explicit	πᾶν	1		Here, **all** refers to anything that a person does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all that a person does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	14	23	u9p2	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία	1	whatever is not from faith is sin	See how you translated the abstract noun **sin** in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 
 ROM	15	intro	ae9u			0		# Romans 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)<br>    * How to act toward God (12:1–2)<br>    * How to serve the church (12:3–8)<br>    * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)<br>    * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)<br>    * How to act toward government (13:1–7)<br>    * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)<br>    * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)<br>    * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)<br>    * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)<br>    * Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)<br>8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)<br>    * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)<br>    * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 9–11](../15/09.md) and [21](../15/21.md) of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in [verse 12](../15/12.md).<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Able and unable<br><br>In [verses 1–6](../15/01.md) Paul concludes his teaching from Chapter 14 about how Christians with different degrees of spiritual maturity should act toward each other. He refers to some Christians as those who are “weak in faith” ([14:1](../14/01.md)) or “unable” ([15:1](../15/01.md)). These phrases describe Christians who have immature faith and feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. By contrast, he refers to spiritually mature Christians as those who are “able” ([15:1](../15/01.md)). Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith and neither should judge the other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Forms of ‘You’<br><br>In this chapter, with three exceptions, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to Paul’s Christian readers, whom he calls “brothers” in [verses 14](../15/14.md) and [30](../15/30.md). Notes will discuss the use of singular forms of “you” and “your” in [verses 3](../15/03.md) and [9](../15/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])<br><br>### Inclusive language<br><br>In this chapter the pronouns “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ourselves” refer inclusively to Paul’s Christian readers. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [verses 14](../15/14.md) and [30](../15/30.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM	15	1	u19s	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἑαυτοῖς	1	Now	Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns **we** and **ourselves** refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM	15	1	u19s	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἑαυτοῖς	1	Now	Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns **we** and **ourselves** refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ROM	15	1	u73x	figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ	1	we who are strong	Here, **we, being able** refers to Paul and other people who have mature faith. See the discussion about this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we, having mature faith” or “we, being spiritually strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	1	h18p	figs-metaphor	τὰ ἀσθενήματα&βαστάζειν	1	we who are strong	Paul speaks of **weaknesses** as if they were objects that a person could **bear**. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help overcome the weaknesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	1	h18p	figs-metaphor	τὰ ἀσθενήματα & βαστάζειν	1	we who are strong	Paul speaks of **weaknesses** as if they were objects that a person could **bear**. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help overcome the weaknesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	1	kuhe	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἀσθενήματα	1	we who are strong	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weaknesses**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the weak qualities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	1	cv61	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀδυνάτων	1	of the weak	Here, **the ones who are unable** refers to Christians who are not spiritually mature. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the ones who have immature faith” or “of the ones who are spiritually weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	2	bkon	figs-explicit	τῷ πλησίον	1		Here, **neighbor** refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	2	kz0t	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς&πρὸς	1	in order to build him up	Here, **for** and **toward** indicate that what follows are purposes for pleasing one’s **neighbor**. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … and for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	2	kz0t	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς & πρὸς	1	in order to build him up	Here, **for** and **toward** indicate that what follows are purposes for pleasing one’s **neighbor**. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … and for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	2	z2k8	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομήν	1	in order to build him up	See how you translated **building up** in [14:19](../14/19.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	3	jqul	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is an example of pleasing others, as Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	15	3	h571	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -2503,15 +2503,15 @@ ROM	15	3	nlu9	figs-quotemarks	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδι
 ROM	15	3	ulis	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ	1	it was just as it is written	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **insults**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The insulting words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	3	qni7	figs-metaphor	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	The insults of those who insulted you fell on me	Paul quotes David referring to insults against God also affecting Christ as if those insults were objects that **fell** on him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The insults of those who insult you are also insults against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	4	h6qm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows emphasizes the importance of the scriptural quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	15	4	txd4	figs-activepassive	ὅσα&προεγράφη&ἐγράφη	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whatever the prophets wrote previously, they wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	4	pgdw	figs-explicit	ὅσα&προεγράφη	1		Paul is referring to what **was previously written** in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what was previously written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	15	4	q3jp	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς&ἵνα	1		Here, **for** and **in order that** indicate that what follows are purposes for the Scriptures. Use the natural form in your language for indicating purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+ROM	15	4	txd4	figs-activepassive	ὅσα & προεγράφη & ἐγράφη	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whatever the prophets wrote previously, they wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	4	pgdw	figs-explicit	ὅσα & προεγράφη	1		Paul is referring to what **was previously written** in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what was previously written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	4	q3jp	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς & ἵνα	1		Here, **for** and **in order that** indicate that what follows are purposes for the Scriptures. Use the natural form in your language for indicating purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	4	dx6h	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **instruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for instructing us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	4	wk5h	figs-infostructure	ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “in order that we would have the hope through the patience and through the encouragement of the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	15	4	i0z9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς&τῆς παρακλήσεως&τὴν ἐλπίδα	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **patience**, **encouragement**, and **hope**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **patience** in [2:4](../02/04.md), **encouragement** in [12:8](../12/08.md), and **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	4	i0z9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς & τῆς παρακλήσεως & τὴν ἐλπίδα	1	For whatever was previously written was written for our instruction	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **patience**, **encouragement**, and **hope**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **patience** in [2:4](../02/04.md), **encouragement** in [12:8](../12/08.md), and **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	4	g6r1	figs-personification	διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν	1	through patience and through encouragement of the scriptures we would have certain hope	Here Paul speaks about **the Scriptures** as if they were a person who could have **patience** and be encouraging. He means that God uses **the Scriptures** to show his **patience** and **encouragement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the patience and through the encouragement that God gives in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	15	5	y97a	figs-possession	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as being characterized by **patience** and **encouragement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by patience and encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	15	5	u2zm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς&τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		See how you translated **patience** and **encouragement** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	5	y97a	figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as being characterized by **patience** and **encouragement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by patience and encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	5	u2zm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς & τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		See how you translated **patience** and **encouragement** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	5	ip4l		τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1		Alternate translation: “to agree with each other”
 ROM	15	5	g5xm	figs-explicit	κατὰ Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		This could refer to: (1) the example of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “according to the example of Christ Jesus” (2) the will of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “according to the will of Christ Jesus” (3) both the example and will of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “according to Christ Jesus’ will and example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	6	lp5m	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	praise with one mouth	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the unity that he prayed for in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -2522,7 +2522,7 @@ ROM	15	7	prx1	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	receive one another	The wor
 ROM	15	7	z941	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	receive one another	Here, **to** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christians should accept each other as Christ accepted Christians. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	8	ae6k	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	15	8	gbh8	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	For I say	The pronoun **I** refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	15	8	refk	figs-abstractnouns	διάκονον&ἀληθείας&τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **servant** in [13:4](../13/04.md), **truth** in [2:8](../02/08.md), and “promises” in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	8	refk	figs-abstractnouns	διάκονον & ἀληθείας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		See how you translated the abstract nouns **servant** in [13:4](../13/04.md), **truth** in [2:8](../02/08.md), and “promises” in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	8	k4my	figs-metonymy	περιτομῆς	1	Christ has been made a servant of the circumcision	Here, **the circumcision** refers to the people who have been circumcised: the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	15	8	rtbo	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι	1		Here, **to** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for which **Christ** became a **servant of the circumcision**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of confirming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	8	prp8	figs-possession	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the promises** that God made to **the fathers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promises given to the fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -2542,21 +2542,21 @@ ROM	15	11	xw7t	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	1		This phrase indicates th
 ROM	15	11	gk0i	figs-quotemarks	αἰνεῖτε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τὸν Κύριον; καὶ ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ λαοί	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 117:1](../psa/117/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	15	12	inaw	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν Ἠσαΐας λέγει	1	root of Jesse	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something **Isaiah** said in an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 11:10](../isa/11/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures, Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 ROM	15	12	u5kr	figs-pastforfuture	Ἠσαΐας λέγει	1	root of Jesse	Here Paul uses the present tense verb **says** to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Isaiah said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-ROM	15	12	lpf6	figs-explicit	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί&ὁ ἀνιστάμενος&αὐτῷ	1	root of Jesse	These three expressions all refer to the same person, the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The root of Jesse … he is the one who rises … that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	12	lpf6	figs-explicit	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί & ὁ ἀνιστάμενος & αὐτῷ	1	root of Jesse	These three expressions all refer to the same person, the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The root of Jesse … he is the one who rises … that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	12	fta5	figs-metaphor	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί	1	root of Jesse	Paul quotes Isaiah referring to a descendant of **Jesse** as if that person were a **root** or shoot that had grown out of a plant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	12	lgr5	figs-idiom	ὁ ἀνιστάμενος	1	root of Jesse	Paul quotes Isaiah using **rising** to refer to someone becoming a king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who becomes king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	15	13	t3dd	figs-possession	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as the source of **hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	15	13	u77u	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐλπίδος&χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης&ἐλπίδι&δυνάμει	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	See how you translated the abstract nouns **hope** in the previous verse, **joy** and **peace** in [14:17](../14/17.md), and **power** in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	15	13	w7wn	figs-metaphor	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Paul refers to people experiencing **joy** and **peace** as if they were things that could **fill** someone. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “may the God of hope allow you to experience all joy and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	13	t3dd	figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as the source of **hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	13	u77u	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐλπίδος & χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης & ἐλπίδι & δυνάμει	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	See how you translated the abstract nouns **hope** in the previous verse, **joy** and **peace** in [14:17](../14/17.md), and **power** in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	13	w7wn	figs-metaphor	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Paul refers to people experiencing **joy** and **peace** as if they were things that could **fill** someone. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “may the God of hope allow you to experience all joy and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	13	zmno	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πιστεύειν	1	May fill you with all joy and peace	Here, **in** indicates that **believing** is the means by which people will experience **all joy and peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	13	aee3	figs-ellipsis	τῷ πιστεύειν	1		Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “in believing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 ROM	15	13	a6rk	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that you might abound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	13	k3y1		εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς	1		Alternative translation: “so that you will have this hope with abundance”
-ROM	15	14	h98x	figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι&καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has also persuaded me myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	14	g16z	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ&αὐτοὶ&ἐστε	1		Paul uses the words **myself** and **yourselves** to emphasize how certain he is that his readers are good and knowledgeable Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed … you are indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+ROM	15	14	h98x	figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι & καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has also persuaded me myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ROM	15	14	g16z	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ & αὐτοὶ & ἐστε	1		Paul uses the words **myself** and **yourselves** to emphasize how certain he is that his readers are good and knowledgeable Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed … you are indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 ROM	15	14	d878	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	15	14	jne2	figs-metaphor	αὐτοὶ μεστοί ἐστε ἀγαθωσύνης	1	brothers	Paul refers to people experiencing **goodness** as if it were something that could make someone **full**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you yourselves fully experience goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	15	14	ext0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθωσύνης&γνώσεως	1	brothers	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **goodness** and **knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is good … that is knowable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	14	ext0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθωσύνης & γνώσεως	1	brothers	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **goodness** and **knowledge**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is good … that is knowable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	14	wit1	figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	brothers	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having filled you with all knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	15	14	fkec	figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	brothers	Here Paul refers to people having **knowledge** as if it were something that someone could be**filled with**. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having all knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	14	qhv3	figs-hyperbole	πάσης γνώσεως	1	filled with all knowledge	Here, **all** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize how much **knowledge** these people have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “abundant knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -2566,18 +2566,18 @@ ROM	15	15	n2gr	figs-activepassive	τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν 
 ROM	15	15	nln5	figs-explicit	τὴν χάριν	1		Here, **grace** refers to God graciously choosing Paul to be an apostle. See how you translated the similar phrase in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	16	coxw	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναί με	1		Here, **in order for** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God graciously gave Paul authority, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that I would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	16	zgo0	figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργὸν	1		See how you translated **servant** in [13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	15	16	wiw1	figs-metaphor	ἱερουργοῦντα τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα&ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable	Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel to the Gentiles as if he is a priest who serves **the gospel** by making an **offering** to God. He speaks of **the Gentiles** who become Christians as a result of his preaching as if they were **the offering** that he makes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel so that the Gentiles who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	16	wiw1	figs-metaphor	ἱερουργοῦντα τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα & ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable	Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel to the Gentiles as if he is a priest who serves **the gospel** by making an **offering** to God. He speaks of **the Gentiles** who become Christians as a result of his preaching as if they were **the offering** that he makes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel so that the Gentiles who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	16	hert	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Paul preaches the gospel to the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	16	veeq	figs-possession	ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the offering** that consists of **the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the offering, that is, the Gentiles,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	15	16	ah87	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ προσφορὰ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **offering**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	16	lztb	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένη ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	15	17	s7ns	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. **Therefore** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the result of what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Because of these things” or "As a result of these things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	15	17	mtjb	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	15	17	lpc0	figs-metaphor	ἔχω&καύχησιν	1		Here, Paul speaks of **a boast** as if it were an object someone can **have**. He means that he is rightfully able to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I can boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	15	17	lpc0	figs-metaphor	ἔχω & καύχησιν	1		Here, Paul speaks of **a boast** as if it were an object someone can **have**. He means that he is rightfully able to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I can boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	18	b3q2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	15	18	lu97	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ&τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ	1	by the power of signs and wonders	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will only dare to speak what Christ produced through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ROM	15	18	lu97	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ	1	by the power of signs and wonders	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will only dare to speak what Christ produced through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 ROM	15	18	by9s		εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	Here, **for** indicates the result of **what Christ produced through** Paul. Use the natural way in your language to express a result. Alternate translation: “that resulted in the obedience of the Gentiles”
-ROM	15	18	zdk4	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν&ἔργῳ	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **deed**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Gentiles obey … what is done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	18	zdk4	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν & ἔργῳ	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **deed**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Gentiles obey … what is done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	18	yua7	figs-explicit	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	for the obedience of the Gentiles	Here, **obedience** refers to **the Gentiles** obeying the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles to obey what God commanded in the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	18	xds3	figs-explicit	λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	These are things done by word and action	Here, **word and deed** could refer to: (1) what Paul had said and done that resulted in **the Gentiles** trusting in Christ. Alternate translation: “by my words and actions” (2) how **the Gentiles** displayed their **obedience**. Alternate translation: “by their words and actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	18	pqtq	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	These are things done by word and action	Here Paul uses the term **word** to describe what he had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2599,7 +2599,7 @@ ROM	15	21	wy8k	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		If your lang
 ROM	15	21	ocug	figs-quotemarks	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 52:15](../isa/52/15.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 ROM	15	21	zbeu	figs-parallelism	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν	1		These two clauses mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that non-Jewish people will hear about the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Those who have not heard about him will certainly understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ROM	15	21	u8d6	figs-activepassive	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those to whom no one had reported concerning him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	21	m1f0	figs-explicit	ὄψονται&συνήσουσιν	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	Isaiah implies that the non-Jewish people who never heard about the Messiah will **understand** who the Messiah is and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “will see who the Messiah is … will understand who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	15	21	m1f0	figs-explicit	ὄψονται & συνήσουσιν	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	Isaiah implies that the non-Jewish people who never heard about the Messiah will **understand** who the Messiah is and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “will see who the Messiah is … will understand who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	21	eihc	figs-metaphor	ὄψονται	1	Those to whom no tidings of him came	Paul quotes Isaiah using **see** to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “will perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	15	22	f1fq	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1		The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Here, **Therefore** indicates that what follows is the result of Paul’s desire to preach the gospel in places where people have never heard it before. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “For this reason” or “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	15	22	ex5j	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην	1	I was also hindered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those things also prevented me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2616,11 +2616,11 @@ ROM	15	24	wg6d		ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπ
 ROM	15	25	z3e5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	διακονῶν τοῖς ἁγίοις	1		This clause is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for him **traveling to Jerusalem**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of ministering to the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	15	26	mjvr	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul is going to minister to the saints in Jerusalem, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “I am going to Jerusalem because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	15	26	wape	translate-names	Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	The words **Macedonia** and **Achaia** are the names of Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ROM	15	26	vn1r	figs-synecdoche	εὐδόκησαν&Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	Paul uses **Macedonia** and **Achaia** here to refer to the Christians who lived in those areas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were well-pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ROM	15	26	vn1r	figs-synecdoche	εὐδόκησαν & Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	Paul uses **Macedonia** and **Achaia** here to refer to the Christians who lived in those areas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were well-pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ROM	15	26	n0fb	figs-abstractnouns	κοινωνίαν τινὰ ποιήσασθαι	1	it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **contribution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to contribute a certain amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	27	w5ap	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	Indeed they were please to do this	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-ROM	15	27	px7a	writing-pronouns	εὐδόκησαν&ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν	1	Indeed they were please to do this	The two occurrences of **they** in this verse refer to the Christians in Macedonia and Achaia, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased … those people are obligated to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ROM	15	27	tfz1	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν&αὐτῶν&αὐτοῖς	1	indeed, they are their debtors	In this verse, **them** and **their** refer to the Christians in Jerusalem. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Jerusalem … their … those believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	15	27	px7a	writing-pronouns	εὐδόκησαν & ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν	1	Indeed they were please to do this	The two occurrences of **they** in this verse refer to the Christians in Macedonia and Achaia, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased … those people are obligated to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ROM	15	27	tfz1	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & αὐτοῖς	1	indeed, they are their debtors	In this verse, **them** and **their** refer to the Christians in Jerusalem. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Jerusalem … their … those believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	15	27	ipij	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason the believers in Macedonia and Achaia **are obligated** to help the believers in Jerusalem. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 ROM	15	27	en7l	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	if the Gentiles have shared in their spiritual things, they owe it to them also to serve them	Paul uses **if** as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 ROM	15	28	jj6t	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers to Paul traveling to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this trip to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2633,9 +2633,9 @@ ROM	15	29	st5e	figs-metaphor	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χρισ
 ROM	15	30	v9iy	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	15	30	scg1	figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		The two occurrences of **by** in this verse indicate that what follows each one are the bases for Paul to **urge** his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of our Lord Jesus Christ and on the basis of the love of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	30	wq9l	figs-possession	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		This could refer to: (1) **the love** that **the Spirit** gives to Christians. Alternate translation: “the love from the Spirit” (2) **the love** that belongs to **the Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	15	30	a5g4	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος&ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **prayers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you love from the Spirit … what you pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	15	30	a5g4	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος & ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **prayers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you love from the Spirit … what you pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	30	fy1v	figs-metaphor	συναγωνίσασθαί μοι	1	to strive together with	Paul speaks of praying fervently as if it were a struggle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to pray intensely together with me” or “to pray intensely with me as if striving together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	15	31	q3v8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα&καὶ	1	to strive together with	Both occurrences of **so that** in this verse could indicate: (1) the contents of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that … and that” (2) the purposes for praying. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM	15	31	q3v8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα & καὶ	1	to strive together with	Both occurrences of **so that** in this verse could indicate: (1) the contents of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that … and that” (2) the purposes for praying. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 ROM	15	31	u7st	figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	I may be rescued from those who are disobedient	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might deliver me from the disobedient ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	15	31	gq4x	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	I may be rescued from those who are disobedient	Here, **the disobedient ones** refers to the Jews **in Judea** who disobeyed God by refusing to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews” or “those Jews who do not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	15	31	nw5h	figs-euphemism	διακονία μου	1	and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers	Here, **my service** refers to the money that Paul was going to bring to the poor believers in Jerusalem from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. This is a polite way of referring to bringing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “the money I bring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@@ -2644,7 +2644,7 @@ ROM	15	32	fe4d	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα	1	and that my service for J
 ROM	15	32	erby	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χαρᾷ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	32	ekou	figs-abstractnouns	θελήματος Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	15	32	sgcl	figs-activepassive	συναναπαύσωμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and might refresh myself together with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	15	33	s947	figs-possession	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	May the God of peace be with	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** who gives **peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	15	33	s947	figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	May the God of peace be with	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** who gives **peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	15	33	ubtx	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰρήνης	1	May the God of peace be with	See how you translated **peace** in [1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	intro	qy96			0		# Romans 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)<br>    * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)<br>    * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)<br>    * Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2)<br>    * Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16)<br>    * Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20)<br>    * Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24)<br>    * Doxology (16:25–27)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Letter writing and sending<br><br>In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Tertius mentions that he is the scribe writing the letter for Paul ([16:22](../16/22.md)). Paul begins this chapter by recommending Phoebe to the believers in Rome who receive this letter. This could indicate that Phoebe was the messenger who delivered the letter to them.<br><br>### Greetings<br><br>In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letters. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In [verses 3–16](../16/03.md) and [21–23](../16/21.md) Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Romans knew. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language.
 ROM	16	1	sg6a	writing-pronouns	συνίστημι	1		The pronoun **I** here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul, except for [verse 22](../16/22.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, commend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2658,7 +2658,7 @@ ROM	16	2	yic3		ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων	1	in a manner worthy of the saint
 ROM	16	2	g7of	grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ	1	in a manner worthy of the saints	Here, **and** indicates that what follows is a second purpose for Paul to commend Phoebe to the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in order that you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	16	2	qp4w	figs-metaphor	παραστῆτε αὐτῇ	1	stand by her	Here, **stand by** refers to helping someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might assist her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	2	i0fm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	stand by her	**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants the Roman believers to help Phoebe. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason I want you to do this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	16	2	inh1	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ&προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ	2	has become a helper of many, and of myself as well	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **benefactor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has also benefited many, and myself as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	2	inh1	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ & προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ	2	has become a helper of many, and of myself as well	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **benefactor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has also benefited many, and myself as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	3	na1k			0	General Information:	As was customary in his culture, in [verses 3–16](../16/03.md) Paul begins to conclude the letter by extending greetings to the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “I send regards to”
 ROM	16	3	xigr	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		**Greet** here and throughout [verses 3–16](../16/03.md) is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ROM	16	3	c5lg	translate-names	Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν	1	Priscilla and Aquila	The word **Prisca** is the name of a woman who is also called “Priscilla” in [Acts 18:2](../act/18/02.md). **Aquila** is the name of her husband. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2666,7 +2666,7 @@ ROM	16	3	fsk1	figs-explicit	τοὺς συνεργούς μου	1	my fellow work
 ROM	16	3	uo3a	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	in Christ Jesus	Here, **in Christ Jesus** could refer to: (1) the kind of work that **Prisca and Aquila** did with Paul. Alternate translation: “in the service of Christ Jesus” (2) being united with Christ, as this phrase is used in [3:24](../03/24.md); [6:11](../06/11.md), [23](../06/23.md); [8:1–2](../08/01.md), [39](../08/39.md); and [15:17](../15/17.md). Alternate translation: “who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	4	ilnn	figs-distinguish	οἵτινες ὑπὲρ τῆς ψυχῆς μου, τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν, οἷς οὐκ ἐγὼ μόνος εὐχαριστῶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	in Christ Jesus	This verse interrupts the main part of the sentence in [verses 3–5](../16/03.md) in order to give further information about Prisca and Aquila. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse as its own sentence and repeat the main verb of the previous verse in the next verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	16	4	fye8	figs-idiom	τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν	1		This phrase refers to doing something that would put someone in danger of being executed. Romans often executed people by chopping their heads off at the neck with an axe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “risked having their heads chopped off by the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ROM	16	4	xmf8	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ&εὐχαριστῶ	1		Here Paul speaks of expressing **thanks** as if they were something that he could **give** to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am thankful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM	16	4	xmf8	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & εὐχαριστῶ	1		Here Paul speaks of expressing **thanks** as if they were something that he could **give** to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am thankful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	5	i32d	figs-infostructure	καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Greet the church that is in their house	This clause continues the sentence that Paul began in [verse 3](../16/03.md) and interrupted in the previous verse. If you made the previous verse into its own sentence, then here you will need to add the main verb from [verse 3](../16/03.md). Alternate translation: “and greet the church based in their house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 ROM	16	5	d6i0	writing-pronouns	οἶκον αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **their** here refers to Prisca and Aquila. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of Prisca and Aquila” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ROM	16	5	qqdg	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
@@ -2681,14 +2681,14 @@ ROM	16	7	nvw5	figs-distinguish	οἳ	1	They are prominent among the apostles	Her
 ROM	16	7	ylvm	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	They are prominent among the apostles	Here, **in Christ** refers to being united with Christ. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	8	h976	translate-names	Ἀμπλιᾶτον	1	Ampliatus	The word **Ampliatus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	8	alh2	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [verse 2](../16/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	9	bd5l	translate-names	Οὐρβανὸν&Στάχυν	1	Urbanus … Stachys	The words **Urbanus** and **Stachys** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	9	bd5l	translate-names	Οὐρβανὸν & Στάχυν	1	Urbanus … Stachys	The words **Urbanus** and **Stachys** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	9	if0q	figs-explicit	τὸν συνεργὸν ἡμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	10	k55t	translate-names	Ἀπελλῆν&Ἀριστοβούλου	1	Apelles … Aristobulus	The words **Apelles** and **Aristobulus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	10	k55t	translate-names	Ἀπελλῆν & Ἀριστοβούλου	1	Apelles … Aristobulus	The words **Apelles** and **Aristobulus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	10	q96n	figs-activepassive	τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	the approved in Christ	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM	16	11	gt6r	translate-names	Ἡρῳδίωνα&Ναρκίσσου	1	Herodion … Narcissus	The words **Herodion** and **Narcissus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	11	gt6r	translate-names	Ἡρῳδίωνα & Ναρκίσσου	1	Herodion … Narcissus	The words **Herodion** and **Narcissus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	11	iifk	figs-explicit	τὸν συγγενῆ	1	Herodion … Narcissus	See how you translated “kinsmen” in [verse 7](../16/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	11	ket9	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	who are in the Lord	Here, **in the Lord** refers to being united to Christ and has the same meaning as “in Christ” in [verse 7](../16/07.md) and [3:24](../03/24.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM	16	12	sq9n	translate-names	Τρύφαιναν&Τρυφῶσαν&Περσίδα	1	Tryphaena … Tryphosa … Persis	The words **Tryphaena**, **Tryphosa**, and **Persis** are names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	12	sq9n	translate-names	Τρύφαιναν & Τρυφῶσαν & Περσίδα	1	Tryphaena … Tryphosa … Persis	The words **Tryphaena**, **Tryphosa**, and **Persis** are names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	12	vkh4	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	-1		See how you translated a similar use of **in the Lord** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	13	zmf4	translate-names	Ῥοῦφον	1	Rufus	The word **Rufus** is the name of a man. See how this name is translated in [Mark 15:21](../mrk/15/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	13	zy3x	figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2696,15 +2696,15 @@ ROM	16	13	hqf6	figs-metaphor	τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμο
 ROM	16	14	dwh9	translate-names	Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν	1	Asyncritus … Phlegon … Hermes … Patrobas … Hermas	These are names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	14	ck2w	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφούς	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	16	14	il54	figs-explicit	τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς ἀδελφούς	1		Here, **with them** implies that these people meet together as a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the brothers who meet with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	15	ye9j	translate-names	Φιλόλογον&Νηρέα&Ὀλυμπᾶν	1	Philologus … Nereus … Olympas	The words **Philologus**, **Nereus**, and **Olympas** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	15	ye9j	translate-names	Φιλόλογον & Νηρέα & Ὀλυμπᾶν	1	Philologus … Nereus … Olympas	The words **Philologus**, **Nereus**, and **Olympas** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	15	n2rx	translate-names	Ἰουλίαν	1	Julia	The word **Julia** is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of **Philologus**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	15	j4uu	figs-explicit	τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς πάντας ἁγίους	1	Julia	See how you translated **with them** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	16	nxka	figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1		See how you translated **Greet** in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 ROM	16	16	g2z1	translate-unknown	φιλήματι ἁγίῳ	1	a holy kiss	Here, **a holy kiss** describes a **kiss** that believers would give to other believers (that is why it is **holy**). In Paul’s culture, this was an appropriate way to greet someone with whom one was very close, such as a family member or a good friend. You could use a greeting that is used by close friends or family members and clarify that here it is used in a **holy** or Christian way. Alternate translation: “with a Christian hug” or “in warm way that is appropriate for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ROM	16	16	t1q4	figs-hyperbole	ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	All the churches of Christ greet you	**All** here could refer to: (1) all the **churches** that were in the area where Paul was working when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ in this region” (2) all the **churches** that Paul had authority over or represented. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ that I represent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ROM	16	17	wx6r	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated this word in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ROM	16	17	ztv5	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς διχοστασίας&τὰ σκάνδαλα&τὴν διδαχὴν	1	to think about	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **divisions**, **obstacles**, and **teaching**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what divides … what obstructs … what is taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ROM	16	17	n59l	figs-explicit	τὰς διχοστασίας&ποιοῦντας	1	who are causing the divisions and obstacles	This phrase refers to causing believers to argue with each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	17	ztv5	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς διχοστασίας & τὰ σκάνδαλα & τὴν διδαχὴν	1	to think about	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **divisions**, **obstacles**, and **teaching**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what divides … what obstructs … what is taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	17	n59l	figs-explicit	τὰς διχοστασίας & ποιοῦντας	1	who are causing the divisions and obstacles	This phrase refers to causing believers to argue with each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	17	atil	figs-metaphor	τὰ σκάνδαλα	1		See how you translated “trap” in [11:9](../11/09.md) and [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	17	j9x7	figs-explicit	παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε	1	They are going beyond the teaching that you have learned	This clause could refer to: (1) the **traps**. Alternate translation: “which are contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (2) the means by which these people are **causing divisions and traps**. Alternate translation: “by doing what is contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	17	b318	figs-metaphor	ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Turn away from them	Here, **turn away** refers to avoiding someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “avoid them completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2716,34 +2716,34 @@ ROM	16	18	nxn4	figs-metonymy	τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	but their own
 ROM	16	18	gddw	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας	1	but their own stomach	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **speech** and **flattery**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “through speaking smoothly and flatteringly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	18	c2je	figs-metonymy	τὰς καρδίας	1	they deceive the hearts of the innocent	See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 ROM	16	19	vqml	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. **For** here indicates that was follows is one reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command to “watch out for” and “turn away from” false teachers. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Watch out for and turn away from these people since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ROM	16	19	imc7	figs-personification	ἡ&ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο	1	For your obedience reaches everyone	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ **obedience** as if it were a person who could go to people. He means that many people had heard about their **obedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your obedience has been heard about by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ROM	16	19	o1b9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ&τὸ ἀγαθόν&τὸ κακόν	1		See how you translated **obedience** in [5:19](../05/19.md) and **good** and **evil** in [7:19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	19	imc7	figs-personification	ἡ & ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο	1	For your obedience reaches everyone	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ **obedience** as if it were a person who could go to people. He means that many people had heard about their **obedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your obedience has been heard about by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ROM	16	19	o1b9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ & τὸ ἀγαθόν & τὸ κακόν	1		See how you translated **obedience** in [5:19](../05/19.md) and **good** and **evil** in [7:19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	19	gj2r	figs-hyperbole	πάντας	1	For your obedience reaches everyone	Here, **everyone** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show that many believers had heard about the **obedience** of the Roman believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ROM	16	20	bnni	figs-possession	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1		See how you translated this phrase in [15:33](../15/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ROM	16	20	bnni	figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1		See how you translated this phrase in [15:33](../15/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	16	20	s3cq	figs-metaphor	συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν	1	The God of peace will soon crush Satan under your feet	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers having victory over **Satan** as if they would **crush** him **under** their **feet**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause you to have complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	20	qpr7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τάχει. ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **haste** and **grace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “hastily. May the Lord Jesus Christ act graciously toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	20	btor		ἐν τάχει	1		The phrase translated as **with haste** can also refer to something happening after a short time period. Alternate translation: “in a short time” or “soon”
 ROM	16	20	oo2r	translate-blessing	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1		As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Roman believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ” or “I pray that you will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 ROM	16	21	z4g3	figs-explicit	ὁ συνεργός μου	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 3](../16/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	21	ku15	translate-names	Λούκιος&Ἰάσων&Σωσίπατρος	1	Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater	The words **Lucius**, **Jason**, and **Sosipater** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	21	ku15	translate-names	Λούκιος & Ἰάσων & Σωσίπατρος	1	Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater	The words **Lucius**, **Jason**, and **Sosipater** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	21	km7u	figs-explicit	οἱ συγγενεῖς μου	1		See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../16/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	21	wvzj		ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς	1		As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
 ROM	16	22	pijj	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν	1		This clause means that **Tertius** wrote down the words that Paul told him to write in this letter. In ancient times it was common for people to use scribes to physically  write dictated letters for them. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “I, Tertius, am the person who wrote down what Paul told me to write in this epistle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	22	g8li	figs-123person	ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν, ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		**I** here refers to **Tertius**, who writes this verse. Unlike elsewhere in this letter, it does not refer to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the third person in this verse. Alternate translation: “Tertius, who wrote this epistle, greets you in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 ROM	16	22	xu3q	translate-names	Τέρτιος	1	Tertius, who write this epistle	The word **Tertius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	22	nx4g	figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	greet you in the Lord	See how you translated the similar use of **in the Lord** in [verse 2](../16/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM	16	23	sw7r	translate-names	Γάϊος&Ἔραστος&Κούαρτος	1	Gaius … Erastus … Quartus	The words **Gaius**, **Erastus**, and **Quartus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ROM	16	23	sw7r	translate-names	Γάϊος & Ἔραστος & Κούαρτος	1	Gaius … Erastus … Quartus	The words **Gaius**, **Erastus**, and **Quartus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ROM	16	23	j9u7	figs-explicit	ὁ ξένος μου, καὶ ὅλης τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	the host	This phrase indicates that the home of **Gaius** was where Paul and his fellow believers gathered to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who hosts me and the whole church in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	23	m5hg	figs-explicit	ὁ οἰκονόμος	1	the treasurer	Here, **steward** refers to the person who takes care of the money for **the city** in which Paul is staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the treasurer” or “the one who administrates the finances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	23	fnet	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφός	1	the treasurer	Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated **brother** in [14:10](../14/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 ROM	16	24	ct9t	translate-textvariants	Ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ χριστοῦ μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν. Ἀμήν	1	the treasurer	This verse is not in the best earliest manuscripts. It seems to be an accidental repetition of the last part of [verse 20](../16/20.md). It has been included in the ULT, but it is marked off with square brackets (\\[ \\]) at the beginning and end. If possible, do not include this addition in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 ROM	16	25	xma1			0		[Verses 25–27](../16/25.md) are one long sentence. If you divide this sentence into shorter sentences, then you will need to repeat part of [verse 27](../16/27.md) in [verse 25](../16/25.md), as the UST does.
 ROM	16	25	v71l		δὲ	1	Now	**Now** here marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you could use it here.
-ROM	16	25	xgkv	figs-explicit	τῷ&δυναμένῳ ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1		Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who is able to establish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM	16	25	xgkv	figs-explicit	τῷ & δυναμένῳ ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1		Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who is able to establish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	25	pp5k	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1	to strengthen you	Here Paul speaks of God strengthening a person’s faith as if God were establishing that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ROM	16	25	kmw1	figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** message that he preached. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	16	25	yprj	figs-possession	τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **preaching** that is about **Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the preaching about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ROM	16	25	wyyl	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κήρυγμα&ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **preaching**, **revelation**, and **mystery**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is preached … what is revealed of what is mysterious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	25	wyyl	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κήρυγμα & ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **preaching**, **revelation**, and **mystery**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is preached … what is revealed of what is mysterious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	25	vyj4	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1		Here, **according to** indicates that what follows is what Paul’s preaching is based on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the revelation of the mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ROM	16	25	s5ky	translate-unknown	μυστηρίου	1	according to the revelation of the mystery that had been kept secret for long ages	Here Paul uses the word **mystery** to refer to God’s plan to save people, which was revealed in the **gospel**. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, that God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use **mystery** to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 ROM	16	25	n6c1	figs-activepassive	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the mystery that God has now revealed, yet had kept secret for long ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2751,7 +2751,7 @@ ROM	16	25	bgqm	figs-distinguish	χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημ
 ROM	16	26	d7r5	figs-distinguish	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν	1		This clause gives further information about “the mystery,” which is also the “gospel” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “but now that mystery has been revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 ROM	16	26	kgs8	figs-activepassive	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but now God has revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ROM	16	26	vrul	figs-infostructure	διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1		The word translated as **and** here indicates that the following four phrases are connected to the fifth phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and having been made known through the prophetic writings, according to the command of the eternal God, to the obedience of faith, to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-ROM	16	26	efyy	figs-abstractnouns	Γραφῶν προφητικῶν&ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **writings**, **command**, **obedience**, and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what was written by the prophets … what the eternal God commanded, to be obedient of what is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM	16	26	efyy	figs-abstractnouns	Γραφῶν προφητικῶν & ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **writings**, **command**, **obedience**, and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what was written by the prophets … what the eternal God commanded, to be obedient of what is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 ROM	16	26	fbr6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1		Here, **to** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the obedience of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 ROM	16	26	lc6d	figs-possession	ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	to bring about the obedience of faith	See how you translated this phrase in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 ROM	16	26	cvi3	figs-activepassive	γνωρισθέντος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having made known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
index b4c4035db9..9fab291a66 100644
--- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
@@ -6,8 +6,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	1	qvn5	figs-possession	διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the will** that **God** has. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that this phrase refers to what God wills with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because God desired this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	1	xfbo	figs-explicit	καὶ Σωσθένης	1		This phrase means that **Sosthenes** is with Paul, and Paul writes the letter for both of them. It does not mean that Sosthenes was the scribe who wrote the letter down. It also does not mean that Sosthenes dictated the letter with Paul, since Paul uses the first-person singular more than the first-person plural in the letter. If there is a way in your language to indicate that Paul writes on behalf of Sosthenes, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “and I write on behalf of Sosthenes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	1	1	n9zv	translate-names	Σωσθένης	1		**Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1CO	1	2	r9kg	figs-123person	τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ&τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	to the church of God at Corinth	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you who are members of the church of God at Corinth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1CO	1	2	e75p	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένοις ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ&κλητοῖς ἁγίοις	1	those who have been sanctified in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** and **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying” and “calling.” If you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” does them. Alternate translation: “whom God has sanctified in Christ Jesus, and whom God has called to be saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	1	2	r9kg	figs-123person	τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ & τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	to the church of God at Corinth	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you who are members of the church of God at Corinth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	1	2	e75p	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένοις ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ & κλητοῖς ἁγίοις	1	those who have been sanctified in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** and **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying” and “calling.” If you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” does them. Alternate translation: “whom God has sanctified in Christ Jesus, and whom God has called to be saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	2	lp42	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ, could explain: (1) the means by which God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	1	2	nz5s	figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1		Here Paul describes all believers as if they were **in every place**. He speaks this way to emphasize that believers can be found in many countries, towns, and villages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **in every place** to indicate that believers are found in many places around the world. Alternate translation: “in many places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	1	2	l21m	figs-idiom	ἐπικαλουμένοις τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	those who call on the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	The **calling on the name of** someone is an idiom that refers to worshiping and praying to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who pray to and venerate our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -49,13 +49,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	10	tjkg	translate-unknown	κατηρτισμένοι	1		Here, **joined together** refers to putting something into its proper position or state, often returning it to that state. Here, then, it refers to restoring the community to the unity it had and is supposed to have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this word with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “restored to your previous unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	10	emt2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοῒ καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ γνώμῃ	1	be joined together with the same mind and by the same purpose	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mind** and **purpose**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “think” and “decide” or “choose.” Alternate translation: “by thinking the same things and by choosing the same things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	1	11	dtsp	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, **For** introduces the reason why Paul is urging them to become united together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for** with a short phrase to express the idea. Alternate translation: “I speak this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	1	11	tayn	figs-activepassive	ἐδηλώθη&μοι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί μου, ὑπὸ τῶν Χλόης	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what was **made clear** rather than the people making it **clear**. Alternate translation: “those of Chloe have made it clear to me concerning you, my brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	1	11	tayn	figs-activepassive	ἐδηλώθη & μοι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί μου, ὑπὸ τῶν Χλόης	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what was **made clear** rather than the people making it **clear**. Alternate translation: “those of Chloe have made it clear to me concerning you, my brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	11	ur84	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί μου	1		Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	1	11	e8jb	figs-explicit	τῶν Χλόης	1	Chloe’s people	Here, **those of Chloe** refers to people who are connected to Chloe and probably live in her house or work for her. Paul does not tell us whether they are family members, slaves, or employees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a word or phrase that indicates that these people are related to or dependent on Chloe. Alternate translation: “people connected to Chloe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	1	11	fd71	translate-names	Χλόης	1		**Chloe** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1CO	1	11	vbe6	translate-unknown	ἔριδες ἐν ὑμῖν εἰσιν	1	there are factions among you	Here, **factions** refers to quarrels or strife among groups within a community. These quarrels or fights are not physical but verbal. If possible, use a word that refers to verbal conflict or express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you have verbal fights with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	12	umbx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** introduces a further explanation of what Paul started talking about in [1:11](../01/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	1	12	tsn6	figs-idiom	λέγω&τοῦτο,	1		Here Paul uses the phrase **I say this** to explain what he meant in the previous verse when he mentioned “factions” ([1:11](../01/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable idiom for explaining what has already been said or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “what I mean is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	1	12	tsn6	figs-idiom	λέγω & τοῦτο,	1		Here Paul uses the phrase **I say this** to explain what he meant in the previous verse when he mentioned “factions” ([1:11](../01/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable idiom for explaining what has already been said or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “what I mean is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	1	12	a4lo	figs-explicitinfo	τοῦτο, ὅτι	1		Having both **this** and **that** in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a simpler way to introduce what Paul wants to **say**. Alternate translation: “that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 1CO	1	12	wf0n	figs-hyperbole	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν λέγει	1		Here Paul uses **each of you** to emphasize that many individuals within the Corinthian congregation are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that each person says all four of these things. He also does not mean that every single person in the church is making these kinds of claims. Finally, he does not mean that these are the only four claims that they are making. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the form that Paul uses with an expression that singles out many individuals within a group, and you could add a phrase that indicates that these are examples of what they are saying. Alternate translation: “people in your group are saying things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	1	12	bfd0	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1		If you cannot use this quotation form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that you are of Paul, or you are of Apollos, or you are of Cephas, or you are of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	13	tii7	figs-activepassive	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **baptized** rather than whoever does the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Or did they baptize you in the name of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	13	zi1y	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου	1	in the name of Paul	Here Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used the **name of Paul**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. Instead, he implicitly asserts that they belong to God, whose name would have been used when they were baptized. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this word by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the authority of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	1	14	hhh8	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδένα ὑμῶν ἐβάπτισα, εἰ μὴ	1	none of you, except	If it would appear in your language that Paul is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword the sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I baptized only two of you:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-1CO	1	14	vqq6	translate-names	Κρίσπον&Γάϊον	1	Crispus	**Crispus** and **Gaius** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1CO	1	14	vqq6	translate-names	Κρίσπον & Γάϊον	1	Crispus	**Crispus** and **Gaius** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1CO	1	15	hv3m	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This was so that no one would say that you were baptized into my name	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose or result. In this case, it introduces what results from Paul not baptizing many of the Corinthians. Because he did not baptize almost any of them, they cannot say that they were baptized into his name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word that indicates result, and you could specify that it is the result of Paul not baptizing many of them. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “The result is that” or “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1CO	1	15	dwdv	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **baptized** rather than whoever does the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone baptized you into my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	15	u8f6	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα	1		Here, just as in [1:13](../01/13.md), Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used Paul’s **name**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this word by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -79,17 +79,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	16	nlzn	translate-unknown	οὐκ οἶδα εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα	1		This statement expresses more or less confidence about how many people Paul **baptized**. It could mean that Paul is: (1) relatively confident that he has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I think that this is everyone that I baptized” (2) less confident that he has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I do not remember if I baptized any others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	16	qbjf	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ	1		Paul here uses the condition introduced by **if** because he wishes to acknowledge that he thinks he has mentioned everyone that he baptized, but he is not sure. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word with a word that expresses uncertainty. Alternate translation: “whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	1	17	jkfj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces an explanation for why Paul has baptized so few people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word that introduces an explanation, and you could clarify that it explains how little he baptizes. Alternate translation: “I only baptized a few people, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	1	17	ga5k	figs-infostructure	οὐ&ἀπέστειλέν με Χριστὸς βαπτίζειν, ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1		If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them and introduce **not with wise speech** by repeating **proclaim**. Alternate translation: “Christ sent me to proclaim the gospel, not to baptize. I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	1	17	ga5k	figs-infostructure	οὐ & ἀπέστειλέν με Χριστὸς βαπτίζειν, ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1		If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them and introduce **not with wise speech** by repeating **proclaim**. Alternate translation: “Christ sent me to proclaim the gospel, not to baptize. I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	1	17	tg7i	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1	Christ did not send me to baptize	In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If you do need these words in your language, you could repeat the “sending” language. Alternate translation: “but he sent me to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	1	17	p3cf	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If you do need these words in your language, you could repeat the “proclaiming” language. Alternate translation: “I do not proclaim it with wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	1	17	u60s	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul does not use “wise speech.” Here, you could use a word or phrase that normally indicates purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1CO	1	17	zn1n	figs-metaphor	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	clever speech … the cross of Christ should not be emptied of its power	Here Paul speaks as if the **cross of Christ** were a container that was full of power and which he does not wish to empty of that power. By this, he means that he does not want to take away the power that the cross and the message about it have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly, including the idea of power. Alternate translation: “the cross of Christ would not lose its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	1	17	qdyj	figs-activepassive	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **cross** that could be **emptied** rather than the person doing the “emptying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself would do it. Alternate translation: “I would not empty the cross of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	18	j7cw	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **For** introduces an explanation of the last part of [1:17](../01/17.md). In this verse, then, Paul explains further why he does not use wise speech. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with words that introduce an explanation, and you could briefly restate what Paul is explaining. Alternate translation: “I speak in this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	1	18	fq4x	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος&ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	the message about the cross	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **word** or a teaching that is about **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that the **cross** is the content of the **word**. Alternate translation: “the word about the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	1	18	fq4x	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος & ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	the message about the cross	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **word** or a teaching that is about **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that the **cross** is the content of the **word**. Alternate translation: “the word about the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	18	utr3	figs-metonymy	τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		Here, the word **cross** stands for the event in which Jesus died on the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include Jesus’ death in your translation. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	1	18	p4wb	figs-abstractnouns	μωρία ἐστίν	1	is foolishness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **foolishness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “foolish.” Alternate translation: “seems foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	1	18	lq5z	figs-activepassive	τοῖς&ἀπολλυμένοις	1	to those who are dying	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the ones perishing** rather than focusing on the person who makes them “perish.” If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) they cause or experience the action. Alternate translation: “to those who will experience destruction” (2) God does the action. Alternate translation: “to those whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	1	18	lq5z	figs-activepassive	τοῖς & ἀπολλυμένοις	1	to those who are dying	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the ones perishing** rather than focusing on the person who makes them “perish.” If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) they cause or experience the action. Alternate translation: “to those who will experience destruction” (2) God does the action. Alternate translation: “to those whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	18	ao4m	figs-activepassive	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the ones being saved** rather than the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “but to us whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	18	m66w	figs-distinguish	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		The description **the ones being saved** distinguishes **us** from everyone else. It is not just adding information. Use a form in your language that shows that this is a distinguishing phrase. Alternate translation: “but to us, that is, the ones who are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1CO	1	18	ji74	figs-possession	δύναμις Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	it is the power of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God working in power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -97,41 +97,41 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	19	wx5x	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Isaiah has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	19	tzmj	writing-quotations	γέγραπται γάρ	1		In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Isaiah 29:14](../isa/29/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in Isaiah” or “For it says in the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	1	19	tc6n	figs-quotations	ἀπολῶ τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν, καὶ τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν ἀθετήσω	1	I will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this direct quote as an indirect quote, specifying that God is the subject and including an introductory word such as “that.” Alternate translation: “that God will destroy the wisdom of the wise, and he will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	1	19	kzb0	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν&τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν	1		In both of these clauses, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** or **understanding** that belongs to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that **wisdom** and **understanding** belong to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that the wise have … the understanding that the intelligent have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	1	19	gft6	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν&τῶν συνετῶν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the people who are wise … of the people who are intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	1	19	kzb0	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν & τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν	1		In both of these clauses, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** or **understanding** that belongs to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that **wisdom** and **understanding** belong to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that the wise have … the understanding that the intelligent have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	1	19	gft6	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν & τῶν συνετῶν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the people who are wise … of the people who are intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	1	19	pa5n	translate-unknown	τῶν συνετῶν	1		Here, **intelligent** describes someone who is good at figuring out problems, understanding new ideas, and making smart decisions. Use a word in your language that gets this general idea across. Alternate translation: “of the smart” or “of the clever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	20	m6tf	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σοφός? ποῦ γραμματεύς? ποῦ συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου?	1	Where is the wise person? Where is the scholar? Where is the debater of this world?	With these questions, Paul is not actually asking about the location of certain people. Rather, he is suggesting to the Corinthians that these kinds of people cannot be found. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions with statements that: (1) assert that these people do not actually have real wisdom, knowledge, or skill. Alternate translation: “The wise person does not really have wisdom. The scholar does not really know much. The debater of this age is not really good at arguing” (2) assert that these people do not exist. Alternate translation: “There is no wise person. There is no scholar. There is no debater of this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	1	20	h0qa	figs-genericnoun	σοφός&γραμματεύς&συνζητητὴς	1		Paul uses these singular nouns to identify types of people, but he does not mean just one **wise person**, **scholar**, or **debater**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that identifies a type of person, or you could translate these nouns in plural form. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who has wisdom … the kind of person who is a scholar … the kind of person who is a debater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	1	20	h0qa	figs-genericnoun	σοφός & γραμματεύς & συνζητητὴς	1		Paul uses these singular nouns to identify types of people, but he does not mean just one **wise person**, **scholar**, or **debater**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that identifies a type of person, or you could translate these nouns in plural form. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who has wisdom … the kind of person who is a scholar … the kind of person who is a debater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	1	20	mzxx	figs-possession	συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **debater** who is part of **this age**. In fact, Paul may mean that the **wise person** and the **scholar** also belong to **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the debater, who belongs in this age” or “the debater? All these kinds of people belong to this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	20	u5j5	translate-unknown	συνζητητὴς	1	the debater	Here, **debater** refers to a person who spends much of their time arguing about beliefs, values, or actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word with a short phrase or a term that expresses this idea better. Alternate translation: “the disputant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	20	a7zl	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου?	1	Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a statement. Alternate translation: “ God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	1	20	y5wx	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that seems wise according to the standard of this **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	21	cihg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces an explanation of how God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness ([1:20](../01/20.md)). You could use a word that introduces an explanation in your language or a short phrase that identifies that this verse explains the previous verse. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	1	21	eauj	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπειδὴ&οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		Here, **since** introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, which , begins with **God was pleased**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1CO	1	21	eauj	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπειδὴ & οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		Here, **since** introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, which , begins with **God was pleased**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	1	21	tnez	figs-possession	ἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that **God** uses when he makes decisions or acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by adding “plans” or “thinking” and translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in God’s wise plan” or ”in God’s wise thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	21	odyk	figs-synecdoche	ὁ κόσμος	1		Here Paul uses **the world** to refer to the humans that are part of the **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word by translating **the world** with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	1	21	d7xw	figs-possession	τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος	1	those who believe	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **preaching** that is characterized by **foolishness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by translating **foolishness** as an adjective describing **the preaching** or the content of **the preaching**. Alternate translation: “the foolish preaching” or “the foolish message that we preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	21	lkk1	figs-irony	τῆς μωρίας	1		Paul describes the **preaching** as **foolishness**. He does not actually think his message is foolish. Instead, he speaks from the perspective of **the world** and its **wisdom**, because the message is foolish to **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this way of speaking with an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “the so-called foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	1	22	j8nh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐπειδὴ καὶ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **For** sets up the contrast between this verse and what Paul says in the next verse. If your language has a way to begin a contrast, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “It is indeed true that Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	1	22	e1sy	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαῖοι&Ἕλληνες	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Greeks**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Greek person does these things. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that not all **Jews** and **Greeks** are meant. Alternate translation: “most Jews … most Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1CO	1	22	e1sy	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαῖοι & Ἕλληνες	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Greeks**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Greek person does these things. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that not all **Jews** and **Greeks** are meant. Alternate translation: “most Jews … most Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	1	22	t32r	translate-unknown	Ἕλληνες	1		Here, **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word with a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	23	q8sj	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here Paul uses **But** to continue the contrast he set up in [1:22](../01/22.md). Jews seek signs, and Greeks seek wisdom, but Paul and those like him proclaim that the Messiah was crucified. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that indicates a strong contrast between behavior or beliefs. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	1	23	v9fa	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	General Information:	Here, **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	1	23	ntu3	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον	1	Christ crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Christ** who was **crucified** rather than the person doing the “crucifying.” If you must state who does the action, you can express the idea with: (1) **Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “that Christ laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “that they crucified Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	23	krw3	figs-metaphor	σκάνδαλον	1	a stumbling block	Paul uses **stumbling block** to indicate that the message about “Christ crucified” causes offense or repulses many Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “a repulsive concept” or “an unacceptable idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	1	23	n6u2	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαίοις&ἔθνεσιν	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Gentiles**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Gentile person responds to the gospel in these ways. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Gentile. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that not all **Jews** and **Gentiles** are meant. Alternate translation: “to most Jews … to most Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1CO	1	23	n6u2	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαίοις & ἔθνεσιν	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Gentiles**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Gentile person responds to the gospel in these ways. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Gentile. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that not all **Jews** and **Gentiles** are meant. Alternate translation: “to most Jews … to most Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	1	24	xgw1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here Paul uses **But** to contrast **the called** and the “Jews” and “Gentiles” in [1:23](../01/23.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that contrasts people and their thinking. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	1	24	i7l4	figs-infostructure	αὐτοῖς&τοῖς κλητοῖς, Ἰουδαίοις τε καὶ Ἕλλησιν, Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Paul here puts the people he is talking about first before he makes a statement about them. If this is unnatural in your language, you could: (1) phrase the sentence so that **the called** is the subject of the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, know that Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” (2) move **to the called** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	1	24	h7iw	figs-123person	αὐτοῖς&τοῖς κλητοῖς	1	to those whom God has called	Paul uses the third person to speak about those whom God has called, because he is speaking of the group as a category in comparison with Jews who find the gospel a stumbling block and Gentiles who find the gospel to be foolish. He does not use the third person because he excludes himself or the Corinthians from this category. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with the first person. Alternate translation: “to those of us who are called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	1	24	i7l4	figs-infostructure	αὐτοῖς & τοῖς κλητοῖς, Ἰουδαίοις τε καὶ Ἕλλησιν, Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Paul here puts the people he is talking about first before he makes a statement about them. If this is unnatural in your language, you could: (1) phrase the sentence so that **the called** is the subject of the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, know that Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” (2) move **to the called** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	1	24	h7iw	figs-123person	αὐτοῖς & τοῖς κλητοῖς	1	to those whom God has called	Paul uses the third person to speak about those whom God has called, because he is speaking of the group as a category in comparison with Jews who find the gospel a stumbling block and Gentiles who find the gospel to be foolish. He does not use the third person because he excludes himself or the Corinthians from this category. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with the first person. Alternate translation: “to those of us who are called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	1	24	appp	figs-activepassive	τοῖς κλητοῖς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “whom God has called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	24	pt5x	translate-unknown	Ἕλλησιν	1		Here, **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word with a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	24	hu1s	figs-metonymy	Χριστὸν	1	Christ as the power and the wisdom of God	Here, the word **Christ** could refer to: (1) the message about the work of Christ. Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (2) the work of Christ, especially his death. Alternate translation: “Christ’s work” or “Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	1	24	w9vm	figs-possession	Θεοῦ δύναμιν	1	the power … of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God acting powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	24	p1hu	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1	the wisdom of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that **God** is the source of the **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “wisdom from God” or “God giving wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	25	fst8	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, **For** introduces the reason why the seemingly foolish message about Christ is power and wisdom ([1:24](../01/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word that introduces a reason or a short phrase that connects this verse to the previous verse or verses. Alternate translation: “God works through foolishness because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	1	25	h9hh	figs-irony	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ&τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than people	Paul describes God as having **foolishness** and **weakness**. He does not actually think that God is weak and foolish, but he is speaking of them from the perspective of the world and its wisdom. From the perspective of the world, Paul’s God is indeed foolish and weak. What Paul means to say is that what the world sees as **foolishness** and **weakness** is still **wiser** and **stronger** than anything that humans have to offer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this way of speaking with an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “the apparent foolishness of God … the apparent weakness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+1CO	1	25	h9hh	figs-irony	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ & τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than people	Paul describes God as having **foolishness** and **weakness**. He does not actually think that God is weak and foolish, but he is speaking of them from the perspective of the world and its wisdom. From the perspective of the world, Paul’s God is indeed foolish and weak. What Paul means to say is that what the world sees as **foolishness** and **weakness** is still **wiser** and **stronger** than anything that humans have to offer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this way of speaking with an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “the apparent foolishness of God … the apparent weakness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	1	25	esc9	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	-1		The words translated **men** in both places in this verse do not refer just to male people. Rather, Paul means any human of any sex. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **men** to refer to both genders or use a gender-neutral word. Alternate translation: “women and men … women and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	1	25	jydy	figs-possession	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ&ἐστίν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **foolishness** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **foolishness**. Alternate translation: “the foolish things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	1	25	jydy	figs-possession	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ & ἐστίν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **foolishness** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **foolishness**. Alternate translation: “the foolish things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	25	uciw	figs-ellipsis	σοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν	1		Paul does not include all the words that are needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If you do need these words in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the wisdom.” Alternate translation: “is wiser than the wisdom of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	1	25	gnpe	figs-possession	τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weakness** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by translating this idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **weakness**. Alternate translation: “the weak things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	25	i7pl	figs-ellipsis	ἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Paul does not include all the words that are needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If you do need these words in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the strength.” Alternate translation: “stronger than the strength of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -144,11 +144,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	26	pws2	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	wise according to the flesh	Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase by stating the idiom **according to the flesh** with a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	1	27	qjvd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here Paul uses **But** to introduce a contrast. He is contrasting **God chose the foolish things** with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how **God chose the foolish things** with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by clarifying that Paul writes **But** to contrast this statement with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	1	27	qv5l	figs-parallelism	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ τοὺς σοφούς; καὶ τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ τὰ ἰσχυρά	1	God chose … wise. God chose … strong	Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **foolish** goes with **weak** and **wise** goes with **strong**. These two statements are almost synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one. Alternate translation: “God chose the unimportant things of the world in order that he might shame the important things” or “God chose the foolish and weak things of the world in order that he might shame the wise and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1CO	1	27	r4ly	figs-possession	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου&τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου	1		Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish things** and **weak things** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	1	27	r4ly	figs-possession	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου & τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου	1		Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish things** and **weak things** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	1	27	gdob	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	-1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the world** with an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people … of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	1	27	iwho	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	-1		Here, **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “so that … so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “with the result that … with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1CO	1	27	vtzx	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφούς&τὰ ἰσχυρά	1		Paul uses the adjective **wise** to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective **strong** to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	1	28	tqxg	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου&ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός,&ἵνα	1		In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of the previous verse. He does this because, in his culture, repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than using just one example. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in [1:27](../01/27.md). You could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1CO	1	27	vtzx	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφούς & τὰ ἰσχυρά	1		Paul uses the adjective **wise** to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective **strong** to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	1	28	tqxg	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου & ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, & ἵνα	1		In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of the previous verse. He does this because, in his culture, repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than using just one example. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in [1:27](../01/27.md). You could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1CO	1	28	k3kd	translate-unknown	τὰ ἀγενῆ	1	what is low and despised	Here, **base things** is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in [1:26](../01/26.md). Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **base things** with a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	28	d5pa	translate-unknown	τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		While **base things** refers to a person’s status or a thing’s status, the word translated **despised things** refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says **despised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **despised things** with a word or phrase that refers to how people mistreat others of lower status. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	28	wir6	figs-possession	τὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		Here Paul uses **of the world** to describe both **the base things** and **the despised things**. As in [1:27](../01/27.md), he uses the possessive form to clarify that **base things and the despised things** are only **base** and **despised** from the perspective of the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **of the world**with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -158,16 +158,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	1	28	f9s5	translate-unknown	καταργήσῃ	1		Here, **he might bring to nothing** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God has made **the things that are** unimportant and without function because he instead worked through **the things that are not**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **bring to nothing** with a word or phrase that indicates that a person has acted so that something else is no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “he might tear down” or “render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	1	28	etjg	figs-idiom	τὰ ὄντα	1		In this context, **the {things that} are** does not refer primarily to things that exist. Rather, it refers primarily to things that are important in society and culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the {things that} are** with a comparable phrase that refers to important or significant things and people in your culture. Alternate translation: “the things that people care about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	1	29	unr6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως	1		Here, **so that** introduces a final goal. In [1:28–29](../01/28.md), Paul uses “in order that” to introduce immediate goals, but here, **so that** is the overall goal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **so that** with a word or phrase that introduces a final or overall goal, making sure to distinguish it from the words you used in [1:28–29](../01/28.md), if possible. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1CO	1	29	q4gh	figs-idiom	μὴ&πᾶσα σὰρξ	1		Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to humans. Unlike in many other places in his letters, **flesh** does not indicate sinful and weak humanity. Instead, it simply refers to humans compared to their creator, God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh** with a word or phrase that commonly refers to people in general, especially if it includes the idea that people are created by God. Alternate translation: “no creature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	1	29	q4gh	figs-idiom	μὴ & πᾶσα σὰρξ	1		Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to humans. Unlike in many other places in his letters, **flesh** does not indicate sinful and weak humanity. Instead, it simply refers to humans compared to their creator, God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh** with a word or phrase that commonly refers to people in general, especially if it includes the idea that people are created by God. Alternate translation: “no creature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	1	29	fdv5	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of people not boasting **before God**, as if they were standing in front of **God**. With this way of talking, Paul means that people are acting as if they could see God and God could see them. This means that they recognize that God knows what they say and do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable phrase that indicates that someone recognizes that God knows what they are doing and thinking. Alternate translation: “when they know that God sees them” or “while God looks on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	1	30	yk4y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a slight contrast between people who might boast and the Corinthians who are united to Christ. However, **But** primarily means that Paul is moving to the next step in his argument. If **But** would not express this idea in your language, you could use a word that indicates that the author is moving on to the next step, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	1	30	fmr3	figs-activepassive	ἐξ αὐτοῦ&ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	because of him	While **because of him, you are in Christ Jesus** is not written the way most passive sentences are, this construction is like a passive sentence and may be difficult to represent in your language. What **because of him** means is that God is the source of how the Corinthians **are in Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase these words so that “God” is the subject who makes it so that **you are in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “he puts you in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	1	30	fmr3	figs-activepassive	ἐξ αὐτοῦ & ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	because of him	While **because of him, you are in Christ Jesus** is not written the way most passive sentences are, this construction is like a passive sentence and may be difficult to represent in your language. What **because of him** means is that God is the source of how the Corinthians **are in Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase these words so that “God” is the subject who makes it so that **you are in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “he puts you in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	30	alyj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **of him** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express to whom **him** refers with the name “God” here. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	1	30	a986	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ Jesus, explains how **Christ Jesus** can be **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	1	30	f1at	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις;	1	Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God	Here Paul uses language and structure that is very similar to what he used in [1:24](../01/24.md). Refer back to that verse to help you translate this verse. When Paul says that Jesus **was made for us wisdom** and **righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption**, he does not mean that Jesus has become these abstract ideas. Instead, he means that Jesus is the source of **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for **us** who are **in Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some clarifying words such as “the source of.” Alternate translation: “who was made for us the source of wisdom from God, the source of righteousness, and also the source of sanctification and redemption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	1	30	lxpy	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Christ Jesus**, who was **made for us wisdom**, rather than focusing on the person “making” him wisdom. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “whom God made for us wisdom from himself” or “whom God made to be wisdom for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	1	30	yyns	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		Here, **who** refers to **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of **Christ Jesus** instead of using **who** or along with **who**. Alternate translation: “the Christ who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	1	30	g5um	figs-abstractnouns	σοφία&ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption**, you can express the ideas by using verbs with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “a person through whom God taught us, judged us not guilty, and also set us apart for himself and set us free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	1	30	g5um	figs-abstractnouns	σοφία & ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption**, you can express the ideas by using verbs with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “a person through whom God taught us, judged us not guilty, and also set us apart for himself and set us free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	1	31	dm5h	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of everything he has said about God being the one who chooses and acts. If you use one of the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “Because of all this” or “Therefore” (2) the purpose for which God chose the weak and foolish. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	1	31	gtv0	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language does need these words, you could supply words such as “we should do.” Alternate translation: “so that we should behave just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	1	31	paga	figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		If it would be unnatural in your language to put **just as it is written** before the quotation, you could put **just as it is written** at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “‘Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord,’ just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -178,19 +178,19 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	2	intro	k86p			0		# 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br>      * Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5)<br>      * The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>### The Spirit<br><br>Paul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the nonphysical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>### The Mystery<br><br>Paul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The deep things of God<br><br>In [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The rulers of this age<br><br>In [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Just as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.<br><br>### First-person singular and plural<br><br>Paul uses the first-person singular in [2:1–5](../02/01.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first-person plural in [2:6–16](../02/06.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:6–16](../02/06.md), the first-person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first-person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	2	1	pxmq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, **And I** introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the gospel in weak and foolish ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	2	1	qvj7	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	2	1	koh8	figs-explicitinfo	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς&ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here Paul twice says that he has **come** to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Paul’s language. However, If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) translate the first **come** with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+1CO	2	1	koh8	figs-explicitinfo	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς & ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here Paul twice says that he has **come** to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Paul’s language. However, If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) translate the first **come** with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 1CO	2	1	o0vw	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		The phrase **having come to you** gives background information. It describes what happened before Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by clarifying by using a word that introduces action that has already occurred. Alternate translation: “after I came to you” or “when I came to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-1CO	2	1	mioj	figs-go	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς&ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here Paul is speaking about how he had previously visited the Corinthians. Use a form in your language that refers to a past visit. Alternate translation: “after arriving where you live, did not arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	2	1	mioj	figs-go	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς & ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here Paul is speaking about how he had previously visited the Corinthians. Use a form in your language that refers to a past visit. Alternate translation: “after arriving where you live, did not arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	2	1	o3ks	figs-possession	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **speech** and **wisdom** that have **superiority**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this form by translating **superiority** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “superior speech or superior wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	1	ikmt	translate-unknown	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		Here, **superiority** refers to how something or someone has more authority, skill, knowledge, or power than something or someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this word with a comparable word or a short description. Alternate translation: “greatness of speech or of wisdom” or “speech or wisdom that was better than what others have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	2	1	kxie	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	σοφίας, καταγγέλλων ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **proclaiming to you the mystery of God** gives the situation in which Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit by including a word that indicates that these things are happening at the same time. Alternate translation: “or wisdom when I proclaimed to you the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	2	1	nam8	figs-possession	τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mystery** that is: (1) revealed by God. Alternate translation: “the mystery given by God” or “the mystery from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the mystery about God” or “the mystery concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	1	xu7t	translate-textvariants	μυστήριον	1		In Paul’s language, **mystery** and “testimony” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “testimony” here, other early and important manuscripts have **mystery**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “testimony,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1CO	2	2	a2g9	figs-hyperbole	οὐ&ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν	1	I decided to know nothing … except Jesus Christ	Here Paul speaks as if he decides to forget all his knowledge and become ignorant of everything except **Jesus Christ**. This is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood as emphasis on Paul’s sharp focus on **Jesus Christ** as the one thing he wished to tell the Corinthians about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this exaggeration with a phrase that indicates that it is an exaggeration or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I decided to speak among you only about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-1CO	2	2	nk9r	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ&ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul makes a strong statement about knowing nothing and then contradicts it, you could reword this sentence so that there is no **except**. Alternate translation: “I decided that among you I would only know Jesus Christ and him crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+1CO	2	2	a2g9	figs-hyperbole	οὐ & ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν	1	I decided to know nothing … except Jesus Christ	Here Paul speaks as if he decides to forget all his knowledge and become ignorant of everything except **Jesus Christ**. This is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood as emphasis on Paul’s sharp focus on **Jesus Christ** as the one thing he wished to tell the Corinthians about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this exaggeration with a phrase that indicates that it is an exaggeration or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I decided to speak among you only about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1CO	2	2	nk9r	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ & ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul makes a strong statement about knowing nothing and then contradicts it, you could reword this sentence so that there is no **except**. Alternate translation: “I decided that among you I would only know Jesus Christ and him crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1CO	2	2	zvge	figs-activepassive	τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus Christ** who was **crucified** rather than the person doing the “crucifying.” If you must state who does the action, you can express the idea with: (1) **Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “how he laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “how they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	2	3	xen3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, **And I** is the same word Paul used to introduce [2:1](../02/01.md). It again introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul himself was weak and foolish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “Just as I did not use superior words and wisdom, I myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	2	3	s9lp		κἀγὼ&ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I was with you	Alternate translation: “And I remained with you”
+1CO	2	3	s9lp		κἀγὼ & ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I was with you	Alternate translation: “And I remained with you”
 1CO	2	3	e8li	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, καὶ ἐν φόβῳ, καὶ ἐν τρόμῳ πολλῷ,	1	in weakness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **weakness**, **fear**, and **trembling**, you can express the ideas by using adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “as a weak, fearful, and frequently trembling person” or “while I ailed, feared, and often trembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	2	4	lewv	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here Paul does not use the verb **{were}** in his sentence. In English, this word is essential, so it has been included in the ULT. If you can translate this sentence without **{were}**, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain **{were}** as it appears in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	2	4	g5my	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **word** and **proclamation**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “speak” or “talk” and “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “I spoke and proclaimed a message not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	2	6	xydl	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using language about the time in which the rulers have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	6	endk	translate-unknown	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		The **rulers of this age** could refer to: (1) humans who have power. Alternate translation: “of the people who rule this age” (2) spiritual beings that have power. Alternate translation: “of the spiritual powers that rule this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	2	6	tbnh	translate-unknown	τῶν καταργουμένων	1		Paul has already used the word translated **passing away** in [1:28](../01/28.md), where it is translated **bring to nothing**. Here, the word means that the **rulers** are becoming ineffective, useless, or irrelevant, which means that they will no longer have power. If possible, translate this word like you did in [1:28](../01/28.md). Alternate translation: “who are becoming ineffective” or “who are losing their power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	2	7	l064	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν&ἡμῶν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and anyone who preaches the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. However, the word **our** does include the Corinthians along with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	2	7	l064	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν & ἡμῶν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and anyone who preaches the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. However, the word **our** does include the Corinthians along with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	2	7	bsme	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that **God** would consider to be true **wisdom**. This also means that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by clarifying that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	7	wy8u	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea by using by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	2	7	xbye	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν μυστηρίῳ τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		Here Paul uses both **has been hidden** and **in a mystery**. Both of these phrases refer to something that is secret. If using both of these phrases is redundant in your language, you could use only one. Alternate translation: “that has been hidden” or “that is a mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	2	8	bw5i	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	2	8	imbk	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using language about the time in which **the rulers** have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	8	ur15	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** introduces Paul’s proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this word using a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	2	8	ji1o	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν;	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood {it}** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord of glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	2	8	ji1o	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν;	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood {it}** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord of glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	2	8	zc89	figs-possession	τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης	1	the Lord of glory	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Lord** who has **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by translating **glory** with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	9	fu1y	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love him	Here, **But** introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in [2:8](../02/08.md) about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood God’s wisdom. The **But** reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand God’s wisdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is no longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	2	9	wuar	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary in your language to form a complete thought. If necessary, you could supply a summary from [2:8](../02/08.md) of what the rulers did not understand and how they acted. Alternate translation: “But the rulers did not understand, just as it is written” or “But the rulers did do these things, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -244,14 +244,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	2	10	bhyv	translate-unknown	τὰ βάθη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **deep things of God** refers to things about God that are hard to understand or things about God that no one can fully comprehend. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a comparable expression or state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “secrets about God” or “things about God that no one knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	2	11	h4p8	figs-rquestion	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ?	1	For who knows a person’s thoughts except the spirit of the person in him?	Here Paul uses a question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that is within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	2	11	gw3u	grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? οὕτως καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ.	1	no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of God	In both parts of this verse, Paul makes a negative claim and then offers an exception to that claim. If it would appear in your language that Paul is contradicting himself, you could use a different structure that also singles out one possibility and negates all other possibilities. Alternate translation: “For the spirit of the man that is within him is the only one among men that knows the things of a man, right? So also, the Spirit of God is the only one that knows the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-1CO	2	11	li8e	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων&ἀνθρώπου&τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Although the words translated **men**, **man**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these masculine words with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that is within that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	2	11	lmzi	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου&τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that is within him” or “of men … of men that is within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	2	11	wfr2	figs-idiom	τίς&ἀνθρώπων	1		The phrase **who among men** is a way of asking about people or things that belong to a specific category. Paul means to ask if there are any **men** who can know **the things of a man**. He uses this phrase because God also **knows the things of a man**, so he must limit his question to only **men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase that asks about people or things, but only those that belong in a specific category. Alternate translation: “which man” or “out of all men, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	2	11	mi27	figs-idiom	τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου&τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the phrases **the things of a man** and **the things of God** to refer to everything that makes up the person, including personality, thoughts, actions, desires, possessions, and many more similar categories. Paul is intentionally general and does not narrow down which of these categories he has in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with an expression that refers to all the aspects of a person that makes that person unique. Alternate translation: “all the details about a man … all the details about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	2	11	li8e	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων & ἀνθρώπου & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Although the words translated **men**, **man**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these masculine words with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that is within that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	2	11	lmzi	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that is within him” or “of men … of men that is within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	2	11	wfr2	figs-idiom	τίς & ἀνθρώπων	1		The phrase **who among men** is a way of asking about people or things that belong to a specific category. Paul means to ask if there are any **men** who can know **the things of a man**. He uses this phrase because God also **knows the things of a man**, so he must limit his question to only **men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase that asks about people or things, but only those that belong in a specific category. Alternate translation: “which man” or “out of all men, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	2	11	mi27	figs-idiom	τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the phrases **the things of a man** and **the things of God** to refer to everything that makes up the person, including personality, thoughts, actions, desires, possessions, and many more similar categories. Paul is intentionally general and does not narrow down which of these categories he has in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with an expression that refers to all the aspects of a person that makes that person unique. Alternate translation: “all the details about a man … all the details about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	2	11	i47d	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	spirit of the person	Here, the word translated **spirit** is the same word that Paul uses for the Holy **Spirit**. It refers to the interior life of a person, to the part of them that people cannot see, including their thoughts and desires. If possible, use the same word here that you will use later in the verse for the **Spirit**, since Paul is drawing an analogy between the human **spirit** and God’s **Spirit**. If you cannot use the word for God’s **Spirit** to describe a human being, you could: (1) refer simply to a human without specifying which part of the human **knows**. Alternate translation: “the man himself” (2) use an expression that refers to the interior life of a human. Alternate translation: “the consciousness of the man that is within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	2	11	to3t	figs-idiom	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		In this culture, people would speak of the nonphysical part of a human being as if it were inside the physical part of a human being. Here Paul speaks in this way when he says that the **spirit of the man** is **within him**. By using **within him**, Paul is identifying the **spirit** as the one that belongs to **the man**. It is not some other man’s **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **within him** by: (1) using a word or phrase that identifies that the **spirit** belongs to **the man** only. Alternate translation: “that man’s own spirit” (2) expressing the idea by using a phrase that describes where a human being’s nonphysical part would be in your culture. Alternate translation: “the spirit of the man that permeates him” or “the spirit of the man that suffuses him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	2	12	zbv8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	General Information:	Here, **But** introduces the next part of Paul’s argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that signifies that the argument is moving on. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	2	12	evts	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς&οὐ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου ἐλάβομεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language would naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “we received the Spirit who is from God, not the spirit of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	2	12	evts	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς & οὐ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου ἐλάβομεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language would naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “we received the Spirit who is from God, not the spirit of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	2	12	emse	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		The phrase **spirit of the world** could refer to: (1) a **spirit** that does not actually exist. In other words, Paul is saying that the Spirit they received did not come from the **world** but rather came from **God**. Alternate translation: “a spirit that comes from the world” (2) human ways of thinking and understanding, which could be called a **spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that they did not receive human ways of thinking but rather ways of thinking that God’s Spirit brings. Alternate translation: “human ways of thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	2	12	ev7j	figs-possession	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that comes from or has its source in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a word or phrase that indicates that **the world** is the source or origin of this **spirit**. Alternate translation: “the spirit from the world” or “the spirit that comes from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	12	vw4v	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply some words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we received the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -265,22 +265,22 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	2	13	kinz	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection by including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	2	13	mnpq	translate-unknown	συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, **combining** could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	2	14	i8jw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a new part of Paul’s argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in [2:13](../02/13.md). Unlike Paul and those with him, the **natural person** does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	2	14	hq3u	translate-unknown	ψυχικὸς&ἄνθρωπος	1	unspiritual person	The phrase **the natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	2	14	cve2	figs-genericnoun	ψυχικὸς&ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται&αὐτῷ&οὐ δύναται	1	General Information:	Paul uses the words **person**, **him**, and **he** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	2	14	vvju	figs-gendernotations	αὐτῷ&οὐ δύναται	1		Here, the words translated **him** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **him**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	2	14	fye5	figs-activepassive	μωρία&αὐτῷ ἐστίν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the structure and make **him** the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	2	14	hq3u	translate-unknown	ψυχικὸς & ἄνθρωπος	1	unspiritual person	The phrase **the natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	2	14	cve2	figs-genericnoun	ψυχικὸς & ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται & αὐτῷ & οὐ δύναται	1	General Information:	Paul uses the words **person**, **him**, and **he** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	2	14	vvju	figs-gendernotations	αὐτῷ & οὐ δύναται	1		Here, the words translated **him** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **him**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	2	14	fye5	figs-activepassive	μωρία & αὐτῷ ἐστίν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the structure and make **him** the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	2	14	gwe3	figs-activepassive	πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1	because they are spiritually discerned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **discerned** rather than focusing on the person doing the “discerning.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people can only discern them spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	2	14	vznr		πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit”
-1CO	2	15	w4q7	translate-unknown	ὁ&πνευματικὸς	1	the one who is spiritual	Here Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	2	15	gcv7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει&αὐτὸς&ἀνακρίνεται	1		Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	2	15	w4q7	translate-unknown	ὁ & πνευματικὸς	1	the one who is spiritual	Here Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phrase by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	2	15	gcv7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει & αὐτὸς & ἀνακρίνεται	1		Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	2	15	ap89	figs-hyperbole	τὰ πάντα	1		Here Paul uses **all things** as an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the gospel. Paul does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this exaggeration by using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-1CO	2	15	ji5n	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς&ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who is **discerned** rather than the person doing the “discerning.” Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	2	15	ypl6	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς&ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he himself**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	2	15	zg4b	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς&ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about the impossibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	2	15	ndi1	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, **himself** focuses attention on **the spiritual one**. If **himself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “he is discerned” or “he indeed is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+1CO	2	15	ji5n	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς & ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who is **discerned** rather than the person doing the “discerning.” Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	2	15	ypl6	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς & ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he himself**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	2	15	zg4b	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς & ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about the impossibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	2	15	ndi1	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, **himself** focuses attention on **the spiritual one**. If **himself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “he is discerned” or “he indeed is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1CO	2	16	ye98	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces proof from Scripture to support what Paul has said about the “natural person” and the “spiritual” person in [2:14–15](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing proof. Alternate translation: “you could tell that these things are true, because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	2	16	tj79	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** is the only word that Paul uses to introduce a quotation from the Old Testament, in this case, from the book written by Isaiah the prophet (see [Isaiah 40:13](../isa/40/13.md)). If your language would not introduce a quotation in this way, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For, as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For, according to Isaiah the prophet,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-1CO	2	16	m4pu	figs-rquestion	τίς&ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν?	1	For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him?	Here, the passage that Paul quotes from the book of Isaiah uses a question to indicate that no human **has known the mind of the Lord**, and no human **will instruct him**. The quoted question is not asking for information. Instead, it assumes that the answer is “no one,” and the author used a question to make a negative claim that is stronger than a simple statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the question with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “no one has known the mind of the Lord—no one will instruct him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	2	16	m4pu	figs-rquestion	τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν?	1	For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him?	Here, the passage that Paul quotes from the book of Isaiah uses a question to indicate that no human **has known the mind of the Lord**, and no human **will instruct him**. The quoted question is not asking for information. Instead, it assumes that the answer is “no one,” and the author used a question to make a negative claim that is stronger than a simple statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the question with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “no one has known the mind of the Lord—no one will instruct him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	2	16	wacc	figs-possession	νοῦν Κυρίου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that the **Lord** has or uses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that the **Lord** is one who is thinking with **the mind**by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that the Lord thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	2	16	r18k	figs-metaphor	νοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν	1		Here Paul speaks as if **we** are people who possess **the mind of Christ**. Paul means that **we** are able to understand what Christ thinks and share the same ways of thinking with him. He does not mean that we have taken Christ’s **mind** from him or that we no longer have our own **mind**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express “having someone else’s mind” with a comparable metaphor or with a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “think the same thoughts as Christ does” or “share in the mind of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	2	16	pr9b	figs-possession	νοῦν Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that **Christ** has or uses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **Christ** is the one who is thinking with **the mind**by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that Christ thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -288,16 +288,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	1	zfdg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγώ	1		The word translated **And I** is the same word that appears at the beginning of [2:1](../02/01.md). Just as there, Paul uses **And I** here to introduce how his own experience visiting the Corinthians fits into the general pattern he has outlined at the end of chapter 2. Here, however, his experience with the Corinthians is the opposite of what he would have liked. Therefore, the words **And I** introduce a contrast with what he said in [2:16](../02/16.md) about having the mind of Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of **And I**by using a word or phrase that introduces a specific example or a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “But I” or “As for me, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	3	1	r4iw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	1	jn0q	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἠδυνήθην λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς, ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ.	1		If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statements. Alternate translation: “had to speak to you as to fleshly, as to infants in Christ, not as to spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	3	1	jx17	figs-nominaladj	πνευματικοῖς&σαρκίνοις	1	spiritual people	Paul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **fleshly** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “to spiritual people … to fleshly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	3	1	jx17	figs-nominaladj	πνευματικοῖς & σαρκίνοις	1	spiritual people	Paul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **fleshly** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “to spiritual people … to fleshly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	3	1	r5w5	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις	1	fleshly people	Here Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly; I spoke to you as to infants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	1	ja6t	figs-metaphor	νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	as to little children in Christ	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **infants**. He wants the Corinthians to think about how **infants** are immature, lack knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians **infants in Christ**, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they are immature, have little knowledge, and are unable to understand very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul calls the Corinthians **infants** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	3	1	m588	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains in what area of their lives they were like **infants**. They acted like **infants** in their relationship with Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **in Christ**by referring to their “faith” in **Christ** or their “relationship” with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	3	2	vg2v	figs-metaphor	γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα	1	I fed you milk, not solid food	Paul is using **milk**, the food of “infants” (see [3:1](../03/01.md)), which is easy to digest, to represent things that are easy to understand. Paul is using **solid food**, which is harder to digest, to represent things that are harder to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I had to let you crawl, not walk” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	3	2	fujt	figs-ellipsis	οὐ βρῶμα	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	3	2	d2x5	figs-ellipsis	οὔπω&ἐδύνασθε&οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	3	2	d2x5	figs-ellipsis	οὔπω & ἐδύνασθε & οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	2	i3r5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		Here, **Indeed** functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the **solid food** at either time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Indeed** with a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	3	3	m712	figs-nominaladj	σαρκικοί	-1	still fleshly	Paul is using the adjective **fleshly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “fleshly people … fleshly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	3	3	o618	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου&ἐν ὑμῖν ζῆλος καὶ ἔρις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **jealousy** and **strife**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “being jealous” and “fighting.” Alternate translation: “where you are jealous and fight with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	3	3	o618	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου & ἐν ὑμῖν ζῆλος καὶ ἔρις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **jealousy** and **strife**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “being jealous” and “fighting.” Alternate translation: “where you are jealous and fight with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	3	3	s1uy	figs-metonymy	ὅπου	1		The word **where** often refers to space. However, here Paul uses it to indicate that something exists without focusing on exactly **where** in space that thing is. Instead of identifying a specific location, it identifies existence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **where**by using a word that refers to whether something exists or not. Alternate translation: “if there is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	3	3	k5ll	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ σαρκικοί ἐστε καὶ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε?	1	are you not living according to the flesh, and are you not walking by human standards?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a statement that draws a conclusion from the **jealousy** and the **strife**. Alternate translation: “you are fleshly and walking according to men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	3	3	oz5v	figs-hendiadys	καὶ	2		Here Paul uses **and** to introduce a definition of what **fleshly** means. It means **walking according to men**. If you cannot use **and** to introduce a definition or explanation, you could use another word or phrase that does introduce a definition or explanation. If you use one of the following alternate translations, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “that is, are you not” or “which means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -305,9 +305,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	3	ljri	figs-idiom	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Here Paul speaks of behavior that is **according to men**. He uses this phrase to refer to behaviors done by people who think and act in only human ways. These people do not have God’s Spirit, so they “walk” according to the values and goals of this world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to things and behaviors valued by people who do not believe. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans value” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	3	3	y8b4	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	4	cidr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces further evidence for Paul’s argument that the Corinthians are acting in merely humans ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **For** untranslated or express the idea using a word or phrase that introduces more evidence or examples. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	3	4	g8zt	writing-pronouns	λέγῃ τις&ἕτερος	1		Here Paul uses the pronouns **one** and **another** to give two examples of some people in the Corinthian church who are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that only two people are saying these things. He also does not mean that these are the only things that people in the church are saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with words that introduce examples of a larger pattern, and you could add a phrase that indicates that the words **I am of Paul** and **I am of Apollos** are two examples of the kinds of things that they are saying. Alternate translation: “some people among you say things like … other people among you say things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	3	4	rmtq	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ&εἰμι Παύλου&ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that he or she is of Paul … that he or she is of Apollos” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	3	4	g68p	figs-possession	ἐγὼ&εἰμι Παύλου&ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		Just as in [1:12](../01/12.md), Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that people are claiming to be part of a specific leader’s group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul’ … ‘I follow Apollos’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	3	4	g8zt	writing-pronouns	λέγῃ τις & ἕτερος	1		Here Paul uses the pronouns **one** and **another** to give two examples of some people in the Corinthian church who are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that only two people are saying these things. He also does not mean that these are the only things that people in the church are saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with words that introduce examples of a larger pattern, and you could add a phrase that indicates that the words **I am of Paul** and **I am of Apollos** are two examples of the kinds of things that they are saying. Alternate translation: “some people among you say things like … other people among you say things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	3	4	rmtq	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ & εἰμι Παύλου & ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that he or she is of Paul … that he or she is of Apollos” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	3	4	g68p	figs-possession	ἐγὼ & εἰμι Παύλου & ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		Just as in [1:12](../01/12.md), Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that people are claiming to be part of a specific leader’s group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul’ … ‘I follow Apollos’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	3	4	s96g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄνθρωποί ἐστε?	1	are you not living as human beings?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a statement that draws a conclusion from what Paul says the Corinthians are saying. Alternate translation: “you are men” or “this shows that you are men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	3	4	mmlq	figs-explicit	ἄνθρωποί	1		When Paul says that the Corinthians are **men**, he means that they are “only” or “merely” **men**. He is not identifying them as humans. Rather, he means that they are acting and speaking from “merely human” perspective rather than from God’s perspective, a perspective they can share if they have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a word or phrase that clarifies that **men** refers to a “merely human” view of the world. Alternate translation: “merely men” or “speaking from a human perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	3	4	te5r	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωποί	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	5	lq6n	figs-123person	ἐστιν Παῦλος?	1	And who is Paul?	In this verse, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this use of **Paul** by clarifying that **Paul** is naming himself. Alternate translation: “am I, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	3	5	qmy2	figs-ellipsis	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1	Servants through whom you believed	Here Paul omits several words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language needs these words, you could include words such as “we are” or “they are.” Alternate translation: “We are servants through whom you believed” or “They are servants through whom you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	5	edod	figs-explicit	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1		When **Paul** says that he and **Apollos** are those **through whom** the Corinthians **believed**, he is implying that the Corinthians believed in someone other than **Paul** and **Apollos**. That is, they believed in Christ. If your readers would not make this inference about **whom** the Corinthians **believed** in, you could make it explicit by including what the Corinthians **believed** in, which is “Christ” and not **Apollos** or **Paul**. Alternate translation: “Servants through whom you believed in Christ” or “Servants through whom you believed in Christ, not in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	3	5	h2jv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ&ὡς	1		Here, the words translated **even as** introduce the way in which **Apollos** and **Paul** act as **servants**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that would introduce the ways in which **Apollos** and **Paul** are servants. Alternate translation: “who do what” or “serving just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1CO	3	5	h2jv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ & ὡς	1		Here, the words translated **even as** introduce the way in which **Apollos** and **Paul** act as **servants**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that would introduce the ways in which **Apollos** and **Paul** are servants. Alternate translation: “who do what” or “serving just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	3	5	f6wm	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκεν	1	Servants through whom you believed, to each of whom the Lord gave tasks	Here Paul omits what **the Lord gave** because it would be clear that he means that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task **to each one** of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a word or phrase to **the Lord gave to each one** to indicates that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task. Alternate translation: “even as the Lord gave a task to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	5	e8tb	writing-pronouns	ἑκάστῳ	1		Here, **to each one** directly refers back to **Apollos** and **Paul**. However, it also probably refers to everyone who serves the Lord. If you can refer to multiple individuals considered separately in your language, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “to each and every one who serves him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	3	6	iah7	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1	I planted	Paul speaks about the roles that God gave to him and to **Apollos** as if they were farmers who **planted** and **watered** their crops. See the chapter introduction for further explanation of this metaphor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how the Corinthians received the gospel with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I introduced you to the gospel, Apollos taught you more about the gospel, but God enabled you to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
@@ -324,20 +324,20 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	6	iq9n	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς	1	but God gave the growth	Here Paul uses **but** to contrast himself and **Apollos** with **God**. The point is that what he did and what **Apollos** did are at the same level of importance, but God’s work is the most important. Another way to understand this contrast is to notice that Paul and **Apollos** assist in the process of plants growing, but **God** is the only one who actually makes them grow. Again, the main point is that Paul and **Apollos** are simply “servants” of God ([3:5](../03/05.md)) in a process that God oversees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **but** with a word or phrase that puts Paul and **Apollos** together in contrast with **God**. Alternate translation: “planted, and Apollos watered. However, it was God who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	3	7	g78n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Here, **so then** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said about watering, planting, and growth in [3:6](../03/06.md). He wishes to explain that the difference between **God** **causing the growth** and anyone **planting** or **watering** relates to their importance in the process. It is **God** who is important, because he is the only one **causing the growth**, just as Paul stated in [3:6](../03/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **so then** with a comparable word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	3	7	c4wy	figs-exmetaphor	οὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι, οὔτε ὁ ποτίζων, ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Paul now speaks in general about the tasks that God has given to those who proclaim the gospel. He continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. See the chapter introduction for further explanation of this metaphor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God enables others to receive it with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “neither the person who introduces believers to the gospel nor the person who teaches believers more about the gospel is anything, but God is the one who enables believers to have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	3	7	dl3z	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων&ὁ ποτίζων	1	neither he who plants is anything … but God is the one who causes the growth	When Paul speaks of **the one planting**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one watering**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in the last verse ([3:6](../03/06.md)). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does **planting** and one person who does **watering**. Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	3	7	uutk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων&ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone is **planting** and what someone else is **watering**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	3	7	dl3z	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων & ὁ ποτίζων	1	neither he who plants is anything … but God is the one who causes the growth	When Paul speaks of **the one planting**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one watering**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in the last verse ([3:6](../03/06.md)). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does **planting** and one person who does **watering**. Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	3	7	uutk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων & ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone is **planting** and what someone else is **watering**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	7	jrb1	figs-hyperbole	τι	1		Here, **anything** is an exaggeration the Corinthians would have understood as emphasis on how unimportant the people who plant and water are. It is as if they were nothing, as if they did not exist. Paul does not mean that they do not exist. Instead, he uses this exaggeration to show how unimportant the people who plant and water are compared to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **anything** with a word or phrase that indicates “importance.” Alternate translation: “important” or “significant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	3	7	hmk6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Here Paul does not directly finish the contrast between the people who plant and water and **God**. What he means is that **God** is the one who is important, because he is **causing the growth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the words that Paul omits, including a word or phrase about how God is “important.” Alternate translation: “but God, who is the one who causes the growth, is the important one” or “but God is the significant one because he causes the growth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	7	c68g	figs-abstractnouns	αὐξάνων	1	but God is the one who causes the growth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **growth**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “grow.” Alternate translation: “who makes it grow” or “who causes things to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	3	8	dmfs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **Now** untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	3	8	s16b	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ φυτεύων&καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν; ἕκαστος δὲ τὸν ἴδιον μισθὸν λήμψεται, κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον κόπον.	1	he who plants and he who waters are one	Here Paul continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. See the chapter introduction for further explanation of this metaphor. The **one planting** and the **one watering** will receive **wages** that match the kind of **labor** they did. In the same way, those who first proclaim the gospel and those who teach more about the gospel will receive rewards from God that match the task they accomplished. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God rewards those who do so with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the person who introduces believers to the gospel and the person who teaches believers more about the gospel are one, and each will receive his own reward from God according to his own task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	3	8	ydx8	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων&ὁ ποτίζων	1		Just as in [3:7](../03/07.md), when Paul speaks of **the one planting**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one watering**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in [3:6](../03/06.md). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who is **planting** and one person who is **watering**. Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	3	8	fsj6	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων&ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone is **planting** and that someone else is **watering**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	3	8	s16b	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ φυτεύων & καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν; ἕκαστος δὲ τὸν ἴδιον μισθὸν λήμψεται, κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον κόπον.	1	he who plants and he who waters are one	Here Paul continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. See the chapter introduction for further explanation of this metaphor. The **one planting** and the **one watering** will receive **wages** that match the kind of **labor** they did. In the same way, those who first proclaim the gospel and those who teach more about the gospel will receive rewards from God that match the task they accomplished. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God rewards those who do so with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the person who introduces believers to the gospel and the person who teaches believers more about the gospel are one, and each will receive his own reward from God according to his own task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+1CO	3	8	ydx8	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων & ὁ ποτίζων	1		Just as in [3:7](../03/07.md), when Paul speaks of **the one planting**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one watering**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in [3:6](../03/06.md). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who is **planting** and one person who is **watering**. Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	3	8	fsj6	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων & ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone is **planting** and that someone else is **watering**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	3	8	za43	figs-metaphor	ἕν εἰσιν	1	are one	Paul here speaks as if the **one planting** and the **one watering** are the same person. He speaks in this way in order to: (1) show that the **one planting** and the **one watering** do the same kind of work with the same goal in mind. Alternate translation: “share a common goal” or “do the same kind of work” (2) state that the **one planting** and the **one watering** have equal status. Alternate translation: “are of equal importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	3	8	dfhn	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἴδιον	-1		Here, the words translated **his** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **his** by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own … his or her own” or “that person’s own … that person’s own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	9	vphl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, **For** introduces a summary statement that concludes the whole section in which Paul compares those who proclaim the gospel to farmers ([3:5–8](../03/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **For**by using a word or phrase that introduces a summary statement. Alternate translation: “Thus,” or “In the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	3	9	gj26	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	we are brutally beaten	Here, **we** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel; **we** does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1CO	3	9	r9sn	figs-possession	Θεοῦ&συνεργοί	1	God’s fellow workers	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **fellow workers** who work for **God**. Alternate translation: “coworkers under God’s leadership” (2) **workers** who join **God** in God’s work. Alternate translation: “people who work with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	3	9	r9sn	figs-possession	Θεοῦ & συνεργοί	1	God’s fellow workers	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **fellow workers** who work for **God**. Alternate translation: “coworkers under God’s leadership” (2) **workers** who join **God** in God’s work. Alternate translation: “people who work with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	3	9	iaan	figs-infostructure	Θεοῦ γεώργιον, Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή ἐστε.	1		Here Paul switches from a metaphor about farming to a metaphor about building. He makes this switch without using any connecting words, and he makes the switch within one sentence. Consider whether your language would include the introduction of a new topic at the end of the previous section or at the beginning of a new section, and put **God’s building** where it would be understood as introducing a new section. Include **you are** again if it would be necessary. Additionally, if your language would not begin a new section without using a connecting word or phrase, you could use such a word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “you are God’s field. In fact, you are also God’s building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	3	9	lqg1	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ γεώργιον	1	God’s garden	Here Paul concludes the farming metaphor he began in [3:6](../03/06.md). He identifies the Corinthians as a **field** that is owned by **God**. It is in this field that those who proclaim the gospel “plant” and “water” the crop. By calling the Corinthians a **God’s field**, Paul means to say that they belong to God and that they are the people among whom those who proclaim the gospel labor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	3	9	l2fq	figs-exmetaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή	1	God’s building	Here Paul introduces a new metaphor that compares the Corinthians to a building. This building belongs to God, and those who proclaim the gospel, including Paul, help to construct the building. He uses this metaphor and variations of it in [3:9–17](../03/09.md). Here, he calls the Corinthians **God’s building**, by which he means basically the same thing as when he calls them **God’s field**. They belong to God, and he and others who proclaim the gospel work among them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
@@ -345,23 +345,23 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	10	a69q	figs-exmetaphor	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα, ἄλλος δὲ ἐποικοδομεῖ. ἕκαστος δὲ βλεπέτω, πῶς ἐποικοδομεῖ.	1	I laid a foundation	Paul began using the metaphor of a house in [3:9](../03/09.md). Here he continues that metaphor by speaking about himself as a **wise master builder** who lays **a foundation**. By speaking in this way, he means that he is the one who first introduced the Corinthian believers to the gospel, just like a **master builder** first lays **a foundation**. He then speaks of people who build **{on}** that foundation, meaning that others who proclaim more about the gospel can only do this by using and continuing from the good news that Paul already proclaimed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this extended metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “as a wise church planter, I first proclaimed the gospel to you, and another is teaching you more about that gospel, but let each one be careful how he teaches you more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	3	10	nw8f	figs-infostructure	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα	1		The phrase **as a wise master builder** could describe: (1) the way in which Paul **laid a foundation**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “I laid a foundation as a wise master builder” (2) the specific **grace** that God gave to Paul. Alternate translation: “to be a wise master builder, I laid a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	3	10	mpxl	translate-unknown	σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων	1		Here, **master builder** refers to the person who is in charge of an entire construction project, including designing it and making sure that the building is constructed according to the design. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **master builder** with a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a wise architect” or “a wise construction manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	3	10	mqb8	writing-pronouns	ἄλλος&ἐποικοδομεῖ	1		Here, **another** refers to anyone who **is building {on}** the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who **is building**. If your readers would not infer that **another** refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	3	10	pwi7	figs-imperative3p	ἕκαστος&βλεπέτω	1	another is building on it	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	3	10	mqb8	writing-pronouns	ἄλλος & ἐποικοδομεῖ	1		Here, **another** refers to anyone who **is building {on}** the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who **is building**. If your readers would not infer that **another** refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	3	10	pwi7	figs-imperative3p	ἕκαστος & βλεπέτω	1	another is building on it	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	3	10	px9c	writing-pronouns	ἕκαστος	1	each man	Here, **each one** refers to any person who **builds** on the **foundation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **each one** with a word or phrase that identifies any person who falls into a certain category. Alternate translation: “every person who builds on it” or “each builder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	3	10	krd6	figs-gendernotations	ἐποικοδομεῖ	2		Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she builds on it” or “each one builds on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	11	m4j2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** introduces the reason why the people who build on the foundation should “be careful how” they build “on it” ([3:10](../03/10.md)). They need to “be careful” because what they build must match the only **foundation** that exists, which is **Jesus Christ**. If **for** would not indicate this connection in your language, you could express the idea with a word that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	3	11	qd1o	figs-exmetaphor	θεμέλιον&ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται θεῖναι, παρὰ τὸν κείμενον, ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		Paul continues the metaphor about houses, again speaking about a **foundation**. Here, he reminds the Corinthians that each house has only one **foundation**, and once that **foundation** has been **laid**, no one lays another **foundation** for the house. He speaks in this way to remind them that only one person can introduce them to the gospel, and anyone who tries to introduce them to another gospel is building a different house, not the same house. Paul then directly states that the **foundation** refers to the message about **Jesus Christ** that he preached to them and which should be the starting point and basis for everything else they learn about the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “no one can first proclaim a gospel to you other than the one that I already proclaimed to you, which is Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+1CO	3	11	qd1o	figs-exmetaphor	θεμέλιον & ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται θεῖναι, παρὰ τὸν κείμενον, ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		Paul continues the metaphor about houses, again speaking about a **foundation**. Here, he reminds the Corinthians that each house has only one **foundation**, and once that **foundation** has been **laid**, no one lays another **foundation** for the house. He speaks in this way to remind them that only one person can introduce them to the gospel, and anyone who tries to introduce them to another gospel is building a different house, not the same house. Paul then directly states that the **foundation** refers to the message about **Jesus Christ** that he preached to them and which should be the starting point and basis for everything else they learn about the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “no one can first proclaim a gospel to you other than the one that I already proclaimed to you, which is Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	3	11	jt2b	figs-activepassive	τὸν κείμενον	1	no one can lay a foundation other than the one that has been laid	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being laid** rather than focusing on the person doing the “laying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself does it. Alternate translation: “the one that I already laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	3	11	yh1f		ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		If you use the second alternate translation, you may need to change the comma to a period before it. Alternate translation: “which is Jesus Christ” or “That foundation is Jesus Christ”
 1CO	3	11	azm0	figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦς Χριστός	1		Here Paul uses the words translated **Jesus Christ** to refer to the message he proclaimed to them about **Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that refers to Paul’s message about **Jesus Christ**. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	3	12	nuza	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, **Now** introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **Now** untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	3	12	nbu2	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ&τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην	1	Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or straw	Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He compares those who teach about the gospel with builders who construct a house on its foundation. These builders can use a variety of different materials to construct the house, and Paul lists six. The first three, **gold, silver, precious stones**, are more durable, while the last three, **wood, hay, or straw**, are less durable. It is clear that Paul is interested in durability, because of the next verse, where he states that all of these materials will be tested with fire ([3:13](../03/13.md)). By speaking this way, he indicates that those who proclaim more about the gospel can teach things that are more or less true and acceptable to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “if anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God or words that are not acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	3	12	f8oa	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον	1		Here Paul uses a conditional **if**, but he does not think that this is a hypothetical situation or something that is likely not true. Instead, Paul thinks that people are “building” on the foundation, and he wants to talk about how they are doing so. Additionally, the “then” part of the **if** statement does not begin until the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase this form and structure by stating the condition as a circumstance or an assumption. Alternate translation: “whenever people build on the foundation, using” or “when anyone builds on the foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	3	12	nbu2	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ & τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην	1	Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or straw	Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He compares those who teach about the gospel with builders who construct a house on its foundation. These builders can use a variety of different materials to construct the house, and Paul lists six. The first three, **gold, silver, precious stones**, are more durable, while the last three, **wood, hay, or straw**, are less durable. It is clear that Paul is interested in durability, because of the next verse, where he states that all of these materials will be tested with fire ([3:13](../03/13.md)). By speaking this way, he indicates that those who proclaim more about the gospel can teach things that are more or less true and acceptable to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “if anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God or words that are not acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+1CO	3	12	f8oa	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον	1		Here Paul uses a conditional **if**, but he does not think that this is a hypothetical situation or something that is likely not true. Instead, Paul thinks that people are “building” on the foundation, and he wants to talk about how they are doing so. Additionally, the “then” part of the **if** statement does not begin until the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase this form and structure by stating the condition as a circumstance or an assumption. Alternate translation: “whenever people build on the foundation, using” or “when anyone builds on the foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	3	12	tzgf	translate-unknown	χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην,	1		These six things are all materials that could be used in constructing buildings. The first three will survive if the building catches on fire, but the last three will not (for the fire, see [3:13–15](../03/13.md)). In your culture, you may not use all of these materials for constructing buildings. In that case, you could include just some of these materials or include materials that you do use for constructing buildings in your culture, making sure to include some materials will not burn up and others that will burn up. Alternate translation: “steel, concrete, lumber, or cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	3	13	ndu3	figs-exmetaphor	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται; ἡ γὰρ ἡμέρα δηλώσει, ὅτι ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται; καὶ ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον, ὁποῖόν ἐστιν, τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ δοκιμάσει	1	For it will be revealed in fire. The fire will test the quality of what each one had done	Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He speaks as if **the day** of God’s judgment is like a fire that **will test** the building and show what kind of building materials the builders used. Paul speaks in this way to illustrate how God’s judgment will reveal whether what those who proclaim more about the gospel teach is pleasing to him or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the truth of what each one has taught you will become evident, for God will show how true it is when he comes to judge everyone; when he comes, he will judge everyone, and his judgment will reveal whether what each person has taught is true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	3	13	wv4h	figs-synecdoche	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον	1		Here, **work** refers to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **work**with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “what each one has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	3	13	t2mk	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται	1	his work will be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **work** that will be **evident** rather than the person doing making it **evident**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will make the work of each one evident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	3	13	mv14	figs-explicit	ἡ&ἡμέρα δηλώσει	1	for the daylight will reveal it	Here Paul uses **day** in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “the day of Christ’s return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	3	13	mv14	figs-explicit	ἡ & ἡμέρα δηλώσει	1	for the daylight will reveal it	Here Paul uses **day** in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “the day of Christ’s return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	3	13	lyny	figs-activepassive	ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **revealed** rather than the person doing the “revealing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God reveals it in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	3	13	x48s	writing-pronouns	ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here, **it is revealed** refers to **the day**. It does not refer to the **work**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **it** refers to **the day**. Alternate translation: “that day is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	3	13	ozx6	figs-pastforfuture	ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here Paul speaks as if the day **is revealed** right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this use of the present tense by using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -369,34 +369,34 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	13	wo2j	figs-rpronouns	τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ	1		Here, **itself** focuses attention on **the fire**. If **itself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “that fire” or “the fire indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1CO	3	14	wexj	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here and in [3:15](../03/15.md), Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s **work** might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work that he built will remain will receive a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	3	14	ygva	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures survive a fire receive rewards. He speaks in this way to indicate that God will reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be accurate and acceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **reward** includes public recognition and other blessings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God, he will be honored by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	3	14	iddt	figs-doublet	τινος τὸ ἔργον&ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν	1		Here Paul speaks both of **work** and what **he built**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the ideas into one expression. Alternate translation: “anyone’s building project” or “what anyone built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	3	14	iddt	figs-doublet	τινος τὸ ἔργον & ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν	1		Here Paul speaks both of **work** and what **he built**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the ideas into one expression. Alternate translation: “anyone’s building project” or “what anyone built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	3	14	s4u3	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἔργον	1	work remains	Here Paul uses **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **work**with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	3	14	tec9		μενεῖ	1		Alternate translation: “does not burn up”
-1CO	3	14	ge6s	figs-gendernotations	τινος&ἐποικοδόμησεν&λήμψεται	1		Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she built … he or she will receive” or “people’s … they built … they will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	3	14	ge6s	figs-gendernotations	τινος & ἐποικοδόμησεν & λήμψεται	1		Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she built … he or she will receive” or “people’s … they built … they will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	15	vax6	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται	1		Here, just as in [3:14](../03/14.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s work might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work will be burned up will suffer loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	3	15	ysjz	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται; αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται, οὕτως δὲ ὡς διὰ πυρός.	1		Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, those who proclaim more about the gospel are like builders whose structures do not survive a fire. They **suffer loss**, but they are **saved**, almost as if they were in the fire but escaped. Paul means that those who teach others wrongly about God will not receive honor or reward from God, but God will still accept them, although only just barely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are not acceptable to God, he will receive no honor or blessing when God judges everyone, but he himself will be accepted by God, although just barely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	3	15	c2xj	figs-activepassive	τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται	1	if anyone’s work is burned up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **work** that is **burned up** rather than on what does the “burning up.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **fire** does it. Alternate translation: “fire burns up anyone’s work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	3	15	fyfr	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἔργον	1		Here Paul uses **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **work**with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1CO	3	15	b2l8	figs-gendernotations	τινος&ζημιωθήσεται&αὐτὸς&σωθήσεται	1		Here, the words translated **he** and **himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **himself**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she will suffer loss … he himself or she herself will be saved” or “people’s … they will suffer loss … they themselves will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	3	15	b2l8	figs-gendernotations	τινος & ζημιωθήσεται & αὐτὸς & σωθήσεται	1		Here, the words translated **he** and **himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **himself**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she will suffer loss … he himself or she herself will be saved” or “people’s … they will suffer loss … they themselves will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	15	ups4	translate-unknown	ζημιωθήσεται	1	he will suffer loss	The phrase **he will suffer loss** expresses the opposite of “receiving a reward.” Instead of gaining honor and money, the person loses honor and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he will suffer loss**by using a phrase that refers to losing honor and money. Alternate translation: “he will lose honor and money” or “he will be deprived of any reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	3	15	w1zv	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who will **be saved** rather than the person doing the “saving.” you can express the idea with **he** saving **himself** or **he** not perishing. Alternate translation: “but he will not perish” or “but he will save himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	3	15	vdvl	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	Here, **himself** focuses attention on **he**. If **himself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “he will be saved” or “he indeed will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+1CO	3	15	vdvl	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	Here, **himself** focuses attention on **he**. If **himself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “he will be saved” or “he indeed will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1CO	3	16	uq2g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1	Do you not know that you are God’s temple and that the Spirit of God lives in you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “you know that you are a temple of God, and you know that the Spirit of God lives in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	3	16	yc1g	figs-exmetaphor	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1		Here Paul develops the metaphor about constructing a building in new ways. First, he says that the Corinthians together are **a temple of God**, which is a specific type of building. The **temple of God** was the place where God was present in a special way. Paul is thus identifying the Corinthians as people among whom God is present in the same kind of special way. Second, he says that the Corinthians together are the house or city in which the **Spirit of God lives**. The house or city in which someone lives is where they are always present. Paul is thus saying that the Holy Spirit is always present with the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of Paul’s metaphors with a comparable metaphor or express the idea in nonfigurative language. Alternate translation: “Do you not know that you are the sacred shrine where God dwells, and you are the country in which the Spirit of God has residency?” or “Do you not know that God is present among you, and the Spirit of God is always with you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	3	17	pc0d	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός; ὁ γὰρ ναὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς.	1		Here Paul finishes the metaphor about the temple that he began in [3:16](../03/16.md). He notes that, because God’s temple is **holy**, God will **destroy** anyone who **destroys** the temple. He then again repeats that the Corinthians **are** the temple. By speaking in this way, Paul wishes to remind everyone among the Corinthian believers that “destroying” the unity of the believers is like “destroying” the **temple**, and God will act in response to this like he would if someone “destroyed” his **temple**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone desecrates God’s sacred shrine, God will punish that person. For the sacred shrine is holy, and you are God’s sacred shrine” or “If anyone divides the place of God’s presence, God will punish that person. For wherever God’s presence can be found is holy, and you are the place where God’s presence can be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	3	17	pv8w	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός	1		Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might destroy God’s temple, or that person might not. He then specifies the consequence if someone does destroy God’s temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	3	17	vcuv	writing-pronouns	οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς	1		Here, **which** could refer to: (1) **the temple of God**. Alternate translation: “which temple you are” (2) **holy**. Alternate translation: “and you too are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	3	18	glg8	figs-imperative3p	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω&μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	Let no one deceive himself	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	3	18	glg8	figs-imperative3p	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω & μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	Let no one deceive himself	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	3	18	s57s	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω; εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός.	1		Here, the words translated **himself**, **he**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **himself**, **he**, and **him**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive himself or herself. If anyone among you thinks he or she is wise in this age, let him or her become a ‘fool,’ that he or she may become wise” or “Let no people deceive themselves. If any people among you think they are wise in this age, let them become ‘fools,’ that they may become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	3	18	p3wi	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	in this age	Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might think that **he is wise**, or that person might not think this. He then specifies the consequence if someone does think that **he is wise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Let whoever among you thinks he is wise in this age become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	3	18	p53y		ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1		Alternate translation: “according to the standards of this age”
 1CO	3	18	s7xi	figs-irony	μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός	1	let him become a “fool”	Here Paul commands any **wise** person among the Corinthians to become a **fool**. He does not actually think that doing what he commands makes a person a **fool**, which is why **fool** appears in quotation marks. Rather, he knows that many will call doing what he commands “becoming a **fool**.” To make this clearer, he then says that becoming what many will call **a “fool”** will actually lead to becoming truly **wise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Paul’s use of the word **fool** with a form in your language that indicates that Paul is speaking from the perspective of other people. Alternate translation: “let him become a so-called ‘fool,’ that he may become truly wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	3	18	pvt3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **that** introduces the goal or purpose for which a person should **become a “fool”**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **that**with a word or phrase that introduces a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1CO	3	19	m0gd	figs-possession	ἡ&σοφία τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **this world** considers to be **wisdom**. If **the wisdom of this world** would not be understood in your language as **wisdom** from the perspective of **this world**, you could use a different form that makes this meaning clear. Alternate translation: “what this world considers to be wisdom” or “worldly wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	3	19	m0gd	figs-possession	ἡ & σοφία τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **this world** considers to be **wisdom**. If **the wisdom of this world** would not be understood in your language as **wisdom** from the perspective of **this world**, you could use a different form that makes this meaning clear. Alternate translation: “what this world considers to be wisdom” or “worldly wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	3	19	uqb3	figs-idiom	παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here Paul uses the phrase **with God** to identify God’s perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **with God**with a word or phrase that identifies that this is **foolishness** according to how God views the world. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” or “in God’s eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	3	19	ayvv	writing-quotations	γέγραπται γάρ	1		In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Job” (see [Job 5:13](../job/05/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For the book of Job says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	3	19	vpod	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “the author of Job has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	3	19	zws3	figs-quotations	γέγραπται&ὁ δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	He catches the wise in their craftiness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that God catches the wise in their craftiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	3	19	zws3	figs-quotations	γέγραπται & ὁ δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	He catches the wise in their craftiness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that God catches the wise in their craftiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	3	19	wxz2	figs-metaphor	δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul speaks as if God reaches out and grabs **the wise** as they act in **craftiness**. By speaking in this way, he means that even “crafty” or clever people cannot avoid God when he wishes to “catch” them. God is not deceived, and he can disrupt their clever plans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **catches** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “interrupts the clever plans of the wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	3	19	j0ga	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφοὺς	1		Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “wise people” or “those who think they are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	3	19	x6ts	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πανουργίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **craftiness**, you can express the idea by using by using a phrase such as “crafty plans” or “clever planning.” Alternate translation: “crafty plans” or “clever planning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -410,13 +410,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	3	21	xyti	figs-idiom	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The phrase **boast in men** means that a person is boasting “about” humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **boast in** with a word or phrase that clarifies that the “boasting” has **men** as its content. Alternate translation: “let no one boast about men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	3	21	k9i3	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The next verse makes it clear that here Paul specifically has leaders in mind. He wishes to tell the Corinthians that they should not boast about having a specific leader that they follow. If this meaning of **in men** would not be understood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that it refers to following leaders. Alternate translation: “in men that they follow” or “in men whose group they are part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	3	21	ogfq	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in people” or “in men or women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	3	21	g0hr	figs-explicit	πάντα&ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1		Here, **all things are yours** also implies that **boasting in men** is foolish. If the Corinthians have everything, then boasting about following a specific leader does not make sense. All the Corinthians have all the leaders, and much more beyond that (see [3:22](../03/22.md)). If your readers would not infer that **all things are yours** implies these conclusions, you could include a phrase that states these conclusions. Alternate translation: “all things are yours, including all leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	3	21	g0hr	figs-explicit	πάντα & ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1		Here, **all things are yours** also implies that **boasting in men** is foolish. If the Corinthians have everything, then boasting about following a specific leader does not make sense. All the Corinthians have all the leaders, and much more beyond that (see [3:22](../03/22.md)). If your readers would not infer that **all things are yours** implies these conclusions, you could include a phrase that states these conclusions. Alternate translation: “all things are yours, including all leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	3	22	x1w6		εἴτε Παῦλος, εἴτε Ἀπολλῶς, εἴτε Κηφᾶς, εἴτε κόσμος, εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος, εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα;	1		Paul does not want his readers to think that this list tells the Corinthians everything that they have. Rather, he uses the list to give examples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that shows that the list gives examples. Alternate translation: “including Paul and Apollos and Cephas and the world and life and death and things present and things to come”
 1CO	3	22	o3k5	figs-explicit	εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος	1		When Paul says that **life** and **death** are theirs, he means that neither **life** nor **death** has control over the Corinthians. Rather, they have control over **life** and **death**. What this means is that they can live their lives without being afraid of what will happen while they are alive or afraid of losing their lives when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify the meaning of **life** and **death**. Alternate translation: “or confidence in life or peace in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	3	22	pyir	figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα	1		Here Paul refers to **things present** because it refers to what was happening at the time when Paul wrote this letter. On the other hand, **things to come** refers to what is going to happen in the future, specifically when Jesus comes back. The **things present** is the way the world works right now. The **things to come** is the way the world will work when Jesus returns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify the meaning of these phrases. Alternate translation: “or the current order or the order that Jesus will bring” or “or what happens now or what will happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	3	22	jt0x	figs-infostructure	πάντα ὑμῶν	1		Here Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of [3:21](../03/21.md): **all {things are} yours**. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of **all things** and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because **all {things are} yours** ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with **all {things are} yours**. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	3	23	nj48	figs-possession	ὑμεῖς&Χριστοῦ	1	you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s	Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	3	23	dc6v	figs-possession	Χριστὸς&Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “Christ is part of who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	3	23	nj48	figs-possession	ὑμεῖς & Χριστοῦ	1	you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s	Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	3	23	dc6v	figs-possession	Χριστὸς & Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “Christ is part of who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	4	intro	vg5z			0		# 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br>      * God alone is judge (4:1–5)<br>      * Present weakness (4:6–15)<br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br>      * Paul’s planned visit (4:16–21)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Judgment<br><br>In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), Paul refers to three different judgments. The first judgment is what humans think of each other, including what they think of Paul. The second is Paul’s own judgment of himself. The third is God’s judgment, which occurs when the Lord returns. Paul argues that the first two judgments are not important and carry no weight. Rather, the only judgment that matters is God’s judgment. Therefore, Paul argues that no one should issue a final verdict about anything until God has performed his judgment ([4:5](../04/05.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/discernment]])<br><br>### Pride<br><br>Paul mentions the Corinthians’ pride many times in this chapter. He speaks specifically of being “puffed up” ([4:6](../04/06.md); [4:18–19](../04/18.md)), and boasting ([4:7](../04/07.md)). In contrast, Paul describes himself and the other apostles as humble and weak ([4:9–13](../04/09.md)). By making this contrast, Paul wants the Corinthians to rethink their opinions about themselves. If the apostles, the leaders of the church, are weak and humble, they need to think again about whether they really are as great as they think they are.<br><br>### Word and power<br><br>In [4:19–20](../04/19.md), Paul contrasts “word” with “power.” This is a common comparison in his culture that contrasts talk and deeds. Anyone can say they are capable of doing something, but only those with “power” can actually do what they claim. Paul introduces this contrast because he is coming to see if those who claim greatness (“word”) can do what they claim (“power”). He argues that “power” is what matters more than “word” because God’s kingdom is a matter of “power,” not “word.” It is about action, not just talk. If your language has a standard comparison between “talk” and “deeds,” you could use it in these verses.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Paul as father<br><br>In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), Paul identifies the Corinthians as his children, which makes him their father. He became their father when he preached the gospel to them. Thus, he is their spiritual father, the one who helped bring them into the Christian life. In the metaphor, Paul does not specify who the mother is, and he does not intend his audience to make an inference as to who it might be. In [4:17](../04/17.md), Paul continues this metaphor by claiming Timothy as his spiritual child. If possible, use words in your language that do not always require biological relationships. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/father]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]])<br><br>### The spectacle<br><br>In [4:9](../04/09.md), Paul speaks of the “spectacle” that he and the other apostles participate in. The “spectacle” could be a victory parade in which Paul and the other apostles are prisoners who will be killed, or it could be a gladiatorial performance in an arena in which Paul and the other apostles are destined to die. See the notes on the verse for translation options. Whichever “spectacle” Paul refers to, he is presenting himself and the other apostles as people who are going to be humiliated and killed in public. With this metaphor he continues the theme of Christ working in power through his and others’ weakness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>In [4:8](../04/08.md), Paul says that the Corinthians are satisfied, rich, and reigning. In the second half of the verse, however, he says that he “wishes” that they were actually reigning. The first part of the verse, then, presents how the Corinthians think about themselves. Paul speaks from their perspective in order to show them that their views are foolish and impossible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [4:7](../04/07.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md), Paul uses several questions. All the questions in these two verses are not seeking answers that provide information or further knowledge. Rather, all the questions are meant to make the Corinthians think about what they are thinking and doing. For translation options, see the notes on these two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Not beyond what is written”<br><br>In [4:6](../04/06.md), Paul quotes a phrase: “Not beyond what is written.” This is not a quote from Scripture, and Paul does not say where the phrase comes from. However, the way he quotes it shows that both he and the Corinthians were familiar with this saying. Most likely, the phrase is a well-known proverb or wise saying that Paul uses to strengthen his argument. For the meaning of the phrase and translation options, see the notes on that verse.<br><br>### Paul’s coming<br><br>In [4:18–21](../04/18.md), Paul speaks many times about how he will “come” to them. He intends to visit them again, and he speaks in these verses about what his visit might be like. Use words in your language that refer to someone temporarily visiting someone else.
 1CO	4	1	nkda	figs-explicitinfo	οὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος ὡς	1		If the form **In this manner let a man regard us: as** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “Let a man regard us as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 1CO	4	1	k1v5	figs-imperative3p	ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
@@ -430,17 +430,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	2	qek0	figs-activepassive	ζητεῖται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is required** rather than the on person doing the “requiring.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague subject or refer to “masters.” Alternate translation: “people require” or “a master requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	2	dpeo	figs-activepassive	πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **found** rather than the person doing the “finding.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague subject or refer to “masters.” Alternate translation: “people find one faithful” or “a master finds one faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	2	yesr	writing-pronouns	τις	1		Here Paul uses **one** to refer to any of the **stewards**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **one**by using a plural pronoun such as “they.” Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	4	3	t133		ἐμοὶ&ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “I consider it” or “from my perspective”
+1CO	4	3	t133		ἐμοὶ & ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “I consider it” or “from my perspective”
 1CO	4	3	fspp	figs-idiom	εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν	1		When Paul says that **it is a very small thing** for him to **be examined**, what he means is that their “examination” of him is unimportant to him. Whether they think he has been faithful or not does not matter to him at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it is no big deal” or “it has no significance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	4	3	k6nc	figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ, ἢ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας;	1	it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on Paul, who is **examined**, rather than **you** or the **human court**, who does the “examining.” Alternate translation: “you or a human court would examine me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	3	l2tt	translate-unknown	ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας	1		Here, the words translated **a human court** refer to an official legal proceeding where whether Paul was faithful or not could be judged by those in charge. Here, he uses the words primarily to refer to any people who are in charge of this legal proceeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **a human court** with a word or phrase that refers to an official meeting to decide whether someone is innocent or guilty or a word or phrase that refers to who is in charge at such a meeting. Alternate translation: “a court of law” or “a human jury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	4	3	skwh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1		Here, **For** introduces an even stronger statement about how little Paul cares about being **examined** by humans. He cares so little that he does not even **examine** himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that normally introduces a further, stronger statement. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	4	4	u9jd	figs-idiom	οὐδὲν&ἐμαυτῷ σύνοιδα	1	I am not aware of any charge being made against me	Paul says that he is **aware of nothing against** himself. By this, he means that he does not know about anything that could be used to accuse him. He is not aware of anything he has done wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I have a clear conscience” or “I cannot think of any wrong things I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	4	4	u9jd	figs-idiom	οὐδὲν & ἐμαυτῷ σύνοιδα	1	I am not aware of any charge being made against me	Paul says that he is **aware of nothing against** himself. By this, he means that he does not know about anything that could be used to accuse him. He is not aware of anything he has done wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I have a clear conscience” or “I cannot think of any wrong things I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	4	4	h3wl	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐν τούτῳ δεδικαίωμαι;	1	that does not mean I am innocent. It is the Lord who judges me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on Paul, who is **justified**, rather than what “justifies” him. Alternate translation: “this does not justify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	4	bulo	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1		Here, **this** refers back to the whole idea that Paul is **aware of nothing against** himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying that it refers back to the whole previous statement. Alternate translation: “what I am aware of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	4	4	hjob	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Paul uses **but** to introduce a contrast with everyone else who might “examine” Paul (see [4:3–4](../04/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that introduces a contrast with several previous statements. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	4	4	f6bb		ὁ&ἀνακρίνων με Κύριός ἐστιν.	1		Alternate translation: “the Lord is the one who judges me”
-1CO	4	5	qi3g	figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ καιροῦ&ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος	1	Therefore	If the form **before the time, until the Lord comes** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+1CO	4	4	f6bb		ὁ & ἀνακρίνων με Κύριός ἐστιν.	1		Alternate translation: “the Lord is the one who judges me”
+1CO	4	5	qi3g	figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ καιροῦ & ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος	1	Therefore	If the form **before the time, until the Lord comes** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
 1CO	4	5	t1oq	figs-go	ἔλθῃ	1	Therefore	Here Paul is speaking about how **the Lord** will “come” back to earth at some point in the future. Use a form in your language that could refer to Jesus’ return to earth. Alternate translation: “returns to the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	4	5	wl3i	figs-metaphor	ὃς καὶ φωτίσει τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1	He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heart	Here Paul speaks as if **the Lord** will bring a flashlight or torch when he comes, and he will use that torch or flashlight to shine **light** on things that are currently **hidden** in the **darkness**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that **the Lord** will reveal what no person knows right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who will both disclose what people do not know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	5	dcje	figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are **hidden** in **darkness**. If the **hidden things** would not be understood to be in **darkness** in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -457,21 +457,21 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	6	o02a	figs-explicit	τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται,	1		Here Paul quotes a short phrase that is not from the Old Testament but that would have been well-known to the Corinthians. The phrase **what is written** could refer to: (1) the Old Testament scriptures. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that the Old Testament approves. Alternate translation: “Not beyond what the Scriptures say” (2) general principles of life that everyone knows about. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that are generally approved and accepted. Alternate translation: “Not beyond proper standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	4	6	kyrt	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the Scriptures or scriptural author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “the authors of Scripture have written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	6	hk55	figs-infostructure	ἵνα	2		The statement introduced by **so that** could be the purpose for: (1) learning that they should not go **beyond what is written**. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying **these things** to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	4	6	e79m	figs-activepassive	μὴ εἷς&φυσιοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the person “puffs” himself or herself up. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	4	6	hjfu	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ἑνὸς&τοῦ ἑτέρου	1		Here, **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the one** and **the other**by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	4	7	fnu3	figs-yousingular	σε&ἔχεις&ἔλαβες&ἔλαβες&καυχᾶσαι&λαβών	1	between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not	In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-1CO	4	7	gtb5	figs-rquestion	τίς&σε διακρίνει?	1	For who makes you superior?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	4	7	r6yw	figs-rquestion	τί&ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?	1	What do you have that you did not freely receive?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	4	6	e79m	figs-activepassive	μὴ εἷς & φυσιοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the person “puffs” himself or herself up. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	4	6	hjfu	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑτέρου	1		Here, **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the one** and **the other**by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	4	7	fnu3	figs-yousingular	σε & ἔχεις & ἔλαβες & ἔλαβες & καυχᾶσαι & λαβών	1	between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not	In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	4	7	gtb5	figs-rquestion	τίς & σε διακρίνει?	1	For who makes you superior?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	4	7	r6yw	figs-rquestion	τί & ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?	1	What do you have that you did not freely receive?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	4	7	eixw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες	1		Paul is speaking as if “receiving {it}” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	4	7	e8l2	figs-rquestion	τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών?	1	why do you boast as if you had not done so?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	4	7	p0hg	writing-pronouns	ἔλαβες&λαβών	2		Here, both uses of **{it}** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **{it}** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you can use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	4	7	p0hg	writing-pronouns	ἔλαβες & λαβών	2		Here, both uses of **{it}** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **{it}** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you can use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	4	8	yp8s	figs-irony	ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε	1	General Information:	With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	4	8	v77u	figs-metaphor	κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ	1		Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have had more than enough food to eat and beverages to drink. By this, he means that (they think that) they have so many spiritual blessings that there are no more that they can receive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of **satisfied** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you are stuffed with blessings” or “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	8	uc7s	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτήσατε	1		Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have become wealthy people. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that (they think that) they have more spiritual blessings than they need. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of **become rich**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “you have become fat” or “you have an excess of spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	4	8	mpir	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμεῖς	1		Here, **us** and **we** refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	4	8	mpir	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς	1		Here, **us** and **we** refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	4	9	bb41	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	God has put us apostles on display	Here, **For** introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connection by using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “you could tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	4	9	v0bg	translate-unknown	δοκῶ	1		Here, **I think** introduces Paul’s own opinion of what he and other **apostles** are meant to do and experience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **I think**by using a word or phrase that introduces a person’s interpretation or opinion. Alternate translation: “in my opinion,” or “it seems to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	4	9	lz8v	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς&ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	4	9	lz8v	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	4	9	vfq3	figs-metaphor	ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐσχάτους ἀπέδειξεν, ὡς ἐπιθανατίους	1	has put us apostles on display	Here Paul uses a metaphor that identifies himself and other apostles as those who receive public humiliation and are put to death. The metaphor itself could: (1) refer to a Roman gladiatorial contest. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** in the arena as part of the **last** event. As those who are **sentenced to death**, they would then die in this last event. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles in the last event of the gladiatorial games, in which we are destined to die” (2) refer to a victory parade. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** at the end of the parade, or **last**. As the **last** prisoners, they are **sentenced to death**, and will be killed soon after the parade ends. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles at the end of the victory parade, in the place where prisoners who are sentenced to death march” (3) be a figure of speech that your readers would misunderstand. If this is the case, you could express the idea in nonfigurative language. Alternate translation: “has chosen us apostles to be humiliated, and we are destined to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	9	ayu9	translate-unknown	ἐσχάτους	1		Here, **last of all** could identify: (1) the time when the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be as the last event held in the arena. Alternate translation: “at the end” (2) the place where the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be at the end of the victory parade. Alternate translation: “last in line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	4	9	e4i1	figs-metaphor	θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1		Here Paul speaks as if he and other apostles were part of a gladiatorial game or a theatrical show. He speaks in this way to show that the humiliation and death he and other apostles suffer happens in public, with everyone watching to see what happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we live in full view of the world—both of angels and of men” or “we undergo these things publicly, before the world—both angels and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -479,8 +479,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	9	d8da	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to men and women” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	4	10	ds54	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ διὰ Χριστόν, ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι ἐν Χριστῷ; ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί; ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι	1		In Paul’s language, he did not need to include **{are}**. However, many languages, including English, must add **{are}**, which is why the ULT includes it in brackets. If your language would not use **{are}** here, you could leave it unexpressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	4	10	johq	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	-1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1CO	4	10	fkw2	figs-irony	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ&ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς&ἡμεῖς&ἄτιμοι	1	We are fools … in dishonor	With these statements, Paul identifies what he and the other apostles are like from the perspective of this world. They are **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. Paul does know that from God’s perspective they are actually “wise,” “strong,” and “honored.” However, he speaks from the perspective of this world to help the Corinthians change their thinking. Instead of wanting to be **wise**, **strong**, and **honored**, the Corinthians need to realize that following God will instead make them appear to this world as **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these statements with a word or phrase that clarifies that they are spoken from a different perspective. Alternate translation: “We seem to be fools … We seem to be weak … we seem to be dishonored” or “According to the world, we are fools … According to the word, we are weak … according to the world, we are dishonored’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-1CO	4	10	ufj2	figs-irony	ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι&ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί&ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι	1		With these statements, Paul identifies what the Corinthians think about themselves. They think they are **wise**, **strong**, and **honored** from the perspective of this world. Paul contrasts what the Corinthians think about themselves and how he and other apostles look from the world’s perspective in order to make the Corinthians reconsider what they think about themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these statements with a word or phrase that identifies that they are spoken from the perspective of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “but you consider yourselves wise … but you consider yourselves strong … You consider yourselves honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+1CO	4	10	fkw2	figs-irony	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ & ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς & ἡμεῖς & ἄτιμοι	1	We are fools … in dishonor	With these statements, Paul identifies what he and the other apostles are like from the perspective of this world. They are **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. Paul does know that from God’s perspective they are actually “wise,” “strong,” and “honored.” However, he speaks from the perspective of this world to help the Corinthians change their thinking. Instead of wanting to be **wise**, **strong**, and **honored**, the Corinthians need to realize that following God will instead make them appear to this world as **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these statements with a word or phrase that clarifies that they are spoken from a different perspective. Alternate translation: “We seem to be fools … We seem to be weak … we seem to be dishonored” or “According to the world, we are fools … According to the word, we are weak … according to the world, we are dishonored’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+1CO	4	10	ufj2	figs-irony	ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι & ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί & ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι	1		With these statements, Paul identifies what the Corinthians think about themselves. They think they are **wise**, **strong**, and **honored** from the perspective of this world. Paul contrasts what the Corinthians think about themselves and how he and other apostles look from the world’s perspective in order to make the Corinthians reconsider what they think about themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these statements with a word or phrase that identifies that they are spoken from the perspective of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “but you consider yourselves wise … but you consider yourselves strong … You consider yourselves honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	4	10	wqh7	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	You are held in honor	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ” (2) the reason why God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	10	d1s9	figs-infostructure	ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι.	1		Paul changes the order of the last item in the list, putting **You** in front of **we**. In his culture, this is one way to identify the last item in a list. If it would be helpful in your language, you could match the order that Paul uses for the first two items. Alternate translation: “We are dishonored, but you are honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	4	11	i298	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας	1	Up to this present hour	In Paul’s culture, the phrase **Up to this present hour** means that what Paul is about to say has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “To this very day” “All the time that we serve Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -488,19 +488,19 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	11	hqco	translate-unknown	γυμνιτεύομεν	1		Here, **are poorly clothed** means that the clothing is old and worn and barely covers a person’s body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **are poorly clothed** with a word or phrase that identifies clothing that barely covers a person. Alternate translation: “are clothed in rags” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	4	11	jj2y	figs-activepassive	καὶ κολαφιζόμεθα, καὶ	1	we are brutally beaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **we** who are **beaten** rather than focusing on the people doing the “beating.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and people brutally beat us, and we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	11	yhf4	translate-unknown	ἀστατοῦμεν	1	we are homeless	Here, **are homeless** means that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence or a house that they own. It does not mean that they never had a place to stay. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **are homeless** with a word or phrase that indicates that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence. Alternate translation: “do not own homes” or “are always on the move” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	4	12	exfo	figs-exclusive	ἰδίαις&εὐλογοῦμεν&ἀνεχόμεθα	1		Here, **our** and **we** refer to Paul and other “apostles.” They do not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	4	12	exfo	figs-exclusive	ἰδίαις & εὐλογοῦμεν & ἀνεχόμεθα	1		Here, **our** and **we** refer to Paul and other “apostles.” They do not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	4	12	ushf	figs-doublet	κοπιῶμεν, ἐργαζόμενοι	1		Here, the words **working hard** and **working** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize how **hard** he is working. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these words and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are working very hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	4	12	e0mz	figs-idiom	ἐργαζόμενοι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσίν	1		In Paul’s culture, the phrase **with our own hands** indicates that Paul and other apostles were doing manual labor. In fact, we know that Paul himself made tents (see [Acts 18:3](../act/018/03.md)), so that is probably the manual labor which he refers to here. If **with our hands** would not refer to manual labor in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that refers to manual labor. Alternate translation: “doing physically demanding work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	4	12	z6fg	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	λοιδορούμενοι&διωκόμενοι	1		The phrases **Being reviled** and **being persecuted** identify the situations in which Paul and other apostles **bless** and **endure**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are reviled … any time we are persecuted” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are reviled … although we are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+1CO	4	12	z6fg	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	λοιδορούμενοι & διωκόμενοι	1		The phrases **Being reviled** and **being persecuted** identify the situations in which Paul and other apostles **bless** and **endure**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are reviled … any time we are persecuted” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are reviled … although we are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	4	12	n389	figs-activepassive	λοιδορούμενοι	1	When we are reviled, we bless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **reviled** rather than focusing on the people doing the “reviling.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others reviling us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	12	o7jz	translate-unknown	λοιδορούμενοι	1		Here, **Being reviled** refers to someone abusing another person with words. If that meaning for **Being reviled** would not be obvious in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does refer to using abusive words about another person. Alternate translation: “Being slandered” or “Being attacked verbally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	4	12	l71q	figs-explicit	εὐλογοῦμεν	1		Here Paul does not state whom or what they **bless**. He could mean that they **bless**: (1) the people who “revile” them. Alternate translation: “we bless in return” (2) God, even though they are suffering. Alternate translation: “we bless God anyway” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	4	12	kue7	figs-activepassive	διωκόμενοι	1	When we are persecuted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **persecuted** rather than the people doing the “persecuting.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others persecuting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	4	13	xvn4	figs-exclusive	παρακαλοῦμεν&ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	4	13	xvn4	figs-exclusive	παρακαλοῦμεν & ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	4	13	l3ns	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δυσφημούμενοι	1		The phrase **being slandered** identifies the situation in which Paul and other apostles **comfort**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are slandered” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	4	13	a6hp	figs-activepassive	δυσφημούμενοι	1	When we are slandered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **slandered** rather than the people doing the “slandering.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others slandering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	13	p0fd	figs-simile	ὡς περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου ἐγενήθημεν, πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul says that he and other apostles are like **scum** and **refuse**, both of which are words that describe garbage. Paul speaks in this way to show that **the world** considers him and other apostles to be worthless, just like garbage is worthless and should be thrown away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this simile with a comparable image or plainly. Alternate translation: “We have no value according to the world’s perspective” or “We have become like a heap of garbage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-1CO	4	13	uubg	figs-doublet	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου&πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word **scum** refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word **refuse** refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	4	13	uubg	figs-doublet	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου & πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word **scum** refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word **refuse** refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	4	13	gqxj	figs-possession	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **the world** identifies as **scum**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a short phrase to clarify that **scum** is what **the world** thinks he and other apostles are. Alternate translation: “what the world considers scum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	4	13	flf9	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the world** with an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	4	13	ip6p	figs-possession	πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **refuse** that: (1) comes from **all things**. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) **all** people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -510,13 +510,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	14	nlzx	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on [4:6–13](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **these things** with a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	4	14	t8jc	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	correct	Here, the phrase **as my beloved children** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because you are my beloved children” (2) the way in which he corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “as a father corrects his beloved children, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	4	14	ruu5	figs-metaphor	τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	my beloved children	Here Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were his **beloved children**. He speaks in this way because he is their spiritual father, the one who first preached the good news to them. Also, he loves them in the same way a father loves his own children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind why Paul calls the Corinthians his **beloved children**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “my beloved younger siblings” or “fellow believers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	4	15	ur1i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν&μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have **myriads of guardians**, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many **guardians** they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	4	15	ur1i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν & μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have **myriads of guardians**, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many **guardians** they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	4	15	n8c1	figs-hyperbole	μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς	1	ten thousand guardians	Here, **myriads of guardians** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **guardians**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **myriads** with a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many guardians” or “a large number of guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	4	15	nkcc	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could identify: (1) that these **guardians** are helping the Corinthians in their union with Christ. Alternate translation: “who work to unite you more strongly to Christ” (2) the guardians as fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	15	d25x	figs-ellipsis	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be essential in your language to create a complete thought. In English, these words are essential, so they have been included in the ULT in brackets. If you can translate this sentence without these words, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain these words as they appear in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	4	15	yij4		οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Alternate translation: “you would have only one father”
 1CO	4	15	j01t	figs-exmetaphor	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας; ἐν γὰρ Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα.	1		Here Paul speaks of himself as a “father” to the Corinthian believers. He became their father **through the gospel**, which means that he is their spiritual father. He is the one who preached the **gospel** to them when they became united to **Christ Jesus**, and that makes him the one who **fathered** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul speaks about **fathers** by clarifying that Paul refers to “spiritual” **fathers**. Alternate translation: “you would not have many spiritual fathers; for I fathered you spiritually in Christ Jesus through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	4	15	m9ek	figs-metaphor	ἐν&Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	2	I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospel	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could explain: (1) that the Corinthians became united to Christ when Paul preached the good news to them. Alternate translation: “when you were united to Christ Jesus” (2) Paul is their father in the Christian family, the family that is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Christian family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	4	15	m9ek	figs-metaphor	ἐν & Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	2	I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospel	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could explain: (1) that the Corinthians became united to Christ when Paul preached the good news to them. Alternate translation: “when you were united to Christ Jesus” (2) Paul is their father in the Christian family, the family that is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Christian family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	16	vkao	figs-abstractnouns	μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you can express the idea by using a verbal such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	4	17	lrqn	writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about imitating him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **this** refers to by clarifying that it refers back to the previous verse. Alternate translation: “For that reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	4	17	r7z7		ἔπεμψα	1		Sometimes, Paul uses the past tense **sent** with reference to the person who carries the letter to its destination. However, Paul later speaks of Timothy visiting them as only a possibility (see [16:10](../16/10.md)). Therefore, the visit to which Paul refers here could: (1) have already happened by the time Paul is writing this letter. Timothy would be visiting the Corinthians while Paul is writing this letter, since Paul uses the future tense to refer to how Timothy **will remind** them of Paul’s ways. Alternate translation: “I have sent” (2) be when Timothy brings the letter to them, at which time he **will remind** them of his ways. Alternate translation: “I am sending”
@@ -524,32 +524,32 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	17	nwqz	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies Timothy as someone who faithfully does what he is called to do in his union with **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “in his union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	17	oqd7	figs-metaphor	τὰς ὁδούς μου τὰς ἐν	1		Here Paul speaks of how he lives and what he does as **my ways**, which refers to the paths that Paul walks on. This way of speaking is related to how Paul has already spoken of behavior as “walking” (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). The phrase **my ways** could identify: (1) how Paul thinks and lives. Alternate translation: “the way that I live in” (2) the principles that Paul follows concerning how to think and live. Alternate translation: “the principles that I follow in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	4	17	cq9z	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ Jesus, describes Paul’s **ways** as ways that are appropriate for those united to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “appropriate in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	4	17	j6gj	figs-explicit	καθὼς&διδάσκω	1		Here Paul does not explicitly state what it is that he is teaching. From the previous words, however, it is clear that he teaches his **ways**, the same **ways** that Timothy will **remind** them about. If you need to clarify what Paul teaches, you could refer to the **ways** explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same ways that I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	4	17	j6gj	figs-explicit	καθὼς & διδάσκω	1		Here Paul does not explicitly state what it is that he is teaching. From the previous words, however, it is clear that he teaches his **ways**, the same **ways** that Timothy will **remind** them about. If you need to clarify what Paul teaches, you could refer to the **ways** explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same ways that I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	4	17	xs5y	figs-hyperbole	πανταχοῦ ἐν πάσῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Here Paul speaks as if Paul has been **everywhere** and visited **every church**. The Corinthians would have understood this to refer to **everywhere** and **every church** that Paul has visited. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **everywhere** and **every church** by clarifying that Paul refers to **every** place and church he has visited. Alternate translation: “everywhere I go and in every church that I visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	4	17	wdug	figs-doublet	πανταχοῦ ἐν πάσῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Here, the words **everywhere** and **in every church** have very similar meanings. Paul repeats the idea to emphasize that he teaches the **ways** in every church, not just among the Corinthians. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine the two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “in every church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	4	18	v4fn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Now	Here, **Now** introduces a development in the argument. Paul starts addressing some of the Corinthians who are proud. If **Now** does not introduce a new part of the argument in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does do this. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	4	18	th6i	writing-pronouns	τινες	1		The word **some** refers to **some** of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **some** refers to by clarifying that it identifies **some** Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “some from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	4	18	flbr	figs-activepassive	ἐφυσιώθησάν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the people “puff” themselves up. Alternate translation: “have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	18	gap0	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς	1		Here Paul speaks of him **not coming** as something that is a possibility. However, he is convinced that this is not true, since he will “come” to them. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “as if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-1CO	4	18	sq6q	figs-go	μὴ ἐρχομένου&μου	1		Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I were not about to arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	4	18	sq6q	figs-go	μὴ ἐρχομένου & μου	1		Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I were not about to arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	4	19	jdk5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	I will come to you	Here, **But** introduces a contrast with what some people are thinking in the previous verse, that is, that Paul is not going to visit them. In this verse, he says that he will visit them soon. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Despite what they think,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	4	19	y1sl	figs-infostructure	ἐλεύσομαι&ταχέως πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		If your language would put the **if** statement first, you could rearrange these two clauses. Alternate translation: “if the Lord wills, I will come to you soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	4	19	hr6o	figs-go	ἐλεύσομαι&πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	4	19	y1sl	figs-infostructure	ἐλεύσομαι & ταχέως πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		If your language would put the **if** statement first, you could rearrange these two clauses. Alternate translation: “if the Lord wills, I will come to you soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	4	19	hr6o	figs-go	ἐλεύσομαι & πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	4	19	eyq3	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		Here Paul says that he will only visit the Corinthians **if the Lord wills**. He is not sure whether the Lord will “will” or not. Use a form in your language that indicates a true hypothetical. Alternate translation: “only if the Lord wills, of course” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	4	19	tdbk	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον&τὴν δύναμιν	1		The contrast between **word** and **power** was well known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the talk … their deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	4	19	tdbk	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον & τὴν δύναμιν	1		The contrast between **word** and **power** was well known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the talk … their deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	4	19	kbp1	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τῶν πεφυσιωμένων	1		Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what these who have been puffed up say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	4	19	fz8n	figs-activepassive	τῶν πεφυσιωμένων	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the people “puff” themselves up. Alternate translation: “of these people who have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	4	19	m92u	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how powerful they are” or “their powerful deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	4	20	iucw	figs-metaphor	οὐ&ἐν λόγῳ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		Here Paul speaks as if **the kingdom of God** exists **in**, not **word**, but **power**. By this, he means that **the kingdom of God** does not consist in what people say but in what they do. To say it another way, **word**, or what people say, by itself does not make people part of God’s kingdom. Rather, it takes God’s **power** working for and through people to make them part of God’s kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists not in word but in power” or “the kingdom of God is not about word but about power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	4	20	shgb	figs-explicit	ἐν λόγῳ&ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		The contrast between **word** and **power** was well-known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can do. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “not in talk but in deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	4	20	iucw	figs-metaphor	οὐ & ἐν λόγῳ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		Here Paul speaks as if **the kingdom of God** exists **in**, not **word**, but **power**. By this, he means that **the kingdom of God** does not consist in what people say but in what they do. To say it another way, **word**, or what people say, by itself does not make people part of God’s kingdom. Rather, it takes God’s **power** working for and through people to make them part of God’s kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists not in word but in power” or “the kingdom of God is not about word but about power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	4	20	shgb	figs-explicit	ἐν λόγῳ & ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		The contrast between **word** and **power** was well-known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can do. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “not in talk but in deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	4	20	gfhp	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1		Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	4	20	wzpo	figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you can express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “powerful deeds” or “what people powerfully do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	4	21	ix5g	figs-rquestion	τί θέλετε?	1	What do you want?	Paul asks the Corinthians **What** they **want** because he wants them to realize that their behavior will show him how to respond to them. He does not want the Corinthians to tell him all their desires. Rather, he presents two options in the rest of the verse, and the question **What do you want?** shows the Corinthians that they can choose between those two options by listening to Paul or choosing not to listen to him. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you can translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “Depending on what you do, I will behave towards you in one of two ways.” or “How you respond to me will tell me how to respond to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	4	21	wv61	figs-rquestion	ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος?	1	Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?	Here Paul uses a question to present the two options for how he could act toward the Corinthians when he “comes” to them. He asks a question for the same reason he asked the first question in this verse. He wants them to realize that how they choose to respond to him will dictate how he will act when he visits. If they do not listen to him, he will **come with a rod**. If they do listen, he will come **with love and a spirit of gentleness**. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you can translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “I will either come to you with a rod or with love and a spirit of gentleness.” or “If you do not listen, I will come to you with a rod. If you do listen, I will come to you with love and a spirit of gentleness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	4	21	iscw	figs-go	ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “Shall I arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	4	21	bl1d	figs-metaphor	ἐν ῥάβδῳ	1		Paul speaks of coming **with a rod** as if he is going to physically beat the Corinthians to teach them to listen to him. This metaphor may continue the way in which he speaks of himself as a “father” in [4:14–15](../04/14.md), since fathers could punish their children physically **with a rod** if they did not obey. By speaking in this way, Paul thus refers to discipline or punishment, but the discipline he threatens will not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a word or phrase that would describe discipline or punishment, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to punish you” or “with a harsh rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	4	21	h4oj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ&τε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “lovingly” or a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “shall I love you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	4	21	u7b9	figs-possession	πνεύματί&πραΰτητος	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **gentleness** as an adjective, such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	4	21	h4oj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ & τε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “lovingly” or a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “shall I love you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	4	21	u7b9	figs-possession	πνεύματί & πραΰτητος	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **gentleness** as an adjective, such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	4	21	hpmb	translate-unknown	πνεύματί	1		Here, **spirit** does not refer to God’s Spirit, the Holy Spirit. Rather, it refers to Paul’s spirit. In Paul’s culture, **as spirit of** something is a way to describe a person’s attitude that is characterized by that thing. Here, then, Paul speaks about an attitude that is gentle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **spirit** with a word such as “attitude” to express the idea. Alternate translation: “an attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	4	21	ix7l	figs-abstractnouns	πραΰτητος	1	of gentleness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gentleness**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “that is gentle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	5	intro	vb3l			0		# 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br>    * Paul condemns a sexually immoral man (5:1–5)<br>    * Passover festival metaphor (5:6–8)<br>    * Explanation of previous letter (5:9–13)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13. Verse 13 quotes from Deuteronomy 17:7.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Sexual immorality<br><br>This chapter deals mostly with what Paul calls “sexual immorality” ([5:1](../05/01.md), [9–11](../05/09.md)). The word Paul uses for “sexual immorality” is a general term for sexual behavior that is considered improper. The specific type of “sexual immorality” that Paul addresses in this chapter is a man having sex with his step-mother. In some languages, there is a specific word for this. English uses the word “incest.” However, since Paul uses a general term and then brings up a specific situation, you also should use a general term for “sexual immorality” in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])<br><br>### Judgment<br><br>Paul refers to “judgment” or “judging” in [5:3](../05/03.md), [12–13](../05/12.md). “Judging” refers to deciding whether someone is guilty or innocent. Paul emphasizes in this chapter that Christians should “judge” other Christians in the proper setting (see [5:3–5](../05/03.md)). However, they do not need to “judge” people who are not Christians. Paul states that “judging” them is God’s responsibility ([5:12–13](../05/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])<br><br>### Excommunication<br><br>In [5:2](../05/02.md), Paul speaks about “removing” the person who committed the sexual sin from among the Corinthians, and he makes a similar command in [5:13](../05/13.md). The phrase “hand this man over to Satan” in [5:5](../05/05.md) has a similar meaning. Finally, when Paul tells them to “clean out the old yeast” ([5:7](../05/07.md)), this is a metaphor for the same action. Paul is commanding the Corinthians to stop including in their group the man who committed the sexual sin. It is not totally clear whether the man can be accepted back into the group if he stops committing the sin.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms<br><br>As is the case in many cultures, sexual behavior is a delicate topic. Paul thus uses euphemisms to avoid sounding crude or nasty. When he says that “someone has his father’s wife” ([5:1](../05/01.md)), this is a delicate way to refer to someone consistently having sex with his father’s wife, whether married or not. He later on calls this behavior “a deed” ([5:2](../05/02.md)) or “such a thing” ([5:3](../05/03.md)). These phrases are ways of referring back to the man having sex with his father’s wife without using crude words. If your language has similar euphemisms for delicately referring to sexual behavior, you could use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])<br><br>### Passover metaphor<br><br>In [5:6–8](../05/06.md), Paul speaks of “yeast” and “Passover.” Passover was Jewish festival in which the people celebrated how God delivered them from serving as slaves in Egypt. The Israelites sacrificed lambs and spread the blood on their doors, and they ate bread without yeast in it because they would have to leave quickly, before the bread could rise. Then, God sent a destroying angel who killed the firstborn child in every house that did not have blood on its door. When this happened, the ruler of Egypt told the Israelites to leave immediately. you could read about these events in [Exodus 12](../exo/12/01.md). Later generations of Israelites celebrated this day by removing the yeast from their houses and by sacrificing a lamb. Paul refers to this festival in these verses. He uses the festival of Passover as a metaphor to encourage the Corinthians to remove sinful people (“yeast”) from their group (“their house”). There is even a “Passover lamb,” who is Jesus himself. Since this metaphor is drawn from the Old Testament, you should preserve it in your translation. If necessary you could include a footnote that gives some extra information, or you could refer your readers to Exodus 12 if they have access to the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/yeast]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [5:6](../05/06.md) and [5:12](../05/12.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Present in spirit<br><br>In [5:3–4](../05/03.md), Paul speaks of being with the Corinthians “in spirit.” While this could be a reference to the Holy Spirit, who would connect Paul with the Corinthians, more likely Paul is referring to his own “spirit,” which refers to the aspect of Paul that can connect with the Corinthians even when he is not physically present. When he says that he is with them “in spirit,” that means that he is thinking about them and that they should act as they would if Paul was physically present. You could either use a comparable idiom in your language or explain in some other way what “spirit” means in these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Structure of 5:3–5<br><br>In [5:3–5](../05/03.md), Paul uses a long and complicated sentence structure. In 5:3, he describes how he has “passed judgment” as if he were present. In 5:5, he tells them what the response to that judgment should be: “hand this man over to Satan.” In 5:4, then, he describes the situation in which they should hand the man over: they should be gathered together and acting with the authority of both Paul and Jesus. Finally, in 5:4, “in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ” could describe how Paul has “passed judgment” in 5:3, or it could describe how the Corinthians have “assembled” in 5:4. In order to translate these verses clearly, you may need to rearrange some clauses or add explanatory information that clarifies what Paul is saying. For more details and translation options, see the notes on those verses.<br><br>### Structure of 5:12–13<br><br>In [5:12–13](../05/12.md), Paul alternates between talking about judging “those outside” and “those inside.” If alternating between these two ideas would be confusing in your language, you could rearrange the clauses so that the verses deal with “those outside” first and then “those inside.” Here is an example of how you could do this: “For what to me to judge those outside? God will judge those outside. But do you not judge those inside? “Remove the evil from among yourselves.”
@@ -559,17 +559,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	5	1	bnnc	figs-explicit	ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		While Paul does not explicitly say why this **immorality** is not **among the Gentiles**, the Corinthians would have understood him to mean that the **Gentiles** do not permit such behavior and prohibit it by law or social practice. If this information would not be implied in your language, you could include a word or phrase that indicates that Paul refers to the attitude of **Gentiles** towards this kind of **sexual immorality**. Alternate translation: “which even the Gentiles avoid” or “which even the Gentiles find shocking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	5	1	q8p7	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		Here Paul does not use **the Gentiles** primarily to refer to non-Jews, since there were non-Jewish members of the church. Rather, Paul uses **the Gentiles** to describe anyone who does not worship the true God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the Gentiles** with a word or phrase that identifies those who do not worship or serve God. Alternate translation: “the pagans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	5	1	b9xn	figs-euphemism	γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν	1	a man has his father’s wife	In Paul’s culture, if man **has** a woman, it refers to a long-term sexual relationship. Often this would be a marriage, but it could also be a sexual relationship without marriage. Here, it is not clear whether the person (**someone**) marries **his father’s wife** or not. What is clear is that he is in a long-term sexual relationship with **his father’s wife**. If possible use a word or phrase that indicates this kind of general relationship. Alternate translation: “someone is living with his father’s wife” or “someone is sleeping with his father’s wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-1CO	5	1	lxp1	translate-kinship	γυναῖκά&τοῦ πατρὸς	1	father’s wife	Here, **his father’s wife** identifies a woman who is married to a man’s father but who is not the man’s mother. If your language has a specific word for this relationship, you could use it here. If your language does not have a word for this relationship, you can describe the relationship with a phrase, much like the ULT does. Alternate translation: “his father’s wife who is not his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
+1CO	5	1	lxp1	translate-kinship	γυναῖκά & τοῦ πατρὸς	1	father’s wife	Here, **his father’s wife** identifies a woman who is married to a man’s father but who is not the man’s mother. If your language has a specific word for this relationship, you could use it here. If your language does not have a word for this relationship, you can describe the relationship with a phrase, much like the ULT does. Alternate translation: “his father’s wife who is not his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 1CO	5	2	idwe	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς πεφυσιωμένοι ἐστέ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **you** “puff” yourselves up. Alternate translation: “you puff yourselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	5	2	uwco	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἀρθῇ&ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) a purpose for the “mourning.” Alternate translation: “in order that the one who did this deed might be removed (2) a command. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “The one who did this deed should be removed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1CO	5	2	uwco	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἀρθῇ & ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) a purpose for the “mourning.” Alternate translation: “in order that the one who did this deed might be removed (2) a command. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “The one who did this deed should be removed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1CO	5	2	rr93	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1	The one who did this must be removed from among you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **removed** rather than the people doing the “removing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do it. Alternate translation: “so that you remove the one who did this deed from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	5	2	ffwt	figs-doublet	ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		In Paul’s culture, it was normal to use both **done** and **deed** to refer to performing an act. If your language would not use both **done** and **deed** here, you could express the idea with just one of these two words. Alternate translation: “the one who did this” or “the one who carried out this deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	5	2	qwja	figs-idiom	ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν	1		When someone is **removed from among** a group, it means that he or she is no longer part of the group. If your language has a specific word or phrase to describe expelling a member of a group, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “might be banned from your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	5	3	rm6l	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why the man who has committed the sexual sin should be “removed from among you” ([5:2](../05/02.md)). The reason is because Paul has already **passed judgment** on him, and so the Corinthians should be enacting the punishment. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “He should be removed since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	5	3	u5a2	figs-idiom	ἀπὼν τῷ σώματι	1		In Paul’s culture, **being absent in body** is a figurative way to speak about not being present in person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being absent in the body** with a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not being there with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	5	3	xm4e	figs-idiom	παρὼν&τῷ πνεύματι	1	I am present in spirit	In Paul’s culture, **being present in spirit** is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **being present in spirit**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “still being connected to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	5	3	xm4e	figs-idiom	παρὼν & τῷ πνεύματι	1	I am present in spirit	In Paul’s culture, **being present in spirit** is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **being present in spirit**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “still being connected to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	5	3	gfep		τῷ πνεύματι	1		Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) Paul’s **spirit**, which would be the part of him that connects with the Corinthians across a distance. Alternate translation: “in my spirit” (2) the Holy Spirit, which connects Paul with the Corinthians, even though they are not physically together. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit”
-1CO	5	3	ax3u		ἤδη κέκρικα&τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1	I have already passed judgment on the one who did this	Here Paul has **already passed judgment**, which means that he has declared the man to be guilty. Two verses later ([5:4](../05/04.md)), Paul specifies what the punishment that results from the **judgment** should be: the man should be “handed over to Satan.” Here, then, use a word or phrase that indicates a decision about guilt, not a punishment. Alternate translation: “have already judged the one who did such a thing to be guilty”
+1CO	5	3	ax3u		ἤδη κέκρικα & τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1	I have already passed judgment on the one who did this	Here Paul has **already passed judgment**, which means that he has declared the man to be guilty. Two verses later ([5:4](../05/04.md)), Paul specifies what the punishment that results from the **judgment** should be: the man should be “handed over to Satan.” Here, then, use a word or phrase that indicates a decision about guilt, not a punishment. Alternate translation: “have already judged the one who did such a thing to be guilty”
 1CO	5	3	sac6	figs-abstractnouns	ἤδη κέκρικα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “judge” instead of **passed judgment on**. Alternate translation: “have already judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	5	3	v4o9	figs-euphemism	τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1		Paul does not wish to repeat the ugly details of the man having sex with his stepmother. Instead, he uses general words to refer back to what he has already said about the man. If possible, preserve how Paul avoids repeating the details of the sin in your translation. You could use vague language like Paul does, or you could use a similar euphemism. Alternate translation: “the man who committed this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1CO	5	3	g8b6	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς παρὼν	1		Here Paul makes a conditional statement that might sound hypothetical but that he knows is not true. He knows that he is not present with them, but he wants to emphasize that his **judgment** is just as effective **as if** he were **present**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even though I am absent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
@@ -598,9 +598,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	5	7	mpra	figs-exmetaphor	ἐκκαθάρατε τὴν παλαιὰν ζύμην, ἵνα ἦτε νέον φύραμα, καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι	1		Here Paul speaks about how Jews would **clean out the old yeast** during the festival of Passover and only bake **unleavened bread**. Just like in [5:6](../05/06.md), he compares sin to **yeast**. By speaking in this way, he urges the Corinthians to **clean out** the person who is sinning. Then, they will be like **new dough**, like **unleavened bread**, that is, without sin. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or if necessary, you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “Clean out the old yeast, that is, sin, so that you may be new dough, just as you are unleavened bread” or “Clean out the bad apple so that you may be a fresh barrel, just as you are fresh apples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	5	7	z7vq	translate-unknown	καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι	1		When Paul says that they **are unleavened bread**, this means that they are in danger of encountering the **yeast**, that is, sin. This is why they must **clean out the old yeast**. If they remain **unleavened** by avoiding contact with **old yeast**, they will be **new dough**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **you are unleavened bread** by clarifying that Paul calls them this because it shows that **yeast** is a threat to them. Alternate translation: “for you are currently unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	5	7	x3pt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here Paul uses **For** to introduce the reason why his metaphor about **yeast** is appropriate. **Christ** is like the **Passover lamb**. Since Christ has **been sacrificed** like that **lamb**, the Corinthians are supposed to live as if it is **Passover**. This means avoiding sin in their group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “You should act like people observing Passover because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	5	7	ret3	figs-explicit	καὶ&τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1	Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificed	When God delivered the Jewish people from Egypt, he required them to sacrifice a lamb and spread its blood on their doors. God did not harm anyone who had the blood on their door, but the firstborn son of anyone who did not have the blood on their door died. Because of this, the **lamb** that was sacrificed at **Passover** represented God delivering the Jewish people by accepting the **lamb**’s death in place of the firstborn son. See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). The implication here is that **Christ**’s death also functioned in this way, in place of those whom he delivers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a footnote explaining the function of the **lamb** at **Passover**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	5	7	qhrz	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ&τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Here Paul compares **Christ** to the **Passover lamb**, since both died to save someone else. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language, or you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like our Passover lamb, has also been sacrificed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	5	7	yzjl	figs-activepassive	καὶ&τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Paul intentionally does not state who **sacrificed** the **Passover lamb**, who is **Christ**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in another way. If possible, do not state who **sacrificed** **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christ, our Passover lamb, has also died as a sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	5	7	ret3	figs-explicit	καὶ & τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1	Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificed	When God delivered the Jewish people from Egypt, he required them to sacrifice a lamb and spread its blood on their doors. God did not harm anyone who had the blood on their door, but the firstborn son of anyone who did not have the blood on their door died. Because of this, the **lamb** that was sacrificed at **Passover** represented God delivering the Jewish people by accepting the **lamb**’s death in place of the firstborn son. See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). The implication here is that **Christ**’s death also functioned in this way, in place of those whom he delivers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a footnote explaining the function of the **lamb** at **Passover**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	5	7	qhrz	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ & τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Here Paul compares **Christ** to the **Passover lamb**, since both died to save someone else. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language, or you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like our Passover lamb, has also been sacrificed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+1CO	5	7	yzjl	figs-activepassive	καὶ & τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Paul intentionally does not state who **sacrificed** the **Passover lamb**, who is **Christ**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in another way. If possible, do not state who **sacrificed** **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christ, our Passover lamb, has also died as a sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	5	8	ouhj	figs-explicit	ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν, μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας.	1		Just as in [5:6–7](../05/06.md), here Paul speaks about **yeast** and “dough.” In this Jewish **festival** of Passover, people would remove all the **yeast** from their houses and only bake dough that was not fermented (**unleavened bread**). See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). Here, then, the **yeast** is what is meant to be removed, and the **unleavened bread** is what is meant to be eaten. If your readers would not understand this background, you could include a footnote that gives extra information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	5	8	donb	figs-exmetaphor	ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν, μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας.	1		Here Paul finishes the metaphor about **yeast** and Passover that he began in [5:6](../05/06.md). Paul encourages the Corinthians to **celebrate the festival** by getting rid of the **old yeast**. He then identifies that the **yeast** stands for **evil and wickedness**, while the **unleavened bread** that they are supposed to eat stands for **sincerity and truth**. With this metaphor Paul exhorts the Corinthians to expel from their group the man who has sinned, just as one would remove yeast from one’s house during the **festival**. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or you could include a footnote that explains the metaphor. Alternate translation: “So then, we should be like those who celebrate the festival, not with old yeast, nor with yeast of evil and wickedness, but with unleavened bread of sincerity and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	5	8	hoew	figs-explicit	ἑορτάζωμεν	1		Because of what Paul has said in [5:7](../05/07.md), this **festival** must be the festival connected with Passover. If your readers would not understand this from the context, you could include the name “Passover” here. Alternate translation: “we might celebrate the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -628,14 +628,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	5	11	ypib	translate-unknown	ἅρπαξ	1		Here, **swindler** identifies a person who takes money from others dishonestly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **swindler** with a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “a thief” or “an embezzler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	5	11	fq7j	figs-explicit	τῷ τοιούτῳ μηδὲ συνεσθίειν	1		In Paul’s culture, to **eat with** someone meant that you accepted them into your social group. Here, he wants the Corinthians not to accept such people into their group. If “eating with” someone does not signify accepting them in your culture, you may need to make that idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Do not even include such a person in your group’s meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	5	12	kj1x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, **For** introduces further reasons why Paul wants the Corinthians to focus on “judging” fellow believers but not **those outside**. These reasons continue into the next verse ([5:13](../05/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that would introduce further reasons. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “For more proof,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	5	12	xeu7	figs-rquestion	τί&μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν?	1	how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church?	Here Paul asks **what to me to judge those outside**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “nothing” or “it does not matter to me,” and Paul uses the question to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “it is nothing to me to judge those outside” or “it is not my business to judge those outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	5	12	jmxt	figs-ellipsis	τί&μοι	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “is it” or “does it matter” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “what is it to me” or “what does it matter to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	5	12	xeu7	figs-rquestion	τί & μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν?	1	how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church?	Here Paul asks **what to me to judge those outside**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “nothing” or “it does not matter to me,” and Paul uses the question to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “it is nothing to me to judge those outside” or “it is not my business to judge those outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	5	12	jmxt	figs-ellipsis	τί & μοι	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “is it” or “does it matter” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “what is it to me” or “what does it matter to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	5	12	n6on	figs-123person	μοι	1		Here Paul speaks of himself only, but he wants the Corinthians to have the same opinion that he has. If **to me** would cause your readers to misunderstand this point, you could include the Corinthians in this question as well. Alternate translation: “to us” or “to you and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1CO	5	12	ncl1	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἔξω&τοὺς ἔσω	1		The phrase **the ones outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. The phrase **the ones inside** identifies the opposite: people who do belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these phrases with words or phrases that refer to people who belong to and do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders … the insiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	5	12	ncl1	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἔξω & τοὺς ἔσω	1		The phrase **the ones outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. The phrase **the ones inside** identifies the opposite: people who do belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these phrases with words or phrases that refer to people who belong to and do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders … the insiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	5	12	m4s6	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε?	1	Are you not to judge those inside?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation or statement of obligation. Alternate translation: “But you should judge those inside” or “You do indeed judge those inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	5	13	m1d9	translate-textvariants	κρίνει	1		In Paul’s language, **judges** and “will judge” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “will judge” here, some early and important manuscripts have **judges**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “will judge,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	5	13	hvo1	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνει	1		Here, **judges** makes a general statement about what God does. The present tense does not mean that God is currently passing final judgment on **those outside** and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul has the final judgment in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the present tense of **judges** with the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1CO	5	13	z45o	figs-idiom	τοὺς&ἔξω	1		The phrase **the ones outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	5	13	z45o	figs-idiom	τοὺς & ἔξω	1		The phrase **the ones outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	5	13	kx9j	writing-quotations	ἐξάρατε τὸν πονηρὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul quotes a command that appears many times in the Old Testament book named Deuteronomy (see [Deuteronomy 13:5](../deu/13/05.md); [17:7](../deu/17/07.md), [17:12](../deu/17/12.md); [19:19](../deu/19/19.md); [21:21](../deu/21/21.md); [22:21–22](../deu/22/21.md), [22:24](../deu/22/24.md); [24:7](../deu/24/07.md)). If your readers would not recognize this command as a quotation, you could introduce it in the same way that you have already introduced quotations from the Old Testament (see [1:31](../01/31.md)). Alternate translation: “As it can be read in the Old Testament, ‘Remove the evil from among yourselves’” or “According to the book of Deuteronomy, ‘Remove the evil from among yourselves’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	5	13	al7v	figs-quotations	ἐξάρατε τὸν πονηρὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “We read in Scripture that you should remove the evil from among yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	5	13	h6ry	figs-nominaladj	τὸν πονηρὸν	1		Paul is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -644,38 +644,38 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	6	1	q5d3	translate-unknown	τολμᾷ	1	dispute	Here, **dare** refers to having confidence or boldness when one should not have confidence or boldness. Use a word or phrase in your language that indicates improper confidence. Alternate translation: “Do … have the audacity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	1	qi57	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον	1		The phrase **having a dispute with another** provides the situation in which they are going **to court**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “if you have a dispute with another” or “whenever you have a dispute with another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	6	1	jsgt	figs-explicit	τὸν ἕτερον	1		Here, **another** identifies the other person as a fellow believer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **another** with a word or phrase that identifies **another** as a believer. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	6	1	umgg	figs-idiom	κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ&ἐπὶ	1		The phrase **to go to court before** refers to settling a lawsuit or other legal dispute **before** a judge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **go to court before** with a comparable idiom that refers to setting a dispute in a court of law. Alternate translation: “to resolve your lawsuit in the presence of … in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	6	1	umgg	figs-idiom	κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ	1		The phrase **to go to court before** refers to settling a lawsuit or other legal dispute **before** a judge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **go to court before** with a comparable idiom that refers to setting a dispute in a court of law. Alternate translation: “to resolve your lawsuit in the presence of … in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	6	2	r8sj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:1](../06/01.md). The Corinthians currently think that going to court in public is fine. Paul gives the true alternative: they **will judge the world** and thus should not need to take their quarrels and lawsuits anywhere else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	6	2	i1m5	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν?	1	Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You already know that the saints will judge the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	2	i67f	figs-rquestion	ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?	1	If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “you are definitely not unworthy of the smallest cases” or “you are definitely worthy of the smallest cases (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	2	py6h	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	6	2	yq8e	figs-activepassive	ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the world**, which is **judged**, rather than **you**, who do the “judging.” Alternate translation: “you judge the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	6	2	jqvf	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνεται	1		Here, **is judged** makes a general statement about what **you**, that is, the **saints**, do. The present tense does not mean that the **saints** are currently passing final judgment and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the **saints**. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the present tense of **is judged** with the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1CO	6	2	stvc	figs-idiom	ἀνάξιοί&κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unworthy of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	6	2	stvc	figs-idiom	ἀνάξιοί & κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unworthy of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	6	2	dmi6	translate-unknown	κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, **cases** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “of the smallest legal disputes” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “of the lowest courts of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	3	us55	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν,	1	Do you not know that we will judge the angels?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that we will judge angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	3	x6h3	figs-rquestion	μήτι γε βιωτικά?	1	How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the reader agrees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “How much more the matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	3	hxzn	figs-ellipsis	μήτι γε βιωτικά	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “can we judge” or “are we able to judge” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “How much more can we judge the matters of this life” or “How much more are we able to judge the matters of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	6	3	h3z0	grammar-connect-logic-result	μήτι γε	1		Here Paul’s argument assumes that judging **angels** is a greater and more difficult thing than judging **the matters of this life**. The phrase **How much more** implies that people who can do a great and difficult thing like judging **angels** can easily do a less impressive and easier thing like judging **the matters of this life**. If **How much more** does not express that connection in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does express that connection. Alternate translation: “If we can do that, can we not judge” or “Should it not be easy, then, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	6	3	h374	translate-unknown	βιωτικά	1	matters of this life	Here, **matters of this life** refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as simply matters of ordinary life and insignificant in comparison with something like judging **angels**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **matters of this life** with a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “what happens in our daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	6	4	xn32	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	βιωτικὰ&κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **have legal disputes**, or they might not **have legal disputes**. He then specifies the result for if they do **have legal disputes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “when.” Alternate translation: “when you have legal disputes about things of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	6	4	v80t	translate-unknown	κριτήρια&ἔχητε	1		Here, **legal disputes** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “you have lawsuits” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “you seek a judgment in a court of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	6	4	xn32	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	βιωτικὰ & κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **have legal disputes**, or they might not **have legal disputes**. He then specifies the result for if they do **have legal disputes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “when.” Alternate translation: “when you have legal disputes about things of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	6	4	v80t	translate-unknown	κριτήρια & ἔχητε	1		Here, **legal disputes** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “you have lawsuits” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “you seek a judgment in a court of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	4	cu0s	translate-unknown	βιωτικὰ	1		Here, **things of this life** refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as matters of ordinary life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **about things of this life** with a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “about what happens in your daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	4	vw5t	figs-rquestion	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “there is no good reason.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement or a command. Alternate translation: “do not appoint as judges those who are of no account in the church!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	4	e791	translate-unknown	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Here, these **ones of no account in the church** could be: (1) people who are not members of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “who do not believe” (2) people who are members of the church in Corinth but whom other believers do not respect. Alternate translation: “whom the fellow believers do not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	5	dvq3	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1		The phrase **I speak** could refer: (1) to what Paul has already said, probably all of [6:1–4](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “I say those things” (2) to what Paul is saying throughout this whole section ([6:1–8](../06/01.md)). Alternate translation: “I am saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	6	5	xnd7	figs-idiom	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν	1		Here, **to your shame** means that the things that Paul has said should make the Corinthians feel **shame**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to your shame** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to embarrass you” or “to make you feel ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	6	5	ebh6	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν λέγω	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **shame**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “shame.” Alternate translation: “I say this to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	6	5	hk4q	figs-idiom	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι&οὐδεὶς σοφὸς	1		The phrase **{Is it} thus that there is not any wise {man}** identifies a situation in which no **wise {man}** can be found. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase or find it confusing with a comparable expression that identifies a situation in which there are no wise people. Alternate translation: “Is there not a wise man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	6	5	hk4q	figs-idiom	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι & οὐδεὶς σοφὸς	1		The phrase **{Is it} thus that there is not any wise {man}** identifies a situation in which no **wise {man}** can be found. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase or find it confusing with a comparable expression that identifies a situation in which there are no wise people. Alternate translation: “Is there not a wise man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	6	5	fue4	figs-rquestion	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ?	1	Is there no one among you wise enough to settle a dispute between brothers?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing, specifically by making them feel ashamed. The question assumes that the answer is “there should be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a “should” statement or introduce a statement with “surely.” Alternate translation: “You should have a wise man among you who will be able to discern between his brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	6	5	xma9	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ ἔνι&σοφὸς&αὐτοῦ	1		Although the words translated **wise {man}** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these masculine words with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “there are not any wise people … their” or “there is not any wise man or woman … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	6	5	xma9	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ ἔνι & σοφὸς & αὐτοῦ	1		Although the words translated **wise {man}** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these masculine words with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “there are not any wise people … their” or “there is not any wise man or woman … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	6	5	l1hd	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	6	5	o28z	translate-unknown	διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον	1		The phrase **to discern between** refers to making decisions about disputes between people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this phrase with a word or phrase that refers to deciding which party is in the right in a dispute. Alternate translation: “to judge between” or “to settle disputes between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	6	m7ls	figs-rquestion	ἀδελφὸς μετὰ ἀδελφοῦ κρίνεται, καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων?	1	But brother goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that there will be no verbal answer. Rather, the question is supposed to make the Corinthians feel ashamed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a statement that expresses shock or condemnation. Alternate translation: “brother really goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	6	6	fyq8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφὸς&ἀδελφοῦ	1		Although the words translated **brother** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a brother or sister … a brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	6	6	fyq8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφὸς & ἀδελφοῦ	1		Although the words translated **brother** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a brother or sister … a brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	6	6	dv5g	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could include what action is happening. Alternate translation: “and they do this before unbelievers” or “and they go to court before unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	6	7	kvva	figs-infostructure	ἤδη μὲν οὖν ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν ἐστιν, ὅτι κρίματα ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1		Here Paul gives the reason for the **defeat** after he mentions the **defeat**. If your language would state the reason first, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Therefore, since you have lawsuits among yourselves, this is indeed already a complete defeat for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	6	7	topu		ἤδη&ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν	1		Here, **already** refers to how the Corinthians do not suffer **defeat** in the court of law but rather before that, when the lawsuit begins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **already** by clarifying that the time in view is before the lawsuit is decided. Alternate translation: “a complete defeat for you even before you enter the court of law”
+1CO	6	7	topu		ἤδη & ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν	1		Here, **already** refers to how the Corinthians do not suffer **defeat** in the court of law but rather before that, when the lawsuit begins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **already** by clarifying that the time in view is before the lawsuit is decided. Alternate translation: “a complete defeat for you even before you enter the court of law”
 1CO	6	7	ugf7		ἤδη μὲν οὖν ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “Therefore, you are indeed already completely defeated”
 1CO	6	7	lvc1	figs-metaphor	ὅλως ἥττημα	1		Here, **complete defeat** refers to total failure in attempting to accomplish some goal. The **defeat** does not require an opponent, since one can suffer **defeat** because of other obstacles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **complete defeat**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “a total derailing” or “a total failure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	7	tn9m	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?	1	Why not rather suffer the wrong? Why not rather allow yourselves to be cheated?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the reader agrees that it would be better to **be wronged** and **cheated**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions by stating the ideas as emphatic comparisons. Alternate translation: “It would be better to be wronged! It would be better to be cheated!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	6	10	h6aa	figs-metaphor	κληρονομήσουσιν	1		Here Paul speaks of the **kingdom of God** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. Here, Paul uses the word **inherit** to refer to being able to live in the **kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	11	j49p	writing-pronouns	ταῦτά	1		Here, **that** refers to the list of unrighteous behaviors that Paul gave in [6:9–10](../06/09.md). Paul identifies **some** of the Corinthians as people who behaved in those ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **that** by more clearly referring back to the list of unrighteous behaviors. Alternate translation: “those kinds of people are what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	6	11	pxp6	figs-doublet	ἀλλὰ ἀπελούσασθε, ἀλλὰ ἡγιάσθητε, ἀλλὰ ἐδικαιώθητε	1		Here Paul repeats **But you were** in order to emphasize the contrast between what the Corinthians **were** and what they have now experienced. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use **But you were** once and express the strong contrast in another way. Alternate translation: “But now you have been washed, sanctified, and justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1CO	6	11	v5yq	figs-activepassive	ἀπελούσασθε&ἡγιάσθητε&ἐδικαιώθητε	1	you have been cleansed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **you**, who are **washed**, **sanctified**, and **justified**, rather than the person doing the “washing,” “sanctifying,” and “justifying.” If you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” does them. Alternate translation: “God washed you … God sanctified you … God justified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	6	11	v5yq	figs-activepassive	ἀπελούσασθε & ἡγιάσθητε & ἐδικαιώθητε	1	you have been cleansed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **you**, who are **washed**, **sanctified**, and **justified**, rather than the person doing the “washing,” “sanctifying,” and “justifying.” If you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” does them. Alternate translation: “God washed you … God sanctified you … God justified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	6	11	rri7	figs-metaphor	ἀπελούσασθε	1		Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had been **washed** with water. By speaking in this way, Paul emphasizes that they have been cleansed from sin, just like washing with water cleanses a person from dirt. Paul may have baptism in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you were washed clean” or “you were purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	11	s55x	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ	When something is done **in the name of** a person, it is done with the authority or power of that person. Here the cleansing, sanctification, and justification are done with the authority or power of Jesus, since they are done **in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the name of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “with the power of the Lord Jesus Christ” or “by the authority of the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	6	11	gzrh	figs-possession	τῷ Πνεύματι τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify the **Spirit** as **our God**, that is, as the Holy Spirit. He does not mean that the **Spirit** is something that belongs to **our God**. If your language would not use that form to identify the **Spirit** as **our God**, you could use a word or phrase that does identify the **Spirit** as **our God** or the “Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is our God” or “the Holy Spirit, our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -709,9 +709,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	6	12	r4mx	figs-explicit	πάντα	-1	Everything is lawful for me	Here, **Everything** refers to any action or behavior that one might pursue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Everything** by clarifying that Paul is referring to any action or behavior. Alternate translation: “Every behavior … every behavior … Every behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	6	12	y6kn	figs-explicit	συμφέρει	1		Here Paul does not say to whom **everything** is not **beneficial**. He means that **everything** is not **beneficial** to the person or people who say that **Everything is lawful** for them. If your language would include for whom **everything** is not **beneficial**, you could include a phrase such as “for you” here. Alternate translation: “is beneficial for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	6	12	c8vz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος	1	I will not be mastered by any of them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are not **mastered** rather than focusing on **anything**, which tries to do the “mastering.” Alternate translation: “nothing will master me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	6	12	p0d8	translate-unknown	οὐκ&ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό	1		Here, **be mastered** refers to being under the authority of something else. Paul here means that some things, when a person habitually does them, begin to have power or control over that person. Here, then, he wishes to tell the Corinthians that, while such things might be **lawful**, they should avoid doing these things because they will **be mastered** by these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **be mastered**by using words that refer to “power” or “control.” Alternate translation: “will not be controlled by” or “will not be under the power of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	6	13	jz55	writing-quotations	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν;&δὲ	1	“Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but God will do away with both of them	In this verse, Paul quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying, just like he did in [6:12](../06/12.md). The ULT, by using quotation marks, indicates that this claim is a quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach for food** and think that Paul is claiming this by clarifying that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘Food is for the stomach, and the stomach for food,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-1CO	6	13	gt0n	figs-ellipsis	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν&τὸ&σῶμα οὐ τῇ πορνείᾳ, ἀλλὰ τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		In these two sentences, Paul omits **{is}** multiple times. If your language does not need to state **{is}** to express the idea, you can omit **{is}** throughout these two sentences. If your language does need to state **{is}** to express the idea, you could: (1) include **{is}** the first time it is needed in each sentence. See the ULT. (2) include **{is}** every time it is needed. Alternate translation: “Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food … the body is not for sexual immorality, but is for the Lord, and the Lord is for the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	6	12	p0d8	translate-unknown	οὐκ & ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό	1		Here, **be mastered** refers to being under the authority of something else. Paul here means that some things, when a person habitually does them, begin to have power or control over that person. Here, then, he wishes to tell the Corinthians that, while such things might be **lawful**, they should avoid doing these things because they will **be mastered** by these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **be mastered**by using words that refer to “power” or “control.” Alternate translation: “will not be controlled by” or “will not be under the power of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	6	13	jz55	writing-quotations	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν; & δὲ	1	“Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but God will do away with both of them	In this verse, Paul quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying, just like he did in [6:12](../06/12.md). The ULT, by using quotation marks, indicates that this claim is a quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach for food** and think that Paul is claiming this by clarifying that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘Food is for the stomach, and the stomach for food,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+1CO	6	13	gt0n	figs-ellipsis	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν & τὸ & σῶμα οὐ τῇ πορνείᾳ, ἀλλὰ τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		In these two sentences, Paul omits **{is}** multiple times. If your language does not need to state **{is}** to express the idea, you can omit **{is}** throughout these two sentences. If your language does need to state **{is}** to express the idea, you could: (1) include **{is}** the first time it is needed in each sentence. See the ULT. (2) include **{is}** every time it is needed. Alternate translation: “Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food … the body is not for sexual immorality, but is for the Lord, and the Lord is for the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	6	13	uc1v	translate-unknown	καταργήσει	1	do away with	Here, **will do away with** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God will make **food** and **the stomach** unimportant and without function. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **will do away with** with a word or phrase that indicates that a God has acted so that **food** and **the stomach** are no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “will render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	6	13	scrh	writing-pronouns	καὶ ταύτην καὶ ταῦτα	1		Here, **this** refers to **stomach**, and **those** refers to **food**, since **food** is plural here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **this** and **those** refer to with the names **stomach** and **food** instead. Alternate translation: “both stomach and food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	6	13	pd10	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	2		Here, **Now** introduces a development based on what Paul has said about **food** and **the stomach**. While **food** is indeed **for the stomach**, the **body** is not **for sexual immorality**. Paul agrees with the Corinthians about **food** and **the stomach**, but he disagrees that **sexual immorality** and **the body** should be understood in the same way. Instead, **the body** exists **for the Lord**. Paul further explains in the next verse ([6:14](../06/14.md)) that, unlike **food** and **the stomach**, God will not **do away with** the **body**, since we will be resurrected. If **Now** would not introduce a difference between **the stomach** and **the body**, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce such a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -720,12 +720,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	6	13	zpx9	figs-explicit	καὶ ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		Here, **the Lord for the body** could express the idea that: (1) the **Lord** works for the human **body** and not just the human “soul” or nonphysical part. If you use either of the following alternate translations, you may need to include a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and the Lord works for the body” (2) the **Lord** is human now and in a **body**, which would explain why Paul speaks about the resurrection of the **Lord** in the next verse. Alternate translation: “and the Lord has a human body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	6	14	tayy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** introduces one way in which “the Lord is for the body” ([6:13](../06/13.md)). Human bodies are important and are not for sexual immorality, because God will raise those who believe to new life, and this includes human bodies. If **Now** would not introduce a further development of the argument in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does function in this way. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	6	14	ev9l	figs-idiom	τὸν Κύριον ἤγειρεν, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐξεγερεῖ	1	raised the Lord	Paul uses the words **raised** and **raise up** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “restored the Lord to life and will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	6	14	jvng		ἤγειρεν&ἐξεγερεῖ	1		Here, **raised** and **raise up** have the same meaning. Paul uses a slightly different word for variety or because he is referring to the future. In your translation, you could use the same word for **raised** and **raise up**. Alternate translation: “raised … will … raise”
+1CO	6	14	jvng		ἤγειρεν & ἐξεγερεῖ	1		Here, **raised** and **raise up** have the same meaning. Paul uses a slightly different word for variety or because he is referring to the future. In your translation, you could use the same word for **raised** and **raise up**. Alternate translation: “raised … will … raise”
 1CO	6	14	wgh4	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “powerfully” or an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “by working powerfully” or “by his powerful action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	6	15	gt2x	figs-metaphor	μέλη Χριστοῦ&τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ&πόρνης μέλη	1	Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ?	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **members**, which are body parts, that belong either to **Christ** or to a **prostitute**. He speaks in this way to indicate how closely joined the Corinthians are either to **Christ** or to a **prostitute**. This union is as close as the union between a finger and the body to which it belongs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “united to Christ … people who are united to Christ … unite with a prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	6	15	gt2x	figs-metaphor	μέλη Χριστοῦ & τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ & πόρνης μέλη	1	Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ?	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **members**, which are body parts, that belong either to **Christ** or to a **prostitute**. He speaks in this way to indicate how closely joined the Corinthians are either to **Christ** or to a **prostitute**. This union is as close as the union between a finger and the body to which it belongs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “united to Christ … people who are united to Christ … unite with a prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	15	io5p	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You should know that your bodies are members of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	6	15	agvy	figs-metaphor	ἄρας&τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks about **taking away the members of Christ** as if, like cutting off a finger, he could remove a body part from **Christ**. He speaks in this way to show how bad it is to remove a person from union with **Christ**. It is as bad as cutting off a finger, arm, or leg from a person’s body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having removed people from union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	6	15	f4vd	figs-rquestion	ἄρας&τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη?	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I should never take away the members of Christ and make them members of a prostitute.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	6	15	agvy	figs-metaphor	ἄρας & τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks about **taking away the members of Christ** as if, like cutting off a finger, he could remove a body part from **Christ**. He speaks in this way to show how bad it is to remove a person from union with **Christ**. It is as bad as cutting off a finger, arm, or leg from a person’s body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having removed people from union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	6	15	f4vd	figs-rquestion	ἄρας & τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη?	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I should never take away the members of Christ and make them members of a prostitute.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	15	h21r	figs-123person	ποιήσω	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	Here Paul speaks in the first person because he is using himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is treating himself as an example, or you could use a form that would naturally provide an example in your language. Alternate translation: “should I, for example, make them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	6	15	kmt2	figs-idiom	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it not be!	Here, **May it never be!** gives Paul’s own response to his question. The phrase is one of the strongest negatives Paul could use. Use a strong word or phrase that answers a question with a no. Alternate translation: “Never!” or “Absolutely not!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	6	16	seg6	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν?	1	Do you not know that … her?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “You know for sure that the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -735,25 +735,25 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	6	16	up28	figs-ellipsis	ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	Here Paul is pointing out that **the one being joined** and the **prostitute** make up **one body** together. He is not arguing that **the one being joined** by himself is **one body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that Paul implies. Alternate translation: “is one body with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	6	16	fioa	figs-metaphor	ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	Here Paul is speaking as if **the one being joined** and the **prostitute** together share **one body** when they have sex. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these two people have when they have sex, which is as close as if they had only one body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “shares all things with her” or “is united to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	16	m2gm	writing-quotations	γάρ, φησίν,	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	In Paul’s culture, **For it says** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Genesis” (see [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For in the book of Genesis we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-1CO	6	16	vv2n	figs-quotations	ἔσονται&φησίν, οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it says that the two will become as one flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	6	16	ks89	figs-explicit	ἔσονται&οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	The passage that Paul quotes here comes from the book of Genesis. The story is about God creating Adam and Eve, the first man and woman. When God brings Eve, the woman, to the man named Adam, the narrative comments that this is why “a man will leave his father and his mother, and he will cling to his wife, and they will become one flesh” ([Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md)). Paul quotes the end of this sentence here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what this quote refers to, you could include a footnote explaining the context. Additionally by clarifying what the word **two** refers to. Alternate translation: “A man and a woman will become as one flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	6	17	zyjd	figs-metaphor	ὁ&κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here, **being joined to the Lord** refers to what Paul elsewhere describes as being “in Christ” or “united to Christ.” Paul uses this specific phrase because he used it in the last verse to refer to union with a “prostitute” (see [6:16](../06/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being joined to the Lord** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. If possible, use the same words you that you used in the last verse for “joined to the prostitute.” Alternate translation: “the one who lives with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	6	17	c2tb	figs-activepassive	ὁ&κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person **being joined** rather than the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person did it to himself or herself. Alternate translation: “the one who joins himself to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	6	16	vv2n	figs-quotations	ἔσονται & φησίν, οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it says that the two will become as one flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	6	16	ks89	figs-explicit	ἔσονται & οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	The passage that Paul quotes here comes from the book of Genesis. The story is about God creating Adam and Eve, the first man and woman. When God brings Eve, the woman, to the man named Adam, the narrative comments that this is why “a man will leave his father and his mother, and he will cling to his wife, and they will become one flesh” ([Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md)). Paul quotes the end of this sentence here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what this quote refers to, you could include a footnote explaining the context. Additionally by clarifying what the word **two** refers to. Alternate translation: “A man and a woman will become as one flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	6	17	zyjd	figs-metaphor	ὁ & κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here, **being joined to the Lord** refers to what Paul elsewhere describes as being “in Christ” or “united to Christ.” Paul uses this specific phrase because he used it in the last verse to refer to union with a “prostitute” (see [6:16](../06/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being joined to the Lord** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. If possible, use the same words you that you used in the last verse for “joined to the prostitute.” Alternate translation: “the one who lives with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	6	17	c2tb	figs-activepassive	ὁ & κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person **being joined** rather than the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person did it to himself or herself. Alternate translation: “the one who joins himself to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	6	17	z273	figs-ellipsis	ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here Paul is pointing out that the **one being joined** and the **Lord** make up **one spirit** together. He is not arguing that the **one being joined** by himself is **one spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that Paul implies. Alternate translation: “is one spirit with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	6	17	vv1s	figs-metaphor	ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here Paul is speaking as if the **one being joined** and the **Lord** together share **one spirit** when the **one being joined** believes in the **Lord**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity between a believer and Jesus, which is as close as if they had only one spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “shares all things with him spiritually” or “is spiritually united to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	17	kt2x		πνεῦμά	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) a person’s **spirit** in contrast to his or her “body.” While a prostitute and a man can have “one body” ([6:16](../06/16.md)), which is a physical union, the Lord and a believer can have **one spirit**, which is a spiritual union. Alternate translation: “spiritually” (2) the Holy Spirit, who unites the Lord and the believer. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit”
 1CO	6	18	ex92	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε	1	Flee from	Here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **sexual immorality** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **Flee from**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Carefully stay away from” or “Fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	18	nhpq	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πορνείαν	1	Flee from	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “what is sexually immoral” or “sexually immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	6	18	sc9d	grammar-connect-exceptions	πᾶν ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ πορνεύων εἰς τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα ἁμαρτάνει	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using exception language. Alternate translation: “Almost every sin that a man might commit is outside the body, but the one who is sexually immoral sins against his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-1CO	6	18	dfck	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος&τὸ ἴδιον	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	Although **man** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** and **his** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a man or woman … his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	6	18	dfck	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος & τὸ ἴδιον	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	Although **man** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** and **his** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a man or woman … his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	6	18	jr46	figs-metaphor	ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν	1	sin that a person commits	Here Paul speaks as if sins were located **outside the body**. By speaking in this way, he means that most sins do not affect the **body** the way **sexual immorality** does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “does not directly affect the body” or “is apart from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	19	i5bt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?	The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:18](../06/18.md). Some people are indeed “sinning against their bodies.” Paul gives the correct alternative: they should **know** that their bodies are the “temple” of the **Holy Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	6	19	qy5j	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν, ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός ἐστιν, οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ?	1	Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You certainly know that your body is a temple of the Holy Spirit in you, whom you have from God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	19	bb35	grammar-collectivenouns	τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν	1	your body	The word **body** is a singular noun that refers to multiple “bodies.” Paul makes this clear by using a plural **your**. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “each of your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 1CO	6	19	d2mc	figs-metaphor	ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός	1	temple of the Holy Spirit	Here Paul speaks of the relationship between the believer and the **Holy Spirit** as if the believer were a **temple** and the **Holy Spirit** were the god that dwelled in that temple. In Paul’s culture, deities had specific temples, and they would be specially present to their worshipers in those temples. Paul applies this thinking to believers. Each believer is a **temple**, and the **Holy Spirit** is **in** each believer. This means that the Holy Spirit is specially present with each believer. This is a significant metaphor in the Bible so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea by using a simile. Alternate translation: “is a temple in which the Holy Spirit dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	6	19	cg8m		οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1	temple of the Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “whom God has given to you”
-1CO	6	20	vzz8	figs-metaphor	ἠγοράσθητε&τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	Here Paul speaks if the Corinthians were slaves whom God had **bought with a price** from someone else. Paul is speaking of what we often call “redemption.” The **price** is Christ’s death on the cross, which “redeems” believers from sin and evil powers. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. Alternate translation: “you were bought with a price, which is the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	6	20	qv47	figs-activepassive	ἠγοράσθητε&τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **bought** rather than the person doing the “buying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God bought you with a price” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	6	20	vzz8	figs-metaphor	ἠγοράσθητε & τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	Here Paul speaks if the Corinthians were slaves whom God had **bought with a price** from someone else. Paul is speaking of what we often call “redemption.” The **price** is Christ’s death on the cross, which “redeems” believers from sin and evil powers. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. Alternate translation: “you were bought with a price, which is the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	6	20	qv47	figs-activepassive	ἠγοράσθητε & τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **bought** rather than the person doing the “buying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God bought you with a price” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	6	20	y7fe		ἐν τῷ σώματι ὑμῶν	1	Therefore	Alternate translation: “with your body” or “with what you do with your body”
 1CO	6	20	t65e	translate-textvariants	ἐν τῷ σώματι ὑμῶν	1	Therefore	After **your body**, a few early manuscripts include “and in your spirit, which belong to God.” Most early manuscripts do not include these additional words. If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	7	intro	a25m			0		# 1 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. On abstinence (7:1–40)<br>      * Directions on sex in marriage (7:1–7)<br>      * Directions on marriage and divorce (7:8–16)<br>      * Believers should remain as God called them (7:17–24)<br>      * Benefit of staying as one is, whether single or married (7:25–35)<br>      * Exceptions for engaged Christians and widows (7:36–40)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The letter from the Corinthians to Paul<br><br>In [7:1](../07/01.md), Paul says that the Corinthians wrote to him. In fact, the second half of the verse is probably a quote from their letter to Paul. To show this, the ULT puts the quotation inside quotation marks. We do not know what else the letter included about marriage and sex. In the rest of the chapter, though, Paul responds to what they wrote to him.<br><br>### Sex and marriage<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks at length about sex and marriage. While he does not argue this here, he assumes that sexual relations should only take place within a marriage. This is clear when he says that lack of sexual self-control is a good reason to get married in [7:9](../07/09.md). Further, he has four categories of people in mind: those who have never gotten married, those who are engaged to be married, those who are no longer married (whether through divorce or death of a spouse), and those who are currently married. Whether your language has more or fewer categories for marital status, make the distinctions between these four categories as clear as possible.<br><br>### Sanctification of unbelieving spouse and children<br><br>In [7:12–16](../07/12.md), Paul addresses Christian men and women who have an unbelieving spouse. He specifically argues that they should stay together unless the unbelieving spouse wishes to leave the marriage. He argues that they should stay together because the unbelieving spouse and the children are “sanctified” by the believing spouse. By “sanctified,” Paul does not mean that the unbelieving spouse and the children are considered to be Christians whom God has saved. Rather, “sanctified” identifies the unbelieving spouse and the children as appropriate family for the believing spouse. In other words, having an unbelieving spouse does not make one’s marriage and children improper before God. Instead, God “sanctifies” them. If your language has a way to refer to an improper or unacceptable marriage, you might be able to use those kinds of words here.<br><br>### Divorce<br><br>In this passage, Paul uses a number of words and phrases to refer to what we call divorce: “being separated” ([7:10–11](../07/10.md)), “divorce” ([11–13](../07/11.md)), “departing” ([15](../07/15.md)), and “being released” ([27](../07/27.md)). In Paul’s culture, the rules for divorce were different in different places, and some divorces would have been more formal and legal than others. Additionally, in many places both men and women could divorce a spouse, but in a few places only men could divorce their wives. If Paul’s language would be understood in your language, you should try to preserve the different words and phrases he uses. If you need to make his language more consistent, use a word or phrase that refers generally to ending a marriage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/divorce]])<br><br>### The “virgin”<br><br>In [7:25–38](../07/25.md), Paul refers repeatedly to “virgins.” With this word, he identifies a woman who has never been married. The word does not necessarily mean that the woman has never had any sexual experiences. When Paul identifies the virgin as “his virgin,” he refers either to a woman who is engaged to be married to a man or to a daughter who is under the authority of her father (see the last section in this introduction). In your language, use a word or phrase that refers to a woman who has never been married.<br><br>### The “coming distress”<br><br>In [7:26](../07/26.md), Paul speaks of the “coming distress.” This is trouble, persecution, or difficulties that affect the Corinthian church and perhaps all churches. When Paul says that the distress is “coming,” he could mean that it has already begun to happen and will continue to happen. It is more likely, however, that “coming” means that the distress is about to begin. Because of this “distress,” Paul thinks that believers are better off not getting married. It is unclear what Paul thought about the length of this “distress.” Is the “distress” still happening in the present day? It is better not to clarify the answer to this in your translation, since Paul does not give any hints. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/trouble]])<br><br>### Calling<br><br>Paul refers consistently to a “calling” and to “being called” in [7:17–24](../07/17.md). Throughout this section, “being called” refers to God’s action to save a person. Paul speaks about a person’s situation when they “were called” as a “calling” in [7:20](../07/20.md), while in other places he specifies what that situation might be: married or unmarried, circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or free. The point Paul wishes to make is that God’s “call” does not require one to change one’s situation. Rather, God’s “call” is for people to serve him in the situation they are in. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/call]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms for having sex<br><br>In the first half of this chapter, Paul uses many euphemisms for having sex: “touching a woman” ([7:1](../07/01.md)), “duty” ([3](../07/03.md)), not “depriving each other” ([5](../07/05.md)), and being “together again” ([5](../07/05.md)). In most cases, he speaks in this way to be polite and avoid offending those who would read the letter. When this is true, you could translate Paul’s language with any polite way of referring to having sex in your language. However, the euphemism “duty” in ([7:3](../07/03.md)) particularly emphasizes that married couples are required to have sex. If your language has a euphemism that emphasizes “duty,” you could use it in that verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])<br><br>### Redemption<br><br>Just as in [6:20](../06/20.md), in [7:23](../07/23.md) Paul tells the Corinthians that they have been “bought with a price.” He does not state what the price is or from whom God bought the Corinthians. However, it is clear that Paul is speaking about what we call “redemption” here. Paul thinks of the Corinthians as slaves who are for sale, and God buys them from their previous owner by paying a price. The previous owner can be understood as sin, death, and evil powers, while the price is Jesus the Son dying for believers. You should not include all these implications in your translation, but you should use words that can be interpreted in this way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]])<br><br>### Those who have … should be as those who do not have …<br><br>In [7:29–31](../07/29.md), Paul emphasizes that those who have or do something “should be as those” who do not have or do that thing. He emphasizes this by giving a list of five examples. Paul’s point is that actions or things related to this world should not define who Christians are. He backs this up in [7:31](../07/31.md) by stating that “the present form of this world is passing away.” Therefore, those who weep should act like those who do not weep, and those who are married should act like those who are not married. Neither weeping nor marriage should have an impact on who the Christian is and on what the Christian does. As a Christian, none of these five things, which stand for everything in the “present form of this world,” are significant for one’s relationship to God. If possible, preserve the strong contrasts, which almost sound like contradictions. These strong contrasts are an essential part of Paul’s argument.<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses rhetorical questions in [7:16](../07/16.md). He asks these questions to involve the Corinthians in his argument and to force them to think about what he is saying. He again uses rhetorical questions in [7:18](../07/18.md), [21](../07/21.md), [27](../07/27.md). He asks these questions for a different reason: to identify those to whom his statements apply. If possible, you should preserve these questions. However, if your language does not use rhetorical questions, see the notes on each question for other translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Translating gendered words<br><br>In much of this chapter, Paul uses masculine and feminine words to identify when he is addressing men and when he is addressing women. Unlike in most of the previous chapters, then, you should intentionally preserve most of the gendered language in this chapter. The notes will identify any cases of gendered language that refer to all people. If there is no note, assume that the gendered language is functioning to distinguish between genders.<br><br>### Who speaks, Paul or the Lord?<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses a number of phrases to indicate whose authority lies behind the commands he gives. First, he marks [7:10–11](../07/10.md) as something that the Lord, not him, has spoken. Of course, he himself is speaking, but he is summarizing the Lord’s teaching on divorce. Therefore, “not I, but the Lord” in [7:11](../07/11.md) is Paul’s way of indicating that he is summarizing teaching directly from the Lord. Second, he marks [7:12–16](../07/12.md) as something he commands. By using “I, not the Lord” in [7:12](../07/12.md), he indicates that he gives the commands that follow on his own authority as an apostle. He is not saying that these commands are not as authoritative or important as those in [7:10–11](../07/10.md). Third, Paul introduces [7:25–40](../07/25.md) by stating that again he does “not have a command from the Lord,” but that he gives “an opinion” that God has made “trustworthy.” He concludes the section by stating that he has given his “judgment,” and he has the “Spirit of God” ([7:40](../07/40.md)). This is a slightly weaker claim to authority than he made in [7:12](../07/12.md): these are his “opinion” or “judgment.” However, Paul also claims that God has made him “trustworthy” and given him the Spirit, so these verses should not be taken simply as Paul’s private opinion. Rather, Paul himself already provides exceptions and qualifications in this section because he is less confident. Do not translate what Paul says as if it were simply advice from someone. Instead, this whole chapter carries apostolic authority.<br><br>### Father or fiancé in [7:36–38](../07/36.md)?<br><br>In these verses, Paul repeatedly refers to “he” or “him.” He does not state who this man is, but the man has a “virgin.” There are two common ways to understand these verses. First, and more likely, the man is engaged to “his virgin,” and Paul is giving him instructions on whether to get married or not. Second, and less likely, the man is the father of the daughter (“his virgin”), and Paul is giving him instructions on whether to give his daughter in marriage or not. If a specific translation choice follows one of these interpretations instead of the other, the notes on these verses will point out whether it matches the “fiancé interpretation” or the “father interpretation.”
@@ -765,17 +765,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	1	z9j5	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς	1		Here Paul refers to **man** and **woman** in the singular, but he is speaking generically of any **man** and any **woman**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “for men … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	1	mx7w	figs-euphemism	ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	not to touch a woman	Here, **for a man** to **touch a woman** is a euphemism for having sex. This is a general statement about having sex, although Paul primarily speaks about sex within marriage in the verses that follow. The Corinthians used this euphemism in their letter to Paul in order to be polite. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for a man not to touch a woman** with a similar polite euphemism in your language. Alternate translation: “for a man not to sleep with a woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1CO	7	2	c3uq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	But because	Here, **But** introduces the qualifications Paul wishes to give for the statement in the previous verse: “{It is} good for a man not to touch a woman.” Paul wishes to give qualifications about whether that statement is from the Corinthians or is Paul’s own statement. Use a word or phrase in your culture that introduces qualifications to a claim. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	7	2	fys4	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ&τὰς πορνείας	1	But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “because people are immoral” or “because of immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	7	2	ktqd	figs-metonymy	διὰ&τὰς πορνείας	1		Here, **because of immorality** refers to how people desire to commit **immorality** and do commit **immorality**. Paul does not refer to **immorality** in the abstract. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **immorality** with a word or phrase that refers to “temptation” or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “because of the temptation of immorality” or “because people act immorally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1CO	7	2	fys4	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ & τὰς πορνείας	1	But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “because people are immoral” or “because of immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	7	2	ktqd	figs-metonymy	διὰ & τὰς πορνείας	1		Here, **because of immorality** refers to how people desire to commit **immorality** and do commit **immorality**. Paul does not refer to **immorality** in the abstract. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **immorality** with a word or phrase that refers to “temptation” or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “because of the temptation of immorality” or “because people act immorally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	7	2	r822	figs-imperative3p	ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω	1		Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “each man should have his own wife, and each woman should have her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	2	j4wc	figs-idiom	ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω	1		The phrases **have his own wife** and **have her own husband** refer primarily to the ongoing state of being married, which includes continuing to have sex. However, the idiom primarily emphasizes remaining in a state of marriage with one’s current spouse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **have his own wife** and **have her own husband** with a comparable idiom or refer directly to staying married. Alternate translation: “let each man continue in marriage with his own wife, and let each woman continue in marriage with her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	7	3	he0c	figs-genericnoun	τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ&ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1		Here Paul refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each husband … to his wife … each wife … to her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	7	3	xv9s	figs-imperative3p	ὁ ἀνὴρ&ἀποδιδότω	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “A husband should give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	7	3	he0c	figs-genericnoun	τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ & ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1		Here Paul refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each husband … to his wife … each wife … to her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	3	xv9s	figs-imperative3p	ὁ ἀνὴρ & ἀποδιδότω	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “A husband should give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	3	mj8l	figs-euphemism	τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἀποδιδότω	1	sexual rights	Here Paul uses **duty** to refer to married couples having sex. He uses this word to be polite and also because he wishes to emphasize that having sex is an obligation for married couples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **duty** with a comparable euphemism or refer directly to how married couples “should” have sex. Alternate translation: “Let the husband fulfill his sexual obligations to the wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-1CO	7	3	vhv1	figs-ellipsis	ὁμοίως&καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	likewise the wife to her husband	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “likewise let the wife also give to the husband the duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	7	4	px2s	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ&ὁ ἀνήρ&ὁ ἀνὴρ&ἡ γυνή	1		Just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), Paul here refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each wife … her husband does … each husband … his wife does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	3	vhv1	figs-ellipsis	ὁμοίως & καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	likewise the wife to her husband	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “likewise let the wife also give to the husband the duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	7	4	px2s	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ & ὁ ἀνήρ & ὁ ἀνὴρ & ἡ γυνή	1		Just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), Paul here refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each wife … her husband does … each husband … his wife does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	4	a7nb	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ ἰδίου σώματος οὐκ ἐξουσιάζει	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **authority**, you can express the idea by using a verb or verbal phrase such as “control” or “claim as one’s own.” Alternate translation: “does not control her own body … does not control his own body” or “does not claim her body as her own … does not claim his body as his own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	7	4	sspg	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἀνήρ&ἡ γυνή	1		In both these places, Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of each statement in order to complete the thought, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “the husband has authority over her body … the wife has authority over his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	7	4	sspg	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἀνήρ & ἡ γυνή	1		In both these places, Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of each statement in order to complete the thought, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “the husband has authority over her body … the wife has authority over his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	7	5	qq7u	figs-euphemism	μὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους	1	Do not deprive each other	Here Paul omits a direct reference to having sex in order to be polite. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that they should not **deprive each other** of having sex. If your readers also would understand this, you could express the idea the same way Paul did. If your readers would not understand this, you may need to include a word or phrase that politely refers to having sex. Alternate translation: “Do not deprive each other of sleeping together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1CO	7	5	wzeh	grammar-connect-exceptions	μὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους, εἰ μήτι ἂν ἐκ συμφώνου	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “You should deprive each other only in one situation: by mutual agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1CO	7	5	cnr5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ συμφώνου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **agreement**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “when you both agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	6	zsy3	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ συνγνώμην, οὐ κατ’ ἐπιταγήν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **concession** and **command**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “concede” and “command.” Alternate translation: “because I concede it, not because I command it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	7	b7xz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a contrast with everything that Paul has said in [7:1–6](../07/01.md). In those verses, he speaks about how believers should act when they are already married. Now, however, he begins to talk about getting married, and he says that he wishes that people stayed unmarried, like he does. The **But** introduces a new stage in the argument that deals with getting married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a new but related topic. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	7	7	rbe7	figs-explicit	εἶναι ὡς καὶ ἐμαυτόν	1	were as I am	When Paul wrote this letter, he was not married, and as far as we know, he was never married. When Paul says that he wishes that all people were **even as myself**, he is referring to how he is unmarried. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **to be even as myself** to include the fact that Paul is not married. Alternate translation: “to be unmarried as I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	7	7	mlsi	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους&ἴδιον	1		Although **men** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** and **his** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “men and women … his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	7	mlsi	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους & ἴδιον	1		Although **men** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** and **his** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “men and women … his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	7	zima	figs-metaphor	χάρισμα	1		Here Paul speaks about the way of life that God has called each person to live as if it were a **gift** that each person receives from God. By using **gift**, Paul emphasizes that the person receives the **gift** freely from God and that the **gift** is a good thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **gift** plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “blessing” or “calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	7	w9ld	figs-ellipsis	ὁ μὲν οὕτως, ὁ δὲ οὕτως	1	But each one has his own gift from God. One has this kind of gift, and another that kind	Here Paul omits some words that may be necessary in your language to make a complete thought. If your language needs these words, you could include a phrase such as “acts in” or “live in.” Alternate translation: “one indeed acts in this way, and another acts in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	7	8	y6lc	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἀγάμοις	1		Here, **unmarried** could refer to: (1) people who are not currently married, whether they never have been married or are no longer married. Alternate translation: “to those without spouses” (2) men whose wives have died, which pairs well with **widows**. Alternate translation: “to the widowers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -801,24 +801,24 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	8	s7s9	translate-unknown	ταῖς χήραις	1		Here, **widows** refers specifically to women whose husbands have died. It does not refer to men whose wives have died. Alternate translation: “to women who are widowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	8	f43d	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that people might **remain** as Paul is or they might not. He specifies that it is **good** if they do **remain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	8	r27x	figs-explicit	μείνωσιν ὡς κἀγώ	1	it is good	Just as in [7:7](../07/07.md), Paul again assumes that his readers know that he is unmarried. When Paul says that it is good for **the unmarried** and **the widows** to **remain as I also am**, he is referring to how he is unmarried. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **remain as I also am** by including the fact that Paul is not married. Alternate translation: “remain without a spouse, as I also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	7	9	o4j5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται, γαμησάτωσαν	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that people might **have self-control** or they might not. Here he gives instructions for if they **do not have self-control**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whoever does not have self-control should marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	7	9	o4j5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται, γαμησάτωσαν	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that people might **have self-control** or they might not. Here he gives instructions for if they **do not have self-control**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whoever does not have self-control should marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	9	bxa2	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **self-control**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “self-controlled” or a verbal phrase such as “control themselves.” Alternate translation: “they are not self-controlled” or “they do not control themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	9	jy8g	figs-imperative3p	γαμησάτωσαν	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “let” or “should,” as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “let them marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	9	ty79	figs-metaphor	πυροῦσθαι	1	to burn with desire	Here, **to burn** is a way to refer to sexual desire. Paul uses **burn** because he represents the desire as hard to fight and as something that consumes a person like fire consumes a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or by including a reference to sexual desire. Alternate translation: “to burn with desire” or “to lust after someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	7	10	gxni	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς&γεγαμηκόσιν	1		Paul is using the adjective **married** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **married** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “to those who are married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	7	10	gxni	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς & γεγαμηκόσιν	1		Paul is using the adjective **married** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **married** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “to those who are married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	7	10	zwgk	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὐκ ἐγὼ, ἀλλὰ ὁ Κύριος	1		Here Paul clarifies that he is not the authority behind this command. It is **the Lord** who is the authority here. Paul specifically has in mind what **the Lord** said about marriage and divorce while he was on earth (see [Mark 10:5–12](../mrk/10/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **not I, but the Lord** either by identifying that it is not Paul “alone” who gives the command, or by clarifying that Paul is referring to what **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “not I alone, but the Lord also” or “and here I refer to what the Lord said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	7	10	ywsy	figs-genericnoun	γυναῖκα ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “each wife … from her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	7	10	hc5p	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ&μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1	should not separate from	Here, **to be separated from** is technical language for ending a marriage before death. The phrase does not distinguish between “separation” and “divorce.” If possible, use a similar general phrase in your language. Alternate translation: “is not to divorce or separate from” or “is not to leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	7	10	hc5p	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ & μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1	should not separate from	Here, **to be separated from** is technical language for ending a marriage before death. The phrase does not distinguish between “separation” and “divorce.” If possible, use a similar general phrase in your language. Alternate translation: “is not to divorce or separate from” or “is not to leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	7	10	h049	figs-activepassive	μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **wife**, who is **separated**, rather than the person doing the “separating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **wife** does it herself. Alternate translation: “is not to separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	11	wtbo	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν δὲ καὶ χωρισθῇ, μενέτω ἄγαμος ἢ τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1		The ULT puts this clause in parentheses because it is a qualification of what Paul said in [7:11](../07/11.md) and because one can read [7:10–11](../07/10.md) smoothly together without this clause. In this clause, Paul issues commands about what the wife is supposed to do if she divorces her husband despite what Paul has said. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. Alternate translation: “if she is separated despite what I have said, let her remain unmarried, or let her be reconciled to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	7	11	r5oz	figs-genericnoun	χωρισθῇ&τῷ ἀνδρὶ&ἄνδρα&γυναῖκα	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “one of the wives might be separated … to her husband … each husband … his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	11	r5oz	figs-genericnoun	χωρισθῇ & τῷ ἀνδρὶ & ἄνδρα & γυναῖκα	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “one of the wives might be separated … to her husband … each husband … his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	11	pqr9	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν δὲ καὶ χωρισθῇ, μενέτω	1		Here Paul uses **even if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a wife **might be separated**, or she might not. He then specifies the result if **she** is **separated**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let whichever wife might be separated remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	11	phpw	figs-activepassive	χωρισθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the “wife” who is **separated**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “separating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the “wife” does it herself. Alternate translation: “she separates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	11	lj79	figs-ellipsis	χωρισθῇ	1		Here Paul omits some words that might be needed in your language to make a complete thought. Paul omits them because he already used them in [7:10](../07/10.md) and he assumes his audience will infer them from there. If you need to include these words, you could insert the words “from her husband.” Alternate translation: “she might be separated from her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	7	11	tvo2	figs-imperative3p	μενέτω ἄγαμος ἢ τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1		Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “she must remain unmarried, or she must be reconciled to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	11	lxf7	figs-activepassive	τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1	be reconciled to her husband	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the “wife,” who is **reconciled**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “reconciling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the “wife” does it herself. Alternate translation: “let her reconcile with the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	11	k7ju		ἄνδρα γυναῖκα μὴ ἀφιέναι	1		Alternate translation: “a husband should not divorce a wife”
-1CO	7	12	k9yd		τοῖς&λοιποῖς	1	agrees	Here, **the rest** could refer to: (1) people in situations other than those already named, particularly those who are married to an unbelieving spouse. Alternate translation: “to the rest of those who are married” (2) everything else Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “about other situations”
+1CO	7	12	k9yd		τοῖς & λοιποῖς	1	agrees	Here, **the rest** could refer to: (1) people in situations other than those already named, particularly those who are married to an unbelieving spouse. Alternate translation: “to the rest of those who are married” (2) everything else Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “about other situations”
 1CO	7	12	xn88	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐγώ, οὐχ ὁ Κύριος	1		Here, **I, not the Lord** is the opposite of what Paul said in [7:10](../07/10.md). Paul wishes to clarify that he is the authority behind this command. Of course, **the Lord** made him an apostle and gave him authority, but he wants the Corinthians to know that he is speaking out of that authority here, and he is not referring to what **the Lord** said while he was on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **I, not the Lord** either by identifying that it is Paul alone who gives the command, or by clarifying that **the Lord** did not say anything about this topic. Alternate translation: “I alone” or “on my own authority, since the Lord did not speak about this topic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	7	12	rrfp	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις ἀδελφὸς γυναῖκα ἔχει ἄπιστον, καὶ αὕτη συνευδοκεῖ οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτοῦ, μὴ ἀφιέτω	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a **brother** might have **an unbelieving wife**, and she might agree **to live with him**, or this situation might not happen. He then specifies the result if this situation does happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let any brother who has an unbelieving wife who agrees to live with him not divorce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	12	ae1u	figs-idiom	οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **to live with him** refers to staying married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to live with him** with a comparable idiom that refers to staying married. Alternate translation: “to stay with him” or “to remain married to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -827,29 +827,29 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	13	q39l	figs-idiom	οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτῆς	1		Here, **to live with her** refers to staying married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to live with her** with a comparable idiom that refers to staying married. Alternate translation: “to stay with her” or “to remain married to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	7	13	fsbq	figs-imperative3p	μὴ ἀφιέτω τὸν ἄνδρα	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “she must not divorce the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	14	hv30	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces the reason or basis for Paul’s commands in [7:12–13](../07/12.md). When one spouse is not a believer, Paul wants them to stay together, and the reason is that the unbelieving spouse is **sanctified**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces the basis for a command. Alternate translation: “You should do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	7	14	k0qs	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί&ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “any unbelieving husband … through his wife … any unbelieving wife … through her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	7	14	l84p	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται&ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί; καὶ ἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God sanctifies the unbelieving husband through the wife, and God sanctifies the unbelieving wife through the brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	7	14	k0qs	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί & ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wife** and **husband** with a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “any unbelieving husband … through his wife … any unbelieving wife … through her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	14	l84p	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται & ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί; καὶ ἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God sanctifies the unbelieving husband through the wife, and God sanctifies the unbelieving wife through the brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	14	b9rb	translate-unknown	ἡγίασται	-1		Here, **sanctified** is a reference to purity. It does not mean that the **unbelieving husband** or **unbelieving wife** is considered to be a believer. Rather, Paul’s point is that the believing spouse is not made unclean by the unbelieving spouse. Just the opposite: the marriage is clean and pure because of the believing spouse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **sanctified** with a word or phrase that identifies an acceptable or pure marriage partner. Alternate translation: “is made clean … is made clean” or “is considered an acceptable spouse … is considered an acceptable spouse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	14	i1x4	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	the brother	Here, **the brother** refers to a believing man, in this case the believing husband. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the brother** by clarifying that **the brother** is the **unbelieving wife**’s spouse. Alternate translation: “the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	7	14	x9vy	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐπεὶ ἄρα τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν ἀκάθαρτά ἐστιν	1		Here, **Otherwise** refers to what the situation would be like if what Paul has just said were not true. Paul does not actually think that **your children are unclean**, but that would be true if he was wrong about the unbelieving spouse being **sanctified**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Otherwise** with a form that refers to a situation that the author thinks is not true. Alternate translation: “If that were not so, your children would be unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	7	14	iy14	figs-123person	ὑμῶν	1		Here, **your** refers to anyone among the Corinthians who has an unbelieving spouse. Thus, it refers back to **the wife** and **the brother**. If your language would not use **your** in this situation, you could use **their** instead. Alternate translation: “their” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	7	14	qtbz	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νῦν δὲ ἅγιά ἐστιν	1		Here, **but now** provides the contrast with **Otherwise your children are unclean**. The word **now** does not refer to time but rather identifies that what Paul has said about the unbelieving spouse being **sanctified** really is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **now** with a word or phrase that identifies that what Paul has said is true. Alternate translation: “but since the unbelieving spouse is sanctified, they are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	7	14	fmu5	translate-unknown	ἀκάθαρτά&ἅγιά	1	they are set apart	Here, **holy** is a reference to purity, and **unclean** is a reference to impurity. The word **holy** does not mean that the **children** are considered to be believers. Rather, Paul’s point is that the **children** are not made **unclean** by having an unbelieving parent. Just the opposite: the **children** are clean and pure because of the believing parent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unclean** and **holy** with words or phrases that identify the **children** as those born in a “clean” or “honorable” way. Alternate translation: “not pure … pure” or “dishonored … honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	7	15	rdwy	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **the unbeliever** might depart, or he or she might not. He then specifies the result for if **the unbeliever departs**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whichever unbeliever departs, let him go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	7	15	qjmw	figs-idiom	εἰ&ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω	1		Here, **departs** refers to ending the marriage, that is, leaving the spouse. The phrase **let him go** refers to allowing the spouse to break the marriage or leave. If these words would not refer to breaking a marriage or getting divorced in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “if the unbeliever wants a divorce, let him divorce you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	7	15	t5tf	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἄπιστος&χωριζέσθω	1		Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer back to **the unbeliever**, which could refer to either a man or a woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the unbeliever … let him or her go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	7	15	uefj	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἄπιστος&ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1		Here Paul is speaking of unbelievers, brothers, and sisters in general and not of just one **unbeliever**, **brother**, or **sister**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these words with a comparable way to refer generically to unbelievers, brothers, and sisters. Alternate translation: “one of the unbelievers … the brother or the sister involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	14	fmu5	translate-unknown	ἀκάθαρτά & ἅγιά	1	they are set apart	Here, **holy** is a reference to purity, and **unclean** is a reference to impurity. The word **holy** does not mean that the **children** are considered to be believers. Rather, Paul’s point is that the **children** are not made **unclean** by having an unbelieving parent. Just the opposite: the **children** are clean and pure because of the believing parent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unclean** and **holy** with words or phrases that identify the **children** as those born in a “clean” or “honorable” way. Alternate translation: “not pure … pure” or “dishonored … honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	7	15	rdwy	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **the unbeliever** might depart, or he or she might not. He then specifies the result for if **the unbeliever departs**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whichever unbeliever departs, let him go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	7	15	qjmw	figs-idiom	εἰ & ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω	1		Here, **departs** refers to ending the marriage, that is, leaving the spouse. The phrase **let him go** refers to allowing the spouse to break the marriage or leave. If these words would not refer to breaking a marriage or getting divorced in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “if the unbeliever wants a divorce, let him divorce you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	7	15	t5tf	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἄπιστος & χωριζέσθω	1		Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer back to **the unbeliever**, which could refer to either a man or a woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the unbeliever … let him or her go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	15	uefj	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἄπιστος & ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1		Here Paul is speaking of unbelievers, brothers, and sisters in general and not of just one **unbeliever**, **brother**, or **sister**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these words with a comparable way to refer generically to unbelievers, brothers, and sisters. Alternate translation: “one of the unbelievers … the brother or the sister involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	15	h9qc	figs-imperative3p	χωριζέσθω	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “allow him to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	15	jef4	figs-metaphor	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1	In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows	Here, **bound** could refer to: (1) the marriage with an unbelieving spouse. Paul is saying that the **brother or the sister** does not need to try to preserve the marriage. They are not **bound** to the unbeliever but can accept the divorce. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is not bound to the unbeliever” (2) the rules that Paul laid out for staying with a spouse in [7:10–13](../07/10.md). Paul is saying that **the brother or the sister** does not have to follow those rules about staying with a spouse, and perhaps he is even saying that they can marry someone else. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is not bound to remain unmarried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	15	v76o	figs-explicit	ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1	In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows	Here Paul uses **brother** and **sister** to identify the people involved as believers of both genders. The people he refers to are **brother** and **sister** of the Corinthian believers, not of the **unbeliever**. Rather, **the brother or the sister** is married to the **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the brother or the sister** with a word or phrase that refers to believing husbands and wives. Alternate translation: “the believing husband or wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	7	15	q6k2	figs-activepassive	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **not bound** rather than focusing on what does the “binding.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “the marriage” does not bind the **brother** or **sister**. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	15	z5nz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	2		Here, **but** introduces how Paul wants the Corinthians to act in general. Whether their spouse leaves or not, they should act in **peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **but**by using a word or phrase that introduces a general principle. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “In every case,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	7	15	tli3	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “peaceful” or an adverb such as “peaceably.” Alternate translation: “act peaceably” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	7	16	l559	figs-yousingular	οἶδας&τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις&οἶδας&τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις	1	do you know, woman … you will save your husband … do you know, man … you will save your wife	Here Paul addresses each individual woman within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-1CO	7	16	h5td	figs-rquestion	τί&οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις? ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer is “we do not know for sure.” If these questions would be confusing for your readers, you could express the ideas by using statements. Paul could be using these questions to show the Corinthians that: (1) they should have little confidence about unbelieving spouses becoming Christians. The questions thus support how Paul allows divorces initiated by an unbelieving spouse in [7:15](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “you cannot know, woman, that you will save the husband. And you cannot know, man, that you will save the wife.” (2) show the Corinthians that they should have much confidence about unbelieving spouses becoming Christians. The questions thus support how Paul says that the unbelieving spouse is “holy” in [7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “you could not know, woman, but you may save the husband. And you could not know, man, but you may save the wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	7	16	nd1k	figs-infostructure	τί γὰρ οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ&τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here, the words **woman** and **man** are direct addresses to people in the audience. If your language would put these words somewhere else in the sentence, you could move them to where they sound natural. Alternate translation: “For woman, how do you know whether… man, how do you know whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	7	16	dbz6		τί&οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις? ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul directly addresses a **woman** and a **man** in the audience. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean a **woman** or **man** in their group who was married to an unbelieving spouse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **woman** or **man** by stating the direct address in a different way. Alternate translation: “how does any woman know whether she will save the husband? Or how does any man know whether he will save the wife?”
-1CO	7	16	b5zw	figs-genericnoun	γύναι&τὸν ἄνδρα&ἄνερ&τὴν γυναῖκα	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul refers to **woman**, **husband**, **man**, and **wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically of any person who fits into these categories. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each of you women … your husband … each of you men … your wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	16	l559	figs-yousingular	οἶδας & τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις & οἶδας & τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις	1	do you know, woman … you will save your husband … do you know, man … you will save your wife	Here Paul addresses each individual woman within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	7	16	h5td	figs-rquestion	τί & οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις? ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer is “we do not know for sure.” If these questions would be confusing for your readers, you could express the ideas by using statements. Paul could be using these questions to show the Corinthians that: (1) they should have little confidence about unbelieving spouses becoming Christians. The questions thus support how Paul allows divorces initiated by an unbelieving spouse in [7:15](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “you cannot know, woman, that you will save the husband. And you cannot know, man, that you will save the wife.” (2) show the Corinthians that they should have much confidence about unbelieving spouses becoming Christians. The questions thus support how Paul says that the unbelieving spouse is “holy” in [7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “you could not know, woman, but you may save the husband. And you could not know, man, but you may save the wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	7	16	nd1k	figs-infostructure	τί γὰρ οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ & τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here, the words **woman** and **man** are direct addresses to people in the audience. If your language would put these words somewhere else in the sentence, you could move them to where they sound natural. Alternate translation: “For woman, how do you know whether… man, how do you know whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	7	16	dbz6		τί & οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις? ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul directly addresses a **woman** and a **man** in the audience. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean a **woman** or **man** in their group who was married to an unbelieving spouse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **woman** or **man** by stating the direct address in a different way. Alternate translation: “how does any woman know whether she will save the husband? Or how does any man know whether he will save the wife?”
+1CO	7	16	b5zw	figs-genericnoun	γύναι & τὸν ἄνδρα & ἄνερ & τὴν γυναῖκα	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul refers to **woman**, **husband**, **man**, and **wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically of any person who fits into these categories. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each of you women … your husband … each of you men … your wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	16	jt3c	figs-metonymy	σώσεις	-1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul speaks of husbands or wives leading their spouses to faith in Jesus as “saving” them. By this, Paul means that the **woman** or **man** is the means by which God will **save** the **husband** or **wife**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **you will save** with a word or phrase that refers to leading someone towards “salvation,” that is, helping them to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will use you to save … God will use you to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	7	17	ivee	grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ μὴ	1	each one	Here, **However** acknowledges the exception about “walking” **as the Lord has assigned to each one** that he just included: if an unbelieving spouse wishes to divorce a believing spouse, that is permissible. Paul acknowledges this exception but wishes to emphasize the main point: the believers should remain in the state they are in. If **However** would not have the meaning of acknowledging an exception to a claim, you could use a word or phrase that does do so. Alternate translation: “In every other case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	7	17	l5lu	figs-infostructure	ἑκάστῳ ὡς ἐμέρισεν ὁ Κύριος, ἕκαστον ὡς κέκληκεν ὁ Θεός, οὕτως περιπατείτω	1	each one	If your language would state the command to **walk** before explaining how to **walk**, you could rearrange these clauses so that they read more naturally. Alternate translation: “let each one walk as the Lord has assigned to each one, as God has called each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -858,54 +858,54 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	17	c7b9	figs-imperative3p	περιπατείτω	1	each one	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	17	o6v2	figs-gendernotations	περιπατείτω	1	each one	Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	17	iid2		καὶ οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι	1	I direct in this way in all the churches	Alternate translation: “This is what I require from all the churches”
-1CO	7	18	zo3j	figs-gendernotations	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω&μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Here Paul is speaking of male circumcision only. Therefore, the masculine words in this verse should be retained in translation if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	18	zo3j	figs-gendernotations	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω & μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Here Paul is speaking of male circumcision only. Therefore, the masculine words in this verse should be retained in translation if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	18	unc4	figs-rquestion	περιτετμημένος τις ἐκλήθη? μὴ ἐπισπάσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the following command applies to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If anyone was called, having been circumcised, let him not be uncircumcised.” or “Some of you were called, having been circumcised. If that is you, do not be uncircumcised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	7	18	gpav	figs-activepassive	τις ἐκλήθη&κέκληταί τις	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “Did God call anyone … Did God call anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	7	18	gpav	figs-activepassive	τις ἐκλήθη & κέκληταί τις	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “Did God call anyone … Did God call anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	18	xt7p	figs-activepassive	περιτετμημένος	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **circumcised** rather than focusing on the person doing the “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you can use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “someone having circumcised them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	18	tkn4	translate-unknown	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	To **be uncircumcised** refers to a physical procedure by which one could make one’s penis appear to have a foreskin, even though one had been circumcised. If your language has a word for this procedure, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you can use a phrase that identifies this procedure. Alternate translation: “Let him not hide his circumcision” or “Let him not undo his circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	7	18	cejz	figs-imperative3p	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω&μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “He must not be uncircumcised … he must not be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
-1CO	7	18	uwuw	figs-activepassive	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω&μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **uncircumcised** or **circumcised** rather than the person doing the “uncircumcising” or “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you can use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Let someone not uncircumcise him … Let someone not circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	7	18	cejz	figs-imperative3p	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω & μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “He must not be uncircumcised … he must not be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	7	18	uwuw	figs-activepassive	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω & μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **uncircumcised** or **circumcised** rather than the person doing the “uncircumcising” or “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you can use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Let someone not uncircumcise him … Let someone not circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	18	fqv6	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις? μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the following command applies to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If anyone was called in uncircumcision, let him not be circumcised.” or “Some of you were called in uncircumcision. If that is you, do not be circumcised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	7	18	a8g3	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **uncircumcision**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “uncircumcised.” Alternate translation: “while uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	19	oajz	figs-hyperbole	ἡ περιτομὴ οὐδέν ἐστιν, καὶ ἡ ἀκροβυστία οὐδέν ἐστιν	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Here Paul says that both **Circumcision** and **uncircumcision** are **nothing**. He does not mean that **Circumcision** and **uncircumcision** do not exist. Rather, the Corinthians would have understood him to mean that **Circumcision** and **uncircumcision** do not have value or importance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **nothing** with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Circumcision has no value, and uncircumcision has no value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	7	19	focy	figs-parallelism	ἡ περιτομὴ οὐδέν ἐστιν, καὶ ἡ ἀκροβυστία οὐδέν ἐστιν	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Here Paul repeats **is nothing** because this repetition was powerful in his language. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine the two clauses and make the claim sound strong by using some other method. Alternate translation: “Neither circumcision nor uncircumcision is anything”” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1CO	7	19	eku9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ περιτομὴ&ἡ ἀκροβυστία	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you can express the ideas by using adjectives such as “circumcised” and “uncircumcised.” Alternate translation: “Being circumcised … being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	7	19	eku9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ περιτομὴ & ἡ ἀκροβυστία	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you can express the ideas by using adjectives such as “circumcised” and “uncircumcised.” Alternate translation: “Being circumcised … being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	19	nc2u	figs-ellipsis	τήρησις ἐντολῶν Θεοῦ	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Here Paul omits some words that may be necessary in your language to complete the thought. If your language does require more words, you could infer them from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “observance of the commandments of God is everything” or “observance of the commandments of God is important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	7	19	vx9p	figs-abstractnouns	τήρησις ἐντολῶν	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **observance**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “observe.” Alternate translation: “observing the commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	19	he16	figs-abstractnouns	ἐντολῶν Θεοῦ	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **commandments**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	20	khsd	figs-infostructure	ἕκαστος ἐν τῇ κλήσει ᾗ ἐκλήθη, ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω	1	General Information:	The order of elements in this sentence might be confusing in your language. If your language would structure this sentence in a different way, you could rearrange the elements so that they sound more natural. Paul has arranged the elements to emphasize **in the calling in which he was called**, so retain the emphasis on this element if possible. Alternate translation: “Let each one remain in the calling in which he was called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	7	20	ssaq		ἐν τῇ κλήσει ᾗ ἐκλήθη	1	General Information:	Alternate translation: “in the calling which God gave to him” or “in his own calling from God”
-1CO	7	20	yy8l	figs-gendernotations	ἐκλήθη&μενέτω	1	General Information:	Here, the words translated **he** and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **him**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she was called, let him or her remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	20	yy8l	figs-gendernotations	ἐκλήθη & μενέτω	1	General Information:	Here, the words translated **he** and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he** and **him**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she was called, let him or her remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	20	hsz1	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθη	1	in the calling … he should remain	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	20	s3mh	figs-imperative3p	μενέτω	1	in the calling … he should remain	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	20	hrqk	figs-metaphor	ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω	1	in the calling … he should remain	Here, **remain in** refers to faithfully serving God in a specific situation. In other words, Paul does not want them to try to change their social and economic situation. Instead, they should serve God in the situation in which God **called** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **remain in** plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “let him live his life in that” or “let him be content in that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	7	21	ag5a	figs-yousingular	ἐκλήθης&σοι&δύνασαι	1	Were you … called you? Do not be … you can become	Here Paul addresses each individual person within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	7	21	ag5a	figs-yousingular	ἐκλήθης & σοι & δύνασαι	1	Were you … called you? Do not be … you can become	Here Paul addresses each individual person within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	7	21	nli9	figs-rquestion	δοῦλος ἐκλήθης? μή σοι μελέτω	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the command that follows applies to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If you were called as a slave, let it not be a concern to you.” or “Some of you were called as slaves. If that is you, let it not be a concern to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	7	21	emau	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθης	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **you**, who are **called**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “Did God call you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	21	l8qt	figs-imperative3p	μή σοι μελέτω	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should,” or you could rephrase the imperative. Alternate translation: “Do not be concerned about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	21	y02l	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ καὶ δύνασαι ἐλεύθερος γενέσθαι, μᾶλλον χρῆσαι	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might be **able to become free**, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if someone is **able to become free**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “indeed whoever is able to become free should take advantage of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	21	h7e1		χρῆσαι	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	Alternate translation: “use the opportunity that you have”
 1CO	7	22	mgt6	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the Lord’s freeman	Here, **For** provides support for the claim that Paul made at the beginning of the previous verse that those who are slaves should not be concerned by that ([7:21](../07/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **For** supports explicit. Alternate translation: “Do not be concerned about being a slave because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	7	22	l6vq	figs-activepassive	ὁ&ἐν Κυρίῳ κληθεὶς&ὁ…κληθεὶς	1	the Lord’s freeman	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the one whom God called in the Lord as … the one whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	7	22	l6vq	figs-activepassive	ὁ & ἐν Κυρίῳ κληθεὶς & ὁ…κληθεὶς	1	the Lord’s freeman	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the one whom God called in the Lord as … the one whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	22	gy9z	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	the Lord’s freeman	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the person **having been called** as someone who is united to the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	22	ie5k	figs-possession	ἀπελεύθερος Κυρίου	1	the Lord’s freeman	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe someone who is a **freedman** in the perspective of **the Lord**. In other words, while the person may be a slave in terms of human thinking, that person is a **freedman** before **the Lord**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by speaking about the Lord’s “perspective” or “sight.” Alternate translation: “is a freedman in the Lord’s eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	7	22	npb1	figs-possession	δοῦλός&Χριστοῦ	1	the Lord’s freeman	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe someone who is a **slave** who belongs to **Christ**. In other words, while the person may be free in terms of human thinking, that person is a **slave** in relationship to **Christ**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belonging to.” Alternate translation: “a slave who belongs to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	7	22	npb1	figs-possession	δοῦλός & Χριστοῦ	1	the Lord’s freeman	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe someone who is a **slave** who belongs to **Christ**. In other words, while the person may be free in terms of human thinking, that person is a **slave** in relationship to **Christ**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belonging to.” Alternate translation: “a slave who belongs to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	7	23	m53p	figs-activepassive	τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε	1	You have been bought with a price	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **you**, who are **bought**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “buying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God bought you with a price” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	23	sgft	figs-metaphor	τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε	1	You have been bought with a price	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were slaves whom God had **bought with a price** from someone else. Paul is speaking of what we often call “redemption.” The **price** is Christ’s death on the cross, which “redeems” believers from sin and evil powers. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. Alternate translation: “you were bought with a price, which is the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	23	pe5g	figs-metaphor	μὴ γίνεσθε δοῦλοι ἀνθρώπων	1	You have been bought with a price	Here Paul uses **slaves** as a description of anyone who follows and obeys someone else. Paul wants the Corinthians, whether they are **slaves** or “freedmen” in social and economic terms, to only obey and serve God, not **men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **slaves** by clarifying that Paul has “serving” and “obeying” in mind. Alternate translation: “do not obey men” or “do not serve mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	23	pjgp	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	You have been bought with a price	Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	24	jio8			0	General Information	This verse is very similar to [7:20](../07/20.md). The main difference is that this verse refers to remaining **with God**, while that verse does not. With that exception, translate this verse so that it sounds similar to [7:20](../07/20.md).
-1CO	7	24	s3ms	figs-infostructure	ἕκαστος ἐν ᾧ ἐκλήθη&ἐν τούτῳ μενέτω παρὰ Θεῷ.	1	Brothers	The order of elements in this sentence might be confusing in your language. If your language would structure this sentence in a different way, you could rearrange the elements so that they sound more natural. Paul has arranged the elements to emphasize **each one in that which he was called**, so retain the emphasis on this element if possible. Alternate translation: “let each one remain with God in that which he was called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	7	24	s3ms	figs-infostructure	ἕκαστος ἐν ᾧ ἐκλήθη & ἐν τούτῳ μενέτω παρὰ Θεῷ.	1	Brothers	The order of elements in this sentence might be confusing in your language. If your language would structure this sentence in a different way, you could rearrange the elements so that they sound more natural. Paul has arranged the elements to emphasize **each one in that which he was called**, so retain the emphasis on this element if possible. Alternate translation: “let each one remain with God in that which he was called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	7	24	yrp9		ἐν ᾧ ἐκλήθη	1	Brothers	Alternate translation: “in that which God gave to him” or “in what he received from God”
-1CO	7	24	qu1l	figs-gendernotations	ἐκλήθη, ἀδελφοί&μενέτω	1	Brothers	Although **Brothers**, **he**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Brothers**, **he**, and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters … he or she was called, let him or her remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	24	qu1l	figs-gendernotations	ἐκλήθη, ἀδελφοί & μενέτω	1	Brothers	Although **Brothers**, **he**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Brothers**, **he**, and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters … he or she was called, let him or her remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	24	c83e	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθη	1	was called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	24	ghrk	figs-imperative3p	μενέτω	1	was called	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	24	wix0	figs-metaphor	ἐν τούτῳ μενέτω παρὰ Θεῷ	1	was called	Here, **remain with God in that** refers to faithfully serving God in a specific situation. In other words, Paul does not want them to try to change their social and economic situations. Instead, they should serve God in the situations in which God called them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **remain with God in that** plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “let him live his life with God in that” or “let him be content serving God in that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	25	ag3x	grammar-connect-words-phrases	περὶ δὲ	1	Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord	Just as in [7:1](../07/01.md), **Now concerning** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now concerning** here as you did in [7:1](../07/01.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	7	25	f71a	translate-unknown	ἐπιταγὴν Κυρίου οὐκ ἔχω	1	Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord	Here Paul wishes to clarify that he is speaking out of the authority that he has as an apostle. He is not referring to anything that the Lord said while he was on earth, unlike what Paul did in [7:10](../07/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I do not have a command of the Lord** with the language of “authority” or “quotation.” Alternate translation: “I do not quote from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	25	q3k1	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιταγὴν Κυρίου	1	Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “anything that the Lord commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	7	25	vaa4	translate-unknown	γνώμην&δίδωμι	1	I give my opinion	Here, **I give an opinion** identifies that Paul is speaking from his own knowledge and authority. He wants the Corinthians to take this as strong advice, not as a command from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I give an opinion** with a word or phrase that indicates that what Paul says is not as strong as a command. Alternate translation: “I give my own view” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	7	25	iuyv	figs-abstractnouns	γνώμην&δίδωμι	1	I give my opinion	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opinion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “think.” Alternate translation: “I say what I think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	7	25	vaa4	translate-unknown	γνώμην & δίδωμι	1	I give my opinion	Here, **I give an opinion** identifies that Paul is speaking from his own knowledge and authority. He wants the Corinthians to take this as strong advice, not as a command from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I give an opinion** with a word or phrase that indicates that what Paul says is not as strong as a command. Alternate translation: “I give my own view” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	7	25	iuyv	figs-abstractnouns	γνώμην & δίδωμι	1	I give my opinion	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opinion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “think.” Alternate translation: “I say what I think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	25	qqz7	figs-activepassive	ἠλεημένος ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on Paul, who has **received mercy**, rather than focusing on the **Lord**, who gives the “mercy.” Alternate translation: “one to whom the Lord has given mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	25	lyqi	figs-abstractnouns	ἠλεημένος ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mercy**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “mercifully” or an adjective such as “merciful.” Alternate translation: “having received what the Lord has mercifully done to make me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	26	zf3o	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Here, **Therefore** does not refer back to how Paul has received mercy from God. Rather, **Therefore** introduces the “opinion” that Paul said he was going to “give” ([7:25](../07/25.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Therefore** with a word or phrase that introduces a statement that one has already spoken about. Alternate translation, changing the comma to a colon or a period: “Here is my opinion:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -913,10 +913,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	26	kqxa	figs-infostructure	τοῦτο καλὸν ὑπάρχειν διὰ τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἀνάγκην, ὅτι καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ τὸ οὕτως εἶναι	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Here Paul interrupts his sentence to include the reason why he thinks that this is **good** advice. He does this to emphasize **the coming distress**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate rearrange the sentence and represent the emphasis on **the coming distress** in another way. Alternate translation: “that it is good for a man to remain as he is. This is because of the coming distress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	7	26	lvoc	translate-unknown	τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἀνάγκην	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Here, **coming** could refer to: (1) something that is about to happen. Alternate translation: “of the distress that will soon be here” (2) something that is already happening. Alternate translation: “of the present distress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	26	a25d	translate-unknown	τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἀνάγκην	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Here, **distress** could refer to: (1) general suffering and persecution of the church throughout the world. Alternate translation: “of the coming general distress” (2) suffering and difficulties that the Corinthian believers are experiencing. Alternate translation: “of the distress coming on your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	7	26	ikl6	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπῳ&τὸ οὕτως	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Here, the words translated **man** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **man** and **he**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “for a person … as he or she is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	26	ikl6	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπῳ & τὸ οὕτως	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Here, the words translated **man** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **man** and **he**by using words that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “for a person … as he or she is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	26	r3xs		τὸ οὕτως εἶναι	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	Alternate translation: “to stay in the position he is in”
-1CO	7	27	a77x	figs-yousingular	δέδεσαι&λέλυσαι	1	General Information:	Here Paul addresses specific individuals within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-1CO	7	27	k9td	figs-rquestion	δέδεσαι γυναικί? μὴ ζήτει&λέλυσαι ἀπὸ γυναικός? μὴ ζήτει	1	Are you married to a wife? Do not	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to identify people who fit into the situations he describes. If someone answered “yes” to one of these questions, then the following command applies to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If you are bound to a woman, do not seek … If you are released from a woman, do not seek” or “Some of you are bound to a woman. If that is you, do not seek … Some of you are released from a woman. If that is you, do not seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	7	27	a77x	figs-yousingular	δέδεσαι & λέλυσαι	1	General Information:	Here Paul addresses specific individuals within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	7	27	k9td	figs-rquestion	δέδεσαι γυναικί? μὴ ζήτει & λέλυσαι ἀπὸ γυναικός? μὴ ζήτει	1	Are you married to a wife? Do not	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to identify people who fit into the situations he describes. If someone answered “yes” to one of these questions, then the following command applies to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions with a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If you are bound to a woman, do not seek … If you are released from a woman, do not seek” or “Some of you are bound to a woman. If that is you, do not seek … Some of you are released from a woman. If that is you, do not seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	7	27	r4kt	figs-idiom	δέδεσαι γυναικί	1	Are you married to a wife? Do not	Here, **bound to a wife** could refer to: (1) a man being engaged to marry a woman. Alternate translation: “Are you engaged to a woman” (2) a man being married to a woman. Alternate translation: “Are you married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	7	27	x2lk	figs-idiom	μὴ ζήτει λύσιν	1	Do not seek a divorce	Here, **released** could refer to: (1) breaking off an engagement or betrothal. Alternate translation: “Do not seek to break off the betrothal” (2) ending a marriage. Alternate translation: “Do not seek a divorce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	7	27	ypa2	figs-idiom	λέλυσαι ἀπὸ γυναικός	1	Do not seek a divorce	Here, **released from a wife** could refer to: (1) someone who has never been engaged or married. Alternate translation: “Are you single” (2) someone who has been engaged or married but broken the marriage or engagement. Alternate translation: “Have you left your fiancée” or “Have you divorced your wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -924,14 +924,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	27	d79c	figs-idiom	μὴ ζήτει γυναῖκα	1	do not seek a wife	Here, to **seek a wife** refers to searching for a **woman** to marry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **seek a wife** with a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “Do not look for a wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	7	28	sip2	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	I want to spare you from this	Here, **But** introduces an exception to Paul’s general advice in the previous verse ([7:27](../07/27.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces an exception. Alternate translation: “In fact, though,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	7	28	hi7o	figs-yousingular	γαμήσῃς, οὐχ ἥμαρτες	1	I want to spare you from this	Here Paul addresses specific men within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** here is singular. The **you** at the end of the verse is plural because here Paul has both the men and the women in mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-1CO	7	28	c66v	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν&καὶ γαμήσῃς, οὐχ ἥμαρτες	1	I want to spare you from this	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a man might **marry**, or a man might not. He then specifies the result for if the man does **marry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whichever man does indeed marry has not sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	7	28	c66v	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν & καὶ γαμήσῃς, οὐχ ἥμαρτες	1	I want to spare you from this	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a man might **marry**, or a man might not. He then specifies the result for if the man does **marry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whichever man does indeed marry has not sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	28	ad8m	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν γήμῃ ἡ παρθένος, οὐχ ἥμαρτεν	1	I want to spare you from this	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a **virgin** might **marry**, or she might not. He then specifies the result for **if the virgin** does **marry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whichever virgin marries has not sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	28	cav7	writing-pronouns	οἱ τοιοῦτοι	1	I want to spare you from this	Here, **the ones of such kind** refers back to the man and **the virgin** who **marry**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones of such kind** by clarifying that it refers to married people. Alternate translation: “those who are married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	7	28	r2qf	translate-unknown	θλῖψιν&τῇ σαρκὶ ἕξουσιν	1	I want to spare you from this	Here, **distress in the flesh** refers to the same problems and troubles that Paul has already called “the coming distress” in [7:26](../07/26.md). The phrase does not refer to marital problems or fights with one’s spouse. Rather, it refers to extra **distress** that married people will experience while suffering under persecution and troubles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **distress in the flesh** by referring to how you translated “the coming distress” in [7:26](../07/26.md) and making the connection to that phrase clear. Alternate translation: “will experience the distress in the flesh that I have already said is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	7	28	m6ea	figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψιν&ἕξουσιν	1	I want to spare you from this	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **distress**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “will suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	7	28	whf5	writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ&ὑμῶν φείδομαι	1	I want to spare you from this	Here,**this** refers back to the **distress in the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying that it refers to the **distress**. Alternate translation: “I want to spare you from this distress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	7	28	r2qf	translate-unknown	θλῖψιν & τῇ σαρκὶ ἕξουσιν	1	I want to spare you from this	Here, **distress in the flesh** refers to the same problems and troubles that Paul has already called “the coming distress” in [7:26](../07/26.md). The phrase does not refer to marital problems or fights with one’s spouse. Rather, it refers to extra **distress** that married people will experience while suffering under persecution and troubles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **distress in the flesh** by referring to how you translated “the coming distress” in [7:26](../07/26.md) and making the connection to that phrase clear. Alternate translation: “will experience the distress in the flesh that I have already said is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	7	28	m6ea	figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψιν & ἕξουσιν	1	I want to spare you from this	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **distress**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “will suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	7	28	whf5	writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ & ὑμῶν φείδομαι	1	I want to spare you from this	Here,**this** refers back to the **distress in the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying that it refers to the **distress**. Alternate translation: “I want to spare you from this distress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	28	tcwd	figs-idiom	ὑμῶν φείδομαι	1	I want to spare you from this	Here, **to spare you {from this}** refers to Paul’s desire to keep the Corinthians from experiencing the **distress** he has mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to spare you {from this}** with a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “want to help you avoid this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	7	29	oq9f	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο&φημι	1	The time is short	Here, **this** refers forward to what Paul is about to say. Paul refers to what he will say before he says it in order to emphasize what he is about to say. If your language would not use **this** to refer to something that will soon be said, you could use a word or phrase that does introduces something about to be said and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	7	29	oq9f	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο & φημι	1	The time is short	Here, **this** refers forward to what Paul is about to say. Paul refers to what he will say before he says it in order to emphasize what he is about to say. If your language would not use **this** to refer to something that will soon be said, you could use a word or phrase that does introduces something about to be said and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	29	dv1e	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	The time is short	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	29	r594	figs-metaphor	ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν	1	The time is short	When **time is shortened**, an event at the end of that **time** is about to happen. In other words, something is about to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **The time is shortened**with a comparable metaphor or a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “There is not much time left” or “The time until the event occurs is short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	29	j9ev	figs-activepassive	ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν	1	The time is short	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **time**, which is **shortened**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “shortening.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has shortened the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -947,13 +947,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	31	u5qh	figs-synecdoche	τὸν κόσμον	1	those using the world	Here, **the world** specifically focuses on people and things that belong to **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the world** by clarifying that Paul is focusing on things that belong to **the world**. Alternate translation: “something worldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	7	31	jl2r	translate-unknown	τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1	as though they were not using it	Here, **present form of this world** refers to how **this world** is currently structured and how things work in **this world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **present form** with a word or phrase that refers to how the world is right now. Alternate translation: “the current setup of this world” or “the way the world presently works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	31	yl3s		παράγει	1	as though they were not using it	Alternate translation: “will soon end”
-1CO	7	32	t4ab	translate-unknown	ἀμερίμνους&μεριμνᾷ	1	free from worries	Here, **free from concern** and **concerned** are opposites. They both refer to consistently thinking about and worrying about things. Paul wishes the Corinthians to think and worry about as few things as possible. In line with that, the only thing the **unmarried man** thinks and cares about is **the things of the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **concern** and **concerned** with a word or phrase that refers to thinking and worrying consistently about something. Alternate translation: “free from worry … is worried about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	7	32	t4ab	translate-unknown	ἀμερίμνους & μεριμνᾷ	1	free from worries	Here, **free from concern** and **concerned** are opposites. They both refer to consistently thinking about and worrying about things. Paul wishes the Corinthians to think and worry about as few things as possible. In line with that, the only thing the **unmarried man** thinks and cares about is **the things of the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **concern** and **concerned** with a word or phrase that refers to thinking and worrying consistently about something. Alternate translation: “free from worry … is worried about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	32	f569	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἄγαμος	1	concerned about	Here Paul refers to **The unmarried {man}** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **unmarried {man}**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “Each unmarried man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	7	32	d4zd	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἄγαμος&ἀρέσῃ	1	concerned about	Here Paul is referring only to men. He will go on address unmarried women in [7:34](../07/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	32	d4zd	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἄγαμος & ἀρέσῃ	1	concerned about	Here Paul is referring only to men. He will go on address unmarried women in [7:34](../07/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	32	fouj	figs-activepassive	μεριμνᾷ	1	concerned about	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **{man}** who is **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes him **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **unmarried {man}** himself does it. Alternate translation: “concerns himself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	32	zqfz	figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	concerned about	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to **the Lord**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the Lord** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “everything that concerns the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	7	32	g3nk		πῶς ἀρέσῃ τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	concerned about	Here, **how he might please the Lord** further explains what being **concerned about the things of the Lord** means. If **how** would not introduce a further explanation in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce such an explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, how he might please the Lord”
-1CO	7	33	upzf	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&γαμήσας	1	concerned about	Here Paul refers to **the married {man}** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any married man. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each unmarried man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	33	upzf	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & γαμήσας	1	concerned about	Here Paul refers to **the married {man}** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any married man. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each unmarried man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	33	hzcp	figs-activepassive	μεριμνᾷ	1	concerned about	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **{man}** who is **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes him **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **married man** himself does it. Alternate translation: “concerns himself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	33	gcvl	figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ κόσμου	1	concerned about	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to the **world**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the **things of the world** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to the **world**. Alternate translation: “many things that relate to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	7	33	sank	figs-genericnoun	τῇ γυναικί	1	concerned about	Here Paul refers to **the wife**, but he specifically has in mind the wife of the **married man** already mentioned. If your language would not use this form to refer to the man’s wife, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	34	ug6n	figs-activepassive	μεριμνᾷ	1	is concerned about	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes them **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “the unmarried woman or the virgin” ([7:33](../07/33.md)) does it. Alternate translation: “concerns herself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	34	b884	figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	is concerned about	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to **the Lord**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the Lord** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “everything that concerns the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	7	34	el97	figs-merism	καὶ τῷ σώματι καὶ τῷ πνεύματι	1	is concerned about	Here Paul refers to **the body** and **the spirit** as a way to refer to everything that a person is. The **body** is the outward part of the person, while the **spirit** is in the inward part of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **both in the body and in the spirit** with a word or phrase that emphasizes that the entire person is in view. Alternate translation: “in body and soul” or “in every part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-1CO	7	34	mfin	figs-gendernotations	ἡ&γαμήσασα	1	is concerned about	Here, **the one having been married** is feminine. If this is not clear for your readers, you could clarify that this phrase speaks about women. Alternate translation: “the woman who is married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	7	34	mfin	figs-gendernotations	ἡ & γαμήσασα	1	is concerned about	Here, **the one having been married** is feminine. If this is not clear for your readers, you could clarify that this phrase speaks about women. Alternate translation: “the woman who is married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	34	h91l	figs-activepassive	μεριμνᾷ	2	is concerned about	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes them **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **the one having been married** does it. Alternate translation: “concerns herself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	7	34	edvb	figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ κόσμου	1	is concerned about	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to **the world**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the world** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the world**. Alternate translation: “many things that relate to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	7	34	puzh	figs-genericnoun	τῷ ἀνδρί	1	is concerned about	Here Paul refers to **the husband**, but he specifically has in mind the husband of the **the one having been married** already mentioned. If your language would not use this form to refer to the woman’s husband, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
@@ -977,35 +977,35 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	7	35	ms4g	translate-unknown	ἀπερισπάστως	1	devoted	Here, **without any distraction** means that nothing is hindering specific actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **without any distraction** with a word or phrase that describes a situation in which nothing is hindering an action. Alternate translation: “without hindrance” or “with full attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	35	ip8a	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπερισπάστως	1	devoted	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **distraction**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “distract.” Alternate translation: “without being distracted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	36	t87y			0	he is acting improperly toward	This verse has two primary interpretations: (1) the fiancé interpretation, which suggests that the verse is about a man who is engaged to marry a woman. In this case, Paul is saying that the man should marry his fiancée if he thinks he is acting improperly and if she is of a certain age. (2) the father interpretation, which suggests that the verse is about a father who has a daughter. In this case, Paul is saying that the father should allow his daughter to get married if he thinks he is acting improperly and if the daughter is of a certain age. In the notes that follow, we will identify which choices match with which of these two major options.
-1CO	7	36	lx6q	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&τις ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ νομίζει, ἐὰν ᾖ ὑπέρακμος καὶ οὕτως ὀφείλει γίνεσθαι	1	he is acting improperly toward	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce two true possibilities. He means that a man might **be acting improperly**, or the man might not be. He also means that the woman might be **beyond the age of marriage**, or she might not be. He then specifies the result for if the man is **acting improperly** and the woman is **beyond the age of marriage**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by describing the specific situation. Alternate translation: “someone might think he is acting improperly toward his virgin, and she might be beyond the age of marriage. In this situation, it must be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	7	36	lx6q	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & τις ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ νομίζει, ἐὰν ᾖ ὑπέρακμος καὶ οὕτως ὀφείλει γίνεσθαι	1	he is acting improperly toward	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce two true possibilities. He means that a man might **be acting improperly**, or the man might not be. He also means that the woman might be **beyond the age of marriage**, or she might not be. He then specifies the result for if the man is **acting improperly** and the woman is **beyond the age of marriage**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by describing the specific situation. Alternate translation: “someone might think he is acting improperly toward his virgin, and she might be beyond the age of marriage. In this situation, it must be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	36	qw58	writing-pronouns	τις	1	he is acting improperly toward	Here, **anyone** could refer to: (1) a man who is engaged to the **virgin**. This fits with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “any fiancé” (2) a father has a daughter who is a **virgin**. This fits with the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “any father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	36	jn8j	translate-unknown	ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ	1	he is acting improperly toward	The phrase **acting improperly** is often used to refer to sexual impropriety, including shameful nakedness or improper sexual behavior. Therefore, **acting improperly** could refer to: (1) engaging in or wishing to engage in improper sexual behavior. This fits with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “he might have improper sex with” (2) wrongly prohibiting a daughter from marrying and thus shaming her. This fits with the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “he is wrongly shaming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	36	dsma	translate-unknown	τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ	1	he is acting improperly toward	Here, **his virgin** could refer to: (1) a woman who is engaged to a man. This fits with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “his fiancée” (2) a daughter who has never married. This fits with the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “his unmarried daughter”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	36	crb8	figs-gendernotations	ᾖ	1	his virgin	Here, the word translated **she** could refer to a man or to a woman. If it refers to: (1) a woman, it identifies something about the woman as the reason for the man and woman to get married. This fits with both the father and the fiancé interpretations. (2) a man, it identifies something about the man as the reason for the man and woman to get married. This fits best with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	7	36	whuj	translate-unknown	ὑπέρακμος	1	his virgin	Here, **beyond the age of marriage** could describe: (1) a person who is older than the normal age at which a person gets married. This fits with both the father and the fiancé interpretations. Alternate translation: “is older than average to get married” (2) a person who has reached full sexual maturity. This fits with both the father and the fiancé interpretations. Alternate translation: “is fully matured” or “is ready to have sex” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	7	36	m0hq	writing-pronouns	ὑπέρακμος καὶ οὕτως ὀφείλει γίνεσθαι&ποιείτω	1	his virgin	Here, **it** could refer to: (1) what Paul is about to say, which is **he should do what he wants**. Alternate translation: “is beyond the age of marriage—then this is how it must be: he should do” (2) the necessity of getting married. Alternate translation: “is beyond the age of marriage and it seems necessary to marry—he should do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	7	36	m0hq	writing-pronouns	ὑπέρακμος καὶ οὕτως ὀφείλει γίνεσθαι & ποιείτω	1	his virgin	Here, **it** could refer to: (1) what Paul is about to say, which is **he should do what he wants**. Alternate translation: “is beyond the age of marriage—then this is how it must be: he should do” (2) the necessity of getting married. Alternate translation: “is beyond the age of marriage and it seems necessary to marry—he should do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	36	wfea	writing-pronouns	ὃ θέλει ποιείτω	1	his virgin	Here, **he** could refer to: (1) the fiancé, who wants to get married. Alternate translation: “the fiancé should do what he wants” (2) the father, who wants his daughter to get married. Alternate translation: “the father should do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	36	pyh7	figs-explicit	ὃ θέλει ποιείτω	1	let them marry	Here, **what he wants** could refer to: (1) how the fiancé wants to get married and have sex. Alternate translation: “he should get married as he wants to” (2) how the father wants his daughter to get married. Alternate translation: “he should give her in marriage as he wants to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	7	36	ugk2	figs-imperative3p	ποιείτω	1	let them marry	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let him do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	36	j6lc	figs-imperative3p	γαμείτωσαν	1	let them marry	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “can.” Alternate translation: “they can marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	7	36	wdj5	writing-pronouns	γαμείτωσαν	1	let them marry	Here, **them** identifies the man and the woman who are getting married. This fits with both the fiancé interpretation and the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “let the man and the woman marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	37	ta66			0	But if he is standing firm in his heart	Much like the previous verse ([7:36](../07/36.md)), this verse has two primary interpretations: (1) the fiancé interpretation, which suggests that the verse is about a man who is engaged to marry a woman. In this case, Paul is saying that the man who decides not to marry his fiancée does **well**. (2) the father interpretation, which suggests that the verse is about a father who has a daughter. In this case, Paul is saying that the father who decides to keep his daughter from marrying does **well**. In the notes that follow, I will identify any choices that specifically match with these two major options. Follow the interpretation that you chose in the last verse.
-1CO	7	37	nm99	figs-metaphor	ὃς&ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος	1	But if he is standing firm in his heart	Here Paul speaks as if a person’s **heart** were a place in which he or she could “stand firm.” By speaking in this way, Paul means that the person will not change what they have decided in his or her **heart**. It is as if they are standing **firm** in a specific location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “the one who settles on a decision” or “the one who firmly decides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	7	37	uthl	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ&ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ καρδίᾳ	1		In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in his mind … in his own mind” or “in what he has planned … in what he himself has planned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1CO	7	37	nm99	figs-metaphor	ὃς & ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος	1	But if he is standing firm in his heart	Here Paul speaks as if a person’s **heart** were a place in which he or she could “stand firm.” By speaking in this way, Paul means that the person will not change what they have decided in his or her **heart**. It is as if they are standing **firm** in a specific location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “the one who settles on a decision” or “the one who firmly decides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	7	37	uthl	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ & ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ καρδίᾳ	1		In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in his mind … in his own mind” or “in what he has planned … in what he himself has planned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	7	37	v41a	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχων ἀνάγκην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **compulsion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “compel.” Alternate translation: “through someone compelling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	7	37	o8o2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαν&ἔχει περὶ τοῦ ἰδίου θελήματος	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **authority** and **will**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “control” and “want.” Alternate translation: “ruling over what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	7	37	o8o2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαν & ἔχει περὶ τοῦ ἰδίου θελήματος	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **authority** and **will**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “control” and “want.” Alternate translation: “ruling over what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	7	37	vjrv	figs-infostructure	τοῦτο κέκρικεν ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ καρδίᾳ, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον, καλῶς ποιήσει	1		The order of these three phrases might be unnatural in your language. If the order is unnatural, you could reorder the phrases so that they sound more natural. Alternate translation: “he has decided in his own heart to keep his own virgin, this man will do well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	7	37	b7sk	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο&ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ καρδίᾳ, τηρεῖν	1		Here, **this** refers forward to what Paul is about to say: **to keep his own virgin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying that Paul is talking about what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “in his own heart to do this—that is, to keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	7	37	b7sk	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο & ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ καρδίᾳ, τηρεῖν	1		Here, **this** refers forward to what Paul is about to say: **to keep his own virgin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying that Paul is talking about what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “in his own heart to do this—that is, to keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	7	37	fny7	figs-idiom	τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον	1		Here, **to keep his own virgin** could mean that: (1) the man does not marry his fiancée but leaves her as a **virgin**. This fits with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “to remain unmarried to his fiancée” (2) the father does not give his daughter in marriage but leaves her as a **virgin**. This fits with the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “not to give his daughter in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	7	37	k842	figs-ellipsis	καλῶς ποιήσει	1		Here Paul omits what it is that is done **well**. The Corinthians would have inferred from the verse that Paul means that keeping **his own virgin** is what he does **well**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could clarify what is done **well**. Alternate translation: “he is right to do this” or “this is a good choice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	7	37	mebk	figs-pastforfuture	ποιήσει	1		Here Paul uses the future tense to identify something that is true in general. If your language would not use the future tense for something that is generally true, you could use whatever tense is natural here. Alternate translation: “he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1CO	7	38	c93x	figs-genericnoun	ὁ γαμίζων&ὁ μὴ γαμίζων	1		Paul uses the words **the one marrying** and **the one not marrying** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who marries … anyone who does not marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	7	38	c93x	figs-genericnoun	ὁ γαμίζων & ὁ μὴ γαμίζων	1		Paul uses the words **the one marrying** and **the one not marrying** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who marries … anyone who does not marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	7	38	px3z	translate-unknown	ὁ γαμίζων τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον	1		Here Paul could be referring to: (1) a man marrying his fiancée. This fits with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “the man who marries his fiancée” (2) a father giving his daughter in marriage. This fits with the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “a father who give his daughter in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	38	idyk	translate-unknown	ὁ μὴ γαμίζων	1		Here Paul could be referring to: (1) a man not marrying his fiancée. This fits with the fiancé interpretation. Alternate translation: “the man who does not marry his fiancée” (2) a father not giving his daughter in marriage. This fits with the father interpretation. Alternate translation: “a father who does not give his daughter in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	7	38	kdm6	figs-pastforfuture	ποιήσει	1		Here Paul uses the future tense to identify something that is true in general. If your language would not use the future tense for something that is generally true, you could use whatever tense is natural here. Alternate translation: “does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 1CO	7	39	d413	figs-metaphor	δέδεται ἐφ’	1	A wife is bound for as long as her husband lives	Here, **bound** refers to the legal and moral obligation to remain married. This obligation is strong enough that Paul can speak about it as if it were a rope that **bound** the man and the woman together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **bound** plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “is required to stay with her husband” or “is spoken for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	39	jhq4	figs-activepassive	γυνὴ δέδεται	1	A wife is bound for as long as her husband lives	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **wife**, who is **bound**, rather than the person doing the “binding.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” or the “law” does it. Alternate translation: “A wife must remain married” or “God’s law binds a wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	7	39	ms7z	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν&κοιμηθῇ ὁ ἀνήρ, ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν	1	for as long as … lives	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **the husband** might die or he might not. He then specifies the result for if **the husband dies**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “any wife whose husband dies is free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	7	39	ms7z	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν & κοιμηθῇ ὁ ἀνήρ, ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν	1	for as long as … lives	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **the husband** might die or he might not. He then specifies the result for if **the husband dies**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “any wife whose husband dies is free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	7	39	f1dy	grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ᾧ θέλει γαμηθῆναι, μόνον ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	whomever she wishes	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using this form. Alternate translation: “she is free to marry whomever she wishes as long as they are in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1CO	7	39	y6rz	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	whomever she wishes	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the person as someone who believes in Jesus. Alternate translation: “if they believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	7	40	hwz4	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην	1	my judgment	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Alternate translation: “I judge that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1017,23 +1017,23 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	8	1	beh8	figs-activepassive	τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	food sacrificed to idols	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sacrificed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sacrificing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “the things that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	8	1	vk06	figs-explicit	οἴδαμεν ὅτι πάντες γνῶσιν ἔχομεν	1	food sacrificed to idols	Here Paul could be: (1) expressing his own view about **knowledge**. Alternate translation: “We know that we all indeed have knowledge” (2) quoting what the Corinthians said in their letter so that he can respond to it, much like he did in [6:12–13](../06/12.md); [7:1](../07/01.md). Alternate translation: “you wrote, ‘we know that we all have knowledge.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	1	a6hi	figs-explicit	πάντες γνῶσιν ἔχομεν	1	food sacrificed to idols	Here Paul does not specify what the **knowledge** is about. It becomes clear in [8:4–6](../08/04.md) that Paul is speaking about **knowledge** about other gods, specifically knowing that there is only one God and that other gods do not really exist. If possible, do not give further explanation of **knowledge** here, since Paul explains later in the chapter. If you must specify what the **knowledge** is about, you could clarify that it is about the **idols** or the topic of **things sacrificed to idols**. Alternate translation: “we all have knowledge about idols” or “we all have knowledge about this issue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	8	1	ytrf	figs-abstractnouns	πάντες γνῶσιν ἔχομεν&ἡ γνῶσις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “we all know things. Knowing things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	8	1	ytrf	figs-abstractnouns	πάντες γνῶσιν ἔχομεν & ἡ γνῶσις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “we all know things. Knowing things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	1	yw8s	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δὲ ἀγάπη	1	but love builds up	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “but loving other believers” or “but a loving action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	1	an8s	figs-metaphor	ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ	1	love builds up	Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **love** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “love enables other believers to grow” or “love edifies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	2	egjr	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις δοκεῖ ἐγνωκέναι τι, οὔπω ἔγνω	1	thinks he knows something	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might think **he knows something**, or that person might not think so. He then specifies the result that happens if the person does think **he knows something**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause or by introducing the sentence with “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who thinks he knows something does not yet know” or “Whenever anyone thinks he knows something, he does not yet know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	8	2	qbh9	figs-gendernotations	ἐγνωκέναι&οὔπω ἔγνω&δεῖ	1	thinks he knows something	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she knows … he or she does not yet know … he or she ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	8	3	qsa7	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&τις ἀγαπᾷ τὸν Θεόν, οὗτος ἔγνωσται	1	that person is known by him	Just as in the last verse, here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might love **God**, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if the person does love **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause or by introducing the sentence with “whenever.” Alternate translation: “anyone who loves God is known” or “whenever anyone loves God, that one is known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	8	2	qbh9	figs-gendernotations	ἐγνωκέναι & οὔπω ἔγνω & δεῖ	1	thinks he knows something	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she knows … he or she does not yet know … he or she ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	8	3	qsa7	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & τις ἀγαπᾷ τὸν Θεόν, οὗτος ἔγνωσται	1	that person is known by him	Just as in the last verse, here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might love **God**, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if the person does love **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by using a relative clause or by introducing the sentence with “whenever.” Alternate translation: “anyone who loves God is known” or “whenever anyone loves God, that one is known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	8	3	etd6	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἔγνωσται ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	that person is known by him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **known** rather than focusing on **God**, who does the “knowing.” Alternate translation: “he knows that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	8	3	lnwx	writing-pronouns	οὗτος&αὐτοῦ	1	that person is known by him	Here, **that one** refers to **anyone**, and **him** refers to **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these pronouns by clarifying to whom they refer. Alternate translation: “that person … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	8	3	lnwx	writing-pronouns	οὗτος & αὐτοῦ	1	that person is known by him	Here, **that one** refers to **anyone**, and **him** refers to **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these pronouns by clarifying to whom they refer. Alternate translation: “that person … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	8	4	v4gx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	περὶ	1	General Information:	Here Paul repeats **about** from [8:1](../08/01.md) to let his readers know that he is going to speak directly about **things sacrificed to idols** again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the repetition of the phrase from [8:1](../08/01.md) by clarifying that Paul is returning to the topic he introduced there. Alternate translation: “returning to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	8	4	bgd2	figs-possession	τῆς βρώσεως&τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	General Information:	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about **eating** meat **sacrificed to idols**. If your language does not use this form to express that meaning, you can express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “eating things sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	8	4	bgd2	figs-possession	τῆς βρώσεως & τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	General Information:	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about **eating** meat **sacrificed to idols**. If your language does not use this form to express that meaning, you can express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “eating things sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	8	4	wkep	translate-unknown	τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	General Information:	Here, **the things sacrificed to idols** refers to meat that has been offered to an idol. Translate this phrase the same way you did in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “of meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	8	4	mbqo	figs-activepassive	τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	General Information:	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sacrificed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sacrificing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “of the things that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	8	4	y3ee	figs-explicit	οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1	We know that an idol in this world is nothing and that there is no God but one	Here Paul could be: (1) expressing his own view about **an idol** and **God**. Alternate translation: “We know that an idol in the world indeed is nothing and that there is indeed no God except one” (2) quoting what the Corinthians said in their letter so that he can respond to it, much like he did in [6:12–13](../06/12.md); [7:1](../07/01.md). If you chose this option in [8:1](../08/01.md), you should also choose it here. Alternate translation: “you wrote, ‘we know that an idol in the world is nothing’ and, ‘there is no God except one’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	4	g67g	figs-metaphor	οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ	1		Here Paul says that **an idol** is **nothing** in order to emphasize that idols are not really gods. He is not saying that images or statues do not exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **nothing** by clarifying that Paul is speaking about how **an idol** does not have the power or existence of the true God. Alternate translation: “an idol in the world is not really a god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	4	w8ar	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1CO	8	4	tx5b	figs-explicit	εἰ μὴ εἷς	1		Here Paul does not directly quote from the Old Testament, but he uses words that would make any reader who is familiar with the Old Testament think about [Deuteronomy 6:4](../deu/06/04.md), where it is written that “the Lord is one.” If your readers would not make this connection, you could include a footnote or a brief reference to Deuteronomy. Alternate translation: “except one, as Moses wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	8	5	s77m	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	καὶ&εἴπερ	1	so-called gods	Here, **even if** introduces a possibility that Paul does not believe to be true. In other words, Paul does not think that there are **many gods** and **many lords**. He does think that people speak about **many gods** and **many lords**. Thus, his main point is that, no matter how many **gods** and **lords** other people talk about, believers only acknowledge one God and one Lord ([8:6](../08/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **even if** with a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “although it might be that” or “while some people claim that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	8	5	s77m	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	καὶ & εἴπερ	1	so-called gods	Here, **even if** introduces a possibility that Paul does not believe to be true. In other words, Paul does not think that there are **many gods** and **many lords**. He does think that people speak about **many gods** and **many lords**. Thus, his main point is that, no matter how many **gods** and **lords** other people talk about, believers only acknowledge one God and one Lord ([8:6](../08/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **even if** with a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “although it might be that” or “while some people claim that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	8	5	sl8j		εἰσὶν λεγόμενοι θεοὶ	1	so-called gods	Alternate translation: “people name many ‘gods’”
 1CO	8	5	x4ob	figs-merism	θεοὶ, εἴτε ἐν οὐρανῷ εἴτε ἐπὶ γῆς	1	so-called gods	Paul speaks, using **heaven** and **earth** in order to include them and everything in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every place that God created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “gods in all parts of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 1CO	8	5	l7ib	figs-irony	θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί	1	many “gods” and many “lords.”	Here Paul acknowledges that there are **many “gods”** and **“lords”**. He implies that **so-called** from earlier in the verse also applies here, so the ULT has put quotation marks around **gods** and **lords** to indicate that these are the names people use. Paul himself does not believe that what people call **gods** and **lords** really are those things; rather, [10:20–21](../10/20.md) suggests that Paul thinks these **gods** and **lords** are actually demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what Paul means by **“gods”** and **“lords”** with a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective. Alternate translation: “many so-called gods and many so-called lords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@@ -1044,8 +1044,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	8	6	cokf	figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ τὰ πάντα	1	Yet for us there is only one God	Here Paul emphasizes that the **Lord Jesus Christ** is the agent through whom **God the Father** created all things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **through whom all {things are}** with a phrase that identifies the **Lord Jesus Christ** as the agent in the creation of everything that exists. Alternate translation: “through whom God the Father created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	6	jsqb	figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	Yet for us there is only one God	Here Paul could be expressing the idea: (1) that **we** exist because of what Christ has done by creating and then saving us. Alternate translation: “through whom we live” (2) that **we** have been saved and given new life by Christ. Alternate translation: “through whom we have new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	7	th5p	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐν πᾶσιν ἡ γνῶσις	1	General Information:	Here Paul speaks as if **everyone** were a container in which **knowledge** could be stored, but some people do not have **knowledge** stored in them. He speaks in this way to show that not everyone understands what he has just said about how God the Father and Jesus are the only God and Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea that **knowledge** is **not in** someone with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “not everyone knows this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	8	7	v7lt	figs-idiom	τῇ συνηθείᾳ&τοῦ εἰδώλου	1	everyone … some	The Corinthians would have understood **the custom of the idols** to refer to regular practices associated with worshiping **idols**, including eating meat **sacrificed to idols**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **the custom of the idols**, by refer to worshiping idols “regularly.” Alternate translation: “regularly involved in worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	8	7	heud	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ συνηθείᾳ&τοῦ εἰδώλου	1	everyone … some	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **custom**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “used to” or “accustomed.” Alternate translation: “accustomed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	8	7	v7lt	figs-idiom	τῇ συνηθείᾳ & τοῦ εἰδώλου	1	everyone … some	The Corinthians would have understood **the custom of the idols** to refer to regular practices associated with worshiping **idols**, including eating meat **sacrificed to idols**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **the custom of the idols**, by refer to worshiping idols “regularly.” Alternate translation: “regularly involved in worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	8	7	heud	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ συνηθείᾳ & τοῦ εἰδώλου	1	everyone … some	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **custom**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “used to” or “accustomed.” Alternate translation: “accustomed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	7	e737	figs-explicit	ἕως ἄρτι	1	everyone … some	Here, **now** refers to the time since these people became believers. Paul means that these people worshiped idols until they became Christians, not until the time he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **until now** by clarifying that Paul is referring to when these people first believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “until they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	7	jdnr	translate-unknown	εἰδωλόθυτον	1	everyone … some	Here, the things **sacrificed to idols** refers to meat that has been offered to an idol. Translate this phrase the same way you did in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	8	7	pdev	figs-activepassive	εἰδωλόθυτον	1	everyone … some	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sacrificed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sacrificing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “things that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1053,17 +1053,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	8	7	xl4f	grammar-collectivenouns	ἡ συνείδησις αὐτῶν	1	everyone … some	The word **conscience** is a singular noun that refers to all **their** consciences. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “each of their consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 1CO	8	7	pbyx	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενὴς οὖσα	1	everyone … some	Here, **being weak** identifies a **conscience** that easily leads a person to feel guilty. A **weak** conscience condemns some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being sensitive” or “which often condemns them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	7	ba7e	figs-activepassive	ἡ συνείδησις αὐτῶν ἀσθενὴς οὖσα μολύνεται	1	is defiled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **their conscience**, which is **defiled**, rather than focusing on who or what does the “defiling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **things as sacrificed to idols** or “they” do it. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “their conscience being weak, they defile it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	8	8	ii4m	figs-personification	βρῶμα&ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	food will not present us to God	Here Paul speaks as if **food** were a person who could **bring us near to God**. By speaking in this way, Paul discusses whether food can make our relationship with God stronger or not. Just like a person who cannot **bring us near** to someone so that we can know that person better, so food cannot make our relationship with God any stronger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “food will not make our relationship with God any stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	8	8	ii4m	figs-personification	βρῶμα & ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	food will not present us to God	Here Paul speaks as if **food** were a person who could **bring us near to God**. By speaking in this way, Paul discusses whether food can make our relationship with God stronger or not. Just like a person who cannot **bring us near** to someone so that we can know that person better, so food cannot make our relationship with God any stronger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “food will not make our relationship with God any stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	8	8	yzt9	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὔτε ἐὰν μὴ φάγωμεν, ὑστερούμεθα; οὔτε ἐὰν φάγωμεν, περισσεύομεν	1	food will not present us to God	Here Paul contrasts “eating” and “not eating” while negating both sides of the contrast. If your language does not use this form, you can express the idea with two negative clauses. Alternate translation: “we are not made to lack if we do not eat, and we do not abound if we eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	8	8	wp5k	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	οὔτε ἐὰν μὴ φάγωμεν, ὑστερούμεθα; οὔτε ἐὰν φάγωμεν, περισσεύομεν	1	food will not present us to God	Here Paul uses **if** twice to introduce true possibilities. He means that a person might **not eat**, or that person might **eat**. He specifies the result for each option. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statements by introducing them with a word such as “whenever” or by using relative clauses. Alternate translation: “neither are we made to lack whenever we do not eat, nor do we abound whenever we eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	8	8	x91v	figs-explicit	ὑστερούμεθα&περισσεύομεν	1	We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it	Here Paul does not specify in what **we** might **lack** or **abound**. If possible, do not specify this is in your translation. If you must clarify in what we might **lack** or **abound**, Paul implies that it is God’s “favor” or “grace.” Alternate translation: “are we made to lack God’s grace … we abound in God’s grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	8	8	ciez	figs-explicit	μὴ φάγωμεν&φάγωμεν	1	We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it	Here Paul states a general principle, and he does not clarify what kinds of **food** he has in mind. If possible, do not specify what **we eat** in your translation. If you must clarify what **we eat**, you could include a vague or generic reference to “certain kinds of food.” Alternate translation: “we do not eat specific kinds of food … we eat specific kinds of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	8	8	x91v	figs-explicit	ὑστερούμεθα & περισσεύομεν	1	We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it	Here Paul does not specify in what **we** might **lack** or **abound**. If possible, do not specify this is in your translation. If you must clarify in what we might **lack** or **abound**, Paul implies that it is God’s “favor” or “grace.” Alternate translation: “are we made to lack God’s grace … we abound in God’s grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	8	8	ciez	figs-explicit	μὴ φάγωμεν & φάγωμεν	1	We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it	Here Paul states a general principle, and he does not clarify what kinds of **food** he has in mind. If possible, do not specify what **we eat** in your translation. If you must clarify what **we eat**, you could include a vague or generic reference to “certain kinds of food.” Alternate translation: “we do not eat specific kinds of food … we eat specific kinds of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	9	ns0y	figs-explicit	ἡ ἐξουσία ὑμῶν αὕτη	1	those who are weak	Here Paul implies that their **authority** is over “food”, as mentioned in the last verse ([8:8](../08/08.md)). The point is that food has no **authority** over believers, whether to make them more or less “near to God.” Instead, believers have **authority** over food and can thus eat whatever they want. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **authority** refers to here by clarifying that it refers to **authority** over “food.” Alternate translation: “this authority of yours over food” or “this authority of yours concerning eating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	9	vu0y	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐξουσία ὑμῶν αὕτη	1	those who are weak	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **authority**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “rule” or “manage” and include “food” or “eating” as the object. Alternate translation: “how you rule over food” or “how you manage your eating (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	9	loo1		ἡ ἐξουσία ὑμῶν αὕτη	1	those who are weak	Alternate translation: “this authority that you have”
 1CO	8	9	f3ds	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν	1	those who are weak	Much like in [8:7](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for the sensitive” or “for those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	9	deu5	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν	1	those who are weak	Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	8	10	usg7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν&τις ἴδῃ	1	sees the one who has	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	8	10	usg7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν & τις ἴδῃ	1	sees the one who has	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	8	10	a7qn	figs-explicit	γνῶσιν	1	sees the one who has	Here Paul does not specify what the **knowledge** is about. However, it is clear from [8:4–6](../08/04.md) that Paul is speaking about **knowledge** about other gods, specifically knowing that there is only one God and that other gods do not really exist. If you must specify what the knowledge is about, you could clarify that it is about the idols or the topic of things sacrificed to idols. Alternate translation: “knowledge about idols” or “knowledge about this issue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	10	v611	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν ἔχοντα γνῶσιν	1	sees the one who has	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “the person who knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	10	xhn9	translate-unknown	κατακείμενον	1	sees the one who has	In Paul’s culture, people ate lying down on their side (**reclining**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **reclining to eat** with a word or phrase that describes the normal position for eating in your culture or indicate that the person is about to eat. Alternate translation: “about to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1074,15 +1074,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	8	10	ohzy	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενοῦς ὄντος	1	built up so as to eat	Here, **being weak** identifies a **conscience** that easily leads a person to feel guilty. A **weak** conscience condemns some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being sensitive” or “which often condemns him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	10	mdqc	translate-unknown	τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα	1	built up so as to eat	Here, **the things sacrificed to idols** refers to meat that has been offered to an idol. Translate this phrase the same way you did in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	8	10	a7s8	figs-activepassive	τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα	1	built up so as to eat	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sacrificed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sacrificing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “the things that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	8	11	g5tn	figs-activepassive	ἀπόλλυται&ὁ ἀσθενῶν ἐν τῇ σῇ γνώσει, ὁ ἀδελφὸς, δι’ ὃν Χριστὸς ἀπέθανεν	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **destroyed** rather than focusing on what or who does the “destroying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” or “your knowledge” does it. Alternate translation: “you, through your knowledge, destroy the one who is weak, the brother for whom Christ died,” or “your knowledge destroys the one who is weak, the brother for whom Christ died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	8	11	x6jd	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀσθενῶν&ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	Jesus is speaking of those who are weak and brothers in general, not of one particular person who is a **brother** and **the one being weak**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can express the idea in a form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “each one who is weak, who is a brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	8	11	g5tn	figs-activepassive	ἀπόλλυται & ὁ ἀσθενῶν ἐν τῇ σῇ γνώσει, ὁ ἀδελφὸς, δι’ ὃν Χριστὸς ἀπέθανεν	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **destroyed** rather than focusing on what or who does the “destroying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” or “your knowledge” does it. Alternate translation: “you, through your knowledge, destroy the one who is weak, the brother for whom Christ died,” or “your knowledge destroys the one who is weak, the brother for whom Christ died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	8	11	x6jd	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀσθενῶν & ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	Jesus is speaking of those who are weak and brothers in general, not of one particular person who is a **brother** and **the one being weak**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can express the idea in a form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “each one who is weak, who is a brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	8	11	zy3t	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἀσθενῶν	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	Much like in [8:9](../08/09.md), **the one being weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **being weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is sensitive” or “the one who often condemns himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	11	xs2l	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	Although **brother** is masculine, Paul is using this word to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	8	11	ez6t	figs-yousingular	σῇ	1	your knowledge	Here Paul addresses specific individuals within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **your** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	8	11	gwc9	figs-explicit	γνώσει	1	your knowledge	Here Paul does not specify what the **knowledge** is about. However, just as in [8:10](../08/10.md), it is clear that Paul is speaking of knowledge about other gods, specifically knowing that there is only one God and that other gods do not really exist. If you must specify what the **knowledge** is about, you could clarify that it is about the idols or the topic of things sacrificed to idols. Alternate translation: “knowledge about idols” or “knowledge about this issue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	11	f6bg	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ γνώσει	1	your knowledge	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “through what you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	12	azal	writing-pronouns	οὕτως	1	your knowledge	Here, **thus** refers back to the series of actions and results in [8:10–11](../08/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **thus** refers to by clarifying that it refers to the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “through your knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	8	12	d8ni	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	οὕτως&ἁμαρτάνοντες εἰς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, καὶ τύπτοντες αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν, εἰς Χριστὸν ἁμαρτάνετε	1	your knowledge	Here Paul means that whenever the Corinthians “sin against” and “wound” their **brothers**, they at the same time **sin against Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the relationship between **sinning against your brothers and wounding their weak consciences** and **sin against Christ** by clarifying that they happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “any time you thus sin against your brothers and wound their weak consciences, you at the same time sin against Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+1CO	8	12	d8ni	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	οὕτως & ἁμαρτάνοντες εἰς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, καὶ τύπτοντες αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν, εἰς Χριστὸν ἁμαρτάνετε	1	your knowledge	Here Paul means that whenever the Corinthians “sin against” and “wound” their **brothers**, they at the same time **sin against Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the relationship between **sinning against your brothers and wounding their weak consciences** and **sin against Christ** by clarifying that they happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “any time you thus sin against your brothers and wound their weak consciences, you at the same time sin against Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	8	12	i5f6		καὶ τύπτοντες	1	your knowledge	Alternate translation: “by wounding” or “because you wound”
 1CO	8	12	o0w5	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	your knowledge	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non=gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	8	12	ti84	figs-metaphor	τύπτοντες αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν	1	your knowledge	Here Paul speaks as if **consciences** were body parts that could be wounded. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that the Corinthians who have knowledge are hurting the **weak consciences** of other believers as surely as if they had wounded their arms or bodies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wounding their weak consciences** by clarifying that Paul means that the Corinthians who have knowledge are hurting **weak consciences** or making the **weak consciences** feel guilty. Alternate translation: “hurting their weak consciences” or “making their weak consciences feel guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1101,8 +1101,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	1	l6sq	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔργον μου	1	Am I not an apostle?	Here, **work** refers to the result of the **work**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **work** by clarifying that what the **work** produced is the focus here. Alternate translation: “the result of my work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	9	1	re1t	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Have I not seen Jesus our Lord?	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, describes the **work** as what Paul does because of his union with the Lord. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” or “that I perform because I am united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	2	j6qz	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ ἄλλοις οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος, ἀλλά γε	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **others** might think that he is **not an apostle**, or they might think that he is an apostle. He then specifies the result for if the **others** think that he is **not an apostle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing the statement with “perhaps.” Alternate translation: “Perhaps I am not an apostle to others, but at least” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	9	2	j4k8	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **proof**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “prove” or “show.” Alternate translation: “you prove my apostleship” or “you show that I am an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	9	2	y2nh	figs-possession	ἡ&σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **proof** that shows his **apostleship**. If your language does not use this form to express that meaning, you can express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “what proves my apostleship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	9	2	j4k8	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **proof**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “prove” or “show.” Alternate translation: “you prove my apostleship” or “you show that I am an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	9	2	y2nh	figs-possession	ἡ & σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **proof** that shows his **apostleship**. If your language does not use this form to express that meaning, you can express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “what proves my apostleship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	9	2	gxhr	figs-abstractnouns	μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **apostleship**, you can express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “I am an apostle.” Alternate translation: “that I am an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	2	z5sb	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, describes the **proof** that the Corinthians provide as something that happens in union with the Lord. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” or “as you are united to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	3	yb0x	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία τοῖς ἐμὲ ἀνακρίνουσίν	1	This is my defense … me:	Here Paul uses language that would normally be used in the legal courts. The **defense** is what the persons accused would say to prove their innocence. The ones **examining** are the ones who are in charge of the court and make the decisions about who is guilty and who is innocent. Paul uses this metaphor to explain that he is defending himself against people who have accused him of acting wrongly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the legal metaphor plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “My answer to those who accuse me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1139,8 +1139,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	8	vy1n	figs-rquestion	ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?	1	Or does not the law also say this?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, the law says these things.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement. If you do so, you will need to separate the second half of the verse from the first half. Alternate translation: “No, the law also says these things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	9	8	spqj	translate-unknown	ὁ νόμος	1	Or does not the law also say this?	Here, **the law** refers specifically to the first five books of the Old Testament, often called the Pentateuch or “the law of Moses.” Make sure your readers can tell that Paul is referring to this specific **law** here. Alternate translation: “the Pentateuch” or “Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	9	lf1q	writing-quotations	ἐν γὰρ τῷ Μωϋσέως νόμῳ, γέγραπται	1	Do not put a muzzle on	In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, Paul clarifies that the quote comes from **the law of Moses**. It is specifically from [Deuteronomy 25:4](../deu/25/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the law of Moses” or “For in the book of Deuteronomy, in the law of Moses we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-1CO	9	9	wc4i	figs-activepassive	ἐν&τῷ Μωϋσέως νόμῳ, γέγραπται	1	Do not put a muzzle on	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses has written in the law” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	9	9	fks6	figs-quotations	Μωϋσέως&οὐ φιμώσεις βοῦν ἀλοῶντα	1	Do not put a muzzle on	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “of Moses that you should not muzzle an ox treading out grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	9	9	wc4i	figs-activepassive	ἐν & τῷ Μωϋσέως νόμῳ, γέγραπται	1	Do not put a muzzle on	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses has written in the law” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	9	9	fks6	figs-quotations	Μωϋσέως & οὐ φιμώσεις βοῦν ἀλοῶντα	1	Do not put a muzzle on	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “of Moses that you should not muzzle an ox treading out grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	9	9	h2d3	figs-yousingular	οὐ φιμώσεις	1	Do not put a muzzle on	The command from **the law of Moses** is addressed to specific individuals. Because of this, the command is in the singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	9	9	kvxh	translate-unknown	οὐ φιμώσεις βοῦν ἀλοῶντα	1	Do not put a muzzle on	In Paul’s culture, farmers often would make **oxen** walk or “tread” on harvested wheat to separate the kernels of grain from the wheat stalks. Some people would **muzzle an ox** while it is **treading out grain** in order to keep the **ox** from eating the **grain**. The point of the command is that the **ox** should be allowed to eat what it is working to produce: the **grain**. If your readers would not understand what this command is about, you could include a footnote explaining the context or add a short clarifying phrase. Alternate translation: “Do not muzzle an ox to keep it from eating the grain it is treading out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	9	sxk2	figs-rquestion	μὴ τῶν βοῶν μέλει τῷ Θεῷ?	1	Is it really the oxen that God cares about?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, he does not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “God does not care about the oxen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1151,8 +1151,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	10	f8f4	figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς	-1	for our sake	Here, **our** could refer to: (1) everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “for the sake of us who believe … for the sake of us who believe” (2) Paul, Barnabas, and others who proclaim the good news. Alternate translation: “for the sake of us who proclaim the gospel … for the sake of us who proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	9	10	evv4	figs-activepassive	ἐγράφη	1	for our sake	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote it” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God said it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	9	10	d1cn	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	for our sake	Here, **that** could introduce: (1) the reason why **it was written**. Alternate translation: “because” (2) a summary of the content of what **was written**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and it means that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	9	10	c42y	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀροτριῶν&ὁ ἀλοῶν	1	for our sake	Paul is speaking of these people in general, not of one particular person **plowing** or **threshing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who plows … anyone who threshes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	9	10	bdlk	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι&ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τοῦ μετέχειν	1	for our sake	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “hopefully” or a verb such as “expect.” Alternate translation: “hopefully … hopefully expecting to share the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	9	10	c42y	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀροτριῶν & ὁ ἀλοῶν	1	for our sake	Paul is speaking of these people in general, not of one particular person **plowing** or **threshing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who plows … anyone who threshes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	9	10	bdlk	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι & ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τοῦ μετέχειν	1	for our sake	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “hopefully” or a verb such as “expect.” Alternate translation: “hopefully … hopefully expecting to share the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	10	pas5	figs-ellipsis	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	for our sake	Here Paul does not mention what the **hope** expects because he states it at the end of the verse: **sharing the harvest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explicitly state that **sharing the harvest** is what the **hope** expects. Alternate translation: “in hope of sharing the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	10	q1q2	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἀλοῶν ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	for our sake	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**ought to plow**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the one who threshes ought to thresh in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	11	zn5m	figs-metaphor	εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν τὰ πνευματικὰ ἐσπείραμεν, μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν?	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	In this verse, Paul applies the farming language he used in [9:9–10](../09/09.md). When he and Barnabas “sow,” they should also “reap” the harvest. Paul clarifies that what they **sowed** was **spiritual things**, which means the good news. The **material things** that they can **reap** are money and support from the Corinthians. If your reader would misunderstand this application of the farming language, you could use analogies to clarify what Paul is referring to or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Similarly, if we told you about the good news, is it too much if we receive material support from you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1162,10 +1162,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	11	czcs	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	2	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **we** could **reap material things from you**, though **we** might not do so. He specifies the result for if **we** do **reap material things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “that.” Alternate translation: “that” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	9	12	v333	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	If others exercised this right	Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	9	12	z3mr	figs-explicit	τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν	1	If others exercised this right	While Paul does not directly state this, the Corinthians would have understood **right** to refer to the **right** to receive financial support. If your readers would not understand **right** in this way, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “shared the right to financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	9	12	cr62	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν&ἡμεῖς&τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ	1	If others exercised this right	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **right**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “able to.” If you do so, you may need to express an object, which here is receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “were able to require financial support from you, are we … being able to require financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	9	12	cr62	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν & ἡμεῖς & τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ	1	If others exercised this right	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **right**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “able to.” If you do so, you may need to express an object, which here is receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “were able to require financial support from you, are we … being able to require financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	12	lld4	figs-rquestion	οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς?	1	If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, you do.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we certainly do even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	9	12	po30	figs-ellipsis	οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς	1	If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more?	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “do we not share the right even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	9	12	ybwy	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἐχρησάμεθα&στέγομεν&δῶμεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	9	12	ybwy	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἐχρησάμεθα & στέγομεν & δῶμεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	9	12	nr6u	figs-explicit	πάντα στέγομεν	1	others	Here Paul refers to what he and Barnabas had to “endure” because they **did not take advantage** of receiving financial aid from the Corinthians. They had to work to support themselves, and they probably had to go without as much food and supplies as they would have liked. Some of the hardships that Paul and Barnabas endured appear in [4:10–13](../04/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **everything** to make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “we endured serving without financial support” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	9	12	q7vj	figs-idiom	μή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	this right	In Paul’s culture, to **give any hindrance** means to “delay” or to “block” something. Paul means that he would rather have **endured everything**” than to have hindered **the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **give any hindrance**in a form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we might not hinder the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	9	12	prci	figs-abstractnouns	μή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	this right	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hindrance**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “hinder.” Alternate translation: “we might not hinder the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1176,7 +1176,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	13	fxxi	figs-explicit	οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες	1	Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple	Here, **the ones serving at the altar** refers to the specific people who offered sacrifices on **the altar**. Paul may specifically have in mind the “priests.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones serving at the altar** with a word or phrase for the people who have the closest contact with God and who offer sacrifices to him. Alternate translation: “the priests” or “those who serve the most sacred things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	9	13	lqar	translate-unknown	τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται	1	Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple	Here, to **partake from the altar** means that these people offer part of a sacrifice on the altar, but they also eat part of that sacrifice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **partake from the altar** with a word or phrase that refers to eating part of what people offer to their god. Alternate translation: “eat part of what is sacrificed on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	14	g5i8	figs-explicit	ὁ Κύριος διέταξεν	1	get their living from the gospel	Here Paul refers to how Jesus said that a “worker deserves wages” when he sent people to proclaim the good news. See the saying in [Matthew 10:10](../mat/10/10.md) and [Luke 10:7](../luk/10/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote to explain the reference to what Jesus said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	9	14	tuiy	figs-idiom	ἐκ&ζῆν	1	get their living from the gospel	Here, **to live from** identifies how a person should support themselves and acquire food and other necessities. For example, **to live from** carpentry would mean that the person makes money to pay for food and housing by doing carpentry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to live from** with a word or phrase in your language that refers to how a person makes a living or supports themselves. Alternate translation: “to support themselves on” or “to receive their income from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	9	14	tuiy	figs-idiom	ἐκ & ζῆν	1	get their living from the gospel	Here, **to live from** identifies how a person should support themselves and acquire food and other necessities. For example, **to live from** carpentry would mean that the person makes money to pay for food and housing by doing carpentry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **to live from** with a word or phrase in your language that refers to how a person makes a living or supports themselves. Alternate translation: “to support themselves on” or “to receive their income from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	9	14	rj38	figs-metonymy	τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	get their living from the gospel	Here, **the gospel** refers to: (1) the job or occupation of proclaiming **the gospel**. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel” (2) the people who hear and believe in **the gospel**. Alternate translation: “those who believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	9	15	fs7a	translate-unknown	οὐ κέχρημαι	1	these rights	Here, **taken advantage of** refers to “making use of” a resource or “requiring” a specific behavior. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **taken advantage of** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “have not made use of” or “have not required you to provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	15	j8zn	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ κέχρημαι οὐδενὶ	1	these rights	Here Paul uses two negative words in the Greek: “have not taken advantage of none.” In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would misunderstand these two negatives, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “have by no means taken advantage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -1185,25 +1185,25 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	15	ygaz	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these rights	Here Paul refers to what he has already written, especially to [9:6–14](../09/06.md). Use a form in your language that refers back to things that have just been said. Alternate translation: “those things” or “what I have just written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	9	15	vf7d	writing-pronouns	οὕτως γένηται	1	these rights	Here, **thus** refers to receiving financial support from the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **thus** with a word or phrase that more clearly refers to receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “these things might be done” or “support might be given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	9	15	sy42	figs-activepassive	γένηται ἐν ἐμοί	1	so that this might be done for me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **done** rather than the person doing it. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you,” the Corinthians, would do it. Alternate translation: “you might do for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	9	15	fd69	figs-metaphor	τὸ καύχημά μου&κενώσει	1	deprive me of my boasting	Here Paul speaks as if a **boast** was a container that someone could make **empty**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that someone could take away what he boasts about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **make my boast empty** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will remove my reason for boasting” or “will deflate my boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	9	15	fd69	figs-metaphor	τὸ καύχημά μου & κενώσει	1	deprive me of my boasting	Here Paul speaks as if a **boast** was a container that someone could make **empty**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that someone could take away what he boasts about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **make my boast empty** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will remove my reason for boasting” or “will deflate my boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	15	rl1y	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καύχημά μου	1	deprive me of my boasting	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boast**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “boast.” Alternate translation: “what I boast about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	9	16	lq4l	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν&εὐαγγελίζωμαι, οὐκ ἔστιν μοι καύχημα, ἀνάγκη γάρ μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language would normally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because compulsion is placed on me, there is nothing for me to boast about if I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	9	16	lq4l	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν & εὐαγγελίζωμαι, οὐκ ἔστιν μοι καύχημα, ἀνάγκη γάρ μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language would normally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because compulsion is placed on me, there is nothing for me to boast about if I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	9	16	xpve	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	this necessity was placed upon me	Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1CO	9	16	ecw2	figs-activepassive	ἀνάγκη&ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, upon whom the **compulsion is placed**, rather than focusing on the person placing the **compulsion**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God places compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	9	16	qyp0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάγκη&μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **compulsion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “compel” and rephrase the clause. Alternate translation: “I am compelled to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	9	16	eimr	figs-metaphor	ἀνάγκη&μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	Here Paul speaks as if **compulsion** were a physical object that someone had **placed upon** him. By speaking in this way, he means that he is required to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am commanded to do so” or “I have an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	9	16	l7as	figs-idiom	οὐαὶ&μοί ἐστιν	1	woe be to me if	Here, **woe be to me** expresses what Paul thinks would happen to him if he ever were to stop preaching the gospel. He would experience **woe**, with the implication that this **woe** will come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **woe be to me** with a word or phrase that expresses the expectation of bad things to come. Alternate translation: “bad things will happen to me” or “God will punish me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	9	16	ecw2	figs-activepassive	ἀνάγκη & ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, upon whom the **compulsion is placed**, rather than focusing on the person placing the **compulsion**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God places compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	9	16	qyp0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάγκη & μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **compulsion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “compel” and rephrase the clause. Alternate translation: “I am compelled to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	9	16	eimr	figs-metaphor	ἀνάγκη & μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	Here Paul speaks as if **compulsion** were a physical object that someone had **placed upon** him. By speaking in this way, he means that he is required to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am commanded to do so” or “I have an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	9	16	l7as	figs-idiom	οὐαὶ & μοί ἐστιν	1	woe be to me if	Here, **woe be to me** expresses what Paul thinks would happen to him if he ever were to stop preaching the gospel. He would experience **woe**, with the implication that this **woe** will come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **woe be to me** with a word or phrase that expresses the expectation of bad things to come. Alternate translation: “bad things will happen to me” or “God will punish me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	9	16	p1sa	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν μὴ εὐαγγελίζωμαι	1	woe be to me if	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that he does indeed **preach the gospel**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “whenever I stop preaching the gospel, which I will never do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-1CO	9	17	d7l9	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&ἑκὼν τοῦτο πράσσω, μισθὸν ἔχω; εἰ δὲ ἄκων, οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι	1	if I do this willingly	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce two possibilities. He means that he might **do this willingly**, or he might do it **unwillingly**. He specifies a result for each option, but he implies that he does it **unwillingly** (see the “compulsion” in [9:16](../09/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statements in a natural way in your language, such as by introducing them with “whenever.” Alternate translation: “were I to do this willingly, I would have a reward. But were it unwillingly, I would still have been entrusted with a stewardship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	9	17	d7l9	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἑκὼν τοῦτο πράσσω, μισθὸν ἔχω; εἰ δὲ ἄκων, οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι	1	if I do this willingly	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce two possibilities. He means that he might **do this willingly**, or he might do it **unwillingly**. He specifies a result for each option, but he implies that he does it **unwillingly** (see the “compulsion” in [9:16](../09/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statements in a natural way in your language, such as by introducing them with “whenever.” Alternate translation: “were I to do this willingly, I would have a reward. But were it unwillingly, I would still have been entrusted with a stewardship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	9	17	jtwy	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο πράσσω	1	if I do this willingly	Here, **this** refers back to “preaching the gospel” in [9:16](../09/16.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying what it refers to. Alternate translation: “I preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	9	17	x6s9	translate-unknown	ἑκὼν&ἄκων	1	if I do this willingly	Here, **willingly** means that someone does something because they choose to, while **unwillingly** means that someone has to do something whether they choose to or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **willingly** and **unwillingly**by using two contrasting words that refer to whether someone chooses to do something or not. Alternate translation: “because I choose to … I do not choose to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	9	17	x6s9	translate-unknown	ἑκὼν & ἄκων	1	if I do this willingly	Here, **willingly** means that someone does something because they choose to, while **unwillingly** means that someone has to do something whether they choose to or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **willingly** and **unwillingly**by using two contrasting words that refer to whether someone chooses to do something or not. Alternate translation: “because I choose to … I do not choose to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	17	gkxi	figs-abstractnouns	μισθὸν ἔχω	1	if I do this willingly	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reward**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reward” or “compensate.” Alternate translation: “I am compensated for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	17	gteh	figs-infostructure	εἰ δὲ ἄκων, οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι.	1	But if not willingly	This sentence could: (1) include both the “if” and the “then” statements and explain how Paul preaching the gospel is “unwilling.” He did not choose this **stewardship**, and so he does it **unwillingly**. However, the reason he does preach the gospel is because he has **been entrusted with** that **stewardship**. Alternate translation: “But if unwillingly, I do this because I have been entrusted with a stewardship” (2) express the “if” statement for the question (the “then” statement) at the beginning of the next verse ([9:18](../09/18.md)). The word **unwillingly** would modify **entrusted**, and you would need to connect the end of this verse and the beginning of the next verse with a comma, dropping the capitalization on “What.” Alternate translation: “But I have been unwillingly entrusted with a stewardship,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	9	17	t8pm	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ ἄκων	1	But if not willingly	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I do this**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “But if I do this unwillingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	17	xa5p	figs-activepassive	πεπίστευμαι	1	I have been entrusted with a stewardship	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who has **been entrusted**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “entrusting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has entrusted me with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	9	17	kjgf	figs-abstractnouns	οἰκονομίαν	1	I have been entrusted with a stewardship	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **stewardship**, you can express the idea by using a phrase with a verb such as “oversee” or “do.” Alternate translation: “something to do” or “a task to oversee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	18	lg51	figs-rquestion	τίς οὖν μού ἐστιν ὁ μισθός?	1	What then is my reward?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the following words are the answer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a construction that introduces what follows as the **reward**. Alternate translation: “This, then, is my reward:” or “Here, then, is my reward:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	9	18	pfw2	figs-abstractnouns	μού&ὁ μισθός	1	What then is my reward?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reward**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reward” or “compensate.” Alternate translation: “the way God rewards me” or “the way God compensates me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	9	18	pfw2	figs-abstractnouns	μού & ὁ μισθός	1	What then is my reward?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reward**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reward” or “compensate.” Alternate translation: “the way God rewards me” or “the way God compensates me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	18	ia5x	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	εὐαγγελιζόμενος ἀδάπανον, θήσω	1	That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge	Here, **proclaiming the gospel without charge** describes how Paul wishes to **offer** the gospel. The phrase **proclaiming the gospel without charge** could: (1) provide the means by which Paul **might offer**. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel without charge, I might offer” (2) give the situations in which Paul “offers” the gospel without taking **advantage of** his **right**. Alternate translation: “whenever I proclaim the gospel without charge, I offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	9	18	o3ju	translate-unknown	ἀδάπανον	1	That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge	Here, **without charge** means that something is free to the person who receives it. Paul is stating that the **gospel** is “free” or “at no cost” for those to whom he preaches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **without cost** with a word or phrase that indicates that something is “free” or “without cost.” Alternate translation: “freely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	18	dln7	figs-idiom	θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	offer the gospel	Here, to **offer the gospel** means to tell people about the gospel so that they have the chance to believe in it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **offer the gospel** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “I might present the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1212,11 +1212,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	18	ziyb	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	so not take full use of my right in the gospel	Here Paul speaks as if his **right** was inside **the gospel**. He speaks in this way in order to show that he only has the **right** because of his work for **the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “by the gospel” or “that comes from the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	19	of7z	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐλεύθερος γὰρ ὢν	1	I am free from all	Here, **For** introduces verses [19–23](../09/19.md). Paul is drawing an inference from what he said in [9:18](../09/18.md) about offering the gospel “without charge.” Since he offers the gospel without charge, he is **free from all**. In this and the following verses, Paul will explain what he does as someone who is **free from all** and how this is beneficial or a “reward.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or further development. Alternate translation: “So, because I am free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	9	19	b83w	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὢν	1	I am free from all	Here, **being** introduces a phrase that: (1) contrasts with **I enslaved myself**. Alternate translation: “although I am” (2) gives the reason why Paul can “enslave himself.” Alternate translation: “because I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	9	19	s48l	figs-metaphor	ἐλεύθερος&ὢν ἐκ πάντων, πᾶσιν ἐμαυτὸν ἐδούλωσα	1	I am free from all	Here Paul uses the language of slavery and freedom to describe how he proclaims the gospel. Since he does not charge money when he proclaims the gospel, he is **free**. No person employs him or tells him what to do. However, Paul decides to serve others, to “enslave himself,” by doing what others think is right. In this way, he acts like a slave who has to do what his master requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the slavery and freedom metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not having to obey all, I choose to obey all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	9	19	s48l	figs-metaphor	ἐλεύθερος & ὢν ἐκ πάντων, πᾶσιν ἐμαυτὸν ἐδούλωσα	1	I am free from all	Here Paul uses the language of slavery and freedom to describe how he proclaims the gospel. Since he does not charge money when he proclaims the gospel, he is **free**. No person employs him or tells him what to do. However, Paul decides to serve others, to “enslave himself,” by doing what others think is right. In this way, he acts like a slave who has to do what his master requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the slavery and freedom metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not having to obey all, I choose to obey all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	19	gv2u	figs-explicit	πάντων, πᾶσιν	1	I am free from all	Here, the Corinthians would have understood **all** to refer specifically to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **all** by including a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is speaking about “people.” Alternate translation: “all people … to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	9	19	xlhn	translate-unknown	κερδήσω	1	I am free from all	Here, to **gain** someone means to help them toward belief in the Messiah. Once people believe, they belong to Christ and his church, and so the person who preached the gospel to them “gained” them as a new part of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **gain** plainly or with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “I might convert” or “I might gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	19	mms9	figs-explicit	τοὺς πλείονας	1	I might gain even more	Here Paul is speaking about how “enslaving himself” **to all** gains **more** than if he did not “enslave himself” in this way. He refers specifically to people here, just like **all** refers to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **even more things** by clarifying that Paul is referring to gaining **more** people than if he did not “enslave himself.” Alternate translation: “even more people” or “more people in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	9	20	hh8t		ἐγενόμην&ὡς Ἰουδαῖος	1	I became like a Jew	Alternate translation: “I practiced Jewish customs”
+1CO	9	20	hh8t		ἐγενόμην & ὡς Ἰουδαῖος	1	I became like a Jew	Alternate translation: “I practiced Jewish customs”
 1CO	9	20	g1ig	translate-unknown	κερδήσω	-1	I became like a Jew	Just as in [9:19](../09/19.md), to **gain** someone means to help them to believe in the Messiah. Translate this word the same way you did in [9:19](../09/19.md). Alternate translation: “to convert” or “to gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	20	s9tu	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ νόμον	-1	I became like one under the law	Here Paul speaks about those who think that they need to obey the law as if they were physically **under law**. By speaking as if the **law** were on top of these people, Paul emphasizes how the **law** controls their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **under law** with a word or phrase that refers to the obligation to obey the **law**. Alternate translation: “who keep the law … one who keeps the law … one who keeps the law … who keep the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	20	buuw	figs-ellipsis	ὑπὸ νόμον, ὡς ὑπὸ νόμον	1	I became like one under the law	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I became**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “under law, I became as one under law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1224,22 +1224,22 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	20	m82d	translate-textvariants	μὴ ὢν αὐτὸς ὑπὸ νόμον	1	I became like one under the law	A few early manuscripts do not include **not being under law myself**. However, most early manuscripts do include these words. If possible, include these words in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	9	20	fhhp	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μὴ ὢν	1	I became like one under the law	Here, **not being** introduces a phrase that contrasts with **as under law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **not being** by adding words that introduce a contrast. Alternate translation: “although I am not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	9	20	d330	figs-infostructure	νόμον, μὴ ὢν αὐτὸς ὑπὸ νόμον, ἵνα τοὺς ὑπὸ νόμον κερδήσω	1	I became like one under the law	Here, **in order to gain the ones under law** is the purpose for which Paul acts like a person **under law**. The phrase **not being under law myself** indicates that Paul realizes that he is not actually **under law**. If your language would put the purpose immediate after what leads to that purpose, you could rearrange these two clauses. Alternate translation: “law in order to win those under law, not being under law myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	9	21	vjuq	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἀνόμοις&ἄνομος&τοὺς ἀνόμους	1	outside the law	Here, **without the law** refers to people who do not have **the law** that Moses wrote down. These people are not Jews, but Paul is not saying that they are disobedient. Rather, Paul is emphasizing **the law** that Moses wrote down here, which is why he uses this language rather than referring to “Gentiles” or “non-Jews.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **without the law**by clarifying that Paul is referring to people who do not have the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “To those without Moses’ law … without Moses’ law … those without Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	9	21	vjuq	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἀνόμοις & ἄνομος & τοὺς ἀνόμους	1	outside the law	Here, **without the law** refers to people who do not have **the law** that Moses wrote down. These people are not Jews, but Paul is not saying that they are disobedient. Rather, Paul is emphasizing **the law** that Moses wrote down here, which is why he uses this language rather than referring to “Gentiles” or “non-Jews.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **without the law**by clarifying that Paul is referring to people who do not have the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “To those without Moses’ law … without Moses’ law … those without Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	21	htnr	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἄνομος	1	outside the law	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous verses (**I became** in [9:20](../09/20.md)). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Since English needs these words, the ULT has supplied them in brackets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	21	d1ol	figs-infostructure	μὴ ὢν ἄνομος Θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ ἔννομος Χριστοῦ, ἵνα κερδάνω τοὺς ἀνόμους	1	outside the law	Much like in [9:20](../09/20.md), Paul includes some statements between being **without the law** and the purpose of being **without the law**. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could rearrange the clauses so that the purpose comes immediately after **without the law**, or you could mark the statements in the middle as parenthetical, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “so that I might win those without the law. Now I am not without the law of God, but under the law of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	9	21	hzib	figs-possession	ἄνομος Θεοῦ	1	outside the law	Here Paul uses the possessive form to state that: (1) he is **not without the law** that **God** has given. Paul distinguishes between the **law** that Moses wrote down and God’s **law** in general. Alternate translation: “without any law from God” (2) he is **not** someone who is disobedient (**without the law**) towards **God**. Paul is distinguishing between people who do not have the **law** that Moses wrote down and people who disobey God. Alternate translation: “disobedient towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	9	21	qtu7	figs-metaphor	ἔννομος Χριστοῦ	1	outside the law	Much like in [9:20](../09/20.md), Paul speaks about those who think that they need to obey **the law** as if they were physically **under the law**. By speaking as if **the law** were on top of these people, Paul emphasizes how **the law** controls their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **under the law** with a word or phrase that refers to the obligation to obey **the law of Christ**. Alternate translation: “keeping the law of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	21	p13t	figs-possession	ἔννομος Χριστοῦ	1	outside the law	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the law** that **Christ** commanded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this form with a word or phrase that clearly states that **Christ** commanded this **law**. Alternate translation: “under Christ’s law” or “under the law that comes from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	9	21	pksy	translate-unknown	κερδάνω	1	outside the law	Just as in [9:19](../09/19.md), to **gain** someone means to help them to believe in the Messiah. Translate this word the same way you did in [9:19](../09/19.md). Alternate translation: “I might convert” or “I might gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	9	22	zimr	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν, ἀσθενής&τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	outside the law	Much like in [8:7–12](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “To the sensitive … sensitive … the sensitive” or “To those who often condemn themselves … one who condemns himself … those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	9	22	dd4r	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν&τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	outside the law	Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “To people who are weak … the people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	9	22	zimr	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν, ἀσθενής & τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	outside the law	Much like in [8:7–12](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “To the sensitive … sensitive … the sensitive” or “To those who often condemn themselves … one who condemns himself … those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	9	22	dd4r	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν & τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	outside the law	Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “To people who are weak … the people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	9	22	zbip	translate-unknown	κερδήσω	1	outside the law	Just as in [9:19](../09/19.md), to **gain** someone means to help that person believe in the Messiah. Translate this word the same way you did in [9:19](../09/19.md). Alternate translation: “I might convert” or “I might gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	22	wgy4	figs-idiom	τοῖς πᾶσιν γέγονα πάντα	1	outside the law	Here, to **become all things** means that Paul has lived in many different ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **I have become all things**more naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “I have lived in all ways with everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	9	22	pkkx	figs-hyperbole	τοῖς πᾶσιν γέγονα πάντα	1	outside the law	Here, **all things** and **everyone** are exaggerations that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that Paul has become many things to many people. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he is willing to **become** anything to anyone as long it leads to saving people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and expression the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I have become many things to many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-1CO	9	22	q4ai		ἵνα πάντως&σώσω	1	outside the law	Alternate translation: “so that, by using every means I have, I might save”
-1CO	9	22	ezm2	figs-metonymy	πάντως&σώσω	1	outside the law	Here Paul speaks of how he leads others to faith in Jesus as “saving” them. By this, he means that he himself is the means by which God will save **some**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul says that he can **save some** with a word or phrase that refers to leading someone towards “salvation,” that is, helping them to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God might by all means use me to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1CO	9	22	q4ai		ἵνα πάντως & σώσω	1	outside the law	Alternate translation: “so that, by using every means I have, I might save”
+1CO	9	22	ezm2	figs-metonymy	πάντως & σώσω	1	outside the law	Here Paul speaks of how he leads others to faith in Jesus as “saving” them. By this, he means that he himself is the means by which God will save **some**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul says that he can **save some** with a word or phrase that refers to leading someone towards “salvation,” that is, helping them to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God might by all means use me to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	9	23	tald	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	outside the law	Here, **But** introduces a summary of what Paul has said in [9:19–22](../09/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a summary or concluding statement. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “So,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	9	23	ewxy		πάντα&ποιῶ	1	outside the law	Alternate translation: “everything I do is”
+1CO	9	23	ewxy		πάντα & ποιῶ	1	outside the law	Alternate translation: “everything I do is”
 1CO	9	23	vklq	translate-unknown	συνκοινωνὸς αὐτοῦ	1	outside the law	Here, **a partaker** is someone who participates in or shares in something with others. What Paul means is that he acts in the ways that he does with the purpose of participating in or sharing in the **gospel** and receiving what the **gospel** promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **partaker** with a comparable word or phrase that indicates that Paul is a “participator” or “sharer” in the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “a sharer in it” or “a participator in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	23	f6es	figs-abstractnouns	συνκοινωνὸς αὐτοῦ γένωμαι	1	outside the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **partaker**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “partake” or “share.” Alternate translation: “I might partake in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	23	bruk	figs-metonymy	αὐτοῦ	1	outside the law	Here, **it** refers back to **the gospel**, but Paul particularly has in mind the benefits or blessings that come from **the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it** by clarifying that Paul is referring to the blessings of **the gospel**. Alternate translation: “of its blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1247,14 +1247,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	24	mq1d	figs-exmetaphor	οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν, εἷς δὲ λαμβάνει τὸ βραβεῖον? οὕτως τρέχετε, ἵνα καταλάβητε	1	run	Here Paul begins using athletic metaphors, metaphors he will use throughout [9:24–27](../09/24.md). In this verse, he focuses on footraces. In his culture, only the runner who finished first would receive **the prize**. The **prize** might be one of many things, but often it was a “wreath” of leaves (see [9:25](../09/25.md)). Paul’s point is that the runner who wished to win had to work and train hard to be the best. Paul wants the Corinthians to approach their Christian lives with this mindset, the mindset of a successful athlete. Translate this verse in a way that clearly connects the Christian life to a footrace. Alternate translation: “only one runner receives the prize after a race? You should live your lives like a runner who focuses on receiving the prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 1CO	9	24	gb46		οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν	1	run	Alternate translation: “in a race everyone runs”
 1CO	9	24	mh8z	translate-unknown	βραβεῖον	1	So run in such a way that you might obtain it	Here, **prize** refers to what a runner would receive after winning the race. In Paul’s culture, this would often be a “wreath” of leaves ([9:25](../09/25.md)) and sometimes money. Use a word in your culture that refers generally to what an athlete receives after winning a contest. Alternate translation: “trophy” or “reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	9	25	l334	translate-unknown	πᾶς&ὁ ἀγωνιζόμενος	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here, **everyone competing in the games** refers generally to any athlete who participates in a competition, not just runners, as in the last verse. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to athletes who compete in any sport or competition. Alternate translation: “every competitor in athletic competitions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	9	25	l334	translate-unknown	πᾶς & ὁ ἀγωνιζόμενος	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here, **everyone competing in the games** refers generally to any athlete who participates in a competition, not just runners, as in the last verse. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to athletes who compete in any sport or competition. Alternate translation: “every competitor in athletic competitions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	25	mypo	translate-unknown	ἐγκρατεύεται	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul specifically has in mind the way an athlete only eats certain foods, trains their body in difficult ways, and behaves differently than most other people. All of this requires **self-control**. He implies at the end of the verse that **we** too must exercise **self-control**. If possible, use a word or phrase that refers to athletic training but that can be applied to the Christian life as well. Alternate translation: “disciplines themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	9	25	rqey	figs-ellipsis	ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὖν ἵνα	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from the first sentence in the verse. Since English needs these words, the ULT has supplied them in brackets. Alternate translation: “They therefore exercise self-control in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	25	s0n2	figs-explicit	φθαρτὸν στέφανον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here, the **wreath** refers to a crown made out of leaves gathered from a plant or a tree. This **wreath** was given to the athlete who won the contest as a symbol of their victory. Since the **wreath** was made out of leaves, it was **perishable**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **perishable wreath**by using a word or phrase that refers to what a winning athlete receives while still emphasizing that this prize is **perishable**. Alternate translation: “a breakable medal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	9	25	w421	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς&ἄφθαρτον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “we do it in order that we might receive an imperishable one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	9	25	w421	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς & ἄφθαρτον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “we do it in order that we might receive an imperishable one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	25	bfe4	figs-metaphor	ἄφθαρτον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	Here Paul speaks of a **wreath** that is **imperishable** that believers will **receive**. He speaks of what God will give to believers as a **wreath** in order to emphasize that Christians will receive something like the honor and glory that a successful athlete receives. Paul emphasizes that it will be better because it will be **imperishable**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with an analogy. Alternate translation: “an imperishable reward that is like a wreath” or “an imperishable prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	9	26	k64n	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ&οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1	I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air	Here Paul uses two different athletic metaphors, the first from footraces and the second from boxing. Both metaphors emphasize how Paul remains focused on his goal. As a runner, he has a **purpose**, which is to reach the finish line as quickly as possible. As a boxer, he does not box **the air** but rather focuses on striking his opponent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these figures of speech by stating the ideas plainly or by using analogies. Alternate translation: “I focus on the goal, much like a runner focuses on the finish line and a boxer focuses on striking the opponent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1CO	9	26	m7gf	figs-infostructure	οὕτως&ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως&ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1		In both halves of this verse, Paul introduces how he “runs” or “fights” with the word **thus**, and then he explains more clearly how he “runs” or “fights.” If your readers would find this confusing, you could introduce how Paul “runs” or “fights” more naturally. Alternate translation: “not as without purpose … not as boxing the air” or “as one who is not without purpose … as one who is not boxing the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	9	26	k64n	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ & οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1	I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air	Here Paul uses two different athletic metaphors, the first from footraces and the second from boxing. Both metaphors emphasize how Paul remains focused on his goal. As a runner, he has a **purpose**, which is to reach the finish line as quickly as possible. As a boxer, he does not box **the air** but rather focuses on striking his opponent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these figures of speech by stating the ideas plainly or by using analogies. Alternate translation: “I focus on the goal, much like a runner focuses on the finish line and a boxer focuses on striking the opponent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+1CO	9	26	m7gf	figs-infostructure	οὕτως & ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως & ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1		In both halves of this verse, Paul introduces how he “runs” or “fights” with the word **thus**, and then he explains more clearly how he “runs” or “fights.” If your readers would find this confusing, you could introduce how Paul “runs” or “fights” more naturally. Alternate translation: “not as without purpose … not as boxing the air” or “as one who is not without purpose … as one who is not boxing the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	9	26	muuc	figs-litotes	ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως	1		Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “as with purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1CO	9	26	k69i	figs-idiom	ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1		Here Paul refers to a boxer who hits **the air** instead of the opponent. This kind of boxer does not succeed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **boxing the air** with a phrase that refers to a boxer who often misses his punches. Alternate translation: “not as missing my punches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	9	27	pma2	figs-metaphor	ὑπωπιάζω μου τὸ σῶμα	1		Here Paul uses words that continue the boxing metaphor from [9:26](../09/26.md). The clause **I subdue my body** could also be translated “I give my body a black eye.” Paul’s point is that he controls or rules over his **body**, just like boxers control or rule over any opponents that they have punched in the face. He does not mean that he physically hurts his body. Since this language would be misunderstood in English, the ULT has expressed the idea plainly. You could also express the idea plainly, or you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “I rule my body” or “I take control of my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1263,14 +1263,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	27	tyca	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας	1		Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) a contrast with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (2) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	9	27	blb7	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1	I myself may not be disqualified	Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	27	s3sd	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who could be **disqualified**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “disqualifying.” If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	9	27	uoic	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&γένωμαι	1		Here, **myself** focuses attention on **I**. If **myself** would not draw attention to the Son in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “even I might be” or “I indeed might be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+1CO	9	27	uoic	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & γένωμαι	1		Here, **myself** focuses attention on **I**. If **myself** would not draw attention to the Son in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “even I might be” or “I indeed might be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1CO	10	intro	abcd			0		# 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. On food (8:1–11:1)<br>      * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)<br>      * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)<br>      * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)<br>      * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The Exodus and wilderness journey<br><br>In the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](../exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](../exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](../exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](../num/20/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](../num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](../exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](../num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](../num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](../num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])<br><br>### “Spiritual”<br><br>In [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### The Lord’s Supper<br><br>In [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper.<br><br>### Things sacrificed to idols<br><br>In Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### “That rock was Christ”<br><br>In [10:4](../10/04.md), Paul states that the “rock” from which the Israelites received water “was Christ.” This metaphor can be interpreted in two major ways: (1) Paul could be saying that Christ was the one who made the rock provide the Israelites with water. (2) Paul could be saying that the rock provided water for the Israelites like Christ provides salvation for those who believe in him. (3) Paul could be saying that Christ was somehow present in or with the rock itself. Since Paul’s sentence allows for a number of interpretations, if possible you should also allow for a number of interpretations with your translation. Also, consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “that rock was Christ.”<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Quoting the Corinthians<br><br>In [10:23](../10/23.md), Paul quotes words that the Corinthians have said or that they wrote to him. The ULT indicates these words by putting quotation marks around them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate that an author is quoting someone else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])<br><br>### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?<br><br>In [10:25–27](../10/25.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that they can eat any food from the marketplace or in someone’s home without asking about whether it was sacrificed to an idol. Everything belongs to God, so whether it was sacrificed or not does not matter. However, in [10:28–29a](../10/28.md), Paul gives an exception: if someone tells you directly that the food was sacrificed to an idol, you should not eat it for the sake of the person who told you. Immediately after, however, in [10:29b](../10/29.md), he asks a question that implies that one’s freedom should be constrained by some other person’s ideas about right and wrong. This does not seem to fit with the exception Paul has given in [10:28–29a](../10/28.md). Most likely, Paul means [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) to be understood as a side note, and [10:29b](../10/29.md) follows directly from [10:27](../10/27.md). In order to indicate this, the UST puts parentheses around [10:28–29a](../10/28.md). Consider using a natural way in your language to indicate a side note or a digression from the main argument.
 1CO	10	1	gce5	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	passed through the sea	Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said in the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	10	1	navn	figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω&ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	our fathers	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-1CO	10	1	hhts	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί&οἱ πατέρες	1	our fathers	Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** and **fathers** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	10	1	navn	figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω & ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	our fathers	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+1CO	10	1	hhts	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί & οἱ πατέρες	1	our fathers	Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** and **fathers** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	10	1	mnri	translate-kinship	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Here, **our fathers** refers to the Israelites who were slaves in Egypt and whom God rescued. Not all the Corinthians were descended from these Israelites. However, Paul can still refer to the Israelites as their **fathers** because he believes that all Christians have been included in the family of Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites. Preserve the family language in your translation. Alternate translation: “our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 1CO	10	1	v4c6	figs-explicit	πάντες ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, καὶ πάντες διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον	1	passed through the sea	In this verse, Paul refers to the story of when God brought the Israelites out of Egypt. For this story, see especially [Exodus 13:17–14:31](../exo/13/17.md). God appeared to the Israelites as a pillar of cloud and fire, and he led them and protected them with this pillar of cloud and fire. To get out of Egypt, God led them to a sea called the “Red Sea” or the “Sea of Reeds.” When the king of Egypt came to take the Israelites back to Egypt, God worked through Moses to divide the water of the sea and make a path for the Israelites to travel through. When the king of Egypt tried to follow them, God sent the water back, and the Egyptian army drowned. Paul draws special attention to the **cloud** and the **sea** because of what he will say in the next verse. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	10	1	n16b	figs-go	διὰ&διῆλθον	1	passed through the sea	Here Paul is speaking about how God parted a sea and the Israelites **passed through** that sea without getting wet. Use a word or phrase that refers to going through an area to get to the other side. Alternate translation: “went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	10	1	n16b	figs-go	διὰ & διῆλθον	1	passed through the sea	Here Paul is speaking about how God parted a sea and the Israelites **passed through** that sea without getting wet. Use a word or phrase that refers to going through an area to get to the other side. Alternate translation: “went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	10	2	q15x	figs-activepassive	πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο	1	All were baptized into Moses	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” or an unknown person does it. Alternate translation: “they all experienced baptism into Moses” or “God baptized them all into Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	2	f7cq	figs-idiom	πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο	1	All were baptized into Moses	Here, **baptized into** identifies the person with whom one is united in baptism. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **baptized into** by clarifying the idea by using language of union or relationship. Alternate translation: “they all were baptized so that they followed Moses” or “they all were baptized into relationship with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	10	2	d4ho	figs-metaphor	πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο	1	All were baptized into Moses	Here Paul speaks as if the Israelites had been **baptized**, just like believers in Jesus are **baptized**. By this, he does not mean that the Israelites had a different savior, Moses. Rather, he wants to connect the Israelites and the Corinthians, and one way to do that is to connect their leaders (**Moses** and Jesus). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **baptized into Moses**by using an analogy or indicating that Paul is speaking. Since Paul’s point is to connect the ideas in this verse to “baptism into Jesus,” preserve the metaphor here. Alternate translation: “they all were baptized, so to speak, into Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1281,14 +1281,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	4	wina	translate-unknown	πνευματικὸν	1	drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock	Here, **spiritual** could indicate: (1) that Paul is indicating that the **drink** should be compared with the wine in the Lord’s Supper, which is also **spiritual**. Alternate translation: “divine” (2) that the **drink** came from God in a supernatural way. Alternate translation: “supernatural” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	10	4	op27	translate-unknown	πνευματικῆς	1	drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock	Here, **spiritual** could indicate: (1) that Paul is already hinting that the **rock** should be interpreted as more than a rock, as **Christ** (as he does at the end of the verse). Alternate translation: “a divine” (2) that God used the **rock** in a supernatural way. Alternate translation: “a supernatural” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	10	4	hcae	figs-explicit	ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας	1	drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock	Some early Jewish scholars used the two stories about the water coming from the rock to argue that it was the same rock in both stories. This means that the rock was **following** the Israelites as they journeyed through the desert. Paul seems to refer to this interpretation here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **following {them}** by including a footnote explaining why Paul speaks in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	10	4	whj4	figs-metaphor	ἡ&πέτρα ἦν ὁ Χριστός	1	that rock was Christ	Here Paul identifies the **rock** as **Christ**. By speaking in this way, he means that the rock was the source of water and life for the Israelites, just as **Christ** is the source of life for all those who believe in him. Paul also probably means that **Christ** was the one who made the water come from the **rock**. If possible, preserve Paul’s metaphor here. If you must express the idea in another, you could state a comparison between how the **rock** provided for the Israelites and how **Christ** provides for all his people, including the Israelites. Alternate translation: “they received water from that rock like we receive life from Christ” or “Christ provided for them through the rock, and he provides for us now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	10	5	lh93		οὐκ&ηὐδόκησεν	1	not well pleased	Alternate translation: “was displeased”
+1CO	10	4	whj4	figs-metaphor	ἡ & πέτρα ἦν ὁ Χριστός	1	that rock was Christ	Here Paul identifies the **rock** as **Christ**. By speaking in this way, he means that the rock was the source of water and life for the Israelites, just as **Christ** is the source of life for all those who believe in him. Paul also probably means that **Christ** was the one who made the water come from the **rock**. If possible, preserve Paul’s metaphor here. If you must express the idea in another, you could state a comparison between how the **rock** provided for the Israelites and how **Christ** provides for all his people, including the Israelites. Alternate translation: “they received water from that rock like we receive life from Christ” or “Christ provided for them through the rock, and he provides for us now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	10	5	lh93		οὐκ & ηὐδόκησεν	1	not well pleased	Alternate translation: “was displeased”
 1CO	10	5	tnu4	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐν τοῖς πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεός	1	most of them	If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange this clause so that **them** is the subject and **God** is the object. Alternate translation: “most of them were not pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	5	w673	figs-activepassive	κατεστρώθησαν	1	their corpses were scattered about	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **scattered about** rather than focusing on the person doing the “scattering.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God scattered them about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	10	5	jxua	figs-euphemism	κατεστρώθησαν&ἐν	1	their corpses were scattered about	Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “scattering about.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant while still expressing the idea that they died in many different places. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **they were scattered about** with a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-1CO	10	5	b96g	figs-explicit	κατεστρώθησαν&ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	in the wilderness	Here Paul speaks in general of how the Israelites left Egypt to go to the land that God had promised to give them. To get to that land, they traveled through **the wilderness**. However, the Israelites often disobeyed or grumbled against God, and so he **was not well pleased with most of them**. He punished them by letting most of them die **in the wilderness** and only allowing their children to enter the land that he had promised. See [Numbers 14:20–35](../num/14/20.md) for God’s announcement of judgment. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	10	5	jxua	figs-euphemism	κατεστρώθησαν & ἐν	1	their corpses were scattered about	Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “scattering about.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant while still expressing the idea that they died in many different places. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **they were scattered about** with a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+1CO	10	5	b96g	figs-explicit	κατεστρώθησαν & ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	in the wilderness	Here Paul speaks in general of how the Israelites left Egypt to go to the land that God had promised to give them. To get to that land, they traveled through **the wilderness**. However, the Israelites often disobeyed or grumbled against God, and so he **was not well pleased with most of them**. He punished them by letting most of them die **in the wilderness** and only allowing their children to enter the land that he had promised. See [Numbers 14:20–35](../num/14/20.md) for God’s announcement of judgment. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	10	6	dzkm	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	in the wilderness	Here, **these things** refers to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these things** to more clearly express what it refers to. Alternate translation: “what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	10	6	nr6j	figs-idiom	τύποι&ἐγενήθησαν	1	in the wilderness	Here Paul states that things that happened to the Israelites **became examples**. This means that what happened can be interpreted as **examples** or occurred as **examples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **became** to more clearly state that **these things** should be understood as **examples**. Alternate translation: “can be understood as” or “happened as examples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	10	6	nr6j	figs-idiom	τύποι & ἐγενήθησαν	1	in the wilderness	Here Paul states that things that happened to the Israelites **became examples**. This means that what happened can be interpreted as **examples** or occurred as **examples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **became** to more clearly state that **these things** should be understood as **examples**. Alternate translation: “can be understood as” or “happened as examples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	10	6	afxo		μὴ εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἐπιθυμητὰς	1	in the wilderness	Alternate translation: “we would not desire”
 1CO	10	6	eisd	figs-ellipsis	ἐπεθύμησαν	1	to play	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “desired evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	10	7	lven	writing-quotations	ὥσπερ γέγραπται	1	to play	In Paul’s culture, **even as it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Exodus 32:6](../exo/32/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for it can be read in Exodus” or “For in the book of Exodus we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	7	ej16	figs-quotations	γέγραπται, ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν	1	to play	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is written that the people sat down to eat and to drink and rose up to play” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	10	7	awhu	figs-explicit	ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν	1	to play	This quotation comes from a story in which Moses has gone up on a mountain to meet with God. While he is gone, the Israelites make an idol and worship it. This quotation is how their worship is described. Paul chooses this verse because it refers specifically to food sacrificed to idols and to sexual immorality (**play**, see the next note), which are the topics he has discussed and will again discuss. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	10	7	ukp4	figs-euphemism	παίζειν	1	to play	Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **play** with a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-1CO	10	8	szje	figs-abstractnouns	πορνεύωμεν&ἐπόρνευσαν	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	10	8	szje	figs-abstractnouns	πορνεύωμεν & ἐπόρνευσαν	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	8	jb3v	figs-explicit	τινες αὐτῶν ἐπόρνευσαν, καὶ ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 25:1–9](../num/25/01.md). In this story, many Israelites began to worship a god named “Baal of Peor.” While worshiping this god, they also **committed sexual immorality**. God judged the Israelites by killing 23,000 of them. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	10	8	vlru	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites committing **sexual immorality**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you can use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	10	8	vw5g	translate-numbers	εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -1317,12 +1317,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	11	xotv	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν	1	these things happened to them	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **admonition**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “admonish.” Alternate translation: “to admonish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	11	wmp1	figs-metaphor	εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν	1	as examples	Here Paul speaks as if **the end of the ages** could **come** on somebody. By speaking as if **the end of the ages** were something that could **come**, Paul expresses the idea that he and the Corinthians are living during **the end of the ages**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who live during the end of the ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	10	11	j3z1	figs-idiom	εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν	1	the end of the ages	Here, **the end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. If your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “to whom the end of the world is coming soon” or “on whom the end times have come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	10	12	df2p	figs-metaphor	ἑστάναι&μὴ πέσῃ	1	does not fall	Here someone who **stands** is someone who is strong and faithful when following Jesus. People who **fall** are those who fail to faithfully follow Jesus and whom God punishes, just like he punished the Israelites. “Standing” and “falling” physically represent the spiritual state of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **stands** and **fall** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has firm footing … he might not slip” or “he acts faithfully … he might not fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	10	12	df2p	figs-metaphor	ἑστάναι & μὴ πέσῃ	1	does not fall	Here someone who **stands** is someone who is strong and faithful when following Jesus. People who **fall** are those who fail to faithfully follow Jesus and whom God punishes, just like he punished the Israelites. “Standing” and “falling” physically represent the spiritual state of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **stands** and **fall** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has firm footing … he might not slip” or “he acts faithfully … he might not fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	10	12	hn4j	figs-imperative3p	βλεπέτω	1	does not fall	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	10	12	s8yj	figs-gendernotations	ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ	1	does not fall	Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	10	13	a8vj	grammar-connect-exceptions	πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος	1	No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1CO	10	13	hc7q	figs-personification	πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν	1	He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability	Here, a **temptation** is spoken of as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	10	13	e4je	figs-abstractnouns	πειρασμὸς&οὐκ&σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ	1	He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	10	13	e4je	figs-abstractnouns	πειρασμὸς & οὐκ & σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ	1	He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	13	r066	figs-idiom	ἀνθρώπινος	1	He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability	Something that **{is} common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{what is} common to humanity** with a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	10	13	a72t	figs-activepassive	ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι	1	will not let you be tempted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on who or what does the “tempting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” or “something” does it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	13	idi9	figs-metaphor	ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε	1	will not let you be tempted	Here Paul speaks as if a **temptation** could be **beyond** what the Corinthians **are able** to handle. By speaking as if the **temptation** is too far in distance, Paul emphasizes that a **temptation** that is **beyond** would be one that the Corinthians could not resist, just as they could not reach a place that is **beyond** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “above what you are able” or “so that you are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1338,11 +1338,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	16	tavb	figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον	1	The cup of blessing	Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	10	16	tv8e	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εὐλογίας	1	that we bless	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **blessing**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “bless.” Alternate translation: “that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	16	y5uv	figs-rquestion	εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ?	1	is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we bless is certainly a sharing of the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	10	16	yek5	figs-possession	κοινωνία&τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ&κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ?	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. This could refer primarily to: (1) communion in or union with Christ himself. Alternate translation: “communion with the blood of Christ … communion with the body of Christ” (2) being joined together with other believers, which comes from sharing in the **blood** and **body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “sharing in fellowship based on the blood of Christ … sharing in fellowship based on the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	10	16	yek5	figs-possession	κοινωνία & τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ & κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ?	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. This could refer primarily to: (1) communion in or union with Christ himself. Alternate translation: “communion with the blood of Christ … communion with the body of Christ” (2) being joined together with other believers, which comes from sharing in the **blood** and **body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “sharing in fellowship based on the blood of Christ … sharing in fellowship based on the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	10	16	ngf6	figs-rquestion	κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1	The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	10	16	g8ad	translate-unknown	κλῶμεν	1	The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ?	Here, to **break** bread refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. By using **we break**, Paul is referring to many people together eating **bread**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **we break** with a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat **bread** while still emphasizing that many people eat the **bread**. Alternate translation: “we eat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	10	17	gfur	figs-infostructure	ὅτι εἷς ἄρτος, ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν; οἱ γὰρ πάντες ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου μετέχομεν	1	loaf of bread	Here Paul presents his argument by stating a premise, a conclusion, and then another premise. If your language would naturally state both premises before the conclusion, you could rearrange these clauses. Alternate translation: “Because there is one bread, and we all partake from the one bread, we who are many are one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	10	17	g954	translate-unknown	εἷς ἄρτος&τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου	1	loaf of bread	Here Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one bread** with a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “there is one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	10	17	g954	translate-unknown	εἷς ἄρτος & τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου	1	loaf of bread	Here Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one bread** with a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “there is one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	10	17	vvt7	figs-metaphor	ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν	1	loaf of bread	Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	10	18	f97w	figs-idiom	τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα	1	Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar?	Here, **according to the flesh** identifies **Israel** as a reference to the people who are physically descended from Abraham and part of the nation of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **according to the flesh** with a word or phrase that refers to physical descent or genealogy. Alternate translation: “ethnic Israel” or “Israel by physical descent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	10	18	q9ng	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν?	1	Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, they are.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “those who are eating the sacrifices are certainly partakers of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1353,15 +1353,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	19	b9ct	writing-pronouns	τί οὖν φημι	1	What am I saying then?	Here Paul is referring to what he has said in his argument about idols and things sacrificed to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is referring to what he has said so far by stating that more clearly. Alternate translation: “What does what I have argued imply, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	10	19	j8dj	translate-unknown	εἰδωλόθυτόν	1	Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything?	Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you can use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	10	19	lxm3	figs-activepassive	εἰδωλόθυτόν	1	Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sacrificed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sacrificing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	10	19	l9t4	figs-rquestion	οὖν&ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	10	19	l9t4	figs-rquestion	οὖν & ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	10	19	tmkb		τὶ ἐστιν	-1		Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **{food} sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **{food} sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** are real or not. Alternate translation: “is real … is real”
 1CO	10	20	skct	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὅτι	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply some from the previous verse ([10:19](../10/19.md)). Alternate translation: “Rather, I am saying that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	10	20	hvi0	figs-infostructure	ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη&θύουσιν	1		Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	10	20	hvi0	figs-infostructure	ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη & θύουσιν	1		Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	10	20	snhh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a development in the argument. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	10	20	w8ep	figs-possession	κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or joining in union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with nonbelievers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	10	21	vgx5	figs-hyperbole	οὐ δύνασθε&πίνειν&οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης&μετέχειν	1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Here Paul states that they **are not able** to do both of these things even though he knows that they can physically do both of these things. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that it is shocking and unthinkable to do both of these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **You are not able**with a strong command or a statement of how bad doing both these things would be. Alternate translation: “You should never drink … You should never partake of the table” or “It is very wrong to drink … It is very wrong to partake of the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1CO	10	21	vgx5	figs-hyperbole	οὐ δύνασθε & πίνειν & οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης & μετέχειν	1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Here Paul states that they **are not able** to do both of these things even though he knows that they can physically do both of these things. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that it is shocking and unthinkable to do both of these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **You are not able**with a strong command or a statement of how bad doing both these things would be. Alternate translation: “You should never drink … You should never partake of the table” or “It is very wrong to drink … It is very wrong to partake of the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	10	21	dy2g	figs-metonymy	ποτήριον	-1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **the cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in **the cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1CO	10	21	mxni	figs-possession	ποτήριον Κυρίου&ποτήριον δαιμονίων&τραπέζης Κυρίου&τραπέζης δαιμονίων.	1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **the Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **the Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	10	21	mxni	figs-possession	ποτήριον Κυρίου & ποτήριον δαιμονίων & τραπέζης Κυρίου & τραπέζης δαιμονίων.	1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **the Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **the Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	10	21	qwk7	figs-metonymy	τραπέζης	-1	You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons	Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **table** by more explicitly referring to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	10	22	nxv9	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον	1	Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy?	The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word or phrase that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	10	22	l8ik	figs-rquestion	ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον?	1	Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1370,11 +1370,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	23	z31s	figs-doublet	πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ.	1	Everything is lawful	Here, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul repeats **All {things are} lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **All {things are} lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can state **All {things are} lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““All things are lawful for me,’ but not all things are beneficial, and not all things build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	10	23	tu2m	writing-quotations	πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’	-1	Everything is lawful	In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. By using quotation marks, the ULT indicates that these claims are quotations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **All {things are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this by clarifying that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things are lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things are lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	10	23	jm4k		οὐ πάντα	-1	not everything is beneficial	Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things”
-1CO	10	23	adry	figs-explicit	συμφέρει&οἰκοδομεῖ	1	not everything is beneficial	Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “are beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All {things are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “are beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	10	23	adry	figs-explicit	συμφέρει & οἰκοδομεῖ	1	not everything is beneficial	Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “are beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All {things are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “are beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	10	23	ex6z	figs-metaphor	οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ	1	not everything builds people up	Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this figure of speech plainly or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	10	24	bpf8	figs-imperative3p	μηδεὶς&ζητείτω	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	10	24	bpf8	figs-imperative3p	μηδεὶς & ζητείτω	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	10	24	i6ek	figs-gendernotations	ἑαυτοῦ	1	not everything builds people up	Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **his**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	10	24	mcwj	figs-possession	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ&ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other {person}**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	10	24	mcwj	figs-possession	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ & ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other {person}**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	10	24	pn70	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	10	24	dppr	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other {person}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the other {person}** with a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	10	25	djh4	figs-explicit	ἐν μακέλλῳ	1	not everything builds people up	Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote to explain the context and say why Paul is speaking about **the market**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	25	crww	writing-pronouns	τὴν συνείδησιν	1	not everything builds people up	Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the people who are buying the food **in the market**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the conscience**with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the people who buy the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	10	26	c1al	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1	not everything builds people up	In Paul’s culture, **For** a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 24:1](../psa/24/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	10	26	l89d	figs-quotations	τοῦ Κυρίου γὰρ ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς	1	not everything builds people up	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “For it says that the earth is the Lord’s, and the fullness of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	10	26	yi79	figs-infostructure	τοῦ Κυρίου&ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς	1	not everything builds people up	Here, the passage that Paul quotes includes a second thing that is **the Lord’s** after the **earth**. In the author’s culture, this was good poetic style. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put **the earth** and **the fullness of it** together. Alternate translation: “the earth and the fullness of it are the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	10	26	yi79	figs-infostructure	τοῦ Κυρίου & ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς	1	not everything builds people up	Here, the passage that Paul quotes includes a second thing that is **the Lord’s** after the **earth**. In the author’s culture, this was good poetic style. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put **the earth** and **the fullness of it** together. Alternate translation: “the earth and the fullness of it are the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	10	26	c5tk	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “and the fullness of it is also the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	10	26	ib5g	translate-unknown	τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς	1	not everything builds people up	Here, **fullness** refers to everything that is connected with **the earth**, including people, animals, natural resources, and anything else that goes with **the earth**. Use a natural way to refer to everything connected with **the earth** in your language. Alternate translation: “everything in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	10	27	nbjw	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ	1	you without asking questions of conscience	Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that an unbeliever might **invite you** and **you** might **want to go**, or this might not happen. He specifies the result for **if** the unbeliever does **invite you** and **if** **you** do **want to go**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
@@ -1403,24 +1403,24 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	28	qr1c	figs-extrainfo	τὴν συνείδησιν	1	says to you … do not eat … informed you	Here it is unclear whose **conscience** Paul is speaking about. If possible, preserve the ambiguity, because Paul will explain whose **conscience** he has in mind in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	10	28	f8mv	translate-textvariants	συνείδησιν	1	says to you … do not eat … informed you	After **conscience**, some manuscripts include “For ‘the earth {is} the Lord’s, and the fullness of it.’” This seems to be an accidental repetition of [10:26](../10/26.md). If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	10	29	v1d9		συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ	1	the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours	Alternate translation: “now the conscience I am talking about is not”
-1CO	10	29	s1wk	figs-ellipsis	συνείδησιν&λέγω, οὐχὶ	1	and not yours	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “I mean.” Alternate translation: “when I say the conscience, I mean not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	10	29	s1wk	figs-ellipsis	συνείδησιν & λέγω, οὐχὶ	1	and not yours	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “I mean.” Alternate translation: “when I say the conscience, I mean not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	10	29	d0p8	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	and not yours	Here, **the other {person}** is the one who spoke about how the food was “offered in sacrifice” in [10:28](../10/28.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who **the other {person}** is by clarifying to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “of the person who informed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	10	29	k8xr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For why … conscience?	Here, **For** introduces further support for the point that Paul was making in [10:25–27](../10/25.md) about how “conscience” is not significant for eating food at someone’s house. This means that [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) interrupt the argument. For ways to mark this in your translation, see the chapter introduction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify that Paul is returning to an earlier argument in verse 27. Alternate translation: “In most cases, though,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	10	29	dr73	figs-123person	ἡ ἐλευθερία μου	1	For why … conscience?	Here Paul begins speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. What he says in [10:33](../10/33.md) confirms that this is why he uses the first person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the first person here by clarifying that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “my freedom, for example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1CO	10	29	d4q1	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί&ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	10	29	ksog	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τί&ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **my freedom** that is **judged** rather than focusing on **another’s conscience**, which does the “judging.” Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	10	29	d4q1	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί & ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	10	29	ksog	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τί & ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **my freedom** that is **judged** rather than focusing on **another’s conscience**, which does the “judging.” Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	29	kbj4	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐλευθερία μου	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you can express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	30	x2v5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	If I partake	Here Paul uses **If** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might **partake with gratitude**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for if the person does **partake with gratitude**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **If** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	10	30	b7n9	figs-123person	ἐγὼ&βλασφημοῦμαι&ἐγὼ	1	If I partake	Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. What he says in [10:33](../10/33.md) confirms that this is why he uses the first person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the first person here by clarifying that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	10	30	b7n9	figs-123person	ἐγὼ & βλασφημοῦμαι & ἐγὼ	1	If I partake	Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. What he says in [10:33](../10/33.md) confirms that this is why he uses the first person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the first person here by clarifying that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	10	30	n89t	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι	1	with gratitude	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gratitude**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “gratefully” or an adjective such as “grateful.” Alternate translation: “gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	30	dv5f	figs-rquestion	τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ?	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	10	30	bafd	figs-activepassive	βλασφημοῦμαι	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who is **insulted**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “insulting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that some other person does it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	31	ub3g	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion of what Paul has argued in [8:1–10:30](../08/01.md). If you have a way to introduce the conclusion to an entire section, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	10	31	pxzd	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε&ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	10	31	pxzd	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε & ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	10	31	zmvv	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	32	sj34	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	10	32	ag47	figs-explicit	καὶ Ἰουδαίοις&καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out by clarifying that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	10	33	rjyz	figs-possession	τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον&τὸ τῶν πολλῶν	1	the many	Here Paul speaks of a **benefit** that belongs to him or to **many** others. By this, he refers to what is a **benefit** for himself or for the **many** others. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **benefit** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is a benefit for me but what is a benefit for the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	10	32	ag47	figs-explicit	καὶ Ἰουδαίοις & καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out by clarifying that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	10	33	rjyz	figs-possession	τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον & τὸ τῶν πολλῶν	1	the many	Here Paul speaks of a **benefit** that belongs to him or to **many** others. By this, he refers to what is a **benefit** for himself or for the **many** others. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **benefit** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is a benefit for me but what is a benefit for the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	10	33	k86v	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον, ἀλλὰ τὸ τῶν πολλῶν	1	the many	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit.” Alternate translation: “what benefits me but what benefits the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	33	hd2z	figs-nominaladj	τῶν πολλῶν	1	the many	Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	10	33	qsg4	figs-activepassive	σωθῶσιν	1	the many	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **saved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	3	hbt7	figs-metaphor	παντὸς ἀνδρὸς ἡ κεφαλὴ ὁ Χριστός ἐστιν, κεφαλὴ δὲ γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ, κεφαλὴ δὲ τοῦ Χριστοῦ ὁ Θεός	1	is the head	Here Paul speaks as if someone could be **the head** of someone else. This is an important metaphor that Paul uses in many places, and it might contain elements of both of the possibilities in this note, so preserve the metaphor if possible. This figure of speech could refer to how the head: (1) functions as the source of life and existence for the body. The person who is identified as **the head** would function as the source of life and existence for the other person, and the other person is connected to the **head**. Alternate translation: “Christ is the source of every man, and the man is the source of a woman, and God is the source of Christ” (2) functions as the leader or director of the body. The person who is identified as **the head** would function as the authority over or leader of the other person. Alternate translation: “Christ has authority over every man, and the man has authority over a woman, and God has authority over Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	11	3	wfaa	figs-gendernotations	παντὸς ἀνδρὸς	1	is the head	Here, **every man** could refer to: (1) male people. Paul is not saying that Christ is not **the head** of female people, but he is claiming that he is **the head** of male people. Alternate translation: “of every male person” (2) people in general, even though the word is masculine. Alternate translation: “of every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	11	3	en95	figs-explicit	γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ	1	a man is the head of a woman	Here, **man** and **woman** could refer to: (1) a **man** and **woman** who are married to each other. Alternate translation: “the husband is … of his wife” (2) any people who are male and female. Alternate translation: “the male person is … of a female person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	11	3	scbp	figs-genericnoun	κεφαλὴ&γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ	2	a man is the head of a woman	Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “each man is the head of his woman” or “each man is the head of each woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	11	3	scbp	figs-genericnoun	κεφαλὴ & γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ	2	a man is the head of a woman	Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “each man is the head of his woman” or “each man is the head of each woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	11	4	evt9	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων	1	having something on his head	Here, **having something on his head** happens at the same time as **praying or prophesying**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the relationship between these events with a word or phrase that indicates that the events happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “while he has something on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	11	4	uuv2	figs-explicit	κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων	1	having something on his head	Here, **something on his head** refers to a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “having a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	4	g11x	translate-unknown	καταισχύνει	1	having something on his head	Here, **dishonors** is a word that refers to shaming someone else or causing them to lose honor. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this idea. Alternate translation: “shames” or “takes honor away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1445,12 +1445,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	5	zcfw	translate-unknown	καταισχύνει	1	with her head uncovered	Here, **dishonors** is a word that refers to shaming someone else or causing them to lose honor. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this idea. Alternate translation: “shames” or “takes honor away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	5	b9bd	figs-metaphor	τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς	1	as if her head were shaved	Here, **her head** could refer to: (1) how [11:3](../11/03.md) states that “the man {is} the head of a woman.” The phrase **her head** thus refers to “the man” as the **head** of the woman. This man would be the woman’s husband. Alternate translation: “her husband, her head” (2) again how [11:3](../11/03.md) states that “the man is the head of a woman.” In this case, “the man” would refer to men in general. Alternate translation: “every man, her head” (3) the woman’s physical **head**, which would mean that the woman **dishonors** “herself.” Alternate translation: “her own head” or “herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	11	5	sw8t	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν	1	as if her head were shaved	Here, **it** refers back to having **the head uncovered**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **it** refers to more clearly. Alternate translation: “having the head uncovered is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	11	5	pco3	figs-idiom	ἓν&ἐστιν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	Here, **one and the same thing** is a way to say that two things are similar or identical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it is the same thing as having been shaved” or “this is just like having been shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	11	5	pco3	figs-idiom	ἓν & ἐστιν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	Here, **one and the same thing** is a way to say that two things are similar or identical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it is the same thing as having been shaved” or “this is just like having been shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	11	5	fd7y	figs-ellipsis	τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	Here, **having been shaved** refers to the **head**. If you need to clarify what is being **shaved**, you could include **head**. Alternate translation: “as her head having been shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	11	5	ltq4	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	In Paul’s culture, a woman with a **shaved** head would experience shame and dishonor, and Paul assumes this for the sake of his argument. If that is not true in your culture, you might need to clarify that a **shaved** head was shameful for a woman. Alternate translation: “as having been shamefully shaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	5	e1pz	figs-activepassive	τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “as someone shaving her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	6	wamj	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **a woman** might **cover her head**, or she might not. He specifies the result for if the **woman does not cover her head**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	11	6	lac8	figs-explicit	οὐ κατακαλύπτεται&κατακαλυπτέσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **not** “covering” the **head** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “does not wear a cloth on her head … let her wear a cloth on her head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “loosens her hair … let her bind up her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	11	6	lac8	figs-explicit	οὐ κατακαλύπτεται & κατακαλυπτέσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **not** “covering” the **head** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “does not wear a cloth on her head … let her wear a cloth on her head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “loosens her hair … let her bind up her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	6	ahln	figs-imperative3p	καὶ κειράσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	11	6	i9ou	figs-activepassive	καὶ κειράσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair**, which is **cut off**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “let a person cut her hair off also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	6	s4r5	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	2	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@@ -1462,16 +1462,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	7	aa4r	figs-explicit	κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν	1	should not have his head covered	Here, **to cover his head** refers to using a piece of clothing that would be worn on the top and back of the head. The phrase does not refer to hair or to some piece of clothing that obscures the face. Paul does not clarify, however, what kind of clothing this might be. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to clothing. Alternate translation: “have a covering on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	7	hvot	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὑπάρχων	1	should not have his head covered	Here, **being** introduces a clause that gives a reason or basis for what he has already said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection with a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	11	7	rc0x	figs-abstractnouns	εἰκὼν καὶ δόξα Θεοῦ	1	should not have his head covered	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **image** and **glory**, you can express the idea by using verbs such as “reflect” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “one who reflects and glorifies God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	11	7	mdob	figs-explicit	ἡ γυνὴ&δόξα ἀνδρός ἐστιν	1	should not have his head covered	Here, **woman** and **man** could refer to: (1) a **woman** and **man** who are married to each other. Alternate translation: “the wife is the glory of the husband” (2) any people who are male and female. Alternate translation: “the female person is the glory of the male person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	11	7	ziew	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ&δόξα ἀνδρός ἐστιν	1	should not have his head covered	Paul is speaking of “women” and “men” in general, not of one particular **woman** and **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “each woman is the glory of her man” or “women are the glory of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	11	7	mdob	figs-explicit	ἡ γυνὴ & δόξα ἀνδρός ἐστιν	1	should not have his head covered	Here, **woman** and **man** could refer to: (1) a **woman** and **man** who are married to each other. Alternate translation: “the wife is the glory of the husband” (2) any people who are male and female. Alternate translation: “the female person is the glory of the male person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	11	7	ziew	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ & δόξα ἀνδρός ἐστιν	1	should not have his head covered	Paul is speaking of “women” and “men” in general, not of one particular **woman** and **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “each woman is the glory of her man” or “women are the glory of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	11	7	t5jn	figs-abstractnouns	δόξα ἀνδρός	1	glory of the man	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “the one who glorifies man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	11	8	w8jm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For neither … for man	Here, **For** introduces a basis for what Paul has claimed in [11:7](../11/07.md), most specifically for the claim that “woman is the glory of man.” In [11:10](../11/10.md), Paul gives the result of what he has claimed in [11:7](../11/07.md). Because of this, in some languages [11:7–8](../11/07.md) might seem like they interrupt the logic or argument. If that is true in your language, you could mark [11:7–8](../11/07.md) as an interruption by using parentheses or some other natural form in your language. Alternate translation: “As a side note,” or “By the way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	11	8	s5ns	figs-explicit	οὐ&ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	Here Paul is speaking about a **man** and a **woman**. These words could refer to: (1) the first **man** and **woman** that God created: Adam and Eve. In the story in [Genesis 2:18–25](../gen/02/18.md), God has already made Adam. He makes Adam sleep, takes a rib from his side, and uses it to create a woman, Eve. In this sense, **woman {is} from man**. Alternate translation: “the first man was not from the first woman, but the first woman was from the first man” (2) “men” and “women” in general. In this case, Paul would be referring to the role that men play in procreation. Alternate translation: “men do not come from women, but women come from men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	11	8	s5ns	figs-explicit	οὐ & ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	Here Paul is speaking about a **man** and a **woman**. These words could refer to: (1) the first **man** and **woman** that God created: Adam and Eve. In the story in [Genesis 2:18–25](../gen/02/18.md), God has already made Adam. He makes Adam sleep, takes a rib from his side, and uses it to create a woman, Eve. In this sense, **woman {is} from man**. Alternate translation: “the first man was not from the first woman, but the first woman was from the first man” (2) “men” and “women” in general. In this case, Paul would be referring to the role that men play in procreation. Alternate translation: “men do not come from women, but women come from men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	9	g8lw	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ γὰρ	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	Here, **For indeed** introduces a second basis for what Paul has claimed in [11:7](../11/07.md), most specifically for the claim that “woman is the glory of man.” In [11:10](../11/10.md). However, Paul gives the result of what he has claimed in [11:7](../11/07.md) in [11:10](../11/10.md). Because of this, in some languages [11:7–8](../11/07.md) might seem like they interrupt the logic or argument. If that is true in your language, you could mark [11:7–8](../11/07.md) as an interruption by using parentheses or some other natural form in your language. Alternate translation: “As another side note,” or “Also by the way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	11	9	rrs5	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐκτίσθη ἀνὴρ διὰ τὴν γυναῖκα, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ διὰ τὸν ἄνδρα	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	Again, Paul is speaking about a **man** and a **woman**. Just as in [11:8](../11/08.md), these words could refer to: (1) the first **man** and **woman** that God created: Adam and Eve. In the story in [Genesis 2:18–25](../gen/02/18.md), God has already made Adam. God then has Adam name all the animals, but there was no “helper” for Adam. God then makes Eve as a “helper” for Adam. Alternate translation: “the first man was not created for the first woman, but the first woman was created for the first man” (2) “men” and “women” in general. In this case, Paul would be referring to the relationship between males and females in general or to the specific relationship between husbands and wives. Alternate translation: “men were not created for women, but women for men” or “husbands were not created for wives, but wives for husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	9	tctb	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐκτίσθη ἀνὴρ	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **man**, who is **created**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “creating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God did not create man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	9	t4je	figs-ellipsis	γυνὴ διὰ τὸν ἄνδρα	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**was created**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “woman was created for the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	11	10	q3kx	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο&ἡ γυνὴ&διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	Here, **For this reason** could refer to: (1) both what Paul said in [11:7](../11/07.md) about how “the woman is the glory of man” and what he will say at the end of this verse about **the angels**. Alternate translation: “Because of how the woman is the glory of the man and because of the angels, the woman” (2) just what Paul has said in [11:7](../11/07.md) about how “the woman is the glory of man.” Alternate translation: “Because of what I have said, the woman … because of the angels” (3) just what Paul will say at the end of the verse about **the angels**. Alternate translation: “For this reason, that is, because of the angels, the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1CO	11	10	q3kx	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο & ἡ γυνὴ & διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	Here, **For this reason** could refer to: (1) both what Paul said in [11:7](../11/07.md) about how “the woman is the glory of man” and what he will say at the end of this verse about **the angels**. Alternate translation: “Because of how the woman is the glory of the man and because of the angels, the woman” (2) just what Paul has said in [11:7](../11/07.md) about how “the woman is the glory of man.” Alternate translation: “Because of what I have said, the woman … because of the angels” (3) just what Paul will say at the end of the verse about **the angels**. Alternate translation: “For this reason, that is, because of the angels, the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	11	10	bikt	figs-explicit	ἡ γυνὴ	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	Here, **the woman** could refer to: (1) a female person. Alternate translation: “the female person” (2) a wife. Alternate translation: “the wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	10	jsu0	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	Paul is speaking of “women” in general, not of one particular **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	11	10	olmx	translate-unknown	ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	The phrase **have authority on the head** could refer to: (1) the **authority** that the “man” has over **the woman**. In this view, **authority** implies the head covering or long hair, which **the woman** wears as a sign of the man’s **authority** over her. Alternate translation: “to have a sign of the man’s authority on her head” (2) how the **woman** has **authority** over her own **head**. In other words, she has **authority** to decide what to wear or not wear on her head, or **authority** could imply the head covering or long hair, which **the woman** wears as a sign of her **authority** over herself. Alternate translation: “to have authority over her own head” or “to have a sign of her authority on her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1480,11 +1480,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	10	vwq4	figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	Here, **because of the angels** clearly means that Paul considers **the angels** to be a reason for why **the woman ought to have authority on the head**, whichever meaning of that clause you decide on. However, what Paul means by the phrase **because of the angels** is not clear. Therefore, you also should leave your translation open so that your readers could draw any of the following conclusions. The phrase **because of the angels** could refer to: (1) how the angels oversee the order of the world and especially worship. The **woman** having **authority on the head** would satisfy what the angels require for worship practices. Alternate translation: “because of what the angels require” (2) how the angels can be sexually attracted to earthly women, so **the woman ought to have authority on the head** to keep the angels from acting or being tempted to act sexually with women. Alternate translation: “because otherwise the angels would be tempted” (3) how the angels are present in the worship of the community, and **the woman** must **have authority on the head** as a sign of respect to them. Alternate translation: “because angels are present when you worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	11	pir4	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	πλὴν	1	Nevertheless, in the Lord	Here, **Nevertheless** introduces a contrast or qualification of what Paul has been saying, especially with reference to [11:8–9](../11/08.md). Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a contrast or qualification of previous arguments. Alternate translation: “Even so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	11	11	h9t4	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the situation in which men and women are **not independent** from each other. Alternate translation: “in their union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	11	11	hqy4	figs-litotes	οὔτε&χωρὶς&οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς	1	the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman	Here Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **independent from**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you can instead use one positive word. Alternate translation: “is dependent on … and man is dependent on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-1CO	11	11	velr	figs-genericnoun	γυνὴ&ἀνδρὸς&ἀνὴρ&γυναικὸς	1	the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman	Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman … men … every man … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	11	12	aiid	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ&τοῦ ἀνδρός&ὁ ἀνὴρ&τῆς γυναικός	1	all things come from God	Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman … men … every man … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	11	12	fd3u	figs-explicit	ὥσπερ&ἡ γυνὴ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνδρός, οὕτως καὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ διὰ τῆς γυναικός	1	all things come from God	Here, **even as the woman {is} from the man** refers back to the story about how God made the first woman, Eve, from a rib he took from the first man, Adam. Paul has already referred to this story in [11:8](../11/08.md). Paul then compares this with how **the man {is} through the woman**. This clause refers to how women give birth to men. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what these two clauses refer to more explicitly. Alternate translation: “even as the first woman came from the first man, so also men are born from women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	11	12	i8qu		τὰ&πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	all things come from God	Alternate translation: “God created all things”
+1CO	11	11	hqy4	figs-litotes	οὔτε & χωρὶς & οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς	1	the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman	Here Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **independent from**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you can instead use one positive word. Alternate translation: “is dependent on … and man is dependent on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+1CO	11	11	velr	figs-genericnoun	γυνὴ & ἀνδρὸς & ἀνὴρ & γυναικὸς	1	the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman	Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman … men … every man … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	11	12	aiid	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ & τοῦ ἀνδρός & ὁ ἀνὴρ & τῆς γυναικός	1	all things come from God	Paul is speaking of “men” and “women” in general, not of one particular **man** and **woman**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “every woman … men … every man … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	11	12	fd3u	figs-explicit	ὥσπερ & ἡ γυνὴ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνδρός, οὕτως καὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ διὰ τῆς γυναικός	1	all things come from God	Here, **even as the woman {is} from the man** refers back to the story about how God made the first woman, Eve, from a rib he took from the first man, Adam. Paul has already referred to this story in [11:8](../11/08.md). Paul then compares this with how **the man {is} through the woman**. This clause refers to how women give birth to men. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what these two clauses refer to more explicitly. Alternate translation: “even as the first woman came from the first man, so also men are born from women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	11	12	i8qu		τὰ & πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	all things come from God	Alternate translation: “God created all things”
 1CO	11	13	hp13	figs-rquestion	ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε: πρέπον ἐστὶν γυναῖκα ἀκατακάλυπτον, τῷ Θεῷ προσεύχεσθαι?	1	Is it proper for a woman to pray to God with her head uncovered?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, it is not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. If you do, you may need to include a phrase such as “and you will find” after **Judge for your own selves**, which by itself introduces a question and not a statement. Alternate translation: “Judge for your own selves, and you will find that it is not proper for a woman to pray to God uncovered.” or “Judge for your own selves whether it is proper for a woman to pray to God uncovered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	11	13	eex3	translate-unknown	πρέπον	1	Judge for yourselves	Here, **proper** identifies behavior that most people in a culture would agree is “appropriate” or “right” for a certain people or situations. Use a word or phrase that identifies what is “appropriate” or “right” for someone or at some time. Alternate translation: “right for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	13	ylgd	figs-explicit	ἀκατακάλυπτον	1	Judge for yourselves	Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **uncovered** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “without a cloth on the head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “with her hair unbound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1496,10 +1496,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	14	kr9k	translate-unknown	κομᾷ	1	Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?	Here Paul uses a word that refers to someone letting his or her hair grow long. It is not clear how long the hair must be to count as **long hair**. Use a word or phrase that refers to what your culture would consider **long hair**. Alternate translation: “lets his hair grow long” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	14	jgcu	figs-abstractnouns	ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1	Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disgrace**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “disgrace” or an adjective such as “disgraceful.” Alternate translation: “it disgraces him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	11	15	f66k	figs-rquestion	γυνὴ δὲ ἐὰν κομᾷ, δόξα αὐτῇ ἐστιν?	1	For her hair has been given to her	This is the second part of the rhetorical question that began in the last verse. Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, nature does teach this.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong affirmation. If you use the following alternate translation, you should translate the previous verse as a separate affirmation. Alternate translation: “However, if a woman has long hair, it is glory for her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	11	15	qlhs	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	γυνὴ&ἐὰν κομᾷ, δόξα αὐτῇ ἐστιν?	1	For her hair has been given to her	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **a woman might have long hair**, or she might not. He specifies the result for **if a woman** does **have long hair**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “when” or by avoiding the **if** structure. Alternate translation: “when a woman has long hair, it is glory for her” or “it is glory for a woman to have long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	11	15	qlhs	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	γυνὴ & ἐὰν κομᾷ, δόξα αὐτῇ ἐστιν?	1	For her hair has been given to her	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **a woman might have long hair**, or she might not. He specifies the result for **if a woman** does **have long hair**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “when” or by avoiding the **if** structure. Alternate translation: “when a woman has long hair, it is glory for her” or “it is glory for a woman to have long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	11	15	qbci	translate-unknown	κομᾷ	1	For her hair has been given to her	Just as in [11:14](../11/14.md), here Paul uses a word that refers to someone letting his or her hair grow long. It is not clear how long the hair must be to count as **long hair**. Use a word or phrase that refers to what your culture would consider **long hair**. Alternate translation: “grows her hair out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	15	vpou	figs-abstractnouns	δόξα αὐτῇ ἐστιν	1	For her hair has been given to her	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify” or an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “it glorifies her” or “it is glorious for her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	11	15	s7ys	figs-activepassive	ὅτι ἡ κόμη&δέδοται αὐτῇ	1	For her hair has been given to her	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **long hair** that **has been given** rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has given her the long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	11	15	s7ys	figs-activepassive	ὅτι ἡ κόμη & δέδοται αὐτῇ	1	For her hair has been given to her	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **long hair** that **has been given** rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has given her the long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	15	jaxe	translate-unknown	ἡ κόμη	1	For her hair has been given to her	Here Paul uses a word that refers to **the long hair** itself. It is not clear how long the hair must be to count as **long hair**. Use a word or phrase that refers to what your culture would consider **long hair**. Alternate translation: “grown-out hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	15	dwbm		ἀντὶ περιβολαίου	1	For her hair has been given to her	This could refer to: (1) how **the long hair** is equivalent to or functions as **a covering**. Alternate translation: “to be a covering” (2) how **the long hair** functions “instead of” or as a replacement of **a covering**. Alternate translation: “instead of a covering”
 1CO	11	16	ou4r	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	For her hair has been given to her	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might be **contentious about this**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for **if anyone** is **contentious**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
@@ -1508,7 +1508,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	16	dr9j	figs-explicit	τοιαύτην συνήθειαν	1	For her hair has been given to her	Here, **any such practice** could refer to: (1) the **practice** that anyone who **thinks to be contentious** supports. Therefore, this **practice** would be for women to have “uncovered” heads. Alternate translation: “the practice that they have” or “the practice of women with uncovered heads” (2) being **contentious**. Alternate translation: “any such practice of being contentious” or “the practice of being contentious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	16	cjpt	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ αἱ ἐκκλησίαι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	For her hair has been given to her	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**do not have any such practice**). If your language does need these words, you could supply as many as are needed from that clause. Alternate translation: “nor do the churches of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	11	17	vt5a	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For	Here, **But** introduces a new topic and also signals a contrast with what Paul said in [11:2](../11/02.md) about being able to “praise” them. Here, he does **not praise** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic. If possible, preserve the contrast with [11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “Now, however,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	11	17	arh9	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο&παραγγέλλων	1	in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For	Here, **this** refers to what Paul is about to say about the Lord’s Supper. It does not refer back to what he has already said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **this** refers to by clarifying that it refers to what Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “in commanding what I am about to command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	11	17	arh9	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο & παραγγέλλων	1	in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For	Here, **this** refers to what Paul is about to say about the Lord’s Supper. It does not refer back to what he has already said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **this** refers to by clarifying that it refers to what Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “in commanding what I am about to command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	11	17	fw7j	figs-go	συνέρχεσθε	1	in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For	Throughout this chapter, **come together** refers to a group gathering in a specific place. Your language may say “go” or “gather” rather than “come” in contexts such as this. Use whatever is most natural. Alternate translation: “you go together” or “you gather together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	11	17	du1a	figs-nominaladj	οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον	1	it is not for the better but for the worse	Paul is using the adjectives **better** and **worse** as nouns in order to describe the results of the Corinthians’ behavior. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrase. Alternate translation: “not for better things but for worse things” or “not with better results but with worse results” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	11	17	u6em	figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον	1	it is not for the better but for the worse	Here Paul does not state for whom or what the “coming together” is **not for the better but for the worse**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that their behavior was **worse** and **not for the better** for people in their group and for how they glorify God. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “not for the better for your group but for the worse” or “not for better glorifying God and serving others but for doing this worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1520,32 +1520,32 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	18	l9vx	translate-unknown	σχίσματα	1	there are divisions among you	Here, **divisions** refers to when one group splits into multiple different groups because they have different leaders, beliefs, or opinions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this word with a comparable noun or a short phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “opposing parties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	18	tljm	figs-idiom	μέρος τι πιστεύω	1	there are divisions among you	Here, **in part** qualifies how much Paul “believes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in part** with a word or phrase that identifies “part of” something. Alternate translation: “I believe part of it” or “I believe some of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	11	19	ppv1	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For there must also be factions among you	Here, **For** introduces the reason for which Paul “in part believes” what he has “heard” ([11:18](../11/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that clearly gives a reason for why Paul “believes it.” Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I do this since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	11	19	s9sy	figs-irony	δεῖ&καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι, ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν	1	For there must also be factions among you	This sentence could be: (1) a simple statement about how God uses **factions** to reveal **those who are approved**. Alternate translation: “God wishes to make evident among you those who are approved, and factions among you are a necessary part of this” (2) an ironic statement that identifies **factions** as the **necessary** result of people who want to show themselves off as **those who are approved**. Use a standard form in your language to indicate irony, especially with the phrase **those who are approved**, which would be spoken from the Corinthians’ perspective. Alternate translation: “some people consider it necessary indeed for there to be factions among you, so that they, who consider themselves to be ‘those who are approved,’ may display themselves publicly among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+1CO	11	19	s9sy	figs-irony	δεῖ & καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι, ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν	1	For there must also be factions among you	This sentence could be: (1) a simple statement about how God uses **factions** to reveal **those who are approved**. Alternate translation: “God wishes to make evident among you those who are approved, and factions among you are a necessary part of this” (2) an ironic statement that identifies **factions** as the **necessary** result of people who want to show themselves off as **those who are approved**. Use a standard form in your language to indicate irony, especially with the phrase **those who are approved**, which would be spoken from the Corinthians’ perspective. Alternate translation: “some people consider it necessary indeed for there to be factions among you, so that they, who consider themselves to be ‘those who are approved,’ may display themselves publicly among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 1CO	11	19	kcr7	translate-unknown	αἱρέσεις	1	factions	Here, **factions** has similar meaning to “divisions” in [11:18](../11/18.md). The word **factions** focuses more on the content of the differing beliefs and practices than “divisions” does; “divisions” emphasizes the differences themselves. If your language can clearly express these distinctions, you could use words that express these two ideas. If your language does not clearly express these distinctions, you can translate **factions** with the same word you used for “divisions.” Alternate translation: “divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	19	j7db	figs-activepassive	δόκιμοι	1	who are approved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **approved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “approving.” If you must state who did the action, you must choose a subject that fits with whether you understand this sentence as ironic or not. The subject could be: (1) God, if the sentence is not ironic. Alternate translation: “whom God approves” (2) the people themselves, if the sentence is ironic. Alternate translation: “who approve of themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	19	gdxa	figs-explicit	καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται	1	who are approved	Here Paul does not state how or why **the ones approved** will **become evident**. Depending on whether the sentence is ironic or not, **may become evident** could imply that: (1) the **factions** are God’s way of testing and revealing who is **approved**, since those who continue to genuinely believe are **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is not ironic. Alternate translation: “God may reveal also those who are approved” (2) the **factions** are the means by which some people show off what they think about themselves as **approved**. This is the implication if the sentence is ironic. Alternate translation: “also those who are approved may show themselves off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	20	x9h5	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	come together	Here, **So then** introduces an inference or result from the “divisions” and “factions” mentioned in [11:18–19](../11/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **So then** to more clearly state what it draws an inference from. Alternate translation: “So then, since you have factions,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	11	20	xe65	figs-doublet	συνερχομένων&ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	come together	Here Paul uses both **come together** and **in one place** to emphasize the physical unity of the Corinthians when they meet. He does this in order to contrast this physical unity with the disunity that their eating practices show. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “when you are all together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	11	20	xe65	figs-doublet	συνερχομένων & ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	come together	Here Paul uses both **come together** and **in one place** to emphasize the physical unity of the Corinthians when they meet. He does this in order to contrast this physical unity with the disunity that their eating practices show. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “when you are all together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	11	20	dse7	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	Here Paul does not explicitly state that the Corinthians **come together** in order **to eat the Lord’s Supper**. However, he and the Corinthians would have understood this when he speaks about “coming together.” Paul’s point is that they think they are eating **the Lord’s Supper**, but what they are doing does not actually count as **the Lord’s Supper**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the idea behind **it is not to eat the Lord’s Supper** is that the Corinthians thought that they were eating **the Lord’s Supper**, but Paul thinks that they are not. Alternate translation: “it is not the Lord’s Supper that you are eating” or “you think that you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	21	gvln	translate-unknown	τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	This could refer to: (1) how some of the Corinthians were receiving food before others were. This could mean that the people who received food first ate more than their fair share, using up all the food before others were served. Or it could mean that each of the Corinthians ate food that was prepared ahead of time specifically for each of them and in proportion to their social status. Alternate translation: “eats his own supper before others receive enough food” or “receives the food that was prepared for him ahead of time” (2) how some of the Corinthians were “devouring” their own food without sharing with others. Alternate translation: “devours his own supper” or “eats his own supper without sharing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	21	ljb3	figs-gendernotations	ἴδιον	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	Although **his** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	11	21	g0su	figs-idiom	ὃς μὲν πεινᾷ, ὃς δὲ μεθύει	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	Here Paul repeats **one is** to introduce two of the results that come from **each one** taking **his own supper first**. He does not mean that only **one** person is **hungry** or **drunk**, and he does not mean that these are the only two options. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that naturally indicates possible, alternate results. Alternate translation: “some are indeed hungry, but others are drunk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	11	21	fbmb	figs-explicit	ὃς μὲν πεινᾷ, ὃς δὲ μεθύει	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	Here Paul contrasts being **hungry** with being **drunk**. These two words are not natural opposites, but Paul uses them to imply their opposites in his contrast. He does this to avoid having a complicated contrast with four words instead of two. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the contrast between being **hungry** and **drunk** by using all four words. Alternate translation: “one is indeed hungry and thirsty, but one is stuffed and drunk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	11	22	f8ht	figs-rquestion	μὴ&οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we do have houses.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement. Alternate translation: “you definitely have houses in which to eat and to drink.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	11	22	pcxz	figs-explicit	μὴ&οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?	1		With this question, Paul implies that the eating behaviors he criticized in the last verse could be appropriate in one’s own “house.” Paul’s point here, then, is that if they want to “take their own suppers first” ([11:21](../11/21.md)), they should be eating at their own **houses**. Behavior at the Lord’s Supper needs to be different. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul asks this question more explicitly as it connects back to how the Corinthians are eating at the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “do you certainly not have houses in which you could eat and drink in any way you like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	11	22	hvkv	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ&οὐκ	1		The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the question even more negative, which in this case expects a strong positive answer. English speakers would misunderstand two negatives, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “surely not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-1CO	11	22	zl1h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ&καταφρονεῖτε	1	to eat and to drink in	The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he reminded them that they do have **houses in which to eat and to drink**. With **Or**, then, Paul introduces the incorrect alternative: they could **despise the church of God and humiliate those who have nothing**. He introduces this incorrect alternate to show that the implication of his first question is true: they should be “eating” and “drinking” at home. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather, do you despise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1CO	11	22	f8ht	figs-rquestion	μὴ & οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we do have houses.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement. Alternate translation: “you definitely have houses in which to eat and to drink.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	11	22	pcxz	figs-explicit	μὴ & οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?	1		With this question, Paul implies that the eating behaviors he criticized in the last verse could be appropriate in one’s own “house.” Paul’s point here, then, is that if they want to “take their own suppers first” ([11:21](../11/21.md)), they should be eating at their own **houses**. Behavior at the Lord’s Supper needs to be different. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul asks this question more explicitly as it connects back to how the Corinthians are eating at the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “do you certainly not have houses in which you could eat and drink in any way you like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	11	22	hvkv	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ & οὐκ	1		The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the question even more negative, which in this case expects a strong positive answer. English speakers would misunderstand two negatives, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “surely not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1CO	11	22	zl1h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ & καταφρονεῖτε	1	to eat and to drink in	The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he reminded them that they do have **houses in which to eat and to drink**. With **Or**, then, Paul introduces the incorrect alternative: they could **despise the church of God and humiliate those who have nothing**. He introduces this incorrect alternate to show that the implication of his first question is true: they should be “eating” and “drinking” at home. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather, do you despise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	11	22	am33	figs-rquestion	ἢ τῆς ἐκκλησίας τοῦ Θεοῦ καταφρονεῖτε, καὶ καταισχύνετε τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we do not want to do these things.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement. Alternate translation: “However, you are the ones who despise the church of God and humiliate those who have nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	11	22	fshq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ καταισχύνετε	1		Here, **and** introduces the specific way in which some of the Corinthians **despise the church of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the function of **and** here with a word that more clearly indicates a specific example or a means. Alternate translation: “by humiliating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	11	22	d2cm	figs-hyperbole	τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας	1	despise	Here, **the ones having nothing** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that these people do not **have** very much. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize the contrast between those who **have houses** and those **having nothing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have very little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	11	22	nz88	figs-rquestion	τί εἴπω ὑμῖν?	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we know that you are going to rebuke us.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong statement about what Paul is going to say. Alternate translation: “You know what I am going to say to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	11	22	uv6z	figs-rquestion	ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ?	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I will definitely not praise you for this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	11	22	qc27	figs-doublet	ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? οὐκ ἐπαινῶ!	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Here Paul indicates that he will **not praise** the Corinthians by using both a rhetorical question and a negative statement. He uses both sentences in order to strongly emphasize how displeased he is. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers would not understand why Paul repeats the same idea, you could combine these two sentences into one strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “I will never praise you for this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1CO	11	23	av31		ἐγὼ&παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	This could refer to: (1) how Paul learned the tradition he is about to recount indirectly **from the Lord**. In other words, Paul learns about these things from others, who received the tradition directly from the Lord. Alternate translation: “from others who knew the Lord I received what the Lord himself did, which” (2) how Paul learned the tradition directly **from the Lord**. In other words, **the Lord** himself revealed this information to Paul. Alternate translation: “I received directly from the Lord what”
+1CO	11	23	av31		ἐγὼ & παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	This could refer to: (1) how Paul learned the tradition he is about to recount indirectly **from the Lord**. In other words, Paul learns about these things from others, who received the tradition directly from the Lord. Alternate translation: “from others who knew the Lord I received what the Lord himself did, which” (2) how Paul learned the tradition directly **from the Lord**. In other words, **the Lord** himself revealed this information to Paul. Alternate translation: “I received directly from the Lord what”
 1CO	11	23	xgh4	translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	Here, **on the night** states that the events that Paul will describe all happened “during” one specific **night**. Use a natural way to refer to “during the night” as the time in which the events occur. Alternate translation: “during the night when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	23	iy93	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	Here Paul refers to the story about how Jesus was arrested. One of Jesus’ closest disciples, Judas Iscariot, made a deal with the religious leaders to “betray” Jesus to them (see [Matthew 26:14–16](../mat/26/14.md); [Mark 14:10–11](../mrk/14/10.md); [Luke 22:3–6](../luk/22/03.md)). After Jesus eats with his disciples and spends time praying, Judas leads the religious leaders to Jesus, and they arrest him (see [Matthew 26:47–50](../mat/26/47.md); [Mark 14:43–46](../mrk/14/43.md); [Luke 22:47–48](../luk/22/47.md); [John 18:2–12](../jhn/18/02.md)). Paul is not primarily interested in this part of the story, but he mentions it to explain when Jesus **took bread**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **on the night in which he was betrayed** refers to with a footnote to explain the context or include some short, extra information. Alternate translation: “on the night in which he was handed over to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	23	c197	figs-activepassive	παρεδίδετο	1	on the night when he was betrayed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who was **betrayed**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “betraying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Judas Iscariot” did it. Alternate translation: “Judas betrayed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	11	23	gkv2	figs-extrainfo	ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς&ἔλαβεν ἄρτον	1	on the night when he was betrayed	Beginning here and continuing in [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Paul tells the story of what is often called “The Last Supper.” This is Jesus’ last meal with his closest disciples before his death, and Paul narrates some things that he said and did during this last meal. Since Paul himself states the details, you should not need to state anything more explicitly than he does. The story of “The Last Supper” can also be found in [Matthew 26:20–29](../mat/26/20.md); [Mark 14:17–25](../mrk/14/17.md); [Luke 22:14–23](../luk/22/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+1CO	11	23	gkv2	figs-extrainfo	ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς & ἔλαβεν ἄρτον	1	on the night when he was betrayed	Beginning here and continuing in [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Paul tells the story of what is often called “The Last Supper.” This is Jesus’ last meal with his closest disciples before his death, and Paul narrates some things that he said and did during this last meal. Since Paul himself states the details, you should not need to state anything more explicitly than he does. The story of “The Last Supper” can also be found in [Matthew 26:20–29](../mat/26/20.md); [Mark 14:17–25](../mrk/14/17.md); [Luke 22:14–23](../luk/22/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	11	24	e19d	translate-unknown	ἔκλασεν	1	he broke it	Here, “breaking bread” refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he broke {it}** with a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat bread. Alternate translation: “he split it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	24	wmfb	figs-quotations	εἶπεν, τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα, τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν; τοῦτο ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν.	1	he broke it	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “said that this was his body, which is for you, and that you should do this in remembrance of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	11	24	f6hn	figs-metaphor	τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα	1	This is my body	Here Paul refers to how Jesus identified the “bread” as his **body**. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The “bread” could somehow become Jesus’ **body**, or Jesus’ **body** could be present in some way when people eat the “bread,” or the “bread” could represent or memorialize Jesus’ **body**. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This functions as my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1569,9 +1569,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	27	as6y	figs-possession	ἐσθίῃ τὸν ἄρτον ἢ πίνῃ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	Here, **of the Lord** modifies both the **cup** and the **bread**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a possessive form with **bread** as well as with **cup**. Alternate translation: “might eat the Lord’s bread or might drink his cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	11	27	d7ad	figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “what is in the cup” or “the wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	11	27	z6en	figs-explicit	ἀναξίως	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	Here, **in an unworthy manner** identifies behavior that is **unworthy** or “improper” for those who are participating in the Lord’s Supper. Paul has identified examples of this kind of behavior in [11:18–22](../11/18.md). This phrase does not refer to people who are **unworthy**. Rather it refers to behavior that is **unworthy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in an unworthy manner** with a phrase that identifies inappropriate or improper behavior in a specific context. Alternate translation: “while acting inappropriately” or “without respecting the Lord and fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	11	27	d51p	figs-idiom	ἔνοχος&τοῦ σώματος καὶ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	Here, **guilty of** could introduce: (1) what the person is **guilty of** doing. Here, that could be “profaning” or “dishonoring” the **body and the blood of the Lord**, or it could be participating in killing **the Lord**, which his **body** and **blood** signifies. Alternate translation: “guilty of dishonoring the body and the blood of the Lord” or “guilty of spilling the Lord’s blood and piercing his body” (2) whom the person has wronged. Here, that would be **the Lord** himself, particularly as he offered his **body** and **blood**. Alternate translation: “guilty of sinning against the Lord in his body and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	11	27	d51p	figs-idiom	ἔνοχος & τοῦ σώματος καὶ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	Here, **guilty of** could introduce: (1) what the person is **guilty of** doing. Here, that could be “profaning” or “dishonoring” the **body and the blood of the Lord**, or it could be participating in killing **the Lord**, which his **body** and **blood** signifies. Alternate translation: “guilty of dishonoring the body and the blood of the Lord” or “guilty of spilling the Lord’s blood and piercing his body” (2) whom the person has wronged. Here, that would be **the Lord** himself, particularly as he offered his **body** and **blood**. Alternate translation: “guilty of sinning against the Lord in his body and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	11	28	mwzr	figs-imperative3p	δοκιμαζέτω δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν, καὶ οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω.	1	examine	In this verse, Paul uses three third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “But a man must examine himself, and in this way he should eat from the bread, and he should drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
-1CO	11	28	nhx7	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν&ἐσθιέτω&πινέτω	1	examine	Here, **a man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these words by using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	11	28	nhx7	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτόν & ἐσθιέτω & πινέτω	1	examine	Here, **a man**, **himself**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these words by using word that do not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “a person … himself or herself … let him or her eat … let him or her drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	11	28	ih78	figs-infostructure	οὕτως ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου πινέτω	1	examine	Here, **in this way** introduces both **let him eat** and **let him drink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine **let him drink** and the earlier command, or you could repeat **in this way**. Alternate translation: “in this way let him eat from the bread and drink from the cup” or “in this way let him eat from the bread, and in this way let him drink from the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	11	28	hzac	figs-idiom	ἐκ τοῦ ἄρτου ἐσθιέτω	1	examine	Here, to **eat from** something means to **eat** some of that thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **eat from** with a word or phrase that refers to eating part of something. Alternate translation: “let him eat his portion of the bread” or “let him eat some of the loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	11	29	gqd2	figs-metaphor	μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα	1	without discerning the body	Here, **body** could refer to: (1) the “church,” which is **the body** of Christ (for a similar use of **body**, see [12:27](../12/27.md)). The point would be that people are behaving during the Lord’s Supper in a way that does not respect fellow believers, who are **the body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “without discerning that fellow believers are the body” (2) the presence of **the body** of Christ in the Lord’s Supper itself. The point would be that believers are participating in the Lord’s Supper in a way that does not respect how Christ’s **body** is present in the bread and wine. Alternate translation: “without discerning the presence of the Lord’s body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1583,9 +1583,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	31	jg7v	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ δὲ ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν	1	examine	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He has already stated in the last verse that the Corinthians are being **judged**, which means that **we** are indeed **judged**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “But were we to actually examine ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	11	31	j6ml	figs-explicit	ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν	1	examine	Here Paul is speaking about **examining ourselves** in the context of the Lord’s Supper, as the similarity of this statement to [11:28](../11/28.md) shows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Paul is still speaking about **examining** in the context of the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “we were examining ourselves at the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	31	egl8	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα	1	we will not be judged	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **judged** rather than focusing on the person doing the “judging.” Alternate translation: “God would not judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	11	32	ruq5	figs-activepassive	κρινόμενοι&ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person **being judged** instead of focusing on **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord judging us” or “when the Lord judges us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	11	32	s2ax	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	κρινόμενοι&ὑπὸ Κυρίου, παιδευόμεθα	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	Here, **being judged** and **we are disciplined** happen at the same time. The phrase **we are disciplined** gives the function or purpose of **being judged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how these two phrases relate by stating their relationship explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined” or “being judged by the Lord is how we are disciplined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
-1CO	11	32	c8qi	figs-activepassive	παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ&κατακριθῶμεν	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **we** instead of focusing on the person doing the actions. However, if you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” or **the Lord** does them. Alternate translation: “he disciplines us so that he does not condemn us” or “he disciplines us so that God does not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	11	32	ruq5	figs-activepassive	κρινόμενοι & ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person **being judged** instead of focusing on **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord judging us” or “when the Lord judges us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	11	32	s2ax	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	κρινόμενοι & ὑπὸ Κυρίου, παιδευόμεθα	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	Here, **being judged** and **we are disciplined** happen at the same time. The phrase **we are disciplined** gives the function or purpose of **being judged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how these two phrases relate by stating their relationship explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined” or “being judged by the Lord is how we are disciplined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+1CO	11	32	c8qi	figs-activepassive	παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ & κατακριθῶμεν	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **we** instead of focusing on the person doing the actions. However, if you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” or **the Lord** does them. Alternate translation: “he disciplines us so that he does not condemn us” or “he disciplines us so that God does not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	32	gr2a	figs-synecdoche	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	Here Paul uses **world** to refer primarily to the humans that are part of the **world**, those who do not believe in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this word by translating **world** with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1CO	11	33	igek	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	come together to eat	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	11	33	maa7	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συνερχόμενοι εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν	1	come together to eat	Here, **coming together to eat** is the situation in which the Corinthians are to **wait for one another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the relationship between these statements by clarifying that **coming together to eat** is the context in which they should **wait for one another**. Alternate translation: “whenever you come together to eat” or “at the time you come together to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
@@ -1597,7 +1597,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	34	jjqd	figs-gendernotations	ἐσθιέτω	1	let him eat at home	Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	11	34	x1l8	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς κρίμα	1	not be for judgment	Here, **for judgment** indicates what will happen if the Corinthians do not obey Paul’s instruction to **eat at home**. It does not indicate why the Corinthians are “coming together.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for judgment** with a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “with judgment as the result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	11	34	ti9q	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κρίμα	1	not be for judgment	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Paul implies that “God” is the one who is doing the “judging.” Alternate translation: “with the result that God judges you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	11	34	xuu7	figs-extrainfo	τὰ&λοιπὰ	1	not be for judgment	Here Paul does not clarify what **the remaining things** are, and it is best to leave the reference unclear. Use a form that could be interpreted in the following ways. The phrase could refer to: (1) everything else Paul wishes to say about the Lord’s Supper. (2) Paul’s responses to other things that the Corinthians asked him about. (3) other instructions about worship practices. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+1CO	11	34	xuu7	figs-extrainfo	τὰ & λοιπὰ	1	not be for judgment	Here Paul does not clarify what **the remaining things** are, and it is best to leave the reference unclear. Use a form that could be interpreted in the following ways. The phrase could refer to: (1) everything else Paul wishes to say about the Lord’s Supper. (2) Paul’s responses to other things that the Corinthians asked him about. (3) other instructions about worship practices. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	11	34	r3hj	figs-abstractnouns	διατάξομαι	1	not be for judgment	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **directions**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “direct” or “instruct.” Alternate translation: “I will direct you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	11	34	zy1v	figs-go	ὡς ἂν ἔλθω	1	not be for judgment	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. The language that he uses indicates that he does not yet have a plan for how and when he will visit. What he is saying is that he does plan to visit them at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans. Alternate translation: “whenever I can next visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	12	intro	abcf			0		# 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)<br>      * God is the source of every gift (12:1–11)<br>      * The body (12:12–26)<br>      * Diversity of gifts (12:27–31)<br><br>Some translations put the second half of [12:31](../12/31.md) with the next section. The short sentence is a transition sentence, so it could end the current section or begin a new section. Consider how translations that your readers might be familiar with treat this verse.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Spiritual gifts<br><br>In [12:1](../12/01.md), Paul introduces “spiritual gifts.” This phrase refers to specific ways in which the Holy Spirit has empowered specific believers to do specific things. The examples that Paul uses in this chapter include things that we might consider to be amazing or “supernatural,” such as speaking in tongues or healing others, and things that we might consider to be everyday or “normal,” including “helps” and “administration.” Make sure to use a word or phrase that could include both kinds of things in the category of “spiritual gifts.” Paul implies that the Holy Spirit empowers all believers with “gifts,” but this does not necessarily mean that each believer receives only one “gift” for his or her entire life. The “gifts” are ways that the Holy Spirit empowers believers, not things that believers themselves possess. Avoid language that implies that each believer possesses one specific gift for their whole life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/gift]])<br><br>### Speaking in tongues<br><br>Three times in this chapter, Paul refers to speaking in “tongues” (see [12:10](../12/10.md), [28](../12/28.md), [30](../12/30.md)). He will develop this theme with much more detail in chapter 14, so you may want to look ahead at chapter 14 before you decide how to translate the expressions that refer to speaking in “tongues.” The “tongues” could refer to: (1) an otherwise unknown language that one person speaks to God. (2) the language or languages spoken by angels. (3) foreign languages that believers in the church do not speak. Of course, it could refer to any or all of these languages. Since Paul’s words are not very specific, you may also want to use relatively generic terms that refer to “unknown languages” or “special languages.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tongue]])<br><br>### Ranking of gifts?<br><br>In [12:31](../12/31.md), Paul refers to “greater gifts.” Further, in [12:28](../12/28.md), he numbers the first three items in his list: “first apostles, second prophets, third teachers.” These two verses could suggest that some “gifts” are more valuable or have more importance than other gifts. However, in [12:22–25](../12/22.md), Paul argues that the “weaker,” “less honorable,” and “unpresentable” body parts are essential, honorable, and full of dignity. This seems to suggest that none of the “gifts” are more valuable or important than others. Consider the implications of how you translate especially [12:28](../12/28.md), [31](../12/31.md) for this issue. See the notes on those verses for translation options that fit with each view about the ranking of gifts.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Body analogy and metaphor<br><br>In [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul speaks about a “body.” He directly speaks about the human body, but he wants the Corinthians to apply what he says about a human body to their own group of believers. He uses the human body as an analogy for the group of believers because he identifies them as “the body of Christ” ([12:27](../12/27.md)). He uses this metaphor because wants them to realize that they are so closely connected to each other and to Christ that they are like one body. Because he uses this metaphor about the “body of Christ,” he also uses the human body as an analogy to understand the “body of Christ.” In the human body, there are different body parts, and each one has a specific function. Despite that, they all work together. Paul wants each of the Corinthians to think about himself or herself as a body part that works with all the other body parts to function together as a body, the “body of Christ.” Paul speaks mostly about the human “body” throughout, and your translation should reflect that. The notes point out specific figures of speech, but much of this section is description of how human body parts work together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/member]])<br><br>### Personification of body parts<br><br>In [12:15–16](../12/15.md), [21](../12/21.md), Paul develops quotes of what body parts might say if they could speak. In [12:25–26](../12/25.md), he speaks as if body parts could care for, suffer with, and rejoice with each other. So that he can make a point, he speaks as if the body parts were people. However, he also wants the Corinthians to identify themselves with the body parts in the analogy, so personifying them helps the Corinthians see themselves as “body parts.” If possible, preserve this figure of speech so that your readers can identify themselves as body parts. If you must express the idea in some other way, you could indicate that Paul is using a hypothetical situation or telling a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [12:17](../12/17.md), [19](../12/19.md), [29–30](../12/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Non-exhaustive lists<br><br>In [12:8–10](../12/08.md), [28](../12/28.md), [29–30](../12/29.md), Paul provides three different lists of “spiritual gifts.” Each of these lists contain some of the same items that the others contain, but none of them contain all of the same items. This shows that Paul did not intend these lists to identify every spiritual gift that might exist. Instead, Paul is listing particular gifts as examples. Make sure that your translation does not imply that the gifts that Paul lists are the only ones that exist.<br><br>### “Members”<br><br>Throughout [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul refers to “members,” which identifies any of the human body parts. In English, “members” has other meanings besides parts of the body, which is why the UST translates it as “body parts.” In your translation, make sure to use a word that refers specifically to parts of the body, including external limbs (such as arms, legs, and toes) and internal organs (such as heart, lungs, and stomach). If you must choose a word that identifies only external or internal body parts, it is better to refer to external body parts because Paul refers specifically to head, ears, eyes, hands, and feet. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/member]])<br><br>### Names for the Holy Spirit<br><br>Paul refers to the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of God” ([12:3](../12/03.md)), as “the Holy Spirit” ([12:3](../12/03.md)), as “one Spirit” ([12:13](../12/13.md)), and as “the Spirit” ([12:4](../12/04.md), [7–9](../12/07.md), [11](../12/11.md)). All these phrases refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that these phrases all refer to the same Spirit by stating that in some specific way or by using “Holy Spirit” in all these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1610,13 +1610,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	12	2	c6pj	translate-unknown	τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα	1		Here, **mute** means that the **idols** cannot speak to those who worship them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mute** with a word or phrase to describe the **idols** as unable to speak. Alternate translation: “idols who cannot communicate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	12	2	cinz	figs-extrainfo	ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε	1		Here Paul intentionally uses vague language that does not define the **ways you were led**. In your translation, use a word or phrase that similarly does not tightly define what the **ways** are. Alternate translation: “however you were led” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	12	3	qd7u	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	Here, **Therefore** could draw a conclusion from: (1) [12:1–2](../12/01.md). The Corinthians “know” about how pagan worship worked (verse 2), but Paul wants to tell them more about how Christian worship works (verse 1). **Therefore**, he will make this **known** to them. Alternate translation: “Because you know less about Christian worship” (2) just [12:2](../12/02.md). The Corinthians were accustomed to how “inspired speech” or **speaking** by the power of a god worked when they “were pagans.” Now, Paul wants to tell them about how it works by the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “Now, however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	12	3	cae5	translate-names	Πνεύματι Θεοῦ&Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	Here, **Spirit of God** and **Holy Spirit** are two different names for the same person: the Holy Spirit. If your language uses only one name for the Holy Spirit, and if your readers would think that two different persons are identified in this verse, you could use the same name in both places in this verse. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit” or “the Spirit of God … the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1CO	12	3	zg4j	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν&ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	Here, **speaking by the Spirit of God** refers to words that the **Spirit of God** has enabled someone to say. This could be more formal, such as in prophecy or preaching, or it could be less formal, referring to everyday speech. Paul does not specify exactly what he has in mind since the Corinthians would have understood what he implied. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **speaking by the Spirit of God** means in a way that more clearly refers to the **Spirit** empowering someone to “speak.” Alternate translation: “speaking as the Spirit of God leads them … as the Holy Spirit leads them” or “speaking in the power of the Spirit of God … in the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	12	3	irbm	figs-quotations	λέγει, ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς&εἰπεῖν, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	If your language does not use this form to refer to what someone says, you can translate the statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “says that Jesus is accursed … to say that Jesus is Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	12	3	cae5	translate-names	Πνεύματι Θεοῦ & Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	Here, **Spirit of God** and **Holy Spirit** are two different names for the same person: the Holy Spirit. If your language uses only one name for the Holy Spirit, and if your readers would think that two different persons are identified in this verse, you could use the same name in both places in this verse. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit” or “the Spirit of God … the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1CO	12	3	zg4j	figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν & ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	Here, **speaking by the Spirit of God** refers to words that the **Spirit of God** has enabled someone to say. This could be more formal, such as in prophecy or preaching, or it could be less formal, referring to everyday speech. Paul does not specify exactly what he has in mind since the Corinthians would have understood what he implied. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **speaking by the Spirit of God** means in a way that more clearly refers to the **Spirit** empowering someone to “speak.” Alternate translation: “speaking as the Spirit of God leads them … as the Holy Spirit leads them” or “speaking in the power of the Spirit of God … in the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	12	3	irbm	figs-quotations	λέγει, ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς & εἰπεῖν, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	If your language does not use this form to refer to what someone says, you can translate the statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “says that Jesus is accursed … to say that Jesus is Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	12	3	jak6	translate-unknown	ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς	1	Jesus is accursed	This phrase identifies any words that someone might use to “curse” **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Jesus {is} accursed** with a form that indicates any kind of “curse” against someone. Alternate translation: “Cursed be Jesus” or “I curse Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	12	3	tzk9	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς δύναται εἰπεῖν, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς, εἰ μὴ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Jesus is accursed	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “and only by the Holy Spirit is one able to say, ‘Jesus is Lord’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-1CO	12	4	pvhr	figs-abstractnouns	διαιρέσεις&χαρισμάτων	1	Jesus is accursed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **varieties**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “various” or “different.” Alternate translation: “various gifts” or “different gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	12	4	su9f	figs-ellipsis	τὸ&αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα	1	Jesus is accursed	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul implies that it is **the same Spirit** who gives the **varieties of gifts**. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires these words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “the same Spirit gives them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	12	4	pvhr	figs-abstractnouns	διαιρέσεις & χαρισμάτων	1	Jesus is accursed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **varieties**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “various” or “different.” Alternate translation: “various gifts” or “different gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	12	4	su9f	figs-ellipsis	τὸ & αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα	1	Jesus is accursed	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul implies that it is **the same Spirit** who gives the **varieties of gifts**. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires these words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “the same Spirit gives them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	5	n4h7	figs-abstractnouns	διαιρέσεις διακονιῶν	1	Jesus is accursed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **varieties**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “various” or “different.” Alternate translation: “various ministries” or “different ministries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	5	z91g	figs-abstractnouns	διακονιῶν	1	Jesus is accursed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministries**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “serve” or “minister.” Alternate translation: “of ways to minister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	5	xf4p	figs-ellipsis	ὁ αὐτὸς Κύριος	1	Jesus is accursed	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul implies that it is **the same Lord** whom people serve with the **varieties of ministries**. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires these words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “all of them minister for the same Lord” or “everyone serves the same Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1624,23 +1624,23 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	12	6	mmdx	translate-unknown	ἐνεργημάτων	1	who is working all things in everyone	Here, **workings** refers to “activities” or “actions,” that is, doing things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **workings** with a word or phrase that refers generally to “doing things.” Alternate translation: “of activities” or “of ways to do things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	12	6	r3vr	figs-ellipsis	ὁ αὐτὸς Θεός	1	who is working all things in everyone	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul implies that it is **the same God** who empowers the **varieties of workings**. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires these words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “it is the same God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	6	eth3	figs-explicit	τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν	1	who is working all things in everyone	Here, **all things in everyone** could refer: (1) specifically to **all** gifts, ministries, and workings that God is **working** in **everyone** who believes. Alternate translation: “each of these things in each person” (2) generally to how God is **working all things** in “everything and everyone.” Alternate translation: “everything in everyone” or “all things in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	12	7	x7mv	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστῳ&δίδοται	1	to each one is given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to focus on the gifts rather than focusing on the one who gives them. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see [12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “to each one God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	12	7	x7mv	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστῳ & δίδοται	1	to each one is given	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to focus on the gifts rather than focusing on the one who gives them. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see [12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “to each one God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	12	7	zyqc	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ φανέρωσις τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	to each one is given	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **display**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “display” or “manifest.” Alternate translation: “how they display the Spirit” or “how they manifest the power of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	7	j2rf	figs-possession	ἡ φανέρωσις τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	to each one is given	Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate how **the Spirit** is revealed by **the outward display**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **the outward display** is a revelation of **the Spirit**with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the ability to outwardly display the Spirit” or “a way to outwardly display the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	12	7	rd8z	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον	1	to each one is given	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit” or “help.” Alternate translation: “in order to benefit everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	12	8	c9ak	figs-activepassive	ᾧ μὲν&διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος δίδοται	1	to one is given by the Spirit a word	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to emphasize what **is given** over who gives it. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” or **the Spirit** did it. Alternate translation: “the Spirit gives to one” or “God gives to one through the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	12	8	i6n9	writing-pronouns	ᾧ&ἄλλῳ	1	to one is given by the Spirit a word	While Paul specifically refers to **one** and to **another**, he is not speaking about just two people. Rather, he is using this form to give two examples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is using two examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to certain people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	12	8	c9ak	figs-activepassive	ᾧ μὲν & διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος δίδοται	1	to one is given by the Spirit a word	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to emphasize what **is given** over who gives it. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” or **the Spirit** did it. Alternate translation: “the Spirit gives to one” or “God gives to one through the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	12	8	i6n9	writing-pronouns	ᾧ & ἄλλῳ	1	to one is given by the Spirit a word	While Paul specifically refers to **one** and to **another**, he is not speaking about just two people. Rather, he is using this form to give two examples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is using two examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to certain people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	12	8	us1k	figs-metonymy	λόγος	-1	a word	Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message … a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	12	8	terk	figs-abstractnouns	λόγος σοφίας	1	a word	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea in another way. Paul could mean that: (1) the **word** is characterized by **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “a wise word” (2) the **word** gives **wisdom** to those who hear it. Alternate translation: “a word that makes others wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	12	8	pe8s	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ&λόγος	1	is given	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**is given**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to another is given a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	12	8	pe8s	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ & λόγος	1	is given	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**is given**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to another is given a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	8	pbe4	figs-abstractnouns	λόγος γνώσεως	1	is given	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea in another way. Paul could mean that: (1) the **word** is characterized by **knowledge**. Alternate translation: “an enlightened word” (2) the **word** gives **knowledge** to those who hear it. Alternate translation: “a word that makes others knowledgeable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	9	dkia		ἑτέρῳ	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	Here Paul uses a different word for **another** than he does in the previous verse or the rest of this verse. It is possible that Paul uses this different word to indicate that he is beginning a new section in the list. If you are breaking the list into sections, you could begin a new section here. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “To another person”
-1CO	12	9	zhfq	writing-pronouns	ἑτέρῳ&ἄλλῳ	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	In both parts of this verse, Paul specifically refers to **another**. When he does this, he is not speaking about just one person. Rather, he is using this form to give an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is giving examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to other people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	12	9	rh96	figs-ellipsis	ἑτέρῳ πίστις&ἄλλῳ&χαρίσματα	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly at the beginning of [12:8](../12/08.md) (“is given”). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to another is given faith … to another are given gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	12	9	zhfq	writing-pronouns	ἑτέρῳ & ἄλλῳ	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	In both parts of this verse, Paul specifically refers to **another**. When he does this, he is not speaking about just one person. Rather, he is using this form to give an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is giving examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to other people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	12	9	rh96	figs-ellipsis	ἑτέρῳ πίστις & ἄλλῳ & χαρίσματα	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly at the beginning of [12:8](../12/08.md) (“is given”). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to another is given faith … to another are given gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	9	s2lf	figs-explicit	πίστις	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	Here, **faith** refers to a special belief in God. It does not refer to the **faith** that all believers have. This special **faith** could be the belief in God that is required to do miracles, or it could be the ability to help others believe more, or it could be something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express more explicitly that **faith** by itself is a special kind of **faith**. Alternate translation: “special faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	9	foa8	figs-abstractnouns	πίστις	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “the ability to believe” or “how they believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	9	szhv		τῷ ἑνὶ Πνεύματι	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	Here, **the one Spirit** means basically the same thing as **the same Spirit**. Paul uses a different phrase because changing a repeated phrase was sometimes considered good style in his culture. If it would not be good style to state **the same Spirit** with different words in your language, and if your readers would be confused about why Paul changes his words, you could use **the same Spirit** here instead of **that one Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the same Spirit”
-1CO	12	10	x572	writing-pronouns	ἄλλῳ&ἄλλῳ&ἄλλῳ&ἑτέρῳ&ἄλλῳ	1	to another prophecy	Throughout this verse, Paul specifically refers to **another**. When he does this, he is not speaking about just one person. Rather, he is using this form to give an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is giving examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to other people … to other people … to other people … to other people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	12	10	x572	writing-pronouns	ἄλλῳ & ἄλλῳ & ἄλλῳ & ἑτέρῳ & ἄλλῳ	1	to another prophecy	Throughout this verse, Paul specifically refers to **another**. When he does this, he is not speaking about just one person. Rather, he is using this form to give an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is giving examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to other people … to other people … to other people … to other people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	12	10	v7xy	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ δὲ ἐνεργήματα δυνάμεων, ἄλλῳ προφητεία, ἄλλῳ διακρίσεις πνευμάτων, ἑτέρῳ γένη γλωσσῶν, ἄλλῳ δὲ ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν.	1	to another various kinds of tongues	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly at the beginning of [12:8](../12/08.md) (“is given”). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “and to another are given workings of power; to another is given prophecy; to another are given discernments of spirits; to another are given kinds of tongues; and to another is given the interpretation of tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	10	j8qk	figs-abstractnouns	ἐνεργήματα δυνάμεων	1	to another the interpretation of tongues	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **workings** or **power**, you can express the ideas by using a verb and adverbs. Alternate translation: “how they powerfully work” or “what they powerfully do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	10	ekgi	figs-possession	ἐνεργήματα δυνάμεων	1	to another the interpretation of tongues	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about **workings** that are characterized by **power**. This could mean: (1) that the person can “work” things that are “powerful.” Alternate translation: “doing powerful deeds” or “doing miracles” (2) that the **workings** exhibit or show **power**. Alternate translation: “powerful workings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1659,78 +1659,78 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	12	12	g2xa	figs-genericnoun	τὸ σῶμα	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “a human body, for example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	12	12	cjsq	figs-idiom	ἕν ἐστιν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **one** refers to how the **body** is a single entity. In other words, we can count **one** body as **one** thing, even though it is made up of many parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one** with a word or phrase that emphasizes the unity of the **body**. Alternate translation: “is united” or “is a unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	12	12	j3xl	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	πολλὰ ὄντα	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **being many** contrasts with the words that follow: **are one body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce **being many** with a word or phrase that explicitly indicates a contrast. Alternate translation: “although they are many” or “despite being many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	12	12	c1e1	figs-extrainfo	καθάπερ&οὕτως καὶ ὁ Χριστός	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul does not explain how **Christ** is like **the body** he describes in this verse. Instead, he slowly explains how **Christ** is like **the body** throughout the following verses. In [12:27](../12/27.md), he fully explains what he means: “you are the body of Christ and individually members of it.” Because Paul goes on to explain what **so also {is} Christ** means in the next verses, you should express this phrase by emphasizing the comparison between **the body** and **Christ** but without giving any more detail. Alternate translation: “just as … Christ too is like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+1CO	12	12	c1e1	figs-extrainfo	καθάπερ & οὕτως καὶ ὁ Χριστός	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul does not explain how **Christ** is like **the body** he describes in this verse. Instead, he slowly explains how **Christ** is like **the body** throughout the following verses. In [12:27](../12/27.md), he fully explains what he means: “you are the body of Christ and individually members of it.” Because Paul goes on to explain what **so also {is} Christ** means in the next verses, you should express this phrase by emphasizing the comparison between **the body** and **Christ** but without giving any more detail. Alternate translation: “just as … Christ too is like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	12	13	s881		ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	Here, **by one Spirit** could refer to: (1) the person in whom **we were all baptized**. In other words, the baptism happens by the power of the **one Spirit** or leads to the reception of the **one Spirit**. Alternate translation: “in one Spirit” or “into one Spirit” (2) the one who performs the “baptism.” Alternate translation: “by the work of the one Spirit”
-1CO	12	13	g8uk	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες&ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Here, the one who does the “baptizing” could be: (1) the believer who performs a water baptism by means of the Spirit’s power. Alternate translation: “fellow believers baptized all of us by the power of the Spirit” (2) God, who gives the **one Spirit** to believers during a water baptism or in a way that is like a “baptism.” Alternate translation: “God baptized all of us in one Spirit” or “it was as if God baptized us by giving us the one Spirit, which means that he united us” (3) the **one Spirit**, who empowers the water baptism or unites us in a way similar to a baptism. Alternate translation: “the one Spirit baptized all of us” or “it was as if the one Spirit baptized us, which means that he united us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	12	13	xijs	figs-explicit	πάντες&ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	Here, **baptized** could refer to: (1) water baptism, which is connected to the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “were all baptized in water” (2) becoming a believer and receiving the **Spirit**, which is like being **baptized**. Alternate translation: “were all incorporated by something like baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	12	13	g8uk	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες & ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Here, the one who does the “baptizing” could be: (1) the believer who performs a water baptism by means of the Spirit’s power. Alternate translation: “fellow believers baptized all of us by the power of the Spirit” (2) God, who gives the **one Spirit** to believers during a water baptism or in a way that is like a “baptism.” Alternate translation: “God baptized all of us in one Spirit” or “it was as if God baptized us by giving us the one Spirit, which means that he united us” (3) the **one Spirit**, who empowers the water baptism or unites us in a way similar to a baptism. Alternate translation: “the one Spirit baptized all of us” or “it was as if the one Spirit baptized us, which means that he united us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	12	13	xijs	figs-explicit	πάντες & ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	Here, **baptized** could refer to: (1) water baptism, which is connected to the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “were all baptized in water” (2) becoming a believer and receiving the **Spirit**, which is like being **baptized**. Alternate translation: “were all incorporated by something like baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	13	xfrh	figs-idiom	πάντες εἰς ἓν σῶμα ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	Here, being **baptized into** something or someone identifies with whom one is being united in baptism. In this case, believers are united together as **one body** when they are **baptized**. Alternate translation: “were all baptized so that we became one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	12	13	noi4	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἓν σῶμα	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	Here Paul speaks as if believers together were **one body**. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes the unity that believers have because they together have the **Spirit** as the **body** of Christ. Paul uses this metaphor throughout the following verses, and it is an important metaphor for 1 Corinthians and for Christian teaching. Because of this, you should preserve this metaphor or, if you must express the idea differently, use an analogy. Alternate translation: “into close union, as if we were one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	12	13	r9hm		εἴτε&δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι	3	whether bound or free	Alternate translation: “whether slaves or freedmen”
+1CO	12	13	r9hm		εἴτε & δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι	3	whether bound or free	Alternate translation: “whether slaves or freedmen”
 1CO	12	13	ju15	figs-activepassive	πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to emphasize the people who are drinking rather than emphasizing the one who provides the drink. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God made us all drink one Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	12	13	r5kw	figs-metaphor	πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here Paul speaks as if receiving the **Spirit** or being empowered by the **Spirit** is “drinking” the **Spirit**. It is possible that he speaks in this way to make the Corinthians think about the Lord’s Supper (“drinking the cup”), especially since the beginning of the verse speaks of being **baptized**. The main point is that all those who **drink** the **one Spirit** are united together by that drinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “all received one Spirit” or “all partook of the one Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	12	14	dshs	figs-genericnoun	τὸ σῶμα	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here Paul is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “any body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	12	15	rdjj	figs-hypo	ἐὰν εἴπῃ ὁ πούς, ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ χείρ, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that a **foot** could talk and claim that it is not **of the body** because it is not **a hand**. He uses this hypothetical situation because it is absurd for a **foot** to talk, and it is even more absurd that a **foot** would say these things if it could talk. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose a foot would say, ‘Since I am not a hand, I am not of the body’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	12	15	aq31	figs-genericnoun	ὁ πούς	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Paul is using any **foot** as an example. He is not speaking about one particular **foot** that can talk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to any **foot**. Alternate translation: “a foot” or “any foot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	12	15	o9bk	figs-personification	ἐὰν εἴπῃ ὁ πούς	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here Paul speaks as if a **foot** could **say** things. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as body parts making up the body of Christ, and so **the foot** is an example for them. He also wishes them to see how absurd it is for a **foot** to say what it says here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech by clarifying that this is a hypothetical situation in which a **foot** can say things. Alternate translation: “Say that a foot could talk, and it said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	12	15	efom	figs-quotations	εἴπῃ&ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ χείρ, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “would say that, since it is not a hand, it is not of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	12	15	r4qq	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος&οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here, **of the body** identifies something that belongs to or is part of **the body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of the body** with a form in your language that refers to what is part of or belongs to something else. Alternate translation: “I am not a part of the body … it is not a part of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	12	15	efom	figs-quotations	εἴπῃ & ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ χείρ, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “would say that, since it is not a hand, it is not of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	12	15	r4qq	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος & οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here, **of the body** identifies something that belongs to or is part of **the body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of the body** with a form in your language that refers to what is part of or belongs to something else. Alternate translation: “I am not a part of the body … it is not a part of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	12	15	iyx7	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παρὰ τοῦτο, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here Paul uses two negative words to express the idea that the reason that the **foot** gives is not valid for separating it from **the body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the two negative words with positive words or only one negative word. Alternate translation: “despite that, it is of the body” or “it is still of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1CO	12	15	pqtz	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here, **this** refers back to what the **foot** said about not being a hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies what it refers to. Alternate translation: “this reasoning” or “that idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	12	16	ie72	figs-hypo	ἐὰν εἴπῃ τὸ οὖς, ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ ὀφθαλμός, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Just as in [12:15](../12/15.md), here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that an **ear** could talk and claim that it is not **of the body** because it is not an **eye**. He uses this hypothetical situation because it is absurd for an **ear** to talk, and it is even more absurd that an **ear** would say these things if it could talk. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose an ear would say, ‘Since I am not an eye, I am not of the body’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	12	16	uoju	figs-genericnoun	τὸ οὖς	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Paul is using any **ear** as an example. He is not speaking about one particular **ear** that can talk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to any **ear**. Alternate translation: “an ear” or “any ear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	12	16	gb60	figs-personification	ἐὰν εἴπῃ τὸ οὖς	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Just as in [12:15](../12/15.md), here Paul speaks as if an **ear** could say things. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as body parts of the body of Christ, and so **the ear** is an example for them. He also wishes them to see how absurd it is for an **ear** to say what it says here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech by clarifying that this is a hypothetical situation in which a foot can say things. Alternate translation: “say that an ear could talk, and it said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	12	16	lidw	figs-quotations	εἴπῃ&ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ ὀφθαλμός, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος;	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “would say that, since it is not an eye, it is not of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	12	16	c3vw	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος&οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Just as in [12:15](../12/15.md), **of the body** identifies something that belong to or is part of **the body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of the body** with a form in your language that refers to what is part of or belongs to something else. Alternate translation: “I am not a part of the body … it is not a part of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	12	16	lidw	figs-quotations	εἴπῃ & ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ ὀφθαλμός, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος;	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “would say that, since it is not an eye, it is not of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	12	16	c3vw	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος & οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Just as in [12:15](../12/15.md), **of the body** identifies something that belong to or is part of **the body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of the body** with a form in your language that refers to what is part of or belongs to something else. Alternate translation: “I am not a part of the body … it is not a part of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	12	16	gdk1	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παρὰ τοῦτο, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here Paul uses two negative words to express the idea that the reason that **the ear** gives is not valid for separating it from **the body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the two negative words with positive words or only one negative word. Alternate translation: “despite that, it is of the body” or “it is still of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1CO	12	16	j4ce	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here, **this** refers back to what **the ear** said about not being **an eye**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies what it refers to. Alternate translation: “this reasoning” or “that idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	12	17	dfrr	figs-hypo	εἰ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα ὀφθαλμός, ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? εἰ ὅλον ἀκοή, ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις?	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Here Paul is using two hypothetical situations to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **the whole body** was **an eye** or **an ear**. He uses these hypothetical situations because it is absurd for **an eye** or **an ear** to make up **the whole body**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Suppose the whole body were an eye; where would the hearing be? Suppose the whole were an ear; where would the sense of smell be?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-1CO	12	17	zl05	figs-genericnoun	ὅλον τὸ σῶμα&ὅλον	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Here Paul is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “any whole body … any whole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	12	17	rsl6	figs-rquestion	ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή?&ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις?	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information about **where** the senses of **hearing** and **smell** are. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, a **body** that is only **an eye** does not have **hearing**, and a **body** that is only an **ear** does not have **smell**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions by stating the ideas with strong negations. Alternate translation: “it would never hear anything. … it would never smell anything.” or “it would not have hearing. … it would not have the sense of smell.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1CO	12	17	zl05	figs-genericnoun	ὅλον τὸ σῶμα & ὅλον	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Here Paul is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “any whole body … any whole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	12	17	rsl6	figs-rquestion	ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? & ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις?	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information about **where** the senses of **hearing** and **smell** are. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, a **body** that is only **an eye** does not have **hearing**, and a **body** that is only an **ear** does not have **smell**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions by stating the ideas with strong negations. Alternate translation: “it would never hear anything. … it would never smell anything.” or “it would not have hearing. … it would not have the sense of smell.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	12	17	uuvi	figs-ellipsis	ὅλον	2	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Here Paul omits **body** because he stated it explicitly in the previous sentence. If your language needs to state **body** here, you could supply it from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “the whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	18	n3pu	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	where would the body be?	Here, **But now** introduces what is true, in contrast to the hypothetical situations Paul offered in the last verse ([12:17](../12/17.md)). Here, the word **now** does not refer to time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But now** with a word or phrase that introduces reality in contrast to a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “As it really is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	12	18	habs	figs-infostructure	τὰ μέλη, ἓν ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ἐν	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul interrupts his sentence to include **each one of them**. In Paul’s culture, this interruption emphasized **each one of them**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate why Paul interrupts his sentence by rearranging the phrases and expressing the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “each and every member in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	12	18	yikv	translate-unknown	καθὼς ἠθέλησεν	1	where would the body be?	Here, **just as he desired** means that the God **appointed the members** as he decided, and not because of any other factors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **desired** with a word that refers to what God “decided” or “chose.” Alternate translation: “in the way that he chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	12	19	eswt	figs-hypo	εἰ&ἦν τὰ πάντα ἓν μέλος, ποῦ	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **all** the body parts were just **one member**, that is, one kind of body part. He uses this hypothetical situation because it is absurd for **all** body parts to be **one member**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose they were all one member; where” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-1CO	12	19	zw6k	figs-explicit	τὰ&ἓν μέλος	1	the same member	Here, **one member** refers to one kind of **member**. In other words, it does not indicate that there is only one body part (one arm, for example). Rather, it indicates that all the body parts are of one type (as if all the ears, legs, and other body parts were all arms). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one member** by clarifying that Paul has in mind many members that are of one kind. Alternate translation: “one kind of member” or “one type of member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	12	19	eswt	figs-hypo	εἰ & ἦν τὰ πάντα ἓν μέλος, ποῦ	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **all** the body parts were just **one member**, that is, one kind of body part. He uses this hypothetical situation because it is absurd for **all** body parts to be **one member**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose they were all one member; where” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+1CO	12	19	zw6k	figs-explicit	τὰ & ἓν μέλος	1	the same member	Here, **one member** refers to one kind of **member**. In other words, it does not indicate that there is only one body part (one arm, for example). Rather, it indicates that all the body parts are of one type (as if all the ears, legs, and other body parts were all arms). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one member** by clarifying that Paul has in mind many members that are of one kind. Alternate translation: “one kind of member” or “one type of member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	19	y4vg	figs-rquestion	ποῦ τὸ σῶμα?	1	where would the body be?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information about **where** the **body** is. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, a **body** that is made up of only **one member** is not a **body** at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “there would be no body!” or “the body would certainly not exist.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	12	20	hmcr	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νῦν δὲ	1	where would the body be?	Just as in [12:18](../12/18.md), **But now** introduces what is true, in contrast with the hypothetical situations Paul offered in the last verse (12:19). The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But now** with a word or phrase that introduces reality in contrast to a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “As it really is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	12	20	qr0s	figs-explicit	πολλὰ&μέλη	1	where would the body be?	Here, **many members** refers to many kinds of **member**. In other words, it does not indicate that there are many examples of one body part (many arms, for example). Rather, it indicates that there are many different types of **members** (ears, legs, and arms, for example). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **many members** by clarifying that Paul has in mind many different kinds of **members**. Alternate translation: “there are many types of members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	12	20	qr0s	figs-explicit	πολλὰ & μέλη	1	where would the body be?	Here, **many members** refers to many kinds of **member**. In other words, it does not indicate that there are many examples of one body part (many arms, for example). Rather, it indicates that there are many different types of **members** (ears, legs, and arms, for example). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **many members** by clarifying that Paul has in mind many different kinds of **members**. Alternate translation: “there are many types of members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	20	honm	figs-ellipsis	ἓν δὲ σῶμα	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul omits some words that your language might need to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**there are**). If your language does need these words here, you could supply them from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but there is one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	12	21	nl5l	figs-hypo	οὐ δύναται&ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς&ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that an **eye** and a **head** could talk to other body parts. He uses this hypothetical situation because, if these body parts could talk, they would never say **“I have no need of you”** to other body parts. His point is that human body parts work together; they do not try to get rid of each other. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that the eye could speak. It is not able … suppose that the head could speak. It is not able to say to the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-1CO	12	21	ig02	figs-personification	οὐ δύναται&ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς εἰπεῖν τῇ χειρί, χρείαν σου οὐκ ἔχω; ἢ πάλιν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν, χρείαν ὑμῶν οὐκ ἔχω	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul speaks as if an **eye** and a **head** could say things. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as body parts of the body of Christ, and so the **eye** and the **head** are examples for them. He also wishes them to see how absurd it would be if an **eye** or a **head** were to say that it did not need other body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech by clarifying that this is a hypothetical situation in which an **eye** or a **head** can say things. Alternate translation: “say that an eye could talk. It is not able to say to the hand, ‘I do not have need of you.’ Or again, say that a head could talk. It is not able to say to the hand, ‘I do not have need of you.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	12	21	cmnr	figs-quotations	τῇ χειρί, χρείαν σου οὐκ ἔχω&τοῖς ποσίν, χρείαν ὑμῶν οὐκ ἔχω.	1	where would the body be?	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “that it does not need the hand … that it does not need the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	12	21	ytya	figs-genericnoun	οὐ δύναται&ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς εἰπεῖν τῇ χειρί&ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν	1	where would the body be?	Paul is using these body parts as examples. He is not speaking about one particular **eye**, **hand**, **head**, or **feet**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to any ear. Alternate translation: “no eye is able to say to a hand … no head is able to say to feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	12	21	lhik	figs-idiom	χρείαν σου οὐκ ἔχω&χρείαν ὑμῶν οὐκ ἔχω	1	where would the body be?	Here, **I do not have need of you** is a natural way to express this idea in Paul’s language. In some languages, this clause sounds unnatural or longer than it needs to be. Paul is not using this form for special emphasis, so you could express the idea in whatever way seems natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I do not require you … I do not require you” or “You are not needed … You are not needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	12	21	nl5l	figs-hypo	οὐ δύναται & ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς & ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that an **eye** and a **head** could talk to other body parts. He uses this hypothetical situation because, if these body parts could talk, they would never say **“I have no need of you”** to other body parts. His point is that human body parts work together; they do not try to get rid of each other. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that the eye could speak. It is not able … suppose that the head could speak. It is not able to say to the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+1CO	12	21	ig02	figs-personification	οὐ δύναται & ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς εἰπεῖν τῇ χειρί, χρείαν σου οὐκ ἔχω; ἢ πάλιν ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν, χρείαν ὑμῶν οὐκ ἔχω	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul speaks as if an **eye** and a **head** could say things. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as body parts of the body of Christ, and so the **eye** and the **head** are examples for them. He also wishes them to see how absurd it would be if an **eye** or a **head** were to say that it did not need other body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech by clarifying that this is a hypothetical situation in which an **eye** or a **head** can say things. Alternate translation: “say that an eye could talk. It is not able to say to the hand, ‘I do not have need of you.’ Or again, say that a head could talk. It is not able to say to the hand, ‘I do not have need of you.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	12	21	cmnr	figs-quotations	τῇ χειρί, χρείαν σου οὐκ ἔχω & τοῖς ποσίν, χρείαν ὑμῶν οὐκ ἔχω.	1	where would the body be?	If your language does not use this form, you can translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “that it does not need the hand … that it does not need the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	12	21	ytya	figs-genericnoun	οὐ δύναται & ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς εἰπεῖν τῇ χειρί & ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν	1	where would the body be?	Paul is using these body parts as examples. He is not speaking about one particular **eye**, **hand**, **head**, or **feet**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to any ear. Alternate translation: “no eye is able to say to a hand … no head is able to say to feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	12	21	lhik	figs-idiom	χρείαν σου οὐκ ἔχω & χρείαν ὑμῶν οὐκ ἔχω	1	where would the body be?	Here, **I do not have need of you** is a natural way to express this idea in Paul’s language. In some languages, this clause sounds unnatural or longer than it needs to be. Paul is not using this form for special emphasis, so you could express the idea in whatever way seems natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I do not require you … I do not require you” or “You are not needed … You are not needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	12	21	q8ru	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ πάλιν	1	where would the body be?	Here, **or again** introduces another example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **or again** with a word or phrase that introduces another example. Alternate translation: “or, for another example,” or “or further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	12	21	jwzv	figs-ellipsis	ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῖς ποσίν	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**is not able to say**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the head is not able to say to the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	22	hnt4	translate-unknown	ἀσθενέστερα	1	where would the body be?	Here, **weaker** refers to physical frailty or lack of strength. It is unclear which body parts he might have considered to be **weaker**. Use a similar general word that identifies frailty or weakness. Alternate translation: “frailer” or “less strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	12	22	w75w	translate-unknown	ἀναγκαῖά	1	where would the body be?	Here, **essential** identifies the **weaker** bodies parts as required for the body to function properly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **essential** with a word or phrase that identifies the body parts as “necessary” or “required.” Alternate translation: “required” or “indispensable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	12	22	q1wr	figs-explicit	πολλῷ μᾶλλον&ἀσθενέστερα ὑπάρχειν, ἀναγκαῖά ἐστιν	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul seems to be stating a general principle that the **weaker** a body part is, the **more** it ends up being **essential** for the body. He implies a comparison with other body parts, which are “stronger” but “less essential.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this general principle or what Paul is comparing more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be weaker than other members are actually that much more essential than those other members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	12	22	q1wr	figs-explicit	πολλῷ μᾶλλον & ἀσθενέστερα ὑπάρχειν, ἀναγκαῖά ἐστιν	1	where would the body be?	Here Paul seems to be stating a general principle that the **weaker** a body part is, the **more** it ends up being **essential** for the body. He implies a comparison with other body parts, which are “stronger” but “less essential.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this general principle or what Paul is comparing more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be weaker than other members are actually that much more essential than those other members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	23	apc4	figs-explicit	καὶ ἃ δοκοῦμεν ἀτιμότερα εἶναι τοῦ σώματος, τούτοις τιμὴν περισσοτέραν περιτίθεμεν; καὶ τὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν, εὐσχημοσύνην περισσοτέραν ἔχει;	1	our unpresentable members	Throughout this verse, Paul is most likely thinking about how we carefully wear clothing that covers our **less honorable** and **unpresentable** body parts. He does not specify which body parts these would be, but it is likely that he has genital organs in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Paul has clothing in mind as the way we **bestow** some body parts with **greater honor** or give them **more dignity**. Alternate translation: “and those of the body which we think to be less honorable, we bestow them greater honor by clothing them; and our unpresentable members have more dignity because of the care we take to cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	12	23	vilq	writing-pronouns	ἃ&τοῦ σώματος	1	our unpresentable members	Here, **those** refers back to the “members” in [12:22](../12/22.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those** with “members” instead. Alternate translation: “the members of the body which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	12	23	vilq	writing-pronouns	ἃ & τοῦ σώματος	1	our unpresentable members	Here, **those** refers back to the “members” in [12:22](../12/22.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **those** with “members” instead. Alternate translation: “the members of the body which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	12	23	ring	figs-infostructure	ἃ δοκοῦμεν ἀτιμότερα εἶναι τοῦ σώματος, τούτοις τιμὴν περισσοτέραν περιτίθεμεν	1	our unpresentable members	Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**those of the body which we think to be less honorable**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **them** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “we bestow greater honor on those of the body which we think to be less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	12	23	mhim	figs-abstractnouns	τούτοις τιμὴν περισσοτέραν περιτίθεμεν	1	our unpresentable members	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “honor” or an adverb such as “honorably.” Alternate translation: “we treat them honorably” or “we honor them more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	23	id5z	figs-euphemism	τὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν	1	our unpresentable members	Here, **unpresentable members** is a polite way to refer to sexual organs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unpresentable members** with a comparable polite term. Paul’s euphemism contrasts **unpresentable** with **dignity**. If possible, use a euphemism that similarly creates a contrast. Alternate translation: “our private parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1CO	12	23	rn4p	figs-abstractnouns	εὐσχημοσύνην περισσοτέραν ἔχει	1	our unpresentable members	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **dignity**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “dignify” or an adjective such as “presentable.” Alternate translation: “are more dignified” or “are more presentable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	12	24	lxj8	figs-explicit	τὰ&εὐσχήμονα ἡμῶν	1	our unpresentable members	Here, **presentable members** contrasts with the “unpresentable members” in [12:23](../12/23.md). These **presentable members** are probably those body parts which we do not cover with clothing, but Paul does not specify exactly which body parts he is thinking about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **presentable members** with a word or phrase that contrasts with how you translated “unpresentable members.” Alternate translation: “nonprivate parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	12	24	lxj8	figs-explicit	τὰ & εὐσχήμονα ἡμῶν	1	our unpresentable members	Here, **presentable members** contrasts with the “unpresentable members” in [12:23](../12/23.md). These **presentable members** are probably those body parts which we do not cover with clothing, but Paul does not specify exactly which body parts he is thinking about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **presentable members** with a word or phrase that contrasts with how you translated “unpresentable members.” Alternate translation: “nonprivate parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	24	qe2n	figs-ellipsis	οὐ χρείαν ἔχει	1	our unpresentable members	Here Paul does not specify what they do not **need**. He implies that they do not need to be treated with “dignity,” as the “unpresentable parts” are (see [12:23](../12/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **do not have need** by referring back to how you translated what people do with their “unpresentable parts.” Alternate translation: “do not need to be treated with dignity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	12	24	ik7r	figs-metaphor	συνεκέρασεν τὸ σῶμα	1	our unpresentable members	Here Paul speaks as if God took many different things and **combined** them **together** to make **the body**. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that the body is made up of many different parts, but that God has united or **combined** all these parts together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **combined the body together** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has assembled the body” or “has joined all the body parts into one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	12	24	mqcu	figs-genericnoun	τὸ σῶμα	1	our unpresentable members	Here Paul is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “the human body” or “each body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	12	24	gg2h	figs-explicit	τῷ ὑστερουμένῳ, περισσοτέραν δοὺς τιμήν	1	our unpresentable members	Here Paul implies that the body parts that “lack” honor receive **more honor** from God. The Corinthians would have understood this clause to mean that God is the one who created the body, so that what Paul has already stated in [12:23–24](../12/23.md) is true. God has made the body in such a way that we give more honor and dignity to the private and less honorable body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication more plainly by including what humans think about the body parts. Alternate translation: “giving more honor to what we think has less honor” or “giving more honor to the body parts that we consider to be less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	24	sbnd	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὑστερουμένῳ, περισσοτέραν δοὺς τιμήν	1	our unpresentable members	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “honor” or an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “honoring more what is honored less” or “making honorable what is less honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	12	25	uvnk	figs-litotes	μὴ&σχίσμα&ἀλλὰ	1	there may be no division within the body, but	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. If you do, you will need to express the contrast between the two halves of this verse as a connection. Alternate translation: “complete unity … and that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+1CO	12	25	uvnk	figs-litotes	μὴ & σχίσμα & ἀλλὰ	1	there may be no division within the body, but	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. If you do, you will need to express the contrast between the two halves of this verse as a connection. Alternate translation: “complete unity … and that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1CO	12	25	zvsl	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι	1	there may be no division within the body, but	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **division**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “divide” or “split.” Alternate translation: “the body may not divide itself” or “the body may not become divided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	12	25	u3wp	figs-personification	ὑπὲρ ἀλλήλων μεριμνῶσι τὰ μέλη	1	there may be no division within the body, but	Here Paul speaks as if **the members** of a body could **care for another**. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as **members** of the body of Christ, and so **the members** of a human body are an example for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the members should work together like they care for one another” or “the members should work with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	12	25	z4kk	figs-idiom	τὸ αὐτὸ	1	there may be no division within the body, but	Here, **the same** means that **the members** are “caring” for each body part **the same** way they care for all the others. In other words, the body parts make no distinctions about honor or dignity. Instead, they treat each other **the same**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the same**with a comparable phrase that emphasizes equality or similarity. Alternate translation: “equally” or “without distinctions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	12	26	wyve	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴτε πάσχει ἓν μέλος&εἴτε δοξάζεται μέλος	1	one member is honored	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show the connection between **one member** and **all the members**. If the conditional form does not draw a close connection between what happens to **one** and what happens to **all**, you could use a different form that does draw a close connection. Alternate translation: “when one member suffers … when a member is honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	12	26	wyve	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴτε πάσχει ἓν μέλος & εἴτε δοξάζεται μέλος	1	one member is honored	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show the connection between **one member** and **all the members**. If the conditional form does not draw a close connection between what happens to **one** and what happens to **all**, you could use a different form that does draw a close connection. Alternate translation: “when one member suffers … when a member is honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	12	26	gqc1	figs-personification	εἴτε πάσχει ἓν μέλος, συνπάσχει πάντα τὰ μέλη	1	one member is honored	Here Paul speaks as if **one member** and indeed **all the members** of a body could **suffer**, which is a word that is normally used for people instead of things. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as **members** of the body of Christ, and so the **members** of a human body are an example for them. Here, he specifically has in mind the idea that an injury or infection in one body part (a finger, for example) has an effect on the entire body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “if one member feels pain, all the members also feel the pain” or “if one member is like a person who suffers, all the members also join in the suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	12	26	da97	figs-activepassive	δοξάζεται μέλος	1	one member is honored	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to avoid stating who is doing the “honoring.” If you must state who does it, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “they honor a member” or “a member receives honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	12	26	vlcf	figs-personification	συνχαίρει πάντα τὰ μέλη	1	one member is honored	Here Paul speaks as if **all the members** of a body could **rejoice** like people do. He speaks in this way because he wants the Corinthians to think of themselves as **members** of the body of Christ, and so **the members** of a human body are an example for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “all the members are like people who rejoice together” or “all the members together receive the honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	12	27	z2ct	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Now you are	Here, **Now** introduces the application of what Paul has been saying about **the body** in [12:12–26](../12/12.md). You could use a word or phrase that would naturally introduce an application or explanation of what Paul has said in these verses. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “What I mean is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	12	27	i8i6	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς&ἐστε σῶμα Χριστοῦ, καὶ μέλη ἐκ μέρους	1	Now you are	Here Paul speaks as if believers were **members**, or body parts, that together make up **the body of Christ**. By speaking in this way, he applies everything he has said in [12:12–26](../12/12.md) about “bodies” to the church, and he emphasizes the unity of the church. Paul used **body** language throughout this whole paragraph, and it is an important metaphor for 1 Corinthians and for Christian teaching. Because of this, you should preserve this metaphor or, if you must express the idea differently, use an analogy. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are the body of Christ and individually members of it” or “you function as the body of Christ, and individually you function as members of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	12	27	i8i6	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & ἐστε σῶμα Χριστοῦ, καὶ μέλη ἐκ μέρους	1	Now you are	Here Paul speaks as if believers were **members**, or body parts, that together make up **the body of Christ**. By speaking in this way, he applies everything he has said in [12:12–26](../12/12.md) about “bodies” to the church, and he emphasizes the unity of the church. Paul used **body** language throughout this whole paragraph, and it is an important metaphor for 1 Corinthians and for Christian teaching. Because of this, you should preserve this metaphor or, if you must express the idea differently, use an analogy. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are the body of Christ and individually members of it” or “you function as the body of Christ, and individually you function as members of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	12	27	gul0	translate-unknown	μέλη ἐκ μέρους	1	Now you are	Here, **individually** refers to how specific people are **members** of the **body of Christ**. In other words, discrete people can each be considered a “member”. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **individually** with a word or phrase that identifies people on their own, apart from the communities in which they participate. Alternate translation: “each one of you is a member of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	12	28	n04s	writing-pronouns	οὓς	1	first apostles	Here, **some** refers to the specific people who have the gifts listed in the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **some** by clarifying that it refers to the people who have the gifts or titles he gives in the list. Alternate translation: “people to specifically function” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	12	28	ft5q	translate-ordinal	πρῶτον&δεύτερον&τρίτον	1	first apostles	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “one, … two, … three,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+1CO	12	28	ft5q	translate-ordinal	πρῶτον & δεύτερον & τρίτον	1	first apostles	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “one, … two, … three,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 1CO	12	28	ll3s		ἐκκλησίᾳ πρῶτον ἀποστόλους, δεύτερον προφήτας, τρίτον διδασκάλους, ἔπειτα δυνάμεις, ἔπειτα χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων	1	first apostles	Here Paul could use the numbers and **then** to indicate: (1) that he listed these things in the order in which he thought of them. In this case, there is no special significance to the numbers, and Paul stopped numbering items because he kept listing things after he said **then**. Alternate translation: “church. This includes first apostles, second prophets, third teachers, then miracles, then gifts of healing” (2) that the items are listed in order of importance or authority until Paul starts using **then**. This means that **apostles**, **prophets**, and **teachers** have special importance or authority in that order. Alternate translation: “church. Most important are apostles, second are prophets, and third are teachers. Then there are miracles, gifts of healing” (3) that the items are listed in the order in which God uses them in the church, up until Paul starts using **then**. Alternate translation: “church, which first requires apostles, second prophets, and third teachers. Then God gives miracles, gifts of healing”
 1CO	12	28	al4j	figs-explicit	ἔπειτα δυνάμεις, ἔπειτα χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων, ἀντιλήμψεις, κυβερνήσεις, γένη γλωσσῶν	1	first apostles	When Paul stops using numbers in his list, he also stops using titles for people and instead names the gifts they have. However, the questions in the next two verses ([12:29–30](../12/29.md)) show that Paul wants the Corinthians to think about these gifts as belonging to specific people. If your readers would be confused by the change from titles to gifts, you could explicitly connect these gifts with the people who perform them. Alternate translation: “then people who perform miracles, then those with gifts of healing, those who help, those who administer, and those who speak various kinds of tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	12	28	unh1	translate-unknown	ἀντιλήμψεις	1	those who provide helps	Here, **helps** could refer to: (1) acts that help other people. Alternate translation: “helpful deeds” (2) service that **helps** the church, which would include administrative work and distributing aid to those in need. Alternate translation: “supporting the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1748,8 +1748,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	13	intro	abcg			0		# 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)<br>      * The necessity of love (13:1–3)<br>      * The characteristics of love (13:4–7)<br>      * The enduring nature of love (13:8–13)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Love<br><br>Paul’s main topic in this chapter is love. He speaks about how important it is, what it is like, and how it will endure forever. Much of the time, it seems that he is emphasizing love for other people. However, he likely also has love for God in mind. See the notes for ways to translate the abstract noun “love” if your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Hypothetical situations<br><br>In [13:1–3](../13/01.md), Paul provides three hypothetical situations. He uses these situations to show how essential love is: no matter what other great things a person can do, they must have love. He uses himself as the character in the situations to avoid making someone else an example of a person who does not have love. Consider natural ways to speak about hypothetical situations in your language. If your readers would be confused when Paul uses “I” in the hypothetical situations, you can use a generic reference to a “person” or “someone” instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])<br><br>### Personification<br><br>In [13:4–8a](../13/04.md), Paul speaks about love as if it were a person who could do things. He speaks in this way because it makes the abstract idea of “love” easier to think about. If your readers would be confused when Paul speaks about love as a person, you can express the idea in another way. See the notes on those verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])<br><br>### Child analogy<br><br>In [13:11](../13/11.md), Paul again uses himself as an example. This time he speaks about what he did as a child and what he does as an adult. He speaks in this way to illustrate how some things are appropriate for specific times. For example, speaking like a child is appropriate when one is a child, but it is not appropriate when one is an adult. Paul wishes the Corinthians to apply this reasoning to spiritual gifts and to love. Spiritual gifts are appropriate until Jesus comes back, but then they will no longer be appropriate. On the other hand, love is always appropriate.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Non-exhaustive lists<br><br>In [13:4–8a](../13/04.md), Paul provides a list of love’s characteristics. While he mentions many things, he does not intend the list to completely define every characteristic of love. Instead, he wishes to show the Corinthians what love is like. Make sure that your translation does not imply that the characteristics that Paul lists are the only characteristics that love has.<br><br>### First-person singular and plural<br><br>In [13:1–3](../13/01.md), [11](../13/11.md), [12b](../13/12.md), Paul speaks of himself in the first-person singular. In [13:9](../13/09.md), [12a](../13/12.md), Paul includes the Corinthians and other believers with himself by using the first-person plural. However, the alternation between singular and plural, especially in [13:11–12](../13/11.md), shows that Paul is not drawing any distinctions between his own experiences and those of other believers. Rather, Paul uses himself as an example, but he also wishes to speak about believers in general. If your readers would find switching between first-person singular and first-person plural to be confusing, you can use the first-person plural throughout. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	13	1	n8lm	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ταῖς γλώσσαις τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαλῶ καὶ τῶν ἀγγέλων, ἀγάπην δὲ μὴ ἔχω	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he could **speak with tongues of men and of angels** but also that he did **not have love**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation so that he does not offend the Corinthians by using them as an example of people without **love**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose that I could speak with the tongues of men and of angels, but also suppose that I did not have love.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	13	1	cm2n	figs-metonymy	ταῖς γλώσσαις	1	the tongues of … angels	Here, **tongues** refers to something that one does with one’s “tongue,” which is to speak a language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that **tongues** is a way of speaking about “languages” by using a comparable term or expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “with the languages” or “in the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1CO	13	1	axzw	translate-unknown	ταῖς γλώσσαις τῶν ἀνθρώπων&καὶ τῶν ἀγγέλων	1	the tongues of … angels	Here Paul refers to two specific categories of **tongues**: those **of men** and those **of angels**. He does not mean that these are the only kinds of **tongues** that exist, but he does think that these two kinds do exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **tongues of men and of angels** with a normal way to refer to various human languages and then also modify it so that you could use it for angelic languages. Alternate translation: “foreign languages and angelic languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	13	1	oucm	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην&μὴ ἔχω	1	the tongues of … angels	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	1	axzw	translate-unknown	ταῖς γλώσσαις τῶν ἀνθρώπων & καὶ τῶν ἀγγέλων	1	the tongues of … angels	Here Paul refers to two specific categories of **tongues**: those **of men** and those **of angels**. He does not mean that these are the only kinds of **tongues** that exist, but he does think that these two kinds do exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **tongues of men and of angels** with a normal way to refer to various human languages and then also modify it so that you could use it for angelic languages. Alternate translation: “foreign languages and angelic languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	13	1	oucm	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην & μὴ ἔχω	1	the tongues of … angels	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	13	1	k2gk	figs-metaphor	γέγονα χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbal	Here Paul speaks as if he were a metallic instrument that makes loud noises. He speaks in this way because he wants to argue that **tongues** without **love** are noisy, like an instrument, but they do not actually help others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I have become loud but useless” or “I have become like loud radio static” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	13	1	o4y7	figs-doublet	χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	a clanging cymbal	Here Paul refers to two different loud, metallic instruments in his culture. If your culture does not have two different loud instruments made of metal, you could refer to just one here. Further, if your culture does not use metal instruments, you could refer to two or one instruments that make a loud noise. Alternate translation: “a noisy cymbal” or “a loud drum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	13	1	krt1	translate-unknown	χαλκὸς ἠχῶν	1	gong	Here, **a noisy gong** refers to the sound that comes when someone hits a flat metal object. A **gong** is a metal instrument that someone hits to make a deep, booming sound. You could use a word that identifies a metal instrument in your culture, especially if it makes a loud sound. Alternate translation: “a loud bell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1759,13 +1759,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	13	2	d4n5	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ μυστήρια πάντα, καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γνῶσιν	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mysteries** and **knowledge**, you can express the ideas in another way, such as with adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “everything that is secret and worth knowing” or “all that is hidden and all that there is to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	13	2	os3b	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχω πᾶσαν τὴν πίστιν	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Paul implies that this is **faith**in God. Alternate translation: “I trust God completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	13	2	kssy	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε ὄρη μεθιστάναι	1	a clanging cymbal	Here, **so as to** introduces a description of what could result from the **faith**. Paul here uses an extreme example to define how great the **faith** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate how **remove mountains** relates to **faith** by making it clearer that Paul identifies **remove mountains** as an extreme example of what the **faith** can lead to. Alternate translation: “so that I can even remove mountains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	13	2	g0pq	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην&μὴ ἔχω	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	2	g0pq	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην & μὴ ἔχω	1	a clanging cymbal	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	13	2	qedk	figs-hyperbole	οὐθέν εἰμι	1	a clanging cymbal	Here Paul says that he, if the hypothetical situation were true, would be **nothing**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that none of the great things he could do would be worth anything, and he himself would gain no honor or glory from them. Paul does not mean that he would not exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **I am nothing** by qualifying Paul’s claim or indicating that it refers to honor or value. Alternate translation: “I have no value” or “I gain nothing from those great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	13	3	d0f4	figs-hypo	κἂν ψωμίσω πάντα τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μου, καὶ ἐὰν παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου, ἵνα καυχήσωμαι, ἀγάπην δὲ μὴ ἔχω, οὐδὲν ὠφελοῦμαι	1	I give my body	Here, just as in [13:1–2](../13/01.md), Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he could **give away all** his **possessions** and that he could **hand over** his **body so that** he **might boast** but that he did **not have love**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation so that he does not offend the Corinthians by using them as an example of people without love. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “And suppose that I gave away all my possessions, and suppose that I handed over my body so that I might boast, but also suppose that I did not have love. In that case, I would gain nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	13	3	ar2q	figs-explicit	παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου	1	I give my body	Here, **hand over my body** refers to willingly accepting bodily suffering and even death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **hand over my body**more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I allow others to hurt my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	13	3	hjuf	translate-textvariants	καυχήσωμαι	1	I give my body	In Paul’s language, **I might boast** and “I might be burned” look and sound very similar. While many later manuscripts have “I might be burned” here, the earliest manuscripts have **I might boast**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “I might be burned,” it is best to follow the ULT here and translate **I might boast**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	13	3	g5o3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα καυχήσωμαι	1	I give my body	Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) a result that comes from “handing over one’s body.” Alternate translation: “that I might then boast” (2) a purpose of “handing over one’s body.” Alternate translation: “in order that I might boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	13	3	z8yk	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην&μὴ ἔχω	1	I give my body	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	13	3	z8yk	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπην & μὴ ἔχω	1	I give my body	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “I do not love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	13	4	m671	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ ζηλοῖ; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul speaks as if **love** were a person who could be **patient**, **kind**, without **envy**, without “boasting,” and **not arrogant**. Paul speaks in this way to describe the abstract idea of **love** in more concrete ways that are easier to think about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make Paul’s description of **love** more concrete in another way, such as by speaking about the “people” who **love**. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you are patient and kind; you do not envy; you do not boast, you are not arrogant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	13	4	cr57	figs-ellipsis	μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul does not connect **is patient** and **is kind** with any other words. He does this because he wants the Corinthians to think of these two ideas as closely connected. Since English speakers would misunderstand this connection, the ULT has added “and” to clarify that these two ideas are connected. If your readers would also misunderstand the connection, you could add a connecting word like the ULT does or you could express **is kind** as its own thought. Alternate translation: “is patient; it is kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	13	4	lhwa	figs-doublet	οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here, **boast** refers to how people try to draw attention to how great they are, often with words. On the other hand, **arrogant** refers to how highly people think about themselves. If your language has words that fit with these distinctions, you could use them here. If your language does not have words that fit with these distinctions, you can use one general word for “arrogance” or “pride.” Alternate translation: “is not proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1785,8 +1785,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	13	7	lfoo	translate-unknown	στέγει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **bears** could refer to: (1) keeping things that are outside from getting inside. The point here would be that “love” is able to “bear” or endure bad things that other people do. Alternate translation: “It endures” or “It tolerates” (2) keeping things that are inside from getting outside. The point here would be that “love” protects or shields other people from bad things. Alternate translation: “It protects against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	13	8	o6tv	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη οὐδέποτε πίπτει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just like in [13:4–7](../13/04.md), Paul speaks as if **love** were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you will never stop doing so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	13	8	sb1a	figs-litotes	οὐδέποτε πίπτει	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses two negative words, **never** and **fails**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you can instead use a strong positive word. Alternate translation: “always keeps going” or “love always continues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-1CO	13	8	jlan	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε&προφητεῖαι, καταργηθήσονται; εἴτε γλῶσσαι, παύσονται; εἴτε γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses the conditional form to identify what he is speaking about. This form does not mean that Paul is unsure about whether **prophecies**, **tongues**, and **knowledge** currently exist. Rather, Paul uses this form to identify each one as the topic of the rest of the clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind Paul’s use of **if** hereby using a contrast word such as “although” or by simplifying the clauses so that they do not use **if**. Alternate translation: “although there are prophecies, they will pass away; although there are tongues, they will cease; although there is knowledge, it will pass away” or “prophecies will pass away; tongues will cease; knowledge will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1CO	13	8	ytoy	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε&προφητεῖαι, καταργηθήσονται; εἴτε γλῶσσαι, παύσονται; εἴτε γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται.	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “there are” or “there is.” Since English does need these words in the first clause, the ULT supplies them. You could supply them in just the first clause or in all of the clauses. Alternate translation: “if there are prophecies, they will pass away; if there are tongues, they will cease; if there is knowledge, it will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	13	8	jlan	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε & προφητεῖαι, καταργηθήσονται; εἴτε γλῶσσαι, παύσονται; εἴτε γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses the conditional form to identify what he is speaking about. This form does not mean that Paul is unsure about whether **prophecies**, **tongues**, and **knowledge** currently exist. Rather, Paul uses this form to identify each one as the topic of the rest of the clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind Paul’s use of **if** hereby using a contrast word such as “although” or by simplifying the clauses so that they do not use **if**. Alternate translation: “although there are prophecies, they will pass away; although there are tongues, they will cease; although there is knowledge, it will pass away” or “prophecies will pass away; tongues will cease; knowledge will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	13	8	ytoy	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε & προφητεῖαι, καταργηθήσονται; εἴτε γλῶσσαι, παύσονται; εἴτε γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται.	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “there are” or “there is.” Since English does need these words in the first clause, the ULT supplies them. You could supply them in just the first clause or in all of the clauses. Alternate translation: “if there are prophecies, they will pass away; if there are tongues, they will cease; if there is knowledge, it will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	13	8	ahfm	figs-metonymy	γλῶσσαι	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **tongues** refers to something that one does with one’s “tongue,” which is to speak a language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that **tongues** is a way of speaking about “languages” by using a comparable term or expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “special languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	13	8	wvjp	translate-unknown	γλῶσσαι	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **tongues** has the same meaning it had in [12:10](../12/10.md), [28](../12/28.md), [30](../12/30.md); [13:1](../13/01.md). Translate it the same way you did in those verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	13	8	lvov	figs-abstractnouns	γνῶσις, καταργηθήσεται	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “secret things that people know, they will pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1805,15 +1805,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	13	12	tjq9	figs-idiom	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1		Here, **face to face** identifies an action or situation as something that takes place in person. In other words, a person can actually see the other person’s **face**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **face to face** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “but then, eye to eye” or “but then, in God’s direct presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	13	12	x54w	figs-explicit	τότε	-1		Here, **then** refers to the time when Jesus comes back and what happens after that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **then** refers to explicitly. Alternate translation: “then, when Jesus returns, … then, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	13	12	mgd5	writing-pronouns	ἄρτι γινώσκω ἐκ μέρους; τότε δὲ ἐπιγνώσομαι, καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1		Here Paul switches from first-person plural to first-person singular. Since he is using himself as an example for every believer, there is no special meaning behind the switch. Rather, Paul changes from plural to singular because it was good style in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this verse in first-person plural as well, or you could include words that clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “Now I, for example, know in part, but then I will know fully, just as I also have been fully known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	13	12	qp7g	figs-explicit	γινώσκω&ἐπιγνώσομαι	1	I will know fully	Again, Paul does not state what it is that **I know**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **I know** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know God … I will know God fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	12	qp7g	figs-explicit	γινώσκω & ἐπιγνώσομαι	1	I will know fully	Again, Paul does not state what it is that **I know**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **I know** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implication explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know God … I will know God fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	13	12	acp3	figs-idiom	ἐκ μέρους	1	I will know fully	Here, just as in [13:9](../13/09.md), **in part** refers to how something is only a **part** of a larger whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in part** with a comparable expression that indicates that something is only **part** of a larger whole. Alternate translation: “partially” or “imperfectly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	13	12	i28w	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1	just as I have also been fully known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the person who is **known** rather than focusing on the one doing the “knowing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has also fully known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	13	13	peiw	grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ	1	faith, hope, and love	Here, **now** could function to: (1) introduce a summary statement about how things are. Alternate translation: “as it is,” (2) give the time during which **these three remain**. Alternate translation: “in the present,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	13	13	jblt		μένει&τὰ τρία ταῦτα	1	faith, hope, and love	This could indicate that: (1) **these three** will **remain** forever, even after Jesus comes back, in contrast to prophecies, tongues, and knowledge in [13:8](../13/08.md), which will “pass away.” Alternate translation: “these three will never pass away” (2) **these three remain** in the present life of believers. Alternate translation: “these three continue on”
+1CO	13	13	jblt		μένει & τὰ τρία ταῦτα	1	faith, hope, and love	This could indicate that: (1) **these three** will **remain** forever, even after Jesus comes back, in contrast to prophecies, tongues, and knowledge in [13:8](../13/08.md), which will “pass away.” Alternate translation: “these three will never pass away” (2) **these three remain** in the present life of believers. Alternate translation: “these three continue on”
 1CO	13	13	yzuz	figs-infostructure	μένει πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη, τὰ τρία ταῦτα	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul introduces **these three** and then goes on to name them at the end of the sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange pieces of the sentence. Alternate translation: “faith, hope, and love remain, these three” or “three things, faith, hope, and love, remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	13	13	nt1y	figs-abstractnouns	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith**, **hope**, and **love**, you can express ideas by using verbs. If you do so, you may need to specify objects for those verbs. Paul implies that **faith** is in God, **hope** is in what God has promised, and **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “trusting in God, hopefully waiting for God to act for us, and loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	13	13	iw8o	figs-ellipsis	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul simply lists the three things without using connecting words. Since English speakers expect a connecting word before the last item in a list, the ULT has included **and** here. If your readers would also expect one or several connecting words in a list, you could include them. Alternate translation: “faith and hope and love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	13	13	l4wx	figs-explicit	μείζων&τούτων	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul does not explicitly say why **love** is **the greatest**. He could imply that: (1) loving God and others is the most important thing to do. Alternate translation: “the most significant of these” (2) **love** is the only one of the **three** that continues after Jesus comes back, and so it is the only one that lasts. Alternate translation: “the most enduring of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	13	13	l4wx	figs-explicit	μείζων & τούτων	1	faith, hope, and love	Here Paul does not explicitly say why **love** is **the greatest**. He could imply that: (1) loving God and others is the most important thing to do. Alternate translation: “the most significant of these” (2) **love** is the only one of the **three** that continues after Jesus comes back, and so it is the only one that lasts. Alternate translation: “the most enduring of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	13	13	pw69	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Paul implies that the **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “is loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	intro	abch			0		# 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)<br>      * Prophecy is superior to tongues in the church (14:1–25)<br>      * Order in the church (14:26–40)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 21. Verse 21 quotes from ([Isaiah 28:11–12](../isa/28/11.md)).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Prophecy<br><br>When Paul speaks about “prophecy” or “prophesying,” he is referring to when someone proclaims a message from God. This message could encourage, rebuke, warn, predict, or do many other things. Whatever the “prophecy” is about, it means that a human is speaking a message from God that others can understand. In your translation, use a word or a phrase that refers to God speaking through people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>In this chapter, Paul refers many times to “tongues.” A “tongue” could be: (1) an otherwise unknown language that one person speaks to God. (2) the language or languages spoken by angels. (3) foreign languages that believers in the church do not speak. It could refer to any or all of these languages. Since Paul’s words are not very specific, you may also want to use relatively generic terms that refer to “unknown languages” or “special languages.” What Paul emphasizes is that many or most other believers do not understand the language unless someone interprets it, so make sure that your translation uses a word or phrase that refers to language that not many people understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tongue]])<br><br>### Interpreting tongues<br><br>Paul says that some believers have the “gift” of being able to “interpret” the tongues. These could be the same people who speak the “tongues,” or they could be other people. When someone “interprets” the tongues, he or she either explains what the sounds mean or translates them into a language that the other believers know. Use a word or phrase that refers to explaining or translating unknown languages and sounds. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/interpret]])<br><br>### The ungifted<br><br>In [14:16](../14/16.md), [23–24](../14/23.md), Paul refers to the “ungifted.” This word could describe people who: (1) do not have the “gift” of tongues or interpreting tongues. (2) do not belong to the group of believers. The first option is more likely correct because of the emphasis in this chapter on understanding what others are saying during a gathering of believers.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [14:6–9](../14/06.md), [16](../14/16.md), [23](../14/23.md), [26](../14/26.md), [36](../14/36.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that include these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Building up<br><br>In [14:3–5](../14/03.md), [12](../14/12.md), [17](../14/17.md), [26](../14/26.md), Paul speaks about “building up.” He identifies people and groups of people with buildings, and he refers to making these people or groups stronger and more mature as if it were “building up” the buildings. If you readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor for making people or groups stronger and more mature, or you could express the idea plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Hypothetical examples<br><br>Many times in this chapter, Paul speaks about specific situations that may or may not be real. He uses these hypothetical situations to give examples that support how he wants the Corinthians to think and what he wants them to do. In [14:6](../14/06.md), [11](../14/11.md), [14](../14/14.md), Paul uses himself in hypothetical examples. In [14:16–17](../14/16.md), [23–25](../14/23.md), Paul uses the Corinthians in hypothetical examples. See the notes on each verse for ways to introduce each hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])<br><br>### “Childlike” metaphor<br><br>In [14:20](../14/20.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he wants them to be “childlike” about evil, but not “children” in their thoughts, where they should be “mature” or adult in their thinking. In this metaphor, Paul emphasizes how children know little and are not capable of doing very much. He wants the Corinthians to know and do little evil, but he wants them to know much about the truth and do many good things. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking about how children know and do very little, you could make this explicit or express the metaphor plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Holy Spirit or human spirit?<br><br>In [14:2](../14/02.md), [14–16](../14/14.md), Paul uses a word that could refer to the “Holy Spirit” or to a person’s “spirit.” Similarly, in [14:32](../14/32.md), Paul uses a word that could refer to specific ways in which the “Holy Spirit” empowers prophets or to the prophet’s own “spirits.” The notes will refer to this issue in each of these verses. In [14:2](../14/02.md), [32](../14/32.md), it is recommended that you translate the word in a way that relates it to the Holy Spirit. In [14–16](../14/14.md), however, Paul contrasts this word with the “mind,” so it is recommended that you translate the word here in a way that relates to a person’s “spirit,” which identifies the inner or nonphysical part of a person that is not their mind. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### Musical instruments<br><br>In [14:7–8](../14/07.md), Paul refers to three musical instruments. The “flute” refers to a hollow tube or pipe that a musician blows into to create notes. The “harp” refers to a frame with strings attached that a musician plucks to create notes. The “trumpet” refers metal tube with large opening at one end that a musician blows into to create notes. The “trumpet” was often used to send signals during battles. Paul’s point in this verse does not depend upon the exact instruments used. He uses instruments that were common in his culture to make the point that the instruments must make different, recognizable sounds for anyone to understand the music. You could refer to common instruments in your culture that are similar to the ones to which Paul refers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/flute]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/harp]], and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/trumpet]])<br><br>### [14:22](../14/22.md) and the examples in [14:23–25](../14/23.md)<br><br>In [14:22](../14/22.md), Paul says that “tongues” are a “sign” for unbelievers, but “prophecy” is a “sign” for believers. However, in the examples that he gives in [14:23–25](../14/23.md), he only speaks about unbelievers, and it is the “prophecy” that leads to the unbeliever repenting and believing. The “tongues” only lead to the unbeliever thinking that believers are “insane.” Most likely, Paul uses two different nuances of “sign” in these verses. A “sign” simply points to something, so “tongues” point to how someone does not belong to the group (an unbeliever), while “prophecy” points to how someone does belong to the group (a believer). When Paul gives the examples of unbelievers hearing both “tongues” and “prophecy,” the “tongues” are a “sign” because they make the unbeliever feel like an outsider. On the other hand, the “prophecy” is a “sign” because it makes the unbeliever into an insider, a believer. See the notes on these verses for translation options, especially for “sign.”<br><br>### Function of [14:33b](../14/33.md)<br><br>The clause “As in all the churches of the saints” in [14:33](../14/33.md) could modify what goes before it (“God is not of confusion, but of peace”) or what goes after it (“let the women be silent in the churches”). Many translations decide that it modifies what goes after it. This is because, in the other places where Paul refers to all the churches (see [7:17](../07/17.md); [11:16](../11/16.md)), is talking about how the churches behave, not about who God is. God is the same no matter what church he is connected to. On the other hand, some translations decide that the phrase modifies what goes before it. This is because Paul states “in the church” again in [14:34](../14/34.md), which would make “As in all the churches of the saints” redundant if it was connected with that verse. Also, the other places where Paul uses similar phrases (see verses already mentioned) put the reference to the other churches at the end of the sentence, not at the beginning. Consider how translations that your readers might be familiar with treat this verse. If there is no strong reason to pick one option or the other, you could follow the ULT and UST.<br><br>### The details of [14:34–35](../14/34.md)<br><br>In [14:34–35](../14/34.md), Paul speaks “the women.” The word that he uses could refer to women in general or more specifically to married women. Translations and commentators are divided over whether these two verses require women in general to be silent in church or whether they require wives to be silent in church. Further, being “silent” could refer to keeping quiet at all times, or it could refer to keeping quiet in certain situations or not saying certain things. There are three major options. First, Paul could be speaking about “wives,” and he could be requiring them to keep quiet while their husbands are speaking or prophesying. In other words, they cannot in public question or examine what their husbands say. Second, Paul could be speaking about “women” in general, and he could be requiring them to avoid certain kinds of talking. This could be speaking while others are speaking, or it could be asking too many questions, or it could be speaking during specific times when male church leaders are speaking. Third, Paul could be speaking about “women” in general, and he could be requiring them to keep quiet during the entire public gathering of believers. See the notes on these verses for the specific translation issues. Part of the problem in these verses is that Paul is not very specific about what he is commanding. If possible, make your translation general enough to allow for several of these interpretations.
 1CO	14	1	vl57	figs-metaphor	διώκετε	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Corinthians to run after and try to capture **love**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to act in **love** as persistently as someone who “pursues” someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Consistently act in” or “Seek after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1822,20 +1822,20 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	1	x938	translate-unknown	ζηλοῦτε	1	Pursue love	Here, to **be zealous for** something means that one vigorously seeks after it or strongly desires it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **be zealous for** with a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “set your heart on” or “seek after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	14	1	ki3l		μᾶλλον	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here, **especially** could mean: (1) that prophecy is the best **gift** to **be zealous** for. Alternate translation: “above all” (2) that prophecy is better than **spiritual gifts**. Alternate translation: “more than that,”
 1CO	14	2	bdhf	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here, **For** introduces the reasons why Paul wants the Corinthians to especially desire to prophesy. These reasons are found in [14:2–4](../14/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a comparable way to introduce reasons for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is why you should be zealous for prophecy:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	14	2	ii60	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&λαλῶν γλώσσῃ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Paul is speaking of people “speaking in tongues” in general; he is not speaking of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	2	ii60	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & λαλῶν γλώσσῃ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Paul is speaking of people “speaking in tongues” in general; he is not speaking of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	14	2	ftxf	translate-unknown	γλώσσῃ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here and throughout this chapter, translate **tongue** and “tongues” as you did in [13:1](../13/01.md), [8](../13/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	14	2	q21u	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις&δὲ λαλεῖ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Although the words **men** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans … but he or she speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	2	q21u	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις & δὲ λαλεῖ	1	especially that you may prophesy	Although the words **men** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans … but he or she speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	14	2	uvxu	figs-abstractnouns	μυστήρια	1	especially that you may prophesy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mysteries**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “secret” or “mysterious.” Alternate translation: “mysterious words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	2	oiai		πνεύματι	1	especially that you may prophesy	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, which enables or empowers the person to speak in the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit” (2) the person’s spirit, which refers to the interior life of a person. It is from this interior life that the **tongue** originates. Alternate translation: “in his spirit”
-1CO	14	3	iw24	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&προφητεύων	1	to build them up	Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	3	iw24	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & προφητεύων	1	to build them up	Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	14	3	up3s	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	to build them up	Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	14	3	r1nx	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	to build them up	Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one prophesying** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for growth” or “for edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	3	zv5l	figs-doublet	παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν	1	to build them up	Here, **encouragement** refers primarily to “encouraging” others to act or think in a specific way. On the other hand, **consolation** refers primarily to “comforting” others in grief or pain. If your language has words that fit with these distinctions, you could use them here. If your language does not have words that fit with these distinctions, you can use one general word for “exhortation” or **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “exhortation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	14	3	ypx0	figs-abstractnouns	παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν	1	to build them up	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **encouragement** and **consolation**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “encourage” and “console.” Alternate translation: “encouraging and consoling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	14	4	k612	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ&ὁ…προφητεύων	1	builds up	Here, just as in [14:2–3](../14/02.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “Anyone who speaks in a tongue … anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-1CO	14	4	b2mg	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ&ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ	1	builds up	Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one speaking in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one prophesying** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	14	4	k612	figs-genericnoun	ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ & ὁ…προφητεύων	1	builds up	Here, just as in [14:2–3](../14/02.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “Anyone who speaks in a tongue … anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	4	b2mg	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ & ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ	1	builds up	Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one speaking in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one prophesying** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	5	f1sh	figs-ellipsis	μᾶλλον δὲ ἵνα	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I desire**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “but I desire even more that” or “but even more, I desire that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	14	5	z5my	figs-genericnoun	ὁ προφητεύων&ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσαις	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Here, just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies … anyone who speaks in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1CO	14	5	z5my	figs-genericnoun	ὁ προφητεύων & ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσαις	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Here, just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul is speaking of people “prophesying” and people “speaking in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies … anyone who speaks in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	14	5	o0b6	figs-explicit	μείζων	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Here, **greater** indicates that **the one prophesying** does something that is more important and helpful than **the one speaking in tongues**. It does not mean that God cares about the person **prophesying** more than the person **speaking in tongues**. If you readers would misunderstand **greater**, you could state explicitly how or in what way the person is **greater**. Alternate translation: “does something more useful” or “does what is more valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	5	u9oq	figs-infostructure	ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	The ULT puts these clauses in parentheses because they give a qualification of what Paul has said about how **the one prophesying is greater than the one speaking in tongues**. In this clause, Paul clarifies that he is only speaking about **tongues** without interpretation. Further, if someone does **interpret** the **tongues**, then that can lead to **building up**, just like prophecy. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That is true except for when he interprets, so that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	5	g9k1	grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ	1	he would interpret	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. If you use this alternate translation, you may need to remove the parentheses. Alternate translation: “and does not interpret, because it is only when he interprets that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
@@ -1844,7 +1844,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	5	o7ok	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	he would interpret	Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one speaking in tongues** and also “interprets” helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “growth” or “edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	6	fxhx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	νῦν δέ, ἀδελφοί	1	how will I benefit you?	Here, **But now** introduces what Paul thinks is true. The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But now** with a word or phrase that introduces what a person thinks is true. Alternate translation: “As it is, brothers,” or “But what is true, brothers, is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	14	6	oemv	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	how will I benefit you?	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	14	6	jndd	figs-123person	ἔλθω&ὠφελήσω&λαλήσω	1	how will I benefit you?	Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody comes … will he or she benefit … he or she speaks” or “people come … will they benefit … they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	14	6	jndd	figs-123person	ἔλθω & ὠφελήσω & λαλήσω	1	how will I benefit you?	Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody comes … will he or she benefit … he or she speaks” or “people come … will they benefit … they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	14	6	j3nn	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ?	1	how will I benefit you?	If your language would normally express what will **benefit** the Corinthians before what will not **benefit** them, you could rearrange this verse. Alternate translation: “will I not benefit you if I speak to you in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching? But will I benefit you at all if I come to you speaking in tongues?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	6	i4st	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω	1	how will I benefit you?	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he is coming to them **speaking in tongues**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation to illustrate that he could do this if he wanted to and also because he does not want to offend someone else by saying that they do not **benefit** others. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that I came to you speaking in tongues. What would I benefit you unless I spoke to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	14	6	f6ee	figs-go	ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	how will I benefit you?	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	6	vqpn	figs-abstractnouns	ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ	1	how will I benefit you?	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation**, **knowledge**, **prophecy**, or **teaching**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal,” “know,” “prophesy,” and “teach.” Alternate translation: “either to show you things or to make you understand things or to prophesy to you or to instruct you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	7	d6mt	figs-infostructure	ὅμως τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν διδόντα, εἴτε αὐλὸς, εἴτε κιθάρα, ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **they** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “If even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—would not give different sounds” or “Take even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—as an example. If they would not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	7	cv7t	translate-unknown	τὰ ἄψυχα	1	they do not make different sounds	Here**lifeless things** are things are inanimate objects, things that have never been alive. Paul is specifically thinking of instruments that humans use to make sounds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **lifeless things** with a word or phrase that normally refers to things that have never been alive. Alternate translation: “inanimate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	14	7	g2fx	figs-idiom	φωνὴν διδόντα&διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something could **give** a sound. This means that the thing creates or makes the sound. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **giving sounds** or **give different sounds** with a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “creating sounds … they would not create different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	14	7	g2fx	figs-idiom	φωνὴν διδόντα & διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something could **give** a sound. This means that the thing creates or makes the sound. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **giving sounds** or **give different sounds** with a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “creating sounds … they would not create different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	14	7	xunn	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **flute** and **harp** really do **give different sounds**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if they actually did not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	14	7	t3rb	figs-explicit	διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	Here Paul refers to how an instrument like a **flute** or a **harp** produces many **different sounds**. It is only because it produces a variety of different sounds that it can create a melody or a song. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate what Paul is talking about here by making it more explicit that he is talking about how different sounds make up a song or melody. Alternate translation: “they did not make many different pitches” or “they did not create various notes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	7	hq2u	figs-rquestion	πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον?	1	how will it be known what is being played on the flute	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it will not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the thing being played on the flute or the thing being played on the harp will not be known.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1862,10 +1862,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	8	qdy0	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here, **For indeed** introduces another example that further supports what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For indeed** with a word or phrase that introduces another example. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	14	8	ykv3	figs-explicit	ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον	1	who will prepare for battle?	In Paul’s culture, soldiers would often use **a trumpet** to issue commands or signals before or during a **battle**. These signals could indicate that an enemy was coming, that the soldiers should attack or retreat, or various other things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Paul jumps from talking about **a trumpet** to talking about a **battle** because the **trumpet** was used in warfare. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound when a solider uses it to signal other soldiers, who will prepare for battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	8	h3hv	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **a trumpet** really does “give” a certain or clear **sound**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet actually were to give an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-1CO	14	8	hauz	figs-idiom	ἄδηλον&φωνὴν δῷ	1	who will prepare for battle?	In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something **gives** a **sound**. This means that the thing creates or makes the **sound**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **gives an uncertain sound** with a comparable idiom or expression. See how you translated this idiom in [14:7](../14/07.md). Alternate translation: “creates an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	14	8	ynnk	figs-explicit	ἄδηλον&φωνὴν	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here, **an uncertain sound** refers to notes that are not easily recognized or are difficult to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **an uncertain sound** with a word or phrase that refers to notes that are played poorly or are hard to hear. Alternate translation: “an unclear sound” or “an indistinct sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	14	8	hauz	figs-idiom	ἄδηλον & φωνὴν δῷ	1	who will prepare for battle?	In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something **gives** a **sound**. This means that the thing creates or makes the **sound**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **gives an uncertain sound** with a comparable idiom or expression. See how you translated this idiom in [14:7](../14/07.md). Alternate translation: “creates an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	14	8	ynnk	figs-explicit	ἄδηλον & φωνὴν	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here, **an uncertain sound** refers to notes that are not easily recognized or are difficult to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **an uncertain sound** with a word or phrase that refers to notes that are played poorly or are hard to hear. Alternate translation: “an unclear sound” or “an indistinct sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	8	z6jg	figs-rquestion	τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον?	1	who will prepare for battle?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one will.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “people would never prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	14	9	q9lk	figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς&ἐὰν	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have inferred that Paul meant they would be like instruments that do not make clear sounds. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires more words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “You are like those instruments. Unless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	14	9	q9lk	figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς & ἐὰν	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have inferred that Paul meant they would be like instruments that do not make clear sounds. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires more words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “You are like those instruments. Unless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	14	9	f9h6		οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς διὰ τῆς γλώσσης, ἐὰν μὴ εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here, **tongue** could refer to: (1) the human body part that people use to speak words. In this case, **with your tongue** modifies **give intelligible speech**. Alternate translation: “In the same way also you, unless you use your tongue to give intelligible speech” (2) the unknown language that some of the Corinthians were speaking. In this case, **with your tongue** modifies the first **you**. Alternate translation: “You act in the same way when you speak in a tongue. Unless you give intelligible speech”
 1CO	14	9	ltq2	figs-idiom	εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here, to **give intelligible speech** refers to making words that other people understand. If your language does not use **give** for **speech** or words, you can use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “you speak intelligible words” or “you talk in intelligible language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	14	9	bw66	translate-unknown	εὔσημον λόγον	1	who will prepare for battle?	Here, **intelligible speech** refers to words and sentences that other people can understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **intelligible speech** with a comparable expression that identifies language that can be understood. Alternate translation: “understandable speech” or “words that others can comprehend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1878,10 +1878,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	11	dl95	figs-hypo	ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς, ἔσομαι τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβαρος, καὶ ὁ λαλῶν ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος.	1	none is without meaning	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he is with somebody who speaks a language that he does not know. In this situation, he and the other person are “foreigners” to each other. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose, then, that I do not know the meaning of a specific language. In this situation, I am a foreigner to anyone who speaks that language, and anyone who speaks that language is a foreigner to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	14	11	drm2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐὰν οὖν	1	none is without meaning	Here, **then** could introduce: (1) an inference from the previous verse. In other words, if every language communicates meaning ([14:10](../14/10.md)), **then** a person who does not understand that meaning is **a foreigner** to the person who speaks that language. Alternate translation: “Therefore, if” (2) a contrast with the previous verse. In other words, although every language communicates meaning ([14:10](../14/10.md)), a person who does not understand the language cannot grasp that meaning. Alternate translation: “But if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	14	11	myal	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς	1	none is without meaning	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that not knowing **the meaning of the language** leads to being a **foreigner to the one speaking** that language. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **If** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Then, whenever I do not know the meaning of the language” or “Suppose then that I do not know the meaning of the language. Then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	14	11	ut5z	figs-123person	μὴ εἰδῶ&ἔσομαι&ἐμοὶ	1	none is without meaning	Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody does not know … he or she will be … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	14	11	ut5z	figs-123person	μὴ εἰδῶ & ἔσομαι & ἐμοὶ	1	none is without meaning	Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody does not know … he or she will be … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	14	11	ueuu	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς	1	none is without meaning	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **meaning**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “communicates” or “means.” Alternate translation: “what the language means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	11	szms	translate-unknown	βάρβαρος	-1	none is without meaning	Here, **foreigner** identifies someone with whom one does not share a culture and language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **foreigner** with a comparable term for someone who has a different language and culture. Alternate translation: “an outsider … will be an outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	14	11	q756	figs-ellipsis	τῷ λαλοῦντι&ὁ λαλῶν	1	none is without meaning	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the first clause (**the language**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to the one speaking the language … the one speaking the language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	14	11	q756	figs-ellipsis	τῷ λαλοῦντι & ὁ λαλῶν	1	none is without meaning	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the first clause (**the language**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to the one speaking the language … the one speaking the language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	14	12	o0rq	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	try to excel in the gifts that build up the church	Here, **So also you** introduces the conclusion Paul wishes to draw from what he has said in [14:1–11](../14/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the function of **So also you** with a comparable phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “In line with all of that” or “Given what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	14	12	oel4	figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	try to excel in the gifts that build up the church	Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. If your language does need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “should act in this way.” Alternate translation: “So also you should behave in the following way:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	14	12	f6vn	figs-idiom	ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε	1	try to excel in the gifts that build up the church	Here, **seek that you would abound** refers to desiring to have more of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this construction with a comparable phrase that indicates a desire to have or do more. Alternate translation: “desire to overflow with them” or “endeavor to gain more of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1892,15 +1892,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	13	yjos	figs-ellipsis	διερμηνεύῃ	1	interpret	Here Paul omits what the person is going to **interpret** since he already stated it in the previous clause (**a tongue**). If you need to specify what the person will **interpret**, you could include a reference to the **tongue** here. Alternate translation: “he might interpret it” or “he might interpret what he said in the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	14	13	a378	figs-gendernotations	διερμηνεύῃ	1	interpret	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she might interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	14	14	yi43	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν προσεύχωμαι γλώσσῃ, τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	my mind is unfruitful	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that praying **in a tongue** leads to the **spirit** praying but the **mind** being **unfruitful**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **If** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Whenever I pray in a tongue, my spirit” or “Suppose that I pray in a tongue. Then, my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	14	14	tfy0	figs-123person	προσεύχωμαι&μου&μου	1	my mind is unfruitful	Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person, or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “somebody would pray … his or her … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1CO	14	14	tfy0	figs-123person	προσεύχωμαι & μου & μου	1	my mind is unfruitful	Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person, or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “somebody would pray … his or her … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	14	14	gph1		τὸ πνεῦμά μου προσεύχεται	1	my mind is unfruitful	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “my inner spiritual being prays” or “my heart prays” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit prays with my spirit” or “the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being in prayer”
-1CO	14	14	kjh6	figs-metaphor	ὁ&νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν	1	my mind is unfruitful	Here Paul speaks as if his **mind** were a plant or tree that could produce “fruit.” He states that his **mind** is **unfruitful** to indicate that it is not doing anything useful, just like a fruit tree that does not produce fruit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “my mind does nothing” or “my mind is not involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	14	14	kjh6	figs-metaphor	ὁ & νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν	1	my mind is unfruitful	Here Paul speaks as if his **mind** were a plant or tree that could produce “fruit.” He states that his **mind** is **unfruitful** to indicate that it is not doing anything useful, just like a fruit tree that does not produce fruit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “my mind does nothing” or “my mind is not involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	15	vm6p	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν?	1	What should I do?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or solution. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I will tell you what I do.” or “This, then, is what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	14	15	nkgj	figs-123person	προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ	1	What should I do?	Here, just as in [14:14](../14/14.md), Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the first person as a generic third person, or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “People should pray with their spirits, and they should also pray with their minds. People should sing with their spirits, and they should also sing with their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1CO	14	15	nneh	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ&ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ.	1	What should I do?	Here, doing things **with my mind** could happen: (1) at the same time as doing things **with my spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he will use both his **spirit** and **mind** at the same time when he “prays” or “sings.” Alternate translation: “and I will use my mind also … and I will use my mind also” (2) at a different time as doing things **with my spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he sometimes use his **spirit** and sometimes use his **mind**. Alternate translation: “but other times I will pray with my mind … but other times I will sing with my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+1CO	14	15	nneh	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ & ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ.	1	What should I do?	Here, doing things **with my mind** could happen: (1) at the same time as doing things **with my spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he will use both his **spirit** and **mind** at the same time when he “prays” or “sings.” Alternate translation: “and I will use my mind also … and I will use my mind also” (2) at a different time as doing things **with my spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he sometimes use his **spirit** and sometimes use his **mind**. Alternate translation: “but other times I will pray with my mind … but other times I will sing with my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 1CO	14	15	r11f		τῷ Πνεύματι	-1	pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind	Here, just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with my inner spiritual being … with my inner spiritual being” or “with my heart … with my heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit … as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being … as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being”
-1CO	14	16	fyc7	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι&πῶς	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that blessing **with the spirit** leads to **the one filling the place of the ungifted** being unable to **say the “Amen”**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “whenever you bless with the spirit, how” or “Suppose that you bless with the spirit. Then, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	14	16	niu5	figs-yousingular	εὐλογῇς&τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ&λέγεις	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Here Paul switches from using himself as an example to using one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, every **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, bless … your thanksgiving … you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	14	16	fyc7	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι & πῶς	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that blessing **with the spirit** leads to **the one filling the place of the ungifted** being unable to **say the “Amen”**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “whenever you bless with the spirit, how” or “Suppose that you bless with the spirit. Then, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	14	16	niu5	figs-yousingular	εὐλογῇς & τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ & λέγεις	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Here Paul switches from using himself as an example to using one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, every **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, bless … your thanksgiving … you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	14	16	crew	figs-explicit	εὐλογῇς πνεύματι	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Here Paul is speaking about someone who is using **thespirit** only and not the “mind” to speak in “tongues.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “you bless in tongues with the spirit only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	16	gi1q		πνεύματι	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Just as in [4:14–15](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the mind but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with your inner spiritual being” or “with your heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “by the power of the Holy Spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs your inner spiritual being”
 1CO	14	16	r4w5	figs-rquestion	ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν?	1	how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the answer to the question is “he cannot.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the one who fills the place of the ungifted will not be able to say the ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	16	i6o5	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ	1	say “Amen”	Here, **your thanksgiving** refers back to what the person said when they were “blessing” **with the spirit**. Paul uses a different word here, but they mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **thanksgiving** by translating this phrase so that it clearly refers back to **bless with the spirit**. Alternate translation: “at what you said” or “at your blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	16	jxn4	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ	1	say “Amen”	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **thanksgiving**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “thank.” Alternate translation: “at how you thanked God” or “at what you thanked God for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	16	m0x2	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ οἶδεν	1	say “Amen”	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she does not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	14	17	a7wr	figs-yousingular	σὺ μὲν&εὐχαριστεῖς	1	you certainly give	Here Paul continues to use one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, certainly give thanks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	14	17	a7wr	figs-yousingular	σὺ μὲν & εὐχαριστεῖς	1	you certainly give	Here Paul continues to use one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, **you** in this verse is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second-person singular as a second-person plural, or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, certainly give thanks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	14	17	cgls	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἕτερος	1	you certainly give	Paul is speaking of **other** people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	14	17	w25k	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται	1	the other person is not built up	Just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul here speaks as if a person were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **you** who are “giving thanks” are not helping other people become stronger, unlike the one who builds a house and thus makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the other person is not helped to grow” or “the other person is not edified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	17	m7cj	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the person who **is not built up** rather than emphasizing the person who is not doing the building up. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “you” did it. Alternate translation: “you do not build up the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	19	nzby	figs-infostructure	ἵνα καὶ ἄλλους κατηχήσω, ἢ μυρίους λόγους ἐν γλώσσῃ	1	than ten thousand words in a tongue	If your language would naturally state the rest of the comparison before the purpose, you could rearrange these clauses. You may need to start a new sentence when you express the purpose. Alternate translation: “than myriads of words in a tongue. That way, I might also instruct others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	19	cbw8	figs-hyperbole	μυρίους λόγους	1	than ten thousand words in a tongue	Here, much like in [4:15](../04/15.md), **myriads of words** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **words**. If **myriad** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many words” or “a large number of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	14	20	luu4	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	General Information:	Although **Brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	14	20	mh5t	figs-metaphor	μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε&τῇ κακίᾳ, νηπιάζετε	1	do not be children in your thinking	Here, much like in [13:11](../13/11.md), Paul compares people to **children**. He is particularly thinking about how children do not know very much or do very much. Paul does not want the Corinthians to be like children in how children know very little. Rather, he wants the Corinthians to be like children in how children do very little **evil**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech as an analogy or in a nonfigurative way. If possible, preserve the metaphor, because Paul has already used “child” language in [13:11](../13/11.md). Alternate translation: “do not be immature, like children, … do very little evil, like children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	14	20	mh5t	figs-metaphor	μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε & τῇ κακίᾳ, νηπιάζετε	1	do not be children in your thinking	Here, much like in [13:11](../13/11.md), Paul compares people to **children**. He is particularly thinking about how children do not know very much or do very much. Paul does not want the Corinthians to be like children in how children know very little. Rather, he wants the Corinthians to be like children in how children do very little **evil**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech as an analogy or in a nonfigurative way. If possible, preserve the metaphor, because Paul has already used “child” language in [13:11](../13/11.md). Alternate translation: “do not be immature, like children, … do very little evil, like children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	20	i2w1	figs-infostructure	ἀλλὰ τῇ κακίᾳ, νηπιάζετε, ταῖς δὲ φρεσὶν, τέλειοι γίνεσθε	1	do not be children in your thinking	If your language would naturally express the contrast before the comparison, you could move the clause about being **mature** before the clause about being **childlike**. Alternate translation: “Rather, become mature in the thoughts, and only be childlike in evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	20	y2og		τῇ κακίᾳ	1	do not be children in your thinking	Alternate translation: “about evil”
 1CO	14	21	jx6l	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται	1	In the law it is written,	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the words rather than emphasizing whoever wrote the words. If you must state who did the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “In the Law someone wrote” or “They wrote in the Law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1934,29 +1934,29 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	21	s7uu	figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ	1	By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers	The Corinthians would have understood **this people** to refer to the people of Israel. If your readers would not make this inference, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	21	sltb	figs-infostructure	λαλήσω τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ καὶ οὐδ’ οὕτως εἰσακούσονταί μου, λέγει Κύριος	1	By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers	Here Paul includes **says the Lord** to indicate who spoke the words he quotes. If your language would indicate who is speaking before or in the middle of the quote, you could move **says the Lord** to a more natural place. Alternate translation: “I will speak to this people,’ says the Lord, ‘but not even in this way will they hear me.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	22	bp4j		εἰς σημεῖόν εἰσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **sign** could be: (1) a negative indication of God’s judgment or wrath. This would fit with what the quotation from Isaiah in the last verse suggests. Alternate translation: “are an indication of God’s judgment” (2) a positive indication of what convicts or impresses people. This would fit with what “signs” means in [1:22](../01/22.md), but it does not fit well with the next two verses (see [14:23–24](../14/23.md)). Alternate translation: “are impressive” or “are convicting”
-1CO	14	22	vl45	figs-infostructure	σημεῖόν&οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις&οὐ τοῖς ἀπίστοις, ἀλλὰ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language would naturally put those whom the signs are **to** before those whom they are **not to**, you could rearrange the clauses so that the **not** clause is second. Alternate translation: “a sign to the unbelievers, not to those who believe … is to those who believe, not to the unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	14	22	qj5f	figs-ellipsis	ἡ&προφητεία, οὐ	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians could have inferred: (1) the words “is for a sign,” since Paul used these words in the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “prophecy is for a sign, not” (2) the word “is,” since Paul’s language often implies “is” when there is no verb. See the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	14	22	bddb		ἡ&προφητεία, οὐ	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	If Paul implies “is for a sign” here, then “sign” could mean what it meant earlier in the verse, but it more likely means something different. “Sign” could be: (1) a positive indication of what convicts or impresses people. Alternate translation: “prophesy is impressive, not” or “prophecy is convicting, not” (2) a negative indication of God’s judgment or wrath. Alternate translation: “prophecy is an indication of God’s judgment, not”
-1CO	14	22	mb3p	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&προφητεία	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **prophecy**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “prophesy.” Alternate translation: “what people prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	22	vl45	figs-infostructure	σημεῖόν & οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις & οὐ τοῖς ἀπίστοις, ἀλλὰ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language would naturally put those whom the signs are **to** before those whom they are **not to**, you could rearrange the clauses so that the **not** clause is second. Alternate translation: “a sign to the unbelievers, not to those who believe … is to those who believe, not to the unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	14	22	qj5f	figs-ellipsis	ἡ & προφητεία, οὐ	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians could have inferred: (1) the words “is for a sign,” since Paul used these words in the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “prophecy is for a sign, not” (2) the word “is,” since Paul’s language often implies “is” when there is no verb. See the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	14	22	bddb		ἡ & προφητεία, οὐ	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	If Paul implies “is for a sign” here, then “sign” could mean what it meant earlier in the verse, but it more likely means something different. “Sign” could be: (1) a positive indication of what convicts or impresses people. Alternate translation: “prophesy is impressive, not” or “prophecy is convicting, not” (2) a negative indication of God’s judgment or wrath. Alternate translation: “prophecy is an indication of God’s judgment, not”
+1CO	14	22	mb3p	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & προφητεία	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **prophecy**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “prophesy.” Alternate translation: “what people prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	23	ec5x	figs-hypo	ἐὰν οὖν συνέλθῃ ἡ ἐκκλησία ὅλη ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ, καὶ πάντες λαλῶσιν γλώσσαις, εἰσέλθωσιν δὲ ἰδιῶται ἢ ἄπιστοι, οὐκ ἐροῦσιν	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **the whole church** is together, and **all speak in tongues**. Then, he wants them to imagine what would happen if **ungifted or unbelievers** are present and hear **all** speaking **in tongues**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose, then, that the whole church comes together to the same place, and they all speak in tongues. Suppose that ungifted or unbelievers come in. Will they not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-1CO	14	23	mlmt	figs-doublet	συνέλθῃ&ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Here Paul uses both **come together** and **to the same place** to emphasize that he is speaking about an official gathering of the church for worship. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “might come together” or “might be in the same place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	14	23	mlmt	figs-doublet	συνέλθῃ & ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Here Paul uses both **come together** and **to the same place** to emphasize that he is speaking about an official gathering of the church for worship. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you can use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “might come together” or “might be in the same place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	14	23	agza	translate-unknown	ἰδιῶται	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Here, just as in [14:16](../14/16.md), **ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the **tongues** that the other people are speaking. Alternate translation: “people who do not understand tongues” or “uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	14	23	n03r	figs-go	εἰσέλθωσιν	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Your language may say “would go in” rather than **would come in** in this situation. Use whatever form is natural. Alternate translation: “would go in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	14	23	hj3d	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε?	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “yes, they will.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “they will definitely say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	14	23	xiiq	translate-unknown	μαίνεσθε	1	would they not say that you are insane?	People who are **insane** act in ways that are not normal or acceptable. Often these ways are dangerous, strange, or irrational. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **insane** with a word or phrase that identifies people who are acting in irrational and strange ways. Alternate translation: “you are out of your minds” or “you are mad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	14	23	fa7i	figs-123person	μαίνεσθε	1	would they not say that you are insane?	Here, **you** refers back to **the whole church** and **they** who **speak in tongues**. Paul switches from third person to second person to apply the hypothetical situation to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this switch with second person earlier in the verse or use the third person here. Alternate translation: “the church is insane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1CO	14	24	mm3e	figs-hypo	ἐὰν&πάντες προφητεύωσιν, εἰσέλθῃ δέ τις ἄπιστος ἢ ἰδιώτης, ἐλέγχεται	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **all would prophesy**, and he implies that the whole church is together for this hypothetical situation, just like for the last one (see [14:23](../14/23.md)). Then, he wants them to imagine what would happen if **some unbeliever** or **ungifted person** is present and hears **all** prophesying. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that they all would prophesy. Suppose that some unbeliever or ungifted person comes in. In that situation, he is convicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+1CO	14	24	mm3e	figs-hypo	ἐὰν & πάντες προφητεύωσιν, εἰσέλθῃ δέ τις ἄπιστος ἢ ἰδιώτης, ἐλέγχεται	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **all would prophesy**, and he implies that the whole church is together for this hypothetical situation, just like for the last one (see [14:23](../14/23.md)). Then, he wants them to imagine what would happen if **some unbeliever** or **ungifted person** is present and hears **all** prophesying. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that they all would prophesy. Suppose that some unbeliever or ungifted person comes in. In that situation, he is convicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1CO	14	24	feby	figs-123person	πάντες προφητεύωσιν	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Here Paul uses the third person because he is again using a hypothetical situation. However, he wants the Corinthians to apply this hypothetical situation to themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **they** applies to the Corinthians with the second person instead. Alternate translation: “you all would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1CO	14	24	d5vi	translate-unknown	ἰδιώτης	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Here, just as in [14:23](../14/23.md), **ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the tongues that the other people are speaking. Alternate translation: “person who does not understand tongues” or “uninitiated person” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	14	24	ihkk	figs-go	εἰσέλθῃ	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Your language may say “might go in” rather than **might come in** in this situation. Use whatever form is natural. Alternate translation: “might go in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	14	24	xxy5	figs-parallelism	ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Here Paul uses the same words and structure twice, only changing the verb. He does this to emphasize how the “prophecy” affects the **unbeliever or ungifted person**. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers might be confused as to why Paul repeats himself, you can combine these two clauses into one. Alternate translation: “he is confronted by all” or “he is convicted and examined by all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1CO	14	24	izrj	figs-activepassive	ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to emphasize the person who is **convicted** or **examined** rather than emphasizing the **all** that is doing the actions. Alternate translation: “all convict him, all examine him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	14	24	gr05	figs-gendernotations	ἐλέγχεται&ἀνακρίνεται	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she is convicted … he or she is examined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	24	gr05	figs-gendernotations	ἐλέγχεται & ἀνακρίνεται	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she is convicted … he or she is examined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	14	24	iprk		ὑπὸ πάντων	-1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Here, **all** could refer to: (1) everything that the people who **prophesy** are saying. Alternate translation: “by all that is said … by all that is said” or “by all the words … by all the words” (2) **they all** who are prophesying. Alternate translation: “by all who are prophesying … by all who are prophesying”
 1CO	14	25	ma47	figs-metonymy	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ	1	The secrets of his heart would be revealed	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** as the place where humans think in your culture, or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the secrets of his mind” or “his secret thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	14	25	l62f	figs-metaphor	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται	1		Here Paul speaks as if **the secrets of his heart** were invisible objects that could **become visible**. He speaks in this way to indicate that others now know **the secrets** as much as if they saw them **become visible**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the secrets of his heart become known” or “the secrets of his heart are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	25	w31w	figs-idiom	πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον	1	he would fall on his face and worship God	In Paul’s culture, “falling” **on** one’s **face** refers to kneeling down and putting one’s **face** close to the ground. This was a position used to show respect and sometimes worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **having fallen on his face** with a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having bowed down” or “kneeling to show respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	14	25	q5ee	figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ&πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει	1	he would fall on his face and worship God	Although **his** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** and **he** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her face, he or she will worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	25	q5ee	figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ & πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει	1	he would fall on his face and worship God	Although **his** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** and **he** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her face, he or she will worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	14	25	tou0	figs-quotations	ἀπαγγέλλων, ὅτι ὄντως ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν	1	he would fall on his face and worship God	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “declaring that God is really among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	14	26	bv9k	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί?	1	What is tp be then, brothers?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or a clarification. Alternate translation: “This is what it is, brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	14	26	f8ai	figs-explicit	τί οὖν ἐστιν	1	What is tp be then, brothers?	Here Paul could be asking this question about: (1) what his argument means for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “What then do I mean” (2) what the Corinthians should be doing. Alternate translation: “What then should you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1979,20 +1979,20 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	28	rlag	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	must interpret	Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	14	28	bkc6	figs-explicit	διερμηνευτής	1	must interpret	Here, much like in [14:26–27](../14/26.md), **interpreter** refers specifically to someone who can interpret a tongue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpreter** is the person who “interprets” the tongue. Alternate translation: “an interpreter for the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	28	znt9	figs-extrainfo	μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής	1	must interpret	Just as in [14:27](../14/27.md), the **interpreter** could be someone who speaks in tongues or some other person. If possible, you should translate **an interpreter** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking in a tongue or to someone else. Alternate translation: “no one can interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-1CO	14	28	u0ia	figs-gendernotations	σιγάτω&ἑαυτῷ&λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	14	28	c2wj	figs-imperative3p	σιγάτω&λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be silent … he needs to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
-1CO	14	28	nzye	figs-explicit	σιγάτω&λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Here, **let him be silent** and **let him speak** refer specifically to speaking in “tongues.” They do not refer in general to any speaking **in church**. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “let him not speak the tongue … let him speak the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	14	28	u0ia	figs-gendernotations	σιγάτω & ἑαυτῷ & λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	28	c2wj	figs-imperative3p	σιγάτω & λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be silent … he needs to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	14	28	nzye	figs-explicit	σιγάτω & λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Here, **let him be silent** and **let him speak** refer specifically to speaking in “tongues.” They do not refer in general to any speaking **in church**. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “let him not speak the tongue … let him speak the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	28	pqky	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	must interpret	Here, just as in [14:19](../14/19.md), **in the church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meets to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the church** by clarifying that **the church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	14	28	fl59	figs-idiom	ἑαυτῷ&καὶ τῷ Θεῷ	1	must interpret	Here, **to himself and to God** could refer to: (1) how the person should keep the “tongue” between **himself** and **God**. In other words, the only people who experience the “tongue” are the person speaking it and God. This would mean that the person speaking the “tongue” says words in their head or very quietly. Alternate translation: “in his mind to God” or “quietly to God” (2) how the person should speak the “tongue” after the meeting is over and “he” is by **himself**. In this way, only the person who speaks the “tongue” and **God** hear it. Alternate translation: “to God when he is by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	14	28	fl59	figs-idiom	ἑαυτῷ & καὶ τῷ Θεῷ	1	must interpret	Here, **to himself and to God** could refer to: (1) how the person should keep the “tongue” between **himself** and **God**. In other words, the only people who experience the “tongue” are the person speaking it and God. This would mean that the person speaking the “tongue” says words in their head or very quietly. Alternate translation: “in his mind to God” or “quietly to God” (2) how the person should speak the “tongue” after the meeting is over and “he” is by **himself**. In this way, only the person who speaks the “tongue” and **God** hear it. Alternate translation: “to God when he is by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	14	29	x2fd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Let two or three prophets speak	Here, **But** introduces similar instructions about a new topic (prophecy). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a related topic. Alternate translation: “In the same way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	14	29	a9iz	figs-explicit	προφῆται&δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	Paul does not explicitly state in what situation **two or three prophets** should **speak**. He does not mean that only **two or three** prophets can ever speak. He could be speaking about: (1) each time the believers gathered to worship God. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak every time you gather together” (2) the periods between when **the others evaluate**. In this case, **two or three prophets** can speak before the evaluation happens. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak consecutively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	14	29	a9iz	figs-explicit	προφῆται & δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	Paul does not explicitly state in what situation **two or three prophets** should **speak**. He does not mean that only **two or three** prophets can ever speak. He could be speaking about: (1) each time the believers gathered to worship God. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak every time you gather together” (2) the periods between when **the others evaluate**. In this case, **two or three prophets** can speak before the evaluation happens. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak consecutively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	29	kw3u	figs-explicit	δύο ἢ τρεῖς	1	Let two or three prophets speak	Here, **two or three** does not restrict the number of prophets to only those two numbers. Rather, Paul uses **two or three** to give a general idea of how many **prophets** should **speak** when believers gather for worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **two or three** by including a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is giving examples or rough estimates. Alternate translation: “roughly two or three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	14	29	u33q	figs-imperative3p	προφῆται&δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν, καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “two or three prophets must speak, and the others must evaluate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	14	29	u33q	figs-imperative3p	προφῆται & δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν, καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “two or three prophets must speak, and the others must evaluate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	14	29	qdb8	writing-pronouns	οἱ ἄλλοι	1	Let two or three prophets speak	Here, **the others** could refer to: (1) all the believers who are not prophesying. Alternate translation: “the rest of the believers” (2) all the prophets who are not prophesying. Alternate translation: “the other prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	14	29	dsmv	figs-explicit	οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	Here Paul does not state what **the others** are supposed to **evaluate**. He implies that it is what the **prophets speak**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could refer to what the **prophets speak** explicitly. Alternate translation: “let the others evaluate what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	30	zd6m	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν	1	if a revelation is given to another	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **something** might be **revealed to another**, or it might not. He specifies the result for **something is revealed to another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “when” or “suppose.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	14	30	sl1q	figs-activepassive	ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ καθημένῳ	1	if a revelation is given to another	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to keep the focus on the “revelation” and the person who receives it. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “another who is sitting there receives a revelation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	14	30	lcmf	figs-explicit	ἄλλῳ&καθημένῳ	1	if a revelation is given to another	Here, **sitting** implies that the person is participating in the worship when the believers gather together. It further implies that the person is not the one speaking since the speaker would stand in Paul’s culture. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could state them explicitly. Alternate translation: “to another who is sitting and listening” or “to another worshiper who is listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	14	30	lcmf	figs-explicit	ἄλλῳ & καθημένῳ	1	if a revelation is given to another	Here, **sitting** implies that the person is participating in the worship when the believers gather together. It further implies that the person is not the one speaking since the speaker would stand in Paul’s culture. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could state them explicitly. Alternate translation: “to another who is sitting and listening” or “to another worshiper who is listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	30	e2m4	figs-imperative3p	ὁ πρῶτος σιγάτω	1	if a revelation is given to another	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the first must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	14	30	i3m1	writing-pronouns	ὁ πρῶτος	1	if a revelation is given to another	Here, **the first** refers back to one of the “two or three prophets” in [14:29](../14/29.md). It identifies the person who is speaking while **another** is **sitting there**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the first** with a word or phrase that identifies the person who is speaking while **something is revealed to another**. Alternate translation: “the one currently prophesying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	14	31	oytt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	prophesy one by one	Here, **For** introduces the reason why Paul wants “the first” speaker to “be silent” when another receives a revelation (see [14:30](../14/30.md)): if they do what he asks, **all are able to prophesy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word that introduces a reason for a command. Alternate translation: “Do that because, in this way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -2000,41 +2000,41 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	31	xr69	figs-idiom	καθ’ ἕνα	1	prophesy one by one	Here, **one by one** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **one by one** with a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “in turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	14	31	nrq1	figs-activepassive	πάντες παρακαλῶνται	1	all may be encouraged	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to emphasize the person who is **encouraged** instead of the person doing the encouraging. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the ones who **prophesy** do it. Alternate translation: “the prophets may encourage all” or “the prophecies may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	14	32	rcat	figs-activepassive	πνεύματα προφητῶν, προφήταις ὑποτάσσεται	1	all may be encouraged	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the **spirits** rather than focusing on the **prophets** If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **prophets** do it. Alternate translation: “prophets subject the spirits of prophets” or “prophets govern the spirits of prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	14	32	o950	translate-unknown	πνεύματα προφητῶν&ὑποτάσσεται	1	all may be encouraged	Here, **the spirits of the prophets** could refer to: (1) the “spiritual” gift that the **prophets** have by the power of the Holy Spirit. This is supported by [14:12](../14/12.md), where the word that is here translated **spirits** is there translated “spiritual gifts.” Alternate translation: “the spiritual gifts of prophets are subject to” or “what the Holy Spirit enables prophets to do is subject to” (2) the **spirits** that are part of the **prophets**, that is, their inner life or nonphysical parts. Alternate translation: “how the prophets act is subject to” or “the minds of prophets are subject to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	14	32	o950	translate-unknown	πνεύματα προφητῶν & ὑποτάσσεται	1	all may be encouraged	Here, **the spirits of the prophets** could refer to: (1) the “spiritual” gift that the **prophets** have by the power of the Holy Spirit. This is supported by [14:12](../14/12.md), where the word that is here translated **spirits** is there translated “spiritual gifts.” Alternate translation: “the spiritual gifts of prophets are subject to” or “what the Holy Spirit enables prophets to do is subject to” (2) the **spirits** that are part of the **prophets**, that is, their inner life or nonphysical parts. Alternate translation: “how the prophets act is subject to” or “the minds of prophets are subject to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	14	32	cli1		προφήταις	1	all may be encouraged	Here, **prophets** could refer to (1) the same **prophets** who have **the spirits**. In this case, **prophets** control their own **spirits**. Alternate translation: “these prophets” (2) other **prophets**. In this case, some **prophets** (those who are not speaking) control the **spirits** of different **prophets** (those who are speaking). Alternate translation: “the other prophets”
 1CO	14	33	iki9	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	God is not a God of confusion	Here, **For** introduces the reason why “the spirits of the prophets are subject to prophets” ([14:32](../14/32.md)). Since the prophetic gift comes from God, it should fit with who God is. Since God is **not of confusion, but of peace**, so the prophetic gift must be **of peace** as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a statement. Alternate translation: “you could know this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	14	33	my65	figs-infostructure	οὐ&ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης	1	God is not a God of confusion	If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “God is of peace, not of confusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	14	33	ze95	figs-possession	οὐ&ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης	1	God is not a God of confusion	Here Paul uses the possessive form to state that **God** is characterized by **peace**, not by **confusion**. If your language does not use the possessive form to characterize someone, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “God is not a confused God but a peaceful God” or “God is not related to confusion but to peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	14	33	cu4y	figs-abstractnouns	ἀκαταστασίας&ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης	1	God is not a God of confusion	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confusion** and **peace**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “confused” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “confused, but peaceful” or “a confused God, but a peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	33	my65	figs-infostructure	οὐ & ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης	1	God is not a God of confusion	If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “God is of peace, not of confusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	14	33	ze95	figs-possession	οὐ & ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης	1	God is not a God of confusion	Here Paul uses the possessive form to state that **God** is characterized by **peace**, not by **confusion**. If your language does not use the possessive form to characterize someone, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “God is not a confused God but a peaceful God” or “God is not related to confusion but to peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	14	33	cu4y	figs-abstractnouns	ἀκαταστασίας & ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης	1	God is not a God of confusion	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confusion** and **peace**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “confused” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “confused, but peaceful” or “a confused God, but a peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	14	33	k0ma	figs-infostructure	εἰρήνης. ὡς ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῶν ἁγίων,	1	God is not a God of confusion	The phrase **As in all the churches of the saints** could modify: (1) the two verses that follow. Supporting this option is how the first half of this verse sounds like a conclusion and how it does not make much sense to say that **God** is a specific way **in all the churches**. See the ULT for this option. (2) the first sentence in this verse. Supporting this option is how “in the churches” is repeated near the beginning of the next verse and how Paul uses a phrase similar to this one at the end of sentences (see [4:17](../04/17.md); [7:17](../07/17.md)). Alternate translation: “of peace, as in all the churches of the saints.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	14	33	m76o	figs-metaphor	ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις	1	God is not a God of confusion	Here, **in all the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in all the churches** by clarifying that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in all the gatherings of believers” or “in all the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	34	gjv2	figs-explicit	αἱ γυναῖκες	1	let be silent	Here, **women** could refer to: (1) married **women** (and possibly **women** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to “their own husbands” in [14:35](../14/35.md). Alternate translation: “wives” (2) **women** in general. Alternate translation: “women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	14	34	ssjr	figs-explicit	αἱ γυναῖκες&σιγάτωσαν&λαλεῖν	1	let be silent	Here, **be silent** and **speak** could refer to: (1) speaking or not speaking in specific situations related to “examining” prophecies (see [14:29](../14/29.md)). These specific situations would be when the woman’s husband or close male relative is the one who has prophesied. Alternate translation: “let the women be silent when their husbands are prophesying … to speak when their husbands are prophesying” (2) speaking or not speaking in disruptive ways, particularly asking questions improperly, talking loudly, or speaking out of turn. Paul is using **be silent** as he did in [14:28](../14/28.md), [30](../14/30.md): it does not prohibit any kind of talking but refers to “keeping quiet” when speaking would be disruptive. Alternate translation: “let the women avoid disruptive talk … to disrupt worship by speaking” (3) any official speaking, including prophecy, discerning prophecies, and tongues. Alternate translation: “remain silent … ever to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	14	34	h6ip	figs-imperative3p	αἱ γυναῖκες&σιγάτωσαν	1	let be silent	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the women must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	14	34	ssjr	figs-explicit	αἱ γυναῖκες & σιγάτωσαν & λαλεῖν	1	let be silent	Here, **be silent** and **speak** could refer to: (1) speaking or not speaking in specific situations related to “examining” prophecies (see [14:29](../14/29.md)). These specific situations would be when the woman’s husband or close male relative is the one who has prophesied. Alternate translation: “let the women be silent when their husbands are prophesying … to speak when their husbands are prophesying” (2) speaking or not speaking in disruptive ways, particularly asking questions improperly, talking loudly, or speaking out of turn. Paul is using **be silent** as he did in [14:28](../14/28.md), [30](../14/30.md): it does not prohibit any kind of talking but refers to “keeping quiet” when speaking would be disruptive. Alternate translation: “let the women avoid disruptive talk … to disrupt worship by speaking” (3) any official speaking, including prophecy, discerning prophecies, and tongues. Alternate translation: “remain silent … ever to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	14	34	h6ip	figs-imperative3p	αἱ γυναῖκες & σιγάτωσαν	1	let be silent	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the women must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	14	34	d18m	figs-metaphor	ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις	1	let be silent	Here, **in the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in the churches** by clarifying that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gatherings of believers” or “in the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	14	34	i3t3	figs-idiom	οὐ&ἐπιτρέπεται αὐταῖς	1	let be silent	Here, **it is not permitted** is a way to indicate that a custom or a practice is strongly forbidden. It does not state who forbids the custom or practice but rather indicates that this is generally accepted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it is not permitted** with a comparable word or phrase that refers to a general prohibition. Alternate translation: “they are not allowed” or “they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	14	34	i3t3	figs-idiom	οὐ & ἐπιτρέπεται αὐταῖς	1	let be silent	Here, **it is not permitted** is a way to indicate that a custom or a practice is strongly forbidden. It does not state who forbids the custom or practice but rather indicates that this is generally accepted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it is not permitted** with a comparable word or phrase that refers to a general prohibition. Alternate translation: “they are not allowed” or “they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	14	34	rwgg	figs-imperative3p	ὑποτασσέσθωσαν	1	let be silent	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let them be in submission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	14	34	edeg	figs-explicit	ὑποτασσέσθωσαν	1	let be silent	Here Paul does not state to whom or what the **women** are **to be in submission**. If possible, you also should not express what they are **to be in submission** to. If you must consider the object of **submission**, Paul could imply that the **submission** is to: (1) husbands (or other close male relatives). Alternate translation: “to be in submission to their husbands” (2) to the order God has given the church. Alternate translation: “to act in line with the order of the church” (3) to the church as a whole, particularly the leaders. Alternate translation: “to be in submission to other believers” or “to be in submission to the leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	34	nszq	figs-extrainfo	καθὼς καὶ ὁ νόμος λέγει	1	let be silent	Here Paul does not specify what he means by **law**. It could refer to [Genesis 3:16](../gen/03/16.md). However, it may just be a more general reference to the first five books of the Old Testament (the “Pentateuch”) or to the entire Old Testament (as Paul uses **law** in [14:21](../14/21.md)). If possible, do not clarify what meaning of **law** Paul had in mind, since he does not identify exactly what he means by **law**. Alternate translation: “just as you can find it in God’s commandments” or “just as it is written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	14	35	orcw	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	let be silent	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **desire to learn anything**, or they may not. He specifies the result for **if they desire to learn anything**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “suppose.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	14	35	tzao	figs-explicit	τι μαθεῖν θέλουσιν	1	let be silent	Here Paul does not state what the “women” or “wives” might **desire to learn** about. He could imply that they want **to learn** more and **ask** questions about: (1) what their husbands have said **in church**. Alternate translation: “they desire to learn anything about what their husbands have said” (2) what anyone has said **in church**. Alternate translation: “they desire to learn about what someone said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	35	hx7r	figs-imperative3p	ἐπερωτάτωσαν	1	let be silent	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “they must ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
-1CO	14	35	a1dt	figs-extrainfo	αἰσχρὸν&ἐστιν	1	let be silent	Here Paul does not express for whom this behavior is **disgraceful**. He almost certainly means that it brings “disgrace” on the woman and probably her family too. It may also bring “disgrace” on the whole group of believers. If possible, use an expression that is general enough to capture any or all of these ideas. Alternate translation: “it is shameful” or “it brings shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+1CO	14	35	a1dt	figs-extrainfo	αἰσχρὸν & ἐστιν	1	let be silent	Here Paul does not express for whom this behavior is **disgraceful**. He almost certainly means that it brings “disgrace” on the woman and probably her family too. It may also bring “disgrace” on the whole group of believers. If possible, use an expression that is general enough to capture any or all of these ideas. Alternate translation: “it is shameful” or “it brings shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	14	35	fqot	figs-explicit	γυναικὶ	1	let be silent	Here, just as in [14:34](../14/34.md), **woman** could refer to: (1) any married **woman** (and possibly any **woman** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to **their own husbands** in this verse. Alternate translation: “for a wife” (2) any **woman** in general. Alternate translation: “for any woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	35	sj8l	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	let be silent	Here, **in church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gathering of believers who meet to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in church** by clarifying that **church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “in the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	36	fysl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?	The word **Or** introduces an alternate to the instructions that Paul has given about proper order in worship, including what he has said in [14:27–35](../14/27.md) but especially [14:33b–35](../14/33.md). Paul uses **Or** to indicate that thinking that **the word of God** went **out from** them is the opposite of obeying what he has said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word or phrase that introduces an alternative. Alternate translation: “Suppose you do not want to follow my instructions. Consider this:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	14	36	h8lp	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν?	1	Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “no, it did not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions by stating the ideas with strong negations. If you do so, you will need to replace **Or** with different transition words. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the word of God certainly did not go out from you, and it certainly did not come only to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	14	36	o8sf	figs-personification	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν&κατήντησεν	1	Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?	Here Paul speaks as if **the word of God** were a person who could travel. He speaks in this way to emphasize **the word** over the people who proclaim that **word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that people travel with the **word** and indicate the emphasis on **the word of God** in another way. Alternate translation: “did the people who proclaim the word of God go out … did people who proclaim it come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1CO	14	36	tmfn	figs-go	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν&εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν	1	the word of God	In the first question, **go out** refers to the Corinthians as the source of the **word of God**. In the second question, **come** refers to the Corinthians as the recipients of the **word of God**. Use movement words that make this clear in your language. Alternate translation: “did the word of God depart … did it reach only you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	14	36	o8sf	figs-personification	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν & κατήντησεν	1	Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?	Here Paul speaks as if **the word of God** were a person who could travel. He speaks in this way to emphasize **the word** over the people who proclaim that **word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that people travel with the **word** and indicate the emphasis on **the word of God** in another way. Alternate translation: “did the people who proclaim the word of God go out … did people who proclaim it come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1CO	14	36	tmfn	figs-go	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν & εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν	1	the word of God	In the first question, **go out** refers to the Corinthians as the source of the **word of God**. In the second question, **come** refers to the Corinthians as the recipients of the **word of God**. Use movement words that make this clear in your language. Alternate translation: “did the word of God depart … did it reach only you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	14	36	mj6b	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	14	36	hdu2	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Here Paul uses the possessive to describe a **word** that is: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	14	37	lrzp	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τις δοκεῖ προφήτης εἶναι ἢ πνευματικός	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might think that they are “prophets” or **spiritual**, but he knows that some of them do think in this way. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “Whoever thinks himself to be a prophet or spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1CO	14	37	h265	figs-gendernotations	δοκεῖ&ἐπιγινωσκέτω	1	he should acknowledge	Although **himself** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **himself** and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “thinks himself or herself … let him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	14	37	h265	figs-gendernotations	δοκεῖ & ἐπιγινωσκέτω	1	he should acknowledge	Although **himself** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **himself** and **him** with non gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “thinks himself or herself … let him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	14	37	ab6u	figs-imperative3p	ἐπιγινωσκέτω	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to acknowledge” or “he should acknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	14	37	b81a	figs-pastforfuture	γράφω	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul uses the present tense to refer to this letter, 1 Corinthians. If your language would not use the present tense to refer to a letter that one is currently writing, you could use the tense that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1CO	14	37	z0hu	figs-possession	Κυρίου&ἐντολή	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul uses the possessive form to the describe the **command** as: (1) a **command** that he gives with the authority of **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord authorizes” or “a command that has the Lord’s authority” (2) a **command** that **the Lord** gave or currently gives. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	14	37	rc1r	figs-abstractnouns	Κυρίου&ἐντολή	1	he should acknowledge	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “what the Lord commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	14	38	ilzx	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&τις ἀγνοεῖ	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul speaks as **if** some of the Corinthians might be **ignorant**, but he expects that some of them truly might be. He uses **if** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **if** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “whoever is ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	14	37	z0hu	figs-possession	Κυρίου & ἐντολή	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul uses the possessive form to the describe the **command** as: (1) a **command** that he gives with the authority of **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord authorizes” or “a command that has the Lord’s authority” (2) a **command** that **the Lord** gave or currently gives. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	14	37	rc1r	figs-abstractnouns	Κυρίου & ἐντολή	1	he should acknowledge	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “what the Lord commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	14	38	ilzx	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & τις ἀγνοεῖ	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul speaks as **if** some of the Corinthians might be **ignorant**, but he expects that some of them truly might be. He uses **if** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **if** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “whoever is ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	14	38	m1lx		ἀγνοεῖ, ἀγνοείτω	1	he should acknowledge	Here, **ignorant** could refer to: (1) the opposite of “acknowledge” in the last verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)), that is, not accepting the authority of something or someone. Alternate translation: “does not acknowledge this, let him not be acknowledged” (2) not knowing that something is true. Alternate translation: “does not know this, let him continue not to know”
 1CO	14	38	b8fk	figs-explicit	ἀγνοεῖ	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul does not state what the person **is ignorant** about. However, the previous verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)) implies that the person **is ignorant** about how what Paul has written is a command of the Lord. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “is ignorant that I am writing a command from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	38	fde9	figs-imperative3p	ἀγνοείτω	1	he should acknowledge	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
@@ -2043,24 +2043,24 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	38	cwbs	translate-textvariants	ἀγνοείτω	1	he should acknowledge	In Paul’s language, **let him be ignorant** and “he is considered ignorant” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “he is considered ignorant” here, many early and important manuscripts have **let him be ignorant**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “he is considered ignorant,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	14	39	xgjw	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues	Here, **So then** introduces a conclusion of the argument from [14:1–38](../14/01.md). Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces the conclusion to an argument. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “To sum up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	14	39	oe0c	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the term to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	14	39	jvr7		τὸ λαλεῖν&γλώσσαις	1	do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues	Alternate translation: “speaking in tongues”
-1CO	14	40	d7ia	figs-activepassive	πάντα&γινέσθω	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to avoid stating who is “doing” **all things**, which makes the imperative more general. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do the action. Alternate translation: “you should do all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	14	40	mrnf	figs-imperative3p	πάντα&γινέσθω	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “all things must be done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	14	39	jvr7		τὸ λαλεῖν & γλώσσαις	1	do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues	Alternate translation: “speaking in tongues”
+1CO	14	40	d7ia	figs-activepassive	πάντα & γινέσθω	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to avoid stating who is “doing” **all things**, which makes the imperative more general. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do the action. Alternate translation: “you should do all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	14	40	mrnf	figs-imperative3p	πάντα & γινέσθω	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “all things must be done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	14	40	y5wb	translate-unknown	εὐσχημόνως	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	Here, **properly** refers to behavior that is appropriate for the situation. See how you translated the similar word “appropriate” in [7:35](../07/35.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **properly** with a word or phrase that refers to appropriate or decent behavior. Alternate translation: “correctly” or “decently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	14	40	yh07	translate-unknown	κατὰ τάξιν	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	Here, **in order** refers to how things, people, and actions are in proper place and sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in order** with a word or phrase that indicates such proper and organized things, people, and actions. Alternate translation: “in an organized way” or “in a correctly arranged way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	intro	abci			0		# 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>9. On the Resurrection of the Dead (15:1–58)<br>      * The Gospel and Resurrection (15:1–11)<br>      * Proof of Christ’s Resurrection (15:12–34)<br>      * The Resurrection Body (15:35–58)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [15:54b](../15/54.md) (from [Isaiah 25:8](../isa/25/08.md)) and [15:55](../15/55.md) (from [Hosea 13:14](../hos/13/14.md)).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Denying the resurrection<br><br>In [15:12](../15/12.md), Paul notes that some of the Corinthians are denying the resurrection of the dead. There are at least three possible reasons why they might do this: (1) they hold to a philosophy or theology that denies afterlife altogether; (2) they believe that some form of resurrection has already happened; and (3) they think that the body is not valuable or cannot resurrect. It is likely that a combination of these three reasons may account for why some Corinthians were denying that the dead resurrect. However, Paul himself only argues for the resurrection, and he does not explain what the Corinthians believe. So, you do not need to choose a specific view about why some of the Corinthians were denying the resurrection.<br><br>### The resurrection of the body<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul emphasizes that the resurrection of Christ and believers is in the body. He clarifies that this is a glorious, transformed body, but it is still a body. Make sure that you express Paul’s references to “resurrection” or “being raised” in such a way that they imply that bodies are given life again. Paul does not clarify in this chapter what happens to nonbelievers, since he focuses on believers. At the same time, he uses very general language to refer to “the resurrection of the dead.” If possible, preserve this general language without making any explicit claims about what happens to nonbelievers after they die. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])<br><br>### Adam and Christ<br><br>In [15:45–49](../15/45.md), Paul uses the “first man” Adam (the first human that God created) and the “last man” Jesus (the first human to rise from the dead) to speak about the current body and the resurrection body. Paul’s point is that everyone who is alive now on earth has a body like Adam’s, while those who rise from the dead will have a body like Jesus’ body. In this way, Jesus is a “Second Adam” because he is the first human to have the new kind of body. Make sure that your readers know who “Adam” is and that these verses compare and contrast Adam and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/adam]])<br><br>### “Natural” and “spiritual” bodies<br><br>In [15:44](../15/44.md), Paul introduces the terms “natural” and “spiritual” to describe two different kinds of bodies. He also refers to the “natural” body as “perishable” and “mortal,” and he refers to the “spiritual” body as “imperishable” or “incorruptible” and “immortal.” The contrast between these two kinds of bodies is not about how material or fleshly they are. Rather, the contrast is about whether they can die or not and whether they can live in the world when God has renewed it or not. Use words that make contrasts between different kinds of bodies, not words that make contrasts between bodies and other things, such as spirits. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Falling asleep<br><br>In [15:6](../15/06.md), [18](../15/18.md), [20–21](../15/20.md), Paul refers to people “falling asleep.” In his culture, this was a polite way to refer to dying. It is also possible that Paul uses this euphemism because people who “fall asleep” eventually “wake up,” just like those who die will eventually resurrect. However, “falling asleep” is a common euphemism for dying, so Paul may not mean anything more than that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate “falling asleep” by using a comparable euphemism or expressing the idea plainly. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])<br><br>### Parallelisms<br><br>In this chapter, and particularly in [15:39–44](../15/39.md), [53–55](../15/53.md), Paul uses parallel structures to make his point powerfully. Often, these parallel structures repeat every word except for one or two. The words that are different either add further ideas or make distinctions between ideas. If repetition is powerful in your language, preserve these parallelisms. If it would be helpful in your language, you could omit some words. In some cases, multiple parallel clauses can be expressed as one clause. In other cases, multiple parallel clauses can be expressed in shortened form using lists. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [15:12](../15/12.md), [29–30](../15/29.md), [32](../15/32.md), [55](../15/55.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Hypothetical arguments<br><br>In [15:13–19](../15/13.md), Paul shows the Corinthians what would be true if the dead were not raised. He does not believe that this is true, but he assumes that it is true for the sake of his argument. These verses thus build from the hypothesis that the dead are not raised and go on to show that many other things which the Corinthians believe and do are worthless if the hypothesis is true. Use a form in your language that shows that Paul does not believe that the dead are not raised but that he uses this claim as the basis for a hypothetical argument. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])<br><br>### Farming analogy<br><br>In [15:36–38](../15/36.md), Paul uses a farming analogy. Just as a seed is sown (buried) in the ground and then transforms into a plant that looks very different than the seed, so also the human body is buried in the ground and then is transformed into a new body that is different than the one we have now. Paul returns to the language of “sowing” in [15:42–44](../15/42.md) but applies it directly to bodies. If possible, preserve the farming language throughout these sections, and use words and phrases that match farming techniques in your culture.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Son subordinated to Father?<br><br>In [15:28](../15/28.md), Paul says that “the Son himself” will “be subjected” to the Father, “the one who subjected all things to him.” This does not mean that the Son is inferior to the Father or is no longer God. Rather, it means that the Son obeys the Father, and the Father acts through the Son. Avoid using words or phrases in your language that imply that the Son is inferior to the Father in nature, power, or glory. Instead, use words or phrases that imply that the Son obeys and acts for the Father when relating to what God has created. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])<br><br>### “Body” in the singular<br><br>In [15:35–54](../15/35.md), Paul speaks about a “spiritual body” and a “natural body.” While he varies the descriptors he uses and sometimes uses adjectives alone without the word “body,” he always refers to each of these bodies in the singular. He does this because his language uses the singular form to speak about a category. Thus, when Paul speaks about a “spiritual body,” he is referring to the category to which spiritual bodies belong. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to a category, or if your readers would find the singular form confusing, you can use a plural form or another form that your language uses to refer to a category. The UST models several different options throughout the chapter.<br><br>### Common sayings<br><br>In [15:32–33](../15/32.md), Paul quotes two sayings that the Corinthians would have recognized. While the saying in [15:32](../15/32.md) can also be found in [Isaiah 22:13](../isa/22/13.md), Paul does not seem to have Isaiah in mind. Rather, he assumes the Corinthians would know both of the sentences he quotes as common sayings. Use a form in your language that introduces common sayings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	15	1	gc6n	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **Now** introduces a new topic that Paul will speak about for many verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	15	1	la9v		γνωρίζω&ὑμῖν, ἀδελφοί	1	make known to you	Paul makes it clear in the rest of the verse that this is not the first time he has made **known** the **gospel** to the Corinthians. If **I make known to you** sounds like Paul is making it known for the first time, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is reminding them of the **the gospel** or giving them more information about it. Alternate translation: “I again make known to you, brothers,” or “I remind you, brothers, about”
+1CO	15	1	la9v		γνωρίζω & ὑμῖν, ἀδελφοί	1	make known to you	Paul makes it clear in the rest of the verse that this is not the first time he has made **known** the **gospel** to the Corinthians. If **I make known to you** sounds like Paul is making it known for the first time, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is reminding them of the **the gospel** or giving them more information about it. Alternate translation: “I again make known to you, brothers,” or “I remind you, brothers, about”
 1CO	15	1	c3yo	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Connecting Statement:	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	15	1	xv53	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἑστήκατε	1	on which you stand	Here Paul speaks as if **the gospel** were something solid **on which** the Corinthians could **stand**. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the gospel** is trustworthy, like a firm foundation or a well-built floor. He also speaks in this way to indicate that the Corinthians trust **the gospel** as much as if it were a floor that was keeping them from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “which also you trust completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	2	i2h6	figs-infostructure	δι’ οὗ καὶ σῴζεσθε, τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν, εἰ κατέχετε	1	you are being saved	If your language would naturally state the condition before the main statement, you could rearrange these two clauses. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “If you hold firmly to the word I proclaimed to you, by it also you are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	15	2	xh29	figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ καὶ σῴζεσθε	1	you are being saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) God does it by means of the “gospel.” Alternate translation: “through which God is also saving you” (2) the gospel does it. Alternate translation: “which also is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	2	s83s		σῴζεσθε	1	you are being saved	Here Paul uses the present tense to speak about the Corinthians’ salvation. Paul could use this tense because: (1) he wants the Corinthians to realize that they are only finally **saved** when Jesus comes back, and right now they are in the process of **being saved**. Alternate translation: “you are currently being saved” or “you will be saved” (2) he is using the present tense to speak about something that is generally true. He does not have a specific time in mind for when the Corinthians are **saved**. Alternate translation: “you are saved”
 1CO	15	2	nx1q	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	you are being saved	Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that holding **firmly to the word** leads to **being saved**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	15	2	d8or	figs-metaphor	τίνι λόγῳ&κατέχετε	1	you are being saved	Here Paul speaks as if **what word** were a physical object that the Corinthians could **hold firmly to**. He speaks in this way to refer to trust or belief that is as strong as someone’s grip on an object that they do not wish to lose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you never let go of the word” or “you persistently believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	2	d8or	figs-metaphor	τίνι λόγῳ & κατέχετε	1	you are being saved	Here Paul speaks as if **what word** were a physical object that the Corinthians could **hold firmly to**. He speaks in this way to refer to trust or belief that is as strong as someone’s grip on an object that they do not wish to lose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you never let go of the word” or “you persistently believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	2	le2k	figs-metonymy	τίνι λόγῳ	1	the word I preached to you	Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	15	2	opvd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ εἰκῇ ἐπιστεύσατε	1	the word I preached to you	Here, **unless** introduces the opposite of holding **firmly to the word**. Paul means that they **believed in vain** if they do not **hold firmly to the word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by stating the contrast more explicitly. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “However, if you do not hold firmly to the word, you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1CO	15	3	cqxn	figs-metaphor	παρέδωκα&ὑμῖν ἐν πρώτοις	1	as of first importance	Here Paul speaks as if the gospel that he preached to the Corinthians were a physical object that he **delivered** to them. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that he truly taught the Corinthians the gospel, and they now know it as well as if they held it in their hands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I instructed you among the first in” or “I handed over to you among the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	3	cqxn	figs-metaphor	παρέδωκα & ὑμῖν ἐν πρώτοις	1	as of first importance	Here Paul speaks as if the gospel that he preached to the Corinthians were a physical object that he **delivered** to them. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that he truly taught the Corinthians the gospel, and they now know it as well as if they held it in their hands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I instructed you among the first in” or “I handed over to you among the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	3	sp4p	figs-explicit	ἐν πρώτοις	1	as of first importance	Here, **among the first** could mean that: (1) what Paul is about to say is one of the **first** things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the first things I said” (2) what Paul is about to say is one of the most important things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the most important things I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	3	azw6	figs-extrainfo	ὃ καὶ παρέλαβον	1	for our sins	Here Paul does not clarify from whom he **received** this information. In [11:23](../11/23.md), which uses very similar words, Paul says that he “received” things “from the Lord.” Here, then, it is likely that he also **received** what he is about to say “from the Lord.” However, he may also mean that he **received** this specific way of expressing the good news from another human being. Since Paul avoids stating from whom he **received** what he is about to say, you should also try to avoid stating it. If you must state whom he **received** it from, you could refer to “the Lord” or generally to people. Alternate translation: “what I also received from the Lord” or “what I also received from others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	15	3	f5yp		ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	for our sins	Alternate translation: “in order to deal with our sins”
@@ -2082,15 +2082,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	6	q8bl	figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθησαν	1	some have fallen asleep	Here Paul refers to dying as having **fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to death or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “have passed away” or “are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1CO	15	7	nswj	figs-activepassive	ὤφθη Ἰακώβῳ, εἶτα τοῖς ἀποστόλοις πᾶσιν	1	some have fallen asleep	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to emphasize the person being **seen** rather than emphasizing those who do the “seeing.” Alternate translation: “James and then all the apostles saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	7	efpi	figs-extrainfo	τοῖς ἀποστόλοις πᾶσιν	1	some have fallen asleep	Here, **all the apostles** does not refer only to the twelve close followers that Jesus called to follow him. Paul does not clarify exactly whom he means when he refers to **apostles**, but the word probably refers to “the Twelve”, perhaps also **James**, and others. Since Paul does not specify who exactly the **apostles** are, you also should use a general term in your translation. Alternate translation: “by all those who are apostles” or “by all whom Jesus specially chose as his representatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-1CO	15	8	n9c6		ἔσχατον&πάντων	1	Last of all	Here, **last of all** identifies Paul’s vision of Christ as the **last** one to occur in the list he has been giving. Alternate translation: “more recently than all the others”
+1CO	15	8	n9c6		ἔσχατον & πάντων	1	Last of all	Here, **last of all** identifies Paul’s vision of Christ as the **last** one to occur in the list he has been giving. Alternate translation: “more recently than all the others”
 1CO	15	8	u9mm	figs-activepassive	ὡσπερεὶ τῷ ἐκτρώματι, ὤφθη κἀμοί	1	Last of all	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to emphasize the person being **seen** rather than the person who does the “seeing.” Alternate translation: “I also saw him, as if I were a child born at the wrong time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	8	vg7t	translate-unknown	τῷ ἐκτρώματι	1	a child born at the wrong time	Here, **a child born at the wrong time** could refer to: (1) a child whose birth is unexpected because it is too soon. Alternate translation: “to a child born at an unusual time” (2) a child who is born dead. Alternate translation: “to a stillborn child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	8	tcqq	figs-explicit	ὡσπερεὶ τῷ ἐκτρώματι	1	a child born at the wrong time	Paul here compares himself to a **child born at the wrong time**. He may mean: (1) that he saw Christ and became an apostle suddenly or at an unusual time, just like **a child born at the wrong time**. Alternate translation: “which happened suddenly, as if I were a child born at the wrong time” (2) that before Christ appeared to him, he was as powerless and wretched as a **child born at the wrong time**. Alternate translation: “who was as powerless and wretched as a child born at the wrong time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	9	frj2	figs-infostructure	ἐγὼ&εἰμι ὁ ἐλάχιστος τῶν ἀποστόλων, ὃς οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς καλεῖσθαι ἀπόστολος, διότι ἐδίωξα τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	a child born at the wrong time	If your language would state the reason before the result, you could move the clause **because I persecuted the church of God** earlier in the sentence. It could give the reason for: (1) **who am not worthy to be called an apostle**. Alternate translation: “I am the least of the apostles, who, because I persecuted the church of God, am not worthy to be called an apostle” (2) the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “because I persecuted the church of God, I am the least of the apostles, who am not worthy to be called an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	15	9	frj2	figs-infostructure	ἐγὼ & εἰμι ὁ ἐλάχιστος τῶν ἀποστόλων, ὃς οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς καλεῖσθαι ἀπόστολος, διότι ἐδίωξα τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	a child born at the wrong time	If your language would state the reason before the result, you could move the clause **because I persecuted the church of God** earlier in the sentence. It could give the reason for: (1) **who am not worthy to be called an apostle**. Alternate translation: “I am the least of the apostles, who, because I persecuted the church of God, am not worthy to be called an apostle” (2) the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “because I persecuted the church of God, I am the least of the apostles, who am not worthy to be called an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	15	9	u3ta	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐλάχιστος	1	a child born at the wrong time	Here, **least** implies **least** in importance and honor. If your readers would not infer that importance and honor are what Paul is **least** in, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the least important” or “the least valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	9	gzyz	figs-activepassive	καλεῖσθαι	1	a child born at the wrong time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul uses the passive to avoid stating who is doing the “calling,” you can use a vague or indefinite subject if you must state who does the action. Alternate translation: “for people to call me” or “for them to call me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	9	zxzb	translate-unknown	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	a child born at the wrong time	Here, **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in the Messiah. It does not refer to just one **church** or group of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **the church of God** to make it clear that this phrase refers to all believers Alternate translation: “the churches of God” or “the whole church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	10	jc1j	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι&Θεοῦ&ἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ&ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	his grace in me was not in vain	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “give” or an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “because God acted graciously to me, …the fact that he acted graciously to me … God acted graciously” or “by what God gave me … what he gave me that was in me … what God gave to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	10	jc1j	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι & Θεοῦ & ἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	his grace in me was not in vain	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “give” or an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “because God acted graciously to me, …the fact that he acted graciously to me … God acted graciously” or “by what God gave me … what he gave me that was in me … what God gave to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	10	caun	figs-explicit	ὅ εἰμι	1	his grace in me was not in vain	Here Paul does not state what **I am**. However, the previous verse implies that he is an “apostle” ([15:9](../15/09.md)). If your readers would not make this inference, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I am, that is, an apostle” or “an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	10	n45h	figs-litotes	οὐ κενὴ ἐγενήθη, ἀλλὰ	1	his grace in me was not in vain	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. If you do, you will need to change the contrast word **Instead** into a support word or phrase such as “in fact” or “indeed.” Alternate translation: “was effective. Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1CO	15	10	it0q	figs-idiom	κενὴ	1	his grace in me was not in vain	Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, God’s **grace** would be **in vain** if it did not lead Paul to “labor” or if no one believed Paul’s message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2098,33 +2098,33 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	10	pl58	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐγὼ δὲ, ἀλλὰ ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί	1	his grace in me was not in vain	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I labored**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “yet it was not I who labored, but the grace of God labored with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	15	10	h2w1	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγὼ δὲ, ἀλλὰ ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί	1	his grace in me was not in vain	If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “although it was really the grace of God with me, not I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	15	10	xh95	figs-metonymy	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here Paul describes God’s action in **grace** as simply **the grace of God**. If your readers would not understand that **the grace of God** identifies God himself acting in **grace**, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God in grace with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1CO	15	11	pm2o	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε&ἐγὼ εἴτε ἐκεῖνοι	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here Paul introduces **I** and **they** without a verb. He does this to identify whom he means when he uses **we** later in the verse. If your language needs a verb in this situation, you could use a verb that introduces or brings up characters or ideas. Alternate translation: “whether we are talking about me or them” or “whether we are referring to me or to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	15	11	pm2o	figs-ellipsis	εἴτε & ἐγὼ εἴτε ἐκεῖνοι	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here Paul introduces **I** and **they** without a verb. He does this to identify whom he means when he uses **we** later in the verse. If your language needs a verb in this situation, you could use a verb that introduces or brings up characters or ideas. Alternate translation: “whether we are talking about me or them” or “whether we are referring to me or to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	15	11	uoji	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here, just as in [15:10](../15/10.md), **they** refers back to the “apostles” that Paul mentions in [15:9](../15/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this reference by referring explicitly to “apostles” here. Alternate translation: “other apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	11	vqai	writing-pronouns	οὕτως κηρύσσομεν, καὶ οὕτως ἐπιστεύσατε	1	the grace of God that is with me	In both places, **in this way** could refer to: (1) the gospel as Paul has outlined it in [15:3–8](../15/03.md). Alternate translation: “it is this gospel that we preach, and it is this gospel that you believed” (2) the “grace” that Paul discussed in the last verse ([15:10](../15/10.md)). Alternate translation: “by God’s grace we preach, and by God’s grace you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	11	z7b6	figs-exclusive	κηρύσσομεν	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here, **we** refers to **I** and **they** earlier in the sentence. It includes Paul and other apostles but not the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	15	12	h62z	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1CO	15	12	k9rb		εἰ&Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται, ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγήγερται	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Alternate translation: “if it is proclaimed that Christ was raised from the dead”
+1CO	15	12	k9rb		εἰ & Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται, ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγήγερται	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Alternate translation: “if it is proclaimed that Christ was raised from the dead”
 1CO	15	12	jhia	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that anyone who preaches the gospel does it, particularly he and other “apostles.” Alternate translation: “we proclaim Christ, specifically” or “believing preachers proclaim Christ, specifically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	12	jbi8	figs-idiom	ἐγήγερται	1	raised	Here, **raised** refers to someone who died and comes back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he was restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	12	zamn	figs-activepassive	ἐγήγερται	1	raised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on Jesus, who **was raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	15	12	ja71	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν&νεκρῶν	1	raised	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people … of the dead people” or “from the corpses … of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	12	ja71	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν & νεκρῶν	1	raised	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people … of the dead people” or “from the corpses … of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	12	ub2p	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν?	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “that cannot be true.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is shocked that they are saying this or that it is contradictory to say this. Alternate translation, as a statement: “I am amazed that some among you say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” or “it does not make sense for some among you to say that there is no resurrection of the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	15	12	izkz	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will not resurrect” or “the dead will not be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	13	eqxa		εἰ&ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Here, **there is no resurrection of the dead** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:12](../15/12.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true”
-1CO	15	13	zwcu	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that there really is a **resurrection of the dead**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that “there is no resurrection of the dead” (see [15:12](../15/12.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if there actually were no resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	15	13	eqxa		εἰ & ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Here, **there is no resurrection of the dead** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:12](../15/12.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true”
+1CO	15	13	zwcu	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that there really is a **resurrection of the dead**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that “there is no resurrection of the dead” (see [15:12](../15/12.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if there actually were no resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	15	13	eq2c	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will not resurrect” or “the dead will not be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	13	vbhj	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	13	mi12	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on Jesus, who was **raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has not raised even Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	15	14	izp7		εἰ&Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here, **Christ has not been raised** repeats words found at the end of the last verse ([15:13](../15/13.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true”
-1CO	15	14	zokz	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Christ** really has **been raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Christ has not actually been raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	15	14	izp7		εἰ & Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here, **Christ has not been raised** repeats words found at the end of the last verse ([15:13](../15/13.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “if that were true”
+1CO	15	14	zokz	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Christ** really has **been raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Christ has not actually been raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	15	14	lsos	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on Jesus, who was **raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has not raised Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	15	14	xth0	figs-parallelism	κενὸν&τὸ κήρυγμα ἡμῶν, κενὴ καὶ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here Paul repeats **in vain** and the same structure in two straight clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “our preaching and your faith are all in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1CO	15	14	xth0	figs-parallelism	κενὸν & τὸ κήρυγμα ἡμῶν, κενὴ καὶ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here Paul repeats **in vain** and the same structure in two straight clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “our preaching and your faith are all in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1CO	15	14	qre2	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here, **our** refers to Paul and the other apostles mentioned in earlier verses (see [15:11](../15/11.md)). It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1CO	15	14	loal	figs-abstractnouns	κενὸν&τὸ κήρυγμα ἡμῶν, κενὴ καὶ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	not even Christ has been raised	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **preaching** and **faith**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “preach” and “believe.” Alternate translation: “we preached in vain, and you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	14	xxtq	figs-idiom	κενὸν&κενὴ	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, the apostles’ **preaching** and the Corinthians’ **faith** would not lead to salvation **if Christ has not been raised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “is useless … is useless” or “has no meaning … has no meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	15	14	loal	figs-abstractnouns	κενὸν & τὸ κήρυγμα ἡμῶν, κενὴ καὶ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	not even Christ has been raised	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **preaching** and **faith**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “preach” and “believe.” Alternate translation: “we preached in vain, and you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	14	xxtq	figs-idiom	κενὸν & κενὴ	1	not even Christ has been raised	Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, the apostles’ **preaching** and the Corinthians’ **faith** would not lead to salvation **if Christ has not been raised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “is useless … is useless” or “has no meaning … has no meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	15	gi99	figs-activepassive	εὑρισκόμεθα	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on who **are found** rather than focusing on the person doing the “finding.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “they would find us to be” or “people would find us to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	15	ejp5	figs-idiom	εὑρισκόμεθα	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **we are found** indicates that other people realize or find out something about “us.” The phrase emphasizes the status of the subject (**we**) more than the action of others in finding that status out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **we are found to be** with a word or phrase that refers to status. Alternate translation: “it is clear that we are” or “everyone would know that we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	15	15	r0xf	figs-exclusive	εὑρισκόμεθα&ἐμαρτυρήσαμεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just as “our” did in [15:14](../15/14.md), **we** refers to Paul and the other apostles mentioned in earlier verses (see [15:11](../15/11.md)). It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	15	15	r0xf	figs-exclusive	εὑρισκόμεθα & ἐμαρτυρήσαμεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, just as “our” did in [15:14](../15/14.md), **we** refers to Paul and the other apostles mentioned in earlier verses (see [15:11](../15/11.md)). It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	15	15	ctn5	figs-possession	ψευδομάρτυρες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	we are found to be false witnesses about God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that he and other apostles would be **false witnesses** who say false things about **God**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can express the idea by using a word such as “about” or by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “false witnesses concerning God” or “falsely testifying about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	15	15	aq5s	figs-idiom	κατὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	we are found to be	Here, **concerning God** could indicate: (1) that **God** is a person about whom **we testified**. Alternate translation: “about God” (2) that **we testified** against **God** by saying he did something that he did not do. Alternate translation: “against God” (3) that **God** is the authority by which **we testified**. Alternate translation: “by God” or “by God’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	15	w2rj	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἴπερ ἄρα νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	we are found to be	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if then the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
@@ -2132,12 +2132,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	15	ju4x	figs-nominaladj	νεκροὶ	1	we are found to be	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	16	fbuz	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	we are found to be	Here, **For** introduces again (see [15:13](../15/13.md)) Paul’s proof that Christ was not raised if it is true that **the dead are not raised**. He reintroduces this proof because he stated at the end of the last verse that God did not raise Christ if the dead are not raised (see [15:15](../15/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces a proof. Alternate translation: “That is true because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	15	16	a0fl		νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	we are found to be	Here, **the dead are not raised** repeats the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:15](../15/15.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “that were true”
-1CO	15	16	mjq9	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	we are found to be	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	15	16	mjq9	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	we are found to be	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	15	16	rf43	figs-nominaladj	νεκροὶ	1	we are found to be	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	16	ieza	figs-activepassive	νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	we are found to be	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on who **are** or **are not raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the “raising.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	16	nrsp	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται	1	we are found to be	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **Christ**, who has or has not **been raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has not raised even Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	17	v6vz		Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Here, **Christ has not been raised** repeats words found at the end of the last verse ([15:16](../15/16.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “that were true”
-1CO	15	17	zurn	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Christ** really has **been raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Christ has not actually been raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+1CO	15	17	zurn	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Christ** really has **been raised**. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Christ has not actually been raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	15	17	plcm	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς οὐκ ἐγήγερται	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **Christ**, who has or has not **been raised**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “raising.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has not raised Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	17	bhoh	figs-abstractnouns	ματαία ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Paul implies that they have **faith** in the gospel, in God, or in both. Alternate translation: “you are trusting in vain” or “you believed God in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	17	z4vw	figs-idiom	ματαία	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Here, as in [15:14](../15/14.md), **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, the Corinthians’ **faith** would not lead to salvation **if Christ has not been raised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in vain** with a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “is useless” or “has no meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2148,7 +2148,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	18	jb0k	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies **the ones having fallen asleep** as those who have believed **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “who believed in Christ” or “who are believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	18	stvz	translate-unknown	ἀπώλοντο	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Here, **have perished** could indicate that **the ones having fallen asleep in Christ**: (1) will not live again, or will cease to exist. Alternate translation: “have been destroyed” or “are gone” (2) are not saved. Alternate translation: “have not been saved” or “are lost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	19	fv8e	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ, ἐν Χριστῷ ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον	1	of all people	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that it is not **only in this life** that we **have hope in Christ**, since we also **have hope** for a new life. He uses this form to continue to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim about resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If only in this life did we actually have hope in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-1CO	15	19	tmk8	figs-infostructure	εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ&ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον	1	of all people	Here, **only** could modify: (1) **in this life**. Alternate translation: “If it is only in this life that we have hope” (2) **we have hope**. Alternate translation: “If in this life we only have hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	15	19	tmk8	figs-infostructure	εἰ ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ & ἠλπικότες ἐσμὲν μόνον	1	of all people	Here, **only** could modify: (1) **in this life**. Alternate translation: “If it is only in this life that we have hope” (2) **we have hope**. Alternate translation: “If in this life we only have hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	15	19	iwky	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ	1	of all people	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “while we are currently living do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	19	afxj	figs-abstractnouns	ἠλπικότες	1	of all people	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “hope.” Alternate translation: “can we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	19	ts7u	figs-infostructure	ἐλεεινότεροι πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐσμέν	1	of all people we are most to be pitied	Here Paul mentions a comparison (**of all people**) before he states his main point. He does this to emphasize the comparison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate why Paul mentions the comparison first by rearranging the clauses and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “we are more pitiful than every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -2160,16 +2160,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	20	dcym	figs-euphemism	τῶν κεκοιμημένων	1	the firstfruits	Here Paul is referring to people who have died as **the ones having fallen asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones having fallen asleep** with a different polite way of referring to those who have died, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who have passed away” or “those who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1CO	15	21	bzud	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπειδὴ	1	death came by a man	Here, **since** introduces a logical statement about how things work. Paul assumes that everyone agrees that **death {is} by a man**. His point is that, **since** things work that way, **by a man also resurrection of the dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **since** with a word or phrase that introduces this kind of logical connection. Alternate translation: “since we know that” or “because it is true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	15	21	uca8	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος	1	death came by a man	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “everyone dies by a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	21	mjjw	figs-extrainfo	δι’ ἀνθρώπου&καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου	1	death came by a man	Here, the first **man** that Paul refers to would be “Adam,” the first man. When Adam sinned, **death** became a part of human life (see especially [Genesis 3:17–19](../gen/03/17.md)). The second **man** that Paul refers to is Christ, whose resurrection guarantees and begins the **resurrection of the dead**. However, since Paul explains this in the next verse ([15:22](../15/22.md)), if possible do not include this information here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **a man** to make it clear that a specific **man** is in view in both cases. Alternate translation: “is by a specific man, by a specific man also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+1CO	15	21	mjjw	figs-extrainfo	δι’ ἀνθρώπου & καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου	1	death came by a man	Here, the first **man** that Paul refers to would be “Adam,” the first man. When Adam sinned, **death** became a part of human life (see especially [Genesis 3:17–19](../gen/03/17.md)). The second **man** that Paul refers to is Christ, whose resurrection guarantees and begins the **resurrection of the dead**. However, since Paul explains this in the next verse ([15:22](../15/22.md)), if possible do not include this information here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **a man** to make it clear that a specific **man** is in view in both cases. Alternate translation: “is by a specific man, by a specific man also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	15	21	gsgb	figs-ellipsis	δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος, καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου ἀνάστασις	1	death came by a man	In both clauses, Paul omits the verb **{is}** because the Corinthians would infer it. If your readers would not infer this verb, you could include it in the first clause (as the ULT does) or in both clauses. Alternate translation: “death is by a man, by a man also is the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	15	21	gf8p	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν	1	by a man also came the resurrection of the dead	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the dead will resurrect” or “the dead will be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	21	wnsi	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	by a man also came the resurrection of the dead	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	15	22	srba	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ&ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1	the firstfruits	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphors **in Adam** and **in Christ** to describe the union of people with **Adam** and **Christ**. Paul does not specify how this union occurs, but what is clear is that those who are united to **Adam** will **die**, while those who are united to **Christ** will **be made alive**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are related to Adam … those who are related to Christ” or “in union with Adam … in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	22	srba	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ & ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1	the firstfruits	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphors **in Adam** and **in Christ** to describe the union of people with **Adam** and **Christ**. Paul does not specify how this union occurs, but what is clear is that those who are united to **Adam** will **die**, while those who are united to **Christ** will **be made alive**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are related to Adam … those who are related to Christ” or “in union with Adam … in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	22	no6k	figs-pastforfuture	ἀποθνῄσκουσιν	1	the firstfruits	Here Paul uses the present tense of **die** to indicate what is generally true. If your language does not use the present tense for what is generally true, you can use whatever tense is most natural. Alternate translation: “will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 1CO	15	22	xkb3	figs-activepassive	πάντες ζῳοποιηθήσονται	1	the firstfruits	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **all**, who **will be made alive**, rather than focusing on the one making them **alive**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will make all alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	22	qusf	figs-explicit	πάντες	2	the firstfruits	Here, **all** contrasts with the **all** who are **in Adam** earlier in the sentence. Paul is not trying to argue about how many people **will be made alive again**. Rather he is contrasting how **all** who are **in Adam** end up dying, while **all** who are **in Christ** end up being **made alive**. If your readers would think that Paul is making a claim about how many people are **made alive**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies **all** as those who are **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “all who believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	23	ngp8	figs-idiom	ἕκαστος δὲ ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ τάγματι&Χριστός	1	the firstfruits	Here, **in his own order** identifies that things happen in a specific sequence or in turn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in his own order** with a word or phrase that does introduce a sequence. Alternate translation: “But these things happen in sequence: first, Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	15	23	zwxy	figs-ellipsis	ἕκαστος&ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ τάγματι	1	the firstfruits	Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that, first, **each** is made alive **in his own order**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include these words. Alternate translation: “each will be made alive in his own order” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	15	23	ngp8	figs-idiom	ἕκαστος δὲ ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ τάγματι & Χριστός	1	the firstfruits	Here, **in his own order** identifies that things happen in a specific sequence or in turn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in his own order** with a word or phrase that does introduce a sequence. Alternate translation: “But these things happen in sequence: first, Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	15	23	zwxy	figs-ellipsis	ἕκαστος & ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ τάγματι	1	the firstfruits	Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that, first, **each** is made alive **in his own order**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include these words. Alternate translation: “each will be made alive in his own order” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	15	23	f3lg	figs-gendernotations	ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ	1	the firstfruits	Although **his** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **his** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in his or her own” or “in their own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	15	23	p4g9	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ Χριστός	1	the firstfruits	Here, just as in [15:20](../15/20.md), **firstfruits** refers to what farmers first gathered from their fields. Often, these **firstfruits** were offered to God to thank him for providing food. What Paul emphasizes here is that **firstfruits** implies that there will be more “fruits”, that is, crops or produce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul uses **firstfruits** to emphasize that Jesus’ resurrection implies that there will be more resurrections with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like the firstfruits” or “the guarantee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	23	bzh4	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	the firstfruits	Here, **his coming** refers specifically to Jesus “coming back” to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **at his coming** with a phrase that more clearly refers to Jesus’ “second coming.” Alternate translation: “when he comes again” or “at his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2177,14 +2177,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	24	any2	grammar-connect-time-sequential	εἶτα	1	General Information:	Here, **Then** introduces events that occur after the “coming” in the last verse ([15:23](../15/23.md)). Paul does not clarify how soon after the “coming” these events will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Then** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies events happening in sequence. Alternate translation: “Next will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 1CO	15	24	fp4n	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	General Information:	Here, **the end** identifies that something has reached its goal and thus ended. Paul does not state explicitly what **end** he has in mind, but the Corinthians would have inferred that he meant **the end** of the world as it currently exists. This does not mean that there will be no more world, but it means that things will be very different after **the end**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **end** Paul is speaking about explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of this world” or “the end of the way things are now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	24	towh	figs-infostructure	ὅταν παραδιδῷ τὴν Βασιλείαν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί; ὅταν καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν	1	General Information:	Here, **when he has abolished** will occur before **when he hands over**. In Paul’s language, the sequence is clear even though the events are not in order. If your language would put the events in order, you could rearrange these two clauses to make the sequence clearer. Alternate translation: “when he has abolished all rule and all authority and power, when he hands over the kingdom to the God and Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	15	24	u298	writing-pronouns	παραδιδῷ&καταργήσῃ	1	General Information:	Here, **he** refers to “Christ.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express to whom **he** refers with “Christ” in one or both of these places. Alternate translation: “Christ hands over … Christ has abolished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	15	24	u298	writing-pronouns	παραδιδῷ & καταργήσῃ	1	General Information:	Here, **he** refers to “Christ.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express to whom **he** refers with “Christ” in one or both of these places. Alternate translation: “Christ hands over … Christ has abolished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	24	xkl6	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί	1	General Information:	Here, **God** and **Father** are two names for the same person. The name **Father** makes it clear that Paul is speaking about “God the Father” to distinguish him from “God the Son,” who is the one who **hands over the kingdom**. Use a word or phrase here that clearly names “God the Father.” Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1CO	15	24	uwh3	translate-unknown	καταργήσῃ	1	he will abolish all rule and all authority and power	Here, **abolished** refers to making someone or something ineffective or no longer in control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **abolished** with a word or phrase that indicates that the Messiah has conquered or made something ineffective. Alternate translation: “he has overcome” or “he has put an end to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	24	w4e1	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν	1	he will abolish all rule and all authority and power	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **rule**, **authority**, and **power**, you can express the idea by using verbs such as “rule,” “govern,” and “control.” Paul is speaking here about the position or ability to have **rule** and **authority** and **power**, so you can refer to the position or ability itself, or you can refer to the person or thing that fills that position or has that ability. Alternate translation: “all ruling and all governing and controlling” or “all those who rule and all those who govern and control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	24	kit3	figs-explicit	πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν	1	he will abolish all rule and all authority and power	Here, **rule**, **authority**, and **power** could identify: (1) any position or person that has **rule**, **authority**, and **power**. Alternate translation: “all positions of rule and all positions of authority and power” (2) powerful spiritual beings that have **rule**, **authority**, and **power** or that are called “rules,” “authorities,” and “powers.” Alternate translation: “all the powerful spiritual beings that exercise rule and authority and power” or “all spiritual beings and all angels and archangels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	24	ksjs		πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν	1	he will abolish all rule and all authority and power	Here Paul includes **all** with the first two items in the list but not with the third item. He does this to connect the last two items together, which means that **all** modifies both **authority** and **power**. If you can group the last two items closely together, you could do so here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul uses **all** with only two of the three items with one **all** to modify the whole list, or you could repeat **all** with each item. Alternate translation: “all rule and authority and power” or “all rule and all authority and all power”
 1CO	15	25	phrn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Here, **For** introduces Paul’s explanation of how Christ “abolishes all rule and all authority and power” ([15:24](../15/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Specifically,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	15	25	oeko	figs-explicit	δεῖ&αὐτὸν βασιλεύειν	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Here Paul does not explain why Christ **must** reign. He implies that it is because this is what God the Father has decided. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **must** implies explicitly. Alternate translation: “God chose that Christ will reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	15	25	oeko	figs-explicit	δεῖ & αὐτὸν βασιλεύειν	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Here Paul does not explain why Christ **must** reign. He implies that it is because this is what God the Father has decided. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **must** implies explicitly. Alternate translation: “God chose that Christ will reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	25	t8mk	figs-idiom	ἄχρι οὗ θῇ πάντας τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Here Paul speaks as if Christ will one day stand on or rest **his feet** on **the enemies**. In Paul’s culture, kings or generals might stand on or put their feet on leaders that they conquered. This showed that these leaders were indeed conquered and had to submit to the king or general who conquered them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put all the enemies under his feet** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “until he has subdued all his enemies” or “until he has conquered all his enemies and put them under his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	25	vnxs	writing-pronouns	θῇ	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Every **he** and **his** in this verse refers to Christ except for perhaps this one. Here, **he** could refer to: (1) Christ, who puts his own **enemies under his feet**. Alternate translation: “he himself has put” (2) God (the Father), who puts **enemies under** Christ’s **feet**. Alternate translation: “God has put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	25	dag1	figs-possession	τοὺς ἐχθροὺς	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Here, **the enemies** refers most specifically to the enemies of Christ, but it may also include the enemies of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **the enemies** refers to the **enemies** of Christ and his people with an appropriate possessive form here. Alternate translation: “his enemies” or “his and believers’ enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -2195,14 +2195,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	26	qh26	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ θάνατος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “that people die” or “the fact that people die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	27	g3r3	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1	he has put everything under his feet	In Paul’s culture, **For** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see ([Psalm 8:6](../psa/08/06.md))). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For in the book of Psalms we can read,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	15	27	oow4	figs-quotations	πάντα γὰρ ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	he has put everything under his feet	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “For it says that he has put everything under his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1CO	15	27	df59	figs-idiom	πάντα&ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ&πάντα ὑποτέτακται	1	he has put everything under his feet	Just as in [15:25](../15/25.md), Paul speaks as if Christ will one day stand on or rest his feet on the enemies. In Paul’s culture, kings or generals might stand on or put their feet on leaders that they conquered. This showed that these leaders were conquered and had to submit to the king or general who conquered them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put everything under his feet** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has subdued all his enemies to him … he has subdued” or “until he has conquered all his enemies and put them under his feet …he has conquered and put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	15	27	gqiy	writing-pronouns	πάντα&ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ&ὑποτέτακται	1	he has put everything under his feet	Here, **his** refers to Christ, and **he** refers to God the Father. Paul himself distinguishes between **he** and **his** later on in the verse, so if possible, leave the referents of **he** and **his** unstated. If you must state the referents, you could use “God” and “Christ.” Alternate translation: “God has put everything under Christ’s feet … God has put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	15	27	isfu	writing-quotations	ὅταν&εἴπῃ ὅτι	1	he has put everything under his feet	In Paul’s culture, **when it says** is a normal way to refer back to a text that has already been mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring back to what he just said. Alternate translation: “when the quote reads,” or “when we see in the quote the words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+1CO	15	27	df59	figs-idiom	πάντα & ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ & πάντα ὑποτέτακται	1	he has put everything under his feet	Just as in [15:25](../15/25.md), Paul speaks as if Christ will one day stand on or rest his feet on the enemies. In Paul’s culture, kings or generals might stand on or put their feet on leaders that they conquered. This showed that these leaders were conquered and had to submit to the king or general who conquered them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put everything under his feet** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has subdued all his enemies to him … he has subdued” or “until he has conquered all his enemies and put them under his feet …he has conquered and put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	15	27	gqiy	writing-pronouns	πάντα & ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ & ὑποτέτακται	1	he has put everything under his feet	Here, **his** refers to Christ, and **he** refers to God the Father. Paul himself distinguishes between **he** and **his** later on in the verse, so if possible, leave the referents of **he** and **his** unstated. If you must state the referents, you could use “God” and “Christ.” Alternate translation: “God has put everything under Christ’s feet … God has put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1CO	15	27	isfu	writing-quotations	ὅταν & εἴπῃ ὅτι	1	he has put everything under his feet	In Paul’s culture, **when it says** is a normal way to refer back to a text that has already been mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring back to what he just said. Alternate translation: “when the quote reads,” or “when we see in the quote the words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	15	27	gspq	figs-quotations	εἴπῃ ὅτι πάντα ὑποτέτακται	1	he has put everything under his feet	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Make sure that it is clear that Paul is repeating **he has put everything** from the previous quote so that he can comment on it. Alternate translation: “it says that he has put everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	15	27	bvxd	figs-idiom	δῆλον ὅτι	1	he has put everything under his feet	Here, **{it is} clear** indicates that someone is pointing out something that is or should be obvious. In other words, the author does not need to argue for what is **clear** and can instead just point it out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{it is} clear** with a comparable word or phrase that introduces something obvious. Alternate translation: “you could tell that” or “it is obvious that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	27	lzex	figs-explicit	τοῦ ὑποτάξαντος αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα	1	he has put everything under his feet	Here the Corinthians would have known that **the one having put everything** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “the one who put everything in subjection to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	27	p2m3	translate-unknown	ἐκτὸς	1	he has put everything under his feet	Here, **excepted** identifies something as an “exception” to a general rule or statement. Here Paul means that **the one having put everything** is not included in **everything**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{is} excepted** with a word or phrase that identifies an exception. Alternate translation: “is not included” or “is not subjected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	28	xm8u	figs-activepassive	ὑποταγῇ&τὰ πάντα	1	all things are subjected to him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **all things** that are **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has subjected all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	15	28	xm8u	figs-activepassive	ὑποταγῇ & τὰ πάντα	1	all things are subjected to him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **all things** that are **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has subjected all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	28	im2j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς	1	the Son	Paul here refers to God **the Son** as opposed to God “the Father,” whom he referred to in [15:24](../15/24.md). Use a translation that clearly refers to God **the Son**. Alternate translation: “God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1CO	15	28	a1cd	figs-activepassive	καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς, ὑποταγήσεται	1	the Son himself will be subjected	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **the Son** who is **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) the **Son** does it to himself. Alternate translation: “the Son will also subject himself” (2) “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will subject the Son himself also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	28	m6e3	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς	1	the Son himself will be subjected	Here, **himself** focuses attention on **the Son** and emphasizes that **the Son** is the one doing this. If **himself** would not draw attention to **the Son** in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “even the Son” or “the Son indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -2213,8 +2213,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	29	a4d4	figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν?	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “They will accomplish nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “those who are baptized for the dead do nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	15	29	izah	figs-activepassive	ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are getting **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “will those do whom others baptize” or “will those do who receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	29	jpb7	figs-explicit	ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	Here Paul speaks of “doing” something in the future. He could be referring to: (1) the intended result of being **baptized**, which happens after the baptism. Alternate translation: “will those accomplish who are baptized” (2) what the people **being baptized** think that they are doing. Alternate translation: “do those who are baptized for the dead think that they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	29	m7v6	figs-explicit	ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν&βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	It is unclear what **being baptized for the dead** actually means and what kind of practice it refers to. What is clear is that the practice only makes sense if one believes that **the dead** are **raised**. If possible, express these phrases in general terms. Two of the most common ways to understand **being baptized for the dead** are that it could refer to: (1) the practice of living believers receiving baptism in place of people who died without being baptized. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized in place of the dead … are they baptized in their place” (2) people receiving baptism because they believe that the **dead** will “rise.” They could be expecting their own resurrection or the resurrection of people they knew who are **dead**. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized with the dead in mind … are they baptized with them in mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	29	js1o	figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν&νεκροὶ	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people … the dead people” or “the corpses … the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	29	m7v6	figs-explicit	ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν & βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	It is unclear what **being baptized for the dead** actually means and what kind of practice it refers to. What is clear is that the practice only makes sense if one believes that **the dead** are **raised**. If possible, express these phrases in general terms. Two of the most common ways to understand **being baptized for the dead** are that it could refer to: (1) the practice of living believers receiving baptism in place of people who died without being baptized. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized in place of the dead … are they baptized in their place” (2) people receiving baptism because they believe that the **dead** will “rise.” They could be expecting their own resurrection or the resurrection of people they knew who are **dead**. Alternate translation: “will those do who are baptized with the dead in mind … are they baptized with them in mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	15	29	js1o	figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν & νεκροὶ	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people … the dead people” or “the corpses … the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	29	t3yc	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	are not raised	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **the dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if the dead actually are not raised at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1CO	15	29	jdc9	figs-activepassive	νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	the dead are not raised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are or **are not raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the raising. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	29	s7kx	figs-rquestion	τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν	1	why then are they baptized for them?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no reason why.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this question by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “they are baptized for them for nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	32	c36a	writing-quotations	οὐκ ἐγείρονται, φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	The Corinthians would have recognized **“Let use eat and drink, for tomorrow we die”** as a common saying. The same words appear in [Isaiah 22:13](../isa/22/13.md), but the saying may have been used more generally by many people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces this saying with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “are not raised, as the saying goes, ‘Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	15	32	y2nr	figs-quotations	οὐκ ἐγείρονται, φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the saying as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Make sure that your readers know that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “are not raised, let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die, as people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	15	32	w7t7	figs-idiom	φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	Here, **Let us eat and drink** refers to lavish or wild eating and drinking. It does not refer to regular meals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this phrase refers to partying or wild behavior with a word or phrase that more clearly expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “Let us party” or “Let us feast and get drunk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	15	32	gthm	figs-hyperbole	αὔριον&ἀποθνῄσκομεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	Here, **tomorrow** refers to a time that will come soon. It does not necessarily refer to the day after today. The saying uses **tomorrow** to emphasize how soon **we** will **die**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **tomorrow** with a comparable word or phrase that emphasizes a time that will soon arrive. Alternate translation: “soon we die” or “sometime very soon we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1CO	15	32	gthm	figs-hyperbole	αὔριον & ἀποθνῄσκομεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	Here, **tomorrow** refers to a time that will come soon. It does not necessarily refer to the day after today. The saying uses **tomorrow** to emphasize how soon **we** will **die**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **tomorrow** with a comparable word or phrase that emphasizes a time that will soon arrive. Alternate translation: “soon we die” or “sometime very soon we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	15	33	q7uc	writing-quotations	μὴ πλανᾶσθε— φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	The Corinthians would have recognized **“Bad company corrupts good morals”** as a common saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces this saying with a phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “Do not be deceived. As the saying goes, ‘Bad company corrupts good morals’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	15	33	qlhh	figs-quotations	μὴ πλανᾶσθε— φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the saying as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Make sure that your readers know that Paul is referring to a common saying. Alternate translation: “Do not be deceived. People say that bad company corrupts good morals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	15	33	ehet	figs-activepassive	μὴ πλανᾶσθε	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **deceived** rather than focusing on the people doing the “deceiving.” If you must state who does the action, you can use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Do not let others deceive you” or “You should not allow people to deceive you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2251,12 +2251,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	33	vy9x	translate-unknown	ὁμιλίαι κακαί	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	Here, **Bad company** refers to a persons’ friends who normally do what is wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Bad company** with a comparable phrase that refers to friends who do what is wrong. Alternate translation: “Wicked companions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	33	f3c5	translate-unknown	ἤθη χρηστὰ	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	Here, **good morals** refers to the character of a person who habitually does what is **good** or right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **good morals** with a comparable word or phrase that identifies someone with proper or right character. Alternate translation: “those who do what is right” or “upright character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	34	gr3v	figs-metaphor	ἐκνήψατε	1	Sober up	Here, **Be sober** refers to someone becoming **sober** after they were drunk. Paul speaks in this way to characterize how the Corinthians are acting and thinking as if they were drunk. He wants them to no longer act as if they are in a stupor or asleep and instead be alert and in their right mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Be sober** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Be in your right mind” or “Be alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	15	34	aarv	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγνωσίαν&Θεοῦ&ἔχουσιν	1	Sober up	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know” or “understand.” Alternate translation: “do not understand who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	34	aarv	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγνωσίαν & Θεοῦ & ἔχουσιν	1	Sober up	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know” or “understand.” Alternate translation: “do not understand who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	34	saxx	figs-idiom	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν λαλῶ	1	Sober up	Here, **I say this to your shame** is Paul’s way of telling the Corinthians that they should feel ashamed about how **some** of them **have no knowledge of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you should be ashamed about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	34	axl3	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν	1	Sober up	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **shame**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “shame.” Alternate translation: “to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	35	ewpu	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **But** introduces an objection or at least a problem with what Paul has argued about how God raises the dead. Since **But** introduces a new section of the argument, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new development in the argument. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1CO	15	35	w4hk	writing-quotations	ἐρεῖ τις	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses the phrase **someone will say** to bring up an objection or a problem with what he has been arguing. He does not have in mind a specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **someone will say** with a word or phrase that introduces a counterargument or a problem. Alternate translation: “it may be objected” or “questions may be raised:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-1CO	15	35	hw4a	figs-quotations	ἐρεῖ&πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται?	1	But someone will say, “How are the dead raised, and with what kind of body will they come?”	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these questions as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that it is clear that these are questions that are looking for information. Alternate translation: “will ask how the dead are raised and with what kind of body they come.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1CO	15	35	hw4a	figs-quotations	ἐρεῖ & πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται?	1	But someone will say, “How are the dead raised, and with what kind of body will they come?”	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these questions as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that it is clear that these are questions that are looking for information. Alternate translation: “will ask how the dead are raised and with what kind of body they come.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 1CO	15	35	ty4t	figs-activepassive	ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί	1	someone will say	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on who are **raised** rather than focusing on the person doing the “raising.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	35	l4lv	figs-nominaladj	οἱ νεκροί	1	someone will say	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	35	e5lv	translate-unknown	ἔρχονται	1	with what kind of body will they come	Here, the person asking the question speaks as if **the dead** can **come**. This could refer to: (1) the existence of **the dead**. In other words, **come** would refer to anything that **the dead** do. Alternate translation: “do they do things” or “do they exist” (2) how the believing dead **come** with Christ when he returns to earth. Alternate translation: “do they come with Christ at his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2267,12 +2267,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	36	elgv	figs-activepassive	οὐ ζῳοποιεῖται	1	What you sow will not start to grow unless it dies	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on how **What you sow** ends up “living” rather than focusing on what or who causes it **to live**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” or the plant itself does it. Alternate translation: “God does not cause to live” or “does not begin to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	36	uiv9	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ ζῳοποιεῖται, ἐὰν μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	What you sow will not start to grow unless it dies	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only is caused to live once it dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1CO	15	37	pw6v	figs-ellipsis	ὃ σπείρεις	1	What you sow is not the body that will be	Here Paul refers to **what you sow** without including a main verb. He does this in order to identify the topic that he is about to comment on. If your language would not introduce a topic in this way, you could include a main verb or use a form that normally introduces a topic in your language. Alternate translation: “while we are speaking about what you sow” or “when you sow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	15	37	h6zi	figs-yousingular	ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ&σπείρεις	1	What you sow	Here Paul continues to address the person who asked the question in [15:35](../15/35.md). That person is a hypothetical “someone,” but Paul still addresses the answer to **you** in the singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1CO	15	37	h6zi	figs-yousingular	ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ & σπείρεις	1	What you sow	Here Paul continues to address the person who asked the question in [15:35](../15/35.md). That person is a hypothetical “someone,” but Paul still addresses the answer to **you** in the singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	15	37	ny1b		οὐ τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον σπείρεις, ἀλλὰ γυμνὸν κόκκον, εἰ τύχοι σίτου, ἤ τινος τῶν λοιπῶν	1	What you sow	Here Paul continues to use an analogy from farming. In this verse, he focuses on how the living plant that grows from a seed looks nothing like that seed. The key verbal connection between humans and plants is the word **body**, so if possible use the same word to refer to the human **body** and the **body** of the plant **that will be**. Alternate translation: “you sow only a bare seed, perhaps wheat or something else, not the body of the plant that will grow”
 1CO	15	37	fb2z	translate-unknown	τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον	1	What you sow	Here, **the body that will be** identifies the plant that will later grow from the seed. Paul’s point is that one does not **sow** something that looks like the fully grown plant. Rather, one sows **a bare seed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the body that will be** with a word or phrase that refers to a fully grown plant. If possible, use the same word for **body** that you have used for the human body, since Paul is using **body** to connect what he says about plants with what he is saying about the resurrection. Alternate translation: “the body of a fully grown plant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	37	lhmz	translate-unknown	γυμνὸν κόκκον	1	What you sow	Here, **a bare seed** refers to a seed all by itself, with no leaves or stem like the plant will later have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **a bare seed** with a word or phrase that identifies that Paul is speaking about a **seed** all by itself. Alternate translation: “only a seed” or “a seed alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	37	cky8	translate-unknown	εἰ τύχοι σίτου, ἤ τινος τῶν λοιπῶν	1	What you sow	Here Paul uses **wheat** as an example of a plant that was common in culture and that starts out as a seed. When he says **or something else**, he makes it clear that any kind of plant that begins as a seed works for his analogy. So, you could refer to any common plant in your culture that starts out as a seed. Alternate translation: “perhaps a corn seed or some other kind of seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	38	dmx1		ὁ&Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν, καὶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν σπερμάτων, ἴδιον σῶμα	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	Here Paul concludes his analogy about farming. In the last verse he proved that seeds grow into bodies that look nothing like the seeds. Here, he shows that God is one who decides what **body** a seed grows into and that God gives different kinds of “bodies” to different kinds of seeds. Again, the main verbal connection between human resurrection and seeds growing is the word **body**, so if possible use a word for **body** that can apply to both seeds and humans. Alternate translation: “God decides what kind of plant a seed grows into, and each of the seeds grows into its own kind of plant”
+1CO	15	38	dmx1		ὁ & Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν, καὶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν σπερμάτων, ἴδιον σῶμα	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	Here Paul concludes his analogy about farming. In the last verse he proved that seeds grow into bodies that look nothing like the seeds. Here, he shows that God is one who decides what **body** a seed grows into and that God gives different kinds of “bodies” to different kinds of seeds. Again, the main verbal connection between human resurrection and seeds growing is the word **body**, so if possible use a word for **body** that can apply to both seeds and humans. Alternate translation: “God decides what kind of plant a seed grows into, and each of the seeds grows into its own kind of plant”
 1CO	15	38	ude0	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	Here, **it** refers back to “a bare seed” in [15:37](../15/37.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **it** by referring explicitly back to the “seed.” Alternate translation: “the seed” or “that seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	38	wrnh	translate-unknown	καθὼς ἠθέλησεν	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	Here, **just as he desires** means that God has chosen what kind of **body** every seed will grow into, and he does this as he thinks best. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **desires** with a word that refers to what God “decides” or “chooses.” Alternate translation: “in the way that he decides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	38	fd1f	figs-ellipsis	ἑκάστῳ τῶν σπερμάτων, ἴδιον σῶμα	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**God gives**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to each of the seeds God gives its own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -2283,13 +2283,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	39	qi8y	translate-unknown	κτηνῶν	1	flesh	Here, **animals** refers to living things that are not **men**, **birds**, or **fish** but still count as **animals**. The word often refers particularly to domesticated animals such as sheep, goats, oxen, or horses. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this group of beings. Alternate translation: “of domesticated animals” or “of beasts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	40	d9k2	figs-explicit	σώματα ἐπουράνια, καὶ σώματα ἐπίγεια	1	heavenly bodies	Here, **heavenly bodies** refers to the kinds of things that Paul will mention in the next verse: the sun, moon, and stars ([15:41](../15/41.md)). The **earthly bodies** are the kinds of things Paul mentioned in the previous verse: humans, animals, birds, and fish ([15:39](../15/39.md)). The primary distinction Paul is drawing is a spatial one: some **bodies** exist in “heaven,” and others exist on “earth.” Use words or phrases that naturally draw this distinction in your language. Alternate translation: “superterrestrial bodies and terrestrial bodies” or “bodies in heaven and bodies on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	40	g6cf	figs-abstractnouns	ἑτέρα μὲν ἡ τῶν ἐπουρανίων δόξα, ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ τῶν ἐπιγείων	1	earthly bodies	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “splendorous.” Alternate translation: “the heavenly are splendorous in one way, and the earthly are splendorous in another way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	40	j1kb	figs-ellipsis	τῶν ἐπουρανίων&τῶν ἐπιγείων	1	glory	Here Paul omits **bodies** because he stated them explicitly in the previous sentence. If your language needs **bodies** here, you could supply it from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “of the heavenly bodies … of the earthly bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	15	40	qg3p	figs-explicit	ἑτέρα&ἑτέρα	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Here Paul is distinguishing between different kinds of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “is one kind … is another kind” or “is of one type … is of another type” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	15	40	j1kb	figs-ellipsis	τῶν ἐπουρανίων & τῶν ἐπιγείων	1	glory	Here Paul omits **bodies** because he stated them explicitly in the previous sentence. If your language needs **bodies** here, you could supply it from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “of the heavenly bodies … of the earthly bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	15	40	qg3p	figs-explicit	ἑτέρα & ἑτέρα	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Here Paul is distinguishing between different kinds of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “is one kind … is another kind” or “is of one type … is of another type” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	41	y6lr	figs-explicit	ἄλλη	-1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Here, just as in [15:40](../15/40.md), Paul is distinguishing between different kinds of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is one kind of … another kind of … another kind of” or “There is one type of … another type of … another type of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	41	m075	figs-abstractnouns	ἄλλη δόξα ἡλίου, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα σελήνης, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα ἀστέρων&ἐν δόξῃ	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “splendorous.” Alternate translation: “The sun is splendorous in one way, and the moon is splendorous in another way, and the stars are splendorous in another way … in how glorious they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	41	m075	figs-abstractnouns	ἄλλη δόξα ἡλίου, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα σελήνης, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα ἀστέρων & ἐν δόξῃ	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “splendorous.” Alternate translation: “The sun is splendorous in one way, and the moon is splendorous in another way, and the stars are splendorous in another way … in how glorious they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	41	ltg6	figs-parallelism	ἄλλη δόξα ἡλίου, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα σελήνης, καὶ ἄλλη δόξα ἀστέρων	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Here Paul repeats **glory of** and the same structure in three consecutive clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture, and it emphasizes the distinctions between the different kinds of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and stars have varying kinds of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1CO	15	41	uznk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Here, **For** introduces a further explanation of the **glory of the stars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **For** with a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or clarification. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	15	41	d4qn		ἀστὴρ&ἀστέρος διαφέρει ἐν δόξῃ	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Alternate translation: “some stars have different kinds of glory than other stars” or “the stars themselves differ in glory”
+1CO	15	41	d4qn		ἀστὴρ & ἀστέρος διαφέρει ἐν δόξῃ	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	Alternate translation: “some stars have different kinds of glory than other stars” or “the stars themselves differ in glory”
 1CO	15	42	d3sc	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὕτως καὶ	1	is raised	Here, **So also** introduces Paul’s explanation of how what he has said in [15:36–41](../15/36.md) about seeds and bodies applies to **the resurrection of the dead**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces the application of an illustration or example. Alternate translation: “It is in these terms that you should think about” or “Let us apply these things to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	15	42	ay76	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν	1	is raised	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect” or “live again.” Alternate translation: “the way in which the dead will resurrect” or “how the dead will be restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	42	lbrp	figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν	1	is raised	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -2297,14 +2297,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	42	b6ob	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται ἐν φθορᾷ, ἐγείρεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “What people sow in decay God raises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	42	rw3k	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν φθορᾷ, ἐγείρεται ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ	1	in decay … in immortality	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **decay** and **immortality**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “decay” or “die.” Alternate translation: “while it decays is raised so that it never decays again” or “when it dies is raised in such a way that it never dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	43	ssjk	figs-parallelism	σπείρεται ἐν ἀτιμίᾳ, ἐγείρεται ἐν δόξῃ; σπείρεται ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, ἐγείρεται ἐν δυνάμει;	1	It is sown … it is raised	Here Paul repeats **is sown in**, **is raised in**, and similar structure in three consecutive sentences (see the end of [15:42](../15/42.md)). This was worded powerfully in his culture, and it emphasizes the three distinctions between how the body **is sown** and **raised**. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to omit “What is sown in decay is raised in immortality” in [15:42](../15/42.md), since the alternate translation includes that idea. Alternate translation: “What is sown in dishonorable decay is raised in glorious immortality” or “What is sown in decay, dishonor, and weakness is raised in immortality, glory, and power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1CO	15	43	h4u5	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται ἐν ἀτιμίᾳ&σπείρεται ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ	1	It is sown … it is raised	Here, just as in [15:42](../15/42.md), Paul speaks as if a dead body were **sown** like a seed. He speaks in this way to connect how a dead body is buried in the ground to how a seed is **sown** in the ground. However, Paul does not continue the metaphor when he talks about how the body **is raised**, since those are his normal words for speaking about resurrection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **is sown** with a comparable phrase that applies to both seeds and human bodies, or you could express the idea using an analogy. Alternate translation: “The body is put in the ground in dishonor, just like a seed … The body is put in the ground in weakness, just like a seed” or “It is planted in dishonor … It is planted in weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	15	43	zo03	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται&ἐγείρεται&σπείρεται&ἐγείρεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it … God raises it … People sow it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	15	43	h4u5	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται ἐν ἀτιμίᾳ & σπείρεται ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ	1	It is sown … it is raised	Here, just as in [15:42](../15/42.md), Paul speaks as if a dead body were **sown** like a seed. He speaks in this way to connect how a dead body is buried in the ground to how a seed is **sown** in the ground. However, Paul does not continue the metaphor when he talks about how the body **is raised**, since those are his normal words for speaking about resurrection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **is sown** with a comparable phrase that applies to both seeds and human bodies, or you could express the idea using an analogy. Alternate translation: “The body is put in the ground in dishonor, just like a seed … The body is put in the ground in weakness, just like a seed” or “It is planted in dishonor … It is planted in weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	43	zo03	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται & ἐγείρεται & σπείρεται & ἐγείρεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it … God raises it … People sow it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	43	v892	figs-abstractnouns	σπείρεται ἐν ἀτιμίᾳ, ἐγείρεται ἐν δόξῃ	1	It is sown … it is raised	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **dishonor** and **glory**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “dishonorable” and “glorious.” Alternate translation: “A dishonorable body is sown; a glorious body is raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	43	fcpv	figs-abstractnouns	σπείρεται ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, ἐγείρεται ἐν δυνάμει	1	It is sown … it is raised	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **weakness** and **power**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “weak” and “powerful.” Alternate translation: “A weak body is sown; a powerful body is raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	44	u856	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται σῶμα ψυχικόν	1	It is sown … it is raised	Here, just as in [15:42–43](../15/42.md), Paul speaks as if a dead body were **sown** like a seed. He speaks in this way to connect how a dead body is buried in the ground with how a seed is **sown** in the ground. However, Paul does not continue the metaphor when he talks about how the body **is raised**, since those are his normal words for speaking about resurrection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **is sown** with a comparable phrase that applies to both seeds and human bodies, or you could express the idea using an analogy. Alternate translation: “The body is put in the ground as a natural body, just like a seed” or “It is planted as a natural body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	15	44	b4dm	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται&ἐγείρεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it as … God raises it as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	15	44	b4dm	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται & ἐγείρεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it as … God raises it as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	44	f93u	translate-unknown	σῶμα ψυχικόν	-1		Here, **natural body** refers to human bodies before they are **raised**. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural body** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “a this-worldly body … a this-worldly body” or “a regular body … a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	44	n07f	translate-unknown	σῶμα πνευματικόν&πνευματικόν	1		Here, **spiritual {body}** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **{body}** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	44	n07f	translate-unknown	σῶμα πνευματικόν & πνευματικόν	1		Here, **spiritual {body}** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **{body}** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	44	ktad	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	15	45	zsb9	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως καὶ	1		Here, **So also** introduces the basis for the claim Paul made about the existence of both “natural” and “spiritual” bodies in the last verse ([15:44](../15/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces evidence or support. Alternate translation: “For” or “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	15	45	y5c0	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture, **it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it can be read in Genesis” or “the author of the book of Genesis says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -2319,24 +2319,24 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	46	umt5	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here, **But** introduces a clarification of the point that Paul made in the previous verse. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or further explanation. Alternate translation: “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	15	46	fc51	figs-infostructure	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρῶτον τὸ πνευματικὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ψυχικόν, ἔπειτα τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here Paul first negates the idea that **the spiritual** is **first** and then states that it comes after **the natural**. Paul states this idea in both negative and positive ways to emphasize the correct sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul states both negative and positive versions of the same claim by stating just one of the versions. Alternate translation: “But the natural is first, then the spiritual” or “But the spiritual is not first; rather the natural is first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	15	46	tibu	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὐ πρῶτον τὸ πνευματικὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ψυχικόν, ἔπειτα τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here, **first** and **then** indicate sequence in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul has sequence in time in mind with words that more clearly refer to time. Alternate translation: “the spiritual is not before the natural; rather, the natural is before the spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-1CO	15	46	netl	figs-nominaladj	τὸ πνευματικὸν&τὸ ψυχικόν&τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Paul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **natural** as nouns in order to refer to bodies that are **spiritual** or **natural**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the spiritual body … the natural body … the spiritual body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	15	46	umfq	figs-extrainfo	τὸ πνευματικὸν&τὸ ψυχικόν&τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here Paul does not specify whose bodies **the spiritual** and **the natural** refer to. He does this to allow for at least two interpretations. If possible, translate this verse in such a way that your readers could infer either or both of the following. The words **spiritual** and **natural** could refer to: (1) the bodies of Jesus (**spiritual**) and Adam (**natural**). Alternate translation: “the spiritual body that belongs to Jesus … the natural body that belonged to Adam … the spiritual body that belongs to Jesus” (2) the bodies that every believer has while alive (**natural**) and after resurrecting (**spiritual**). Alternate translation: “any believer’s spiritual body … his or her natural body … his or her spiritual body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-1CO	15	46	pw4m	translate-unknown	τὸ πνευματικὸν&τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here, just as in [15:44](../15/44.md),**spiritual** refers to human bodies after they are raised. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the body is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “the one fit for the new creation … the one fit for the new creation” or “that controlled by God’s Spirit … that controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the body is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “that made out of spirit … that made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	46	netl	figs-nominaladj	τὸ πνευματικὸν & τὸ ψυχικόν & τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Paul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **natural** as nouns in order to refer to bodies that are **spiritual** or **natural**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the spiritual body … the natural body … the spiritual body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	46	umfq	figs-extrainfo	τὸ πνευματικὸν & τὸ ψυχικόν & τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here Paul does not specify whose bodies **the spiritual** and **the natural** refer to. He does this to allow for at least two interpretations. If possible, translate this verse in such a way that your readers could infer either or both of the following. The words **spiritual** and **natural** could refer to: (1) the bodies of Jesus (**spiritual**) and Adam (**natural**). Alternate translation: “the spiritual body that belongs to Jesus … the natural body that belonged to Adam … the spiritual body that belongs to Jesus” (2) the bodies that every believer has while alive (**natural**) and after resurrecting (**spiritual**). Alternate translation: “any believer’s spiritual body … his or her natural body … his or her spiritual body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+1CO	15	46	pw4m	translate-unknown	τὸ πνευματικὸν & τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	Here, just as in [15:44](../15/44.md),**spiritual** refers to human bodies after they are raised. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the body is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “the one fit for the new creation … the one fit for the new creation” or “that controlled by God’s Spirit … that controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the body is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “that made out of spirit … that made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	46	nd64	translate-unknown	ψυχικόν	1	natural	Here, just as in [15:44](../15/44.md), **natural** refers to human bodies before they are raised. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “the this-worldly” or “regular” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	47	yt2q	figs-explicit	ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος&ὁ δεύτερος ἄνθρωπος	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	Here, **first man** refers to Adam, the first human whom God created. The **second man** refers to Jesus, the first human to receive the new resurrection body. Paul describes them as **first** and **second** because Adam was the **first** to receive a specific kind of body, and Jesus was the **second** to receive a specific kind of body, a body different than the body that Adam received. This is the same point he made in the last verse about which body comes “first” ([15:46](../15/46.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **first man** and **second man** by clarifying to whom they refer. Alternate translation: “The first man, Adam, … The second man, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	47	pton	figs-gendernotations	ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος&ὁ δεύτερος ἄνθρωπος	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	Although **man** is masculine, and both Adam (**The first man**) and Jesus (**The second man**) are male, Paul is focusing on how the **first** and **second man** are representative human beings. He is not focusing on the **first** and **second man** as representative males. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a non gendered word. Alternate translation: “The first person … The second person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1CO	15	47	yt2q	figs-explicit	ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος & ὁ δεύτερος ἄνθρωπος	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	Here, **first man** refers to Adam, the first human whom God created. The **second man** refers to Jesus, the first human to receive the new resurrection body. Paul describes them as **first** and **second** because Adam was the **first** to receive a specific kind of body, and Jesus was the **second** to receive a specific kind of body, a body different than the body that Adam received. This is the same point he made in the last verse about which body comes “first” ([15:46](../15/46.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **first man** and **second man** by clarifying to whom they refer. Alternate translation: “The first man, Adam, … The second man, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	15	47	pton	figs-gendernotations	ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος & ὁ δεύτερος ἄνθρωπος	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	Although **man** is masculine, and both Adam (**The first man**) and Jesus (**The second man**) are male, Paul is focusing on how the **first** and **second man** are representative human beings. He is not focusing on the **first** and **second man** as representative males. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a non gendered word. Alternate translation: “The first person … The second person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	15	47	iclf	figs-explicit	ἐκ γῆς, χοϊκός	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	Here Paul refers again to [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). In that verse, we learn about how God made the **first man**, Adam, out of **dust**. Paul uses this reference to **dust** to prove that the **first man** has the kind of life and body that belongs on **the earth**. So, **of the earth** means almost the same thing that “natural” means in [15:46](../15/46.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **of the earth, made of dust** by clarifying that Paul is referring to the story about how God made the **first man** as a human who has a body and life fit for **the earth**. Alternate translation: “God made out of dust, and he is fit for the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	47	s1pc	figs-explicit	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	Here, **from heaven** could refer to: (1) how Jesus, the **second man**, has a body and life fit for heaven and the new creation. In this case, **from heaven** would mean basically the same thing that “spiritual” means in [15:46](../15/46.md). Alternate translation: “is fit for heaven” (2) how Jesus, the **second man**, came **from heaven** when he became a human. Alternate translation: “came from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	48	lnwa	figs-ellipsis	οἷος ὁ χοϊκός, τοιοῦτοι καὶ οἱ χοϊκοί; καὶ οἷος ὁ ἐπουράνιος, τοιοῦτοι καὶ οἱ ἐπουράνιοι	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	In this verse, Paul does not use any verbs. He does this because he did not need verbs in his culture to state that the **earthly** and **the ones of earth** are the same kind of thing and that the **heavenly** and **the ones of heaven** are the same kind of thing. If your language does not need verbs or other words to state that two different things or groups belong together as the same kind of thing, you can use those verbs or words here. Alternate translation: “The earthly and those of the earth are of the same type; and the heavenly and those of heaven are of the same type” or “As the earthly exists, in the same way those of the earth exist; and as the heavenly exists, in the way those of heaven exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1CO	15	48	r9be	figs-nominaladj	ὁ χοϊκός&ὁ ἐπουράνιος	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	Paul is using the adjectives **earthly** and **heavenly** as nouns in order to refer back to the “first man” (who is “of the earth”) and the “second man” (who is “of heaven”) from the previous verse ([15:47](../15/47.md)). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases that refer back to those people. Alternate translation: “the earthly first man … the heavenly second man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	48	r9be	figs-nominaladj	ὁ χοϊκός & ὁ ἐπουράνιος	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	Paul is using the adjectives **earthly** and **heavenly** as nouns in order to refer back to the “first man” (who is “of the earth”) and the “second man” (who is “of heaven”) from the previous verse ([15:47](../15/47.md)). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases that refer back to those people. Alternate translation: “the earthly first man … the heavenly second man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	48	jnbn	figs-explicit	οἱ χοϊκοί	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	Here, **the ones of earth** refers to people who are not united to Jesus and who thus belong to the **earth**. Paul uses this language to connect these people with the **earthly** first man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones of earth** with a word or phrase that clarifies that **the ones of earth** describes people who are represented by Adam, not by Jesus. Alternate translation: “those of the earth who are represented by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	15	48	mkth	figs-possession	οἱ χοϊκοί&οἱ ἐπουράνιοι	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	Here, **the ones of earth** and **the ones of heaven** refer to people who are “earthly” and “heavenly.” This means that **earth** is the proper home of **the ones of earth**, while **heaven** is the proper home of **the ones of heaven**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with adjectives such as “earthly” or “heavenly,” or you could refer to the “home” of these people. Alternate translation: “those who are earthly … those who are heavenly” or “those whose home is on earth … those whose home is in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1CO	15	48	mkth	figs-possession	οἱ χοϊκοί & οἱ ἐπουράνιοι	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	Here, **the ones of earth** and **the ones of heaven** refer to people who are “earthly” and “heavenly.” This means that **earth** is the proper home of **the ones of earth**, while **heaven** is the proper home of **the ones of heaven**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with adjectives such as “earthly” or “heavenly,” or you could refer to the “home” of these people. Alternate translation: “those who are earthly … those who are heavenly” or “those whose home is on earth … those whose home is in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	15	48	s9pn	figs-explicit	οἱ ἐπουράνιοι	1	those who are of heaven	Here, **the ones of heaven** refers to people who are united to Jesus and who thus belong to **heaven**, as Jesus does. Paul uses this language to connect these people with the **heavenly** second man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the ones of heaven** with a word or phrase that clarifies that **the ones of heaven** describes people who are represented by Jesus, not by Adam. Alternate translation: “those of heaven, who are represented by Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	49	w19v	figs-pastforfuture	ἐφορέσαμεν	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Here, the past tense **have borne** does not mean that **we** no longer “bear” this **image**. Rather, it means that we began to “bear” it and continue to do so now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **we have borne** with a tense that naturally refers to a current, ongoing state. Alternate translation: “we bear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 1CO	15	49	ax2u	figs-idiom	ἐφορέσαμεν τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ, φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Here, to **bear the image** of something or somebody refers to being similar to that thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **bear the image** with a word or phrase that identifies something as similar or like something else. Alternate translation: “we have been modeled on the earthly, let us also be modeled on the heavenly” or “we have the likeness of the earthly, let us also have the likeness of the heavenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	15	49	fm74	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ&τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **image**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “participate.” Alternate translation: “how we reflect the earthly … how we reflect the heavenly” or “the way we participate in the earthly … the way we participate in the heavenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	49	mq8z	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ χοϊκοῦ&τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Paul is using the adjectives **earthly** and **heavenly** as nouns in order to refer to bodies that are **earthly** and **heavenly**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the earthly body … of the heavenly body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	15	49	wx68	figs-explicit	τοῦ χοϊκοῦ&τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Here Paul does not specify whose bodies **the earthly** and **the heavenly** refer to. However, the previous verses imply that the **earthly** body belongs to the “first man,” Adam, while the **heavenly** body belongs to the “second man,” Jesus. If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the earthly body that belongs to the first man … of the heavenly body that belongs to the second man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	15	49	fm74	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ & τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **image**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “participate.” Alternate translation: “how we reflect the earthly … how we reflect the heavenly” or “the way we participate in the earthly … the way we participate in the heavenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	49	mq8z	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ χοϊκοῦ & τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Paul is using the adjectives **earthly** and **heavenly** as nouns in order to refer to bodies that are **earthly** and **heavenly**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the earthly body … of the heavenly body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	49	wx68	figs-explicit	τοῦ χοϊκοῦ & τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Here Paul does not specify whose bodies **the earthly** and **the heavenly** refer to. However, the previous verses imply that the **earthly** body belongs to the “first man,” Adam, while the **heavenly** body belongs to the “second man,” Jesus. If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the earthly body that belongs to the first man … of the heavenly body that belongs to the second man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	49	h277	figs-imperative	φορέσωμεν καὶ	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	Here Paul uses the exhortation **let us also bear** in order to urge all believers to act in such a way that God will raise them so that they have a body like the **heavenly** man, Jesus. Paul does not think that people change themselves into the **image of the heavenly**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **let us also bear** by clarifying that Paul is urging everyone to live in a certain way. Alternate translation: “let us think and act so that we also bear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1CO	15	49	gme6	translate-textvariants	φορέσωμεν καὶ	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	In Paul’s language, **let us also bear** and “we will also bear” look and sound very similar. Both options have some evidence to support them. Consider whether translations your readers might be familiar with choose one of the options. If there is no strong reason to choose one option over the other, you could follow the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1CO	15	50	jub2	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο δέ φημι, ἀδελφοί, ὅτι	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **Now this I say** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to discuss. Because of that, **this** refers to what Paul says in the rest of this verse, not to what he has already said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now this I say** with a word or phrase that introduces and refers forward to a new topic. Alternate translation: “Next, I am going to say something important, brothers:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2344,15 +2344,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	50	mwy3	figs-parallelism	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ	1	flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable	Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **flesh and blood** goes with **perishable** and **the kingdom of God** goes with **imperishable**. These two statements could: (1) be basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one to show why Paul uses two parallel sentences. Alternate translation: “perishable flesh and blood are not able to inherit the imperishable kingdom of God” (2) refer first to people who are alive (**flesh and blood**) and then to people who are dead (**perishable**). In this case, you should preserve some distinction between the two sentences. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood are not able to inherit the kingdom of God, and the perishable are not able to inherit the imperishable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1CO	15	50	nz7s	figs-hendiadys	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα	1	flesh and blood	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together describe the human body as it currently exists. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the fleshly” or “the things that exist now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1CO	15	50	zele	figs-metonymy	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα	1	flesh and blood	Here, **flesh and blood** represents a body that is made out of **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh and blood** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1CO	15	50	e4gd	figs-metaphor	κληρονομῆσαι&κληρονομεῖ	1	inherit	Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** that is **imperishable** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers will eventually receive and live in **the3 kingdom of God** that God has promised to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to live in … does … live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	50	e4gd	figs-metaphor	κληρονομῆσαι & κληρονομεῖ	1	inherit	Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** that is **imperishable** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers will eventually receive and live in **the3 kingdom of God** that God has promised to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to live in … does … live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	50	b9hc	translate-unknown	ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν	1	the perishable … the imperishable	Here, **perishable** and **imperishable** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. These words are the same ones translated as “decay” and “immortality” in [15:42](../15/42.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **imperishable** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	50	t68j	figs-nominaladj	ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν	1	the perishable … the imperishable	Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **imperishable** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** bodies and the **imperishable** kingdom. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “a perishable body … the imperishable kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1CO	15	51	g2bp	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	we will all be changed	Here, **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “Listen up” or “Hear me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 1CO	15	51	lxl4	figs-abstractnouns	μυστήριον	1	we will all be changed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mystery**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “secret” or “mysterious.” Alternate translation: “a mysterious thing” or “what was secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	51	c3cx	figs-exclusive	πάντες οὐ κοιμηθησόμεθα, πάντες&ἀλλαγησόμεθα	1	we will all be changed	Here, **we** refers to all believers, including Paul, the Corinthians, and others. Paul is speaking in general terms about believers. He does not necessarily think that he is one who will not **fall asleep**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1CO	15	51	c3cx	figs-exclusive	πάντες οὐ κοιμηθησόμεθα, πάντες & ἀλλαγησόμεθα	1	we will all be changed	Here, **we** refers to all believers, including Paul, the Corinthians, and others. Paul is speaking in general terms about believers. He does not necessarily think that he is one who will not **fall asleep**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	15	51	dt91	figs-euphemism	πάντες οὐ κοιμηθησόμεθα	1	we will all be changed	Here Paul refers to how people die as if they **fall asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **fall asleep** with a different polite way of referring to death or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “We will not all pass away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-1CO	15	51	c8oh	translate-unknown	πάντες&ἀλλαγησόμεθα	2	we will all be changed	Here, **changed** refers to how the bodies of believers are transformed from “natural” to “spiritual.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **changed** with a word or phrase that refers to this kind of transformation. Alternate translation: “we will all be renewed” or “we will all be transfigured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	51	k5dw	figs-activepassive	πάντες&ἀλλαγησόμεθα	2	we will all be changed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the people who are **changed** rather than focusing on the person who does the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will change us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1CO	15	51	c8oh	translate-unknown	πάντες & ἀλλαγησόμεθα	2	we will all be changed	Here, **changed** refers to how the bodies of believers are transformed from “natural” to “spiritual.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **changed** with a word or phrase that refers to this kind of transformation. Alternate translation: “we will all be renewed” or “we will all be transfigured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	51	k5dw	figs-activepassive	πάντες & ἀλλαγησόμεθα	2	we will all be changed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the people who are **changed** rather than focusing on the person who does the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will change us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	52	lxt1	translate-unknown	ἐν ἀτόμῳ	1	in the twinkling of an eye	Here, **instant** refers to the smallest segment of time that Paul and the Corinthians knew about. He means that the “change” ([15:51](../15/51.md)) will happen so quickly that it will only take up the smallest bit of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **in a moment** to refer to the smallest amount of time in your culture or to express the idea in a way that emphasizes speed. Alternate translation: “in one second” or “very quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	52	r4ix	figs-idiom	ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ	1	in the twinkling of an eye	Here, **in the twinkling of an eye** refers to the speed at which one moves or blinks one’s eye. Paul’s point is that the “change” ([15:51](../15/51.md)) will take place so quickly that one cannot move one’s eye fast enough to see it, or if one blinks, one might miss it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the blink of an eye” or “at great speed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	52	h668	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι; σαλπίσει γάρ	1	at the last trumpet	Paul refers briefly to the **last trumpet** without explanation because the Corinthians would have known what he was talking about. In Paul’s culture, people knew that a **trumpet** would **sound** to signal the Day of the Lord, in this case, the day when Jesus comes back, the dead rise, and the world is renewed. An angel or archangel would blow this trumpet. If your readers would not make such inferences about **the last trumpet**, you could express some of these ideas explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we hear the trumpet that means that Jesus is coming back. For that trumpet will sound” or “when an angel sounds the end-times trumpet. For the angel will sound that trumpet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2362,18 +2362,18 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	52	ehf0	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	the dead will be raised	Here, **we** refers to Paul, the Corinthians, and all other believers who are alive. Paul included himself in this group because he was alive when he sent this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **we** refers to living believers with a phrase that makes this explicit. Alternate translation: “we who are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1CO	15	52	p8f8	figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς ἀλλαγησόμεθα	1	We will be changed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **we** who **will be changed** rather than focusing on the one doing the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will change us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	53	n7mf	figs-parallelism	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσασθαι ἀφθαρσίαν, καὶ τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσασθαι ἀθανασίαν	1	We will be changed	Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **perishable** goes with **mortal** and **incorruptibility** goes with **immortality**. These two statements are basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate why Paul uses two parallel sentences by combining the two sentences into one. Alternate translation: “this perishable mortal to put on incorruptible immortality” or “this perishable and mortal to put on incorruptibility and immortality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1CO	15	53	yarq	figs-nominaladj	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο&τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο	1	We will be changed	Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **mortal** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** and **mortal** bodies. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “this perishable body … this mortal body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	15	53	nua2	translate-unknown	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο&ἀφθαρσίαν	1	this perishable body … is imperishable	Here, **perishable** and **incorruptibility** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. See how you translated the similar words in [15:42](../15/42.md), [50](../15/50.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **incorruptibility** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	53	iyd2	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθαι ἀφθαρσίαν&ἐνδύσασθαι ἀθανασίαν	1	must put on	Here Paul speaks as if the **perishable** and the **mortal** could **put on incorruptibility** and **immortality** like they were pieces of clothing. He does not mean that believers still have what is **perishable** and **mortal** somehow underneath **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. Instead, Paul uses the metaphor to illustrate how people will change identity from what is **perishable** and **mortal** to **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to change into incorruptibility … to change into immortality” or “to become incorruptible … to become immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	15	53	vyoo	figs-abstractnouns	ἀφθαρσίαν&ἀθανασίαν	1	must put on	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **incorruptibility** and **immortality**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “incorruptible” and “immortal.” Alternate translation: “what is incorruptible … what is immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	53	x823	translate-unknown	τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο&ἀθανασίαν	1	must put on	Here, **mortal** and **immortality** identify whether people or things die or cannot die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mortal** and **immortality** with two words or phrases that refer to whether things can die or not. Alternate translation: “what can die … what never dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	53	yarq	figs-nominaladj	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο & τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο	1	We will be changed	Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **mortal** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** and **mortal** bodies. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “this perishable body … this mortal body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	53	nua2	translate-unknown	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο & ἀφθαρσίαν	1	this perishable body … is imperishable	Here, **perishable** and **incorruptibility** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. See how you translated the similar words in [15:42](../15/42.md), [50](../15/50.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **incorruptibility** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	53	iyd2	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθαι ἀφθαρσίαν & ἐνδύσασθαι ἀθανασίαν	1	must put on	Here Paul speaks as if the **perishable** and the **mortal** could **put on incorruptibility** and **immortality** like they were pieces of clothing. He does not mean that believers still have what is **perishable** and **mortal** somehow underneath **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. Instead, Paul uses the metaphor to illustrate how people will change identity from what is **perishable** and **mortal** to **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to change into incorruptibility … to change into immortality” or “to become incorruptible … to become immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	53	vyoo	figs-abstractnouns	ἀφθαρσίαν & ἀθανασίαν	1	must put on	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **incorruptibility** and **immortality**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “incorruptible” and “immortal.” Alternate translation: “what is incorruptible … what is immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	53	x823	translate-unknown	τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο & ἀθανασίαν	1	must put on	Here, **mortal** and **immortality** identify whether people or things die or cannot die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mortal** and **immortality** with two words or phrases that refer to whether things can die or not. Alternate translation: “what can die … what never dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	54	zuo5	figs-doublet	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν, καὶ τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable	Here, these clauses repeat the words found at the end of the last verse ([15:53](../15/53.md)). Paul repeats these words to make what he is arguing very clear. If your readers do not need these words to be repeated, and if they would be confused about why Paul is repeating himself, you could refer back to the words in the previous verse with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “that happens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	15	54	qq5m	figs-parallelism	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν, καὶ τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable	Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **perishable** goes with **mortal** and **incorruptibility** goes with **immortality**. These two statements are basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate why Paul uses two parallel sentences by combining the two sentences into one. Alternate translation: “this perishable mortal has put on incorruptible immortality” or “this perishable and mortal has put on incorruptibility and immortality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1CO	15	54	aq9a	figs-nominaladj	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο&τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο	1	when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable	Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **mortal** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** and **mortal** bodies. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “this perishable body … this mortal body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	15	54	od10	translate-unknown	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο&ἀφθαρσίαν	1		Here, **perishable** and **incorruptibility** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. See how you translated these words in [15:53](../15/53.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **incorruptibility** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	54	j9zs	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν&ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here Paul speaks as if the **perishable** and the **mortal** could **put on incorruptibility** and **immortality** like they were pieces of clothing. He does not mean that believers still have what is **perishable** and **mortal** somehow underneath **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. Instead, Paul uses the metaphor to illustrate how people will change identity from what is **perishable** and **mortal** to **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has changed into incorruptibility … has changed into immortality” or “has become incorruptible … has become immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	15	54	yjhy	figs-abstractnouns	ἀφθαρσίαν&ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **incorruptibility** and **immortality**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “incorruptible” and “immortal.” Alternate translation: “what is incorruptible … what is immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	54	m0l5	translate-unknown	τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο&ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here, **mortal** and **immortality** identify whether people or things die or cannot die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mortal** and **immortality** with two words or phrases that refer to whether things can die or not. See how you translated these words in [15:53](../15/53.md). Alternate translation: “what can die … what never dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	54	aq9a	figs-nominaladj	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο & τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο	1	when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable	Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **mortal** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** and **mortal** bodies. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “this perishable body … this mortal body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1CO	15	54	od10	translate-unknown	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο & ἀφθαρσίαν	1		Here, **perishable** and **incorruptibility** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. See how you translated these words in [15:53](../15/53.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **incorruptibility** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	15	54	j9zs	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν & ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here Paul speaks as if the **perishable** and the **mortal** could **put on incorruptibility** and **immortality** like they were pieces of clothing. He does not mean that believers still have what is **perishable** and **mortal** somehow underneath **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. Instead, Paul uses the metaphor to illustrate how people will change identity from what is **perishable** and **mortal** to **incorruptibility** and **immortality**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has changed into incorruptibility … has changed into immortality” or “has become incorruptible … has become immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	54	yjhy	figs-abstractnouns	ἀφθαρσίαν & ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **incorruptibility** and **immortality**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “incorruptible” and “immortal.” Alternate translation: “what is incorruptible … what is immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	54	m0l5	translate-unknown	τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο & ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here, **mortal** and **immortality** identify whether people or things die or cannot die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mortal** and **immortality** with two words or phrases that refer to whether things can die or not. See how you translated these words in [15:53](../15/53.md). Alternate translation: “what can die … what never dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	54	idtf	figs-idiom	γενήσεται	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here, **will come about** identifies that something will happen or come to pass. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **will come about** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will come to pass” or “will be realized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	54	ozha	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here, **word** represents what someone says or writes in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1CO	15	54	asfj	writing-quotations	ὁ λόγος ὁ γεγραμμένος	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	In Paul’s culture, **the word that is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from or reference to an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Isaiah” (see ([Isaiah 25:8](../isa/25/08.md))). Most likely, this phrase introduces the quote from [Hosea 13:14](../hos/13/14.md) in the next verse as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the word that is written** with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from or referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “what can be read in the Scriptures” or “the words that Isaiah and Hosea wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -2388,19 +2388,19 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	55	rn56	figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον?	1	Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **Death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” If you do this, you may need to express the direct address to **Death** in another way. Alternate translation: “When people die, where is the victory? When people die, where is the sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	55	l23m	figs-parallelism	ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον?	1	Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting?	Here Paul quotes how Hosea repeats **O death, where {is} your**. Parallel structures like this were poetic in Hosea’s culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “O death, where is your conquest?” or “O death, where are your victory and sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1CO	15	55	pdxo	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον?	1		Paul does not quote these questions because he is looking for information about **where** death’s **victory** and **sting** are. Rather, the questions involve the Corinthians in what Paul is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, there is no **victory** or **sting** for **Death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questions with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “O death, you have no victory! O death, you have no sting!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	15	55	gg3d	figs-you	σου&σου	1	your … your	Both appearances of **your** refer back to **Death** and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-1CO	15	55	r1sl	figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ σου&τὸ νῖκος	1	your … your	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **victory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “conquer.” Alternate translation: “have you conquered anything” or “where is how you have conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	55	z5dn	figs-metaphor	ποῦ σου&τὸ κέντρον	2	your … your	Here, **sting** refers to a sharp point, particularly the kind that insects have that can pierce skin, inject poison, and cause pain. The author of this quotation (Hosea) speaks as if **Death** has a **sting**, referring to how death causes pain both for the person who dies and for others who have lost someone they love. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **sting** with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “where is the pain that you cause” or “where is your ability to harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	55	gg3d	figs-you	σου & σου	1	your … your	Both appearances of **your** refer back to **Death** and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1CO	15	55	r1sl	figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ σου & τὸ νῖκος	1	your … your	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **victory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “conquer.” Alternate translation: “have you conquered anything” or “where is how you have conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	55	z5dn	figs-metaphor	ποῦ σου & τὸ κέντρον	2	your … your	Here, **sting** refers to a sharp point, particularly the kind that insects have that can pierce skin, inject poison, and cause pain. The author of this quotation (Hosea) speaks as if **Death** has a **sting**, referring to how death causes pain both for the person who dies and for others who have lost someone they love. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **sting** with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “where is the pain that you cause” or “where is your ability to harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	56	entt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	the sting of death is sin	Here, **But** introduces a clarification or further elaboration. It does not introduce a contrast with the quotations in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or elaboration, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	15	56	qal8	figs-metaphor	τὸ&κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	the sting of death is sin	Here, **the sting of death** refers back to the same words in the quote in [15:56](../15/56.md). Express the metaphor the same you did there. Alternate translation: “the pain that death causes comes from sin” or “death’s ability to harm {is} sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	15	56	qal8	figs-metaphor	τὸ & κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	the sting of death is sin	Here, **the sting of death** refers back to the same words in the quote in [15:56](../15/56.md). Express the metaphor the same you did there. Alternate translation: “the pain that death causes comes from sin” or “death’s ability to harm {is} sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	56	iyd3	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	the sting of death is sin	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “that leads to dying is how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	56	pf4e	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος	2	the power of sin is the law	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “empower” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “the law makes what make people do wrong powerful” or “it is the law that empowers how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	15	57	rmnx	figs-idiom	τῷ&Θεῷ χάρις	1	gives us the victory	Here, **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	15	56	pf4e	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος	2	the power of sin is the law	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **sin**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “empower” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “the law makes what make people do wrong powerful” or “it is the law that empowers how people sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	15	57	rmnx	figs-idiom	τῷ & Θεῷ χάρις	1	gives us the victory	Here, **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	57	ztj6	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ διδόντι ἡμῖν τὸ νῖκος	1	gives us the victory	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **victory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “defeat” or “conquer.” Alternate translation: “who empowers us to defeat them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	57	kr1m	figs-explicit	τὸ νῖκος	1	gives us the victory	Here Paul does not express whom **the victory** is over. However, the Corinthians would have inferred from the previous verse that Paul meant both “sin” and “death.” If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “the victory over sin and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	15	58	k4c4	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Connecting Statement:	Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	15	58	xubx	figs-activepassive	ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοί	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “my brothers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	15	58	e1ew	figs-doublet	ἑδραῖοι&ἀμετακίνητοι	1	be steadfast and immovable	Here, both **steadfast** and **immovable** refer to people who hold their positions steadily. The word **steadfast** emphasizes that someone is reliable or faithful, while **immovable** emphasizes that someone is stable and cannot be moved. Paul uses two similar words to emphasize the need to maintain one position. If your language does not have two words to represent these ideas, or if your readers would find the repetition confusing instead of emphatic, you can express the idea with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “reliable” or “strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	15	58	e1ew	figs-doublet	ἑδραῖοι & ἀμετακίνητοι	1	be steadfast and immovable	Here, both **steadfast** and **immovable** refer to people who hold their positions steadily. The word **steadfast** emphasizes that someone is reliable or faithful, while **immovable** emphasizes that someone is stable and cannot be moved. Paul uses two similar words to emphasize the need to maintain one position. If your language does not have two words to represent these ideas, or if your readers would find the repetition confusing instead of emphatic, you can express the idea with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “reliable” or “strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	15	58	j1pl	figs-metaphor	ἑδραῖοι γίνεσθε, ἀμετακίνητοι	1	be steadfast and immovable	Here Paul speaks as if he wanted the Corinthians to be an object or thing that stays in one place. He speaks in this way because he wants them to continue to believe the gospel as firmly as if it was a location that they could remain in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “become those with a tight grip” or “dependable, stable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	58	a9kb	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	be steadfast and immovable	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **work**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “how you work for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	15	58	zn8f	figs-possession	ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Always abound in the work of the Lord	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **work** that is done for **the Lord**. If your language does not use that form for this meaning, you can express the idea with a phrase such as “that is for.” Alternate translation: “in your work for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -2414,23 +2414,23 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	16	1	yer5	figs-explicit	εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	for the saints	Here Paul does not clarify which **saints** he is speaking about. However, in [16:3](../16/03.md), he states that this **collection** will be taken to “Jerusalem.” Therefore, the **saints** are Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The Corinthians would have known to which **saints** Paul is referring, but If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind who the **saints** are explicitly here instead of waiting until [16:3](../16/03.md). Alternate translation: “for the Jewish saints” or “for the saints in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	16	1	nyy7	figs-infostructure	ὥσπερ διέταξα ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Γαλατίας, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιήσατε	1	for the saints	If your language would normally state the command (**you must do**) before the comparison (**even as**), you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “also you must do even as I directed the churches of Galatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	16	2	w1jv	figs-idiom	κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου	1	storing up	Here, the **first of the week** refers to the first day of the week in the Jewish calendar, which is the day we call Sunday. It is also the day on which Christians would hold special gatherings since Jesus rose from the dead on this day of the week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Every first of the week** with a normal way to refer to Sunday, the first day of the week, which is when Christians gather to worship God. Alternate translation: “Every Sunday” or “On the worship day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	16	2	bx0o	figs-imperative3p	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν&τιθέτω	1	storing up	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “each of you must put something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	16	2	bx0o	figs-imperative3p	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τιθέτω	1	storing up	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “each of you must put something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	16	2	ivmd	figs-idiom	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν παρ’ ἑαυτῷ τιθέτω	1	storing up	Here, to **put {something} aside** refers to putting some money in a specific location in one’s house to use later for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **put {something} aside** with a phrase that refers to putting money in a specific location. Alternate translation: “let each of you place some money in a special place” or “let each of you separate something out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	2	h8n9	translate-unknown	θησαυρίζων	1	storing up	Here, **storing up** refers to saving something, which in this case is money. Use a word or phrase that refers to saving money. Alternate translation: “reserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	16	2	ztyz	figs-idiom	ὅ τι ἐὰν εὐοδῶται	1	storing up	Here, **whatever he might have prospered** refers to how much money a person earned. Here, the phrase could specifically refer to: (1) how much more a person made than what they needed or expected. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put {something} aside** from the extra money that they received. Alternate translation: “from whatever you earned more than you expected” (2) the amount a person made in a specific period of time. Paul would thus be asking the Corinthians to **put {something} aside** in proportion to how much they made during a week. Alternate translation: “according to how much you made that week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	2	ehne	figs-gendernotations	εὐοδῶται	1	storing up	Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “you might have prospered” or “he or she might have prospered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	16	2	q16u	figs-go	ἔλθω	1	storing up	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-1CO	16	2	wc3w	translate-unknown	μὴ&λογεῖαι γίνωνται	1	so that there will be no collections when I come	Here, **collections** refers to “collecting” money from people for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **collections** with a word or phrase that refers to “collecting” money for a purpose. Alternate translation: “I will not need to ask for money” or “there will not be requested donations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	16	2	wc3w	translate-unknown	μὴ & λογεῖαι γίνωνται	1	so that there will be no collections when I come	Here, **collections** refers to “collecting” money from people for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **collections** with a word or phrase that refers to “collecting” money for a purpose. Alternate translation: “I will not need to ask for money” or “there will not be requested donations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	16	3	yj6c	translate-unknown	οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε	1	whomever you approve	Here, those whom the Corinthians **approve** are those whom they consider to be trustworthy and able to accomplish the task of taking the money to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **whomever you might approve** with a word or phrase that refers to choosing people to accomplish a specific task. Alternate translation: “whomever you might choose” or “whomever you might commission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	16	3	u2ik	figs-infostructure	οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε&τούτους πέμψω	1	whomever you approve	Here Paul identifies whom he is talking about first (**whomever you might approve**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **them** in the next clause. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “I will send whomever you might approve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	16	3	u2ik	figs-infostructure	οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε & τούτους πέμψω	1	whomever you approve	Here Paul identifies whom he is talking about first (**whomever you might approve**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **them** in the next clause. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “I will send whomever you might approve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	16	3	j612	figs-explicit	δι’ ἐπιστολῶν	1	I will send with letters	In Paul’s culture, messengers and travelers often carried a letter or **letters** that were meant to introduce them to the person they were going to visit. These kinds of **letters** usually stated that the messenger or traveler was trustworthy and should be welcomed. You can find the sorts of things that would be written in these types of letters in [2 Corinthians 8:16–24](../2co/08/16.md). Here, the letters could be from: (1) Paul. Alternate translation: “with letters of introduction from me” (2) the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “with your letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	16	3	yivo	figs-explicit	τὴν χάριν ὑμῶν	1	I will send with letters	Here, **your gift** refers to the money that the Corinthians have “collected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **your gift** by clarifying that it is the **gift** of the money that they have “put aside.” Alternate translation: “your money” or “your contribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	16	4	z8x4	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν&ἄξιον ᾖ τοῦ κἀμὲ πορεύεσθαι&πορεύσονται	1	I will send with letters	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that it might be **appropriate for me to go also**, or it might not. He specifies the result for when **it is appropriate**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the if statement by introducing it with a word or phrase such as “suppose” or “were it to be.” Alternate translation: “suppose that it is appropriate for me to go also. Then, they will go” or “were it to be appropriate for me to go also, then they would will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1CO	16	4	z8x4	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν & ἄξιον ᾖ τοῦ κἀμὲ πορεύεσθαι & πορεύσονται	1	I will send with letters	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that it might be **appropriate for me to go also**, or it might not. He specifies the result for when **it is appropriate**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the if statement by introducing it with a word or phrase such as “suppose” or “were it to be.” Alternate translation: “suppose that it is appropriate for me to go also. Then, they will go” or “were it to be appropriate for me to go also, then they would will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1CO	16	4	ofl5	figs-explicit	ἄξιον ᾖ	1	I will send with letters	Here, **appropriate** identifies an action that fits or matches the situation. Paul does not explicitly state who thinks **it is appropriate**. It could be: (1) both Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we consider it appropriate for” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I think it is appropriate for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	16	4	d5zq	figs-go	κἀμὲ πορεύεσθαι, σὺν ἐμοὶ πορεύσονται	1	I will send with letters	Here, **go** refers to traveling to Jerusalem. Use a word or phrase that refers to traveling to a different location. Alternate translation: “me to travel also, they will travel with me” or “me also to visit Jerusalem, they will accompany me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	16	5	ei27	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	I will send with letters	Here, **But** introduces a new topic: Paul’s own travel plans. It does not introduce a contrast with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	16	5	hr4z	figs-go	ἐλεύσομαι&πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I will send with letters	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-1CO	16	5	munt	figs-go	διέλθω&διέρχομαι	1	I will send with letters	Here, **passed through** and **going through** refer to entering and then exiting an area while one is traveling. Use a form in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “I have entered and then left … I am entering and then leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	16	5	hr4z	figs-go	ἐλεύσομαι & πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I will send with letters	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	16	5	munt	figs-go	διέλθω & διέρχομαι	1	I will send with letters	Here, **passed through** and **going through** refer to entering and then exiting an area while one is traveling. Use a form in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “I have entered and then left … I am entering and then leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	16	5	zqlh	figs-pastforfuture	διέρχομαι	1	I will send with letters	Here Paul speaks as if he were **going through Macedonia** while he writes this letter. He speaks in this way because it is his current plan to go **through Macedonia** when he leaves Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul speaks in the present tense here with whatever tense is customarily used to speak about travel plans in your language. Alternate translation: “I will go through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 1CO	16	6	lsbt	translate-unknown	τυχὸν	1	you may help me on my way, wherever I go	Here, **perhaps** indicates that Paul is uncertain about how long he will stay with the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perhaps** with a word that indicates uncertainty or lack of confidence. Alternate translation: “maybe” or “possibly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	16	6	w94k	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε	1	you may help me on my way, wherever I go	Here, to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help me on my way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “you could give me what I need to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2442,27 +2442,27 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	16	7	k16x	figs-idiom	ἐν παρόδῳ	1	I do not wish to see you now	Here, **only in passing** refers to a brief time, particularly a time between two other events. Paul is referring to a short visit while traveling somewhere else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **only in passing** with a comparable phrase that refers to a short period of time. Alternate translation: “as I travel through” or “briefly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	7	d7tm	figs-idiom	χρόνον τινὰ	1	I do not wish to see you now	Here, **for some time** refers to a longer period of time than **only in passing**. Given what Paul said in the previous verse ([16:6](../16/06.md)), it probably refers to a time period as long as “winter.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for some time** with a word or phrase that refers to a period of time as long as a whole season. Alternate translation: “for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	7	m6rf	figs-idiom	ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος ἐπιτρέψῃ	1	I do not wish to see you now	Here, **if the Lord would permit** means that Paul plans on traveling in the ways he has described, but he acknowledges that this will only happen if that is what **the Lord** allows him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable phrase that refers to what a deity allows or wants. Alternate translation: “if the Lord wills” or “given that this is what the Lord allows me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	16	9	fyj3	figs-metaphor	θύρα&μοι ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Paul speaks of his opportunity to preach the gospel in Ephesus as if someone had opened a door for him to enter into a room. He describes this door as **wide** to indicate that the opportunity is great. He describes the door as **effective** to indicate that his work is producing results. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **a wide and effective door** that **has opened** describes a good opportunity that God has provided to preach the gospel with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I have found a wide and effective window of opportunity” or “God has given me an effective ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO	16	9	px3c	figs-explicit	θύρα&ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Here Paul speaks as if the **door** opens itself, but he implies that “God” is the one who has opened the door. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how the **door has opened** by clarifying that God opens it. Alternate translation: “God has opened a wide and effective door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	16	9	fyj3	figs-metaphor	θύρα & μοι ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Paul speaks of his opportunity to preach the gospel in Ephesus as if someone had opened a door for him to enter into a room. He describes this door as **wide** to indicate that the opportunity is great. He describes the door as **effective** to indicate that his work is producing results. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **a wide and effective door** that **has opened** describes a good opportunity that God has provided to preach the gospel with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I have found a wide and effective window of opportunity” or “God has given me an effective ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO	16	9	px3c	figs-explicit	θύρα & ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Here Paul speaks as if the **door** opens itself, but he implies that “God” is the one who has opened the door. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how the **door has opened** by clarifying that God opens it. Alternate translation: “God has opened a wide and effective door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	16	9	wsc0	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	a wide door has opened	Here, **and** could introduce: (1) another reason why Paul plans on staying in Ephesus. In other words, he stays both to take advantage of the “open door” and because he needs to resist those who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a potential reason why Paul would not stay in Ephesus. Paul would be saying that the “open door” is enough reason to stay even though there are **many** who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “even though” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	16	9	ycte	figs-nominaladj	πολλοί	1	a wide door has opened	Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	16	10	axhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν&ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	16	10	axhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν & ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	16	10	b83r	figs-go	ἔλθῃ	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Here Paul is speaking about how Timothy will visit the Corinthians. Use a word in your language that refers to a person arriving where someone lives to visit them. Alternate translation: “visits you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	16	10	p6vb	figs-idiom	βλέπετε ἵνα	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Here, **see that** refers to carefully doing something or making sure that something happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **see that** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “ensure that” or “be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	10	kiou	figs-explicit	ἀφόβως γένηται πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Here Paul implies that the Corinthians could make Timothy “afraid.” Throughout the letter, it has been clear that some of the Corinthians disagree with and even oppose Paul. Paul wants to make sure that the Corinthians do not treat Timothy badly because of his relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind why Paul wants to make sure that Timothy is **unafraid**more explicitly. Alternate translation: “you do not intimidate him” or “he is not afraid because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	16	10	bvi0	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&ἔργον Κυρίου ἐργάζεται	1	see that he is with you unafraid	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **work**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “he is working for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	16	11	f4mw	figs-imperative3p	μή τις&αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Let no one despise him	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “no one should despise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
-1CO	16	11	hkl7	translate-unknown	μή τις&ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Let no one despise him	Here, **despise** refers to how people treat others who have low status, including looking down on them and ignoring them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **despise** with a word or phrase that refers to how people treat others of lower status badly. Alternate translation: “let no one scorn him” or “let no one treat him with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	16	11	y9zy	figs-explicit	προπέμψατε&αὐτὸν	1	Let no one despise him	Here, just as in [16:6](../16/06.md), to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help him on his way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “give him what he needs to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	16	10	bvi0	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & ἔργον Κυρίου ἐργάζεται	1	see that he is with you unafraid	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **work**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “he is working for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1CO	16	11	f4mw	figs-imperative3p	μή τις & αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Let no one despise him	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “no one should despise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	16	11	hkl7	translate-unknown	μή τις & ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Let no one despise him	Here, **despise** refers to how people treat others who have low status, including looking down on them and ignoring them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **despise** with a word or phrase that refers to how people treat others of lower status badly. Alternate translation: “let no one scorn him” or “let no one treat him with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	16	11	y9zy	figs-explicit	προπέμψατε & αὐτὸν	1	Let no one despise him	Here, just as in [16:6](../16/06.md), to **help** people on their **way** refers to assisting them with the things that they need to travel, including food and money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **help him on his way** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “give him what he needs to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	16	11	qtcx	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1	Let no one despise him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “peaceably.” Alternate translation: “peaceably” or “in a peaceful way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	16	11	ymh9	figs-go	ἔλθῃ πρός με	1	Let no one despise him	Here, **come** refers to how Timothy will travel from Corinth back to where Paul is. Use a word that naturally describes this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he may return to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-1CO	16	11	gmnd	figs-explicit	ἐκδέχομαι&αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Let no one despise him	Here Paul is **expecting** Timothy to travel back to where Paul is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that this is what **expecting** means more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him to return with the brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	16	11	fi3p		ἐκδέχομαι&αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Let no one despise him	Here, **the brothers** could be: (1) traveling with Timothy, and Paul is expecting their return along with Timothy. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him and the brothers” (2) with Paul, expecting Timothy to return. Alternate translation: “I, with the brothers, am expecting him”
+1CO	16	11	gmnd	figs-explicit	ἐκδέχομαι & αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Let no one despise him	Here Paul is **expecting** Timothy to travel back to where Paul is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that this is what **expecting** means more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him to return with the brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1CO	16	11	fi3p		ἐκδέχομαι & αὐτὸν μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Let no one despise him	Here, **the brothers** could be: (1) traveling with Timothy, and Paul is expecting their return along with Timothy. Alternate translation: “I am expecting him and the brothers” (2) with Paul, expecting Timothy to return. Alternate translation: “I, with the brothers, am expecting him”
 1CO	16	11	rknd	figs-extrainfo	μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Let no one despise him	Paul provides no information about who **the brothers** are or how they relate to Timothy. He may refer to the same group of **brothers** again in the next verse ([16:12](../16/12.md)). If possible, use a generic or general phrase that refers to other believers. Alternate translation: “with the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	16	11	s7fw	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Let no one despise him	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. It is possible that the **brothers** were male, but Paul is not focusing on their gender. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	16	12	i0e3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	περὶ δὲ	1	our brother Apollos	Just as in [16:1](../16/01.md), **Now concerning** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now concerning** here as you did in [16:1](../16/01.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	16	12	is6j	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	our brother Apollos	Here, **brother** identifies **Apollos** as a fellow believer. **Apollos** was male, although **brother** does not emphasize this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with a word or phrase that identifies **Apollos** as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “our Christian brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	16	12	blp5	figs-go	ἔλθῃ&ἔλθῃ&ἐλεύσεται	1	our brother Apollos	Here, **come** refers to **Apollos** traveling from where Paul is to Corinth. Use a word that describes this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he would go … he would go … he will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1CO	16	12	blp5	figs-go	ἔλθῃ & ἔλθῃ & ἐλεύσεται	1	our brother Apollos	Here, **come** refers to **Apollos** traveling from where Paul is to Corinth. Use a word that describes this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he would go … he would go … he will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	16	12	akiu	figs-extrainfo	μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	our brother Apollos	Paul provides no information about who **the brothers** are or how they relate to Apollos. This may be the same group of **brothers** that Paul spoke about in the previous verse ([16:11](../16/11.md)), or it may be the three people whom Paul mentions in [16:17](../16/17.md). If possible, use a generic or general phrase that refers to other believers. Alternate translation: “with the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	16	12	pfbp	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	our brother Apollos	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. It is possible that the **brothers** were male, but Paul is not focusing on their gender. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	16	12	vzpi	figs-abstractnouns	πάντως οὐκ ἦν θέλημα	1	our brother Apollos	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “decide” or “choose.” Alternate translation: “it was not at all what he chose” or “he definitely did not choose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2477,16 +2477,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	16	13	b2pm	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	stand firm in the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea in another way. Here, **faith** could refer primarily to: (1) the act of believing. Alternate translation: “as you believe” or “in how you believe” (2) what they believe. Alternate translation: “in what you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	16	13	a3fs	figs-idiom	ἀνδρίζεσθε	1	act like men	Here, **act like men** is a way to urge someone to be brave and courageous. The opposite of acting **like men** is acting like cowards. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “be stouthearted” or “act with courage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	13	xwvg	figs-explicit	κραταιοῦσθε	1	act like men	Here, **be strong** does not refer to physical strength but rather to mental strength or determination. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **be strong** with a word or phrase that urges mental strength or determination. Alternate translation: “keep persevering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	16	14	rij5	figs-imperative3p	πάντα ὑμῶν&γινέσθω	1	Let all that you do be done in love	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All your things must happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+1CO	16	14	rij5	figs-imperative3p	πάντα ὑμῶν & γινέσθω	1	Let all that you do be done in love	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All your things must happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 1CO	16	14	kpnl	figs-idiom	πάντα ὑμῶν	1	Let all that you do be done in love	Here, **all your things** refers to everything that a person thinks and does. If your reader would misunderstand **all your things**, you could use an expression that refers to all the **things** that a person thinks and does. Alternate translation: “all that you do” or “all things that you think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	14	pbvz	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	Let all that you do be done in love	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love” or an adjective such as “loving.” Alternate translation: “in a loving way” or “so that you are loving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	16	15	fy4e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a comparable word or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1CO	16	15	wgyu	figs-infostructure	παρακαλῶ&ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, οἴδατε τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ, ὅτι ἐστὶν ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀχαΐας, καὶ εἰς διακονίαν τοῖς ἁγίοις ἔταξαν ἑαυτούς;	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul begins a sentence with **I urge you, brothers**. He continues this sentence in the next verse with “that you also would be subject” (see [16:16](../16/16.md)). The rest of this verse interrupts that sentence with information about the people that Paul is going to speak about. The ULT indicates this interruption by using parentheses. If your readers would find this interruption confusing, you could use markers that indicate such an interruption in your language, or you could rearrange the verse so that **I urge you, brothers** goes more directly with the next verse. Alternate translation: “you know the household of Stephanas, that they are the firstfruits of Achaia, and they have devoted themselves to the service of the saints. I urge you, brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1CO	16	15	wgyu	figs-infostructure	παρακαλῶ & ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, οἴδατε τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ, ὅτι ἐστὶν ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀχαΐας, καὶ εἰς διακονίαν τοῖς ἁγίοις ἔταξαν ἑαυτούς;	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul begins a sentence with **I urge you, brothers**. He continues this sentence in the next verse with “that you also would be subject” (see [16:16](../16/16.md)). The rest of this verse interrupts that sentence with information about the people that Paul is going to speak about. The ULT indicates this interruption by using parentheses. If your readers would find this interruption confusing, you could use markers that indicate such an interruption in your language, or you could rearrange the verse so that **I urge you, brothers** goes more directly with the next verse. Alternate translation: “you know the household of Stephanas, that they are the firstfruits of Achaia, and they have devoted themselves to the service of the saints. I urge you, brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	16	15	bq80	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Connecting Statement:	Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	16	15	asp2	translate-names	τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ	1	the household of Stephanas	**Stephanas** is the name of a man. Paul already mentioned his **household** in [1:16](../01/16.md). See how you translated this phrase there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1CO	16	15	bhhk	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ	1	the household of Stephanas	Here, **firstfruits** refers to what farmers first gathered from their fields. Often, these **firstfruits** were offered to God to thank him for providing food. What Paul emphasizes here is that **firstfruits** are the first products from a field, although the word also implies that there will be more products. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul uses **firstfruits** to emphasize that the **household of Stephanas** were the “first” to believe in Jesus with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “like the firstfruits since they were the first to believe” or “the first believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	16	15	na2p	translate-names	Ἀχαΐας	1	Achaia	**Achaia** is the name of a province in the southern part of what we call Greece. The city of Corinth is in this province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1CO	16	15	tki1	translate-unknown	εἰς&ἔταξαν ἑαυτούς	1	Achaia	Here, **they have devoted themselves** refers to how these people decided to spend most of their time doing something specific. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **devoted themselves** with a word or phrase that refers to how people choose to spend their time doing one thing. Alternate translation: “they have focused on” or “they have dedicated themselves to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1CO	16	15	tki1	translate-unknown	εἰς & ἔταξαν ἑαυτούς	1	Achaia	Here, **they have devoted themselves** refers to how these people decided to spend most of their time doing something specific. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **devoted themselves** with a word or phrase that refers to how people choose to spend their time doing one thing. Alternate translation: “they have focused on” or “they have dedicated themselves to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	16	15	x6p6	figs-abstractnouns	διακονίαν τοῖς ἁγίοις	1	Achaia	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **service**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “help” or “serve.” Alternate translation: “help the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	16	16	w9ki	writing-pronouns	τοῖς τοιούτοις	1	Achaia	Here, **the ones such as these** refers back to the “household of Stephanas” from the previous verse ([16:15](../16/15.md)). It also refers to anyone else who, like that “household,” “devote themselves to the service of the saints.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **the ones such as these** refers to “the household of Stephanas” and others like them with a word or phrase that does clearly refer to these two groups. Alternate translation: “to people who are like that” or “to them and those such as them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	16	16	ljg3	figs-abstractnouns	συνεργοῦντι	1	Achaia	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **work**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “who is working together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2496,11 +2496,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	16	17	e79z	translate-names	Στεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ	1	Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus	**Stephanas**, **Fortunatus**, and **Achaicus** are the names of three men. **Stephanas** is the same man whom Paul mentioned in [16:15](../16/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1CO	16	17	xodt	translate-unknown	ἀνεπλήρωσαν	1	Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus	Here, **supplied** refers to filling something up or making something complete. Here Paul says that these three men **supplied**, or filled up or completed, whatever Paul and the Corinthians were **lacking**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **supplied** with a word or phrase that refers to filling up or completing something. Alternate translation: “have filled up” or “have provided me with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	16	17	an3e	figs-idiom	τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα	1	They have made up for your absence	This could refer to: (1) what Paul is **lacking** in his relationship with the Corinthians. In other words, Paul misses the Corinthians and wishes he was with them. Alternate translation: “the contact with you that I was lacking” (2) what the Corinthians are **lacking** in how they are helping Paul. In other words, the Corinthians were not helping Paul very much until these three men arrived. Alternate translation: “the assistance that I was not receiving from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1CO	16	18	f3kg	figs-idiom	ἀνέπαυσαν&τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here, **refreshed my spirit and yours** refers to how these three men helped Paul and the Corinthians regain energy, strength, and confidence. In other words, they helped Paul and the Corinthians feel better and stronger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they raised my spirits and yours” or “they helped me and you rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1CO	16	18	f3kg	figs-idiom	ἀνέπαυσαν & τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here, **refreshed my spirit and yours** refers to how these three men helped Paul and the Corinthians regain energy, strength, and confidence. In other words, they helped Paul and the Corinthians feel better and stronger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they raised my spirits and yours” or “they helped me and you rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	18	lfxl		τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here, **spirit** is part of the idiom “refresh the spirit.” It refers to the **spirit** of the person, or their inner life, not to the Holy Spirit. If your readers would find **spirit** confusing, you could refer just to the people instead of to their “spirits.” Alternate translation: “me and you”
 1CO	16	18	hxt7	figs-ellipsis	τὸ ὑμῶν	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here Paul omits what it is that is **yours**. He does this because he stated it in the previous phrase (**spirit**). If your language would not omit **spirit** here, you could include it. Alternate translation: “your spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	16	18	k9d8	writing-pronouns	τοὺς τοιούτους	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here, **the ones like these** refers back to the three men whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse ([16:17](../16/17.md)). It also refers to anyone else who, like those men, “refreshes the spirit” of others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that **the ones like these** refers to the three men and others like them with a word or phrase that does clearly refer to these two groups. Alternate translation: “people who are like that” or “them and those such as them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1CO	16	19	urc0		ἀσπάζονται&ἀσπάζεται&πολλὰ	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	As was customary in his culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “ask to be remembered … enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “send regards … enthusiastically send regards to”
+1CO	16	19	urc0		ἀσπάζονται & ἀσπάζεται & πολλὰ	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	As was customary in his culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “ask to be remembered … enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “send regards … enthusiastically send regards to”
 1CO	16	19	nzlw	figs-idiom	πολλὰ	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here, **enthusiastically** indicates that **Aquila and Priscilla** wish to **greet** the Corinthians especially strongly or with extra friendship. Use a word or phrase that identifies an especially strong or friendly greeting. Alternate translation: “warmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	16	19	wkte	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies the greeting from **Aquila and Priscilla** as something that they give because both they and the Corinthians are united to the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their union with the Lord” or “as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	16	19	tipf	figs-ellipsis	ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς ἐν Κυρίῳ πολλὰ Ἀκύλας καὶ Πρίσκα, σὺν τῇ κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Paul has not included the verb “greet” with **the church in their home**, because it was unnecessary in his language. If including “greet” is necessary in your language, you could (1) move **with the church in their home** before **greet you**. Alternate translation: “Aquila and Priscilla, with the church in their home, enthusiastically greet you in the Lord” (2) include it with the phrase and **with the church in their home**. Alternate translation: “Aquila and Priscilla enthusiastically greet you in the Lord, and the church in their home also greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv
index 873b2a9f83..33a960ffe0 100644
--- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 EPH	front	intro	e3di			0		# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Ephesians\n\n1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1–23)\n1. Sin and salvation (2:1–10)\n1. Unity and peace (2:11–22)\n1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1–13)\n1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14–21)\n1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1–16)\n1. New life (4:17–32)\n1. Imitators of God (5:1–21)\n1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22–6:9)\n11. Armor of God (6:10–20)\n1. Final greeting (6:21–24)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?\n\nPaul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nThe Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.\n\n### What is the Book of Ephesians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?\n\nThe expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.\n\n### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?\n\nPaul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?\n\nWhen Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?\n\n* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.\n* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 EPH	1	intro	fg42			0		# Ephesians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### “I pray”<br><br>Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Predestination<br><br>Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])
 EPH	1	1	kx1g	figs-you		0	General Information:	Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers in the church at Ephesus (and elsewhere). Except where noted, all instances of “you” and “your” refer to the Ephesian believers as well as to all believers, and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EPH	1	1	ilf2		Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ&τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν	1	Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are	Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people”
+EPH	1	1	ilf2		Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ & τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν	1	Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are	Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people”
 EPH	1	1	u73p	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	in Christ Jesus	The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him, picturing believers as being surrounded by Christ. Alternate translation: “in close relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	1	2	x9ey		χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace to you and peace	This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing.
 EPH	1	3	lm67	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	In this book, unless otherwise stated, the words “us” and “we” refer to Paul, the believers in Ephesus, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ EPH	1	3	j2lk		ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις	1	in the heavenly places	T
 EPH	1	3	v9qz	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	in Christ	Here, **in Christ** could mean: (1) a metaphor referring to our close relationship with Christ. Alternate translation: “by uniting us with Christ” or “because we are united with Christ” (2) what Christ has done. Alternate translation: “through Christ” or “through what Christ has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	1	4	ibv6	figs-doublet	ἁγίους καὶ ἀμώμους	1	holy and blameless	Paul uses the two similar words **holy** and **blameless** to emphasize moral goodness. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EPH	1	4	ab01	figs-doublenegatives	ἀμώμους	1	blameless	The word **blameless** contains two negative ideas: “blame” or “fault,” and “-less,” which means “without.” If it would be helpful in your language, the two negative ideas can be replaced with the corresponding positive idea, “perfect.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-EPH	1	5	fp7l		προορίσας&αὐτόν&αὐτοῦ	1	General Information:	The words “he,” “himself,” and “his” refer to God.
+EPH	1	5	fp7l		προορίσας & αὐτόν & αὐτοῦ	1	General Information:	The words “he,” “himself,” and “his” refer to God.
 EPH	1	5	h7pn	figs-exclusive	προορίσας ἡμᾶς εἰς υἱοθεσίαν	1	he predestined us for adoption	The word **us** refers to Paul, the Ephesian church, and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “God planned long ago to adopt us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EPH	1	5	pq1x		προορίσας ἡμᾶς	1	he predestined us	Alternate translation: “God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago”
 EPH	1	5	e6f6	figs-metaphor	εἰς υἱοθεσίαν	1	for adoption	Here, **adoption** is a metaphor that refers to becoming part of God’s family. Alternate translation: “to become his children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ EPH	1	10	ab7q		ἐν αὐτῷ	1	in him	Alternate translation: “under his rul
 EPH	1	11	ww9s	figs-exclusive	καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν, προορισθέντες	1	we were also allotted as a possession. We were predestined	Both pronouns **we** and **We** are inclusive in this verse. Paul is referring to all Christians, who were predestined to belong to Christ. In verses 12 and 13 he will divide this group into “we” (exclusive) Jewish Christians and “you” Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EPH	1	11	t281	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν	1	we were also allotted as a possession	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God also chose us to be his possession. (2) God also chose us to be heirs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EPH	1	11	nkf8	figs-activepassive	προορισθέντες	1	We were predestined	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EPH	1	12	gj44	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς&τοὺς προηλπικότας ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1	we who were the first to have confident hope in Christ	Here, the word **we** is exclusive and refers to the Jewish believers who first heard the good news, not the believers at Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+EPH	1	12	gj44	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & τοὺς προηλπικότας ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1	we who were the first to have confident hope in Christ	Here, the word **we** is exclusive and refers to the Jewish believers who first heard the good news, not the believers at Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EPH	1	12	zqm9		εἰς τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς, εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης αὐτοῦ	1	so that we … would be for the praise of his glory	Alternate translation: “so that we … would live to praise him for his glory”
 EPH	1	13	j1zc			0	General Information:	Paul has been speaking in the previous two verses about himself and the other Jewish believers, but now he begins speaking about the Ephesian believers.
 EPH	1	13	ac1e		τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the word of truth	This could mean: (1) the message about the truth. (2) the true message.
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ EPH	2	2	n5d2		τὸν ἄρχοντα τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρ
 EPH	2	2	bj9y		τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ νῦν ἐνεργοῦντος	1	the spirit that is now working	Alternate translation: “the spirit of Satan, who is currently working”
 EPH	2	2	ab9y	figs-idiom	τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας	1	the sons of disobedience	Alternate translation: “people who routinely disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EPH	2	3	d3wd	figs-metonymy	τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ τῶν διανοιῶν	1	the desires of the body and of the mind	The words **body** and **minds** represent the entire person. Alternate translation: “the selfish things that people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EPH	2	3	zd6v	figs-idiom	τέκνα&ὀργῆς	1	children of wrath	Alternate translation: “people with whom God is angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EPH	2	3	zd6v	figs-idiom	τέκνα & ὀργῆς	1	children of wrath	Alternate translation: “people with whom God is angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EPH	2	4	abco	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The love and mercy of God is in sharp contrast to the evil way the Ephesians lived before they believed in God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EPH	2	4	chm6	figs-abstractnouns	Θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει	1	God is rich in mercy	The word **mercy** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “God is abundantly merciful” or “God is very kind to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EPH	2	4	hrx9	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ, ἣν ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς	1	because of his great love with which he loved us	The word **love** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “because he loved us so very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -122,11 +122,11 @@ EPH	2	13	abcw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	The connecting word **B
 EPH	2	13	uf8m	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς οἵ ποτε ὄντες μακρὰν, ἐγενήθητε ἐγγὺς ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	you who once were far away have been brought near by the blood of Christ	Not belonging to God due to sin is spoken of as **being far away** from God. Belonging to God because of **the blood of Christ** is spoken of as being **brought near** to God. Alternate translation: “you who once did not belong to God now belong to God because of the blood of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	2	13	tth1	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	by the blood of Christ	Here the **blood of Christ** is a metonym for his death. Alternate translation: “by Christ’s death” or “when Christ died for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EPH	2	14	abcv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For	The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ himself joined them to the Jewish believers. The result is that the Ephesian Gentile believers were brought near to God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EPH	2	14	ue4u		αὐτὸς&ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν	1	he himself is our peace	Alternate translation: “Jesus gives us his peace”
+EPH	2	14	ue4u		αὐτὸς & ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν	1	he himself is our peace	Alternate translation: “Jesus gives us his peace”
 EPH	2	14	ccy8	figs-exclusive	ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν	1	our peace	The word **our** refers to Paul and his readers and so, it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EPH	2	14	t9zn		ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἓν	1	who has made the two one	Alternate translation: “who made the Jews and Gentiles one”
 EPH	2	14	t6rd	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ αὐτοῦ	1	in his flesh	The phrase **his flesh,** his physical body, is a metonym for his body dying. Alternate translation: “by the death of his body on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EPH	2	14	d7uf	figs-metaphor	τὸ μεσότοιχον τοῦ φραγμοῦ&τὴν ἔχθραν	1	the middle wall of partition, the hostility	The **hostility** between the Jews and Gentiles is compared to a **wall**. Alternate translation: “the hostility that was like a wall that separated them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	2	14	d7uf	figs-metaphor	τὸ μεσότοιχον τοῦ φραγμοῦ & τὴν ἔχθραν	1	the middle wall of partition, the hostility	The **hostility** between the Jews and Gentiles is compared to a **wall**. Alternate translation: “the hostility that was like a wall that separated them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	2	15	bn71		τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν καταργήσας	1	He abolished the law of commandments in regulations	Jesus’ blood satisfies the law of Moses so that both the Jews and Gentiles can live at peace in God. Alternate translation: “He took away the requirements in the law of Moses”
 EPH	2	15	abcx	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of Christ in abolishing the law was to join the Jews and the Gentiles together into one group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 EPH	2	15	sr2r	figs-metaphor	ἕνα καινὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	one new man	Paul talks about the unity of Jews and Gentiles as if they had become **one** person. Alternate translation: “a single new people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ EPH	2	19	r11r	figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ συνπολῖται τῶν ἁγίων
 EPH	2	20	r2je	figs-metaphor	ἐποικοδομηθέντες ἐπὶ τῷ θεμελίῳ	1	You have been built on the foundation	Paul speaks of God’s people as if they were a building. Christ is the cornerstone, the apostles are the **foundation**, and the believers are the structure. Alternate translation: “you depend on the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	2	20	fs7j	figs-activepassive	ἐποικοδομηθέντες	1	You have been built	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has built you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EPH	2	21	g8ga	figs-metaphor	πᾶσα οἰκοδομὴ συναρμολογουμένη, αὔξει εἰς ναὸν ἅγιον	1	the whole building, being fit together, grows into a holy temple	Paul continues to speak of Christ’s family as if it were a **building**. In the same way that a builder fits stones together while building, so Christ is fitting us together. Alternate translation: “all of us, as we grow together, become a holy group that worships God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EPH	2	21	ljt5	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ&ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	In whom … in the Lord	These metaphors express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. Alternate translation: “In Christ … in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	2	21	ljt5	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ & ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	In whom … in the Lord	These metaphors express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. Alternate translation: “In Christ … in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	2	22	u55j	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ	1	in whom	You can translate this as “in Christ,” which is a metaphor that expresses the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	2	22	b4c8	figs-metaphor	καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε, εἰς κατοικητήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Πνεύματι	1	you also are being built together as a dwelling place for God in the Spirit	This describes how believers are being put together to become a **place** where **God** will permanently live through the power of the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “you also are being joined to this group where God lives by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	2	22	e52h	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε	1	you also are being built together	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God is also building you together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ EPH	3	2	rx7t		τὴν οἰκονομίαν τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θε
 EPH	3	3	dc7x	figs-activepassive	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν ἐγνωρίσθη μοι	1	according to the revelation made known to me	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “according to what God revealed to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EPH	3	3	qm6m		καθὼς προέγραψα ἐν ὀλίγῳ	1	about which I already wrote in brief	Paul refers here to another letter that he had written to these people.
 EPH	3	5	srn9	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἑτέραις γενεαῖς οὐκ ἐγνωρίσθη τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	which in other generations was not made known to the sons of men	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make these things known to people in the past” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EPH	3	5	eq5u	figs-activepassive	ὡς νῦν ἀπεκαλύφθη&ἐν Πνεύματι	1	as it now has been revealed by the Spirit	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but now the Spirit has revealed it” or “but now the Spirit has made it known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EPH	3	6	pqy3		εἶναι τὰ ἔθνη, συνκληρονόμα&διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	that the Gentiles are fellow heirs … through the gospel	This is the hidden truth that Paul began to explain in the previous verse. The **Gentiles** who receive Christ also receive everything that the Jewish believers receive from God.
+EPH	3	5	eq5u	figs-activepassive	ὡς νῦν ἀπεκαλύφθη & ἐν Πνεύματι	1	as it now has been revealed by the Spirit	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but now the Spirit has revealed it” or “but now the Spirit has made it known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EPH	3	6	pqy3		εἶναι τὰ ἔθνη, συνκληρονόμα & διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	that the Gentiles are fellow heirs … through the gospel	This is the hidden truth that Paul began to explain in the previous verse. The **Gentiles** who receive Christ also receive everything that the Jewish believers receive from God.
 EPH	3	6	y88q		σύνσωμα	1	fellow members of the body	The church is often referred to as the **body** of Christ.
 EPH	3	6	wxs4		ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	in Christ Jesus	The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
 EPH	3	6	i4h7		διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	through the gospel	This could mean: (1) because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow sharers in the promise. (2) because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow heirs and members of the body and fellow sharers in the promise.
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ EPH	3	8	y97f	figs-metaphor	ἀνεξιχνίαστον	1	unsearchable	Paul speak
 EPH	3	8	e96z	figs-metaphor	πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	riches of Christ	Paul speaks of the truth about **Christ** and the blessings he brings as if they were material wealth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	3	9	f2zp	figs-activepassive	τοῦ μυστηρίου, τοῦ ἀποκεκρυμμένου ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν τῷ Θεῷ, τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι	1	of the mystery that was hidden from the ages in God who created all things	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of God, who created all things, kept this plan hidden for long ages in the past” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EPH	3	10	abd3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of God revealing the mystery of the church to Paul is to enable the rulers in the heavenly places to see the wisdom of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-EPH	3	10	q62l	figs-activepassive	γνωρισθῇ&ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις&ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the multifaceted wisdom of God might be made known to the rulers and to the authorities in the heavenly places	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may make his great wisdom known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EPH	3	10	q62l	figs-activepassive	γνωρισθῇ & ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις & ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the multifaceted wisdom of God might be made known to the rulers and to the authorities in the heavenly places	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may make his great wisdom known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EPH	3	10	elh2	figs-doublet	ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις	1	to the rulers and to the authorities	The words **rulers** and **authorities** share similar meanings. Paul uses them together to emphasize that every spiritual being will know God’s wisdom. If your language does not have two words for this, you can use one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EPH	3	10	z7vy		ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις	1	in the heavenly places	The phrase **heavenly places** refers to the place where God is. See how this is translated in [Ephesians 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “in the supernatural world”
 EPH	3	10	ll77	figs-metaphor	ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the multifaceted wisdom of God	Paul talks of God’s **wisdom** as though it were an object with many surfaces. Alternate translation: “the complex wisdom of God” or “how extremely wise God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ EPH	3	18	bkk6		καταλαβέσθαι	1	to comprehend	This is the third item f
 EPH	3	18	uu6l		πᾶσιν τοῖς ἁγίοις	1	all the saints	Alternate translation: “all the believers in Christ”
 EPH	3	18	ef4s	figs-metaphor	τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος	1	the width and length and height and depth	In this metaphor Paul pictures something that is not physical or measurable as something that is physical but stretches out in all directions and, thus, is very large. This could refer to: (1) the intensity of Christ’s love for us. Alternate translation: “how very much Christ loves us” (2) the greatness of God’s wisdom. Alternate translation: “how very wise God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	3	18	ef4t	figs-explicit	τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος	1	the width and length and height and depth	It may be necessary to state explicitly what these words refer to. If so, you could combine this with the phrase from the next verse and say: “the width and length and height and depth of, and truly know the love of Christ” or “the width and length and height and depth of the love of Christ, and truly know it”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EPH	3	19	rev9		γνῶναί τε τὴν&ἀγάπην τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and to know the love of Christ	This continues the idea from the previous verse. They both refer to knowing the greatness of the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “that you can know how great Christ’s love for us is”
+EPH	3	19	rev9		γνῶναί τε τὴν & ἀγάπην τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and to know the love of Christ	This continues the idea from the previous verse. They both refer to knowing the greatness of the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “that you can know how great Christ’s love for us is”
 EPH	3	19	px4z		ἵνα πληρωθῆτε εἰς πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	so that you may be filled with all the fullness of God	This is the fourth item for which Paul bends his knees and prays ([Ephesians 3:14](../03/14.md)). The first is that they would “be strengthened” ([Ephesians 3:16](../03/16.md)), the second is that “Christ would live in their hearts through faith” ([Ephesians 3:17](../03/17.md)), and the third is that they “could comprehend Christ’s love” ([Ephesians 3:18](../03/18.md)).
 EPH	3	19	ab4z	figs-metaphor	ἵνα πληρωθῆτε εἰς πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	so that you may be filled with all the fullness of God	In this metaphor Paul pictures the Ephesian believers as containers into which **God** can pour himself. Alternate translation: “so God can give you everything that he has to give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	3	19	cd4z	figs-activepassive	ἵνα πληρωθῆτε	1	so that you may be filled	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that God can fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -222,11 +222,11 @@ EPH	4	3	ab5c	figs-abstractnouns	τηρεῖν τὴν ἑνότητα τοῦ Π
 EPH	4	4	x5kv		ἓν σῶμα	1	There is one body	The church is often referred to as the **body** of Christ.
 EPH	4	4	y6ep		ἓν Πνεῦμα	1	one Spirit	Alternate translation: “only one Holy Spirit”
 EPH	4	4	b9mr	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθητε ἐν μιᾷ ἐλπίδι τῆς κλήσεως ὑμῶν	1	you were called in one certain hope of your calling	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God called you to have one confident hope in your calling” or “there is one thing that God also chose you to be confident in and expect him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EPH	4	6	bz5i		Πατὴρ πάντων&ἐπὶ πάντων&διὰ πάντων&ἐν πᾶσιν	1	Father of all … over all … through all … in all	The word **all** here means “everything.”
+EPH	4	6	bz5i		Πατὴρ πάντων & ἐπὶ πάντων & διὰ πάντων & ἐν πᾶσιν	1	Father of all … over all … through all … in all	The word **all** here means “everything.”
 EPH	4	7	pp9t			0	General Information:	The quote here is from a song that King David wrote.
 EPH	4	7	i4za			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds believers of the gifts that Christ gives believers to use in the church, which is the whole body of believers.
-EPH	4	7	u2bw	figs-activepassive	ἑνὶ&ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἐδόθη ἡ χάρις	1	to each one of us grace has been given	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has given grace to each one of us” or “God gave a gift to each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EPH	4	7	abbw	figs-abstractnouns	ἑνὶ&ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἐδόθη ἡ χάρις	1	to each one of us grace has been given	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “God has given a gift to each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EPH	4	7	u2bw	figs-activepassive	ἑνὶ & ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἐδόθη ἡ χάρις	1	to each one of us grace has been given	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has given grace to each one of us” or “God gave a gift to each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EPH	4	7	abbw	figs-abstractnouns	ἑνὶ & ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἐδόθη ἡ χάρις	1	to each one of us grace has been given	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “God has given a gift to each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EPH	4	8	abdb	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that every believer has been given a spiritual gift. The result is that the Scripture says Jesus gave gifts to men. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EPH	4	8	wj8t		ἀναβὰς εἰς ὕψος	1	When he ascended to the heights	Alternate translation: “When Christ went up into heaven”
 EPH	4	9	e5at		ἀνέβη	1	He ascended	Alternate translation: “Christ went up”
@@ -253,8 +253,8 @@ EPH	4	14	r3bj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ κυβίᾳ τῶν ἀνθρώπω
 EPH	4	15	abdd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Instead	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Following every changing teaching is in contrast to becoming mature in Christ and building up his body. Use a word in your language that indicates contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EPH	4	15	ab88	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθεύοντες	1	speaking the truth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **truth**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “speaking truthfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EPH	4	15	i2ff	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	in love	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “as the members love one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EPH	4	15	zw32	figs-metaphor	εἰς αὐτὸν&ὅς ἐστιν ἡ κεφαλή	1	into him who is the head	Paul uses a metaphor of the human body to describe how Christ causes believers to work together in harmony as the **head** of a body causes the body parts to work together to grow in a healthy way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EPH	4	16	ll7f	figs-metaphor	ἐξ οὗ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα&τὴν αὔξησιν τοῦ σώματος ποιεῖται	1	from whom the whole body … causes the growth of the body	Paul continues the metaphor of the believers as a human **body** with Christ as the head to describe how Christ causes believers to work together in harmony as the head of a body causes the body parts to work together to grow in a healthy way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	4	15	zw32	figs-metaphor	εἰς αὐτὸν & ὅς ἐστιν ἡ κεφαλή	1	into him who is the head	Paul uses a metaphor of the human body to describe how Christ causes believers to work together in harmony as the **head** of a body causes the body parts to work together to grow in a healthy way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	4	16	ll7f	figs-metaphor	ἐξ οὗ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα & τὴν αὔξησιν τοῦ σώματος ποιεῖται	1	from whom the whole body … causes the growth of the body	Paul continues the metaphor of the believers as a human **body** with Christ as the head to describe how Christ causes believers to work together in harmony as the head of a body causes the body parts to work together to grow in a healthy way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	4	16	ab7f	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς οἰκοδομὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	for building up itself in love	The word **for** indicates a purpose clause. The purpose of all of the believers working together in harmony, as the members of a human body do, is so that all believers will grow in our ability to love each other and to love God. Use a word in your language that marks this as a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 EPH	4	16	abff	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	in love	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “as the members love one another” or “to be able to love each other more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EPH	4	16	l5r6	figs-metaphor	διὰ πάσης ἁφῆς τῆς ἐπιχορηγίας	1	by every supporting ligament	Paul continues the metaphor comparing the believers to a human body. A **ligament** is a strong band that connects bones or holds organs in place in the body. Just as the body is held together by strong ligaments, so the believers are held together by love that grows stronger as the body parts grow and work together. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ EPH	4	22	h1ha	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέσθαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τὴν π
 EPH	4	22	j7n7	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέσθαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	You are to put aside what belongs to your former manner of life, the old man	Paul is speaking of a way of living as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “You must stop doing the things that your former self did” or “Stop doing the things that you used to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	4	22	d3j6	figs-metaphor	τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	the old man	The **old man** refers to the “old nature” or “former self,” the way that the person was before the person became a believer in Christ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	4	22	qw3d	figs-metaphor	τὸν φθειρόμενον κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυμίας τῆς ἀπάτης	1	that is corrupt because of its deceitful desires	Paul is continuing to speak of a sinful way of living as if it were a person who does evil things. Alternate translation: “when you fooled yourself into thinking that it was good to do whatever evil thing that you wanted to do” See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EPH	4	23	jy7h	figs-activepassive	ἀνανεοῦσθαι&τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν	1	to be renewed in the spirit of your minds	This may be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “to allow God to change your attitudes and thoughts” or “to allow God to give you new attitudes and thoughts” See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EPH	4	23	jy7h	figs-activepassive	ἀνανεοῦσθαι & τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν	1	to be renewed in the spirit of your minds	This may be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “to allow God to change your attitudes and thoughts” or “to allow God to give you new attitudes and thoughts” See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EPH	4	24	x41y	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας	1	in righteousness and holiness of the truth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the words **righteousness**, **holiness**, and **truth**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “truly righteous and holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EPH	4	24	abc7	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθαι τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	to put on the new man	Paul continues to speak of a way of living as if it were a person, and also as if it were clothing, so that one could **put on** the **new** person like a robe. Alternate translation: “be the new person” or “start living in the new way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	4	25	abdi	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God has created the believers as new, holy people. The result is that they would stop acting immorally like they used to live. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ EPH	5	8	iw4q	figs-metaphor	νῦν δὲ φῶς ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	but now are
 EPH	5	8	abdu	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. The fact that the Ephesian believers were formerly darkness is in contrast to the fact that they are now light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EPH	5	8	l6ki	figs-metaphor	ὡς τέκνα φωτὸς περιπατεῖτε	1	Walk as children of light	To **Walk** on a path is a metaphor for how a person lives his life. Alternate translation: “Live as people who understand what the Lord wants them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	5	8	abc9	figs-simile	ὡς τέκνα φωτὸς	1	as children of light	God desires us to imitate or follow him since we are his spiritual **children**. Alternate translation: “as God’s children who know the truth” or “because you are God’s children and see the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-EPH	5	9	q194	figs-metaphor	ὁ&καρπὸς τοῦ φωτὸς ἐν πάσῃ ἀγαθωσύνῃ, καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	the fruit of the light consists in all goodness and righteousness and truth	Here, **fruit** is a metaphor for “result” or “outcome.” Alternate translation: “the result of living in the light is good work, right living, and truthful behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	5	9	q194	figs-metaphor	ὁ & καρπὸς τοῦ φωτὸς ἐν πάσῃ ἀγαθωσύνῃ, καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	the fruit of the light consists in all goodness and righteousness and truth	Here, **fruit** is a metaphor for “result” or “outcome.” Alternate translation: “the result of living in the light is good work, right living, and truthful behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	5	9	abdv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	for	The connecting word **for** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that fruit of the light is goodness and righteousness and truth. The result is that the Ephesian believers should walk as children of light. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EPH	5	11	zdu1	figs-metaphor	μὴ συνκοινωνεῖτε τοῖς ἔργοις τοῖς ἀκάρποις τοῦ σκότους	1	do not take part in the unfruitful works of darkness	Paul speaks of the useless, sinful things that unbelievers do as if they are evil deeds that people do in the dark so no one will see them. Alternate translation: “do not do useless, sinful things with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	5	11	v4d1	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔργοις τοῖς ἀκάρποις τοῦ σκότους	1	in the unfruitful works of darkness	Here Paul is comparing evil actions to an unhealthy tree that produces nothing good. Alternate translation: “actions that do nothing good, useful, or profitable, caused by darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ EPH	5	11	hpl2	figs-metaphor	ἐλέγχετε	1	expose them	Speaking against the
 EPH	5	12	cd23	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	them	Here, **them** refers to the “sons of disobedience” mentioned in 5:6 and also referred to as “them” in 5:7. If it is unclear who “them” refers to in either place, then use “those who disobey God” or a similar phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EPH	5	13	sp1z			0	General Information:	It is unknown if this quotation is a combination of quotations from the prophet Isaiah or a quotation from a hymn sung by the believers.
 EPH	5	13	abdy	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. Hiding the shameful works of darkness now is in contrast to the light exposing them later. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-EPH	5	13	vqi7	figs-metaphor	πᾶν&τὸ φανερούμενον φῶς ἐστιν	1	everything that is revealed is light	Paul makes this general statement in order to imply that God’s Word shows people’s actions to be good or bad. The Bible often speaks of God’s truth as if it were **light** that could reveal the character of something. Alternate translation: “if you compare everything to what God says, you could know if it is good or bad” See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	5	13	vqi7	figs-metaphor	πᾶν & τὸ φανερούμενον φῶς ἐστιν	1	everything that is revealed is light	Paul makes this general statement in order to imply that God’s Word shows people’s actions to be good or bad. The Bible often speaks of God’s truth as if it were **light** that could reveal the character of something. Alternate translation: “if you compare everything to what God says, you could know if it is good or bad” See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	5	14	abdz	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that their sins will be revealed by the light. The result is that sinners should allow Christ to shine on them. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EPH	5	14	z4ar	figs-apostrophe	ἔγειρε, ὁ καθεύδων, καὶ ἀνάστα ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν	1	Awake, O sleeper, and arise from the dead	This could mean: (1) Paul is addressing the believers and using death as a metaphor for their areas of spiritual weakness that they need to become aware of and reject. (2) Paul is addressing unbelievers who need to wake up from being dead spiritually just as a person who has died must come alive again in order to respond. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 EPH	5	14	abcl	figs-apostrophe	ὁ καθεύδων	1	O sleeper	This could mean: (1) Paul is addressing this comment directly to the believers who are reading or hearing the letter. (2) Paul is addressing this comment directly to unbelievers who are not reading or hearing the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ EPH	5	20	e6w5	figs-metaphor	ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶ
 EPH	5	20	abw5		τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί	1	to God, even the Father	Alternate translation: “to God, who is our Father”
 EPH	5	22	isd7			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to one another ([Ephesians 5:21](../05/21.md)). He starts with instructions to wives and husbands on how they should act toward each other.
 EPH	5	23	abe7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For	The connecting word **For** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the husband is head of the wife in the same way Christ is head of the church. The result is that wives should submit to their husbands. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EPH	5	23	x637	figs-metaphor	κεφαλὴ τῆς γυναικὸς&κεφαλὴ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	the head of the wife … the head of the church	The word **head** here represents the leader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH	5	23	x637	figs-metaphor	κεφαλὴ τῆς γυναικὸς & κεφαλὴ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	the head of the wife … the head of the church	The word **head** here represents the leader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EPH	5	23	abc1		τοῦ σώματος	1	of the body	The church is often referred to as the **body** of Christ.
 EPH	5	25	sx8d			0	General Information:	Here the words **himself** and **he** refer to Christ. The word **her** refers to the church.
 EPH	5	25	sm9e		ἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας	1	love your wives	Here, **love** means that the husband unselfishly does what is best for the wife, unselfishly serving or giving to his wife.
diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv
index c4cf2b40ac..29b2643d71 100644
--- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ PHP	1	6	qhmh		ὑμῖν	1		See how you translated the word **you** in [Philippi
 PHP	1	6	p2a5	figs-explicit	ἐπιτελέσει	1		Here, **will perfect {it}** means that God would bring to completion the work which he began in the lives of the Philippian believers at their conversion and which he was continuing to do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	6	p5pu	figs-explicit	ἡμέρας Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		The phrase **the day of Jesus Christ** refers to the time in the future when Jesus Christ will return to judge the world and save those who believe in him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	7	sowf	figs-idiom	τὸ ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς	1	I have you in my heart	The phrase, **I have you in my heart** is an idiom which expresses strong affection. If you have an equivalent expression which adequately communicates the meaning, you may use it here. If not, you could state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-PHP	1	7	jn2s		συνκοινωνούς μου τῆς χάριτος&ὄντας	1	being partakers with me of grace	Alternate translation: “sharing in grace with me”
+PHP	1	7	jn2s		συνκοινωνούς μου τῆς χάριτος & ὄντας	1	being partakers with me of grace	Alternate translation: “sharing in grace with me”
 PHP	1	7	df00	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτος	1		Here, **grace** refers to the way that God kindly gives us good things that we do not deserve. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with a verb or adjective. In this context, Paul considers both his imprisonment and his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel to be gifts from God. Alternate translation: “of God’s gracious gift” or “in experiencing how kind God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	7	o7ef	figs-metonymy	δεσμοῖς μου	1		Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard and the Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHP	1	7	wey7	figs-doublet	καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀπολογίᾳ καὶ βεβαιώσει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1		The words translated **defense** and **confirmation** could be used to refer to defending and confirming in a court of law the truth of something against which a charge was made. These two words mean very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that this is hard work. If your language has one word for these ideas, use that here and add emphasis another way. If there is a word or phrase that could be used with this legal sense but could also be used in the context of defending the gospel, consider using it here. Alternate translation: “and as I contend for the truth of the gospel” or “and as I labor to show people that the gospel is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ PHP	1	12	zy4g	figs-explicit	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ	1	the things concerning me
 PHP	1	12	q288	figs-metaphor	μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν	1	have really happened for the advancement of the gospel	The phrase **advancement of the gospel** refers to an increasing number of people hearing and believing the gospel. Alternate translation: “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	1	13	wi6n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	my chains in Christ became apparent among the whole palace guard and all the others	Here, the phrase **As a result** shows that what follows this phrase is the result of Paul’s circumstances which he began discussing in verse 12, namely, his imprisonment. Consider using a connecting word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows it is the result of Paul’s imprisonment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHP	1	13	h1ly	figs-metonymy	δεσμούς μου	1	my chains in Christ became apparent	Paul again refers to his imprisonment in a figurative way by using the phrase **my chains**. See how you translated this phrase in [1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-PHP	1	13	f8az	figs-explicit	τοὺς δεσμούς μου&ἐν Χριστῷ	1	my chains in Christ	Here, the phrase **my chains in Christ** means that Paul is imprisoned because of his work for the cause of Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	1	13	f8az	figs-explicit	τοὺς δεσμούς μου & ἐν Χριστῷ	1	my chains in Christ	Here, the phrase **my chains in Christ** means that Paul is imprisoned because of his work for the cause of Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	14	a1kh		τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1		See how you translated **brothers** in the previous verse [1:12](../01/12.md).
 PHP	1	14	eurs	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1		Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “my companions who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	1	14	sz29	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου	1		The phrase **encouraged in the Lord** means that the Philippian Christians had grown in their trust of the Lord because of Paul’s imprisonment. Alternate translation: “trust the Lord more because of my chains” or “have received more courage from the Lord as a result of my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ PHP	1	14	k4tm	figs-activepassive	καὶ τοὺς πλείονας τῶν ἀ
 PHP	1	14	ecy8	figs-metonymy	δεσμοῖς μου	1		Paul is referring to his imprisonment by mentioning one part of it: the chains that bound his feet and hands. If this is unclear in your language, you could mention the imprisonment directly. See how you translated the phrase **my chains** in [1:7](../01/07.md) and [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “because of my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHP	1	14	v2wo	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον	1		Here, **the word** refers to the message from God about Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel” or “the good news” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	1	15	sa9n			0	Some indeed even proclaim Christ	Beginning in this verse, and extending to the end of [1:17](../01/17.md), Paul uses a poetic device called chiasm that could be confusing in some languages. You may need to reorder certain things in [1:15–17](../01/15.md) if it would be more natural in your language. See the UST.
-PHP	1	15	vw1s		τινὲς μὲν καὶ&τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν	1	Some indeed even proclaim Christ	Alternate translation: “Some people are preaching the good news about Jesus”
+PHP	1	15	vw1s		τινὲς μὲν καὶ & τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν	1	Some indeed even proclaim Christ	Alternate translation: “Some people are preaching the good news about Jesus”
 PHP	1	15	z9y9	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ φθόνον καὶ ἔριν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **envy** and **strife** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because they are envious and seek their own evil purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	15	yh1c	figs-abstractnouns	εὐδοκίαν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodwill** by using it in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “their desire that others would know Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	16	w0b8	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἀγάπης	1		Here the object of the word **love** is not specified. You can leave the object of **love** unspecified or, if it is needed in your language, you may specify the object of **love**. Here, the word **love** could refer to: (1) love for Paul. Alternate translation: “because of their love for me” (2) love for Christ. Alternate translation: “The ones who proclaim the good news because they love Christ” (3) love for multiple objects, such as Paul and Christ and those who have not yet heard or believed in the gospel. Alternate translation: “The ones who proclaim the good news because of their love for me, and Jesus, and those who do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ PHP	1	25	vnn9	figs-hendiadys	εἰς τὴν ὑμῶν προκοπὴν κα
 PHP	1	25	h6f2		ὑμῶν	1		See how you translated the word **your** in [1:5](../01/05.md).
 PHP	1	25	zse3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in trusting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	26	viwq	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, the phrase **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose of what came before it. The purpose of Paul remaining alive, ([1:25](../01/25.md)), was to increase the Philippian’s boasting in Christ. In your translation, use the method your language uses to indicate purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-PHP	1	26	d906	figs-abstractnouns	καύχημα&ἐν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boasting** by expressing its meaning in a verb phrase or in some other way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “glorying in” or “rejoicing in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+PHP	1	26	d906	figs-abstractnouns	καύχημα & ἐν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boasting** by expressing its meaning in a verb phrase or in some other way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “glorying in” or “rejoicing in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	1	26	j1d2	figs-go	παρουσίας	1		Here the word **coming** describes Paul’s travel from the perspective of the Philippians. In your language, it may be more natural to describe his travel from Paul’s perspective and use a word such as “going.” Here and in verse [27](../01/27.md), use the word or phrase that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 PHP	1	26	ay37	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τῆς ἐμῆς παρουσίας	1		Here the word **through** could refer to: (1) the reason the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “because”. Alternate translation: …because of my coming” (2) the means by which the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “by”. Alternate translation: “by my coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHP	1	27	bwmq	figs-go	ἐλθὼν	1		Your language may have a different way of expressing the motion described by the word **come**. Here, the word **come** refers to Paul traveling to where the Philippians live and visiting them. See how you translated the form of this word in the previous verse, [1:26](../01/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -118,11 +118,11 @@ PHP	1	30	cewf	figs-metaphor	τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, 
 PHP	1	30	hnec	figs-idiom	εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί	1		Here, the phrase **in me** occurs twice, both times referring to what Paul is experiencing. If this would be unclear in your language, you could express this in a way that is understandable in your language. Alternate translation: “you saw me experience and now hear that I am experiencing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 PHP	2	intro	ixw8			0		# Philippians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6–11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Practical instructions<br><br>In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “If there is any”<br><br>This appears as though it is a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.”
 PHP	2	1	v4ns	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is the natural result of or conclusion to what preceded it. Use the most natural form in your language to show this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-PHP	2	1	b1q7	figs-explicit	εἴ τις&παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ, εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης, εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος, εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί	1	If there is any encouragement in Christ	The phrase **if {there is} any**, which occurs one time in this verse, and the phrase **if any**, which occurs three times in this verse, appear to be hypothetical statements. However, they are not hypothetical, because they each express things which are true. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning of these phrases explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the encouragement which comes from Christ, because there is comfort from his love, because of the fellowship of the Spirit, because you have affections and compassions” or “since Christ has encouraged you, since there is comfort from his love, since there is fellowship in the Spirit, since you have affections and compassions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	2	1	b1q7	figs-explicit	εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ, εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης, εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος, εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί	1	If there is any encouragement in Christ	The phrase **if {there is} any**, which occurs one time in this verse, and the phrase **if any**, which occurs three times in this verse, appear to be hypothetical statements. However, they are not hypothetical, because they each express things which are true. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning of these phrases explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the encouragement which comes from Christ, because there is comfort from his love, because of the fellowship of the Spirit, because you have affections and compassions” or “since Christ has encouraged you, since there is comfort from his love, since there is fellowship in the Spirit, since you have affections and compassions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	1	del5	figs-ellipsis	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης, εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος, εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί	1		In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the missing words, “there is,” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would cause confusion. Alternate translation: “if there is any comfort from love, if there is any fellowship of the Spirit, if there are any affections and compassions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-PHP	2	1	xye5	figs-abstractnouns	εἴ τις&παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **encouragement** by using a verbal form of this word. Alternate translation: “if Christ encourages you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	2	1	n82s		εἴ τις&παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **encouragement** could refer to: (1) “encouragement” (2) “exhortation” Alternate translation: “if there is any exhortation in Christ” (3) both the idea of “encouragement” and “exhortation” at the same time. Alternate translation: “if there is any encouragement and exhortation in Christ”
-PHP	2	1	dapb	figs-explicit	εἴ τις&παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase, **encouragement in Christ** probably means the encouragement that Christ gives to believers because they are in union with him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the encouragement which comes from Christ” or “if Christ encourages you” or “because you are encouraged by being in Christ” or “since you are encouraged because of your union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	2	1	xye5	figs-abstractnouns	εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **encouragement** by using a verbal form of this word. Alternate translation: “if Christ encourages you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+PHP	2	1	n82s		εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **encouragement** could refer to: (1) “encouragement” (2) “exhortation” Alternate translation: “if there is any exhortation in Christ” (3) both the idea of “encouragement” and “exhortation” at the same time. Alternate translation: “if there is any encouragement and exhortation in Christ”
+PHP	2	1	dapb	figs-explicit	εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase, **encouragement in Christ** probably means the encouragement that Christ gives to believers because they are in union with him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the encouragement which comes from Christ” or “if Christ encourages you” or “because you are encouraged by being in Christ” or “since you are encouraged because of your union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	1	k1b2	figs-explicit	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης	1	if any comfort of love	Here, **love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	1	d63e	figs-abstractnouns	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **comfort** and **love** by using verbal forms of these words and/or using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if Christ’s love for you has comforted you” or “if being loved by Christ has comforted you” or “if Christ’s love comforts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	1	ub8e	figs-explicit	εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης	1		The phrase **comfort of love** refers to the comfort which the Philippian believers received from Christ’s love. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if you have received any comfort from Christ’s love” or “if Christ’s love comforts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ PHP	2	3	xmey	figs-abstractnouns	μηδὲ κατὰ κενοδοξίαν	1		If y
 PHP	2	3	kzj6	figs-abstractnouns	ἀλλὰ τῇ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ ἀλλήλους ἡγούμενοι ὑπερέχοντας ἑαυτῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **humility** by using an adjective or some other way. Alternate translation: “but rather, act in a humble way by considering others more important than yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	4	ezk6		μὴ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος σκοποῦντες, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἑτέρων ἕκαστοι	1	each one not considering the things of himself, but also the things of each other	Alternate translation: “each of you caring not only about what you need, but also about what others need”
 PHP	2	4	nowd	figs-explicit	ἕκαστος	1		The phrase **each one** here means “each person” and refers to all of the Philippian believers. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “every one of you” or “each of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	2	4	ob45		μὴ&σκοποῦντες	1		Alternate translation: “not thinking about”
+PHP	2	4	ob45		μὴ & σκοποῦντες	1		Alternate translation: “not thinking about”
 PHP	2	4	l3q0	figs-pronouns	ἑαυτῶν	1		Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** is plural in form in the original language in which Paul wrote this letter. If your language has a plural form for this pronoun, consider using it here. Alternate translation: “of yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
 PHP	2	4	qmzl	figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτῶν	1		Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** refers back to **each one** at the beginning of the verse. Alternate translation: “of yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 PHP	2	5	pqdc		τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Alternate translation: “Have the same attitude that Christ Jesus had”
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ PHP	2	5	rh98	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν,
 PHP	2	5	kwoe	figs-yousingular	τοῦτο φρονεῖτε	1		This is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian believers. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you should have this attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	5	acmu	figs-explicit	τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here the phrase **Have this attitude in you which also {was} in Christ Jesus** means that a believer is to have the same attitude and disposition which Christ Jesus had and which characterized his behavior. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating it explicitly. Alternate translation: “Think the same way that Christ Jesus did” or “Have the same values which Christ Jesus also had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	6	xo2l		ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων	1		The phrase **existing in the form of God** means that Jesus had the very nature of God. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be God, but was not God. This phrase is saying that Jesus was fully God. The rest of this verse and the next two verses explain that Jesus, while being fully God, humbled himself and acted as a servant, in obedience to God. Avoid any translation that would suggest that Jesus was not fully God. Alternate translation: “being fully God” or “though everything that is true of God is true of him”
-PHP	2	6	kd1l		οὐχ&ἡγήσατο	1		Alternate translation: “did not think” or “did not regard”
+PHP	2	6	kd1l		οὐχ & ἡγήσατο	1		Alternate translation: “did not think” or “did not regard”
 PHP	2	6	els2		ἁρπαγμὸν	1	did not consider being equal with God something to be grasped	Alternate translation: “something to be held onto” or “something to be retained”
 PHP	2	7	x5rt	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		The word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the preceding clause in [2:6](../02/06.md) and what is expressed about Jesus in this verse and the next two verses. The contrast is made between Jesus’ choice to retain his divine rights and privileges, or to surrender them. Choose the best form in your language to show the contrast that **Instead** expresses here. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” or “Rather” or “But instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 PHP	2	7	kvjd	writing-pronouns	ἀλλὰ ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν	1		Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider the best way to express the meaning of **he** to show that it refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Instead, Jesus emptied himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ PHP	2	17	ji4w	figs-abstractnouns	σπένδομαι	1		If it would be clearer in
 PHP	2	17	thi0	figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ καὶ λειτουργίᾳ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “on your sacrifice and service which you offer because you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 PHP	2	17	ip8i	figs-hendiadys	ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ καὶ λειτουργίᾳ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν	1		The words **sacrifice** and **service** express a single idea by using two words connected by **and**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning as a single idea or phrase. Alternate translation: “to complete your sacrificial service which you offer because you believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 PHP	2	17	s1j9		χαίρω καὶ συνχαίρω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν	1		The phrase **I rejoice and rejoice with you all** is Paul’s summary of his attitude toward his hard work and suffering on behalf of the Philippians, which he described in [2:16](../02/16.md) and in this verse.
-PHP	2	18	bicj	figs-explicit	τὸ&αὐτὸ	1		The phrase **in the same manner** refers to the Philippian Christians rejoicing in the same manner that Paul said he would rejoice in previous verse [2:17](../02/17.md). If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the same way that I rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	2	18	bicj	figs-explicit	τὸ & αὐτὸ	1		The phrase **in the same manner** refers to the Philippian Christians rejoicing in the same manner that Paul said he would rejoice in previous verse [2:17](../02/17.md). If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the same way that I rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	18	dr9c	figs-yousingular	καὶ ὑμεῖς χαίρετε καὶ συνχαίρετέ μοι	1	Connecting Statement:	The phrases **you also rejoice** and **rejoice with me** are both commands or instructions given to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I urge each of you to rejoice, and also to rejoice with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	19	gml9	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίζω δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	Now I hope in the Lord Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **hope** with a verb form such as “hoping.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	20	d9mw		οὐδένα γὰρ ἔχω ἰσόψυχον	1	For I have no one like-minded	Alternate translation: “For I have no one else who loves you like I do”
@@ -220,13 +220,13 @@ PHP	2	21	b922	figs-explicit	οἱ πάντες γὰρ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ζη
 PHP	2	22	gm8i	figs-simile	ὡς πατρὶ τέκνον, σὺν ἐμοὶ ἐδούλευσεν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	as a child with his father, he served with me	The point of this comparison is that children learn from their fathers and try to follow and imitate them as they work alongside them. Paul was not Timothy’s biological father, but he uses this simile to illustrate how Timothy worked alongside him and learned from him as, together, they advanced the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he learned from me and did what I did as he served with me in the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 PHP	2	22	clvw	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δὲ δοκιμὴν αὐτοῦ γινώσκετε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **worth** with an adjective such as “valuable” or in some other way. Alternate translation: “But you know how valuable Timothy is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	22	xdn5	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	in the gospel	Here, **the gospel** means the work of advancing the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in gospel work” or “in working to spread the gospel” or “in the work of telling people the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-PHP	2	24	yn62		πέποιθα&ἐν Κυρίῳ, ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ταχέως ἐλεύσομαι	1	I am confident in the Lord that I myself will also come soon	Alternate translation: “I am sure, if it is the Lord’s will, that I will also come soon”
+PHP	2	24	yn62		πέποιθα & ἐν Κυρίῳ, ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ταχέως ἐλεύσομαι	1	I am confident in the Lord that I myself will also come soon	Alternate translation: “I am sure, if it is the Lord’s will, that I will also come soon”
 PHP	2	24	qqpo	figs-explicit	ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ταχέως ἐλεύσομαι.	1		Here, the word **also** expresses that Paul was confident that he would be able to visit the Philippian Christians too, in addition to sending Timothy to them. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that I myself, in addition to Timothy, will also come soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	2	24	wbpc	figs-go	ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ταχέως ἐλεύσομαι	1		Your language may say “go” instead of **come** in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “that I myself will also go soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 PHP	2	25	k4wz	translate-names	Ἐπαφρόδιτον	1	Epaphroditus	**Epaphroditus** is the name of a man sent by the Philippian church to minister to Paul in prison. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-PHP	2	25	csw5	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφὸν&μου	1		Here the phrase **my brother** does not mean that Epaphroditus was Paul’s biological brother. Rather, Paul calls Epaphroditus his **brother** because they were both members of God’s spiritual family through their faith in Jesus Christ. If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my spiritual brother” or “my brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+PHP	2	25	csw5	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφὸν & μου	1		Here the phrase **my brother** does not mean that Epaphroditus was Paul’s biological brother. Rather, Paul calls Epaphroditus his **brother** because they were both members of God’s spiritual family through their faith in Jesus Christ. If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my spiritual brother” or “my brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	2	25	c3ce	figs-metaphor	συνστρατιώτην	1	fellow worker and fellow soldier	Here the phrase **fellow soldier** does not mean that Epaphroditus and Paul were actual soldiers in a military. What Paul means is that he and Epaphroditus were spiritual soldiers fighting together beside God in the spiritual battle against Satan and evil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly or modify the phrase **fellow soldier** to further explain what Paul means, or you could express the meaning of **fellow soldier** by turning it into a simile, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “fellow believer who works and struggles along with us” or “fellow soldier of God” or “fellow warrior for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	2	25	qsd6		ὑμῶν&ἀπόστολον καὶ λειτουργὸν τῆς χρείας μου	1	your messenger and minister for my needs	Alternate translation: “who brings your messages to me and helps me in my need”
+PHP	2	25	qsd6		ὑμῶν & ἀπόστολον καὶ λειτουργὸν τῆς χρείας μου	1	your messenger and minister for my needs	Alternate translation: “who brings your messages to me and helps me in my need”
 PHP	2	26	gxn9		ἐπιποθῶν ἦν πάντας ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἀδημονῶν	1	he is longing to be with you all and he is distressed	Alternate translation: “he has wanted to be with you all and is deeply concerned”
 PHP	2	26	wdvh	writing-pronouns	ἐπειδὴ ἐπιποθῶν ἦν πάντας ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἀδημονῶν διότι ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἠσθένησεν	1		In this verse all three uses of the pronoun **he** refer to Epaphroditus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural. Alternate translation: “seeing that Epaphroditus has been longing to be with you all and is distressed because you heard that he was sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 PHP	2	27	d3ou	writing-pronouns	καὶ γὰρ ἠσθένησεν παραπλήσιον θανάτῳ, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ἠλέησεν αὐτόν, οὐκ αὐτὸν δὲ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐμέ, ἵνα μὴ λύπην ἐπὶ λύπην σχῶ	1		Here the pronoun **he** refers to Epaphroditus, as do both uses of the pronoun **him**. If this would be unclear in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation. Alternate translation: “For indeed Epaphroditus was sick nearly to death. But God had mercy on him, and not on him only, but also on me, so that I might not have sorrow upon sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ PHP	2	27	ioqq	figs-explicit	λύπην ἐπὶ λύπην	1		If it would be hel
 PHP	2	27	dzgz		λύπην ἐπὶ λύπην	1		The expression **sorrow upon sorrow** could mean: (1) adding the sorrow of Epaphroditus’ death to the sorrow of Epaphroditus’ sickness. Alternate translation: “the sorrow of Epaphroditus’ death added to the sorrow of his sickness” (2) adding the sorrow of Epaphroditus’ death to the sorrow of Paul’s imprisonment. Alternate translation: “the sorrow of Epaphroditus’ death added to the sorrow of my imprisonment”
 PHP	2	28	kt1d	writing-pronouns	σπουδαιοτέρως οὖν ἔπεμψα αὐτὸν, ἵνα ἰδόντες αὐτὸν πάλιν, χαρῆτε κἀγὼ ἀλυπότερος ὦ	1		Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to Epaphroditus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying who **him** is referring to in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I sent Epaphroditus all the more eagerly, so that, having seen him again, you might rejoice, and I might be free from pain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 PHP	2	28	y5gc	figs-abstractnouns	κἀγὼ ἀλυπότερος ὦ	1	and I might be free from pain	Here when Paul refers to **pain**, he is referring to emotional pain. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pain**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **pain** with an adjective such as “anxious” or “concerned” or in some other way. Alternate translation: “and I might be less anxious” or “and I might be less concerned about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHP	2	29	y95x	figs-yousingular	προσδέχεσθε&αὐτὸν	1	Therefore welcome him	The word **welcome** is a command or instruction in plural form to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I exhort all of you to welcome him” or “all of you receive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+PHP	2	29	y95x	figs-yousingular	προσδέχεσθε & αὐτὸν	1	Therefore welcome him	The word **welcome** is a command or instruction in plural form to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I exhort all of you to welcome him” or “all of you receive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	29	qx14	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν Κυρίῳ μετὰ πάσης χαρᾶς	1	in the Lord with all joy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adverb such as “joyfully,” as the UST does, or you can use a verbal form of this word such as “rejoicing.” Alternate translation: “Therefore, welcome him in the Lord with rejoicing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	2	29	l59w	figs-yousingular	ἐντίμους ἔχετε	1		The phrase **hold in honor** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I exhort each of you to hold in honor” or “each of you honor” or “all of you honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	2	29	lk2b	figs-abstractnouns	ἐντίμους ἔχετε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **honor**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **honor** with a verbal form of **honor** as the UST does, or in some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ PHP	3	1	b8y6		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	rejoice in the Lord	Alternate translation: “
 PHP	3	1	qb78	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν δὲ ἀσφαλές	1	and is a safeguard for you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how writing these things is a **safeguard** for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “and these teachings will protect you from those who teach what is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	2	ttws	figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	-1		All three times that the phrase **Beware** occurs in this verse, it is a command or instruction given to all of the Philippian believers. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I exhort each of you to beware of” or “Each of you beware of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	3	2	ny6y		βλέπετε	-1	Beware	Alternate translation: “Watch out for” or “Look out for” or “Be on guard against”
-PHP	3	2	zin8		τοὺς κύνας&τοὺς κακοὺς ἐργάτας&τὴν κατατομήν	1	the dogs … the evil workers … the mutilation	The phrases **the dogs**, **the evil workers**, and **the mutilation** are three different ways of describing the same group of Jewish teachers who were corrupting the gospel. Paul uses strong expressions to convey his feelings about these Jewish teachers.
+PHP	3	2	zin8		τοὺς κύνας & τοὺς κακοὺς ἐργάτας & τὴν κατατομήν	1	the dogs … the evil workers … the mutilation	The phrases **the dogs**, **the evil workers**, and **the mutilation** are three different ways of describing the same group of Jewish teachers who were corrupting the gospel. Paul uses strong expressions to convey his feelings about these Jewish teachers.
 PHP	3	2	yeax	translate-unknown	τοὺς κύνας	1	the dogs	Paul speaks of the Jewish teachers who were corrupting the gospel as though they were **dogs** in order to show strong contempt for them. A dog is an animal that is common in many parts of the world. Dogs are despised in some cultures but not despised in other cultures, so using the term **dogs** in some cultures may not have the same derogatory or negative meaning that Paul intended. If you have a different animal in your culture that is despised or whose name is used as an insult, you could use this animal instead, if it would fit well in this context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 PHP	3	2	n44a	figs-explicit	κακοὺς ἐργάτας	1		Here, the phrase **evil workers** refers to Jewish teachers who were teaching things that were contrary to the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this phrase using plain language. Alternate translation: “false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	2	vc2u	translate-unknown	τὴν κατατομήν	1		The word **mutilation** is a sarcastic way of referring to circumcision, and the phrase **the mutilation** is a sarcastic way of referring to the people who taught that circumcision was necessary in order to be in right standing with God. By using the term **mutilation**, Paul is showing the Philippian believers that those who trust in circumcision, and not solely in Christ, mistakenly think that they can earn God’s favor by cutting their bodies. Consider the term that would best communicate this idea in your language, or you could state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “those who cut themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -319,14 +319,14 @@ PHP	3	13	kqk7	figs-extrainfo	ἐγὼ ἐμαυτὸν οὐ λογίζομαι
 PHP	3	13	hjs9	figs-ellipsis	ἓν δέ	1	forgetting what is behind and straining for what is ahead	In the phrase **But one thing**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But take note of this one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	3	13	ia2b	figs-metaphor	τὰ μὲν ὀπίσω ἐπιλανθανόμενος, τοῖς δὲ ἔμπροσθεν ἐπεκτεινόμενος	1	forgetting what is behind and straining for what is ahead	In the phrase **forgetting {what is} behind and straining for {what is} ahead**, Paul is using the imagery of a person who is in a race to win a prize. Paul portrays himself as a runner in this metaphor, and he continues using this metaphor until the end of [Philippians 3:14](../03/14.md). If this metaphor is unfamiliar in your culture, consider using another metaphor that would be familiar to your readers, or you may state this in plain language, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “like a runner, I forget what is behind me and put all of my effort into running toward the finish line in front of me” or “like a runner, I have one focus, and therefore I do not look backward as I run, but only look forward as I strain with all my might so that I will reach the finish line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	3	14	z39s	figs-metaphor	κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον	1	I press on toward the goal to the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus	In this verse Paul continues using the metaphor of a runner who is competing in a foot race in order to win a prize. In this verse Paul says that his **goal**, which he works hard for, is to win the **prize** which God promises to give every person who obediently follows Christ. If this metaphor would be unfamiliar in your culture, consider using another metaphor, or use plain language to translate the idea behind this metaphor. Alternate translation: “I do all I can to pursue the goal of winning the prize of God’s upward call in Christ Jesus” or “I work hard so that I can reach my goal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	3	14	jhtv		σκοπὸν&εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	I press on toward the goal to the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus	The phrases **the goal** and **the prize** could be related to each other in one of two ways. They could: (1) be focusing on the same basic idea. Alternate translation: “the goal, which is to be given the prize of God’s upward call” or “my goal, which is to receive the prize of God’s upward call” (2) be focusing on different things, in which case **the goal** is referring to the goal of Paul’s life, while **the prize** is referring to what Paul hopes to receive once he has successfully achieved his goal. Alternate translation: “the goal and toward being given the prize of God’s upward call” or “the goal and toward receiving the prize of God’s upward call”
+PHP	3	14	jhtv		σκοπὸν & εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	I press on toward the goal to the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus	The phrases **the goal** and **the prize** could be related to each other in one of two ways. They could: (1) be focusing on the same basic idea. Alternate translation: “the goal, which is to be given the prize of God’s upward call” or “my goal, which is to receive the prize of God’s upward call” (2) be focusing on different things, in which case **the goal** is referring to the goal of Paul’s life, while **the prize** is referring to what Paul hopes to receive once he has successfully achieved his goal. Alternate translation: “the goal and toward being given the prize of God’s upward call” or “the goal and toward receiving the prize of God’s upward call”
 PHP	3	14	lmr6	figs-extrainfo	τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of the upward calling	The phrase **the prize of the upward calling of God** could mean: (1) that **the prize** is **the upward calling of God**. Alternate translation: “receive the prize of God’s upward call” or “receive the prize of God’s heavenward invitation” (2) that the **upward calling of God** is a call to come and receive God’s **prize**. Alternate translation: “answer God’s upward call to receive his prize” or “answer God’s invitation to receive his prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 PHP	3	14	cq3f	figs-extrainfo	τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	of the upward calling	The word **upward** probably refers to both the origin of God’s call and to the direction of God’s call. In other words, the phrase **the upward calling of God** probably refers both to the fact that the **calling** is from God and that the calling is also a heavenly calling to move towards God. Alternate translation: “God’s heavenward call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 PHP	3	14	agwg	figs-explicit	κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	of the upward calling	The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could be: (1) modifying the phrase **the upward calling of God**. (2) modifying the phrase **I press on**. Alternate translation: “I press on in Christ Jesus toward the goal for the prize of the upward calling of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	3	14	d75h	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	of the upward calling	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **goal**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **goal** in another way. Alternate translation: “I make it my main focus to win the prize of God’s upward calling in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	15	de4y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	as many as are perfect should think this way	The word **Therefore** indicates that Paul is transitioning from teaching the Philippians by using his personal experience ([Philippians 3:4–14](../03/04.md)) to exhorting them ([Philippians 3:15–17](../03/15.md)). Use the form that would best express this meaning in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 PHP	3	15	ki7f	figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι	1	God will also reveal that to you	The phrase **as many as** is missing some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many of you as” or “all of you who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-PHP	3	15	pb9p		ὅσοι&τέλειοι	1	God will also reveal that to you	Here, the word **perfect** does not mean “without sin,” but rather it means “spiritually mature.” Alternate translation: “as many as are spiritually mature”
+PHP	3	15	pb9p		ὅσοι & τέλειοι	1	God will also reveal that to you	Here, the word **perfect** does not mean “without sin,” but rather it means “spiritually mature.” Alternate translation: “as many as are spiritually mature”
 PHP	3	15	yy22		καὶ τοῦτο ὁ Θεὸς ὑμῖν ἀποκαλύψει	1	God will also reveal that to you	Alternate translation: “God will also make it clear to you” or “God will make sure you know it”
 PHP	3	16	pxn9	figs-exclusive	εἰς ὃ ἐφθάσαμεν, τῷ αὐτῷ στοιχεῖν	1	in what we have attained, we should live in it	When Paul says **we** in this verse, he is speaking of himself and the Philippian Christians, so **we** is inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these two uses of **we** as inclusive forms. Alternate translation: “let us all continue obeying the same truths we have already received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHP	3	16	p3pm		εἰς ὃ ἐφθάσαμεν, τῷ αὐτῷ στοιχεῖν	1	in what we have attained, we should live in it	Alternate translation: “in the things that we have attained so far, we should live in them” or “in the things that we have believed so far, we should obey them” or “in the things that we have believed so far, we should act on them”
@@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ PHP	3	19	exy0	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐ
 PHP	3	19	r3t0	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐτῶν	1	their glory is in their shame	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **shame**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **shame** by using an adjective such as “ashamed.” Alternate translation: “ who take pride in what should cause them to be ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	19	sv5z	figs-metonymy	οἱ τὰ ἐπίγεια φρονοῦντες	1	who are thinking about earthly things	Here, **earthly** refers to all the things that pertain to everyday living on earth. Alternate translation: “who only think about the things here on this earth” or “who only think about the things of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 PHP	3	19	n8e3	figs-explicit	οἱ τὰ ἐπίγεια φρονοῦντες	1	who are thinking about earthly things	The implied contrast that Paul is making here is between earthly things and spiritual things. Alternate translation: “who think about is earthly things instead of the things of God” or “who only think about earthly things instead of the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	3	20	q1cc	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1		Here when Paul uses **our** and **we**, he is referring to himself and the believers in Philippi, so **our** and **we** are inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+PHP	3	20	q1cc	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1		Here when Paul uses **our** and **we**, he is referring to himself and the believers in Philippi, so **our** and **we** are inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHP	3	20	u8yr	figs-abstractnouns	πολίτευμα	1	our citizenship exists in heaven	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **citizenship**, you can express the idea behind **citizenship** with a concrete noun such as “citizen.” Alternate translation: “status as citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHP	3	21	r3zw	writing-pronouns	σώματι τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ	1	our citizenship exists in heaven	Here, the pronoun **his** refers to Christ. Alternate translation: “to Christ’s glorious body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 PHP	3	21	deci	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δύνασθαι αὐτὸν	1	our citizenship exists in heaven	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** in some other way. Alternate translation: “of his might and ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ PHP	4	1	dz44		οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί	1
 PHP	4	1	zu0i	figs-yousingular	στήκετε	1	in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved	The phrase **stand firm** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	4	1	j6fp	figs-metaphor	στήκετε	1	in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved	Here the phrase **stand firm** is used to refer to the imagery of a soldier remaining in place, not moved by the enemy. Here, Paul gives this metaphor a spiritual meaning to exhort the Philippian Christians to not change their minds but continue believing what they have already believed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another metaphor that would make sense in your culture, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “remain unmoved in your belief in Christ” or “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHP	4	1	i8ad		οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved	Alternate translation: “stand firm in your union and relationship with the Lord” or “stand firm in your union and communion with the Lord”
-PHP	4	2	x5qf	translate-names	Εὐοδίαν&Συντύχην	1	I urge Euodia, and I urge Syntyche	**Euodia** and **Syntyche** are the names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+PHP	4	2	x5qf	translate-names	Εὐοδίαν & Συντύχην	1	I urge Euodia, and I urge Syntyche	**Euodia** and **Syntyche** are the names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHP	4	3	yb3f	figs-yousingular	σέ	1	I also ask you	Here, **you** refers to the **true companion** and is singular. This is the only occurrence of the word **you** in Philippians that is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHP	4	3	hdz7		γνήσιε σύνζυγε	1	true companion	The phrase **true companion** refers to a person with whom the Philippian believers were familiar at that time but whose identity is no longer known. Alternate translation: “my faithful helper in the work of the gospel”
 PHP	4	3	wkp7	figs-ellipsis	αἵτινες ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ συνήθλησάν μοι	1	with also Clement	In the phrase **the gospel**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that would be needed in many languages for the sentence to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “who have labored with me in the work of spreading the gospel” or “who have labored with me in the work of telling people the gospel” or “who have labored with me in the work of sharing the gospel with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ PHP	4	11	ew5e		οὐχ ὅτι καθ’ ὑστέρησιν λέγω	1	in whate
 PHP	4	11	ts2k		αὐτάρκης εἶναι	1	to be content	Alternate translation: “to be satisfied” or “to be happy”
 PHP	4	11	uj5z	figs-ellipsis	ἐν οἷς εἰμι	1	to be content	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “in whatever situation I am in” or “in whatever circumstances I am in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	4	12	lgp9	figs-explicit	οἶδα καὶ	1	I know both how to be brought low and I know how to abound	Here, the phrase **I know** means “I know from experience” and refers to what Paul knew from his experience. If it would help your readers, consider clarifying this in your translation in some way. Alternate translation: “I have learned both how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-PHP	4	12	ydod		οἶδα καὶ ταπεινοῦσθαι, οἶδα καὶ περισσεύειν&καὶ περισσεύειν καὶ ὑστερεῖσθαι	1	I know both how to be brought low and I know how to abound	The sentence at the beginning of this verse, **I know both {how} to be brought low and I know {how} to abound** is very similar in meaning to the phrase **and to abounding and to being in need** at the end of this verse. You can combine the beginning sentence and the closing phrase, as modeled by the UST, if you think it will help your readers.
+PHP	4	12	ydod		οἶδα καὶ ταπεινοῦσθαι, οἶδα καὶ περισσεύειν & καὶ περισσεύειν καὶ ὑστερεῖσθαι	1	I know both how to be brought low and I know how to abound	The sentence at the beginning of this verse, **I know both {how} to be brought low and I know {how} to abound** is very similar in meaning to the phrase **and to abounding and to being in need** at the end of this verse. You can combine the beginning sentence and the closing phrase, as modeled by the UST, if you think it will help your readers.
 PHP	4	12	usbe	figs-merism	οἶδα καὶ ταπεινοῦσθαι, οἶδα καὶ περισσεύειν	1	I know both how to be brought low and I know how to abound	Here, the phrases **to be brought low** and **to abound** refer to two opposite extremes of living and to every living condition between them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I know both how to live with very little and how to live with more than I need” or “I know how to live with very little and I know how to live with plenty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 PHP	4	12	lpld	figs-activepassive	ταπεινοῦσθαι	1	I know both how to be brought low and I know how to abound	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the passive phrase **to be brought low** with an active form. Alternate translation: “to live with less” or “to live without things I need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 PHP	4	12	aswc	figs-idiom	ταπεινοῦσθαι	1	I know both how to be brought low and I know how to abound	Here the phrase **to be brought low** is a figurative way of saying “to live with very little.” If it would help your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to live with very little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ PHP	4	14	tlur		μου τῇ θλίψει	1	in my affliction	Alternate translatio
 PHP	4	15	w23w	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the beginning of the gospel	Here, **in the beginning of the gospel** refers to when Paul first began communicating the gospel message to the Philippians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly the idea behind this phrase. Alternate translation: “when you first heard me preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	15	npph		τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the beginning of the gospel	See how you translated the phrase **the gospel** in [Philippians 1:5](../01/05.md) and [4:3](../04/03.md).
 PHP	4	15	dyf8	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδεμία μοι ἐκκλησία ἐκοινώνησεν εἰς λόγον δόσεως καὶ λήμψεως, εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς μόνοι	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	You can state **no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone** in the positive. Alternate translation: “you were the only church that shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-PHP	4	15	bpc2	figs-explicit	μοι&ἐκοινώνησεν	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Here, **shared with me** means the Philippians helped Paul financially and in other practical ways. Alternate translation: “were partners with” or “helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP	4	15	bpc2	figs-explicit	μοι & ἐκοινώνησεν	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Here, **shared with me** means the Philippians helped Paul financially and in other practical ways. Alternate translation: “were partners with” or “helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	15	rgxx		εἰς λόγον δόσεως καὶ λήμψεως	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	In the original language in which Paul wrote this letter, the phrase **giving and receiving** could refer either to exchanges that involved money or to exchanges that involved the giving and receiving of non-financial things that would benefit the other party. Here, the phrase **giving and receiving** may refer to both financial and non-financial gifts because the Philippians helped Paul by sending a gift of money via Epaphroditus, who also helped Paul in other ways. Alternate translation: “by sending money and help to me”
 PHP	4	16	getb		ὅτι καὶ ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Alternate translation: “for even when I was in Thessalonica”
 PHP	4	16	puar	figs-idiom	καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δὶς	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	The phrase **both once and twice** is an idiom meaning that something occurred more than one time. If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use an equivalent idiom from your language, or you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “several times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 PHP	4	16	lqor	figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὴν χρείαν μοι ἐπέμψατε	1	no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone	Paul is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you sent me money to help me with my needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHP	4	17	bh3t	figs-metaphor	ἐπιζητῶ τὸν καρπὸν τὸν πλεονάζοντα εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν	1	I seek the fruit that increases to your account	At the time Paul wrote this letter, the word **fruit** could be used in a business context to refer to what was gained in a financial transaction. When used in a business context, the word **fruit** meant “profit” or “gain.” Here Paul is using this business meaning to refer to God’s reward. If your language has an equivalent word that could be used in a business context, consider using it here if it would be natural in your language. Alternately, you may express this meaning using plain language, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “I seek the profit that increases to your account” or “I seek the gain that increases to your account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP	4	18	fs44		ἀπέχω&πάντα	1	I have everything in full	The phrase **I have all things in full** could mean: (1) that Paul has received **all things** that he needs from the Philippian believers and is therefore sufficiently supplied. Alternate translation: “I have everything I need and am content” (2) that Paul is continuing the business metaphor from [Philippians 4:17](../04/17.md) and is here offering the Philippians a figurative receipt for the gifts they gave him. Alternate translation: “I have received the gift that you sent”
+PHP	4	18	fs44		ἀπέχω & πάντα	1	I have everything in full	The phrase **I have all things in full** could mean: (1) that Paul has received **all things** that he needs from the Philippian believers and is therefore sufficiently supplied. Alternate translation: “I have everything I need and am content” (2) that Paul is continuing the business metaphor from [Philippians 4:17](../04/17.md) and is here offering the Philippians a figurative receipt for the gifts they gave him. Alternate translation: “I have received the gift that you sent”
 PHP	4	18	en6t	figs-explicit	περισσεύω	1	I abound	The phrase **I abound** means that Paul has more than enough of the things that he needs for himself. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have more than enough of the things I need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHP	4	18	p6y1	figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωμαι, δεξάμενος παρὰ Ἐπαφροδίτου τὰ παρ’ ὑμῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the phrase **I have been filled** with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “You have fully provided for me by giving me the things which Epaphroditus brought to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 PHP	4	18	hte4	translate-names	Ἐπαφροδίτου	1	I abound	**Epaphroditus** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Philippians 2:25](../02/25.md). (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
index 8b9bf4c9f4..4fd4ae5942 100644
--- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ COL	1	1	bqvt	figs-yousingular		0	General Information:	The words “you,” “yo
 COL	1	1	xnhq	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the first person here. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 COL	1	1	yzlo	figs-explicit	καὶ Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1		This phrase does not mean that **Timothy** helped Paul write this letter. Paul was the author of this letter, as he shows by using the first person singular throughout the letter. What this does mean is that Timothy is with Paul and that Timothy is in agreement with what Paul writes. If it sounds in your language like Timothy is writing the letter with Paul, you could make Timothy’s supporting role more clear. Alternate translation: “with the support of Timothy, our fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	1	2	v9x7	figs-123person	τοῖς ἐν Κολοσσαῖς ἁγίοις, καὶ πιστοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to you who live in the city of Colossae and who are God’s people and faithful fellow believers who are united to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-COL	1	2	s9x7	figs-doublet	τοῖς&ἁγίοις, καὶ πιστοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		The words **saints**, **faithful brothers**, and **in Christ** all describe people who are followers of Jesus. Paul is using all of these to describe one group of people. For example, he is not implying that **saints** and **faithful brothers in Christ** are two different groups. If using both **saints** and **faithful brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could join these together in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “to God’s faithful people, joined together as a family in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+COL	1	2	s9x7	figs-doublet	τοῖς & ἁγίοις, καὶ πιστοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		The words **saints**, **faithful brothers**, and **in Christ** all describe people who are followers of Jesus. Paul is using all of these to describe one group of people. For example, he is not implying that **saints** and **faithful brothers in Christ** are two different groups. If using both **saints** and **faithful brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could join these together in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “to God’s faithful people, joined together as a family in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 COL	1	2	cqfk	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		After stating his name and the name of the person to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing for the Colossians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah” or “I pray that grace and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah will always be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 COL	1	2	jzhd	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The words **Grace** and **peace** are abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs or description words. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “We pray that God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ will treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	2	egjk	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1		Here and throughout the chapter, **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God, who is our Father,” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples)
-COL	1	3	q1su	figs-exclusive	εὐχαριστοῦμεν&ἡμῶν	1	We give thanks … of our Lord	The word **We** here does not include the Colossians, but the word **our** here does include the Colossians (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+COL	1	3	q1su	figs-exclusive	εὐχαριστοῦμεν & ἡμῶν	1	We give thanks … of our Lord	The word **We** here does not include the Colossians, but the word **our** here does include the Colossians (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	1	3	g0sn	figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1		Here, **always** is an exaggeration that the Colossians understood to mean that Paul and Timothy prayed for them often. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 COL	1	4	z6eb	figs-abstractnouns	ἀκούσαντες τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν	1	your faith in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you can express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: “having heard that you are trusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	4	gjwb	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην ἣν ἔχετε εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους,	1	your faith in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **love**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much you love all the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -24,11 +24,11 @@ COL	1	6	wk21	figs-metaphor	ἐστὶν καρποφορούμενον καὶ 
 COL	1	6	ev91	figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν	1		Paul leaves out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from the context. Alternate translation: “just as this good news has reached you so that you do what is pleasing to God” or “just as it has done among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 COL	1	6	ait7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπέγνωτε τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	the grace of God in truth	Here, **in truth** could describe (1) the way in which the Colossians learned about the grace of God. Alternate translation: “accurately grasped how God acts kindly” (2) the way God is gracious to the Colossians. Alternate translation: “learned about the true grace of God” or “understood how God truly acts kindly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	7	pz3h	translate-names	Ἐπαφρᾶ	1	Epaphras	**Epaphras** is the name of a man. He is the one who preached the good news to the people in Colossae. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-COL	1	7	f8t1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν	1	our … our	Here, **our** does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+COL	1	7	f8t1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	our … our	Here, **our** does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	1	8	k2k9	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	to us	The word **us** here does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	1	8	e7ez	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑμῶν ἀγάπην	1	your love in the Spirit	Here Paul is primarily talking about the **love** that the Colossians are showing to other believers. Of course they also love God. If you must specify the object of their love, and people might think that the Colossians do not love God if he is not mentioned, then you can include both. Alternate translation: “that you love God and all his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	8	hzqq		ἐν Πνεύματι	1		Alternate translation: “which is by the power of the Holy Spirit” or “which you do through the power of the Holy Spirit”
-COL	1	9	f2xd	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἠκούσαμεν, οὐ παυόμεθα	1	we heard this we also have not stopped	The word **we** here does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+COL	1	9	f2xd	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἠκούσαμεν, οὐ παυόμεθα	1	we heard this we also have not stopped	The word **we** here does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	1	9	u7zh		ἀφ’ ἧς ἡμέρας ἠκούσαμεν	1	from the day we heard this	Alternate translation: “from the day Epaphras told us these things”
 COL	1	9	crnv	figs-hyperbole	οὐ παυόμεθα	1		Here, **have not stopped** is an exaggeration that the Colossians would have understood to mean that Paul and Timothy pray often for the Colossians. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “have been frequently” or “have made a habit of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 COL	1	9	qxnu	figs-litotes	οὐ παυόμεθα	1		Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “have kept” or “are continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ COL	1	16	ho8g	figs-merism	ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς καὶ ἐπὶ τ
 COL	1	16	s8h1	figs-merism	τὰ ὁρατὰ καὶ τὰ ἀόρατα	1		Paul refers to two opposite things, **the visible** and **the invisible**, as another way to refer to everything that God and his Son created. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “whether people can see them or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 COL	1	16	fkic	translate-unknown	εἴτε θρόνοι, εἴτε κυριότητες, εἴτε ἀρχαὶ, εἴτε ἐξουσίαι	1		The words **thrones**, **dominions**, **governments**, and **authorities** here refer to different kinds of angels or other spiritual beings that are not specified as being good or evil. They are examples of what is **invisible**. It may be that the false teachers were teaching that these beings should be worshiped. But Paul is emphasizing here that God the Father created all of these spiritual beings through his Son, and so the Son is much greater than these. If these four words would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) identify that these are spiritual beings and translate as many of these names as you have different words for. Alternate translation: “Including all spiritual beings, which can be called thrones or dominions or rulers or authorities” (2) use names from your culture that identify different classes of angels or spiritual beings. Alternate translation: “Whether angels or archangels or spirit rulers” (3) summarize without using specific names. Alternate translation: “Including all types of powerful spiritual beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	1	16	zl7j	figs-activepassive	τὰ πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν ἔκτισται	1	all things were created through him and for him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “through him and for him God created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	1	16	c3lm		δι’ αὐτοῦ&ἔκτισται	1		The phrase **through him** shows God the Son’s involvement in creating the world with the Father. Alternate translation: “God the Father created by working through the Son”
+COL	1	16	c3lm		δι’ αὐτοῦ & ἔκτισται	1		The phrase **through him** shows God the Son’s involvement in creating the world with the Father. Alternate translation: “God the Father created by working through the Son”
 COL	1	16	nmr1	grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν	1		Here, **for him** refers to the Son as the purpose or goal of all creation. If the meaning of **for him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that creation’s purpose is to honor and glorify the Son. Alternate translation: “and everything exists to glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	1	17	wk9y	grammar-connect-time-sequential	αὐτός ἐστιν πρὸ πάντων	1	he is before all things	The word **before** refers to time, not location. It means that the Son did not come into being when God created everything, but rather he existed as God before anything was created. If the meaning of **before** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to prior time. Alternate translation: “before God created anything, the Son existed as God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 COL	1	17	m4lp	figs-metaphor	τὰ πάντα ἐν αὐτῷ συνέστηκεν	1	in him all things hold together	Paul is speaking here as if all created things **hold together** because they are inside the Son. By speaking in this way, Paul means that everything that God created continues to exist because the Son actively works to preserve everything. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he controls everything so that it works the way it should” or “he is the one who makes sure everything has its proper place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ COL	1	20	cf2d		τὰ πάντα	1	through the blood of his cross	Here, **all thi
 COL	1	20	c3qd	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρηνοποιήσας	1	through the blood of his cross	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **peace**, you can express this idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having made things right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	1	20	as3p	figs-possession	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ	1	through the blood of his cross	Paul uses the possessive form to describe **blood** characterized by **his cross**, which is the location where the blood was shed. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can make the relationship between the two words clearer with a short phrase such as “shed on.” Alternate translation: “the blood shed on his cross.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	1	20	x5av	figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the blood of his cross	Here, **blood** stands for the death of Christ on the cross. If the meaning of **blood** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-COL	1	20	mbra	figs-infostructure	τὰ πάντα εἰς αὐτόν&εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		The last part of this verse (**whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens**) describes **all things**, found near the beginning of the verse. If your language does not separate a description from the thing it describes, you can move the description next to **all things**. Alternate translation: “all things, whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens, to himself” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
+COL	1	20	mbra	figs-infostructure	τὰ πάντα εἰς αὐτόν & εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		The last part of this verse (**whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens**) describes **all things**, found near the beginning of the verse. If your language does not separate a description from the thing it describes, you can move the description next to **all things**. Alternate translation: “all things, whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens, to himself” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
 COL	1	20	quxc	figs-merism	εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		Paul refers to the **things on the earth** and the **things in the heavens** to include them and everything in between, that is, everything in all of creation. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “everything in the whole creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 COL	1	21	kv5u	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ποτε	1	Connecting Statement:	The phrase **At one time** does not refer to one specific instance in time when the Colossians were alienated from God. Instead, it refers to all the time before they believed in Jesus. If **At one time** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify what **time** Paul is referring to. Alternate translation: “During the time before you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 COL	1	21	wp3t	figs-activepassive	ὄντας ἀπηλλοτριωμένους	1	alienated	If your language does not use this passive form, you can describe the Colossians’ state with an active form. Alternate translation: “did not want a relationship with God” or “were people who did not want to be near God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ COL	1	27	hm8q		ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		This phrase could refer to: (1
 COL	1	27	c7ln	figs-metaphor	Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Christ in you	Paul speaks of the believers as if they were containers in which **Christ** is present. The expression means basically the same thing as “you in Christ.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the same translation you have used for being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “your union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	1	27	mr83	figs-possession	ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς δόξης	1	the hope of glory	Here Paul speaks of a **hope** that relates to **glory**. This could refer to: (1) hoping for, or expecting, glory. Alternate translation: “the expectation of becoming glorious” (2) a hope that is glorious. Alternate translation: “the glorious hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	1	27	nkz3	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς δόξης	1	the hope of glory	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **hope** and **glory**, you can express those ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “with whom we can expect to share his glorious life” or “who makes us confidently hope for living with him in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL	1	28	va1x	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς καταγγέλλομεν&παραστήσωμεν	1	We proclaim … we may present	The pronoun **We** in this verse does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+COL	1	28	va1x	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς καταγγέλλομεν & παραστήσωμεν	1	We proclaim … we may present	The pronoun **We** in this verse does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	1	28	lyz1	figs-explicit	πάντα ἄνθρωπον	-1	so that we may present every man	Here, **every man** refers to every person whom Paul has told about Jesus. If **every man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “every man whom we talk to … each of them … each of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	1	28	pwff	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	-1		Here, the word **man** does not refer to only male people but to any human being. If **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a term that refers to humans in general. Alternate translation: “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 COL	1	28	y1sb	figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ	1		Here Paul speaks when he says that he uses **all wisdom**, by which he means that he uses all of the wisdom that he possesses. He does not mean that he possesses all the wisdom that exists. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this more plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the wisdom that we have” or “all of the wisdom that God has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ COL	2	2	v13e	figs-possession	ἐπίγνωσιν τοῦ μυστηρίου	1	Ch
 COL	2	2	v9az	figs-possession	τοῦ μυστηρίου τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul here uses the possessive form to speak about **the mystery** that comes from **God**. Only **God** can reveal the content of this **mystery**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can express the idea by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the mystery that God reveals” or “the mystery known by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	3	o2ob	figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly to whom the word **whom** refers. The word **whom** could refer to: (1) the mystery. Alternate translation: “in this mystery” (2) Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Messiah.” Since [2:2](../02/02.md) identifies the mystery with Christ, both options express what Paul is saying, so pick the option that most clearly communicates the idea in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	2	3	w74d	figs-activepassive	εἰσιν πάντες οἱ θησαυροὶ τῆς σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως ἀπόκρυφοι	1	in whom all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge are hidden	If your language does not use this form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has hidden all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	2	3	vhsr	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ εἰσιν πάντες οἱ θησαυροὶ&ἀπόκρυφοι	1		Paul here speaks of the Messiah as if he were a container that could “hide” **treasures**. He speaks this way to emphasize the value of what Christians receive from God when they are united to the Messiah. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “from whom all the blessings … can be received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	3	vhsr	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ εἰσιν πάντες οἱ θησαυροὶ & ἀπόκρυφοι	1		Paul here speaks of the Messiah as if he were a container that could “hide” **treasures**. He speaks this way to emphasize the value of what Christians receive from God when they are united to the Messiah. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “from whom all the blessings … can be received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	3	w4mr	figs-possession	οἱ θησαυροὶ τῆς σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως	1	the treasures of wisdom and knowledge	Paul here uses the possessive form to explain what the **treasures** are: **wisdom** and **knowledge**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can clarify that **wisdom** and **knowledge** are the **treasures**. Alternate translation: “the treasures, which are wisdom and knowledge,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	3	vd98	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως	1	of wisdom and knowledge	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **wisdom** and **knowledge**, you can express the ideas behind these abstract nouns with adjectives such as “wise” and “knowledgeable.” Alternate translation: “of wise and knowledgeable thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	3	iiob	figs-doublet	τῆς σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως	1	of wisdom and knowledge	The words **wisdom** and **knowledge** mean very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the breadth of spiritual wisdom. If your language does not use repetition in this way or has only one word for this concept, you can use just one word or translate **wisdom** as an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “of wisdom” or “of knowledge” or “of wise knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ COL	2	4	j8di	figs-explicit	τοῦτο	1	might deceive	The word **this** refers
 COL	2	4	ksh8		μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς παραλογίζηται	1		Alternate translation: “people cannot deceive you”
 COL	2	4	y4r3	translate-unknown	πιθανολογίᾳ	1	persuasive speech	The phrase **persuasive speech** refers to arguments that appear plausible. The phrase itself does not suggest that the arguments are true or false, but the context here suggests that the arguments are false even though they sound believable. If **persuasive speech** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “plausible arguments” or “words that sound true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	5	ydw1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The word **For** introduces further support for why the Colossians should not be “deceived” ([2:4](../02/04.md)). Even if Paul is physically absent, he is thinking about them and caring for them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could specify what the word **For** is supporting. Alternate translation: “This persuasive speech is false because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-COL	2	5	ubd9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&καὶ	1		Paul speaks as if being **absent** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language would not use a conditional statement for something that is a current fact, you could translate these words as an affirmation. Alternate translation: “while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+COL	2	5	ubd9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & καὶ	1		Paul speaks as if being **absent** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language would not use a conditional statement for something that is a current fact, you could translate these words as an affirmation. Alternate translation: “while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 COL	2	5	g1rp	figs-idiom	τῇ σαρκὶ ἄπειμι	1	I am absent in the flesh	In Paul’s culture, being **absent in the flesh** is a figurative way to speak about not being present in person. If **absent in the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not there with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	2	5	fz3t	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		The word **yet** introduces a contrast with **absent in the flesh**. While the Colossians might expect that, since Paul is **absent in the flesh**, he is also absent “in the spirit,” Paul says the opposite: he is with them **in the spirit**. Use a word that indicates contrast or contraexpectation in your language. Alternate translation: “despite this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 COL	2	5	bz56	figs-idiom	τῷ πνεύματι σὺν ὑμῖν εἰμι	1	I am with you in the spirit	In Paul’s culture, being with someone **in the spirit** is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If **with you in the spirit** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “I am still connected to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -190,22 +190,22 @@ COL	2	5	yvvr		τῷ πνεύματι	1	I am with you in the spirit	Here, **the s
 COL	2	5	w0ye	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	χαίρων καὶ βλέπων	1		Here, **rejoicing and seeing** are what Paul does while he is with them **in the spirit**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make the relationship between the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: (adding a period after “spirit”) “When I think about you, I rejoice and see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 COL	2	5	t8mc	figs-hendiadys	χαίρων καὶ βλέπων	1		Paul here expresses a single idea with the two words **rejoicing** and **seeing**. He means that he “rejoices” when he “sees.” If **rejoicing and seeing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **rejoicing** as an adverb or prepositional phrase. Alternate translation: “joyfully seeing” or “seeing with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 COL	2	5	ev9p	translate-unknown	ὑμῶν τὴν τάξιν	1	good order	The phrase **good order** refers to behavior that properly fits into a larger pattern or arrangement. In the context, that larger pattern is what God expects of his people. If **good order** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable term or translate the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “the fact that you behave according to God’s standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	2	5	hth1	figs-possession	τὸ στερέωμα&πίστεως ὑμῶν	1	the strength of your faith	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the Colossians’ **faith** as something that has **strength**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express this idea, you can express the idea by translating **strength** with an adjective such as “strong.” Alternate translation: “your strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-COL	2	5	kw3x	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ στερέωμα&πίστεως ὑμῶν	1	the strength of your faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **strength** and **faith**, you can express the ideas behind these abstract nouns in another way. Alternate translation: “how you strongly believe” or “the fact that you firmly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+COL	2	5	hth1	figs-possession	τὸ στερέωμα & πίστεως ὑμῶν	1	the strength of your faith	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the Colossians’ **faith** as something that has **strength**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express this idea, you can express the idea by translating **strength** with an adjective such as “strong.” Alternate translation: “your strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+COL	2	5	kw3x	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ στερέωμα & πίστεως ὑμῶν	1	the strength of your faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **strength** and **faith**, you can express the ideas behind these abstract nouns in another way. Alternate translation: “how you strongly believe” or “the fact that you firmly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	6	a6cr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** draws an inference or conclusion from what Paul has said in [2:1–5](../02/01.md), which includes the truth about Paul and the benefits that flow from knowing the Messiah. If **Therefore** by itself would be misunderstood in your language, you could specify from what does Paul draw his inference. Alternate translation: “Because of what I have told you about myself and about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-COL	2	6	wqwi	figs-infostructure	ὡς&παρελάβετε τὸν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον, ἐν αὐτῷ περιπατεῖτε,	1		Paul here draws a comparison between the way in which the Colossians **received** the Messiah and the way in which he wishes them to behave now. If your language would put the comparison second, you could reverse the two clauses. Alternate translation: “walk in Christ Jesus the Lord just as you received him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
+COL	2	6	wqwi	figs-infostructure	ὡς & παρελάβετε τὸν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον, ἐν αὐτῷ περιπατεῖτε,	1		Paul here draws a comparison between the way in which the Colossians **received** the Messiah and the way in which he wishes them to behave now. If your language would put the comparison second, you could reverse the two clauses. Alternate translation: “walk in Christ Jesus the Lord just as you received him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
 COL	2	6	s99k	figs-metaphor	παρελάβετε τὸν Χριστὸν	1		Paul says that the Colossians **received Christ** as if they had welcomed him into their homes or received him as a gift. What this means is that they believed in Jesus and the teachings about him. If **received Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to coming to believe in Jesus, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you first believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	6	m3f1	figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτῷ περιπατεῖτε	1	walk in him	This command does not require the Colossians to walk around inside Jesus. Rather, in Paul’s culture, to **walk** is a common metaphor for how people live their lives, and the words **in him** refer to being united to Christ. If **walk in him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a verb that refers to behavior in life and connect it with how you have translated “in Christ” elsewhere. Alternate translation: “act as those who are united to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	2	7	e2x6	figs-explicit	ἐρριζωμένοι&ἐποικοδομούμενοι&βεβαιούμενοι&περισσεύοντες	1	being rooted … built up in him … confirmed in the faith … abounding in thanksgiving	Paul uses these four verbs to give examples of how the Colossians should “walk in” the Messiah ([2:6](../02/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “Walking in him entails being rooted … built up … confirmed … abounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	2	7	en3l	figs-activepassive	ἐρριζωμένοι&ἐποικοδομούμενοι&βεβαιούμενοι	1		If your language does not use these passive forms, you can translate all three of these words in their active forms with the Colossians as the subject. Alternate translation: “rooting yourselves … building yourselves up … having confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	2	7	fw47	figs-metaphor	ἐρριζωμένοι&ἐν αὐτῷ	1	being rooted	Paul wants the Colossians to be united so closely to Christ that he speaks of this union as if the Colossians were a plant with roots growing into Christ. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “being closely connected with … in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	7	e2x6	figs-explicit	ἐρριζωμένοι & ἐποικοδομούμενοι & βεβαιούμενοι & περισσεύοντες	1	being rooted … built up in him … confirmed in the faith … abounding in thanksgiving	Paul uses these four verbs to give examples of how the Colossians should “walk in” the Messiah ([2:6](../02/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “Walking in him entails being rooted … built up … confirmed … abounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	2	7	en3l	figs-activepassive	ἐρριζωμένοι & ἐποικοδομούμενοι & βεβαιούμενοι	1		If your language does not use these passive forms, you can translate all three of these words in their active forms with the Colossians as the subject. Alternate translation: “rooting yourselves … building yourselves up … having confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+COL	2	7	fw47	figs-metaphor	ἐρριζωμένοι & ἐν αὐτῷ	1	being rooted	Paul wants the Colossians to be united so closely to Christ that he speaks of this union as if the Colossians were a plant with roots growing into Christ. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “being closely connected with … in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	7	tb5m	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐποικοδομούμενοι ἐν αὐτῷ	1	built up in him	Paul wants the Colossians to base everything they think and do on Christ as if they were a house built on Christ, who is the foundation. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “in him, and basing everything you think and do on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	7	yh83	translate-unknown	βεβαιούμενοι τῇ πίστει	1	confirmed in the faith	The word **confirmed** refers to something being sure or valid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “sure about the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	7	umcl	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1	confirmed in the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea in a different way, such as with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “in what you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	7	l1is	figs-activepassive	ἐδιδάχθητε	1	just as you were taught	If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this verb (1) in its active form with Epaphras as the subject (we know he was their teacher from [1:7](../01/07.md)) (2) with a verb such as “learned.” Alternate translation: “you learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	2	7	j47d	figs-abstractnouns	περισσεύοντες ἐν εὐχαριστίᾳ	1	abounding in thanksgiving	If your language does not use an abstract for the idea behind **thanksgiving**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being very thankful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	8	cbw5	figs-idiom	βλέπετε, μή τις ὑμᾶς ἔσται ὁ συλαγωγῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	Paul uses this clause to warn the Colossians against any person who wishes to take them captive. If your language does not use this form, you can simplify or restructure the clause so that it does not include both **someone** and **the one**. Alternate translation: “Beware lest anyone take you captive” or “Make sure that no one takes you captive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	2	8	ga9l	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς&ὁ συλαγωγῶν	1	will be the one who takes you captive	Paul speaks of those who are trying to deceive the Colossians as if they were capturing the Colossians as prisoners. He uses this language to portray the false teachers as enemies who do not care about the Colossians but only want to use them for their own benefit. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “the one who convinces you to believe a lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	8	ga9l	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς & ὁ συλαγωγῶν	1	will be the one who takes you captive	Paul speaks of those who are trying to deceive the Colossians as if they were capturing the Colossians as prisoners. He uses this language to portray the false teachers as enemies who do not care about the Colossians but only want to use them for their own benefit. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “the one who convinces you to believe a lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	8	p3vx	figs-hendiadys	τῆς φιλοσοφίας καὶ κενῆς ἀπάτης	1	philosophy	The words **philosophy** and **empty deceit** work together to express one idea: human **philosophy** that is **empty** of content and deceitful. If your language does not use this form, you can combine the two nouns into one phrase, such as by using words like “meaningless” and “deceptive.” Alternate translation: “empty, deceitful philosophy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 COL	2	8	nlws	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς φιλοσοφίας	1	philosophy	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **philosophy**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how humans understand the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	8	t8xx	figs-metaphor	κενῆς ἀπάτης	1	empty deceit	Paul speaks of deceitful **philosophy** as if it were a container that had nothing in it. He means that the deceitful **philosophy** has nothing important or meaningful to contribute. If **empty deceit** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “valueless deceit” or “deceit with no content” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ COL	2	9	ahq5	figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλ
 COL	2	9	m529	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς Θεότητος	1	in him all the fullness of God dwells in bodily form	If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **fullness** and **deity**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everything that it means to be God” or “everything that belongs fully to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	10	oykt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1		The word **and** introduces another reason why the Colossians need to watch out for anyone who provides teaching that is “not according to Christ” ([2:8](../02/08.md)): not only is Christ fully God ([2:9](../02/09.md)), but he provides the way in which the Colossians are filled with everything they need. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this link more explicit. Alternate translation: “and furthermore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 COL	2	10	lbk7	figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ ἐν αὐτῷ πεπληρωμένοι	1	you are filled in him	Here Paul speaks as if people were containers that are filled when they are united to Christ, which means that people receive everything they need, including salvation, in their union with Christ. The word **filled** is very similar to the word Paul used in [2:9](../02/09.md) for “fullness.” If your language uses similar words in these two sentences, you could use a word like the one you used in [2:9](../02/09.md). If not, you could express this idea in another way, using a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you lack nothing because of your union with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	2	10	sbi0	figs-activepassive	ἐστὲ&πεπληρωμένοι	1		If in your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this verb in the active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has filled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+COL	2	10	sbi0	figs-activepassive	ἐστὲ & πεπληρωμένοι	1		If in your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this verb in the active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has filled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	2	10	je36	figs-metaphor	ἡ κεφαλὴ πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας	1	who is the head of all rule and authority	The expression **head of** here refers to supremacy and authority over something or somebody. If **head** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with another noun, such as “sovereign” or “ruler,” or a verb, such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “the sovereign over all rule and authority” or “the one who rules over all rule and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	10	pwg2	translate-unknown	πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας	1		The words **rule** and **authority** could refer to (1) powerful spiritual beings, as in [1:16](../01/16.md). Translate these words here as you translated them there. Alternate translation: “of all spirit beings who govern and rule” (2) anyone or anything with power and authority. Alternate translation: “of anyone with power and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	11	xeq7	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ περιετμήθητε περιτομῇ ἀχειροποιήτῳ, ἐν τῇ ἀπεκδύσει τοῦ σώματος τῆς σαρκός, ἐν τῇ περιτομῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in whom you were also circumcised	Here Paul uses **circumcision** as an image to describe what happens to believers when they are united to the Messiah. In the metaphor, the **circumcision** is completed **without hands**, which means that God accomplishes it. What is “removed” or cut off is the **body of flesh**, which refers to the broken and sinful parts of the person. If this metaphor about **circumcision** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with the language of analogy or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you were also marked off by God as his own when he took away your body of flesh by the work of the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
@@ -228,9 +228,9 @@ COL	2	11	fw80	figs-metonymy	τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the word *
 COL	2	12	ln8e	figs-metaphor	συνταφέντες αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ βαπτισμῷ	1	having been buried with him in baptism	Paul here uses a metaphor that connects **baptism** to “burial” to further explain what happens to believers when they are united to Christ. This metaphor expresses how, when they are baptized, believers are united to Christ in his (death and) burial and are no longer who they once were. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with the language of analogy, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “having been united with the Messiah in his burial when you were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	12	s2a0	figs-synecdoche	συνταφέντες	1		Here Paul refers only to being **buried**, but he also implies “dying.” If **buried** would not include the idea of “dying” in your language, you could include “dying” in your translation. Alternate translation: “having died and been buried with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 COL	2	12	r8l8	figs-activepassive	συνταφέντες αὐτῷ	1	having been buried with him in baptism	If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this phrase in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God burying you with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	2	12	g1rq	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ&συνηγέρθητε	1	in whom you were raised up	Paul here explains that believers are not only united to Christ in his burial but also in his resurrection. It is by being united to him in his resurrection that believers receive new life. If believers being **raised up** now would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	12	g1rq	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ & συνηγέρθητε	1	in whom you were raised up	Paul here explains that believers are not only united to Christ in his burial but also in his resurrection. It is by being united to him in his resurrection that believers receive new life. If believers being **raised up** now would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	12	yp7u	figs-activepassive	συνηγέρθητε	1	in whom you were raised up	If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate the idea in its active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God raised you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-COL	2	12	rec6	figs-idiom	συνηγέρθητε&τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	you were raised up	Paul uses the words **raised up** and **raised him from the dead** to refer to someone who had died and then came back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, use a comparable idiom or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you were restored to life … who restored him to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	2	12	rec6	figs-idiom	συνηγέρθητε & τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	you were raised up	Paul uses the words **raised up** and **raised him from the dead** to refer to someone who had died and then came back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, use a comparable idiom or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you were restored to life … who restored him to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	2	12	oo6l	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you were raised up	If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **faith** and **power**, you can express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because you trusted in the powerful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	12	j4uy	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1		Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “among the dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 COL	2	13	oxde	writing-pronouns	ὑμᾶς νεκροὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν, συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul begins the sentence with **you**, and then he restates **you** when he identifies what God has done for **you**. If your language would not restate **you** or use this structure, you could separate the two uses of **you** into separate sentences. Alternate translation: “you were dead in the trespasses and the uncircumcision of your flesh. Then, he made you alive together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -242,21 +242,21 @@ COL	2	13	gdke	figs-possession	τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς
 COL	2	13	f9ms	figs-metaphor	συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς σὺν αὐτῷ	1	you, being dead … he made you alive together	Here Paul speaks of God’s work in restoring people to himself as if he brought these people back to life physically. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual life or express the idea with a simile or plainly. Alternate translation: “he did something like making you alive together with him” or “he restored you to proper relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	13	upyk	writing-pronouns	συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς σὺν αὐτῷ	1		The word **he** refers to God the Father, while the word translated **him** refers to God the Son. If these pronouns would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify the antecedent of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “he made you alive together with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 COL	2	14	w22z	figs-metaphor	ἐξαλείψας τὸ καθ’ ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον τοῖς δόγμασιν, ὃ ἦν ὑπεναντίον ἡμῖν, καὶ αὐτὸ ἦρκεν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου, προσηλώσας αὐτὸ τῷ σταυρῷ;	1	having canceled the written record of the decrees against us, which were opposed to us	Paul speaks of the way God forgives our sins as if God **canceled** debts that we owed him. In the metaphor, God has crossed out or erased the **written record** of those debts and thus removed any impact these debts have on our relationship to him. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having taken away the guilt from our sins, he has kept those sins from impacting our relationship with him, having nailed them to the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	2	14	k0fg	figs-doublet	καθ’ ἡμῶν&ὃ ἦν ὑπεναντίον ἡμῖν	1		The phrases **against us** and **opposed to us** might be considered redundant in your language. If this is the case, you could combine the two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “which were opposed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+COL	2	14	k0fg	figs-doublet	καθ’ ἡμῶν & ὃ ἦν ὑπεναντίον ἡμῖν	1		The phrases **against us** and **opposed to us** might be considered redundant in your language. If this is the case, you could combine the two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “which were opposed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 COL	2	14	phgg	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸ ἦρκεν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου	1		Paul speaks as if the **written record** was within the community of believers, and God takes it away. What he means by this is that the **written record** of our sins no longer affects our relationship with God and each other. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has kept it from affecting our relationship with him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	14	o5mx	figs-metaphor	προσηλώσας αὐτὸ τῷ σταυρῷ	1		Here Paul speaks as if God had nailed the “written record” to the cross. He means that Christ’s death on the cross “canceled” the “written record” as surely as if it had been nailed to the cross and died with Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea using a simile, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “destroying it through the Messiah’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	2	15	gh24	figs-metaphor	ἀπεκδυσάμενος&ἐδειγμάτισεν ἐν παρρησίᾳ&θριαμβεύσας	1	he made a public spectacle of them	Here Paul speaks of God’s victory over powerful spiritual beings in terms that fit with what a conqueror often did to his prisoners in Paul’s culture. He would make a **public spectacle** or example of them, “stripping” them of their clothes and forcing them to parade behind him in his “triumph.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express these ideas with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “having defeated … he showed everyone that he had conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	2	15	gh24	figs-metaphor	ἀπεκδυσάμενος & ἐδειγμάτισεν ἐν παρρησίᾳ & θριαμβεύσας	1	he made a public spectacle of them	Here Paul speaks of God’s victory over powerful spiritual beings in terms that fit with what a conqueror often did to his prisoners in Paul’s culture. He would make a **public spectacle** or example of them, “stripping” them of their clothes and forcing them to parade behind him in his “triumph.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express these ideas with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “having defeated … he showed everyone that he had conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	15	pbkm	translate-unknown	τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὰς ἐξουσίας	1		Just as in [1:16](../01/16.md) and [2:10](../02/10.md), the **rulers** and **authorities** could refer to (1) powerful spiritual beings that rule this world. Alternate translation: “the spiritual powers, including those known as rulers and authorities” (2) anybody or anything that rules and has authority. Alternate translation: “those who rule with authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	15	h7kx		ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Alternate translation: “by the cross” or “through the cross”
 COL	2	16	bvs7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		The word **Therefore** draws an inference or conclusion from what Paul has already said, which can be found in [2:9–15](../02/09.md): in the work of Christ, the Colossians have received new life and the powers that rule this world have been defeated. Because of these things that have happened, the Colossians should not allow others to judge them in how they behave. Paul is continuing the warning against false teachers that he started in [2:8](../02/08.md). If these connections would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to these ideas more explicitly or use a comparable transition word or phrase. Alternate translation: “In light of all these things” or “Given the Messiah’s sufficient work on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-COL	2	16	e1rp	figs-imperative3p	μὴ&τις ὑμᾶς κρινέτω	1		This phrase translates a third-person imperative. If your language has third-person imperatives, you could use one here. If your language does not have third-person imperatives, you can use a comparable phrase or express the idea with a second-person imperative. Alternate translation: “you should not let anyone judge you” or “do not permit anyone to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+COL	2	16	e1rp	figs-imperative3p	μὴ & τις ὑμᾶς κρινέτω	1		This phrase translates a third-person imperative. If your language has third-person imperatives, you could use one here. If your language does not have third-person imperatives, you can use a comparable phrase or express the idea with a second-person imperative. Alternate translation: “you should not let anyone judge you” or “do not permit anyone to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 COL	2	16	cii9	figs-explicit	ἐν βρώσει, καὶ ἐν πόσει, ἢ ἐν μέρει ἑορτῆς, ἢ νουμηνίας, ἢ Σαββάτων	1	in food or in drink	This list of areas in which someone might judge the Colossians refers to parts of the law of Moses. Some of these areas were also important for other religions in Paul’s culture. If Paul’s list of things that someone could **judge** the Colossians in would be misunderstood in your translation, you could clarify that these areas are covered by the law of Moses and sometimes by the traditions of other religions as well. Alternate translation: “for you how behave in relationship to the law of Moses and other religious traditions, including in the areas of food and drink and festivals, new moons or Sabbaths.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	2	16	b4kd	figs-metonymy	νουμηνίας	1	in regard to a festival, or a new moon, or Sabbaths	The word **new moon** refers to a festival or celebration that would take place when it was the time of the new moon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea with a longer phrase. Alternate translation: “a new moon celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 COL	2	17	ip3a	figs-metaphor	ἅ ἐστιν σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων, τὸ δὲ σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	which are a shadow of the things coming, but the body is of Christ	A **shadow** shows the shape and outline of a **body**, but it is not the **body** itself. In a similar way, the things listed in the previous verse show the shape and outline of the **things coming**, but the **body** that casts this **shadow** is **Christ**. He is the substance of the **things coming**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “which are a foretaste of the things coming, but the full experience is of Christ” or “which hint at the things that were to come, but Christ is the one who came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	17	sev8	figs-possession	σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων	1		Paul here uses the possession form to show that the **shadow** is cast by the **things coming**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a shadow cast by the things coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	17	liqe	translate-unknown	τῶν μελλόντων	1		The **things coming** primarily refers to things that will happen or be experienced in the future. They can be connected with both the first and the second coming of Christ, which is why the **body** is of Christ in this verse. If that meaning of **coming** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **coming** refers to what Christ has blessed believers with at his first coming and what he will bless them with at his second coming. Alternate translation: “blessings that Christ brings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	2	17	ykh9	figs-possession	τὸ&σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **Christ** as the **body** that casts the “shadow.” If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea with a simple “being” verb. Alternate translation: “the body is Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-COL	2	18	aa4v	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς&ἑόρακεν&αὐτοῦ	1		The words **no one**, **he**, and **his** do not refer to one male person. Instead, they refer in a generic way to anyone who acts in these ways. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words with a comparable generic phrase in your language or make them plural. Alternate translation: “no one … they have seen … their” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+COL	2	17	ykh9	figs-possession	τὸ & σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **Christ** as the **body** that casts the “shadow.” If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea with a simple “being” verb. Alternate translation: “the body is Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+COL	2	18	aa4v	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς & ἑόρακεν & αὐτοῦ	1		The words **no one**, **he**, and **his** do not refer to one male person. Instead, they refer in a generic way to anyone who acts in these ways. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words with a comparable generic phrase in your language or make them plural. Alternate translation: “no one … they have seen … their” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 COL	2	18	ontu	figs-imperative3p	μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς καταβραβευέτω	1		This phrase translates a third-person imperative. If your language has third-person imperatives, you could use one here. If your language does not, you can use a comparable phrase or express the idea with a second-person imperative. Alternate translation: “Do not allow anyone … deprive you of your prize” or “Be on your guard against anyone … so that he does not deprive you of your prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
 COL	2	18	zv2t	figs-metaphor	μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς καταβραβευέτω	1	Let no one … deprive you of your prize	Here Paul refers to the false teachers as if they were judges or umpires at a contest who could decide against the Colossians, thus keeping them from receiving the prize for winning the contest. This metaphor fits with the “judging” language in [2:16](../02/16.md). These two verses together suggest that the Colossians are tempted to choose the false teachers as their judges instead of Christ. If these figures of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Let no one … act instead of Christ as your judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	2	18	b5ce	figs-abstractnouns	ταπεινοφροσύνῃ	1	delighting in false humility	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **humility**, you can express the idea in another way, such as with a verb. Alternate translation: “humbling themselves falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ COL	2	20	fe1k	figs-rquestion	τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ δογμ
 COL	2	20	g0jz	figs-activepassive	δογματίζεσθε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in its active form, perhaps by using a similar verb. Alternate translation: “do you submit to its decrees” or “do you subject yourselves to its decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	2	20	cdgc	figs-abstractnouns	δογματίζεσθε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **decrees**, you can express the idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “are you being subjected to what people require” or “are you being subjected to what it commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	21	v9e7			0	Connecting Statement:	This verse gives three commands that are not from Paul, but rather they are examples of the “decrees” from [2:20](../02/20.md). If these commands would be misunderstood in your language, you could introduce these commands with a phrase, such as “for example,” that shows that they connect to the “decrees” in the previous verse.
-COL	2	21	pzj1	figs-yousingular	ἅψῃ&γεύσῃ&θίγῃς	1	Connecting Statement:	These commands are addressed to **You** in the singular. Most likely, Paul refers to specific commands given to one person in a specific situation. However, he does intend these to be taken as examples of commands that might be given to any person among the Colossians. If your language can use a command in the singular as a generic example, you could do so here. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use plural commands here. Alternate translation: “You all may … handle … taste … touch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+COL	2	21	pzj1	figs-yousingular	ἅψῃ & γεύσῃ & θίγῃς	1	Connecting Statement:	These commands are addressed to **You** in the singular. Most likely, Paul refers to specific commands given to one person in a specific situation. However, he does intend these to be taken as examples of commands that might be given to any person among the Colossians. If your language can use a command in the singular as a generic example, you could do so here. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use plural commands here. Alternate translation: “You all may … handle … taste … touch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 COL	2	21	b392	figs-explicit	μὴ ἅψῃ! μηδὲ γεύσῃ! μηδὲ θίγῃς!	1	You may not handle, nor taste, nor touch!	Paul does not express what these commands say not to **handle**, **taste**, or **touch**, but it is clear that only certain things would be included, not all things. If your language would make this information explicit, you could add a generic phrase such as “certain things” or use words that match each command. Alternate translation: “You may not handle certain objects, nor taste certain foods and drinks, nor touch certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	2	22	a25u	writing-pronouns	ἅ	1		This pronoun refers to the commands in the previous verse, especially focusing on the implied objects of the rules. If **which** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a noun or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “The things that these commands regulate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 COL	2	22	ogj7	figs-idiom	ἐστιν πάντα εἰς φθορὰν τῇ ἀποχρήσει	1		This phrase means that all the objects that the commands in the previous verse are about end up being destroyed when they are used. In other words, food and drink are destroyed when they are eaten, and tools eventually break when they are used. By describing the objects in this way, Paul shows that the rules about these objects are not very important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this phrasemore clearly, such as with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “all end up in destruction because of their use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -294,17 +294,17 @@ COL	2	22	d4lu	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκ
 COL	2	22	oqmf	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of men and women” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 COL	2	23	r2m8	figs-idiom	λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας	1		Commands that have **a word of wisdom** are commands that come from wise thinking or require wise behavior. If this **having indeed a word of wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idiom with a comparable expression, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “are indeed characterized by wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	2	23	h2hk	figs-metonymy	λόγον	1		Here, **a word** represents a message that is made up of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message” or “a lesson” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-COL	2	23	y2dc	figs-hypo	ἅτινά&λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος	1	These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body	While there is no grammatical marker for a condition here, the word **in** functionally introduces a condition: these commands have a **word of wisdom** “if” one values **self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body**. It is only if one values these things that the commands have wisdom. If Paul’s explanation of how these commands could have **wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using a conditional expression, or use the word “seem.” Alternate translation: “which, having indeed a word of wisdom if one values self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+COL	2	23	y2dc	figs-hypo	ἅτινά & λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος	1	These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body	While there is no grammatical marker for a condition here, the word **in** functionally introduces a condition: these commands have a **word of wisdom** “if” one values **self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body**. It is only if one values these things that the commands have wisdom. If Paul’s explanation of how these commands could have **wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using a conditional expression, or use the word “seem.” Alternate translation: “which, having indeed a word of wisdom if one values self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 COL	2	23	g60j	figs-abstractnouns	λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος,	1	These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body	If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **wisdom**, **religion**, **humility**, and **severity**, you can rephrase this part of the verse so that you can express these ideas with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “having indeed a word that seems wise according to people who serve God in their own way, who humble themselves for gain, and who act severely to their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	23	vr8p	translate-unknown	ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ	1		The phrase **self-made religion** could describe (1) people who worship God however they want to. Alternate translation: “invented religion” (2) people who pretend to worship God but do not. Alternate translation: “mock worship” or “false worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	23	g9i8	translate-unknown	ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος	1		The phrase **severity of the body** refers to treating one’s body harshly as part of one’s religious practice. This could include beating oneself, not eating enough, or other ascetic practices. If **severity of the body** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to religious practice or translate the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “and wounding one’s body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	2	23	e7p5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐστιν&οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι	1	are not of any value against the indulgence of the flesh	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **value**, you can combine it with the verbal phrase **are not** to create a new phrase. Alternate translation: “do nothing” or “are ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+COL	2	23	e7p5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐστιν & οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι	1	are not of any value against the indulgence of the flesh	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **value**, you can combine it with the verbal phrase **are not** to create a new phrase. Alternate translation: “do nothing” or “are ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	2	23	blil	figs-possession	πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός	1		Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **indulgence** one gives to the **flesh**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could translate **indulgence** with a verb such as “indulging.” Alternate translation: “indulging the flesh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 COL	2	23	e70e	translate-unknown	πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός	1		If one “indulges” **the flesh**, this means that one has behaved in ways that match what one’s weak and sinful parts wish. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word for “sin.” Alternate translation: “sin” or “giving in to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	2	23	k3x6	figs-abstractnouns	πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **indulgence**, you can use a verb, such as “indulge.” Alternate translation: “indulging the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	intro	qtl2			0		# Colossians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>[4:1](../04/01.md) belongs to the section that begins in [3:18](../03/18.md), even though it is in the next chapter.<br><br>3. Exhortation Section<br>    * Seek the Things Above (3:1–4)<br>    * Take off Vices, Put on Virtues (3:5–17)<br>    * Commands for the Household (3:18–4:1)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Old and new “man”<br><br>Paul refers to the old and new “man” in [3:9–10](../03/09.md). These terms refer to the person before (“old”) and after (“new”) dying and rising with Christ. With these key words, Paul makes a similar claim to what he argued in [2:11–13](../02/11.md): believers are not who they used to be; rather, they have received new life in Christ and are new people. Your translation should reflect the idea that Paul tells the Colossians that they are new people in their union with Christ.<br><br>### The wrath of God<br><br>In [3:6](../03/06.md), Paul speaks of the “wrath of God,” which is “coming.” God’s “wrath” is not primarily an emotion, but rather, it is his act of judgment on those who do not believe and who disobey. It is “coming” because God will act in judgment soon. In your translation, emphasize God’s act over his emotion.<br><br>### No Greek and Jew …<br><br>In [3:11](../03/11.md), Paul refers to multiple different ways to categorize people in his world. See the notes on that verse for details. Paul says that none of these categories exist in the “new man.” By this, he means that these categories are not relevant for those who have died and risen with Christ. It is one’s status as a “new” person that is relevant and important.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Christ, your life<br><br>In [3:4](../03/04.md), Paul identifies Christ as the Colossians’ “life.” This metaphor comes from the previous verse, where Paul says that the Colossians’ life is “hidden with Christ.” Since their life is in Christ, Christ can be called their life. To say this a different way, the Colossians only have life in Christ, so their life and Christ’s life are bound together.<br><br>### Avoiding vices, pursuing virtues<br><br>In his exhortation to the Colossians to avoid vices and pursue virtues, Paul uses a number of metaphors. For avoiding vices, he uses the language of “putting to death” ([3:5](../03/05.md)), “laying aside” ([3:8](../03/08.md)), and “taking off” ([3:9](../03/09.md)). All these metaphors require separation from vices, whether that is pictured as putting to death parts of the body that pursue vices or as taking off evil desires as if they were clothing. For pursuing virtues, he opposes “taking off” with “putting on” ([3:10](../03/10.md); [3:12](../03/12.md)). Just as the Colossians should “take off” the desire to pursue vices, they should “put on” the desire to pursue virtues. These metaphors are all intended to help the Colossians pursue virtue instead of vice.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Vice and virtue lists<br><br>In [3:5](../03/05.md) and [3:8](../03/08.md), Paul gives lists of vices. These lists are not meant to provide a complete catalog of immoral and evil behaviors. Instead, they provide some examples that are meant to show the Colossians the kinds of behaviors that Paul has in mind. In [3:12](../03/12.md), he provides a corresponding list of virtues. The same thinking applies here: this is not a complete catalog of correct or good behavior but instead gives examples of the kinds of things that Paul wants the Colossians to do. You could introduce these lists as examples if it would help your readers understand.<br><br>### The “household code”<br><br>In [3:18](../03/18.md)–[4:1](../04/01.md), Paul uses a form that was well-known in his culture. It is often called a “household code,” and it consists of a list of instructions to different members of the household, including parents, children, slaves, and others. Paul uses this form and gives his own specific instructions to members of the household. Of course, he is not addressing a household but a church. He gives his instructions to whomever in the audience was a parent or a child or a slave.
 COL	3	1	r5yh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	If, therefore	The word **therefore** introduces an exhortation based on what Paul has already said about being “raised with Christ” in [2:12](../02/12.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or concluding command based on what has already been said. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-COL	3	1	oav8	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since … you were raised with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+COL	3	1	oav8	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since … you were raised with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 COL	3	1	t1jv	figs-metaphor	συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ	1	you were raised with Christ	Paul again states that believers have been raised from the dead with Christ. By this, he means that believers are united to Christ in his resurrection and thus receive new life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	1	qmzv	figs-idiom	συνηγέρθητε	1	you were raised with Christ	Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had died coming back to life. If this word does not refer to coming back to life in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you were restored to life with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	1	sl1f	figs-activepassive	συνηγέρθητε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father raised you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -322,13 +322,13 @@ COL	3	3	ihr6	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν κέκρυπται	1	your
 COL	3	4	ugge	figs-activepassive	ὁ Χριστὸς φανερωθῇ, ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate the idea in active form with: (1) Christ as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ, your life, reveals himself” or “Christ, your life, appears” (2) God the Father as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father reveals Christ, your life,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	3	4	n4nj	figs-metaphor	ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν	1	your life	Continuing the theme of the Colossians’ life being hidden with Christ, Paul now identifies Christ as the Colossians’ **life**. In other words, if the Colossians’ life is hidden with Christ, then Christ can be called their **life**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “who holds your life” or “with whom you have life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	4	kpqf	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν	1	your life	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you can express the idea with a verb for “living.” Alternate translation: “in whom you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL	3	4	b2io	translate-unknown	φανερωθῇ&σὺν αὐτῷ φανερωθήσεσθε	1		Paul uses the word **is revealed** to refer to Christ’s second coming, when he is **revealed** to everyone as who he truly is. Paul uses the phrase **will be revealed with him** to refer to how the Colossians will participate with Christ in that second coming and also be **revealed** as who they truly are. If the meaning of **revealed** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words such as “coming” or “returning” instead of “revealing.” Alternate translation: “comes again … will come with him” or “returns … will return with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	3	4	vlxm	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ὅταν&τότε	1		The word **When** indicates a moment in time, and the word translated **then** refers back to that same time. Therefore, the events described in two parts of this sentence occur at the same time. Use a construction that indicates simultaneous time in your language. Alternate translation: “When … at the same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+COL	3	4	b2io	translate-unknown	φανερωθῇ & σὺν αὐτῷ φανερωθήσεσθε	1		Paul uses the word **is revealed** to refer to Christ’s second coming, when he is **revealed** to everyone as who he truly is. Paul uses the phrase **will be revealed with him** to refer to how the Colossians will participate with Christ in that second coming and also be **revealed** as who they truly are. If the meaning of **revealed** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words such as “coming” or “returning” instead of “revealing.” Alternate translation: “comes again … will come with him” or “returns … will return with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+COL	3	4	vlxm	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ὅταν & τότε	1		The word **When** indicates a moment in time, and the word translated **then** refers back to that same time. Therefore, the events described in two parts of this sentence occur at the same time. Use a construction that indicates simultaneous time in your language. Alternate translation: “When … at the same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 COL	3	4	mz6o	translate-unknown	ἐν δόξῃ	1		As a previous note pointed out, the “revealing” language suggests that something will be revealed about Christ and the Colossians. Here, Paul describes it as **glory**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that this is one thing that **is revealed** about Christ and the Colossians: they are glorious. Alternate translation: “as glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	4	ajcy	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δόξῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as very great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	5	xvsp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		Here, the word **therefore** introduces an exhortation based on previous statements. In this case, Paul bases his exhortation on what he has said about the Colossians’ union with Christ and its end goal: being revealed with him in glory. If the meaning of **therefore** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable connecting word or express the idea with a phrase that refers back to what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 COL	3	5	jl45	figs-infostructure	νεκρώσατε οὖν	1		If your language would normally put a transition word like **therefore** at the beginning of the sentence, you could move it there in your translation. Alternate translation: “Therefore, put to death” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
-COL	3	5	zn6i	figs-metaphor	νεκρώσατε&τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1		Here Paul speaks of the **members** as if they were people that one could kill or **Put to death**. By using this metaphor, he wants to show the Colossians that the evil desires he lists should be treated as enemies and dealt with as harshly as possible. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Eliminate … the members that are on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	3	5	zn6i	figs-metaphor	νεκρώσατε & τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1		Here Paul speaks of the **members** as if they were people that one could kill or **Put to death**. By using this metaphor, he wants to show the Colossians that the evil desires he lists should be treated as enemies and dealt with as harshly as possible. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Eliminate … the members that are on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	5	gdz8	figs-metaphor	τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1		Paul here speaks of sins as if they were **members** or limbs of the body that are part of the person **on the earth**. What this metaphor means is that these sins can be so much a part of a person while they are living on earth that getting rid of them is like cutting off an arm or leg. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the sins that have become part of you while you live on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	5	pu2k	figs-abstractnouns	πορνείαν, ἀκαθαρσίαν, πάθος, ἐπιθυμίαν κακήν, καὶ τὴν πλεονεξίαν, ἥτις ἐστὶν εἰδωλολατρία;	1		If your language would not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **immorality**, **uncleanness**, **passion**, **desire**, **envy**, and **idolatry**, you could rephrase this sentence and use adjectives or verbs to express the idea. Alternate translation: “behaving in ways that are sexually immoral, unclean, wrongly emotional, lustful, and envious, which is idolatrous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	5	p9w9	translate-unknown	ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	uncleanness	The word **uncleanness** describes morally dirty or impure behavior. This is a general term that covers many sins that would make one unclean, that is, that would make other people avoid one. If you have a comparable expression in your language, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “unclean behavior” or “disgusting acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ COL	3	11	mrpc	figs-hyperbole	οὐκ ἔνι	1		Here, Paul speaks as if none of
 COL	3	11	t2w2	figs-genericnoun	οὐκ ἔνι Ἕλλην καὶ Ἰουδαῖος, περιτομὴ καὶ ἀκροβυστία, βάρβαρος, Σκύθης, δοῦλος, ἐλεύθερος	1	there is no Greek and Jew, circumcision and uncircumcision, barbarian, Scythian, slave, freeman	All these terms are nouns that refer to groups of people that are characterized by the trait that the noun names. These words do not refer to just one person. If your language has a way to categorize people by characteristics, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “there are no Greek and Jewish people, circumcised and uncircumcised people, barbaric people, Scythian people, enslaved people, free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 COL	3	11	vt4t	translate-unknown	βάρβαρος	1	barbarian	The word **barbarian** was used by people who spoke Greek to describe anyone who did not speak Greek. If **barbarian** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “foreign.” Alternate translation: “alien” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	11	n7by	translate-unknown	Σκύθης	1	Scythian	The word **Scythian** was used to describe a nomadic group of people who were fierce warriors. It was also used to describe those who behaved in similar ways, who were often considered rough or rude. If **Scythian** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add an adjective before **Scythian** to clarify its connotation, or you could use a comparable label. Alternate translation: “uncivilized Scythian” or “rough Scythian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-COL	3	11	i964	figs-metaphor	πάντα καὶ&Χριστός	1	but Christ is all, and in all	Here Paul speaks of **Christ** as being **all** things. By this, he means that none of the categories he just listed matter because Christ is the only person who matters. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a verb such as “matters” or a noun such as “importance.” Alternate translation: “Christ is all that matters, and he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+COL	3	11	i964	figs-metaphor	πάντα καὶ & Χριστός	1	but Christ is all, and in all	Here Paul speaks of **Christ** as being **all** things. By this, he means that none of the categories he just listed matter because Christ is the only person who matters. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a verb such as “matters” or a noun such as “importance.” Alternate translation: “Christ is all that matters, and he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	11	iqmw	figs-metaphor	ἐν πᾶσιν	1		Again, Paul speaks of those who have died and risen with Christ. Here, instead of speaking of the Colossians being “in Christ,” he reverses the form, just as he did in [1:27](../01/27.md): Christ is **in all** of those who believe in him. If possible, translate this expression the same way you translated “Christ in you” in [1:27](../01/27.md). Alternate translation: “is united to all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	12	hu90	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		Here the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation based on what Paul has already told the Colossians in [3:9–11](../03/09.md) about putting off the old man, putting on the new man, and the effects of this. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces an exhortation based on what has already been said, and you could refer back to what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “Because you have put off the old man and put on the new man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 COL	3	12	yyfe	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε	1		The phrase **put on** uses the same words Paul used in [3:10](../03/10.md) for “having put on” the new man. Here, he uses the same clothing metaphor to show the Colossians that “putting on” the new man means that they also must **put on** the character traits he lists here. This means that they must consistently behave in ways that show **mercy, kindness, humility, gentleness, {and} patience**. If possible, translate **put on** as you did in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “step into new virtues, including” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ COL	3	13	m1d9	figs-infostructure	ἀνεχόμενοι ἀλλήλων καὶ 
 COL	3	13	r8iy	figs-idiom	ἀνεχόμενοι ἀλλήλων	1	bearing with one another	In Paul’s culture, the phrase **bearing with one another** refers to being patient with others, even when they do things that are annoying or strange. If **bearing with one another** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “putting up with one another” or “being patient with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	13	rts1	figs-hypo	ἐάν	1	being gracious to each other	Paul uses **if** to introduce a hypothetical situation that he thinks will happen among the Colossians at times. It is in this kind of situation that he wants them to “bear with one another and be gracious to each other.” If your language would not use **if** to express that idea, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to any time something happens. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 COL	3	13	f5f9	figs-idiom	τις πρός τινα ἔχῃ μομφήν	1	being gracious to each other	This phrase indicates a situation in which one person feels offended or hurt by another person. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that indicates that one party has been offended or hurt by another. Alternate translation: “a person has been offended by another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	3	13	p474	figs-abstractnouns	πρός&ἔχῃ μομφήν	1	may have a complaint against	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **complaint**, you can express the idea by translating the abstract noun as a verb. Alternate translation: “may complain against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+COL	3	13	p474	figs-abstractnouns	πρός & ἔχῃ μομφήν	1	may have a complaint against	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **complaint**, you can express the idea by translating the abstract noun as a verb. Alternate translation: “may complain against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	13	lp1o	figs-infostructure	καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	may have a complaint against	If your language would put the comparison after the command, you could switch them in your translation, including “forgive” in the new first clause. Alternate translation: “you should forgive others, just as the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 COL	3	13	lkdl	figs-simile	καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν	1	may have a complaint against	Here Paul draws a comparison between how he wants the Colossians to forgive and how Jesus has forgiven them. Use a word or phrase that would normally be used for comparing things that are similar. Alternate translation: “in the same way that the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 COL	3	13	l0kr	figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	may have a complaint against	Paul leaves out words that could be needed in some languages to make a complete statement. If your language needs these words, you could supply words such as “forgive one another.” Alternate translation: “so also you should forgive each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ COL	3	16	g0h5	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Let the w
 COL	3	16	mz40	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	Let the word of Christ dwell in you	Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 COL	3	16	frn8	figs-metaphor	πλουσίως	1	Let the word of Christ dwell in you	Here Paul speaks as if the “word” were wealthy and could do something **richly**. He uses this metaphor to command that the word should dwell in the Colossians completely and with all the blessings that come from it. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “in every way and with every blessing” or “fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	16	aqx3	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ	1	Let the word of Christ dwell in you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “in all wise ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL	3	16	e44g	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ, διδάσκοντες καὶ νουθετοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς&ᾄδοντες	1	Let the word of Christ dwell in you	Paul uses the words **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** to show the Colossians some ways in which they can “let the word of Christ dwell” in them. Therefore, **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** happen at the same time as **the word of Christ** dwelling in them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could directly state it. Alternate translation: (start a new sentence) “you could do this by teaching and admonishing one another in all wisdom … and by singing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
+COL	3	16	e44g	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ, διδάσκοντες καὶ νουθετοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς & ᾄδοντες	1	Let the word of Christ dwell in you	Paul uses the words **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** to show the Colossians some ways in which they can “let the word of Christ dwell” in them. Therefore, **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** happen at the same time as **the word of Christ** dwelling in them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could directly state it. Alternate translation: (start a new sentence) “you could do this by teaching and admonishing one another in all wisdom … and by singing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 COL	3	16	h5k9	figs-doublet	διδάσκοντες καὶ νουθετοῦντες	1	admonishing one another	These two verbs have only slightly different meanings. The word **teaching** refers positively to giving someone information, skills, or concepts. The word **admonishing** refers negatively to warning someone against something. If you have words that fit these two ideas, you could use them here. If you do not have words that make these distinctions, you could translate both of them with a single verb such as “instruct.” Alternate translation: “instructing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 COL	3	16	ubi5	translate-unknown	ψαλμοῖς, ὕμνοις, ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς	1	with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs	These three terms name different kinds of songs. The word **psalms** refers to songs from the book of Psalms in the Bible. The word **hymns** refers to songs sung in praise, usually to a deity. Finally, the word **songs** refers to vocal music that celebrates someone or something, usually in poem form. If you have words that roughly match these categories in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have words that match these categories, you could express the idea with only one or two words or use adjectives to describe the different types of songs. Alternate translation: “psalms and spiritual songs” or “biblical songs, praise songs, and celebratory spiritual songs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	16	eapz	translate-unknown	ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς	1	with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs	The word **spiritual** could refer to (1) the Holy Spirit as the origin or inspiration of the **songs**. Alternate translation: “and songs from the Spirit” (2) **songs** that are sung by or in the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “and songs empowered by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ COL	3	21	fvi7	figs-activepassive	μὴ ἀθυμῶσιν	1	do not provoke your
 COL	3	21	bjk2	translate-unknown	ἀθυμῶσιν	1	do not provoke your children	The phrase **they may … be discouraged** describes the feeling of despair or hopelessness. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “they may … despair” or “they may … lose heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	22	lf6k		οἱ δοῦλοι	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	Here Paul directly addresses the **Slaves** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You slaves”
 COL	3	22	cx6a	figs-idiom	τοῖς κατὰ σάρκα κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	The phrase **according to the flesh** describes the **masters** as humans on this earth. Paul uses this phrase to describe these **masters** because he is already setting up a contrast with the “Master” over these masters: Jesus (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If **according to the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with an adjective such as “human” or “earthly.” Alternate translation: “your earthly masters” or “your human masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	3	22	o6mi	figs-explicit	τοῖς&κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	Here Paul does not explicitly state that slaves must **obey** “their own” masters. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **your** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each slave’s master in mind. Alternate translation: “your own masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	3	22	o6mi	figs-explicit	τοῖς & κυρίοις	1	obey your masters according to the flesh	Here Paul does not explicitly state that slaves must **obey** “their own” masters. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **your** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each slave’s master in mind. Alternate translation: “your own masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	3	22	iy1n	figs-idiom	κατὰ πάντα	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	Just as in [3:20](../03/20.md), the phrase **in all things** is an idiom that indicates that slaves should obey “everything their masters command” or “in every situation.” If **in all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	3	22	p36t	translate-unknown	μὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοδουλεία	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	The word **eyeservice** describes how people sometimes behave to look good more than to do the right thing. If **eyeservice** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase such as “wanting to look impressive.” Alternate translation: “not focusing on how you appear to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	3	22	b5en	translate-unknown	ὡς ἀνθρωπάρεσκοι	1	all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers	The phrase **people pleasers** describes the kind of people who care about “eyeservice.” Here, **people pleasers** are those who focus on impressing humans rather than doing what God desires. If these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could emphasize that **people pleasers** want to please humans only, not God. Alternate translation: “as people who want to please humans rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ COL	3	24	f3ed	figs-possession	τὴν ἀνταπόδοσιν τῆς κληρο
 COL	3	24	sod6	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀνταπόδοσιν τῆς κληρονομίας	1	the reward of the inheritance	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **reward** and **inheritance**, you can express those ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what he has promised to hand down to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	24	oyo4	figs-declarative	τῷ Κυρίῳ Χριστῷ δουλεύετε	1	the reward of the inheritance	Here Paul uses a simple statement as (1) a reminder that states for whom they actually work. Alternate translation: “Keep in mind that you are serving the Lord Christ” (2) a command about whom they should serve. Alternate translation: “Serve the Lord Christ” or “You should serve the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 COL	3	25	fvw0	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the reward of the inheritance	The word **For** introduces support for what has already been said. Here Paul uses it to introduce a negative reason for obedience (he already gave a positive reason in [3:24](../03/24.md)). If **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it introduces another reason for obedience. Alternate translation: “Do these things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-COL	3	25	u5lx	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&ἀδικῶν&ἠδίκησεν	1	the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously	Here Paul speaks in general of anyone who does **unrighteousness**. However, he directs this general statement to the slaves he has been addressing (not the masters, since he does not address them until [4:1](../04/01.md)). If this generic form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary form for generic statements or include the slaves as the ones being addressed. Alternate translation: “any of you who do unrighteousness … you did unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+COL	3	25	u5lx	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & ἀδικῶν & ἠδίκησεν	1	the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously	Here Paul speaks in general of anyone who does **unrighteousness**. However, he directs this general statement to the slaves he has been addressing (not the masters, since he does not address them until [4:1](../04/01.md)). If this generic form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary form for generic statements or include the slaves as the ones being addressed. Alternate translation: “any of you who do unrighteousness … you did unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 COL	3	25	sttw	figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικῶν	1	the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unrighteousness**, you can express the idea differently, such as with an adverb. Alternate translation: “acting unrighteously” or “doing unrighteous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	3	25	ak8j	figs-metaphor	κομιεῖται ὃ ἠδίκησεν	1	doing unrighteousness	In this context, the phrase **will receive** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul, then, speaks as if **the one doing unrighteousness** will **receive** as payment or recompense exactly **what he did unrighteously**. By this, Paul means that God will punish those who do **unrighteousness** in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will receive a punishment that fits the crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	3	25	c9fx	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία	1	there is no favoritism	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **favoritism**, you can express the idea with a verb such as “favor” or with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “God does not favor anyone” or “God judges everyone by the same standard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ COL	4	2	gmtv	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	γρηγοροῦντες	1	Conti
 COL	4	2	wv73		ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Continue steadfastly in prayer	Alternate translation: “during your time of prayer”
 COL	4	2	calz	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν εὐχαριστίᾳ	1	Continue steadfastly in prayer	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **thanksgiving**, you can express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “and giving thanks” or an adverb such as “thankfully.” Alternate translation: “thankfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	4	3	iqjo	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἅμα	1	:	In this context, the word **together** does not refer to people being together but rather, it refers to actions happening **together** or at the same time. If **together** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that the Colossians should pray for Paul at the same time they pray about other things (the things mentioned in [4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “at the same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
-COL	4	3	sct4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῖν	1		In this verse, the word **us** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+COL	4	3	sct4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῖν	1		In this verse, the word **us** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	4	3	ql6g	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the content of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that” or “asking that” (2) the purpose for which the Colossians should pray for Paul. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	4	3	ub1i	figs-metaphor	ὁ Θεὸς ἀνοίξῃ ἡμῖν θύραν τοῦ λόγου	1	God may open a door	Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for Paul and Timothy to preach the gospel as if God were “opening” a **door** to them **for the word**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul and Timothy can go in and preach the message about Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God may give us opportunities to preach the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	4	3	m7z4	figs-doublet	τοῦ λόγου, λαλῆσαι	1	God may open a door	Here, **for the word** and **to speak** mean almost the same thing. If your language would not use both of phrases here, you could combine them into one. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ COL	4	6	v14n	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν πάντοτε ἐν χάρ
 COL	4	6	u9mh	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χάριτι	1	your words always with grace, seasoned with salt	If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **grace**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	4	6	fuv5	figs-metaphor	ἅλατι ἠρτυμένος	1	your words always with grace, seasoned with salt	In Paul’s culture, when food was **seasoned with salt**, it would taste good and be nourishing. Paul thus speaks of seasoning one’s “words” **with salt** to say that the words should be interesting (like food that tastes good) and helpful (like food that is nourishing). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or plainly. Alternate translation: “both compelling and helpful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	4	6	c1w4	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδέναι	1	to know how it is necessary for you to answer	Here Paul uses the phrase **to know** to introduce the result of speaking words **with grace** and **seasoned with salt**. If **to know** does not introduce a result in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly expresses that Paul is speaking about a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that you will know” or “ so that you might know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-COL	4	6	jdtx		πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς&ἀποκρίνεσθαι	1	to know how it is necessary for you to answer	Alternate translation: “how to best answer” or “the right answer to give to”
+COL	4	6	jdtx		πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς & ἀποκρίνεσθαι	1	to know how it is necessary for you to answer	Alternate translation: “how to best answer” or “the right answer to give to”
 COL	4	6	djl0	writing-pronouns	ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ	1	to know how it is necessary for you to answer	The phrase **each one** refers to individuals who would be considered part of “those outside” ([4:5](../04/05.md)). If what **each one** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could explicitly refer back to how you translated “those outside.” Alternate translation: “each outsider” or “each one who does not believe in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 COL	4	7	ut91	figs-infostructure	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ πάντα γνωρίσει ὑμῖν Τυχικὸς, ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς, καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος, καὶ σύνδουλος ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Connecting Statement:	If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange this sentence so that (1) what **Tychicus will make known** to them comes after **to you**, and (2) the words that describe **Tychicus** come after his name. You may need to make one or both of these changes to make the verse clear in your language. Alternate translation: “Tychicus, the beloved brother and faithful servant and fellow slave in the Lord, will make known to you all the things concerning me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
 COL	4	7	xzz4	figs-idiom	τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ πάντα	1	the things concerning me	When Paul speaks of **All the things concerning me**, he refers to details about his life such as where he is living, his health, how his work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “All the news about me” or “All the details about how I am doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ COL	4	7	h3mk	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	fellow slave	Paul uses the spatia
 COL	4	8	wmmd	figs-pastforfuture	ἔπεμψα	1	the things concerning us	Here Paul uses the past tense form **sent** to describe something he has not yet done when he is dictating this letter. He uses the past tense because, when the letter is read to the Colossians, his sending of Tychicus will be in the past. If your language would not use the past tense here, you could use whatever tense would customarily be used in this situation in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I send” or “whom I have sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 COL	4	8	eei1	figs-doublet	ὑμᾶς εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, ἵνα	1	the things concerning us	It may seem that the phrase **for this very {reason}** contains redundant information in your language, since Paul also includes **so that**. If both of these phrases would be redundant in your language, you could use a single purpose phrase, such as **so that**. Alternate translation: “you so that” or “you in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 COL	4	8	iv0m	translate-textvariants	ἵνα γνῶτε τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	he might encourage your hearts	While many manuscripts have **so that you might know the things concerning us**, some say “so that he might know the things concerning you.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-COL	4	8	fr1z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα&καὶ	1	he might encourage your hearts	The words **so that** and **and that** introduce two of Paul’s purposes in sending Tychicus to the Colossians. If **so that** and **and that** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to introduce a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+COL	4	8	fr1z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα & καὶ	1	he might encourage your hearts	The words **so that** and **and that** introduce two of Paul’s purposes in sending Tychicus to the Colossians. If **so that** and **and that** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to introduce a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	4	8	cty1	figs-idiom	τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	the things concerning us	Just like the phrase “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md), the phrase **the things concerning us** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the news about us” or “the details about how we are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	8	vyq5	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	the things concerning us	The word **us** does not include the Colossians. Instead, Paul is referring to himself and those who are with him, including Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 COL	4	8	rw4z	figs-synecdoche	τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	the things concerning us	Here when Paul refers to **your hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **your hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “your souls” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
@@ -525,17 +525,17 @@ COL	4	9	f18w	figs-explicit	σὺν Ὀνησίμῳ	1	the faithful and beloved b
 COL	4	9	yqh9	translate-names	Ὀνησίμῳ	1	the faithful and beloved brother	**Onesimus** is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
 COL	4	9	aqe3	figs-idiom	ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	the faithful and beloved brother	The phrase **from among you** means that Onesimus used to live with the Colossians and was part of the group to whom Paul is writing the letter. To express this idea, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person belongs to a specific group of people. Alternate translation: “is from your town” or “used to live with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	9	n15d	writing-pronouns	γνωρίσουσιν	1	they will make known to you	The pronoun **they** refers back to Onesimus and Tychicus. If what **they** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by using their names or referring to “two” of them. Alternate translation: “the two of them will make known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-COL	4	9	vb7j	figs-idiom	πάντα&τὰ ὧδε	1	all the things here	Just like the phrases “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md) and “the things concerning us” in [4:8](../04/08.md), the phrase **all the things here** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “all the news about us” or “all the details about what is happening here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	4	10	wmf4	translate-names	Ἀρίσταρχος&Μᾶρκος&Βαρναβᾶ	1	Aristarchus	**Aristarchus**, **Mark**, and **Barnabas** are all names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+COL	4	9	vb7j	figs-idiom	πάντα & τὰ ὧδε	1	all the things here	Just like the phrases “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md) and “the things concerning us” in [4:8](../04/08.md), the phrase **all the things here** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “all the news about us” or “all the details about what is happening here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+COL	4	10	wmf4	translate-names	Ἀρίσταρχος & Μᾶρκος & Βαρναβᾶ	1	Aristarchus	**Aristarchus**, **Mark**, and **Barnabas** are all names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	4	10	lcxt		ἀσπάζεται	1	Aristarchus	As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered to” or “says hello to”
 COL	4	10	v0le	translate-unknown	ὁ συναιχμάλωτός μου	1	Aristarchus	The phrase **my fellow prisoner** identifies Aristarchus as someone who is in prison along with Paul. If **fellow prisoner** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this with a short phrase instead. Alternate translation: “who has been imprisoned with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 COL	4	10	uq72	figs-ellipsis	καὶ Μᾶρκος, ὁ ἀνεψιὸς Βαρναβᾶ	1	Aristarchus	Paul has not included the verb “greet” in this clause because it was unnecessary in his language. If it is necessary in your language, you could include it here. Alternate translation: “and Mark, the cousin of Barnabas, also greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 COL	4	10	ta5i	translate-kinship	ὁ ἀνεψιὸς Βαρναβᾶ	1	Aristarchus	The word **cousin** refers to the son of the brother or sister of one’s mother or father. If possible, use a word in your language that makes this relationship clear, or you could describe the relationship. Alternate translation: “the son of Barnabas’ aunt or uncle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-COL	4	10	st6r	writing-pronouns	οὗ&ἔλθῃ&αὐτόν	1	Aristarchus	The words **whom**, **he**, and **him** refer back to Mark, not Barnabas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Mark … he may come … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+COL	4	10	st6r	writing-pronouns	οὗ & ἔλθῃ & αὐτόν	1	Aristarchus	The words **whom**, **he**, and **him** refer back to Mark, not Barnabas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Mark … he may come … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 COL	4	10	i5ca	figs-extrainfo	περὶ οὗ ἐλάβετε ἐντολάς	1	Aristarchus	Paul does not clarify who sent these **orders** to the Colossians, and it was probably not him. If it is possible in your language, leave the person who sent these **orders** unexpressed. If you must clarify who sent the **orders**, you could use an indefinite expression. Alternate translation: “about whom someone sent you orders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 COL	4	10	wiwq	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ἔλθῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Aristarchus	Here Paul indicates a hypothetical situation. It may be that Mark does visit the Colossians, but Paul is not sure if he will or not. Use a form that indicates a true possibility in your language. Alternate translation: “he may or may not come to you, but if he does,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 COL	4	10	a1v3	figs-idiom	δέξασθε αὐτόν	1	if he may come	To **receive** someone means welcoming that person into one’s group and extending hospitality to him or her. If **receive** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression that indicates this kind of hospitality or express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “show him hospitality and accept him into your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	4	11	bm6s	translate-names	Ἰησοῦς&Ἰοῦστος	1	Jesus who is called Justus	**Jesus** and **Justus** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+COL	4	11	bm6s	translate-names	Ἰησοῦς & Ἰοῦστος	1	Jesus who is called Justus	**Jesus** and **Justus** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	4	11	p6tp	figs-distinguish	ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰοῦστος	1	Jesus who is called Justus	Here Paul gives further information about “Jesus.” This information identifies which “Jesus” this is (the one also known as **Justus**), distinguishing him from other men who might be named “Jesus.” If this way of introducing a second name would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form in your language that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “, the one called Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 COL	4	11	ktfz	figs-activepassive	ὁ λεγόμενος	1	Jesus who is called Justus	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “whom some people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	4	11	oscc	figs-ellipsis	καὶ Ἰησοῦς, ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰοῦστος	1	Jesus who is called Justus	Paul has not included the verb “greet” in this clause because it was unnecessary in his language. If it is necessary in your language, you could include it here. Alternate translation: “and Jesus who is called Justus also greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -556,16 +556,16 @@ COL	4	12	s7e7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θε
 COL	4	13	sg4h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	The word **For** introduces further support for Paul’s statements about Epaphras in the previous verse. In [4:12](../04/12.md), Paul says that Epaphras is “always striving” for them, and he supports that claim here by giving his own testimony about how hard Epaphras has worked for the Colossians and for other believers who live near them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support for a previous statement, or you could refer back to what Paul is supporting. Alternate translation: “you could be sure that he does this, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 COL	4	13	k8vv	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πολὺν πόνον	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **labor**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “labor.” Alternate translation: “he labors diligently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 COL	4	13	zzc8	figs-ellipsis	τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ, καὶ τῶν ἐν Ἱεραπόλει	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	Here Paul leaves out to whom the pronoun **the ones** refers, since in his language it was clear that **the ones** refers to people who live in the cities he mentions. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **the ones** refers to believers who live in these two towns. Alternate translation: “of believers who live in Laodicea, and of believers who live in Hierapolis” or “of believers who live in Laodicea and Hierapolis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-COL	4	13	d0et	figs-explicit	Λαοδικίᾳ&Ἱεραπόλει	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	**Laodicea** and **Hierapolis** were towns near Colossae. In fact, they were all in the same valley. If it would be helpful to your readers to clarify that these are nearby towns, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “nearby Laodicea … nearby Hierapolis” or “Laodicea … Hierapolis, churches near you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	4	13	d0et	figs-explicit	Λαοδικίᾳ & Ἱεραπόλει	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	**Laodicea** and **Hierapolis** were towns near Colossae. In fact, they were all in the same valley. If it would be helpful to your readers to clarify that these are nearby towns, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “nearby Laodicea … nearby Hierapolis” or “Laodicea … Hierapolis, churches near you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	4	14	v0ho		ἀσπάζεται	1	I testify for him, that he has much hard labor on behalf of you	As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered to” or “says hello to”
-COL	4	14	hq1k	translate-names	Λουκᾶς&Δημᾶς	1	Demas	**Demas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+COL	4	14	hq1k	translate-names	Λουκᾶς & Δημᾶς	1	Demas	**Demas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	4	14	bv7b	figs-ellipsis	ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς Λουκᾶς, ὁ ἰατρὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς, καὶ Δημᾶς.	1	Demas	Paul has not included the verb “greet” with **and also Demas,** because it was unnecessary in his language. If including “greet” is necessary in your language, you could (1) move **and also Demas** before **greets you**. Alternate translation: “Luke the beloved physician and also Demas greet you” (2) include it with the phrase **and also Demas**. Alternate translation: “Luke the beloved physician greets you, and also Demas greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 COL	4	15	xi2b		ἀσπάσασθε	1	the brothers	As was customary in this culture, Paul not only extends greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing (as he has done in [4:10–14](../04/10.md)). He also asks the Colossians to extend greetings for him to other people that both he and the Colossians know. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “Remember me to” or “Say hello for me to”
-COL	4	15	sc5g	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς&ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	The word **brothers** does not refer to only male people. Instead, it refers to both men and women who are part of the group of believers. If **brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word that does not refer to natural gender or you could use both male and female genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+COL	4	15	sc5g	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς & ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	The word **brothers** does not refer to only male people. Instead, it refers to both men and women who are part of the group of believers. If **brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word that does not refer to natural gender or you could use both male and female genders. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 COL	4	15	zkp3	translate-names	Νύμφαν	1	in Laodicea	**Nympha** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 COL	4	15	wyk3	figs-idiom	κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῆς	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	The phrase **in her house** is a way to indicate that the church used Nympha’s house as their meeting place. If **in her house** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that gathers in her house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-COL	4	16	zzq4	figs-explicit	ἀναγνωσθῇ&ἀναγνωσθῇ&ἀναγνῶτε	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	In this culture, letters sent to a group were normally read out loud by one person to everyone else in the group. The words that are translated by **read** in this verse refer to this practice. If you have a way to refer to this practice, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “has been heard … it is heard … hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-COL	4	16	zvor	figs-activepassive	ἀναγνωσθῇ παρ’ ὑμῖν ἡ ἐπιστολή&ἀναγνωσθῇ	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	If your language does not use these passive forms, you can express the ideas in active forms by supplying an indefinite subject such as “person” or by expressing the idea with a different verb such as “hear.” Alternate translation: “you have heard this letter … they hear it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+COL	4	16	zzq4	figs-explicit	ἀναγνωσθῇ & ἀναγνωσθῇ & ἀναγνῶτε	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	In this culture, letters sent to a group were normally read out loud by one person to everyone else in the group. The words that are translated by **read** in this verse refer to this practice. If you have a way to refer to this practice, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “has been heard … it is heard … hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL	4	16	zvor	figs-activepassive	ἀναγνωσθῇ παρ’ ὑμῖν ἡ ἐπιστολή & ἀναγνωσθῇ	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	If your language does not use these passive forms, you can express the ideas in active forms by supplying an indefinite subject such as “person” or by expressing the idea with a different verb such as “hear.” Alternate translation: “you have heard this letter … they hear it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 COL	4	16	q4sz	figs-explicit	ποιήσατε ἵνα καὶ ἐν τῇ Λαοδικαίων ἐκκλησίᾳ ἀναγνωσθῇ, καὶ τὴν ἐκ Λαοδικίας ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀναγνῶτε	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	With these commands, Paul is asking the churches to exchange letters. He wants the Colossians to hear the letter he sent to Laodicea, and he wants the Laodiceans to hear the letter he sent to the Colossians. If you have a specific form to refer to sending and receiving letters, you could use it hear. Alternate translation: “send it off to Laodicea to be read in the church there, and request the letter I sent to them so that you can read it too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 COL	4	16	q05z	figs-idiom	τὴν ἐκ Λαοδικίας	1	Nympha, and the church that is in her house	The phrase **the one from Laodicea** refers to a letter that Paul has already sent or is about to send to the church in Laodicea. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that clarifies that this is a letter from Paul, not one written to Paul. Alternate translation: “the letter I addressed to Laodicea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 COL	4	17	z330		καὶ εἴπατε	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	In addition to asking the Colossians to greet others for him ([4:15](../04/15.md)), Paul also asks them to **say** something to Archippus. If you have a specific form in your language for instructions on relaying a message, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “And relay this message”
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ COL	4	17	do70	translate-names	Ἀρχίππῳ	1	say to Archippus, “Look to th
 COL	4	17	yy8s	figs-quotations	βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν ἣν παρέλαβες ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἵνα αὐτὴν πληροῖς	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	The instruction from Paul to Archippus is written as a direct quote. If your language does not use this form, you can write it as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “that he must look to the ministry that he has received in the Lord, so that he may fulfill it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 COL	4	17	d39x	figs-yousingular	εἴπατε Ἀρχίππῳ, βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν ἣν παρέλαβες ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἵνα αὐτὴν πληροῖς.	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	The words **Look**, **you have received**, and **you may fulfill** all refer to Archippus alone and are singular. However, the word **say** refers to the Colossians and is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 COL	4	17	dy11	figs-metaphor	βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Here Paul speaks as if Archippus’ **ministry** were something he can **look to**. By this, he means that he wants Archippus to focus on carrying out his ministry just as if it were something he could stare at. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “Focus on the ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-COL	4	17	dau6	figs-extrainfo	τὴν διακονίαν&παρέλαβες	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Paul does not clarify or even hint at what **the ministry** is or from whom Archippus **received** it. If it is possible, leave this information unclear in your translation. If you must include some extra information, you could clarify that “God” gave him the **ministry** of serving the church. Alternate translation: “the task of serving the church … God gave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+COL	4	17	dau6	figs-extrainfo	τὴν διακονίαν & παρέλαβες	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Paul does not clarify or even hint at what **the ministry** is or from whom Archippus **received** it. If it is possible, leave this information unclear in your translation. If you must include some extra information, you could clarify that “God” gave him the **ministry** of serving the church. Alternate translation: “the task of serving the church … God gave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 COL	4	17	uble	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of Archippus with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord** or united to the Lord identifies the situation in which he **received** his **ministry**. He received this **ministry** when he was united to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 COL	4	17	ufdy	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.”	The phrase **so that** introduces a goal or purpose. Here, it is the purpose for which Archippus should **look to** or stay focused on his ministry. Use a word or phrase that introduces the goal or purpose of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 COL	4	18	t5js		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ	1	Remember my chains	Paul concludes his letter by writing a final greeting to the Colossians. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I ask to be remembered by my own hand” or “I say hello by my own hand”
diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv
index 25356d5824..5100b5554a 100644
--- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv
@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	1	1	luw5	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace and peace to you	This phrase is a common biblical blessing formula and greeting (See Rom. 1:7; 1 Cor. 1:3; 2 Cor. 1:2; Gal. 1:3; Eph. 1:2; Phil. 1:2; Col. 1:2; 2 Th. 1:2; Philem. 1:3; 1 Pet. 1:2; 2 Pet. 1:2; Rev. 1:4). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing that could be used as a greeting in your language. Alternate translation: “May God give you his grace and peace” or “I pray that God shows you favor and keeps you safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 1TH	1	1	qx70	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace and peace to you	The words **Grace** and **peace** are abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs or description words. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “We pray that God will treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
 1TH	1	1	nn67	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1	to you	Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the church of Thessalonica, unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you)
-1TH	1	2	of3g	figs-infostructure	εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε&μνείαν ποιούμενοι	1		In this verse Paul describes the apostles’ prayers for the Thessalonians in two clauses. The first clause is specific, that they **give thanks to God**, and the second is general, that they are **making mention** of them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses, as done in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
-1TH	1	2	o7cp	figs-hyperbole	εὐχαριστοῦμεν&πάντοτε&μνείαν ποιούμενοι&ἀδιαλείπτως	1		Here the words **always** and **continually** are exaggerations that express the intensity and frequency of the prayers offered up to God by Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy for the Thessalonians. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We regularly give thanks … very often making mention of you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
+1TH	1	2	of3g	figs-infostructure	εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε & μνείαν ποιούμενοι	1		In this verse Paul describes the apostles’ prayers for the Thessalonians in two clauses. The first clause is specific, that they **give thanks to God**, and the second is general, that they are **making mention** of them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses, as done in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
+1TH	1	2	o7cp	figs-hyperbole	εὐχαριστοῦμεν & πάντοτε & μνείαν ποιούμενοι & ἀδιαλείπτως	1		Here the words **always** and **continually** are exaggerations that express the intensity and frequency of the prayers offered up to God by Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy for the Thessalonians. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We regularly give thanks … very often making mention of you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
 1TH	1	3	ecw0	figs-idiom	μνημονεύοντες ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν;	1		The main verb of this sentence is “we give thanks” (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). The phrase **remembering … before our God and Father** is an idiom that also means to thank God in prayer. The apostles are **remembering** these things about the Thessalonians and thanking God for them. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could move the phrase **before our God and Father** to follow **remembering**. Alternate translation: “offering thanks for … to our God and Father” or “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father … Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
 1TH	1	3	w769	figs-possession	τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος	1		Paul uses three pairs of words in a possessive relationship here. The most likely meaning of this possessive relationship is that the second word of each pair is the motivation for the first word of the pair. Alternate translation: “work motivated by faith and labor because of love and endurance based on future promises” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
 1TH	1	3	kr8q	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		The words **in our Lord Jesus Christ** is a possessive form. The relationship between **our Lord Jesus Christ** and **hope** could refer to: (1) Jesus as the object of hope. Alternate translation: “that our Lord Jesus Christ will do what he has promised” (2) Jesus as the source of hope. Alternate translation: “that comes from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	1	8	z9eu	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε μὴ χρείαν ἔχειν ἡμᾶς λαλεῖν τι	1		**Therefore** marks what follows as the result of what came before. Because the gospel message and the faithful model of the Thessalonian church were so effective, the writers of this letter have no need to add anything to it. Use a natural way in your language to show this result relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why we have no reason to say anything more” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result)
 1TH	1	9	nsws	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** is used to emphasize and explain why the writers of this letter do not need to **say anything** [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “Because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	1	9	rd2b	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γὰρ περὶ ἡμῶν ἀπαγγέλλουσιν	1	they themselves report	The writers of the letter use the pronoun **themselves** to emphasize at least two things: (1) These are the same people who heard about the Thessalonians’ gospel message and way of life. (2) The way the writers of this letter know that the Thessalonians’ gospel message and way of life has spread “into every place” is from the **report**. Alternate translation: “Those people who heard about the Thessalonian church tell” or “These same people proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-1TH	1	9	vq7j		αὐτοὶ&ἀπαγγέλλουσιν	1		Alternate translation: “these same people are sending out the message” or “they themselves are proclaiming”
+1TH	1	9	vq7j		αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν	1		Alternate translation: “these same people are sending out the message” or “they themselves are proclaiming”
 1TH	1	9	v145	figs-abstractnouns	ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	what kind of reception we had with you	If your language does not use the abstract noun **reception**, you can express that idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “how readily you received us” or “how enthusiastically you welcomed us” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
 1TH	1	9	xeff	figs-explicit	ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	what kind of reception we had with you	Paul implies that the **kind of reception** they had from the Thessalonians was a good one. If that would not be understood by your readers, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good reception we had from you” or “how gladly you welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	1	9	dkv4	figs-idiom	πῶς ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	you turned to God from the idols to serve the living and true God	Here, the phrase **how you turned** is an idiom that simply refers to the fact that they turned, not to the manner of how they turned. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “that you turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -72,11 +72,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	1	10	cx5g	figs-metaphor	τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης	1		Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were something that could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means by this that in the future an event will happen when God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	intro	kt5l			0		# 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2<br><br>1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)<br>* Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)<br>* Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)<br>* Apostolic witness (2:10–3)<br>2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)<br>* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)<br>* Jewish persecution (2:14b–16)<br>3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>The first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.<br><br>## “We” and “You”<br><br>In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Apostolic witness<br><br>Here, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])<br><br>### The gospel of God<br><br>The foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).<br><br>### The Second Coming of Christ<br><br>In this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19–20](../02/19.md)).
 1TH	2	1	ii5j	grammar-connect-words-phrases	αὐτοὶ γὰρ οἴδατε, ἀδελφοί	1		Here, **For you yourselves know, brothers** functions as a chapter transition into the next topic, the apostles’ suffering. You could emphasize this if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you are fully aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1TH	2	1	gpr4	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ&οἴδατε	1	you yourselves know	The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian church. Paul uses this emphasis to express how well the Thessalonians understand the benefit of the apostles’ previous visit. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you fully realize” or “you personally understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+1TH	2	1	gpr4	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε	1	you yourselves know	The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian church. Paul uses this emphasis to express how well the Thessalonians understand the benefit of the apostles’ previous visit. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you fully realize” or “you personally understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1TH	2	1	tdl3	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Throughout this letter, **brothers** is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See [1:4](../01/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brothers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	1	r14z	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TH	2	1	nwlt	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **our coming** is an abstract noun phrase that refers to the apostles’ previous visit (See “reception” in [1:9](../01/09.md)). If your language does not use abstract noun phrases for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase with a verb form. Alternate translation: “when we visited you” or “when you received us” or “when you welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TH	2	1	g6qq	figs-exclusive	τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν&ὅτι	1	our coming	Here, **our** is exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy–but not to the Thessalonian church (See [1:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “when we apostles came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1TH	2	1	g6qq	figs-exclusive	τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν & ὅτι	1	our coming	Here, **our** is exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy–but not to the Thessalonian church (See [1:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “when we apostles came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	2	1	w584	figs-litotes	οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν	1	has not been in vain	Here, **has not been in vain** is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “has proved quite beneficial” or “has definitely been worthwhile” or “has been very useful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1TH	2	2	h9s8	writing-background		0		This verse provides background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi (See Acts 16–17:1–10; [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 1TH	2	2	w0qu	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις ἐπαρρησιασάμεθα ἐν τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν	1		**But** begins a contrasting clause emphasizing that the coming of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy was **not in vain** [2:1](../02/01.md). The phrase **we were bold** is an emphatic contrast to the normal response one would expect from suffering. Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are able to respond this way because their boldness comes from God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However … God made us confident in how powerful he is” or “Instead … God encouraged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	4	b0yy	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὐχ ὡς ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκοντες, ἀλλὰ Θεῷ	1		Here, the word **but** contrasts **men** and **God**. Paul is indicating that **God** and **men** are different beings. Paul is also expressing the idea that the apostles’ motive for speaking the **gospel** is to please **God**, and not to be **pleasing to men**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “not to flatter people, but to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	2	4	bq9a	figs-metonymy	τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1		The phrase **our hearts** is a metonym for the apostles’ motives, affections, or deepest thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “what we love” or “what we ponder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	2	5	xk2o	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, the phrase **For we did not come at that time** marks a transition where the apostles defend their motives by describing their previous godly conduct. Alternate translation: “Because previously when we came, it was not to flatter you” or “Certainly we never came in order to flatter you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1TH	2	5	u28j	figs-litany	οὔτε&ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας&οὔτε ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας	1		Here, Paul uses a series of negative examples in [2:5–6](../02/05.md) to describe behavior that is not fitting for Christ’s apostles. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” You can use a form in your language to list things that someone should not do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
+1TH	2	5	u28j	figs-litany	οὔτε & ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας & οὔτε ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας	1		Here, Paul uses a series of negative examples in [2:5–6](../02/05.md) to describe behavior that is not fitting for Christ’s apostles. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” You can use a form in your language to list things that someone should not do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
 1TH	2	5	hqih	figs-infostructure	οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν,	1		Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2](../02/02.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “As you are well aware, we did not previously come to flatter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1TH	2	5	q2yh	figs-metaphor	ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας	1		Here, **pretext** expresses the idea of people with greedy motives by comparing them to people wearing a mask or a disguise to cover up their evil intent. If the concept of a masking or disguising would not communicate a covering of true motives, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “disguising greedy intent” or “trying to hide greed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	5	qqia	figs-ellipsis	(Θεὸς μάρτυς)	1		In the phrase **God {is} witness**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “God is our witness!”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -121,11 +121,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	10	re18	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός	1		The apostles are appealing to the Thessalonian church and God to validate their gospel message and personal motives (See also [2:5](../02/05.md)). They speak as if they are summoning both the church and God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “You are our witnesses, as well as God himself” or “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	10	h52a	figs-ellipsis	ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός	1		In this phrase, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TH	2	10	il3e	figs-litany	ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως, ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐγενήθημεν	1	holy, and righteous, and blameless	Paul uses a repetitive series of proofs of the apostles’ godly behavior in [2:10–12](../02/10.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the evidence for which the Thessalonian church and God are evoked as witnesses. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done right. Alternate translation: “just how faithfully and justly and innocently we conducted ourselves toward you believers in God” or “how we acted reverently, and fairly, and blamelessly while visiting the faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
-1TH	2	10	ufdv	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς&ὑμῖν	1	holy, and righteous, and blameless	The pronouns **You** and **you** are plural and refer to all the believers in God at Thessalonica. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “You all … among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+1TH	2	10	ufdv	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν	1	holy, and righteous, and blameless	The pronouns **You** and **you** are plural and refer to all the believers in God at Thessalonica. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “You all … among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1TH	2	11	oug6		καθάπερ οἴδατε ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν	1		Again, Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2,5](../02/02.md)). It is another way of saying “you {are} witnesses” (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Paul is appealing to the Thessalonian church’s own experience of the apostles’ godly behavior to prove their gospel message comes from God (See [2:9](../02/09.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “just as you each and every one of you are well aware” or “just as each one of you experienced for yourself”
 1TH	2	11	i58m	figs-simile	ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ	1	as a father his own children	The point of Paul’s comparison is that the apostles are like fathers who model and instruct in proper behavior for their **children**. They see themselves as spiritual fathers to the Thessalonian church, so they nurture them in the Christian faith like a father would care for the overall well-being of his own children. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like a father nurtures his own children” or “just as a father cares for his own children” or “like a father trains his own children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-1TH	2	12	m91e		παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι&ὑμᾶς	1	exhorting you and encouraging and testifying for you	Paul uses a repetitive series of verb forms to show how the apostles have instructed the Thessalonian church like caring fathers would teach their children. These words are meant to instill a sense of urgency. Alternate translation: “encouraging and building you up and acting as your witness” or “instructing you through appeals, encouragement, and our own personal example”
-1TH	2	12	clhg		παρακαλοῦντες&μαρτυρόμενοι	1		These verbal forms also describe the apostles’ fatherly behavior toward the Thessalonian church. These forms can be expressed in a number of ways: (1) result. Alternate translation: “with the result that we kept exhorting … testifying” (2) means. Alternate translation: “by exhorting … testifying” (3) manner. Alternate translation: “how we kept exhorting … testifying”
+1TH	2	12	m91e		παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι & ὑμᾶς	1	exhorting you and encouraging and testifying for you	Paul uses a repetitive series of verb forms to show how the apostles have instructed the Thessalonian church like caring fathers would teach their children. These words are meant to instill a sense of urgency. Alternate translation: “encouraging and building you up and acting as your witness” or “instructing you through appeals, encouragement, and our own personal example”
+1TH	2	12	clhg		παρακαλοῦντες & μαρτυρόμενοι	1		These verbal forms also describe the apostles’ fatherly behavior toward the Thessalonian church. These forms can be expressed in a number of ways: (1) result. Alternate translation: “with the result that we kept exhorting … testifying” (2) means. Alternate translation: “by exhorting … testifying” (3) manner. Alternate translation: “how we kept exhorting … testifying”
 1TH	2	12	afop	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the apostles’ appeals. He wants the Thessalonian church to live **worthy of God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “that you must honor God by how you live” or “so that you would live how God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1TH	2	12	go6b	figs-possession	εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form **of God** to describe how God’s people should live. Use a natural way in your language to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to live in a way that honors God” or “to live in a way that God honors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	2	12	udek	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν	1		Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live.” If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to habitually live” or “for you to continue to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	13	i39s	figs-events	ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε	1	General Information:	Paul is stressing that it is **the word of God** that the apostles reported. This is why he first mentions that the Thessalonians **received the word of God** before mentioning that they **heard** it. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “that when we told you God’s message, you heard it, and then you accepted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 1TH	2	13	dr6q	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, **that** marks the reasons in [2:13–14](../02/13.md) for why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why people should do things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	2	13	zj5f	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ καθὼς ἀληθῶς ἐστὶν	1	not as the word of man	Paul uses this contrasting clause to strongly negate the idea that the apostles’ message is of human origin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing an emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but in fact what it really is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1TH	2	13	f6ta	figs-metonymy	λόγον ἀνθρώπων&λόγον Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8–9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1TH	2	13	f6ta	figs-metonymy	λόγον ἀνθρώπων & λόγον Θεοῦ	1		Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8–9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	2	13	ci1e	figs-personification	ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	which is also working in you who believe	The apostles refer to God’s gospel message as if it were a person or tool doing work. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God is energizing you faithful ones with this message” or “and God is activating this message among you who trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1TH	2	13	z89g	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1	which is also working in you who believe	Here, the word translated **which** could refer to **God** or **the word**. Alternate translation: “and God” or “and God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1TH	2	13	x7oi	figs-yousingular	ἐν ὑμῖν	1		Here, the pronoun **you** is plural and refers to all the believers in God at Thessalonica (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1TH	2	14	mh8n	writing-background		0	became imitators of the churches	Verses 14–16 provide background information about how the Thessalonian church suffered persecutions similar to the Judean church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 1TH	2	14	xopt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows is the proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “Because” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	2	14	cj05	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1TH	2	14	ij9j		μιμηταὶ ἐγενήθητε&τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1		Here, **imitators** is a noun that can be translated with a verb (See [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “mimicked the churches” or “imitated the churches” or “copied the behavior of the churches”
+1TH	2	14	ij9j		μιμηταὶ ἐγενήθητε & τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1		Here, **imitators** is a noun that can be translated with a verb (See [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “mimicked the churches” or “imitated the churches” or “copied the behavior of the churches”
 1TH	2	14	g0t5	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, Paul speaks of the churches of God **in Christ Jesus** as though they were occupying space inside Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus (See also [1:1](../01/01.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that Thessalonian believers **in Christ Jesus** have with Judean believers **in Christ Jesus** through the Holy Trinity. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	15	a6xd	writing-background	τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων	1		This is the specific content of the background information about the Jewish persecution of Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 1TH	2	15	pgzz	figs-merism	τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων	1		The whole history of the persecution of God’s people is summarized in three parts: the killing of Old Testament prophets, the crucifixion of the Lord Jesus, and persecution of the apostles. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	3	1	amxf	figs-hyperbole	διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες	1	enduring it no longer	This phrase uses extreme exaggeration to express the apostles’ deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church (See [2:17](../02/17.md)). The word translated **enduring** is related to the idea of keeping water out of a ship or trying to contain or holding something back. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that communicates anxious longing. Alternate translation: “Thus, since we could not bear to wait any longer” or “Therefore, because we could not ignore these emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TH	3	1	n47x	figs-explicit	ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι	1	we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone	Here, **we** and **alone** refer to Paul and Silvanus (and perhaps Timothy), since in [3:2](../03/02.md) it says, “we sent Timothy.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Silas and I thought it was good idea to remain alone in Athens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	3	2	q1f7	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	our brother and a servant	What follows the word **and** here is in contrast to Paul and Silvanus staying behind at Athens. Instead, they sent Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “even though this was true,” or “yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1TH	3	2	vsoo	figs-exclusive	ἐπέμψαμεν&ἡμῶν	1	our brother and a servant	When Paul says **we** and **our**, he is exclusively speaking of himself and Silvanus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1TH	3	2	vsoo	figs-exclusive	ἐπέμψαμεν & ἡμῶν	1	our brother and a servant	When Paul says **we** and **our**, he is exclusively speaking of himself and Silvanus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	3	2	d8yy	figs-distinguish	τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	our brother and a servant	This phrase gives us further information about Timothy. It is meant to clarify that he is authorized by the apostles and God himself. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “and we sent Timothy, who is our fellow worker and an authorized servant of God” or “and we sent Timothy. He is our assistant and God’s authorized servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	3	2	yyio	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	our brother and a servant	Here, the metaphors **our brother** and **servant** refer to **Timothy** as a fellow apostle (See [2:6](../02/06.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brother** or **servant** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he assists us and ministers for God in the preaching of the gospel about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	3	2	lkvo	figs-possession	καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	our brother and a servant	Here, **servant of God** could refer to: (1) a servant in general. Alternate translation: “and a minister of God” or “and assistant to God” (2) office of deacon. Alternate translation: “and a deacon of God” or “who also serves God as a deacon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -246,15 +246,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	3	9	pdc5	figs-metaphor	τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν	1	before our God	With the phrase **give back**, Paul speaks of the apostles as if they owe God a debt for the sake of the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Paul means that the apostles cannot adequately express how thankful they are. If your readers would not understand what it means to **give back** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because, how could we possibly show how grateful we are to God for you” or “Indeed, what kind of thanksgiving for you could we give to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	3	9	j6pj	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	before our God	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Since this is a rhetorical question, you could change it to a statement, and begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Because of you, we greatly rejoice when we pray to God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	3	9	u00t	figs-doublet	ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν	1	before our God	Here, **joy** and **rejoice** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy the apostles have because of how faithful the Thessalonian church has been towards God. Alternate translation: “for how much we greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1TH	3	9	p5ka	figs-idiom	χαίρομεν&ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	before our God	Here, **before our God** is an idiom for being in the personal presence of God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we rejoice in the presence of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1TH	3	9	p5ka	figs-idiom	χαίρομεν & ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	before our God	Here, **before our God** is an idiom for being in the personal presence of God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we rejoice in the presence of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	3	10	k71n	figs-hyperbole	νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι	1	earnestly	This emphatic phrase is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how much and often the apostles pray for the Thessalonian church. Paul does not mean to say he never does anything else except pray. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we never stop intensely pleading” or “we continually and fervently pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TH	3	10	eb26	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον	1	to see your face	Here, the phrase **to see your face** is an idiom meaning “visit.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	3	10	s0xz	figs-synecdoche	ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον	1	to see your face	Paul refers to **your face** to mean the whole Thessalonian church. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1TH	3	10	e5fh	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν	1	to see your face	If your language does not use the abstract noun **faith**, you can express the idea behind it in another way (See also [2:17](../02/17.md)). Alternate translation: “and to provide support so that you remain faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TH	3	11	tet9	translate-blessing	δὲ&κατευθύναι	1	General Information:	Here the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+1TH	3	11	tet9	translate-blessing	δὲ & κατευθύναι	1	General Information:	Here the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 1TH	3	11	f3wh	figs-hendiadys	ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν	1	our God and Father … our Lord	Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. This phrase is a hendiadys, since Father further describes God (See also [1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys)
 1TH	3	11	mc2m	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς	1	may our God and Father … direct	Paul uses the word **himself** to distinguish **our God and Father** from **our Lord Jesus**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-1TH	3	11	bql9	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν	1	our God and Father … our Lord	It is possible that these first two uses of **our** are inclusive of the whole Christian Church. Yet, the third use of **our** exclusively refers to the apostles. So, it is most likely that **our** refers exclusively to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy in this whole verse (see also [1:9, 2:1, 3:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1TH	3	11	bql9	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	our God and Father … our Lord	It is possible that these first two uses of **our** are inclusive of the whole Christian Church. Yet, the third use of **our** exclusively refers to the apostles. So, it is most likely that **our** refers exclusively to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy in this whole verse (see also [1:9, 2:1, 3:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	3	11	um1c	figs-metaphor	κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς.	1	may … direct our way to you	Paul speaks about God as if he were a pilot or captain of a ship. Paul means that he wants God to allow the apostles to visit the Thessalonian church again. If your readers would not understand what **direct our way to you** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may … quickly bring us to you” or “may … direct our voyage so that we can visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	3	12	f4ma	figs-doublet	ὑμᾶς δὲ ὁ Κύριος πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι	1	may the Lord make you increase and abound in love	Here, **increase** and **abound** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much the apostles want the Thessalonian church to keep increasing in their love for all people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus make you completely excel” or “O that the Lord Jesus would cause you to fully thrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TH	3	12	o80n	figs-metaphor	τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	may the Lord make you increase and abound in love	Paul speaks of **love** as something that can be quantified or measured. He means that he hopes the Thessalonian church will keep loving people well. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “in the way you love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	7	q4tj	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	God did not call us	Here, **us** is inclusive, referring to the apostles, the Thessalonian church, and by extension, to all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “us believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	4	7	qli0	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ	1	God did not call us	What follows the word **but** is in contrast to **uncleanness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	4	8	mn5y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοιγαροῦν	1	the one rejecting this	The emphatic connecting word **Therefore** is meant to mark the end of this section prohibiting sexual immorality. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “So then” or “As you can be absolutely certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1TH	4	8	gzz8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ ἀθετῶν&ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα	1	rejecting this rejects not man, but God	Here God’s constant giving of the **Holy Spirit** is contrasted with the person who constantly **rejects** the apostolic teaching. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “he who continues to reject … but actually God himself, who continues to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1TH	4	8	gzz8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ ἀθετῶν & ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα	1	rejecting this rejects not man, but God	Here God’s constant giving of the **Holy Spirit** is contrasted with the person who constantly **rejects** the apostolic teaching. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “he who continues to reject … but actually God himself, who continues to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	4	9	uxn8	figs-explicit	περὶ δὲ τῆς φιλαδελφίας	1	brotherly love	This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, related to your question about how to love fellow believers in Christ” or “Now, about your question referring to Christian relationships” or “Now, about your question related to Christian friendships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	9	rpmn	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς φιλαδελφίας	1	brotherly love	If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **brotherly love**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “how to affectionately care for fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TH	4	9	sgen	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν, αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους	1	brotherly love	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because God himself teaches you that you should love each other, you do not need us to write to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -343,13 +343,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	14	j09o	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη	1	if we believe	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he actually means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you could translate their words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “As we certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1TH	4	14	hmw4	figs-explicit	πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη	1	if we believe	Here it is assumed that the Thessalonian church knows the apostolic teaching that **Jesus died and rose again**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we apostles trust―as you already know―that Jesus died and rose again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	14	ybz6	figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν	1	if we believe	Although **we believe** could be inclusive of the Thessalonian church (and by extension all Christians), it is most likely exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. The previous use in [4:11](../04/11.md) and subsequent uses (See “we say” in [4:15](../04/15.md)) are clearly referring to the apostles. Here, it mostly likely is a reference to their authoritative teaching. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1TH	4	14	kmk2	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως&ὁ Θεὸς	1	rose again	This phrase could refer to: (1) result. Alternate translation: “then God” (2) manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God” or “this is how God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1TH	4	14	kmk2	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως & ὁ Θεὸς	1	rose again	This phrase could refer to: (1) result. Alternate translation: “then God” (2) manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God” or “this is how God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	4	14	m1fy	figs-possession	καὶ ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ.	1	rose again	Paul is using the possessive form. Here, **through Jesus** could refer to: (1) being united to Jesus’ resurrection power **through** death. Alternate translation: “God will bring back with Jesus those who are united to him in death” (2) those who God will also bring back again **through** Jesus. Alternate translation: “it is through Jesus that God will also bring back the dead people who are with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	4	14	tjqj	figs-explicit	αὐτῷ	1	rose again	Here Paul implies that **him** refers to **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	15	vvda	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	by the word of the Lord	This clause indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to (See also [1:8](../01/08.md) for **the word of the Lord**). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord Jesus’ message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	4	15	ni3m	figs-metonymy	ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	by the word of the Lord	The phrase **the word of the Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	4	15	gbe1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς	1	by the word of the Lord	Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **the word of the Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1TH	4	15	fdwk	figs-exclusive	λέγομεν&ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες	1	by the word of the Lord	When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we, the ones being alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1TH	4	15	fdwk	figs-exclusive	λέγομεν & ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες	1	by the word of the Lord	When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we, the ones being alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	4	15	hdlr	figs-distinguish	οἱ περιλειπόμενοι	1	by the word of the Lord	This phrase gives us further information about **we, the ones being alive**. It is not making a distinction between **the ones being left behind** and **we, the ones being alive**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and survive” or “and remain here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TH	4	15	b786	figs-idiom	εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	at the coming of the Lord	Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “until the Lord Jesus returns” or “for the Second Coming of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	4	15	xd2y	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας	1	by the word of the Lord	Here, the phrase translated **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement as in the UST. Alternate translation: “will never precede those who are dead” or “are not permitted to come before those who have already died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -400,13 +400,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	5	ddce	figs-doublet	πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους	1	For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day	Here, **sons of the light** means basically the same thing as **sons of the day**. Also, **of the night** means basically the same thing as **of the darkness**. The repetition is used to emphasize how **light** characterizes **day** and how **darkness** characterizes **night**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Certainly, all of you are ready for Christ’s Second Coming. None of us are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TH	5	5	zp3z	figs-metaphor	πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας	1	For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day	Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as if the **light** and **day** were their physical parents. He means that the Thessalonian church members are God’s spiritual children who are characterized by spiritual readiness. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of the light and sons of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is because all of you who belong to God are ready for Christ’s coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	5	ilv4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day	Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church will escape God’s judgment on “the **day** of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TH	5	5	cxo9	figs-nominaladj	πάντες&ὑμεῖς&ἐστε	1	For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day	Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the whole Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “you Thessalonians are all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1TH	5	5	cxo9	figs-nominaladj	πάντες & ὑμεῖς & ἐστε	1	For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day	Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the whole Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “you Thessalonians are all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1TH	5	5	d6fm	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους	1	We are not of the night nor of the darkness	Again, Paul speaks of these people as if they actually live in a place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See [5:4](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the night** or **of the darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We are not unprepared like those at night or those who live in the darkness, ” or “We are not characterized by being spiritually ignorant” or “We do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	5	kq0x	figs-exclusive	ἐσμὲν	1	We are not of the night nor of the darkness	In [5:5–10](../05/05.md), **We** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers in Christ are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	5	5	f4uw	figs-possession	νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους	1	We are not of the night nor of the darkness	Paul is using the possessive form to describe people who are characterized by spiritual ignorance or who live sinfully. This means that they will not be prepared at “**the day** of the Lord.” If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “characterized by being spiritually unprepared and living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	5	6	paqf	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα οὖν	1	we might keep watch and be sober	Here, **so then** emphatically introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	5	6	d2aj	figs-metaphor	μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί	1	we might keep watch and be sober	Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4–5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	5	6	on3d	figs-imperative	μὴ καθεύδωμεν&γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν	1	we might keep watch and be sober	Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** could also refer to: (1) commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+1TH	5	6	on3d	figs-imperative	μὴ καθεύδωμεν & γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν	1	we might keep watch and be sober	Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** could also refer to: (1) commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1TH	5	6	x0zh	figs-nominaladj	οἱ λοιποί	1	we might keep watch and be sober	Paul is using the adjective **the rest** as a noun in order to describe those who are unprepared for Christ’s return. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like others who are not ready for the Lord Jesus to return” or “like the rest of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1TH	5	6	q33e	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	we might not sleep	Here, what follows the word **but** is in contrast to **the rest** who **sleep**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “On the contrary,” or “Instead,” or “Rather,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	5	6	sdww	figs-metaphor	γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν	1	we might not sleep	Here, Paul speaks of Christians as if they are watch guards. He means that they should be aware and be prepared for the Lord’s return by living as God’s people should live. If your readers would not understand what it means to **keep watch** or **be sober** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “instead, we must stay spiritually alert and prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -416,22 +416,22 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	7	s253	figs-metaphor	οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν	1	For those who are sleeping, sleep at night	Here again, like in [5:6](../05/06.md), Paul speaks as if these people are actually sleeping, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or even sinful (See also notes at [5:2,4](../05/02.md)). If your readers would not understand what **sleep** and **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Those who are sleeping are unaware” or “Certainly those who are asleep are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	7	exa8	figs-metaphor	οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν	1	those who are getting drunk, get drunk at night	Paul speaks as if these people are actually drunk, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or sinful. If your readers would not understand what **getting drunk** or **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are drunk are unprepared” or “those who are drunk are unaware” or “those who drink too much alcohol tend to drink at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	8	wh3g	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	we, being of the day	What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to “getting drunk” at “night” in [5:7](../05/07.md). Instead, Christians are characterized by the activities of **the day** and staying **sober** (See [5:5–6](../05/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1TH	5	8	iv63	figs-imperative	ἡμεῖς&νήφωμεν	1	we, being of the day	Here, **should stay sober** could refer to: (1) a command. Alternate translation: “we … must stay sober” (2) an appeal. Alternate translation: “let us … stay sober” (See your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+1TH	5	8	iv63	figs-imperative	ἡμεῖς & νήφωμεν	1	we, being of the day	Here, **should stay sober** could refer to: (1) a command. Alternate translation: “we … must stay sober” (2) an appeal. Alternate translation: “let us … stay sober” (See your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1TH	5	8	jqqo	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες	1	we, being of the day	Paul speaks of Christians as if they are actually a part of the day time. He means that they are characterized by spiritual readiness for the Lord’s return. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Now, because we are ready for Christ’s coming, we” or “Since we are characterized by being ready, we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	8	ev6i	figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας	1	having put on the breastplate of faith and of love	Paul speaks of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10–18,23](../eph/06/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	5	8	l89q	figs-possession	πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης&σωτηρίας	1	having put on the breastplate of faith and of love	Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are characterized by **faith** and **hope** and **love**. You could turn these phrases into similes if it would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1TH	5	8	l89q	figs-possession	πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης & σωτηρίας	1	having put on the breastplate of faith and of love	Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are characterized by **faith** and **hope** and **love**. You could turn these phrases into similes if it would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	5	9	h5y2	figs-abstractnouns	ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν	1		Here, **wrath** refers to God’s future and final Judgment (See your translation of **wrath** at [1:10](../01/10/.md), [2:16](../02/16/.md)). (See also [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)). If your language does not use the abstract noun **wrath**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. “Certainly, God did not destine that he would punish us” or “Indeed, God did not determine that he would judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TH	5	9	lrx6	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should have “the hope of salvation” (See [5:8](../05/08.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TH	5	9	erz5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς&εἰς	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	Here, **to … to** introduces two purpose clauses. Paul is stating the purpose or goal for which God **appointed** the two types of people described in [5:3–8](../05/03.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1TH	5	9	erz5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς & εἰς	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	Here, **to … to** introduces two purpose clauses. Paul is stating the purpose or goal for which God **appointed** the two types of people described in [5:3–8](../05/03.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1TH	5	9	qmo5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to **wrath**. Here Paul emphasizes that God’s true people will not experience his final punishment. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but actually” or “but instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TH	5	9	qfcf	figs-possession	εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	Here, the phrase translated **to obtain salvation** is a possessive form that Paul uses to indicate that **salvation** is something that belongs to God’s people. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for the possessing of salvation” or “for the acquiring of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	5	10	arhm	figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	Here, **the one having died for us** gives us further information about what “salvation through our Lord Jesus Christ” is (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Paul means that God gives the guarantee that Christians will “obtain salvation,” because Jesus **died for us**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who died on our behalf” or “who died for our sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-1TH	5	10	dzq0	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα&ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating why Jesus **died for us**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that … we could live together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1TH	5	10	dzq0	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα & ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating why Jesus **died for us**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that … we could live together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1TH	5	10	w59c	figs-metaphor	εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν	1	whether we might be awake or asleep	Paul speaks of these people as if they were physically **awake or asleep**. He means that they are “alive or dead” (See [4:14–17](../04/14.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **awake or asleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whether we are living or even if we are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	11	r921	grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὸ	1	build up one the other	Here, **Therefore** indicates the conclusion of this section about timing of “the day of the Lord,” and connects to the manner of Christ’s return in [4:14–18](../04/14.md) by again using the same phrase, **comfort one another**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1TH	5	11	o85i	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ παρακαλεῖτε	1	build up one the other	**Therefore** begins a result clause. Paul explains how the Thessalonian church should respond to the fact that Jesus died so that Christians can “obtain salvation” (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Alternate translation: “This is why you should encourage” or “As a result, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	5	11	m2c9	figs-doublet	διὸ παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα	1	build up one the other	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much Paul wants the Thessalonian church to encourage and support each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “As a result, continue to be supportive of what each person needs” or “This is why you must supportively console each other with this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1TH	5	11	hepx	figs-imperative	παρακαλεῖτε&οἰκοδομεῖτε	1	build up one the other	These verbs are imperatives but could communicate an appeal rather than a command. You could use a form in your language that communicates an urgent request or appeal. Alternate translation: “we apostles urge you to comfort … build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+1TH	5	11	hepx	figs-imperative	παρακαλεῖτε & οἰκοδομεῖτε	1	build up one the other	These verbs are imperatives but could communicate an appeal rather than a command. You could use a form in your language that communicates an urgent request or appeal. Alternate translation: “we apostles urge you to comfort … build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1TH	5	11	fx2f	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομεῖτε	1	build up one the other	Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as if they were a building that can be constructed. He means that they should mutually support one another in the Christian life. If your readers would not understand what it means to **build up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “keep supporting” or “continue to confirm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	11	kdae	figs-idiom	εἷς τὸν ἕνα	1	build up one the other	Here, the term **one the one** is an idiom meaning “each and every one” or “each one.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “each one” or “one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	5	11	sfv4		καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε	1	build up one the other	Here Paul uses the emphatic phrase **just as also you are doing** to encourage the Thessalonian church to continue their practice of mutually supporting each other. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “exactly as you have been doing”
@@ -471,10 +471,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	21	jska	figs-ellipsis	τὸ καλὸν	1	Test all things	A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TH	5	22	z9k0	figs-personification	παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ	1	Test all things	Here, **evil** is spoken of as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “anything clearly wicked” or “all that is obviously evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1TH	5	23	mqi7	translate-blessing	αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	Here, the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer (See also [3:11–13](../03/11.md)). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that God himself, who gives peace, would sanctify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-1TH	5	23	ozyh	figs-parallelism	ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως&τηρηθείη	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how much he wants God to preserve the Thessalonian church as his people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “may … fully preserve you as his people to the end, and may every part of you be protected” or “may … completely preserve each and every one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1TH	5	23	ozyh	figs-parallelism	ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως & τηρηθείη	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how much he wants God to preserve the Thessalonian church as his people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “may … fully preserve you as his people to the end, and may every part of you be protected” or “may … completely preserve each and every one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1TH	5	23	sbxc	figs-possession	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	Here Paul uses the possessive form **the God of peace**, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (See Romans 15:33; 16:20; Philippians 4:9; Hebrews 13:20). If this is not clear in your language, you could make it explicit. In this context, **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (2) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (3) Both. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1TH	5	23	nb1x	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize the urgency of the apostles’ prayer or blessing by drawing attention to **God**, who is the only one who can sanctify and keep the Christian person blameless. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-1TH	5	23	vkhs	figs-activepassive	ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως&τηρηθείη.	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **be kept** with an active form, and you could emphasize who did the action. Alternate translation: “may God keep you completely blameless” or “may God make your whole life sinless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1TH	5	23	vkhs	figs-activepassive	ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως & τηρηθείη.	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **be kept** with an active form, and you could emphasize who did the action. Alternate translation: “may God keep you completely blameless” or “may God make your whole life sinless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TH	5	23	s36k	figs-merism	ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	Paul speaks, using these three aspects of the human person in order to represent the whole human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your whole being” or “your whole life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 1TH	5	23	nyma	figs-idiom	ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly	Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:15](../04/15.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” in [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth again” or “at the arrival of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	5	24	i03k	grammar-connect-logic-result	πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει	1	who will also do it	Here, **who will also do it** expresses the result of God’s faithfulness. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Because God is faithful, he will also preserve you sanctified” or “Since God is trustworthy, he will also completely sanctify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv
index ea22b9d1be..7cc990d05d 100644
--- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv
@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	2	g6rb	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Grace to you	Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 2TH	1	2	bv9m	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	1	3	o6v9	checking/headings		0	General Information:	In verses 3–12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
-2TH	1	3	m6z5		εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν&πάντοτε	1	General Information:	Paul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
+2TH	1	3	m6z5		εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε	1	General Information:	Paul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
 2TH	1	3	ea59	figs-hyperbole	εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε	1	We ought always to give thanks to God	Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TH	1	3	o01t	figs-explicit	εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί	1		If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	1	3	h6t9	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-2TH	1	3	ezaf	writing-pronouns	καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν	1		If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “&is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2TH	1	3	ezaf	writing-pronouns	καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν	1		If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “ & is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TH	1	3	emu9	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	1	3	xy7k	figs-abstractnouns	πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	the love of each one of you all for one another is increasing	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “each of you sincerely loves one another more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	1	3	bmn6	figs-rpronouns	ἀλλήλους	1	one another	Here, **one another** means fellow believers. Alternate translation: “each other” or “each believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	6	cxx1	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ	1	if indeed it is righteous for God	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2TH	1	6	id3i	figs-metaphor	παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν	1	for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you	Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	1	6	zemk	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TH	1	7	hxy2	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὑμῖν&ἄνεσιν	1	and relief to you	The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2TH	1	7	hxy2	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν	1	and relief to you	The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2TH	1	7	l3ht	writing-pronouns	καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1		Here, **you who are being afflicted** refers to the Thessalonian believers, and **us** refers to Paul and his associates. Other people are afflicting both groups because of their faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “and relief to you who are being afflicted just as we are being afflicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2TH	1	7	knbb	figs-abstractnouns	ὑμῖν&ἄνεσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2TH	1	7	knbb	figs-abstractnouns	ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	1	7	bcxy	figs-activepassive	τοῖς θλιβομένοις	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom other people are afflicting” or “from the affliction that others are causing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	1	7	fh5g	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, **at the revealing** is an indication of the time when the suffering believers will have relief from their suffering. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Lord Jesus is revealed” or “when everyone sees the Lord Jesus coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	1	8	p1ie	figs-abstractnouns	διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **vengeance**, you can express this idea in another way. Since this is part of God’s justice, do not use a word that implies that God is doing something illegal or inappropriate. Alternate translation: “punishing the people” or “judging the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -43,12 +43,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	9	qhta	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TH	1	9	htqg	figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2TH	1	9	wmdm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TH	1	10	ugk9	figs-explicit	ὅταν ἔλθῃ&ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ	1	when he comes on that day	Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TH	1	10	ugk9	figs-explicit	ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ	1	when he comes on that day	Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	1	10	bi2u	figs-activepassive	ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν	1	to be glorified by his saints and to be marveled at by all those who have believed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	1	10	wsvb	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι	1		Here, the two verbs **to be glorified**and **to be marveled at** indicate the result of Jesus’ coming, not the purpose. Use a connector here that indicates result. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” or “with the result that his saints will glorify him and all those who have believed will marvel at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2TH	1	10	z1hg		ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν	1		The **saints** and **the ones having believed** are one group of people, not two. If your readers might be confused by this, you could combine these into one phrase. Alternate translation: “with the result that all of his saints, that is, the believers, will glorify him and marvel at him” or “as all of his people glorify him and marvel at him”
 2TH	1	10	e56p	figs-activepassive	ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have believed our witness when we shared it with you” or “when we testified about the saving power of Jesus Christ, you believed what we said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive)
-2TH	1	11	zy14	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὃ	1		Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified&and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+2TH	1	11	zy14	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὃ	1		Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified & and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2TH	1	11	ik19	figs-hyperbole	καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν	1	we also pray always for you	Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TH	1	11	hiv9	figs-explicit	τῆς κλήσεως	1	of your calling	Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to belong to him and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “to appoint you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	1	11	r8gk	figs-abstractnouns	πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει	1	he may fulfill every desire of goodness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -80,14 +80,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	3	tkg9	figs-idiom	ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας	1	the son of destruction	Here, **son of destruction** is an idiom meaning a person who is destined for destruction. Alternate translation: “the one who will be destroyed” or “the one whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TH	2	3	x6p0	figs-events	ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας	1		God will destroy this person some time after the events of verse 4. If it would be clearer in your language, consider moving this phrase to the end of verse 4. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 2TH	2	4	t485	figs-activepassive	πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα	1	everything being called god or an object of worship	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people call God or whatever they worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TH	2	4	sk8t	figs-pastforfuture	αὐτὸν&καθίσαι	1		Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+2TH	2	4	sk8t	figs-pastforfuture	αὐτὸν & καθίσαι	1		Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 2TH	2	4	wj33		ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός	1	showing that he himself is God	Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God”
 2TH	2	5	rsz1	figs-rquestion	οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν	1	Do you not remember … these things?	Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 2TH	2	5	lkk7	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TH	2	6	hph0		καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε	1		There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him”
 2TH	2	6	ask4	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ	1	he is revealed in his time	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	7	faa5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-2TH	2	7	si9i	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας	1	mystery of lawlessness	Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against God’s wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject God’s laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2TH	2	7	si9i	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας	1	mystery of lawlessness	Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against God’s wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject God’s laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	7	fcu7		ὁ κατέχων	1	the one who restrains him	To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back”
 2TH	2	7	bijc	writing-pronouns	γένηται	1		Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TH	2	7	tt88	figs-metaphor	ἐκ μέσου γένηται	1		Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -117,8 +117,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	12	m1cl	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	13	w83a	checking/headings		0	General Information:	Paul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 2TH	2	13	b3hh		δὲ	1	Now	The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
-2TH	2	13	dze5	figs-hyperbole	ἡμεῖς&ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν&πάντοτε	1	we ought always to give thanks	The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-2TH	2	13	m418	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ὀφείλομεν	1	we ought	Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2TH	2	13	dze5	figs-hyperbole	ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε	1	we ought always to give thanks	The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+2TH	2	13	m418	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν	1	we ought	Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2TH	2	13	ia4x	figs-activepassive	ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	brothers having been loved by the Lord	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	13	v15j	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TH	2	13	l7a8	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth	Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -136,8 +136,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	15	jrg4	figs-explicit	δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν	1	whether by word or by our letter	You can make clear the implicit information that **by our letter** refers to what Paul taught to the Thessalonians in an earlier letter (probably 1 Thessalonians). Alternate translation: “by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	2	16	g8m1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 2TH	2	16	njk1	translate-blessing	αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	Paul ends this section with a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “Now may our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” or “We pray that our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-2TH	2	16	yge9	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν&ἡμᾶς	1	our Lord … who loved us and gave us	The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-2TH	2	16	cm54	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς	1	our Lord Jesus Christ himself	Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+2TH	2	16	yge9	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς	1	our Lord … who loved us and gave us	The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2TH	2	16	cm54	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς	1	our Lord Jesus Christ himself	Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 2TH	2	16	h3gk	figs-abstractnouns	δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “always comforts us and has given us good things to hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	16	iirq	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χάριτι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how gracious he is to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	17	x3rr	figs-metonymy	παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι	1	may he comfort and strengthen your hearts	Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -158,13 +158,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	3	3	p91k		τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil”
 2TH	3	4	xk85	figs-nominaladj	πεποίθαμεν δὲ	1	we are confident	The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 2TH	3	4	w79e	figs-metaphor	πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς	1		This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident”
-2TH	3	5	giz4	figs-metonymy	ὁ&Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	may the Lord direct your hearts	Here, **hearts** stands for a person’s thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2TH	3	5	giz4	figs-metonymy	ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	may the Lord direct your hearts	Here, **hearts** stands for a person’s thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TH	3	5	wre3	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ	Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	3	5	dzbn	figs-possession	εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2TH	3	5	ia7x	figs-possession	εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2TH	3	6	mst3	checking/headings		0	General Information:	In verses 6–15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 2TH	3	6	v33v	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-2TH	3	6	x9l8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί&ἀδελφοῦ	1	brothers	Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+2TH	3	6	x9l8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ	1	brothers	Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TH	3	6	y4a9	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TH	3	6	jvw1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	of our Lord	Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2TH	3	6	x2r8	figs-metaphor	ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος	1		Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	3	9	lrjr	figs-abstractnouns	ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **example**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we might show you the right way in order for you” or “we might demonstrate the way to live for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	3	9	z0up		μιμεῖσθαι	1		See how you translated **imitate** in verse 7.
 2TH	3	10	c652	figs-doublenegatives	εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω	1	If anyone is not willing to work, do not even let him eat	You can state this in positive form, if this form is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-2TH	3	11	ey6c	figs-metaphor	τινας περιπατοῦντας&ἀτάκτως	1	some who are walking idly	Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TH	3	11	ey6c	figs-metaphor	τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως	1	some who are walking idly	Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	3	11	iv1z	translate-unknown	ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους	1	but meddling	Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 2TH	3	12	bm6z	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ ἡσυχίας	1	with quietness	Here, **with quietness** is the opposite of meddling. Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other people’s affairs. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a quiet and peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	3	13	jx8t	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δέ	1	But	Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -190,8 +190,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	3	15	idj6	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφόν	1		Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TH	3	16	nef4	checking/headings		0	General Information:	In verses 16–18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 2TH	3	16	z1zs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-2TH	3	16	whb9	translate-blessing	αὐτὸς&ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν	1	may the Lord of peace himself give you	Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-2TH	3	16	zl1s	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης	1	the Lord of peace himself	Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+2TH	3	16	whb9	translate-blessing	αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν	1	may the Lord of peace himself give you	Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+2TH	3	16	zl1s	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης	1	the Lord of peace himself	Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 2TH	3	17	c2cb		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω	1	This greeting is in my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write	Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me because this is how I write”
 2TH	3	17	e3sa	figs-idiom	τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ	1		Here, the phrase **in my own hand** is an idiom meaning “in my own handwriting.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I myself am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TH	3	17	wg3f	figs-explicit	οὕτως γράφω	1	In this manner I write	Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you could know that the letter is from me because this is how I write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv
index 20a51ae02f..b235257f0c 100644
--- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	1	6	se38	figs-metaphor	ἐξετράπησαν εἰς	1	have turned away to	Here, **turned away** means these people have stopped doing what God has commanded. Alternate translation: “are no longer doing what God commands. Instead of that, they just engage in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	7	v28u	figs-explicit	νομοδιδάσκαλοι	1	teachers of the law	Here, **law** refers specifically to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	1	7	kz8x	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μὴ νοοῦντες	1	not understanding	If the contrast is not clear in your language between what these people want to be (teachers of the law) and their ability to do it, you may want to mark the contrast. Alternate translations: “but not understanding” or “and yet they do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-1TI	1	7	t131	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ&μήτε&μήτε	1	not … either … or	Paul uses a triple negative in Greek for emphasis here, “not … neither … nor.” None of these negatives cancel each other to create a positive meaning. Instead, the negative meaning is retained throughout. If your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1TI	1	7	t131	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ & μήτε & μήτε	1	not … either … or	Paul uses a triple negative in Greek for emphasis here, “not … neither … nor.” None of these negatives cancel each other to create a positive meaning. Instead, the negative meaning is retained throughout. If your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1TI	1	7	t132	figs-parallelism	ἃ λέγουσιν, μήτε περὶ τίνων διαβεβαιοῦνται	1	what they are saying or about which they make confident affirmations	These two phrases mean similar things. Paul uses the repetition for emphasis. You do not need to put both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that they say so confidently are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1TI	1	8	d6dz		οἴδαμεν δὲ ὅτι καλὸς ὁ νόμος	1	we know that the law is good	Alternate translations: “we understand that the law is useful” or “we understand that the law is beneficial”
 1TI	1	8	t134	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	we know	In this letter, Paul uses the words **we**, “us,” and “our” to refer either to Timothy and himself, or else to all believers, which would also include the two of them. So generally, these words include the addressee. A note will discuss the one possible exception in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	1	13	rq2m	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἠλεήθην, ὅτι ἀγνοῶν, ἐποίησα ἐν ἀπιστίᾳ	1	I was shown mercy because not knowing, I acted in unfaithfulness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the order of these phrases since the second phrase, “not knowing,” gives the reason for the action that the first phrase, “I was shown mercy,” describes. Alternate translation: “I did not act the way God would have trusted me to act, but that was because I did not know what I was doing, and so Jesus had mercy on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TI	1	13	nv6k	figs-activepassive	ἠλεήθην	1	I was shown mercy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who showed **mercy** to Paul with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “Jesus had mercy on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	1	14	t158		δὲ	1	Indeed	Paul here uses the word **Indeed** to introduce an expanded description of the way Jesus treated him mercifully even though he persecuted the followers of Jesus. This description will help Timothy and the other believers in Ephesus to understand how great the mercy of Jesus is. Alternate translation: “in fact”
-1TI	1	14	c1lg	figs-metaphor	ὑπερεπλεόνασεν&ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	the grace of our Lord overflowed	Paul speaks of the **grace** of Jesus as if it were a liquid that fills a container until it flows over the top. Alternate translation: “Jesus showed me unlimited grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	1	14	c1lg	figs-metaphor	ὑπερεπλεόνασεν & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	the grace of our Lord overflowed	Paul speaks of the **grace** of Jesus as if it were a liquid that fills a container until it flows over the top. Alternate translation: “Jesus showed me unlimited grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	14	z5lv	figs-idiom	μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	with the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus	This could refer to: (1) **faith and love** that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) **faith and love** that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TI	1	15	z48s		πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	This word is trustworthy	In this context, the term **word** refers to an entire statement. Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
 1TI	1	15	rh2r		καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος	1	and worthy of all acceptance	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who does this action. Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it”
@@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	1	18	ijn8	figs-metaphor	ταύτην τὴν παραγγελίαν παρατίθεμαί σοι	1	This command I am placing before you	Paul speaks of his instructions as if he could physically put them in front of Timothy. Alternate translations: “I am entrusting you with this command” or “this is what I am commanding you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	18	b6uq	figs-metaphor	τέκνον	1	child	Paul speaks of his close relationship to Timothy as though they were father and **child**. This shows Paul’s sincere love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul personally led Timothy to trust in Christ, and that would be another reason why Paul considered him to be like his own child. Alternate translation: “you who are like my very own child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	18	y6jg		κατὰ τὰς προαγούσας ἐπὶ σὲ προφητείας	1	in accordance with the earlier prophecies about you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how these prophecies happened and who did this action. Alternate translation: “in agreement with what other believers prophesied about you”
-1TI	1	18	w2ex	figs-metaphor	στρατεύῃ&τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν	1	fight the good fight	Paul speaks about Timothy doing his best for the Lord as if he were a soldier fighting a battle. Alternate translation: “continue to do your best on behalf of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	1	18	w2ex	figs-metaphor	στρατεύῃ & τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν	1	fight the good fight	Paul speaks about Timothy doing his best for the Lord as if he were a soldier fighting a battle. Alternate translation: “continue to do your best on behalf of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	19	jj6k	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχων πίστιν	1	holding faith	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a phrase that uses a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “continue trusting in Jesus” (2) a belief in the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “keep believing the true teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	1	19	ly6q	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθὴν συνείδησιν	1	a good conscience	See how you translated this phrase in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “continuing to choose to do what is right instead of what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TI	1	19	h2wk	figs-metaphor	τινες&περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἐναυάγησαν	1	have shipwrecked regarding the faith	Paul speaks of these people as if they were a ship that had sunk. He means that these people no longer believe in Jesus and no longer live as his followers. You could use this same figure, or a similar one from your culture, if your readers would understand this meaning. Otherwise, you could state as an alternative translation, “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	1	19	h2wk	figs-metaphor	τινες & περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἐναυάγησαν	1	have shipwrecked regarding the faith	Paul speaks of these people as if they were a ship that had sunk. He means that these people no longer believe in Jesus and no longer live as his followers. You could use this same figure, or a similar one from your culture, if your readers would understand this meaning. Otherwise, you could state as an alternative translation, “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	19	dyr6	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ τὴν πίστιν	1	regarding the faith	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith**. Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus (or God). Alternate translation: “their relationship with Jesus” (2) the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TI	1	20	pv7f	translate-names	Ὑμέναιος&Ἀλέξανδρος	1	Hymenaeus … Alexander	**Hymenaeus** and **Alexander** are names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1TI	1	20	pv7f	translate-names	Ὑμέναιος & Ἀλέξανδρος	1	Hymenaeus … Alexander	**Hymenaeus** and **Alexander** are names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1TI	1	20	ty7n	figs-metaphor	οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	whom I have given over to Satan	Paul speaks as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them **to Satan**. If this does not make sense in your language, you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	20	az10	figs-explicit	οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ	1		This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	1	20	s76c	figs-activepassive	ἵνα παιδευθῶσι	1	so that they may be taught	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God may teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	2	1	t183	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TI	2	2	g4va	figs-doublet	ἤρεμον καὶ ἡσύχιον βίον	1	a peaceful and quiet life	The terms **peaceful** and **quiet** mean the same thing. Paul uses them together for emphasis. He wants all believers to be able to live their lives without having trouble with the authorities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “an undisturbed life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TI	2	2	pb58	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι	1	in all godliness and dignity	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **godliness** and **dignity** with phrases that use verbs such as “honor” and “respect.” Alternate translation: “that honors God and that other people will respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TI	2	3	t186	figs-doublet	καλὸν καὶ ἀπόδεκτον ἐνώπιον&Θεοῦ	1	good and acceptable before God	The terms **good** and **acceptable** mean similar things. Paul may be using them together for emphasis. If you think that having both terms in your translation might be confusing for your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “very pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1TI	2	3	t186	figs-doublet	καλὸν καὶ ἀπόδεκτον ἐνώπιον & Θεοῦ	1	good and acceptable before God	The terms **good** and **acceptable** mean similar things. Paul may be using them together for emphasis. If you think that having both terms in your translation might be confusing for your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “very pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TI	2	4	i3ze	figs-activepassive	ὃς πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλει σωθῆναι	1	who desires all men to be saved	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translation: “who wants to save everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	2	4	t188	figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους	1	all men	Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TI	2	4	n26m	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν	1	to come to the knowledge of the truth	Paul speaks of learning the truth about God as if it were a place where people could **come**. Alternate translation: “to know and accept what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	2	7	t201	figs-hendiadys	διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	a teacher of the nations in faith and truth	If this phrase has the second meaning that the previous note discusses, Paul may be using the two terms **faith** and **truth** together to express one idea. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles about the true faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TI	2	8	a841	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1	the men in every place	Here the word **men** refers specifically to males. The term is not generic, since Paul addresses women next. Alternate translations: “the males in all places” or “men everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TI	2	8	unw6	translate-symaction	ἐπαίροντας ὁσίους χεῖρας	1	to pray, lifting up holy hands	It was the customary posture in this culture for people to raise their **hands** while praying. You could translate this in a way that would make that clear. Alternate translation: “reverently lifting up their hands in the customary way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-1TI	2	8	yzg3	figs-synecdoche	προσεύχεσθαι&ἐπαίροντας ὁσίους χεῖρας	1	to pray, lifting up holy hands	Paul describes one part of the person, the **hands**, as holy to indicate that the entire person is to be holy. Alternate translation: “to lift up their hands to pray in holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1TI	2	8	yzg3	figs-synecdoche	προσεύχεσθαι & ἐπαίροντας ὁσίους χεῖρας	1	to pray, lifting up holy hands	Paul describes one part of the person, the **hands**, as holy to indicate that the entire person is to be holy. Alternate translation: “to lift up their hands to pray in holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1TI	2	8	t206	figs-hendiadys	χωρὶς ὀργῆς καὶ διαλογισμοῦ	1	without anger and argument	Here Paul expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **anger** tells what kind of **argument** the men should avoid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “without angry arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TI	2	9	t207	figs-ellipsis	ὡσαύτως	1	likewise	Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “in the same way, I also want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TI	2	9	sw21	translate-unknown	μὴ ἐν πλέγμασιν	1	not in braided hair	During this time, many Roman women braided their hair lavishly to try to make themselves attractive. If your readers would not be familiar with the practice of braiding hair, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translations: “they should not have fancy hairstyles” or “they should not have elaborate hairstyles that attract attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -120,14 +120,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	2	11	gb7a	figs-idiom	ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ	1	in quietness	Paul may be saying that he wants the women to listen rather than to speak. Alternate translation: “by listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TI	2	11	c7sh		ἐν πάσῃ ὑποταγῇ	1	in all submission	Alternate translation: “and submit to the authority of the teacher”
 1TI	2	12	t216		εἶναι ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ	1	to be in quietness	As in [2:11](../02/11.md), Paul may be saying that he wants the women to listen rather than to speak. Alternate translation: “she should listen quietly”
-1TI	2	13	iv31	figs-activepassive	Ἀδὰμ&πρῶτος ἐπλάσθη	1	Adam was formed first	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God created Adam first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1TI	2	13	iv31	figs-activepassive	Ἀδὰμ & πρῶτος ἐπλάσθη	1	Adam was formed first	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God created Adam first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	2	13	v7v6	figs-ellipsis	εἶτα Εὕα	1	then Eve	Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and then God created Eve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TI	2	14	wq5k	figs-activepassive	Ἀδὰμ οὐκ ἠπατήθη	1	Adam was not deceived	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “Adam was not the one whom the serpent deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	2	14	n6td	figs-activepassive	ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἐξαπατηθεῖσα, ἐν παραβάσει γέγονεν	1	but the woman, having been deceived, came into transgression	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “but it was the woman who disobeyed God when the serpent deceived her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	2	14	t221	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν παραβάσει γέγονεν	1	came into transgression	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **transgression** by stating the ideas behind it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “began to sin” or “began to disobey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	2	15	krx4	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Paul uses the word **But** to indicate that this sentence provides a contrast to the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TI	2	15	t222		σωθήσεται	1	she will be saved	Here, **she** likely refers to Eve, mentioned in the preceding verse, and whom Paul describes as “the woman.” Later in the sentence, **they** refers to women in general. To show how Paul shifts the topic from Eve, a representative woman, to all women, the word **she** could be translated here as “women.”
-1TI	2	15	u8iv		σωθήσεται&διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας	1	she will be saved through childbearing	This could mean: (1) people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). Alternate translation: “God will save women as they attend to their families” (3) a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translation: “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child”
+1TI	2	15	u8iv		σωθήσεται & διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας	1	she will be saved through childbearing	This could mean: (1) people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). Alternate translation: “God will save women as they attend to their families” (3) a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translation: “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child”
 1TI	2	15	i0ap	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας	1		If option number 2 from the previous note is correct, then Paul is referring to all of the aspects of motherhood by mentioning the beginning part of it: **childbearing**. Alternate translation: “as they attend to their families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1TI	2	15	n818	figs-activepassive	σωθήσεται	1	she will be saved	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God will save women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	2	15	gh3c		ἐὰν μείνωσιν	1	if they remain	Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living”
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	3	6	q7hu		μὴ νεόφυτον	1	not a new convert	Alternate translations: “not still just learning the faith” or “mature from a long, steady growth in the faith”
 1TI	3	6	t240	figs-explicit	τυφωθεὶς	1	puffed up	Paul is warning that a new convert might become excessively proud if he were given an important leadership position right away. Alternate translation: “becoming proud of himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	3	6	t241	figs-metaphor	τυφωθεὶς	1	puffed up	Paul describes being proud as if it made a person swell in size. Alternate translation: “thinking that he is better than others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TI	3	6	v6f5	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ&εἰς κρίμα ἐμπέσῃ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	so that he may not fall … into the judgment of the devil	Paul describes the experience of being condemned for having done wrong as like falling into a hole. Alternate translation: “and have God condemn him … as he condemned the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	3	6	v6f5	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ & εἰς κρίμα ἐμπέσῃ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	so that he may not fall … into the judgment of the devil	Paul describes the experience of being condemned for having done wrong as like falling into a hole. Alternate translation: “and have God condemn him … as he condemned the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	3	7	si1d	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἔξωθεν	1	those outside	Paul speaks of the church as though it were a place and unbelievers were physically **outside** of it. Alternate translation: “those who are not believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	3	7	qsa6	figs-metaphor	μὴ εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν ἐμπέσῃ	1	so that he may not fall into disgrace	Paul speaks of **disgrace** as if it were a hole that a person could **fall into**. Alternate translation: “so that he does not do anything that would make him ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	3	7	t245	figs-metaphor	παγίδα τοῦ διαβόλου	1	the trap of the devil	Paul speaks of **the devil** tempting someone to sin as if it were a **trap** that could catch a person. Alternate translation: “so that the devil is not able to tempt him to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	3	9	jda1	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ μυστήριον	1	the mystery	Paul uses the abstract noun **mystery** to refer to a truth that had existed for some time but that God was revealing at that moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with a verb such as “reveal.” Alternate translation: “what God has now revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	3	9	rfv7	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως	1	the mystery of the faith	Here, **faith** refers to the content of the **mystery**, that is, the specific things that God has revealed and that followers of Jesus must believe. Alternate translation: “the teachings that God has revealed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	3	9	y91f	figs-metaphor	ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει	1	with a clean conscience	Paul speaks of a person’s sense of right and wrong being **clean**, which means that it assures that person that he has done nothing wrong. Alternate translation: “knowing that they are not doing anything wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TI	3	10	hl1p	figs-activepassive	καὶ οὗτοι&δοκιμαζέσθωσαν πρῶτον	1	let them also be tested first	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would the action. Alternate translations: “the leaders should observe and approve of them first” or “they should first prove themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1TI	3	10	hl1p	figs-activepassive	καὶ οὗτοι & δοκιμαζέσθωσαν πρῶτον	1	let them also be tested first	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would the action. Alternate translations: “the leaders should observe and approve of them first” or “they should first prove themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	3	11	xyc9		γυναῖκας	1	the women	This could mean: (1) deacons’ wives. (2) female deacons.
 1TI	3	11	q5qx		σεμνάς	1	dignified	Alternate translations: “must be people who act properly” or “must be people who are worthy of respect”
 1TI	3	11	a12k		μὴ διαβόλους	1	not slanderers	Alternate translation: “not saying malicious things about other people”
@@ -168,14 +168,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	3	12	wji2		μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἄνδρες	1	husbands of one wife	See how you translated this phrase in [3:2](../03/02.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translations: “not married to more than one woman” or “faithful to their wives”
 1TI	3	12	dv31		τέκνων καλῶς προϊστάμενοι καὶ τῶν ἰδίων οἴκων	1	managing their own children and households well	Alternate translation: “taking proper care of their children and their personal affairs”
 1TI	3	13	rfq2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Paul here uses the word **For** to introduce what the results will be if people with the qualifications he has just described are chosen as church leaders. Alternate translation: “After all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TI	3	13	t259		οἱ&καλῶς διακονήσαντες	1	those having served well	This phrase could refer either to deacons, whom Paul has just discussed, or to overseers as well, as a conclusion to Paul’s entire discussion of church leaders. Alternate translations: “deacons who serve well” or “church leaders who serve well”
-1TI	3	13	cv34		βαθμὸν&καλὸν	1	a good standing	This could mean: (1) an honorable position. (2) a good reputation.
+1TI	3	13	t259		οἱ & καλῶς διακονήσαντες	1	those having served well	This phrase could refer either to deacons, whom Paul has just discussed, or to overseers as well, as a conclusion to Paul’s entire discussion of church leaders. Alternate translations: “deacons who serve well” or “church leaders who serve well”
+1TI	3	13	cv34		βαθμὸν & καλὸν	1	a good standing	This could mean: (1) an honorable position. (2) a good reputation.
 1TI	3	13	m684		καὶ πολλὴν παρρησίαν ἐν πίστει τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	much confidence in the faith that is in Christ Jesus	This could mean: (1) they will speak more confidently to other people about believing in Jesus. (2) they will trust in Jesus with even more confidence.
 1TI	3	14	t262	figs-idiom	ἐν τάχει	1	in quickness	The expression **in quickness** describes Paul’s haste and urgency. Alternate translation: “as soon as I can” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TI	3	14	zzzu	figs-go	ἐλθεῖν	1	to come	In some languages it is more natural to say “go” here, rather than **come**. Alternate translation: “to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1TI	3	15	z9z8		ἐὰν δὲ βραδύνω	1	but if I delay	This phrase does not imply that Paul might choose to take his time rather than hurrying. Alternate translations: “but in case I cannot get there soon” or “but if something prevents me from getting there soon”
 1TI	3	15	p9u4		ἵνα εἰδῇς πῶς δεῖ ἐν οἴκῳ Θεοῦ ἀναστρέφεσθαι	1	so that you may know how one ought to behave in the household of God	Paul speaks of the group of believers as a family because God adopts each believer as a son or daughter through Christ. This could refer to: (1) the believers in general. Alternate translation: “so that you all may know how to conduct yourselves as members of God’s family” (2) Timothy’s behavior in the church. Alternate translation: “so that you may know how to conduct yourself as a member of God’s family”
-1TI	3	15	wzk3	figs-distinguish	οἴκῳ Θεοῦ&ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐκκλησία Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the household of God, which is the church of the living God	This phrase gives us further information about **the household of God**. It is not making a distinction between a household of God that is the church and one that is not the church. Alternate translation: “household of God, by which I mean the community of people who believe in the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1TI	3	15	wzk3	figs-distinguish	οἴκῳ Θεοῦ & ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐκκλησία Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the household of God, which is the church of the living God	This phrase gives us further information about **the household of God**. It is not making a distinction between a household of God that is the church and one that is not the church. Alternate translation: “household of God, by which I mean the community of people who believe in the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 1TI	3	15	cd5r	figs-metaphor	στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα τῆς ἀληθείας	1	a pillar and support of the truth	Paul speaks of the truth as if it were a building and of the community of believers as if they were helping to hold up that building. Alternate translation: “which helps to proclaim God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	3	15	t267	figs-doublet	στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα	1	a pillar and support	The terms **pillar** and **support** mean basically the same thing. They are architectural features that hold up parts of buildings. Paul uses the terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them into an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “which helps promote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TI	3	15	sg64	figs-idiom	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the living God	Alternate translations: “the God who is genuinely alive” or “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -220,9 +220,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	4	6	t304	figs-activepassive	ἐντρεφόμενος τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας ᾗ παρηκολούθηκας	1	being nourished by the words of the faith and of the good teaching that you have followed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expessed in proper teaching, are causing you to trust more strongly in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	4	6	f8vs	figs-metaphor	ἐντρεφόμενος τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας ᾗ παρηκολούθηκας	1	being nourished by the words of the faith and of the good teaching that you have followed	Paul speaks of these statements and teachings as if they could physically feed Timothy and make him strong. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expressed in proper teaching, are causing you to trust more strongly in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	4	6	ny78	figs-metonymy	τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας	1	by the words of the faith and of the good teaching	Paul uses the term **words** to describe the statements of belief and the teachings that explain them, both expressed in words. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expressed in proper teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1TI	4	7	th4i		τοὺς&βεβήλους καὶ γραώδεις μύθους	1	the profane and old-womanish myths	See how you translated **myths** in [1:4](../01/04.md) and **profane** in [1:9](../01/09.md). Alternate translation: “foolish, made-up stories in which nothing is sacred”
+1TI	4	7	th4i		τοὺς & βεβήλους καὶ γραώδεις μύθους	1	the profane and old-womanish myths	See how you translated **myths** in [1:4](../01/04.md) and **profane** in [1:9](../01/09.md). Alternate translation: “foolish, made-up stories in which nothing is sacred”
 1TI	4	7	elk7	figs-idiom	γραώδεις μύθους	1	old-womanish myths	The term **old-womanish** is an idiom that means “silly” or “foolish.” Paul tells Timothy in [5:2](../05/02.md) that he should respect older women as mothers, so Paul’s expression here should be recognized as idiomatic rather than disrespectful. Your language may have a similar expression. Alternate translation: “old wives’ tales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1TI	4	7	sea5	figs-metaphor	γύμναζε&σεαυτὸν πρὸς εὐσέβειαν	1	train yourself for godliness	Paul tells Timothy to work to develop godly character as if he were an athlete improving his physical conditioning. Alternate translation: “diligently practice acting in ways that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	4	7	sea5	figs-metaphor	γύμναζε & σεαυτὸν πρὸς εὐσέβειαν	1	train yourself for godliness	Paul tells Timothy to work to develop godly character as if he were an athlete improving his physical conditioning. Alternate translation: “diligently practice acting in ways that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	4	8	t311	figs-quotemarks	γὰρ	1	for	What follows after the word **for** is a direct quotation of a saying that Paul uses for teaching. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1TI	4	8	i6rh		σωματικὴ γυμνασία	1	bodily training	Alternate translation: “physical exercise”
 1TI	4	8	t313		πρὸς ὀλίγον ἐστὶν ὠφέλιμος	1	is valuable for a little	This could mean: (1) it has some small value. (2) it has value for a little while. (3) it does not have very much value.
@@ -260,14 +260,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	3	qc6s		τὰς ὄντως χήρας	1	real widows	Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
 1TI	5	4	vv64		τέκνα ἢ ἔκγονα	1	children or grandchildren	Here these **children** and **grandchildren** are adults who are able to care for others, not young children.
 1TI	5	4	w38h		πρῶτον	1	first	This could mean one of two things, or possibly both: (1) of all of their religious duties, taking care of their family is the most important one and the one that they should learn to do before anything else. Alternate translation: “as the most basic part of belonging to God’s people” (2) these children and grandchildren should be the first ones to take care of their family members, before the rest of the congregation. Alternate translation: “before the church offers any support”
-1TI	5	4	fnab		μανθανέτωσαν&εὐσεβεῖν	1	let them learn to honor	Here, **learn** means to practice, that is, to learn by doing. Alternate translation: “let them become proficient in honoring”
-1TI	5	4	t344	figs-parallelism	μανθανέτωσαν&τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον εὐσεβεῖν, καὶ ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις	1	let them learn to honor their own household and to make repayment to their forebears	These two phrases may: (1) mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be helpful to your readers. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) have a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1TI	5	4	fnab		μανθανέτωσαν & εὐσεβεῖν	1	let them learn to honor	Here, **learn** means to practice, that is, to learn by doing. Alternate translation: “let them become proficient in honoring”
+1TI	5	4	t344	figs-parallelism	μανθανέτωσαν & τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον εὐσεβεῖν, καὶ ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις	1	let them learn to honor their own household and to make repayment to their forebears	These two phrases may: (1) mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be helpful to your readers. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) have a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1TI	5	4	g5mu	figs-metonymy	τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον	1	their own household	Paul uses this phrase to refer to family members, by association to the way they live in the same house. Alternate translations: “their own family members” or “those living in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TI	5	4	q5c8		ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις	1	make repayment to their forebears	Alternate translation: “let them do good to their mother or grandmother in return for the good things their parents and grandparents gave them”
 1TI	5	4	t347	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	for	Paul uses the term **for** to introduce an additional reason why family members should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TI	5	4	t348	figs-metaphor	τοῦτο&ἐστιν ἀπόδεκτον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this is pleasing before God	Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Alternate translations: “this is pleasing in God’s view” or “this pleases God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TI	5	5	xp1u	figs-hendiadys	ἡ&ὄντως χήρα καὶ μεμονωμένη	1	the genuine and left-alone widow	The two words **genuine** and **left-alone** work together to describe one condition, and they may be combined if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “a widow who is genuinely alone” Or it may be that **left-alone** further defines **genuine**. Alternate translation: “a real widow, that is, one who has no family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-1TI	5	5	ggk0		ἡ&χήρα	1	the … widow	Here, **the … widow** does not refer to any specific widow, but to all widows who meet this description. Alternate translations: “any … widow” or “all … widows”
+1TI	5	4	t348	figs-metaphor	τοῦτο & ἐστιν ἀπόδεκτον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this is pleasing before God	Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Alternate translations: “this is pleasing in God’s view” or “this pleases God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	5	5	xp1u	figs-hendiadys	ἡ & ὄντως χήρα καὶ μεμονωμένη	1	the genuine and left-alone widow	The two words **genuine** and **left-alone** work together to describe one condition, and they may be combined if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “a widow who is genuinely alone” Or it may be that **left-alone** further defines **genuine**. Alternate translation: “a real widow, that is, one who has no family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+1TI	5	5	ggk0		ἡ & χήρα	1	the … widow	Here, **the … widow** does not refer to any specific widow, but to all widows who meet this description. Alternate translations: “any … widow” or “all … widows”
 1TI	5	5	u1lj	figs-ellipsis	προσμένει ταῖς δεήσεσιν καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	continues in requests and prayers	Paul leaves a verb unexpressed here that your language might need to express. Alternate translations: “continues in making requests and prayers” or “continues to make requests and to offer prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TI	5	5	rwp4	figs-hendiadys	ταῖς δεήσεσιν καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	in requests and prayers	The phrase **requests and prayers** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **requests** tells what kind of **prayers** Paul is talking about here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translations: “making requests to God in prayer” or “praying to God for what she needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]).
 1TI	5	5	rb9f	figs-merism	νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας	1	night and day	The words **night** and **day** are used together to mean that she prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that she prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	10	ey6i	figs-nominaladj	θλιβομένοις ἐπήρκεσεν	1	she has relieved the afflicted	Paul is using the adjective **afflicted** as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “she has helped people who were suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1TI	5	10	h96j	figs-hyperbole	παντὶ ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ ἐπηκολούθησεν	1	she has pursued every good work	Paul uses the word **every** here as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “she has done many good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TI	5	11	rv5h		νεωτέρας δὲ χήρας παραιτοῦ	1	But refuse younger widows	Alternate translation: “But do not add the names of widows who are younger than 60 years old to the list of widows”
-1TI	5	11	vqq9	figs-explicit	ὅταν&καταστρηνιάσωσιν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	when they become wanton against Christ	The implication of this phrase is that when a widow accepted a place on the register, she promised to remain unmarried and devote herself to serving other believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when they feel bodily desires that are contrary to their pledge of chastity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TI	5	11	vqq9	figs-explicit	ὅταν & καταστρηνιάσωσιν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	when they become wanton against Christ	The implication of this phrase is that when a widow accepted a place on the register, she promised to remain unmarried and devote herself to serving other believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when they feel bodily desires that are contrary to their pledge of chastity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	5	12	t372		ἔχουσαι κρίμα	1	having judgment	Alternate translation: “and so they incur God’s judgment”
 1TI	5	12	nha7		τὴν πρώτην πίστιν ἠθέτησαν	1	they have broken their first pledge	The term **pledge** here refers to a commitment that the widows made, as the last note to [5:11](../05/11.md) explains, that they would serve the Christian community for the rest of their lives and not remarry if the community would supply their needs. Alternate translations: “they have not kept their prior commitment” or “they have not done what they had previously promised to do”
 1TI	5	13	t4iv		καὶ ἀργαὶ μανθάνουσιν	1	they learn to be lazy ones	Alternate translation: “they also get into the habit of doing nothing”
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	16	y6hf	figs-metaphor	καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία	1	let the church not be weighed down	Paul speaks of the community having to help more people than it is able to help as if it were carrying too much weight on its back. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	5	16	t384	figs-activepassive	καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία	1	let the church not be weighed down	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	5	16	d35m		ὄντως χήραις	1	genuine widows	Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
-1TI	5	17	u93q	figs-activepassive	οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι&ἀξιούσθωσαν	1	The elders having ruled well, let them be considered worthy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “All believers should consider elders who are good leaders to be deserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1TI	5	17	u93q	figs-activepassive	οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι & ἀξιούσθωσαν	1	The elders having ruled well, let them be considered worthy	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “All believers should consider elders who are good leaders to be deserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	5	17	wp9d	figs-abstractnouns	διπλῆς τιμῆς	1	of double honor	Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) the congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) they should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	5	17	t389	figs-hendiadys	ἐν λόγῳ καὶ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	in the word and in teaching	This phrase may be expressing a single idea by using two phrases (which are actually just two words in Greek) connected with **and**. The phrase **in the word** would be identifying the content of the **teaching**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “at teaching from the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TI	5	17	t390	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	the word	Paul may be using the term **word** here to describe the Scriptures, which God inspired people to put into words. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	19	af68	grammar-connect-exceptions	κατηγορίαν μὴ παραδέχου, ἐκτὸς εἰ	1	do not receive an accusation, except if	If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this statement to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only believe that an accusation is true if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
 1TI	5	19	t399	figs-ellipsis	ἐπὶ δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων	1	on two or three witnesses	Here, **on** stands for the concept of “relying on.” You may need to use a more complete phrase in your language. Alternate translations: “you are relying on the testimony of two or three people” or “at least two people give evidence for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TI	5	19	kmy5		δύο ἢ τριῶν	1	two or three	Alternate translations: “at least two” or “two or more”
-1TI	5	20	db63	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον&πάντων	1	before all	Paul uses the expression **before** to mean “in front of.” Alternate translations: “where everyone can see” or “in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	5	20	db63	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον & πάντων	1	before all	Paul uses the expression **before** to mean “in front of.” Alternate translations: “where everyone can see” or “in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	5	20	ql4m	figs-explicit	ἵνα καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ φόβον ἔχωσιν	1	so that the rest also may have fear	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what, by implication, people will be afraid of doing. Alternate translation: “so that other people will be afraid to sin themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	5	20	t404	figs-idiom	φόβον ἔχωσιν	1	may have fear	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TI	5	21	x0zp		διαμαρτύρομαι ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν ἀγγέλων	1	I adjure you, before God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels	By calling on **God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels** as witnesses to what Paul is saying, Paul is making Timothy responsible to God to do what he says. If this is not clear, then put this into the form that your language uses for an oath. Alternate translation: “as God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels are my witnesses, I put you under oath”
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	25	bb2t	figs-doublenegatives	κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the double-negative **not … hidden** in a positive way. Alternate translation: “people will learn about them later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1TI	6	intro	rks4			0		# 1 Timothy 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>In this chapter Paul teaches slaves about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving their masters. This does not mean that he is endorsing slavery as a good thing or as something that God approves of. Instead, Paul is encouraging believers to be godly and content in every situation that they are in. This does not mean that they cannot also work to change those situations.
 1TI	6	1	nm4n	figs-metaphor	ὅσοι εἰσὶν ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι	1	As many slaves as are under the yoke	Paul speaks of people who work as **slaves** as though they were oxen plowing or pulling with a **yoke** around their necks. Alternate translation: “Concerning people who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TI	6	1	ep1l	figs-explicit	ὅσοι εἰσὶν&δοῦλοι	1	as many … as are	The implication in context is that Paul is speaking about believers who are slaves. Alternate translation: “All the believers who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TI	6	1	ep1l	figs-explicit	ὅσοι εἰσὶν & δοῦλοι	1	as many … as are	The implication in context is that Paul is speaking about believers who are slaves. Alternate translation: “All the believers who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	6	1	he2n	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται	1	so that the name of God and the teaching may not be blasphemed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will not insult God’s character or what we believe and teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	6	1	e3ce		ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this negative phrase in a positive way. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will always speak respectfully about God’s character and about the things that we teach”
 1TI	6	1	xb92	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the name of God	Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Alternate translations: “God’s character” or “God’s reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -363,9 +363,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	6	5	t443	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	between men	Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “between people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TI	6	6	q5sq	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between what the false teachers believe about godliness and what is really true about godliness. Alternate translation: “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TI	6	6	ya9z	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ εὐσέβεια μετὰ αὐταρκείας	1	godliness with contentment	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **godliness** and **contentment** by stating the ideas behind them with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “doing what is godly along with being content with what a person has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TI	6	6	o6j4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔστιν&πορισμὸς μέγας	1	is great gain	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gain** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “makes a person very well off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1TI	6	6	o6j4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔστιν & πορισμὸς μέγας	1	is great gain	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gain** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “makes a person very well off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	6	7	t446	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Paul uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for what he said in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “After all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TI	6	7	j6qv	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν&εἰσηνέγκαμεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	we brought nothing into the world	The implication of this phrase is that Paul is speaking about when a person is born. Alternate translation: “brought nothing into the world when we were born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TI	6	7	j6qv	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν & εἰσηνέγκαμεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	we brought nothing into the world	The implication of this phrase is that Paul is speaking about when a person is born. Alternate translation: “brought nothing into the world when we were born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	6	7	t448	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι	1	that	Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and so it is also clear that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1TI	6	7	jlv8	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ ἐξενεγκεῖν τι δυνάμεθα	1	neither are we able to take anything out	The implication of this phrase is that Paul is speaking about when a person dies. Alternate translation: “we can take nothing out of the world when we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	6	8	lbk5	figs-declarative	ἀρκεσθησόμεθα	1	we will be satisfied	Here Paul uses a statement in order to express a moral imperative. Alternate translation: “that should be enough for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
@@ -373,12 +373,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	6	9	ij4j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Now	Paul uses the word **Now** to indicate that he is returning to the topic of those who think being godly will make them wealthy. You can translate the term with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1TI	6	9	pl5d	figs-metaphor	ἐμπίπτουσιν εἰς πειρασμὸν, καὶ παγίδα	1	fall into temptation and a trap	Paul speaks about those who let the **temptation** of money cause them to sin as if they were animals that **fall into** a hole that a hunter is using as **a trap**. Alternate translation: “will encounter more temptation than they can resist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	6	9	gfy7	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐπιθυμίας πολλὰς ἀνοήτους καὶ βλαβεράς	1	and many foolish and harmful desires	This phrase continues the figure of speech from the previous phrase. Paul speaks about these desires if they too were a hole that a hunter was using as a trap. Alternate translation: “and will experience destructive impulses than they cannot overcome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TI	6	9	t456	figs-hendiadys	ἐπιθυμίας&ἀνοήτους καὶ βλαβεράς	1	foolish and harmful desires	Here Paul expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **foolish** tells why these desires are **harmful**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “destructive impulses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+1TI	6	9	t456	figs-hendiadys	ἐπιθυμίας & ἀνοήτους καὶ βλαβεράς	1	foolish and harmful desires	Here Paul expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **foolish** tells why these desires are **harmful**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “destructive impulses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TI	6	9	nc3i	figs-metaphor	αἵτινες βυθίζουσι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους εἰς ὄλεθρον καὶ ἀπώλειαν	1	whatever plunges men into ruin and destruction	This phrase summarizes the character of the temptations and impulses that Paul has just described. He speaks of them as if they could make people drown in deep water. Alternate translation: “which people cannot escape, and such things destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	6	9	t458	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους	1	men	Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1TI	6	9	t459	figs-doublet	ὄλεθρον καὶ ἀπώλειαν	1	ruin and destruction	These two words **ruin** and **destruction** mean very similar things. Paul uses them both to emphasize that this is very bad. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use one term with a word that adds emphasis. Alternate translations: “complete destruction” or “total ruin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TI	6	10	t460	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Paul uses the word **For** to introduce the reasons for what the previous sentence stated. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1TI	6	10	xs9d	figs-metaphor	ῥίζα&πάντων τῶν κακῶν ἐστιν ἡ φιλαργυρία	1	a root of all evils is the love of money	Paul speaks of evil as if it were a plant, and of **the love of money** as if it were the **root** from which that plant grew. Alternate translation: “loving money leads a person to do all kinds of wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TI	6	10	xs9d	figs-metaphor	ῥίζα & πάντων τῶν κακῶν ἐστιν ἡ φιλαργυρία	1	a root of all evils is the love of money	Paul speaks of evil as if it were a plant, and of **the love of money** as if it were the **root** from which that plant grew. Alternate translation: “loving money leads a person to do all kinds of wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	6	10	t462	figs-hyperbole	πάντων τῶν κακῶν	1	of all evils	Paul uses the term **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “of many kinds of wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TI	6	10	j5z9		τινες ὀρεγόμενοι	1	which, some desiring	The reference here is to people **desiring** money, not evil. You could start a new sentence here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some people who want to become rich”
 1TI	6	10	b83v	figs-metaphor	ἀπεπλανήθησαν ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως	1	have been led away from the faith	Paul speaks of the desire for money as if it were an evil guide that intentionally leads people down the wrong path. Alternate translation: “have stopped believing in Jesus because of their desire for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
index 8f821f22b7..c08b7101e0 100644
--- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	1	6	p010	figs-metaphor	τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου	1	the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands	Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	6	s6vb	figs-explicit	τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου	1	the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands	It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	1	7	u8vl	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2TI	1	7	h1z3		οὐ&ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ	1	God did not give us a spirit of fear, but of power, and of love, and of discipline	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
+2TI	1	7	h1z3		οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ	1	God did not give us a spirit of fear, but of power, and of love, and of discipline	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
 2TI	1	7	p011	figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ	1	of power, and of love, and of discipline	Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	1	7	k6g7		σωφρονισμοῦ	1	of discipline	Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
 2TI	1	8	fk9z	figs-metonymy	τὸ μαρτύριον	1	the testimony	Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternate translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	1	15	p018	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	all who are in Asia	The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TI	1	15	p6f4	figs-metaphor	ἀπεστράφησάν με	1	turned away from me	This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	1	15	p020	figs-explicit	ἀπεστράφησάν με	1	turned away from me	Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TI	1	15	x6cc	translate-names	Φύγελος&Ἑρμογένης	1	Phygelus	**Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2TI	1	15	x6cc	translate-names	Φύγελος & Ἑρμογένης	1	Phygelus	**Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	16	izk9	translate-blessing	δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ	1	May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus	Paul is asking God to bless the family of **Onesiphorus**. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 2TI	1	16	e6hl	translate-names	Ὀνησιφόρου	1	of Onesiphorus	**Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	16	zz44	figs-metonymy	τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ	1	to the household of Onesiphorus	The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	4	p028	figs-activepassive	ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις	1	gets entangled in the affairs of life	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	2	4	p029	figs-explicit	τοῦ βίου	1	of life	By **life**, Paul means, in the context of this metaphor, “civilian life.” The implication is that Timothy and all believers should not allow competing concerns to keep them from serving Christ. Alternate translation: “of everyday life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	2	4	d2lg		τῷ στρατολογήσαντι	1	the one who enlisted him	Alternate translation: “his leader” or “the one who commands him”
-2TI	2	5	d483	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν&ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ	1	if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully	To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	5	p031	figs-hypo	ἐὰν&ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ	1	if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully	Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-2TI	2	5	p032		ἐὰν&ἀθλῇ τις	1	if anyone competes	Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event”
+2TI	2	5	d483	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ	1	if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully	To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	5	p031	figs-hypo	ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ	1	if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully	Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+2TI	2	5	p032		ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις	1	if anyone competes	Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event”
 2TI	2	5	xbn6	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ	1	he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the officials will only crown him if he competes by the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 2TI	2	5	p033	figs-activepassive	οὐ στεφανοῦται	1	he is not crowned	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	2	5	p034	figs-explicit	οὐ στεφανοῦται	1	he is not crowned	Paul assumes that Timothy will know that in this culture crowning indicated the winner of a competition. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him as the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -128,13 +128,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	11	p044		πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	This word is trustworthy	You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement”
 2TI	2	11	p045	figs-quotemarks	πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	This word is trustworthy	Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 2TI	2	11	g6e4	writing-poetry	εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν	1	For if we died with him, we will also live with him	This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
-2TI	2	11	in38	figs-metaphor	εἰ&συναπεθάνομεν	1	if we died with him	Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	11	in38	figs-metaphor	εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν	1	if we died with him	Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	11	p046		καὶ συνζήσομεν	1	we will also live with him	Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
 2TI	2	12	p048		εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα	1	if we deny him	Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
 2TI	2	12	p049		κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς	1	he also will deny us	In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
 2TI	2	13	ke4w		εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν	1	if we are unfaithful	Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
 2TI	2	13	p050	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει	1	he remains faithful	This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TI	2	13	ihd4		ἀρνήσασθαι&ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται	1	he is not able to deny himself	Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
+2TI	2	13	ihd4		ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται	1	he is not able to deny himself	Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
 2TI	2	14	u661		ὑπομίμνῃσκε	1	Remind them	The word **{them}**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
 2TI	2	14	p051	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	14	r5lq	figs-explicit	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	15	xgz9	figs-metaphor	ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας	1	cutting the word of truth straight	Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	15	p052	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the word of truth	Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	15	p053	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the word of truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TI	2	16	e27q	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ πλεῖον&προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας	1	they will advance into greater ungodliness	Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	16	e27q	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας	1	they will advance into greater ungodliness	Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	17	i73t	figs-simile	ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει	1	their word will have a spreading like gangrene	This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 2TI	2	17	p054	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν	1	their word	Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	17	p055	translate-unknown	ὡς γάγγραινα	1	like gangrene	“Gangrene” is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	18	p057	figs-abstractnouns	οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν	1	who have missed the mark regarding the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	2	18	pu22	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι	1	the resurrection has already happened	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	2	18	ura5	figs-metaphor	ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν	1	who are destroying the faith of some	Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	19	ir1z	figs-metaphor	ὁ&στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν	1	the firm foundation of God stands	Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	19	ir1z	figs-metaphor	ὁ & στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν	1	the firm foundation of God stands	Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	19	p058	figs-metonymy	ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην	1	having this seal	Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	19	p059	figs-quotemarks	ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην	1	having this seal	Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 2TI	2	19	nd7t	figs-idiom	ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	who names the name of the Lord	The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -174,19 +174,19 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	21	nl5d	figs-metaphor	ἡγιασμένον	1	having been sanctified	If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	21	p064	figs-metaphor	εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ	1	useful to the Master	In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	21	p065	figs-activepassive	εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον	1	having been prepared for every good work	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TI	2	22	h9p6	figs-metaphor	τὰς&νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε	1	flee youthful lusts	Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	22	p066	figs-metonymy	τὰς&νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε	1	flee youthful lusts	Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2TI	2	22	h9p6	figs-metaphor	τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε	1	flee youthful lusts	Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	22	p066	figs-metonymy	τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε	1	flee youthful lusts	Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	22	srb7	figs-metaphor	δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην	1	and pursue righteousness, faith, love, and peace	Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	22	p067	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην	1	righteousness, faith, love, and peace	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	2	22	hg99		μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας	1	with those who call on the Lord from a clean heart	This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions”
 2TI	2	22	gl3q	figs-idiom	τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον	1	those who call on the Lord	The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TI	2	22	p068	figs-metonymy	ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας	1	from a clean heart	Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	22	b2ti	figs-metaphor	ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας	1	from a clean heart	Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	23	tmf7	figs-metonymy	τὰς&μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ	1	avoid foolish and ignorant questions	Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2TI	2	23	tmf7	figs-metonymy	τὰς & μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ	1	avoid foolish and ignorant questions	Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	2	23	p069	figs-doublet	μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις	1	foolish and ignorant questions	Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2TI	2	23	kh6p	figs-metaphor	γεννῶσι μάχας	1	they give birth to battles	Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	23	p070	figs-metaphor	μάχας	1	battles	Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	2	24	p071	figs-metaphor	δοῦλον&Κυρίου	1	the slave of the Lord	Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	2	24	p071	figs-metaphor	δοῦλον & Κυρίου	1	the slave of the Lord	Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	24	p072	figs-metaphor	οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι	1	must not battle	Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	25	un9l	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πραΰτητι	1	in meekness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	2	25	u6rp		παιδεύοντα	1	educating	Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting”
@@ -230,9 +230,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	3	8	sppy	figs-explicit	ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here and say who does not approve of these men. Alternate translation: “God does approve of these men because they do not have a genuine faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	3	9	x9kx	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’	1	But	The word **But** indicates a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	3	9	c6xx	figs-metaphor	οὐ προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ πλεῖον	1	they will not advance unto more	Paul uses an expression about physical movement to mean that the false teachers will not continue to have much success among the believers. Alternate translation: “they will not be able to continue teaching falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	3	9	mv4j	figs-hyperbole	ἡ&ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν	1	their foolishness will be obvious to all	The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+2TI	3	9	mv4j	figs-hyperbole	ἡ & ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν	1	their foolishness will be obvious to all	The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TI	3	9	z4fu	figs-nominaladj	ἐκείνων	1	of those	The term **those** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to Jannes and Jambres. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can supply the names of the two men. Alternate translation: “of Jannes and Jambres” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-2TI	3	10	vw42	figs-metaphor	σὺ&παρηκολούθησάς	1	you have followed	Paul speaks of giving close attention to the things he lists in this verse as if one were physically following them as they moved. The idea is that Timothy is giving close attention to these things and imitating them. Alternate translation: “you have observed” or “you have paid close attention to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	3	10	vw42	figs-metaphor	σὺ & παρηκολούθησάς	1	you have followed	Paul speaks of giving close attention to the things he lists in this verse as if one were physically following them as they moved. The idea is that Timothy is giving close attention to these things and imitating them. Alternate translation: “you have observed” or “you have paid close attention to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	3	10	wma6	figs-abstractnouns	μου τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	my teaching	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **teaching** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I have taught others to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	3	10	lq3v	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀγωγῇ	1	conduct	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **conduct** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I live my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TI	3	10	p088	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ προθέσει	1	purpose	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **purpose** with a verbal clause. Alternate translation: “what I try to do with my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	3	12	ke7f		ζῆν εὐσεβῶς	1	to live piously	The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way”
 2TI	3	12	xm9l	figs-activepassive	διωχθήσονται	1	will be persecuted	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “people will persecute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	3	13	p094	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωποι	1	men	Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that can include both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-2TI	3	13	xo4q	figs-hendiadys	πονηροὶ&ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες	1	evil men and impostors	This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+2TI	3	13	xo4q	figs-hendiadys	πονηροὶ & ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες	1	evil men and impostors	This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2TI	3	13	s7f2		γόητες	1	impostors	The term **impostors** refers here to a person who wants other people to think he is a true Christian when he is not. Alternate translation: “people who are pretending to be believers”
 2TI	3	13	imc8	figs-metaphor	προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον	1	will advance unto the worse	Paul speaks of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	3	13	p095	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον	1	unto the worse	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	2	p102	figs-hendiadys	ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ	1	with all patience and teaching	Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2TI	4	2	g5r0	figs-explicit	ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ	1	with all patience and teaching	The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	4	2	p103	figs-hyperbole	ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ	1	with all patience and teaching	Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-2TI	4	3	jv7a		ἔσται&καιρὸς ὅτε	1	there will be a time when	Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
+2TI	4	3	jv7a		ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε	1	there will be a time when	Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
 2TI	4	3	u2cc		οὐκ ἀνέξονται	1	they will not endure	Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
 2TI	4	3	ilx7	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἀνέξονται	1	they will not endure	The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	4	3	fyl3	figs-metonymy	τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας	1	healthy teaching	The expression **healthy teaching** means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -287,13 +287,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	3	p104	figs-metonymy	κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν	1	their ear itching	Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	4	4	rh2i	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν	1	will both turn their ear away from the truth	Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	4	4	p105	figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν	1	will both turn their ear away from the truth	Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-2TI	4	4	xrv7	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ&τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται	1	be turned aside to myths	Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	4	4	p106	figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ&τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται	1	be turned aside to myths	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TI	4	4	xrv7	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται	1	be turned aside to myths	Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	4	4	p106	figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται	1	be turned aside to myths	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	4	5	ehz7	figs-metaphor	νῆφε	1	be sober	Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to **be sober** rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	4	5	tv3k		εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	of an evangelist	Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus”
-2TI	4	6	p107		ἐγὼ&ἤδη σπένδομαι	1	I am already being poured out	While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out”
-2TI	4	6	sh23	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ&ἤδη σπένδομαι	1	I am already being poured out	Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	4	6	p108	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ&ἤδη σπένδομαι	1	I am already being poured out	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TI	4	6	p107		ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι	1	I am already being poured out	While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out”
+2TI	4	6	sh23	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι	1	I am already being poured out	Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	4	6	p108	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι	1	I am already being poured out	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	4	6	fb7l	figs-euphemism	ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν	1	the time of my departure is here	Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 2TI	4	7	d9ts	figs-metaphor	τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι	1	I have fought the good fight	Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	4	7	kq83	figs-metaphor	τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα	1	I have finished the race	Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a **race** on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -304,11 +304,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	8	n3k8	figs-explicit	ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	on that day	As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	4	8	uh88		πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ	1	those who have loved his appearing	Alternate translation: “to all those who are looking forward to his return”
 2TI	4	8	p109	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ	1	his appearing	See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-2TI	4	9	t8b7		σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν&ταχέως	1	come … quickly	Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible”
-2TI	4	10	e4xx	translate-names	Δημᾶς&Κρήσκης&Τίτος	1	Demas … Crescens … Titus	**Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2TI	4	9	t8b7		σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν & ταχέως	1	come … quickly	Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible”
+2TI	4	10	e4xx	translate-names	Δημᾶς & Κρήσκης & Τίτος	1	Demas … Crescens … Titus	**Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	10	ji2l	figs-metonymy	τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα	1	the present age	The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	4	10	u2qb	figs-ellipsis	Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν	1	Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia	Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2TI	4	10	gs61	translate-names	Γαλατίαν&Δαλματίαν	1	Galatia … Dalmatia	This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2TI	4	10	gs61	translate-names	Γαλατίαν & Δαλματίαν	1	Galatia … Dalmatia	This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	11	w21u		μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν	1	he is useful to me for service	This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry”
 2TI	4	12	y60r		ἀπέστειλα	1	I sent	Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending”
 2TI	4	13	d5rw	translate-unknown	φελόνην	1	cloak	The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	16	v847		ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ	1	At my first defense	Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions”
 2TI	4	16	f2c3		οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο	1	no one appeared with me	Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
 2TI	4	16	rm2t	figs-activepassive	μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη	1	May it not be counted against them	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TI	4	17	t1fw	figs-metaphor	ὁ&Κύριός μοι παρέστη	1	the Lord stood with me	Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TI	4	17	t1fw	figs-metaphor	ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη	1	the Lord stood with me	Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	4	17	y69m	figs-activepassive	ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ	1	so that through me, the proclamation might be fully carried out	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	4	17	p113	figs-hyperbole	καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	and all the Gentiles might hear	Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TI	4	17	gsr8	figs-metaphor	ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος	1	I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion	Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	4	18	p115	figs-idiom	εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων	1	to the ages of the ages	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TI	4	19	n4zc	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον	1	the household of Onesiphorus	See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TI	4	19	mef8	translate-names	Ὀνησιφόρου	1	of Onesiphorus	**Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-2TI	4	20	lie9	translate-names	Ἔραστος&Τρόφιμον	1	Erastus … Trophimus	**Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2TI	4	20	lie9	translate-names	Ἔραστος & Τρόφιμον	1	Erastus … Trophimus	**Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	20	wp9h	translate-names	Μιλήτῳ	1	Miletus	**Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-2TI	4	21	cvc7		σπούδασον&ἐλθεῖν	1	Hasten to come	Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”
+2TI	4	21	cvc7		σπούδασον & ἐλθεῖν	1	Hasten to come	Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”
 2TI	4	21	eh95	figs-explicit	πρὸ χειμῶνος	1	before winter	The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If **winter** is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	4	21	z1j9	figs-ellipsis	ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Eubulus greets you, and Pudens, and Linus, and Claudia, and the brothers	Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2TI	4	21	p7px	translate-names	Εὔβουλος&Πούδης&Λίνος	1	Eubulus … Pudens … Linus	**Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2TI	4	21	p7px	translate-names	Εὔβουλος & Πούδης & Λίνος	1	Eubulus … Pudens … Linus	**Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	21	er77	translate-names	Κλαυδία	1	Claudia	**Claudia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	4	21	mk26	figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TI	4	22	tx26	figs-you	ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου	1	The Lord be with your spirit	Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv
index 6593c3fdf3..5c07ed80e5 100644
--- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ TIT	1	1	fyf8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κατ’ εὐσέβειαν	1	that agr
 TIT	1	2	xyz9		ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	with the certain hope of everlasting life	Alternate translation: “that gives us the certain hope of everlasting life” or “based on our certain hope for everlasting life”
 TIT	1	2	r2gj		πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων	1	before all the ages of time	Alternate translation: “before time began”
 TIT	1	3	b22h		καιροῖς ἰδίοις	1	at the right time	Alternate translation: “at the proper time”
-TIT	1	3	swi9	figs-metaphor	ἐφανέρωσεν&τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	he revealed his word	Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “he caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	3	swi9	figs-metaphor	ἐφανέρωσεν & τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	he revealed his word	Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “he caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 TIT	1	3	abc9		ἐν κηρύγματι	1	by the proclamation	Alternate translation: “through the proclamation of the message”
 TIT	1	3	m41u	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ	1	that I was entrusted with	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 TIT	1	3	dpn4		τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	of God our Savior	Alternate translation: “of God, who saves us”
@@ -21,20 +21,20 @@ TIT	1	4	xy17	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus,
 TIT	1	5	ew8h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τούτου χάριν	1	For this purpose	The connecting phrase **For this purpose** introduces the goal that Paul wanted to accomplish when he left Titus in Crete (to ordain elders in the church). Alternate translation: “This is the reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 TIT	1	5	lh9b		ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ	1	I left you in Crete	Alternate translation: “I told you to stay in Crete”
 TIT	1	5	ga62		ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ	1	that you might set in order things not yet complete	Alternate translation: “so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done”
-TIT	1	5	b52u		καταστήσῃς&πρεσβυτέρους	1	ordain elders	Alternate translation: “appoint elders” or “designate elders”
+TIT	1	5	b52u		καταστήσῃς & πρεσβυτέρους	1	ordain elders	Alternate translation: “appoint elders” or “designate elders”
 TIT	1	5	p56w		πρεσβυτέρους	1	elders	In the early Christian churches, Christian **elders** gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith.
 TIT	1	6	wja4			0	Connecting Statement:	Having told Titus to ordain elders in every city on the island of Crete, Paul then gives the requirements for elders.
 TIT	1	6	jen8		εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος	1	if anyone is blameless	This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “an elder must be without blame” or “an elder must not have a bad reputation”
 TIT	1	6	ab70	figs-doublenegatives	ἀνέγκλητος	1	blameless	To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “without blame” You can state this positively: “a person who has a good reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 TIT	1	6	q6uy	figs-explicit	μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ	1	the husband of one wife	This means that he has only **one wife**; that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-TIT	1	6	wd6q		τέκνα&πιστά	1	faithful children	This could refer to: (1) children who believe in Jesus. (2) children who are trustworthy.
+TIT	1	6	wd6q		τέκνα & πιστά	1	faithful children	This could refer to: (1) children who believe in Jesus. (2) children who are trustworthy.
 TIT	1	7	lz7x		τὸν ἐπίσκοπον	1	the overseer	The word **overseer** is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church.
 TIT	1	7	g2zf	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον	1	the household manager of God	Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s **household**, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 TIT	1	7	d6l1		μὴ πάροινον	1	not addicted to wine	Alternate translation: “not an alcoholic” or “not one who drinks much wine”
 TIT	1	7	j1qq		μὴ πλήκτην	1	not a brawler	Alternate translation: “not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight”
 TIT	1	8	i549	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Instead	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the things an elder is not to be (that Paul already stated), and the things an elder is to be (which Paul is about to state). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 TIT	1	8	vkq1		φιλάγαθον	1	a friend of what is good	Alternate translation: “a person who loves to do good”
-TIT	1	8	xy11	figs-doublet	σώφρονα&ἐγκρατῆ	1	sensible … and self-controlled	The terms **sensible** and **self-controlled** are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	1	8	xy11	figs-doublet	σώφρονα & ἐγκρατῆ	1	sensible … and self-controlled	The terms **sensible** and **self-controlled** are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 TIT	1	8	xy12	figs-doublet	δίκαιον, ὅσιον	1	righteous, holy	The terms **righteous** and **holy** are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 TIT	1	9	xwy6	figs-metaphor	ἀντεχόμενον	1	He must hold tightly to	Paul speaks of devotion to the Christian faith as if it were grasping the faith with one’s hands. Alternate translation: “He must be devoted to” or “He should know well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 TIT	1	9	xy10		κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν	1	that is in accordance with the teaching	Alternate translation: “that agrees with the things that we taught him”
@@ -64,16 +64,16 @@ TIT	1	14	m4a5	figs-metaphor	ἀποστρεφομένων τὴν ἀλήθει
 TIT	1	15	qtb9		πάντα καθαρὰ τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	All things are pure to those who are pure	Alternate translation: “If people are pure on the inside, everything that they do will be pure” or “When people have only good thoughts, nothing that they do will offend God”
 TIT	1	15	nx42		τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	to those who are pure	Alternate translation: “to those who are acceptable to God”
 TIT	1	15	abcn	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast between people who are pure and people who are corrupt and unbelieving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	1	15	n3wk	figs-metaphor	τοῖς&μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπίστοις, οὐδὲν καθαρόν	2	to those who are corrupt and unbelieving, nothing is pure	Paul speaks of sinners as if they were physically dirty. Alternate translation: “if people are morally defiled and do not believe, they cannot do anything pure” or “when people are full of sin and unbelief, nothing that they do is acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	15	n3wk	figs-metaphor	τοῖς & μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπίστοις, οὐδὲν καθαρόν	2	to those who are corrupt and unbelieving, nothing is pure	Paul speaks of sinners as if they were physically dirty. Alternate translation: “if people are morally defiled and do not believe, they cannot do anything pure” or “when people are full of sin and unbelief, nothing that they do is acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 TIT	1	16	abco	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast between what these corrupt people say (they know God) and what their actions show (they do not know God). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	1	16	i3l2		τοῖς&ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται	1	they deny him by their actions	Alternate translation: “how they live proves that they do not know him”
+TIT	1	16	i3l2		τοῖς & ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται	1	they deny him by their actions	Alternate translation: “how they live proves that they do not know him”
 TIT	1	16	ja47		βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες	1	They are detestable	Alternate translation: “They are disgusting”
 TIT	2	intro	h3il			0		# Titus 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gender roles<br><br>Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation.
 TIT	2	1	lfu1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God’s word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers.
 TIT	2	1	tpi2	figs-explicit	σὺ δὲ	1	But you	Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you could include the name “Titus” here, as in the UST. ([[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 TIT	2	1	ph2j		τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	with sound teaching	See the note about **sound teaching** on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings”
-TIT	2	2	xyz3	figs-ellipsis	πρεσβύτας&εἶναι	1	Older men are to be	The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We could supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-TIT	2	2	xy13	figs-doublet	νηφαλίους&σεμνούς, σώφρονας	1	temperate, dignified, sensible	These three words are very close in meaning and may be combined into one or two terms if the target language does not have three separate terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	2	2	xyz3	figs-ellipsis	πρεσβύτας & εἶναι	1	Older men are to be	The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We could supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+TIT	2	2	xy13	figs-doublet	νηφαλίους & σεμνούς, σώφρονας	1	temperate, dignified, sensible	These three words are very close in meaning and may be combined into one or two terms if the target language does not have three separate terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 TIT	2	2	xc6t		νηφαλίους	1	temperate	Alternate translation: “sober-minded” or “self-controlled”
 TIT	2	2	y3j2		σώφρονας	1	to be … sensible	Alternate translation: “in control of their desires”
 TIT	2	2	abc1		ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει	1	sound in faith	Here the word **sound** means to be firm and unwavering. See the note about **sound** on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1) and the note about **sound in faith** on [Titus 1:13](../01/13/je3r).
@@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ TIT	2	10	f8jy		τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος 
 TIT	2	10	pn93		Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	God our Savior	Alternate translation: “our God who saves us”
 TIT	2	10	xy16	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 TIT	2	11	y44u			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul encourages Titus to look for Jesus’ coming and remember his authority through Jesus.
-TIT	2	11	gp2z	figs-personification	ἐπεφάνη&ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the grace of God has appeared	Paul speaks of **the grace of God** as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+TIT	2	11	gp2z	figs-personification	ἐπεφάνη & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the grace of God has appeared	Paul speaks of **the grace of God** as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 TIT	2	12	qy8k	figs-personification	παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς	1	training us	Paul speaks of the grace of God (2:11) as if it were a person who trains other people how to live holy lives. Alternate translation: “by which God trains us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 TIT	2	12	abce	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	Here, **us** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 TIT	2	12	lxb3		τὴν ἀσέβειαν	1	godlessness	Alternate translation: “things that dishonor God”
 TIT	2	12	n3k5		τὰς κοσμικὰς ἐπιθυμίας	1	worldly passions	Alternate translation: “strong desires for the things of this world” or “strong desires for sinful pleasures”
-TIT	2	12	xy19		ἀσέβειαν&εὐσεβῶς	1	godlessness … godly way	These terms are direct opposites, meaning “God-dishonoring” and “God-honoring,” respectively.
+TIT	2	12	xy19		ἀσέβειαν & εὐσεβῶς	1	godlessness … godly way	These terms are direct opposites, meaning “God-dishonoring” and “God-honoring,” respectively.
 TIT	2	12	fk8j		ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι	1	in the present age	Alternate translation: “while we live in this world” or “during this time”
 TIT	2	13	rz93		προσδεχόμενοι	1	while we look forward to receiving	Alternate translation: “while we wait to welcome”
 TIT	2	13	xyz6	figs-metonymy	τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα	1	the blessed hope	Here, what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ TIT	2	15	xy22	figs-doublenegatives	μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω
 TIT	2	15	jbu1	figs-explicit	σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let … disregard you	The way that people would disregard Titus can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Let … refuse to listen to your words” or “Let … refuse to respect you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 TIT	3	intro	zh6x			0		# Titus 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul gives Titus personal instructions in this chapter.<br><br>Verse 15 formally concludes this letter. This is a common way of ending a letter in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogies<br><br>Genealogies (verse 9) are lists that record a person’s ancestors or descendants, and show from what tribe and family a person came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron. Some of these lists included stories of ancestors and even of spiritual beings. These lists and stories were used to argue about where things came from and about how important various people were.
 TIT	3	1	y9tr			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete.
-TIT	3	1	j2sa		ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς&ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Remind them to submit	Alternate translation: “Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit”
+TIT	3	1	j2sa		ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς & ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Remind them to submit	Alternate translation: “Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit”
 TIT	3	1	w3fy		ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	to submit to rulers and authorities, to obey them	Alternate translation: “to do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them”
 TIT	3	1	wa9x	figs-doublet	ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις	1	to rulers and authorities	The words **rulers** and **authorities** have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 TIT	3	1	xy25	figs-doublet	ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	to submit … to obey them	The words **submit** and **obey** have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -142,15 +142,15 @@ TIT	3	2	abcx	figs-doublenegatives	ἀμάχους εἶναι	1	to be uncontenti
 TIT	3	3	m9zd		ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	For once we also were	Alternate translation: “This is because we ourselves were once”
 TIT	3	3	me7b		ποτε	1	once	Alternate translation: “formerly” or “at some time” or “previously”
 TIT	3	3	bl8e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Here, **we** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians, referring to the time before they trusted in Christ. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	3	rrx9		ἦμεν&ἀνόητοι	1	were foolish	Alternate translation: “were thoughtless” or “were unwise”
+TIT	3	3	rrx9		ἦμεν & ἀνόητοι	1	were foolish	Alternate translation: “were thoughtless” or “were unwise”
 TIT	3	3	qt8f	figs-personification	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures	Here, **passions** and **pleasures** are spoken of as if they were masters over people and had made those people into slaves by lying to them. Alternate translation: “We had allowed ourselves to believe the lie that various passions and pleasures could make us happy, and then we were unable to control our feelings or stop doing things we thought would give us pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 TIT	3	3	xy27	figs-activepassive	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Various passions and pleasures had lied to us and so led us astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 TIT	3	3	tl5n		ἐπιθυμίαις	1	passions	Alternate translation: “lusts” or “desires”
 TIT	3	3	dec4		ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ διάγοντες	1	We lived in evil and envy	Here, **evil** and **envy** describe sin. The word **evil** is general and **envy** is a specific kind of sin. Alternate translation: “We were always doing evil things and wanting what others have”
 TIT	3	3	y5lp		στυγητοί	1	detestable	Alternate translation: “causing others to hate us”
 TIT	3	4	xy28	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	**But** is used here to mark the important contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1–3) and the goodness of God (verses 4–7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	3	4	ba5a	figs-personification	ὅτε&ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	Paul speaks of God’s **kindness** and **love** as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-TIT	3	4	abcg	figs-abstractnouns	ὅτε&ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	You can state the abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	3	4	ba5a	figs-personification	ὅτε & ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	Paul speaks of God’s **kindness** and **love** as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+TIT	3	4	abcg	figs-abstractnouns	ὅτε & ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	You can state the abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 TIT	3	4	abch	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 TIT	3	5	n4ug		κατὰ τὸ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος	1	by his mercy	Alternate translation: “because he had mercy on us”
 TIT	3	5	k1a6	figs-metaphor	λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας	1	the washing of new birth	Paul combines two metaphors here. He is speaking of God’s forgiveness for sinners as if he were physically **washing** them clean from their sin. He is also speaking of sinners who become responsive to God as if they had been born again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -164,23 +164,23 @@ TIT	3	8	j8md		ὁ λόγος	1	This message	This **message** is the one just exp
 TIT	3	8	xy29		τούτων	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1–7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about”
 TIT	3	8	kqm6		φροντίζωσιν καλῶν ἔργων, προΐστασθαι	1	may be careful to engage themselves in good works	Alternate translation: “may seek to do good works”
 TIT	3	9	tzh9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains what Titus should avoid and how to treat those who cause contention among the believers.
-TIT	3	9	j1hf		δὲ&περιΐστασο	1	But avoid	Alternate translation: “So avoid” or “Therefore, avoid”
-TIT	3	9	xnf9		μωρὰς&ζητήσεις	1	foolish debates	Alternate translation: “arguments concerning unimportant matters”
+TIT	3	9	j1hf		δὲ & περιΐστασο	1	But avoid	Alternate translation: “So avoid” or “Therefore, avoid”
+TIT	3	9	xnf9		μωρὰς & ζητήσεις	1	foolish debates	Alternate translation: “arguments concerning unimportant matters”
 TIT	3	9	qk66		γενεαλογίας	1	genealogies	The word **genealogies** refers to the study of family kinship relationships. See the Introduction to Titus.
 TIT	3	9	xu7f		ἔρεις	1	strife	Alternate translation: “arguments” or “fights”
 TIT	3	9	ky3n		νομικὰς	1	about the law	Alternate translation: “about the law of Moses”
-TIT	3	10	x3fh		αἱρετικὸν ἄνθρωπον&παραιτοῦ	1	Reject a divisive person	Alternate translation: “Stay away from a person who causes division”
+TIT	3	10	x3fh		αἱρετικὸν ἄνθρωπον & παραιτοῦ	1	Reject a divisive person	Alternate translation: “Stay away from a person who causes division”
 TIT	3	10	xzx1		μετὰ μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν	1	after one or two warnings	Alternate translation: “after you have warned that person once or twice”
 TIT	3	11	r7pc		ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	such a person	Alternate translation: “a person like that”
 TIT	3	11	inh5	figs-metaphor	ἐξέστραπται	1	has turned from the right way	Paul speaks of someone who chooses to do wrong things as if he were leaving the **right** path to walk in the wrong direction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 TIT	3	11	p81k		ὢν αὐτοκατάκριτος	1	being self-condemned	Alternate translation: “bringing judgment on himself”
 TIT	3	12	z7i4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul closes the letter by telling Titus what to do after he appoints elders in Crete and by giving greetings from those with him.
 TIT	3	12	mba6		ὅταν πέμψω	1	When I send	Alternate translation: “After I send”
-TIT	3	12	c32w	translate-names	Ἀρτεμᾶν&Τυχικόν	1	Artemas … Tychicus	**Artemas** and **Tychicus** are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+TIT	3	12	c32w	translate-names	Ἀρτεμᾶν & Τυχικόν	1	Artemas … Tychicus	**Artemas** and **Tychicus** are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 TIT	3	12	knt1		σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν	1	hurry to come	Alternate translation: “come quickly”
 TIT	3	12	xy30		σπούδασον	1	hurry	The verb **hurry** is singular and directed at Titus alone. Artemas or Tychicus would stay in Crete, probably to take Titus’ place.
 TIT	3	12	gdw9		παραχειμάσαι	1	to spend the winter	Alternate translation: “to stay for the winter”
-TIT	3	13	a46f	translate-names	Ζηνᾶν&Ἀπολλῶν	1	Zenas	**Zenos** is a man's name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+TIT	3	13	a46f	translate-names	Ζηνᾶν & Ἀπολλῶν	1	Zenas	**Zenos** is a man's name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 TIT	3	13	s757		καὶ Ἀπολλῶν	1	and Apollos	Alternate translation: “and also Apollos”
 TIT	3	13	j496		σπουδαίως πρόπεμψον	1	Diligently send on their way	Alternate translation: “Do not delay in sending”
 TIT	3	13	xy31	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μηδὲν αὐτοῖς λείπῃ	1	so that they lack nothing	You can state this positively: “so that they have everything that they need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv
index c9d5c818ef..370ce9de6a 100644
--- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv
@@ -12,19 +12,19 @@ PHM	1	2	b37l	translate-names	Ἀπφίᾳ	1		**Apphia** is the name of a woman.
 PHM	1	2	bb1s	figs-exclusive	τῇ ἀδελφῇ	1		Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Apphia to Paul and the readers as a sister in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could do the same as the original, which says, “the sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHM	1	2	hhpc	figs-metaphor	τῇ ἀδελφῇ	1		Paul is using the term **sister** to mean a woman who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our spiritual sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
 PHM	1	2	e8su	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-PHM	1	2	kyzo		Ἀπφίᾳ&Ἀρχίππῳ&τῇ&ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house, on the same level as he is writing to Philemon.
+PHM	1	2	kyzo		Ἀπφίᾳ & Ἀρχίππῳ & τῇ & ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house, on the same level as he is writing to Philemon.
 PHM	1	2	sq44	translate-names	Ἀρχίππῳ	1	Archippus	**Archippus** is the name of a man in the church with Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHM	1	2	mnn5	figs-metaphor	τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν	1	our fellow soldier	Paul speaks here of Archippus as if he and Archippus were both soldiers in an army. He means that Archippus works hard, as Paul himself works hard, to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “our fellow spiritual warrior” or “who also fights the spiritual battle with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	2	uof9		καὶ τῇ κατ’ οἶκόν σου ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Apphia and Archippus were probably also members of the **church** that met at Philemon’s house. If mentioning them separately would imply that they were not part of the church, you could include a word like “other.” Alternate translation: “to the other members of the church in your house”
 PHM	1	3	r4nq	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Grace to you and peace from God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ	After introducing the senders and recipients of the letter, Paul gives a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 PHM	1	3	iv7e	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace** with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-PHM	1	3	e5z8	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν	1	our	The word **our** here is inclusive, referring to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+PHM	1	3	e5z8	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	our	The word **our** here is inclusive, referring to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 PHM	1	3	qglx	figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1		Here, **you** is plural, referring to all of the recipients named in verses 1–2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHM	1	3	lh8a	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρὸς	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 PHM	1	4	puh8	figs-yousingular	σου	1		Here, the word **you** is singular and refers to Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHM	1	5	l3i2	figs-abstractnouns	ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους	1	figs-abstractnouns	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **love** and **faith** by stating the ideas behind them with verbs instead. Alternate translation: “hearing how much you love and believe in the Lord Jesus and all the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHM	1	5	ojcu	writing-poetry	ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους	1	writing-poetry	Paul is using a poetic structure here in which the first and last parts relate and the second and third parts relate. Therefore, the meaning is: “hearing of the faith that you have in the Lord Jesus and of your love for all the saints.”Paul said exactly that in Colossians 1:4 without the poetic structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
-PHM	1	5	pf1y	figs-yousingular	σου&ἔχεις	1		Here, the words **your** and **you** are singular and refer to Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+PHM	1	5	pf1y	figs-yousingular	σου & ἔχεις	1		Here, the words **your** and **you** are singular and refer to Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 PHM	1	6	mfrp	figs-explicit	ὅπως	1		Here, **that** introduces the content of the prayer that Paul mentions in verse 4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat the idea of prayer here. Alternate translation: “I pray that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 PHM	1	6	t54l	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου	1	the fellowship of your faith	The word translated **fellowship** means a sharing or a partnership in something. Paul probably intends both meanings, but if you must choose, it could mean: (1) that Philemon shares the same faith in Christ as Paul and others. Alternate translation: “the faith that you share with us” (2) that Philemon is a partner with Paul and others in working for Christ. Alternate translation: “your working together with us as believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 PHM	1	6	hcwp	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου, ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ τοῦ ἐν ἡμῖν εἰς Χριστόν.	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe,” and behind **knowledge** with a verb such as “know” or “learn.” Alternate translation: “as you trust in the Messiah along with us, you may become increasingly better at serving the Messiah, as you learn about all of the good things that he has given us to use for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ PHM	1	16	bynb		ὑπὲρ δοῦλον	1		Alternate translation: “more valuab
 PHM	1	16	f8tz	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν	1	a beloved brother	Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “a beloved spiritual brother” or “a brother whom we love in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	16	qxi0		ἀγαπητόν	1		Alternate translation: “dear” or “precious”
 PHM	1	16	scj1		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	Alternate translation: “in the fellowship of brotherhood through Jesus” or “in the fellowship of believers in the Lord”
-PHM	1	17	e1j2	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&με ἔχεις κοινωνόν	1	if you have me as a partner	Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+PHM	1	17	e1j2	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & με ἔχεις κοινωνόν	1	if you have me as a partner	Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 PHM	1	17	e0es	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** means that what came before this word is the reason for what comes after it. It may be that Paul intends for everything that came before to be the reason, because this word also indicates that Paul is now coming to the main point of the letter. Use a natural method in your language to indicate this transition. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHM	1	17	d56r	figs-ellipsis	προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ.	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “receive him just as you would receive me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHM	1	18	nq4j	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει	1		Onesimus certainly did wrong to Philemon by running away, and he probably also stole some of Philemon’s property. But Paul is stating these things as uncertain in order to be polite. If your language does not use a conditional statement in this way, then use a more natural way to state this. Alternate translation: “But whatever he has taken or whatever wrong he has done to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@@ -83,11 +83,11 @@ PHM	1	22	ctr4		χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν	1	I will be given back to you
 PHM	1	22	mzr0		ἑτοίμαζέ μοι ξενίαν	1	I will be given back to you	The word translated **guest room** refers to any hospitality that is provided for a guest. So the kind of space is unspecified. Alternate translation: “also prepare a place in your house for me.”
 PHM	1	22	lnw9		διὰ τῶν προσευχῶν ὑμῶν	1	I will be given back to you	Alternate translation: “God will answer your prayers so”
 PHM	1	22	p2u0	figs-activepassive	χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν.	1	I will be given back to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly with an active form. Alternate translation: “God will bring me back to you” or “those who are keeping me in prison will set me free so that I can come to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-PHM	1	22	o06s	figs-you	ὑμῶν&ὑμῖν	1	I will be given back to you	The words **your** and **you** here are plural, referring to Philemon and all the believers who met in his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+PHM	1	22	o06s	figs-you	ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν	1	I will be given back to you	The words **your** and **you** here are plural, referring to Philemon and all the believers who met in his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 PHM	1	23	x2d8	translate-names	Ἐπαφρᾶς	1	Epaphras	**Epaphras** was the name of a man who was a fellow believer and prisoner with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 PHM	1	23	f0b6		ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Epaphras	fdHere, **in Christ Jesus** means something similar to the phrases “in the Lord” and “in Christ” in verse 20. See how you translated those there. Alternate translation: “who is here with me because he serves Christ Jesus”
-PHM	1	24	i5gc	translate-names	Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς	1	Mark&Aristarchus&Demas&Luke	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-PHM	1	24	uc6n	figs-ellipsis	Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς	1	Mark&Aristarchus&Demas&Luke	Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as do Mark, Aristarchus, Demas, and Luke, my fellow workers” or “Mark, Aristarchus, Demas, and Luke, my fellow workers, also greet you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+PHM	1	24	i5gc	translate-names	Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς	1	Mark & Aristarchus & Demas & Luke	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+PHM	1	24	uc6n	figs-ellipsis	Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς	1	Mark & Aristarchus & Demas & Luke	Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as do Mark, Aristarchus, Demas, and Luke, my fellow workers” or “Mark, Aristarchus, Demas, and Luke, my fellow workers, also greet you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHM	1	24	gf6e		οἱ συνεργοί μου	1	my fellow workers	Alternate translation: “the men who work with me” or “who all work with me.”
 PHM	1	25	apvl	figs-synecdoche	μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1	be with your spirit	The words **your spirit** are a synecdoche and represent the people themselves. Paul is referring to Philemon and all who met in his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 PHM	1	25	e35h	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	be with your spirit	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and” or “May our Lord Jesus Christ be kind to you and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
index cb5def5351..fa87920c6a 100644
--- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ HEB	1	3	xvin	figs-infostructure	ὃς ὢν ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξη
 HEB	1	3	he0e	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **brightness**, **glory**, **representation**, and **being**, you could express the ideas by using verbs, adjectives, or adverbs. Alternate translation: “brightly glorious like he is and exactly representing who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	1	3	hn4q	figs-metaphor	ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ	1	the brightness of God’s glory	Here the author speaks as if the “Son” had the **brightness** that belongs to God’s **glory**, which is pictured here as being like a bright light. The author speaks in this way to emphasize that the Son “shines” with the **glory** that only God has. He means that the “Son” is God and represents God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the reflection of his glory and” or “one who has the glory of God and the” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	3	b7jc	translate-unknown	χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	glory, the exact representation of his being	Here, the phrase **exact representation** refers to something that perfectly shows or matches what something else is like. In this case, the “Son” perfectly shows or matches God’s **being**, that is, what God is like. The author uses **exact representation of his being** to show that the “Son” is God along with God the Father but not the same person. You could use a word or phrase that indicates that the “Son” is just like what God the Father is like. Alternate translation: “exactly like what he is like” or “perfectly representing who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	1	3	kmza	figs-metaphor	φέρων&τὰ πάντα	1		Here the author speaks as if the Son were standing underneath **all the things** and holding them up so that they did not fall. He speaks in this way to indicate that everything continues to exist only because the Son works to make it continue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “preserving all the things” or “supporting all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	1	3	kmza	figs-metaphor	φέρων & τὰ πάντα	1		Here the author speaks as if the Son were standing underneath **all the things** and holding them up so that they did not fall. He speaks in this way to indicate that everything continues to exist only because the Son works to make it continue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “preserving all the things” or “supporting all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	3	ms8z	figs-metonymy	τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1	the word of his power	Here, the word **word** refers to speaking “words” or “messages.” It does not refer to one word that the Son speaks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how the Son speaks. Alternate translation: “through his powerful speech” or “by how he speaks with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	1	3	mk26	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “by his powerful word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	1	3	l1pg	figs-abstractnouns	καθαρισμὸν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ποιησάμενος	1	After he had made cleansing for sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **purification**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “cleanse” or “purify.” Alternate translation: “having cleansed us from our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -27,21 +27,21 @@ HEB	1	3	ir7x	figs-euphemism	τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης	1	the Majesty on high
 HEB	1	3	awjd	translate-unknown	ἐν ὑψηλοῖς	1		Here, the phrase **on high** identifies the location of **the right of the Majesty**, which is where the Son **sat down**. This location is in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that it means that Jesus ascended into heaven, which is where the **right** side is. Alternate translation: “in heaven” or “on high, in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	1	4	x4bh		γενόμενος	1	He has become	Here, the words **having become** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what “sitting at God’s right” side ([1:3](../01/03.md)) means. Alternate translation: “thus, he has become” (2) a result that comes from “sitting at God’s right hand” ([1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “so, he has become” or “therefore, he has become”
 HEB	1	4	hnab		τοσούτῳ κρείττων γενόμενος τῶν ἀγγέλων, ὅσῳ διαφορώτερον παρ’ αὐτοὺς, κεκληρονόμηκεν ὄνομα	1		Here the author uses a comparison that indicates that the difference in “superiority” between the Son and **the angels** is the same as the difference between the Son’s **name** and the names of **the angels**. Consider clear ways to indicate such a comparison in your language. Alternate translation: “having become as much superior to the angels as the name that he has inherited is more excellent than theirs”
-HEB	1	4	bn6t	translate-unknown	τοσούτῳ κρείττων&τῶν ἀγγέλων&διαφορώτερον	1		Here, the phrases **far superior** and **more excellent** both refer to how Jesus and Jesus’ **name** have more authority and honor than the angels and their names. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that express this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “more honorable than the angels … more honorable” or “far higher than the angels … a higher”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	1	4	fzg3	figs-extrainfo	διαφορώτερον&ὄνομα	1	as the name he has inherited is more excellent than their name	Here the author does not clarify what **name** this is. It could be the title “Son,” the title “Lord,” the name “Jesus,” or God’s own special name, “Yahweh.” Since the author did not clarify to what **name** he is referring, it is best to refer to a name or title without stating what it is. Alternate translation: “a more excellent title” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+HEB	1	4	bn6t	translate-unknown	τοσούτῳ κρείττων & τῶν ἀγγέλων & διαφορώτερον	1		Here, the phrases **far superior** and **more excellent** both refer to how Jesus and Jesus’ **name** have more authority and honor than the angels and their names. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that express this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “more honorable than the angels … more honorable” or “far higher than the angels … a higher”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	1	4	fzg3	figs-extrainfo	διαφορώτερον & ὄνομα	1	as the name he has inherited is more excellent than their name	Here the author does not clarify what **name** this is. It could be the title “Son,” the title “Lord,” the name “Jesus,” or God’s own special name, “Yahweh.” Since the author did not clarify to what **name** he is referring, it is best to refer to a name or title without stating what it is. Alternate translation: “a more excellent title” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	1	4	qt7q	figs-metaphor	κεκληρονόμηκεν	1	he has inherited	Here the author speaks as if Jesus were a child who would receive property that a parent passes on to their heir when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus receives a **name** from God the Father, although this does not mean that God the Father has died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has received” or “God has given him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	4	uu4s	figs-ellipsis	παρ’ αὐτοὺς	1		Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete comparison. He omits these words because he stated them in the first half of the comparison (a **name**). If your language needs these words to make a complete comparison, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “than their names” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	1	5	d964	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the support or basis that proves that the Son is “superior to the angels” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). The supporting statements that **For** introduces can be found in [1:5–14](../01/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is the proof for that:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	1	5	ww5h	figs-rquestion	τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων, Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?	1	For to which of the angels did God ever say, “You are my son … a son to me”?	The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “none of them,” for God said these words to his own Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas with strong negations. Alternate translation: “For God never said to any of the angels ‘You are my son, and I today I have become your father.’ And again, ‘I will be as a father to him, and he will be as a son to me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-HEB	1	5	pzkc	writing-quotations	τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων&καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the quotations as quotations, but instead he introduces them as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md), and the second quotation comes from [2 Samuel 7:14](../../2sa/07/14.md). Since the author introduces these quotations as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce these quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include footnotes or use some other form to identify the quotations. The phrase **And again** is a normal form that the author uses to connect a second quotation to a first quotation. Alternate translation: “For to which of the angels did he ever speak … And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	1	5	wmyy	figs-quotations	εἶπέν ποτε&Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “did he ever say that he was his son, that today he had fathered him, and again, that he would be as a father to him, and that he would be as a son to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	1	5	fdsv	translate-kinship	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε&ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν	1		In their original contexts, these two quotations referred to the king of Israel as one who became God’s **son** when he began to rule. Thus, God was his **father**. When the author applies these words not to angels but to Jesus, he identifies the **father** as God the Father and the **son** as God the Son. He does not mean that Jesus becomes **son** at some point or begins to exist at some point. Rather, he means that God the Father declares and reveals Jesus to be God the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words or a footnote that clarifies the meaning. Alternate translation: “You are my son, today I have proclaimed that I am your father … I proclaim that I am his father and that he is my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
+HEB	1	5	pzkc	writing-quotations	τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων & καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the quotations as quotations, but instead he introduces them as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md), and the second quotation comes from [2 Samuel 7:14](../../2sa/07/14.md). Since the author introduces these quotations as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce these quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include footnotes or use some other form to identify the quotations. The phrase **And again** is a normal form that the author uses to connect a second quotation to a first quotation. Alternate translation: “For to which of the angels did he ever speak … And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	5	wmyy	figs-quotations	εἶπέν ποτε & Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “did he ever say that he was his son, that today he had fathered him, and again, that he would be as a father to him, and that he would be as a son to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	1	5	fdsv	translate-kinship	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε & ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν	1		In their original contexts, these two quotations referred to the king of Israel as one who became God’s **son** when he began to rule. Thus, God was his **father**. When the author applies these words not to angels but to Jesus, he identifies the **father** as God the Father and the **son** as God the Son. He does not mean that Jesus becomes **son** at some point or begins to exist at some point. Rather, he means that God the Father declares and reveals Jesus to be God the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words or a footnote that clarifies the meaning. Alternate translation: “You are my son, today I have proclaimed that I am your father … I proclaim that I am his father and that he is my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	1	5	t48e	figs-parallelism	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	You are my son … I have become your father	Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **son** language, and the other uses “father” language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “Today I have fathered you, my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	1	5	wkoz	figs-yousingular	σύ&σε	1		Because the quotation is referring to one **son**, **You** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	1	5	wkoz	figs-yousingular	σύ & σε	1		Because the quotation is referring to one **son**, **You** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	1	5	jzhs	figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **father** language, and the other uses **son** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “I will be as a father to him, who is my son” or “He will be as a son to me, his father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	1	6	u0km	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ πάλιν	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the previous verse, which talks about what God has not said to angels. In this verse, the author identifies what God has said to angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Again, and in contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-HEB	1	6	n7ph	writing-quotations	δὲ πάλιν&λέγει	1	he says	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to angels about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said to the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The phrase **But again** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “Further … God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	1	6	wnl5	figs-pastforfuture	εἰσαγάγῃ&λέγει	1		Here the author uses the present tense to introduce what God says. He may be referring to a past event (if **brings** refers to the incarnation or the ascension of Jesus) or a future event (if **brings** refers to the return of Jesus at the end). The author uses the present tense to focus on what God **says** rather than when he **says** it. Consider what tense would be appropriate for referring primarily to what a person says. Alternate translation: “he brought … he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+HEB	1	6	n7ph	writing-quotations	δὲ πάλιν & λέγει	1	he says	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to angels about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said to the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The phrase **But again** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “Further … God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	6	wnl5	figs-pastforfuture	εἰσαγάγῃ & λέγει	1		Here the author uses the present tense to introduce what God says. He may be referring to a past event (if **brings** refers to the incarnation or the ascension of Jesus) or a future event (if **brings** refers to the return of Jesus at the end). The author uses the present tense to focus on what God **says** rather than when he **says** it. Consider what tense would be appropriate for referring primarily to what a person says. Alternate translation: “he brought … he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 HEB	1	6	llcd	figs-infostructure	ὅταν δὲ πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον εἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην, λέγει	1		Here, the word **again** could modify: (1) **he says**. In this case, **again** tells the audience that the author is quoting an important text **again**. Alternate translation: “But, when he brings the firstborn into the world, again he says” (2) **he brings**. In this case, **again** tells the audience that the **firstborn** has already been in **the world**, and God is “bringing” him into it **again**. The “bringing” would then refer to how Jesus returns to heaven when he ascends or how he comes back again to earth at the end. Alternate translation: “But, when he again brings the firstborn into the world, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	1	6	b4s2	figs-metaphor	τὸν πρωτότοκον	1	the firstborn	Here, the phrase **the firstborn** refers to Jesus. The author refers to him as the **firstborn** to emphasize his importance and authority over everyone else. It does not imply that there was a time before Jesus existed or that God gave birth to him at some point. Rather, it implies that Jesus has adopted siblings; they are everyone who believes in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “his honored Son” or “his first Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	6	lnxs		εἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην	1		Here, the phrase **the world** could refer to: (1) the “world that is coming” (see [2:5](../02/05.md)), which is heaven or the heavenly world. In this case, the verse refers to Jesus’ ascension into heaven. Alternate translation: “into the coming world” (2) this world as it currently exists. In this case, the verse refers either to Jesus’ incarnation or to his return to earth at the end. Alternate translation: “into our world”
@@ -50,17 +50,17 @@ HEB	1	6	b6dy	figs-imperative3p	καὶ προσκυνησάτωσαν αὐτῷ
 HEB	1	7	bwuh	writing-quotations	καὶ πρὸς μὲν τοὺς ἀγγέλους λέγει	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Psalm 104:4](../../psa/104/04.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The word **And** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “On the one hand, with regard to the angels, God speaks,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	7	acjd	figs-quotations	λέγει, ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that he makes his angels spirits, and his servants flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	7	urbi	figs-parallelism	ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “The one who makes his servant angels spirits and flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	1	7	wqd8	writing-pronouns	ὁ ποιῶν&αὐτοῦ&αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the words **The one** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “God makes his … his” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	1	7	x53n	figs-123person	ὁ ποιῶν&αὐτοῦ&αὐτοῦ	1		Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I am the one who makes his angels spirits and his servants flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+HEB	1	7	wqd8	writing-pronouns	ὁ ποιῶν & αὐτοῦ & αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the words **The one** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “God makes his … his” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	1	7	x53n	figs-123person	ὁ ποιῶν & αὐτοῦ & αὐτοῦ	1		Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I am the one who makes his angels spirits and his servants flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 HEB	1	7	u76p		πνεύματα	1		Here, the word translated **spirits** could refer to: (1) “winds,” since the word could mean either **spirits** or “winds” in the author’s culture. Alternate translations: “winds” (2) how God made the angels to be “spiritual” beings. Alternate translation: “spiritual beings”
 HEB	1	7	isd8	figs-metaphor	ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα	1	He is the one who makes his angels spirits, and his servants flames of fire	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God turned **his angels** into **spirits** and into **flames of fire**. He speaks in this way to identify what the angels are like and to show that God made them like that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that identifies what God made the angels like. Alternate translation: “The one who makes his angels so that they are like spirits, and his servants so that they are like flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	7	d9yj	figs-possession	πυρὸς φλόγα	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **flames** that are made of **fire**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with an adjective such as “fiery.” Alternate translation: “fiery flames” or “flames made of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	1	8	nk2j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the phrase **But on the other hand** introduces a contrast with what God said about the angels in [1:7](../01/07.md). The author contrasts the fact that God has created the angels with how the **Son** rules forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “However, on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-HEB	1	8	yp11	figs-ellipsis	πρὸς&τὸν Υἱόν	1		Here, the author does not include “he says” because he used these words in the last verse ([1:7](../01/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could include “he says” here. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	1	8	p1xx	writing-quotations	πρὸς&τὸν Υἱόν	1	But to the Son he says	Here and in the next verse, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 45:6–7](../psa/45/06.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about his Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	1	8	jlql		πρὸς&τὸν Υἱόν	1		Here, the phrase **with regard to** could indicate that: (1) God is speaking about the **Son**. Alternate translation: “concerning the Son” (2) God is speaking directly to the **Son**. Alternate translation: “to the Son”
+HEB	1	8	yp11	figs-ellipsis	πρὸς & τὸν Υἱόν	1		Here, the author does not include “he says” because he used these words in the last verse ([1:7](../01/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could include “he says” here. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+HEB	1	8	p1xx	writing-quotations	πρὸς & τὸν Υἱόν	1	But to the Son he says	Here and in the next verse, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 45:6–7](../psa/45/06.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about his Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	8	jlql		πρὸς & τὸν Υἱόν	1		Here, the phrase **with regard to** could indicate that: (1) God is speaking about the **Son**. Alternate translation: “concerning the Son” (2) God is speaking directly to the **Son**. Alternate translation: “to the Son”
 HEB	1	8	b155	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱόν	1	Son	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-HEB	1	8	x9uc	figs-quotations	πρὸς&τὸν Υἱόν, ὁ θρόνος σου, ὁ Θεὸς, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the following verse as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “to the Son he says that he is God and that his throne is forever and ever, and the scepter of righteousness is the scepter of his kingdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	1	8	x9uc	figs-quotations	πρὸς & τὸν Υἱόν, ὁ θρόνος σου, ὁ Θεὸς, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the following verse as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “to the Son he says that he is God and that his throne is forever and ever, and the scepter of righteousness is the scepter of his kingdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	8	jqi7	figs-yousingular	σου	1		Since the word **Your** refers to one person, the **Son**, it is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	1	8	ewm4	figs-metonymy	ὁ θρόνος σου	1	Your throne, God, is forever and ever	Here, the word **throne** refers to what the person on the **throne** does, which is to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to “rule” or “reign.” Alternate translation: “Your reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	1	8	qi4x	figs-exclamations	ὁ Θεὸς	1		Here, the word **God** directly addresses and names who “you” in the quote is. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “O God” or “you who are God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -70,44 +70,44 @@ HEB	1	8	iprl	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος	1
 HEB	1	8	vl1n	figs-123person	αὐτοῦ	1		Here the author refers to the **Son** in the third person instead of in the second person. He is still referring to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could continue to use **you** instead. Alternate translation: “your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 HEB	1	8	b7f0	translate-textvariants	αὐτοῦ	1		Most later manuscripts have “your” here instead of **his**. However, the earliest manuscripts have **his**, and later scribes probably changed it to “your” to be consistent with the rest of the quote. Unless there is a good reason not to use **his**, you should follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 HEB	1	9	pl80	figs-quotations	ἠγάπησας δικαιοσύνην καὶ ἐμίσησας ἀνομίαν; διὰ τοῦτο, ἔχρισέν σε ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου, ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως παρὰ τοὺς μετόχους σου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that your translation fits with how you expressed the first half of the quote in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “He has loved righteousness and hated lawlessness. Therefore, God, his God, has anointed him with the oil of exultation more than his companions.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	1	9	p5va	figs-yousingular	ἠγάπησας&ἐμίσησας&σε&σου&σου	1		Since the words **You**, **your**, and **you** refer to one person, the Son, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-HEB	1	9	ollt	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην&ἀνομίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **lawlessness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective or adverbs. Alternate translation: “what is righteous … what is lawless” or “what people do righteously … what people do lawlessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	1	9	lu3m	figs-doublet	ἔχρισέν&ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου	1		Here the quotation repeats the word **God** in order to emphasize that **God** is the one who “anoints” and also to identify him as **your God**, which means that he is the **God** whom **you** serve. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea by using **God** once and emphasizing the phrase in another way. Alternate translation: “the God whom you serve has anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-HEB	1	9	eyqe	figs-123person	ἔχρισέν&ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου	1		Since **God** is the one speaking this quotation, he refers to himself in the third person here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person here to clarify that this is not another **God**. Alternate translation: “I, who am your God, have anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-HEB	1	9	t9yw	figs-metaphor	ἔχρισέν σε&ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως	1	has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companions	In the author’s culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	1	9	p5va	figs-yousingular	ἠγάπησας & ἐμίσησας & σε & σου & σου	1		Since the words **You**, **your**, and **you** refer to one person, the Son, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	1	9	ollt	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην & ἀνομίαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **lawlessness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective or adverbs. Alternate translation: “what is righteous … what is lawless” or “what people do righteously … what people do lawlessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	1	9	lu3m	figs-doublet	ἔχρισέν & ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου	1		Here the quotation repeats the word **God** in order to emphasize that **God** is the one who “anoints” and also to identify him as **your God**, which means that he is the **God** whom **you** serve. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea by using **God** once and emphasizing the phrase in another way. Alternate translation: “the God whom you serve has anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	1	9	eyqe	figs-123person	ἔχρισέν & ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου	1		Since **God** is the one speaking this quotation, he refers to himself in the third person here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person here to clarify that this is not another **God**. Alternate translation: “I, who am your God, have anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+HEB	1	9	t9yw	figs-metaphor	ἔχρισέν σε & ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως	1	has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companions	In the author’s culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	9	w1l1	figs-possession	ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως	1		Here the quotation uses the possessive form to show that the **oil** leads to **exultation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates result. Alternate translation: “with the oil that leads to exultation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	1	9	h3ne	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαλλιάσεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exultation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exult” or “rejoice.” Alternate translation: “that makes you rejoice” or “which causes you to exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	1	9	akn8	figs-extrainfo	τοὺς μετόχους σου	1		Here the author does not clarify who the **companions** are. In the context of the quotation, they probably referred to other people in the royal family who did not become king. In the context of Hebrews, they probably refer to those who believe in Jesus. God saves them, but he does not seat them at his right hand like he does with Jesus. However, neither the quotation nor the author of Hebrews state explicitly who the **companions** are, so you should leave their identify unspecified if possible. Alternate translation: “those who are with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	1	10	nsd4	writing-quotations	καί	1		Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He uses **And** to indicate that these are more words that God says “with regard to the Son” (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 102:25–27](../psa/102/25.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “God says further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	10	pbzo	figs-quotations	καί, σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “And further, according to the beginnings the Lord founded the earth, and the heavens are the works of his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	10	html	figs-parallelism	σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί	1		This part of the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **earth** language, and the other uses **heavens** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture, and **heavens** and **earth** together refer to everything that God made. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “according to the beginnings, O Lord, you founded the earth and the heavens” or “according to the beginnings, O Lord, you made everything, both earth and heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	1	10	yp0w	figs-yousingular	σὺ&ἐθεμελίωσας&σού	1		Since the words **you** and **your** refer to one person, the Son, **you** and **your** are singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	1	10	yp0w	figs-yousingular	σὺ & ἐθεμελίωσας & σού	1		Since the words **you** and **your** refer to one person, the Son, **you** and **your** are singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	1	10	tmu5	figs-idiom	κατ’ ἀρχάς	1	In the beginning	Here, the phrase **according to the beginnings** refers to when all created things first came into being. In other words, the **beginnings** identifies the time when God created the universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to when everything first began to exist. Alternate translation: “when everything began to exist” or “at the beginning of the creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	1	10	klk9	figs-exclamations	Κύριε	1		Here, the word **Lord** directly addresses and names who **you** in the quote is. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “O Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 HEB	1	10	j64k	figs-metaphor	τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας	1	you laid the earth’s foundation	Here the quotation refers to **the earth** as if it were a building that was set on a “foundation.” The **Lord** is the one who put **the earth** on its foundation or **founded** it. The author of the quotations speaks in this way in order to show that the **Lord** is the one who created and sustains **the earth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “perfectly set up the earth” or “made the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	10	k199	figs-abstractnouns	ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “make” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what your hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	1	10	r19v	figs-metonymy	τῶν χειρῶν σού	1	The heavens are the work of your hands	Here, the word **hands** refers to the power and action that a person has by which to do **works**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of your power” or “that you powerfully did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	1	11	zugp	figs-quotations	αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις; καὶ πάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσονται,	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous and following verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “They themselves will perish, but he himself will continue; and they will all wear out like a garment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	1	11	a6le	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται&πάντες&παλαιωθήσονται	1	They will perish	Here, the words **They** and **they** refer to the “earth” and the “heavens” mentioned in [1:10](../01/10.md), which together refer to everything that God has made. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what **They** and **they** refer back to. Alternate translation: “Earth and heavens themselves will perish … they will all wear out” or “Every created thing itself will perish … every one of them will wear out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	1	11	a6le	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται & πάντες & παλαιωθήσονται	1	They will perish	Here, the words **They** and **they** refer to the “earth” and the “heavens” mentioned in [1:10](../01/10.md), which together refer to everything that God has made. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what **They** and **they** refer back to. Alternate translation: “Earth and heavens themselves will perish … they will all wear out” or “Every created thing itself will perish … every one of them will wear out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	1	11	fqk2	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις	1		Here, the words translated **themselves** and **yourself** emphasize the contrast between “them” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “It is they who will perish, but it is you who will continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	1	11	g0dt	figs-yousingular	σὺ&διαμένεις	1		Since the phrase **you yourself** refers to one person, the Son, **you yourself** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-HEB	1	11	yl85	translate-unknown	σὺ&διαμένεις	1		Here, the word **continue** is the exact opposite of **perish**. What **continue** means it that **you**, the Son, will never cease to exist or cease to live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the Son as one who never stops existing and functioning. Alternate translation: “you yourself will never perish” or “you yourself always exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	1	11	g0dt	figs-yousingular	σὺ & διαμένεις	1		Since the phrase **you yourself** refers to one person, the Son, **you yourself** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	1	11	yl85	translate-unknown	σὺ & διαμένεις	1		Here, the word **continue** is the exact opposite of **perish**. What **continue** means it that **you**, the Son, will never cease to exist or cease to live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the Son as one who never stops existing and functioning. Alternate translation: “you yourself will never perish” or “you yourself always exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	1	11	qy4e	figs-simile	πάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσονται	1	wear out like a piece of clothing	Here the author of the quotation compares the heavens and earth to a piece of clothing that gets old and eventually becomes useless. By speaking in this way, he illustrates how everything that God has created will eventually fall apart. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they will all fall apart like a worn pair of shoes” or “they will eventually come to nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 HEB	1	12	kl5e	figs-quotations	καὶ ὡσεὶ περιβόλαιον ἑλίξεις αὐτούς, ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται; σὺ δὲ ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ, καὶ τὰ ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “And as a cloak he will roll them up, and as a garment they will be changed. But he himself is the same, and his years will not fail.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	1	12	iar0	figs-yousingular	ἑλίξεις&σὺ …εἶ&σου	1		Since the words **you**, **yourself**, and **your** refer to one person, the Son, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-HEB	1	12	ienx	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς&ἀλλαγήσονται	1		Just as in the previous verse, the words **them** and **they** here refer to the “earth” and the “heavens,” which identify everything that God has created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **them** and **they** refer to explicit. Alternate translation: “the earth and heavens … they will be changed” or “all created things … they will be changed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	1	12	iar0	figs-yousingular	ἑλίξεις & σὺ …εἶ & σου	1		Since the words **you**, **yourself**, and **your** refer to one person, the Son, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	1	12	ienx	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς & ἀλλαγήσονται	1		Just as in the previous verse, the words **them** and **they** here refer to the “earth” and the “heavens,” which identify everything that God has created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **them** and **they** refer to explicit. Alternate translation: “the earth and heavens … they will be changed” or “all created things … they will be changed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	1	12	c2n6	figs-parallelism	καὶ ὡσεὶ περιβόλαιον ἑλίξεις αὐτούς, ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **cloak** and “rolling” language, and the other uses **garment** and “changing” language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “And as a cloak you will change them” or “And as a garment they will be rolled up and changed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	1	12	n4hl	figs-simile	ὡσεὶ περιβόλαιον ἑλίξεις αὐτούς, ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται	1	roll them up like a cloak	Here the author continues to compare the heavens and earth to clothing, in this case a **cloak** or a **garment**. Both of these words refer to outer clothing. Both similes describe what a person would do with a dirty or old piece of clothing. They would “change” out of it, and they would **roll** it up to wash it or throw it away. The author of the quotation uses this simile to show that God will remove and replace what he has created as easily as a person changes out of an outer garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “as a worn shoe you will throw them in a corner, and as an old shoe they will be taken off” or “you will remove them, and they will be transformed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 HEB	1	12	iv4r	figs-activepassive	ὡς ἱμάτιον καὶ ἀλλαγήσονται	1	they will be changed like a piece of clothing	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **they** who are **changed** rather than the person doing the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “the Lord” does it. Alternate translation: “and as a garment you will change them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	1	12	ncsi	figs-parallelism	σὺ&ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ, καὶ τὰ ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement refers to how the Lord stays **the same**, and the other refers to how his **years will not fail**. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “you stay alive forever” or “you yourself are always the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	1	12	vg0t	figs-rpronouns	σὺ&εἶ	1		Here, the word translated **yourself** emphasizes the contrast between “they” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “it is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	1	12	i761	translate-unknown	σὺ&ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ	1	they will be changed	Here, to be **the same** is the exact opposite of being **changed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes someone who never changes. Alternate translation: “you yourself never change” or “you yourself stay exactly as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	1	12	ncsi	figs-parallelism	σὺ & ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ, καὶ τὰ ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement refers to how the Lord stays **the same**, and the other refers to how his **years will not fail**. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “you stay alive forever” or “you yourself are always the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+HEB	1	12	vg0t	figs-rpronouns	σὺ & εἶ	1		Here, the word translated **yourself** emphasizes the contrast between “they” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “it is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+HEB	1	12	i761	translate-unknown	σὺ & ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ	1	they will be changed	Here, to be **the same** is the exact opposite of being **changed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes someone who never changes. Alternate translation: “you yourself never change” or “you yourself stay exactly as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	1	12	v5mf	figs-idiom	ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν	1	your years do not end	Here, the phrase **your years will not fail** means that a person is alive during every “year.” They will never run out of **years**, which means that they are always alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that a person never dies or always lives. Alternate translation: “your life will never end” or “you will never run out of years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	1	13	pqs9	writing-quotations	πρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε	1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:1](../../psa/110/01.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has or has not said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “But to which of the angels has he ever spoken the words (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	13	z0hn	figs-quotations	εἴρηκέν ποτε, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the question as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “has he ever said that he should sit as his right hand until he makes his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	13	kz68	figs-rquestion	πρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου?	1	But to which of the angels has God said at any time … feet”?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “none of them,” for God only said these words to his own Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. See how translated the similar question in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “But God has never said to any of the angels, ‘Sit at my right hand until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	1	13	z0me	writing-pronouns	εἴρηκέν ποτε	1		Here, **he** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **he** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “has God ever said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	1	13	k8j9	figs-yousingular	κάθου&σου&σου	1		Since the words **Sit** and **your** refer to one person, the Son, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	1	13	k8j9	figs-yousingular	κάθου & σου & σου	1		Since the words **Sit** and **your** refer to one person, the Son, all forms of **you** in this verse are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	1	13	s6k7	translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Sit at my right hand	When someone sits at the **right hand** of God, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. See how you translated the similar words in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “Sit to rule at my right hand” or “Take the place of honor and authority at my right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 HEB	1	13	ee35	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1		Here, the phrase**at my right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Son has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at my right side” or “at the honorable place next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 HEB	1	13	ulp5	figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	until I make your enemies a stool for your feet	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the Son’s **enemies** could become a **footstool** on which he puts his **feet**. In the author’s culture, something that is under **feet** has been conquered and is powerless and shamed, so this means that God will conquer and shame all the **enemies** of the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “until I make your enemies kneel before you” or “until I conquer and shame your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ HEB	2	1	wzt9	figs-abstractnouns	προσέχειν	1		If your language does not
 HEB	2	1	e724	figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἀκουσθεῖσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **heard** rather than focusing on the person doing the “hearing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “we” did it. Alternate translation: “to the things that we heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	1	ayd1	figs-metaphor	μήποτε παραρυῶμεν	1	so that we do not drift away from it	Here the author speaks as if the audience were boats that could **drift away** from where they were moored. In this metaphor, the place where the boats are moored is the good news about Jesus, and “drifting away” from this place refers to slowly failing to believe this good news. The author uses this metaphor to encourage the audience to remain “moored” to the good news by continuing to focus on it and firmly believe it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that we might not slide from them” or “so that we might not slowly fail to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	2	2	omsr	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces the reason why “it is far more necessary for us to give attention” to the message ([2:1](../02/01.md)). This reason continues into the next verse ([2:3](../02/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “You can tell that we need to give attention because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	2	2	k5kb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ γὰρ ὁ&λόγος	1	For if the message	Here the author is speaking as if these things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “For since the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+HEB	2	2	k5kb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ γὰρ ὁ & λόγος	1	For if the message	Here the author is speaking as if these things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “For since the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 HEB	2	2	gea1	figs-explicit	ὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος	1		In the author’s culture, people believed that God gave his law to Moses through angels. Here, **the message spoken through angels** refers to this law that Moses received from God with angels as the messengers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the message spoken through angels to Moses” or “Moses’ law, which was spoken through angels,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	2	2	j4fa	figs-activepassive	ὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος	1	For if the message that was spoken through the angels	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it by means of angels. Alternate translation: “the message that God spoke through angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	2	u52i	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσα παράβασις καὶ παρακοὴ	1	every trespass and disobedience receives just punishment	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **transgression** and **disobedience**, you could express the ideas by using a verbs such as “transgress” and “disobey.” Alternate translation: “any person who transgressed and disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -137,30 +137,30 @@ HEB	2	3	fv4q	figs-rquestion	πῶς ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα τηλ
 HEB	2	3	mrsy	figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα	1		Here the author implies that **we** will not **escape** what those under the law experienced when they broke that law, a “just penalty” ([2:2](../02/02.md)). So, he does not include what **we escape** because he stated it in the last verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “will we escape the penalty” or “will we escape just punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	2	3	vond	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα τηλικαύτης ἀμελήσαντες σωτηρίας	1		Here, the phrase **having neglected** introduces a hypothetical possibility. The author is not claiming that he or his audience have **neglected** or will “neglect” the **salvation**. Instead, he is asking the question about what we would happen if he or his audience did “neglect” the **salvation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a possibility. Alternate translation: “will we escape if we neglect so great a salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 HEB	2	3	i2zv	translate-unknown	ἀμελήσαντες	1	ignore	Here, the word **neglected** refers to ignoring or failing to pay attention to something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “paying no attention to” or “considering unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	2	3	gm6v	figs-abstractnouns	τηλικαύτης&σωτηρίας? ἥτις	1	This is salvation that was first announced by the Lord and confirmed to us by those who heard it	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “the amazing way in which God saves us? This way in which God saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	2	3	dmsh	figs-metonymy	τηλικαύτης&σωτηρίας? ἥτις	1		Here, the word **salvation** refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which proclamation about salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+HEB	2	3	gm6v	figs-abstractnouns	τηλικαύτης & σωτηρίας? ἥτις	1	This is salvation that was first announced by the Lord and confirmed to us by those who heard it	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “the amazing way in which God saves us? This way in which God saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	2	3	dmsh	figs-metonymy	τηλικαύτης & σωτηρίας? ἥτις	1		Here, the word **salvation** refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which proclamation about salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	2	3	dyn1	figs-activepassive	ἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **chosen** and **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “choosing” and “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did the “choosing” and **the Lord** did the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “God having chosen the Lord to speak it first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	3	le2l	figs-idiom	ἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι	1		Here, the phrase **first having been chosen** identifies that something was the **first** or began some process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that something begins a process or was the **first**. Alternate translation: “first spoken” or “which had its beginning when it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	2	3	fpvx	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τῶν ἀκουσάντων εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **confirmed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “confirming.” Alternate translation: “those who heard confirmed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	2	4	k4j9	figs-abstractnouns	σημείοις&καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ ποικίλαις δυνάμεσιν, καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου μερισμοῖς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **signs**, **wonders**, **miracles**, and **distributions**, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “by enabling people to do amazing and wonderful things, to act powerfully in various ways, and to be empowered by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	2	4	li2n	figs-doublet	σημείοις&καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ ποικίλαις δυνάμεσιν	1		Here the author uses three similar words to describe supernatural acts that God empowers his people to do. The word **signs** emphasizes that these acts reveal something; the word **wonders** emphasizes that these acts are amazing or unusual; the word **miracles** emphasizes that these acts are powerful. The author uses these three words to show that God uses lots of things to “testify” to the truth of the message about salvation. If your language does not have different words that emphasize these three aspects of the supernatural acts, you could combine two or all three of these words into one word or phrase and emphasize the variety of testimonies in another way. Alternate translation: “by many and various miracles” or “by many signs and various miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	2	4	k4j9	figs-abstractnouns	σημείοις & καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ ποικίλαις δυνάμεσιν, καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου μερισμοῖς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **signs**, **wonders**, **miracles**, and **distributions**, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “by enabling people to do amazing and wonderful things, to act powerfully in various ways, and to be empowered by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	2	4	li2n	figs-doublet	σημείοις & καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ ποικίλαις δυνάμεσιν	1		Here the author uses three similar words to describe supernatural acts that God empowers his people to do. The word **signs** emphasizes that these acts reveal something; the word **wonders** emphasizes that these acts are amazing or unusual; the word **miracles** emphasizes that these acts are powerful. The author uses these three words to show that God uses lots of things to “testify” to the truth of the message about salvation. If your language does not have different words that emphasize these three aspects of the supernatural acts, you could combine two or all three of these words into one word or phrase and emphasize the variety of testimonies in another way. Alternate translation: “by many and various miracles” or “by many signs and various miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	2	4	ix3o	translate-unknown	Πνεύματος Ἁγίου μερισμοῖς	1		Here, the word **distributions** refers to specific ways in which the **Holy Spirit** empowers people. Sometimes these specific ways are referred to as “gifts.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people receive specific “gifts” or “empowerings” from the **Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “gifts from the Holy Spirit” or “specific empowerings of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	2	4	m2p8	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν αὐτοῦ θέλησιν	1	according to his will	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “chose.” Alternate translation: “in just the way he wanted to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	2	4	jsav	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the word **his** could refer to: (1) **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s” (2) **the Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s” or “his own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	2	5	i3bh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For it was not to the angels that God subjected	Here, the word **For** primarily introduces a new topic into the discussion. However, it may also indicate that what the author says about this new topic supports or gives a basis for an earlier claim. If this is so, **For** could introduce support for the claim in [2:1](../02/01.md) about the need to “give attention,” or it could introduce support for the arguments in [1:5–14](../01/05.md) about how the Son is superior to the angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	2	5	rqr9	translate-unknown	τὴν οἰκουμένην τὴν μέλλουσαν	1	the world to come	Here, the word **world** is the same word that is translated “world” in [1:6](../01/06.md), and the author probably has the same **world** in mind here. He specifies that it is **coming**, which means that humans on earth do not yet experience this **world** but will experience it some day, when Jesus comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in the same way you did in [1:6](../01/06.md) and include the idea that humans will someday experience this **world**. Alternate translation: “the new world that God will give us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	2	5	bztr	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, the word **we** refers to the author, who is one who “speaks.” However, the author assumed that the audience was involved in the conversation by “hearing” what he “spoke,” so he uses **we**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to just the speaker by using a pronoun such as “I.” Alternate translation: “I am speaking” or “I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-HEB	2	6	jh56	writing-quotations	διεμαρτύρατο&πού τις λέγων	1	General Information:	Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He intentionally uses vague words to introduce the quotation, and he does not identify who wrote the words or where they could be found. The quotation comes from [Psalm 8:4–6](../../psa/08/04.md). Since the author intentionally avoids giving information about where the quotation comes from, you should not include such information in your translation. If your readers would not know where the quote comes from, you could include the reference in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you can read these words in the Scriptures:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	2	6	jh56	writing-quotations	διεμαρτύρατο & πού τις λέγων	1	General Information:	Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He intentionally uses vague words to introduce the quotation, and he does not identify who wrote the words or where they could be found. The quotation comes from [Psalm 8:4–6](../../psa/08/04.md). Since the author intentionally avoids giving information about where the quotation comes from, you should not include such information in your translation. If your readers would not know where the quote comes from, you could include the reference in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you can read these words in the Scriptures:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	2	6	m30v	figs-quotations	λέγων, τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν?	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the floowing two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “asking about what man is that you remember, or a son of man, that you watch over him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	6	df5a	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν?	1	What is man, that you are mindful of him?	The author does not include this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he includes it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing,” for nothing about **man** or a **son of man** is significant enough for God to **remember** or **watch over** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “Man has nothing that should make you remember him, and a son of man has nothing that should make you watch over him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	2	6	mz3y	figs-parallelism	τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν	1		Here, the quotation includes two questions that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “What is man, that you care about him” or “What is a son of man that you remember him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	2	6	vj7h	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος&αὐτοῦ&υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου&αὐτόν	1		The quotation refers to **man** and **son of man**, which are both singular and masculine. The author could intend these words primarily to identify: (1) humans in general. While he goes on to identify Jesus as the only human who currently fulfills these words (see [2:9](../02/09.md)), he intends the words first of all to refer to humans in general. Alternate translation: “a human … him or her … a child of a human … him or her” (2) Jesus, who calls himself a **son of man**. In this case, you should preserve the singular and masculine language. Alternate translation: “Man … him … the Son of Man … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-HEB	2	6	j50u	figs-yousingular	μιμνῄσκῃ&ἐπισκέπτῃ	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, the word **you** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	2	6	vj7h	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος & αὐτοῦ & υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου & αὐτόν	1		The quotation refers to **man** and **son of man**, which are both singular and masculine. The author could intend these words primarily to identify: (1) humans in general. While he goes on to identify Jesus as the only human who currently fulfills these words (see [2:9](../02/09.md)), he intends the words first of all to refer to humans in general. Alternate translation: “a human … him or her … a child of a human … him or her” (2) Jesus, who calls himself a **son of man**. In this case, you should preserve the singular and masculine language. Alternate translation: “Man … him … the Son of Man … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	2	6	j50u	figs-yousingular	μιμνῄσκῃ & ἐπισκέπτῃ	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, the word **you** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	2	6	wkd9	figs-idiom	υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Or a son of man, that you care for him?	In the culture of the quotation’s author, the phrase **son of man** was a way to refer to a person who was descended from other humans. In other words, it is another way to say **man** or “human.” Jesus used this phrase to refer to himself during his earthly life, so it is possible that the author of Hebrews intended **son of man** to refer to Jesus directly. However, the author never uses **son of man** to refer to Jesus anywhere else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could: (1) use a word or phrase that refers to humans in general. Alternate translation: “a human being” (2) use the same phrase that Jesus used to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	2	6	e47v	figs-ellipsis	υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Or a son of man	Here, the author does not include “what is” because he used these words in the first part of the sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include these words here. Alternate translation: “what is a son of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	2	7	pig3	figs-quotations	ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους; δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφάνωσας αὐτόν	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that your translation fits with how you expressed the first part of the quote in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You have made him a little lower than the angels; you have crowned him with glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	7	yb4f	figs-yousingular	ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι …ἐστεφάνωσας	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, the word **you** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-HEB	2	7	q9rb	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸν&αὐτόν	1		Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), the word **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “him or her … him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “him … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	2	7	q9rb	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸν & αὐτόν	1		Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), the word **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “him or her … him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “him … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	2	7	ka5a	figs-metaphor	ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους	1	a little lower than the angels	Here the quotation refers to how humans are **lower than the angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since **angels** live in heaven “above” and humans live on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that humans have less status and power than angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or a phrase that describes how humans have less status and power than **angels**. Alternate translation: “You have given him a little less status than the angels” or “You have made him a little less important than the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	2	7	s6dd	figs-idiom	βραχύ τι	1		Here, the phrase **a little** could refer primarily to place or to time. The author eventually applies the phrase to how Jesus was lower than the angels for **a little** time (see [2:9](../02/09.md)). However, the quotation itself suggests that humans have a place that is **a little** lower. If that is true, then the author later uses **a little** to refer to time in a play on words. You could express **a little** so that it refers to: (1) place. Alternate translation: “a little bit” (2) time. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	2	7	s85x	figs-metaphor	δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφάνωσας αὐτόν	1	you crowned him with glory and honor	Here the quotation refers to the **glory** and **honor** that God gave to humans as if, together, they formed a crown to be placed on the head of a king to signify his power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you gave him great glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -170,13 +170,13 @@ HEB	2	7	nee4	translate-textvariants	τιμῇ	1		After the word **honor**, many
 HEB	2	8	o9o7	figs-quotations	πάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “You have subjected all things under his feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	8	yn89	figs-yousingular	ὑπέταξας	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here the word **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	2	8	k5j2	figs-metaphor	πάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ	1	You put everything in subjection under his feet	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if **all things** could be under the **feet** of humans. In the author’s culture, something that is under feet has been conquered and is controlled by the person whose feet it is under. The point is that **all things** are conquered and controlled by humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “You made him control all things” or “You gave him authority over all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	2	8	ac9f	figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ&αὐτῷ&αὐτῷ	1	his feet … to him	Just as in [2:6–7](../02/06.md), the words **his** and **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “his or her … to him or her … to him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “his … to him … to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	2	8	ac9f	figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ & αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ	1	his feet … to him	Just as in [2:6–7](../02/06.md), the words **his** and **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “his or her … to him or her … to him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “his … to him … to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	2	8	sq9i	writing-quotations	ἐν τῷ γὰρ ὑποτάξαι τὰ πάντα	1		Here, the phrase **For in** introduces a restatement of part of the quote. The author restates this portion of the quote (**subjecting all the things**) so that he can comment on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “By using the phrase ‘subjecting all the things’” or “For with the words ‘subjecting all the things’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	2	8	nwci	writing-pronouns	ἀφῆκεν	1		Here, the word **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	2	8	rf44	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν ἀφῆκεν αὐτῷ ἀνυπότακτον	1	He did not leave anything not subjected to him	Here, the phrase **nothing not** means that there are no exceptions to how all things will be **subjected** to **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that only includes one negative. Alternate translation: “he did not omit anything that could be subjected to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-HEB	2	8	xy7c	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲν&ἀνυπότακτον&τὰ πάντα ὑποτεταγμένα	1	we do not yet see everything subjected to him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **subjected** rather than focusing on the person doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “nothing that God did not subject … God subjecting all the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	2	9	wlt0	figs-metaphor	τὸν&βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους ἠλαττωμένον	1		Here the author refers to how Jesus was **lower than the angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since angels live in heaven “above” and Jesus lived on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that **Jesus** had less status and power than the **angels**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that describes how **Jesus** had less status and power than **angels** during his incarnate life. See how you translated this clause in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “who had a little less status than the angels” or “who was a little less important than the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	2	9	ma4j	figs-activepassive	βραχύ τι&ἠλαττωμένον	1	who was made	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who **was made**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “making.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God made a little lower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	2	8	xy7c	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲν & ἀνυπότακτον & τὰ πάντα ὑποτεταγμένα	1	we do not yet see everything subjected to him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **subjected** rather than focusing on the person doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “nothing that God did not subject … God subjecting all the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	2	9	wlt0	figs-metaphor	τὸν & βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους ἠλαττωμένον	1		Here the author refers to how Jesus was **lower than the angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since angels live in heaven “above” and Jesus lived on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that **Jesus** had less status and power than the **angels**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that describes how **Jesus** had less status and power than **angels** during his incarnate life. See how you translated this clause in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “who had a little less status than the angels” or “who was a little less important than the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	2	9	ma4j	figs-activepassive	βραχύ τι & ἠλαττωμένον	1	who was made	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who **was made**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “making.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God made a little lower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	9	ck8i	figs-idiom	βραχύ τι	1		Here, the phrase **a little** could refer primarily to place or to time. Here, it is likely that the author uses the phrase to show that Jesus was lower than the angels for **a little** time. However, the phrase in the quotation in [2:7](../02/07.md) suggested that humans have a place that is **a little** lower. If that is true, then the author uses the same phrase that referred to place in the quotation, but he uses it to refer to time. You could express **a little** so that it refers to: (1) time. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (2) place. Alternate translation: “a little bit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	2	9	i4fc	figs-metaphor	δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφανωμένον	1	lower than the angels … crowned with glory and honor	Here the quotation refers to the **glory** and **honor** that God gave to **Jesus** as if, together, they formed a crown to be placed on the head of a king to signify his power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this phrase in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “given great glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	2	9	uri1	figs-activepassive	ἐστεφανωμένον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus**, who is **crowned**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “crowning.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -198,18 +198,18 @@ HEB	2	10	nkus	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς δόξαν	1		If your language does not
 HEB	2	10	sw9t	figs-possession	τὸν ἀρχηγὸν τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν	1	the leader of their salvation	Here the author uses the possessive form to speak of Jesus, the **founding leader**, who establishes and leads his people to **salvation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a verbal phrase that refers to what Jesus does as **founding leader**. Alternate translation: “the one who leads them to salvation” or “their leader, who establishes their salvation,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	2	10	l321	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν, διὰ παθημάτων	1	complete	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **salvation** and **sufferings**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “save” and “suffer.” Alternate translation: “who saves them through what he suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	2	11	ky9v	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the one who sanctifies	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how believers can be called “sons” (see [2:10](../02/10.md)) and of why Jesus suffered in order to save these “sons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Everyone who believes is a son, because” or “He saved them through sufferings because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	2	11	jy9p	figs-explicit	ὅ&ἁγιάζων, καὶ οἱ ἁγιαζόμενοι	1	General Information:	Here, the phrase **the one who sanctifies** refers to Jesus, and the phrase **those who are being sanctified** refers to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the one who sanctifies, Jesus, and we who are being sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	2	11	jy9p	figs-explicit	ὅ & ἁγιάζων, καὶ οἱ ἁγιαζόμενοι	1	General Information:	Here, the phrase **the one who sanctifies** refers to Jesus, and the phrase **those who are being sanctified** refers to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the one who sanctifies, Jesus, and we who are being sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	2	11	jzw3	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἁγιαζόμενοι	1	those who are sanctified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **being sanctified** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “Jesus” does it. Alternate translation: “those whom Jesus is sanctifying” or “those whom he is sanctifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	11	bj7i	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἑνὸς πάντες	1	have one source	Here, the word **one** could refer to: (1) God the Father, who is the source of all humans and also of God the Son. Alternate translation: “all have one source, God himself” or “all have the same Father” (2) type or common origin. Alternate translation: “all have one common origin” or “are all humans together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	2	11	ul23	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται	1	he is not ashamed	Here, the word **he** refers back to the **the one who sanctifies**, who is Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus is not ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	2	11	k1q5	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται	1	is not ashamed to call them brothers	Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-HEB	2	11	h8rz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται&καλεῖν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **ashamed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaming.” Alternate translation: “he does not feel shame when he calls” or “he does not worry when others shame him for calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	2	11	h8rz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται & καλεῖν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **ashamed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaming.” Alternate translation: “he does not feel shame when he calls” or “he does not worry when others shame him for calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	11	a8h9	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὺς	1	brothers	Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	2	11	gacv	translate-kinship	ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοὺς καλεῖν	1		In [2:10](../02/10.md), believers are called **sons** of God; here believers are called **brothers** of Jesus. The words **sons** and **brothers** both refer to everyone who believes, and the terms identify how believers are part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using an analogy. Alternate translation: “to refer to them as people who are like brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	2	12	y2es	writing-quotations	λέγων	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken to God about his **brothers**. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 22:22](../../psa/22/22.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the Son has spoken to God, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as you can see when he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	2	12	dtkn	figs-quotations	λέγων, ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that he will proclaim your name to his brothers; he will sing to you in the midst of the assembly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	12	cou1	figs-parallelism	ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε	1		Here, the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. The author of Hebrews particularly focuses on the word **brothers**, so be sure to include that term in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will sing praise to you in the midst of my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	2	12	kewm	figs-yousingular	σου&σε	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	2	12	kewm	figs-yousingular	σου & σε	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	2	12	e88p	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	I will proclaim your name to my brothers	Here, the word **name** refers to what the person who has that **name** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to what a person is like. Alternate translation: “who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	2	12	yh0b	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου	1		Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author of the quotation is using it to refer to all those who worship God, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	2	12	bui0	translate-kinship	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου	1		Just as in [2:11](../02/11.md), the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “to the people who are like my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ HEB	2	13	y4vb	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ	1		Here, the word **Behold*
 HEB	2	13	xap9	translate-kinship	τὰ παιδία	1	the children	Here, the phrase **little children** refers to everyone who believes. Just as Jesus is a “son” of God the Father (see [1:2](../01/02.md)), those who believe in him are also **children** of God (see also [2:10](../02/10.md)). Being **little children** who belong to God means that believers are part of God’s family and siblings of Jesus. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using an analogy. Alternate translation: “the people who are like God’s little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	2	14	e1ie	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		Here the author draws an inference from how Jesus has many “brothers,” who are also God’s **little children** (see [2:11–13](../02/11.md). The word **Therefore** also introduces a new development in the argument, since the author now begins to talk about what Jesus has done for those who believe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or a development in the argument. Alternate translation: “In light of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	2	14	qj3d	translate-kinship	τὰ παιδία	1	the children	Here, the phrase **little children** refers back to the phrase as it appears in the quotation in the previous verse (see [2:13](../02/13.md)). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “the people who are like God’s little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-HEB	2	14	ndv2	figs-idiom	κεκοινώνηκεν&μετέσχεν	1	share in flesh and blood	Here, the words **share in** and **shared in** refer to having things in common. The phrases do not mean that all humans and Jesus all have a piece of **flesh and blood**. Rather, they mean that all humans and Jesus are people who are **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to some characteristic that people have in common. Alternate translation: “have in common … participated in” or “are characterized by … chose to be characterized by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	2	14	ndv2	figs-idiom	κεκοινώνηκεν & μετέσχεν	1	share in flesh and blood	Here, the words **share in** and **shared in** refer to having things in common. The phrases do not mean that all humans and Jesus all have a piece of **flesh and blood**. Rather, they mean that all humans and Jesus are people who are **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to some characteristic that people have in common. Alternate translation: “have in common … participated in” or “are characterized by … chose to be characterized by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	2	14	wj5y	figs-hendiadys	αἵματος καὶ σαρκός	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together identify what it means to be human, which includes eventually dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “humanity” or “what it means to be human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 HEB	2	14	fy7a	writing-pronouns	τῶν αὐτῶν	1	he likewise shared in the same	Here, the phrase **the same things** refers back to **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “the same flesh and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	2	14	p878	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τοῦ θανάτου	1	through death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “when he died,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -233,11 +233,11 @@ HEB	2	15	w0x1	figs-infostructure	ἀπαλλάξῃ τούτους, ὅσοι φ
 HEB	2	15	cp8e	figs-abstractnouns	φόβῳ θανάτου	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **fear** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “fear” and “die” or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “by how they fear to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	2	15	lhv7	figs-idiom	διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν	1		Here, the phrase **throughout all their lives** refers to the entire time period during which a person is alive. Use a natural form in your language to refer to the span of a person’s life. Alternate translation: “during their lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	2	15	mjxb	figs-activepassive	ἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **held in slavery** rather than focusing on the person doing the “holding.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, or you could state that the “devil” did it. Alternate translation: “someone held in slavery” or “the devil held in slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	2	15	llc1	figs-abstractnouns	ἔνοχοι&δουλείας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **slavery**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “enslaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	2	15	llc1	figs-abstractnouns	ἔνοχοι & δουλείας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **slavery**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “enslaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	2	16	c31g	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of why the Son shared in “flesh and blood” and died. He did this because he **takes hold of** humans, not angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He did those things because”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	2	16	b3b3	figs-idiom	δήπου	1		Here, the phrase **of course** identifies the claim as something that everyone knows to be true. In other words, the author does not think that the claim needs to be proven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a claim that does not need proof. Alternate translation: “obviously” or “it is clear that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	2	16	ewau	figs-infostructure	οὐ&ἀγγέλων ἐπιλαμβάνεται, ἀλλὰ σπέρματος Ἀβραὰμ ἐπιλαμβάνεται	1		If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “he takes hold of the descendant of Abraham. He does not take hold of angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	2	16	meaw	translate-unknown	οὐ&ἐπιλαμβάνεται&ἐπιλαμβάνεται.	1		Here, the phrase **take hold of** could refer to: (1) how someone **takes** someone by the hand or the shoulder and leads them where they need to go. In other words, someone who **takes hold of** someone else is helping or taking care of them. Alternate translation: “he does not assist … he assists” (2) how someone **takes** someone else’s specific nature or kind. In other words, Jesus took the nature of **the descendant of Abraham**, not the nature of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “he does not take the nature of … he takes the nature of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	2	16	ewau	figs-infostructure	οὐ & ἀγγέλων ἐπιλαμβάνεται, ἀλλὰ σπέρματος Ἀβραὰμ ἐπιλαμβάνεται	1		If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “he takes hold of the descendant of Abraham. He does not take hold of angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	2	16	meaw	translate-unknown	οὐ & ἐπιλαμβάνεται & ἐπιλαμβάνεται.	1		Here, the phrase **take hold of** could refer to: (1) how someone **takes** someone by the hand or the shoulder and leads them where they need to go. In other words, someone who **takes hold of** someone else is helping or taking care of them. Alternate translation: “he does not assist … he assists” (2) how someone **takes** someone else’s specific nature or kind. In other words, Jesus took the nature of **the descendant of Abraham**, not the nature of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “he does not take the nature of … he takes the nature of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	2	16	hasp	grammar-collectivenouns	σπέρματος	1		Here, the word **descendant** is a singular noun that refers to a group of “descendants.” If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the descendants” or “the group of descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 HEB	2	16	yy68	translate-kinship	σπέρματος Ἀβραὰμ	1		Here, the phrase **descendant of Abraham** refers to those who are descended from **Abraham**, which are the Israelites or Jews. However, the author applies a promise made to **Abraham** to his audience, whether they were Jews or not (see [6:13–20](../06/13.md)). Because of this, he thinks that each person who believes in Jesus receives the promise and is a **descendant of Abraham**. In your translation, make it clear that **descendant** is not just about physical descendants but rather about who belongs in Abraham’s family, whether they were born in that family or not. Alternate translation: “the spiritual descendant of Abraham” or “each one whom God considers a descendant of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	2	17	b0o3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅθεν	1		Here, the phrase **from which** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what the author has argued, particularly what he wrote in [2:16](../02/16.md). Because Jesus focuses on “the descendants of Abraham,” he is **obligated to become like** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “so you can see that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ HEB	2	17	uc7e	translate-unknown	τὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν	1		Here, the ph
 HEB	2	17	u6ch	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὸ ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ	1	he would bring about the pardon of the people’s sins	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **atonement** and **sins**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “atone” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “in order to atone for how the people sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	2	18	gqfo	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how Jesus functions as “a merciful and faithful high priest.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He can be merciful and faithful because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	2	18	jnzj	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς	1		Here, the word **himself** emphasizes Jesus in order to set up the comparison with everyone else who is **tempted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes **he**, that is, Jesus. Alternate translation: “is one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	2	18	xde4	figs-activepassive	πειρασθείς&πειραζομένοις	1	was tempted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things “tempt” people. Alternate translation: “things having tempted him … whom things tempt” or “having experienced temptation … who experience temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	2	18	xde4	figs-activepassive	πειρασθείς & πειραζομένοις	1	was tempted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things “tempt” people. Alternate translation: “things having tempted him … whom things tempt” or “having experienced temptation … who experience temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	18	a3a6		πέπονθεν αὐτὸς, πειρασθείς	1	who are tempted	Here, the phrase **having been tempted** could identify: (1) the situation in which Jesus **suffered**. Alternate translation: “he himself had suffered when he was tempted” (2) what resulted from the “suffering.” Alternate translation: “he was tempted when he suffered”
 HEB	3	intro	mu26			0		# Hebrews 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)<br>      * Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)<br>      * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [3:7b–11](../03/07.md), [15](../03/15.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Today”<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” The author mentions “today” again in [3:13](../03/13.md), [15](../03/15.md). In both of these verses, he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” So, anything that happens during the time we call “today” must happen every day, since every day is “today.” In this way, the author shows that the quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) applies to his audience every day. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])<br><br>### Rest<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “rest.” In the context of the Psalm, this “rest” probably refers to the land that God promised to give to the Israelites. However, scholars debate what the author of Hebrews means when he uses the word “rest.” This is important because the author speaks much more about “rest” in chapter 4. There are two major options for what “rest” could mean: (1) “rest” could refer to how people rest, that is, to the state or experience of “resting.” (2) “rest” could refer to the place where people rest. For the author of Hebrews, this place of “rest” is either in heaven or on a renewed earth. Before you choose how to translate “rest,” consider reading [Hebrews 4:1–11](../../heb/04/01.md) so that you can decide what the author means when he uses “rest.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “house” in [3:1–6](../03/01.md)<br><br>In [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the author refers to a “house.” In the author’s culture, “house” could refer to a building that people live in, or it could refer to a “household” or a group of related people. In these verses, the author uses both meanings of “house.” In [3:2](../03/02.md), [5–6](../03/05.md), “house” refers to a group of related people, God’s people. In [3:3–4](../03/03.md), “house” refers to a building that people live in. In these verses, the author uses a “house” (the building) as an example to explain more about the “house” (the people). If you do not have a word that could mean both “building” and “people,” you may need to express “house” with two different words. If so, you will need to make sure that your readers know that the author is comparing a building to people, especially in [3:3–4](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>The author asks several questions in this chapter (see [3:16–18](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about the quotation from Psalm 95. In [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the second question in each verse answers the first question. In [3:18](../03/18.md), the second half of the question answers the first half of the question. For ways to translate these questions, see the notes on [3:16–18](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The quotation from Psalm 95<br><br>David wrote [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) many years after the events that the psalm refers to. You can read the story about these events in [Num 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md) (see also the related story in [Exodus 17:1–7](../../exo/17/01.md)). In these stories, the Israelites complain and disobey God, and God punishes them. David refers back to these stories to encourage the Israelites, whom he ruled, to act differently. He wanted them to listen to and obey God. The author of Hebrews quotes what David wrote for a similar reason. He wants to encourage his audience to listen to and obey God, and he shows that what David wrote still applies to his audience. Consider reading the Old Testament stories and Psalm 95 before translating this chapter. See the notes for places where the author refers directly to Psalm 95 or to the Old Testament stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])<br><br>### What does “for 40 years” modify?<br><br>In [3:10](../03/10.md), “for 40 years” tells how long the Israelites saw God’s works. However, in [3:17](../03/17.md), it refers to the time during which God “was very angry” with the Israelites. This is not a contradiction, because the author knew that the Israelites saw God’s works and that God was very angry with them during the same period of “40 years.” There is no need to harmonize these two verses.
 HEB	3	1	m1cv	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅθεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what the author has said about Jesus in [2:5–18](../02/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “As a result of all that” or “Because of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -266,25 +266,25 @@ HEB	3	2	k4u8	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the word **his** refers to G
 HEB	3	2	wnzn	translate-textvariants	τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1		Instead of **his house**, many ancient manuscripts have the phrase “all his house.” This phrase is in the Old Testament story about **Moses** (see [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md)). So, it is possible that scribes added “all” to **his house** because they knew this passage. Unless there is a good reason to use “all his house,” you should use **his house**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 HEB	3	3	os46	translate-versebridge		0		To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the general principle about buildings and builders in a first sentence and the application of that general principle in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For every house is built by someone, and the one building the house has greater honor than the house. According to that much, since God is the one who built all things, this one has been considered worthy of greater glory than Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 HEB	3	3	b1zp	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		Here, the phrase **this one** refers to Jesus, the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	3	3	py5n	figs-activepassive	οὗτος&ἠξίωται	1	Jesus has been considered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **has been considered worthy** rather than focusing on the person doing the “considering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has considered this one worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	3	3	yl7d	figs-abstractnouns	πλείονος&δόξης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to be more glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	3	3	w8v5	figs-abstractnouns	πλείονα τιμὴν ἔχει&ὁ κατασκευάσας αὐτόν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “more honorable the one building the house is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	3	3	i68f		τοῦ οἴκου&αὐτόν	1		Here the author uses the word **house** plainly to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “the structure … than the structure”
-HEB	3	4	wvw1	figs-activepassive	πᾶς&οἶκος κατασκευάζεται ὑπό τινος	1	every house is built by someone	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **house** that is **built** rather than focusing on the person doing the “building.” Alternate translation: “someone built every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	3	4	aya1		πᾶς&οἶκος	1		Here, just as in [3:3](../03/03.md), the author uses the word **house** plainly to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that here the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses. Alternate translation: “every structure”
-HEB	3	4	f8n8	figs-metaphor	ὁ&πάντα κατασκευάσας	1	the one who built everything	Here the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this way to connect God’s act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	3	3	py5n	figs-activepassive	οὗτος & ἠξίωται	1	Jesus has been considered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **has been considered worthy** rather than focusing on the person doing the “considering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has considered this one worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	3	3	yl7d	figs-abstractnouns	πλείονος & δόξης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to be more glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	3	3	w8v5	figs-abstractnouns	πλείονα τιμὴν ἔχει & ὁ κατασκευάσας αὐτόν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “more honorable the one building the house is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	3	3	i68f		τοῦ οἴκου & αὐτόν	1		Here the author uses the word **house** plainly to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “the structure … than the structure”
+HEB	3	4	wvw1	figs-activepassive	πᾶς & οἶκος κατασκευάζεται ὑπό τινος	1	every house is built by someone	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **house** that is **built** rather than focusing on the person doing the “building.” Alternate translation: “someone built every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	3	4	aya1		πᾶς & οἶκος	1		Here, just as in [3:3](../03/03.md), the author uses the word **house** plainly to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that here the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses. Alternate translation: “every structure”
+HEB	3	4	f8n8	figs-metaphor	ὁ & πάντα κατασκευάσας	1	the one who built everything	Here the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this way to connect God’s act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	3	5	c8wh	figs-extrainfo	Μωϋσῆς μὲν πιστὸς ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ, ὡς θεράπων	1		Here, just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could use a footnote to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	3	5	d57q	figs-metaphor	ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1	in God’s entire house	Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, in this case the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among God’s entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	3	5	uz5d	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the word **his** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	3	5	m4xr	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν	1	bearing witness about the things	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **testimony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “testify” or “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “to testify to the things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	5	u37w	figs-explicit	τῶν λαληθησομένων	1		Here the author does not clarify what exactly is **spoken**. He may be referring to what God the Father said about the Son in chapter 1, or he could be referring in general to the good news about Jesus. If your readers need to know what is **spoken**, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the good news that would be spoken in the future” or “of the things that would be spoken about Jesus in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	3	5	gt8c	figs-activepassive	λαληθησομένων	1	were to be spoken of in the future	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the words that are **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God would speak in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	3	6	nsfg	figs-ellipsis	Χριστὸς&ὡς Υἱὸς	1		Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. He omits these words because he stated them in the previous verse (“was faithful”). If your language needs these words to make a complete thought, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “Christ was faithful as a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+HEB	3	6	nsfg	figs-ellipsis	Χριστὸς & ὡς Υἱὸς	1		Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. He omits these words because he stated them in the previous verse (“was faithful”). If your language needs these words to make a complete thought, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “Christ was faithful as a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	3	6	dgt5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς	1	Son	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. See how you translated this word in [1:2](../01/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 HEB	3	6	pfrj	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **over his house** contrasts with how Moses was “in his entire house” (see [3:5](../03/05.md)). The phrase **over his house** indicates that the **Son** rules or is in charge of the **house**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the implications of **over his house** explicit. Alternate translation: “in charge of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	3	6	djm7	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς	1	in charge of God’s house	Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, in this case God’s people. See how you translated house in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “over his clan (whose clan we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	3	6	x89x	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ, οὗ	1		Here, the words **his* and **whose** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronouns refer to God. Alternate translation: “God’s … whose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	3	6	u94p	figs-infostructure	οἶκον&οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς, ἐὰν τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.	1		This sentence transitions from what the author has said about God’s **house**, Jesus, and Moses to an exhortation to continue to **hold fast**. The ULT has connected the sentence to the preceding information but put it in parentheses to indicate that it is slightly disconnected. Consider a natural way to include a transition sentence in your language. Alternate translation: “house. We are his house if we hold fast to the confidence and the boasting of our hope.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	3	6	u94p	figs-infostructure	οἶκον & οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς, ἐὰν τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.	1		This sentence transitions from what the author has said about God’s **house**, Jesus, and Moses to an exhortation to continue to **hold fast**. The ULT has connected the sentence to the preceding information but put it in parentheses to indicate that it is slightly disconnected. Consider a natural way to include a transition sentence in your language. Alternate translation: “house. We are his house if we hold fast to the confidence and the boasting of our hope.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	3	6	tlak	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν	1		Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding fast” leads to being God’s **house**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 HEB	3	6	v817	translate-unknown	κατάσχωμεν	1		Here, the phrase **hold fast** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. Alternate translation: “we tightly grasp” or “we remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	3	6	kp9y	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν	1	if we hold fast to our courage and the hope of which we boast	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confidence**, **boasting**, and **hope**, you could express those ideas by using verbs and adjectives or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “we keep being confident and proud about what we hope for” or “we continue to boldly await and speak joyfully about the things that we expect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -303,15 +303,15 @@ HEB	3	8	kddy	figs-possession	τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ	1
 HEB	3	9	e6n7	figs-quotations	οὗ ἐπείρασαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ, καὶ εἶδον τὰ ἔργα μου,	1	General Information:	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “where your fathers tested him by examination, and they saw his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	3	9	i3wb	translate-kinship	οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν	1	your ancestors	Here, the phrase **your fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. The audience of the original quotation were Israelites who descended from these people. Use a word or phrase that refers to ancestors. Alternate translation: “your forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	3	9	bbzv	figs-gendernotations	οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν	1		Although the word **fathers** is masculine, it refers to any ancestors, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “your fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-HEB	3	9	uj2z	figs-123person	οὗ ἐπείρασαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν&μου	1		Beginning in this verse, God speaks directly, using first-person pronouns. In the previous two verses, the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the same person for the pronouns throughout the quotation, or you could indicate that God is speaking directly here. Alternate translation: “where, as God says, your fathers tested me … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-HEB	3	9	td5w	figs-doublet	ἐπείρασαν&ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ	1		Here, the words **tested** and **examination** refer to basically the same thing. The word **tested** refers to the act of “testing,” while **examination** refers to the “test” itself. The author of the quotation uses both words to emphasize how the **fathers** “examined” God. If the repetition would be confusing, and if using both words is not emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with one word or phrase. Alternate translation: “examined me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	3	9	uj2z	figs-123person	οὗ ἐπείρασαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν & μου	1		Beginning in this verse, God speaks directly, using first-person pronouns. In the previous two verses, the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the same person for the pronouns throughout the quotation, or you could indicate that God is speaking directly here. Alternate translation: “where, as God says, your fathers tested me … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+HEB	3	9	td5w	figs-doublet	ἐπείρασαν & ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ	1		Here, the words **tested** and **examination** refer to basically the same thing. The word **tested** refers to the act of “testing,” while **examination** refers to the “test” itself. The author of the quotation uses both words to emphasize how the **fathers** “examined” God. If the repetition would be confusing, and if using both words is not emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with one word or phrase. Alternate translation: “examined me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	3	9	q7c2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ	1	by testing me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **examination**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “examine.” Alternate translation: “by examining me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	9	k3kf	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “perform” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what I performed” or “what I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	9	fg7n	figs-explicit	καὶ εἶδον τὰ ἔργα μου	1		Here, the clause **they saw my works** could refer to: (1) how the **fathers tested** God even though they **saw** the amazing **works** that God did to rescue them and bring them through the wilderness. Alternate translation: “even though they saw my powerful deeds” (2) how God acted to punish the **fathers** for how they **tested** him. Alternate translation: “and they saw how I punished them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	3	10	cgs9	figs-quotations	τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη. διὸ προσώχθισα τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, καὶ εἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was very angry with that generation, and he said, ‘They are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	3	10	qap2	figs-infostructure	τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη	1		Here, the phrase **for 40 years** goes with the end of the previous verse and tells how long “they saw my works”([3:9](../03/09.md)). You could include these words at the end of verse 9, or you could include them here in verse 10 and show with punctuation that they belong with the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	3	10	upb8	translate-unknown	προσώχθισα	1	I was displeased	Here, the phrase **I was very angry** indicates that God was properly angry or displeased with the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to proper or appropriate anger and displeasure. Alternate translation: “I was displeased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	3	10	ohlh	figs-123person	διὸ προσώχθισα&εἶπον	1		Just as in [3:9](../03/09.md), God speaks directly using first person pronouns. However, in [3:7–8](../03/07.md), the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. Use the same translation strategy that you used in [3:9](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, as God says, I was very angry … I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+HEB	3	10	ohlh	figs-123person	διὸ προσώχθισα & εἶπον	1		Just as in [3:9](../03/09.md), God speaks directly using first person pronouns. However, in [3:7–8](../03/07.md), the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. Use the same translation strategy that you used in [3:9](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, as God says, I was very angry … I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 HEB	3	10	bfu5	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου;	1		If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that they are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 HEB	3	10	lz7n	figs-parallelism	ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “They are always going astray from my ways in their hearts” or “Their hearts have never know my ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	3	10	kh4v	figs-metaphor	ἀεὶ πλανῶνται	1	They have always gone astray in their hearts	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the Israelites were traveling down the wrong road. He speaks in this way to indicate that they were not following God properly. Someone who is **going astray** does not want to do what is right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “They are not following me” or “They are happy to disobey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -335,11 +335,11 @@ HEB	3	12	kjm7	figs-idiom	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	the living God	Here, the phra
 HEB	3	13	d3k2	writing-quotations	ἄχρις οὗ, τὸ σήμερον, καλεῖται	1	as long as it is called “today,”	Here the author refers to **today** in such a way that the audience would know that he was referring to how the quotation used the word **today** (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Use a form in your language that shows that the author is referring back to the quotation. Alternate translation: “as long as it is called ‘today,’ as the psalmist wrote,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	3	13	jn9s	figs-idiom	ἄχρις οὗ, τὸ σήμερον, καλεῖται	1		Here the author speaks about a time that we call **today**. We call every day **today**, so this phrase means that we should **exhort one another** all the time. However, since the author of Hebrews uses **today** because the author of the quotation used it, make sure that you use the same words that you used to translate **today** in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “as long as we live in the time that we call ‘this day’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	3	13	m1e7	figs-activepassive	μὴ σκληρυνθῇ τις ἐξ ὑμῶν ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	no one among you will be hardened by the deceitfulness of sin	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **hardened** rather than focusing on what does the “hardening.” Alternate translation: “the deceitfulness of sin hardens no one among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	3	13	b198	figs-metaphor	σκληρυνθῇ&ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	no one among you will be hardened by the deceitfulness of sin	Here the author speaks of becoming stubborn or unwilling to obey or trust in God as if the person were **hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “becomes stubborn because of the deceitfulness of sin” or “stops trusting God because of the deceitfulness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	3	13	b198	figs-metaphor	σκληρυνθῇ & ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	no one among you will be hardened by the deceitfulness of sin	Here the author speaks of becoming stubborn or unwilling to obey or trust in God as if the person were **hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “becomes stubborn because of the deceitfulness of sin” or “stops trusting God because of the deceitfulness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	3	13	enjy	figs-possession	ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to characterize **sin** as something that has **deceitfulness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more naturally. Alternate translation: “by sin deceiving you” or “by the way that sin deceives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	3	13	sye2	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **deceitfulness**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “deceive” or an adjective such as “deceitful.” Alternate translation: “by how sin deceives” or “by deceitful sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	14	znu5	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	General Information:	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the audience should “exhort one another”(see [3:13](../03/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “You should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	3	14	f52j	figs-possession	μέτοχοι&τοῦ Χριστοῦ γεγόναμεν	1	For we have become	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that believers “share” **Christ**. See how you translated **sharers** in [3:1](../03/01.md). More specifically, **sharers of Christ** could mean that believers: (1) “share” the promise and the blessings together with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “we have with Christ shared the blessings” (2) “share” or participate in **Christ** himself. Alternate translation: “we have shared in Christ” or “we have participated in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	3	14	f52j	figs-possession	μέτοχοι & τοῦ Χριστοῦ γεγόναμεν	1	For we have become	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that believers “share” **Christ**. See how you translated **sharers** in [3:1](../03/01.md). More specifically, **sharers of Christ** could mean that believers: (1) “share” the promise and the blessings together with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “we have with Christ shared the blessings” (2) “share” or participate in **Christ** himself. Alternate translation: “we have shared in Christ” or “we have participated in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	3	14	e753	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐάνπερ	1	if we firmly hold to our confidence in him	Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding firm” leads to being **sharers of Christ**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 HEB	3	14	zskg	translate-unknown	βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν	1		Here, the phrase **hold firm** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. See how you expressed the similar idea in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “we tightly grasp” or “we remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	3	14	j3aq	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς ὑποστάσεως	1	from the beginning	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **beginning** and **confidence**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “began” and “trust.” Alternate translation: “from the time when we first believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -350,14 +350,14 @@ HEB	3	15	wa11	writing-quotations	ἐν τῷ λέγεσθαι	1	if you hear his
 HEB	3	15	j8dh	figs-quotations	ἐν τῷ λέγεσθαι, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ.	1	as in the rebellion	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “while it is said that today, if you hear his voice, you should not harden your hearts as in the rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	3	15	zn0d		σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ	1		Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:7b–8a](../03/07.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in those verses.
 HEB	3	16	inhs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces [3:16–19](../03/16.md), which further explain the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “In the quotation,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	3	16	b4jy	figs-rquestion	τίνες&ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν? ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντες οἱ ἐξελθόντες ἐξ Αἰγύπτου διὰ Μωϋσέως?	1		The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “it was those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who heard** and **provoked** with **all those who came out from Egypt through Moses**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are who heard and provoked him. It was all those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” or “which ones who heard provoked him? It was all those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-HEB	3	16	pwl2	figs-distinguish	ἀκούσαντες&ἐξελθόντες	1	Who was it who heard God and rebelled? Was it not all those who came out of Egypt through Moses?	Here, the phrases **who heard** and **who came out** introduce phrases that distinguish or identify the people that the author is speaking about. Use a form in your language which identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “that heard … that came out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+HEB	3	16	b4jy	figs-rquestion	τίνες & ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν? ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντες οἱ ἐξελθόντες ἐξ Αἰγύπτου διὰ Μωϋσέως?	1		The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “it was those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who heard** and **provoked** with **all those who came out from Egypt through Moses**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are who heard and provoked him. It was all those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” or “which ones who heard provoked him? It was all those who came out from Egypt through Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+HEB	3	16	pwl2	figs-distinguish	ἀκούσαντες & ἐξελθόντες	1	Who was it who heard God and rebelled? Was it not all those who came out of Egypt through Moses?	Here, the phrases **who heard** and **who came out** introduce phrases that distinguish or identify the people that the author is speaking about. Use a form in your language which identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “that heard … that came out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 HEB	3	16	ldi4		ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν	1		The author uses the words **heard** and **provoked** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “hear his voice” in [3:7](../03/07.md) and “provocation” in [3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “who heard his voice participated in the provocation”
 HEB	3	16	yfdd	figs-go	οἱ ἐξελθόντες	1		Here, the phrase **came out** refers to leaving a country or area. Use a word for this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “those who went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-HEB	3	17	swy4	figs-rquestion	τίσιν&προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ?	1	With whom was he angry for forty years? Was it not with those who sinned, whose dead bodies fell in the wilderness?	The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **with whom he was very angry** with **those who sinned**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are with whom he was very angry for 40 years. It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” or “with whom was he very angry for 40 years? It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+HEB	3	17	swy4	figs-rquestion	τίσιν & προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ?	1	With whom was he angry for forty years? Was it not with those who sinned, whose dead bodies fell in the wilderness?	The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **with whom he was very angry** with **those who sinned**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are with whom he was very angry for 40 years. It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” or “with whom was he very angry for 40 years? It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	3	17	goid		προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη	1		The author uses the phrases **was he very angry** and **for 40 years** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “I was very angry” and “for 40 years” in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “was he displeased for those 40 years”
 HEB	3	17	uhga	figs-idiom	ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1		The author uses these words because he found them in [Numbers 14:29](../../num/14/29.md), where God tells Moses what is going to happen to **those who sinned**. The phrase **corpses fell** refers to people dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to people dying. Alternate translation: “who fell down dead in the wilderness” or “who were buried in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	3	18	l1gc	figs-rquestion	τίσιν&ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν?	1	To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second half of the question gives the answer to the first half: “it was those who disobeyed.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who disobeyed** with “those to whom he swore.” Alternate translation: “you know who they are to whom he swore that they would not enter into his rest. It was to those who disobeyed.” or “to whom did he swear that they would not enter into his rest? It was to those who disobeyed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+HEB	3	18	l1gc	figs-rquestion	τίσιν & ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν?	1	To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second half of the question gives the answer to the first half: “it was those who disobeyed.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who disobeyed** with “those to whom he swore.” Alternate translation: “you know who they are to whom he swore that they would not enter into his rest. It was to those who disobeyed.” or “to whom did he swear that they would not enter into his rest? It was to those who disobeyed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	3	18	q16u		ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1	they would not enter his rest	The author uses the clause **they would not enter into his rest** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “If they will enter into my rest” in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “did he swear, ‘they will never enter into my rest,’”
 HEB	3	19	impp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1		Here, the word **And** introduces a summary or conclusion for the argument, especially for what the author has said in [3:16–18](../03/16.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a summary or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	3	19	henz	figs-infostructure	βλέπομεν ὅτι οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν εἰσελθεῖν δι’ ἀπιστίαν	1		If your language would naturally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the sentence. The author puts **because of unbelief** last in order to emphasize it, so use a form that emphasizes this phrase. Alternate translation: “we see that it was because of unbelief that they were not able to enter”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -366,16 +366,16 @@ HEB	3	19	evf1	figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν	1		Here the author uses the wor
 HEB	3	19	x18z	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ἀπιστίαν	1	because of unbelief	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unbelief**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “did not believe” or an adjective such as “unbelieving.” Alternate translation: “because they were unbelieving” or “because they refused to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	intro	u72n			0		# Hebrews 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)<br>      * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)<br>      * Exhortation: The power of God’s word (4:12–13)<br>4. Summary statement (4:14–16)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### God’s rest<br><br>The author continues to refer to “rest” in this chapter. This time, he also includes how God “rested” after he created everything. Continue to translate “rest” the way you did in chapter 3. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])<br><br>### “Today”<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” Much like in the previous chapter, the author references “today” several times (see [4:7–8](../04/07.md)). In [4:7](../04/07.md), he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” This means that the “rest” is available “today,” or right now. In [4:8](../04/08.md), the author refers to “another day” that happens after Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. This refers again to “today” from the psalm quotation. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day or time, and translate “day” so that it is clear that it refers to “today.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])<br><br>### Joshua, David, and the audience<br><br>In [4:7–9](../04/07.md), the author makes an argument that is based on sequence in time. First, Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. Many years later, God spoke through David that people could enter the rest “today.” Finally, the author quotes these words to his audience after Jesus died and rose again. The author’s point is that what Joshua led the Israelites into could not count as “rest,” because David was still speaking about entering the “rest” many years later. The author argues that this means that the words about entering the rest still apply when he himself is writing this letter. When you translate these verses, make sure that your readers understand that the author is making an argument based on sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])<br><br>### Jesus the high priest<br><br>In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), much like in [2:17](../02/17.md), the author refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. Here the author begins to develop that theme by showing that Jesus is a sympathetic and merciful high priest. Translate “high priest” like you did in [2:17](../02/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The word of God as a sword<br><br>In [4:12](../04/12.md), the author says that God’s word is “sharper than any two-edged sword,” and it can “pierce” and “divide” people’s joints and marrow and their souls and spirits. The author makes this comparison because he wants to show that God uses his “word” to discern and judge everything, even things that are very hard to know or understand. Just like a sharp sword can cut anything apart, even things that are securely fastened together, so God uses his “word” to get to the core of what every person is and thinks. If possible, preserve the comparison between God’s word and a sharp blade, since this is an important metaphor that appears in other biblical books. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Who “speaks” the quotations?<br><br>In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), the author refers to the person who “speaks” the quotations as “he.” Since the author identified the Holy Spirit as the one who “speaks” Psalm 95, it is likely that he is referring to the Holy Spirit again as the speaker of these quotations. However, it is also possible that the author means that God, considered as a whole, speaks these quotations, or perhaps the author is avoiding identifying the speaker. If possible, preserve the ambiguity by referring simply to “he” or an unnamed person. If necessary, you could make it more explicit that the “Holy Spirit” or “God” speaks these words. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])<br><br>### The logic of [4:3–7](../04/03.md)<br><br>In [4:3–7](../04/03.md), the author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to comment on [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). This is a complicated argument, and it is likely that the author is making several points.<br><br>First (1), he could be identifying the “rest” as the result of God’s “works.” In other words, the “rest” is something that God finished and then enjoyed on the seventh day. The author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to show that the “rest” has been completed since God created the world. This means that the “rest” to which [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md) refers has been available since then. This explains why the author says that the “rest” remains for some to enter (see [4:6](../04/06.md)).<br><br>Second (2), he could be using what [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) says about “rest” to define what “rest” means in [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). In the Psalm, the “rest” would have originally referred primarily to the promised land. However, the author uses how God “rested” on the seventh day to define the “rest” primarily as something that people do with God rather than as a place to which they go. This explains why the author defines “entering the rest” as “resting from works” (see [4:10](../04/10.md)).<br><br>Since the author does not include much explanation and instead quotes the two verses together, you should also put the two verses together without including much explanation. See the notes for specific translation decisions. The author gives some conclusions in [4:6–10](../04/06.md), so focus on translating these verses clearly.
 HEB	4	1	ay25	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on everything that the author has said about the Israelite ancestors in [3:7–19](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation that is based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	4	1	n98m	figs-doublenegatives	φοβηθῶμεν&μήποτε καταλειπομένης	1	Connecting Statement:	If how the author puts two negative words together would be confusing in your language, you could express **be afraid lest** with a positive statement. The author uses this construction for emphasis, so use an emphatic form in your language. Alternate translation: “let us be careful so that while there remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+HEB	4	1	n98m	figs-doublenegatives	φοβηθῶμεν & μήποτε καταλειπομένης	1	Connecting Statement:	If how the author puts two negative words together would be confusing in your language, you could express **be afraid lest** with a positive statement. The author uses this construction for emphasis, so use an emphatic form in your language. Alternate translation: “let us be careful so that while there remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	4	1	ti1x	figs-idiom	μήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1		When a **promise remains**, people can still receive what is promised. In other words, the promise is still valid or true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “lest while a promise to enter into his rest is still valid” or “lest while God still offers a promise to enter into his rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	4	1	zta2	figs-abstractnouns	μήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1	none of you might seem to have failed to reach the promise left behind for you to enter God’s rest	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise.” Alternate translation: “lest while what God has promised about entering into his rest remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	1	gg3v	figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1		Here and throughout this chapter, the word **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “to participate in the way that God rests” or “to rest with him” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s resting place” or “to enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	1	ev85	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1	to enter God’s rest	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note for what **rest** means. Alternate translation: “the way that God rests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	4	1	hxln		δοκῇ&ὑστερηκέναι	1		Here, the phrase **seem to have failed** could indicate that: (1) a person is showing the outward signs of having **failed**. Alternate translation: “look like you have failed to attain it” (2) someone might think that he or she has **failed**. Alternate translation: “might think that you have failed to attain it” (3) God considers them **to have failed**. Alternate translation: “might be judged to have failed to attain it”
+HEB	4	1	hxln		δοκῇ & ὑστερηκέναι	1		Here, the phrase **seem to have failed** could indicate that: (1) a person is showing the outward signs of having **failed**. Alternate translation: “look like you have failed to attain it” (2) someone might think that he or she has **failed**. Alternate translation: “might think that you have failed to attain it” (3) God considers them **to have failed**. Alternate translation: “might be judged to have failed to attain it”
 HEB	4	2	ioq6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of why we should “be afraid” ([4:1](../04/01.md)). The author’s point is that **they** received the promise of rest, but they did not receive rest, because they disobeyed. Since **we** are in the same situation and have also received the promise of rest, we need to “be afraid” that what happened to **them** will happen to **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “That is especially true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	4	2	m74h	figs-activepassive	καὶ&ἐσμεν εὐηγγελισμένοι καθάπερ κἀκεῖνοι	1	For we were told the good news just as they were	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those to whom the **good news** is **proclaimed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “proclaiming.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “we also listened to the good news just as they did” or “someone proclaimed the good news to us also just as to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	4	2	m74h	figs-activepassive	καὶ & ἐσμεν εὐηγγελισμένοι καθάπερ κἀκεῖνοι	1	For we were told the good news just as they were	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those to whom the **good news** is **proclaimed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “proclaiming.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “we also listened to the good news just as they did” or “someone proclaimed the good news to us also just as to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	4	2	zc7k	figs-ellipsis	καθάπερ κἀκεῖνοι	1		This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “just as they also had good news proclaimed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	4	2	znk9	writing-pronouns	κἀκεῖνοι&ἐκείνους	1	as they were	Here, the word **them** refers to the Israelites whom God led out of Egypt and who died in the wilderness without entering the rest (see [3:16–19](../03/16.md)). If your readers would not know to whom **them** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Israelite ancestors also … them” or “to that generation also … them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	4	2	znk9	writing-pronouns	κἀκεῖνοι & ἐκείνους	1	as they were	Here, the word **them** refers to the Israelites whom God led out of Egypt and who died in the wilderness without entering the rest (see [3:16–19](../03/16.md)). If your readers would not know to whom **them** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Israelite ancestors also … them” or “to that generation also … them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	4	2	qtgc	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος τῆς ἀκοῆς	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **message** that someone, in this case the Israelite ancestors, “heard.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the message that they heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	4	2	zza4	grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ συνκεκερασμένους	1	But that message did not benefit those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed	Here, the phrase **not having been joined** introduces the reason why **the message** did not **benefit them**. If your readers not infer this relationship, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it had not been joined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	4	2	vexi	translate-unknown	μὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ πίστει τοῖς ἀκούσασιν	1		Here, the phrase **not having been joined** refers back to **them**, who are not **joined** with **those who heard** as part of the group of those who believe. In this construction, the word **faith** can refer to: (1) what those who are **joined** have in common. Alternate translation: “not having been joined as people with faith to those who heard it” (2) what does the “joining.” Alternate translation: “not having been joined by faith to those who heard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -383,33 +383,33 @@ HEB	4	2	fzjj	translate-textvariants	μὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ
 HEB	4	2	zwpf	figs-activepassive	μὴ συνκεκερασμένους	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **joined** rather than focusing on the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” or they themselves did it. Alternate translation: “not having joined themselves” or “God not having joined them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	4	2	uinq	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “in trusting it” or “in believing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	3	n6dw	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces how one does “benefit” from hearing the “good news” ([4:2](../04/02.md)). It is those who “believe” who are able to **enter into rest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	4	3	w6t4	figs-explicit	εἰσερχόμεθα&εἰς κατάπαυσιν, οἱ πιστεύσαντες	1	we who have believed enter that rest	Here, the word **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “we who have believed participate in the way that God rests” or “we who have believed rest” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “we who have believed enter into the resting place” or “we who have believed enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	4	3	w6t4	figs-explicit	εἰσερχόμεθα & εἰς κατάπαυσιν, οἱ πιστεύσαντες	1	we who have believed enter that rest	Here, the word **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “we who have believed participate in the way that God rests” or “we who have believed rest” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “we who have believed enter into the resting place” or “we who have believed enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	3	egfo	figs-explicit	καθὼς εἴρηκεν	1		Here, the phrase **just as** indicates that the quotation will support the claim that **we who have believed enter into rest**. However, the quotation is a negative statement about how the Israelite ancestors will not **enter into rest**. The quotation could support the claim by: (1) proving the opposite point. Since the Israelite ancestors did not enter because they did not believe (see [3:19](../03/19.md)), that means that those who believe can enter. Alternate translation: “which you know because he said this about those who did not believe:” (2) proving that the **rest** is still available. In other words, because the Israelite ancestors did not **enter**, someone still can **enter**. Alternate translation: “which you can tell is still available because he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	3	x2kq	writing-quotations	καθὼς εἴρηκεν	1	just as he said	Here the author uses the phrase **just as he said** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:11](../03/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “just as he said in what I already quoted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	4	3	lncz	writing-pronouns	εἴρηκεν	1		Here, the word **he** could refer back to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit said” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	4	3	v4q4	figs-quotations	εἴρηκεν, ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he said, as he swore in his wrath, that they would never enter into his rest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	4	3	qfs8		ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1	As I swore in my wrath	Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:11](../03/11.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
 HEB	4	3	k1ld	figs-explicit	καίτοι τῶν ἔργων	1	They will never enter my rest	Here, the word **although** introduces something that is unexpected. God swore that the Israelite ancestors would not **enter into my rest**, but (unexpectedly) that rest has been available since **the foundation of the world**, since God’s **works were finished** then. The author’s point is that God’s oath about how the Israelite ancestors would never **enter** does not mean that the **rest** is not available or not yet available. Instead, the **rest** has been available since God created everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “but despite that, his works” or “although the rest is available even now, for his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	4	3	x8zv	figs-activepassive	τῶν ἔργων&γενηθέντων	1	his works were finished	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **works** that **were finished** rather than focusing on the person doing the “finishing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God finished his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	4	3	af1l	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἔργων&γενηθέντων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things that he did were finished” or “what he worked was finished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	4	3	x8zv	figs-activepassive	τῶν ἔργων & γενηθέντων	1	his works were finished	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **works** that **were finished** rather than focusing on the person doing the “finishing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God finished his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	4	3	af1l	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἔργων & γενηθέντων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things that he did were finished” or “what he worked was finished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	3	ypr4	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **foundation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “establish” or “build.” Alternate translation: “from when he established the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	3	vym3	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου	1	from the foundation of the world	The author speaks of how God created the **world** as if he set the **world** on a **foundation** or solid base. In the author’s culture, this was a common way to refer to how God created everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to how God created everything. Alternate translation: “from the beginning of the world” or “from the time when the world was created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	4	4	q2n3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the proof for what the author has claimed about how God’s “works were finished from the foundation of the world” (see [4:3](../04/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof or support. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	4	4	fzgj	writing-pronouns	εἴρηκεν&που	1		Here, just as in [4:3](../04/03.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit has somewhere spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God has somewhere spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	4	4	hsuj	writing-quotations	εἴρηκεν&που περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης οὕτως	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that someone (probably the Holy Spirit) has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md). This passage tells the story of how God created everything in six days and then rested on the seventh day. Since the author introduces the quotation as words that someone has spoken, you should do the same. The word **somewhere** shows that the words come from Scriptures without stating exactly where. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “in another place he has said thus about the seventh day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	4	4	a7ij	figs-quotations	περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης&καὶ κατέπαυσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ;	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “about the seventh day that God rested on that day from all his works.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	4	4	hbm5	translate-ordinal	τῆς ἑβδόμης&τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ	1	the seventh day	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “day seven … day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+HEB	4	4	fzgj	writing-pronouns	εἴρηκεν & που	1		Here, just as in [4:3](../04/03.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit has somewhere spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God has somewhere spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	4	4	hsuj	writing-quotations	εἴρηκεν & που περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης οὕτως	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that someone (probably the Holy Spirit) has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md). This passage tells the story of how God created everything in six days and then rested on the seventh day. Since the author introduces the quotation as words that someone has spoken, you should do the same. The word **somewhere** shows that the words come from Scriptures without stating exactly where. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “in another place he has said thus about the seventh day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	4	4	a7ij	figs-quotations	περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης & καὶ κατέπαυσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ;	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “about the seventh day that God rested on that day from all his works.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	4	4	hbm5	translate-ordinal	τῆς ἑβδόμης & τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ	1	the seventh day	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “day seven … day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	4	4	jojq	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “from the things that he was doing” or “from what he was working” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	4	ghxk	figs-explicit	πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **all his works** refers specifically to the **works** of creation. The quotation does not mean that God stopped doing everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “all his works of creating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	5	zq16	writing-quotations	καὶ ἐν τούτῳ πάλιν	1	it still remains that some will enter his rest	Here the author uses the phrase **And again in this {passage}** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:11](../03/11.md); [4:3](../04/03.md)). The phrase **this {passage}** refers to the quotation from Psalm 95, which is the primary passage that the author is discussing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “And when we consider again the passage we are discussing, it says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	4	5	zwlk	figs-quotations	ἐν τούτῳ&εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in this passage it says that they will never enter into his rest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	4	5	zwlk	figs-quotations	ἐν τούτῳ & εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in this passage it says that they will never enter into his rest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	4	5	qfjr		εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1		Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:11](../03/11.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
 HEB	4	6	hptv	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		Here, the word **Therefore** introduces the conclusion to what the author has argued in [4:2–5](../04/02.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	4	6	twwv	figs-idiom	ἀπολείπεται τινὰς εἰσελθεῖν	1		When something **remains**, people can still access or make use of it. In other words, the ability to **enter** is still valid or available. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar words in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “there is still the possibility of entering” or “God still allows some to enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	4	6	f3pz	figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς αὐτήν&οὐκ εἰσῆλθον	1		Here, just as in [4:1](../04/01.md), the rest which people **enter** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “to participate in it … did not participate” or “to rest with God … did not rest with God” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “to enter into the place … did not enter it” or “to enter into the land … did not enter it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	4	6	f3pz	figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς αὐτήν & οὐκ εἰσῆλθον	1		Here, just as in [4:1](../04/01.md), the rest which people **enter** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “to participate in it … did not participate” or “to rest with God … did not rest with God” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “to enter into the place … did not enter it” or “to enter into the land … did not enter it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	6	uyfr	figs-explicit	οἱ πρότερον εὐαγγελισθέντες	1		Here, those who **had the good news proclaimed to them** are the same people the author mentions as “them” in [4:2](../04/02.md): the Israelite ancestors whom God led out of Egypt and who did not enter the Promised Land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make who these people are more explicit. Alternate translation: “the Israelite ancestors who previously had the gospel proclaimed to them” or “the people of that generation who previously had the gospel proclaimed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	6	z0pz	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ εἰσῆλθον δι’ ἀπείθειαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey” or an adjective such as “disobedient.” Alternate translation: “did not enter, because they disobeyed” or “did not enter, because they were disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	4	7	s964	writing-pronouns	πάλιν&ὁρίζει	1		Here, just as in [4:3–4](../04/03.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit again sets” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God again sets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	4	7	s964	writing-pronouns	πάλιν & ὁρίζει	1		Here, just as in [4:3–4](../04/03.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit again sets” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God again sets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	4	7	w90d		πάλιν	1		Here, the word **again** indicates that the Holy Spirit had already “set” a **day** and now does it for a second time. The first time was when God promised the “rest” to the Israelite ancestors. The second time (**again**) was when the Spirit spoke the quote from Psalm 95 **through David**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to doing something “once more” or “for a second time.” Alternate translation: “for a second time”
 HEB	4	7	z7bj	figs-idiom	σήμερον	1		Here the author speaks about a time that we call **Today**. We call every day **Today**, so this phrase means that the rest is available right now. However, since the author uses **Today** because the author of the quotation uses it, make sure that you use the same words that you used to translate **Today** in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “calling it ‘This day’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	4	7	y2tm		ἐν Δαυεὶδ λέγων	1	General Information:	The Holy Spirit calls the **certain day** **“Today”** when he was **speaking through David**. The author knows that **David** wrote the psalm that he is quoting, but he also knows that **David** was inspired by the Holy Spirit. Use a form in your language that refers to how someone speaks through or by means of someone else. Alternate translation: “using David to speak”
@@ -419,34 +419,34 @@ HEB	4	7	yojd	figs-activepassive	προείρηται	1		If your language does no
 HEB	4	7	bp6u	figs-quotations	προείρηται, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	if you hear his voice	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it has already been said that today, if you hear his voice, you should not harden your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	4	7	pktz		σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1		Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:7b–8a](../03/07.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in those verses.
 HEB	4	8	s78r	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation about the day called “Today.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	4	8	fp52	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν	1		Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Joshua** did not give the Israelite ancestors the kind of **rest** he is discussing. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by showing that it would contradict what is true: the Holy Spirit did actually speak **about another day**, as the previous verse shows. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Joshua had actually given them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+HEB	4	8	fp52	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν	1		Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Joshua** did not give the Israelite ancestors the kind of **rest** he is discussing. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by showing that it would contradict what is true: the Holy Spirit did actually speak **about another day**, as the previous verse shows. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Joshua had actually given them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 HEB	4	8	mdq9	figs-metaphor	αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν	1	if Joshua had given them rest	Here the author speaks as if **Joshua** were the one who could have “given” **rest** to the Israelite ancestors. This expression means that what Joshua did could have enabled the Israelite ancestors to receive **rest** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the **rest** comes from God, who worked through **Joshua**. Alternate translation: “God had used Joshua to give them rest” or “Joshua had helped them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	4	8	kskn	figs-explicit	αὐτοὺς&κατέπαυσεν	1		See how you translated the word **rest** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “enabled them to rest with God” or “enabled them to enter into God’s resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	4	8	o9qb	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτοὺς&κατέπαυσεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note for what **rest** means. Alternate translation: “helped them rest the way that God rests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	4	8	wl6l	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἂν&ἐλάλει	1		Here, just as in [4:7](../04/07.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit would not have spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God would not have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	4	8	kskn	figs-explicit	αὐτοὺς & κατέπαυσεν	1		See how you translated the word **rest** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “enabled them to rest with God” or “enabled them to enter into God’s resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	4	8	o9qb	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτοὺς & κατέπαυσεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note for what **rest** means. Alternate translation: “helped them rest the way that God rests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	4	8	wl6l	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἂν & ἐλάλει	1		Here, just as in [4:7](../04/07.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit would not have spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God would not have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	4	8	gnxj		ἡμέρας	1		Here the author refers to a **day** because the quotation he is discussing refers to “today.” If possible, use a word or phrase here that is related to how you translated “today” in the quotation (see [4:7](../04/07.md)). The author does not mean that there is only one period of 24 hours during which people can “enter the rest.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “time” or “moment in time”
 HEB	4	8	jjkr	figs-explicit	μετὰ ταῦτα	1		Here, the phrase **these things** refers to what happened when **Joshua** was leading the Israelite ancestors. He guided them into the land that God had promised to give them, and he led them as they fought their enemies and then settled in that land. The author’s point is that, since David speaks about entering the **rest** much later than this, the events related to **Joshua** must not count as getting **rest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Joshua led the people into the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	9	ob3p	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα	1		Here, the word **Therefore** introduces the conclusion to the argument in [4:3–8](../04/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So then” or “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	4	9	vhx9	figs-idiom	ἀπολείπεται σαββατισμὸς	1	there is still a Sabbath rest reserved for God’s people	When something **remains**, people can still access or make use of it. In other words, the **Sabbath rest** is still valid or available. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar words in [4:1](../04/01.md), [6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “there is still a Sabbath rest” or “God still provides a Sabbath rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	4	9	qe6x	translate-unknown	σαββατισμὸς	1	a Sabbath rest	Here, the word translated **a Sabbath rest** is a very rare word that is closely related to the word for **Sabbath**, which refers to the seventh day of the week on which the Israelites rested, as God commanded them to do. The **Sabbath rest** could refer to: (1) keeping the **Sabbath** by “resting.” Alternate translation: “rest as on the Sabbath day” (2) celebrating the special day that is the **Sabbath**. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath celebration” or “a celebration as on the day of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	4	10	nyix	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of **rest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	4	10	i6eh	figs-pastforfuture	ὁ&εἰσελθὼν&καὶ αὐτὸς κατέπαυσεν	1		Here the author uses the past tense to speak about something that is true in general. Use whatever tense you would naturally use in your language to speak about something that is generally true. Alternate translation: “the one who will enter … will himself also rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-HEB	4	10	ej9y	figs-explicit	ὁ&εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1	he who enters into God’s rest	See how you translated “entering the rest” in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “the one who rests with God” or “the one who enters into God’s resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	4	10	i6eh	figs-pastforfuture	ὁ & εἰσελθὼν & καὶ αὐτὸς κατέπαυσεν	1		Here the author uses the past tense to speak about something that is true in general. Use whatever tense you would naturally use in your language to speak about something that is generally true. Alternate translation: “the one who will enter … will himself also rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+HEB	4	10	ej9y	figs-explicit	ὁ & εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1	he who enters into God’s rest	See how you translated “entering the rest” in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “the one who rests with God” or “the one who enters into God’s resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	10	dg2d	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the word **his** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	4	10	xmgn	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς&αὐτοῦ	1		Although the words **himself** and **his** are masculine, they refer to anyone, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “himself or herself … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	4	10	xmgn	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς & αὐτοῦ	1		Although the words **himself** and **his** are masculine, they refer to anyone, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “himself or herself … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	4	10	rdm0	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς	1		Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes the comparison between **the one who has entered** and **God**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize this comparison in your language. Alternate translation: “in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	4	10	r3jy	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ&τῶν ἰδίων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things he did … the things he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	4	10	r3jy	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ & τῶν ἰδίων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things he did … the things he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	10	sj1t	figs-explicit	ὥσπερ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰδίων ὁ Θεός	1		Here the author refers back to what he already said in [4:4](../04/04.md) about how God “rested on the seventh day” after he created everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as God rested after he created the world” or “just as God did from his own works on the seventh day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	4	11	fem2	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on what the author has argued in [3:7–4:10](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces how readers should respond to what the author has argued. Alternate translation: “So then” or “In light of what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	4	11	vyo4	translate-unknown	σπουδάσωμεν	1		Here, the phrase **let us be eager** refers to focusing on and working hard to accomplish some specific goal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “let us strive” or “let us be diligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	4	11	bmg5	figs-explicit	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν κατάπαυσιν	1	let us be eager to enter that rest	See how you translated the phrase “entering the rest” in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “to rest with God” or “to enter into God’s resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	4	11	rtj7	figs-metaphor	ἐν&πέσῃ	1	will fall into the kind of disobedience that they did	Here the author speaks as if **disobedience** were a hole that a person could physically **fall into**. This “falling into” the hole of **disobedience** keeps a person from reaching their goal or arriving at their destination. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “might fail by following” or “might follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	4	11	eoso	figs-possession	τῷ αὐτῷ&ὑποδείγματι&τῆς ἀπειθείας	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **example** is the **disobedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. The idea is that the Israelite ancestors provided the **example** of **disobedience** that we should not follow. Alternate translation: “the same thing, which is disobedience” or “disobedience that is like that of the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	4	11	uznd	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ αὐτῷ&ὑποδείγματι&τῆς ἀπειθείας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “disobeying in the same way that they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	4	11	rtj7	figs-metaphor	ἐν & πέσῃ	1	will fall into the kind of disobedience that they did	Here the author speaks as if **disobedience** were a hole that a person could physically **fall into**. This “falling into” the hole of **disobedience** keeps a person from reaching their goal or arriving at their destination. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “might fail by following” or “might follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	4	11	eoso	figs-possession	τῷ αὐτῷ & ὑποδείγματι & τῆς ἀπειθείας	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **example** is the **disobedience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. The idea is that the Israelite ancestors provided the **example** of **disobedience** that we should not follow. Alternate translation: “the same thing, which is disobedience” or “disobedience that is like that of the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	4	11	uznd	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ αὐτῷ & ὑποδείγματι & τῆς ἀπειθείας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “disobeying in the same way that they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	12	iwtk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further reason for why we need to “be eager” ([4:11](../04/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the basis for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	4	12	h5d2	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God is living	Here, the word **word** refers to what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” or “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	4	12	hnc2	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that: (1) **God** speaks. Alternate translation: “the word that God speaks” (2) is **God**. Alternate translation: “the divine Word” or “God the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	4	12	j9qy	figs-personification	ζῶν&καὶ ἐνεργὴς&διϊκνούμενος&καὶ κριτικὸς	1	living and active	In these phrases, the author describes the **word of God** as if it were a person that was **living and active** and that could “pierce” and **judge** other people. He speaks in this way to show that God accomplishes these things through his **word**, that is, when he speaks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by making God the subject of these actions or by using analogy form. Alternate translation: “is from the living and active God … God uses it to pierce … and God uses it to judge” or “is like a living and active person … piercing like a person pierces … and able, like a person, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	4	12	j9qy	figs-personification	ζῶν & καὶ ἐνεργὴς & διϊκνούμενος & καὶ κριτικὸς	1	living and active	In these phrases, the author describes the **word of God** as if it were a person that was **living and active** and that could “pierce” and **judge** other people. He speaks in this way to show that God accomplishes these things through his **word**, that is, when he speaks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by making God the subject of these actions or by using analogy form. Alternate translation: “is from the living and active God … God uses it to pierce … and God uses it to judge” or “is like a living and active person … piercing like a person pierces … and able, like a person, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	4	12	g4tc	figs-metaphor	τομώτερος, ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν μάχαιραν δίστομον, καὶ διϊκνούμενος ἄχρι μερισμοῦ	1	sharper than any two-edged sword	Here the author compares the **word of God** to a **sword** that has two edges. God’s word is even **sharper** than that kind of sword, which means it is even better at **piercing**. The author uses this figure of speech to show how good the **word of God** is at discerning and judging humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is like a very sharp two-edged sword that pierces to the dividing” or “able to distinguish what is wrong from what is right, including even the dividing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	4	12	lv6y	translate-unknown	μάχαιραν δίστομον	1	two-edged sword	The phrase **two-edged sword** describes a weapon or tool with two sharp edges. This kind of **sword** can “pierce” something better than a sword with only one sharp edge can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable term or a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “blade with two sharp edges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	4	12	e7kv	translate-unknown	καὶ διϊκνούμενος ἄχρι μερισμοῦ ψυχῆς καὶ πνεύματος, ἁρμῶν τε καὶ μυελῶν	1	It pierces even to the dividing of soul and spirit, of joints and marrow	Here the author describes how the **word**, like a **sword**, can “pierce” **to the dividing** of things. These words refer to how a **sword** can cut something into two pieces. The author refers to things that are hard to divide: **joints** and **marrow** are difficult to separate, as are **soul** and **spirit**. The point is that the **word** can separate things that are hard to separate, just like a very sharp **sword** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to cutting things into pieces. Alternate translation: “and slicing apart soul and spirit, joints and marrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -455,9 +455,9 @@ HEB	4	12	sc3m	translate-unknown	ἁρμῶν τε καὶ μυελῶν	1	joints
 HEB	4	12	n6n5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐνθυμήσεων καὶ ἐννοιῶν καρδίας	1	is able to discern	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **thoughts** and **intentions**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “think” and “plan.” Alternate translation: “what the heart ponders and devises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	12	xdu4	figs-metonymy	καρδίας	1	the thoughts and intentions of the heart	In the author’s culture, the word **heart** refers to the place within us where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of the mind” or “that people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	4	12	r6rn	figs-genericnoun	καρδίας	1		Here the author is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “of hearts” or “of human hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-HEB	4	13	kyok	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ&αὐτοῦ, πρὸς ὃν	1		Here, the words **him** and **whom** could refer to: (1) God, who spoke the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “God … of him to whom” (2) the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this word … of it to which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	4	13	kyok	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτοῦ, πρὸς ὃν	1		Here, the words **him** and **whom** could refer to: (1) God, who spoke the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “God … of him to whom” (2) the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this word … of it to which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	4	13	nx6n	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἔστιν κτίσις ἀφανὴς	1	Nothing created is hidden before God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus what is **hidden** rather than focusing what does the “hiding.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague subject or have the “creature” trying to hide itself. Alternate translation: “no creature can hide” or “no creature can hide itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	4	13	f3h1	figs-metaphor	πάντα&γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα	1	everything is bare and open	Here the author speaks about **all things** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all things** as if someone had pulled another person’s head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas plainly. Alternate translation: “all things are visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	4	13	f3h1	figs-metaphor	πάντα & γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα	1	everything is bare and open	Here the author speaks about **all things** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all things** as if someone had pulled another person’s head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas plainly. Alternate translation: “all things are visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	4	13	yk64	figs-doublet	γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα	1	bare and open	These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that God sees and knows everything. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are visible” or “are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	4	13	sltw	figs-activepassive	τετραχηλισμένα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since the author is describing a characteristic of **all things**, avoid stating a subject here. It may be best to translate **laid open** with an adjective that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “open” or “visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	4	13	i9hh	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	to the eyes of the one to whom we must give account	Here, the word **eyes** refers to sight or knowledge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ HEB	4	14	ph6z	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ
 HEB	4	14	vt4v	figs-metaphor	κρατῶμεν τῆς ὁμολογίας	1	let us firmly hold to our beliefs	Here, the phrase **firmly hold** refers to continuing to consistently believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. Alternate translation: “let us tightly grasp our confession” or “let us continue to trust our confession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	4	14	xfmw	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὁμολογίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confession**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “confess” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “to what we confess” or “to what we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	15	z0bq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of how Jesus is a high priest. This information supports the author’s exhortation to “firmly hold” to the “confession” (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces support for an exhortation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	4	15	i2fw	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ&ἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα μὴ δυνάμενον συνπαθῆσαι ταῖς ἀσθενείαις ἡμῶν, πεπειρασμένον δὲ	1	we do not have a high priest who cannot feel sympathy … Instead, we have	Here the author uses two negative words to emphasize how much Jesus is able to **sympathize** with us as **high priest**. If the two negatives would be confusing, and if it would not be emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with a positive statement and emphasize it in another way. If you do this, you will need to translate **but** as a connection instead of a contrast. Alternate translation: “we indeed have a high priest who is able to sympathize with our weaknesses, one having been tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+HEB	4	15	i2fw	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & ἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα μὴ δυνάμενον συνπαθῆσαι ταῖς ἀσθενείαις ἡμῶν, πεπειρασμένον δὲ	1	we do not have a high priest who cannot feel sympathy … Instead, we have	Here the author uses two negative words to emphasize how much Jesus is able to **sympathize** with us as **high priest**. If the two negatives would be confusing, and if it would not be emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with a positive statement and emphasize it in another way. If you do this, you will need to translate **but** as a connection instead of a contrast. Alternate translation: “we indeed have a high priest who is able to sympathize with our weaknesses, one having been tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	4	15	zupr	figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς ἀσθενείαις ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weaknesses**, you could express the idea by using a an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “with the ways that we are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	4	15	m56m	figs-ellipsis	πεπειρασμένον δὲ	1		This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we have one who has been tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	4	15	d26h	figs-activepassive	πεπειρασμένον	1	who has in all ways been tempted as we are	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Jesus, who was **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things can “tempt.” Alternate translation: “one whom things tempted” or “one having experienced temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ HEB	4	16	n654	translate-unknown	εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν	1		Here, the
 HEB	5	intro	b67j			0		# Hebrews 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)<br>      * Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [5:5–6](../05/05.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### High priest<br><br>In [5:1–4](../05/01.md), the author explains what it means to be a high priest: (1) he must offer things to God, (2) he must be sympathetic to others because he also experiences weakness, and (3) he must be appointed by God. The author then applies these qualifications and duties to Jesus ([5:5–10](../05/05.md)): (1) he was appointed by God, (2) he suffered like all humans do, and (3) he himself is the offering that brings eternal salvation. Make that your translation clearly draws connections between what high priests experience and do and what Jesus has experienced and done. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])<br><br>### Melchizedek<br><br>In the entire Old Testament, only two passages mention Melchizedek: [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) and [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). In this chapter, the author quotes from the psalm, and in chapter 7 he will refer to Genesis. Melchizedek was a king and priest in the city of Salem. Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites, met him and gave him a gift. Much later, the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) writes how God appointed the king of Israel (David) to be a priest like Melchizedek. Since the author simply introduces Melchizedek here and saves his explanation for chapter 7, you also should simply refer to him here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Metaphor with “milk” and “solid food”<br><br>In [5:12–14](../05/12.md), the author uses “milk” to refer figuratively to basic teachings about God and about what is right and wrong. He uses “solid food” to refer figuratively to the more complex teachings. Since “infants” are the ones who drink “milk” in the author’s culture, he refers to those who only know the basic teachings as “infants.” Those who know complex teachings are “mature” adults who eat “solid food.” If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, if possible use a figure of speech that contrasts between adults and little children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Jesus “learning obedience” and “being made perfect”<br><br>In [5:8–9](../05/08.md), the author states that Jesus “learned obedience” and was “made perfect.” These statements do not mean that Jesus failed to obey and sometimes sinned before this time. Instead, “learning obedience” refers to fully understanding or experiencing what obedience means, and being “made perfect” refers to “perfect” qualifications for a position or office. So, Jesus fully experienced what it means to obey God, and God made him a “perfect” fit for the office of high priest. Translate these phrases in such a way that your readers will not think that Jesus went from being disobedient and sinful to obedient and perfect.
 HEB	5	1	dn18	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** indicates that the author is going to explain more about high priests and about how Jesus is a high priest. It also signals that the author is beginning a new section. Use a word or phrase that indicates that a new section is beginning, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	5	1	whq1	figs-activepassive	λαμβανόμενος	1	chosen from among people	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **taken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “taking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God taking him” or “whom God takes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	5	1	u4gd	figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων&ὑπὲρ ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the word **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all the people in a group, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from among humans on the behalf of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	5	1	u4gd	figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων & ὑπὲρ ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the word **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all the people in a group, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from among humans on the behalf of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	5	1	ndz7	figs-activepassive	καθίσταται	1	is appointed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God appointed” or “is one whom God appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	5	1	mzd9	translate-unknown	τὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν	1	to act on the behalf of people	Here the phrase **{in} the things related to God** identifies **every high priest** as a person who serves God and who acts as a priest in God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this clear. See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “before God” or “to be in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	5	1	oe4p	figs-gendernotations	προσφέρῃ	1		Here, the word **he** refers to the **high priest** that the author is discussing. In Israelite and Jewish culture, only men could be high priests, so **he** does refer to a man. However, the author is not emphasizing that the **high priest** is male, so you can use a non-gendered word if it is clearer. Alternate translation: “this person may offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -518,8 +518,8 @@ HEB	5	5	c45n	figs-quotations	ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν, Υἱός
 HEB	5	5	pr3f	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν	1	the one speaking to him said	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “the one who spoke to him glorified him to become a high priest, saying” or “he was glorified to become a high priest by the one who spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	5	5	i694		Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	You are my Son; today I have become your Father	Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [1:5](../01/05.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
 HEB	5	6	bce6	writing-quotations	καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει	1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to Christ. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../../psa/110/04.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to Christ, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. The phrase **in another {place}** shows that the words come from a different part of the Old Testament, here a different psalm. Alternate translation: “he also declared, as it is recorded in another place in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	5	6	ds6v	writing-pronouns	καὶ&λέγει	1	he also says	Here, the word **he** refers to God the Father, who speaks these words to his Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	5	6	k5uw	figs-quotations	ἐν ἑτέρῳ&σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	in another place	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in another place that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	5	6	ds6v	writing-pronouns	καὶ & λέγει	1	he also says	Here, the word **he** refers to God the Father, who speaks these words to his Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	5	6	k5uw	figs-quotations	ἐν ἑτέρῳ & σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	in another place	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in another place that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	5	6	pb9k	figs-yousingular	σὺ	1		Because the quotation is referring to one person (Christ), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	5	6	ede5	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	after the manner of Melchizedek	Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and performs the same duties which that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	5	7	alje	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		Here, the word **He** refers back to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that **He** refers to Christ. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ HEB	5	7	e75a	figs-activepassive	εἰσακουσθεὶς	1	he was heard	If you
 HEB	5	7	s2fg	figs-explicit	εἰσακουσθεὶς	1		Here, the phrase **was heard** could mean that: (1) God both **heard** Jesus and did what he asked. Alternate translation: “he was heard and answered” (2) God only **heard** or listened to what Jesus asked. Alternate translation: “he was listened to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	5	7	iku4	translate-unknown	ἀπὸ τῆς εὐλαβείας	1		Here, the phrase **godly life** refers to attitude and actions that honor and respect God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes the meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “because he respected God” or “because he acted in a way that pleased God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	5	8	mk8z	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	υἱός	1	a son	Here, the word **son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. Alternate translation: “the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-HEB	5	8	dqsn	figs-explicit	ἔμαθεν&τὴν ὑπακοήν	1		Here, the clause **he learned obedience** means that the Son gained new knowledge and experience about **obedience**. It does not mean that the Son had never “obeyed” before or had to become better at obeying God. The Son has always “obeyed,” but this verse shows that he **learned** new things about **obedience** when he **suffered**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clause that makes the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “he learned what it takes to be obedient” or “he learned more about obedience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	5	8	dqsn	figs-explicit	ἔμαθεν & τὴν ὑπακοήν	1		Here, the clause **he learned obedience** means that the Son gained new knowledge and experience about **obedience**. It does not mean that the Son had never “obeyed” before or had to become better at obeying God. The Son has always “obeyed,” but this verse shows that he **learned** new things about **obedience** when he **suffered**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clause that makes the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “he learned what it takes to be obedient” or “he learned more about obedience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	5	8	xm1n	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑπακοήν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **obedience**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “obedient” or a verb such as “obey.” Alternate translation: “to be obedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	5	8	usns	figs-extrainfo	ἀφ’ ὧν ἔπαθεν	1		Here the author does not clarify exactly what **{the things} which he suffered** are. These things probably include everything that Jesus **suffered** during his life up to and including his death. If possible, use a general phrase that could refer to all the “suffering” that Jesus experienced. Alternate translation: “from all the suffering that he experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	5	9	iv42	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τελειωθεὶς	1		Here, the phrase **having been made perfect** introduces something that happens before the phrase **he became**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “after having been made perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -564,14 +564,14 @@ HEB	5	13	z2dz	translate-unknown	ἄπειρος	1		Here, the word **inexperience
 HEB	5	13	tdur	figs-possession	λόγου δικαιοσύνης	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **message** that is about **righteousness**. In other words, the person he is describing is **inexperienced** about what counts as **righteousness**, and by implication, what counts as “wickedness.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “matters of righteousness” or “what counts as righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	5	13	kund	figs-abstractnouns	λόγου δικαιοσύνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or “right.” Alternate translation: “the} message about what is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	5	13	vl7k	figs-gendernotations	ἐστιν	1	because he is still a little child	Although the word **he** is masculine, it refers to anyone, either male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-HEB	5	14	k2j1	figs-exmetaphor	τελείων&ἐστιν ἡ στερεὰ τροφή	1		Here the author further explains the metaphor about **solid food** that he introduced in [5:12](../05/12.md). He identifies the one who eats **solid food** as a person who is **mature**. The point is that the people who fit this description are those who know much about God and about **good** and **evil**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “those who run are mature ones” or “complex things are for the mature ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+HEB	5	14	k2j1	figs-exmetaphor	τελείων & ἐστιν ἡ στερεὰ τροφή	1		Here the author further explains the metaphor about **solid food** that he introduced in [5:12](../05/12.md). He identifies the one who eats **solid food** as a person who is **mature**. The point is that the people who fit this description are those who know much about God and about **good** and **evil**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “those who run are mature ones” or “complex things are for the mature ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
 HEB	5	14	e3yh	figs-idiom	διὰ τὴν ἕξιν	1	who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evil	Here, the phrase **through habit** refers to how a person develops skills or abilities by repeating the same thing over and over again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to learning by repetition. Alternate translation: “by means of repetition” or “through consistent practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	5	14	hhzb	figs-metaphor	γεγυμνασμένα	1		Here, the word **trained** is often used for how athletes practice so that their bodies become stronger and better at their sport. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “educated” or “developed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	5	14	mq0p	translate-unknown	τὰ αἰσθητήρια	1		Here, the word **senses** identifies all the ways in which people receive information about the world around them, including tasting, touching, and hearing. The author’s point here is that people can learn to tell between what is **good** and what is **evil** by using these **senses**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the part or parts of the person that experience the world around him or her. Alternate translation: “their faculties” or “themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	6	intro	nz5i			0		# Hebrews 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)<br>      * Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The promise to Abraham ([6:13–15](../06/13.md))<br><br>In [6:13–14](../06/13.md), the author speaks about God’s promise to Abraham. He quotes directly from [Genesis 22:17](../gen/22/17.md), but he also has in mind other times when God made similar promises to Abraham: [Genesis 12:1–3](../gen/12/01.md); [15:1–21](../gen/15/01.md); [17:1–8](../gen/17/01.md). The author’s point is that God “swore by himself,” which means that he himself guaranteed what he promised. Abraham waited for God to fulfill that promise, and God eventually did so when he gave Abraham a son and then numerous descendants. If your readers would need some of this information to understand the passage, you could include it in a footnote.<br><br>### “Swearing” and the “oath”<br><br>In [6:13–18](../06/13.md), the author refers to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” by someone refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. When someone makes an “oath,” they “swear by” a person or thing that is more powerful than they are. What they are saying is that the powerful person or thing will punish them if they are lying. If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])<br><br>### The heavenly sanctuary<br><br>In  [6:19–20](../06/19.md), the author first refers to the heavenly sanctuary. He will discuss this sanctuary more in the following chapters. At this point, he simply refers to how our “hope” figuratively “enters” where Jesus himself “entered”: the area “inside” the “curtain.” In the author’s culture, a sanctuary would have a solid wall or a cloth “curtain” that marked off the most sacred part of the sanctuary from the rest of the structure. This part of the sanctuary is most sacred because it is where God is most strongly present. Use words that would clearly refer to the most sacred part of a sanctuary. Since the author describes the heavenly sanctuary in words that come from how the tabernacle is described in the Old Testament, you should preserve as much of the details as possible (such as a “curtain” instead of a wall). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/curtain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The farming metaphor in [6:7–8](../06/07.md)<br><br>In these verses, the author uses land that people use to grow food as an analogy for how people respond to God’s gifts and his message about salvation. In [6:7](../06/07.md), the author describes farmland that grows helpful crops when rain falls on it. This good farmland is like people who hear the good news, believe it, and then obey God. In  [6:8](../06/08.md), the author describes farmland that grows plants that are not useful and that can hurt people. A farmer will set these plants on fire to destroy them. This bad farmland is like people who hear the good news and receive gifts from God but fail to firmly believe the good news and obey God. God will punish them, much like the farmer burns the bad plants. If your readers would misunderstand this analogy, you could make the comparison more explicit in the text.<br><br>### Hope as an anchor<br><br>In [6:19](../06/19.md), the author states that “hope” has the qualities of an “anchor.” An anchor is a heavy piece of metal attached to the end of a rope. The other end of the rope is tied to a boat, and the anchor is dropped over the edge so that its weight keeps the boat from moving around or drifting away. The author’s point is that hope functions like an anchor for believers: it keeps them focused on Jesus and what God has promised, and they do not “drift away” from what they believe (see the warning in [2:1](../02/01.md)). If your readers would not know what an “anchor” is, you could compare hope to some other thing in your culture that holds things in place.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The “foundational” teachings in [6:1–2](../06/01.md)<br><br>In these verses, the author lists six things that are “foundational” or “elementary” teachings. These are not the only “foundational” teachings, but the author uses them as examples. The structure of the list can be understood in several ways:<br><br>(1)<br>* the foundation<br>      * of repentance from dead works and<br>      * of faith in God,<br>* teaching<br>      * about baptisms and<br>          * laying on of hands and<br>          * resurrection of the dead and<br>          * eternal judgment.<br><br>(2)<br>* the foundation<br>      * of repentance from dead works and<br>      * of faith in God,<br>      * {of} teaching<br>          * about baptisms and<br>              * laying on of hands and<br>              * resurrection of the dead and<br>              * eternal judgment.<br><br>(3)<br>* the foundation<br>      * of repentance from dead works and<br>      * of faith in God,<br>      * {of} teaching about baptisms and<br>      * {of} laying on of hands and<br>      * {of} resurrection of the dead and<br>      * {of} eternal judgment.<br><br>See the note at the beginning of [6:2](../06/02.md) for translation suggestions for each of these options.<br><br>### Are those who “fall away” in [6:4–6](../06/04.md) truly believers?<br><br>In [6:4–5](../06/04.md), the author gives a list of things that a person can experience but then still “fall away” ([6:6](../06/06.md)). Scholars debate whether this list describes people who truly believe in Jesus and then stop believing or if it describes people who came close to believing in Jesus but then did not truly believe. Since the author focuses on how these people have experienced good things from God but then still reject Jesus, he does not clearly express whether these people are truly believers are not. If possible, focus your translation on what the people experience rather than on whether they have truly believed.
 HEB	6	1	f1nk	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **So then** introduces what the author wants his audience to do in response to the warning he gave in [5:11–14](../05/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an application or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	6	1	i4xr	figs-metaphor	ἀφέντες τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον, ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα	1	let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturity	Here the author speaks as if the **beginning of the message of Christ** were the starting point for a journey and as if **maturity** were the destination. He speaks in this way to encourage his audience to focus more time and energy on the destination (**maturity**) than on where they started out (**the beginning of the message**). He does not want them to replace **the beginning of the message** with what is related to **maturity**. Rather, he is exhorting them about what to focus their time and energy on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “putting to the side the beginning of the message of Christ, let us take up maturity” or “focusing less on the beginning of the message of Christ, let us focus more on maturity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	6	1	gsvd	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς&λόγον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **beginning**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “basic” or “elementary.” Alternate translation: “the elementary message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	6	1	gsvd	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς & λόγον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **beginning**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “basic” or “elementary.” Alternate translation: “the elementary message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	1	ryfa	figs-possession	τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to identify the parts of the **message** about **Christ** with which a person would “begin.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a form that is more natural. Alternate translation: “what you first learned about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	6	1	ydpy	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **maturity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “mature.” The idea of **maturity** could relate primarily to: (1) the audience and how they are becoming “mature.” Alternate translation: “to becoming mature people” (2) the **message** or teachings that the “mature” learn. Alternate translation: “to teachings for mature people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	1	thw8	figs-metaphor	μὴ πάλιν θεμέλιον καταβαλλόμενοι	1	Let us not lay again the foundation … of faith in God	Here the author speaks about teaching basic things as if it were **laying** a **foundation**. He speaks in this way because the **foundation** is the first thing that a builder “lays,” and the builder soon begins to build on top of that foundation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not rehearsing again the simple teachings” or “not learning again the basics” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -580,9 +580,9 @@ HEB	6	1	d5q3	figs-personification	νεκρῶν ἔργων	1	dead works	Here th
 HEB	6	2	s1cv	figs-infostructure	βαπτισμῶν διδαχὴν, ἐπιθέσεώς τε χειρῶν, ἀναστάσεώς τε νεκρῶν, καὶ κρίματος αἰωνίου	1	nor the foundation of teaching … eternal judgment	Here, the **teaching** (see the chapter introduction) could: (1) redefine the “foundation” in the previous verse ([6:2](../06/02.md)) and go with all four topics in this verse. Alternate translation: “that is, teaching concerning baptisms and concerning laying on of hands and concerning resurrection of the dead and concerning eternal judgment” (2) identify the third part of the “foundation,” along with “repentance from dead works” and “faith in God” (see [6:2](../06/02.md)). In this case, it goes with the four topics in this verse. Alternate translation: “and of teaching about baptisms and about laying on of hands and about resurrection of the dead and about eternal judgment” (3) identify the third part of the “foundation,” and the rest of the topics in this verse also identify parts of the “foundation.” Alternate translation: “and of teaching about baptisms and of laying on of hands and of resurrection of the dead and of eternal judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	6	2	fe8e	figs-abstractnouns	βαπτισμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **baptisms**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “about baptizing people” or “about what baptizing someone means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	2	rd3q	figs-explicit	βαπτισμῶν	1		Here, the word **baptisms** is plural. It could refer to: (1) different kinds of **baptisms** that people knew about. See the discussion about “John’s baptism” in [Acts 19:1–7](../act/19/01.md) for an example of different kinds of **baptisms**. Alternate translation: “about various baptisms” or “different kinds of baptisms” (2) many different kinds of washing rituals. Alternate translation: “about washings” or “about kinds of washing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	6	2	srvc	figs-explicit	ἐπιθέσεώς&χειρῶν	1		Here, the phrase **laying on of hands** refers to how believers would put their hands on a fellow believer when they were commissioning him or her, praying for him or her, asking God to heal him or her, or helping him or her receive the Holy Spirit. For examples, see [Acts 8:14–17](../act/08/14.md); [Acts 13:2–3](../act/13/02.md); [Acts 28:8](../act/28/08.md); [1 Timothy 4:14](../1ti/04/14.md). In all of these situations, God uses the **laying on of hands** to help a fellow believer. If possible, express the idea in such a way that your readers understand the physical action and also that the action helps other believers. If it is necessary, you could include some short extra information in your translation or more information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “laying on of hands through which God works” or “placing hands on believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	6	2	xww5	figs-possession	ἐπιθέσεώς&χειρῶν ἀναστάσεώς τε νεκρῶν	1	laying on of hands	Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about how a person “lays” their **hands** on someone else and about how the **dead** will “resurrect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “laying hands on others and the dead resurrecting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	6	2	qdfn	figs-abstractnouns	ἀναστάσεώς&νεκρῶν, καὶ κρίματος αἰωνίου	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **resurrection** and **judgment**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “resurrect” and “judge.” Alternate translation: “the dead resurrecting and God eternally judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	6	2	srvc	figs-explicit	ἐπιθέσεώς & χειρῶν	1		Here, the phrase **laying on of hands** refers to how believers would put their hands on a fellow believer when they were commissioning him or her, praying for him or her, asking God to heal him or her, or helping him or her receive the Holy Spirit. For examples, see [Acts 8:14–17](../act/08/14.md); [Acts 13:2–3](../act/13/02.md); [Acts 28:8](../act/28/08.md); [1 Timothy 4:14](../1ti/04/14.md). In all of these situations, God uses the **laying on of hands** to help a fellow believer. If possible, express the idea in such a way that your readers understand the physical action and also that the action helps other believers. If it is necessary, you could include some short extra information in your translation or more information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “laying on of hands through which God works” or “placing hands on believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	6	2	xww5	figs-possession	ἐπιθέσεώς & χειρῶν ἀναστάσεώς τε νεκρῶν	1	laying on of hands	Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about how a person “lays” their **hands** on someone else and about how the **dead** will “resurrect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “laying hands on others and the dead resurrecting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	6	2	qdfn	figs-abstractnouns	ἀναστάσεώς & νεκρῶν, καὶ κρίματος αἰωνίου	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **resurrection** and **judgment**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “resurrect” and “judge.” Alternate translation: “the dead resurrecting and God eternally judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	2	tfu3	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1		The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 HEB	6	2	g1ke	figs-explicit	κρίματος αἰωνίου	1		Here, the phrase **eternal judgment** could identify a **judgment** that: (1) has **eternal** validity or consequences. In other words, what God decides in this **judgment** will never change. Alternate translation: “judgment that leads to eternal destiny” (2) happens at the end of this time and at the beginning of the **eternal** time. In other words, the **eternal judgment** is God’s last **judgment** when he renews the creation. Alternate translation: “final judgment” or “God’s last judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	3	xut9	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο ποιήσομεν	1		Here, the word **this** refers back to [6:1](../06/01.md), where the author exhorted his audience: “let us go forward to maturity.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit by repeating words from [6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “we will go forward to maturity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -591,12 +591,12 @@ HEB	6	4	land	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** intr
 HEB	6	4	r14x	figs-infostructure	ἀδύνατον γὰρ τοὺς	1		Here, the word **impossible** goes with the phrase “to restore {them} again” in [6:6](../06/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **{it is} impossible** to verse 6. If you do this, make sure that you also follow the infostructure note on verse 6. Alternate translation: “For consider the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	6	4	e7px	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἅπαξ φωτισθέντας	1	those who were once enlightened	Here the author speaks of receiving and understanding the good news as if it were light shining on a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for those who once understood the message about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	6	4	e2e6	figs-activepassive	τοὺς ἅπαξ φωτισθέντας, γευσαμένους τε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who were **enlightened** rather than focusing on the person doing the “enlightening.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “for those whom God has once enlightened, and who tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	6	4	l5mc	figs-metaphor	γευσαμένους&τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου	1	who tasted the heavenly gift	Here the author speaks as if **the heavenly gift** were food that people could “taste.” He speaks in this way to show that these people experienced **the heavenly gift** as much as a person who eats food truly experiences that food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “had experience of the heavenly gift” or “participated in the heavenly gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	6	4	l5mc	figs-metaphor	γευσαμένους & τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου	1	who tasted the heavenly gift	Here the author speaks as if **the heavenly gift** were food that people could “taste.” He speaks in this way to show that these people experienced **the heavenly gift** as much as a person who eats food truly experiences that food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “had experience of the heavenly gift” or “participated in the heavenly gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	6	4	ysas	figs-explicit	τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου	1		Here, the phrase **the heavenly gift** identifies what God gives to those who believe in Jesus. This includes new life and forgiveness of sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of God’s gift of new life” or “of God’s gifts from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	4	d2lp	figs-possession	μετόχους γενηθέντας Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	who were sharers of the Holy Spirit	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that these people “share” the **Holy Spirit**. This form means that the people whom the author is speaking about were among the group of people who received the **Holy Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “received the Holy Spirit along with other believers” or “participated in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	6	5	vp46	figs-metaphor	γευσαμένους	1	who tasted God’s good word	Here the author again uses the word **tasted** figuratively. Express the meaning the same way you did in the previous verse ([6:4](../06/04.md)). Alternate translation: “who had experience of” or “who participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	6	5	vf2t	figs-possession	δυνάμεις&μέλλοντος αἰῶνος	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that the **powers** will be fully experienced in **the age to come**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clear. Alternate translation: “the powers that belong to the age to come” or “the powers that will be experienced in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	6	5	tw1u	figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμεις&μέλλοντος αἰῶνος	1	the powers of the age to come	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **powers**, you could express the idea in another way. The **powers** could refer to: (1) what God will do, sometimes through other people, for those who believe. Alternate translation: “what God will do powerfully in the age to come” (2) how people can do “powerful” things. Alternate translation: “the powerful things that people will do in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	6	5	vf2t	figs-possession	δυνάμεις & μέλλοντος αἰῶνος	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that the **powers** will be fully experienced in **the age to come**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clear. Alternate translation: “the powers that belong to the age to come” or “the powers that will be experienced in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	6	5	tw1u	figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμεις & μέλλοντος αἰῶνος	1	the powers of the age to come	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **powers**, you could express the idea in another way. The **powers** could refer to: (1) what God will do, sometimes through other people, for those who believe. Alternate translation: “what God will do powerfully in the age to come” (2) how people can do “powerful” things. Alternate translation: “the powerful things that people will do in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	5	virg	figs-idiom	μέλλοντος αἰῶνος	1		Here, the phrase **the age to come** refers to the time during and after which God will make people alive again and renew everything that he created. This **age** begins when Jesus comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “of the time when Jesus comes back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	6	6	fcrq	figs-infostructure	καὶ παραπεσόντας, πάλιν ἀνακαινίζειν	1		If you decided to move “{it is} impossible” from [6:4](../06/04.md) here, you will need to consider a natural way to include it. If you used the alternate translation from the note in verse 4, the following alternate translation will work here. Alternate translation: “but who fell away. It is impossible to restore these people again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	6	6	y24v	figs-metaphor	παραπεσόντας	1		Here the author speaks of how people reject how they used to believe in Jesus as if they were walking on a path and then **fell away** from it. He speaks in this way to emphasize how significant it is when a person stops believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who deserted Christ” or “who stopped believing the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ HEB	6	6	jkue	figs-explicit	ἀνασταυροῦντας ἑαυτοῖς	1		He
 HEB	6	6	y47b	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	The phrase **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 HEB	6	6	ldgx	translate-unknown	παραδειγματίζοντας	1		Here, the word translated **exposing {him} to public shame** refers to punishing someone in **public** so that the person experiences **shame** and so that other people look down on the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “shaming him publicly” or “insulting him in front of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	6	7	wz7w	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an example that uses farming language to illustrate two ways in which a person could respond to the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “For example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	6	7	p4tf	figs-personification	γῆ&ἡ πιοῦσα τὸν ἐπ’ αὐτῆς ἐρχόμενον πολλάκις ὑετόν, καὶ τίκτουσα βοτάνην εὔθετον, ἐκείνοις δι’ οὓς καὶ γεωργεῖται, μεταλαμβάνει εὐλογίας ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the land that drinks in the rain	Throughout this verse, the author speaks of **land** as if it could “drink,” “produce,” and “share.” This was a natural way to express how **land** relates to crops and rain in the author’s culture. Use a natural way in your language to refer to how **land** is involved in the farming process. Alternate translation: “a land that absorbs the rain that often falls on it and on which grows useful vegetation for those for whom it is also cultivated receives a blessing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	6	7	p4tf	figs-personification	γῆ & ἡ πιοῦσα τὸν ἐπ’ αὐτῆς ἐρχόμενον πολλάκις ὑετόν, καὶ τίκτουσα βοτάνην εὔθετον, ἐκείνοις δι’ οὓς καὶ γεωργεῖται, μεταλαμβάνει εὐλογίας ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the land that drinks in the rain	Throughout this verse, the author speaks of **land** as if it could “drink,” “produce,” and “share.” This was a natural way to express how **land** relates to crops and rain in the author’s culture. Use a natural way in your language to refer to how **land** is involved in the farming process. Alternate translation: “a land that absorbs the rain that often falls on it and on which grows useful vegetation for those for whom it is also cultivated receives a blessing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	6	7	r32n	figs-idiom	τὸν ἐπ’ αὐτῆς ἐρχόμενον πολλάκις ὑετόν	1	that gives birth to the plants	Here the author refers to how **rain** falls from clouds onto the **land**. Use a phrase that refers to this process naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “the rain that often falls from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	6	7	h5iq	translate-unknown	βοτάνην εὔθετον	1		Here, the phrase **useful vegetation** refers to plants that grow on the **land** and that benefit people. They could be plants that people eat, or they could be plants that people use for other purposes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to plants that people use. Alternate translation: “helpful crops” or “edible plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	6	7	da68	figs-activepassive	καὶ γεωργεῖται	1	the land that receives a blessing from God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the land that is **cultivated** rather than focusing on the people doing the “cultivating.” If you must state who did the action, you could refer to farmers or people in general. Alternate translation: “farmers cultivate it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ HEB	6	8	sgzj	figs-abstractnouns	κατάρας	1		If your language does not use
 HEB	6	8	a2bk	figs-idiom	ἧς τὸ τέλος εἰς καῦσιν	1	Its end is in burning	Here, the phrase **the end of which {is} for burning** indicates what will finally happen to the land. Use a phrase that refers to the final destiny of something. Alternate translation: “its final destiny is to be burned” or “and eventually it will be burned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	6	8	eb6p	writing-pronouns	ἧς	1		Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) the “land,” which the author mentioned in [6:7](../06/07.md). Alternate translation: “of which land” (2) the **curse**. This would mean that the final result of the curse is that the land is “burned.” Alternate translation: “of which curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	6	8	vkus	figs-explicit	εἰς καῦσιν	1		In the author’s culture, people would “burn” a field to destroy the plants that were growing on it. That way, they could start fresh with a field that did not have any weeds or other bad plants growing on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **burning** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “is for burning all its vegetation” or “is for someone to burn everything on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	6	9	sb4a	figs-exclusive	πεπείσμεθα&λαλοῦμεν	1	we are convinced	Here the author uses the first person plural (**we**), but he is referring only to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more naturally refers to the author. Alternate translation: “I myself am convinced … I speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+HEB	6	9	sb4a	figs-exclusive	πεπείσμεθα & λαλοῦμεν	1	we are convinced	Here the author uses the first person plural (**we**), but he is referring only to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more naturally refers to the author. Alternate translation: “I myself am convinced … I speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 HEB	6	9	nwh7	figs-activepassive	πεπείσμεθα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who is **convinced**, rather than focusing on what has **convinced** him. Alternate translation: “we are confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	6	9	jt3k	figs-explicit	τὰ κρείσσονα καὶ	1	about better things concerning you	Here the author does not clarify what he is comparing the audience to when he says that he is convinced of **things {that are} better**. He implies they are doing **better** than the people he mentioned in [6:4–6](../06/04.md), the people who have stopped believing in the gospel and have “fallen away.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the comparison explicit. Alternate translation: “of things that are better than those who have fallen away and that” or “that you are doing better than the people in my warning, and that you have all things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	9	bs61	figs-idiom	ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας	1		Here, the things that **are accompanying salvation** are everything that a person has and experiences when God saves them. These include having the Holy Spirit, growing in faith and knowledge, and experiencing God’s blessing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to everything that goes with being saved. Alternate translation: “have to do with salvation” or “that go along with salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ HEB	6	9	npu2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας	1	things that c
 HEB	6	9	vq5g	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	εἰ καὶ οὕτως λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, the phrase **even if we speak thus** contrasts what the author has said in this verse with the warning he has given in [5:11–6:8](../05/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly indicates such a contrast. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that we speak thus” or “notwithstanding how we have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	6	9	jou5	writing-pronouns	οὕτως	1		Here, the word **thus** refers back to the warnings that the author has given in [5:11–6:8](../05/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **thus** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “with words of warning” or “such warnings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	6	10	ouxh	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces more explanation about why the author is “convinced of things that are better” concerning his audience ([6:9](../06/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “I am convinced of this, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	6	10	t2hb	figs-litotes	οὐ&ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ἐπιλαθέσθαι	1	For God is not so unjust that he would forget	The phrase **not unjust** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how “just” God is. If this is confusing in your language, you could express the meaning positively. If you do, you may need to negate **forget**. Alternate translation: “God is very just, to remember” or “God is just, to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+HEB	6	10	t2hb	figs-litotes	οὐ & ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ἐπιλαθέσθαι	1	For God is not so unjust that he would forget	The phrase **not unjust** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how “just” God is. If this is confusing in your language, you could express the meaning positively. If you do, you may need to negate **forget**. Alternate translation: “God is very just, to remember” or “God is just, to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 HEB	6	10	puu1	figs-explicit	ἐπιλαθέσθαι	1		Here, the word **forget** does not mean simply that a person does not remember something. It also includes how a person will not consider or include something that they have “forgotten.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how a person “overlooks” or “fails to include” something. Alternate translation: “to ignore” or “to pass over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	10	gzvj	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ ἔργου ὑμῶν, καὶ τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **work** and **love**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “do” and “love.” Alternate translation: “what you do and the way that you love, which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	10	vljf	translate-unknown	ἐνεδείξασθε	1		Here, people who have **demonstrated** something prove or show that it is true. The author tells his audience that they have “proved” or “shown” that they have **love**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “you have shown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -635,8 +635,8 @@ HEB	6	10	r9xx	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	for his nam
 HEB	6	10	szt0	figs-explicit	διακονήσαντες τοῖς ἁγίοις καὶ διακονοῦντες	1		Here, the ones who **serve** are the audience. The author’s point is that they served **the saints** in the past, and they are still serving **the saints** in the present. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “since you have served the saints in the past and even now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	11	j7f5	figs-exclusive	ἐπιθυμοῦμεν	1	We greatly desire	Here the author uses the first person plural (**we**), but he is referring only to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more naturally refers to the author. Alternate translation: “I long for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 HEB	6	11	k4si	translate-unknown	ἐνδείκνυσθαι	1	diligence	Here, just as in [6:10](../06/10.md), people who **demonstrate** something prove or show that it is true. The author wants his audience to “prove” or “show” that they have **diligence**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “to show” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	6	11	abfz	figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν&σπουδὴν	1		Here the author could want the audience to have **diligence** that is **the same** as: (1) the **diligence** that they have shown in the past. Alternate translation: “consistent diligence” (2) how they have “demonstrated” love (see [6:10](../06/10.md)). Alternate translation: “diligence, just as you demonstrate love,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	6	11	i2yc	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν αὐτὴν&σπουδὴν, πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος	1	in order to make your hope certain	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **diligence**, **assurance**, and **hope**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you strive diligently to be fully assured of what you hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	6	11	abfz	figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν & σπουδὴν	1		Here the author could want the audience to have **diligence** that is **the same** as: (1) the **diligence** that they have shown in the past. Alternate translation: “consistent diligence” (2) how they have “demonstrated” love (see [6:10](../06/10.md)). Alternate translation: “diligence, just as you demonstrate love,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	6	11	i2yc	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν αὐτὴν & σπουδὴν, πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος	1	in order to make your hope certain	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **diligence**, **assurance**, and **hope**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you strive diligently to be fully assured of what you hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	11	uwj3	figs-possession	πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about **full assurance** that concerns **hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “toward becoming fully assured of your hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	6	11	xfy1	figs-explicit	ἄχρι τέλους	1	to the end	Here, the phrase **the end** could refer to: (1) the **end** of the audience’s lives. Alternate translation: “until your lives end” (2) the **end** of the current time period, which would be when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “until the end of the age” or “until Jesus comes back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	12	zjgw	figs-metaphor	μὴ νωθροὶ γένησθε	1		Here the author speaks as if the audience could become **dull**, just as if they were sharp tools that become dull and no longer cut things well. He speaks in this way to exhort them not to become ineffective and slow in their behavior. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “you might not become slow” or “you might not become people who avoid doing what you should” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ HEB	6	16	k4tz	figs-explicit	τοῦ μείζονος	1		Here, the word **greater
 HEB	6	16	mxrh	figs-idiom	πάσης αὐτοῖς ἀντιλογίας πέρας, εἰς βεβαίωσιν ὁ ὅρκος	1		Here the author uses technical language related to **disputes** and the law courts. The word **end** refers to a final decision end point, while the word **confirmation** refers to how something is backed up and proved to be true by evidence or, here, an **oath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable words or express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the conclusion of all their disputes is the oath that closes the issue” or “the oath confirms that a dispute has ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	6	16	pqcw	figs-abstractnouns	πάσης αὐτοῖς ἀντιλογίας πέρας, εἰς βεβαίωσιν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **end**, **disputes**, and **confirmation**, you could express the ideas in more natural ways. Alternate translation: “what confirms that people have stopped disputing” or “what certainly finishes anything that people are arguing about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	17	jq1k	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐν ᾧ	1		Here, the word **which** refers back to how humans “swear” with an **oath** (see [6:16](../06/16.md)). The phrase **in which** means that what the author speaks about in this verse happens in that same context or way. In other words, God used an **oath**, just like humans do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens according to a previously stated pattern. Alternate translation: “in which same way” or “in which pattern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	6	17	dw5n	figs-infostructure	περισσότερον&ἐπιδεῖξαι	1		Here, the phrase **even more** modifies **to show**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements in this sentence to make clearer what **even more** modifies. Alternate translation: “to show even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	6	17	dw5n	figs-infostructure	περισσότερον & ἐπιδεῖξαι	1		Here, the phrase **even more** modifies **to show**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements in this sentence to make clearer what **even more** modifies. Alternate translation: “to show even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	6	17	rpv9	figs-metaphor	τοῖς κληρονόμοις τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	to the heirs of the promise	Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive the **promise** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to those who were to receive the promise” or “to the recipients of the promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	6	17	wlbg	figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1		Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “of the things from the promise” or “of the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	6	17	zz5f	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise.” Alternate translation: “of what God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -679,11 +679,11 @@ HEB	6	18	hy89		ἐν οἷς ἀδύνατον ψεύσασθαι τὸν Θεό
 HEB	6	18	gjw3	figs-metaphor	οἱ καταφυγόντες	1	we, who have fled for refuge	Here the author speaks of believers who trust in God to save and protect them as if they were running to a safe place. He speaks in this way to emphasize the need for **refuge** and the fact God provides it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who have found salvation” or “who have sought protection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	6	18	bkgy	figs-explicit	οἱ καταφυγόντες	1		Here the author does not specify from what **we** have **fled** or who provides the **refuge**. He implies that God provides the **refuge**, but from what **we** have **fled** is not clear. Most likely, the author implies any trouble or problems that humans encounter, including sin, suffering, persecution, or anything else that is bad or painful. If it would be helpful in your language, you include some of this implied information here. Alternate translation: “who have fled to God for refuge from our sins and struggles” or “who have fled to God’s refuge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	6	18	bmq6	figs-abstractnouns	ἰσχυρὰν παράκλησιν ἔχωμεν, οἱ καταφυγόντες	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **refuge** and **encouragement**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “protect” and “encourage.” Alternate translation: “who have fled to be protected might be strongly encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	6	18	gk6n	figs-metaphor	κρατῆσαι τῆς&ἐλπίδος	1	will have a strong encouragement to hold firmly to the hope set before us	Here, the phrase **hold firmly** refers to continuing to consistently believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or expect something. Alternate translation: “to tightly grasp the hope” or “to continue to expect the hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	6	18	vjvm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς&ἐλπίδος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or “expect.” The author could primarily be focusing on: (1) the act of “hoping.” Alternate translation: “to how we hope for what God has” (2) what it is that we **hope** for. Alternate translation: “to what we hope for that is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	6	18	gk6n	figs-metaphor	κρατῆσαι τῆς & ἐλπίδος	1	will have a strong encouragement to hold firmly to the hope set before us	Here, the phrase **hold firmly** refers to continuing to consistently believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or expect something. Alternate translation: “to tightly grasp the hope” or “to continue to expect the hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	6	18	vjvm	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς & ἐλπίδος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or “expect.” The author could primarily be focusing on: (1) the act of “hoping.” Alternate translation: “to how we hope for what God has” (2) what it is that we **hope** for. Alternate translation: “to what we hope for that is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	6	18	hs84	figs-activepassive	προκειμένης	1	set before us	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **set before** rather than focusing on the person doing the “setting before.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God has set before us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	6	19	w66k	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **which** refers back to “the hope” that the author mentioned in the previous verse (see [6:18](../06/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that **which** refers “the hope.” Alternate translation: “which hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	6	19	ng9i	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἄγκυραν&τῆς ψυχῆς, ἀσφαλῆ τε καὶ βεβαίαν	1	as a secure and reliable anchor for the soul	Here the author states that “hope” functions **as an anchor for the soul**. Just like an **anchor** holds a ship in one place so that it does not drift away (see the chapter introduction), so “hope,” which is **both reliable and confirmed**, holds **the soul** in one place so that the person persists in trusting God and hoping for what he has promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to something else that holds things in place, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “like a weight that holds the soul in place, both reliable and confirmed” or “as something that keeps the soul close to God in a reliable and confirmed way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	6	19	ng9i	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἄγκυραν & τῆς ψυχῆς, ἀσφαλῆ τε καὶ βεβαίαν	1	as a secure and reliable anchor for the soul	Here the author states that “hope” functions **as an anchor for the soul**. Just like an **anchor** holds a ship in one place so that it does not drift away (see the chapter introduction), so “hope,” which is **both reliable and confirmed**, holds **the soul** in one place so that the person persists in trusting God and hoping for what he has promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to something else that holds things in place, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “like a weight that holds the soul in place, both reliable and confirmed” or “as something that keeps the soul close to God in a reliable and confirmed way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	6	19	xaxt	translate-unknown	ἄγκυραν	1		An **anchor** is a heavy piece of metal attached to the end of a rope. The other end of the rope is tied to a boat, and in this way the anchor keeps the boat from moving around or drifting away. If your readers would not know what **an anchor** is, you could explain it or refer to a different object that keeps something in place. Alternate translation: “a foundation stone” or “a pillar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	6	19	vdt3	figs-doublet	ἀσφαλῆ τε καὶ βεβαίαν	1	a secure and reliable anchor	These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how secure the “hope” is. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “extremely reliable” or “very much confirmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	6	19	d223	figs-personification	εἰσερχομένην εἰς τὸ ἐσώτερον τοῦ καταπετάσματος	1	hope that enters into the inner place behind the curtain	Here the author speaks as if the “hope” can “enter” **into the inside of the curtain**. He speaks in this way to indicate that “hope” penetrates into a place we cannot experience right now: the inside of the heavenly sanctuary. In other words, while we cannot “enter” that place, we can confidently expect to receive and experience what is in that place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “already accessing what is inside the curtain” or “penetrating into the inside of the curtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -696,19 +696,19 @@ HEB	6	20	q9tt	grammar-connect-time-sequential	γενόμενος	1		Here, the ph
 HEB	6	20	zgj6		κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	after the order of Melchizedek	Here the author uses the same words he used in [5:6](../05/06.md), [10](../05/10.md). You should translate this phrase in exactly the same way as you did in those verses.
 HEB	7	intro	y8j3			0		# Hebrews 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)<br>      * Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [7:17](../07/17.md), [21](../07/21.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### High priests<br><br>In this chapter, the author frequently discusses high priests. He speaks about their “order,” which refers to the requirements, system, and service that go along with being a priest in that “order.” He focuses on two “orders.” First is the order of Aaron, made up of priests who are descended from Levi. These priests are required by Moses’ law and must offer sacrifices for themselves as well as for the rest of the people since they also sin. Also, each priest eventually dies and must be replaced by another. Second is the order of Melchizedek, made up of priests who have an “indestructible life.” This order only includes Melchizedek and Jesus. Jesus only offers sacrifices for the sins of other people, since he does not sin. Also, he never dies, so he can be a priest forever. Consider how to refer to these two different kinds of priests in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])<br><br>### Melchizedek<br><br>In this chapter, the author refers to Melchizedek as he is described in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md), including how the story does not mention his father, mother, birth, or death. Scholars debate whether the author thought that Melchizedek was a supernatural being such as an angel, or whether the author simply describes the character Melchizedek without referring to the historical person named Melchizedek. What is clear is that the author thinks that Melchizedek was “made like” Jesus, not the other way around (see [7:3](../07/03.md)). In other words, the author speaks about Melchizedek because the description of him in Genesis is a helpful way to think about Jesus. Since Melchizedek was greater than Abraham, Jesus, whom Melchizedek is like, is greater than Abraham’s descendants who became priests. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])<br><br>### Tithes<br><br>In [7:1–10](../07/01.md), the author refers multiple times to giving and collecting “tithes” or “a tenth.” These words refer to the practice of separating out one tenth of what a person earned or grew and giving it to someone else. In the law that God gave through Moses, the Israelites were required to give a “tenth” or “tithe” to priests. This enabled the priests to perform their service without having to do other work. The author uses the “tithes” language to show that Abraham, Levi’s great-grandfather, paid a “tithe” to Melchizedek. That means that the descendants of Abraham who received “tithes” actually paid “tithes” through Abraham to Melchizedek. In the author’s argument, this shows that Melchizedek and his priesthood are greater than Levi and his priesthood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tenth]])<br><br>### “Swearing” and the “oath”<br><br>Just as in chapter 6, the author refers multiple times to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. The author implies that words spoken with an “oath” have more significance or indicate something greater than words without an “oath.” If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The “loin” of Abraham<br><br>In [7:5](../07/05.md), [10](../07/10.md), the author refers to the “loin” of Abraham. This word is a polite way to refer to the male sexual organ. In [7:5](../07/05.md), the author’s point is that all the Israelites are descended from Abraham, since they all come from his “loin.” In [7:10](../07/10.md), the author’s point is that Levi, the great-grandson of Abraham, could be considered to be inside Abraham’s “loin” before Abraham and Sarah had their son, Isaac. In the author’s culture, one could speak of the descendants of a man as if they were inside the man’s sexual organ. Consider natural ways to express these ideas in your language, and see the notes on these two verses.
 HEB	7	1	mwy8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** signals that the author will now go on to explain who “Melchizedek” is and why he is important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	1	smhy	figs-idiom	οὗτος&ὁ Μελχισέδεκ	1		Here, the phrase **this Melchizedek** identifies this **Melchizedek** as the same one whom the author was speaking about in the previous verse (see [6:20](../06/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly identifies that this is the same **Melchizedek**. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek, the one whom I just mentioned,” or “this man Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	7	1	smhy	figs-idiom	οὗτος & ὁ Μελχισέδεκ	1		Here, the phrase **this Melchizedek** identifies this **Melchizedek** as the same one whom the author was speaking about in the previous verse (see [6:20](../06/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly identifies that this is the same **Melchizedek**. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek, the one whom I just mentioned,” or “this man Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	1	rfc9	translate-names	Σαλήμ	1	Salem	The word **Salem** is the name of a city that existed somewhere in the middle of what is now Israel. Some scholars think that it is another name for the city of Shechem, while other scholars think it is another name for the city of Jerusalem. Since our author is referring directly to [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md), you should preserve this name as much as possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	1	h4n1	translate-names	τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου	1		The phrase **Most High God** refers to God and describes him as the most powerful and greatest being. The author uses this phrase since it appears in [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a title that describes God as powerful and great. Alternate translation: “of God, who is more powerful than anything else” or “of the Most Exalted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	1	ji3f	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ὑποστρέφοντι	1		Here, the word **returning** refers to action that happened at the same time as when Melchizedek **met Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he was returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	7	1	rx36	figs-explicit	Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων	1	Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings	The phrase **the slaughter of the kings** refers to a story in [Genesis 14:1–16](../gen/14/01.md). Four **kings** conquered a city in which Abraham’s nephew was living, and they captured his nephew. Abraham took the fighting men that he had, and he conquered and “slaughtered” the armies of these four **kings**. He recovered all the valuable things that these **kings** had taken, including his nephew. When he was going back home after defeating the **kings**, he met **Melchizedek**. If your readers would need to know more about this background than the author states explicitly, you could include some extra information in your translation, or you could use a footnote to explain the story. Alternate translation: “Abraham, who was returning from the battle in which he defeated the four kings who had kidnapped his nephew,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	1	np7o	figs-synecdoche	τῶν βασιλέων	1		Here, the word **kings** refers to both the **kings** and their armies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 HEB	7	2	q87x	writing-pronouns	ᾧ	1	It was to him	Here, the word **whom** refers back to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “to whom—that is, Melchizedek—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	2	dplz	translate-unknown	δεκάτην&ἐμέρισεν	1		Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “gifted one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	7	2	dplz	translate-unknown	δεκάτην & ἐμέρισεν	1		Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “gifted one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	2	pw9x	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ πάντων	1		Here, the phrase **all things** refers to the things that Abraham took from the kings that he had defeated. This would have included what the kings took from their enemies and things that they themselves had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **all things refers to. Alternate translation: “from all that he had plundered from the kings” or “from everything that he took after defeating the kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	2	x3bd	figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος	1		Here the author does not state what is **translated**. The word **first** implies that it is the first name for this person: “Melchizedek.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is translating the name “Melchizedek.” Alternate translation: “his name first being translated as” or “first indeed the name ‘Melchizedek’ being translated as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	2	trz1	translate-names	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν, βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης	1		Here the author provides translations of Melchizedek’s name (“Melchizedek”) and his title (**king of Salem**) from Hebrew, the language that Abraham spoke. The name “Melchizedek” means **king of righteousness**, and the name **Salem** sounds like the Hebrew word for **peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that gives the meaning of names. Alternate translation: “first indeed his name means ‘king of righteousness,’ and then also ‘Salem’ means ‘peace,’ so ‘king of Salem’ means ‘king of peace,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	2	kfsz	figs-activepassive	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author wishes to emphasize what the words mean in a different language rather than focusing on the person doing the translating. Alternate translation: “first whose name we translate as” or “first indeed meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	7	2	abh4	figs-possession	βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης&βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης	1	king of righteousness … king of peace	Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about a **king** who is characterized by **righteousness** and **peace**. This means that he rules in a “righteous” and “peaceful” way and that what he does leads to **righteousness** and **peace** in his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “king who rules righteously … king who rules peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	7	2	abh4	figs-possession	βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης & βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης	1	king of righteousness … king of peace	Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about a **king** who is characterized by **righteousness** and **peace**. This means that he rules in a “righteous” and “peaceful” way and that what he does leads to **righteousness** and **peace** in his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “king who rules righteously … king who rules peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	7	2	yaa0	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνης… εἰρήνης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **peace**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who does what is righteous … who does what is peaceful” or “who makes things righteous … who makes things peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	2	bm11	translate-names	Σαλήμ	1		The word **Salem** refers to the same city that the author mentioned in [7:1](../07/01.md). Translate it the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	3	q4eh	figs-explicit	ἀπάτωρ, ἀμήτωρ, ἀγενεαλόγητος, μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν, μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων	1	He is without father, without mother, without ancestors, with neither beginning of days nor end of life	Here the author is describing the character “Melchizedek” as he appears in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). The author of that story does not mention anything about Melchizedek’s parents, how old he was, when he was born, or when he died. This is unusual, especially since priests usually needed to be the children of priests. The author of Hebrews probably did not think that Melchizedek was a supernatural being. Instead, he uses the character “Melchizedek” from the Old Testament story to help his audience understand Jesus better. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to what the Old Testament tells us about Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “concerning whom there is no record of his father, mother, or genealogy, and no record of the beginning of his days or the end of his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ HEB	7	5	j5c3		ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ	1		Here, the phrase **from th
 HEB	7	5	ffl4	translate-kinship	τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ	1		In the author’s culture, the word **sons** could refer to all the descendants of an important person. Here, **sons of Levi** identifies everyone who is descended from **Levi**, one of the grandsons of Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants. Only men could **receive the priesthood**, so you could use a masculine form here. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Levi” or “Levi’s tribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	7	5	l9zq	figs-distinguish	Λευεὶ τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες	1	The sons of Levi who receive the priesthood	Here, the phrase **who receive the priesthood** identifies the specific **sons of Levi** that the author is speaking about. Use a form which in your language identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “of Levi, specifically those who receive the priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 HEB	7	5	pjj8	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are called to be priests” or “who act as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	5	wash	figs-explicit	ἐντολὴν ἔχουσιν&κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1		Here the author refers specifically to the law that God gave through Moses. He probably is thinking about the **command** about Levites and tithes in [Numbers 18:21–24](../num/18/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to a specific part of Moses’ law. Alternate translation: “are commanded in Moses’ law” or “are told by God in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	5	wash	figs-explicit	ἐντολὴν ἔχουσιν & κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1		Here the author refers specifically to the law that God gave through Moses. He probably is thinking about the **command** about Levites and tithes in [Numbers 18:21–24](../num/18/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to a specific part of Moses’ law. Alternate translation: “are commanded in Moses’ law” or “are told by God in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	5	hn3k	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποδεκατοῦν	1	from the people	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **tithe**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “to receive one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	5	ri2y	translate-kinship	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν	1	from their brothers	Here, the word **brothers** refers to anyone who is descended from **Abraham** and Jacob, which would be all Israelites. It does not refer just to male children of one’s parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to everyone from one tribe or nation. Alternate translation: “from their fellow Israelites” or “from the others in their nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	7	5	busq	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν	1		Although the word **brothers** is masculine, it refers to any relative, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from their relatives” or “from their brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -742,11 +742,11 @@ HEB	7	6	d2hq	figs-explicit	τὸν ἔχοντα τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1
 HEB	7	6	odvp	figs-idiom	τὸν ἔχοντα τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		Here, the phrase **the one having the promises** identifies Abraham as the one to whom God made these **promises**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use another comparable phrase that identifies Abraham as the recipient of God’s **promises**. Alternate translation: “the one to whom God made the promises” or “the recipient of the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	6	kh73	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	7	xhcq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a further development concerning how Melchizedek blessed Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further development, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Concerning blessings,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	7	wdtx	figs-idiom	χωρὶς&πάσης ἀντιλογίας	1		The phrase **without any dispute** identifies the statement as something that most people would agree with. In other words, the author does not think he needs to prove this statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a commonly held belief that does not need to be proved. Alternate translation: “as everyone knows” or “as we all know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	7	7	wdtx	figs-idiom	χωρὶς & πάσης ἀντιλογίας	1		The phrase **without any dispute** identifies the statement as something that most people would agree with. In other words, the author does not think he needs to prove this statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a commonly held belief that does not need to be proved. Alternate translation: “as everyone knows” or “as we all know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	7	ddwg	figs-explicit	τὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ κρείττονος εὐλογεῖται	1		The author assumes that his audience would apply this general principle to what he has said about Melchizedek blessing Abraham. If your readers would not naturally make this application, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the lesser, in this case Abraham, is blessed by the greater, in this case Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	7	k6pc	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ κρείττονος εὐλογεῖται	1	the lesser person is blessed by the greater person	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the greater blesses the lesser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	7	7	hper	figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἔλαττον&τοῦ κρείττονος	1		The author is using the adjectives **lesser** and **greater** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **lesser** and **greater**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “a lesser person … a greater person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-HEB	7	8	sf79	figs-infostructure	ὧδε μὲν&ἐκεῖ δὲ	1	In this case … in that case	The phrase **indeed here** introduces the first situation: that of the priests descended from Levi. The phrase **but there** introduces the second situation: that of Melchizedek the priest. The author compares how they both receive **tithes** (implicitly with Melchizedek) and contrasts how the priests descended from Levi die but Melchizedek **lives on**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that introduce two situations that the author wishes to compare and contrast. Alternate translation: “in the case of the Levites … but in the case of Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	7	7	hper	figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἔλαττον & τοῦ κρείττονος	1		The author is using the adjectives **lesser** and **greater** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **lesser** and **greater**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “a lesser person … a greater person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+HEB	7	8	sf79	figs-infostructure	ὧδε μὲν & ἐκεῖ δὲ	1	In this case … in that case	The phrase **indeed here** introduces the first situation: that of the priests descended from Levi. The phrase **but there** introduces the second situation: that of Melchizedek the priest. The author compares how they both receive **tithes** (implicitly with Melchizedek) and contrasts how the priests descended from Levi die but Melchizedek **lives on**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that introduce two situations that the author wishes to compare and contrast. Alternate translation: “in the case of the Levites … but in the case of Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	7	8	negg	figs-explicit	ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι	1		Here, the phrase **mortal men** refers specifically to the priests descended from Levi. The author is emphasizing that all these priests die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make clearer to whom **mortal men** refers . Alternate translation: “priests who will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	8	iymo	figs-abstractnouns	δεκάτας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **tithes**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	8	seiq	writing-pronouns	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1		Here, the word **he** refers to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make clear to whom **he** refers. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek is testified about that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -754,36 +754,36 @@ HEB	7	8	n9nb	figs-explicit	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1		The autho
 HEB	7	8	d1yr	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Melchizedek, who **is testified about**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that God did it when he spoke through Moses in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). Alternate translation: “God testifies about him” or “Moses testifies about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	8	c9zz	figs-explicit	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1	is testified that he lives on	Here, just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), the author is describing the character “Melchizedek” as he appears in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). The author of that story does not mention anything about Melchizedek’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to what the Old Testament tells us about Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “he is testified about that he lives on, since there is no record of his death in the Scriptures” or “the lack of any record of his death testifies that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	9	v1kt	figs-idiom	ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν	1		The phrase **so to speak** identifies what follows as something that the author considers to be imprecise or that claims more than he might wish to claim in the end. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an argument to which the author does not want to fully commit. Alternate translation: “as one might say” or “in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	7	9	zvd3	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ&Λευεὶς	1		The word 
+HEB	7	9	zvd3	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ & Λευεὶς	1		The word 
 HEB	7	9	e9gc	figs-metonymy	Λευεὶς, ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων	1		Here, the name **Levi** refers to the descendants of **Levi** who were priests and collected **tithes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi**. Alternate translation: “Levi’s descendants, the ones collecting tithes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-HEB	7	9	v1yu	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ&ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται	2	Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through Abraham	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea behind **tithe** and **tithes**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “the one collecting one out of ten portions, also had paid one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	9	odg8	figs-explicit	δι’ Ἀβραὰμ&δεδεκάτωται	1		Here the author refers to how Abraham **paid a tithe** to Melchizedek, an event the author has already mentioned (see [7:4](../07/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make more explicit that the author is referring to that event. Alternate translation: “had paid a tithe to Melchizedek through Abraham after Abraham defeated his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	10	g26s	figs-idiom	ἔτι&ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν	1	Levi was in the body of his ancestor	The phrase **the loin of his father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham, while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	7	9	v1yu	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ & ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται	2	Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through Abraham	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea behind **tithe** and **tithes**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “the one collecting one out of ten portions, also had paid one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	7	9	odg8	figs-explicit	δι’ Ἀβραὰμ & δεδεκάτωται	1		Here the author refers to how Abraham **paid a tithe** to Melchizedek, an event the author has already mentioned (see [7:4](../07/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make more explicit that the author is referring to that event. Alternate translation: “had paid a tithe to Melchizedek through Abraham after Abraham defeated his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	10	g26s	figs-idiom	ἔτι & ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν	1	Levi was in the body of his ancestor	The phrase **the loin of his father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham, while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	10	bd2l	translate-kinship	τοῦ πατρὸς	1		Here the author uses the word **father** to refer in general to a male ancestor. Abraham was more specifically Levi’s great-grandfather on his father’s side. Use an appropriate word for this relationship in your culture. Alternate translation: “of his ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	7	10	l5dd	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1		Here, the word **him** refers to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	11	kdb8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν οὖν	1	Now	Here, the word **then** shows the audience that the author is continuing the argument about Melchizedek and the priests descended from Levi. The word **indeed** signals the first part of a contrast. The second part is the question in the second half of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce a development in the argument that takes the form of a contrast. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “then on the one hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	11	ruvi	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν	1		Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **perfection** did not happen **through the Levitical priesthood**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by reminding the audience that God did indeed appoint **another priest** who is **according to the order of Melchizedek**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If indeed then, perfection had actually been through the Levitical priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-HEB	7	11	yvxw	figs-abstractnouns	τελείωσις&ἦν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **perfection**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “perfect.” Alternate translation: “people could become perfect” or “what is perfect was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	7	11	yvxw	figs-abstractnouns	τελείωσις & ἦν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **perfection**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “perfect.” Alternate translation: “people could become perfect” or “what is perfect was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	11	nw53	translate-unknown	τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης	1		Here, the phrase **the Levitical priesthood** refers to the people, the system, and the practices that were connected with how the descendants of Levi served as priests to God for the rest of the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to all these components. Alternate translation: “the way that the descendants of Levi served as priests” or “the priesthood that the descendants of Levi practiced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	11	eyek	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Levites served as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	11	t3pe	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification or explanation of what the author just said. In other words, he speaks about **perfection** and the **Levitical priesthood** because this **priesthood** was the **basis** for the whole **law**. He wishes his audience to know that what he says about **perfection** and **priesthood** applies to the whole **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or explanation. Alternate translation: “now” or “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	11	etid	figs-infostructure	εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν, ὁ λαὸς γὰρ ἐπ’ αὐτῆς νενομοθέτηται,	1		Here the author provides a clarification after he makes his claim. If your readers would find this order confusing, you could put the clarification before the claim. Alternate translation: “Now on the basis of the Levitical priesthood, the people had been given the law. If indeed then, perfection was through the Levitical priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	7	11	ui2m	figs-explicit	ὁ λαὸς&νενομοθέτηται	1		Here the author refers to the **law** that God gave through Moses to the **people** of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to which **law** and which **people** the author is referring. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people had been given Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	11	a17s	figs-activepassive	ὁ λαὸς&νενομοθέτηται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **people** who were **given the law**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God had given the law to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	11	ui2m	figs-explicit	ὁ λαὸς & νενομοθέτηται	1		Here the author refers to the **law** that God gave through Moses to the **people** of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to which **law** and which **people** the author is referring. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people had been given Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	11	a17s	figs-activepassive	ὁ λαὸς & νενομοθέτηται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **people** who were **given the law**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God had given the law to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	11	wgp5	figs-rquestion	τίς ἔτι χρεία κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι?	1	what further need would there have been for another priest to arise after the manner of Melchizedek, and not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there was no further need.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “there was no further at all for another priest to arise according to the order of Melchizedek and not be said to be according to the order of Aaron.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	7	11	jt8l	figs-abstractnouns	τίς ἔτι χρεία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **need**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “need” or an adjective such as “necessary.” Alternate translation: “why was it still necessary” or “why was it needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	11	kmfw	figs-explicit	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι?	1		Here the author is referring back to the words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md) from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md): “You are a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” It is these words that “say” that Jesus is a priest **according to the order of Melchizedek* and not **according to the order of Aaron**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to the quotation. Alternate translation: “for another to arise who, according to the psalm, serves according to the order of Melchizedek and is not said to serve according to the order of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	11	hi4e	figs-metaphor	ἀνίστασθαι	1	to arise	Here, the word **arise** refers to someone taking a position as if they were standing up to do something. The author speaks in this way to show that **another priest** has “stood up” to do his task as priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to appear” or “to begin serving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	7	11	cc5f	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ&κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν	1	after the manner of Melchizedek	Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and performs the same duties which that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest … in the same way that Aaron was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood … having a priesthood just like Aaron’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	7	11	kt3a	figs-activepassive	οὐ&λέγεσθαι	1	not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is not **said** rather than focusing on what does not do the “saying.” If you must state who does not “say,” the author implies that “God” did not say this when he spoke in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “for the psalm not to identify him to be” or “for God to say that he is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	11	cc5f	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ & κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν	1	after the manner of Melchizedek	Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and performs the same duties which that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest … in the same way that Aaron was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood … having a priesthood just like Aaron’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	7	11	kt3a	figs-activepassive	οὐ & λέγεσθαι	1	not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is not **said** rather than focusing on what does not do the “saying.” If you must state who does not “say,” the author implies that “God” did not say this when he spoke in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “for the psalm not to identify him to be” or “for God to say that he is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	12	wawz	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation and support for the idea that the “basis” of the **law** is the **priesthood** (see [7:11](../07/11.md)). The author’s point is that, because a **change of the law** occurs whenever the **priesthood is changed**, that means that the **priesthood** must be the basis for the **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further support for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that the priesthood is the basis of the law, because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	7	12	c7f1	figs-activepassive	μετατιθεμένης&τῆς ἱερωσύνης	1	For when the priesthood is changed, the law must also be changed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **changed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “when God changes the priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	12	c7f1	figs-activepassive	μετατιθεμένης & τῆς ἱερωσύνης	1	For when the priesthood is changed, the law must also be changed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **changed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “when God changes the priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	12	lipz	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἱερωσύνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how people act as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	12	s8qi	figs-idiom	ἐξ ἀνάγκης	1		Here, the phrase **from necessity** indicates that what follows “must” or “has to” happen. The phrase does not clarify why what follows is a **necessity**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates obligation or certainty. Alternate translation: “it is required that” or “it follows that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	12	e8av	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀνάγκης καὶ νόμου μετάθεσις γίνεται	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **necessity**, **change**, or **place**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the law also needs to be changed” or “it is required that the law also changes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	13	mwx4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has implied: there has indeed been a change in the priesthood (see [7:11–12](../07/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “Now the priesthood has been changed, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	13	k9zi	writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ὃν&λέγεται ταῦτα&μετέσχηκεν	1	For the one	Here, the words **he** and **whom** both refer to Jesus, to whom the author has applied the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). The author does not refer to Jesus by name here, because he uses “the Lord” in the next verse and because he emphatically uses Jesus’ name in [7:22](../07/22.md). If possible, refer to Jesus here as indirectly as the author does. If you must clarify to whom **he** and **whom** refer, you could use a word or phrase that directly identifies Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord about whom these things are said belongs to” or “Jesus, about whom these things are said, belongs to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	13	m9mm	figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ὃν&λέγεται ταῦτα	1	about whom these things are said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the “saying,” the author implies that “God” did it in the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “about whom God said these things” or “about whom we read these things in the psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	13	k9zi	writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ὃν & λέγεται ταῦτα & μετέσχηκεν	1	For the one	Here, the words **he** and **whom** both refer to Jesus, to whom the author has applied the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). The author does not refer to Jesus by name here, because he uses “the Lord” in the next verse and because he emphatically uses Jesus’ name in [7:22](../07/22.md). If possible, refer to Jesus here as indirectly as the author does. If you must clarify to whom **he** and **whom** refer, you could use a word or phrase that directly identifies Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord about whom these things are said belongs to” or “Jesus, about whom these things are said, belongs to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	13	m9mm	figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ὃν & λέγεται ταῦτα	1	about whom these things are said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the “saying,” the author implies that “God” did it in the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “about whom God said these things” or “about whom we read these things in the psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	13	nmdl	figs-extrainfo	φυλῆς ἑτέρας	1		Here, the phrase **tribe** refers to all those people who are descended from one of Jacob’s twelve sons. The author refers to **another tribe** to show that Jesus is not from the **tribe** of Levi. He will state which tribe Jesus is from in the next verse, so do not identify of whose **tribe** the author speaks until the next verse. Alternate translation: “one of the other tribes” or “a tribe that is not connected with Levi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	7	13	n3hs	figs-idiom	προσέσχηκεν τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ	1		Here, the phrase **officiated at the altar** is another way to say that someone has served or functioned as a priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to acting as a priest. Alternate translation: “has functioned as priest” or “has done priestly work at God’s altar” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	14	t3dm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Now	Here, the word **For** introduces further, more specific explanation of what the author claimed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more specific information. Alternate translation: “More specifically,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -793,13 +793,13 @@ HEB	7	14	fh67	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν Μωϋσῆς ἐλάλησεν	1		Here
 HEB	7	14	onns	figs-explicit	περὶ ἱερέων οὐδὲν	1		Here, the phrase **nothing concerning priests** indicates that the law of **Moses** contains no instructions or indications about people from the tribe of **Judah** serving as priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “nothing about some of them acting as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	15	uf6c	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν	1		Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the author’s claim that God changed the priesthood. Alternate translation: “the change in priesthood is” or “the fact that God has changed the priesthood is” (2) more generally to what the author is arguing about Jesus and the priests who are descended from Levi. Alternate translation: “what I am arguing is” or “what I have said is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	15	jn1p		καὶ περισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν	1	What we say is clearer yet	Here, the phrase **still even more obvious** is a stronger form of the phrase “{it is} obvious” in [7:14](../07/14.md). The author’s point is that everyone must acknowledge that **this** (see the previous note) is true, given that the following **if** statement is also true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that everyone must agree with. Alternate translation: “And everyone must agree that this is true” or “And everyone knows that this is surely correct”
-HEB	7	15	md9i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ἀνίσταται ἱερεὺς ἕτερος	1	if another priest arises	Here the author is speaking as if **another priest** “emerging” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “because” or “since.” Alternate translation: “now that another priest has emerged” or “because another priest has emerged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+HEB	7	15	md9i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἀνίσταται ἱερεὺς ἕτερος	1	if another priest arises	Here the author is speaking as if **another priest** “emerging” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “because” or “since.” Alternate translation: “now that another priest has emerged” or “because another priest has emerged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 HEB	7	15	i17g	figs-explicit	ἱερεὺς ἕτερος	1	General Information:	Here, the phrase **another priest** refers to Jesus, who is a different kind of **priest** than the priests who are descended from Levi. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the phrase refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is a different priest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	15	chxb	figs-metaphor	ἀνίσταται	1		Here the author speaks of how Jesus has become a priest as if he were a person “emerging” from underneath a covering or screen. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus became a **priest** at a specific point in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to becoming a priest. Alternate translation: “takes office” or “begins to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	7	15	z1yl	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ	1	in the likeness of Melchizedek	Here, the phrase **according to the likeness of** means something very similar to “according to the order of.” See how you translated that phrase in [7:11](../07/11.md). If possible, use similar but not identical words here. The word **likeness** emphasizes similar behavior and identity, while “order” emphasizes similar requirements and duties. Alternate translation: “much like how Melchizedek was a priest” or “with a priesthood much like Melchizedek’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	15	afqi	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **likeness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “like” or “similar.” Alternate translation: “who is like Melchizedek” or “who is similar to Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	16	nt6b	writing-pronouns	ὃς&γέγονεν	1		Here, the word **who** refers back to the phrase “another priest” in the previous verse ([7:15](../07/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to “another priest.” If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That priest has become one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	16	fr4a	figs-infostructure	οὐ κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης&ἀλλὰ κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου	1	It was not based on the law	If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “according to the power of an indestructible life, not according to a law of a fleshly command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	7	16	nt6b	writing-pronouns	ὃς & γέγονεν	1		Here, the word **who** refers back to the phrase “another priest” in the previous verse ([7:15](../07/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to “another priest.” If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That priest has become one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	16	fr4a	figs-infostructure	οὐ κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης & ἀλλὰ κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου	1	It was not based on the law	If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “according to the power of an indestructible life, not according to a law of a fleshly command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	7	16	erq7	figs-possession	νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1	the law of fleshly descent	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **a law** includes **a fleshly command**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “according to a fleshly command in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	7	16	el4j	figs-explicit	ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1		Here, the phrase **fleshly command** refers to a **command** that could: (1) deal with what is **fleshly**, specifically how humans have children. In other words, the **command** relates to how priests need to be descended from Levi. Alternate translation: “of a command about physical descent” (2) apply to people who are **fleshly**, that is, those who are alive now and who do not have resurrected bodies. Alternate translation: “of command that deals with this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	16	l4mg	figs-abstractnouns	ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “that commands what is fleshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -809,16 +809,16 @@ HEB	7	16	m4kl	figs-explicit	ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου	1		Here, the phrase
 HEB	7	17	xmj8	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For scripture witnesses about him	Here, the word **For** introduces the evidence or proof that Jesus has become a priest “according to the power of an indestructible life” (see [7:16](../07/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	7	17	gqya	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρεῖται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **testified** rather than focusing on who or what does the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it when he spoke [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is testifying” or “the psalm is testifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	17	t8nv	writing-quotations	μαρτυρεῖται	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that has been **testified**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it is being testified in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	7	17	oo1b	figs-quotations	μαρτυρεῖται&ὅτι σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is being testified that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	7	17	oo1b	figs-quotations	μαρτυρεῖται & ὅτι σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is being testified that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	7	17	g6zd		σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	according to the order of Melchizedek	Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
 HEB	7	18	bzht	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what the quote in the previous verse means. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “on the other hand” in [7:19b](../07/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a two-part explanation. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to follow something like the alternate translation for “on the other hand” in 7:19b. Alternate translation: “First then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	18	dm50	figs-abstractnouns	ἀθέτησις&γίνεται προαγούσης ἐντολῆς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **annulment** and **commandment**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “annul” and “command.” Alternate translation: “what was formerly commanded is annulled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	7	18	dm50	figs-abstractnouns	ἀθέτησις & γίνεται προαγούσης ἐντολῆς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **annulment** and **commandment**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “annul” and “command.” Alternate translation: “what was formerly commanded is annulled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	18	x8tw	figs-explicit	προαγούσης ἐντολῆς	1		Here, the phrase **the former commandment** identifies what God commanded Moses to tell the people about how the descendants of Levi would serve as priests and what they would do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the former commandment about the Levitical priesthood” or “of the former commandment concerning priests in Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	18	ez4i	figs-doublet	ἀσθενὲς, καὶ ἀνωφελές	1		These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how ineffective the “former commandment” was. If your language does not use repetition to do this, or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “is very weak” or “cannot accomplish anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	7	19	t5w7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces support for how the “former commandment” is “weak and useless” (see [7:18](../07/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “indeed,” or “that is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	7	19	ia8j	figs-personification	οὐδὲν&ἐτελείωσεν ὁ νόμος	1	the law made nothing perfect	Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who was ineffective and could “perfect” nothing. He speaks in this way to indicate that the system of laws that God gave through Moses, particularly the laws about priests, did not lead to people or things becoming “perfect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the law was not something that people could follow to become perfect” or “nothing was perfected through Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	7	19	ia8j	figs-personification	οὐδὲν & ἐτελείωσεν ὁ νόμος	1	the law made nothing perfect	Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who was ineffective and could “perfect” nothing. He speaks in this way to indicate that the system of laws that God gave through Moses, particularly the laws about priests, did not lead to people or things becoming “perfect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the law was not something that people could follow to become perfect” or “nothing was perfected through Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	7	19	otzd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the phrase **on the other hand** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this phrase so that it works well with how you translated “on the one hand” in [7:18](../07/18.md). Alternate translation: “and second, there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	19	stc2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπεισαγωγὴ&κρείττονος ἐλπίδος	1	a better hope is introduced	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **introduction** and **hope**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “introduce” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “God introduces something better for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	7	19	stc2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπεισαγωγὴ & κρείττονος ἐλπίδος	1	a better hope is introduced	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **introduction** and **hope**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “introduce” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “God introduces something better for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	19	xp1h	figs-metonymy	κρείττονος ἐλπίδος	1	a better hope is introduced	Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the better things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	7	19	c9tz	figs-go	ἐγγίζομεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	through which we come near to God	Here, the phrase **come near** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to approach God in heaven. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “we go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	7	20	e97r	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put in a first sentence the background information about how the Israelite priests were not appointed with an oath while Jesus was appointed with an oath. Then, you could put the comparison between how Jesus was appointed with an oath and how he is the guarantor of a better covenant in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For indeed they, without swearing an oath, are become priests, but he with an oath-taking, through God saying to him, “The Lord swore and will not change his mind: ‘You are a priest forever.’” So, by as much as not without swearing an oath,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
@@ -830,8 +830,8 @@ HEB	7	20	atus	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ	1	And it was not wit
 HEB	7	20	jrue	writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **they** refers to the priests who are descended from Levi, about whom God gave laws through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Levitical priests. Alternate translation: “the Levitical priests” or “the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	20	n5bi	figs-explicit	χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας εἰσὶν ἱερεῖς γεγονότες	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author points out that God did not “swear” an **oath** when he appointed the descendants of Levi to be priests. Instead, he gave laws and regulations through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the author is claiming more explicit. Alternate translation: “are appointed priests by God without him swearing an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	21	q1vm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **but** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this word so that it works well with how you translated “indeed” in [7:20](../07/20.md). Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	21	y3uo	figs-ellipsis	ὁ&μετὰ	1	And it was not without an oath!	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse ([7:20](../07/20.md)). Alternate translation: “he became a priest with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	7	21	hook	writing-pronouns	ὁ&μετὰ ὁρκωμοσίας διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the words **he** and **him** refer to Jesus the Son. The phrase **the one saying** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronouns refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Son with an oath-taking, through God the Father saying to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	21	y3uo	figs-ellipsis	ὁ & μετὰ	1	And it was not without an oath!	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse ([7:20](../07/20.md)). Alternate translation: “he became a priest with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+HEB	7	21	hook	writing-pronouns	ὁ & μετὰ ὁρκωμοσίας διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the words **he** and **him** refer to Jesus the Son. The phrase **the one saying** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronouns refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Son with an oath-taking, through God the Father saying to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	21	ythb	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ ὁρκωμοσίας διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **oath-taking**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “taking an oath.” Alternate translation: “through God taking an oath when he said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	21	fzr9	writing-quotations	διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to Christ. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to Christ, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “through the one speaking to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	7	21	o4wg	figs-quotations	πρὸς αὐτόν, ὤμοσεν Κύριος, καὶ οὐ μεταμεληθήσεται, σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα;	1	And it was not without an oath!	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the quotation as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “to him that the Lord swore and will not change his mind, saying that he is a priest forever—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ HEB	7	21	e5v1		σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	And it was no
 HEB	7	22	h462	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κατὰ τοσοῦτο	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **according to so much more** introduces the second half of the comparison that the author began in the first part of [7:20](../07/20.md). The comparison indicates that the difference in greatness between a priesthood with an oath and a priesthood without an oath is comparable to the difference in greatness between the covenants of which these priesthoods are a part. In other words, the covenant that Jesus “guarantees” is greater than the covenant that God gave through Moses, just like his priesthood that is guaranteed by an oath is greater than the priesthood that God gave to the descendants of Levi. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses a comparison between two situations or concepts. Alternate translation: “by that much” or “by so much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	22	e23d	translate-unknown	γέγονεν ἔγγυος	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here, the word **guarantor** refers to a person who makes sure that people do what they promised or agreed to do. In other words, Jesus is the one who ensures that the **better covenant** be carried out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “ensures the fulfillment” or “makes certain the accomplishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	22	qn5c	figs-explicit	κρείττονος διαθήκης	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here the audience would have inferred that the **covenant** is **better** than the “old covenant,” the one that God gave through Moses to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of a covenant that is better than the covenant that God gave through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	23	cdsy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ οἱ μὲν&γεγονότες	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here, the word **And** indicates that the author is adding a new point or topic to what he is discussing. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the reader that this new point occurs in two contrasting parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that more clearly introduce a new point in two contrasting parts. Make sure that you express the second half of the contrast in [7:24](../07/24.md) so that it fits with what you do here. Alternate translation: “Now on the one hand, the ones having become” or “First, the ones having become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	7	23	cdsy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ οἱ μὲν & γεγονότες	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here, the word **And** indicates that the author is adding a new point or topic to what he is discussing. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the reader that this new point occurs in two contrasting parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that more clearly introduce a new point in two contrasting parts. Make sure that you express the second half of the contrast in [7:24](../07/24.md) so that it fits with what you do here. Alternate translation: “Now on the one hand, the ones having become” or “First, the ones having become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	23	ygc6	figs-explicit	πλείονές	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here the author is primarily interested in how there were **many** priests serving one after the other. He is not speaking about how **many** priests served at one time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the long sequence of priests who served one after the other. Alternate translation: “many in a row” or “many throughout time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	23	yeb6	figs-activepassive	θανάτῳ κωλύεσθαι παραμένειν	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **prevented** rather than focusing on what does the “preventing.” Alternate translation: “death prevents them from continuing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	23	vn5m	figs-abstractnouns	θανάτῳ	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “by how they die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -853,10 +853,10 @@ HEB	7	24	z20u	figs-explicit	μένειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν αἰῶν
 HEB	7	24	u941	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπαράβατον ἔχει τὴν ἱερωσύνην	1	he has a permanent priesthood	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “is permanently a priest” or “permanently acts as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	25	a4gg	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅθεν	1	Therefore he	Here, the phrase **because of which** introduces a conclusion based on the fact that Jesus has “the permanent priesthood” ([7:24](../07/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural form that introduces a conclusion. Alternate translation: “as a result of which” or “so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	7	25	sn4h	figs-explicit	σῴζειν εἰς τὸ παντελὲς	1	Therefore he	Here, the word **completely** identifies the way that Jesus “saves” people as something that he himself does totally and finally. In other words, he does not need someone else to assist him in “saving” his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to save entirely” or “to save all the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	25	b182	figs-go	τοὺς προσερχομένους&τῷ Θεῷ	1	those who approach God through him	Here, the word **approaching** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author speaks of people **approaching God**. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “the ones going before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	7	25	b182	figs-go	τοὺς προσερχομένους & τῷ Θεῷ	1	those who approach God through him	Here, the word **approaching** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author speaks of people **approaching God**. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “the ones going before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	7	25	l29k	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	πάντοτε ζῶν	1	those who approach God through him	Here, the phrase **always living** could introduce: (1) another reason why he is **able to save completely**. Alternate translation: “because he always lives” (2) something that happens as part of or during his “saving” of those **approaching God through him**. Alternate translation: “as one who always lives” or “part of which is how he always lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	7	26	x23q	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	has become higher than the heavens	Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of the way in which Jesus serves as a priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces more explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	26	p677	writing-pronouns	τοιοῦτος&ἀρχιερεύς	1	has become higher than the heavens	Here, the word **such** could refer: (1) back to what the author said in the previous verses about how Jesus has a “permanent priesthood” and can “save completely” (see [7:24–25](../07/24.md)). Alternate translation: “that kind of high priest” (2) ahead to what the author will say in this and the following verses about the kind of high priest that Jesus is. Alternate translation: “the kind of high priest I am about to describe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	26	p677	writing-pronouns	τοιοῦτος & ἀρχιερεύς	1	has become higher than the heavens	Here, the word **such** could refer: (1) back to what the author said in the previous verses about how Jesus has a “permanent priesthood” and can “save completely” (see [7:24–25](../07/24.md)). Alternate translation: “that kind of high priest” (2) ahead to what the author will say in this and the following verses about the kind of high priest that Jesus is. Alternate translation: “the kind of high priest I am about to describe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	26	gl1y	translate-unknown	καὶ ἔπρεπεν	1	has become higher than the heavens	Here, the word **suitable** identifies something or someone that is appropriate to a specific situation or task. The author’s point is that Jesus is the appropriate high priest to “save completely” everyone who believes in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies this **high priest** as “appropriate” or “fitting.” Alternate translation: “was indeed fitting” or “was indeed the right one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	26	t182	figs-doublet	ὅσιος, ἄκακος, ἀμίαντος	1	has become higher than the heavens	The three words **holy**, **innocent**, and **pure** mean very similar things and emphasize that Jesus did not sin or do anything wrong. The word **holy** emphasizes how Jesus honored and pleased God. The word **innocent** identifies Jesus as a person who did not think about or plan evil deeds. The word **pure** indicates that Jesus did not do anything that would defile him or make him repulsive to God. If your language does not have words that fit with these three distinct ideas, you could express these three words with one or two words or with a phrase. Alternate translation: “sinless and perfect” or “without sin or evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	7	26	xxf1		κεχωρισμένος ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν	1	has become higher than the heavens	Here, the phrase **separated from the sinners** could refer to: (1) how Jesus is distinct from or different than **the sinners**. Alternate translation: “not one of the sinners” or “distinct from the sinners” (2) how Jesus does not come into contact with **sinners** because he is now **higher than the heavens**. Alternate translation: “dwelling far away from sinners” or “not coming into contact with the sinners”
@@ -865,49 +865,49 @@ HEB	7	27	yc7r	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔχει καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀν
 HEB	7	27	nfh7	figs-infostructure	καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνάγκην, ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ	1		If your readers would find the order in which the author presents information confusing, you could rearrange the elements so that they appear in more natural order. Alternate translation: “a need each day to offer up sacrifices, first on behalf of his own sins and then on behalf of the those of the people, even as the high priests do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	7	27	lxug	figs-explicit	ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1		Here, the phrase **high priests** refers to other **high priests** besides Jesus, more specifically those who are descended from Levi and Aaron. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit which **high priests** these are. Alternate translation: “even as the other high priests” or “even as the Levitical high priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	27	jdb8		πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ	1		Here the author uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in [5:3](../05/03.md). They are not the same words, but the main idea is very similar. Consider referring to that verse when you translate these words.
-HEB	7	27	qnj1	grammar-connect-time-sequential	πρότερον&ἔπειτα	1		Here, the words **first** and **then** indicate sequence in time. In other words, only after making an offering **on behalf of his own sins** does the high priest do so **{on behalf of} those of the people**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce two actions in a sequence. Alternate translation: “in the first place … and in the second place” or “first … and second” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-HEB	7	27	ubdv	figs-idiom	ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν&τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **on behalf of** someone’s sins means that the **sacrifices** are intended to deal with those sins. It does not mean that the **sacrifices** allow the sins or encourage the sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to deal with his own sins … to deal with those of the people” or “for the forgiveness of his own sins … for the forgiveness of those of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	7	27	b6nv	writing-pronouns	τῶν ἰδίων&ἐποίησεν&ἑαυτὸν	1		Here, the phrase **his own** refers to any one of the **high priests**. The words **he** and **himself** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “the high priest’s own … Jesus did … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	27	qnj1	grammar-connect-time-sequential	πρότερον & ἔπειτα	1		Here, the words **first** and **then** indicate sequence in time. In other words, only after making an offering **on behalf of his own sins** does the high priest do so **{on behalf of} those of the people**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce two actions in a sequence. Alternate translation: “in the first place … and in the second place” or “first … and second” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+HEB	7	27	ubdv	figs-idiom	ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν & τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **on behalf of** someone’s sins means that the **sacrifices** are intended to deal with those sins. It does not mean that the **sacrifices** allow the sins or encourage the sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to deal with his own sins … to deal with those of the people” or “for the forgiveness of his own sins … for the forgiveness of those of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	7	27	b6nv	writing-pronouns	τῶν ἰδίων & ἐποίησεν & ἑαυτὸν	1		Here, the phrase **his own** refers to any one of the **high priests**. The words **he** and **himself** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “the high priest’s own … Jesus did … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	27	nqlp	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces the reason why Jesus did not **have each day a need** to do what the **high priests** did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	7	27	ciag	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο&ἐποίησεν	1		Here, the word **this** refers to the result of the **sacrifices** that the author mentioned earlier in the verse. He means that Jesus successfully dealt with or removed sins, which is what those **sacrifices** were meant to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “he successfully took away sins” or “he did what these priests were supposed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	27	ciag	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο & ἐποίησεν	1		Here, the word **this** refers to the result of the **sacrifices** that the author mentioned earlier in the verse. He means that Jesus successfully dealt with or removed sins, which is what those **sacrifices** were meant to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “he successfully took away sins” or “he did what these priests were supposed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	27	uoky	translate-unknown	ἐφάπαξ	1		Here, the phrase **once and never again** indicates that something occurred one time and will not or does not need to occur again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to one, definitive moment. Alternate translation: “only one time” or “once only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	28	e8a6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknesses	Here, the word **For** introduces a summary statement for what the author has argued in [7:18–27](../07/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces a summary statement. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “So,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	28	n693	figs-personification	ὁ νόμος&καθίστησιν	1	the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknesses	Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could “appoint” people as high priests. He speaks in this way to indicate that these high priests fulfill what is written in the law about high priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the one who gave **the law** as the one who **appoints**, or you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in the law it is written that someone should appoint” or “according to the law, one must appoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-HEB	7	28	il92	figs-explicit	ὁ νόμος&ὁ λόγος&τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον	1	the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknesses	Here, the phrase **the law** refers to the **law** that God gave to Israel through Moses. The phrase **the word of the swearing of an oath** refers to what God had the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) write down. The psalm was written **after** the law, which means that it can overrule what the **law** required. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to which **law** and **oath** the author is referring. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses … but the psalm that records the swearing of an oath, which was written after the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	28	n693	figs-personification	ὁ νόμος & καθίστησιν	1	the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknesses	Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who could “appoint” people as high priests. He speaks in this way to indicate that these high priests fulfill what is written in the law about high priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the one who gave **the law** as the one who **appoints**, or you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in the law it is written that someone should appoint” or “according to the law, one must appoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	7	28	il92	figs-explicit	ὁ νόμος & ὁ λόγος & τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον	1	the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknesses	Here, the phrase **the law** refers to the **law** that God gave to Israel through Moses. The phrase **the word of the swearing of an oath** refers to what God had the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) write down. The psalm was written **after** the law, which means that it can overrule what the **law** required. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to which **law** and **oath** the author is referring. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses … but the psalm that records the swearing of an oath, which was written after the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	28	esfp	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους	1	the law appoints as high priests men who have weaknesses	In Israelite and Jewish culture, only **men** could be high priests, so the author is referring to **men** here. However, he is not emphasizing that the high priests were male, so you can use a non-gendered word if it is clearer. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-HEB	7	28	u5ny	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνθρώπους&ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν	1	men who have weaknesses	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weakness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “men who are weak” or “men who fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	28	lboj	figs-personification	ὁ λόγος&τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν	1	men who have weaknesses	Just as with **law**, the author speaks of **the word of the swearing of an oath** as if it were a person who could “appoint” someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **Son** fulfill what God “swore” in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the one who swore **the oath** as the one who **{appoints}**, or you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in the word of the swearing of an oath, which came after the law, it is written that God appoints a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-HEB	7	28	gzm1	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος&τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας	1	the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that records how God “swore” **an oath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that records how God swore an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	7	28	yez2	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος&τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας	1	the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son	Here, the word **word** refers to what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message concerning the swearing of an oath” or “what God said about the swearing of an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+HEB	7	28	u5ny	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνθρώπους & ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν	1	men who have weaknesses	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weakness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “men who are weak” or “men who fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	7	28	lboj	figs-personification	ὁ λόγος & τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν	1	men who have weaknesses	Just as with **law**, the author speaks of **the word of the swearing of an oath** as if it were a person who could “appoint” someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **Son** fulfill what God “swore” in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the one who swore **the oath** as the one who **{appoints}**, or you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in the word of the swearing of an oath, which came after the law, it is written that God appoints a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	7	28	gzm1	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος & τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας	1	the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that records how God “swore” **an oath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that records how God swore an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	7	28	yez2	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος & τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας	1	the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son	Here, the word **word** refers to what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message concerning the swearing of an oath” or “what God said about the swearing of an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	7	28	msa4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱόν	1	Son	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 HEB	7	28	r5lc		εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τετελειωμένον	1	who has been made perfect	Here, the phrase **having been made perfect forever** could refer to: (1) who the **Son** is. Alternate translation: “who has been made perfect forever” (2) something that happened before the **Son** became a high priest. Alternate translation: “after he was made perfect forever”
 HEB	7	28	fkl3	figs-activepassive	τετελειωμένον	1	who has been made perfect	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is **made perfect** rather than focusing on the person doing the “perfecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having made him perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	8	intro	ks94			0		# Hebrews 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)<br>      * Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [8:8–12](../08/08.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### New covenant<br><br>In [8:6–13](../08/06.md), the author refers to a “second,” “better,” or “new” covenant. All these phrases refer to the same covenant, the one that God promised in the words that the author quotes from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). This new covenant is “mediated” through Jesus the Son ([8:6](../08/06.md)), and when God initiates this covenant, the “first covenant” (the one God made with the Israelites through Moses) becomes “old” or “obsolete” ([8:13](../08/13.md)). In your translation, use words or phrases that refer to an agreement or formal contract between people or groups. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])<br><br>### The heavenly sanctuary<br><br>In [8:1–2](../08/01.md), the author refers to how Jesus has sat down at the right side of God’s throne and is a “servant of the holy place and the true tabernacle.” Most likely, the author considers the throne where Jesus sat down to be inside this heavenly sanctuary. Scholars debate whether “holy place” and “true tabernacle” are two different names for the same thing or whether the “holy place” is the most sacred area inside the “true tabernacle.”  Either way, these names refer to the sanctuary in heaven where Jesus acts as a high priest. You should refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “house” of Israel or Judah<br><br>In [8:8](../08/08.md), [10](../08/10.md), the quotation refers to the “house” of Israel or of Judah. In this context, “house” refers figuratively to groups of people who are connected because they are all descended from the same person or because they are all ruled by the same leader. In this case, both are true: the “house” refers to the people who are descended from Abraham and are ruled by a king. In [10](../08/10.md), the “house of Israel” refers to all the Israelites. In [8:8](../08/08.md), the “house of Israel” and the “house of Judah” refer to the two different kingdoms that the original kingdom of Israel split into. In both cases, the quotation is referring to all the Israelites. Consider using a natural way to refer to a group of people who go together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Was Jesus a priest when he lived and died on earth?<br><br>In [8:4](../08/04.md), the author argues that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth. His basis for this claim seems to be that God has already appointed priests to offer sacrifices on earth. Scholars frequently debate whether the author of Hebrews claims that Jesus served as a priest when he obeyed during his earthly life and when he died on the cross, or whether he only served as a priest after he came back to life and ascended to heaven. Either way, the author’s point in this verse is that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth right now. See the notes on this verse for ways to translate the contrary-to-fact condition.<br><br>### What is the “fault” in the first covenant?<br><br>In [8:7](../08/07.md), the author implies that the “first covenant” was not “faultless.” However, in [8:8](../08/08.md), he claims that God finds “fault” with “them,” that is, the Israelites who received that covenant. Most likely, the “fault” in the first covenant was that it did not enable the Israelites to keep the covenant, and so they failed. This contrasts with the “new covenant,” in which God will put his laws in the minds and hearts of his people. Since the people are the “fault” in the new covenant, there is no need to harmonize these two verses.
 HEB	8	1	tw7l	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the author’s argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	8	1	nb8q	translate-unknown	κεφάλαιον&ἐπὶ τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **point** refers to the main or most significant idea in a speech or argument. The author could be referring to the most significant idea in: (1) everything he is writing, including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what is being said is this” (2) what he has already said, not including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what has been said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	8	1	nb8q	translate-unknown	κεφάλαιον & ἐπὶ τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **point** refers to the main or most significant idea in a speech or argument. The author could be referring to the most significant idea in: (1) everything he is writing, including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what is being said is this” (2) what he has already said, not including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what has been said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	8	1	noty	figs-activepassive	τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “the things that I have said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	8	1	m2b4	writing-pronouns	τοιοῦτον&ἀρχιερέα	1	We have a high priest	Here, the word **such** refers back to what the author has already said about how Jesus is a priest, particularly to the words in [7:26–28](../07/26.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **such** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the kind of high priest I have described, one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	8	1	m2b4	writing-pronouns	τοιοῦτον & ἀρχιερέα	1	We have a high priest	Here, the word **such** refers back to what the author has already said about how Jesus is a priest, particularly to the words in [7:26–28](../07/26.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **such** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the kind of high priest I have described, one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	8	1	b8qy	translate-symaction	ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of the Majesty	When someone sits **at the right hand** of God (**the Majesty**), it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right hand” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 HEB	8	1	kqzi	figs-metonymy	ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ θρόνου	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of the Majesty	Here, the phrase **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s right hand, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the throne” or “in the honorable place next to the throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	8	1	u9kw	figs-euphemism	τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of the Majesty	In the author’s culture, it was considered reverent to avoid saying God’s name. Here the author uses **Majesty** instead of God’s name in order to follow this custom and to indicate that God is powerful and glorious. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a reverent way to refer to God in your culture, especially if it emphasizes how God is powerful and glorious. Alternate translation: “of the great deity” or “of the glorious God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 HEB	8	1	hoom	figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of the Majesty	Many people in the author’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, the author refers to how God’s throne can be found **in the heavens**. Since the author does not include details about **the heavens**, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	2	utqk	figs-possession	τῶν ἁγίων λειτουργὸς καὶ τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς	1	the true tabernacle that the Lord, not a man, set up	Here the author uses the possessive form to refer to **a servant** who serves in **the holy {place} and the true tabernacle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a servant who belongs to the holy place and the true tabernacle” or “a servant in the holy place and the true tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	8	2	c3y7	figs-explicit	τῶν ἁγίων&καὶ τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς	1	the true tabernacle that the Lord, not a man, set up	Here, the phrases **holy {place}** and **true tabernacle** could describe: (1) the inner room of the sanctuary (**holy {place}**) and the entire sanctuary (**true tabernacle**). Alternate translation: “of the holy place in the true tabernacle” (2) the whole sanctuary from two different perspectives. Alternate translation: “of the holy place, that is, the true tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	8	2	c3y7	figs-explicit	τῶν ἁγίων & καὶ τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς	1	the true tabernacle that the Lord, not a man, set up	Here, the phrases **holy {place}** and **true tabernacle** could describe: (1) the inner room of the sanctuary (**holy {place}**) and the entire sanctuary (**true tabernacle**). Alternate translation: “of the holy place in the true tabernacle” (2) the whole sanctuary from two different perspectives. Alternate translation: “of the holy place, that is, the true tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	2	lrb7	figs-explicit	τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς	1	the true tabernacle that the Lord, not a man, set up	Here, the word **true** contrasts this **tabernacle** with the tabernacle that God had Moses build. The author does not mean that Moses’ tabernacle was “false” or wrong. Rather, he means that this (heavenly) **tabernacle** is more real and effective than Moses’ tabernacle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the **tabernacle** as most real or effective. Alternate translation: “most effective tabernacle” or “the tabernacle that is closest to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	2	m3nx	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	the true tabernacle that the Lord, not a man, set up	Although the word **man** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to any human, whether male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a man or woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	8	3	p6ol	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For every high priest is appointed	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what the author has said in [8:1–2](../08/01.md) about how Christ is a high priest. This explanation continues in the following verses and compares and contrasts Christ with the Levitical priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Now I will say more about high priests:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	8	3	gk0w	figs-explicit	πᾶς&ἀρχιερεὺς	1	For every high priest is appointed	Here, the phrase **every high priest** refers to all the descendants of Levi and Aaron who served as high priests. It does not refer to every high priest in every culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every Israelite high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	8	3	su9j	figs-activepassive	πᾶς&ἀρχιερεὺς&καθίσταται	1	For every high priest is appointed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God appoints every high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	8	3	gk0w	figs-explicit	πᾶς & ἀρχιερεὺς	1	For every high priest is appointed	Here, the phrase **every high priest** refers to all the descendants of Levi and Aaron who served as high priests. It does not refer to every high priest in every culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every Israelite high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	8	3	su9j	figs-activepassive	πᾶς & ἀρχιερεὺς & καθίσταται	1	For every high priest is appointed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God appoints every high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	8	3	gauz	figs-doublet	δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίας	1	For every high priest is appointed	Here, the words **gifts** and **sacrifices** function together to refer to anything that an Israelite would have offered to God. It is probable that **sacrifices** refers to animals that would be killed and offered to God, while **gifts** identifies anything else that a person would give to God. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God. See you how you translated the same phrase in [5:1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “sacrifices” or “things presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-HEB	8	3	qqnm		ἀναγκαῖον ἔχειν&καὶ τοῦτον	1	For every high priest is appointed	Alternate translation: “this one also must have” or “God requires this one also to have”
+HEB	8	3	qqnm		ἀναγκαῖον ἔχειν & καὶ τοῦτον	1	For every high priest is appointed	Alternate translation: “this one also must have” or “God requires this one also to have”
 HEB	8	3	jcmr	writing-pronouns	τοῦτον	1	For every high priest is appointed	Here, the phrase **this one** refers back to Jesus, whom the author described in [8:1–2](../08/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this high priest” or “Jesus, our high priest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	8	4	p2v6	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** introduces an inference based on the claim that priests offer **gifts and sacrifices** ([8:3](../08/03.md)). The author’s points is that God already set up a priesthood **on earth** which offers the necessary **gifts**. Because Jesus does not belong to that priesthood (since he is not descended from Levi), he is not **a priest** on earth but only in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or a development. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	8	4	no6j	writing-pronouns	ἦν&οὐδ’ ἂν ἦν ἱερεύς	1	Now	Here, the word **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus were … he would not be a priest at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	8	4	t6kt	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὲν&ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς	1	Now	Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that Jesus is not really **on earth** right now. He uses the statement that he knows is not true to show that Jesus can only be a high priest in heaven and not on earth. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if indeed he were actually on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+HEB	8	4	no6j	writing-pronouns	ἦν & οὐδ’ ἂν ἦν ἱερεύς	1	Now	Here, the word **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus were … he would not be a priest at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	8	4	t6kt	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὲν & ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς	1	Now	Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that Jesus is not really **on earth** right now. He uses the statement that he knows is not true to show that Jesus can only be a high priest in heaven and not on earth. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if indeed he were actually on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 HEB	8	4	yutw	figs-explicit	ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς	1	Now	Here the author does not mean that Jesus was never **on earth** or will never be **on earth**. Rather, he means that Jesus is not **on earth** right now, because he ascended into heaven (see [8:1](../08/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he were currently on earth” or “he were now on earth instead of in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	4	lw35	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων κατὰ νόμον τὰ δῶρα	1	Now	Here, the phrase **{since} there are** introduces the reason why Jesus **would not be a priest at all** if he were **on earth** right now. The author’s point is that God already appointed priests who serve on earth, and Jesus is not one of them. So, he is not a priest **on earth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the phrase **{since} there are the ones offering** gives the reason for the author’s claim. Alternate translation: “because the ones offering the gifts according to the law already exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	8	4	gfz1	figs-explicit	ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων κατὰ νόμον τὰ δῶρα	1	according to the law	Here the author is referring to the priests who are descended from Levi who offer **gifts** and “sacrifices” as God commanded them to do through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “since the Levitical priests offer the gifts according to Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	8	5	t3i8	translate-unknown	ὑποδείγματι καὶ σκιᾷ&τῶν ἐπουρανίων	1	They serve a copy and shadow of the heavenly things	Here, the words **example** and **shadow** describe something that is similar to and based on something else. The original thing is more real than the **example** and **shadow**, which is based on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to something that is based on or made to be like something else. Alternate translation: “something that is based on and similar to the heavenly things” or “a copy and imitation of the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	8	5	t3i8	translate-unknown	ὑποδείγματι καὶ σκιᾷ & τῶν ἐπουρανίων	1	They serve a copy and shadow of the heavenly things	Here, the words **example** and **shadow** describe something that is similar to and based on something else. The original thing is more real than the **example** and **shadow**, which is based on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to something that is based on or made to be like something else. Alternate translation: “something that is based on and similar to the heavenly things” or “a copy and imitation of the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	8	5	m067	figs-doublet	ὑποδείγματι καὶ σκιᾷ	1		Here, the words **example** and **shadow** function together to describe something that is based on something else. It is probable that **example** emphasizes the way that the “copy” illustrates what the “original is like,” while **shadow** emphasizes how the “copy” is not as real or good as the “original.” If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to something that is based on something else. Alternate translation: “a copy” or “an imperfect version” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	8	5	zbl4	figs-explicit	τῶν ἐπουρανίων	1		Here, the phrase **heavenly things** refers specifically to the heavenly sanctuary, “the true tabernacle” that the author referred to in [8:2](../08/02.md).If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “of the heavenly tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	5	k5r1	figs-activepassive	κεχρημάτισται Μωϋσῆς, μέλλων	1	It is just as Moses was warned by God when he was	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Moses**, who was **warned** rather than focusing on the person doing the “warning.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God warned Moses when he was about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ HEB	8	5	agjf	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	μέλλων	1	It is just as Mose
 HEB	8	5	qb7g	figs-explicit	μέλλων ἐπιτελεῖν τὴν σκηνήν	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	Here the author refers to how God revealed to Moses what the **tabernacle**, the sanctuary that the Israelites used when they were in the desert, should be like. Moses then told the Israelites how to **complete the tabernacle**. You can read the instructions that God gave to Moses about the tabernacle and its service in [Exodus 25–30](../exo/25/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he and the Israelites were going to construct the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	5	vbkq	writing-quotations	γάρ φησίν	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God said to Moses. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Exodus 25:40](../exo/25/40.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “as God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	8	5	on9c	figs-quotations	ὅρα, γάρ φησίν, ποιήσεις πάντα κατὰ τὸν τύπον τὸν δειχθέντα σοι ἐν τῷ ὄρει;	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “for he says that Moses should see that he makes everything according to the type that was shown to him on the mountain.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	8	5	jk6i	figs-yousingular	ὅρα&ποιήσεις&σοι	1	See that	Because God is speaking to one person (Moses), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	8	5	jk6i	figs-yousingular	ὅρα & ποιήσεις & σοι	1	See that	Because God is speaking to one person (Moses), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	8	5	iym5	figs-idiom	ὅρα	1	See that	Here, the phrase **See that** calls attention to or emphasizes the command that follows. It does not mean that Moses was supposed to **See** with his eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that draws attention to the command. Alternate translation: “Be sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	8	5	kkcu	figs-explicit	πάντα	1	See that	Here, the word **everything** identifies all the features of the tabernacle. It does not refer to **everything** that exists or **everything** that Moses did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clear that the word **everything** refers to **everything** about the tabernacle. Alternate translation: “the whole tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	5	wf1p	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὸν τύπον	1	to the pattern	Here, the word **type** refers to the original version of something on which a copy is based. When everything is **according to the type**, that means that all the details of the copy match the details or the original. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to similarity to an original. Alternate translation: “just like the original” or “to match the initial version” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -924,19 +924,19 @@ HEB	8	5	s9xe	figs-activepassive	τὸν δειχθέντα	1	that was shown to y
 HEB	8	5	j3tz	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὄρει	1	on the mountain	Here, the word **mountain** refers to Mount Sinai. Moses climbed up this mountain to meet God and receive God’s promises and commands for the Israelites. You can read about Moses climbing up Mount Sinai in [Exodus 19](../exo/19/01.md); [24](../exo/24/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on Mount Sinai” or “when I spoke to you on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	6	qdj6	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **But now** introduces what is true, in contrast to the hypothetical situation the author offered in [8:4](../08/04.md). The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces reality in contrast to a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “As it really is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	8	6	rt2a	translate-unknown	τέτυχεν	1	Christ has received	Here, the word **obtained** refers to how Jesus received the **ministry** from God. It does not mean that Jesus took it from God without God knowing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to receiving an office or beginning to act in a specific position. Alternate translation: “he has received” or “he has performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	8	6	u8wv	figs-abstractnouns	διαφορωτέρας&λειτουργίας	1	Christ has received	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister” or “serve.” Alternate translation: “how he ministers in a way far superior way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	8	6	in57	figs-explicit	διαφορωτέρας&λειτουργίας&κρείττονός&διαθήκης&κρείττοσιν ἐπαγγελίαις	1	mediator of a better covenant	Here the audience would have inferred that the **ministry**, **covenant**, and **promises** are **superior** or **better** than the “old” ministry, covenant, and promises, the ones that God gave through Moses to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a ministry far superior to the ministry of the Levites … of a covenant that is better than the one God made with the Israelites … promises that are better than those that God made through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	8	6	u8wv	figs-abstractnouns	διαφορωτέρας & λειτουργίας	1	Christ has received	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister” or “serve.” Alternate translation: “how he ministers in a way far superior way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	8	6	in57	figs-explicit	διαφορωτέρας & λειτουργίας & κρείττονός & διαθήκης & κρείττοσιν ἐπαγγελίαις	1	mediator of a better covenant	Here the audience would have inferred that the **ministry**, **covenant**, and **promises** are **superior** or **better** than the “old” ministry, covenant, and promises, the ones that God gave through Moses to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a ministry far superior to the ministry of the Levites … of a covenant that is better than the one God made with the Israelites … promises that are better than those that God made through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	6	sn6a	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅσῳ καὶ κρείττονός ἐστιν διαθήκης μεσίτης	1	Christ has received	Here, the phrase **in as much as** indicates that the difference between Jesus’ **far superior ministry** and the ministry of the Levitical priests is the same as the different between the **better covenant** and the covenant that God made with Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a comparison. Alternate translation: “as far superior as the covenant of which he is the mediator is better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	8	6	spy1	figs-possession	κρείττονός&διαθήκης μεσίτης	1	mediator of a better covenant	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how Jesus functions as the **mediator* for the **better covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the one who mediates a better covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	8	6	aw58	figs-activepassive	ἥτις&νενομοθέτηται	1	covenant, which is based on better promises	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **covenant**, which **has been legislated**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “legislating.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “which God has legislated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	8	6	spy1	figs-possession	κρείττονός & διαθήκης μεσίτης	1	mediator of a better covenant	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how Jesus functions as the **mediator* for the **better covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the one who mediates a better covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	8	6	aw58	figs-activepassive	ἥτις & νενομοθέτηται	1	covenant, which is based on better promises	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **covenant**, which **has been legislated**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “legislating.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “which God has legislated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	8	6	dz0z	translate-unknown	νενομοθέτηται	1	covenant, which is based on better promises	Here, the word **legislated** refers to enacting or creating something based on laws or principles. In other words, the “old covenant” that God made with Israel was **legislated** on the laws and promises that God gave through Moses. This **better covenant** is **legislated** or based on **better promises**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the legal basis for an agreement. Alternate translation: “has been based” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	8	6	ntwl	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ κρείττοσιν ἐπαγγελίαις	1	covenant, which is based on better promises	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “on the better things that God has pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	8	7	obo7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	first covenant … second covenant	Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has claimed about how the covenant that Jesus mediates is “better” (see [8:6](../08/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that the second covenant is greater, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	8	7	tqku	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ&ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη ἦν ἄμεμπτος	1	first covenant … second covenant	Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the **first {covenant}** was not **faultless**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that God set up a **second** covenant. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if that first covenant had really been faultless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-HEB	8	7	wb9d	translate-ordinal	ἡ πρώτη&δευτέρας	1	first covenant … second covenant	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “covenant one … for a covenant two” or “earlier covenant … for a later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-HEB	8	7	gig6	figs-explicit	ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη&δευτέρας	1	had been faultless	Here, the words **first** and **second** refer to two covenants that God made. The **first** covenant is the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses, and it was made before the **second** covenant, which is the one that God makes with his people through Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first … for another, later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	8	7	tqku	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ & ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη ἦν ἄμεμπτος	1	first covenant … second covenant	Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the **first {covenant}** was not **faultless**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that God set up a **second** covenant. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if that first covenant had really been faultless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+HEB	8	7	wb9d	translate-ordinal	ἡ πρώτη & δευτέρας	1	first covenant … second covenant	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “covenant one … for a covenant two” or “earlier covenant … for a later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+HEB	8	7	gig6	figs-explicit	ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη & δευτέρας	1	had been faultless	Here, the words **first** and **second** refer to two covenants that God made. The **first** covenant is the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses, and it was made before the **second** covenant, which is the one that God makes with his people through Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first … for another, later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	8	7	np7l	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἂν δευτέρας ἐζητεῖτο τόπος	1	had been faultless	Here, the phrase **no place would have been sought** refers to how God would not have made another covenant if the first one had been **faultless**. The word **place** refers to a situation in which another covenant would exist. The idiom avoids referring to who is doing the “seeking.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that refers to an “opportunity” or “situation” in which another covenant is made. Alternate translation: “there would not have been a situation in which another covenant was made” or “there would have been no need for a second one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	8	7	pktf	figs-activepassive	οὐκ&ἐζητεῖτο τόπος	1	had been faultless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **place** that is **sought** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeking.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “no one would have sought a place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	8	7	pktf	figs-activepassive	οὐκ & ἐζητεῖτο τόπος	1	had been faultless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **place** that is **sought** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeking.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “no one would have sought a place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	8	8	ya4n	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	General Information:	Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has claimed about how the first covenant was not “faultless” (see [8:7](../08/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know that the first covenant was not faultless, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	8	8	sqb4	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	with the people	Here, the word **them** refers to the people with whom God made the “first covenant”: the people of Israel. The author may be referring specifically to the people whom God led out of Egypt, or he may be referring to all the people who lived under the “first covenant.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom **them** refers. Alternate translation: “with the Israelite ancestors” or “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	8	8	jd18	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	with the people	Here and in the following four verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “God spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -971,12 +971,12 @@ HEB	8	10	hs53	figs-idiom	ἔσομαι αὐτοῖς εἰς Θεόν, καὶ
 HEB	8	11	lsq6	figs-quotations	καὶ οὐ μὴ διδάξωσιν ἕκαστος τὸν πολίτην αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἕκαστος τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ λέγων, γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον, ὅτι πάντες εἰδήσουσίν με, ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν.	1	General Information:	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous three verses and the following verse as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “And they will certainly not teach each one his fellow citizen, and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord,’ for they will all know him, from the least of them to the greatest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	8	11	qma1	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	General Information:	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In the author’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as the author’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	8	11	wne2	figs-parallelism	ἕκαστος τὸν πολίτην αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἕκαστος τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	neighbor … brother	Here the quotation includes two phrases that mean almost the same thing. One phrase refers to a **fellow citizen**, and the other refers to a **brother**. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the parallelism would be confusing, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “each one his brother” or “each one the person closest to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	8	11	v36j	figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ&τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	neighbor … brother	Although **his** and **brother** are masculine, they refer to anyone, whether male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her sibling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	8	11	v36j	figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ & τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	neighbor … brother	Although **his** and **brother** are masculine, they refer to anyone, whether male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her sibling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	8	11	jl1h	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον	1	They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord.’	If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he should know the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 HEB	8	11	mehi	figs-yousingular	γνῶθι	1	They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord.’	Because **each one** is speaking to one person, the imperative **Know** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	8	11	q5ki	figs-merism	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν	1	Know the Lord … will all know me	Here God speaks figuratively, using **the least** and **the greatest** in order to include them and every person in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every person who is part of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every single one of them” or “including people of every status” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 HEB	8	11	u98k	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν	1	Know the Lord … will all know me	Here, the phrases **the least** and **the greatest** refer to people who have the least and the most importance and power in a society. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least powerful of them to the most powerful” or “from the littlest ones to the biggest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	8	11	ne4p	figs-nominaladj	μικροῦ&μεγάλου	1	Know the Lord … will all know me	The author is using the adjectives **least** and **greatest** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **least** and **greatest**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “the least person … the greatest person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+HEB	8	11	ne4p	figs-nominaladj	μικροῦ & μεγάλου	1	Know the Lord … will all know me	The author is using the adjectives **least** and **greatest** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **least** and **greatest**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “the least person … the greatest person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 HEB	8	12	zksg	figs-quotations	ὅτι ἵλεως ἔσομαι ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι	1	toward their evil deeds	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous four verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “For he will be merciful toward their unrighteousness, and their sins he will certainly not remember any longer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	8	12	oaqt	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	toward their evil deeds	Here, the word **For** introduces the basis on which God establishes this new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces the basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “I will make this new covenant because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	8	12	g1jk	figs-parallelism	ἵλεως ἔσομαι ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι	1	toward their evil deeds	Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the parallelism would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “I will mercifully forgive their sins and unrighteousness” or “I will never remember their unrighteousness and their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -985,18 +985,18 @@ HEB	8	12	cu1b	figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν	1	towa
 HEB	8	12	a1xr	figs-idiom	οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, the phrase **I will certainly not remember** refers to how God chooses not to bring up or act on **their sins**. It does not mean that God forgets or does not know about the **sins**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates that God will not bring up or act on **their sins**. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not act on” or “I will certainly not consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	8	12	k1vo	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In the author’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as the author’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	8	13	pzqj	writing-quotations	ἐν τῷ λέγειν, καινὴν	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here the author refers back to how the quotation used the word **new** to describe the “new covenant” (see [8:8](../08/08.md)). Use a natural form in your language for referring back to a specific word that was quoted. Alternate translation: “By using the word ‘new’ for this new covenant,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	8	13	ofnl	translate-unknown	πεπαλαίωκεν τὴν πρώτην; τὸ&παλαιούμενον	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, to make something **obsolete** means to provide something newer and better that makes the older version out of date or no longer relevant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how something is out of date or not relevant. Alternate translation: “he has made the first out of date … what is out of date” or “he has made the first no longer relevant … what is no longer relevant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	8	13	ofnl	translate-unknown	πεπαλαίωκεν τὴν πρώτην; τὸ & παλαιούμενον	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, to make something **obsolete** means to provide something newer and better that makes the older version out of date or no longer relevant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how something is out of date or not relevant. Alternate translation: “he has made the first out of date … what is out of date” or “he has made the first no longer relevant … what is no longer relevant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	8	13	grcm	writing-pronouns	πεπαλαίωκεν τὴν πρώτην	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, the word **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God has made the first obsolete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	8	13	zpho	figs-explicit	τὴν πρώτην	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, the phrase **the first** refers specifically to “the first covenant,” the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to this “first covenant.” Alternate translation: “the first covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	8	13	ta59	figs-doublet	τὸ&παλαιούμενον καὶ γηράσκον	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, the phrases **being made obsolete** and **growing old** mean almost the same thing. The author uses both words to emphasize that **the first** covenant is no longer the current covenant. If you do not have two phrases that express this particular meaning, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one phrase here. Alternate translation: “what is becoming obsolete” or “what is old and obsolete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	8	13	ta59	figs-doublet	τὸ & παλαιούμενον καὶ γηράσκον	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Here, the phrases **being made obsolete** and **growing old** mean almost the same thing. The author uses both words to emphasize that **the first** covenant is no longer the current covenant. If you do not have two phrases that express this particular meaning, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one phrase here. Alternate translation: “what is becoming obsolete” or “what is old and obsolete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	8	13	v2tt		ἐγγὺς ἀφανισμοῦ	1	their sins I will not remember any longer	Alternate translation: “is going to disappear soon”
 HEB	9	intro	p8vy			0		# Hebrews 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The earthly tabernacle<br><br>In [9:1–10](../09/01.md), the author describes and evaluates the earthly tabernacle. When the author wrote this letter, there was a temple in Jerusalem, and the tabernacle no longer existed. So, his descriptions are based on the Old Testament only, not on personal experience. The tabernacle was a large tent divided into two parts: the outer “Holy Place” and the inner “Most Holy Place.” This tabernacle contained an “ark,” in which God had the people store important objects. God was specially present where the ark was. The tabernacle also contained a lampstand that burned continually, a table on which the priests laid bread in God’s presence, and an altar for burning incense. Priests frequently went into the “Holy Place,” but only the high priest would enter the “Most Holy Place” on one special day in the year. The author does not describe everything about the tabernacle, and his descriptions do not always perfectly match what you might read in the Old Testament. Make sure to translate what the author actually says. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])<br><br>### The heavenly sanctuary<br><br>In [9:11](../09/12.md), the author refers again to a “tabernacle” and “holy places.” Scholars debate what these two names identify, much like in [8:1–2](../08/01.md). Most likely the “tabernacle” refers to the entire heavenly sanctuary that Jesus passes “through” to enter into the inner section, the “holy places.” However, the two names could each refer to the entire sanctuary from two different perspectives. The author mentions the heavenly sanctuary again in [9:23–24](../09/23.md). However, here he refers simply to “the things in the heavens,” “the heavenly things,” and the “true ones.” The meaning of these general terms depend on how you understand the more specific words in [8:1–2](../08/01.md); [9:11–12](../09/11.md). See the specific verses for translation options. Make sure that you refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same or similar words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])<br><br>### Old covenant offerings and rituals<br><br>The author refers to multiple different rituals and offerings that God commanded Moses and the Israelites to perform.<br> * In [9:6](../09/06.md), he refers generally to “service” that the priests would perform in the first section of the tabernacle.<br> * In [9:7](../09/07.md), he refers to the Day of Atonement, the special day on which the high priest would enter the inner part of the tabernacle. You can read about the Day of Atonement in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md).<br> * In [9:13](../09/13.md), the author refers to blood of “bulls and goats,” which may be a general statement about animal sacrifices, or it may be another specific reference to the Day of Atonement, which included sacrifices of bulls and goats. Further, he refers to a “heifer,” which identifies a ceremony related to purification. You can read about this ceremony in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md).<br> * In [9:19–21](../09/19.md), the author describes how Moses inaugurated the covenant and the tabernacle. You can read about what he did in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md).<br><br>### Covenant<br><br>The author speaks about “covenants” throughout this chapter. The “new” covenant refers to the agreement that God has made with his people through Jesus. The “first” covenant refers to the agreement that God made with the Israelites through Moses. In the author’s culture, the word translated “covenant” could also be used to refer to a “will,” a paper that a person writes to tell others what to do with that person’s belongings when he or she dies. Scholars debate whether the author focuses on this specific meaning of “covenant” in [9:16–17](../09/16.md) or not. The UST follows the interpretation that the author uses the specific meaning “will” as an analogy to better understand “covenant.” See the notes on those verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])<br><br>### Blood<br><br>Throughout this chapter, the author refers to “blood.” This blood always comes from someone or something that has died. Scholars debate what blood symbolizes or represents: the death of the sacrifice, the life of the sacrifice, or something else. Either way, the author argues from the Old Testament and the sacrifices that God required that blood is required for both “cleansing” and “forgiveness.” This is true for both the old covenant and the new covenant. In your translation, you should refer to shed blood, since the blood always comes from someone or something that has died. Also, you should refer directly to “blood,” not to what it might symbolize or represent. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “parable” in [9:8–9](../09/08.md)<br><br>In these verses, the author explains what meaning the “Spirit” gives to the earthly tabernacle. While the exact details about what the author means by the “first tent” and the “holy places” are not perfectly clear, what is clear is that the first section of the earthly tabernacle, or perhaps the earthly tabernacle as a whole, indicates how people could not go to the “holy places.” Whether the “holy places” refers to the heavenly sanctuary as a whole, to the second section of the earthly tabernacle, or to the inner part of the heavenly sanctuary, it indicates a place where God is specially present. What the author is saying, then, is that the use of the “first tent” signifies lack of access to God. The “parable” in [9:9](../09/09.md) further explains that this lack of access applies to “the present time,” which is when sacrifices are offered. The details of these two verses are debated by scholars, so for more details see the notes. If possible, translate these two verses in such a way that they allow the various possible views.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Where does the altar of incense belong?<br><br>In [9:3–4](../09/03.md), the author places the “incense altar” inside the Most Holy Place. However, [Exodus 30:6](../exo/30/06.md) seems to place the incense altar outside the curtain, in the Holy Place. There are many theories about why the author describes the “incense altar” inside the Most Holy Place. However, there is no reason to harmonize your translation with Exodus’ description. If you think your readers would recognized and be confused by the difference, you could include a footnote with some possible solutions. It is possible that the author interpreted [Exodus 30:6](../exo/30/06.md) to mean that the altar was in the Most Holy Place, and it is possible that he knew a tradition that put the altar there. It is also possible that he places the altar there for the sake of his argument. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/altar]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/incense]])<br><br>### Cleansing the heavenly things<br><br>In [9:23](../09/23.md), the author refers to how the “heavenly things” need to be cleansed with “better sacrifices” than those used to cleanse the earthly things. Some scholars think that the heavenly things are perfect and cannot be made impure, so they argue that the “cleansing” refers to inauguration, or they suggest that the “heavenly things” refers to human consciences. Other scholars think that the heavenly sanctuary could be defiled by people’s sin, just like the earthly sanctuary was, so it too needed to be cleansed. This is most likely what the author means. However, no matter what interpretation you choose, you should translate the verse with a word or phrase that refers to the removal of defilement or impurity. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
 HEB	9	1	av9i	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν οὖν	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** resumes what the author has been saying about the **first {covenant}** (see [8:7](../08/07.md)). The word **indeed** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “but” in [9:11](../09/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a two-part development. Alternate translation: “As for the covenants, on the one hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]),
 HEB	9	1	d3vs		ἡ πρώτη	1	first covenant	See how you translated **first covenant** in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
-HEB	9	1	pw63	figs-abstractnouns	εἶχε&δικαιώματα&λατρείας&τε	1	had regulations	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **regulations** and **worship**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “regulate” and “worship.” Alternate translation: “regulated how people worshiped and included” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	1	af6x	figs-explicit	τό&ἅγιον κοσμικόν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **earthly holy {place}** refers to the entire earthly sanctuary, which the author will define as a “tabernacle” in the following verse ([9:2](../09/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly refer to the entire earthly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the earthly holy sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	1	pw63	figs-abstractnouns	εἶχε & δικαιώματα & λατρείας & τε	1	had regulations	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **regulations** and **worship**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “regulate” and “worship.” Alternate translation: “regulated how people worshiped and included” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	9	1	af6x	figs-explicit	τό & ἅγιον κοσμικόν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **earthly holy {place}** refers to the entire earthly sanctuary, which the author will define as a “tabernacle” in the following verse ([9:2](../09/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly refer to the entire earthly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the earthly holy sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	2	e3em	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For	Here, the word **for** introduces further explanation of “the earthly holy place” (see [9:1](../09/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “for which purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	9	2	f6k7	figs-activepassive	σκηνὴ&κατεσκευάσθη	1	a tabernacle was prepared	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **tabernacle**, which **was prepared**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the Israelites” did it. Alternate translation: “the Israelites prepared a tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	2	f6k7	figs-activepassive	σκηνὴ & κατεσκευάσθη	1	a tabernacle was prepared	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **tabernacle**, which **was prepared**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the Israelites” did it. Alternate translation: “the Israelites prepared a tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	2	p34j	figs-explicit	ἡ πρώτη	1	a tabernacle was prepared	Here, the phrase **the first one** identifies which part of the **tabernacle** the author is speaking about. The **tabernacle** structure was made up of two rooms or sections. The word **first** refers to the **first** part that a person would enter. The author will describe the second part in [9:3–5](../09/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the outer room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	2	uz9h	translate-ordinal	ἡ πρώτη	1	a tabernacle was prepared	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “section one” or “room one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	9	2	t13a	translate-unknown	ἥ τε λυχνία καὶ ἡ τράπεζα, καὶ ἡ Πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων	1	the lampstand, the table, and the bread of the presence	Here the author refers to some things that God had the Israelites put in the first section of the **tabernacle**. The **loaves** were “presented” on the **table**. You can read God’s instructions about the **lampstand**, **table**, and **loaves** in [Exodus 25:23–40](../exo/25/23.md). If you have a translation of Exodus, you could use the same words here. If you do not have a translation of Exodus, you could make it clear that these are holy or special items that the priests used when they were serving God. Alternate translation: “both the holy lampstand and the special table with the presentation of God’s loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1004,11 +1004,11 @@ HEB	9	2	gw3p	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ Πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων
 HEB	9	2	vee3	writing-pronouns	ἥτις	1	bread of the presence	Here, the word **which** refers to the **first** part of the **tabernacle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to the **first** part. Alternate translation: “which first part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	9	2	i46y	figs-activepassive	λέγεται	1	bread of the presence	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what **is called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people called” or “they named” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	2	k2vg	figs-explicit	Ἅγια	1	bread of the presence	Here the author uses another name for the **first** part of the **tabernacle**. He does not use this exact name to refer to **first** part of the **tabernacle** again, and it is likely that here he uses the name that he found in his version of the Old Testament. Make sure that your readers know that the author is quoting a name that he knew about. Alternate translation: “by the name ‘Holy Room’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	3	j7w3	figs-explicit	μετὰ&τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα σκηνὴ	1	Behind the second curtain	The author has not mentioned a first **curtain**, but he implies that the first **curtain** was at the entrance to the first part of the tabernacle. The **second curtain** separated the outer and inner sections of the tabernacle. The **tent** here thus must be the **second** or inner part of the tabernacle, since it is **behind the second curtain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that this is the **curtain** in front of the second or inner **tent**. Alternate translation: “behind a curtain was the second tent” or “behind the curtain was the inner part of the tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	3	j7w3	figs-explicit	μετὰ & τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα σκηνὴ	1	Behind the second curtain	The author has not mentioned a first **curtain**, but he implies that the first **curtain** was at the entrance to the first part of the tabernacle. The **second curtain** separated the outer and inner sections of the tabernacle. The **tent** here thus must be the **second** or inner part of the tabernacle, since it is **behind the second curtain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that this is the **curtain** in front of the second or inner **tent**. Alternate translation: “behind a curtain was the second tent” or “behind the curtain was the inner part of the tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	3	ssr9	translate-ordinal	δεύτερον καταπέτασμα	1	second	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “curtain two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	9	3	jq7h	figs-activepassive	ἡ λεγομένη	1	second	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what **is called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “which people called” or “which they named” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	3	msz6	figs-explicit	Ἅγια Ἁγίων	1	second	Here the author uses another name for the inner part of the **tent**. He does not use this exact name to refer to the second part of the **tent** again, and it is likely that here he uses the name that he found in his version of the Old Testament. Make sure that your readers know that the author is quoting a name that he knew about. Alternate translation: “by the name ‘Most Holy Room’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	4	zf2k	translate-unknown	χρυσοῦν&θυμιατήριον	1	Inside it	This **altar** was a small structure on which priests would burn **incense**, which is a substance that gives off a sweet smell when someone burns it. This altar was coated in “gold.” You can read about the **golden incense altar** in [Exodus 30:1–10](../exo/30/01.md). Use a phrase that refers to a structure or object which someone would use to offer things to God. Alternate translation: “a sacred table for burning incense, covered in gold,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	9	4	zf2k	translate-unknown	χρυσοῦν & θυμιατήριον	1	Inside it	This **altar** was a small structure on which priests would burn **incense**, which is a substance that gives off a sweet smell when someone burns it. This altar was coated in “gold.” You can read about the **golden incense altar** in [Exodus 30:1–10](../exo/30/01.md). Use a phrase that refers to a structure or object which someone would use to offer things to God. Alternate translation: “a sacred table for burning incense, covered in gold,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	4	qsa7	translate-unknown	τὴν κιβωτὸν τῆς διαθήκης, περικεκαλυμμένην πάντοθεν χρυσίῳ	1	Inside it	The **ark of the covenant** was a box or chest where God was specially present in the tabernacle. This chest was coated in **gold** and symbolized God’s **covenant** with Israel. You can read about the design of the **ark of the covenant** in [Exodus 25:10–22](../exo/25/10.md). Use a phrase that refers to a chest or box that has special meaning and importance. Alternate translation: “the special covenantal box that was covered completely all around with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	4	zopy	figs-activepassive	περικεκαλυμμένην πάντοθεν χρυσίῳ	1	Inside it	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **ark**, which was **covered**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “covering.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “which someone covered completely all around with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	4	w3ef	figs-doublet	περικεκαλυμμένην πάντοθεν	1	Inside it	Here, the words **completely** and **all around** mean almost the same thing. The author uses these words to emphasize that every part of the **ark** was covered **with gold**. If you do not have two words that express this particular meaning, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “having been covered completely” or “having been covered on every side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1016,26 +1016,26 @@ HEB	9	4	kt3u	writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾗ	1	Inside it	Here, the word **which** ref
 HEB	9	4	md1f	figs-explicit	στάμνος χρυσῆ ἔχουσα τὸ μάννα	1	that budded	Here the author refers to **manna**, which is the food that God miraculously provided for his people while they traveled through the wilderness. God told Moses to keep some **manna** as a reminder of how he provided for them. You can read about Moses and Aaron putting a **jar** of **manna** in the **ark** in [Exodus 16:32–34](../exo/16/32.md). It is not clear what kind of **jar** this is, so use a general word if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a golden vessel containing the manna that God provided for his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	4	jj9y	figs-explicit	ἡ ῥάβδος Ἀαρὼν ἡ βλαστήσασα	1	Aaron’s rod that budded	Here the author refers to a story about how some people wanted to be priests instead of **Aaron**. God had the leaders of each of the twelve tribes put a **rod** or walking stick in his presence. God made the **rod of Aaron** “bud” as proof that God had chosen him to be priest. You can read the story about **the rod of Aaron** in [Numbers 17:1–11](../num/17/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Aaron’s staff that budded, which proved that God had chosen him as priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	4	q9w3	figs-explicit	αἱ πλάκες τῆς διαθήκης	1	tablets of the covenant	Here the author refers to two stone **tablets** on which Moses wrote the most important parts of God’s **covenant** with the Israelites. You can read about the **tablets** in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). The words on these tablets were the “Ten Commandments,” which you can find in [Exodus 20:1–17](../exo/20/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the stone plaques on which Moses wrote the Ten Commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	5	uap3	figs-explicit	ὑπεράνω&αὐτῆς	1	tablets of the covenant	Here, the phrase **above it** places the **cherubim** on top of the “ark of the covenant.” They were not floating above the ark but were built on top of the ark. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “set on the ark” or “built on top of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	5	uap3	figs-explicit	ὑπεράνω & αὐτῆς	1	tablets of the covenant	Here, the phrase **above it** places the **cherubim** on top of the “ark of the covenant.” They were not floating above the ark but were built on top of the ark. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “set on the ark” or “built on top of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	5	ue5q	translate-unknown	Χερουβεὶν δόξης κατασκιάζοντα τὸ ἱλαστήριον	1	glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid	Here, the word **cherubim** refers to figures or statues of winged beings. They are **glorious** because they show that God is present where they are. The author describes them as **overshadowing the atonement lid** because God commanded the Israelites to make them so that their wings spread over the top of the ark. You can read about the **cherubim** and the **atonement lid** in [Exodus 25:17–22](../exo/25/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “statues of glorious cherubim spreading their wings over the lid of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	5	vxqn	translate-transliterate	Χερουβεὶν	1	glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid	The word **cherubim** is a Hebrew word that the author spelled out in Greek letters. It is a plural word referring to more than one “cherub.” In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds, or you can express what it means: powerful beings with wings. Alternate translation: “winged beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
 HEB	9	5	jfup	figs-possession	Χερουβεὶν δόξης	1	glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid	Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **cherubim** are characterized by **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “cherubim that are glorious” or “cherubim full of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	9	5	ixtq	figs-abstractnouns	Χερουβεὶν δόξης	1	glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “very great cherubim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	9	5	fh6g	figs-idiom	περὶ ὧν οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν κατὰ μέρος	1	cherubim	Here the author uses a standard form in his language to indicate that he is not going to speak in detail about each of the objects and structures he has mentioned. The phrase **according to each part** refers to the details about each thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that indicates that a speaker is not going to deal with the details of a certain subject. Alternate translation: “about which things I will not go into detail here” or “which things I will not at the moment cover in their specifics” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	5	qw39	writing-pronouns	ὧν	1	cherubim	Here, the phrase **which things** refers to everything about the “tabernacle” that the author has described in [9:2–5](../09/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **which things** refers to. Alternate translation: “all of which” or “about which things concerning the tabernacle and its furnishings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	9	6	mra7	figs-activepassive	τούτων&οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων	1	After these things were prepared	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **things** that are **prepared** rather than focusing on the people doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “when people had thus prepared these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	9	6	zinf	writing-pronouns	τούτων&οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων	1	After these things were prepared	Here, the phrase **these things** refers to all the objects and structures the author has mentioned in [9:1–5](../09/01.md). The word **thus** refers to what the author has said about how these objects and structures were created and arranged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these words refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “when what I have described had been prepared as I have described it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	9	6	mra7	figs-activepassive	τούτων & οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων	1	After these things were prepared	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **things** that are **prepared** rather than focusing on the people doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “when people had thus prepared these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	6	zinf	writing-pronouns	τούτων & οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων	1	After these things were prepared	Here, the phrase **these things** refers to all the objects and structures the author has mentioned in [9:1–5](../09/01.md). The word **thus** refers to what the author has said about how these objects and structures were created and arranged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these words refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “when what I have described had been prepared as I have described it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	9	6	mrj4	figs-idiom	διὰ παντὸς	1	After these things were prepared	Here, the word **always** indicates that the **priests** consistently would **enter**, usually twice a day. It does not mean that some was **always** entering at every moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a form that refers to something that happens frequently and consistently. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “very frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	9	6	crlt	figs-go	εἰς&εἰσίασιν	1	After these things were prepared	Here, the phrase **enter into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “move into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	9	6	crlt	figs-go	εἰς & εἰσίασιν	1	After these things were prepared	Here, the phrase **enter into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “move into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	9	6	vh9r	figs-explicit	τὴν πρώτην σκηνὴν	1	After these things were prepared	Here, the phrase **first tabernacle** refers to the **first** or outer section of the **tabernacle**. See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “the outer room of the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	6	uwy4	translate-ordinal	τὴν πρώτην σκηνὴν	1	After these things were prepared	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “tabernacle one” or “tent one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	9	6	jte8	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς λατρείας ἐπιτελοῦντες	1	After these things were prepared	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **services**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “serve.” Alternate translation: “performing what they do to serve God” or “doing what God requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	7	vgxd	figs-explicit	εἰς&τὴν δευτέραν, ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ μόνος ὁ ἀρχιερεύς, οὐ χωρὶς αἵματος, ὃ προσφέρει ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ ἀγνοημάτων	1	not without blood	In this verse, the author refers to the festival called the Day of Atonement. On this day, the high priest would enter the most sacred part of the tabernacle and present blood from an animal sacrifice there to atone for the sins of all the Israelites, including himself. You can read about the Day of Atonement in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit, or you could use a footnote to give extra information. Alternate translation: “into the second tent, once in the year, only on the Day of Atonement, the high priest enters, and not without blood from a sacrifice that he offers on behalf of himself and of the unintentional sins of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	7	vgxd	figs-explicit	εἰς & τὴν δευτέραν, ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ μόνος ὁ ἀρχιερεύς, οὐ χωρὶς αἵματος, ὃ προσφέρει ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ ἀγνοημάτων	1	not without blood	In this verse, the author refers to the festival called the Day of Atonement. On this day, the high priest would enter the most sacred part of the tabernacle and present blood from an animal sacrifice there to atone for the sins of all the Israelites, including himself. You can read about the Day of Atonement in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit, or you could use a footnote to give extra information. Alternate translation: “into the second tent, once in the year, only on the Day of Atonement, the high priest enters, and not without blood from a sacrifice that he offers on behalf of himself and of the unintentional sins of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	7	kmhb	figs-explicit	τὴν δευτέραν	1	not without blood	Here, the phrase **second {tent}** refers to the **second** or inner section of the tabernacle. See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:3](../09/03.md). Alternate translation: “the inner room of the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	7	pqby	translate-ordinal	τὴν δευτέραν	1	not without blood	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “tent two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	9	7	h4tn	figs-idiom	ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ μόνος	1	not without blood	Here, the phrase **once {in} the year only** identifies an event as something that happens on one day in the year. The event does not occur again until the same day the next year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “only one time every year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	7	xs9l	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ χωρὶς αἵματος	1	not without blood	The phrase **not without blood** uses two negative words to emphasize that **blood** is required. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with positive words, emphasizing the importance of **blood**. Alternate translation: “enters, and always with blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-HEB	9	7	u1ww	figs-gendernotations	προσφέρει&ἑαυτοῦ	1	not without blood	In Israelite and Jewish culture, only men could be high priests, so the author is referring to a man here. However, he is not emphasizing that the high priests were male, so you can use a non-gendered word if it is clearer. Alternate translation: “the high priest offers … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	9	7	u1ww	figs-gendernotations	προσφέρει & ἑαυτοῦ	1	not without blood	In Israelite and Jewish culture, only men could be high priests, so the author is referring to a man here. However, he is not emphasizing that the high priests were male, so you can use a non-gendered word if it is clearer. Alternate translation: “the high priest offers … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	9	7	lui1	figs-idiom	ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ ἀγνοημάτων	1	not without blood	Here, just as in [7:27](../07/27.md), the phrase **on behalf of** someone or someone’s sins means that the sacrifices are intended to deal with the sins that those people commit. It does not mean that the sacrifices allow the sins or encourage the sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to deal with his own sins and with the unintentional sins of the people” or “for the forgiveness of his own sins and those of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	7	xtk5	translate-unknown	τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ ἀγνοημάτων	1	blood	Here, the phrase **unintentional sins** refers to wrong things that people have done without intending to do something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to sins that people have committed without trying to sin. Alternate translation: “of the accidental sins of the people” or “of the sins that the people did not intend to commit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	8	b4v7	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	the most holy place	Here, the word **this** could refer: (1) forward to what the author is about to say about **the way of the holy {places}**. Alternate translation: “The following is what” (2) back to what the author has said about when and how the priests enter each part of the earthly tabernacle (see [9:6–7](../09/06.md)). Alternate translation: “All those things are what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ HEB	9	10	voxo	figs-activepassive	ἐπικείμενα	1	until the time of the n
 HEB	9	10	hqs8	figs-explicit	μέχρι καιροῦ διορθώσεως	1	until the time of the new order	Here, the phrase **new order** refers to the new covenant that God gives his people through Jesus. The words **new order** imply that this covenant is better than the previous covenant, although they do not imply that the previous covenant was bad. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the time when God gave the new covenant. Alternate translation: “until the time of the new covenant” or “until God gave his people a new way of doing things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	11	bnc6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast. The first half is in [9:1–10](../09/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces the second half of a contrast, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	9	11	ez21	figs-go	παραγενόμενος	1	good things	Here, the phrase **having come** refers most directly to Jesus ascending into heaven. However, the words can also refer more indirectly to someone assuming a specific role or position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **Christ** has come to “heaven,” or you could emphasize the idea of assuming a position. Alternate translation: “having come to heaven as” or “having assumed the position of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-HEB	9	11	da2i	figs-extrainfo	τῶν&ἀγαθῶν	1	good things	Here the author does not clarify what **the good things** are. The phrase probably refers to everything that believers receive through **Christ**, including rest, redemption, forgiveness, and eternal life. Since the author left the idea vague here, if possible you also should use a general expression without specifying what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “of the blessings” or “of the good gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+HEB	9	11	da2i	figs-extrainfo	τῶν & ἀγαθῶν	1	good things	Here the author does not clarify what **the good things** are. The phrase probably refers to everything that believers receive through **Christ**, including rest, redemption, forgiveness, and eternal life. Since the author left the idea vague here, if possible you also should use a general expression without specifying what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “of the blessings” or “of the good gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	9	11	scqv	translate-textvariants	γενομένων	1	good things	Instead of the phrase **that have come into existence**, many ancient manuscripts have the phrase “that are coming”. The phrase that the ULT uses identifies the **good things** as things that believers already have, while the phrase “that are coming” identifies the **good things** as things that believers are still waiting for. The majority of scholars think that the phrase in the ULT is the correct one, so unless there is a good reason to use “that are coming,” you should use **that have come into existence**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 HEB	9	11	czx6	figs-explicit	τῆς μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρας σκηνῆς	1	the greater and more perfect tabernacle	Here, the phrase **the greater and more perfect tabernacle** refers to the heavenly **tabernacle** that Jesus has entered. The phrase could refer more specifically: (1) to the entire heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the whole greater and more perfect tabernacle” (2) to the first section of the heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the greater and more perfection first section of the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	11	jyqn	figs-doublet	μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρας	1	the greater and more perfect tabernacle	Here, the words **greater** and **more perfect** function together to refer to identify the heavenly **tabernacle** as superior to the earthly one. It is probable that **greater** identifies the heavenly **tabernacle** as more important, while **more perfect** identifies it as more able to accomplish what it was intended to do. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to identify the heavenly **tabernacle** as more important and effective than the earthly one. Alternate translation: “better” or “more powerfully effective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ HEB	9	11	lxw8	figs-activepassive	οὐ χειροποιήτου τοῦτ’ ἔ
 HEB	9	11	mtj9	figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτου	1	human hands	Here, the phrase **human hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **human hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 HEB	9	12	dp2i	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ δι’ αἵματος τράγων καὶ μόσχων, διὰ δὲ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος	1	most holy place	Here the author refers to how a high priest would “enter” the sanctuary, taking with him **blood** from a sacrifice. He would present the **blood** to God and then apply it to various parts of the sanctuary, the altar, and the ark. In this verse, the author contrasts how those priests presented **blood** from animals with how Jesus presented **his own blood**. Scholars debate what **his own blood** represents. It could refer to his resurrected body, his death, or his actual blood. See the book introduction for more information on how Jesus functions as a high priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and not by the blood from slaughtered goats and calves, which is what the Levitical priests use, but by his own blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	12	ox1p	figs-doublet	τράγων καὶ μόσχων	1	most holy place	Here the author refers to **goats** and **calves** as two examples of animals that could be sacrificed so that the Levitical high priest could enter the sanctuary with their **blood**. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-HEB	9	12	a8oh	figs-go	εἰσῆλθεν&εἰς	1	most holy place	Here, the phrase **entered into** refers to movement from outside a structure into that structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he moved into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	9	12	a8oh	figs-go	εἰσῆλθεν & εἰς	1	most holy place	Here, the phrase **entered into** refers to movement from outside a structure into that structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he moved into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	9	12	wp9n	figs-explicit	τὰ ἅγια	1	most holy place	Here, much like in [9:8](../09/08.md), the phrase **the holy {places}** could refer to: (1) the inner section of the heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place in heaven” (2) the entire heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the heavenly sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	12	zvqr	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	εὑράμενος	1	most holy place	Here, the phrase **having himself obtained** could introduce action that: (1) happens at the same as **he entered**. Alternate translation: “which is when he obtained” (2) happened before **he entered**. Alternate translation: “after he obtained” (3) happens after **he entered**. Alternate translation: “with the result that he obtained” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	9	12	g2wm	figs-metaphor	αἰωνίαν λύτρωσιν εὑράμενος	1	most holy place	Here the author speaks as if Jesus paid a price to “redeem” his people from someone or something that owned or controlled them. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus has dealt with his people’s sins and forever kept those sins from controlling them. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. The author’s emphasis here is particularly on how Jesus freed his people from sin. Alternate translation: “having himself obtained eternal deliverance” or “having himself bought his people forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1103,26 +1103,26 @@ HEB	9	15	p2kg	figs-possession	διαθήκης καινῆς μεσίτης ἐ
 HEB	9	15	wioz	figs-infostructure	ὅπως θανάτου γενομένου εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ παραβάσεων, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν λάβωσιν οἱ κεκλημένοι τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	he is the mediator of a new covenant	Here, the phrase **a death having happened** introduces something that occurs before **the ones called** receive **the promise**. In fact, the **death** allows or enables them to receive it. If your readers would find the order of information here confusing, you could use a form and structure in your language that identifies a sequential relationship or a cause and effect relationship. Alternate translation: “so that the ones called might receive the promise of the eternal inheritance, for a death has happened for redemption of the transgressions related to the first covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	9	15	mvwg	figs-explicit	θανάτου γενομένου	1	he is the mediator of a new covenant	Here the author is referring to Jesus’ **death** on the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus having died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	15	z29a	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ παραβάσεων	1	to free those under the first covenant from their sins	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **redemption** and **transgressions**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “redeem” and “transgress.” Alternate translation: “that redeems how people transgressed against the first covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	15	xv09	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν&παραβάσεων	1	to free those under the first covenant from their sins	Here the author speaks as if Jesus paid a price **for redemption** for his people from someone or something that owned or controlled them. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus has dealt with his people’s **transgressions** and forever kept those sins from controlling them. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. The author’s emphasis here is particularly on how Jesus freed his people from **transgressions**. Alternate translation: “for deliverance from the transgressions” or “that bought his people from the transgressions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	9	15	xv09	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν & παραβάσεων	1	to free those under the first covenant from their sins	Here the author speaks as if Jesus paid a price **for redemption** for his people from someone or something that owned or controlled them. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus has dealt with his people’s **transgressions** and forever kept those sins from controlling them. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. The author’s emphasis here is particularly on how Jesus freed his people from **transgressions**. Alternate translation: “for deliverance from the transgressions” or “that bought his people from the transgressions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	9	15	q3x3	figs-explicit	τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ	1	first covenant	Here, the phrase **first covenant** refers to the agreement that God made with the Israelites through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md). Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	15	q0rl	translate-ordinal	τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ	1	first covenant	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “covenant one“ or “the earlier covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	9	15	hgp3	figs-metaphor	οἱ κεκλημένοι	1	first covenant	Here, the phrase **the ones called** refers to those whom God has chosen to be his people as those whom God has **called** or spoken to by name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones selected” or “those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	9	15	ve3v	figs-activepassive	οἱ κεκλημένοι	1	those who are called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the ones** who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	15	mfzh		λάβωσιν	1	those who are called	Here the author may be indicating that **the ones called** are able to **receive the promise**: (1) at least partially right now. Alternate translation: “are receiving” (2) in the future. Alternate translation: “will receive”
-HEB	9	15	j3ac	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν&τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **promise** and **inheritance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “promise” and “inherit.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	15	vdpc	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν&τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	Here, the word **promise** refers to the content of the **promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to what is promised. Alternate translation: “what is promised concerning the eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-HEB	9	15	e1ii	figs-possession	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν&τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **promise** whose content is **the eternal inheritance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the promise, that is, the eternal inheritance” or “the promised eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	9	15	j3ac	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν & τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **promise** and **inheritance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “promise” and “inherit.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	9	15	vdpc	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν & τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	Here, the word **promise** refers to the content of the **promise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to what is promised. Alternate translation: “what is promised concerning the eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+HEB	9	15	e1ii	figs-possession	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν & τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **promise** whose content is **the eternal inheritance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the promise, that is, the eternal inheritance” or “the promised eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	9	15	xb9f	figs-metaphor	τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας	1	inheritance	Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would “inherit” property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive what God promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of what God gives his people forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	9	16	lfsq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:15](../09/15.md)) about “a death” and “a mediator of a new covenant.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “About covenants and deaths,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	9	16	ua79	figs-idiom	ὅπου&διαθήκη	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the word **where** does not indicate that the **covenant** is in a specific place. Rather, it indicates that what the author is about to say is about a **covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces or highlights the topic. Alternate translation: “concerning a covenant” or “when we consider a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	9	16	ua79	figs-idiom	ὅπου & διαθήκη	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the word **where** does not indicate that the **covenant** is in a specific place. Rather, it indicates that what the author is about to say is about a **covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces or highlights the topic. Alternate translation: “concerning a covenant” or “when we consider a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	16	vlxa	figs-explicit	διαθήκη	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the word **covenant** could refer to: (1) a specific type of agreement in which a person declares or writes what should be done with their possessions when they die. In this case, the author is slightly shifting the meaning of **covenant** when he uses the word in [9:16–17](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “there is a covenant about what happens after a person dies” or “there is a last testament” (2) the same kind of **covenant** that he has been speaking about throughout the letter. Alternate translation: “there is any covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	16	dzg3	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **necessity** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “need” and “die.” Alternate translation: “it needs to be proved that the one having covenanted it has died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	16	um9a	figs-activepassive	θάνατον&φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the death** that is **proven** rather than focusing on the person doing the “proving.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone to prove the death of the one having covenanted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	16	um9a	figs-activepassive	θάνατον & φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the death** that is **proven** rather than focusing on the person doing the “proving.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone to prove the death of the one having covenanted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	16	b2bd	translate-unknown	τοῦ διαθεμένου	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the word **covenanted** refers to the process of creating the **covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to setting up or creating a **covenant** or agreement. Alternate translation: “of the one having created it” or “of the one having made it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	16	rsbu	figs-explicit	φέρεσθαι	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	The exact meaning of the word translated **to be proven** depends on how you understand the word **covenant** here: (1) if the word **covenant** refers to a “will,” the author means that the “will” is not valid or effective until everyone knows that the person who made the will is dead. Alternate translation: “to have taken place” or “to be publicly shown” (2) if the word **covenant** refers to any **covenant**, the author means that the **covenant** is not valid or effective unless the person who made it has sworn or promised that he or she will keep the **covenant** or “die.” Alternate translation: “to be presented as guarantee” or “to be stated as the consequence of breaking the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	17	dv7r	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:16](../09/16.md)) about covenants and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	9	17	s5yz	figs-explicit	διαθήκη	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, just as in [9:16](../09/16.md), the word **covenant** could refer to: (1) a specific type of agreement in which a person declares or writes what should be done with their possessions when they die. In this case, the author is slightly shifting the meaning of **covenant** when he uses the word in [9:16–17](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “a covenant about what happens after a person dies” or “a last testament” (2) the same kind of **covenant** that he has been speaking about throughout the letter. Alternate translation: “every covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	17	euuf	figs-idiom	βεβαία&μήποτε ἰσχύει	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the phrases **in force** and **has force** identify that the agreement is binding or will be carried out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that identify an agreement as binding or required. Alternate translation: “is official … it never is official” or “has power … it never has power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	9	17	euuf	figs-idiom	βεβαία & μήποτε ἰσχύει	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the phrases **in force** and **has force** identify that the agreement is binding or will be carried out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that identify an agreement as binding or required. Alternate translation: “is official … it never is official” or “has power … it never has power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	17	vnbp	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ νεκροῖς	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, the phrase **over the dead** indicates the basis or reason for the **covenant** being **in force**. The author’s point is not that the **covenant** only applies to the **dead**. Rather, his point is that the **dead** are the reason why the **covenant** is **in force**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the basis for an agreement being or becoming official. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the dead” or “when people die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	17	qb62	figs-nominaladj	νεκροῖς	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 HEB	9	17	vq4n	translate-unknown	ὁ διαθέμενος	1	the death of the person who made it must be proven	Here, just as in [9:16](../09/16.md), the word **covenanting** refers to the process of creating the **covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to setting up or creating a **covenant** or agreement. Alternate translation: “the one having created it” or “the one having made it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1132,16 +1132,16 @@ HEB	9	18	m9c3	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδ’ ἡ πρώτη χωρὶς αἵμ
 HEB	9	18	kq87	figs-explicit	πρώτη	1	first covenant	Here, the phrase **first {covenant}** refers to the agreement that God made with the Israelites through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [8:7](../08/07.md); [9:15](../09/15.md). Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	18	v838	figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	blood	The author assumes that his audience knows that the use of **blood** also requires the “death” that he has been speaking about. If your readers would not make this inference, you could make it explicit that **blood** requires someone or something to die. Alternate translation: “blood from sacrificed animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	19	uupi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here, the word **For** introduces an important example of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:18](../09/18.md)) about how the “first covenant” was “inaugurated” with “blood.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example. Alternate translation: “For example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	9	19	zl2n	figs-explicit	λαληθείσης&πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, λαβὼν τὸ αἷμα τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων, μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου, αὐτό τε τὸ βιβλίον καὶ πάντα τὸν λαὸν, ἐράντισεν	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here the author refers to several Old Testament texts. The story about Moses “speaking” the law and then “sprinkling” the people with **blood** comes from [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md). In these verses the Israelites agreed to follow the law and keep the covenant. The references to **red wool** and **hyssop** could come from the instructions for cleansing a person with a skin disease, which you can find in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). However, it is more likely that the author is referring to the **red wool** and **hyssop** that the priest burned along with a “heifer” to make “ashes” that could be mixed with water and used for cleansing. You can read about this ritual in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md), and the author has already mentioned it in [9:13](../09/13.md). The author’s point here is that Moses cleansed the people when they agreed to the covenant, and according to the law the cleansing would require **blood**, **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is speaking about how Moses cleansed the people when they heard and agreed to the covenant with God. Alternate translation: “every command having been spoken according to the law by Moses to all the people, they agreed to keep them. Then, Moses took the blood of calves and goats that had been sacrificed, and he mixed it with water and red wool and hyssop. Then, he sprinkled both the scroll of the law itself and all the people with the mixture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	19	we5r	figs-activepassive	λαληθείσης&πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **every command** that was **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “Moses having spoken every command according to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	19	zl2n	figs-explicit	λαληθείσης & πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, λαβὼν τὸ αἷμα τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων, μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου, αὐτό τε τὸ βιβλίον καὶ πάντα τὸν λαὸν, ἐράντισεν	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here the author refers to several Old Testament texts. The story about Moses “speaking” the law and then “sprinkling” the people with **blood** comes from [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md). In these verses the Israelites agreed to follow the law and keep the covenant. The references to **red wool** and **hyssop** could come from the instructions for cleansing a person with a skin disease, which you can find in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). However, it is more likely that the author is referring to the **red wool** and **hyssop** that the priest burned along with a “heifer” to make “ashes” that could be mixed with water and used for cleansing. You can read about this ritual in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md), and the author has already mentioned it in [9:13](../09/13.md). The author’s point here is that Moses cleansed the people when they agreed to the covenant, and according to the law the cleansing would require **blood**, **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is speaking about how Moses cleansed the people when they heard and agreed to the covenant with God. Alternate translation: “every command having been spoken according to the law by Moses to all the people, they agreed to keep them. Then, Moses took the blood of calves and goats that had been sacrificed, and he mixed it with water and red wool and hyssop. Then, he sprinkled both the scroll of the law itself and all the people with the mixture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	19	we5r	figs-activepassive	λαληθείσης & πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **every command** that was **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “Moses having spoken every command according to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	19	nj2q	figs-abstractnouns	πάσης ἐντολῆς	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “everything that God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	19	bd4k	figs-idiom	λαληθείσης&κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here, the phrase **according to the law** identifies **every command** as the ones that God included in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the specific commands in **the law**. Alternate translation: “in the law having been spoken” or “that God included in the law having been spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	9	19	bd4k	figs-idiom	λαληθείσης & κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here, the phrase **according to the law** identifies **every command** as the ones that God included in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the specific commands in **the law**. Alternate translation: “in the law having been spoken” or “that God included in the law having been spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	9	19	ejk4	figs-doublet	τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here the author refers to **calves** and **goats** as two examples of animals that could be sacrificed so that a priest could use their blood. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed, and the story about Moses speaking the commands only mentions **bulls**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	9	19	yfc6	figs-explicit	μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου	1	took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people	Here the author does not state how **Moses** used the **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. The story in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md) mentions that Moses mixed the blood with **water**, but it does not mention the other two things. The author could imply that: (1) Moses tied stalks of **hyssop** plant together with the **red wool** to create a brush that he used to sprinkle the **blood** and **water**. That is what **hyssop** and **red wool** are used for in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). Alternate translation: “mixing it with water and dipping hyssop tied with red wool in it” (2) Moses burned the **red wool** and **hyssop** and mixed them in with the **blood** and **water**. That is what **hyssop** and **red wool** are used for in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md). Alternate translation: “mixing it with water and ashes from red wool and hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	19	tgc2	translate-unknown	ἐρίου κοκκίνου	1	hyssop	Here, the phrase **red wool** refers to cloth or string made from the fur of animals, especially sheep, that is dyed **red** or scarlet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that make the meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “scarlet cloth” or “fabric colored red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	19	nrn5	translate-unknown	ὑσσώπου	1	hyssop	The word **hyssop** refers to a woody plant with small leaves that can be used for sprinkling liquids by dipping the leaves in the liquid and then shaking them or brushing them over the target. If this plant is unknown, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “part of a plant with small branches and many leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	19	zl8f	figs-explicit	τὸ βιβλίον	1	hyssop	Here, the word **scroll** refers to the roll or book on which Moses wrote everything that God had told him. You can read about this **scroll** in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md). These verses do not directly mention Moses sprinkling **the scroll**, but the author knew more about this than we do, and there is no reason to harmonize what he says with the story in Exodus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scroll of God’s words” or “the scroll of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	19	elh7	figs-rpronouns	αὐτό&τὸ βιβλίον	1	hyssop	Here, the word translated **itself** emphasizes **the scroll**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **the scroll** in your language. Alternate translation: “that very scroll” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+HEB	9	19	elh7	figs-rpronouns	αὐτό & τὸ βιβλίον	1	hyssop	Here, the word translated **itself** emphasizes **the scroll**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **the scroll** in your language. Alternate translation: “that very scroll” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 HEB	9	20	e3lr	writing-quotations	λέγων	1	the blood of the covenant	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that Moses said to the people. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Exodus 24:8](../exo/24/08.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “and he spoke to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	9	20	lskz	figs-quotations	λέγων, τοῦτο τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης, ἧς ἐνετείλατο πρὸς ὑμᾶς ὁ Θεός	1	the blood of the covenant	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that this is the blood of the covenant that God commanded for you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]}
 HEB	9	20	k7kh	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	the blood of the covenant	Here, the word **This** refers to the blood that Moses “sprinkled” (see [9:19](../09/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to the blood. Alternate translation: “This blood is” or “What I have sprinkled is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1151,25 +1151,25 @@ HEB	9	20	brhx		ἐνετείλατο πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	the blood of the cov
 HEB	9	21	k6dm	figs-explicit	ὁμοίως	1	he sprinkled	Here, the phrase **in a similar way** refers back to [9:19](../09/19.md) and the **way** in which Moses sprinkled blood on the scroll and the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “like he did with the scroll and the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	21	xa9q	translate-unknown	πάντα τὰ σκεύη τῆς λειτουργίας	1	all the containers used in the service	Here, the phrase **containers of the service** identifies the objects and tools that the priests used in **service** of God. These included forks, bowls, incense burners, and many other similar **containers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these are all the tools and objects used for “serving” God. Alternate translation: “all vessels for service” or “all the objects that the priests use when they serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	21	l27v	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς λειτουργίας	1	sprinkled	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **service**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “serve” or “worship.” Alternate translation: “for worshiping God” or “for serving in the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	9	22	g3ef	figs-idiom	σχεδὸν&πάντα καθαρίζεται	1	almost everything is cleansed with blood	Here, the phrase **almost everything** indicates that what the author is speaking about is generally true but not always true. In other words, there are exceptions to what he says, and he wishes to acknowledge that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to a general truth that has exceptions. Alternate translation: “everything, with some exceptions, is cleansed” or “most things are cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	9	22	hi7m	figs-activepassive	σχεδὸν&πάντα καθαρίζεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **cleansed** rather than focusing on the whoever does the “cleansing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the priests” did it. Alternate translation: “the priests cleanse almost everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	22	g3ef	figs-idiom	σχεδὸν & πάντα καθαρίζεται	1	almost everything is cleansed with blood	Here, the phrase **almost everything** indicates that what the author is speaking about is generally true but not always true. In other words, there are exceptions to what he says, and he wishes to acknowledge that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to a general truth that has exceptions. Alternate translation: “everything, with some exceptions, is cleansed” or “most things are cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	9	22	hi7m	figs-activepassive	σχεδὸν & πάντα καθαρίζεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **cleansed** rather than focusing on the whoever does the “cleansing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the priests” did it. Alternate translation: “the priests cleanse almost everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	22	gs2i		χωρὶς αἱματεκχυσίας, οὐ γίνεται ἄφεσις	1		Here the author presents this clause as a statement of what is generally true. Use a form in your language that presents a general truth or something that everyone knows. Alternate translation: “so it is true that there is no forgiveness without shedding of blood”
 HEB	9	22	uw4g	figs-doublenegatives	χωρὶς αἱματεκχυσίας, οὐ γίνεται ἄφεσις	1		Here the author uses two negative words (**without** and **no**) to emphasize how necessary **blood** is for **forgiveness**. If the two negatives would be confusing, and if it would not be emphatic in your language, you could express the idea with a positive statement and emphasize it in another way. Alternate translation: “forgiveness only occurs with shedding of blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	9	22	v8bj	translate-unknown	αἱματεκχυσίας	1	Without the shedding of blood there is no forgiveness	Here the author uses a very rare word that refers to “pouring out” **blood**. The phrase **shedding of blood** thus refers to the process by which a priest kills an animal, pours its blood into a bowl, and then “pours it out” in a specific location near God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to the collection and presentation of the blood. Alternate translation: “shedding and presenting blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	22	v1tr	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ γίνεται ἄφεσις	1	forgiveness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **forgiveness**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “forgive.” If you need to express who does the “forgiving,” the author implies that it is God. Alternate translation: “no one is forgiven” or “God does not forgive people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	9	23	nh15	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion that is based on what the author has said in [9:18–22](../09/18.md) about blood and cleansing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	9	23	q79n	figs-activepassive	τὰ&ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τούτοις καθαρίζεσθαι	1	the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **examples** that are **cleansed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “cleansing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the priests” did it. Alternate translation: “the priests to cleanse the examples of the things in the heavens with these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	23	q79n	figs-activepassive	τὰ & ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τούτοις καθαρίζεσθαι	1	the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **examples** that are **cleansed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “cleansing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the priests” did it. Alternate translation: “the priests to cleanse the examples of the things in the heavens with these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	23	zgbc	translate-unknown	ὑποδείγματα	1	the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices	Here, the word **examples** indicates that the earthly tabernacle is a copy or illustration of the heavenly tabernacle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to something that is based on something else. Alternate translation: “illustrations” or “replicas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	23	fduq	figs-explicit	ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices	Here, the phrase **examples of the things in the heavens** could refer to: (1) the earthly tabernacle, which is an “example” of the “tabernacle” **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “example of the tabernacle in the heavens” (2) the earthly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it, which are **examples** of the same things **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “examples of the tabernacle, priesthood, and service in the heavens” or “examples of the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	23	rqw2	writing-pronouns	τούτοις&ταύτας	1	the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices	In both places, the word **these** refers back to the sacrifices and blood that the author has discussed in [9:18–22](../09/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **these** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “with those sacrifices … those sacrifices” or “with the blood of animals … the blood of animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	9	23	y9b7	figs-ellipsis	αὐτὰ&τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the heavenly things themselves to be cleansed with better sacrifices than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	9	23	eqn8		αὐτὰ&τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	What the author says about how the **heavenly things themselves** need to **be cleansed** could mean: (1) that when people sin, they defile or make impure the heavenly sanctuary. Thus, the heavenly sanctuary needs **to be cleansed** from this impurity. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be cleansed from impurity with better sacrifices than these” (2) that the heavenly sanctuary needs to be “inaugurated” or “consecrated.” In this case, “cleansing” refers primarily to making a place ready to function as a tabernacle, not to purifying sin from it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be consecrated with better sacrifices than these”
-HEB	9	23	u2hm	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ&τὰ ἐπουράνια	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	Here, the phrase **the heavenly things themselves** could refer to: (1) the heavenly tabernacle. Alternate translation: “the heavenly tabernacle itself” (2) the heavenly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly tabernacle, priesthood, and service themselves” or “the things in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	23	oup0	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὰ&τὰ ἐπουράνια	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	Here, the word translated **themselves** emphasizes **the heavenly things**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **the heavenly things** in your language. Alternate translation: “the very things in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+HEB	9	23	rqw2	writing-pronouns	τούτοις & ταύτας	1	the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices	In both places, the word **these** refers back to the sacrifices and blood that the author has discussed in [9:18–22](../09/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **these** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “with those sacrifices … those sacrifices” or “with the blood of animals … the blood of animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	9	23	y9b7	figs-ellipsis	αὐτὰ & τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the heavenly things themselves to be cleansed with better sacrifices than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+HEB	9	23	eqn8		αὐτὰ & τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	What the author says about how the **heavenly things themselves** need to **be cleansed** could mean: (1) that when people sin, they defile or make impure the heavenly sanctuary. Thus, the heavenly sanctuary needs **to be cleansed** from this impurity. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be cleansed from impurity with better sacrifices than these” (2) that the heavenly sanctuary needs to be “inaugurated” or “consecrated.” In this case, “cleansing” refers primarily to making a place ready to function as a tabernacle, not to purifying sin from it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be consecrated with better sacrifices than these”
+HEB	9	23	u2hm	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ & τὰ ἐπουράνια	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	Here, the phrase **the heavenly things themselves** could refer to: (1) the heavenly tabernacle. Alternate translation: “the heavenly tabernacle itself” (2) the heavenly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly tabernacle, priesthood, and service themselves” or “the things in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	23	oup0	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὰ & τὰ ἐπουράνια	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	Here, the word translated **themselves** emphasizes **the heavenly things**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **the heavenly things** in your language. Alternate translation: “the very things in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 HEB	9	23	xyys	figs-genericnoun	κρείττοσι θυσίαις	1	the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices	Here the author refers to **better sacrifices** in general to make a contrast with the earthly sacrifices. However, he knows that Jesus only offered one “sacrifice.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that **better sacrifices** refers to what is generally true rather than to the details of what Jesus did, or you could use a singular form instead. Alternate translation: “with a better sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 HEB	9	24	drtu	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the most holy place made with hands, which	Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:23](../09/23.md)) about the “heavenly things” and the “better sacrifices.” The explanation continues through [9:25–26](../09/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “which is why” or “and so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	9	24	xo5m	figs-go	οὐ&εἰς&εἰσῆλθεν	1	the most holy place made with hands, which	Here, the phrase **did not enter** refers to movement from outside a structure into that structure. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “did not pass into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-HEB	9	24	svu2	figs-explicit	χειροποίητα&ἅγια&ἀντίτυπα τῶν ἀληθινῶν	1	the most holy place made with hands, which	Here, the phrases **holy {places}** and **copies** refer to the earthly Most Holy Place. The phrase **the true ones** refers to the heavenly Most Holy Place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “a Most Holy Place made with hands—a copy of the true heavenly one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	9	24	xo5m	figs-go	οὐ & εἰς & εἰσῆλθεν	1	the most holy place made with hands, which	Here, the phrase **did not enter** refers to movement from outside a structure into that structure. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “did not pass into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	9	24	svu2	figs-explicit	χειροποίητα & ἅγια & ἀντίτυπα τῶν ἀληθινῶν	1	the most holy place made with hands, which	Here, the phrases **holy {places}** and **copies** refer to the earthly Most Holy Place. The phrase **the true ones** refers to the heavenly Most Holy Place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “a Most Holy Place made with hands—a copy of the true heavenly one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	24	cy2x	figs-synecdoche	χειροποίητα	1	the most holy place made with hands, which	Here, the word **hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their **hands**. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 HEB	9	24	akii	figs-activepassive	χειροποίητα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **holy {places}** that are **made** rather than focusing on the **hands**, which **made** them. Alternate translation: “that hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	24	l1ce	translate-unknown	ἀντίτυπα	1		Here, the word **copies** identifies the **holy {places} made with hands** as something that models or is based on **the true ones**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes something that is based on something else. See you how translated **examples** in [9:23](../09/23.md). Alternate translation: “illustrations” or “replicas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1195,28 +1195,28 @@ HEB	9	26	mfhz	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν αἰώνων	1	to
 HEB	9	26	dq7m	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀθέτησιν ἁμαρτίας διὰ τῆς θυσίας αὐτοῦ	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **annulment** and **sacrifice**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “annul” and “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “to annul sins by sacrificing himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	9	26	flt7	translate-unknown	ἀθέτησιν	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here, the word **annulment** is the same word translated in “annulment” in [7:18](../07/18.md). The word refers to abolishing something or keeping it from being effective or powerful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to removing the power or effectiveness from something. Alternate translation: “the abolition” or “the removal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	27	hflz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ καθ’ ὅσον	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here, the phrase **And just as** introduces further information (**And**) that includes a two-part comparison. The first part is introduced here by **just as**, while the second part is introduced at the beginning of [9:28](../09/28.md) by “so also.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further information and the first part of a comparison. Alternate translation: “Further, in the same way that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	9	27	w2v8	translate-unknown	ἀπόκειται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις&ἀποθανεῖν	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here, the phrase **it is appointed** refers to something that is certain or sure to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that refers to something that will happen for sure. Alternate translation: “men are destined to die” or “men will certainly die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	9	27	h6rr	figs-activepassive	ἀπόκειται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις&ἀποθανεῖν	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has appointed men to die” or “God has made it so that men die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	9	27	w2v8	translate-unknown	ἀπόκειται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις & ἀποθανεῖν	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here, the phrase **it is appointed** refers to something that is certain or sure to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that refers to something that will happen for sure. Alternate translation: “men are destined to die” or “men will certainly die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	9	27	h6rr	figs-activepassive	ἀπόκειται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις & ἀποθανεῖν	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has appointed men to die” or “God has made it so that men die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	9	27	giz9	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Although the word **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to people” or “to men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-HEB	9	27	ewjt	figs-extrainfo	μετὰ&τοῦτο	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here the author does not specify how soon **judgment** comes **after** people die. If possible, express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to an event that comes later without specifying how much later. Alternate translation: “once that happens” or “some time after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+HEB	9	27	ewjt	figs-extrainfo	μετὰ & τοῦτο	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here the author does not specify how soon **judgment** comes **after** people die. If possible, express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to an event that comes later without specifying how much later. Alternate translation: “once that happens” or “some time after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	9	27	j084	figs-explicit	κρίσις	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	Here, the word **judgment** refers to how God will “judge” everyone based on what they have done when Jesus comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the final judgment” or “God’s judgment of everyone at the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	27	p6oi	figs-abstractnouns	κρίσις	1	to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Alternate translation: “they are judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	9	28	nwwq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὕτως καὶ	1	Christ was offered once	Here, the phrase **so also** introduces what the author will compare with humans dying and being judged ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The comparison between humans and **Christ** is about two primary things. First, both die **once**. Second, God’s final decision, either judgment or **salvation**, follows this death at some point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the second part of a comparison. “likewise” or “in much the same way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	9	28	p8b6	figs-activepassive	προσενεχθεὶς	1	Christ was offered once	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “Christ” did it to himself. Alternate translation: “having offered himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	9	28	hv2t	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ&ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας	1	to take away the sins	Here the author refers to how Jesus deals with **sins** as if he were “bearing” or taking them off someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus eliminates the guilt and the power of these **sins** over people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to remove the sins” or “to deal with the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	9	28	hv2t	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ & ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας	1	to take away the sins	Here the author refers to how Jesus deals with **sins** as if he were “bearing” or taking them off someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus eliminates the guilt and the power of these **sins** over people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to remove the sins” or “to deal with the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	9	28	p6th	figs-explicit	ὀφθήσεται	1	the sins	Here, the phrase **will appear** refers to how Jesus will be seen by everyone on earth when comes back to earth from heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to Jesus coming back to earth. Alternate translation: “will come” or “will reveal himself on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	28	s9jy	figs-explicit	ἐκ δευτέρου	1	the sins	Here the author refers to **a second time** because Jesus already “appeared” on earth the “first time,” which is when he became human, lived, and died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “one more time” or “again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	28	scnu	translate-ordinal	δευτέρου	1	the sins	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	9	28	b99a	figs-explicit	χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας	1	the sins	Here, the phrase **apart from sin** refers to how what Jesus will do is not about **sin**. The phrase does not refer to how Jesus himself does not have **sin**, although that is true (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how Jesus’ second “appearing” does not deal with **sin**. Alternate translation: “without reference to sin” or “not dealing with sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	9	28	aijj	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς&εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	the sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “to save those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	9	28	aijj	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς & εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	the sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “to save those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	intro	nev1			0		# Hebrews 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)<br>6. Summary statement (10:19–25)<br>7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)<br>      * Exhortation: Endure in the faith! (10:26–39)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [10:5–7](../10/05.md), [16–17](../10/16.md), [37–38](../10/37.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The sacrifices that Moses’ law required<br><br>In [10:1–11](../10/01.md), the author points out several reasons why it is clear that the sacrifices that God required the Israelites to offer did not take away sins on their own. First, he states that these sacrifices are a “shadow” of the coming good things. It is the real thing, not the shadow, that takes away sins. Second, these sacrifices needed to be repeated. If they actually took away sin, the author reasons, they would only need to be done once. Third, he argues from the Scriptures that God replaces these sacrifices with Jesus doing God’s will. In this chapter, the author does not spend much time speaking about what those sacrifices actually did accomplish. He only says that they are a “reminder” of sins (see [10:3](../10/03.md)). See [9:13](../09/13.md) for more information on what the sacrifices actually could accomplish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sacrifice]])<br><br>### “Once” versus “repeatedly”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, the author states that Christ offered himself once and that his sacrifice has eternal effects. In contrast, he states that the sacrifices that the earthly priests offered happened repeatedly and had limited effects. In your translation, be sure to use words that emphasize the contrast between a single, effective sacrifice and multiple, ineffective sacrifices.<br><br>### The “former days”<br><br>In [10:32](../10/32.md), the author refers to the “former days,” which he then goes on to describe in [10:32–34](../10/32.md). This phrase refers to a period of time in the audience’s past, a time when they had just been “enlightened,” which means they had recently believed in Jesus. During this time, they suffered but also persevered and rejoiced in knowing God. The author wishes them to continue to show the endurance and joy they showed during these “former days.” In these verses, use verb tenses and forms that you would normally use for describing what happened in a person’s past.<br><br>### “The one coming” in [10:37](../10/37.md)<br><br>In [10:37](../10/37.md), the “one coming” refers to the Messiah, whom the author knows is Jesus. In this context, the Messiah “coming” refers to Jesus’ second coming, not his incarnation. Use words here that could be understood as a reference to Jesus’ second coming.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “Shadow” and “image” in [10:1](../10/01.md)<br><br>In this verse, the law has a “shadow” of the coming good things, which means that the law of Moses gives an outline or vague image of those good things. A “shadow” is not bad, but it is not the thing that casts the shadow. Instead, it just gives a foretaste or a hint of what that thing is. The author uses the word “image” to refer to the thing itself. The author’s point, then, is that the law of Moses provides a hint or foretaste of the coming good things, which are what Christ offers to those who believe in him. That means that the law is good, but if people can have the “image” itself (what Christ gives), they do not need the “shadow” (the law) anymore. See the notes on this verse for translation ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/shadow]])<br><br>### “The curtain, that is, his flesh” in [10:20](../10/20.md)<br><br>In this verse, the phrase “that is, his flesh” can be understood in three main ways.<br>(1) it could go with “curtain,” in which case the author is stating that Jesus’ “flesh” is somehow like this “curtain.” It could mean that he needed to live his life in the “flesh” before he could enter the heavenly sanctuary, just like a priest needed to pass through the “curtain” before he could enter the Most Holy Place. Or, it could mean that his “flesh” needed to die before he could enter the heavenly sanctuary, just like a priest needed to penetrate through the curtain to enter the Most Holy Place.<br>(2) it could go with the whole clause “which he has inaugurated for us as a fresh and living way.” In this case, the word “through” is implied with “flesh” as well as “curtain,” and the author is saying that Jesus “inaugurated” this way “through” (or “by means of”) his “flesh.”<br>(3) it could go with “way,” in which case the author is stating that Jesus’ “way” was his “flesh.” This would most likely mean that the path or “way” that Jesus took to get to the heavenly sanctuary was his earthly life in the “flesh.”<br>The first option makes the most sense of the way the author wrote the words in the sentence, but some scholars argue that the idea it expresses does not match the rest of what the author says. Consider using a construction that could modify either “curtain” or “way” to preserve the ambiguity.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### What sins are those for which there is no longer a sacrifice?<br><br>In [10:26–31](../10/26.md), the author refers to sin which no sacrifice can take away and which God will punish with “fire.” Scholars debate what sin or sins the author is speaking about and whether the people who commit the sin or sins are really Christians or not. What is clear is that this is very serious sin: it involves “trampling” Christ and insulting the Holy Spirit. No one could commit this kind of sin by accident. Further, the word for “sinning” in [10:26](../10/26.md) indicates that the author is thinking about more than one individual act. In your translation, make sure that you refer to a pattern or repeated behavior of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>### Old Testament quotations<br><br>When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [10:5–7](../10/05.md), which quotes from a Greek version of [Psalm 40:6–8](../psa/40/06.md), and in [10:37–38](../10/37.md), which quotes from a Greek version of [Habakkuk 2:3–4](../hab/02/03.md). Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament you are familiar with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	1	kwq1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** introduces a new development in the argument that is based on what the author has said in [9:23–28](../09/23.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces development, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	10	1	kj83	figs-metaphor	σκιὰν&ἔχων&τῶν&ἀγαθῶν	1	the law is only a shadow of the good things to come	Here the author speaks as if the **law** has a **shadow** that is cast by **the good things that are coming**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **law** is not one of **the good things that are coming**, but that it does “foreshadow” or give a outline or forecast of what those **good things** are like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “foreshadowing the good things” or “only pointing to the good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	10	1	kj83	figs-metaphor	σκιὰν & ἔχων & τῶν & ἀγαθῶν	1	the law is only a shadow of the good things to come	Here the author speaks as if the **law** has a **shadow** that is cast by **the good things that are coming**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **law** is not one of **the good things that are coming**, but that it does “foreshadow” or give a outline or forecast of what those **good things** are like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “foreshadowing the good things” or “only pointing to the good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	1	mz05	figs-extrainfo	τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν	1	the law is only a shadow of the good things to come	Here the author does not clarify exactly what these **good things** are. What is clear is that God gives them to believers as gifts or blessings. If possible, express the idea without including specifics about what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “of the good gifts that are coming” or “of the blessings that are coming from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	10	1	i4ey	figs-personification	μελλόντων	1	the law is only a shadow of the good things to come	Here the author speaks as if **the good things** were a person who could “come” or arrive at a destination. He means that believers will certainly and quickly receive these **good things**, as surely as someone who is “coming” will soon arrive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that believers will receive soon” or “that we will certainly experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	10	1	miv9	figs-explicit	μελλόντων	1	the law is only a shadow of the good things to come	Here the author could mean that the **good things**: (1) are **coming** for believers, although believers do experience them some now. Alternate translation: “that will come” (2) were **coming** from the perspective of those who received the law but which believers have now received. Alternate translation: “that were to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	1	r6ly	translate-unknown	οὐκ αὐτὴν τὴν εἰκόνα τῶν πραγμάτων	1	not the real forms of those things themselves	Here, the word **image** refers to the opposite of the **shadow**. The **image** refers to the reality or substance of the **things** themselves. It does not refer to a copy or reflection. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that refers to the reality or existence of the **things**. Alternate translation: “not the reality itself of those things” or “not being itself one of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	10	1	kcyq	figs-personification	ἔχων ὁ νόμος&οὐδέποτε δύναται&τελειῶσαι	1	not the real forms of those things themselves	Here the author speaks as if **the law** were a person who could **make perfect** other people. He speaks in this way to indicate that the regulations and rituals that God required in the law do not enable people to become “perfect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “keeping the law, which has … cannot ever make perfect” or “doing what the law requires, which law has … never gives perfection to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	10	1	kcyq	figs-personification	ἔχων ὁ νόμος & οὐδέποτε δύναται & τελειῶσαι	1	not the real forms of those things themselves	Here the author speaks as if **the law** were a person who could **make perfect** other people. He speaks in this way to indicate that the regulations and rituals that God required in the law do not enable people to become “perfect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “keeping the law, which has … cannot ever make perfect” or “doing what the law requires, which law has … never gives perfection to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	10	1	anin	figs-explicit	τοὺς προσερχομένους	1	not the real forms of those things themselves	Here, the phrase **those who approach** could refer to: (1) the Israelites who brought the sacrifices to God. Alternate translation: “the people who approach” (2) the priests who serve in the sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the priests who approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	1	khk2	figs-idiom	κατ’ ἐνιαυτὸν	1	not the real forms of those things themselves	Here, the phrase **every year** identifies an action that happens often and repeatedly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a frequent and repeated action. Alternate translation: “day after day” or “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	2	mww3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐπεὶ	1	would the sacrifices not have ceased to be offered?	Here, the word **Otherwise** introduces a hypothetical situation that is contrary to what the author claimed in the previous verse. The author introduces this hypothetical situation to further support his argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrary to fact. Alternate translation: “If that were not the case” or “Were that not so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ HEB	10	5	coab	figs-explicit	εἰσερχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμο
 HEB	10	5	sp70	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	you did not desire	Here and in the following two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that Christ the Son said to God the Father. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 40:6–8](../psa/40/06.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “he says to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	5	wlz2	figs-quotations	λέγει, θυσίαν καὶ προσφορὰν οὐκ ἠθέλησας, σῶμα δὲ κατηρτίσω μοι.	1	you did not desire	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you also will need to translate the two following verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “he says that sacrifice and offering God did not desire, but a body God prepared for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]}
 HEB	10	5	kqdh	figs-doublet	θυσίαν καὶ προσφορὰν	1	you did not desire	These two terms mean basically the same thing. The author of the quotation uses both of them to show that he is referring to animal sacrifices in general. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and make it general in another way. Alternate translation: “Sacrifices” or “Any kind of offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-HEB	10	5	ml8e	figs-yousingular	οὐκ ἠθέλησας&κατηρτίσω	1	you did not desire	Because Christ is speaking to one person (God the Father), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	10	5	ml8e	figs-yousingular	οὐκ ἠθέλησας & κατηρτίσω	1	you did not desire	Because Christ is speaking to one person (God the Father), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	10	6	t9bn	figs-quotations	ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας οὐκ εὐδόκησας.	1	you did not desire	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you will need to translate the previous and following verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “in whole burnt offerings and concerning sin offerings God was not well-pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]}
 HEB	10	6	q416	figs-doublet	ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	you did not desire	Here, the phrases **whole burnt {offerings}** and **concerning sin {offerings}** function together to refer to sacrifices that the Israelites offered. The **whole burnt {offering}** refers to how a cow, goat, sheep, or bird would be killed and then completely burned before God. The **concerning sin {offering}** refers to how a bull, goat, lamb, or birds would be killed and the blood from the animal would be sprinkled in specific places. The author refers to both types of offerings in order to refer in general to sacrifices related to sin and atoning for that sin. If you do not have two descriptions for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God to take care of sin. Alternate translation: “in sacrifices concerning sin” or “in animals that people offer to deal with ins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	10	6	bfaq	translate-unknown	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	you did not desire	Here, the phrase **concerning sin {offerings}** refers to a specific type of sacrifice that people would offer when they sinned. An important part of this offering was how the priest sprinkled blood from the animal in specific places within the tabernacle. You can read about this offering in [Leviticus 4:1–5:13](../lev/04/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes sacrifices offered to deal with sin. Alternate translation: “sin offerings” or “offerings to take away sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1258,8 +1258,8 @@ HEB	10	7	r0xr	translate-unknown	ἐν κεφαλίδι βιβλίου	1	Then I s
 HEB	10	7	gk53	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ θέλημά σου	1	Then I said	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “desire.” Alternate translation: “what you desire” or “what you wish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	8	c8eb	writing-quotations	ἀνώτερον λέγων	1	General Information:	Here the author uses **When he says above** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see [10:5–7](../10/05.md)). The word **above** refers to the first part or parts of the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand that the author is requoting the previous quotation to focus on a specific portion of it, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “As he says at the beginning of the quotation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	8	k12g	figs-quotations	ἀνώτερον λέγων, ὅτι θυσίας, καὶ προσφορὰς, καὶ ὁλοκαυτώματα, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας, οὐκ ἠθέλησας, οὐδὲ εὐδόκησας	1	General Information:	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “When he says above that sacrifices and offerings and whole burnt offerings and sin offerings God did not desire, nor was he well-pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]}
-HEB	10	8	rlv8		θυσίας, καὶ προσφορὰς&οὐκ ἠθέλησας	1	sacrifices … offerings	These are the same words that the author of the quotation used in [10:5](../10/05.md), although the author of Hebrews has mixed them together with words from [10:6](../10/06.md). Also, he has expressed **Sacrifices and offerings** in plural form instead of singular form. Allowing for these differences, translate these words the same way you did in [10:5](../10/05.md).
-HEB	10	8	n7kc		ὁλοκαυτώματα, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας&οὐδὲ εὐδόκησας	1	whole burnt offerings … sacrifices for sin	These are the same words that the author of the quotation used in [10:6](../10/06.md), although the author of Hebrews has put them together with words from [10:5](../10/05.md). Translate these words the same way you did in [10:6](../10/06.md).
+HEB	10	8	rlv8		θυσίας, καὶ προσφορὰς & οὐκ ἠθέλησας	1	sacrifices … offerings	These are the same words that the author of the quotation used in [10:5](../10/05.md), although the author of Hebrews has mixed them together with words from [10:6](../10/06.md). Also, he has expressed **Sacrifices and offerings** in plural form instead of singular form. Allowing for these differences, translate these words the same way you did in [10:5](../10/05.md).
+HEB	10	8	n7kc		ὁλοκαυτώματα, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας & οὐδὲ εὐδόκησας	1	whole burnt offerings … sacrifices for sin	These are the same words that the author of the quotation used in [10:6](../10/06.md), although the author of Hebrews has put them together with words from [10:5](../10/05.md). Translate these words the same way you did in [10:6](../10/06.md).
 HEB	10	8	d3ek	figs-activepassive	προσφέρονται	1	that are offered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the sacrifices that are **offered** rather than focusing on the people doing the “offering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that the Israelites or the priests did it. Alternate translation: “the people offer” or “the priests offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	10	8	kt5l	figs-idiom	κατὰ νόμον	1	that are offered	Here, the phrase **according to the law** indicates that the “offerings” are done the way that God commanded in the **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the **law** contains the commands for these “offerings.” Alternate translation: “as God commanded in the law” or “as the law requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	9	oq3t	writing-quotations	τότε εἴρηκεν	1	See	Here the author uses **then he had said** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see [10:5–7](../10/05.md)). The word **then** refers to the later part or parts of the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “then he says at the end of the quotation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -1267,13 +1267,13 @@ HEB	10	9	gh6z	figs-quotations	εἴρηκεν, ἰδοὺ, ἥκω τοῦ πο
 HEB	10	9	k5kv		ἰδοὺ, ἥκω τοῦ ποιῆσαι τὸ θέλημά σου	1	See	These are the same words that the author of the quotation used in [10:7](../10/07.md), although the author of Hebrews omitted some of the words to focus on his point. Translate these words the same way you did in [10:7](../10/07.md).
 HEB	10	9	kbrw	writing-pronouns	ἀναιρεῖ	1	See	Here, the word **He** could refer to: (1) the Messiah, who is the one who speaks the quotation. Alternate translation: “The Messiah takes away” or “The one who is speaking takes away” (2) God the Father. Alternate translation: “God takes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	10	9	rxtb	figs-metaphor	ἀναιρεῖ	1		Here, the author speaks as if **the first** were an object that **He** could “take away.” By speaking in this way, he means that **He** has removed the power or efficacy of **the first**, as surely as if he took it from a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “He removes” or “He nullifies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	10	9	ra22	figs-explicit	τὸ πρῶτον&τὸ δεύτερον	1		Here, the phrases **the first** and **the second** could refer to: (1) the parts of the quotation that the author has identified. Alternate translation: “the first thing he talked about … the second thing he talked about” (2) the systems or arrangements of the two different covenants. Alternate translation: “the first system … the second system” (3) the two covenants themselves. Alternate translation: “the first covenant … the second covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	10	9	ja8n	translate-ordinal	τὸ πρῶτον&τὸ δεύτερον	1	first practice … the second practice	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “number one … number two” or “the one … the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+HEB	10	9	ra22	figs-explicit	τὸ πρῶτον & τὸ δεύτερον	1		Here, the phrases **the first** and **the second** could refer to: (1) the parts of the quotation that the author has identified. Alternate translation: “the first thing he talked about … the second thing he talked about” (2) the systems or arrangements of the two different covenants. Alternate translation: “the first system … the second system” (3) the two covenants themselves. Alternate translation: “the first covenant … the second covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	10	9	ja8n	translate-ordinal	τὸ πρῶτον & τὸ δεύτερον	1	first practice … the second practice	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “number one … number two” or “the one … the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	10	9	rkq2	translate-unknown	στήσῃ	1	first practice … the second practice	Here, the word **establish** refers to how someone gives something power or effectiveness. It is the opposite of **takes away**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to putting something into force or giving it power. Alternate translation: “inaugurate” or “put into force” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	10	iqki	figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ θελήματι	1	we have been sanctified	Here, the phrase **that will** refers to the word “will” in the quotation (see “I have come to do your will” in [10:9](../10/09.md)). The phrase **that will** could refer to: (1) God’s will, which Christ accomplishes or does. Alternate translation: “By God’s will that Jesus has done,” (2) Christ doing God’s **will** by offering his **body**. Alternate translation: “By Christ’s obedience to God’s will,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	10	xj9i	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένοι ἐσμὲν	1	we have been sanctified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did through Jesus’ work. Alternate translation: “God has sanctified us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	10	10	xk24	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς προσφορᾶς τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	through the offering of the body of Jesus Christ	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offering**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “offer.” Alternate translation: “through Jesus Christ offering his body” or “by how Jesus Christ offered his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	10	11	x83h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ&μὲν	1	can never take away sins	Here, the word **And** introduces a new development in the argument. The word **indeed** indicates that this development occurs in two contrasting parts. The second part begins with the word “But” at the beginning of [10:12](../10/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a new section or idea that it is in two parts. Alternate translation: “On the one hand,” or “Now first,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	10	11	x83h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ & μὲν	1	can never take away sins	Here, the word **And** introduces a new development in the argument. The word **indeed** indicates that this development occurs in two contrasting parts. The second part begins with the word “But” at the beginning of [10:12](../10/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a new section or idea that it is in two parts. Alternate translation: “On the one hand,” or “Now first,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	10	11	y25p	translate-unknown	ἕστηκεν	1	can never take away sins	Here, the word **stands** refers to someone staying on their feet and not sitting down. It does not mean that the person does not move. The author uses the word **stands** because he will contrast it with how Jesus “sits” (see [10:12](../10/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how a person does not sit down but stays in an upright position. Alternate translation: “stays on his feet” or “stands and walks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	11	jq4i	figs-idiom	καθ’ ἡμέραν	1	can never take away sins	Here, the phrase **every day** identifies an action that happens very often and repeatedly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a very frequent and repeated action. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	11	uw6i	figs-infostructure	ἕστηκεν καθ’ ἡμέραν λειτουργῶν	1	can never take away sins	Here, the phrase **each day** could modify: (1) **stands**. Alternate translation: “stands every day, serving” (2) **serving**. Alternate translation: “stands, serving every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ HEB	10	12	zr61	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	he sat down at the right h
 HEB	10	12	mksp	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the word **he** refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Christ. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	10	12	lfl1	grammar-connect-time-sequential	προσενέγκας	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the phrase **having offered** could introduce an action: (1) that occurs before he **sat down**. Alternate translation: “after having offered” (2) that is the means by which or the reason why he **sat down**. Alternate translation: “because he offered” or “by means of having offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 HEB	10	12	o8m4	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the phrase **for all time** identifies that something is always true or effective. In other words, there will never be a **time** when it is not true or effective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “forever” or “permanently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	10	12	vjto	figs-infostructure	μίαν ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν&θυσίαν, εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς, ἐκάθισεν	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the phrase **for all time** could modify: (1) **offered**. Alternate translation: “one sacrifice for sins for all time, sat down” (2) **sat down**. Alternate translation: “one sacrifice for sins, sat down for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	10	12	vjto	figs-infostructure	μίαν ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν & θυσίαν, εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς, ἐκάθισεν	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the phrase **for all time** could modify: (1) **offered**. Alternate translation: “one sacrifice for sins for all time, sat down” (2) **sat down**. Alternate translation: “one sacrifice for sins, sat down for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	10	12	egky	figs-idiom	ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the phrase **for sins** indicates that Jesus’ **sacrifice** was intended to take away **sins**. The phrase does not mean that the **sacrifice** helps or allows the **sins**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea clear. Alternate translation: “for the forgiveness of sins” or “so that God would forgive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	12	fy8w	translate-symaction	ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	When someone sits **at the right hand of God**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “sat down to rule at the right hand of God” or “took the place of honor and authority at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 HEB	10	12	wl76	figs-metonymy	ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	he sat down at the right hand of God	Here, the phrase **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of God” or “in the honorable place next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1294,9 +1294,9 @@ HEB	10	14	ske9	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	those who are being sancti
 HEB	10	14	tfmy		τετελείωκεν εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς τοὺς ἁγιαζομένους	1	those who are being sanctified	Here the author indicates that the Messiah has **perfected** believers once and in the past. He indicates that **being sanctified** is something that believers are still experiencing and that is not yet finished. In your translation, preserve the timing of these two actions. Alternate translation: “he perfected for all time those who are currently being sanctified”
 HEB	10	14	c298	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς	1	those who are being sanctified	Here, the phrase **for all time** identifies that something is always true or effective. In other words, there will never be a time when it is not true or effective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “forever” or “permanently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	14	dz9n	figs-activepassive	τοὺς ἁγιαζομένους	1	those who are being sanctified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “those whom God is sanctifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	10	15	qk8j	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖ&ἡμῖν	1	General Information:	Here the author does not state what the **Holy Spirit** is “testifying” about. He implies that it is what he said in the previous verses about how Jesus’ offering effectively removes sin and leads to holiness and perfection (see [10:12–14](../10/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “testifies to us that Christ takes away sins” or “testifies to us that Christ perfects his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	10	15	qk8j	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖ & ἡμῖν	1	General Information:	Here the author does not state what the **Holy Spirit** is “testifying” about. He implies that it is what he said in the previous verses about how Jesus’ offering effectively removes sin and leads to holiness and perfection (see [10:12–14](../10/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “testifies to us that Christ takes away sins” or “testifies to us that Christ perfects his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	15	zhyi	writing-quotations	μετὰ γὰρ τὸ εἰρηκέναι	1	General Information:	Here the author introduces a quote from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that **the Holy Spirit** has **said** to **us**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “for after he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	10	15	qt90	grammar-connect-time-sequential	μετὰ&τὸ εἰρηκέναι	1	General Information:	Here, the word **after** indicates that the author will refer to something that was **said** before something else was **said**. The first thing that was **said** could be: (1) all of [10:16](../10/16.md). The second thing is introduced by “And {then}” at the beginning of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “after he said these words from the Lord” (2) the first part of [10:16](../10/16.md), up to “says the Lord.” The second is introduced by “says the Lord” and continues to the end of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “after the Holy Spirit said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+HEB	10	15	qt90	grammar-connect-time-sequential	μετὰ & τὸ εἰρηκέναι	1	General Information:	Here, the word **after** indicates that the author will refer to something that was **said** before something else was **said**. The first thing that was **said** could be: (1) all of [10:16](../10/16.md). The second thing is introduced by “And {then}” at the beginning of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “after he said these words from the Lord” (2) the first part of [10:16](../10/16.md), up to “says the Lord.” The second is introduced by “says the Lord” and continues to the end of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “after the Holy Spirit said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 HEB	10	16	czh3	figs-quotations	αὕτη ἡ διαθήκη ἣν διαθήσομαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς νόμους μου ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς	1	with them	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. ]Alternate translation: “that this is the covenant that he will covenant with them after those days, so he says, putting his laws in their hearts, and he will write them on their mind.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	10	16	s783		αὕτη ἡ διαθήκη ἣν διαθήσομαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς νόμους μου ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς	1	after those days	These words are part of the quotation from [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md) that the author already quoted in [8:10](../08/10.md). Here, the author repeats the words he used there almost exactly. He changes “with the house of Israel” to “with them,” and he reverses the order in which “hearts’ and “mind” appear. Repeat the words you used in [8:10](../08/10.md), but make these two minor changes.
 HEB	10	16	xx53	writing-quotations	τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς	1	I will put my laws in their hearts	Here, the phrase **says the Lord** could be: (1) part of the quotation that the “Holy Spirit” says. Alternate translation: “those days, so the Lord says, putting” (2) the introduction to what **the Lord** says “after” the Spirit speaks other words (see “after having said” in [10:15](../10/15.md)). In this case, **says the Lord** is not part of the quotation but introduces the second half of the quotation, which continues to the end of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “those days,’ then the Lord says, ‘putting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -1305,7 +1305,7 @@ HEB	10	17	pql9	figs-quotations	καὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν,
 HEB	10	17	vkw4		τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἀνομιῶν αὐτῶν, οὐ μὴ μνησθήσομαι ἔτι	1	General Information:	These words are part of the quotation from [Jeremiah 31:34](../jer/31/34.md) that the author already quoted in [8:12](../08/12.md). Here, the author repeats the words he used there almost exactly. He adds **and their lawless deeds** after **sins**, probably to represent the previous clause in [8:12](../08/12.md): “I will be merciful toward their unrighteousness.” Further, he makes “remember” from [8:12](../08/12.md) future tense. Repeat the words you used in [8:10](../08/10.md), but make these two changes.
 HEB	10	17	qn7w	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἀνομιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Their sins and lawless deeds I will remember no longer.”	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **deeds**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “do.” Alternate translation: “the lawless things they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	18	pje1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** introduces an explanation of the words that the author has quoted in [10:16–17](../10/16.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “So,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	10	18	drdg	figs-idiom	ὅπου&ἄφεσις τούτων	1	Now	Here, the word **where** does not indicate that the **forgiveness** is in a specific place. Rather, it indicates that what the author is about to say assumes that **forgiveness** exists or is real. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that is real and that functions as a basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “when forgiveness for these things exists” or “since there is forgiveness for these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	10	18	drdg	figs-idiom	ὅπου & ἄφεσις τούτων	1	Now	Here, the word **where** does not indicate that the **forgiveness** is in a specific place. Rather, it indicates that what the author is about to say assumes that **forgiveness** exists or is real. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that is real and that functions as a basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “when forgiveness for these things exists” or “since there is forgiveness for these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	18	pjh5	figs-abstractnouns	ἄφεσις τούτων	1	where there is forgiveness for these	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **forgiveness**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “forgive” or “release.” Alternate translation: “people are forgiven for these things” or “God releases people from these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	18	w4cd	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1	where there is forgiveness for these	Here, the word **these** refers to the “sins” and “lawless deeds” that the author mentioned in [10:17](../10/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to “sins” and “lawless deeds.” Alternate translation: “for sins and lawless deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	10	18	z351	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκέτι προσφορὰ	1	there is no longer any sacrifice for sin	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice” or “offer.” Alternate translation: “people no longer sacrifice” or “nothing is offered any longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1313,7 +1313,7 @@ HEB	10	18	tj39	figs-idiom	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	there is no longer any s
 HEB	10	19	ih5u	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on at least [8:1–10:18](../08/01.md), and perhaps all of [5:1–10:18](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces how someone applies what they have taught. Alternate translation: “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	10	19	f6g3	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	10	19	vr9d	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1	brothers	Here, the word **having** introduces a basis or reason for the author’s exhortation to “approach” in [10:22](../10/22.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly introduces a basis or reason. Alternate translation: “since we have” or “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	10	19	cxi4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχοντες&παρρησίαν	1	brothers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident” or “authorized.” Alternate translation: “being confident” or “being authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	10	19	cxi4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχοντες & παρρησίαν	1	brothers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident” or “authorized.” Alternate translation: “being confident” or “being authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	19	hty9	figs-explicit	εἰς τὴν εἴσοδον	1	brothers	Here, the word translated **to enter** could refer primarily to: (1) the “entry-way” or “entrance” that belongs to the heavenly sanctuary. This option is more likely if you consider the phrase **the holy {places}** to refer to a sanctuary that is in heaven. Alternate translation: “with regard to the entrance of” or “concerning the entry-way of” (2) the act of “entering” the heavenly sanctuary. This option is more likely if you consider the phrase **the holy {places}** to refer primarily to God’s presence. Alternate translation: “for entering into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	19	fii7	figs-explicit	τῶν ἁγίων	1	the most holy place	Here, the phrase **the holy {places}** could refer to: (1) the inner section of the heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place in heaven” (2) the entire heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the heavenly sanctuary” (3) God’s presence, metaphorically. Alternate translation: “God’s holy presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	19	zl87	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι Ἰησοῦ	1	by the blood of Jesus	Scholars debate what **the blood of Jesus** represents in Hebrews. It could refer to his resurrected body, his death, or his actual blood. See the book introduction for more information on what Jesus’ blood refers to. Since **blood** is a very important concept in Hebrews, preserve the word here if at all possible. Alternate translation: “by Jesus’ blood, which is his sacrifice” or “by the blood of Jesus, that is, his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1329,7 +1329,7 @@ HEB	10	21	bmh1	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον	1	over the house	The phra
 HEB	10	21	d1u1	figs-metaphor	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the house of God	Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, here all God’s people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated **house** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “God’s tribe” or “God’s clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	22	l4ik	figs-go	προσερχώμεθα	1	let us approach	Here, the word **approach** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to **approach** the heavenly sanctuary (see [10:19](../10/19.md)). This means that they enter into God’s presence. It does not mean that they enter into heaven to be within the sanctuary itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “let us go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	10	22	von8	translate-unknown	μετὰ ἀληθινῆς καρδίας	1	let us approach	Here, the word **true** refers to something that is reliable or sure. In this case, **a true heart** would refer to a **heart** that is “sincere” or “single-minded.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that identifies the **heart** as “sincere” or having only one aim or goal. Alternate translation: “with a sincere heart” or “with a single-minded heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	10	22	wez1	figs-metonymy	ἀληθινῆς καρδίας&τὰς καρδίας	1	with true hearts	In the author’s culture, the word **heart** refers to the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “true desire … our desires” or “true thoughts … our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+HEB	10	22	wez1	figs-metonymy	ἀληθινῆς καρδίας & τὰς καρδίας	1	with true hearts	In the author’s culture, the word **heart** refers to the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “true desire … our desires” or “true thoughts … our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	10	22	k2mp	grammar-collectivenouns	ἀληθινῆς καρδίας	1	with true hearts	Here the author is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “true hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 HEB	10	22	i7ti	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πληροφορίᾳ πίστεως	1	in the full assurance of faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **assurance** and **faith**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “confident” and a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “that very confidently believes” or “and by confidently trusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	22	zkg5	figs-activepassive	ῥεραντισμένοι τὰς καρδίας ἀπὸ συνειδήσεως πονηρᾶς, καὶ λελουμένοι τὸ σῶμα	1	having our hearts sprinkled clean	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sprinkled** and **washed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sprinkling” and “washing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having sprinkled our hearts clean from a wicked conscience and having washed our body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ HEB	10	23	dtxl	writing-pronouns	ὁ ἐπαγγειλάμενος	1	without wave
 HEB	10	24	i6ks	figs-idiom	κατανοῶμεν ἀλλήλους	1	without wavering	Here, the phrase **consider one another** refers to thinking and caring about fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to thinking about or spending time on fellow believers. See how you translated the similar phrase with Jesus as the object in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “let us focus on one another” or “let us spend time thinking about one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	24	nt0u	translate-unknown	εἰς παροξυσμὸν	1	without wavering	The word **stimulate** is most frequently used to describe “provoking” another person to anger or some other negative emotion. Here, the author uses the word **stimulate** to refer to “provoking” or strongly encouraging fellow believers to do something positive. If possible, preserve how strong this word is in your translation. Alternate translation: “to provoke” or “to incite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	24	a75t	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπης καὶ καλῶν ἔργων	1	without wavering	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **love** and **deeds**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “love” and “do.” Alternate translation: “loving and doing good” or “each other to love and to do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	10	25	xej1		μὴ ἐγκαταλείποντες&ἀλλὰ παρακαλοῦντες	1	Let us not stop meeting together	Here, the phrases **not abandoning** and **exhorting {one another}** introduce two ways in which the audience can accomplish what the author has encouraged them to do in [10:24](../10/24.md). If it would be helpful in your language,, you could express the relationship more explicitly. Alternate translation: “by not abandoning … and by exhorting one another” or “not by means of abandoning … but by means of exhorting one another”
+HEB	10	25	xej1		μὴ ἐγκαταλείποντες & ἀλλὰ παρακαλοῦντες	1	Let us not stop meeting together	Here, the phrases **not abandoning** and **exhorting {one another}** introduce two ways in which the audience can accomplish what the author has encouraged them to do in [10:24](../10/24.md). If it would be helpful in your language,, you could express the relationship more explicitly. Alternate translation: “by not abandoning … and by exhorting one another” or “not by means of abandoning … but by means of exhorting one another”
 HEB	10	25	w4hc	translate-unknown	ἐγκαταλείποντες	1	Let us not stop meeting together	Here, the word **abandoning** refers to avoiding or leaving something behind. In this case, the author means that they should not stop participating in the group’s meetings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to failing to participate in something. Alternate translation: “giving up on” or “ceasing to participate in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	25	v4fa	figs-explicit	τὴν ἐπισυναγωγὴν ἑαυτῶν	1	Let us not stop meeting together	Here, the phrase **our own meeting together** refers to how the Christian group the author is writing to would gather together and participate in worship and meals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a regular gathering for specific purposes. Alternate translation: “our own congregation” or “our assembling as a group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	25	kvwm	figs-abstractnouns	καθὼς ἔθος τισίν	1	Let us not stop meeting together	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **habit**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “customarily” or “frequently.” Alternate translation: “just as some people frequently do” or “as some people do customarily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1355,14 +1355,14 @@ HEB	10	25	jdqw	figs-idiom	καὶ τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ	1	Let
 HEB	10	25	rqfz	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἡμέραν	1		Here, the word **day** refers to the event of Jesus’ return back to earth (see [9:28](../09/28.md)). In the Old Testament, the phrase “the day of the Lord” refers to the time when God will judge his enemies and save his people. Here, the author applies that idea of the **day** to Jesus’ return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could either refer to “the day of the Lord,” or you could more clearly explain that the author is referring to Jesus’ return. Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord” or “the day when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	10	25	k9c7	figs-personification	βλέπετε ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν	1	as you see the day coming closer	Here the author speaks as if a **day** were a person that the audience could **see** as he or she was **approaching**. The author speaks in this way to indicate that the audience can know that the **day** will happen soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that naturally refers to something in the future that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “you recognize that that day will happen soon” or “you observe that day getting closer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	10	26	gm7l	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the author wants the audience to “hold tightly” to the “confession” ([10:23](../10/23.md)), “stimulate” one another to “love and good works” ([10:24](../10/24.md)), and “meet together” and “exhort one another” (see [10:25](../10/25.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I want you to do those things because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	10	26	nz9k	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἑκουσίως&ἁμαρτανόντων ἡμῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **if** introduces a situation in which the second half of the verse (**a sacrifice on behalf of sins no longer remains**) is true. The author does not mean that **we** have “deliberately kept on sinning” or not. Rather, he uses **if** to introduce the situation as a possibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a possible situation. Alternate translation: “were we to keep on sinning deliberately” or “supposing that we deliberately keep on sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-HEB	10	26	byv6	translate-unknown	ἑκουσίως&ἡμῶν	1	we deliberately go on sinning	Here, the word **deliberately** identifies an action as something that a person has done “on purpose” or planned ahead of time. Any action that someone does accidentally or without intending to is excluded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an action as something that a person does because the intend or want to. Alternate translation: “if we on purpose” or “if we knowingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	10	26	nz9k	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἑκουσίως & ἁμαρτανόντων ἡμῶν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **if** introduces a situation in which the second half of the verse (**a sacrifice on behalf of sins no longer remains**) is true. The author does not mean that **we** have “deliberately kept on sinning” or not. Rather, he uses **if** to introduce the situation as a possibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a possible situation. Alternate translation: “were we to keep on sinning deliberately” or “supposing that we deliberately keep on sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+HEB	10	26	byv6	translate-unknown	ἑκουσίως & ἡμῶν	1	we deliberately go on sinning	Here, the word **deliberately** identifies an action as something that a person has done “on purpose” or planned ahead of time. Any action that someone does accidentally or without intending to is excluded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an action as something that a person does because the intend or want to. Alternate translation: “if we on purpose” or “if we knowingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	26	q13r		ἁμαρτανόντων	1	we deliberately go on sinning	Here, the author wrote the word **sinning** in a form that implies that the person is sinning in the present and doing it more than once. That is why the ULT uses the words **keep on**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to present, continuing sin. Alternate translation: “continue to sin” or “make a habit of sinning”
 HEB	10	26	hj5s	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ λαβεῖν τὴν ἐπίγνωσιν τῆς ἀληθείας	1	after we have received the knowledge of the truth	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **knowledge** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “know” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “we have fully known what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	26	l7sv	figs-explicit	οὐκέτι περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν ἀπολείπεται θυσία	1	a sacrifice for sins no longer exists	Here the author means that, once Christ has offered himself as a sacrifice, there are no other effective offerings (see [10:18](../10/18.md)). Further, Christ has offered himself “once,” so he will not do so again. Because other offerings do not take away **sins** and because Christ will not offer himself again, **a sacrifice on behalf of sins no longer remains**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no sacrifice can take away our sins any longer” or “there are no longer any sacrifices to take away sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	26	sil4	figs-idiom	περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν	1	a sacrifice for sins	Here, the phrase **on behalf of sins** means that the sacrifice is intended to deal with **sins**. It does not mean that the sacrifice allows the **sins** or encourages the **sins**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to deal with sins” or “for the forgiveness of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	27	tbww	figs-ellipsis	φοβερὰ δέ τις ἐκδοχὴ	1	of judgment	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the second half of the previous verse ([10:26](../10/26.md)). Alternate translation: “but what does remain is a certain fearful expectation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	10	27	ilzd	figs-abstractnouns	φοβερὰ&τις ἐκδοχὴ κρίσεως, καὶ πυρὸς ζῆλος	1	of judgment	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **expectation**, **judgment**, and **zeal**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “expect” and “judge” and an adjective such as “zealous.” Alternate translation: “but fearfully expecting that God will judge and that he will send zealous fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	10	27	ilzd	figs-abstractnouns	φοβερὰ & τις ἐκδοχὴ κρίσεως, καὶ πυρὸς ζῆλος	1	of judgment	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **expectation**, **judgment**, and **zeal**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “expect” and “judge” and an adjective such as “zealous.” Alternate translation: “but fearfully expecting that God will judge and that he will send zealous fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	27	fza4	figs-explicit	κρίσεως	1	of judgment	Here, the word **judgment** refers to how God will “judge” everyone based on what they have done when Jesus comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. See how you translated **judgment** in [9:27](../09/27.md). Alternate translation: “of the final judgment” or “of God’s judgment of everyone at the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	27	t6da	figs-metaphor	πυρὸς ζῆλος ἐσθίειν μέλλοντος τοὺς ὑπεναντίους	1	a fury of fire that will consume God’s enemies	Here the author speaks of God’s punishment on his **adversaries** as if it were **fire** that would **consume** them. The word **consume** is a normal word for what **fire** does to things when it burns them. Scholars debate whether the author thought that God’s punishment of his enemies would actually include **fire** or not. Find a natural way to express the idea that God will punish his **adversaries**, and it will either involve or be like **fire**. Alternate translation: “of zeal that is, like fire, about to consume the adversaries” or “of God’s fiery punishment that will burn up the adversaries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	27	fmba	figs-possession	πυρὸς ζῆλος	1	a fury of fire that will consume God’s enemies	Here the author uses the form **of fire of zeal** to: (1) identify the **fire** as God’s **zeal**. Alternate translation: “of fire, that is, God’s zeal,” (2) describe the **fire** as characterized by **zeal**, that is, very hot and powerful. Alternate translation: “of furious fire” or “of hot and powerful fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ HEB	10	29	i6e6	translate-unknown	κοινὸν	1	the blood by which he was sanct
 HEB	10	29	hr3a	translate-unknown	ἐνυβρίσας	1	the blood by which he was sanctified	Here, the word **insulted** refers to mocking or making fun of someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to treating someone badly by making fun of them or saying bad things about them. Alternate translation: “having mocked” or “having spoken badly about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	29	qr6c	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος	1	the Spirit of grace	Here, the word **Spirit** refers to God’s **Spirit**, the Holy Spirit. The author describes the Holy Spirit as **of grace** because the **Spirit** gives **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly refer to the Holy Spirit, who gives **grace**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit who gives grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	30	pu4n	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has said about how God will punish those who shame and dishonor the Son and the Spirit (see [10:29](../10/29.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that is true, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	10	30	ynr1	writing-quotations	τὸν εἰπόντα&καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as quotations but instead introduces them as words that God has **said**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:35](../deu/32/35.md), and the second quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:36](../deu/32/36.md). The words **And again** are a normal way to include a closely related quotation. See how you translated **And again** in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If your readers would not know that these quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify them. Alternate translation: “the one who said … And he also said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	10	30	ynr1	writing-quotations	τὸν εἰπόντα & καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as quotations but instead introduces them as words that God has **said**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:35](../deu/32/35.md), and the second quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:36](../deu/32/36.md). The words **And again** are a normal way to include a closely related quotation. See how you translated **And again** in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If your readers would not know that these quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify them. Alternate translation: “the one who said … And he also said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	30	vub5	figs-quotations	τὸν εἰπόντα, ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω; καὶ πάλιν, κρινεῖ Κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “the one having said that vengeance is his; he will repay. And again that the Lord will judge his people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	10	30	v8ad	figs-abstractnouns	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις	1	Vengeance belongs to me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **Vengeance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “avenge.” Alternate translation: “I will avenge” or “Avenging is what I will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	30	pdw9	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω	1	I will pay back	Here God speaks as if he were going to **pay** people **back** for what he owed them. God speaks in this way to indicate that the way he will punish people will match what they have done wrong, just like a repayment matches a debt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I will give people what they deserve” or “I will fittingly punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1397,13 +1397,13 @@ HEB	10	32	y0v5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	the former days	Here, the
 HEB	10	32	tlh3	figs-idiom	τὰς πρότερον ἡμέρας	1	the former days	Here, the phrase **the former days** refers to a period of time in the past. It does not refer to just a few **days**, and it does not specify how long in the past this period of time is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time in the past. Alternate translation: “the time in the past” or “the previous period of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	32	p3q3	figs-metaphor	φωτισθέντες	1	after you were enlightened	Here the author speaks of receiving and understanding the good news as if it were light shining on a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [6:4](../06/04.md). Alternate translation: “having understood the message about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	32	ami9	figs-activepassive	φωτισθέντες	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who were **enlightened** rather than focusing on the person doing the “enlightening.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having enlightened you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	10	32	c3rw	figs-possession	πολλὴν ἄθλησιν&παθημάτων	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **struggle** which is made up of **sufferings**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a great struggle, which was your sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	10	32	yn29	figs-metaphor	πολλὴν ἄθλησιν&παθημάτων	1		Here, the word **struggle** refers to an athletic competition or contest. The author describes the **sufferings** of the audience as an athletic competition because he wishes to show them that their **sufferings** will bring them gain as long as they “endure” the **struggle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “a great contest with your sufferings” or “a great trial of sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	10	32	y8jk	figs-abstractnouns	πολλὴν ἄθλησιν&παθημάτων	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **struggle** and **sufferings**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “struggle” and “suffer.” Alternate translation: “while you struggled greatly with how you suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	10	33	za24	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦτο μὲν&τοῦτο δὲ	1	You were exposed to public ridicule by insults and persecution	Here, the phrases **at {times} indeed** and **but at other {times}** introduce two different aspects of the sufferings that the audience endured in the past. The two halves of this sentence are not contrasting but rather identify two kinds of suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could words or phrases that introduce two components or aspects of a thing. Alternate translation: “on some occasion … and on other occasions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	10	32	c3rw	figs-possession	πολλὴν ἄθλησιν & παθημάτων	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **struggle** which is made up of **sufferings**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a great struggle, which was your sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	10	32	yn29	figs-metaphor	πολλὴν ἄθλησιν & παθημάτων	1		Here, the word **struggle** refers to an athletic competition or contest. The author describes the **sufferings** of the audience as an athletic competition because he wishes to show them that their **sufferings** will bring them gain as long as they “endure” the **struggle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “a great contest with your sufferings” or “a great trial of sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	10	32	y8jk	figs-abstractnouns	πολλὴν ἄθλησιν & παθημάτων	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **struggle** and **sufferings**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “struggle” and “suffer.” Alternate translation: “while you struggled greatly with how you suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	10	33	za24	grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦτο μὲν & τοῦτο δὲ	1	You were exposed to public ridicule by insults and persecution	Here, the phrases **at {times} indeed** and **but at other {times}** introduce two different aspects of the sufferings that the audience endured in the past. The two halves of this sentence are not contrasting but rather identify two kinds of suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could words or phrases that introduce two components or aspects of a thing. Alternate translation: “on some occasion … and on other occasions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	10	33	cig1	figs-activepassive	ὀνειδισμοῖς τε καὶ θλίψεσιν θεατριζόμενοι	1	You were exposed to public ridicule by insults and persecution	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **publicly exposed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “exposing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “publicly experiencing both reproach and persecution” or “others publicly exposing you both to reproach and persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	10	33	plz0	figs-abstractnouns	ὀνειδισμοῖς τε καὶ θλίψεσιν	1	You were exposed to public ridicule by insults and persecution	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **reproach** and **persecution**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “reproach” and “persecute.” Alternate translation: “when people both reproached and persecuted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	10	33	u1gk	translate-unknown	κοινωνοὶ τῶν&γενηθέντες	1	you were sharing with those	Here, the phrase **having become partners** indicates that the audience identified with and helped those who were being persecuted, so much so that they too would suffer. Helping those who were persecuted could include providing them with food and money, giving them a place to stay, and helping them get out of jail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a word or phrase that refers to this kind of help or assistance. Alternate translation: “having assisted the ones” or “having identified with the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	10	33	u1gk	translate-unknown	κοινωνοὶ τῶν & γενηθέντες	1	you were sharing with those	Here, the phrase **having become partners** indicates that the audience identified with and helped those who were being persecuted, so much so that they too would suffer. Helping those who were persecuted could include providing them with food and money, giving them a place to stay, and helping them get out of jail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a word or phrase that refers to this kind of help or assistance. Alternate translation: “having assisted the ones” or “having identified with the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	33	x1qf	figs-activepassive	τῶν οὕτως ἀναστρεφομένων	1	you were sharing with those	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **being treated in this way** rather than focusing on the people “treating” them in this way. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “of the ones experiencing this kind of treatment” or “of those whom others treated in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	10	34	d073	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	a better and everlasting possession	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how the audience did what the author described in the previous verse ([10:33](../10/33.md)). They became “partners” of those who were persecuted by “sympathizing” **with the prisoners**, and they themselves suffered persecution when people “seized” their **possessions**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or specific examples of a general statement. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	10	34	r01n	translate-textvariants	τοῖς δεσμίοις	1	a better and everlasting possession	Here, instead of **with the prisoners**, some early manuscripts have **with my chains**. This phrase would indicate that the audience **sympathized** with the author while he was in prison. The evidence supports **with the prisoners**, however, so it is best to use the text that the ULT uses here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
@@ -1413,12 +1413,12 @@ HEB	10	34	mvi3	grammar-connect-logic-result	γινώσκοντες	1	a better an
 HEB	10	34	i6ct		γινώσκοντες ἔχειν ἑαυτοὺς	1	a better and everlasting possession	Alternate translation: “knowing that you have”
 HEB	10	34	cjr6	figs-explicit	κρείσσονα ὕπαρξιν, καὶ μένουσαν	1	a better and everlasting possession	Here, the phrase **better and abiding possession** refers to what God has promised to give his people. The author does not specify exactly what this **possession** is, but he states that it is **better** than the **possessions** that were taken from them, and it is **abiding**, which means it will last forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the contrast with the earthly **possessions** that were “seized” more clear. Alternate translation: “something better and more eternal than those possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	35	xh64	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	General Information:	Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or exhortation based on what the author has said ins [10:32–34](../10/32.md) about what the audience did and experienced in the past. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that naturally introduces an inference or exhortation. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	10	35	m35c	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀποβάλητε&τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν	1	do not throw away your confidence, which has a great reward	Here the author speaks as if **confidence** were an object that the audience **throw away** and lose. The author speaks in this way to urge the audience to remain firmly confident, as firmly as they would hold onto a valuable possession. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “leg go of your confidence” or “must not cease being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	10	35	m35c	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀποβάλητε & τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν	1	do not throw away your confidence, which has a great reward	Here the author speaks as if **confidence** were an object that the audience **throw away** and lose. The author speaks in this way to urge the audience to remain firmly confident, as firmly as they would hold onto a valuable possession. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “leg go of your confidence” or “must not cease being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	35	sl3k	figs-explicit	τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν	1	do not throw away your confidence, which has a great reward	Here the author does not state explicitly what the **confidence** is in. He implies that the **confidence** is in God and in what God has promised to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the object of **confidence** more explicit. Alternate translation: “your confidence in God” or “your confidence in what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	35	bksd	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident” or an adverb such as “confidently.” Alternate translation: “how confident you are” or “the way you confidently trust God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	35	w3pr	figs-personification	ἥτις ἔχει μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν	1		Here the author speaks as if **confidence** were a person who could “have” a **great reward**. The author speaks in this way to indicate that people who have this kind of **confidence** will receive that **great reward** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “which God will greatly reward” or “since those with this confidence will receive a great reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	10	36	zmf9	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation or development of what the author said in the previous verse ([10:35](../10/35.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further development, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	10	36	lgu4	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπομονῆς&ἔχετε χρείαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **need** and **endurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “need” and “endure” or “persevere.” Alternate translation: “you must persevere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	10	36	lgu4	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπομονῆς & ἔχετε χρείαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **need** and **endurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “need” and “endure” or “persevere.” Alternate translation: “you must persevere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	36	zdcx	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ποιήσαντες	1		Here, the phrase **having done** could introduce: (1) an action which occurs before “obtaining the promise.” Alternate translation: “after having done” (2) the basis or reason for “obtaining the promise.” Alternate translation: “because you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 HEB	10	36	xy9j	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “desire.” Alternate translation: “what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	36	ezun	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1		Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1426,22 +1426,22 @@ HEB	10	36	hj2e	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1		If your langu
 HEB	10	37	uvq3	figs-quotemarks	ἔτι γὰρ μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	For in a very little while	The words of the quotation could begin with: (1) **yet**. Alternate translation: “For ‘yet in a very little while, the one coming” (2) **{in} a very little {while}**. Alternate translation: “For yet ‘in a very little while, the one coming” (3) **the one coming**. Alternate translation: “For yet in a very little while, ‘the one coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 HEB	10	37	gpp8	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1	For in a very little while	Here the author uses the word **For** to introduce a quotation from the Old Testament, which continues in the following verse. This quotation supports what he has said about how the audience needs “endurance” (see [10:37](../10/37.md)). The quotation is from [Habakkuk 2:3–4](../hab/02/03.md), although the author rearranges some clauses in the following verse. Further, the phrase **yet {in} a very little {while}** paraphrases the beginning of [Habakkuk 2:3](../hab/02/03.md), and it sounds much like part of [Isaiah 26:20](../isa/26/20.md). However, the author introduces these words as one quotation, so you should also do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For in the Scriptures it says,” or “For someone wrote in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	37	d9ln	figs-quotations	ἔτι γὰρ μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἥξει, καὶ οὐ χρονίσει.	1	For in a very little while	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you will also need to translate the sentence in the following verse as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “For the prophet wrote that yet in a very little while, the one coming will come and will not delay.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	10	37	st8v	figs-idiom	ἔτι&μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον	1	For in a very little while	Here, the phrase **yet {in} a very little {while}** indicates that something is going to happen soon or in the very near future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an action as something that will happen very soon. Alternate translation: “in just a short time” or “in the very near future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	10	37	st8v	figs-idiom	ἔτι & μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον	1	For in a very little while	Here, the phrase **yet {in} a very little {while}** indicates that something is going to happen soon or in the very near future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an action as something that will happen very soon. Alternate translation: “in just a short time” or “in the very near future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	37	b3l2	figs-parallelism	ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἥξει, καὶ οὐ χρονίσει	1	For in a very little while	Here the author of the quotation makes the same point with both a positive and a negative statement. This was considered good poetry in his culture. If it would not be considered good poetry in your culture, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with one strong statement. Alternate translation: “the one coming will certainly come” or “the one coming will not delay coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	10	37	cna2	figs-go	ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἥξει	1	in a very little while	Here, the words **coming** and **come** refer primarily to how someone arrives and does something. They do not refer primarily to movement or travel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to someone arriving or appearing. Alternate translation: “the one appearing will appear” or “the one showing up will arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	10	37	xi5d	translate-unknown	οὐ χρονίσει	1	in a very little while	Here, the phrase **will not delay** indicates that **the coming one** will not wait any longer than necessary. In other words, as soon as it is the right time, **the coming one** will arrive and act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to acting as soon as possible. Alternate translation: “will hurry” or “will not be slow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	38	j2ck	figs-quotations	ὁ δὲ δίκαιός μου ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται; καὶ ἐὰν ὑποστείληται, οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ἡ ψυχή μου ἐν αὐτῷ.	1	General Information:	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you will also need to translate the sentence in the previous verse as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “But God’s righteous one will live by faith, and if he would shrink back, God’s soul is not well-pleased with him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	10	38	j6d1	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&δίκαιός μου&ὑποστείληται&ἐν αὐτῷ	1	My righteous one … If he shrinks … with him	Here the author is speaking of **righteous** people in general, not of one particular **righteous** person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “worshipers” in general. Alternate translation: “my righteous ones … they would shrink back … with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+HEB	10	38	j6d1	figs-genericnoun	ὁ & δίκαιός μου & ὑποστείληται & ἐν αὐτῷ	1	My righteous one … If he shrinks … with him	Here the author is speaking of **righteous** people in general, not of one particular **righteous** person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “worshipers” in general. Alternate translation: “my righteous ones … they would shrink back … with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 HEB	10	38	tqpj	writing-pronouns	μου	-1	My righteous one … If he shrinks … with him	Here, the word **my** refers to God, who is speaking here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could to whom **my** refers explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	10	38	c0bz	figs-explicit	ζήσεται	1	My righteous one … If he shrinks … with him	Here, the word **live** refers to the manner in which a person normally acts. It does not refer primarily to being alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people normally or customarily act. Alternate translation: “will conduct himself” or “will live his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	38	y50a	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	My righteous one … If he shrinks … with him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “by believing” or “by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	38	use1	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ὑποστείληται	1	My righteous … I will	Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “shrinking back” leads to God not being **well-pleased**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “were he to shrink back” or “if he ever shrinks back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-HEB	10	38	kjnj	figs-gendernotations	ὑποστείληται&αὐτῷ	1	My righteous … I will	Although the words **he** and **him** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all **righteous** people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she would shrink back … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	10	38	kjnj	figs-gendernotations	ὑποστείληται & αὐτῷ	1	My righteous … I will	Although the words **he** and **him** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all **righteous** people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she would shrink back … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	10	38	zl9g	figs-metaphor	ὑποστείληται	1	My righteous … I will	Here the author of the quotation speaks of failing to continue in **faith** as if it were “shrinking back” from something dangerous or scary. He speaks in this way to indicate that continuing in **faith** may be dangerous or scary, but the **righteous** people will not act fearfully by abandoning their **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he would abandon his faith” or “he would cease living by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	38	r8mh	figs-synecdoche	οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ἡ ψυχή μου	1	My righteous … I will	Here, the phrase **my soul** is a way to refer to oneself as a whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that speakers would use to refer to themselves. Alternate translation: “I myself am not well-pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-HEB	10	39	wesk	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς&οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑποστολῆς εἰς ἀπώλειαν, ἀλλὰ πίστεως εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς	1	who turn back to destruction	If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “we ourselves are of faith to the preservation of the soul, not of shrinking back to destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	10	39	hg36	figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς&οὐκ ἐσμὲν	1	who turn back to destruction	Here, the word **ourselves** emphasizes **we**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **we** in your language. Alternate translation: “as for us, we are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	10	39	vxae	figs-possession	ὑποστολῆς&πίστεως	1	who turn back to destruction	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **we ourselves**: (1) belong to the group of people that has **faith**, not to the group of people that “shrink back.” Alternate translation: “among those who shrink back … among those who have faith” (2) are the kind of people that have **faith**, not the kind of people that “shrink back.” Alternate translation: “the kind of people who shrink back … the kind of people who have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	10	39	wesk	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς & οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑποστολῆς εἰς ἀπώλειαν, ἀλλὰ πίστεως εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς	1	who turn back to destruction	If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “we ourselves are of faith to the preservation of the soul, not of shrinking back to destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	10	39	hg36	figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & οὐκ ἐσμὲν	1	who turn back to destruction	Here, the word **ourselves** emphasizes **we**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **we** in your language. Alternate translation: “as for us, we are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+HEB	10	39	vxae	figs-possession	ὑποστολῆς & πίστεως	1	who turn back to destruction	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **we ourselves**: (1) belong to the group of people that has **faith**, not to the group of people that “shrink back.” Alternate translation: “among those who shrink back … among those who have faith” (2) are the kind of people that have **faith**, not the kind of people that “shrink back.” Alternate translation: “the kind of people who shrink back … the kind of people who have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	10	39	i9zh	figs-metaphor	ὑποστολῆς	1	who turn back to destruction	Here, translate **shrinking back** as you translated “shrink back” in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “of abandoning faith” or “of ceasing to live by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	10	39	zvuj	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	who turn back to destruction	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **destruction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “so that we are destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	39	dv8y	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς	1	for keeping our soul	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **preservation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “preserve.” Alternate translation: “of believing so that the soul is preserved” or “we believe so that our souls are preserved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1450,9 +1450,9 @@ HEB	10	39	br6c	figs-genericnoun	ψυχῆς	1		Here the author is speaking of 
 HEB	11	intro	g4cc			0		# Hebrews 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)<br>      * Exhortation: Examples of faith (11:1–40)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Faith<br><br>The key theme of this chapter is “faith,” which the author makes clear with his definition in [11:1](../11/01.md). The examples of “faith” that follow function in two primary ways: (1) they give examples of “faith” that help define what it is, and (2) they give examples of “faith” that the audience can imitate. The author’s definition of “faith” shows that “faith” is being confident about things that one cannot currently see. The examples that follow show that the things that cannot be seen include things in heaven and things in the future. So, “faith” consists in being confident about and thus “seeing” what is currently invisible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])<br><br>### A heavenly city and homeland<br><br>In [11:10](../11/10.md), [16](../11/16.md), the author refers to a “city,” and in [11:14–16](../11/14.md), he refers to a “heavenly homeland.” Most likely, both “city” and “homeland” refer to the same thing. Scholars debate whether “city” and “homeland” describe places where believers will live that God has prepared or whether the words function as metaphors to describe the people of God living together in God’s presence. Your translation should not choose between these interpretations. You should make it clear that the “city” and “homeland” cannot be found on earth right now.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “By faith”<br><br>The author consistently repeats the phrase “by faith,” usually at the beginning of sentences. He also uses the related phrases “through faith,” “according to faith,” and “because of faith.” The author repeats these phrases, especially “by faith,” to keep his audience focused on the main topic: “faith.” If possible, you should translate all these phrases so that they sound very similar. Make sure that it is clear who has the “faith” in each sentence. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>### References to the history of Israel<br><br>The author refers to people and events in the history of Israel throughout this chapter. Some of the references are several verses long, while others are just one phrase. Many of the stories that he refers to can be found in the Bible, especially in Genesis, Exodus, and Joshua. However, some of the shorter references are about people who lived after the time of the Old Testament. Consider whether your readers will be familiar with some of these stories. You may want to include footnotes that provide some extra information about the most important stories that the author refers to. See the notes for brief summaries of the main stories that the author refers to.<br><br>### The style of the example list<br><br>The list of examples that makes up most of chapter 11 begins with longer stories and longer clauses and ends with very short references to stories and very short clauses. The author writes in this way to increase the excitement and power of his examples as he goes. Consider using natural ways to express this slow increase in power and excitement as the chapter progresses.<br><br>### Is Abraham or Sarah the subject of [11:11](../11/11.md)?<br><br>In [11:11](../11/11.md), the author could have primarily been referring to Sarah and her faith or Abraham and his faith. Many scholars think that the author is referring to Sarah here because her name is written near the beginning of verse, right after “faith,” and because the author does not refer to Abraham in this verse. Other scholars think that the author is referring to Abraham here because the previous and following verses both refer to Abraham and because the phrase “received ability for the conception of an offspring” is only used for the male’s part in procreation. The ULT and UST follow the interpretation that Abraham is the primary subject of the verse. Consider whether your readers might be familiar with a translation that makes a choice in this verse. Otherwise, you may want to follow the ULT and UST here.
 HEB	11	1	d95i	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** introduces a new part of the author’s argument. He goes on to discuss the **faith** that he mentioned in [10:38–39](../10/38.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “This” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	11	1	h7va	figs-parallelism	ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις, πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων	1	Now	Here the author uses two very similar phrases to describe **faith**. He does this to make what he means very clear. If using two very similar phrases would not make what he means clearer in your language, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “assurance of things not seen which are hoped for” or “proof of things being hoped for but not seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	11	1	a371	figs-abstractnouns	ἔστιν&πίστις&ὑπόστασις	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **assurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “assure.” Alternate translation: “believing assures us” or “those who believe are assured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	11	1	a371	figs-abstractnouns	ἔστιν & πίστις & ὑπόστασις	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **assurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “assure.” Alternate translation: “believing assures us” or “those who believe are assured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	1	eirr	translate-unknown	ὑπόστασις	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **assurance** refers to the basis or most fundamental nature of a thing. The author could be focusing on: (1) the fact that something is “assured” or certain. Alternate translation: “the basis” or “a guarantee” (2) the experience of being “assured.” Alternate translation: “confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	11	1	dne9	figs-activepassive	ἐλπιζομένων&οὐ βλεπομένων	1	faith is being sure of the things hoped for	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being hoped {for}** and what is **not being seen** rather than focusing on the people doing these actions. If you must state who does the action, the author implies that anyone with **faith** does them, particularly the audience. Alternate translation: “of things you hope for … you do not see” or “of things that we hope for … that we do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	11	1	dne9	figs-activepassive	ἐλπιζομένων & οὐ βλεπομένων	1	faith is being sure of the things hoped for	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being hoped {for}** and what is **not being seen** rather than focusing on the people doing these actions. If you must state who does the action, the author implies that anyone with **faith** does them, particularly the audience. Alternate translation: “of things you hope for … you do not see” or “of things that we hope for … that we do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	1	hiq2	figs-ellipsis	ἔλεγχος	1	hoped for	The second half of this verse leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “and faith is proof” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	11	1	o69z	translate-unknown	ἔλεγχος	1	hoped for	Here, the word **proof** refers to evidence or argument that something is true or accurate. The author could be focusing on: (1) the fact that something is “proved.” Alternate translation: “evidence” or “demonstration” (2) the experience of having something “proved.” Alternate translation: “conviction” or “certainty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	1	ybd8	figs-abstractnouns	πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος	1	certain of things that are not seen	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **proof**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prove.” Alternate translation: “and it proves things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1467,7 +1467,7 @@ HEB	11	3	cdjm	figs-explicit	τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	the universe was created
 HEB	11	3	mlc6	figs-metonymy	ῥήματι Θεοῦ	1	the universe was created by God’s command	Here, the word **word** refers to the act “speaking” words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the act of speaking instead of what is spoken. Alternate translation: “by God saying words” or “when God spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	11	3	gzmm	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ	1	the universe was created by God’s command	Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a result from what the author has said about God “preparing” the **ages** by his **word**. Since God created the **ages** in that way, it follows that **{what} is seen was not made from what is visible**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	11	3	hhi7	figs-infostructure	εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐκ φαινομένων, τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι	1	the universe was created by God’s command	Here, the word **not** could go with: (1) **made**. The point would be that visible things did not come from other visible things. See the ULT. (2) **what is visible**. The point would be that visible things came from things that are not visible. Alternate translation: “so that what is seen was made from what is not visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	11	3	e7fs	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ μὴ&τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι	1	what is visible was not made out of things that were visible	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **seen** and **not made** rather than focusing on the people doing the “seeing” or the “making.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that people in general do the “seeing,” and God does the “making.” Alternate translation: “so that God did not make what people see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	11	3	e7fs	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ μὴ & τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι	1	what is visible was not made out of things that were visible	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **seen** and **not made** rather than focusing on the people doing the “seeing” or the “making.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that people in general do the “seeing,” and God does the “making.” Alternate translation: “so that God did not make what people see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	3	rlc4	figs-explicit	μὴ ἐκ φαινομένων, τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι	1	what is visible was not made out of things that were visible	Here the author’s point is that what people see came into existence because God spoke. Therefore, what people see did not come from something that is **visible** but from something that is invisible: God and his speech. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that what everyone sees was not made from anything that is similarly visible, but by God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	4	w5de	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	4	tfcq	figs-explicit	πλείονα θυσίαν, Ἂβελ παρὰ Κάϊν προσήνεγκεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here the author refers to a story in the Old Testament about how **Abel** and **Cain** both presented offerings to God, but God was pleased with only Abel’s offering. Cain was angry, and he eventually killed Abel. You can read this story in [Genesis 4:3–8](../gen/04/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make important aspects of this story more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abel offered God a sacrifice that was better than what his brother Cain offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1480,23 +1480,23 @@ HEB	11	4	g52j	figs-metaphor	ἔτι λαλεῖ	1	Abel still speaks	Here the aut
 HEB	11	5	k1zi			0	It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death	Here the author refers to a story about a man named **Enoch**. Because he pleased God, God did not let him die but instead took him to heaven. You can read about **Enoch** in [Genesis 5:21–24](../gen/05/21.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	5	xs88	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	5	r3yl	figs-activepassive	πίστει Ἑνὼχ μετετέθη	1	It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was transferred**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “transferring.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “By Enoch’s faith, God transferred him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	11	5	qlfz	translate-unknown	μετετέθη&μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν&τῆς μεταθέσεως	1	It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death	Here, the words **transferred** and **transfer** refer to a change in location from earth to heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word for this kind of change of location. Alternate translation: “was relocated … relocated him … his relocation” or “was lifted up … lifted him up … his lifting up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	11	5	qlfz	translate-unknown	μετετέθη & μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν & τῆς μεταθέσεως	1	It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death	Here, the words **transferred** and **transfer** refer to a change in location from earth to heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word for this kind of change of location. Alternate translation: “was relocated … relocated him … his relocation” or “was lifted up … lifted him up … his lifting up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	5	ki2t	figs-idiom	τοῦ μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον	1	see death	Here, the phrase **see death** refers to experiencing death or dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that he did not experience death” or “so that he did not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	5	ob9p	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον	1	see death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “himself dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	5	gfnv	writing-quotations	καὶ	1	see death	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. While he does not introduce the quotation with any special words, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 5:24](../gen/05/24.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could use words that introduce a quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “and as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “as it is said in Genesis,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	11	5	d8cx	figs-quotations	καὶ οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο, διότι μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεός	1	see death	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and the Scriptures report that he was not found, because God transferred him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	11	5	r625	figs-activepassive	οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο	1	see death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was not found**, rather than focusing on the people who could not “find” him. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “People did not find him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	5	wegt	figs-idiom	οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο	1	see death	Here, the phrase **He was not found** indicates that no one knew where Enoch was, because he was not on earth any longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is no longer in an area or space. Alternate translation: “He disappeared” or “He was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	11	5	jzor	figs-infostructure	πρὸ&τῆς μεταθέσεως, μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ	1	see death	Here, the phrase **before his transfer** modifies how Enoch was **well-pleasing to God**. It may also modify **he was reported** if God is the one who is doing the “reporting.” If the Scripture or the author of Scripture “reports” this, then **before his transfer** does not modify **he was reported**. Arrange the elements in this sentence so that they match your decision about who is doing the “reporting.” Alternate translation: “he was reported before his transfer to have been well-pleasing to God” or “he was reported to have been well-pleasing to God before his transfer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	11	5	kb5l	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸ&τῆς μεταθέσεως	1	before he was taken up	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **transfer**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “transfer.” Alternate translation: “before he was transferred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	11	5	jzor	figs-infostructure	πρὸ & τῆς μεταθέσεως, μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ	1	see death	Here, the phrase **before his transfer** modifies how Enoch was **well-pleasing to God**. It may also modify **he was reported** if God is the one who is doing the “reporting.” If the Scripture or the author of Scripture “reports” this, then **before his transfer** does not modify **he was reported**. Arrange the elements in this sentence so that they match your decision about who is doing the “reporting.” Alternate translation: “he was reported before his transfer to have been well-pleasing to God” or “he was reported to have been well-pleasing to God before his transfer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	11	5	kb5l	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸ & τῆς μεταθέσεως	1	before he was taken up	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **transfer**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “transfer.” Alternate translation: “before he was transferred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	5	jbx2	figs-activepassive	μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ	1	it was testified that he had pleased God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was reported** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “reporting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it, or that the Scriptures do it. Alternate translation: “God reported that Enoch was well-pleasing to him” or “the Scriptures report that he was well-pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	6	hd94	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now without faith	Here, the word **Now** introduces a further development of the argument. The author proves in this verse that anyone who is **well-pleasing**, like Enoch was**, must have faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	11	6	rq7d	figs-abstractnouns	χωρὶς&πίστεως	1	Now without faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “without believing,” or “for anyone who does not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	11	6	r9nb	figs-doublenegatives	χωρὶς&πίστεως, ἀδύνατον	1	without faith it is impossible to please him	Here the author uses two negative words, **without** and **impossible**, to emphasize a positive truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong positive statement or only one negative word. Alternate translation: “faith is the only way” or “only by faith is it possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+HEB	11	6	rq7d	figs-abstractnouns	χωρὶς & πίστεως	1	Now without faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “without believing,” or “for anyone who does not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	11	6	r9nb	figs-doublenegatives	χωρὶς & πίστεως, ἀδύνατον	1	without faith it is impossible to please him	Here the author uses two negative words, **without** and **impossible**, to emphasize a positive truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong positive statement or only one negative word. Alternate translation: “faith is the only way” or “only by faith is it possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	11	6	hp0o	figs-explicit	εὐαρεστῆσαι	1	without faith it is impossible to please him	Here the author does not state explicitly to whom things are **well-pleasing**. He implies that **faith** makes people **well-pleasing** to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer who is “pleased” here. See how you translated the similar phrase “well-pleasing to God” at the end of [11:5](../11/05.md). Alternate translation: “”to be well-pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	6	wlbm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	without faith it is impossible to please him	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **faith** is the only way to be **well-pleasing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	11	6	b438	figs-go	τὸν προσερχόμενον τῷ Θεῷ	1	that anyone coming to God	Here, the phrase **coming to** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author speaks about people **coming to God**. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. See how you translated “approach” in [10:22](../10/22.md). Alternate translation: “the one going before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-HEB	11	6	xl5v		τοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν&μισθαποδότης γίνεται	1	he is a rewarder of those	Alternate translation: “rewards those who seek”
+HEB	11	6	xl5v		τοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν & μισθαποδότης γίνεται	1	he is a rewarder of those	Alternate translation: “rewards those who seek”
 HEB	11	6	i8e9	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν αὐτὸν	1	those who seek him	Here the author speaks of worshiping and serving God as if it were **seeking him**. He speaks in this way because those who worship and serve God focus on him as much as if they were **seeking** to find **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of the ones focusing on him” or “of the ones following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	11	7	r214			0	having been given a divine message	Here the author refers to a story about a man named **Noah**. When God decided to punish humans for their sins by flooding the earth, he warned Noah about it. Noah built a boat called an “ark” and survived the flood with his family. You can read about **Noah** in [Genesis 6:9–8:22](../gen/06/09.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	7	t11i	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	having been given a divine message	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1506,20 +1506,20 @@ HEB	11	7	b5lb	figs-explicit	τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων	1	about th
 HEB	11	7	l9c4	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν τοῦ οἴκου αὐτοῦ	1	about things not yet seen	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rescue” or “save.” Alternate translation: “to save his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	7	bqpr	writing-pronouns	ἧς	1	about things not yet seen	Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) **faith**. Alternate translation: “which faith” (2) the **ark**. Alternate translation: “which ark” (3) **salvation**. Alternate translation: “which salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	11	7	pf7b	figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	the world	Here, the word **world** refers primarily to the people who were living in the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer specifically to people here. Alternate translation: “everyone in the world” or “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-HEB	11	7	c9yc	figs-metaphor	τῆς&δικαιοσύνης, ἐγένετο κληρονόμος	1	became an heir of the righteousness	Here the author speaks as if **Noah** were a child who would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that Noah received **righteousness** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “became one who received the righteousness” or “received the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	11	7	c9yc	figs-metaphor	τῆς & δικαιοσύνης, ἐγένετο κληρονόμος	1	became an heir of the righteousness	Here the author speaks as if **Noah** were a child who would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that Noah received **righteousness** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “became one who received the righteousness” or “received the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	11	7	dfww	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύνης	1	became an heir of the righteousness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **faith**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “righteous” and a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “who was righteous because of how he believed” or “whom God declared righteous because he believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	7	et9l	figs-idiom	κατὰ πίστιν	1	that is according to faith	Here, the phrase **according to faith** indicates that the **righteousness** fits with or goes along with **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the **righteousness** and **faith** are closely related. Alternate translation: “that goes along with faith” or “that fits with faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	8	hj87			0	when he was called	In [11:8–12](../11/08.md), the author refers to a story about a man named **Abraham** and his wife “Sarah.” God appeared to Abraham and told him to travel to a different country, a country that God promised to give to him. God also promised to give a child and grandchildren to Abraham and Sarah, even though they were old. Although they had to wait a long time, God did what he promised to do, and Abraham’s descendants were the Israelites. You can read about **Abraham** in [Genesis 12–23](../gen/12/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	8	sgtm	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	when he was called	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	8	a7c2	figs-activepassive	καλούμενος	1	when he was called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Abraham**, who was **called**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “when God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	8	sq21	figs-idiom	ὑπήκουσεν ἐξελθεῖν	1	He went out	Here, the phrase **obeyed to go out** means that Abraham **obeyed** God’s command by “going out.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to doing what someone commands. Alternate translation: “obeyed by going out” or “obeyed and went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	11	8	kkt5	figs-go	ἐξελθεῖν&ἐξῆλθεν	1	went out to the place	Here, the phrases **go out** and **went out** refer to travel in which a person leaves one areas and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “to depart … departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	11	8	kkt5	figs-go	ἐξελθεῖν & ἐξῆλθεν	1	went out to the place	Here, the phrases **go out** and **went out** refer to travel in which a person leaves one areas and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “to depart … departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	11	8	e00q	figs-extrainfo	τόπον	1	went out to the place	Here the author uses the word **place** because it is a vague word that refers to a location without giving any more details. He uses a vague word because Abraham did “not fully know where he was going.” If possible, use a vague or indefinite word here as well. Alternate translation: “a locale” or “an area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	11	8	d1zf	figs-metaphor	ἤμελλεν λαμβάνειν εἰς κληρονομίαν	1	that he was to receive as an inheritance	Here the author speaks of the **place** as if it were property that **Abraham** was **going to receive** from a relative. The author speaks in this way to indicate that God was **going to** give this **place** to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God was going to give him as his own” or “he was going to receive from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	11	8	z1fo	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται	1	that he was to receive as an inheritance	Here the author uses the present tense to refer to the process of **going**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to the process of going. Make sure the tense fits with the rest of the verse. Alternate translation: “he was going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 HEB	11	8	s82j	figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	that he was to receive as an inheritance	Here, the word **going** refers to traveling from one place to another. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he is traveling” or “he is journeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	11	9	be1c	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	11	9	pmb6	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας&τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς	1	he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “that God had pledged to him … of the same things that God had pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	11	9	pmb6	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς	1	he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “that God had pledged to him … of the same things that God had pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	9	c0g3	figs-explicit	ὡς ἀλλοτρίαν	1	he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner	Here, the phrase **as a foreign {land}** indicates that Abraham had not yet “inherited” the **land of the promise**, so the **land** belonged to someone else. So, while God had promised to give it to him, while he was living there, it was **foreign** and not his own **land**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as if it were a foreign country” or “as if he were living in a foreign land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	9	pj3f	figs-explicit	ἐν σκηναῖς κατοικήσας	1	he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner	In the author’s culture, people who lived in **tents** did not have one permanent home. Rather, they moved around and did not stay in one place for long. The author refers to **tents** here to indicate that Abraham, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** did not have a permanent home but rather moved around. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “having lived in moveable tents” or “having lived in many places in tents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	9	s5fw	figs-metaphor	τῶν συνκληρονόμων τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς	1	fellow heirs	Here the author speaks as if **Isaac** and **Jacob** were children who, along with Abraham, would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that Abraham, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** all received **the same promise** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the fellow recipients of the same promise” or “who with Abraham received the same promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ HEB	11	10	wtr9	figs-explicit	τὴν τοὺς θεμελίους ἔχουσα
 HEB	11	10	f3z8	figs-metonymy	τοὺς θεμελίους ἔχουσαν	1	the city with foundations	Here the author describes the city as **having foundations** to indicate that it is stable and long-lasting. In other words, this city will never disappear or be destroyed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly or with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “having solid foundations” or “that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	11	10	fd98	figs-doublet	ἧς τεχνίτης καὶ δημιουργὸς ὁ Θεός	1	whose architect and builder is God	Here, the words **architect** and **builder** function together to identify that **God** is one who created the **city**. It is possible that **architect** refers to how God designed or planned the city, while **builder** refers to how God created the city. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify **God** as the creator of the **city**. Alternate translation: “whose creator is God” or “which God made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	11	11	yv5o	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he considered	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because she believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	11	11	mk6i		πίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ&ἡγήσατο	1	It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he considered	The subject of this sentence could be: (1) Abraham. The previous and the following verse speak primarily about Abraham, and the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** was used only of males in the author’s culture. Alternate translation: “By faith he received ability for the conception of an offspring also with Sarah, even though he was beyond the time of full age, since he considered” (2) **Sarah**. She is mentioned right after **faith**, just like all the others who had **faith**. Further, the story about Abraham and **Sarah** focuses more on how **Sarah** was old than on how Abraham was old. In this case, the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** refers to how **Sarah** received what Abraham had the **ability** to do. Alternate translation: “By faith, even Sarah herself received Abraham’s ability for the conception of an offspring, even though she was beyond the time of full age, since she considered”
+HEB	11	11	mk6i		πίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ & ἡγήσατο	1	It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he considered	The subject of this sentence could be: (1) Abraham. The previous and the following verse speak primarily about Abraham, and the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** was used only of males in the author’s culture. Alternate translation: “By faith he received ability for the conception of an offspring also with Sarah, even though he was beyond the time of full age, since he considered” (2) **Sarah**. She is mentioned right after **faith**, just like all the others who had **faith**. Further, the story about Abraham and **Sarah** focuses more on how **Sarah** was old than on how Abraham was old. In this case, the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** refers to how **Sarah** received what Abraham had the **ability** to do. Alternate translation: “By faith, even Sarah herself received Abraham’s ability for the conception of an offspring, even though she was beyond the time of full age, since she considered”
 HEB	11	11	g1ji	figs-rpronouns	αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ	1	It was by faith	Here, the word translated **herself** emphasizes **Sarah**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **Sarah** in your language. Alternate translation: “that very Sarah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 HEB	11	11	cn0o	translate-textvariants	αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ	1	It was by faith	Some early manuscripts include the word “barren” to describe Sarah. Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “barren.” Otherwise, you could use the form that the ULT uses. Alternate translation: “barren Sarah herself” or “Sarah herself, being barren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 HEB	11	11	dgu6	figs-idiom	δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος	1	received ability to father a child	Here, the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** refers to the male’s part in procreation. In other words, the point is that Abraham had the **ability** to make his wife pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to the male’s part in procreation. Alternate translation: “ability for impregnating” or “ability for having a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1555,23 +1555,23 @@ HEB	11	14	l1cx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	a homeland	Here, the word
 HEB	11	14	jb1c	writing-pronouns	τοιαῦτα	1	a homeland	Here, the phrase **such things** refers back to what the author said about the faithful people in the previous verse: they “confessed that they are strangers and foreigners on the earth.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **such things** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “that they are strangers and foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	11	14	xwa4	translate-unknown	πατρίδα	1	a homeland	Here, the word **homeland** refers to the place in which a person most deeply belongs. It often refers to the place where a person was born, but that is not the implication here. Rather, the author is referring to the place where the faithful people belong, a place he has already called a “city” (see [11:10](../11/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the place or country in which a person belongs. Alternate translation: “a country where they belong” or “a fatherland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	15	y4jr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ εἰ μὲν	1	a homeland	Here, the word **And** introduces another step in the author’s argument. The word **indeed** indicates that this further step is in two parts, with the second part beginning with “but” in [11:16](../11/16.md). The word **if** indicates that the first part of the further step is in conditional form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form to indicate these relationships in a natural way. Alternate translation: “Further, on the one hand, if” or “First, if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	11	15	vd0k	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὲν&μνημονεύουσιν	1	a homeland	Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **they** were not actually **thinking of that {land} from which they went out**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that they **had opportunity to return** but did not take that opportunity. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if indeed they had really been thinking” or “were they indeed thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
+HEB	11	15	vd0k	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὲν & μνημονεύουσιν	1	a homeland	Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **they** were not actually **thinking of that {land} from which they went out**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that they **had opportunity to return** but did not take that opportunity. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if indeed they had really been thinking” or “were they indeed thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 HEB	11	15	mbd3	figs-explicit	ἐκείνης μνημονεύουσιν ἀφ’ ἧς ἐξέβησαν	1	a homeland	Here the author implies that they could have thought of **that {land} from which they went out** as their “homeland.” He does not mean that they could have just thought about that land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to **thinking of that {land}** as a “homeland.” Alternate translation: “they had been thinking of that {land} from which they went out as their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	11	15	gf7l	figs-go	ἐξέβησαν&ἀνακάμψαι	1	a homeland	Here, the clause **they went out** refers to movement out of one location and into another. The phrase **to return** refers to going back to that same place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use natural phrases that refer to these kinds of movements. Alternate translation: “they departed … to travel back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	11	15	gf7l	figs-go	ἐξέβησαν & ἀνακάμψαι	1	a homeland	Here, the clause **they went out** refers to movement out of one location and into another. The phrase **to return** refers to going back to that same place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use natural phrases that refer to these kinds of movements. Alternate translation: “they departed … to travel back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	11	15	vavd	figs-abstractnouns	εἶχον ἂν καιρὸν	1	a homeland	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opportunity**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “they would have been able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	16	bhrv	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νῦν δὲ	1	heavenly one	Here, the phrase **But now** introduces what is true, in contrast to the hypothetical situation the author presented in [11:15](../11/15.md). The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces reality in contrast to a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “As it really is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	11	16	cfdu	figs-metaphor	ὀρέγονται	1	heavenly one	Here the author describes longing and desiring as if it were “reaching for” something to take it in one’s hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they yearn for” or “they desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	11	16	vdvm	figs-ellipsis	κρείττονος	1	heavenly one	Here the author does not state what this “land’ is **better** than. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that he means it is better than the “land from which they went out” and any other earthly land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly what the **heavenly** land is **better** than. Alternate translation: “a land that is better than any earthly land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	11	16	epgw		οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς, Θεὸς ἐπικαλεῖσθαι αὐτῶν	1		Here, the phrase **to be called their God** describes the situation in which **God is not ashamed of them**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more clearly expresses the idea. Alternate translation: “God is not ashamed of them when he is called their God” or “God is not ashamed to be called their God”
 HEB	11	16	zfir	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς	1		The phrase **not ashamed** uses two negative words to emphasize that God is honored by these faithful people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with positive words. Alternate translation: “God is honored by them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-HEB	11	16	cvh1	figs-activepassive	αὐτοὺς&Θεὸς ἐπικαλεῖσθαι αὐτῶν	1	God is not ashamed to be called their God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **God**, who is **called their God**, rather than focusing on the people doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “them when others call him their God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	11	16	cvh1	figs-activepassive	αὐτοὺς & Θεὸς ἐπικαλεῖσθαι αὐτῶν	1	God is not ashamed to be called their God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **God**, who is **called their God**, rather than focusing on the people doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “them when others call him their God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	16	ea1a	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	heavenly one	Here, the word **for** introduces support for the author’s claim that **God is not ashamed of them**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “which you know is true, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	11	16	bo30		πόλιν	1	heavenly one	See how you translated “city” in [11:10](../11/10.md).
 HEB	11	17	vjhq			0	when he was tested	In [11:17–19](../11/17.md), the author refers to a specific story about **Abraham**. God told Abraham to sacrifice his son **Isaac**. Abraham began to obey God and was about to kill his son when God sent an angel to stop him and tell him that he had proved that he feared God. Abraham then sacrificed an animal instead of sacrificing Isaac. You can read this story in [Genesis 22:1–19](../gen/22/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	17	o613	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	when he was tested	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	17	cdvc	figs-parallelism	πίστει προσενήνοχεν Ἀβραὰμ τὸν Ἰσαὰκ πειραζόμενος, καὶ τὸν μονογενῆ προσέφερεν, ὁ τὰς ἐπαγγελίας ἀναδεξάμενος	1	when he was tested	Here the author describes the same event with two different clauses. The first clause simply names **Abraham** and **Isaac**. The second clause describes how **Abraham** and **Isaac** relate to the **promises**. The author uses these two different clauses to emphasize the importance of this event. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two clauses and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “By faith, when he was tested, Abraham, who had welcomed the promises, offered up Isaac, his one and only son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	11	17	bk7a	figs-activepassive	πειραζόμενος	1	when he was tested	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Abraham**, who is **tested**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “testing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “at the time when God tested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	11	17	xwwq	figs-explicit	προσενήνοχεν&προσέφερεν	1	when he was tested	Here the author refers to how Abraham **offered** his son **Isaac**. However, the author knows that Abraham did not complete this “offering” by killing Isaac. Rather, he uses the word **offered** to refer to how Abraham completed all the steps of the offering until God interrupted him when he had the knife in his hand to kill his son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Abraham was “about to” or “ready to” offer his son. Alternate translation: “had been ready to offer … was ready to offer up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	11	17	xwwq	figs-explicit	προσενήνοχεν & προσέφερεν	1	when he was tested	Here the author refers to how Abraham **offered** his son **Isaac**. However, the author knows that Abraham did not complete this “offering” by killing Isaac. Rather, he uses the word **offered** to refer to how Abraham completed all the steps of the offering until God interrupted him when he had the knife in his hand to kill his son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Abraham was “about to” or “ready to” offer his son. Alternate translation: “had been ready to offer … was ready to offer up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	17	i9jd		καὶ	1	when he was tested	Alternate translation: “and”
 HEB	11	17	qcra	writing-pronouns	ὁ τὰς ἐπαγγελίας ἀναδεξάμενος	1	when he was tested	Here, the phrase **the one having welcomed the promises** refers back to **Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom this phrase refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham who had welcomed the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	11	17	j9es	figs-metaphor	ἀναδεξάμενος	1	when he was tested	Here the author speaks of how Abraham received God’s **promises** as if they were guests that he **welcomed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1587,8 +1587,8 @@ HEB	11	18	c23z	figs-idiom	κληθήσεταί	1	your descendants will be named
 HEB	11	19	spl8	grammar-connect-logic-result	λογισάμενος	1	God was able to raise up Isaac from the dead	Here, the phrase **having reasoned** introduces the reason why Abraham acted as the author described in [11:17](../11/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he reasoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	11	19	p43u	figs-idiom	καὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγείρειν	1	God was able to raise up Isaac from the dead	Here the author uses the phrase **raise up** to refer to how God makes someone who has died come back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to restore even the dead to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	19	sar1	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	to raise up … from the dead	The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-HEB	11	19	aea3	translate-unknown	αὐτὸν&ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο	1	figuratively speaking	Here, the phrase **in a parable** indicates that what the author is about to say should not be understood literally. The **parable** could refer to: (1) how Isaac did not really die, so the statement that Abraham received Isaac back from the dead overstates what actually happened. Alternate translation: “it was as if he received him back” (2) how Isaac almost dying and then being **received** back figuratively represents how God will resurrect everyone who believes. Alternate translation: “in a type, he received him back” or “in a foreshadowing, he received him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	11	19	hjxf	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&ἐκομίσατο	1	figuratively speaking	Here, the word **he** refers to Abraham, and the word **him** refers to Isaac. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham received Isaac back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	11	19	aea3	translate-unknown	αὐτὸν & ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο	1	figuratively speaking	Here, the phrase **in a parable** indicates that what the author is about to say should not be understood literally. The **parable** could refer to: (1) how Isaac did not really die, so the statement that Abraham received Isaac back from the dead overstates what actually happened. Alternate translation: “it was as if he received him back” (2) how Isaac almost dying and then being **received** back figuratively represents how God will resurrect everyone who believes. Alternate translation: “in a type, he received him back” or “in a foreshadowing, he received him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	11	19	hjxf	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & ἐκομίσατο	1	figuratively speaking	Here, the word **he** refers to Abraham, and the word **him** refers to Isaac. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham received Isaac back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	11	19	k7u3		ὅθεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο	1	from there	Here, the word translated **from there** could be: (1) a reference back to the **dead**, specifically the state of being **dead**. Alternate translation: “and in a parable, he received him back from being dead” (2) a linking word that indicates the cause of Abraham receiving Isaac back. Alternate translation: “because of which, also in a parable, he received him back”
 HEB	11	20	o8gj			0	he received him back	Here the author refers to a story about how **Isaac** blessed his twin sons **Jacob** and **Esau**. In the story, Jacob pretends to be Esau and receives the blessing that Isaac intended for Esau. When Esau comes to receive his blessing, Isaac realizes that Jacob stole the blessing from Esau. He then gives Esau a different blessing. You can read about Isaac blessing his sons in [Genesis 27:1–40](../gen/27/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	20	g19x	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει καὶ	1	he received him back	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “Also by believing,” or “Because he believed also,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ HEB	11	21	l9ab	figs-explicit	προσεκύνησεν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον
 HEB	11	22	xmn3			0	when his end was near	Here the author refers to a story about what **Joseph** said when he was about to die. He said that God would lead them from Egypt to the land that God promised to give to them, and that they should take his bones with them when they left Egypt. You can read this story in [Genesis 50:24–26](../gen/50/24.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	22	awss	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	when his end was near	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	22	lkp6	figs-euphemism	τελευτῶν	1	when his end was near	Here, the phrase **coming to an end** is a polite way of indicating that someone will die soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural and polite expression to indicate that someone is about to die. Alternate translation: “about to pass away” or “being about to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-HEB	11	22	hhs3	figs-idiom	περὶ&ἐμνημόνευσεν	1	spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from Egypt	Here, the phrase **mentioned about** indicates that **Joseph** spoke words concerning **the exodus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to speaking about something. Alternate translation: “said something concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	11	22	hhs3	figs-idiom	περὶ & ἐμνημόνευσεν	1	spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from Egypt	Here, the phrase **mentioned about** indicates that **Joseph** spoke words concerning **the exodus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to speaking about something. Alternate translation: “said something concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	22	ubvs	translate-unknown	τῆς ἐξόδου	1	spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from Egypt	Here, the word **exodus** refers to movement out of a specific place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that refers to this kind of movement. In some contexts, the word **exodus** is a technical term for how God delivered the Israelites out of Egypt. If you have a technical term that refers to the Israelites leaving Egypt, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the departure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	22	sonj	figs-explicit	τῆς ἐξόδου τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ	1	spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from Egypt	Here the audience would understood that the author was speaking about the **exodus** of the Israelites from Egypt to the land that God had promised to give them. If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the exodus of the sons of Israel from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	22	t6i5	figs-gendernotations	τῶν υἱῶν	1	the sons of Israel	Although the word **sons** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of the sons and daughters” or “of the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -1624,14 +1624,14 @@ HEB	11	25	tue5	figs-abstractnouns	πρόσκαιρον ἔχειν ἁμαρτί
 HEB	11	26	oqku	figs-possession	τὸν ὀνειδισμὸν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the disgrace of following Christ	Here the author could be referring to a **reproach** that is: (1) for the sake of or because of **the Christ**. Alternate translation: “the reproach for the sake of the Christ” or “the reproach because of the Christ” (2) like the **reproach** that **the Christ** experienced. Alternate translation: “the reproach that Christ experienced” or “reproach, which is like what Christ suffered,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	11	26	i9sc	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν ὀνειδισμὸν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the disgrace of following Christ	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reproach**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reproach.” Alternate translation: “being reproached for Christ to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	26	ucsy	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the disgrace of following Christ	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Moses **considered** the **reproach of Christ** to be more valuable than **the treasures of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	11	26	t588	figs-metaphor	ἀπέβλεπεν&εἰς	1	fixing his eyes on his reward	Here the author speaks as if Moses was **looking away** from the **treasures of Egypt** and **toward his reward**. He speaks in this way to indicate that Moses thought about and focused on the **reward** from God rather than **the treasures of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for he was concentrating instead on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	11	26	t588	figs-metaphor	ἀπέβλεπεν & εἰς	1	fixing his eyes on his reward	Here the author speaks as if Moses was **looking away** from the **treasures of Egypt** and **toward his reward**. He speaks in this way to indicate that Moses thought about and focused on the **reward** from God rather than **the treasures of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for he was concentrating instead on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	11	26	bsfs	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν μισθαποδοσίαν	1	fixing his eyes on his reward	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reward**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reward” or “repay.” Alternate translation: “toward how God would repay him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	27	ki40	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	27	uyld	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θυμὸν τοῦ βασιλέως	1	he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wrath**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “angry” or “furious.” Alternate translation: “how furious the king was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	27	r4q2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Moses **left Egypt behind** and did not fear **the wrath of the king**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	11	27	o6mo		ὡς ὁρῶν	1	he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible	Here, the word translated **as if** could indicate that Moses: (1) did not actually “see” God but rather acted like he could. Alternate translation: “as though he could see” (2) did “see” God and acted as one who could do so. Alternate translation: “as one who could see”
-HEB	11	27	rc43	figs-simile	τὸν&ἀόρατον ὡς ὁρῶν	2	he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible	Here the author compares the way that Moses **endured** to how someone who was **seeing the unseen one** would endure. The author’s point is that Moses endured because he was totally sure that God was trustworthy, as sure as if God were right beside him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “as one who could see the unseen one endures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-HEB	11	27	cc8w	figs-explicit	τὸν&ἀόρατον	2	the one who is invisible	Here, the audience would have known that **the unseen one** is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could who **the unseen one** is more explicit. Alternate translation: “the unseen God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	11	27	rc43	figs-simile	τὸν & ἀόρατον ὡς ὁρῶν	2	he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible	Here the author compares the way that Moses **endured** to how someone who was **seeing the unseen one** would endure. The author’s point is that Moses endured because he was totally sure that God was trustworthy, as sure as if God were right beside him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “as one who could see the unseen one endures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+HEB	11	27	cc8w	figs-explicit	τὸν & ἀόρατον	2	the one who is invisible	Here, the audience would have known that **the unseen one** is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could who **the unseen one** is more explicit. Alternate translation: “the unseen God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	28	r107			0	he kept the Passover and the sprinkling of the blood	Here the author refers to the story of the first **Passover**, a festival that the Israelites continued to celebrate to remember what happened when God delivered them from Egypt. God had warned the king of Egypt that if he did not let the Israelites go free, he would kill the **firstborn** son in each Egyptian family. God told Moses to have the Israelites spread blood from a sacrificed lamb on their doors so that their **firstborn** sons would not die. Then, God sent a destroying angel, who killed the **firstborn** sons of the Egyptians. When that happened, the king of Egypt let the Israelites go free. You can read about the first **Passover** in [Exodus 11:1–12:32](../exo/11/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	28	dt69	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	he kept the Passover and the sprinkling of the blood	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	28	p91f	figs-idiom	πεποίηκεν τὸ Πάσχα	1	he kept the Passover and the sprinkling of the blood	Here, the clause **he has performed the Passover** identifies Moses as the one who “instituted” or “started” the **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Moses started a festival that is still celebrated even now. Alternate translation: “he instituted the Passover” or “he inaugurated the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1639,7 +1639,7 @@ HEB	11	28	yuc8	figs-explicit	πεποίηκεν	1	he kept the Passover and the s
 HEB	11	28	bef7	figs-explicit	τὴν πρόσχυσιν τοῦ αἵματος	1	the sprinkling of the blood	Here, the phrase **the sprinkling of the blood** refers to God’s command to the Israelites to kill a lamb and spread its **blood** on the doorposts of every house where Israelites lived. This would prevent **the destroyer** from harming their **firstborn**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **the sprinkling of the blood** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the sprinkling of blood from sacrifices on their doorframes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	28	tz7k	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πρόσχυσιν τοῦ αἵματος	1	he kept the Passover and the sprinkling of the blood	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sprinkling**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sprinkle.” Alternate translation: “sprinkled the blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	28	h7st	figs-explicit	ὁ ὀλοθρεύων τὰ πρωτότοκα	1	he kept the Passover and the sprinkling of the blood	Here, the phrase **the destroyer {of} the firstborn** refers to the spiritual being whom God commanded to kill the **firstborn** of the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **the destroyer** is a spiritual being. Alternate translation: “the angel who destroyed the firstborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	11	28	bm2f	figs-metaphor	μὴ&θίγῃ	1	should not touch	Here, the word **touch** refers to harming or killing someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “would not harm” or “would not destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	11	28	bm2f	figs-metaphor	μὴ & θίγῃ	1	should not touch	Here, the word **touch** refers to harming or killing someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “would not harm” or “would not destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	11	28	etvl	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	should not touch	Here, the word **them** refers to the Israelites, perhaps more specifically to the firstborn of the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **them** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite firstborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	11	29	xnid			0	they passed through the Sea of Reeds	Here the author refers to a story about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt. After the king of Egypt let them go free, the Israelites traveled until they reached the edge of the **Red Sea**. However, the king of Egypt decided that he had made a mistake and wanted to take the Israelites back. His army surrounded them as they camped next to the **Red Sea**. However, God opened a path through the **Red Sea**, and the Israelites walked right through. When the Egyptian army followed, God sent the water back over the path he had created, and the Egyptians drowned. You can read this story in [Exodus 14](../exo/14/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	11	29	lr8x	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	they passed through the Sea of Reeds	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because they believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1660,7 +1660,7 @@ HEB	11	31	nt6f	figs-explicit	τοὺς κατασκόπους	1	had received the
 HEB	11	31	ftc8	figs-abstractnouns	μετ’ εἰρήνης	1	had received the spies in peace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “peacefully.” Alternate translation: “who had peacefully received the spies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	32	rh6y	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι λέγω?	1	What more can I say?	The author uses this question to emphasize that there are many more examples that he could have discussed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong statement and include the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I could talk about so many more examples!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	11	32	xndf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	What more can I say?	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of why the author cannot **say** any **more**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “But” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	11	32	bs7h	figs-idiom	ἐπιλείψει&με&ὁ χρόνος	1	the time will fail me	Here, the phrase **the time will fail me** indicates that the author does not have enough time to speak about more people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that refers to a lack of time. Alternate translation: “I will not have enough time” or “it would take too much time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	11	32	bs7h	figs-idiom	ἐπιλείψει & με & ὁ χρόνος	1	the time will fail me	Here, the phrase **the time will fail me** indicates that the author does not have enough time to speak about more people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that refers to a lack of time. Alternate translation: “I will not have enough time” or “it would take too much time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	32	wkve	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	με διηγούμενον	1	the time will fail me	Here, the phrase **fully relating** indicates the condition in which **the time will fail me**. Of course, the author indicates that he will not meet this condition. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit by using a form that introduces a non-real condition. Alternate translation: “me if I were to fully relate” or “me were I to fully relate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 HEB	11	32	luh9	translate-unknown	διηγούμενον	1	the time will fail me	Here, the phrase **fully relating** refers to describing something in detail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to narrating or describing something with careful attention to the details. Alternate translation: “carefully narrating” or “speaking in detail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	32	a7t9	figs-explicit	τῶν προφητῶν	1	Barak	Here, the phrase **the prophets** refers in general to anyone who spoke God’s word to his people. The man **Samuel** was considered a prophet, so make sure that your translation does not imply that **Samuel** was not a prophet. Alternate translation: “the others who spoke for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1682,12 +1682,12 @@ HEB	11	34	dd8s	translate-unknown	παρεμβολὰς ἔκλιναν ἀλλο
 HEB	11	35	i3r7	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν	1	Women received back their dead by resurrection	The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. The word **their** indicates that these **dead** people belong to the families of the **Women**. Alternate translation: “their dead relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 HEB	11	35	t9sp	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀναστάσεως	1	Women received back their dead by resurrection	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “because they were resurrected” or “when God resurrected them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	35	av6c	writing-pronouns	ἄλλοι	1		Here, the word **others** does not refer to other **Women**. Rather, it refers to other people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “other Israelites” or “other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	11	35	j37h	figs-activepassive	ἄλλοι&ἐτυμπανίσθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **were tortured** rather than focusing on the people doing the “torturing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others accepted torture” or “others were those whom people tortured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	11	35	j37h	figs-activepassive	ἄλλοι & ἐτυμπανίσθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **were tortured** rather than focusing on the people doing the “torturing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others accepted torture” or “others were those whom people tortured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	35	ne1u	figs-explicit	οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1	Others were tortured, not accepting release	Here the audience would understand that the “torture” would stop if the people being **tortured** did what the torturer asked. In this case, the author implies that the people are being **tortured** to make them disobey or deny God. To “accept release,” then, would require disobeying or denying God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the author implies more explicit. Alternate translation: “refusing to disobey God in order to be released” or “not being willing to be released by denying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	11	35	sqiz	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1	Others were tortured, not accepting release	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **release**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “release.” Alternate translation: “not asking to be released” or “not trying to be released” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	35	sdds	figs-abstractnouns	κρείττονος ἀναστάσεως τύχωσιν	1	a better resurrection	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **resurrection**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “they might be resurrected in a better way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	35	jyw7	figs-ellipsis	κρείττονος ἀναστάσεως	1	a better resurrection	Here the author does not state what this **resurrection** is **better** than. The phrase **better resurrection** could mean: (1) that this is a final **resurrection** and is thus better than the temporary **resurrection** mentioned at the beginning of the verse. Alternate translation: “resurrection better than a temporary return to life” (2) that **resurrection** is **better** than a temporary **release** from being **tortured**. Alternate translation: “a resurrection better than release” (3) these people will have a **better resurrection** than those who did not have faith. Everyone experiences **resurrection**, but those who trusted God receive a **better** one. Alternate translation: “a resurrection better than what their enemies will obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	11	36	nx7u	figs-abstractnouns	ἕτεροι&ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον, ἔτι δὲ δεσμῶν καὶ φυλακῆς	1	Others had testing in mocking and whippings, and even chains and imprisonment	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **trial**, **mockings**, **whippings**, and **imprisonment**, you could express the ideas by using verbs and verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “others were tested when people mocked and whipped them, and even more when people put them in chains and imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	11	36	nx7u	figs-abstractnouns	ἕτεροι & ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον, ἔτι δὲ δεσμῶν καὶ φυλακῆς	1	Others had testing in mocking and whippings, and even chains and imprisonment	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **trial**, **mockings**, **whippings**, and **imprisonment**, you could express the ideas by using verbs and verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “others were tested when people mocked and whipped them, and even more when people put them in chains and imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	36	e9al	figs-idiom	πεῖραν ἔλαβον	1	Others had testing in mocking and whippings	Here, the phrase **received a trial** refers to experiencing some circumstance or event. It could also indicate that the circumstance or event was hard or difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to experiencing or undergoing something difficult. Alternate translation: “had an experience” or “underwent the pain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	36	fql3	translate-unknown	μαστίγων	1	Others had testing in mocking and whippings	Here, the word **whippings** refers to punishment that consisted in one person hitting another person’s back with ropes. The one doing the **whipping** would hit the other person until his or her back was cut open. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of punishment. Alternate translation: “of floggings” or “of beatings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	36	nauk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἔτι δὲ	1	Others had testing in mocking and whippings	Here, the phrase **and even more** indicates that what the author says next are worse or more difficult to bear than the **mockings** and **whippings** he has already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this comparison clear. Alternate translation: “and even worse,” or “and more difficult,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ HEB	11	37	knra	figs-doublet	ἐν μηλωταῖς, ἐν αἰγίοις δέ
 HEB	11	37	x2jf	translate-unknown	ὑστερούμενοι	1	destitute	Here, the word **destitute** refers to someone who is very poor, who owns nothing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies someone as extremely poor. Alternate translation: “having nothing” or “being very poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	37	hh76	translate-unknown	κακουχούμενοι	1	destitute	Here, the word **mistreated** refers to when a person is treated badly or cruelly by other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a person experiencing cruel or nasty behavior from others. Alternate translation: “tormented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	38	q9hd	figs-infostructure	ὧν οὐκ ἦν ἄξιος ὁ κόσμος, ἐπὶ ἐρημίαις πλανώμενοι, καὶ ὄρεσι, καὶ σπηλαίοις, καὶ ταῖς ὀπαῖς τῆς γῆς.	1	The world was not worthy	The author puts the clause **of which {people} the world was not worthy** here to contrast with how these same **{people}** are “destitute, oppressed, mistreated” (see [11:37](../11/37.md)). If possible, retain this clause where it stands. If keeping the clause here is not possible, you could move it to the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “being caused to wander about in deserts and mountains and caves and the holes in the ground, of which {people} the world was not worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	11	38	a721	figs-metonymy	ἦν&ὁ κόσμος	1	The world was not worthy	Here, the word **world** refers primarily to the people who live in the world and the societies that they make up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the people and societies of **the world**. Alternate translation: “those who live in this world were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+HEB	11	38	a721	figs-metonymy	ἦν & ὁ κόσμος	1	The world was not worthy	Here, the word **world** refers primarily to the people who live in the world and the societies that they make up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the people and societies of **the world**. Alternate translation: “those who live in this world were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	11	38	j9lp	figs-activepassive	πλανώμενοι	1	They wandered about	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **caused to wander** rather than focusing on the people doing the “causing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “having to wander about” or “people causing them to wander about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	38	g7ua	figs-doublet	σπηλαίοις, καὶ ταῖς ὀπαῖς τῆς γῆς	1	They wandered about	Here, the words **caves** and **holes** function together to identify any type of hiding place or shelter **in the ground**. The word **caves** refers to openings in the ground that a person can walk into, while **holes** refers to openings in the ground that person has to climb or drop down into. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify any kind of hiding place or shelter **in the ground**. Alternate translation: “cavities in the ground” or “shelters in the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	11	39	a0x8	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι πάντες	1	Although all these people were approved by God because of their faith, they did not receive the promise	Here, the phrase **all these {people}** refers to everyone who trusted God that the author has mentioned in this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “all these people I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -1712,18 +1712,18 @@ HEB	11	39	l5wd	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρηθέντες	1	Although all thes
 HEB	11	39	uvel	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	Although all these people were approved by God because of their faith, they did not receive the promise	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “because they believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	11	39	vgw2	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	the promise	Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	11	39	zy4b	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	the promise	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	11	40	as77	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	τοῦ Θεοῦ&προβλεψαμένου	1	so that without us, they would not be made perfect	Here, the phrase **God having provided** introduces an idea that contrasts with what the author said in the previous verse ([11:39](../11/39.md)) about how the faithful people did not “receive the promise.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “but God has provided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+HEB	11	40	as77	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	τοῦ Θεοῦ & προβλεψαμένου	1	so that without us, they would not be made perfect	Here, the phrase **God having provided** introduces an idea that contrasts with what the author said in the previous verse ([11:39](../11/39.md)) about how the faithful people did not “receive the promise.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “but God has provided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	11	40	td7x	figs-ellipsis	περὶ ἡμῶν κρεῖττόν τι	1	so that without us, they would not be made perfect	Here, the author states that something is **better**, but he does not specify what it is **better** than. It is clear from the previous verse ([11:39](../11/39.md)) that the author considers receiving what God promised to be **better** than only receiving the promise itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what the author is comparing **something better** with. Alternate translation: “something better concerning us than the promise that he gave them” or “what he promised to us, which is better than receiving just the promise itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	11	40	p9uu	figs-activepassive	μὴ χωρὶς ἡμῶν τελειωθῶσιν	1	so that without us, they would not be made perfect	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **made perfect** rather than focusing on the person doing the “perfecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God would not perfect them without us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	40	nkci	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ χωρὶς ἡμῶν τελειωθῶσιν	1		The phrases **without us** and **not be made perfect** together use two negative words to emphasize that **they** and **us** need to be together to **be made perfect**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with positive words, emphasizing the importance of **they** and **us** together. Alternate translation: “they would be made perfect only with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	12	intro	h1qb			0		# Hebrews 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)<br>      * Exhortation: Imitate Jesus in rejecting sin and enduring discipline (12:1–17)<br>      * Exhortation: Mount Sinai and Mount Zion (12:18–29)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [12:5–6](../12/05.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Sons<br><br>In [12:5–11](../12/05.md), the author identifies the audience as “sons” and explains what that means. In the author’s culture, “sons” were the children who inherited property and received training from fathers and other teachers. The author is not excluding the women in his audience; rather, he is naming them “sons” of God too, since they receive God’s training. You may need to translate “sons” with a gender-neutral word to get this idea across. The author assumes that all true “sons” receive training and discipline. Only those who are not fully “sons,” that is, those who are “illegitimate” children, do not receive such training and discipline. The author’s point is that when the audience experiences suffering and painful events, it is training or discipline that proves that they are “sons.” If possible, preserve the language of children and parents in your translation. If your readers would not assume that parents train or discipline their children, you may need to explain in a footnote that this was common practice in the author’s culture. (See: [rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/son]])<br><br>### “Discipline”<br><br>In [12:5–11](../12/05.md), the author frequently uses a word that the ULT translates as “discipline.” Scholars debate whether this word focuses primarily on education and training on the one hand or punishment and discipline on the other hand. Most likely, the word “discipline” refers to the entire education process, including both learning, training, punishment, and discipline. In fact, Greco-Roman education often included athletic training, which the author refers to directly in [12:1](../12/01.md). If you have a word or short phrase for the whole process of education, you could use it to translate “discipline.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])<br><br>### Mount Sinai and Mount Zion<br><br>In [12:18–24](../12/18.md), the author contrasts two mountains, Mount Sinai and Mount Zion. Mount Sinai is where God came down to meet with Moses and the Israelites to make a covenant with them and give them his commandments and promises. The author refers to all the terrifying natural phenomenon that went along with God coming to meet them: fire, darkness, and loud sounds. You can read about these events in [Exodus 19:9–20:21](../exo/19/09.md) and [Deuteronomy 4:9–5:31](../deu/04/09.md). The author contrasts this mountain with Mount Zion, which on earth is the mountain on which the city of Jerusalem was built. However, the author is referring to the Mount Zion that is in heaven, much like John does in [Revelation 14:1](../rev/14/01.md). On this mountain are God, Jesus, angels, and God’s people. The author contrasts these mountains because Mount Sinai is the place where God gave the first covenant, and Mount Zion is the place where God gives the new covenant. You should preserve the language that refers to mountains while making it clear what happened on these mountains. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/zion]])<br><br>### “Shaking” and “removal”<br><br>In [12:26–28](../12/26.md), the author quotes from [Haggai 2:6](../hag/02/06.md), which is God’s promise that he will “shake” heaven and earth one more time. The author clarifies that this means the “removal” of everything that is “shaken,” while everything that is not “shaken” will “remain.” Scholars debate what the “shaking” and “removal” indicate. These words could mean that: (1) God will “remove” everything that is evil and disobedient from the creation in a way that is like “shaking” dust or dirt off clothing. In this way, the “removal” of the shaken things can be understood as a “transformation” of heaven and earth. It is this transformed heaven and earth that “remain.” (2) God will totally “remove” the creation in a way that is like “shaking” something so hard that it breaks or falls apart. Some scholars think that God will then recreate heaven and earth, and it is this completely new heaven and earth that “remain.” Other scholars think that God will not recreate anything, and only the part of “heaven” that is not “shaken” will “remain.” The first option is slightly more likely, but consider whether there are ways to translate these verses that allow readers to infer either option. <br><br>### The “unshakable kingdom”<br><br>In [12:28](../12/28.md), the author states that believers are receiving an “unshakable kingdom” from God. While some scholars argue that “kingdom” refers primarily to the act of ruling, most likely the author is referring to a place: the heavenly “city” that he described in [12:22–24](../12/22.md). Scholars also debate whether “unshakable” identifies the city as something that is impossible to “shake” or as something that God chooses not to “shake.” In your translation, use words that clearly connect the “unshakable kingdom” to the “shaking” that the author has discussed in [12:26–27](../12/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “race”<br><br>In [12:1](../12/01.md), the author refers to the Christian life as a “race” (specifically a race that includes running). He does not mean that believers are competing against each other. Rather, he is emphasizing how running a race requires training, endurance, and focus. Just as runners remove all possible weight and anything that might trip them, believers need to get rid of sins and any other distractions. Just as a runner must endure and persevere, they need to endure and persevere. It is possible that the author continues the race metaphor when he encourages the audience to make their hands and knees straight and to go on straight paths in [12:12–13](../12/12.md). He may be encouraging them to think of themselves as tired runners who need to renew their strength and endurance. Since this is an important metaphor in this chapter, preserve the language of running a race, either by using the metaphor or expressing the idea as a simile. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/run]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### The “root of bitterness”<br><br>In [12:15](../12/15.md), the author refers to a “root” that can “grow up” and cause trouble. He identifies this “root” as “bitterness.” The author’s point is that “bitterness” is something that is not always noticeable or large, just as a “root” is hidden underneath the ground. However, “bitterness” can cause much trouble, just like a “root” can nourish a large and very noticeable plant. If you cannot preserve the metaphor of the “root,” you could express the idea with a simile or use plain language. See the notes on this verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### The “consuming fire”<br><br>In [12:29](../12/29.md), the author identifies God as a “consuming fire.” What he means is that when God punishes people who disobey or disbelieve, it is like a “fire” totally “consumes” them. In other words, people should fear and respect God like they fear and respect a “consuming fire.” If possible, preserve the “fire” language, especially since the author is probably referring to how God is described as a “fire” in [Deuteronomy 4:24](../deu/04/24.md). See the notes on this verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The comparison to Esau<br><br>In [12:16–17](../12/16.md), the author urges his audience not to be “sexually immoral” or “profane.” Then, he identifies Esau, the son of Isaac and the brother of Jacob, as an example of someone who was both of these things. The Old Testament does not directly describe Esau as “sexually immoral,” but it does tell how he had multiple wives from pagan nations. Later tradition sometimes described him as “immoral” because of this. However, the author focuses particularly on how Esau was “profane,” that is, someone who treats sacred or holy things as if they were ordinary and not holy. As an example, he briefly refers to how Esau was hungry and sold his “birthright” to his brother Jacob to get some food. A “birthright” is a valuable and important thing, but Esau considered it to be less important than one meal. You can read this story in [Genesis 25:29–34](../gen/25/29.md). The author then goes on to describe how Esau could not regain his “birthright,” even though he tried to do so. As the story in the Old Testament goes, Jacob received the special blessing from his father, and Esau did not. You can read this story in [Genesis 27:1–41](../gen/27/01.md). If your readers would not know these stories about Esau, you may need to include some extra information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/esau]])<br><br>### “You have come”<br><br>In [12:18](../12/18.md), the author states that the audience “has not come” to the mountain to which the Israelites came. Rather, he states in [12:22](../12/22.md) that they “have come” to Mount Zion. Since the Israelites could only approach but not go on top of Mount Sinai, it is likely that the phrase “have come” refers to getting near something but not going into or on it. This means that the audience have not entered the heavenly Mount Zion or Jerusalem. Rather, they have gotten close or near it while they are still on earth. Use words in these verses that refer to approaching or getting close to something.
 HEB	12	1	k8mr	grammar-connect-logic-result	τοιγαροῦν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **For that very reason** draws an inference or exhortation from all of [11:1–40](../11/01.md), but especially from [11:39–40](../11/39.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly draws and inference or exhortation from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of all that” or “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	12	1	jg6w	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1		Here, the word **having** introduces a basis or reason for why we should **run with endurance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a basis or reason. Alternate translation: “since we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	12	1	f6u9	figs-metaphor	τοσοῦτον&περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος μαρτύρων	1	we are surrounded by such a large cloud of witnesses	Here, the author speaks of the **witnesses**, that is, the faithful people the author mentioned in the previous chapter, as if they were a **cloud** that “surrounds” **us**. In the author’s culture, a large crowd of people was often described as a **cloud**, and the fact that it “surrounds” means that the author and audience stand in the middle of the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so great a crowd of witnesses around us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	12	1	f6u9	figs-metaphor	τοσοῦτον & περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος μαρτύρων	1	we are surrounded by such a large cloud of witnesses	Here, the author speaks of the **witnesses**, that is, the faithful people the author mentioned in the previous chapter, as if they were a **cloud** that “surrounds” **us**. In the author’s culture, a large crowd of people was often described as a **cloud**, and the fact that it “surrounds” means that the author and audience stand in the middle of the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so great a crowd of witnesses around us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	1	hf97		μαρτύρων	1	witnesses	Here, the word **witnesses** could refer to one or both of the following ideas: (1) the **witnesses** could “witness” or watch **us** as we **run** the **race**. Alternate translation: “of spectators” (2) the **witnesses** could “witness” or testify to what it means to have faith and endurance. Alternate translation: “of witnesses to faith”
-HEB	12	1	xshp	figs-imperative	ὄγκον ἀποθέμενοι πάντα καὶ τὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν&τρέχωμεν	1	witnesses	Here, the phrase beginning with **having laid aside** is part of the author’s exhortation or command to his audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that this phrase is part of the command. Alternate translation: “let us lay aside every weight and the easily entangling sin, and let us run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+HEB	12	1	xshp	figs-imperative	ὄγκον ἀποθέμενοι πάντα καὶ τὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν & τρέχωμεν	1	witnesses	Here, the phrase beginning with **having laid aside** is part of the author’s exhortation or command to his audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that this phrase is part of the command. Alternate translation: “let us lay aside every weight and the easily entangling sin, and let us run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 HEB	12	1	yw1t	figs-metaphor	ὄγκον ἀποθέμενοι πάντα καὶ τὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν	1	let us lay aside every weight and easily entangling sin	Here the author speaks of **sin** and other hindrances to the Christian life as if they were **weight** and something that “entangles.” The author pictures the Christian life as a race, and sin and other hindrances make this race hard and difficult, just like extra **weight** and anything that “entangles” makes a race harder for a runner. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea as a simile or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having laid aside sin and distractions like they were extra weight or things that entangle” or “avoiding sin and any other hindrance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	12	1	k1cr	figs-doublet	ὄγκον&πάντα καὶ τὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν	1	let us lay aside every weight and easily entangling sin	Here, the words **weight** and **sin** refer to very similar things. It is likely that **weight** refers in general to anything that hinders people from “running the race,” while **sin** is a specific type of **weight**. It is also possible that these two words mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by linking the two words together with a word besides **and**. Alternate translation: “every weight, especially the easily entangling sin” or “every weight, that is, the easily entangling sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	12	1	k1cr	figs-doublet	ὄγκον & πάντα καὶ τὴν εὐπερίστατον ἁμαρτίαν	1	let us lay aside every weight and easily entangling sin	Here, the words **weight** and **sin** refer to very similar things. It is likely that **weight** refers in general to anything that hinders people from “running the race,” while **sin** is a specific type of **weight**. It is also possible that these two words mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by linking the two words together with a word besides **and**. Alternate translation: “every weight, especially the easily entangling sin” or “every weight, that is, the easily entangling sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	12	1	g5dn	figs-metaphor	δι’ ὑπομονῆς, τρέχωμεν τὸν προκείμενον ἡμῖν ἀγῶνα	1	Let us patiently run the race that is placed before us	Here, the author speaks of persevering in trusting God and obeying him as if it were a **race** that he and his audience need to **run**. This was a common metaphor in his culture and emphasized the need to have **endurance** despite any obstacles or difficulties. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “let us persist in trusting God, just like a runner keeps running until the race is over” or “let us continue to have faith as we endure whatever happens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	1	zln7	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ὑπομονῆς, τρέχωμεν	1	every weight	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **endurance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “endure” or “persevere.” Alternate translation: “let us endure as we run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	1	t6wu	figs-idiom	προκείμενον ἡμῖν	1	easily entangling sin	Here, the phrase **placed before us** refers to how a race course **is placed** in front of the runners by whoever set up the course. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that naturally refers to how a race course is set up. Alternate translation: “that is set up in front of us” or “that we must run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1731,43 +1731,43 @@ HEB	12	1	ym6m	figs-activepassive	προκείμενον ἡμῖν	1	easily enta
 HEB	12	2	ap7m	figs-metaphor	ἀφορῶντες εἰς	1	the founder and perfecter of the faith	Here the author speaks as if the audience could “look away” from any trouble or persecution and toward **Jesus**. He speaks in this way to indicate that he wants his audience to think about and focus on **Jesus** rather than trouble or persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “concentrating instead on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	2	a946	figs-possession	τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν	1	the founder and perfecter of the faith	Here, the form that the author uses could indicate that: (1) Jesus is **the founder and perfecter** or other people’s **faith**. In other words, he enables them to “begin” and “complete” their **faith**. Alternate translation: “the one who founds and perfects our faith” (2) Jesus was the **founder and perfecter** or his own **faith**. In this case, Jesus is an example of someone who had faith from the beginning to the end, that is, always. Alternate translation: “the one with faith from beginning to end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	12	2	cuot	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	the founder and perfecter of the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “believing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	12	2	bf0j		ἀντὶ τῆς&χαρᾶς	1	the founder and perfecter of the faith	Here, the phrase **for the joy** could mean that: (1) Jesus **endured a cross** for the sake of the **joy**, that is, because he knew he would have **joy** as a result. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the joy” (2) Jesus **endured a cross** instead of the **joy** that could have been experiencing. Alternate translation: “instead of the joy”
+HEB	12	2	bf0j		ἀντὶ τῆς & χαρᾶς	1	the founder and perfecter of the faith	Here, the phrase **for the joy** could mean that: (1) Jesus **endured a cross** for the sake of the **joy**, that is, because he knew he would have **joy** as a result. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the joy” (2) Jesus **endured a cross** instead of the **joy** that could have been experiencing. Alternate translation: “instead of the joy”
 HEB	12	2	bdk5	figs-abstractnouns	ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς	1	the founder and perfecter of the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “for how joyful he would eventually be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	2	za14	figs-idiom	προκειμένης αὐτῷ	1	For the joy that was placed before him	Here, the phrase **placed before him** identifies the **joy** as something that he could expect and be about to experience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that naturally refers to something that is about to happen. See how you translated the similar phrase “placed before us” in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “that he was about to experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	2	x005	figs-activepassive	προκειμένης αὐτῷ	1	For the joy that was placed before him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **joy** that is **placed before him** rather than focusing on the person doing the “placing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God placed before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	2	fyyr	figs-pastforfuture	προκειμένης αὐτῷ	1	For the joy that was placed before him	Here, the phrase **is placed** refers to something that was happening when Jesus **endured the cross**. It does not mean that the **joy** is still **placed before him** now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a verb tense that naturally refers to the time when Jesus **endured the cross**. Alternate translation: “that was placed before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 HEB	12	2	nxwv	figs-metonymy	σταυρὸν	1	For the joy that was placed before him	Here, the word **cross** refers to dying on a **cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to death on a **cross**. Alternate translation: “dying on a cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	12	2	y7me	figs-abstractnouns	αἰσχύνης	1	despised its shame	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **shame**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “shameful” or a verb such as “shame.” Alternate translation: “how it shamed him” or “how shameful it was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	12	2	vm9b	translate-symaction	ἐν δεξιᾷ&τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ Θεοῦ κεκάθικεν	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of God	When someone sits **at the right hand of the throne of God**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right hand of the throne of God” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right hand of the throne of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-HEB	12	2	czd5	figs-metonymy	ἐν δεξιᾷ&τοῦ θρόνου	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of God	Here, the phrase **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the throne” or “in the honorable place on the throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+HEB	12	2	vm9b	translate-symaction	ἐν δεξιᾷ & τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ Θεοῦ κεκάθικεν	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of God	When someone sits **at the right hand of the throne of God**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right hand of the throne of God” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right hand of the throne of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+HEB	12	2	czd5	figs-metonymy	ἐν δεξιᾷ & τοῦ θρόνου	1	sat down at the right hand of the throne of God	Here, the phrase **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the throne” or “in the honorable place on the throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	12	3	aw3u	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous two verses ([12:1–2](../12/01.md)) about “looking away to Jesus” and about who Jesus is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	12	3	ydbc	writing-pronouns	τὸν	1		Here, the word **one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **one** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	12	3	y8ze	figs-explicit	τοιαύτην&ἀντιλογίαν	1		Here, the phrase **such opposition** implies that there was much or great **opposition**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “great opposition” or “much opposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	12	3	d3ir	figs-abstractnouns	τοιαύτην&ὑπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν εἰς ἑαυτοὺς ἀντιλογίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opposition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “oppose.” Alternate translation: “how sinners greatly opposed him against themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	12	3	y8ze	figs-explicit	τοιαύτην & ἀντιλογίαν	1		Here, the phrase **such opposition** implies that there was much or great **opposition**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “great opposition” or “much opposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	12	3	d3ir	figs-abstractnouns	τοιαύτην & ὑπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν εἰς ἑαυτοὺς ἀντιλογίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opposition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “oppose.” Alternate translation: “how sinners greatly opposed him against themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	3	w93k	figs-explicit	ἁμαρτωλῶν εἰς ἑαυτοὺς	1		Here, the author indicates that the **opposition** that Jesus **endured** was actually **against** the people who opposed Jesus. By including **against themselves**, the author indicates that their **opposition** to Jesus actually hurt themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **against themselves** means that they hurt or injured themselves. Alternate translation: “sinners, who actually harmed themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	3	wq9m	translate-textvariants	ἑαυτοὺς	1		Here some early manuscripts have “him” or “himself” instead of **themselves**. The best manuscripts have **themselves**, but scholars often argue that “himself” makes more sense here. Consider whether your readers are familiar with a version that uses “himself” here. Otherwise, you could follow the ULT by using **themselves**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 HEB	12	3	ml2u	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ κάμητε, ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν ἐκλυόμενοι	1		Here, the author continues to speak as if the audience are running a race. He wishes them to persevere in trusting God, just like a runner who does not **become weary** or “give up.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you, like a runner, might not become weary in your souls, giving up” or “so that you might not become discouraged in your souls, ceasing to trust God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	3	ihdn	figs-infostructure	μὴ κάμητε, ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν ἐκλυόμενοι	1		Here, the phrase **in your souls** could go with: (1) **become weary**. See the ULT. (2) **giving up**. Alternate translation: “you might not become weary, giving up in your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	12	3	i1xl	figs-synecdoche	ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν	1	weary in your hearts	Here, the phrase **your souls** is a way to refer to the audience members while focusing on their inner life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the inner life of a person, or you could simply refer to the person as a whole. Alternate translation: “in your hearts” or “inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 HEB	12	3	fsos	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκλυόμενοι	1		Here, the phrase **giving up** introduces what the result would be if the audience became **weary** in their **souls**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “with the result that you give up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	12	4	i4ip	figs-explicit	οὔπω&ἀντικατέστητε	1	to the point of blood	Here the author does not state explicitly what they have **resisted**. The rest of the verse implies that it is **sin**, which probably includes both their own sinful deeds and the sinful acts of others that injure the audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they have **resisted** against clearer. Alternate translation: “You have not yet resisted sin” or “You have not yet resisted sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	12	4	i4ip	figs-explicit	οὔπω & ἀντικατέστητε	1	to the point of blood	Here the author does not state explicitly what they have **resisted**. The rest of the verse implies that it is **sin**, which probably includes both their own sinful deeds and the sinful acts of others that injure the audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they have **resisted** against clearer. Alternate translation: “You have not yet resisted sin” or “You have not yet resisted sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	4	uwg6	figs-idiom	μέχρις αἵματος	1	of blood	Here, the phrase **to the point of blood** refers to death. In other words, the audience has **not yet** died because they **resisted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the point of death” or “so that you died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	4	vc5d	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἀνταγωνιζόμενοι	1	of blood	Here, the word **struggling** introduces how the audience have **resisted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “as you struggle” or “while you are struggling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	12	4	b9b7	figs-personification	πρὸς τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνταγωνιζόμενοι	1	You have not yet resisted or struggled against sin	Here the author speaks of **sin** as if it were an opponent that the audience was fighting against. The author speaks in this way to indicate how serious and dangerous resisting **sin** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “struggling against sin as if it were an enemy” or “striving against sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	12	5	istg		καὶ ἐκλέλησθε τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν ὡς υἱοῖς διαλέγεται	1	the encouragement that instructs you	Here the words that the author uses to introduce the quotation could be: (1) a statement of reproach. See the ULT. (2) a rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “and have you completely forgotten the exhortation that instructs you as sons?”
-HEB	12	5	y6cv	figs-personification	τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν&διαλέγεται	1	the encouragement that instructs you	Here the author speaks as if the quotation or **exhortation** were a person that could “instruct” his audience. He speaks in this way to show that the **exhortation** that he quotes should teach them something about what it means to be **sons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “the exhortation from which you should learn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-HEB	12	5	eqol	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν&διαλέγεται	1	the encouragement that instructs you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exhortation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exhort.” Alternate translation: “what Scripture exhorts you, which instructs you” or “how you have been exhorted and instructed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	12	5	y6cv	figs-personification	τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν & διαλέγεται	1	the encouragement that instructs you	Here the author speaks as if the quotation or **exhortation** were a person that could “instruct” his audience. He speaks in this way to show that the **exhortation** that he quotes should teach them something about what it means to be **sons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “the exhortation from which you should learn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+HEB	12	5	eqol	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν & διαλέγεται	1	the encouragement that instructs you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exhortation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exhort.” Alternate translation: “what Scripture exhorts you, which instructs you” or “how you have been exhorted and instructed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	5	b1wh	writing-quotations	τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἥτις ὑμῖν ὡς υἱοῖς διαλέγεται	1	the encouragement that instructs you	Here, the author introduces a quotation that continues through the following verse. He quotes from [Proverbs 3:11–12](../pro/03/11.md), which are words that Solomon wrote to his children. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “the exhortation from Scripture that instructs you as sons” or “the exhortation from Proverbs that instructs you as sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	12	5	a7vf	figs-quotations	ὡς υἱοῖς&υἱέ μου, μὴ ὀλιγώρει παιδείας Κυρίου, μηδὲ ἐκλύου ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος	1	My son … corrected by him	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. If you do, you will need to translate the clauses in the next verse in the same way. Alternate translation: “as sons not to make light of the discipline of the Lord, as a son, nor to become weary when being reproved by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	12	5	e6a9	figs-gendernotations	ὡς υἱοῖς&υἱέ μου	1	as sons … My son	Although the words **sons** and **son** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all children, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “as sons and daughters: ‘My child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	12	5	a7vf	figs-quotations	ὡς υἱοῖς & υἱέ μου, μὴ ὀλιγώρει παιδείας Κυρίου, μηδὲ ἐκλύου ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος	1	My son … corrected by him	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. If you do, you will need to translate the clauses in the next verse in the same way. Alternate translation: “as sons not to make light of the discipline of the Lord, as a son, nor to become weary when being reproved by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	12	5	e6a9	figs-gendernotations	ὡς υἱοῖς & υἱέ μου	1	as sons … My son	Although the words **sons** and **son** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all children, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “as sons and daughters: ‘My child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	12	5	d21i	figs-parallelism	μὴ ὀλιγώρει παιδείας Κυρίου, μηδὲ ἐκλύου ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος	1	My son … corrected by him	These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both sentences in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “do not make light of the discipline of the Lord; yes, do not become weary when being reproved by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	12	5	cxe9	figs-yousingular	μὴ ὀλιγώρει&μηδὲ ἐκλύου	1	do not think lightly of the Lord’s discipline, nor grow weary	Since the quotation is addressed to one **son**, the commands in this verse are also addressed to only one person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+HEB	12	5	cxe9	figs-yousingular	μὴ ὀλιγώρει & μηδὲ ἐκλύου	1	do not think lightly of the Lord’s discipline, nor grow weary	Since the quotation is addressed to one **son**, the commands in this verse are also addressed to only one person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	12	5	se3v	figs-idiom	μὴ ὀλιγώρει παιδείας	1	do not think lightly of the Lord’s discipline, nor grow weary	Here, the phrase **make light of** indicates that a person does not take something seriously or considers it to be unimportant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “take seriously the discipline” or “do not ignore the discipline” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	5	s5d6	figs-abstractnouns	παιδείας Κυρίου	1	do not think lightly of the Lord’s discipline, nor grow weary	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **discipline**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “discipline” or “train.” Alternate translation: “of the Lord disciplining you” or “of it when the Lord disciplines you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	5	ktf9		μηδὲ ἐκλύου	1	do not think lightly of the Lord’s discipline, nor grow weary	See how you translated the same idea in [12:3](../12/03.md), where the ULT translates the same word with the phrase “giving up.”
 HEB	12	5	i1a6	figs-activepassive	ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος	1	you are corrected by him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **son**, who is **reproved**, rather than focusing on the **Lord**, who does the “reproving.” Alternate translation: “when God is reproving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	6	cwpc	figs-quotations	ὃν γὰρ ἀγαπᾷ Κύριος, παιδεύει, μαστιγοῖ δὲ πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται.	1	every son whom he receives	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. If you do, you will need to translate the clauses in the previous verse in the same way. Alternate translation: “For whom the Lord loves, he disciplines, and he whips every son whom he welcomes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	12	6	sap0	figs-parallelism	ὃν&ἀγαπᾷ Κύριος, παιδεύει, μαστιγοῖ δὲ πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται	1	every son whom he receives	These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both sentences in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord loves, he disciplines; yes, he whips every son whom he welcomes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+HEB	12	6	sap0	figs-parallelism	ὃν & ἀγαπᾷ Κύριος, παιδεύει, μαστιγοῖ δὲ πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται	1	every son whom he receives	These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both sentences in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord loves, he disciplines; yes, he whips every son whom he welcomes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	12	6	yiyw	figs-metaphor	μαστιγοῖ	1	every son whom he receives	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the **Lord** “whipped” or flogged his “sons.” He speaks in this way because “whipping” was a common form of punishment and training in his culture. He means that God acts in ways that cause his “sons” pain, but he does this to train and discipline them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “he is like a father who whips” or “he painfully disciplines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	6	zu3c	figs-gendernotations	υἱὸν	1	every son whom he receives	Although the word **son** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to any child, either male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “son and daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	12	6	vvrb	figs-metaphor	παραδέχεται	1	every son whom he receives	Here the author speaks of God acknowledging or claiming someone as a **son** as if God were “welcoming” the **son** into his house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “he acknowledges” or “he approves of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1775,36 +1775,36 @@ HEB	12	7	j6a5	figs-explicit	ὑπομένετε	1	God deals with you as with son
 HEB	12	7	iq4n		εἰς παιδείαν	1	God deals with you as with sons	Here, the phrase **for discipline** could indicate: (1) the purpose for which the audience should **Endure**. Alternate translation: “so that you are disciplined” or “for the sake of discipline” (2) how they should understand the sufferings that they **Endure**. Alternate translation: “suffering as discipline” or “suffering, since it is discipline”
 HEB	12	7	v1gu	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς παιδείαν	1	God deals with you as with sons	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **discipline**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “discipline” or “train.” Alternate translation: “so that you are disciplined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	7	upgq	figs-explicit	ὡς υἱοῖς ὑμῖν προσφέρεται ὁ Θεός	1		Here the author is not stating that God is treating them “as if” they were sons, although they are really not. Rather, he means that God is treating them **as** what they are: **sons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the audience really are **sons**. Alternate translation: “God is treating you as the sons that you are” or “God is treating you like this since you are sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	12	7	i3k4	figs-gendernotations	υἱοῖς&υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παιδεύει πατήρ	1	sons … son	Although the words **sons**, **son**, and **father** are masculine, the author of the quotation is using them to refer to any children and parents, whether male or female. He uses the masculine forms because **discipline** was most commonly given by fathers to sons in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters … son or daughter is there whom his or her parents do not discipline” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	12	7	i3k4	figs-gendernotations	υἱοῖς & υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παιδεύει πατήρ	1	sons … son	Although the words **sons**, **son**, and **father** are masculine, the author of the quotation is using them to refer to any children and parents, whether male or female. He uses the masculine forms because **discipline** was most commonly given by fathers to sons in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters … son or daughter is there whom his or her parents do not discipline” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	12	7	k09m	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	sons … son	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of how “enduring” suffering means that **God is treating** the audience **as sons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	12	7	jb38	figs-rquestion	τίς&υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παιδεύει πατήρ?	1	what son is there whom his father does not discipline?	The author is using the question form to remind his readers of something he thinks they already know. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate the question with a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “there is no son whom his father does not discipline!” or “every son is disciplined by his father!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+HEB	12	7	jb38	figs-rquestion	τίς & υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παιδεύει πατήρ?	1	what son is there whom his father does not discipline?	The author is using the question form to remind his readers of something he thinks they already know. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate the question with a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “there is no son whom his father does not discipline!” or “every son is disciplined by his father!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	12	8	fdu3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Here, the word **But** introduces a further development in the author’s argument. It does not introduce a contrast with what the author just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next part of an argument, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	12	8	xlp3	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ&χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας&ἄρα&ἐστε	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Here the author uses the conditional form to show that being **without discipline** means that they are **illegitimate and not his sons**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “were you without discipline … then you would be” or “if ever you were without discipline … then you would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+HEB	12	8	xlp3	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας & ἄρα & ἐστε	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Here the author uses the conditional form to show that being **without discipline** means that they are **illegitimate and not his sons**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “were you without discipline … then you would be” or “if ever you were without discipline … then you would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 HEB	12	8	kwc6	figs-abstractnouns	χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας, ἧς μέτοχοι γεγόνασι πάντες	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **discipline**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “discipline” or “train.” Alternate translation: “if you are not disciplined, which all men have participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	12	8	kdgp	figs-gendernotations	πάντες&υἱοί	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Although the words **{men}** and **sons** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “all people … his sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+HEB	12	8	kdgp	figs-gendernotations	πάντες & υἱοί	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Although the words **{men}** and **sons** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “all people … his sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	12	8	gks9	figs-idiom	ἧς μέτοχοι γεγόνασι πάντες	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Here, to be **partakers** in something means to experience that thing. Here, the phrase means that **all {men}** have experienced **discipline**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in which all men have shared” or “which all men have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	8	suc5	figs-doublet	νόθοι καὶ οὐχ υἱοί	1	But if you are without discipline, which all people share in	Here, the words **illegitimate** and **not his sons** function together to identify children who do not have the status of **sons**. In the author’s culture, an **illegitimate** child had one parent who was not fully recognized as a spouse. For example, the woman might not be married to the man, or one of the parents might not be a citizen of the city or country, or one parent might be a slave or concubine. In each of these cases, the child would not receive the full status of “son” and would thus be **illegitimate**. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify a child who does not have full status or honor. Alternate translation: “illegitimate sons” or “not true sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-HEB	12	9	r3qx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἶτα&μὲν&δὲ	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	Here, the word **Furthermore** indicates that the author is about to make another argument for why the audience should accept God’s discipline. The phrase **on the one hand** indicates that this argument is in two parts. The second part begins with the phrase **on the other hand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words and phrases that clearly introduce a further argument that is in two parts. Alternate translation: “In addition, at one time … but now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	12	9	s980	figs-idiom	τοὺς&τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρας	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	Here, the phrase **fathers of our flesh** identifies the **fathers** as those who raised the author and audience when they were children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these kinds of **fathers** in contrast to God as a Father. Alternate translation: “our earthly fathers” or “our fathers on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	12	9	r4lb	figs-rquestion	οὐ πολὺ&μᾶλλον ὑποταγησόμεθα τῷ Πατρὶ τῶν πνευμάτων, καὶ ζήσομεν?	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	The author is using the question form to encourage the audience to agree with him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate the question as an exhortation or exclamation. Alternate translation: “we should much more be subjected to the Father of the spirits and live.” or “we will much more be subjected to the Father of the spirits and live!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-HEB	12	9	kng2	figs-activepassive	οὐ πολὺ&μᾶλλον ὑποταγησόμεθα	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “we” subject ourselves. Alternate translation: “will we not much more subject ourselves” or “will we not much more submit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	12	9	r3qx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἶτα & μὲν & δὲ	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	Here, the word **Furthermore** indicates that the author is about to make another argument for why the audience should accept God’s discipline. The phrase **on the one hand** indicates that this argument is in two parts. The second part begins with the phrase **on the other hand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words and phrases that clearly introduce a further argument that is in two parts. Alternate translation: “In addition, at one time … but now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	12	9	s980	figs-idiom	τοὺς & τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρας	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	Here, the phrase **fathers of our flesh** identifies the **fathers** as those who raised the author and audience when they were children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these kinds of **fathers** in contrast to God as a Father. Alternate translation: “our earthly fathers” or “our fathers on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	12	9	r4lb	figs-rquestion	οὐ πολὺ & μᾶλλον ὑποταγησόμεθα τῷ Πατρὶ τῶν πνευμάτων, καὶ ζήσομεν?	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	The author is using the question form to encourage the audience to agree with him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate the question as an exhortation or exclamation. Alternate translation: “we should much more be subjected to the Father of the spirits and live.” or “we will much more be subjected to the Father of the spirits and live!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+HEB	12	9	kng2	figs-activepassive	οὐ πολὺ & μᾶλλον ὑποταγησόμεθα	1	How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live!	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “we” subject ourselves. Alternate translation: “will we not much more subject ourselves” or “will we not much more submit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	9	cl95	figs-possession	τῷ Πατρὶ τῶν πνευμάτων	1	the Father of spirits	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that God is **Father** in connection with **the spirits**, probably the **spirits** of the author and audience. The author uses this construction to contrast God as **Father** with the **fathers of our flesh**. So, God is a **Father** in relation to our **spirits**, while humans are **fathers** in relation to our **flesh**. If possible, use a construction that is similar to how you translated **fathers of our flesh**. Alternate translation: “to the heavenly Father” or “to the Father in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	12	9	xk8n		τῶν πνευμάτων	1	the Father of spirits	Here, the phrase **the spirits** could refer to: (1) the **spirits** of the author and audience, in contrast to their **flesh**. Alternate translation: “of our spirits” (2) all **spirits**, including human **spirits** and angels, who are **spirits** (see [1:7](../01/07.md)). Alternate translation: “of all spirits”
 HEB	12	9	pem8	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ζήσομεν	1	and live	Here, the word **and** introduces the result of being **subjected to the Father of the spirits**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “so that we will live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	12	9	vize	figs-explicit	ζήσομεν	1	and live	Here, the word **live** refers to receiving eternal life from God, not just to staying alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “receive everlasting life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	12	10	qpwr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ&δὲ	1	so that we can share in his holiness	Here, the word **For** indicates that the author is about to explain further the contrast between how earthly fathers train people and how God trains people. The word **indeed** indicates that this argument is in two parts. The second part begins with the word **but**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words and phrases that clearly introduce an explanation that is in two parts. Alternate translation: “Even more, on the one hand … but on the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	12	10	qpwr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ & δὲ	1	so that we can share in his holiness	Here, the word **For** indicates that the author is about to explain further the contrast between how earthly fathers train people and how God trains people. The word **indeed** indicates that this argument is in two parts. The second part begins with the word **but**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words and phrases that clearly introduce an explanation that is in two parts. Alternate translation: “Even more, on the one hand … but on the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	12	10	a1ts	figs-idiom	πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμέρας	1	so that we can share in his holiness	Here, the phrase **for a few days** refers to a brief period of time, specifically the time in which a person is a child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to a short period of time. Alternate translation: “during our childhood” or “for a few years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	10	k87r	figs-idiom	κατὰ τὸ δοκοῦν αὐτοῖς	1	so that we can share in his holiness	Here, the phrase **according to {what} seems {best} to them** indicates that parents “discipline” in whatever way they think is proper or fitting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to a person doing what they think is right or proper. Alternate translation: “as they thought best” or “in whatever ways they chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	10	bdqj	figs-pastforfuture	τὸ δοκοῦν	1	so that we can share in his holiness	Here, the author uses the present tense to refer to what “seemed” best during the time when the parents **were disciplining {us}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is most appropriate for this time. Alternate translation: “what seemed best” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-HEB	12	10	hq8j	figs-ellipsis	ὁ&ἐπὶ τὸ συμφέρον	1	so that we can share in his holiness	The second half of this verse leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “he disciplines us to benefit us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+HEB	12	10	hq8j	figs-ellipsis	ὁ & ἐπὶ τὸ συμφέρον	1	so that we can share in his holiness	The second half of this verse leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “he disciplines us to benefit us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	12	10	r2ci	figs-explicit	μεταλαβεῖν τῆς ἁγιότητος αὐτοῦ	1	so that we can share in his holiness	Here, to **share** God’s **holiness** means to be like God in being “holy,” that is, set apart and free from sin. It does not mean that we take some **holiness** from God, who would now be less holy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that we are holy like God is, not that we take God’s **holiness** away. Alternate translation: “so that we might participate in the holiness that God has” or “so that we might have the kind of holiness that God has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	10	l1a3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἁγιότητος αὐτοῦ	1	so that we can share in his holiness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **holiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “holy.” Alternate translation: “how he is holy” or “the way that he is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	11	ecx4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here, the word **Now** introduces a further development in the author’s argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces development or leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	12	11	y7v6	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσα&παιδεία πρὸς μὲν τὸ παρὸν, οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι, ἀλλὰ λύπης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **discipline**, **joy**, and **pain**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “discipline” and adjectives such as “joyful” and “painful.” Alternate translation: “being disciplined does not seem like a joyful thing at the present, but a painful thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	12	11	kjt6	figs-idiom	πρὸς&τὸ παρὸν	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here, the phrase **at the present** refers to time during which the **discipline** happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to that period of time. Alternate translation: “at the moment” or “while it is experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	12	11	jmzj	writing-pronouns	αὐτῆς&ἀποδίδωσιν	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	In both places, the word **it** refers back to **discipline**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to what **it** refers. Alternate translation: “the discipline produces … this discipline” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	12	11	g13e	figs-metaphor	καρπὸν εἰρηνικὸν&ἀποδίδωσιν δικαιοσύνης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here, the author speaks of the result or outcome of discipline as if it were **fruit** that the discipline **produces**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it leads to the peaceful result of righteousness” or “it brings about a peaceful outcome of righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	12	11	xt2w	figs-possession	καρπὸν εἰρηνικὸν&δικαιοσύνης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here the author uses the possessive form to identify **peaceful fruit** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. In this case, the **fruit** is **peaceful** because the result of the discipline is **peaceful** instead of being painful. Alternate translation: “peaceful fruit that is righteousness” (2) be **righteousness** as well as “peace.” In this case, both **peaceful** and **righteousness** describe what the **fruit** is. Alternate translation: “the fruit that is peace and righteousness” (3) have its source in **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the peaceful fruit that comes from righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	12	11	y7v6	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσα & παιδεία πρὸς μὲν τὸ παρὸν, οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι, ἀλλὰ λύπης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **discipline**, **joy**, and **pain**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “discipline” and adjectives such as “joyful” and “painful.” Alternate translation: “being disciplined does not seem like a joyful thing at the present, but a painful thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	12	11	kjt6	figs-idiom	πρὸς & τὸ παρὸν	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here, the phrase **at the present** refers to time during which the **discipline** happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to that period of time. Alternate translation: “at the moment” or “while it is experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	12	11	jmzj	writing-pronouns	αὐτῆς & ἀποδίδωσιν	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	In both places, the word **it** refers back to **discipline**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to what **it** refers. Alternate translation: “the discipline produces … this discipline” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	12	11	g13e	figs-metaphor	καρπὸν εἰρηνικὸν & ἀποδίδωσιν δικαιοσύνης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here, the author speaks of the result or outcome of discipline as if it were **fruit** that the discipline **produces**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “it leads to the peaceful result of righteousness” or “it brings about a peaceful outcome of righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	12	11	xt2w	figs-possession	καρπὸν εἰρηνικὸν & δικαιοσύνης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	Here the author uses the possessive form to identify **peaceful fruit** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. In this case, the **fruit** is **peaceful** because the result of the discipline is **peaceful** instead of being painful. Alternate translation: “peaceful fruit that is righteousness” (2) be **righteousness** as well as “peace.” In this case, both **peaceful** and **righteousness** describe what the **fruit** is. Alternate translation: “the fruit that is peace and righteousness” (3) have its source in **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the peaceful fruit that comes from righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	12	11	l9g3	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνης	1	it produces the peaceful fruit of righteousness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “just” or “righteous.” Alternate translation: “of righteous living” or “of acting justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	11	xbg8	figs-metaphor	τοῖς δι’ αὐτῆς γεγυμνασμένοις	1	who have been trained by it	Here, the phrase **having been trained** refers to how athletes physically “train” themselves for competition. The author uses this language to indicate that the “training” is difficult but produces results. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “for the ones having been instructed through it” or “for the ones who learned from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	11	gaor	figs-activepassive	τοῖς δι’ αὐτῆς γεγυμνασμένοις	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **trained** rather than focusing on the person doing the “training.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it by using **it**, that is, the **discipline**. Alternate translation: “for the ones whom God has trained by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1820,11 +1820,11 @@ HEB	12	13	jv3l	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ποσὶν ὑμῶν	1	Make straight pa
 HEB	12	13	i19d	figs-metaphor	μὴ τὸ χωλὸν ἐκτραπῇ	1	what is lame will not be sprained	Here the author speaks of those who are not confidently trusting and obeying God as if they were **lame**. These people are in danger of ceasing to believe at all, which the author refers to as if it were a joint being **dislocated**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “the weak in faith might not be lost” or “those who are struggling might not give up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	13	qmq7	translate-unknown	τὸ χωλὸν	1	straight paths	Here, the word **lame** describes a body part, especially a leg or foot, that does not function as it should. Someone who has a **lame** leg or foot usually limps and cannot walk or run well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to legs or feet that do not work properly. Alternate translation: “the limping” or “the injured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	12	13	yytx	figs-nominaladj	τὸ χωλὸν	1	straight paths	The author is using the adjective **lame** as a noun in order to refer to any body part that is **lame**, and by extension, any person with a **lame** body part. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the lame body parts” or “the people who are lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-HEB	12	13	euf9	translate-unknown	μὴ&ἐκτραπῇ	1	will not be sprained	Here, the word **dislocated** refers to how a joint can become disconnected or improperly connected. When this happens, the arm or leg hangs loosely and does not work as it should. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a disconnected joint. Alternate translation: “might not be put out of joint” or “might not be disconnected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	12	13	euf9	translate-unknown	μὴ & ἐκτραπῇ	1	will not be sprained	Here, the word **dislocated** refers to how a joint can become disconnected or improperly connected. When this happens, the arm or leg hangs loosely and does not work as it should. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a disconnected joint. Alternate translation: “might not be put out of joint” or “might not be disconnected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	12	13	c8e5	figs-activepassive	μὴ τὸ χωλὸν ἐκτραπῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the lame** that is **dislocated** rather than focusing on whatever does the “dislocating.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase the clause so that it is active in form. Alternate translation: “nothing would dislocate the lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	13	wq18	figs-activepassive	ἰαθῇ δὲ μᾶλλον	1	rather be healed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **healed** rather than focusing on whatever does the “healing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase the clause so that it is active in form. Alternate translation: “but rather might become well” or “but rather might heal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	14	g22e	figs-metaphor	διώκετε	1		Here the author speaks as if he wants the audience to run after and try to capture **peace** and **sanctification**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to act for **peace** and **sanctification** as persistently as someone who “pursues” someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “Consistently act in” or “Seek after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	12	14	h45r	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην&μετὰ πάντων, καὶ τὸν ἁγιασμόν	1	Pursue peace with everyone	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **peace** and **sanctify**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “peaceful” and “holy.” Alternate translation: “peaceful ways of living with all men, and the holy way of living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	12	14	h45r	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην & μετὰ πάντων, καὶ τὸν ἁγιασμόν	1	Pursue peace with everyone	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **peace** and **sanctify**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “peaceful” and “holy.” Alternate translation: “peaceful ways of living with all men, and the holy way of living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	14	p3df		μετὰ πάντων	1	Pursue peace with everyone	Here, the phrase **with all {men}** could describe: (1) whom the audience should be at **peace** with. Alternate translation: “in your relationships with all men” (2) who else “pursues peace.” Alternate translation: “along with all men”
 HEB	12	14	kmfz	figs-explicit	πάντων	1	Pursue peace with everyone	Here, the phrase **all {men}** could refer to: (1) all people, both believers and unbelievers. Alternate translation: “all humans” (2) all believers. Alternate translation: “all fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	14	i5fm	figs-gendernotations	πάντων	1	Pursue peace with everyone	Although the phrase **all {men}** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “all people” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -1846,14 +1846,14 @@ HEB	12	17	fot6			0	he was rejected	Here the author refers to a story about what
 HEB	12	17	lxc8	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	he was rejected	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the audience should avoid being like Esau and stay away from those who are like Esau. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “Do not be like that, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	12	17	jlb9	figs-abstractnouns	κληρονομῆσαι τὴν εὐλογίαν	1	he was rejected	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **blessing**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “bless.” Alternate translation: “to be blessed by his father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	17	j6x8	figs-activepassive	ἀπεδοκιμάσθη	1	he was rejected	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Esau, who **was rejected**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “rejecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author could imply that: (1) Esau’s father Isaac did it. Alternate translation: “Isaac his father rejected him” (2) God did it. Alternate translation: “God rejected him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	12	17	q447	figs-idiom	μετανοίας&τόπον οὐχ εὗρεν	1	he was rejected	Here, the clause **he found no place {for} repentance** was a common way in the author’s culture to refer to the opportunity or ability to “repent”. More specifically, the author could be referring to: (1) a chance to change a situation or decision. Alternate translation: “he had no opportunity to change his actions” (2) the ability to feel remorse or sorrow for what he had done. Alternate translation: “he could not feel remorse” or “he could not regret what he had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	12	17	q447	figs-idiom	μετανοίας & τόπον οὐχ εὗρεν	1	he was rejected	Here, the clause **he found no place {for} repentance** was a common way in the author’s culture to refer to the opportunity or ability to “repent”. More specifically, the author could be referring to: (1) a chance to change a situation or decision. Alternate translation: “he had no opportunity to change his actions” (2) the ability to feel remorse or sorrow for what he had done. Alternate translation: “he could not feel remorse” or “he could not regret what he had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	12	17	d6he	figs-abstractnouns	μετανοίας	1	because he found no opportunity for repentance	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **repentance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “repent.” The person who does the **repentance** could be (1) Esau. Alternate translation: “to repent” or “to reverse his actions” (2) Isaac, Esau’s father. Alternate translation: “to change his father’s mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	12	17	uq4m	writing-pronouns	αὐτήν	1	because he found no opportunity for repentance	Here, the word **it** could refer to: (1) **repentance**. Alternate translation: “repentance” or “to reverse his actions” (2) **the blessing**. Alternate translation: “the blessing” or “to be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	12	17	b7k3	figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	even though he sought it with tears	Here, the word **tears** refers to the action of crying or weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the action of creating the **tears**. Alternate translation: “with weeping” as “while he cried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	12	18	xti4			0	Connecting Statement:	In [12:18–21](../12/18.md), the author refers to what happened when the Israelites left Egypt and arrived a mountain named **Sinai**. God came down to this mountain to create a covenant with the Israelites, and Moses met him on the mountain and received God’s commands and promises. When God came to the mountain, there were loud sounds, fire, and dark clouds, and God commanded that nobody should go up the mountain except for Moses and Aaron. The Israelites were afraid and asked Moses to speak to God for them. You can read about this story in [Exodus 19:9–20:21](../exo/19/09.md) and [Deuteronomy 4:9–5:31](../deu/04/09.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	12	18	wjh3	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For you have not come to a mountain that can be touched	Here, the word **For** introduces a further reason (which is found in [12:18–24](../12/18.md)) for why the audience should do what the author has encouraged them to do in [12:14–17](../12/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for exhortations or commands, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You should do all those things, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	12	18	a43l	figs-explicit	οὐ&προσεληλύθατε, ψηλαφωμένῳ	1	For you have not come to a mountain that can be touched	Here the author assumes that his audience knows that **{what} can be touched** is the mountain named Sinai that the Israelites did **come to** after they left the land of Egypt. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “you have not come, as the Israelites did, to a mountain that can be touched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	12	18	y1ed	figs-go	οὐ&προσεληλύθατε	1		Here, the phrase **come to** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. The author is contrasting the audience, who did not **come to** Mount Sinai, with the Israelites, who did **come to** Mount Sinai. God did not allow them to go up on the mountain, so **come to** means that they drew near to the mountain but did not climb on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in something’s presence or near to it. Alternate translation: “you have not drawn near to” or “you have not come into the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+HEB	12	18	a43l	figs-explicit	οὐ & προσεληλύθατε, ψηλαφωμένῳ	1	For you have not come to a mountain that can be touched	Here the author assumes that his audience knows that **{what} can be touched** is the mountain named Sinai that the Israelites did **come to** after they left the land of Egypt. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “you have not come, as the Israelites did, to a mountain that can be touched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	12	18	y1ed	figs-go	οὐ & προσεληλύθατε	1		Here, the phrase **come to** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. The author is contrasting the audience, who did not **come to** Mount Sinai, with the Israelites, who did **come to** Mount Sinai. God did not allow them to go up on the mountain, so **come to** means that they drew near to the mountain but did not climb on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in something’s presence or near to it. Alternate translation: “you have not drawn near to” or “you have not come into the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	12	18	w6j6	figs-activepassive	ψηλαφωμένῳ	1	that can be touched	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to emphasize that the mountain is something that people can “touch.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “what humans can touch” or “what is touchable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	18	aspl	translate-unknown	ψηλαφωμένῳ	1	that can be touched	Here, the phrase **{what} can be touched** describes something that one can experience with the sense of “touch.” In other words, a person can feel this thing with their hands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that describes something that a person can feel using the sense of touch. Alternate translation: “what can be held” or “what can be handled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	12	18	g8qe	figs-infostructure	καὶ κεκαυμένῳ πυρὶ	1	that can be touched	Here, the word **blazing** could: (1) modify **fire**. Alternate translation: “and to a fire that blazes” (2) be parallel with **{what} can be touched**. Alternate translation: “and is burning, to fire” or “and is blazing with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ HEB	12	19	gpme	figs-possession	φωνῇ ῥημάτων	1	nor to a voice that s
 HEB	12	19	x2qk	figs-metonymy	φωνῇ ῥημάτων	1	nor to a voice that speaks words whose hearers begged that not another word be spoken to them	Here, the word **voice** refers to someone speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “to the speaking of words” or “to words being spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	12	19	qw1w	writing-pronouns	ἧς	1	nor to a voice that speaks words whose hearers begged that not another word be spoken to them	Here, the word **which** refers to the **voice**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **which** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “of which voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	12	19	dxlf	figs-idiom	μὴ προστεθῆναι αὐτοῖς λόγον	1	nor to a voice that speaks words whose hearers begged that not another word be spoken to them	Here, the phrase **a word to be added to them** refers to speaking more words to the people who are listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to saying more words to people. Alternate translation: “no more words to be spoken to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	12	19	a9uh	figs-activepassive	μὴ προστεθῆναι&λόγον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to avoid stating who would “add” any more “words.” If you must state who would do the action, the author implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not to add a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	12	19	a9uh	figs-activepassive	μὴ προστεθῆναι & λόγον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to avoid stating who would “add” any more “words.” If you must state who would do the action, the author implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not to add a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	19	wb0p	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the word **them** refers to **the ones having heard**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **them** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “to them, the ones who heard” or “to themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	12	20	rmaq	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	what was commanded	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Israelites “begged for not a word to be added” ([12:19](../12/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “That was because” or “They begged for this since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	12	20	p7qu	figs-activepassive	τὸ διαστελλόμενον	1	what was commanded	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **ordered** rather than focusing on the person doing the “ordering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “what God ordered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1877,7 +1877,7 @@ HEB	12	21	a7a1	figs-explicit	τὸ φανταζόμενον	1	it must be stoned
 HEB	12	21	qsif	figs-activepassive	τὸ φανταζόμενον	1	it must be stoned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **made visible** rather than focusing on the person making it **visible**. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “the thing that God made visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	21	en2n	writing-quotations	εἶπεν	1	it must be stoned	Here, the author could be referring to [Deuteronomy 9:19](../deu/09/19.md), where Moses expresses fear when the people make an idol and worship it. On the other hand, the author could be referring to [Exodus 3:6](../exo/03/06.md), which describes how Moses “trembled” when God appeared to him in a burning bush. Most likely, the author is simply describing Moses’ reaction to what he experienced without quoting directly from any Old Testament passage. Introduce the quotation as words that Moses said, and If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include a footnote that references one or both of the passages that the quotation could refer to. Alternate translation: “spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	12	21	b4hx	figs-quotations	εἶπεν, ἔκφοβός εἰμι καὶ ἔντρομος	1	it must be stoned	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “said that he was terrified and trembling.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-HEB	12	21	gfyu	figs-doublet	ἔκφοβός&καὶ ἔντρομος	1	it must be stoned	Here, the words **terrified** and **trembling** function together to show that **Moses** was very afraid. It is likely that **terrified** describes how Moses felt, while **trembling** describes what happened when he felt **terrified**. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify God as the creator of the city. Alternate translation: “terrified so that I tremble” or “very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	12	21	gfyu	figs-doublet	ἔκφοβός & καὶ ἔντρομος	1	it must be stoned	Here, the words **terrified** and **trembling** function together to show that **Moses** was very afraid. It is likely that **terrified** describes how Moses felt, while **trembling** describes what happened when he felt **terrified**. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify God as the creator of the city. Alternate translation: “terrified so that I tremble” or “very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	12	22	z2id	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Mount Zion	Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with what the audience have not “come to,” which the author has described in [12:18–21](../12/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast with the previous section or idea. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	12	22	wd31	figs-go	προσεληλύθατε	1	Mount Zion	Here, the phrase **come to** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. The author is contrasting the audience, who have **come to Mount Zion**, with the Israelites, who “came to” Mount Sinai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in something’s presence or near to it. Alternate translation: “you have drawn near to” or “you have come into the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	12	22	kdxx		Σιὼν Ὄρει καὶ πόλει Θεοῦ ζῶντος, Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἐπουρανίῳ	1	Mount Zion	Here, the phrases **city of the living God** and **heavenly Jerusalem** could: (1) identify what is on **Mount Zion**. Alternate translation: “Mount Zion and on it the city of the living God, the heavenly Jerusalem” (2) give other names for **Mount Zion**. Alternate translation: “Mount Zion, that is, the city of the living God, the heavenly Jerusalem”
@@ -1891,7 +1891,7 @@ HEB	12	23	j94e	figs-metaphor	πρωτοτόκων	1	the firstborn	Here the autho
 HEB	12	23	e3sc	figs-explicit	ἀπογεγραμμένων ἐν οὐρανοῖς	1	registered in heaven	Here, the phrase **registered in the heavens** refers to how people who lived in or belonged to a city or region would have their names **registered** in a book to indicate that they belonged in that place. Here, people who have their names **registered** in the **heavens** belong to and will receive what is in the **heavens**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whose names have been registered in the heavens” or “whose names are recorded as those who will inherit what is in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	23	km4a	figs-activepassive	ἀπογεγραμμένων	1	registered in heaven	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **registered** rather than focusing on the person doing the “registering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God has registered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	23	xt09		κριτῇ Θεῷ πάντων	1	registered in heaven	Here, the phrase **of all** could go with: (1) **Judge**. Alternate translation: “to God, who is Judge of all” (2) **God**. Alternate translation: “to a Judge, who is God of all”
-HEB	12	23	mwfi	figs-possession	κριτῇ&πάντων	1	registered in heaven	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe to refer to a **Judge** who judges **all** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Judge over all” or “the Judge who judges all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	12	23	mwfi	figs-possession	κριτῇ & πάντων	1	registered in heaven	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe to refer to a **Judge** who judges **all** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Judge over all” or “the Judge who judges all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	12	23	af20	figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1	registered in heaven	The author is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 HEB	12	23	oltb	figs-explicit	πνεύμασι δικαίων	1	registered in heaven	This group of people could be: (1) all the people of God who have died. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of the dead righteous ones” (2) the same group as the **church of the firstborn ones**, that is, all the people of God without distinction. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of all God’s righteous people” (3) all the people of God who lived before Jesus came. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of the righteous Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	23	i7qb	figs-activepassive	τετελειωμένων	1	who have been made perfect	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **made perfect** rather than focusing on the person doing the “perfecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God has made perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1902,20 +1902,20 @@ HEB	12	24	z7uq	figs-metonymy	αἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ	1	blood	Scholars
 HEB	12	24	jn62	figs-explicit	κρεῖττον λαλοῦντι παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ	1	blood	Here the author is referring to a story about how **Abel** was killed by his brother. He has already referred to this story in [11:4](../11/04.md). Here, he focuses on how God tells Abel’s brother that Abel’s blood “cries out” from the ground, with the implication being that Abel’s blood asks God to take vengeance on his brother (see [Genesis 4:10](../gen/04/10.md)). The author here contrasts the blood of **Abel** that cries out for vengeance with the **sprinkled blood** of Jesus, which purifies his people and brings salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “speaking of a better salvation than Abel” or “speaking of salvation rather than the vengeance that Abel spoke of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	24	cggv	figs-ellipsis	παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ	1	blood	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. The author might be implying: (1) **blood speaking**. Alternate translation: “than Abel’s blood speaks” (2) Abel **speaking**. Alternate translation: “than Abel speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	12	25	c9cn	figs-idiom	βλέπετε μὴ παραιτήσησθε	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **see that you do not** is a strong command to diligently or vigilantly avoid doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form that expresses a strong command to pay attention or focus on something. Alternate translation: “Watch out that you do not refuse” or “Be careful to avoid refusing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	12	25	pnn5	figs-explicit	μὴ παραιτήσησθε&παραιτησάμενοι	1		Here, the words **refuse** and **refused** imply that people are “refusing” to do something, but the author does not state what it is directly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that people are “refusing” to listen and obey. Alternate translation: “you do not refuse to listen to … having refused to listen to” or “you do not refuse to obey … having refused to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	12	25	pnn5	figs-explicit	μὴ παραιτήσησθε & παραιτησάμενοι	1		Here, the words **refuse** and **refused** imply that people are “refusing” to do something, but the author does not state what it is directly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that people are “refusing” to listen and obey. Alternate translation: “you do not refuse to listen to … having refused to listen to” or “you do not refuse to obey … having refused to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	12	25	nnk9	writing-pronouns	τὸν λαλοῦντα	1	you do not refuse the one who is speaking	Here, the phrase **the one speaking** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “the one speaking, God” (2) Jesus specifically, whose blood “spoke” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the one speaking, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	12	25	ohmk		εἰ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι οὐκ ἐξέφυγον ἐπὶ γῆς, παραιτησάμενοι τὸν χρηματίζοντα, πολὺ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς οἱ τὸν ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν ἀποστρεφόμενοι;	1	you do not refuse the one who is speaking	Here the author could have meant: (1) a strong statement. Alternate translation: “For if those did not escape, having refused the one warning them on earth, we will so much less escape, we who are turning away from the one from heaven” (2) a rhetorical question. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to start a new sentence at the beginning of the following verse. Alternate translation: “For if those did not escape, having refused the one warning them on earth, how much less will we who are turning away from the one from heaven?”
 HEB	12	25	gkn1	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	if they did not escape	Here the author is speaking as if the lack of “escape” of those who **refused the one warning {them} on earth** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true that they **did not escape**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “because” or “since.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 HEB	12	25	eltr	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1		Here, the word **those** refers to the Israelites who “refused” to obey God. He may have in mind particularly the Israelites who did not obey God and died in the wilderness (see what the author said in [3:7–4:11](../03/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clear to whom **those** refers. Alternate translation: “those Israelites” or “those who drew near to Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	12	25	fy9u	writing-pronouns	ἐπὶ γῆς&τὸν χρηματίζοντα	1	the one who warned them on earth	Here, the phrase **the one warning {them} on earth** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God when he warned them on earth” (2) Moses, who spoke God’s words to the people at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “Moses when he warned them on earth” (3) Jesus specifically. Alternate translation: “Jesus when he warned them on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	12	25	quqe	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ γῆς&ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν	1	the one who warned them on earth	Here, the phrases **on earth** and **from heaven** indicate the places from which God gave his warnings. The phrase **on earth** refers to how God spoke to the Israelites from Mount Sinai when he made the first covenant. The phrase **from heaven** refers to how God speaks from Mount Zion in heaven as he makes the second covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what **on earth** and **from heaven** refer to specifically. Alternate translation: “from a mountain on earth … from a mountain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	12	25	s5lj	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς οἱ&ἀποστρεφόμενοι	1	if we turn away from the one who is warning	Here the author refers to rejecting and disobeying God as if a person were changing direction and **turning away from** him. So, **turning away from** God indicates serious disobedience and rejection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we who are rejecting” or “we who are renouncing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	12	25	fy9u	writing-pronouns	ἐπὶ γῆς & τὸν χρηματίζοντα	1	the one who warned them on earth	Here, the phrase **the one warning {them} on earth** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God when he warned them on earth” (2) Moses, who spoke God’s words to the people at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “Moses when he warned them on earth” (3) Jesus specifically. Alternate translation: “Jesus when he warned them on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	12	25	quqe	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ γῆς & ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν	1	the one who warned them on earth	Here, the phrases **on earth** and **from heaven** indicate the places from which God gave his warnings. The phrase **on earth** refers to how God spoke to the Israelites from Mount Sinai when he made the first covenant. The phrase **from heaven** refers to how God speaks from Mount Zion in heaven as he makes the second covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what **on earth** and **from heaven** refer to specifically. Alternate translation: “from a mountain on earth … from a mountain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	12	25	s5lj	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς οἱ & ἀποστρεφόμενοι	1	if we turn away from the one who is warning	Here the author refers to rejecting and disobeying God as if a person were changing direction and **turning away from** him. So, **turning away from** God indicates serious disobedience and rejection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we who are rejecting” or “we who are renouncing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	12	25	ga99	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς οἱ τὸν ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν ἀποστρεφόμενοι	1	if we turn away from the one who is warning	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “will we escape who are turning away from the one warning us from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	12	25	kmmk	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἡμεῖς οἱ&ἀποστρεφόμενοι	1	if we turn away from the one who is warning	Here the author does not mean that all of the audience were **turning away from** God when he wrote this letter. Rather, he means that every person in the audience could be someone who “turns away from” God, and they will certainly **not escape**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that shows that the audience **turning away from** God is a possibility, not a current fact. Alternate translation: “we, if we turn away from” or “any one of us who turns away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+HEB	12	25	kmmk	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἡμεῖς οἱ & ἀποστρεφόμενοι	1	if we turn away from the one who is warning	Here the author does not mean that all of the audience were **turning away from** God when he wrote this letter. Rather, he means that every person in the audience could be someone who “turns away from” God, and they will certainly **not escape**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that shows that the audience **turning away from** God is a possibility, not a current fact. Alternate translation: “we, if we turn away from” or “any one of us who turns away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 HEB	12	25	lnpe	writing-pronouns	τὸν	3	if we turn away from the one who is warning	Here, the phrase **the one** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God” (2) Jesus specifically. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	12	26	rf4e	figs-metonymy	οὗ ἡ φωνὴ	1	his voice shook the earth	Here, the word **voice** refers to the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to the act of speaking. Alternate translation: “whose speech” or “whose speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	12	26	yxrb	figs-explicit	τότε; νῦν	1	his voice shook the earth	Here, the phrase **at that time** refers to the time when God spoke from Mount Sinai. In contrast, the word **now** refers to the present time, the time when the author is writing this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the time references more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the time of the first covenant … right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	12	26	xekm	translate-unknown	ἐσάλευσεν&ἐγὼ σείσω	1	his voice shook the earth	Here the author uses words that refer to earthquakes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that describe the earth shaking in an earthquake. Alternate translation: “quaked … I myself will quake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	12	26	xekm	translate-unknown	ἐσάλευσεν & ἐγὼ σείσω	1	his voice shook the earth	Here the author uses words that refer to earthquakes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that describe the earth shaking in an earthquake. Alternate translation: “quaked … I myself will quake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	12	26	dr6r	writing-quotations	ἐπήγγελται λέγων	1	his voice shook the earth	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God says to his people. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Haggai 2:6](../hag/02/06.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “he has promised in the Scriptures, saying” or “he has promised when he said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	12	26	rspc	figs-quotations	λέγων, ἔτι ἅπαξ ἐγὼ σείσω, οὐ μόνον τὴν γῆν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸν οὐρανόν	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that still once more he himself will shake not only the earth, but also the heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	12	26	i1c8	figs-idiom	ἔτι ἅπαξ	1	shook … shake	Here, the phrase **Still once** indicates that something has already happened and will happen again, but only one more time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that something will happen one more time. Alternate translation: “Again, but one time only,” or “Once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1924,8 +1924,8 @@ HEB	12	27	ut92		ἔτι ἅπαξ	1	mean the removal of those things that can be
 HEB	12	27	bcew	translate-unknown	δηλοῖ	1	mean the removal of those things that can be shaken, that is, of the things	Here, the word **indicates** refers to what something means or signifies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what words mean or signify. See how you translated this word in [9:8](../09/08.md). Alternate translation: “signifies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	12	27	q2si		μετάθεσιν	1	mean the removal of those things that can be shaken, that is, of the things	Here the word translated **removal** could refer to: (1) a change in content or position. Alternate translation: “the change” or “the transfer” (2) removal or destruction. Alternate translation: “the elimination” or “the eradication”
 HEB	12	27	z6ys	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν σαλευομένων μετάθεσιν, ὡς πεποιημένων	1	mean the removal of those things that can be shaken, that is, of the things	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **removal**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “remove.” Alternate translation: “that God will remove the things being shaken, that is, the things created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	12	27	unla		τῶν σαλευομένων&τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα	1	mean the removal of those things that can be shaken, that is, of the things	Here, the phrase **being shaken** could refer to: (1) how something is or is not **shaken**. Alternate translation: “of the things that are shaken … the things that are not shaken” (2) whether something can be **shaken** or not. Alternate translation: “of the things that can be shaken … the things that cannot be shaken”
-HEB	12	27	l29r		τῶν σαλευομένων&τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα	1	shaken	See how you translated “shook” and “shake” in [Hebrews 12:26](../12/26.md).
+HEB	12	27	unla		τῶν σαλευομένων & τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα	1	mean the removal of those things that can be shaken, that is, of the things	Here, the phrase **being shaken** could refer to: (1) how something is or is not **shaken**. Alternate translation: “of the things that are shaken … the things that are not shaken” (2) whether something can be **shaken** or not. Alternate translation: “of the things that can be shaken … the things that cannot be shaken”
+HEB	12	27	l29r		τῶν σαλευομένων & τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα	1	shaken	See how you translated “shook” and “shake” in [Hebrews 12:26](../12/26.md).
 HEB	12	27	dnpi	figs-activepassive	τῶν σαλευομένων	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **shaken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “of things that God will shake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	12	27	zgjh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὡς πεποιημένων	1		Here, the phrase **that is** could introduce: (1) the way in which things are shaken. In other words, God **created** everything by speaking, and he “shakes” everything by speaking. Alternate translation: “just as they were created” (2) the type of things that are shaken. In other words, only **created** things are **shaken**. Alternate translation: “which are the created things” (3) the reason why things are shaken. In other words, things are **shaken** because they are **created**. Alternate translation: “since they are created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	12	27	s3xt	figs-activepassive	πεποιημένων	1	that have been created	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **created** rather than focusing on the person doing the “creating.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “of the things that God created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1952,7 +1952,7 @@ HEB	13	1	pht5	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ φιλαδελφία μενέτω	1	Connect
 HEB	13	1	cw6j	figs-metaphor	ἡ φιλαδελφία	1	Connecting Statement:	Here the author refers to **brotherly love** because he has identified all believers as “brothers” (see [3:1](../03/01.md); [10:19](../10/19.md)). If possible, express the word **brotherly** here with a word that is related to how you translated “brothers” in those verses. Alternate translation: “love for fellow believers” or “brotherly and sisterly love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	13	1	sf1n	figs-gendernotations	φιλαδελφία	1	Connecting Statement:	Although the word **brotherly** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all siblings, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “love for family” or “sibling love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	13	2	rh7r	figs-litotes	μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθε	1	Do not forget	The phrase **Do not neglect** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how much the audience should focus on **hospitality**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively and include emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Focus on showing” or “Strive to always be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-HEB	13	2	y7cd	figs-abstractnouns	φιλοξενίας&ξενίσαντες	1	hospitality	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hospitality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “hospitable.” Alternate translation: “to be hospitable … have been hospitable to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	13	2	y7cd	figs-abstractnouns	φιλοξενίας & ξενίσαντες	1	hospitality	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hospitality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “hospitable.” Alternate translation: “to be hospitable … have been hospitable to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	13	2	w3kz	writing-pronouns	διὰ ταύτης	1	hospitality	Here, the word **this** refers to **hospitality**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “through hospitality” or “by being hospitable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	13	2	cnvr	figs-explicit	ἔλαθόν	1	hospitality	Here the audience would have inferred that these people did not “know” that the strangers they had **shown hospitality to** were angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “without knowing that they were angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	13	3	gh1n	figs-explicit	μιμνῄσκεσθε	1	as if you were bound with them	Here, the word **Remember** implies not just thinking about someone but also acting to help that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “Remember to care for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1970,18 +1970,18 @@ HEB	13	4	c5rp	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ γάμος	1	Let marriage be respected by e
 HEB	13	4	mbdw		ἐν πᾶσιν	1	Let marriage be respected by everyone	Here, the phrase translated **among all** could refer: (1) to **all** people. Alternate translation: “among all people” (2) to **all** things or areas. Alternate translation: “in all things” or “in every way”
 HEB	13	4	ix79	figs-euphemism	ἡ κοίτη	1	Let the marriage bed be pure	Here, the phrase **the marriage bed** is a polite way to refer to married people having sex. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable polite expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the marital rights” or “having marital sex” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 HEB	13	4	aokv	translate-unknown	ἀμίαντος	1		Here, the word **pure** describes acts that do not defile people or make them repulsive to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. See how you translated this word in [7:26](../07/26.md). Alternate translation: “undefiled” or “without pollution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	13	4	rqyr	figs-doublet	πόρνους&καὶ μοιχοὺς	1		Here, the words **sexually immoral {people}** and **adulterers** function together to identify people who have improper sex. The phrase **sexually immoral {people}** refers generally to anyone who has improper sex. The word **adulterers** refers particularly to married people who have sex with someone besides their own spouse. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase that refers to people who have improper sex. Alternate translation: “those who have improper sex” or “all sexually immoral people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+HEB	13	4	rqyr	figs-doublet	πόρνους & καὶ μοιχοὺς	1		Here, the words **sexually immoral {people}** and **adulterers** function together to identify people who have improper sex. The phrase **sexually immoral {people}** refers generally to anyone who has improper sex. The word **adulterers** refers particularly to married people who have sex with someone besides their own spouse. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase that refers to people who have improper sex. Alternate translation: “those who have improper sex” or “all sexually immoral people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	13	5	r74t	figs-ellipsis	ἀφιλάργυρος ὁ τρόπος	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Much like in the first half of the previous verse ([13:5](../13/05.md)), here the author does not include any verbs. You should use the same form that you used in [13:5](../13/05.md). Alternate translation: “Let your manner of life be free from the love of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	13	5	sz35	figs-abstractnouns	ἀφιλάργυρος ὁ τρόπος	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **life** and **love**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “live” and “love.” Alternate translation: “How you live must be free from loving money” or “You should live in such a way that you do not love money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	13	5	ifbu	figs-idiom	ἀφιλάργυρος	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the phrase **free from** something indicates that a person does not have or experience whatever he or she is **free from**. In this case, being **free from the love of money** means that a person does not love **money** at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “must avoid the love of money” or “must be without the love of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	13	5	g2x1		ἀρκούμενοι	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the phrase **being content** could introduce: (1) the means by which peoples’ **manner of life** can be **free from the love of money**. Alternate translation: “by being content” or “which you can accomplish by being content” (2) a second, positive command. Alternate translation: “and you must be content”
 HEB	13	5	a180	figs-idiom	τοῖς παροῦσιν	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the phrase **things being present** refers to whatever a person owns or possesses at a specific moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what a person owns or possesses. Alternate translation: “with the things that you own” or “with whatever you currently possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	13	5	ycq6	writing-quotations	αὐτὸς γὰρ εἴρηκεν	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God says to the audience. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament. The words do not exactly match any verse in the Greek translation of the Old Testament that we have, but they are very close to the words found in [Deuteronomy 31:6](../deu/31/06.md), [8](../deu/31/08.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “for he himself has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-HEB	13	5	hsep	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸς&εἴρηκεν	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the phrase **he himself** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **he himself** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “God himself has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	13	5	psdx	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς&εἴρηκεν	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes **he**, that is, God. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **he** in your language. Alternate translation: “he, yes he, has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	13	5	d7no	figs-quotations	αὐτὸς&εἴρηκεν, οὐ μή σε ἀνῶ, οὐδ’ οὐ μή σε ἐνκαταλείπω	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he himself has said that he will never leave you nor never will he forsake you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	13	5	hsep	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸς & εἴρηκεν	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the phrase **he himself** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **he himself** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “God himself has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	13	5	psdx	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & εἴρηκεν	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes **he**, that is, God. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **he** in your language. Alternate translation: “he, yes he, has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+HEB	13	5	d7no	figs-quotations	αὐτὸς & εἴρηκεν, οὐ μή σε ἀνῶ, οὐδ’ οὐ μή σε ἐνκαταλείπω	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he himself has said that he will never leave you nor never will he forsake you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	13	5	er71	figs-parallelism	οὐ μή σε ἀνῶ, οὐδ’ οὐ μή σε ἐνκαταλείπω	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the clauses with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will never leave you; indeed, never will I forsake you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-HEB	13	5	q90d	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μή&οὐδ’ οὐ μή	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	The words translated **never** are two negative words in both places. In the author’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. The word **nor** before the second occurrence of **never** makes the statement even more strongly negative. If your language can use two negatives as the author’s culture did, you could use double negatives here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you could translate with one strong negative word, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “certainly not … and most certainly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+HEB	13	5	q90d	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μή & οὐδ’ οὐ μή	1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	The words translated **never** are two negative words in both places. In the author’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. The word **nor** before the second occurrence of **never** makes the statement even more strongly negative. If your language can use two negatives as the author’s culture did, you could use double negatives here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you could translate with one strong negative word, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “certainly not … and most certainly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	13	5	bxyi	figs-yousingular	σε	-1	Let your conduct be free from the love of money	God is speaking to each person individually, so **you** is singular in both places in this quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	13	6	jcog	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	The Lord is my helper … do to me	Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of what God “has said” as recorded in the previous verse ([13:5](../13/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result or outcome of an action. Alternate translation: “so in response” or “and as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	13	6	is75		θαρροῦντας ἡμᾶς λέγειν	1	The Lord is my helper … do to me	Alternate translation: “we confidently say” or “we say with confidence”
@@ -2005,7 +2005,7 @@ HEB	13	7	k2h9	translate-unknown	τῆς ἀναστροφῆς	1	the result of t
 HEB	13	7	tvu6	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν	1	Imitate their faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “how they believed” or “the way they believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	13	8	gmey	figs-idiom	ὁ αὐτός	1	is the same yesterday, today, and forever	Here, the phrase **the same** identifies a person who does not change who they are and how they act. In other words, a person who is **the same** is always consistent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea of consistency or lack of change. Alternate translation: “remains who he is” or “does not change” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	13	8	dv5g	figs-synecdoche	ἐχθὲς καὶ σήμερον	1	is the same yesterday, today, and forever	Here, the author uses names for specific days to refer to entire periods of time. The word **yesterday** refers to the past, and the word **today** refers to the present. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these time periods in a natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “in the past and in the present” or “back then and now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-HEB	13	8	brbj	figs-merism	ἐχθὲς καὶ σήμερον&καὶ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	is the same yesterday, today, and forever	Here the author uses words that refer to past time, present time, and future time to refer to all of time, that is, to any time during which things happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable construction that refers to all time. Alternate translation: “for all time” or “as he was and as he will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+HEB	13	8	brbj	figs-merism	ἐχθὲς καὶ σήμερον & καὶ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	is the same yesterday, today, and forever	Here the author uses words that refer to past time, present time, and future time to refer to all of time, that is, to any time during which things happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable construction that refers to all time. Alternate translation: “for all time” or “as he was and as he will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 HEB	13	9	nbb3	figs-activepassive	μὴ παραφέρεσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **carried away** rather than focusing on the people doing the “carrying.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Do not allow people to carry you away” or “You must not let others carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	13	9	dp5w	figs-metaphor	μὴ παραφέρεσθε	1	Do not be carried away by various strange teachings	Here the author speaks as if the true gospel were a place from which the audience could **be carried away**. By speaking in this way, he means that the **teachings** that the audience have heard will cause them to stop believing the true gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not be led astray” or “Do not be deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	13	9	fe6i	translate-unknown	διδαχαῖς ποικίλαις καὶ ξέναις	1	various strange teachings	Here, the word **various** indicates that there are many different kinds of **teachings**, while **strange** indicates that the **teachings** do not agree with or fit into the true gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to many kinds of **teachings** that do not match or fit with the gospel. Alternate translation: “by many teachings that conflict with the good news” or “by diverse teachings that are out of place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2025,8 +2025,8 @@ HEB	13	10	uhnw	figs-explicit	φαγεῖν οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἐξουσί
 HEB	13	10	d2m2	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἐξουσίαν	1	We have an altar	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **authority**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “authorize.” Alternate translation: “are not authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	13	11	xyvl			0	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here the author refers to some of the commands that God gave for what to do on the special day called “the Day of Atonement.” Once every year, the high priest would slaughter a bull and a goat and sprinkle some of their blood in the inner, most sacred part of the tabernacle. Later, a person would take the carcasses of the bull and the goat and burn them completely outside the area where the Israelites were staying. You can read about these instructions in [Leviticus 16:3–34](../lev/16/03.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote.
 HEB	13	11	cngt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what “the ones serving in the tabernacle” do, specifically what the **high priest** does on the Day of Atonement once every year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces explanation or more information. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Concerning the tabernacle,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	13	11	luf7	figs-activepassive	ὧν&εἰσφέρεται ζῴων τὸ αἷμα περὶ ἁμαρτίας&διὰ τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **blood** that is **brought** rather than focusing on the **high priest** who does the “bringing.” Alternate translation: “the high priest brings the blood of which animals on behalf of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	13	11	n0if	figs-pastforfuture	εἰσφέρεται&κατακαίεται	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here the author could use the present tense because: (1) he is speaking about what God commanded in the Old Testament, which he can read in the present time. Alternate translation: “was brought … were burned up” (2) he is speaking about how, when he wrote this letter, high priests still presented this kind of offering in the temple every year. “is brought every year … are burned up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+HEB	13	11	luf7	figs-activepassive	ὧν & εἰσφέρεται ζῴων τὸ αἷμα περὶ ἁμαρτίας & διὰ τοῦ ἀρχιερέως	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **blood** that is **brought** rather than focusing on the **high priest** who does the “bringing.” Alternate translation: “the high priest brings the blood of which animals on behalf of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	13	11	n0if	figs-pastforfuture	εἰσφέρεται & κατακαίεται	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here the author could use the present tense because: (1) he is speaking about what God commanded in the Old Testament, which he can read in the present time. Alternate translation: “was brought … were burned up” (2) he is speaking about how, when he wrote this letter, high priests still presented this kind of offering in the temple every year. “is brought every year … are burned up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 HEB	13	11	bgw2	figs-idiom	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here, the phrase **on behalf of sin** means that the **blood** is intended to deal with that **sin**. It does not mean that the **blood** from the animals allows the **sin** or encourage the **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to deal with own sin” or “for the forgiveness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	13	11	k3ay	figs-genericnoun	ἁμαρτίας	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here the author is speaking of “sins” in general, not of one particular **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “sins” in general. Alternate translation: “sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 HEB	13	11	q2yf	figs-explicit	τὰ ἅγια	1	the blood of the animals killed for sins is brought by the high priest into the holy place	Here, the phrase **the holy {places}** could refer to: (1) the inner section of the earthly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the inner section of the sanctuary” (2) the earthly sanctuary generally. Alternate translation: “the sanctuary” or “the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2059,12 +2059,12 @@ HEB	13	15	zr2d	figs-synecdoche	χειλέων	1	lips that acknowledge his name	H
 HEB	13	15	v52x	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	his name	Here, the word **name** refers primarily to the person who has that **name**, and it focuses especially on who that person is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “him” or “who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	13	16	eeml	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	Here, the word **But** introduces another exhortation. It does not introduce a contrast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a second command or exhortation, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Even more,” or “Also,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	13	16	ma8c	figs-litotes	μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθε	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	The phrase **let us not neglect** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how much the audience should focus on **the doing of good and sharing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively and include emphasis in another way. See how you translated the similar phrase in [13:2](../13/02.md). Alternate translation: “let us focus on living out” or “let us strive toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-HEB	13	16	hds1	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς&εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **doing** and **sharing**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “do” and “share.” Alternate translation: “to do good and to share” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	13	16	mkye	figs-hendiadys	τῆς&εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	This phrase expresses a single idea by using a phrase and a word connected with **and**. The phrase **doing of good** refers generally to helping others, while the word **sharing** refers to one specific way of **doing** what is **good**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the doing of good by sharing” or “the doing of good, particularly sharing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-HEB	13	16	xtcf	figs-explicit	τῆς&εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	Here the author implies that the **doing of good and sharing** are directed toward other people. He is probably focusing particularly on fellow believers, but he does not emphasize this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom believers should “do good” and with whom they should “share.” Alternate translation: “the doing of good to people and sharing with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	13	16	hds1	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς & εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **doing** and **sharing**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “do” and “share.” Alternate translation: “to do good and to share” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	13	16	mkye	figs-hendiadys	τῆς & εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	This phrase expresses a single idea by using a phrase and a word connected with **and**. The phrase **doing of good** refers generally to helping others, while the word **sharing** refers to one specific way of **doing** what is **good**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the doing of good by sharing” or “the doing of good, particularly sharing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+HEB	13	16	xtcf	figs-explicit	τῆς & εὐποιΐας καὶ κοινωνίας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	Here the author implies that the **doing of good and sharing** are directed toward other people. He is probably focusing particularly on fellow believers, but he does not emphasize this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom believers should “do good” and with whom they should “share.” Alternate translation: “the doing of good to people and sharing with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	13	16	cxb7	figs-nominaladj	εὐποιΐας	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	The author is using the adjective **good** as a noun in order to refer to any act or deed that is **good**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “doing of good deeds” or “doing of good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-HEB	13	16	iq4w	figs-activepassive	τοιαύταις&θυσίαις εὐαρεστεῖται ὁ Θεός	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **God** who is **well-pleased** rather than focusing on what “pleases” him. Alternate translation: “such sacrifices please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	13	16	kp76	figs-metaphor	τοιαύταις&θυσίαις	1	with such sacrifices	Here the author speaks of “doing good and sharing” as if they were **sacrifices**. He speaks in this way to indicate that “doing good and sharing” is what believers present to God, just like the Israelites presented **sacrifices**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “with these things, which are like sacrifices that we offer to him” or “when we do such things for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	13	16	iq4w	figs-activepassive	τοιαύταις & θυσίαις εὐαρεστεῖται ὁ Θεός	1	Let us not forget doing good and helping one another	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **God** who is **well-pleased** rather than focusing on what “pleases” him. Alternate translation: “such sacrifices please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	13	16	kp76	figs-metaphor	τοιαύταις & θυσίαις	1	with such sacrifices	Here the author speaks of “doing good and sharing” as if they were **sacrifices**. He speaks in this way to indicate that “doing good and sharing” is what believers present to God, just like the Israelites presented **sacrifices**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “with these things, which are like sacrifices that we offer to him” or “when we do such things for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	13	17	fid3	figs-doublet	πείθεσθε τοῖς ἡγουμένοις ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑπείκετε	1	keep watch over your souls	Here, the words **Obey** and **submit** function together to exhort the audience to follow their leaders completely. It is possible that **Obey** refers to trust that leads to obedience, while **submit** refers to respecting and obeying a person even if you disagree with him or her. If you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use a single word or phrase that exhorts people to respectfully follow and obey leaders. Alternate translation: “Obediently submit to your leaders” or “Follow your leaders no matter what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	13	17	n5e8	figs-metaphor	ἀγρυπνοῦσιν ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν	1	keep watch over your souls	Here, the author speaks of how the leaders **watch over** the audience as if they stayed up at night guarding their **souls**. He speaks in this way to indicate how much time and energy the leaders spend as they take care of and protect the audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “guard your lives” or “diligently take care of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	13	17	ozhn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὡς	1	keep watch over your souls	Here, the word **as** introduces what the leaders know about themselves. They know that they will **give account** for what they do, and that is why **keep watch**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a person’s motivation for doing something. Alternate translation: “knowing that they are” or “with the recognition that they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -2074,7 +2074,7 @@ HEB	13	17	opzn	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ χαρᾶς	1	not with groaning	If y
 HEB	13	17	z2yp	figs-metonymy	μὴ στενάζοντες	1	not with groaning	Here, the word **groaning** refers to an emotion that leads to **groaning**, particularly sadness or exhaustion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the emotion directly instead of its result. Alternate translation: “not with grief” or “without mourning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	13	17	eanz	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	not with groaning	Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the audience should try to keep their leaders from **groaning**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “because” or “so you should obey them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	13	17	fl8q	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	2	not with groaning	Here, the word **this** refers to how the leaders might **keep watch** with **groaning**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “were they to keep watch over you with groaning, that” or “them leading you with groaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	13	18	xmh1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν; πειθόμεθα&ἔχομεν&ἀναστρέφεσθαι	1	Pray for us	Here, the words **us**, **we**, and **ourselves** do not include the audience. They could refer to: (1) the author and those working with him. Alternate translation: “us who proclaim the good news … we are persuaded … we have … to conduct ourselves” (2) the author and other people who lead the audience. Alternate translation: “us leaders … we are persuaded … we have … to conduct ourselves” (3) just the author. Alternate translation: “me … I am persuaded … I have … to conduct myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+HEB	13	18	xmh1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν; πειθόμεθα & ἔχομεν & ἀναστρέφεσθαι	1	Pray for us	Here, the words **us**, **we**, and **ourselves** do not include the audience. They could refer to: (1) the author and those working with him. Alternate translation: “us who proclaim the good news … we are persuaded … we have … to conduct ourselves” (2) the author and other people who lead the audience. Alternate translation: “us leaders … we are persuaded … we have … to conduct ourselves” (3) just the author. Alternate translation: “me … I am persuaded … I have … to conduct myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 HEB	13	18	d5hf	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **for** could introduce: (1) a reason why he can ask them to pray for him. Alternate translation: “which we request because” (2) another statement that is loosely connected. Alternate translation: “as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	13	18	n6gb	figs-activepassive	πειθόμεθα	1	we are persuaded that we have a clean conscience	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **we** who are **persuaded** rather than focusing on whatever “persuaded” them. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	13	18	m9ge	translate-unknown	καλὴν συνείδησιν ἔχομεν	1	we are persuaded that we have a clean conscience	Here, the phrase **a good conscience** refers to how people know that they have done what is right and feel innocent or clean. A **good conscience** is the opposite of a “wicked conscience,” which the author mentioned in [10:22](../10/22.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies what people experience after they have done something that they know is right. Alternate translation: “we are innocent” or “we have not sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2083,15 +2083,15 @@ HEB	13	18	zqxx	figs-idiom	ἀναστρέφεσθαι	1	we are persuaded that we
 HEB	13	18	qg92	translate-unknown	καλῶς	1	we are persuaded that we have a clean conscience	Here, the word **honorably** describes an action that is right or proper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that similarly describes an action that is right or good. Alternate translation: “rightly” or “well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	13	18	yk45		ἐν πᾶσιν	1	we are persuaded that we have a clean conscience	Here, the phrase **in all** could refer to: (1) every act or deed. Alternate translation: “in all we do” (2) every person. Alternate translation: “toward all people”
 HEB	13	19	vw2e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the word **But** introduces a further development. It does not introduce a contrast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further development or another related exhortation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	13	19	txl5	figs-infostructure	περισσοτέρως&παρακαλῶ τοῦτο ποιῆσαι	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the phrase **even more** could go with: (1) **I encourage**. Alternate translation: “even more I encourage you to do this” (2) **do this**. Alternate translation: “I encourage you to do this even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	13	19	txl5	figs-infostructure	περισσοτέρως & παρακαλῶ τοῦτο ποιῆσαι	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the phrase **even more** could go with: (1) **I encourage**. Alternate translation: “even more I encourage you to do this” (2) **do this**. Alternate translation: “I encourage you to do this even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	13	19	c2o8	figs-explicit	περισσοτέρως	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the phrase **even more** could mean that the author: (1) is encouraging them to pray more than strongly than he did in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “more urgently” or “even more strongly” (2) is urging them more specifically than he did in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “more specifically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	13	19	jy02	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο ποιῆσαι	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the phrase **do this** refers back to what the author asked them to do in the previous verse: to pray (see [13:18](../13/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **do this** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	13	19	iyxx		ἵνα	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) what he wants them to pray for. Alternate translation: “that” (2) the purpose of their prayers. Alternate translation: “in order that”
 HEB	13	19	cg4l	figs-activepassive	ἀποκατασταθῶ	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who would be **restored**, rather than focusing on the person who would do the “restoring.” If you must state who would do the action, the author implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God will restore me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	13	19	h6ah	translate-unknown	ἀποκατασταθῶ	1	that I will be returned to you sooner	Here, the word **restored** refers to how something returns to the way it used to be. Specifically, the author is referring to being with the audience in person, like he used to be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to going to stay with people you have spent time with in the past. Alternate translation: “I will be returned” or “I can come back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	13	20	n66e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section, a blessing from the author to the audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	13	20	op4p	figs-possession	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	Now	Here Paul uses the possessive form the God of peace, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (See [Romans 15:33](../rom/15/33.md); [16:20](../rom/16/20.md); [Philippians 4:9](../php/04/09.md); [1 Thessalonians 5:23](../1th/05/23.md)). In this context, the phrase **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (2) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (3) Both. Alternate translation: “the peaceful God who gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-HEB	13	20	btd0	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ&Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	Now	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “peaceful.” Make sure that your translation fits the option you chose in the previous note about how **God** and **peace** relate. Alternate translation: “the God who makes people peaceful” or “the peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	13	20	op4p	figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	Now	Here Paul uses the possessive form the God of peace, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (See [Romans 15:33](../rom/15/33.md); [16:20](../rom/16/20.md); [Philippians 4:9](../php/04/09.md); [1 Thessalonians 5:23](../1th/05/23.md)). In this context, the phrase **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (2) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (3) Both. Alternate translation: “the peaceful God who gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	13	20	btd0	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	Now	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “peaceful.” Make sure that your translation fits the option you chose in the previous note about how **God** and **peace** relate. Alternate translation: “the God who makes people peaceful” or “the peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	13	20	d8yq	figs-idiom	ὁ ἀναγαγὼν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	brought back from the dead the great shepherd of the sheep, our Lord Jesus	Here the author uses the phrase **brought up** to refer to how God makes someone who has died come back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	13	20	k6n6	figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 HEB	13	20	gn9w	figs-metaphor	τὸν Ποιμένα τῶν προβάτων τὸν μέγαν	1	the great shepherd of the sheep	Here, the author speaks of how Jesus leads and cares for his people as if he were a **shepherd** taking care of and directing his **sheep**. This is an important figure of speech in the Bible, so you should try to preserve the idea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or a footnote to explain the idea. Alternate translation: “the one who is like a shepherd who guides and cares for us who are like his sheep” or “the one who takes care of us like a shepherd takes care of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv
index 62a729fb84..c89ae05fd2 100644
--- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ JAS	1	4	j2p4	figs-personification	ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ ἔργον τέλ
 JAS	1	4	unh4	figs-doublet	τέλειοι καὶ ὁλόκληροι	1	perfect and whole	The words **perfect** and **whole** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. In this context, the word **perfect** does not mean without any flaws. Rather, it refers to something that has reached its goal. The word **whole** describes something that is not missing any of its parts or pieces. Together, the words describe mature Christian character. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea by translating this pair of words with a single expression. Alternate translation: “completely mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JAS	1	4	l7ef		ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι	1	lacking in nothing	You could state this positively in your translation. Alternate translation: “having all that you need” or “being all that you need to be”
 JAS	1	5	du7z	figs-abstractnouns	λείπεται σοφίας	1	lacks wisdom	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “is not sure what would be the wise thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JAS	1	5	q2df		αἰτείτω παρὰ&Θεοῦ	1	let him ask from God	Alternate translation: “let him ask God”
+JAS	1	5	q2df		αἰτείτω παρὰ & Θεοῦ	1	let him ask from God	Alternate translation: “let him ask God”
 JAS	1	5	xu31	figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	it will be given to him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will give it to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	1	6	j010	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πίστει	1	in faith	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “confidently trusting God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	6	y2mk	figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν διακρινόμενος	1	doubting nothing	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative that consists of the negative verb **doubting** and the negative object **nothing** with a positive expression. Alternate translation: “with complete certainty that God will answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ JAS	1	9	j016	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφὸς	1	brother	James is using the term **
 JAS	1	9	j017	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὕψει αὐτοῦ	1	his exaltation	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **exaltation** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the high place he occupies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	9	yxs5	figs-metaphor	τῷ ὕψει αὐτοῦ	1	his exaltation	James is using a spatial metaphor to describe poor believers as if they were in a high place. He wants to convey that God has shown special concern for them. Alternate translation: “the special concern that God has shown for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	10	uzk7	figs-ellipsis	ὁ δὲ πλούσιος, ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ	1	but the rich in his lowliness	James is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “but let the rich boast in his lowliness” or “but let the rich take satisfaction in his lowliness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JAS	1	10	w4ta	figs-nominaladj	ὁ&πλούσιος	1	the rich	James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. It is clear in context that James is speaking of a rich “brother” or “believer,” in parallel with the “lowly brother” he describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a believer who is rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+JAS	1	10	w4ta	figs-nominaladj	ὁ & πλούσιος	1	the rich	James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. It is clear in context that James is speaking of a rich “brother” or “believer,” in parallel with the “lowly brother” he describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a believer who is rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JAS	1	10	j018	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ	1	his lowliness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **lowliness** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the low place he occupies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	10	j019	figs-metaphor	τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ	1	his lowliness	James is using a spatial metaphor to describe rich believers as if they were in a low place in order to indicate that God has taught them humility. Alternate translation: “the humility that God has taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	10	ulk4	figs-explicit	τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ	1	his lowliness	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as UST does, that God has taught rich believers humility by showing them that their wealth does not make them better than other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ JAS	1	12	k3hh	figs-metaphor	λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζ
 JAS	1	12	j031	figs-metaphor	λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς	1	he will receive the crown of life	James is likely not speaking of physical **life** but of spiritual **life**, that is, of living forever in the presence of God after physical death. Alternate translation: “God will honor that person by giving him everlasting life in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	12	hx28	writing-pronouns	ὃν ἐπηγγείλατο τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν	1	which he promised to the ones who love him	In this last clause in the verse, the words **he** and **him** refer to God, not to the person who **endures trial**. Alternate translation: “which God promised to those who love him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JAS	1	13	lh7z	figs-activepassive	ἀπὸ Θεοῦ πειράζομαι	1	I am tempted by God	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is tempting me” or “God is leading me to do something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JAS	1	13	p5cp		ὁ&Θεὸς ἀπείραστός ἐστιν κακῶν	1	God is untempted by evil	Even though the word that ULT translates as **untempted** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers if you translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “evil does not tempt God” or “God’s desires never lead him to do something wrong”
+JAS	1	13	p5cp		ὁ & Θεὸς ἀπείραστός ἐστιν κακῶν	1	God is untempted by evil	Even though the word that ULT translates as **untempted** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers if you translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “evil does not tempt God” or “God’s desires never lead him to do something wrong”
 JAS	1	13	zb13		πειράζει δὲ αὐτὸς οὐδένα	1	and he himself tempts no one	Alternate translation: “and God himself never leads anyone to do anything wrong”
 JAS	1	14	j032	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	James is using the word **But** to indicate a contrast between the wrong idea that God might tempt someone and the truth that each person **is tempted by his own desire**. This is actually a strong contrast, and you may wish to use a strong expression for it. Alternate translation: “No, on the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-JAS	1	14	j033	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος&πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος	1	each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these passive phrases by stating each of these things with active verbal forms. Alternate translation: “each person’s own desire tempts him by enticing him and then dragging him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JAS	1	14	nj9m	figs-personification	ἕκαστος&πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος	1	each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed	James is speaking of **desire** as if it were a living thing that could actively tempt people, entice them, and drag them away captive. Alternate translation: “each person wants to do wrong when he desires something that he should not desire and, because he is attracted to that thing, he commits sin and then cannot stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+JAS	1	14	j033	figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος & πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος	1	each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these passive phrases by stating each of these things with active verbal forms. Alternate translation: “each person’s own desire tempts him by enticing him and then dragging him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JAS	1	14	nj9m	figs-personification	ἕκαστος & πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος	1	each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed	James is speaking of **desire** as if it were a living thing that could actively tempt people, entice them, and drag them away captive. Alternate translation: “each person wants to do wrong when he desires something that he should not desire and, because he is attracted to that thing, he commits sin and then cannot stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JAS	1	14	nle5	figs-events	ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος	1	dragged away and enticed	Since the word translated as **enticed** often means to use bait to trap prey, James may be stressing the result (the captured prey being **dragged away**) by speaking of it before the method that was used to achieve it (baiting a trap). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate that the method came before the result. Alternate translation: “enticed and dragged away” or “dragged away after being enticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 JAS	1	14	z4bd	figs-metaphor	ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος	1	dragged away and enticed	James is speaking of temptation as if the person who gave in to it were captured in a baited trap. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this metaphor as a simile. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wrong thing he desired were bait in a trap that caught him so that a hunter could then drag him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	15	j034	grammar-connect-time-sequential	εἶτα ἡ ἐπιθυμία συλλαβοῦσα τίκτει ἁμαρτίαν	1	Then desire, having conceived, bears sin	James uses the word **Then** to indicate that what he describes in this verse happens after something that he described in the previous verse. However, he does not mean that this happens after a person is “dragged away and enticed,” as he said at the end of that verse. Rather, he means that it happens after a person begins to entertain the temptation of a wrong “desire,” as he said at the beginning of that verse. It may be helpful to your readers to use the word “when” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “When desire has conceived, it bears sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ JAS	1	17	j044	figs-explicit	τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα	1	shadow of turn
 JAS	1	17	g5ge	figs-metaphor	τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα	1	shadow of turning	There could not literally be a **shadow** in God, so this is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “variability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	18	j045		βουληθεὶς, ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς	1	Having willed, he gave birth to us	Alternate translation: “God chose to give birth to us”
 JAS	1	18	mj29	figs-metaphor	βουληθεὶς, ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς	1	Having willed, he gave birth to us	James says that God **gave birth to us** because God gives spiritual life to everyone who believes in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God chose to give us spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JAS	1	18	j046	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς&ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	Here and throughout this letter, James uses the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his readers. Sometimes by extension he also means all believers or all people. In every case, therefore, the pronoun **us** is inclusive, so use the inclusive form if your language makes that distinction. The same applies to the pronoun “our.” However, in some cases the pronoun “we” is exclusive. Notes will identify those places. Everywhere else, the pronoun “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JAS	1	18	j046	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	Here and throughout this letter, James uses the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his readers. Sometimes by extension he also means all believers or all people. In every case, therefore, the pronoun **us** is inclusive, so use the inclusive form if your language makes that distinction. The same applies to the pronoun “our.” However, in some cases the pronoun “we” is exclusive. Notes will identify those places. Everywhere else, the pronoun “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JAS	1	18	j047	figs-possession	λόγῳ ἀληθείας	1	by the word of truth	James is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “by the true word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JAS	1	18	ykq9	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ ἀληθείας	1	by the word of truth	James is using term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “by the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	1	18	j048	figs-abstractnouns	λόγῳ ἀληθείας	1	by the word of truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **truth** by translating the idea behind it with an equivalent expression that uses an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “when we believed the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -99,10 +99,10 @@ JAS	1	18	qh2e	figs-simile	ἀπαρχήν τινα τῶν αὐτοῦ κτισ
 JAS	1	19	dt7i	figs-sentencetypes	ἴστε	1	Know	This Greek form of **Know** could be either imperative or indicative, and so it could mean: (1) if it is an imperative, James is telling his readers to pay attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “This is important” (2) if it is an indicative, James is telling his readers that he is about to remind them of something that they already know. Alternate translation: “You already know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-sentencetypes]])
 JAS	1	19	j051	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοί	1	my beloved brothers	See how you translated this expression in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “my dear fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	19	j052	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	**But** could mean: (1) if **know** is an imperative, then James is using the term **but** as a transitional particle that does not indicate a contrast. If you decided to translate **know** as an imperative, you may have a similar word in your language that you can use for this same purpose. Otherwise, you do not need to translate the term. (2) if **know** is an indicative, then James is using the term **but** to introduce a mild contrast. He is saying that even though his readers already know what he is about to say, he wants to stress it anyway. If you decided to translate **know** as an indicative, you could use a term in your language that indicates a mild contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-JAS	1	19	p728	figs-idiom	ἔστω&πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ταχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, βραδὺς εἰς τὸ λαλῆσαι, βραδὺς εἰς ὀργήν	1	let every man be quick to hear, slow to speak, slow to anger	The expression **slow to speak** does not refer to speaking slowly. Rather, like the expressions before and after it, it is an idiom. Alternate translation: “each of you should listen carefully, speak only after reflecting on what to say, and not lose your tempers easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JAS	1	19	p728	figs-idiom	ἔστω & πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ταχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, βραδὺς εἰς τὸ λαλῆσαι, βραδὺς εἰς ὀργήν	1	let every man be quick to hear, slow to speak, slow to anger	The expression **slow to speak** does not refer to speaking slowly. Rather, like the expressions before and after it, it is an idiom. Alternate translation: “each of you should listen carefully, speak only after reflecting on what to say, and not lose your tempers easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	1	19	ev3v	figs-gendernotations	πᾶς ἄνθρωπος	1	every man	James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “each of you” or “each person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JAS	1	20	j053	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	James uses **For** to introduce the reason why people should not get angry, as he said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You should not get angry, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JAS	1	20	j054	figs-gendernotations	ὀργὴ&ἀνδρὸς	1	the anger of man	James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “human anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+JAS	1	20	j054	figs-gendernotations	ὀργὴ & ἀνδρὸς	1	the anger of man	James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “human anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JAS	1	20	ej4p	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐργάζεται	1	does not work the righteousness of God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **righteousness** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “righteous” or “right.” Alternate translation: “does not fulfill the righteous purposes of God” or “does not accomplish the right things that God wants to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	21	j055	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore	Here James uses **Therefore** to introduce to his readers a statement of what they should do as a result of what he explained to them in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JAS	1	21	hit5	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέμενοι πᾶσαν ῥυπαρίαν καὶ περισσείαν κακίας	1	laying aside all filth and abundance of wickedness	James is speaking of **filth** and **abundance of wickedness** as if they were clothing that could be taken off. By those expressions he means sin and wrong actions (see later notes to this verse). Alternate translation: “stop committing sin and doing so many wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ JAS	1	21	ekl3	figs-personification	τὸν δυνάμενον σῶσαι τὰ
 JAS	1	21	z73e	figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	your souls	James is referring to one part of his readers, their **souls**, to mean their whole beings. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JAS	1	22	j058	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	**But** draws a contrast not with what James has just said, but with a potential misunderstanding of what he has just said. He wants to clarify that by “receive the implanted word” he does not mean simply to believe it, but to put it into practice. It may be appropriate in your language to translate the word **but** with an expression that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JAS	1	22	j059	figs-ellipsis	γίνεσθε δὲ ποιηταὶ λόγου, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ	1	be doers of the word and not only hearers	At the end of this clause, James is leaving out some of the words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the clause. Alternate translation: “be doers of the word and not only hearers of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JAS	1	22	x14m	figs-metonymy	γίνεσθε&ποιηταὶ λόγου, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ	1	be doers of the word and not only hearers	James is using the term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “obey the message about Jesus, do not just listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JAS	1	22	x14m	figs-metonymy	γίνεσθε & ποιηταὶ λόγου, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ	1	be doers of the word and not only hearers	James is using the term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “obey the message about Jesus, do not just listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	1	22	wvp4	figs-idiom	καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ	1	and not only hearers	In the Bible, the word “hear” often has the idiomatic sense of agreeing with what is heard. James may be using the word in that sense. Alternate translation: “and do not just decide that you agree with it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	1	23	j060	figs-hypo	ὅτι εἴ τις ἀκροατὴς λόγου ἐστὶν, καὶ οὐ ποιητής, οὗτος ἔοικεν ἀνδρὶ κατανοοῦντι τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐσόπτρῳ	1	For if anyone is a hearer of the word and not a doer, he is like a man beholding the face of his birth in a mirror	James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone is a hearer of the word and not a doer. Then he is like a man beholding the face of his birth in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 JAS	1	23	r6pp	figs-ellipsis	ἀκροατὴς λόγου ἐστὶν, καὶ οὐ ποιητής	1	is a hearer of the word and not a doer	At the end of this clause, James is leaving out some of the words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the clause. Alternate translation: “is a hearer of the word and not a doer of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ JAS	1	23	j063	figs-gendernotations	ἀνδρὶ	1	a man	James is using the term
 JAS	1	23	shn9	figs-idiom	τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ	1	the face of his birth	This is an idiom that refers to the **face** a person was born with, that is, that person’s natural or physical face. Since the term “face” had many figurative meanings at this time, James is using this idiomatic expression to clarify that he means the hypothetical person’s literal, physical face. You may not need to make this clarification in your language. Alternate translation: “his physical face” or “his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	1	23	j064	translate-unknown	ἐν ἐσόπτρῳ	1	in a mirror	A **mirror** is a flat object made of some reflective material, such as glass or polished metal, that people use to see what they look like. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **mirror** is, you could use the name of something else that serves this purpose in your culture. Alternate translation: “reflected in the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JAS	1	24	j065	figs-explicit	γὰρ	1	For	**For** introduces a reason, as would be expected, but it is a reason for something that must be inferred from the context. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what James is giving the reason for. Alternate translation: “This did not really benefit him, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JAS	1	24	wu34		κατενόησεν&ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἀπελήλυθεν, καὶ εὐθέως ἐπελάθετο ὁποῖος ἦν	1	he beheld himself and went away and immediately forgot of what sort he was	Here James is giving an illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. (See the discussion of this in Part 3 of the Introduction to James.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this sentence by translating this with the present tense. Alternate translation: “he beholds himself and goes away and immediately forgets of what sort he is”
-JAS	1	24	j066	writing-pronouns	κατενόησεν&ἑαυτὸν	1	he beheld himself	James is continuing the simile he began in the previous verse, so the pronouns **he** and **himself** refer to the hypothetical person who looks in the mirror. Alternate translation (using the present tense): “such a person looked at himself in a mirror” or, if you are using the present tense, “such a person looks at himself in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JAS	1	24	wu34		κατενόησεν & ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἀπελήλυθεν, καὶ εὐθέως ἐπελάθετο ὁποῖος ἦν	1	he beheld himself and went away and immediately forgot of what sort he was	Here James is giving an illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. (See the discussion of this in Part 3 of the Introduction to James.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this sentence by translating this with the present tense. Alternate translation: “he beholds himself and goes away and immediately forgets of what sort he is”
+JAS	1	24	j066	writing-pronouns	κατενόησεν & ἑαυτὸν	1	he beheld himself	James is continuing the simile he began in the previous verse, so the pronouns **he** and **himself** refer to the hypothetical person who looks in the mirror. Alternate translation (using the present tense): “such a person looked at himself in a mirror” or, if you are using the present tense, “such a person looks at himself in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JAS	1	24	j067	figs-explicit	καὶ ἀπελήλυθεν, καὶ εὐθέως ἐπελάθετο ὁποῖος ἦν	1	and went away and immediately forgot of what sort he was	James is saying implicitly that this is a person who sees but does not do, just like a person who hears the word of God but does not obey it. The implication is that he sees in the mirror that he needs to do something such as wash his face or fix his hair. But because he does not do that when he is looking in the mirror, when he walks away, he forgets to do it. The point of the comparison is that a person who does not obey God’s word is like this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but because he did not immediately do what he saw he should do, when he walked away from the mirror, he forgot what he saw and so he did nothing about it” or, if you are using the present tense, “but because he does not immediately do what he sees he should do, when he walks away from the mirror, he forgets what he saw and so he does nothing about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	1	24	j068		ὁποῖος ἦν	1	of what sort he was	Alternate translation: “what he needed to do about his appearance” or, if you are using the present tense, “what he needs to do about his appearance”
-JAS	1	25	j069	figs-hypo	ὁ δὲ παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας, καὶ παραμείνας&οὗτος μακάριος&ἔσται	1	But the one having gazed into the perfect law of freedom and having continued … this one will be blessed	James is using a further hypothetical situation to teach. This illustration is a contrast to the one he offered in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “But suppose someone gazes into the perfect law of freedom and perseveres …. Then that person will be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-JAS	1	25	kvr7	figs-metaphor	ὁ&παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον	1	the one having gazed into the perfect law	In this verse, James continues to compare hearing the word of God to looking in a mirror. But the image now becomes a metaphor rather than a simile, since James speaks about someone who has **gazed into** the **law**. He means someone who has listened attentively to God’s word. Alternate translation: “someone who has listened attentively to the perfect law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JAS	1	25	j069	figs-hypo	ὁ δὲ παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας, καὶ παραμείνας & οὗτος μακάριος & ἔσται	1	But the one having gazed into the perfect law of freedom and having continued … this one will be blessed	James is using a further hypothetical situation to teach. This illustration is a contrast to the one he offered in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “But suppose someone gazes into the perfect law of freedom and perseveres …. Then that person will be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+JAS	1	25	kvr7	figs-metaphor	ὁ & παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον	1	the one having gazed into the perfect law	In this verse, James continues to compare hearing the word of God to looking in a mirror. But the image now becomes a metaphor rather than a simile, since James speaks about someone who has **gazed into** the **law**. He means someone who has listened attentively to God’s word. Alternate translation: “someone who has listened attentively to the perfect law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	1	25	j070	figs-possession	νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας	1	the perfect law of freedom	James is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that brings **freedom**. See the notes to [2:12](../02/12.md) for a further explanation of what James means by the **law of freedom**. Alternate translation: “the perfect law that brings freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JAS	1	25	sf8k	figs-abstractnouns	νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας	1	the perfect law of freedom	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **freedom** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “the perfect law that sets people free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	25	j071	figs-explicit	νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας	1	the perfect law of freedom	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this **law** gives people the **freedom** to do. Alternate translation: “the law that sets people free to obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ JAS	1	25	j073	figs-ellipsis	καὶ παραμείνας	1	and having continued
 JAS	1	25	j074	figs-possession	ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς	1	a hearer of forgetfulness	James is using the possessive form to describe a **hearer** who is characterized by **forgetfulness**. Alternate translation: “a hearer who is forgetful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JAS	1	25	j075	figs-abstractnouns	ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς	1	a hearer of forgetfulness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **forgetfulness** by translating the idea behind it with a verb such as “forget.” Alternate translation: “a hearer who forgets” or “someone who forgets what he hears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	25	j076	figs-metonymy	ποιητὴς ἔργου	1	a doer of the work	By association with the **work** that it takes to carry out God’s commands, James is using the term **work** to mean what God commands. Alternate translation: “someone who does what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JAS	1	25	jku1	figs-activepassive	οὗτος μακάριος&ἔσται	1	this one will be blessed	While the word **blessed** is an adjective and so the expression **will be blessed** is not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers to translate this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “God will bless such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JAS	1	25	jku1	figs-activepassive	οὗτος μακάριος & ἔσται	1	this one will be blessed	While the word **blessed** is an adjective and so the expression **will be blessed** is not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers to translate this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “God will bless such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	1	25	j077	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ποιήσει αὐτοῦ	1	in his doing	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **doing** by translating the idea behind it with a verb such as “do.” Alternate translation: “in what he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	1	26	j078	figs-hypo	εἴ τις δοκεῖ θρησκὸς εἶναι, μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ, τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία	1	If anyone thinks to be religious, not bridling his tongue, but deceiving his heart, the religion of that one is worthless	James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone thinks that he is religious, but he does not bridle his tongue, thus deceiving his heart. Then his religion is worthless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 JAS	1	26	j1bg		δοκεῖ θρησκὸς εἶναι	1	thinks to be religious	The word translated **religious** could refer to a pattern of behavior rather than to participation in worship activities. Alternate translation: “thinks that he is honoring God by his actions”
@@ -171,14 +171,14 @@ JAS	2	2	j086	figs-gendernotations	ἀνὴρ	1	man	James is using the term **man
 JAS	2	2	j087	translate-unknown	συναγωγὴν	1	synagogue	A **synagogue** is a Jewish meeting place for worship. James uses the term because he is writing primarily to Jews who have put their faith in Jesus as their Messiah. (See the discussion in Part 1 of the Introduction to James.) In your translation you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “meeting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JAS	2	2	j088	figs-nominaladj	πτωχὸς	1	a poor one	James is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to mean a kind of person. (ULT adds **one** to indicate this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who is poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JAS	2	3	j089	figs-hypo	δὲ	1	and	James is continuing to describe the condition in the hypothetical situation that he introduced in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in UST: “and suppose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-JAS	2	3	j090	figs-you	ἐπιβλέψητε&εἴπητε&εἴπητε	1	you look … you say … you say	In these three instances **you** is plural, since James is speaking to all of his readers about what they might do in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JAS	2	3	j091	figs-idiom	ἐπιβλέψητε&ἐπὶ	1	you look at	In this context, this expression means to **look at** someone or something with admiration. Alternate translation: “you look admiringly at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JAS	2	3	j092	figs-yousingular	σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς&σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ&κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	You sit here well … You stand there … Sit under my footstool	Since these comments are addressed to the rich person and to the poor person as individuals, **You** is singular in the first two instances and the implied “you” in the command to **sit** is also singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+JAS	2	3	j090	figs-you	ἐπιβλέψητε & εἴπητε & εἴπητε	1	you look … you say … you say	In these three instances **you** is plural, since James is speaking to all of his readers about what they might do in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JAS	2	3	j091	figs-idiom	ἐπιβλέψητε & ἐπὶ	1	you look at	In this context, this expression means to **look at** someone or something with admiration. Alternate translation: “you look admiringly at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JAS	2	3	j092	figs-yousingular	σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς & σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ & κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	You sit here well … You stand there … Sit under my footstool	Since these comments are addressed to the rich person and to the poor person as individuals, **You** is singular in the first two instances and the implied “you” in the command to **sit** is also singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 JAS	2	3	zx9f	figs-idiom	σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς	1	You sit here well	In this context **well** means “honorably.” It does not refer to how well the rich person would be able to sit in the indicated seat. Alternate translation: “Sit here in this place of honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	2	3	j093	figs-imperative	σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς	1	You sit here well	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please sit here in this place of honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 JAS	2	3	j094	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	and	The term **and** introduces a contrast between the way the rich person and the poor person are treated. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-JAS	2	3	j095	figs-imperative	σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ&κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	You stand there … Sit under my footstool	These statements addressed to the poor person probably are direct imperatives rather than polite requests, since James is illustrating how believers might treat poor people differently from rich people. Not adding “please” to these statements would show the contrast with the way the rich person is addressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-JAS	2	3	ce14	figs-explicit	σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ&κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	You stand there … Sit under my footstool	The implications are that the poor person is being told to stand or sit in a humbler and less honorable place. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JAS	2	3	j095	figs-imperative	σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ & κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	You stand there … Sit under my footstool	These statements addressed to the poor person probably are direct imperatives rather than polite requests, since James is illustrating how believers might treat poor people differently from rich people. Not adding “please” to these statements would show the contrast with the way the rich person is addressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+JAS	2	3	ce14	figs-explicit	σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ & κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	You stand there … Sit under my footstool	The implications are that the poor person is being told to stand or sit in a humbler and less honorable place. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	2	3	h2fy	figs-you	κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου	1	Sit under my footstool	This imperative statement uses the singular first-person pronoun **my**, since it is something that one of the believers might say to the hypothetical poor person. If this would not be natural in your language, since the statement is introduced by **you** (plural) **say**, you could also use a plural form in the statement itself. Alternate translation: “Sit on the floor by our feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JAS	2	4	j096	figs-hypo	οὐ διεκρίθητε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, καὶ ἐγένεσθε κριταὶ διαλογισμῶν πονηρῶν?	1	have you not distinguished among yourselves and become judges of evil thoughts?	In this verse James describes the result of the hypothetical situation he has been describing since [2:2](../02/02.md). It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then you have distinguished among yourselves and become judges of evil thoughts.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 JAS	2	4	j097	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ διεκρίθητε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, καὶ ἐγένεσθε κριταὶ διαλογισμῶν πονηρῶν	1	have you not distinguished among yourselves and become judges of evil thoughts	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “have you not become judges who think evil things and so begun to consider some people better than others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ JAS	2	7	j107	figs-idiom	τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς	1	that ha
 JAS	2	7	j108	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς	1	that has been called upon you	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “by which people call you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	2	8	j109	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	εἰ μέντοι	1	If, however	James is using these words to introduce a contrast with what he said in [2:6](../02/06.md), “you have dishonored the poor,” meaning “you have treated rich people much better than you have treated poor people.” Alternate translation: “But if, instead of favoring rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 JAS	2	8	j110		τελεῖτε	1	you fulfill	The verb **fulfill** comes from the same root as the adjective “perfect” that James uses several times earlier in this letter. It means to make something accomplish its purpose or reach its goal. Alternate translation: “you completely obey”
-JAS	2	8	q9hh	figs-metonymy	νόμον&βασιλικὸν	1	the royal law	There are two possible reasons for why James describes the **law** that he quotes here from [Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md) as **royal**. (1) When Jesus came proclaiming the kingdom of God, he said that this law was one of two that summed up all of the other laws and guided life in the kingdom of God. (The other law was to love God with all of one’s heart, soul, mind, and strength.) Alternate translation: “the law that guides life in the kingdom of God” (2) James may say that this **law** is **royal** because God, the true king, gave it to people. Alternate translation: “God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JAS	2	8	q9hh	figs-metonymy	νόμον & βασιλικὸν	1	the royal law	There are two possible reasons for why James describes the **law** that he quotes here from [Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md) as **royal**. (1) When Jesus came proclaiming the kingdom of God, he said that this law was one of two that summed up all of the other laws and guided life in the kingdom of God. (The other law was to love God with all of one’s heart, soul, mind, and strength.) Alternate translation: “the law that guides life in the kingdom of God” (2) James may say that this **law** is **royal** because God, the true king, gave it to people. Alternate translation: “God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	2	8	ymf5	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	You will love your neighbor as yourself	Here the law of Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You are to love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JAS	2	8	j111	figs-youcrowd	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	You will love your neighbor as yourself	The words **You**, **your**, and **yourself** are singular in this quotation because, even though Moses gave this law to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was expected to obey it. So in your translation, use the singular forms of “You,” “your,” and “yourself” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 JAS	2	8	gll2	figs-idiom	τὸν πλησίον σου	1	your neighbor	This is an idiom. It does not mean only someone who lives nearby. Alternate translation: “other people” or “anyone you encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -219,14 +219,14 @@ JAS	2	9	xt6y	figs-explicit	προσωπολημπτεῖτε	1	you favor	Your la
 JAS	2	9	cq5h	figs-activepassive	ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ὡς παραβάται	1	convicted by the law as transgressors	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and the law convicts you as transgressors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	2	9	gl2e	figs-personification	ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ὡς παραβάται	1	convicted by the law as transgressors	James is speaking of the law as if it were a human judge. Alternate translation: “and you are guilty of breaking God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JAS	2	10	j112	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The reason why showing favoritism makes a person guilty of breaking God’s law is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JAS	2	10	l29g	figs-idiom	ὅστις&τηρήσῃ	1	whoever might keep	Here, **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “whoever might obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JAS	2	10	l29g	figs-idiom	ὅστις & τηρήσῃ	1	whoever might keep	Here, **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “whoever might obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	2	10	jb5u	figs-metaphor	πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί	1	but stumble in one thing	James speaks of a person disobeying a commandment as if he would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose his balance while walking. Alternate translation: “but disobey one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	2	10	m8ep	figs-nominaladj	πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί	1	but stumble in one thing	James is using the adjective **one** as a noun to refer to one commandment of the law. (ULT adds the term **thing** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “but disobey one commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JAS	2	10	j113		πάντων ἔνοχος	1	guilty of all	Alternate translation: “guilty of breaking the entire law”
 JAS	2	10	j114	figs-explicit	πάντων ἔνοχος	1	guilty of all	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why James says that this is true. Alternate translation: “guilty of breaking the entire law, because God gave the entire law to show people how he wanted them to live, and if you break one part of it, you are not living in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	2	11	j115	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The reason why breaking one law makes a person guilty of breaking every law is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JAS	2	11	ez11	figs-explicit	ὁ&εἰπών	1	the one who said	James is referring implicitly to God, who spoke the commandments quoted in this verse when he gave the law to Moses. Alternate translation: “God who said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JAS	2	11	c8jm	figs-youcrowd	μὴ μοιχεύσῃς&μὴ φονεύσῃς&οὐ μοιχεύεις&φονεύεις&γέγονας	1	Do not commit adultery … Do not murder … you do not commit adultery … you do murder … you have become	The implied “you” in the two commandments that James quotes in this verse is singular because, even though Moses gave these laws to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was expected to obey them. The word **you** is also singular in the rest of the verse because James is carrying forward that usage from the commandments. So in your translation, use the singular form of “you” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+JAS	2	11	ez11	figs-explicit	ὁ & εἰπών	1	the one who said	James is referring implicitly to God, who spoke the commandments quoted in this verse when he gave the law to Moses. Alternate translation: “God who said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JAS	2	11	c8jm	figs-youcrowd	μὴ μοιχεύσῃς & μὴ φονεύσῃς & οὐ μοιχεύεις & φονεύεις & γέγονας	1	Do not commit adultery … Do not murder … you do not commit adultery … you do murder … you have become	The implied “you” in the two commandments that James quotes in this verse is singular because, even though Moses gave these laws to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was expected to obey them. The word **you** is also singular in the rest of the verse because James is carrying forward that usage from the commandments. So in your translation, use the singular form of “you” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 JAS	2	12	c6y8	figs-you	οὕτως λαλεῖτε, καὶ οὕτως ποιεῖτε	1	Thus speak and thus act	The implied “you” in these imperatives is plural. James returns here to the plural usage that he follows in most of his letter. So in your translation, use the plural form of “you” if your language marks that distinction and if it reflects it in imperatives. Alternate translation: “Speak and act in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JAS	2	12	yp6i	figs-activepassive	μέλλοντες κρίνεσθαι	1	ones who are going to be judged	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “people whom God is going to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	2	12	e87r	figs-possession	νόμου ἐλευθερίας	1	the law of freedom	As in [1:25](../01/25.md), James is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that brings **freedom**. Alternate translation: “the law that brings freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ JAS	2	15	j129	figs-hypo	ἐὰν	1	If	James is using a hypothetical situation to
 JAS	2	15	f6el	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἀδελφὴ	1	a brother or sister	As everywhere else in the book, the term **brother** refers to a fellow believer. In every other instance, the term can mean either a man or a woman. But in this verse James uses **brother** to mean a believer who is a man and **sister** to mean a believer who is a woman. If your language has both masculine and the feminine forms of the word you have been using to translate “brother,” you can use them both here. Otherwise, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another man or woman who believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	2	15	j130		γυμνοὶ	1	unclothed	The word **unclothed** can mean “naked,” and if a Bible translation already exists in your area, it may say that. But in this context, the word actually refers to lacking adequate clothes. Alternate translation: “badly clothed”
 JAS	2	16	j131	figs-hypo	δέ	1	and	James is continuing to describe the condition of the hypothetical situation that he is using to teach. Alternate translation: “and suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-JAS	2	16	j132	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς&αὐτοῖς	1	to them … them	Even though in the previous verse James spoke in the singular of “a brother or sister,” he now speaks of needy people generally in the plural, saying **them**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use the singular in this verse as well. Alternate translation: “to him or her … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JAS	2	16	j132	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς	1	to them … them	Even though in the previous verse James spoke in the singular of “a brother or sister,” he now speaks of needy people generally in the plural, saying **them**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use the singular in this verse as well. Alternate translation: “to him or her … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JAS	2	16	j133	figs-metonymy	θερμαίνεσθε καὶ χορτάζεσθε	1	warm yourself and be satisfied	The person who would say this to people in need would be speaking of clothing by association with the way its keeps people warm and of food by association with the way it satisfies people. Alternate translation: “have adequate clothing and enough food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	2	16	lj89		θερμαίνεσθε	1	warm yourself	Alternate translation: “stay warm”
 JAS	2	16	ngj8	figs-activepassive	χορτάζεσθε	1	be satisfied	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an equivalent expression that uses an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “have enough food to satisfy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ JAS	2	19	j148		σὺ πιστεύεις ὅτι εἷς ἐστιν ὁ Θεός
 JAS	2	19	j149	figs-irony	καλῶς ποιεῖς; καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια πιστεύουσιν καὶ φρίσσουσιν	1	You do well. The demons also believe, and they tremble	When James says **You do well**, he is saying the opposite of what he really means. He grants that believing in one God is a good thing in itself, but he is actually saying that by itself, it is the kind of faith without works that cannot save a person. He proves this by observing that the demons, who are not saved, also believe that there is one God, and this makes them tremble. Alternate translation: “You may think that is a good thing to do. But the demons also believe in one God, and they tremble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 JAS	2	19	fv39	figs-explicit	καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια πιστεύουσιν καὶ φρίσσουσιν	1	The demons also believe, and they tremble	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why the **demons** **tremble** at the thought of God. Alternate translation: “The demons also believe in one God, and they tremble, knowing that God is going to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	2	20	ax95	figs-rquestion	θέλεις δὲ γνῶναι, ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ, ὅτι ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν?	1	But do you wish to know, O foolish man, that faith without works is idle?	James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I can show you, O foolish man, that faith without works is idle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JAS	2	20	j150	figs-idiom	θέλεις&γνῶναι	1	do you wish to know	This is an idiom. It means “I can show you” by suggesting implicitly, “If you really want to know, I can show you.” Alternate translation as a statement: “I can show you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+JAS	2	20	j150	figs-idiom	θέλεις & γνῶναι	1	do you wish to know	This is an idiom. It means “I can show you” by suggesting implicitly, “If you really want to know, I can show you.” Alternate translation as a statement: “I can show you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	2	20	j151		ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ	1	O foolish man	James is addressing this hypothetical **man** in the vocative after an exclamation. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you foolish man”
 JAS	2	20	j152	figs-gendernotations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ	1	O foolish man	James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that could mean any person, male or female. Alternate translation: “you foolish person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JAS	2	20	j153	figs-personification	ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν	1	faith without works is idle	James is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that would be lazily doing nothing if it did not have works. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is useless if he does not express it through works” or “a person’s faith is unproductive if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ JAS	2	20	j155	figs-personification	ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργ
 JAS	2	21	q8iv	figs-rquestion	Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἀνενέγκας Ἰσαὰκ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον?	1	Was not Abraham our father justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar?	James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Abraham our father was justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JAS	2	21	j156	figs-explicit	Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἀνενέγκας Ἰσαὰκ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον?	1	Was not Abraham our father justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar?	James assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the book of Genesis. In that story, God tells Abraham to offer his son Isaac as a sacrifice, but God does not really want Abraham to do that. Rather, God wants Abraham to demonstrate his faith and obedience by showing that he is willing to do it. God ultimately stops Abraham from sacrificing his son Isaac. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story and if they would think that Abraham actually did offer his son as a sacrifice. Alternate translation, as a statement: “Abraham our father was justified by works when he demonstrated that he was willing to obey God even if that meant offering his son Isaac as a sacrifice, although God did not actually want him to do that and God stopped him from doing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	2	21	v3ft	figs-explicit	Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη	1	Was not Abraham our father justified by works	See the discussion in Part 2 of the General Introduction to James about how a person is justified before God. James is not saying that Abraham did something that made God consider him righteous. Rather, as James will explain in more detail in the next two verses, God had previously declared Abraham to be righteous because Abraham believed in him. What Abraham did subsequently, when he proved that he was willing to obey God, demonstrated that his faith was genuine. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they might misunderstand and think that Abraham did something that made God consider him righteous. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous because what he did demonstrated that he genuinely believed in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JAS	2	21	j157	figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ&ἐδικαιώθη	1	Was not Abraham our father justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God justified Abraham our father” or “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JAS	2	21	j157	figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ & ἐδικαιώθη	1	Was not Abraham our father justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God justified Abraham our father” or “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	2	21	ph1s	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν	1	our father	James is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	2	21	j159	figs-exclusive	ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν	1	our father	James is Jewish, descended from Abraham, and the people to whom he is writing also come from a Jewish background, so the word **our** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JAS	2	22	l1gj	figs-metaphor	βλέπεις	1	You see	Here, to **see** represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -305,10 +305,10 @@ JAS	2	24	j165	figs-metaphor	ὁρᾶτε	1	You see	Here, to **see** represents t
 JAS	2	24	j166	figs-you	ὁρᾶτε	1	you see	James returns here to the plural usage that he follows in most of the letter. So in your translation, use the plural form of “You” if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating the shift back to plural here. Alternate translation: “So all of you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JAS	2	24	j167	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	a man	James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that could mean any person, male or female. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JAS	2	24	yha5	figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦται	1	is justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “becomes right with God” or “comes to have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JAS	2	24	j168	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἔργων&καὶ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως μόνον	1	from works and not from faith alone	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “by what he does and not just by what he believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JAS	2	24	j169	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων&καὶ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως μόνον	1	from works and not from faith alone	See the discussion in Part 2 of the General Introduction to James about how a person is justified before God. James is not saying that we need to add works to our faith in order to be justified. Rather, James is speaking of works that are an expression and proof of the saving faith that a person already has. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they might misunderstand and think that James is saying that we have to add works to our faith in order for God to consider us righteous. Alternate translation: “by what he does as an expression of what he believes, and not just by what he believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JAS	2	24	j168	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἔργων & καὶ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως μόνον	1	from works and not from faith alone	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “by what he does and not just by what he believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JAS	2	24	j169	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων & καὶ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως μόνον	1	from works and not from faith alone	See the discussion in Part 2 of the General Introduction to James about how a person is justified before God. James is not saying that we need to add works to our faith in order to be justified. Rather, James is speaking of works that are an expression and proof of the saving faith that a person already has. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they might misunderstand and think that James is saying that we have to add works to our faith in order for God to consider us righteous. Alternate translation: “by what he does as an expression of what he believes, and not just by what he believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	2	25	dcv5	figs-rquestion	ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ Ῥαὰβ ἡ πόρνη οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ὑποδεξαμένη τοὺς ἀγγέλους, καὶ ἑτέρᾳ ὁδῷ ἐκβαλοῦσα?	1	And similarly was not Rahab the prostitute also justified from works, having welcomed the messengers and having sent them away by another road?	James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Rahab the prostitute was also justified similarly from works when she welcomed the messengers and sent them away by another road.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JAS	2	25	j170	figs-activepassive	ὁμοίως&καὶ Ῥαὰβ ἡ πόρνη οὐκ&ἐδικαιώθη	1	similarly was not Rahab the prostitute also justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “did not God similarly justify Rahab the prostitute” or “did not God similarly declare Rahab the prostitute to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JAS	2	25	j170	figs-activepassive	ὁμοίως & καὶ Ῥαὰβ ἡ πόρνη οὐκ & ἐδικαιώθη	1	similarly was not Rahab the prostitute also justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “did not God similarly justify Rahab the prostitute” or “did not God similarly declare Rahab the prostitute to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	2	25	hir8	figs-explicit	ὁμοίως	1	similarly	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **similarly** means in this context. Alternate translation: “in the same way as Abraham,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	2	25	bx6i	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἔργων	1	from works	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **works** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “by what she did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	2	25	pn2f	figs-explicit	ὑποδεξαμένη τοὺς ἀγγέλους, καὶ ἑτέρᾳ ὁδῷ ἐκβαλοῦσα	1	having welcomed the messengers and having sent them away by another road	James assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the episode recorded in the book of Joshua in which Joshua sent two spies to explore the land of Canaan. Rahab provided safety and shelter for these spies in her home, and she then sent them away safely by a route that their pursuers would not have expected them to take. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give an explicit indication of this. Alternate translation: “when she provided shelter and safety in her home for the spies whom Joshua sent to explore the land of Canaan and when she sent these spies safely away by a route that their pursuers would not have expected them to take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -324,9 +324,9 @@ JAS	3	1	j175		εἰδότες ὅτι	1	knowing that	Alternate translation: “s
 JAS	3	1	v7fa	figs-exclusive	μεῖζον κρίμα λημψόμεθα	1	we will receive greater judgment	James is speaking of himself and other teachers but not of his readers, so the pronoun **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we who teach will receive greater judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JAS	3	1	aw5f	figs-explicit	μεῖζον κρίμα λημψόμεθα	1	we will receive greater judgment	By **greater judgment**, James means that God will judge people who teach his word more strictly than he will judge other people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly why that is true. Alternate translation: “God will judge us who teach his word more strictly than he will judge other people, because our teaching greatly influences what other people believe and how they live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	3	2	j176	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	James is using **For** to introduce the reason why most of his readers should not become teachers, not the reason why God will judge teachers more strictly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this reason more fully as a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JAS	3	2	j177		πολλὰ&πταίομεν ἅπαντες	1	we all stumble much	James is using the adjective **much** as an adverb. Alternate translation: “we all stumble in many ways”
-JAS	3	2	ab9h	figs-exclusive	πολλὰ&πταίομεν ἅπαντες	1	we all stumble much	James is now speaking of himself and other teachers and also of his readers and people in general, so the pronoun **we** is inclusive here. Alternate translation: “everyone stumbles in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-JAS	3	2	p9ek	figs-metaphor	πολλὰ&πταίομεν ἅπαντες&ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει	1	we all stumble much … does not stumble in word	As in [2:10](../02/10.md), James is speaking of people sinning as if they would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose their balance while walking. Alternate translation: “we all sin in many ways … does not sin in word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JAS	3	2	j177		πολλὰ & πταίομεν ἅπαντες	1	we all stumble much	James is using the adjective **much** as an adverb. Alternate translation: “we all stumble in many ways”
+JAS	3	2	ab9h	figs-exclusive	πολλὰ & πταίομεν ἅπαντες	1	we all stumble much	James is now speaking of himself and other teachers and also of his readers and people in general, so the pronoun **we** is inclusive here. Alternate translation: “everyone stumbles in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JAS	3	2	p9ek	figs-metaphor	πολλὰ & πταίομεν ἅπαντες & ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει	1	we all stumble much … does not stumble in word	As in [2:10](../02/10.md), James is speaking of people sinning as if they would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose their balance while walking. Alternate translation: “we all sin in many ways … does not sin in word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	3	2	t6xt	figs-metonymy	εἴ τις ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει	1	If anyone does not stumble in word	James is using the term **word** to mean what people say by using words. Alternate translation: “If anyone does not sin in what he says” or “If anyone does not say things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	3	2	kn4v		οὗτος τέλειος ἀνήρ	1	he is a perfect man	As in [1:4](../01/04.md) and several other places earlier in this letter, the term **perfect** refers to something that has developed to the point where it is fully suited to its purpose. Alternate translation: “he is a spiritually mature person”
 JAS	3	2	j178	figs-metaphor	δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα	1	able to bridle even the whole body	As in [1:26](../01/26.md), James speaks of a person being able to **bridle** himself as if that person were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “able to control his whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ JAS	3	3	j179		εἰς τὸ πείθεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἡμῖν	1	for t
 JAS	3	3	j180	figs-metonymy	καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν μετάγομεν	1	we also turn their whole body	James means that by using a bit, people can **turn** the body of a horse in whatever direction they want. James is using the action of turning a horse to mean guiding or controlling it in general. Alternate translation: “this enables us to guide their whole body” or “this enables us to control their whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	3	3	j181		ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν	1	their whole body	Since James speaks of **horses** in the plural, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **body**. Alternate translation: “their whole bodies”
 JAS	3	4	j182	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, καὶ τὰ πλοῖα	1	Behold also the ships	The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Also consider the case of ships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JAS	3	4	yn42	translate-unknown	πλοῖα&πηδαλίου	1	ships … rudder	These **ships** are large vessels that are used to transport people or goods by water. A **rudder** is a flat device attached to the back of a ship that is used to steer it. If your readers would not be familiar with what **ships** are and what a **rudder** is, in your translation you could use the name of another transportation vehicle and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “trucks … steering wheel” or “large vehicles … steering device” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+JAS	3	4	yn42	translate-unknown	πλοῖα & πηδαλίου	1	ships … rudder	These **ships** are large vessels that are used to transport people or goods by water. A **rudder** is a flat device attached to the back of a ship that is used to steer it. If your readers would not be familiar with what **ships** are and what a **rudder** is, in your translation you could use the name of another transportation vehicle and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “trucks … steering wheel” or “large vehicles … steering device” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JAS	3	4	j183		τηλικαῦτα ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ ἀνέμων σκληρῶν ἐλαυνόμενα	1	being so large and driven by strong winds	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though they are so large and driven by strong winds”
 JAS	3	4	k7f5	figs-activepassive	τηλικαῦτα ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ ἀνέμων σκληρῶν ἐλαυνόμενα	1	being so large and driven by strong winds	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though they are so large and strong winds drive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	3	4	jrk1	figs-metonymy	μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου	1	it is turned by the smallest rudder	James is using the action of turning a ship to mean guiding or controlling the ship in general. (For example, a person might turn a ship in order to keep it upright, not just to direct it to a certain place.) Alternate translation: “it is controlled by the smallest rudder” or “it is guided by the smallest rudder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -368,21 +368,21 @@ JAS	3	6	j200	figs-metaphor	φλογιζομένη ὑπὸ τῆς Γεέννη
 JAS	3	6	j202	figs-metaphor	τῆς Γεέννης	1	Gehenna	James is using **Gehenna,** where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. Alternate translation: “hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	3	6	j203	figs-metaphor	τῆς Γεέννης	1	Gehenna	Since hell, as a location, would not be able to influence people’s speech and conduct, James is likely using the name **Gehenna** to mean the devil by association. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	3	7	j204	grammar-connect-time-background	γὰρ	1	For	James uses **For** to introduce background information in the form of an illustration that will help his readers understand what he wants to teach them. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-JAS	3	7	j205	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα&φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων, δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται	1	every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals, is being tamed and has been tamed	Here, **every** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many different kinds of beasts, birds, reptiles, and marine animals are being tamed and have been tamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+JAS	3	7	j205	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα & φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων, δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται	1	every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals, is being tamed and has been tamed	Here, **every** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many different kinds of beasts, birds, reptiles, and marine animals are being tamed and have been tamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JAS	3	7	j206		πᾶσα γὰρ φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων	1	every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals	If you retain the generalization in your translation, it might be more natural in your language to use the singular for the creatures on this list. Alternate translation: “every kind of beast, bird, reptile, and marine animal”
 JAS	3	7	j207	figs-merism	πᾶσα γὰρ φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων	1	every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals	James is using various categories of creatures to mean every creature. Alternate translation: “every kind of creature that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 JAS	3	7	zw5m	figs-nominaladj	ἐναλίων	1	marine animals	James is using the adjective **marine** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **animals** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “sea creatures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JAS	3	7	ug59	figs-activepassive	δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀνθρωπίνῃ	1	is being tamed and has been tamed by the human kind	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation (place the phrase right after “For”): “the human kind is taming and has tamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	3	7	j208	figs-doublet	δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀνθρωπίνῃ	1	is being tamed and has been tamed by the human kind	James says both **is being tamed** and **has been tamed** for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation (place the phrase right after “For”): “the human kind is in the process of taming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JAS	3	7	j209		τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀνθρωπίνῃ	1	by the human kind	Alternate translation: “by people”
-JAS	3	8	j210	figs-gendernotations	οὐδεὶς&ἀνθρώπων	1	none of men	James is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “no human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+JAS	3	8	j210	figs-gendernotations	οὐδεὶς & ἀνθρώπων	1	none of men	James is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “no human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 JAS	3	8	q9xe	figs-metaphor	δαμάσαι	1	to tame	By analogy with the animals he discussed in the previous verse, James is using the word **tame** to mean “control.” Alternate translation: “to control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JAS	3	8	j211	figs-metonymy	τὴν&γλῶσσαν	1	the tongue	James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JAS	3	8	j211	figs-metonymy	τὴν & γλῶσσαν	1	the tongue	James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	3	8	j212	figs-nominaladj	ἀκατάστατον κακόν	1	an unsettled evil	James is using the adjective **evil** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “an unsettled evil thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JAS	3	8	j213	figs-personification	ἀκατάστατον κακόν	1	an unsettled evil	In this context, the word **unsettled** means “restless.” James is speaking of the **tongue** as if it were a living thing that could never rest because it always had to be saying bad things. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “We are constantly saying evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JAS	3	8	m7vi	figs-metaphor	μεστὴ ἰοῦ θανατηφόρου	1	full of deadly poison	James is using **deadly poison** as an analogy for the destructive effects of what people say. Alternate translation (continuing a new sentence): “and what we say has very destructive effects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JAS	3	9	le6h	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν&καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα	1	With it we bless … and with it we curse	The pronoun **it** refers to the tongue. Alternate translation: “With our tongue we bless … and with our tongue we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JAS	3	9	j214	figs-metonymy	ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν&καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα	1	With it we bless … and with it we curse	James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “We use our tongue in speech to bless … and we use our tongue in speech to curse” or “By what we say, we bless … and by what we say, we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JAS	3	9	le6h	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν & καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα	1	With it we bless … and with it we curse	The pronoun **it** refers to the tongue. Alternate translation: “With our tongue we bless … and with our tongue we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+JAS	3	9	j214	figs-metonymy	ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν & καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα	1	With it we bless … and with it we curse	James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “We use our tongue in speech to bless … and we use our tongue in speech to curse” or “By what we say, we bless … and by what we say, we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	3	9	ucm9		εὐλογοῦμεν	1	we bless	In this context, **bless** does not mean to confer a blessing on someone, as a superior would to an inferior. Rather, it means to say good things about someone. Alternate translation: “we say good things about”
 JAS	3	9	j215	figs-hendiadys	τὸν Κύριον καὶ Πατέρα	1	the Lord and Father	James is not talking about two different people. He is expressing a single idea by using two nouns connected with **and**. The noun **Father** further identifies **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 JAS	3	9	j216	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -424,15 +424,15 @@ JAS	3	15	h36b	figs-metonymy	ἐπίγειος	1	earthly	The word **earthly** ref
 JAS	3	15	a2u6	figs-metonymy	ψυχική	1	soulish	James is using one part of the human being, the soul, as opposed to another part, the spirit, to mean “unspiritual.” The sense could be either that this behavior has no regard for spiritual things or that it does not come from the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “unspiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JAS	3	15	mzc9		δαιμονιώδης	1	demonic	Alternate translation: “from demons” or “like the behavior of demons”
 JAS	3	16	j237	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “It is clear that this is not godly wisdom, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JAS	3	16	x5jz	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου&ζῆλος καὶ ἐριθεία, ἐκεῖ ἀκαταστασία καὶ πᾶν φαῦλον πρᾶγμα	1	where there is envy and ambition, there is unsettledness and every wicked deed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **envy**, **ambition**, and **unsettledness** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “when people are envious and ambitious, this causes them to act in disorderly and evil ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JAS	3	16	x5jz	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου & ζῆλος καὶ ἐριθεία, ἐκεῖ ἀκαταστασία καὶ πᾶν φαῦλον πρᾶγμα	1	where there is envy and ambition, there is unsettledness and every wicked deed	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **envy**, **ambition**, and **unsettledness** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “when people are envious and ambitious, this causes them to act in disorderly and evil ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	3	16	vmt4	figs-hyperbole	πᾶν φαῦλον πρᾶγμα	1	every wicked deed	Here, **every** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many kinds of wicked deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-JAS	3	17	s8w4	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ&σοφία	1	the wisdom	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise way of living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JAS	3	17	s8w4	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & σοφία	1	the wisdom	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise way of living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JAS	3	17	hhk5	figs-metaphor	ἄνωθεν	1	from above	See how you translated this phrase in [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translation: “that comes from God” or “that God teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	3	17	hfh9	figs-metaphor	καρπῶν ἀγαθῶν	1	good fruits	James speaks of **good fruits** to mean kind things that people do for others as a result of having wisdom from God. Alternate translation: “good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	3	17	by2l		ἀνυπόκριτος	1	sincere	Alternate translation: “not hypocritical” or “honest” or “truthful”
-JAS	3	18	md56	figs-metaphor	καρπὸς&δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην	1	the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace	James speaks of those who **make peace** as if they were sowing seeds, and of righteousness as if it were **fruit** that grew from those seeds. Alternate translation: “those who work in peace to make peace produce righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JAS	3	18	htr1	figs-abstractnouns	καρπὸς&δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην	1	the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who work peacefully to help people live together peacefully are helping those people to live in the right way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JAS	3	18	j238	figs-activepassive	καρπὸς&δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην	1	the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace	If you decide to retain the metaphor of sowing, you could express it with an active verbal form, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “those who make peace sow the fruit of righteousness in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+JAS	3	18	md56	figs-metaphor	καρπὸς & δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην	1	the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace	James speaks of those who **make peace** as if they were sowing seeds, and of righteousness as if it were **fruit** that grew from those seeds. Alternate translation: “those who work in peace to make peace produce righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JAS	3	18	htr1	figs-abstractnouns	καρπὸς & δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην	1	the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who work peacefully to help people live together peacefully are helping those people to live in the right way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JAS	3	18	j238	figs-activepassive	καρπὸς & δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην	1	the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace	If you decide to retain the metaphor of sowing, you could express it with an active verbal form, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “those who make peace sow the fruit of righteousness in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	4	intro	r6vv			0		# James 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1–12)<br>2. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13–17)<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Adultery<br><br>Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. James uses the same metaphor in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
 JAS	4	1	j240	figs-metaphor	πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Whence are wars and whence are battles among you	James is using the terms **wars** and **battles**. Alternate translation: “Where do the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	4	1	pqx2	figs-rquestion	πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν?	1	Whence are wars and whence are battles among you?	James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you where the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -469,14 +469,14 @@ JAS	4	5	bx68		πρὸς φθόνον ἐπιποθεῖ τὸ Πνεῦμα ὃ
 JAS	4	5	j259	writing-pronouns	ὃ κατῴκισεν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	whom he caused to live in us	Whatever the interpretation of the entire sentence, the pronoun **he** in this clause refers to God. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JAS	4	6	ub8z	figs-explicit	μείζονα δὲ δίδωσιν χάριν	1	But he gives greater grace	In light of what he says in the previous two verses, James is drawing a contrast between what God might be expected to do and what God actually does. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the contrast more explicitly. Alternate translation: “But even though God is jealous if we are friends with the world, he does not reject us. Instead, he gives us even more grace to be friends with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	4	6	j260	writing-pronouns	μείζονα δὲ δίδωσιν χάριν	1	But he gives greater grace	The pronoun **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “But God gives greater grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JAS	4	6	j261		μείζονα&χάριν	1	greater grace	The comparative **greater** refers to quantity rather than to size. Alternate translation: “even more grace”
+JAS	4	6	j261		μείζονα & χάριν	1	greater grace	The comparative **greater** refers to quantity rather than to size. Alternate translation: “even more grace”
 JAS	4	6	hyh2	writing-pronouns	διὸ λέγει	1	Therefore it says	The pronoun **it** refers to the Scripture, the antecedent from the previous verse. Even though James is now quoting a specific passage, [Proverbs 3:34](../pro/03/34.md), rather than a general teaching, the reference is to the Bible as a whole. Alternate translation: “Therefore the Scripture says” or “Therefore the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JAS	4	6	j262	figs-personification	λέγει	1	it says	James is speaking of the Bible as if it could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” or “we can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-JAS	4	6	qs61	figs-nominaladj	ὑπερηφάνοις&ταπεινοῖς	1	the proud … the humble	James is using the adjectives **proud** and **humble** as nouns to refer to types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “proud people … to humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+JAS	4	6	qs61	figs-nominaladj	ὑπερηφάνοις & ταπεινοῖς	1	the proud … the humble	James is using the adjectives **proud** and **humble** as nouns to refer to types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “proud people … to humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 JAS	4	7	g7e5	figs-activepassive	ὑποτάγητε οὖν	1	Be submitted, therefore	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Submit, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JAS	4	7	da5t	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὑποτάγητε οὖν	1	Be submitted, therefore	James is giving the reason for the result he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because God gives grace to the humble, be submitted” or “Because God gives grace to the humble, submit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JAS	4	7	j263	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀντίστητε δὲ τῷ διαβόλῳ, καὶ φεύξεται ἀφ’ ὑμῶν	1	But resist the devil, and he will flee from you	James is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “But resist the devil. If you do, then he will flee from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-JAS	4	7	nud3		ἀντίστητε&τῷ διαβόλῳ	1	resist the devil	Alternate translation: “resolve not to do what the devil wants”
+JAS	4	7	nud3		ἀντίστητε & τῷ διαβόλῳ	1	resist the devil	Alternate translation: “resolve not to do what the devil wants”
 JAS	4	7	w9ue	figs-metaphor	φεύξεται ἀφ’ ὑμῶν	1	he will flee from you	James is speaking of the devil as if he would run away from a believer who resisted him after humbling himself before God. Alternate translation: “he will stop trying to get you to do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	4	8	j264	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐγγίσατε τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ ἐγγιεῖ ὑμῖν	1	Come near to God and he will come near to you	James is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “If you come near to God, then he will come near to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JAS	4	8	g62m	figs-metaphor	ἐγγίσατε τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ ἐγγιεῖ ὑμῖν	1	Come near to God and he will come near to you	James is using a spatial metaphor to describe two people in a good relationship as if they were **near** to one another. Alternate translation: “Do your part to have a good relationship with God, and you will find that God also wants to have a good relationship with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -500,16 +500,16 @@ JAS	4	10	j276	figs-activepassive	ταπεινώθητε	1	Be humbled	If it would
 JAS	4	10	an8i	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον Κυρίου	1	before the Lord	The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. While in one sense God is present everywhere, the believers to whom James is writing are not in the direct physical presence of God, so he likely means this expression in a figurative sense. He is referring to the attitude they should have towards God. Alternate translation: “in your attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	4	10	tn5w	figs-metaphor	ὑψώσει ὑμᾶς	1	he will lift you up	James is speaking as if his readers would humbly kneel down or bow down in front of God to show their repentance and as if God would have them stand up to show that he accepted them. Alternate translation: “he will show that he accepts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	4	11	r3hc		μὴ καταλαλεῖτε ἀλλήλων	1	Do not speak against one another	Alternate translation: “Do not say bad things about one another”
-JAS	4	11	uyi9	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί&ἀδελφοῦ&τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	brothers … a brother … his brother	See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers … a fellow believer … his fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JAS	4	11	uyi9	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ & τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	brothers … a brother … his brother	See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers … a fellow believer … his fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	4	11	j277	figs-explicit	καταλαλεῖ νόμου καὶ κρίνει νόμον	1	speaks against the law and judges the law	By **the law**, James means the same thing that he calls the “royal law” in [2:8](../02/08.md) and the “law of freedom” in [1:25](../01/25.md) and [2:12](../02/12.md). That is, he means the commandment “you will love your neighbor as yourself.” James is teaching his readers that by saying or assuming that their fellow believers were doing wrong things, they were not following this commandment and they were treating the commandment as if it were not important to follow. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the term “neighbor” in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “contradicts the law that says to love other people as oneself and judges that law to be unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JAS	4	11	j278	figs-youcrowd	εἰ&νόμον κρίνεις, οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου	1	if you judge the law, you are not a doer of the law	The word **you** is singular in these two cases because even though James is addressing a group of people, he is describing an individual situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+JAS	4	11	j278	figs-youcrowd	εἰ & νόμον κρίνεις, οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου	1	if you judge the law, you are not a doer of the law	The word **you** is singular in these two cases because even though James is addressing a group of people, he is describing an individual situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 JAS	4	11	j279	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου, ἀλλὰ κριτής	1	you are not a doer of the law, but a judge	In the second phrase, James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first phrase. Alternate translation: “you are not a doer of the law, but a judge of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JAS	4	11	jlx4	figs-explicit	οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου, ἀλλὰ κριτής	1	you are not a doer of the law, but a judge	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. See how you translated the similar phrase at the end of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “instead of loving other people, you are saying that it is not important to love them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	4	12	e9da		εἷς ἐστιν νομοθέτης καὶ κριτής	1	The lawgiver and judge is one	Alternate translation: “The lawgiver and judge are the same person”
 JAS	4	12	j280	figs-distinguish	ὁ δυνάμενος σῶσαι καὶ ἀπολέσαι	1	the one who is able to save and to destroy	James uses this phrase, which identifies God by two of his attributes, to clarify whom he means by **one lawgiver and judge**. Alternate translation: “God, who is able to save and to destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 JAS	4	12	m49q	figs-rquestion	σὺ δὲ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων τὸν πλησίον?	1	But who are you, the one judging a neighbor?	James is using the question form to challenge and teach his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But you have no right to judge a neighbor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JAS	4	12	j281	writing-pronouns	σὺ δὲ τίς εἶ	1	But who are you	For emphasis, James includes the pronoun **you** even though it is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily require pronouns with verbs but it can include them for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here in your translation. Other languages may be able to convey this emphasis in other ways, such as by repeating the pronoun. Alternate translation: “But you, who are you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JAS	4	12	j282	figs-youcrowd	σὺ&τίς εἶ	1	who are you	As in the previous verse, James is using the singular form of **you** because even though he is addressing a group of people, he is describing an individual situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+JAS	4	12	j282	figs-youcrowd	σὺ & τίς εἶ	1	who are you	As in the previous verse, James is using the singular form of **you** because even though he is addressing a group of people, he is describing an individual situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 JAS	4	12	j283		τὸν πλησίον	1	a neighbor	See how you translated the term **neighbor** in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “another person”
 JAS	4	13	j284	figs-idiom	ἄγε νῦν	1	Come now	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JAS	4	13	j285		οἱ λέγοντες	1	the ones saying	James is addressing his readers in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who say”
@@ -592,8 +592,8 @@ JAS	5	11	j323	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι πολύσπλαγχνός 
 JAS	5	12	fug7	figs-metaphor	πρὸ πάντων	1	before all	James is using a spatial metaphor to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Your language may use a different spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “above all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	5	12	bjt3	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί μου	1	my brothers	See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	5	12	s755		μὴ ὀμνύετε	1	do not swear	Here, to **swear** means to guarantee, by appealing to something that is considered to be certain and reliable, that a statement is true or that an action will be performed. Alternate translation: “do not make an oath” or “do not make a vow”
-JAS	5	12	j324	figs-ellipsis	ἤτω&ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ	1	let your “Yes” be “Yes” and “No,” “No”	In the second phrase, James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first phrase. Alternate translation: “let your ‘Yes’ be ‘Yes’ and let your ‘No’ be ‘No’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JAS	5	12	m3ve		ἤτω&ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ	1	let your “Yes” be “Yes” and “No,” “No”	Alternate translation: “simply give your word, without making an oath”
+JAS	5	12	j324	figs-ellipsis	ἤτω & ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ	1	let your “Yes” be “Yes” and “No,” “No”	In the second phrase, James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first phrase. Alternate translation: “let your ‘Yes’ be ‘Yes’ and let your ‘No’ be ‘No’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JAS	5	12	m3ve		ἤτω & ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ	1	let your “Yes” be “Yes” and “No,” “No”	Alternate translation: “simply give your word, without making an oath”
 JAS	5	12	f6mx	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ ὑπὸ κρίσιν πέσητε	1	so that you may not fall under judgment	James is speaking of **judgment** as something that a person might **fall under**. Alternate translation: “so that you will not be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JAS	5	12	j325	figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ὑπὸ κρίσιν πέσητε	1	so that you may not fall under judgment	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “so that God will not have to judge and punish you for breaking your oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JAS	5	13	m3e6	figs-rquestion	κακοπαθεῖ τις ἐν ὑμῖν? προσευχέσθω	1	Is anyone among you suffering hardship? Let him pray	James is not looking for information. He is using the question form to state a condition, and he describes the result in a short sentence right after the question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating the question and that sentence together as a single statement. Alternate translation: “If anyone among you is suffering hardship, then he should pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv
index 3b9ede9de2..a536fa13fb 100644
--- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	3	y6aq			0	General Information:	Peter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. [Verses 3–5](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language.
 1PE	1	3	l4vi	figs-declarative	εὐλογητὸς	1		Peter is using a statement to give an exhortation. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for exhortation. Alternate translation: “Let us bless” or “Let us praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 1PE	1	3	z6wk	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1PE	1	3	cyf6	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμᾶς	1	our … us	The words **our** and **us** are inclusive. They refer to Peter and those believers to whom he is writing. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1PE	1	3	cyf6	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς	1	our … us	The words **our** and **us** are inclusive. They refer to Peter and those believers to whom he is writing. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1PE	1	3	ib1x	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe Jesus as the **Lord** who rules over those who believe in him. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the person who is lord over us,” or “of the person who rules over us,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	1	3	mdvi	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to his great merciful character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	3	c92y	figs-metaphor	ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς	1	he has given us new birth	The phrase **born again** is a metaphor that refers to spiritual rebirth. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation and include an explanation if necessary. Alternate translation: “who … has caused us to be spiritually reborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	6	hy8d	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε	1	In this you greatly rejoice	**In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	1	6	dtvb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1PE	1	6	a2bq	figs-activepassive	ὀλίγον ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες ἐν ποικίλοις πειρασμοῖς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary for various trials to distress you a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	1	7	vvp1	figs-metaphor	τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως&διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου	1	so that the proof of your faith	Here Peter speaks of **faith**, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	1	7	vvp1	figs-metaphor	τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως & διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου	1	so that the proof of your faith	Here Peter speaks of **faith**, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	7	ct3n	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως	1	the proof of your faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness** and **faith**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the fact that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	7	g1oe	figs-infostructure	ἵνα τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως πολυτιμότερον χρυσίου τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου, διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου, εὑρεθῇ εἰς ἔπαινον, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ τιμὴν, ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “so that the genuineness of your faith might be found to result in praise and glory and honor at the revelation of Jesus Christ; that faith is more precious than the perishing gold, but being tested by fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	1	7	u63m	figs-explicit	ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως πολυτιμότερον χρυσίου τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου, διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου	1	of your faith, which is more precious than gold that perishes. But, being tested by fire	In this clause Peter means that **faith** is more valuable than **gold** because faith lasts forever but gold does not, even if it is refined by someone passing it through **fire**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “of your faith, which is more precious than gold because even gold that is tested by fire can perish, but your faith will not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	7	lewt	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the future **revelation of Jesus Christ**, when Jesus returns to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future revelation of Jesus Christ” or “when Jesus Christ reveals himself again in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	7	bkr9	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	at the revealing of Jesus Christ	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “at the time when Jesus Christ is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	8	eka3	figs-doublet	χαρᾷ ἀνεκλαλήτῳ καὶ δεδοξασμένῃ	1	with joy that is inexpressible and filled with glory	Here, **inexpressible** and **filled with glory** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how great the joy is. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with joy so great that words cannot describe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1PE	1	9	hw6y	figs-metaphor	κομιζόμενοι&σωτηρίαν	1	the salvation	Here Peter speaks of **salvation** as if it were an object that someone could receive. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experiencing … the salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	1	9	hw6y	figs-metaphor	κομιζόμενοι & σωτηρίαν	1	the salvation	Here Peter speaks of **salvation** as if it were an object that someone could receive. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experiencing … the salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	9	jkcb	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of you believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	9	j2qe	figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν	1	the salvation of your souls	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God saving your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	9	uk4a	figs-synecdoche	σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν	1	the salvation of your souls	Here, **souls** refers to the individual Christians to whom Peter is writing this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “your salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	10	gmcy	figs-abstractnouns	ἧς σωτηρίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	10	wx95	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰς ὑμᾶς χάριτος	1		Here, **this grace** refers to **this salvation**, mentioned earlier in this verse. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God being gracious to you by saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	11	j917	figs-explicit	εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρὸν	1		The word translated **whom** could also be translated “what.” In that case, “what” would refer to the time when salvation would take place and **what time** would then refer to the specific circumstances. However, most translations agree with the ULT’s use of **whom**. Alternate translation: “into what time or what circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	1	11	w3n8	figs-possession	τὸ&Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1	the Spirit of Christ	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as being **the Spirit** that is associated with **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, associated with Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1PE	1	11	w3n8	figs-possession	τὸ & Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1	the Spirit of Christ	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as being **the Spirit** that is associated with **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, associated with Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	1	11	hjq5		προμαρτυρόμενον	1		This could indicate: (1) the time when **the Spirit of Christ was revealing** information to the prophets. Alternate translation: “when testifying beforehand” (2) the means by which **the Spirit of Christ was revealing** information to the prophets. Alternate translation: “by means of testifying beforehand”
 1PE	1	11	x5x8	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ εἰς Χριστὸν παθήματα, καὶ τὰς μετὰ ταῦτα δόξας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings** and **glories**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about how Christ would suffer, and glorious things would happen afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	12	x4b1	figs-activepassive	οἷς ἀπεκαλύφθη	1	It was revealed to them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God revealed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	13	l45d	figs-possession	ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the revelation of Jesus Christ	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	1	14	opvh	figs-metaphor	ὡς τέκνα ὑπακοῆς	1		Here Peter uses **children** to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not express the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “Like children of obedience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	14	n5wg	figs-possession	τέκνα ὑπακοῆς	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **children** who are characterized by **obedience**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “obedient” instead of the noun “obedience.” Alternate translation: “obedient children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1PE	1	14	e4tb	figs-idiom	μὴ συνσχηματιζόμενοι ταῖς πρότερον&ἐπιθυμίαις	1	not being conformed to your former desires	Here, **not being conformed to** is an idiom meaning “not letting one’s life be controlled by.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “not being controlled by your former desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1PE	1	14	nepq	figs-declarative	μὴ συνσχηματιζόμενοι ταῖς πρότερον&ἐπιθυμίαις	1		Peter is using a statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “do not be conformed to your former desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+1PE	1	14	e4tb	figs-idiom	μὴ συνσχηματιζόμενοι ταῖς πρότερον & ἐπιθυμίαις	1	not being conformed to your former desires	Here, **not being conformed to** is an idiom meaning “not letting one’s life be controlled by.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “not being controlled by your former desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1PE	1	14	nepq	figs-declarative	μὴ συνσχηματιζόμενοι ταῖς πρότερον & ἐπιθυμίαις	1		Peter is using a statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “do not be conformed to your former desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 1PE	1	14	j2wo	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἀγνοίᾳ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ignorance**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when you were ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	15	edvw	figs-explicit	τὸν καλέσαντα ὑμᾶς	1		This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	15	mrbq	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ ἀναστροφῇ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in how you conduct yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	16	e6el	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		Here Peter uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 11:44](../lev/11/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1PE	1	16	tt52	figs-declarative	ἅγιοι ἔσεσθε	1		Peter quotes God using a future statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “You must be holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 1PE	1	16	s8kz	figs-123person	ὅτι ἐγὼ ἅγιος	1	You will be holy, because I am holy	In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because I, God, am holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1PE	1	17	x0xl	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ἐπικαλεῖσθε	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1PE	1	17	x0xl	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐπικαλεῖσθε	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1PE	1	17	c53b	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀπροσωπολήμπτως κρίνοντα	1		This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who judges impartially” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	17	s6gv	figs-metaphor	τὸν τῆς παροικίας ὑμῶν χρόνον	1	conduct yourselves in fear during the time of your journey	Here Peter speaks of his readers as if they were people living in a foreign land far away from their homes. Like people living away from home, so are Christians living away from their home in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “during the time that you are living away from your true home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	18	pcm5	figs-infostructure	οὐ φθαρτοῖς, ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, ἐλυτρώθητε ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you have been redeemed from your futile behavior handed down from your fathers, not with perishable things, with silver or with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	18	git3	figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου	1		Here, **handed down** refers to one generation teaching **futile behavior** to another generation, as if that behavior were an object that could be passed by hand from one person to another. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from your futile behavior taught to you by your fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	18	ctgm	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from behaving in futile ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	1	18	b5qa	figs-activepassive	πατροπαραδότου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that your fathers handed down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	1	19	s4jd	figs-metonymy	τιμίῳ αἵματι&Χριστοῦ	1	with the precious blood of Christ	Peter uses **the precious blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	1	19	s4jd	figs-metonymy	τιμίῳ αἵματι & Χριστοῦ	1	with the precious blood of Christ	Peter uses **the precious blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	1	19	gk6a	figs-simile	ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου	1	as an unblemished and spotless lamb	Peter compares Jesus’ blood to the blood of the lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God because of the people’s sins. The point of this comparison is that Jesus died as a sacrifice so that God would forgive people’s sins. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like that of the unblemished and spotless lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God for sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	1	19	smu8	figs-doublet	ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου	1	unblemished and spotless	The words **unblemished** and **spotless** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that Christ was completely perfect and sinless. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “completely perfect” or “with no imperfections at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	1	20	msw5	figs-activepassive	προεγνωσμένου	1	He has been chosen	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having foreknown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	23	w4v3	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐκ σπορᾶς φθαρτῆς	1	having been born again, not from perishable seed, but from imperishable	The word **seed** usually refers to either the seed of a plant or the sperm cell of a man, which is used to produce a baby. However, here Peter uses **seed** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) the **word of God** mentioned later in the verse. In this case, Peter is saying what the **word of God** is not. Alternate translation: “not by means of a human message that can perish” (2) physical human birth, in which case the meaning is similar to the idea expressed in [John 1:13](../jhn/01/13.md). Alternate translation: “not by means of mortal physical birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	23	nh9r	figs-ellipsis	ἀφθάρτου	1	from imperishable	Peter is leaving out a word that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “from imperishable seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	1	23	tjq9	figs-metonymy	λόγου ζῶντος Θεοῦ, καὶ μένοντος	1	through the living and enduring word of God	Here Peter uses **word** to describe the gospel message that came from God and was proclaimed to Peter’s readers by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s living and enduring message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1PE	1	23	pkpl	figs-doublet	ζῶντος&καὶ μένοντος	1		Here, **living** and **enduring** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God’s word is permanent. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “perpetually enduring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1PE	1	23	pkpl	figs-doublet	ζῶντος & καὶ μένοντος	1		Here, **living** and **enduring** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God’s word is permanent. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “perpetually enduring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	1	24	kyc5	writing-quotations	διότι	1		**For** here introduces a quotation of some phrases from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1PE	1	24	e299	figs-quotemarks	πᾶσα σὰρξ ὡς χόρτος, καὶ πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου. ἐξηράνθη ὁ χόρτος, καὶ τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν,	1		In these clauses and the first clause of the next verse, Peter quotes parts of [Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	1	24	dr75	figs-metonymy	πᾶσα σὰρξ	1	All flesh	Here Peter quotes Isaiah using the term **flesh** to refer to human beings in general, which are made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All humankind” or “Everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -131,14 +131,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	24	r0fd	figs-simile	ἐξηράνθη ὁ χόρτος	1	All flesh is like grass … The grass dries up	In this clause the prophet Isaiah continues the comparison between humankind and **grass**. Just like **grass** dies quickly, so human beings only live a short time. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this meaning by repeating the simile language from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “Like the grass dries up, so do people die after a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	1	24	hd2f	figs-simile	τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν	1	all its glory is like the flower of the grass … its flower falls off	In this clause the prophet Isaiah continues the comparison between the glory of humankind and flowers. Just like a **flower** dies and falls to the ground, so does the beauty of mankind disappear. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this meaning by repeating the simile language from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “like the flower that fell off the plant, so does everything that is glorious about humankind come to an end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	1	25	lqjz	figs-quotemarks	τὸ δὲ ῥῆμα Κυρίου μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		This clause completes Peters quotation of [Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md) that began in the previous verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this ending by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-1PE	1	25	aba2	figs-metonymy	τὸ&ῥῆμα Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Peter quotes Isaiah using **word** to describe all that God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that comes from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	1	25	aba2	figs-metonymy	τὸ & ῥῆμα Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Peter quotes Isaiah using **word** to describe all that God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that comes from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	1	25	pp62	figs-metonymy	τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν τὸ ῥῆμα	1		Here Peter uses **word** in the same specific sense as in [verse 23](../01/23.md). It is not the general meaning of **word** used earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And this is the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	1	25	s11j	figs-activepassive	τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν	1	the word that has been proclaimed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the word that we have proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	2	intro	a121			0		# 1 Peter 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)<br>2. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10 and the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Stones<br><br>The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, which is the most important stone. According to [Ephesians 2:20](../eph/02/20.md), the apostles and prophets are the foundation, which is the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])<br><br>### Milk and babies<br><br>When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk” in [2:2](../02/02.md), he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Sheep and shepherds<br><br>The Bible often speaks metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. In [verse 25](../02/25.md), Peter alludes to [Isaiah 53:6](../isa/53/06.md) to describe unbelievers as sheep that wander aimlessly and don’t know where they are going. God’s people are also similar to sheep in that they are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. In [verse 25](../02/25.md), Peter also refers to Jesus as a shepherd who takes care of believers, which is a similar idea to what Jesus said in [John 10:11–18](../jhn/10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/shepherd]])
 1PE	2	1	n3x5	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	**Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said in the previous paragraph ([1:22–25](../01/22.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1PE	2	1	inct	figs-declarative	ἀποθέμενοι&πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1		This clause indicates a command in addition to the command to “long for pure spiritual milk” that occurs next in the verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “put aside all evil and all deceit and hypocrisies and envies and all slanders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-1PE	2	1	g65y	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέμενοι&πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1	having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander	Peter speaks of these sinful actions as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil or being deceptive or being hypocritical or being envious or speaking slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	2	1	r853	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποθέμενοι&πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **deceit**, **hypocrisies**, **envies**, or **slanders**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having put aside every kind of evil and all deceitful, hypocritical, deceptive, and slanderous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1PE	2	1	inct	figs-declarative	ἀποθέμενοι & πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1		This clause indicates a command in addition to the command to “long for pure spiritual milk” that occurs next in the verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “put aside all evil and all deceit and hypocrisies and envies and all slanders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+1PE	2	1	g65y	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέμενοι & πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1	having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander	Peter speaks of these sinful actions as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil or being deceptive or being hypocritical or being envious or speaking slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	2	1	r853	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποθέμενοι & πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **deceit**, **hypocrisies**, **envies**, or **slanders**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having put aside every kind of evil and all deceitful, hypocritical, deceptive, and slanderous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	2	y6fv	figs-simile	ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε	1	As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk	The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just as **newborn babies** desire milk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	2	2	rm71		ἐπιποθήσατε	1	long for	Alternate translation: “desire intensely” or “yearn for”
 1PE	2	2	fn81	figs-metaphor	τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα	1	pure spiritual milk	The word translated as **rational** could also be translated “pertaining to the word”; it refers to the word of God. Peter speaks of the word of God as if it were **rational milk** that nourishes children. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s pure word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	9	m1f8	grammar-collectivenouns	βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα	1		The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of royal priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 1PE	2	9	qk7f	figs-abstractnouns	λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν	1	a people for possession	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **possession**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a people for God to possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	9	ra7z	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἐκ σκότους ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος, εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς	1	who called you from	This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who called you from darkness into his marvelous light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	2	9	nvf5	figs-metaphor	ἐκ σκότους&εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς	1	from darkness into his marvelous light	Here, **darkness** refers to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	2	10	pveb	figs-quotemarks	οὐ λαὸς&λαὸς Θεοῦ&οὐκ ἠλεημένοι&ἐλεηθέντες	1		All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament ([Hosea 1:6–10](../hos/01/06.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+1PE	2	9	nvf5	figs-metaphor	ἐκ σκότους & εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς	1	from darkness into his marvelous light	Here, **darkness** refers to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	2	10	pveb	figs-quotemarks	οὐ λαὸς & λαὸς Θεοῦ & οὐκ ἠλεημένοι & ἐλεηθέντες	1		All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament ([Hosea 1:6–10](../hos/01/06.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	2	11	jnr9			0	General Information:	Peter begins to tell his readers how to live Christian lives.
 1PE	2	11	ve9u	figs-doublet	παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους	1	foreigners and exiles	Here, **foreigners** and **exiles** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Christians on this earth are far away from their home in heaven. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “true exiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	2	11	x8af	figs-metaphor	παροίκους	1		Peter uses **foreigners** here to refer to his Christian readers. Just like a foreigner is not in his homeland, so are Christians not at home while living on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those living away from their home in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -218,12 +218,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	15	mh6s	figs-infostructure	ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν	1	doing good to silence the ignorant talk of foolish people	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “to silence the ignorance of foolish people by doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	2	15	nzwv	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ignorance**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good to silence the ignorant things that foolish people are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	16	zqe3	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐλεύθεροι	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1PE	2	16	y9pg	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα&τῆς κακίας	1	as a covering for wickedness	Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about one’s evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	2	16	y9pg	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα & τῆς κακίας	1	as a covering for wickedness	Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about one’s evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	17	gwy8	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀδελφότητα	1	the brotherhood	Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	18	w2nc			0	General Information:	Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses.
 1PE	2	18	xgk8	figs-doublet	τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν	1	the good and gentle	The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	2	18	mueb	figs-metaphor	τοῖς σκολιοῖς	1		Here, **crooked ones** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	2	19	r1h1	figs-explicit	τοῦτο&χάρις	1	this is praiseworthy	Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	2	19	r1h1	figs-explicit	τοῦτο & χάρις	1	this is praiseworthy	Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	2	19	zm8e	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ	1	because of awareness of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **consciousness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because one is aware of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	19	rjyf	figs-possession	διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **consciousness** that is about or concerning **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of having consciousness about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	2	19	kje6	figs-explicit	Θεοῦ	1		Here, **God** refers to who **God** is and what he requires from his people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of consciousness of who God is and what he requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -232,16 +232,16 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	20	ly9f	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀγαθοποιοῦντες καὶ πάσχοντες	1	doing good and suffering, you will endure	This could mean: (1) someone suffers even though that person did what is good. Alternate translation: “suffering despite doing good” (2) someone suffers because that person did what is good. Alternate translation: “suffering because of doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	2	20	qii1		τοῦτο χάρις παρὰ Θεῷ	1		See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse.
 1PE	2	21	c1jn	figs-explicit	εἰς τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers back to what Peter stated at the end of the previous verse. Believers are called by God to endure suffering while doing what is good. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to endure suffering when you have done what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	2	21	xit1	figs-activepassive	εἰς τοῦτο&ἐκλήθητε	1	to this you were called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1PE	2	21	xit1	figs-activepassive	εἰς τοῦτο & ἐκλήθητε	1	to this you were called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	2	21	si3l	figs-metaphor	ἐπακολουθήσητε τοῖς ἴχνεσιν αὐτοῦ	1	for you so that you might follow in his footsteps	Peter uses **follow in his footsteps** to refer to following Jesus’ example about enduring suffering. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might imitate his behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	22	wii5	figs-quotemarks	ὃς ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἐποίησεν, οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ	1		This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:9](../isa/53/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	2	22	tyz4	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ	1	neither was deceit found in his mouth	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “neither did anyone find deceit in his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	2	22	cjai	figs-metaphor	οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ	1		Peter quotes Isaiah referring to **deceit** as if it were an object that could be found inside someone’s mouth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither was deceit spoken out of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	22	lw1u	figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ	1	neither was deceit found in his mouth	Peter quotes Isaiah describing something the Messiah would say by association with **his mouth**, which he would use to say something. In this case it is something the Messiah did not say. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “neither did he say something deceitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	2	23	lj4a	figs-activepassive	ὃς λοιδορούμενος, οὐκ ἀντελοιδόρει	1	He, being reviled, did not revile back	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people reviled, did not revile them back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	2	23	gqb5	figs-explicit	παρεδίδου&τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως	1		Here, **the one judging justly** refers to God. This means that Jesus trusted God to punish those who reviled him or to prove that he was innocent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to God, who judges justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	2	23	gqb5	figs-explicit	παρεδίδου & τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως	1		Here, **the one judging justly** refers to God. This means that Jesus trusted God to punish those who reviled him or to prove that he was innocent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to God, who judges justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	2	24	k632	figs-rpronouns	ὃς τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν	1	He himself	Peter uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that Jesus alone is the one who bore our sins. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than Jesus bore our sins” or “Jesus, that very person, bore our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-1PE	2	24	w49m	figs-metaphor	τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν&ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον	1	carried our sins in his body to the tree	Peter uses **bore our sins** to refer to Jesus being punished for **our sins** as if **sins** were an object that he carried on **his body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	2	24	w49m	figs-metaphor	τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν & ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον	1	carried our sins in his body to the tree	Peter uses **bore our sins** to refer to Jesus being punished for **our sins** as if **sins** were an object that he carried on **his body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	24	zl8e	figs-metonymy	τὸ ξύλον	1	the tree	Peter uses **tree** to refer to the cross on which Jesus died, which was made of wood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	2	24	x7ni	figs-metaphor	ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι	1		Here, **having died to sins** is a metaphor that means to no longer be controlled by sin. Like a dead person is free from sinning because they are no longer alive, so believers are free to stop sinning because Jesus bore the punishment for their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being no longer controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	24	fxej	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι	1		This clause refers to an event that occurs before the event in the next clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “after having died to sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	24	ep4s	figs-activepassive	οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε	1	of whose wounds you were healed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has healed you by means of his wounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	2	24	lx3n	figs-synecdoche	οὗ τῷ μώλωπι	1		Here, **wounds** refers to all the suffering Jesus endured when he was beaten and killed on the cross. If our readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by whose suffering and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1PE	2	24	n0l5	figs-metaphor	ἰάθητε	1		Here, **healed** could mean: (1) being freed from the penalty and power of sin, which could include physical healing. Alternate translation: “you were freed from the effects of sin” (2) being forgiven for their sins and having a restored relationship with God. Alternate translation: “you were forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	2	25	sgt9	figs-simile	ἦτε&ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι	1	you as sheep are being led astray	Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep that were wandering around aimlessly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were living aimlessly without knowing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+1PE	2	25	sgt9	figs-simile	ἦτε & ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι	1	you as sheep are being led astray	Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep that were wandering around aimlessly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were living aimlessly without knowing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	2	25	jkfu	figs-activepassive	ἐπεστράφητε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has turned you back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	2	25	i5lu	figs-metaphor	τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν	1	the shepherd and guardian of your souls	Peter uses **shepherd** and **overseer** to refer to Jesus. Just as a **shepherd** protects his sheep and an **overseer** takes care of his workers, Jesus protects and takes care of those who trust in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who protects and takes care of your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	25	z6q2	figs-synecdoche	τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν	1		See how you translated **souls** in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -263,9 +263,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	1	b56u	figs-metonymy	ἄνευ λόγου	1		Here, **word** refers to anything the wives might say to their husbands about the gospel message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without a word about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	2	rzrl	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐποπτεύσαντες	1		This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving husbands would become believers in Jesus. These husbands became believers because they **observed** how their wives behaved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they observed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	3	2	zft4	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐν φόβῳ ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν	1	having seen your pure behavior with respect	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you behave purely and with fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	3	2	ng3s	figs-explicit	τὴν&ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν	1	your pure behavior with respect	This could refer to: (1) the wives’ sincere and honest behavior. Alternate translation: “your sincere behavior” (2) the wives’ sexually chaste behavior. Alternate translation: “your sexually chaste behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	3	2	ng3s	figs-explicit	τὴν & ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν	1	your pure behavior with respect	This could refer to: (1) the wives’ sincere and honest behavior. Alternate translation: “your sincere behavior” (2) the wives’ sexually chaste behavior. Alternate translation: “your sexually chaste behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	3	p1bg	writing-pronouns	ὧν	1		Here, **whose** refers to the Christian wives to whom Peter is speaking. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1PE	3	3	ysvn	figs-abstractnouns	ὧν&κόσμος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adornment**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they way you adorn yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1PE	3	3	ysvn	figs-abstractnouns	ὧν & κόσμος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adornment**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they way you adorn yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	4	oav8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin this verse as a new sentence. If you do so, then you will need to repeat the subject and verb from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Rather, let your adornment be the inner man of the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1PE	3	4	m2n3	figs-metonymy	ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος	1		Here, **hidden man** and **heart** both refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	4	l2yq	figs-possession	ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος	1	the inner person of the heart	Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **hidden man** is the same thing as **the heart**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the hidden man, which is the heart” or “the hidden man, namely, the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	6	t3xl	figs-idiom	ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα	1	whose children you have become	Peter uses a Hebrew idiom here in which people are said to be the **children** of someone who has qualities similar to theirs. Women who believe and who act like Sarah acted are thought of as if they were her actual **children**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “who resemble her as if you were her children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1PE	3	6	v2so	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ φοβούμεναι μηδεμίαν πτόησιν	1		The phrase **not being afraid of any** translates two negative words in Greek. Peter uses them together to emphasize that believing women should not fear anything at all. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1PE	3	7	lbc2			0	General Information:	In this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands.
-1PE	3	7	uddn	figs-genericnoun	συνοικοῦντες&τῷ γυναικείῳ	1		Here, **the female** refers to the wives of the men to whom Peter is writing, not to one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “live with the women whom you have married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1PE	3	7	uddn	figs-genericnoun	συνοικοῦντες & τῷ γυναικείῳ	1		Here, **the female** refers to the wives of the men to whom Peter is writing, not to one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “live with the women whom you have married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1PE	3	7	lulz	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ γνῶσιν	1	live with your wife according to understanding, as with a weaker container	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	7	eq1z	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει	1	as with a weaker container	Here Peter refers to women as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	7	a88w	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπονέμοντες τιμήν ὡς καὶ συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς	1	assigning her honor as also fellow heirs of the grace of life	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **heirs**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “honor them as also those who will inherit with you the grace of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -294,12 +294,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	9	wx2r	figs-explicit	εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε, ἵνα	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) **blessing** earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were called to bless so that” (2) **inherit a blessing** later in the verse “to this you were called so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	9	n3xc	figs-metaphor	ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε	1	so that you might inherit a blessing	Peter speaks of experiencing God’s **blessing** as if one is receiving an inheritance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express it plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	10	dpf2	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		**For** here introduces a quotation from the Old Testament ([Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as David wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-1PE	3	10	tce3	figs-quotemarks	ὁ&θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς, παυσάτω	1		From this clause through to the end of [verse 12](../03/12.md), Peter quotes from [Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-1PE	3	10	p9bl	figs-parallelism	ὁ&θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς	1	to love life and to see good days	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the desire to have a good life. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the one truly wanting to have a good life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1PE	3	10	tce3	figs-quotemarks	ὁ & θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς, παυσάτω	1		From this clause through to the end of [verse 12](../03/12.md), Peter quotes from [Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+1PE	3	10	p9bl	figs-parallelism	ὁ & θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς	1	to love life and to see good days	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the desire to have a good life. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the one truly wanting to have a good life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1PE	3	10	btkp	figs-metaphor	ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς	1	to see good days	Peter quotes David speaking of experiencing a good lifetime as **to see good days**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience a good lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	10	rqa9	figs-synecdoche	τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον	1	his tongue … his lips	Peter quotes David using the words **tongue** and **lips** to refer to the person who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “himself from speaking evil and from speaking deceit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1PE	3	10	y4kd	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **deceit**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “his tongue from saying evil things and his lips from speaking deceitful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	3	11	n5sr	figs-metaphor	ἐκκλινάτω&ἀπὸ κακοῦ	1	let him turn away from evil	Here, **turn away from** is a metaphor that means to avoid doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him avoid doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	3	11	n5sr	figs-metaphor	ἐκκλινάτω & ἀπὸ κακοῦ	1	let him turn away from evil	Here, **turn away from** is a metaphor that means to avoid doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him avoid doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	11	fu8e	figs-doublet	ζητησάτω εἰρήνην καὶ διωξάτω αὐτήν	1		The phrases **seek peace** and **pursue it** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of living peacefully with other people. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Let him earnestly pursue peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	3	11	qhyg	figs-explicit	ζητησάτω εἰρήνην	1		Here, **peace** refers to peaceful relationships between people. If it might be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let him seek to live peacefully with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	12	yn5l	figs-idiom	ὀφθαλμοὶ Κυρίου ἐπὶ δικαίους	1	the eyes of the Lord are upon the righteous	Here, **eyes** being **on** someone is an idiom that refers to God acting favorably toward someone by taking care of that person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “The Lord lovingly takes care of the righteous ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -316,8 +316,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	14	xg3m	figs-activepassive	μακάριοι	1	you are blessed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will cause you to be blessed ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	14	j8ds	figs-quotemarks	τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:12](../isa/08/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	3	14	f9u8	figs-parallelism	τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε	1	But do not fear their fear, nor be troubled	These two phrases mean the same thing. Peter states the same idea twice in order to emphasize that believers should not be afraid of people who persecute them. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “But you should not fear at all what people might do to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1PE	3	14	yz6y	figs-possession	τὸν&φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε	1	their fear	This could refer to: (1) the fear that unbelievers have. Alternate translation: “you should not fear what they fear” or “you should not fear the same things that they fear” (2) the fear that righteous people have for unbelievers. Alternate translation: “you should not fear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1PE	3	15	vgv7	figs-metaphor	Κύριον&τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts	Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	3	14	yz6y	figs-possession	τὸν & φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε	1	their fear	This could refer to: (1) the fear that unbelievers have. Alternate translation: “you should not fear what they fear” or “you should not fear the same things that they fear” (2) the fear that righteous people have for unbelievers. Alternate translation: “you should not fear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1PE	3	15	vgv7	figs-metaphor	Κύριον & τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts	Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	15	qjg3	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	in your hearts	Here, **hearts** refers to the thoughts or emotions of Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	15	d69e	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἀπολογίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defense**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to defend your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	15	q8i1	figs-metonymy	τῷ αἰτοῦντι ὑμᾶς λόγον	1		Peter uses **word** to refer to an answer or explanation spoken by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who asks you for a statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -328,13 +328,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	16	s7mb	figs-activepassive	καταλαλεῖσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people are slandering you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	16	qflw	figs-explicit	ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν	1		Here, **in Christ** refers to being a Christian. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your good behavior as a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	16	dvwr	figs-activepassive	καταισχυνθῶσιν, οἱ ἐπηρεάζοντες ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may shame the ones who are reviling your good behavior in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	3	17	bt09	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀγαθοποιοῦντας&κακοποιοῦντας	1		These two phrases indicate two different reasons for suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of doing good … because of doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1PE	3	17	bt09	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀγαθοποιοῦντας & κακοποιοῦντας	1		These two phrases indicate two different reasons for suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of doing good … because of doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	3	17	x8qu	figs-metonymy	εἰ θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Peter uses **the will of God** to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	18	me4u	figs-explicit	περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν	1		Here, **sins** implies the **sins** of people other than Jesus, because Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the sins of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	18	q9fa	figs-activepassive	θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ	1	having been put to death in the flesh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people having indeed killed him in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	18	j5lh	figs-metonymy	θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ	1	having been put to death in the flesh	Here, **flesh** refers to Christ’s body, which was made of **flesh**. Peter is saying that the body of Christ was killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having indeed been killed physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1PE	3	18	h6v4	figs-activepassive	ζῳοποιηθεὶς&πνεύματι	1	having been made alive in the spirit	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God’s spirit having made him alive” or “God having made him alive in the spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	3	18	n7nh	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιηθεὶς&πνεύματι	1	in the spirit	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made alive spiritually” or “having been made alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	3	18	h6v4	figs-activepassive	ζῳοποιηθεὶς & πνεύματι	1	having been made alive in the spirit	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God’s spirit having made him alive” or “God having made him alive in the spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1PE	3	18	n7nh	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιηθεὶς & πνεύματι	1	in the spirit	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made alive spiritually” or “having been made alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	19	hp82	figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ	1	in which	Here, **which** refers to “spirit” in the previous verse. As in the previous verse, this could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence. Alternate translation: “in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	19	ewuu	figs-ellipsis	ἐκήρυξεν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death, which he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct, because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Noah preaching or Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	3	19	ez3d	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν	1	to the spirits in prison	Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) evil spirits whom God imprisoned because of what they did before the flood that occurred in Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)), as in the UST. (2) the spirits of people who died during the flood that occurred in Noah’s time. This interpretation is a less likely to be correct because Peter never refers to people as **spirits**, but rather “souls,” as in the next verse. Alternate translation: “to those people who had died and were in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	21	owi3	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **removal** and **appeal**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it does not remove dirt from the flesh, but appeals to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	21	hmp9	figs-metonymy	σαρκὸς	1		Here, Peter uses **flesh** to refer to a person’s physical body that is made of **flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	21	uz0u	figs-explicit	συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν	1		Here the phrase **a good conscience** means Peter’s readers do not feel guilty because they know that God has forgiven their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “an appeal to God to know that your sins have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	3	21	jti3	figs-infostructure	καὶ ὑμᾶς&νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1	through the resurrection of Jesus Christ	Here, **through the resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1PE	3	21	jti3	figs-infostructure	καὶ ὑμᾶς & νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1	through the resurrection of Jesus Christ	Here, **through the resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	3	21	rixf	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through God raising Jesus Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	3	22	p5ij	figs-infostructure	ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ, πορευθεὶς εἰς οὐρανὸν, ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων	1		The phrases **having gone** and **having been subjected** indicate that those two clauses describe events that occurred before the event in the first clause in this verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that they appear in chronological order. Alternate translation: “after having gone into heaven, with angels and authorities and powers having been subjected to him, he is at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	3	22	g4qh	figs-metonymy	ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ	1	who is at the right hand of God	Here, Peter uses **right hand** to refer to the place located at the right side of God in heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who is at God’s right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -359,15 +359,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	22	f6jq	figs-activepassive	ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων	1	after … had been subjected to him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having subjected angels and authorities and powers to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	4	intro	zh5n			0		# 1 Peter 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)<br>2. How believers should act because the end is near (4:7–11)<br>3. How believers should respond to trials (4:12–19)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verse 18](../04/18.md).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Ungodly Gentiles<br><br>Although the term “Gentiles” usually refers to people who are not Jewish, in [verse 3](../04/03.md) Peter uses “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. Actions like “licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing, drinking parties, and lawless idolatry” were typical of ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Let him” and “Let those”<br><br>In [verses 16–19](../04/16.md) Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. Although they are commands that he wants his readers to obey, it is as if he were telling one person what he wants other people to do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate these as commands, like the UST does.
 1PE	4	1	b8d4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		**Therefore** here refers back to what Peter has said about Jesus’ suffering in [3:18](../03/18.md). If it might help your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Considering what I have written about Christ’s suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-1PE	4	1	ess6	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ&σαρκὶ	1	in the flesh	Here, **flesh** refers to the human body, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the body … in the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	4	1	ess6	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ & σαρκὶ	1	in the flesh	Here, **flesh** refers to the human body, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the body … in the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	4	1	p2rv	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε	1	arm yourselves with the same intention	Here Peter uses **arm yourselves** to refer to preparing one’s mind for something. As soldiers get their weapons ready for battle, so should Christians be mentally prepared to suffer for their faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “prepare your minds with the same way of thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	4	1	yxs5	figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν	1		Here Peter uses **the same way of thinking** to refer to Jesus’ **way of thinking** when he suffered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the same way of thinking about suffering that Christ had when he suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	1	d66g	figs-explicit	πέπαυται ἁμαρτίας	1	has ceased from sin	Here, **ceased from sin** means “no longer living with a sinful mindset.” The idea is that suffering because of one’s faith indicates that a person is not living sinfully. Christians are often persecuted by unbelievers because they refuse to act sinfully. This phrase does not mean that Christians who suffer never sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has stopped living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	2	tjdq	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1		Here, **in order to** introduces a purpose clause. This could mean: (1) this verse states the purpose for ceasing from sin mentioned at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he will” (2) this verse states the purpose for the command to “arm yourselves” in the previous verse. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “Arm yourselves in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1PE	4	2	d49a	figs-metonymy	τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ&χρόνον	1		Peter uses **time in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1PE	4	2	d49a	figs-metonymy	τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ & χρόνον	1		Peter uses **time in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	4	2	fsvk	figs-explicit	ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις	1		Here, **desires** refers specifically to sinful **desires**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sinful desires of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	2	gbb6	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις	1	for the desires of men	Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for human desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1PE	4	3	anhj		ἀρκετὸς&ὁ παρεληλυθὼς χρόνος	1		Alternate translation: “enough time has passed”
+1PE	4	3	anhj		ἀρκετὸς & ὁ παρεληλυθὼς χρόνος	1		Alternate translation: “enough time has passed”
 1PE	4	3	efte	figs-metaphor	τὸ βούλημα τῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Here Peter uses **Gentiles** to refer to sinful people who do not know God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the will of those people who do not know God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	4	3	rp5p	figs-metaphor	πεπορευμένους ἐν ἀσελγείαις, ἐπιθυμίαις, οἰνοφλυγίαις, κώμοις, πότοις, καὶ ἀθεμίτοις εἰδωλολατρίαις	1		Peter speaks of these different sins as if they were places that his readers had formerly **lived in**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having practiced licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing, drinking parties, and lawless idolatry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	4	3	lm35	figs-abstractnouns	πεπορευμένους ἐν ἀσελγείαις, ἐπιθυμίαις, οἰνοφλυγίαις, κώμοις, πότοις, καὶ ἀθεμίτοις εἰδωλολατρίαις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing**, and **idolatry**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having lived licentious and lustful lives, getting drunk, attending immoral parties and drinking parties, and worshiping prohibited idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -384,10 +384,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	6	gm1m	figs-gendernotations	κατὰ ἀνθρώπους	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “according to people” or “as people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1PE	4	6	s72f	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	they were judged in the flesh according to men	Here Peter uses **in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	4	6	encm	figs-explicit	ζῶσι	1		Here, **live** refers to experiencing eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might experience eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	4	6	h154	figs-explicit	ζῶσι&πνεύματι	1		Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	4	7	e445	figs-explicit	πάντων&τὸ τέλος	1	the end of all things	Here, **the end of all things** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	4	6	h154	figs-explicit	ζῶσι & πνεύματι	1		Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	4	7	e445	figs-explicit	πάντων & τὸ τέλος	1	the end of all things	Here, **the end of all things** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	7	qs1t	figs-metaphor	ἤγγικεν	1	has come near	Peter uses **has come near** to refer to something that will happen soon. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	4	7	ubd4	figs-doublet	σωφρονήσατε&καὶ νήψατε	1	be of sound mind, and be sober	The words translated as **sound mind** and **sober** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize the need to think clearly since the end of the world is near. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “be completely clearheaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1PE	4	7	ubd4	figs-doublet	σωφρονήσατε & καὶ νήψατε	1	be of sound mind, and be sober	The words translated as **sound mind** and **sober** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize the need to think clearly since the end of the world is near. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “be completely clearheaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	4	7	k5hh	figs-metaphor	νήψατε	1	be sober	See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	4	7	qb4j	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς προσευχάς	1		Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for his readers to think clearly. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of praying prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1PE	4	8	f1lr	figs-metaphor	ὅτι ἀγάπη καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν	1	for love covers a multitude of sins	Peter describes **love** as if it were a person who could cover something up, and he describes **sins** as if they were objects that could be covered up. This clause, **covers up**, means that people who love others will forgive them for the sins that they commit against them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “for those who love forgive the many sins committed against them by others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	18	re8y	writing-quotations	καὶ	1	If with difficulty the righteous are being saved	**And** here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Proverbs 11:31](../pro/11/31)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And Solomon wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1PE	4	18	f7kx	figs-quotemarks	εἰ ὁ δίκαιος μόλις σῴζεται, ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς ποῦ φανεῖται?	1	If with difficulty the righteous are being saved	This sentence is a quotation from [Proverbs 11:31](../pro/11/31). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	4	18	t762	figs-activepassive	εἰ ὁ δίκαιος μόλις σῴζεται	1	If with difficulty the righteous are being saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If with difficulty God is saving the righteous one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	4	18	i6nz	figs-genericnoun	ὁ δίκαιος&ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	If with difficulty the righteous are being saved	Peter is speaking of these types of people in general, and not of specific, individual people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “righteous ones … ungodly and sinful ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+1PE	4	18	i6nz	figs-genericnoun	ὁ δίκαιος & ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	If with difficulty the righteous are being saved	Peter is speaking of these types of people in general, and not of specific, individual people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “righteous ones … ungodly and sinful ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1PE	4	18	w8ke	figs-rquestion	ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς ποῦ φανεῖται?	1	where will the ungodly and the sinner appear?	Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that ungodly people will suffer much more than believers do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the ungodly and sinner will surely not appear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1PE	4	18	ms54	figs-idiom	ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς ποῦ φανεῖται	1	where will the ungodly and the sinner appear	Here, the combination of **where will** and **appear** is an idiom meaning “what will happen.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “what will happen to the ungodly and the sinner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1PE	4	18	wb4v	figs-doublet	ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς	1		The words **ungodly** and **sinner** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the wickedness of these people. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the ungodly sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -432,12 +432,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	19	g1r6		ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ	1		Alternate translation: “while doing good” or “while continuing to do good deeds”
 1PE	5	intro	a6d9			0		# 1 Peter 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. How believers should interact with one another (5:1–11)<br>2. Conclusion (5:12–14)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Lion<br><br>Other animals are usually afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])<br><br>### Babylon<br><br>Babylon was the evil nation that had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. In other places in Scripture, the authors use Babylon as a metaphor for the enemies of God’s people. In [verse 13](../05/13.md) Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians to whom he was writing. Most scholars believe that here Peter is referring to Rome because the Romans were severely persecuting Christians there at that time. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	1	s8fr			0	General Information:	In [verses 1–4](../05/01.md) Peter speaks directly to men who are leaders in the churches.
-1PE	5	1	m4xr	figs-explicit	πρεσβυτέρους&ὁ συνπρεσβύτερος	1		In [verses 1–5](../05/01.md) the words **elder** and **elders** refer specifically to church leaders, who were often older men. Here these words do not refer to old men in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fellow church leader … the church leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1PE	5	1	m4xr	figs-explicit	πρεσβυτέρους & ὁ συνπρεσβύτερος	1		In [verses 1–5](../05/01.md) the words **elder** and **elders** refer specifically to church leaders, who were often older men. Here these words do not refer to old men in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fellow church leader … the church leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	5	1	n3em	figs-abstractnouns	μάρτυς τῶν τοῦ Χριστοῦ παθημάτων	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **witness** and **sufferings**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who has witnessed Christ suffer in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	1	a6ve	figs-activepassive	τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the glory that God is about to reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	5	1	wead	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς&δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the glorious nature of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1PE	5	1	wead	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς & δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the glorious nature of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	1	yb3l	figs-explicit	τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	The phrase **the glory being about to be revealed** refers to Christ’s glorious return to earth in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the glory that is about to be revealed when Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	5	2	f63v	figs-metaphor	ποιμάνατε τὸ&ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Shepherd the flock of God	Here Peter uses **Shepherd** to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	5	2	f63v	figs-metaphor	ποιμάνατε τὸ & ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Shepherd the flock of God	Here Peter uses **Shepherd** to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	2	dvai	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **oversight** and **compulsion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “supervising—not because you must do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	2	zfei	figs-ellipsis	ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	5	2	k4dk	figs-doublet	μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς, ἀλλὰ ἑκουσίως	1		The phrases **not under compulsion** and **willingly** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to voluntarily take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete willingness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -470,12 +470,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	5	8	tl7i	figs-simile	ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν	1	the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour	Peter speaks of **the devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	5	9	v4t5	figs-ellipsis	στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	5	9	vwtc	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1		Here, **the faith** could refer to: (1) a person’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in the faith that you have” (2) the Christian faith in general. Alternate translation: “in the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	5	9	tusy	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων&ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	5	9	uk06	figs-activepassive	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων&ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the same kind of sufferings are occurring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1PE	5	9	tusy	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων & ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1PE	5	9	uk06	figs-activepassive	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων & ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the same kind of sufferings are occurring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	5	9	v451	figs-metaphor	ὑμῶν ἀδελφότητι	1	your brotherhhood	See how you translated **brotherhood** in [2:17](../02/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	9	i4ur		ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1	in the world	Alternate translation: “in various places throughout the world”
 1PE	5	10	fxfg	figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς πάσης χάριτος, ὁ καλέσας ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον αὐτοῦ δόξαν ἐν Χριστῷ, ὀλίγον παθόντας	1	the God of all grace	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses so that they appear in chronological order. Alternate translation: “But after having suffered for a little while, the God of all grace, the one who has called you to his eternal glory in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1PE	5	10	p648	figs-possession	ὁ&Θεὸς πάσης χάριτος	1	the God of all grace	**God of all grace** could mean: (1) God is always gracious. Alternate translation: “the God who is always gracious” (2) God always give gracious gifts, as mentioned in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “the God who gives all gracious gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1PE	5	10	p648	figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς πάσης χάριτος	1	the God of all grace	**God of all grace** could mean: (1) God is always gracious. Alternate translation: “the God who is always gracious” (2) God always give gracious gifts, as mentioned in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “the God who gives all gracious gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1PE	5	10	wpzj	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον αὐτοῦ δόξαν	1	the God of all grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to his glorious presence forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	10	ns1v	figs-explicit	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	the God of all grace	Here, **in Christ** refers to being united with Christ through faith in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	5	10	suu9		ὀλίγον	1	for a little while	Alternate translation: “for a short time”
diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv
index 07ebf3ff2b..419fc5112a 100644
--- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv
@@ -4,25 +4,25 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	1	n1di	figs-123person	Σίμων Πέτρος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, Simon Peter, am writing this letter” or “From Simon Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 2PE	1	1	xf2u	translate-names	Σίμων Πέτρος	1		**Simon Peter** is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to 2 Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	1	1	v381	figs-distinguish	δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	a servant and apostle of Jesus Christ	This phrase gives further information about Simon Peter. He describes himself as being both a **servant of Jesus Christ** and one given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-2PE	1	1	mbg7	figs-123person	τοῖς&λαχοῦσιν	1	to those who have received	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you who have received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+2PE	1	1	mbg7	figs-123person	τοῖς & λαχοῦσιν	1	to those who have received	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you who have received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 2PE	1	1	yy7j	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἰσότιμον ἡμῖν λαχοῦσιν πίστιν	1	to those who have received the same precious faith	That these people have **received a faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given a faith equal in value with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2PE	1	1	x186	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς ἰσότιμον&λαχοῦσιν πίστιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb, such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “to those whom God has made to trust” or “to those whom God has made to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	1	x186	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς ἰσότιμον & λαχοῦσιν πίστιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb, such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “to those whom God has made to trust” or “to those whom God has made to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	1	y157	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	with us	Here, the word **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles, but not to those to whom he is writing. Alternate translation: “as we apostles have received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2PE	1	1	xdyd		ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ	1		The word **by** indicates the means through which they received the faith. Alternate translation: “by means of the righteousness”
 2PE	1	1	fpsl	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **righteousness** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “righteous” or “right.” Alternate translation: “the righteous acts of our God and Savior” or “the right way of our God and Savior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	2	oaej	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1		In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God increase his kind acts to you and make you more peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-2PE	1	2	y7l9	figs-explicit	χάρις&καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1	May grace and peace be multiplied	God is the one who will give **grace** and **peace** to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that information explicit. Alternate translation: “May God increase his grace and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2PE	1	2	y7l9	figs-explicit	χάρις & καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1	May grace and peace be multiplied	God is the one who will give **grace** and **peace** to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that information explicit. Alternate translation: “May God increase his grace and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	1	2	ui01	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	1	2	n59n	figs-metaphor	χάρις&καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1	May grace and peace be multiplied	Peter speaks of **grace and peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May God increase his grace and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	1	2	n59n	figs-metaphor	χάρις & καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1	May grace and peace be multiplied	Peter speaks of **grace and peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May God increase his grace and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	2	x8na	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1		Here the pronoun **you** is plural, since Peter is writing to believers in Jesus as a group. Generally, throughout the letter the pronouns “you” and “your” are plural for this same reason. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 2PE	1	2	vq19	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	in the knowledge of God and of Jesus our Lord	If you would not use an abstract noun here, you could translate **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because you know God and Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	2	xgax		ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1		This could mean: (1) “because of knowing God and Jesus our Lord” or (2) “through knowing God and Jesus our Lord.”
 2PE	1	2	pmb9	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1		Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-2PE	1	3	ywj9	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς&ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ&δεδωρημένης	1		Here, **As** indicates that this verse provides the reason for the expected result, which is Peter’s command in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Since his divine power has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2PE	1	3	ywj9	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς & ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ & δεδωρημένης	1		Here, **As** indicates that this verse provides the reason for the expected result, which is Peter’s command in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Since his divine power has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	1	3	zwdo	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, **us** refers to Peter and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2PE	1	3	rtxn	writing-pronouns	τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1		The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God’s divine power” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, by his power as God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	3	xdrw	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “God, because he can do anything,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	1	3	xz3s	figs-personification	τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ&δεδωρημένης	1		Peter is speaking of God’s **divine power** as if it were a living thing that could give something to people. God is the one who is giving, and he uses his **divine power** to do so. Alternate translation: “God has used his divine power to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+2PE	1	3	xz3s	figs-personification	τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ & δεδωρημένης	1		Peter is speaking of God’s **divine power** as if it were a living thing that could give something to people. God is the one who is giving, and he uses his **divine power** to do so. Alternate translation: “God has used his divine power to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 2PE	1	3	x8qv	grammar-connect-logic-goal	πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν	1		Here, the word **for** indicates the purpose for which God has given all these things to believers. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of life and godliness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2PE	1	3	epx9	figs-hendiadys	πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν	1	for life and godliness	Here, **godliness** describes the word **life**. Alternate translation: “for a godly life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2PE	1	3	xr1r	figs-abstractnouns	εὐσέβειαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **godliness** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “acting honorably toward God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	4	zxij	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα διὰ τούτων γένησθε θείας κοινωνοὶ φύσεως	1		This is a purpose clause. Peter is stating the purpose for which God has given to us precious and great promises. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that through them you might be sharers of the divine nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2PE	1	4	f42f		διὰ τούτων	1		The word **through** here indicates the means by which you might be sharers of the divine nature. Alternate translation: “by means of them”
 2PE	1	4	umh8	writing-pronouns	διὰ τούτων	1		Here the pronoun **them** refers back to the precious and great promises of the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “through these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2PE	1	4	yk7g	figs-abstractnouns	θείας&φύσεως	1		The abstract noun **nature** refers to the inherent features of something or what it is like. Alternate translation: “of what God is like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	1	4	p2yj	figs-metaphor	ἀποφυγόντες τῆς&φθορᾶς	1		Peter speaks of people not suffering from the **corruption** that wicked desires cause as if they had **escaped** from that corruption. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase plainly. Alternate translation: “no longer being corrupted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	1	4	yk7g	figs-abstractnouns	θείας & φύσεως	1		The abstract noun **nature** refers to the inherent features of something or what it is like. Alternate translation: “of what God is like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	4	p2yj	figs-metaphor	ἀποφυγόντες τῆς & φθορᾶς	1		Peter speaks of people not suffering from the **corruption** that wicked desires cause as if they had **escaped** from that corruption. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase plainly. Alternate translation: “no longer being corrupted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	4	xxuj	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Here, **the world** could mean: (1) the place where we all live, where we are surrounded by sinful people and temptations to sin. Alternate translation: “that is all around us” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God. Alternate translation: “of the world’s ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	1	4	wnec		ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ	1		Here, **by** indicates the means by which the world became corrupt. It does not indicate the means by which Peter’s addressees escaped corruption. Alternate translation: “by means of lust”
 2PE	1	4	kjnh	figs-abstractnouns	φθορᾶς	1	corruption	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **corruption** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “things that corrupt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -50,18 +50,18 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	5	xp0n	figs-idiom	σπουδὴν πᾶσαν παρεισενέγκαντες	1		Here, **applying all diligence** is an idiom that means doing one’s best or making the best effort. Alternate translation: “making every effort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2PE	1	5	j0tr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιχορηγήσατε ἐν τῇ πίστει ὑμῶν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “as you trust in Jesus, add” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	5	tukx	figs-you	ὑμῶν	1		The pronoun **your** is plural here, since Peter is writing to believers in Jesus as a group. Generally, throughout the letter the pronouns “you” and “your” are plural for this same reason. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-2PE	1	5	wj3w	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀρετήν&τῇ ἀρετῇ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodness** with an adjective phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “doing what is good … doing what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	5	wj3w	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀρετήν & τῇ ἀρετῇ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodness** with an adjective phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “doing what is good … doing what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	5	x74i	figs-ellipsis	ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀρετῇ τὴν γνῶσιν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in your goodness, knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	1	5	r61t	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν γνῶσιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	6	anfs	figs-ellipsis	ἐν δὲ τῇ γνώσει τὴν ἐνκράτειαν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in knowledge, self-control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	1	6	anfa	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ γνώσει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	1	6	s5ni	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐνκράτειαν&τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **self-control** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “controlling yourself … controlling yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	6	s5ni	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐνκράτειαν & τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **self-control** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “controlling yourself … controlling yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	6	wloy	figs-ellipsis	ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ τὴν ὑπομονήν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in self-control, endurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2PE	1	6	ajag	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑπομονήν&τῇ ὑπομονῇ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “enduring hardship … enduring hardship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	6	ajag	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑπομονήν & τῇ ὑπομονῇ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “enduring hardship … enduring hardship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	6	mile	figs-ellipsis	ἐν δὲ τῇ ὑπομονῇ τὴν εὐσέβειαν,	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in endurance, godliness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	1	6	x7go	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εὐσέβειαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **godliness** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “acting honorably toward God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	7	nbk3	figs-ellipsis	ἐν δὲ τῇ εὐσεβείᾳ τὴν φιλαδελφίαν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in godliness, brotherly affection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2PE	1	7	a8ti	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν φιλαδελφίαν&τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **brotherly affection** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “being concerned for your brothers and sisters … being concerned for your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	7	a8ti	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν φιλαδελφίαν & τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **brotherly affection** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “being concerned for your brothers and sisters … being concerned for your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	7	xzwn	figs-ellipsis	ἐν δὲ τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ τὴν ἀγάπην	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in brotherly affection, love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	1	7	h713	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “loving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	8	tlhv	grammar-connect-logic-result	ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα	1		The word **For** here indicates that Peter is giving a reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Because these things existing and increasing in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	8	f9qm	figs-doublet	οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους	1		The words **barren** and **unfruitful** mean basically the same thing. In combination with the negatives **neither** and **nor**, they are used together to emphasize that this person will not be unproductive but will experience great benefits from knowing Jesus. If it is confusing in your language to use two words together that mean the same thing, you could just use one word with that meaning. Alternate translation: “not unproductive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2PE	1	8	ppd8	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἐπίγνωσιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in your knowing our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	9	k6lv	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that Peter is giving another reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Peter gave a positive reason in [1:8](../01/08.md) and gives a negative reason here. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	1	9	gg2c	figs-genericnoun	ᾧ&μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα, τυφλός ἐστιν	1	he in whom these things are not present	Here, **he** does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does not have these things. Alternate translation: “anyone who does not have these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+2PE	1	9	gg2c	figs-genericnoun	ᾧ & μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα, τυφλός ἐστιν	1	he in whom these things are not present	Here, **he** does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does not have these things. Alternate translation: “anyone who does not have these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 2PE	1	9	vycf	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		The phrase **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	1	9	h6fn	figs-metaphor	τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων	1	is blind, nearsighted	In this metaphor, Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if the person were **blind** or **nearsighted**. He means this in a spiritual sense, that this person cannot see what is spiritually important. If that is confusing in your language, you could use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he … is like a blind or shortsighted person who cannot see their importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	9	xenf	figs-hendiadys	τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων	1		Although the words **blind** and **nearsighted** have similar meanings, **blind** is more extreme than **nearsighted,** and a person cannot be both at the same time. If it is confusing in your language to describe someone using both of these words in this way, you could use a word like “or” between them or show how they might work together. Alternate translation: “he … is blind or nearsighted” or “he … is blindly nearsighted” or “he … is so nearsighted that he is blind to what is spiritually important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	14	fpng	figs-euphemism	ταχινή ἐστιν ἡ ἀπόθεσις τοῦ σκηνώματός μου	1	the putting off of my tent is imminent	**Putting off** his **tent** is a nice way to refer to dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “I will die soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 2PE	1	14	yzag		καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, ἐδήλωσέν μοι	1		Suggested footnote: “Peter may be referring here to what Jesus told him, as recorded in John 21:18–19.”
 2PE	1	15	aau5	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ καὶ	1		**Likewise** here could mean that: (1) this statement is in addition to what Peter just said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Moreover” (2) this statement is contrasting what he just said in the previous verse with what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-2PE	1	15	xz8d	figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστοτε, ἔχειν ὑμᾶς&τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	15	xz8d	figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστοτε, ἔχειν ὑμᾶς & τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	15	c2iw	writing-pronouns	τούτων	1	of these things	Here, **these things** refers to what Peter has said in the previous verses, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	15	ivw6	figs-euphemism	μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν ἔξοδον	1	after my departure	Peter uses the word **departure** as a nice way to speak of his death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more common euphemism in your language, or state it directly. Alternate translation: “after my passing” or “after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 2PE	1	16	k3rm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	**For** indicates that in [1:16–21](../01/16.md) Peter explains to the believers why they should remember “these things,” which were mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	1	16	vc99	figs-exclusive	οὐ&ἐγνωρίσαμεν	1	we have not followed	Here, **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles. It does not refer to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-2PE	1	16	jwy8	figs-hendiadys	τὴν&δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν	1	the power and coming	The words **power** and **coming** work together to refer to the same thing; they may be translated as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the powerful coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+2PE	1	16	vc99	figs-exclusive	οὐ & ἐγνωρίσαμεν	1	we have not followed	Here, **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles. It does not refer to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2PE	1	16	jwy8	figs-hendiadys	τὴν & δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν	1	the power and coming	The words **power** and **coming** work together to refer to the same thing; they may be translated as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the powerful coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2PE	1	16	zs6v		τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν	1	coming of our Lord Jesus Christ	In this clause Peter refers to the second coming of the Lord Jesus to earth. This future event was foreshadowed by the powerful appearance of Jesus known as the “transfiguration,” which is described in Matthew 17:1–8, Mark 9:1–8, and Luke 9:28–36. Peter was an eyewitness of that event.
 2PE	1	16	v4kd	figs-exclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2PE	1	16	miqe		ἐπόπται γενηθέντες	1		This phrase indicates the means by which the apostles had made known to others the second coming of Jesus. The apostles based their teaching about the return of Jesus partly on their eyewitness experience. Alternate translation: “by means of becoming eyewitnesses”
@@ -120,13 +120,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	16	k3w3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐκείνου μεγαλειότητος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **majesty** with an adjective such as “majestic.” Alternate translation: “of his majestic nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	17	x93a	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** indicates that what follows in [1:17–18](../01/17.md) is the reason that Peter can say in the previous verse that he was an eyewitness to the majesty of Jesus. Use a connector that indicates that this is a reason or explanation. Alternate translation: “I say this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	1	17	q605	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1		**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-2PE	1	17	xlph	figs-abstractnouns	λαβὼν&παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς τιμὴν καὶ δόξαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **glory** by translating them with equivalent expressions that use verbs. Alternate translation: “and God the Father honored and glorified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	17	xlph	figs-abstractnouns	λαβὼν & παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς τιμὴν καὶ δόξαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **glory** by translating them with equivalent expressions that use verbs. Alternate translation: “and God the Father honored and glorified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	17	m33h	figs-activepassive	φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ τοιᾶσδε ὑπὸ τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης	1	when such a voice was brought to him by the Majestic Glory	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when he heard that voice come to him from the Majestic Glory” or “when he heard the voice of the Majestic Glory speak to him” or “when the Majestic Glory spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	1	17	o62f	writing-quotations	φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ τοιᾶσδε ὑπὸ τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “such a voice having been brought to him by the Majestic Glory, and this is what God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 2PE	1	17	sz0p	writing-pronouns	ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ	1		The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly the idea behind this connection. Alternate translation: “having been brought to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	17	yd8g	figs-metonymy	τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης	1	the Majestic Glory	Peter refers to God in terms of his **Glory**. The glory of God is closely associated with God himself and here substitutes for his name. Alternate translation: “God, the Supreme Glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	1	17	cxh2	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱός μου	1		**Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-2PE	1	17	ppum	writing-pronouns	μου&μου&ἐγὼ	1		The pronouns **my** and **myself** refer to God the Father, who is the one speaking in the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	1	17	ppum	writing-pronouns	μου & μου & ἐγὼ	1		The pronouns **my** and **myself** refer to God the Father, who is the one speaking in the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	1	18	ezn2	figs-exclusive	ταύτην τὴν φωνὴν ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν	1	we ourselves heard this voice having been brought from heaven	With the words **we ourselves**, Peter is referring to himself and to the disciples James and John, who also heard the voice of God. Alternate translation: “we, James, John, and I, heard this voice that came from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2PE	1	18	chy4	figs-activepassive	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν	1	we ourselves heard this voice having been brought from heaven	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “having come from heaven” or “that came from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	1	18	mlm9		σὺν αὐτῷ, ὄντες	1	when we were with him	This is a temporal phrase that can begin with “when.” Alternate translation: “when we were with him”
@@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	20	s4k2	figs-infostructure	πᾶσα προφητεία Γραφῆς ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται	1	every prophecy of scripture does not coms from one’s own interpretation	Here, **one’s own interpretation** could mean: (1) that the Old Testament prophets did not base any of their prophecies on their own interpretations of what God had said, but only prophesied what God revealed to them. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of information. Alternate translation: “no prophet interpreted his prophecy according to his own interpretation” (2) that no individual person can interpret scripture on his or her own, but only with the help of the Holy Spirit and the larger community of believers. Alternate translation: “no one is able to explain any prophecy in the Bible through his own ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 2PE	1	20	p5xo	figs-abstractnouns	ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως	1		The word **interpretation** is an abstract noun that represents an action. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with a verb. Alternate translation: “no prophet interpreted his prophecy according to what he himself thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	21	isqj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates that what follows is the reason that the statement of the previous verse is true. It could mean: (1) the prophets could not prophesy according to their own interpretations, because true prophecy could only come from the Holy Spirit. (2) no one can interpret prophecy without help from the Holy Spirit, because the prophecy came from the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	1	21	evx4	figs-activepassive	οὐ&θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “no prophet ever prophesied by the will of man” or “the will of man never produced any prophecy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2PE	1	21	yxdx	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ&θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **will** with a verbal phrase, such as “what a man desires.” Alternate translation: “no prophecy was ever made according to what a man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	1	21	evx4	figs-activepassive	οὐ & θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “no prophet ever prophesied by the will of man” or “the will of man never produced any prophecy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2PE	1	21	yxdx	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **will** with a verbal phrase, such as “what a man desires.” Alternate translation: “no prophecy was ever made according to what a man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	1	21	x2hv	figs-gendernotations	θελήματι ἀνθρώπου	1		Peter is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by human desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2PE	1	21	mh2s	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι	1	men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit	Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit **carried** them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God by the Holy Spirit directing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	1	21	x1xw	figs-ellipsis	ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1		In this phrase, Peter is leaving out a word that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. If this word is required in your language, it can be supplied from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “spoke prophecy from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	7	uknf	figs-distinguish	καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1	Connecting Statement:	This clause is giving more information about **Lot**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “He was being oppressed by the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2PE	2	7	mort	figs-activepassive	καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness oppressed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	7	x8vy	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1		Here, **by** could refer to: (1) the thing that was oppressing Lot, as in the ULT. (2) the reason why Lot was oppressed. Alternate translation: “because of the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	2	7	wrba	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων&ἀναστροφῆς	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **behavior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “by what the lawless ones did” or “by how the lawless ones acted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	2	7	wrba	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων & ἀναστροφῆς	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **behavior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “by what the lawless ones did” or “by how the lawless ones acted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	7	wq2r		τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1		Here, **in** indicates the content of what the lawless people were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **in licentiousness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior of the lawless ones”
 2PE	2	7	xnys	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **licentiousness** with an adjective. See how you translated the plural form of this term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior of the lawless ones” or “the wild sensual behavior of the lawless ones”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	7	k79d	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀθέσμων	1		Here, **the lawless ones** refers to the people who lived in the city of Sodom, where Lot lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the lawless people of Sodom” or “of the people who act as if there is no law in Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -230,17 +230,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	8	xdlw		ἐνκατοικῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς	1		This clause indicates the time when Lot dwelled in Sodom. Alternate translation: “when he lived among them”
 2PE	2	8	xa7g	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the inhabitants of Sodom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify what the pronoun **them** refers to. Alternate translation: “the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	8	ujf1	figs-idiom	ἐνκατοικῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας	1		This phrase, **day from day**, is an idiom meaning “day after day” or “every day.” You may need to express this literally in your language. Alternate translation: “living among them day after day” or “living among them every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-2PE	2	8	hpi4	figs-synecdoche	ψυχὴν δικαίαν&ἐβασάνιζεν	1	was tormenting his righteous soul	Here, **soul** refers to Lot’s thoughts and emotions. The immoral behavior of the citizens of Sodom and Gomorrah disturbed him emotionally. Alternate translation: “was greatly disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+2PE	2	8	hpi4	figs-synecdoche	ψυχὴν δικαίαν & ἐβασάνιζεν	1	was tormenting his righteous soul	Here, **soul** refers to Lot’s thoughts and emotions. The immoral behavior of the citizens of Sodom and Gomorrah disturbed him emotionally. Alternate translation: “was greatly disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 2PE	2	8	co5v		ἀνόμοις ἔργοις	1		This phrase could mean: (1) the **lawless works** were the means by which Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “with lawless works” (2) the **lawless works** were the reason why Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “because of lawless works”
 2PE	2	9	j0m1	grammar-connect-condition-fact	οἶδεν Κύριος	1		This verse and the next verse are the end of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is giving the result of the previous conditions being true. If you have made [2:4–10](../02/04.md) into separate sentences, then you will need to indicate that [2:9](../02/09.md) is the result of the previous conditions being true. Alternate translation: “Therefore, it is true that the Lord knows how” or “Since these things are true, it is also true that the Lord knows how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	9	xk2a	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν	1		Here, **and** could refer to: (1) a contrast between the previous clause and what follows, as in the ULT and UST. (2) a simple connection between the previous clause and what follows. Alternate translation: “and to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-2PE	2	9	bcf3	figs-ellipsis	πειρασμοῦ&ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν	1		In this clause, Peter is leaving out some words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “a trial and the Lord knows how to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2PE	2	9	bcf3	figs-ellipsis	πειρασμοῦ & ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν	1		In this clause, Peter is leaving out some words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “a trial and the Lord knows how to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	2	9	xdos	grammar-connect-logic-goal	κολαζομένους	1		This is a purpose clause. Peter is stating the purpose for which God is keeping the unrighteous people. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to be punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-2PE	2	9	qwcm	figs-activepassive	ἀδίκους&κολαζομένους τηρεῖν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to keep the unrighteous ones to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2PE	2	9	qwcm	figs-activepassive	ἀδίκους & κολαζομένους τηρεῖν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to keep the unrighteous ones to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	9	ms6u		εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως	1		Here, **in** could refer to: (1) when the unrighteous ones will be punished. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (2) the point in time up to which the unrighteous ones will be punished. Alternate translation: “until the day of judgment”
 2PE	2	9	xnf3	figs-possession	ἡμέραν κρίσεως	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **judgment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	10	skh8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **but** indicates a connection between the last clause of the previous verse and what follows. It does not indicate a contrast between “the unrighteous” in the previous verse and “those going after the flesh” in this verse. Alternate translation: “and especially those going after the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-2PE	2	10	xuxw	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ὀπίσω&πορευομένους	1	Connecting Statement:	Peter uses the phrase **going after** to refer to habitually doing something. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshiping false gods or engaging in sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “those habitually engaging in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	2	10	xuxw	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ὀπίσω & πορευομένους	1	Connecting Statement:	Peter uses the phrase **going after** to refer to habitually doing something. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshiping false gods or engaging in sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “those habitually engaging in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	10	eb1k	figs-metonymy	σαρκὸς	1	those who go after the flesh in its lusts of defilement	Here, **flesh** is used to refer to person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this figure of speech literally. Alternate translation: “their sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	2	10	xg5a		ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ	1	those who go after the flesh in its lusts of defilement	Here, **in** indicates that this phrase shows the means by which the wicked people go after the flesh. Alternate translation: “by means of practicing its lusts of defilement”
 2PE	2	10	xndv	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilement** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in its lusts that defile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -250,14 +250,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	10	nkjm	figs-exclamations	τολμηταὶ αὐθάδεις	1		The words **Audacious ones** and **Self-willed ones** are exclamations that emphasize the bold pride of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are so audacious and self-willed!” or “How audacious and self-willed they are!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 2PE	2	10	esb2		αὐθάδεις	1	self-willed	**Self-willed** means “doing whatever one wants to do.” Alternate translation: “Those who do whatever they want”
 2PE	2	10	x82c	writing-pronouns	οὐ τρέμουσιν	1		Here, **They** refers to the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers do not tremble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2PE	2	10	f4gi		δόξας&βλασφημοῦντες	1		This clause indicates the time when the false teachers do not tremble. Alternate translation: “when insulting glorious ones”
+2PE	2	10	f4gi		δόξας & βλασφημοῦντες	1		This clause indicates the time when the false teachers do not tremble. Alternate translation: “when insulting glorious ones”
 2PE	2	10	s7l1		δόξας	1		Here, **glorious ones** could refer to: (1) spiritual beings, such as angels, demons, or both. Alternate translation: “glorious spiritual beings” (2) important human beings, such as church leaders. Alternate translation: “glorious people”
 2PE	2	11	u2jk	figs-distinguish	ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες	1		This clause could refer to: (1) a contrast between the description of the **angels** in this clause with their behavior in the next clause. Alternate translation: “despite being greater in strength and power” (2) a description of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “who are greater in strength and power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2PE	2	11	ljdy	figs-ellipsis	ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the surrounding context, which is a description of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “being greater in strength and power than these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	2	11	vg2j	figs-doublet	ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες	1		The words **strength** and **power** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Together, the words describe extreme power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this pair of words with a single expression. Alternate translation: “being much more powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-2PE	2	11	v1qt	writing-pronouns	οὐ φέρουσιν κατ’ αὐτῶν&βλάσφημον κρίσιν	1	do not bring insulting judgments against them	Here, **them** could mean: (1) the “glorious ones.” Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these glorious ones.” (2) the false teachers. Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these false teachers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+2PE	2	11	v1qt	writing-pronouns	οὐ φέρουσιν κατ’ αὐτῶν & βλάσφημον κρίσιν	1	do not bring insulting judgments against them	Here, **them** could mean: (1) the “glorious ones.” Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these glorious ones.” (2) the false teachers. Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these false teachers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	12	ytrj	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1		Here, **these {men}** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2PE	2	12	y4bl	figs-metaphor	οὗτοι&ὡς ἄλογα ζῷα	1	these unreasoning animals are naturally made for capture and destruction.	Peter describes the false teachers by comparing them to **unreasoning animals**. Just as **animals** cannot think rationally, neither can these people. Alternate translation: “these false teachers are like animals who are not capable of thinking rationally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	2	12	y4bl	figs-metaphor	οὗτοι & ὡς ἄλογα ζῷα	1	these unreasoning animals are naturally made for capture and destruction.	Peter describes the false teachers by comparing them to **unreasoning animals**. Just as **animals** cannot think rationally, neither can these people. Alternate translation: “these false teachers are like animals who are not capable of thinking rationally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	12	xhxj	figs-distinguish	γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν	1		This clause gives more information about the unreasoning animals and thus, by way of comparison, the false teachers. Alternate translation: “which have by nature been born for capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2PE	2	12	yxsy		γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν	1		Here, **by nature** means that the unreasoning animals (and false teachers by comparison) were destined for capture and destruction due to their very nature as animals born for this purpose. Alternate translation: “according to their nature, these animals are born for capture and destruction”
 2PE	2	12	x14h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν	1		This is a purpose clause. The word **for** here indicates that what follows it is the purpose for which these animals have been born. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -294,13 +294,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	15	b39g	figs-activepassive	ἐπλανήθησαν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they went astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	15	xkt6	figs-explicit	ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ, ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν	1		In this verse, Peter compares the false teachers to **Balaam**. Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Balaam was hired by wicked kings to curse the Israelites. When God did not allow Balaam to do so, he used wicked women to seduce the Israelites into sexual immorality and idol worship so that God would punish them for their disobedience. Balaam did these wicked things because he wanted to be paid by the wicked kings, but he was eventually killed by the Israelites when they conquered the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “following the way of Balaam son of Bosor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness so much that he led the Israelites into immorality and idolatry in order to receive money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	2	15	xi4q	figs-metaphor	ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ	1		Here, Peter uses the word **followed** to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “having imitated the way of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	15	v9lx	translate-names	Βαλαὰμ&Βοσὸρ	1	the right way	**Bosor** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+2PE	2	15	v9lx	translate-names	Βαλαὰμ & Βοσὸρ	1	the right way	**Bosor** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	2	15	alxl	figs-metaphor	τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ	1		Here, Peter uses **the way of Balaam** to refer to how Balaam lived his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “the manner of living of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	15	v3wn	writing-pronouns	ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν	1		Here, the pronoun**who** refers to Balaam. It does not refer to Bosor, nor to the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this directly. If you begin a new sentence, you will have to replace the comma with a period. Alternate translation: “Balaam loved the wages of unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	15	befr	figs-possession	ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **wages** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “who loved the unrighteous wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	15	x5gg	figs-abstractnouns	μισθὸν ἀδικίας	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with the adjective “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “the unrighteous wages” or “the wages for unrighteous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	2	16	z37w	figs-abstractnouns	ἔλεγξιν&ἔσχεν	1	he had a rebuke	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **rebuke** as a verb and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God rebuked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	2	16	gsm7	figs-explicit	ἔλεγξιν&ἔσχεν	1	he had a rebuke	If it would be helpful in your language, you could specify who rebuked Balaam. This clause could mean: (1) the donkey rebuked Balaam. Alternate translation: “a donkey rebuked him” (2) God rebuked Balaam through the donkey. Alternate translation: “God rebuked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2PE	2	16	z37w	figs-abstractnouns	ἔλεγξιν & ἔσχεν	1	he had a rebuke	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **rebuke** as a verb and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God rebuked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	2	16	gsm7	figs-explicit	ἔλεγξιν & ἔσχεν	1	he had a rebuke	If it would be helpful in your language, you could specify who rebuked Balaam. This clause could mean: (1) the donkey rebuked Balaam. Alternate translation: “a donkey rebuked him” (2) God rebuked Balaam through the donkey. Alternate translation: “God rebuked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	2	16	x7zu	figs-explicit	ἰδίας παρανομίας	1		This **transgression** specifically refers to Balaam’s use of wicked women to lead the Israelites into sexual immorality and idolatry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for his wicked act of leading the Israelites into immorality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	2	16	xspp	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **irrationality** with an adjective like “irrational” or “foolish.” Alternate translation: “the irrational action of the prophet” or “the foolish action of the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	16	tf38	figs-explicit	ἐκώλυσεν τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν	1	restrained the madness of the prophet	Here, **the prophet** refers to Balaam. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “restrained the madness of the prophet Balaam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -312,8 +312,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	17	v90z		ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους	1		This could mean: (1) the **gloom** is characterized by **darkness**. Alternate translation: “the dark gloom” (2) the **gloom** is identical to the **darkness**. Alternate translation: “the gloom, which is darkness.”
 2PE	2	17	xrpf	figs-metaphor	ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους	1		Here, Peter uses **gloom** and **darkness** to refer to hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	18	xgoc	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** indicates the reason why the false teachers are reserved for punishment in the gloom of darkness, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	2	18	cxt8		ὑπέρογκα&ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι	1	speaking arrogant things of vanity	This clause indicates the means by which the false teachers entice others to sin. Alternate translation: “by means of speaking arrogant things of vanity”
-2PE	2	18	x2by	figs-possession	ὑπέρογκα&ματαιότητος	1	speaking arrogant things of vanity	Peter is using the possessive form to describe **arrogant** speech that is characterized by **vanity**. Alternate translation: “vain, arrogant things” or “vain and arrogant things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+2PE	2	18	cxt8		ὑπέρογκα & ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι	1	speaking arrogant things of vanity	This clause indicates the means by which the false teachers entice others to sin. Alternate translation: “by means of speaking arrogant things of vanity”
+2PE	2	18	x2by	figs-possession	ὑπέρογκα & ματαιότητος	1	speaking arrogant things of vanity	Peter is using the possessive form to describe **arrogant** speech that is characterized by **vanity**. Alternate translation: “vain, arrogant things” or “vain and arrogant things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	18	n2pr	figs-abstractnouns	ματαιότητος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **vanity** with an adjective, such as “vain.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	18	f8tg	writing-pronouns	δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς	1	They entice people by the lusts of the flesh	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice by the lusts of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	18	t543	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς	1		Here, **flesh** is used to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the literal meaning for the metaphor. Alternate translation: “by the lusts of their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -324,17 +324,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	19	je1k	writing-pronouns	ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι	1		Here, the pronoun **them** refers to those people who are deceived by the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “promising freedom to those whom they deceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	19	n0bh	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ δοῦλοι ὑπάρχοντες τῆς φθορᾶς;	1		Peter uses the word **themselves** here to emphasize the irony of spiritually enslaved people promising spiritual freedom to others. Alternate translation: “while they themselves are slaves of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 2PE	2	19	v5tt	figs-metaphor	δοῦλοι	1		Peter speaks of people who live sinfully as if they were **slaves** to sin who need to escape from their captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	19	xyua	figs-possession	δοῦλοι&τῆς φθορᾶς	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that are characterized by **destruction**. Alternate translation: “slaves that will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+2PE	2	19	xyua	figs-possession	δοῦλοι & τῆς φθορᾶς	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that are characterized by **destruction**. Alternate translation: “slaves that will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	19	b79v	figs-metaphor	ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται	1	For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved	Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this plainly or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	19	xqmy	figs-activepassive	ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive sentence with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	20	v3xc		γὰρ	1		Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And”
-2PE	2	20	q96i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ&ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-2PE	2	20	efnj	figs-metaphor	εἰ&ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	2	20	q96i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2PE	2	20	efnj	figs-metaphor	εἰ & ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	20	xpo9	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilements** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that sinful human society does to defile itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	20	lu22	figs-metonymy	τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1	the impurities of the world	Here, the **world** refers to human society, which has been corrupted by sin. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	2	20	bi73	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verbal phrase. See how you translated similar phrases in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “by knowing our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	20	zxcf	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us and saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-2PE	2	20	ih4w	figs-activepassive	τούτοις&πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again; these things have overcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2PE	2	20	ih4w	figs-activepassive	τούτοις & πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again; these things have overcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	20	ygag	figs-metaphor	πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες	1		Here, Peter speaks of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	20	noa9	writing-pronouns	τούτοις	1		Here, the pronoun **these things** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	20	d6ra	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -344,9 +344,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	21	xg05	figs-possession	τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the righteous way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	21	pm7b	figs-idiom	τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	the way of righteousness	Peter speaks of life as a **way** or path. This phrase refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md) and “the straight way” in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the manner of living that pleases the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2PE	2	21	lib0		ἐπιγνοῦσιν	1		This clause indicates that the next clause describes an event that happened after the event of this clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “after having known it”
-2PE	2	21	ic3c	figs-metaphor	ὑποστρέψαι ἐκ τῆς&ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	1	to turn away from the holy commandment	Here, **to turn away from** is a metaphor that means to stop doing something. Alternate translation: “to stop obeying the holy commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	21	j7s6	figs-genericnoun	τῆς&ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	2		Peter uses **the holy commandment** to speak of the commands of God in general. He is not referring to one specific **commandment**. These commands were **delivered** by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the holy commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-2PE	2	21	xwid	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς&ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	2		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **commandment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	2	21	ic3c	figs-metaphor	ὑποστρέψαι ἐκ τῆς & ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	1	to turn away from the holy commandment	Here, **to turn away from** is a metaphor that means to stop doing something. Alternate translation: “to stop obeying the holy commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	2	21	j7s6	figs-genericnoun	τῆς & ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	2		Peter uses **the holy commandment** to speak of the commands of God in general. He is not referring to one specific **commandment**. These commands were **delivered** by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the holy commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+2PE	2	21	xwid	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς & ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	2		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **commandment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	21	blr5	figs-activepassive	τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	1	the holy commandment delivered to them	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that the apostles delivered to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	22	hqr3	writing-pronouns	συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας	1	This has happened to them according to the true proverb	Here, **This** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	22	pc36	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	This has happened to them according to the true proverb	Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -358,21 +358,21 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	1	aah9	writing-pronouns	ἐν αἷς	1		Here, **which** refers to both this letter and the previous letter that Peter had written to this group of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence to say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In both of these letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	3	1	gc3m	figs-metaphor	διεγείρω ὑμῶν ἐν ὑπομνήσει τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν	1	I am stirring up your sincere mind	Here, Peter uses **arouse**, as if the minds of his readers are asleep, to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this plainly. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remind your sincere mind of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	1	deoa	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὑπομνήσει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with a verb. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	3	1	qxt2	figs-metaphor	ὑμῶν&τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν	1		Although the word **pure** usually refers to something being uncontaminated or not mixed with something else, Peter uses it here to indicate that his readers have minds which have not been deceived by the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “your undeceived minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	3	1	qxt2	figs-metaphor	ὑμῶν & τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν	1		Although the word **pure** usually refers to something being uncontaminated or not mixed with something else, Peter uses it here to indicate that his readers have minds which have not been deceived by the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “your undeceived minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	2	bp8r	grammar-connect-logic-goal	μνησθῆναι	1		Here, Peter is stating a purpose for which he is writing this letter. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “that you should remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2PE	3	2	gxj7	figs-activepassive	τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν	1	the words spoken beforehand by the holy prophets	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	2	p4i5	figs-metonymy	τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων	1		Peter is using **words** here to describe the prophecies of the Old Testament prophets that were conveyed by using words, especially those prophecies about the future return of Christ. Alternate translation: “the prophecies spoken previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	3	2	ijnq	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν	1		Here, **prophets** refers to the Old Testament prophets whom Peter also referred to in [1:19–21](../01/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the holy Old Testament prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	3	2	yhi7	figs-activepassive	τῆς τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος	1	the command of the Lord and Savior through your apostles	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the command of our Lord and Savior, which your apostles gave to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2PE	3	2	jnq2	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς&ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **command** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what our Lord and Savior commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2PE	3	2	jx0u	figs-genericnoun	τῆς&ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		Peter uses **command** here to speak of the commands of Jesus in general. He is not referring to one specific command. These commands were delivered by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the commands of the Lord and Savior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+2PE	3	2	jnq2	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς & ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **command** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what our Lord and Savior commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	3	2	jx0u	figs-genericnoun	τῆς & ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος	1		Peter uses **command** here to speak of the commands of Jesus in general. He is not referring to one specific command. These commands were delivered by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the commands of the Lord and Savior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 2PE	3	2	vusd	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ Κυρίου	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Lord** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the person who rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	2	x9rg	figs-abstractnouns	Σωτῆρος	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Savior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the person who saves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	2	tsn4		τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν	1		This phrase indicates the means by which **the command of the Lord and Savior** was given to Peter’s readers. Alternate translation: “by means of your apostles”
 2PE	3	2	xbuo	figs-explicit	τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν	1		Here, **your apostles** could refer to: (1) the apostles who proclaimed the teachings of Christ to Peter’s readers or ministered to them in some way. Alternate translation: “the apostles who serve you” (2) all apostles, who belong to all Christians. Alternate translation: “the apostles of us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	3	3	lm1a		τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες	1	knowing this first	Peter uses **first** here to refer to the degree of importance. It does not to refer to order in time. See how you translated this in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “Most importantly, you must understand”
 2PE	3	3	xcd9	figs-declarative	τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες	1	knowing this first	Peter is using a statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this by translating it as a command. If you do so, it might be helpful to start a new sentence here. See how you translated this in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “Above all, know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-2PE	3	3	mjgr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεύσονται&ἐν ἐμπαιγμονῇ ἐμπαῖκται	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mockery** with a verb. Alternate translation: “mockers will come and mock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2PE	3	3	mjgr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεύσονται & ἐν ἐμπαιγμονῇ ἐμπαῖκται	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mockery** with a verb. Alternate translation: “mockers will come and mock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	3	s69n	figs-metaphor	κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι	1		Here, Peter uses **going** to refer to habitually doing something, like someone who walks toward something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living according to their own lusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	3	znh2	figs-explicit	κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι	1		Here, **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “living according to their own sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	3	4	fe37	writing-quotations	καὶ λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	6	hvc3		ὁ τότε κόσμος	1		Here, **at that time** refers to the time when the world existed before the flood. It does not refer to the exact time when the universe was created. Alternate translation: “the world that existed then”
 2PE	3	6	xm5i		ὕδατι κατακλυσθεὶς	1		This phrase indicates the means by which the ancient world was destroyed. Alternate translation: “by having been flooded by water”
 2PE	3	7	alp6	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οἱ δὲ νῦν οὐρανοὶ καὶ ἡ γῆ	1		Here, **But** indicates that Peter is contrasting the past destruction of the ancient world he mentioned in the previous verse with the future destruction of the present world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this contrast explicitly. Alternate translation: “In contrast, the present heavens and the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-2PE	3	7	b2in	figs-activepassive	οἱ&νῦν οὐρανοὶ καὶ ἡ γῆ, τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ τεθησαυρισμένοι εἰσὶν, πυρὶ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God, by that same word, has reserved the present heavens and the earth for fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2PE	3	7	b2in	figs-activepassive	οἱ & νῦν οὐρανοὶ καὶ ἡ γῆ, τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ τεθησαυρισμένοι εἰσὶν, πυρὶ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God, by that same word, has reserved the present heavens and the earth for fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	7	e673	figs-explicit	τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ	1	by the same word	Here, **word** refers to “the word of God,” which Peter said in [3:5–6](../03/05.md) was the means by which the heavens and earth were created and a flood destroyed the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the same word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	3	7	ghco	grammar-connect-logic-goal	πυρὶ	1		Here, **for** indicates the purpose for which God has been reserving the present heavens and earth. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2PE	3	7	nl8w	figs-metonymy	πυρὶ	1		Here, Peter uses **fire** to refer to what fire does, which is burn. Alternate translation: “for burning with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	7	u7x2		εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως	1		Here, **for** could refer to: (1) the purpose for which God is keeping the present heavens and earth. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the day of judgment” (2) the point in time up to which God is keeping the present heavens and earth. Alternate translation: “until the day of judgment”
 2PE	3	7	y3gg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡμέραν κρίσεως καὶ ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **judgment** and **destruction** by stating the ideas behind them with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind and destroys the ungodly men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	7	zxxk	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of the ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-2PE	3	8	s5cy		ἓν&τοῦτο μὴ λανθανέτω ὑμᾶς	1		Alternate translation: “do not fail to understand this one fact” or “do not ignore this one thing”
+2PE	3	8	s5cy		ἓν & τοῦτο μὴ λανθανέτω ὑμᾶς	1		Alternate translation: “do not fail to understand this one fact” or “do not ignore this one thing”
 2PE	3	8	enh9		ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη	1	that one day with the Lord is like a thousand years	Here, **with the Lord** means “in the judgment of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years”
 2PE	3	8	o1wc	figs-doublet	μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη, καὶ χίλια ἔτη ὡς ἡμέρα μία	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God does not perceive of time the same way that humans do. What might seem to be a short or long time for people would not seem so for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “one day and 1,000 years are alike for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2PE	3	9	zv9m	figs-metonymy	οὐ βραδύνει Κύριος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1		Here, **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the **promise** that Jesus will return. See how you translated it in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “The Lord does not delay to fulfill his promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -413,10 +413,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	9	l9ay	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ πάντας εἰς μετάνοιαν χωρῆσαι	1		Peter is leaving out words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he wants all to move on to repentance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2PE	3	9	jwjo	figs-abstractnouns	ἀλλὰ πάντας εἰς μετάνοιαν χωρῆσαι	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **repentance** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “but all to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	10	w6ma	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Here, **But** indicates a contrast between what the mockers believed about God and what God will really do. Although the Lord is being patient and wants people to repent, he will indeed return and bring judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-2PE	3	10	c5m1	figs-simile	ἥξει&ἡμέρα Κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης	1	the day of the Lord will come as a thief	Peter speaks of the **day** when God will judge everyone as if it were a **thief** who will come unexpectedly and take people by surprise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this simile plainly. Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord will come unexpectedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+2PE	3	10	c5m1	figs-simile	ἥξει & ἡμέρα Κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης	1	the day of the Lord will come as a thief	Peter speaks of the **day** when God will judge everyone as if it were a **thief** who will come unexpectedly and take people by surprise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this simile plainly. Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord will come unexpectedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 2PE	3	10	fu2q	writing-pronouns	κλέπτης, ἐν ᾗ	1		Here, **which** refers to “the day of the Lord”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “a thief. In the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-2PE	3	10	z32k	figs-activepassive	στοιχεῖα&λυθήσεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in an active form and you can indicate who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the elements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2PE	3	10	zgd3		στοιχεῖα&λυθήσεται	1		Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed”
+2PE	3	10	z32k	figs-activepassive	στοιχεῖα & λυθήσεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in an active form and you can indicate who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the elements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2PE	3	10	zgd3		στοιχεῖα & λυθήσεται	1		Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed”
 2PE	3	10	lz8t		στοιχεῖα δὲ καυσούμενα λυθήσεται	1		Here, **being burned up** refers to the means by which the elements will be destroyed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the elements will be destroyed by means of burning” or “and the elements will be destroyed by means of fire”
 2PE	3	10	j1gj	figs-activepassive	γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται	1	the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed	God will see all the **earth** and all the **deeds** of everyone, and he will then judge everything. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active terms. Alternate translation: “God will find the earth and the deeds in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	10	qnu5	figs-explicit	γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται	1		Here, **deeds** refers to the actions of people on the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the earth and what people have done in it will be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	12	rq9g	figs-activepassive	οὐρανοὶ πυρούμενοι, λυθήσονται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the heavens with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	12	v15i		στοιχεῖα καυσούμενα, τήκεται	1	the elements	Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed by heat” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed by heat” See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md).
 2PE	3	12	i1ry		καυσούμενα	1	the elements	This phrase indicates the means by which the heavens will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “by means of being burned up by heat”
-2PE	3	13	ptmy	figs-infostructure	καινοὺς&οὐρανοὺς καὶ γῆν καινὴν, κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ προσδοκῶμεν	1		Peter put the direct object of the main verb at the front of this sentence for emphasis. If your language uses a similar construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to have it here in your translation. But if this construction would be confusing in your language, you could express this emphasis in another way and change the structure of the sentence. Alternate translation: “according to his promise, we are waiting for new heavens and a new earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+2PE	3	13	ptmy	figs-infostructure	καινοὺς & οὐρανοὺς καὶ γῆν καινὴν, κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ προσδοκῶμεν	1		Peter put the direct object of the main verb at the front of this sentence for emphasis. If your language uses a similar construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to have it here in your translation. But if this construction would be confusing in your language, you could express this emphasis in another way and change the structure of the sentence. Alternate translation: “according to his promise, we are waiting for new heavens and a new earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 2PE	3	13	r2y9	writing-pronouns	κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “according to God’s promise” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “according to Jesus’ promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	3	13	evi0		τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **promise** could refer to: (1) God’s promise to create a new heavens and earth, as promised in Isaiah 65:17 and Isaiah 66:22. Alternate translation: “his promise of new heavens and a new earth” (2) the promise of Jesus’ second coming, as in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “his promise of the return of Jesus”
 2PE	3	13	df3v	figs-personification	ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ	1	in which righteousness dwells	Here, **righteousness** is spoken of as though it were a person who could dwell somewhere. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in which righteousness exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -460,13 +460,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	3	17	kn3d	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has said, which could be: (1) the destruction of those who falsely interpret the scriptures mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because those who falsely interpret the Scriptures will be destroyed” (2) the previous content of the entire letter, especially the sure destruction of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “Because of all these things I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	3	17	wk5v	figs-explicit	ἀγαπητοί	1		Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	3	17	bq8o	grammar-connect-logic-result	προγινώσκοντες	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Peter is giving the reason why his readers should heed his command in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “since you know beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	3	17	w3sp	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ&ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ	1	you might not lose your own steadfastness	Here, Peter speaks of **steadfastness** as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might not stop being steadfast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	3	17	v5cb	figs-abstractnouns	ἵνα μὴ&ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **steadfastness** with the adjective “steadfast.” Alternate translation: “so that you might not lose your own steadfast faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
+2PE	3	17	w3sp	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ & ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ	1	you might not lose your own steadfastness	Here, Peter speaks of **steadfastness** as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might not stop being steadfast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	3	17	v5cb	figs-abstractnouns	ἵνα μὴ & ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **steadfastness** with the adjective “steadfast.” Alternate translation: “so that you might not lose your own steadfast faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
 2PE	3	17	um49	grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες	1		This clause indicates the reason why people might lose their own steadfastness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of being led astray by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	3	17	xjht	figs-activepassive	τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the error of the lawless ones having led you astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	3	17	h2ik	figs-metaphor	τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες	1		Here, Peter uses **led astray** to describe people being deceived into living wickedly by false teachers as if they had been led away from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this plainly. Alternate translation: “having been deceived into living wickedly by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	17	px85		τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ	1		This phrase indicates the means by which one might be led astray. Alternate translation: “by means of the error of the lawless ones”
-2PE	3	18	ccm3	figs-metaphor	αὐξάνετε&ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	grow in grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ	Here, **grow** is used to express experiencing or having something in increasing amounts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “have more and more of the grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2PE	3	18	ccm3	figs-metaphor	αὐξάνετε & ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	grow in grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ	Here, **grow** is used to express experiencing or having something in increasing amounts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “have more and more of the grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	18	zjqa		ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει	1		Here, **in** means “with reference to.” Alternate translation: “with reference to the grace and knowledge”
 2PE	3	18	lk3c	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **grace** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “kind acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	3	18	qlbc	figs-abstractnouns	γνώσει	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
index 365341009e..df67270096 100644
--- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
@@ -4,11 +4,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	1	1	honh	checking/headings		0		If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 1. Suggested heading: “The Word of Life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 1JN	1	1	j363	writing-pronouns	ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν, περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς—	1	What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1–3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase **regarding the Word of life** as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. If you have pronouns in your language that refer to people, such as “he,” “who,” and “whom,” it would be appropriate to use them here. Alternate translation: “Regarding the Word of life—he is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	1	1	j364	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1	from the beginning	John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the fact that Jesus has always existed. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	1	1	jd7p	figs-exclusive	ἀκηκόαμεν&ἑωράκαμεν&ἡμῶν&ἐθεασάμεθα&ἡμῶν	1	we have heard … we have seen … our … we have looked at … our	Here the pronouns **we** and **our** are exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, but the people to whom he is writing did not see Jesus. So use exclusive forms here, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	1	1	jd7p	figs-exclusive	ἀκηκόαμεν & ἑωράκαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἐθεασάμεθα & ἡμῶν	1	we have heard … we have seen … our … we have looked at … our	Here the pronouns **we** and **our** are exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, but the people to whom he is writing did not see Jesus. So use exclusive forms here, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1JN	1	1	ej5x	figs-explicit	ἀκηκόαμεν	1	we have heard	The implication is that what John and the other eyewitnesses **heard** was Jesus speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include this information, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “we heard speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	1	1	rb73	figs-parallelism	ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα	1	which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at	These two phrases mean the same thing. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and show the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “whom we saw clearly ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1JN	1	1	j001	figs-explicitinfo	ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν&καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν	1	which we have seen with our eyes … and our hands have touched	In your language, it might seem that these phrases express unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate them. However, your language may have its own way of using such extra information for emphasis, and you could also do that in your translation. Alternate translation: “we saw … and touched” or “we saw with our own eyes … and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-1JN	1	1	j002	figs-explicit	ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν&αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν	1	which we have seen with our eyes … and our hands have touched	The false teachers were denying that Jesus was a real human being and saying that he was only a spirit. But the implications of what John is saying here are that Jesus was a real human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1JN	1	1	j001	figs-explicitinfo	ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν & καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν	1	which we have seen with our eyes … and our hands have touched	In your language, it might seem that these phrases express unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate them. However, your language may have its own way of using such extra information for emphasis, and you could also do that in your translation. Alternate translation: “we saw … and touched” or “we saw with our own eyes … and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+1JN	1	1	j002	figs-explicit	ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν & αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν	1	which we have seen with our eyes … and our hands have touched	The false teachers were denying that Jesus was a real human being and saying that he was only a spirit. But the implications of what John is saying here are that Jesus was a real human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	1	1	j003		περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς	1	regarding the Word of life	As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, you could put your translation of this phrase, **regarding the Word of life**, at the beginning of this verse and present it as a sentence of its own as a topical introduction to the letter, as UST does. Alternate translation: “We are writing to you about Jesus, the Word of life”
 1JN	1	1	j004	writing-pronouns	περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς	1	regarding the Word of life	Letter writers of this time typically began by giving their own names. That is the case for most of the letters in the New Testament. This letter is an exception, but if it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply John’s name here, as UST does. As noted above, John uses the plural pronoun “we” because he is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to Jesus’ earthly life. But it may be more natural in your language for him to refer to himself with a singular pronoun, and if so, you could do that in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing to you about Jesus, the Word of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	1	1	gt44	figs-explicit	τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς	1	the Word of life	Here, **the Word of life** is implicitly a description of Jesus. As the General Introduction explains, there are many similarities between this letter and the Gospel of John. That gospel begins by saying about Jesus, “In the beginning was the Word.” So it is likely that when John speaks in this letter of **the Word of life** that “was from the beginning,” he is also speaking about Jesus. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Word of God, who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	1	1	i8b4	figs-metaphor	τῆς ζωῆς	1	of life	In this letter, John uses **life** in different ways, either to refer literally to physical life or to spiritual life. Here the reference is to spiritual life. Alternate translation: “of spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	1	2	la4a	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἐφανερώθη	1	indeed, the life appeared	See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term could mean one of two things. (1) John could be emphasizing how Jesus came to this earth. (UST brings this out by saying “he came here to the earth.”) In that case, this would be a situation in which a Greek passive verbal form has an active meaning. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the life came right here” (2) John could be emphasizing how God revealed Jesus to the world and thereby revealed himself to the world through Jesus. To bring out that emphasis, you could translate this with a passive verbal form or, if your language does not use passive forms, you can use an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the life was made visible” or “Indeed, God made the life visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	1	2	j006	figs-metonymy	ἡ ζωὴ	1	the life	John is speaking of Jesus, whom he calls the “Word of life” in the previous verse, by referring to **the life** that is associated with him. In this case it seems to describe the **life** that Jesus embodies rather than the **life** that he gives. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “Jesus, who is life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1JN	1	2	j007	figs-exclusive	ἑωράκαμεν&μαρτυροῦμεν&ἀπαγγέλλομεν&ἡμῖν	1	we have seen … we are bearing witness … we are announcing … us	John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronouns **we** and **us** are exclusive in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	1	2	j007	figs-exclusive	ἑωράκαμεν & μαρτυροῦμεν & ἀπαγγέλλομεν & ἡμῖν	1	we have seen … we are bearing witness … we are announcing … us	John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronouns **we** and **us** are exclusive in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1JN	1	2	j008	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1	you	As the General Introduction explains, John is writing this letter to believers in various churches, and so the pronouns **you**, “your,” and “yourselves” are plural throughout the entire letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 1JN	1	2	jp6s	writing-pronouns	ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ μαρτυροῦμεν,	1	we have seen it, and we are testifying to it	If you decided to use personal pronouns in [1:1](../01/01.md), you could use them in these cases as well. Alternate translation: “we have seen him, and we are testifying that we saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	1	2	ih36	figs-parallelism	μαρτυροῦμεν, καὶ ἀπαγγέλλομεν ὑμῖν	1	we are testifying to it, yes, we are announcing to you	These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way, as UST does. Alternate translation: “we are enthusiastically telling you about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -25,12 +25,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	1	2	fru2	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐφανερώθη ἡμῖν	1	and appeared to us	See how you translated **appeared** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “and came right to us” or “and was made visible to us” or “and whom God made visible to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	1	3	j009	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὃ ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν, ἀπαγγέλλομεν καὶ ὑμῖν, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς κοινωνίαν ἔχητε μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1	what we have seen and heard, we declare also to you, so you also will have fellowship with us	If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the parts of this section. You could move the clause beginning with **so you also** to the beginning of the verse, since that clause gives the reason for the action that the rest of the verse describes. For clarity, you could also place the direct-object clause **what we have seen and heard** after the subject and verb **we declare … to you**. In that case, you would not need to translate **also** after **declare**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “So that you also may have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1JN	1	3	vw2w	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν	1	what we have seen and heard	John is referring implicitly to the way that he and the other eyewitnesses had **seen and heard** Jesus when he was alive on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include this information, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “what we saw and heard of Jesus when he was alive on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	1	3	j010	figs-exclusive	ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν, ἀπαγγέλλομεν&ἡμῶν	1	we have seen and heard, we declare … us	John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronouns **we** and **us** are exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1JN	1	3	dw7l	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ὑμεῖς κοινωνίαν ἔχητε μεθ’ ἡμῶν&ἡ κοινωνία&ἡ ἡμετέρα μετὰ τοῦ Πατρὸς, καὶ μετὰ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	you also will have fellowship with us … our fellowship is with the Father and with his Son	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **fellowship** with a concrete noun such as “friends” and an adjective such as “close.” Alternate translation: “so that you could be close friends with us … we are all close friends with God the Father and with his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1JN	1	3	tf4m	figs-exclusive	ἡ κοινωνία&ἡ ἡμετέρα	1	our fellowship is	The word **our** here is likely inclusive, since John is writing to fellow believers. So if your language marks that distinction, you should translate the term as inclusive. Even if your language does not mark that distinction, you can indicate in your translation that the term applies both to John and to the people he is writing to. Alternate translation: “we are all close friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1JN	1	3	rxq7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς&τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the Father … his Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles. Alternate translation: “God the Father … his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1JN	1	3	j010	figs-exclusive	ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν, ἀπαγγέλλομεν & ἡμῶν	1	we have seen and heard, we declare … us	John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronouns **we** and **us** are exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	1	3	dw7l	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ὑμεῖς κοινωνίαν ἔχητε μεθ’ ἡμῶν & ἡ κοινωνία & ἡ ἡμετέρα μετὰ τοῦ Πατρὸς, καὶ μετὰ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	you also will have fellowship with us … our fellowship is with the Father and with his Son	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **fellowship** with a concrete noun such as “friends” and an adjective such as “close.” Alternate translation: “so that you could be close friends with us … we are all close friends with God the Father and with his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1JN	1	3	tf4m	figs-exclusive	ἡ κοινωνία & ἡ ἡμετέρα	1	our fellowship is	The word **our** here is likely inclusive, since John is writing to fellow believers. So if your language marks that distinction, you should translate the term as inclusive. Even if your language does not mark that distinction, you can indicate in your translation that the term applies both to John and to the people he is writing to. Alternate translation: “we are all close friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	1	3	rxq7	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς & τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the Father … his Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles. Alternate translation: “God the Father … his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	1	4	j011	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα γράφομεν ἡμεῖς	1	we are writing these things	As the General Notes to this chapter explain, here John is formally stating his purpose for writing. If you decided in [1:1](../01/01.md) that it would be more natural in your language for him to refer to himself with a singular pronoun in such a context, you could do the same thing here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1JN	1	4	j012	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἡμῶν	1	we … our	If you use the plural pronoun **we** here, it would be exclusive, since John is speaking of himself and the other eyewitnesses on whose behalf he is writing. However, the term **our** in the second clause is likely inclusive, since John probably means that he wants both himself and his readers to have **joy** in the shared fellowship with one another and with the Father and the Son that he describes in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	1	4	j012	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν	1	we … our	If you use the plural pronoun **we** here, it would be exclusive, since John is speaking of himself and the other eyewitnesses on whose behalf he is writing. However, the term **our** in the second clause is likely inclusive, since John probably means that he wants both himself and his readers to have **joy** in the shared fellowship with one another and with the Father and the Son that he describes in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1JN	1	4	j013	translate-textvariants	ἡ χαρὰ ἡμῶν	1	so that our joy may be fulfilled	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to follow the reading of ULT and say **our joy** or to follow the reading of some other versions and say “your joy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1JN	1	4	j014	figs-you	ἡ χαρὰ ἡμῶν	1	so that our joy may be fulfilled	If you follow the variant reading “your joy” here instead of **our joy**, the word “your” would be plural, as in the rest of this letter, since it would refer to a group of believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 1JN	1	4	xn9d	figs-abstractnouns	ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ἡμῶν ᾖ πεπληρωμένη	1	so that our joy may be fulfilled	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “happy.” Alternate translation: “so that we will be completely happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -68,12 +68,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	1	8	j035	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	the truth is not in us	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “we do not believe that what God says is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	1	9	j036	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ὁμολογῶμεν τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν, πιστός ἐστιν καὶ δίκαιος	1	If we confess our sins, he is faithful and righteous	John is using another hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the value and benefits of living in holiness. Alternate translation: “Suppose we confess our sins. Then he is faithful and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	1	9	agve	figs-explicit	ἐὰν ὁμολογῶμεν τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν	1		Part of confessing sin to God is rejecting them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If we confess our sins to God and turn away from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	1	9	gb5l	writing-pronouns	πιστός ἐστιν&ἵνα ἀφῇ	1	he is faithful … that he should forgive	The pronoun **he** refers to God in both instances in this verse. Alternate translation: “God is faithful … and God will forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	1	9	gb5l	writing-pronouns	πιστός ἐστιν & ἵνα ἀφῇ	1	he is faithful … that he should forgive	The pronoun **he** refers to God in both instances in this verse. Alternate translation: “God is faithful … and God will forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	1	9	f68c	figs-parallelism	ἵνα ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ καθαρίσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας	1	that he should forgive us our sins and cleanse us from all unrighteousness	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John is likely using them together for emphasis. If including both phrases would be confusing for your readers, you could combine them and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and he will completely forgive us of what we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1JN	1	9	j038	figs-metaphor	ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ καθαρίσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας	1	cleanse us from all unrighteousness	As in [1:7](../01/07.md), John is speaking of **sins** as if they made a person dirty and of God’s forgiveness as if it made a person clean. Alternate translation: “not hold against us anything that we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	1	9	j039	figs-abstractnouns	πάσης ἀδικίας	1	all unrighteousness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “anything that we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	1	10	j040	figs-hypo	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν ὅτι οὐχ ἡμαρτήκαμεν, ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν	1	If we say that we have not sinned, we make him a liar	John is using another hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of not living in holiness. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say that we have not sinned. Then we are calling God a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-1JN	1	10	j041	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&αὐτοῦ	1	him … his	The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God in this verse. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	1	10	j041	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτοῦ	1	him … his	The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God in this verse. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	1	10	hii2	figs-explicit	ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν	1	we make him a liar	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that God would not actually be a **liar** in this case. Rather, a person who claimed to be without sin would be calling God a liar, since God has said that everyone is a sinner. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that is the same as calling God a liar, because God has said that we have all sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	1	10	j042	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	his word is not in us	John is using the term **word** to mean what God has said by using words. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	1	10	m3p1	figs-metaphor	ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	his word is not in us	As he did about the “truth” in [1:8](../01/08.md), John is speaking of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -94,12 +94,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	3	ubc9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν	1		If your language would not use a conditional statement with **if** for something that is true, you could express the same idea using a word like “by” or another way. Alternate translation: “there is a way to be sure that we truly know God. This is by obeying his commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	2	3	j050	figs-idiom	ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι	1	in this we know that	This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “this is how we know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	2	3	el7q		γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν	1	we know that we have known him	John is using the word **know** in two different senses here. See the discussion of the word **know** in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. If your language has different words for these different senses, it would be appropriate to use them here. Alternate translation: “we can be assured that we have a close relationship with him”
-1JN	2	3	j051	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν&αὐτοῦ	1	him … his	In this verse, the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God, the one who has given the commandments that people must obey. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	2	3	j051	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν & αὐτοῦ	1	him … his	In this verse, the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God, the one who has given the commandments that people must obey. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	3	qn85	figs-idiom	ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν	1	if we keep his commandments	Here, **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “if we obey what he has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	2	4	j052	figs-hypo	ὁ λέγων, ὅτι ἔγνωκα αὐτὸν, καὶ τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ μὴ τηρῶν, ψεύστης ἐστίν	1	The one who says, “I know him,” and does not keep his commandments is a liar	John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to challenge his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone says, ‘I have a close relationship with God,’ but he does not obey what God has commanded. Then that person is a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	2	4	kmz5		ὁ λέγων	1	The one who says	Alternate translation: “Anyone who says” or “The person who says”
 1JN	2	4	q665		ἔγνωκα αὐτὸν	1	I know him	As in the second instance in [2:3](../02/03.md), John is using the word **know** in the sense of knowing someone by personal experience. Alternate translation: “I know God very well”
-1JN	2	4	j053	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν&αὐτοῦ	1	him … his	In this verse, the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God, the one who has given the commandments that people must obey. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	2	4	j053	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτοῦ	1	him … his	In this verse, the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God, the one who has given the commandments that people must obey. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	4	j054	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	and	John is using the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what such a person might say and what his conduct actually indicates to be true. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1JN	2	4	qp1j	figs-idiom	μὴ τηρῶν	1	does not keep	In this instance, the word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey” or “disobeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	2	4	j055	figs-parallelism	ψεύστης ἐστίν, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν	1	is a liar, and the truth is not in this one	These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “is certainly not speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	5	j057	figs-hypo	ὃς δ’ ἂν τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον, ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ τετελείωται	1	But whoever keeps his word, in this one truly the love of God has been perfected	John is suggesting another hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “But suppose someone keeps his word. Then the love of God truly has been perfected in that person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	2	5	j058	figs-metonymy	τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον	1	keeps his word	John is using the term **word** to mean what God has commanded by using words. Alternate translation: “obeys God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	2	5	aqa4	figs-idiom	τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον	1	keeps his word	In this instance, the word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “obeys God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	2	5	j059	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ&αὐτῷ	1	his … him	The pronouns **his** and **him** in this verse refer to God. Alternate translation: “God’s … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	2	5	j059	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτῷ	1	his … him	The pronouns **his** and **him** in this verse refer to God. Alternate translation: “God’s … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	5	x88p	figs-possession	ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ τετελείωται	1	in this one truly the love of God has been perfected	The phrase **the love of God** could mean one of two things. (1) It could refer to a person loving God. Alternate translation: “that person indeed loves God completely” (2) It could refer to God loving people. Alternate translation: “God’s love has completely achieved its purpose in that person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1JN	2	5	j060	figs-activepassive	ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ τετελείωται	1	in this one truly the love of God has been perfected	If it would be helpful in your language, you could restate the passive verbal form **has been perfected** with an active verbal form in its place. The person or thing doing the action will depend on how you decide to translate the phrase **the love of God**. Alternate translation: “that person indeed loves God completely” or “God’s love has completely achieved its purpose in that person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	2	5	jdzb	figs-metaphor	ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ ἐσμεν	1		The word **this** could be referring to (1) what John is about to say in verse 6, or (2) what John has just said in verse 5, or (3) both. If your language allows it, you could choose option (3), since both verses are talking about completely obeying God, but most languages will need to choose one or the other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	18	esd9	figs-idiom	ἐσχάτη ὥρα ἐστίν	-1	it is the last hour … that it is the last hour	John is using the term **hour** to refer a specific time. The expression **the last hour** refers specifically to the time at the end of earthly history just before Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “Jesus will return soon … Jesus will return soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	2	18	r2vq	translate-unknown	ἀντίχριστος ἔρχεται, καὶ νῦν ἀντίχριστοι πολλοὶ γεγόνασιν	1	the Antichrist is coming, indeed now many antichrists have come	See the discussion of the terms **antichrist** and **antichrists** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “someone is coming who will lead a great opposition to Jesus, already many people are opposing Jesus in that way now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1JN	2	19	rmj7	figs-metaphor	ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξῆλθαν	1	They went out from us	These people formerly met with the group of believers to whom John is writing. While they physically left the places where the believers met, John is also using the expression **went out** to mean that these people stopped being part of the group. Alternate translation: “They left our group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	2	19	ytb1	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἦσαν ἐξ ἡμῶν&οὐκ εἰσὶν πάντες ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	but they were not from us … they are all not from us	John is using the expression **from us** in a slightly different sense in these instances than in the first instance in the verse. In the first instance, it means that these people left the group. In this instance, it means that they were never genuinely part of the group. Alternate translation: “but they were never genuinely part of our group … none of them are genuinely part of our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1JN	2	19	ytb1	figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἦσαν ἐξ ἡμῶν & οὐκ εἰσὶν πάντες ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	but they were not from us … they are all not from us	John is using the expression **from us** in a slightly different sense in these instances than in the first instance in the verse. In the first instance, it means that these people left the group. In this instance, it means that they were never genuinely part of the group. Alternate translation: “but they were never genuinely part of our group … none of them are genuinely part of our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	19	j113	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἦσαν ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	they were not from us	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why John makes this claim. Alternate translation: “they were never genuinely part of our group, because they did not actually believe in Jesus in the first place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	19	j114	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ γὰρ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἂν μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1	For if they had been from us, they would have remained with us	John is presenting a situation that is not real to help his readers recognize why the claim that he is making is true. Alternate translation: “We know that they were not genuinely part of our group because they did not continue to participate in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 1JN	2	19	jin1	figs-metaphor	μεμενήκεισαν ἂν μεθ’ ἡμῶν	1	they would have remained with us	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the word seems to refer to continuing participation in a group. Alternate translation: “they would have continued to participate in our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -224,8 +224,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	20	j122	figs-explicit	οἴδατε πάντες	1	you all know	Based on what he says in the next verse, John likely means here that the believers to whom he is writing **all know** the truth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all know the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	21	j123	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ἀλλ’ ὅτι οἴδατε αὐτήν	1	I have not written to you because you do not know the truth, but because you do know it	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Since John then repeats the statement in positive form in the next phrase, you could make the connection to that phrase as an affirmation rather than as a contrast. Alternate translation: “I have written to you because you know the truth, yes, because you do know it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1JN	2	21	w4fm	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ἀλλ’ ὅτι οἴδατε αὐτήν	1		If saying **I have not written to you** seems wrong or confusing in your language, you could move the negative to the next clause. Alternate translation: “I have written to you not because you do not know the truth, but because you do know the truth” or “I have written to you not to inform you of the truth, but I have written to you because you already know it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-1JN	2	21	r8yr	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν&ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the truth … from the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “what is true … from what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1JN	2	21	j124	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἀλήθειαν&ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the truth … from the truth	John is likely referring to the teaching that believers have received from Jesus by association with the way that it is true. Alternate translation: “the true teaching that we received from Jesus … from this true teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1JN	2	21	r8yr	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν & ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the truth … from the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “what is true … from what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1JN	2	21	j124	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἀλήθειαν & ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	the truth … from the truth	John is likely referring to the teaching that believers have received from Jesus by association with the way that it is true. Alternate translation: “the true teaching that we received from Jesus … from this true teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	2	21	j125	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὅτι πᾶν ψεῦδος ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστιν	1	and that every lie is not from the truth	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and you know that every lie is not from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1JN	2	21	j126		πᾶν ψεῦδος ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστιν	1	every lie is not from the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by clarifying it by making the subject negative and the verb positive. Alternate translation: “no lie is from the truth”
 1JN	2	21	nruw		ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας	1		This second occurrence of **the truth** could refer to: (1) The same as the first occurrence. Alternate translation: “part of God’s true message” (2) God, who is the source of all truth. Alternate translation: “from God, the One who is true”
@@ -236,22 +236,22 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	22	pth9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱόν	1	the Father and the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	2	23	j129	figs-explicit	πᾶς ὁ ἀρνούμενος τὸν Υἱὸν	1	Everyone who denies the Son	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means in light of what John says in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Everyone who denies that Jesus is the Son of God and the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	23	j130	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν	-1	the Son … the Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1JN	2	23	k78f	figs-possession	οὐδὲ τὸν Πατέρα ἔχει&καὶ τὸν Πατέρα ἔχει	1	does not have the Father … has the Father	The language of possession that John is using actually indicates that such a person does not or does belong to God, rather than that God does not or does belong to such a person. Alternate translation: “does not belong to the Father … belongs to the Father as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1JN	2	23	k78f	figs-possession	οὐδὲ τὸν Πατέρα ἔχει & καὶ τὸν Πατέρα ἔχει	1	does not have the Father … has the Father	The language of possession that John is using actually indicates that such a person does not or does belong to God, rather than that God does not or does belong to such a person. Alternate translation: “does not belong to the Father … belongs to the Father as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1JN	2	23	j131	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	-1	the Father … the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father … God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	2	23	u9ep	figs-explicit	ὁ ὁμολογῶν τὸν Υἱὸν	1	The one who confesses the Son	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means in light of what John says in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Everyone who truly believes and acknowledges publicly that Jesus is the Son of God and the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	2	24	zl8y	figs-explicit	ὃ ἠκούσατε&ὃ…ἠκούσατε	1	what you have heard … what you have heard	John is referring implicitly to the teaching about Jesus that these believers **have heard**. Alternate translation: “the teaching you have heard … the teaching you have heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1JN	2	24	zl8y	figs-explicit	ὃ ἠκούσατε & ὃ…ἠκούσατε	1	what you have heard … what you have heard	John is referring implicitly to the teaching about Jesus that these believers **have heard**. Alternate translation: “the teaching you have heard … the teaching you have heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	24	dsl7	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	-1	from the beginning … from the beginning	John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the time when the people to whom he is writing first believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “ever since you first believed in Jesus … ever since you first believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	2	24	rfz8	figs-metaphor	ἐν ὑμῖν μενέτω&ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ	1	let it remain in you … remains in you	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In these instances, in reference to the teaching about Jesus, the word seems to refer to continuing belief in that teaching. Alternate translation: “continue to believe it … you continue to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN	2	24	rfz8	figs-metaphor	ἐν ὑμῖν μενέτω & ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ	1	let it remain in you … remains in you	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In these instances, in reference to the teaching about Jesus, the word seems to refer to continuing belief in that teaching. Alternate translation: “continue to believe it … you continue to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	2	24	j132	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ ὃ ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς ἠκούσατε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ μενεῖτε	1	If what you have heard from the beginning remains in you, you will also remain in the Son and in the Father	John is describing a conditional situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “As long as what you have heard from the beginning remains in you, then you will also remain in the Son and in the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 1JN	2	24	ty7q	figs-metaphor	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ μενεῖτε	1	you will also remain in the Son and in the Father	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you will also continue to have a close relationship with the Son and with the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	2	24	j133	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Υἱῷ&τῷ Πατρὶ	1	the Son … the Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles for Jesus and God, respectively. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Son of God … God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1JN	2	24	j133	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Υἱῷ & τῷ Πατρὶ	1	the Son … the Father	**Son** and **Father** are important titles for Jesus and God, respectively. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Son of God … God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	2	25	llj2		ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἣν αὐτὸς ἐπηγγείλατο ἡμῖν	1	the promise that he promised to us	If it is unnatural in your language to use both the noun **promise** and the verb **promised**, you could use just one form of the word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the promise that he made to us” or “what he promised us”
 1JN	2	25	j134	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸς	1	he	The pronoun **he** could refer in this context either to Jesus or to God the Father. However, it seems more likely that it refers to Jesus, since John has just talked in [2:22–23](../02/22.md) about denying or confessing him, and it was Jesus who promised **eternal life** to everyone who believed in him. See, for example, the Gospel of John [3:36](../jhn/03/36.md) and [6:47](../jhn/06/47.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	25	id51	figs-metaphor	τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον	1	eternal life	John means more than physical **life**. This expression can indicate living forever in the presence of God after death, a commonly recognized meaning, but it can also indicate receiving power from God in this life to live in a new way. Alternate translation: “that we would have power to live a new life now and that we would live with him forever after we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	2	26	fe44	figs-metaphor	τῶν πλανώντων ὑμᾶς	1	those who are leading you astray	John speaks of these people as if they were guides who were **leading** others in the wrong direction. This is a metaphor for their attempts to get the people to whom John is writing to believe things that are not true. Alternate translation: “those who are deceiving you” or “those who are trying to get you to believe things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	2	26	d3f5	figs-explicit	τῶν πλανώντων ὑμᾶς	1		If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly in what way these people are **leading** others astray. Alternate translation: “the people who are leading you astray about Jesus” or “the people who are lying to you about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	2	27	cn2f	figs-metaphor	τὸ χρῖσμα ὃ ἐλάβετε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	the anointing that you received from him	See how you translated the word **anointing** in [2:20](../02/20.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit, whom Jesus has given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	2	27	j135	writing-pronouns	ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ&ἐν αὐτῷ	1	from him … his … in him	Like the pronoun “he” in [2:25](../02/25.md), the words **him** and **his** in this verse likely refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name instead of a pronoun. Alternate translation: “from Jesus … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	2	27	j135	writing-pronouns	ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ & ἐν αὐτῷ	1	from him … his … in him	Like the pronoun “he” in [2:25](../02/25.md), the words **him** and **his** in this verse likely refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name instead of a pronoun. Alternate translation: “from Jesus … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	27	j136	figs-metaphor	μένει ἐν ὑμῖν	1	remains in you	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to refer to the continuing presence of the Spirit with a believer. Alternate translation: “lives inside of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	2	27	j137	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	and	John is using the word **and** to introduce the results of what he says in the previous part of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1JN	2	27	j138	figs-metaphor	τὸ αὐτοῦ χρῖσμα	1	his anointing	See how you translated **his anointing** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	28	tii1		καὶ νῦν	1	And now	John uses the expression **And now** to introduce a new part of the letter, in which he will talk about being children of God and the return of Jesus. In your translation, you could use a word, phrase, or other method that is natural in your language for introducing a new topic.
 1JN	2	28	kjn9	figs-metaphor	τεκνία	1	little children	John readdresses the recipients as he begins a new section of the letter. See how you translated **little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “you dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	2	28	j142	figs-metaphor	μένετε ἐν αὐτῷ	1	remain in him	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, John seems to be using the expression in the same way that he has just used it in [2:27](../02/27.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “continue to have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	2	28	j143	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&ἐὰν φανερωθῇ&ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ&αὐτοῦ	1	him … when he appears … by him … his	The pronouns **him**, **he**, and **his** likely refer to Jesus in this verse, since John speaks of his **coming** or return. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	2	28	j143	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & ἐὰν φανερωθῇ & ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ & αὐτοῦ	1	him … when he appears … by him … his	The pronouns **him**, **he**, and **his** likely refer to Jesus in this verse, since John speaks of his **coming** or return. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	28	zz4x	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν φανερωθῇ	1	when he appears	See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term could have either an active or a passive meaning. In either case, John is not saying that Jesus will only appear to return. (1) If the meaning is active, John is speaking of the act of Jesus physically returning to earth. Alternate translation: “when Jesus returns” (2) If the meaning is passive, John is speaking of God revealing Jesus to the world as its true king. To bring out that meaning, you could translate this with a passive verbal form or, if your language does not use passive forms, you can use an active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when Jesus is revealed” or “when God reveals Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	2	28	j144	figs-parallelism	σχῶμεν παρρησίαν, καὶ μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	we may have boldness and not be put to shame by him	These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “we may be completely confident at his coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1JN	2	28	lnk2	figs-abstractnouns	σχῶμεν παρρησίαν	1	we may have boldness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	28	j145	figs-activepassive	μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	may not be put to shame by him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	2	28	x7ic		ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	at his coming	Alternate translation: “when he returns to earth”
 1JN	2	29	j146	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν	1	If you know that he is righteous	John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1JN	2	29	j147	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν&αὐτοῦ	1	he is … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to God the Father, since in the next two verses John says that believers are “children of God,” and he speaks in this verse of those who have **been begotten from him**. Alternate translation: “God is … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	2	29	j147	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν & αὐτοῦ	1	he is … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to God the Father, since in the next two verses John says that believers are “children of God,” and he speaks in this verse of those who have **been begotten from him**. Alternate translation: “God is … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	29	j148	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	everyone who does righteousness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	2	29	u6er	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται	1	everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	2	29	j149	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται	1	everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him	Since believers have not literally **been begotten** by God, John means this. He says in [4:9](../04/09.md) that Jesus is the “only-begotten” of God, since God is the actual Father of Jesus in a way that he is not the actual father of believers. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	1	j152	translate-textvariants	καὶ ἐσμέν	1	and we are	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to follow the reading of ULT and include these words or to follow the reading of some other versions and not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1JN	3	1	fq4t	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο, ὁ κόσμος οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς, ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν	1	For this reason the world does not know us, because it did not know him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the world did not know God, for that reason it does not know us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1JN	3	1	l5e7	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦτο, ὁ κόσμος οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς, ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν	1	For this reason the world does not know us, because it did not know him.	John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to people who do not honor God and who do not live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “because ungodly people have not known God, for that reason they do not know us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1JN	3	1	j155		οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς&οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν	1	does not know us … it did not know him	John is using the word **know** in two different senses. See the discussion of the word “know” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. If your language has different words for these different senses, it would be appropriate to use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “does not recognize who we are … it did not become acquainted with him”
+1JN	3	1	j155		οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς & οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν	1	does not know us … it did not know him	John is using the word **know** in two different senses. See the discussion of the word “know” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. If your language has different words for these different senses, it would be appropriate to use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “does not recognize who we are … it did not become acquainted with him”
 1JN	3	1	j156	figs-explicit	οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς	1	does not know us	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **the world does not know** about believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “does not recognize that we are God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	3	1	j157	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1	him	The pronoun **him** refers to God, the antecedent in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	2	ek9v	figs-nominaladj	ἀγαπητοί	1	Beloved	See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” or “My dear ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -293,18 +293,18 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	2	j159	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	and	John is using the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what is **now** known about believers and what is **not yet** known. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1JN	3	2	anq1	figs-activepassive	οὔπω ἐφανερώθη τί ἐσόμεθα	1	what we will be has not yet appeared	If your language does not use passive forms, you can use an active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God has not yet revealed what we will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	3	2	j160	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν φανερωθῇ	1	when he appears	See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. The meaning of the term in this instance seems to be the same as in [2:28](../02/28.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “when Jesus returns” or “when Jesus is revealed” or “when God reveals Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1JN	3	2	j161	writing-pronouns	ἐὰν φανερωθῇ&αὐτῷ&αὐτὸν&ἐστιν	1	when he appears … him … him … he is	The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to Jesus in this verse, since John speaks of **when he appears** or returns. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	3	2	j161	writing-pronouns	ἐὰν φανερωθῇ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἐστιν	1	when he appears … him … him … he is	The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to Jesus in this verse, since John speaks of **when he appears** or returns. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	2	j162	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅμοιοι αὐτῷ ἐσόμεθα, ὅτι ὀψόμεθα αὐτὸν καθώς ἐστιν	1	we will be like him because we will see him as he is	If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “we will see him just as he is, and so we will be like him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1JN	3	3	pj6a	writing-pronouns	πᾶς ὁ ἔχων τὴν ἐλπίδα ταύτην ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	everyone who has this hope upon him	The pronoun **him** here does not refer to **everyone**; it refers to Jesus. The expression **this hope** refers to the hope that John describes in the previous verse, of seeing Jesus as he is. Alternate translation: “everyone who hopes to see Jesus as he really is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-1JN	3	3	j163	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&ἐκεῖνος	1	him … that one	These pronouns refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	3	3	j163	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & ἐκεῖνος	1	him … that one	These pronouns refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	4	j164	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, καὶ τὴν ἀνομίαν ποιεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐστὶν ἡ ἀνομία	1	Everyone who commits sin also commits lawlessness. Indeed, sin is lawlessness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **lawlessness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Everyone who commits sin is also breaking God’s law. Indeed, sin is breaking God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	3	4	j165		πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, καὶ τὴν ἀνομίαν ποιεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐστὶν ἡ ἀνομία	1	Everyone who commits sin also commits lawlessness. Indeed, sin is lawlessness	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why John gives this warning. See the discussion of “sin” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Suggested footnote: “The false teachers were saying that it does not matter what people do in their physical bodies. In this way, they were tempting the people to sin.”
-1JN	3	5	j166	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος&ἄρῃ&αὐτῷ	1	that one … he might take away … him	The pronouns **that one**, **he**, and **him** refer to Jesus in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	3	5	j166	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνος & ἄρῃ & αὐτῷ	1	that one … he might take away … him	The pronouns **that one**, **he**, and **him** refer to Jesus in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	5	g4ph	figs-activepassive	ἐκεῖνος ἐφανερώθη	1	that one appeared	See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term seems to have an active meaning. Alternate translation: “Jesus came to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	3	5	j167	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν	1	sin is not in him	John speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that could be inside of Jesus, although he is emphasizing that **sin** is not in Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has never sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	6	j999	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ ἐν αὐτῷ μένων	1	Everyone who remains in him	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Everyone who has a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	6	j168	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ ἐν αὐτῷ μένων	1	Everyone who remains in him	John is speaking as if believers could be inside of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Everyone who has a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	3	6	j169	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ&αὐτὸν&αὐτόν	1	him … him … him	The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	3	6	j169	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & αὐτόν	1	him … him … him	The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	6	j170	figs-explicit	οὐχ ἁμαρτάνει	1	does not sin	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what this implicitly means in light of the situation that John is addressing in this letter. See the discussion of “sin” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. John acknowledges elsewhere in this letter that genuine believers actually do sin, but they do not sin continually or wantonly. Alternate translation: “does not sin wantonly and continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	3	6	eu9c	figs-doublet	οὐχ ἑώρακεν αὐτὸν, οὐδὲ ἔγνωκεν αὐτόν	1	has not seen him and has not known him	The words **seen** and **known** mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “certainly does not have a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1JN	3	6	j172	figs-metaphor	οὐχ ἑώρακεν αὐτὸν	1	has not seen him	John is not referring to people literally seeing Jesus. Rather, he is using sight to mean perception and recognition. Alternate translation: “has not recognized who Jesus is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -318,8 +318,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	8	p9ks	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Son of God” or “God’s Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	3	8	nq4w	figs-activepassive	ἐφανερώθη	1	appeared	See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term seems to have an active meaning and to mean the same thing as in [3:5](../03/05.md), that Jesus came to earth. It does not mean that he only appeared to come. Alternate translation: “came to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	3	8	j175	figs-explicit	ἵνα λύσῃ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ διαβόλου	1	so that he might destroy the works of the devil	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **works** John is talking about. Alternate translation: “so that he might free people from continually sinning, as the devil had gotten them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	3	9	ftw3	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ&ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται	1	Everyone who has been begotten from God … because he has been begotten from God	See how you translated this in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “Everyone whose father is God … because God is his father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1JN	3	9	j176	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ&ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται	1	Everyone who has been begotten from God … because he has been begotten from God	See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “Everyone whose spiritual father is God … because God is his spiritual father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN	3	9	ftw3	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ & ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται	1	Everyone who has been begotten from God … because he has been begotten from God	See how you translated this in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “Everyone whose father is God … because God is his father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1JN	3	9	j176	figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ & ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται	1	Everyone who has been begotten from God … because he has been begotten from God	See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “Everyone whose spiritual father is God … because God is his spiritual father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	9	j177	writing-pronouns	σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει	1	his seed remains in him	In this phrase, **his** refers to **God** and **him** refers to the person **who has been begotten from God**. Alternate translation: “God’s seed remains in such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	3	9	j178	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει	1	his seed remains in him	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, as in [2:27](../02/27.md), it seems to refer to a continuing presence. Alternate translation: “God’s seed continues to be present in such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	9	ps9v	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει	1	his seed remains in him	John is using the word **seed** here. It could mean: (1) The characteristics of a father that a child inherits from him and displays more and more as he grows. Alternate translation: “the characteristics that show that God is his father become continually more evident” (2) Something that gives life such as the **seed** from which plants grow. Alternate translation: “the new life that God has put in that person continues to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	11	qd6j	checking/headings		0		If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 11. Suggested heading: “What Love Is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 1JN	3	11	j183	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1	from the beginning	John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the time when the people to whom he is writing first heard about or first believed in Jesus. See how you translated this phrase in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “ever since you first heard about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	3	12	frz9	figs-ellipsis	οὐ καθὼς Κάϊν	1	not like Cain	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and we should not be like Cain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1JN	3	12	w83v	figs-explicit	Κάϊν&ἔσφαξεν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Cain, who … killed his brother	John assumes that his readers will know that **Cain** was a son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve. As the book of Genesis describes, Cain was jealous of his younger **brother** Abel and murdered him. If your readers might not know this, you could express this explicitly in a footnote or by putting the names of his parents and brother in the text. Alternate translation: “Cain, the son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve, … murdered his younger brother Abel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1JN	3	12	w83v	figs-explicit	Κάϊν & ἔσφαξεν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Cain, who … killed his brother	John assumes that his readers will know that **Cain** was a son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve. As the book of Genesis describes, Cain was jealous of his younger **brother** Abel and murdered him. If your readers might not know this, you could express this explicitly in a footnote or by putting the names of his parents and brother in the text. Alternate translation: “Cain, the son of the first man and woman, Adam and Eve, … murdered his younger brother Abel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	3	12	j185		ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ἦν	1	who was from the evil one	This is similar to the phrase “from the devil” in [3:8](../03/08.md). See how you translated that phrase. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the evil one” or “who was influenced by the evil one”
 1JN	3	12	j186	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	John is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1JN	3	12	j187	figs-metonymy	τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	John is speaking of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	16	a2cq	figs-idiom	ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἔθηκεν	1	laid down his life for us	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “willingly gave his life for us” or “willingly died for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	3	16	j197	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡμεῖς ὀφείλομεν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδελφῶν, τὰς ψυχὰς θεῖναι	1	We also ought to lay down our lives for the brothers	John is not saying that we should seek out ways to die for our fellow believers in a literal sense, but that we should be prepared to do so, if necessary. However, he is also using the expression **lay down our lives** to mean that we should seek ways to love our fellow believers in sacrificial ways, as he illustrates in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	16	j198	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	See how you translated **the brothers** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	3	17	j199	figs-hypo	ὃς&ἂν ἔχῃ τὸν βίον τοῦ κόσμου	1	whoever has the possessions of the world	John uses this expression to introduce a hypothetical situation, which he discusses over the course of the whole verse. He is not talking about any specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could restate this as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+1JN	3	17	j199	figs-hypo	ὃς & ἂν ἔχῃ τὸν βίον τοῦ κόσμου	1	whoever has the possessions of the world	John uses this expression to introduce a hypothetical situation, which he discusses over the course of the whole verse. He is not talking about any specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could restate this as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	3	17	nlj7	figs-metonymy	τὸν βίον τοῦ κόσμου	1	the possessions of the world	In this letter, John uses **world** to mean various things. Here it refers to the created world, and so to material things such as, in this context, money, food, and clothing. Alternate translation: “material possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	3	17	j200	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his brother	See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	17	b6lh		χρείαν ἔχοντα	1	having need	Alternate translation: “who needs help”
@@ -374,10 +374,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	18	j204	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	but in deed and truth	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but let us love in deed and in truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1JN	3	18	j205	figs-hendiadys	ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ	1	in deed and truth	John is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **truth** indicates the quality that loving **in deed** would have. Alternate translation: “truly, in actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1JN	3	19	d70n	checking/headings		0		If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 19. Suggested heading: “Have Confidence When You Pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
-1JN	3	19	j206	translate-versebridge	ἐν τούτῳ γνωσόμεθα&καὶ&πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	In this we will know … and we will persuade our hearts	John describes a result in this verse. He gives the reason for that result in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could put [3:20](../03/20.md) first in your translation, making it a separate sentence and leaving out both instances of the word “that.” You could put this verse next, translating it as in the following suggestions. Alternate translation: “That is how we can know … and how we can persuade our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
+1JN	3	19	j206	translate-versebridge	ἐν τούτῳ γνωσόμεθα & καὶ & πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	In this we will know … and we will persuade our hearts	John describes a result in this verse. He gives the reason for that result in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could put [3:20](../03/20.md) first in your translation, making it a separate sentence and leaving out both instances of the word “that.” You could put this verse next, translating it as in the following suggestions. Alternate translation: “That is how we can know … and how we can persuade our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 1JN	3	19	k2rv		ἐν τούτῳ	1		**In this** could refer either to: (1) What John has just said in verse 18. Alternate translation: “If we do that” (2) What John is about to say in verse 20. Alternate translation: “I will tell you how”
 1JN	3	19	j207	figs-idiom	ἐν τούτῳ γνωσόμεθα	1	In this we will know	This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how we can know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	3	19	j208	figs-parallelism	γνωσόμεθα, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν, καὶ&πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	we will know that we are from the truth and we will persuade our hearts	The phrases **we will know** and **we will persuade our hearts** mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “we will be completely convinced that we are from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1JN	3	19	j208	figs-parallelism	γνωσόμεθα, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν, καὶ & πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	we will know that we are from the truth and we will persuade our hearts	The phrases **we will know** and **we will persuade our hearts** mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “we will be completely convinced that we are from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1JN	3	19	qx9c	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν	1	we are from the truth	This could mean one of two things. (1) John could be referring to God by association with the way that God is true. In other words, God always tells **the truth** and does what he says. Alternate translation: “we are from God, who is true” (2) As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the word **truth** could refer to the true teaching that believers have received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “we are conducting our lives according to the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	3	19	j209	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν	1	we are from the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “we are from the One who is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	3	19	j210	figs-idiom	ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν	1	we are from the truth	See how you translated the expression in [3:10](../03/10.md) that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “we belong to God” or “we are living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	3	20	j213	figs-hypo	ὅτι ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία, ὅτι μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα	1	that if our heart condemns us, that God is greater than our heart and knows everything	John is discussing a hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose our heart condemns us. Then we should remember that God is greater than our heart and knows everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	3	20	f594	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία	1	if our heart condemns us	John continues speaking of the **heart** to mean the thoughts and feelings. There may be a similar expression in your language. Alternate translation: “if our feelings condemn us” or “if our thoughts accuse us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	3	20	j214	figs-explicit	ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία	1	if our heart condemns us	The topic here, continuing from [3:19](../03/19.md), is how we can know that “we are from the truth,” so this is likely a reference to needing reassurance about that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if we ever feel that we do not belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	3	20	j215	figs-possession	ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία&τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	our heart … our heart	If it would be unusual in your language to speak of one **heart** in reference to many people, and if you decide to retain the word **heart** as a metaphor in your translation, you could make it plural. Alternate translation: “our hearts … our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1JN	3	20	j215	figs-possession	ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία & τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	our heart … our heart	If it would be unusual in your language to speak of one **heart** in reference to many people, and if you decide to retain the word **heart** as a metaphor in your translation, you could make it plural. Alternate translation: “our hearts … our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1JN	3	20	j216	figs-parallelism	μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα	1	God is greater than our heart and knows everything	Since John is using the **heart** to mean the thoughts and feelings, the statement that **God is greater than our heart** likely means that God knows and understands more than we do and that God has greater compassion for us than we have for ourselves. In that case, the phrases **is greater than our heart** and **knows everything** would mean similar things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1JN	3	20	lv7z	figs-explicit	μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα	1	God is greater than our heart and knows everything	The implications are that, given God’s greater knowledge, we should believe what he has said rather than what our thoughts and feelings are saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him, and so we should believe that because he has said so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	3	21	rf96	figs-nominaladj	ἀγαπητοί	1	Beloved	See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -438,17 +438,17 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	4	4	avj3	figs-metaphor	νενικήκατε αὐτούς	1	you have overcome them	As in [2:13](../02/13.md) and [2:14](../02/14.md), John is using the word **overcome**. He is speaking of the believers’ refusal to believe the false prophets as if the believers had defeated these prophets in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you have refused to believe these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	4	4	j248	writing-pronouns	αὐτούς	1	them	The pronoun **them** refers to the false prophets whom John describes in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	4	4	j5ve	figs-metaphor	ἐστὶν ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	the one who is in you	As in [3:24](../03/24.md), John is speaking as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “God, with whom you have a close relationship,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	4	4	j249		μείζων&ἢ	1	greater than	If it would be helpful in your language, for this context you could use a more specific word than **greater**. Alternate translation: “stronger than”
+1JN	4	4	j249		μείζων & ἢ	1	greater than	If it would be helpful in your language, for this context you could use a more specific word than **greater**. Alternate translation: “stronger than”
 1JN	4	4	tp4q	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1	the one in the world	The phrase **in the world** here and in [verse 5](../04/05.md) seems to have a different meaning than in [verse 1](../04/01.md) and [verse 3](../04/03.md). There, it refers to location, so when John says in [verse 3](../04/03.md) that the spirit of the antichrist is “in the world,” it means “on this earth” or “circulating among people.” But here, John seems to be using the term **world** to mean the value system that is opposed to God. In that case, the phrase **the one in the world** would refer to the devil by association with the way that he inspires that system. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	4	5	y2z8	figs-metonymy	αὐτοὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου εἰσίν; διὰ τοῦτο ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου λαλοῦσιν	1	They are from the world. Because of this, they speak from the world	John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here in these first two instances, it refers to the system of values shared by people who do not know God. Alternate translation: “These false teachers are influenced by the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God. As a result, they express the perspectives of that system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	4	5	j252	writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ	1	They	The pronoun **They** refers to the false prophets whom John describes in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	4	5	em2t	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει	1	the world listens to them	In this instance, the term **world** refers to people who share the world’s value system. That is, they do not honor or obey God. Alternate translation: “ungodly people listen to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	4	5	j253	figs-idiom	ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει	1	the world listens to them	The word **listens** is an idiom that means “believes” or “is persuaded by.” Alternate translation: “ungodly people believe them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	4	6	j254	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν	1	We … us … us	The pronouns **We** and **us** in this verse are probably exclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, we recommend using the exclusive form in your translation. John appears to be speaking here of himself and his fellow eyewitnesses of the resurrection as teachers of the truth about Jesus. He has already said that the believers to whom he is writing are from God in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	4	6	j254	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	We … us … us	The pronouns **We** and **us** in this verse are probably exclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, we recommend using the exclusive form in your translation. John appears to be speaking here of himself and his fellow eyewitnesses of the resurrection as teachers of the truth about Jesus. He has already said that the believers to whom he is writing are from God in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1JN	4	6	j328	figs-idiom	ἡμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν	1	We are from God	Here, **from God** could mean: (1) that John and his fellow eyewitnesses teach the truth about Jesus because God has sent them to do that. Alternate translation: “God has sent us” (2) the same thing as it does in [4:4](../04/04.md) and in [4:1–3](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “We belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	4	6	j256	figs-idiom	ἡμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν	1	We are from God	If you have decided that **We are from God** means “God has sent us,” and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what God has sent John and the other eyewitnesses to do, either here or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God has sent us to teach the truth about Jesus as eyewitnesses to his life on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	4	6	j257		ὁ γινώσκων τὸν Θεὸν	1	The one who knows God	As in [2:3–4](../02/03.md), John is using the word **knowing** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Anyone who has a close relationship with God”
-1JN	4	6	j258	figs-idiom	ἀκούει ἡμῶν&οὐκ ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	listens to us … does not listen to us	As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom that means “believes” or “is persuaded by.” Alternate translation: “believes what we teach … does not believe what we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1JN	4	6	j258	figs-idiom	ἀκούει ἡμῶν & οὐκ ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	listens to us … does not listen to us	As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom that means “believes” or “is persuaded by.” Alternate translation: “believes what we teach … does not believe what we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	4	6	j259	figs-idiom	ὃς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Whoever is not from God	The expression **from God** means the same thing in this verse as in [4:4](../04/04.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Whoever does not belong to God” or “Whoever is not living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	4	6	j260	figs-idiom	ἐκ τούτου γινώσκομεν	1	From this we know	This is an idiomatic expression. It means the same thing as the expression “in this we know” which John uses several times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how we can recognize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	4	6	arsa	writing-pronouns	ἐκ τούτου γινώσκομεν	1		Here, **this** refers back to what John has just written in the previous two sentences. We can know if someone is teaching a true message if it agrees with what John and the other apostles teach, and that it is a false message if it does not. John may have intended for **this** to also include what he said in [4:2–3](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -491,14 +491,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	4	13	yv6s	figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτῷ μένομεν, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν ἡμῖν	1	we remain in him, and he in us	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “we continue to have a close relationship with God, and God continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	4	13	dge3		ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος αὐτοῦ δέδωκεν ἡμῖν	1	he has given us of his Spirit	The word **of** here means “some of.” However, God’s Spirit is not something that can be divided. Rather, John is saying that God is sharing his Spirit with us. God’s Spirit can be in many places, and he is fully present in every place. John is saying that through his Spirit, God is fully present in the entire community, and that each believer experiences some of that full presence of God through the presence of the Spirit in his own life. Be sure that it is also clear in your translation that God does not have less of his Spirit now that each of us has some. Alternate translation: “he has sent his Spirit to live in each of us”
 1JN	4	14	w6mz	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς τεθεάμεθα καὶ μαρτυροῦμεν, ὅτι	1	we have seen and we testify that	In this verse, John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses of the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Alternate translation: “we apostles have seen and bear witness to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1JN	4	14	m7cb	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ&τὸν Υἱὸν	1	the Father … the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “God the Father … Jesus his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1JN	4	14	m7cb	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ & τὸν Υἱὸν	1	the Father … the Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “God the Father … Jesus his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	4	14	j277	figs-metonymy	Σωτῆρα τοῦ κόσμου	1	as the Savior of the world	John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “to save the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	4	15	j278	figs-hypo	ὃς ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃ ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν αὐτῷ μένει, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Whoever confesses that Jesus is the Son of God, God remains in him, and he in God	This can be translated as a conditional statement. John is saying that what he describes in the second phrase will happen only if what he describes in the first phrase happens. Then it will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “If someone confesses that Jesus is the Son of God, then God will remain in him and he will remain in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	4	15	nvb1	figs-explicit	ὃς ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃ ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Whoever confesses that Jesus is the Son of God	The meaning of this expression is similar to the expression “the one who confesses the Son” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Everyone who truly believes and acknowledges publicly that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	4	15	b6td	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	4	15	a7rx	figs-ellipsis	ὁ Θεὸς ἐν αὐτῷ μένει, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	God remains in him, and he in God	In the expression **and he in God**, John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “God remains in him and he remains in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1JN	4	15	l3ft	figs-metaphor	ὁ Θεὸς ἐν αὐτῷ μένει, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	God remains in him, and he in God	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “God continues to have a close relationship with him, and he continues to have a close relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	4	16	j279	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς&ἡμῖν	1	we … us	Here and in the rest of the letter, John speaks of himself and the believers to whom he is writing, so the words **we** and **us** will be inclusive. If your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1JN	4	16	j279	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἡμῖν	1	we … us	Here and in the rest of the letter, John speaks of himself and the believers to whom he is writing, so the words **we** and **us** will be inclusive. If your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1JN	4	16	j280	figs-idiom	τὴν ἀγάπην ἣν ἔχει ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν	1	we have known and believed the love that God has in us	The phrase translated **in us** here is the same as the phrase translated “among us” in [4:9](../04/09.md). Here it could mean: (1) God’s love directed to us. Alternate translation: “the love that God has for us” (2) God’s love directed to others through us. Alternate translation: “the love that God has put into us” It may also be that John used a very general phrase in order to include both meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	4	16	t5am	figs-metaphor	ὁ Θεὸς ἀγάπη ἐστίν	1	God is love	This is a metaphor that describes what God is like in his character. See how you translated it in [4:8](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “God is entirely loving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	4	16	dyr6	figs-metaphor	ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	the one who remains in love	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. As in [2:24](../02/24.md), in this instance the word seems to refer to maintaining a pattern of behavior. Alternate translation: “someone who continues to love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	4	20	j295	figs-hypo	ἐάν τις εἴπῃ, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Θεόν, καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ μισῇ, ψεύστης ἐστίν	1	If anyone says, “I love God,” and hates his brother, he is a liar	John is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the importance of consistency between their words and their actions. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone says, ‘I love God,’ but he hates his brother. Then he is a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	4	20	j296	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	and	John is using the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what would be expected, that someone who loved God would also love his fellow believers, and what would actually be true of this hypothetical person. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1JN	4	20	tfq3	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his brother	See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	4	20	a8zh	figs-doublenegatives	ὁ&μὴ ἀγαπῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ&τὸν Θεὸν&οὐ δύναται ἀγαπᾶν	1	the one who does not love his brother … is not able to love God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “only those who love their fellow believers … are able to love God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1JN	4	20	a8zh	figs-doublenegatives	ὁ & μὴ ἀγαπῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ & τὸν Θεὸν & οὐ δύναται ἀγαπᾶν	1	the one who does not love his brother … is not able to love God	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “only those who love their fellow believers … are able to love God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1JN	4	20	xssu	figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ μὴ ἀγαπῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ὃν ἑώρακεν, τὸν Θεὸν, ὃν οὐχ ἑώρακεν, οὐ δύναται ἀγαπᾶν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly why this is true. Alternate translation: “This is true because it is much easier to love your fellow believer who is right in front of you than to love God, whom you could not even see.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	4	21	j297		ταύτην τὴν ἐντολὴν ἔχομεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	we have this commandment from him	Alternate translation: “this is what God has commanded us”
 1JN	4	21	j298	writing-pronouns	ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	from him	The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -595,8 +595,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	5	11	k2qn	figs-metaphor	ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	eternal life	As in [4:9](../04/09.md), **eternal life** means two things at once. It means receiving power from God in this life to live in a new way, and it also means living forever in the presence of God after death. See how you translated the expression in [4:9](../04/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	11	sz21	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Υἱῷ	1	his Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	5	12	st2z	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἔχων τὸν Υἱὸν, ἔχει τὴν ζωήν; ὁ μὴ ἔχων τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει	1	The one who has the Son has life. The one who does not have the Son of God does not have life	John speaks of believers who are in a close relationship with Jesus as if Jesus were their possession. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Anyone who is in a close relationship with the Son has life. Anyone who is not in a close relationship with the Son of God does not have life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	5	12	j329	figs-metaphor	ἔχει τὴν ζωήν&τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει	1	has life … does not have life	Since both groups of people are physically alive, John means this in a spiritual sense. As in [4:9](../04/09.md), he is likely referring to what he calls “eternal life” in [3:15](../03/15.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). See how you translated that term in those verses. Alternate translation: “has power from God to live as a new person now and will live forever in God’s presence after death … does not have power from God to live as a new person now and will not live forever in God’s presence after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN	5	12	j330	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν&τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son … the Son of God	**Son** and **Son of God** are important titles for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1JN	5	12	j329	figs-metaphor	ἔχει τὴν ζωήν & τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει	1	has life … does not have life	Since both groups of people are physically alive, John means this in a spiritual sense. As in [4:9](../04/09.md), he is likely referring to what he calls “eternal life” in [3:15](../03/15.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). See how you translated that term in those verses. Alternate translation: “has power from God to live as a new person now and will live forever in God’s presence after death … does not have power from God to live as a new person now and will not live forever in God’s presence after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN	5	12	j330	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν & τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the Son … the Son of God	**Son** and **Son of God** are important titles for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	5	13	rr7y	checking/headings		0		If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Eternal Life with the True God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 1JN	5	13	ezl8	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	these things	Here, **these things** refers back to everything that John has written so far in the letter. Alternate translation: “all of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	5	13	wns6	figs-metonymy	τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	you, the ones believing in the name of the Son of God	As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “who believe in the Son of God and what he has done for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -604,18 +604,18 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	5	13	j331	figs-metaphor	ὅτι ζωὴν ἔχετε αἰώνιον	1	that you have eternal life	The emphasis in this verse seems to be more on the future aspect of the expression **eternal life**. Alternate translation: “that you will live forever in God’s presence after you die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	14	j332	figs-explicit	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ παρρησία ἣν ἔχομεν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	this is the confidence that we have towards him	If it would be helpful to your readers, as in [3:21](../03/21.md) you could state explicitly what this **confidence** applies to, in light of what John says in the rest of this sentence. Alternate translation: “we can be confident of this as we pray to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	5	14	yj31	figs-abstractnouns	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ παρρησία ἣν ἔχομεν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	this is the confidence that we have towards him	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **confidence** with an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we can be confident of this as we pray to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1JN	5	14	j333	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν&αὐτοῦ&ἀκούει	1	him … his … he listens	The pronouns **him**, **his**, and **he** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “God” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	5	14	j333	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν & αὐτοῦ & ἀκούει	1	him … his … he listens	The pronouns **him**, **his**, and **he** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “God” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	5	14	at5n		ἐάν τι αἰτώμεθα κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	if we ask anything according to his will	Alternate translation: “if we ask for the things that God wants for us”
 1JN	5	14	j334	figs-idiom	ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	he listens to us	As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. However, the meaning here is different than the meaning there, which was, “is persuaded by.” Rather, here it refers to God being willing to grant what we ask. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give it to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	5	15	j335	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	if we know that he listens to us	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	5	15	j336	figs-idiom	ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	he listens to us	As in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give us what we ask for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	5	15	j337	figs-explicit	ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	he listens to us	It may be helpful to repeat the condition that John specifies in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is disposed to give us what we ask for if it is according to his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1JN	5	15	j338	writing-pronouns	ἀκούει&αὐτοῦ	1	he listens … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be more natural in your language to use the name “God” for **he** and to say **him** later in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN	5	15	j338	writing-pronouns	ἀκούει & αὐτοῦ	1	he listens … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be more natural in your language to use the name “God” for **he** and to say **him** later in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	5	15	ev49		οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἔχομεν τὰ αἰτήματα ἃ ᾐτήκαμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	we know that we have the requests that we have asked from him	Alternate translation: “we know that we will receive what we have asked God for”
 1JN	5	16	j339	figs-hypo	ἐάν τις ἴδῃ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτάνοντα ἁμαρτίαν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον, αἰτήσει	1	If anyone sees his brother sinning a sin not towards death, he will ask	John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to counsel his readers. UST models a way of showing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1JN	5	16	sc1f	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his brother	See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	16	j340		ἁμαρτάνοντα ἁμαρτίαν	1	sinning a sin	If it is unnatural in your language to use both the verb **sinning** and the noun **sin**, you could use just one form of the word in your translation. Alternate translation: “committing a sin”
-1JN	5	16	j341	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον&τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον&ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον	1	a sin not towards death … those sinning not towards death … a sin towards death	The word **death** in this verse and the next refers to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. (See the later note to this verse for a discussion of what kind of sin John may have in mind that would lead to that.) Alternate translation: “a sin that does not lead to eternal separation from God … for those whose sin will not lead to eternal separation from God … a sin that does lead to eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN	5	16	j341	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον & τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον & ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον	1	a sin not towards death … those sinning not towards death … a sin towards death	The word **death** in this verse and the next refers to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. (See the later note to this verse for a discussion of what kind of sin John may have in mind that would lead to that.) Alternate translation: “a sin that does not lead to eternal separation from God … for those whose sin will not lead to eternal separation from God … a sin that does lead to eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	16	j342	figs-declarative	αἰτήσει	1	he will ask	John is using a future statement to give an instruction and command. Alternate translation: “he should pray for that fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 1JN	5	16	j343	writing-pronouns	δώσει αὐτῷ ζωήν	1	he will give him life	In this clause, the pronoun **him** refers to the believer who is sinning, and the pronoun **he** could refer to: (1) God, since only God can give spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God will give life to the believer who is sinning” (2) **anyone**, that is, the person praying. In this case, John may be picturing God giving life by means of the person’s prayers, as in James 5:15, 20. Alternate translation: “he will be God’s instrument to give life to the believer who is sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	5	16	myf6	figs-metaphor	δώσει αὐτῷ ζωήν	1	he will give him life	The word **life** here refers to spiritual life, that is, to eternal life with God. Alternate translation: “God will make sure that the believer who is sinning is not separated from him eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -639,8 +639,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	5	20	j356	figs-explicit	ἥκει	1	has come	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means, as you may have done in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “has come to earth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	5	20	n1nh	figs-abstractnouns	δέδωκεν ἡμῖν διάνοιαν	1	has given us understanding	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** with a verb such as “understand.” Alternate translation: “has enabled us to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	5	20	j357	figs-abstractnouns	δέδωκεν ἡμῖν διάνοιαν	1	has given us understanding	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what Jesus has enabled us to understand. Alternate translation: “has enabled us to understand the truth” or “has enabled us to understand the truth about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1JN	5	20	hvr7	figs-nominaladj	τὸν Ἀληθινόν&τῷ Ἀληθινῷ	1	the True One … the True One	John is using the adjective **True** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **One** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the One who is true … the One who is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1JN	5	20	j358	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἀληθινόν&τῷ Ἀληθινῷ	1	the True One … the True One	John is speaking of God by association with the way that he is **True**. This could mean: (1) The God who is genuine, in contrast to false gods. Alternate translation: “the real God … the real God” (2) The God who is true in all that he says and does. Alternate translation: “God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do … God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1JN	5	20	hvr7	figs-nominaladj	τὸν Ἀληθινόν & τῷ Ἀληθινῷ	1	the True One … the True One	John is using the adjective **True** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **One** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the One who is true … the One who is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1JN	5	20	j358	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἀληθινόν & τῷ Ἀληθινῷ	1	the True One … the True One	John is speaking of God by association with the way that he is **True**. This could mean: (1) The God who is genuine, in contrast to false gods. Alternate translation: “the real God … the real God” (2) The God who is true in all that he says and does. Alternate translation: “God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do … God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	5	20	ge7c	figs-metaphor	ἐσμὲν ἐν τῷ Ἀληθινῷ, ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ	1	we are in the True One, in his Son Jesus Christ	As in [2:5](../02/05.md), John is speaking as if believers could be inside of God and Jesus. This expression describes having a close relationship with God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “we have a close relationship with the true God, with his Son Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	20	gobu	figs-metaphor	ἐσμὲν ἐν τῷ Ἀληθινῷ, ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ	1		This second occurrence of **the True One** could refer to: (1) Jesus, as the rest of the clause makes clear. In this case, John is saying that both God and Jesus are the true God, and we are in both. See the UST. (2) God, just as the first occurrence of **the True One** refers to God. In this case, John is saying that we are in God because of being in Jesus. Alternate translation: “we are in the True One through being in Jesus Christ, his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	5	20	j359	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ	1	his Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
index 907ce3e1fb..6243216aa7 100644
--- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
@@ -9,11 +9,11 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2JN	1	1	src4	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	love in the truth	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. The phrase **the truth** could: (1) refer to how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) provide the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2JN	1	1	a50f	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἐγνωκότες τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	all who have known the truth	John uses the phrase **all the ones having known the truth** to refer to believers who know and accept the true message about Jesus Christ. John is most likely using the term **all** as a generalization to mean all the believers who are with him and who know the people of this church. Alternate translation: “all who are with me and who know and accept the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2JN	1	2	spdg	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	the truth	John uses the abstract noun **truth** to refer to the true message that Christians believe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this termbehind this term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2JN	1	2	et6b	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν&ἡμῶν	1	us … us	If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to both himself and to the recipients of the letter. The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2JN	1	2	et6b	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν	1	us … us	If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to both himself and to the recipients of the letter. The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2JN	1	2	a7rm	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	to the age	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2JN	1	3	gad9	figs-abstractnouns	ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Grace, mercy, and peace will be with us from God the Father and from Jesus Christ	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace** with verbal phrases, and use **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus Christ will be kind to us, be merciful to us, and enable us to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2JN	1	3	zfgr		ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη	1	Grace, mercy, and peace will be with us	In this culture, letter writers would normally offer a good wish or blessing for the recipients before introducing the main business of the letter. But instead of a blessing here, John makes a declarative statement. This probably expresses his confidence that God will do as he promised. Be sure that your translation also expresses this confidence.
-2JN	1	3	vpl9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός&Υἱοῦ	1	the Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to translate them accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+2JN	1	3	vpl9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός & Υἱοῦ	1	the Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to translate them accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 2JN	1	3	w6tr	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ	1	in truth and love	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** by stating the ideas behind them with adjectives or verbs. Here, these abstract nouns could refer to: (1) the qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the “grace, mercy, and peace” from God. Alternate translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2JN	1	4	ir6v	figs-you	σου	1	your	The word **your** is singular here, since John is either addressing one woman, or the church collectively, as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 2JN	1	4	ajlf	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐχάρην λείαν	1		If it is more natural in your language to state the reason first and then the result, you can put this after “I found some of your children walking in the truth,” as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -23,13 +23,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2JN	1	4	s7hr		καθὼς ἐντολὴν ἐλάβομεν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός	1	just as we have received a commandment from the Father	The expression **received a commandment** expresses the idea that God commanded the believers to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make **the Father** the subject of a sentence with the verb “command.” Alternate translation: “just as the Father has commanded us”
 2JN	1	4	w7f1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. Be careful to translate it accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 2JN	1	5	r4hx		καὶ νῦν	1		The words **and now** signal that what follows is the main point of the letter, or at least the first main point. Use a natural way for introducing the main point in your language.
-2JN	1	5	c9xi	figs-you	σε,&σοι	1	you … to you	These instances of **you** are singular since John is once again addressing the church in a figurative way as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+2JN	1	5	c9xi	figs-you	σε, & σοι	1	you … to you	These instances of **you** are singular since John is once again addressing the church in a figurative way as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 2JN	1	5	xjsu	figs-metaphor	κυρία	1	lady	See how you translated **lady** in [verse 1](../01/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2JN	1	5	u38f	figs-explicit	οὐχ ὡς ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφων σοι	1	not as writing a new commandment to you	John does not refer to himself explicitly as the person writing. If your language requires you to state the subject of a verb, you could add a pronoun here. Alternate translation: “not as though I were writing you a new commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2JN	1	5	uhs8	figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1	from the beginning	The phrase **from the beginning** refers to the time when John and his audience first believed in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “since the time that we first believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2JN	1	5	vmm8		ἀρχῆς, ἵνα ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους	1	the beginning—that we should love one another	If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “the beginning. He commanded that we should love one another”
-2JN	1	6	nw4g	figs-metaphor	περιπατῶμεν κατὰ&ἐν αὐτῇ περιπατῆτε	1	we should walk according to … you should walk in	In these instances the expression **walk** means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2JN	1	6	cl95	figs-you	ἠκούσατε&περιπατῆτε	1	you heard … you should walk	The term **you** is plural in this verse, because John is addressing a congregation of believers. This is the case throughout the rest of the letter, as well, except in verse 13, because there John returns to his metaphor of referring to a church as a woman and its members as her children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+2JN	1	6	nw4g	figs-metaphor	περιπατῶμεν κατὰ & ἐν αὐτῇ περιπατῆτε	1	we should walk according to … you should walk in	In these instances the expression **walk** means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2JN	1	6	cl95	figs-you	ἠκούσατε & περιπατῆτε	1	you heard … you should walk	The term **you** is plural in this verse, because John is addressing a congregation of believers. This is the case throughout the rest of the letter, as well, except in verse 13, because there John returns to his metaphor of referring to a church as a woman and its members as her children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 2JN	1	7	u749	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For	Here, **For** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses—it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2JN	1	7	w25m	figs-explicit	ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	For many deceivers have gone out into the world	This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10–11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2JN	1	7	x8yl	figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί	1	Jesus Christ coming in flesh	The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2JN	1	10	xafi	figs-metaphor	ταύτην τὴν διδαχὴν οὐ φέρει	1	does not bring this teaching	John is speaking of a **teaching** or a message as if it were an object that someone could **bring**. If you would not use this kind of metaphor in your language, you could use one that has the same meaning or use plain language. Alternate translation: “does not teach this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2JN	1	10	ls1c	figs-explicit	μὴ λαμβάνετε αὐτὸν εἰς οἰκίαν	1	do not receive him into your house	John does not want the believers to accept a false teacher into their homes and, as a result, support his false teaching by showing him respect and providing for his needs. Alternate translation: “do not support him or encourage him by welcoming him into your home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2JN	1	10	lbct	figs-explicit	χαίρειν αὐτῷ μὴ λέγετε	1	do not say to him, “Greetings”	John warns the believers not to greet a false teacher respectfully in public. The implication is that he does not want them to do anything that might look like they are endorsing a false teacher or that would give a false teacher good standing in the eyes of others. Alternate translation: “do not give him a respectful public greeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2JN	1	11	uhea		ὁ λέγων&αὐτῷ χαίρειν	1	the one who says to him, “Greetings”	Alternate translation: “any person who gives him a respectful public greeting”
+2JN	1	11	uhea		ὁ λέγων & αὐτῷ χαίρειν	1	the one who says to him, “Greetings”	Alternate translation: “any person who gives him a respectful public greeting”
 2JN	1	11	n7zt		κοινωνεῖ τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ τοῖς πονηροῖς	1	shares in his evil deeds	The verb **shares in** expresses the concept of assisting and helping to advance the activity of the false teacher. Alternate translation: “takes part in his evil deeds” or “helps him in his evil deeds”
 2JN	1	12	gq26	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐβουλήθην διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος	1	I did not want with paper and ink	Here John leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “I did not want to write these things with paper and ink” (See: Ellipsis)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2JN	1	12	nx77	figs-metonymy	διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος	1	with paper and ink	John is not saying that he would rather write these things with something other than **paper and ink**. Rather, he is speaking of those writing materials to represent writing in general. He means that he wants to visit the believers personally and to continue his communication with them directly. Alternate translation: “to communicate these things in writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -61,4 +61,4 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2JN	1	13	fh6j	figs-metaphor	τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς	1	The children of your chosen sister	This could: (1) be a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2JN	1	13	aonw	figs-idiom	τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς	1	The children of your chosen sister	In this context, the term **chosen** indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. In the context of John’s metaphor, this indicates a church or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “The members of this group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2JN	1	13	a4rc		ἀσπάζεταί σε	1	greet you	As was customary in this culture, John concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
-2JN	1	13	qjdz	figs-you	σε&σου	1	your … you	The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular here, in keeping with John’s metaphor of writing to a congregation as though it were a lady. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+2JN	1	13	qjdz	figs-you	σε & σου	1	your … you	The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular here, in keeping with John’s metaphor of writing to a congregation as though it were a lady. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
diff --git a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv
index 220c89ced1..6e568c69fd 100644
--- a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ JUD	front	intro	xh5n			0		# Introduction to Jude<br><br>## Part 1: General intro
 JUD	1	1	ek3q	figs-123person	Ἰούδας	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, Jude, am writing this letter” or “From Jude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JUD	1	1	npc3	translate-names	Ἰούδας	1	Jude	**Jude** is the name of a man, the brother of James. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to Jude. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JUD	1	1	zov5	figs-distinguish	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος, ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου	1		These phrases give further information about Jude. He describes himself as being both **a servant of Jesus Christ** and **a brother of James**. This distinguishes him from the two other men named Jude in the New Testament, which English translations usually distinguish from Jude by translating their names as “Judas”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-JUD	1	1	m3v1	figs-explicit	ἀδελφὸς&Ἰακώβου	1	brother of James	**James** and Jude were half brothers of Jesus. Joseph was their physical father, but he was not the physical father of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this relationship explicitly. Alternate translation: “a brother of James, both being half brothers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JUD	1	1	m3v1	figs-explicit	ἀδελφὸς   &   Ἰακώβου	1	brother of James	**James** and Jude were half brothers of Jesus. Joseph was their physical father, but he was not the physical father of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this relationship explicitly. Alternate translation: “a brother of James, both being half brothers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JUD	1	1	p5yl	figs-123person	τοῖς	1		In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JUD	1	1	din3	figs-explicit	κλητοῖς	1		That these people have been **called** implies that God has called and saved them. Alternate translation: “and whom God has called and saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JUD	1	1	gorg	figs-activepassive	ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἠγαπημένοις	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God the Father loves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ JUD	1	1	rih9	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεῷ Πατρὶ	1		**Father** is
 JUD	1	1	s3oh	figs-activepassive	Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρημένοις κλητοῖς	1		If your language does not use the passive form **kept {and} called**, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom Jesus Christ keeps and calls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JUD	1	2	wjsn	translate-blessing	ἔλεος ὑμῖν, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη.	1		In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God increase his mercy and peace and love to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 JUD	1	2	r5ae	figs-abstractnouns	ἔλεος ὑμῖν, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **mercy**, **peace**, and **love** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his merciful acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit and love you more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JUD	1	2	q2qo	figs-metaphor	ἔλεος&καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη.	1		Jude speaks of **mercy and peace and love** as if they were objects that could increase in size or numbers. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May God increase his mercy and peace and love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JUD	1	2	q2qo	figs-metaphor	ἔλεος   &   καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη.	1		Jude speaks of **mercy and peace and love** as if they were objects that could increase in size or numbers. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May God increase his mercy and peace and love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JUD	1	2	etoo	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1		The word **you** in this letter refers to the Christians to whom Jude was writing and is always plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JUD	1	3	htjd	figs-exclusive	ἀγαπητοί	1		**Beloved ones** refers here to those to whom Jude is writing; it can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “Beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JUD	1	3	yfa8		πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούμενος γράφειν ὑμῖν	1		This clause could refer to: (1) that fact that Jude had intended to write about something different than this letter is about. Alternate translation: “although making every effort to write to you” (2) the time when Jude was writing. Alternate translation: “when making every effort to write to you”
@@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ JUD	1	3	mi3w		περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡμῶν σωτηρίας	1	our
 JUD	1	3	kvkg	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡμῶν σωτηρίας	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “about how God saved us all together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	3	kjk6	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here, **our** refers to Jude and his audience, fellow believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JUD	1	3	si1u	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **necessity** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “I needed to write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JUD	1	3	yyf4	grammar-connect-logic-goal	παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ&πίστει	1	exhorting you to struggle earnestly for the faith	This is a purpose clause. Jude is stating the purpose for which he has written the letter. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to exhort you to contend for the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-JUD	1	3	ls3z	figs-ellipsis	παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ&πίστει	1		Jude is leaving out the word “you” that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. This word can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “exhorting you to contend for the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JUD	1	3	yyf4	grammar-connect-logic-goal	παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ   &   πίστει	1	exhorting you to struggle earnestly for the faith	This is a purpose clause. Jude is stating the purpose for which he has written the letter. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to exhort you to contend for the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+JUD	1	3	ls3z	figs-ellipsis	παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ  &  πίστει	1		Jude is leaving out the word “you” that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. This word can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “exhorting you to contend for the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JUD	1	3	pvyp	figs-activepassive	τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει	1		If your language does not use the passive form **delivered**, you state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for the faith that God delivered once for all to the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JUD	1	3	j67u		ἅπαξ	1	once for all	Here, **once for all** expresses the idea of something that was done only once and never again. The meaning of **for all** is “for all time.” It does not mean “for the sake of all people.”
 JUD	1	4	he1b	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, **For** indicates that Jude is giving a reason for why he said in the previous verse that he wants his readers to “contend for the faith.” Alternate translation: “I want you do to this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ JUD	1	4	wwz3	figs-activepassive	οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμένοι ε
 JUD	1	4	c7a6	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **condemnation** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to be condemned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	4	u2oj	figs-explicit	ἀσεβεῖς	1		Here, **ungodly ones** refers to the “certain men” mentioned at the beginning of the verse. They are the false teachers Jude is warning his readers about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “ungodly false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JUD	1	4	c642	figs-metaphor	τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν	1		Here, God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something sinful. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this plainly. The false teachers were teaching that believers could do sexually immoral acts because God’s grace allowed it. Paul addressed this kind of false teaching when he wrote in Romans 6:1–2a: “Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? May it never be!” Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JUD	1	4	g35s	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν&ἡμῶν	1		Both occurrences of **our** in this verse refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+JUD	1	4	g35s	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν  &  ἡμῶν	1		Both occurrences of **our** in this verse refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JUD	1	4	esef	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the kind acts of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	4	tmju	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀσέλγειαν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **licentiousness** with an adjective phrase. Alternate translation: “into licentious behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	4	ws1b		τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, ἀρνούμενοι	1	denying our only Master and Lord, Jesus Christ	Alternate translation: “teaching that Jesus Christ is not our Master and Lord”
 JUD	1	4	p7g6	figs-possession	τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν	1		Here, **Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies back to **only Master**, meaning “the person who owns us.” Alternate translation: “the only person who owns us and rules over us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-JUD	1	5	pg0e	figs-infostructure	ὑπομνῆσαι&ὑμᾶς βούλομαι, εἰδότας ὑμᾶς ἅπαξ πάντα	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of the first two clauses. Alternate translation: “you knowing all things once for all, I want to remind you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+JUD	1	5	pg0e	figs-infostructure	ὑπομνῆσαι  &  ὑμᾶς βούλομαι, εἰδότας ὑμᾶς ἅπαξ πάντα	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of the first two clauses. Alternate translation: “you knowing all things once for all, I want to remind you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JUD	1	5	fa5e	figs-explicit	πάντα	1		Here, **all things** refers specifically to all the information of which Jude is going to remind his readers. It does not mean everything there is to know about God or everything in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things of which I am reminding you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JUD	1	5	xiss	translate-textvariants	ὅτι Ἰησοῦς	1		Here, some ancient manuscripts have, “that the Lord.” See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the Introduction to Jude to decide which phrase to use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 JUD	1	5	z1h9		λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας	1		This could mean that: (1) Jude is indicating the timing of the event described in this clause, in which case the timing is made clear by the occurrence of “afterward” in the next clause. (2) Jude is making a contrast between what Jesus did in this clause and what he did in the next. Alternate translation: “although he saved a people out of the land of Egypt”
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ JUD	1	5	f4mm	figs-explicit	λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας
 JUD	1	6	g5ld	figs-distinguish	τοὺς μὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν	1		Here, Jude uses this phrase to distinguish the **angels** who were kept by God for judgment from those who were not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 JUD	1	6	pt1k		τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν	1	their own domain	Here, the word translated as **domain** refers to one’s sphere of influence or the place where one has authority. Alternate translation: “their proper area of influence” or “their own place of authority”
 JUD	1	6	s3cn	writing-pronouns	δεσμοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν	1	he has kept in everlasting chains, under thick darkness	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has kept in eternal chains, under darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JUD	1	6	c8gf		δεσμοῖς ἀϊδίοις&τετήρηκεν	1		Here, **kept in eternal chains** refers to imprisonment that lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include the idea of imprisonment in your translation. Alternate translations: “God has imprisoned for eternity”
+JUD	1	6	c8gf		δεσμοῖς ἀϊδίοις  &  τετήρηκεν	1		Here, **kept in eternal chains** refers to imprisonment that lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include the idea of imprisonment in your translation. Alternate translations: “God has imprisoned for eternity”
 JUD	1	6	s1j9	figs-metonymy	ὑπὸ ζόφον	1		Here, **darkness** is a metonym which represents the place of the dead or hell. Alternate translation: “in the utter darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JUD	1	6	jzdj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς κρίσιν μεγάλης ἡμέρας	1		This phrase gives the purpose or goal for which the angels have been imprisoned. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the judgment of the great day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JUD	1	6	k1c6	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κρίσιν μεγάλης ἡμέρας	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **judgment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for the great day when God judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -59,14 +59,14 @@ JUD	1	8	p12m	figs-explicit	ὁμοίως	1		Here, **in the same way** refers bac
 JUD	1	8	ujs2	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόμενοι	1		Here, **these** refers to the false teachers introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers who dream” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	8	ez4l	figs-metonymy	σάρκα μὲν μιαίνουσιν	1		Here, **flesh** refers to the bodies of these false teachers. Paul agrees with this idea when he says in 1 Corinthians 6:18 that sexual immorality is sin against one’s own body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “defile their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JUD	1	8	q9ct		κυριότητα	1		Here, **lordship** could refer to: (1) the lordship of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ruling authority of Jesus” (2) the lordship of God. Alternate translation: “the ruling authority of God”
-JUD	1	8	qvhs	figs-abstractnouns	κυριότητα&ἀθετοῦσιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **lordship** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “reject what Jesus commands” or “reject what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JUD	1	8	qvhs	figs-abstractnouns	κυριότητα  &  ἀθετοῦσιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **lordship** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “reject what Jesus commands” or “reject what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	8	pn3j		δόξας	1	the glorious ones	Here, **glorious ones** refers to spiritual beings, such as angels. Alternate translation: “glorious spiritual beings”
 JUD	1	9	uzj1	figs-metaphor	κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας	1		Here Jude speaks of **judgment** as if it were something someone can **bring** from one place to another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak a judgment of slander against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JUD	1	9	v9fh	figs-abstractnouns	κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **judgment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to accuse him of slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	9	lxf3	figs-possession	κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας	1		Jude is using the possessive form to describe a **judgment** that is characterized by **slander**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “to bring a slanderous judgment against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JUD	1	10	h6sq	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1		Here, **these ones** refers to the false teachers introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JUD	1	10	fjm5		ὅσα&οὐκ οἴδασιν	1	what they do not understand	This word **what** could refer to: (1) the spiritual realm referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the spiritual realm, which they do not understand” (2) the glorious ones mentioned in verse [8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the glorious ones, which they do not understand”
-JUD	1	10	q640	figs-simile	ὅσα&φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται	2		This clause refers to the sexual immorality of the false teachers, who thoughtlessly live according to their natural sexual desires, the way animals do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this simile by translating the simile plainly. Alternate translation: “what they naturally understand, unrestrained sexual desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+JUD	1	10	fjm5		ὅσα  &  οὐκ οἴδασιν	1	what they do not understand	This word **what** could refer to: (1) the spiritual realm referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the spiritual realm, which they do not understand” (2) the glorious ones mentioned in verse [8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the glorious ones, which they do not understand”
+JUD	1	10	q640	figs-simile	ὅσα  &  φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται	2		This clause refers to the sexual immorality of the false teachers, who thoughtlessly live according to their natural sexual desires, the way animals do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this simile by translating the simile plainly. Alternate translation: “what they naturally understand, unrestrained sexual desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 JUD	1	10	x35l	writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτοις	1		Here, **these things** refers back to “what they understand by instinct,” which is sexually immoral acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by these sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	10	z0n7	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται	1		If your language does not use the passive form **are being destroyed**, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “these things are destroying them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JUD	1	11	b33e	figs-idiom	οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς	1		The phrase **Woe to them** is the opposite of “blessed are you.” It indicates that bad things are going to happen to the people being addressed, because they have displeased God. Alternate translation: “How terrible it is for them” or “Trouble will come to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ JUD	1	14	acin	figs-pastforfuture	ἦλθεν Κύριος	1		Here Jude is using
 JUD	1	14	pylm		Κύριος	1		Here, **Lord** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “The Lord Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “The Lord God”
 JUD	1	14	tyf8	translate-unknown	μυριάσιν	1		The word **myriads** is the plural of the Greek word “myriad,” which means ten thousand (10,000) but is often used to refer to a large number. You can express this number in the way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tens of thousands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JUD	1	14	ljm1		ἁγίαις	1		Here, **holy ones** could refer to: (1) angels, as suggested by the presence of angels in similar statements about judgment in Matthew 24:31, 25:31, Mark 89:38, and 2 Thessalonians 1:7. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “his holy angels” (2) believers. Alternate translation: “his holy believers” or “his saints”
-JUD	1	15	moys	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ποιῆσαι κρίσιν&καὶ ἐλέγξαι	1		Here both instances of the word **to** indicate the purpose for which the Lord comes with his holy ones. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of judgment … and in order to rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+JUD	1	15	moys	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ποιῆσαι κρίσιν  &  καὶ ἐλέγξαι	1		Here both instances of the word **to** indicate the purpose for which the Lord comes with his holy ones. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of judgment … and in order to rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 JUD	1	15	bl4q	figs-abstractnouns	ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **judgment** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	15	qeei	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσαν ψυχὴν	1		Here, **soul** refers to a person. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JUD	1	15	twxy	figs-possession	τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν	1		Here Jude is using the possessive form to describe **works** that are characterized by **ungodliness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “ungodly works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ JUD	1	17	qjsf	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here, **our** refers to all believers
 JUD	1	18	toms		ὅτι ἔλεγον ὑμῖν	1		This phrase indicates that this verse contains the content of the “words” spoken by the apostles, which Jude referred to in the previous verse.
 JUD	1	18	nlh9	figs-idiom	ἐσχάτου χρόνου	1		Here, **the last time** is an idiom that refers to the time before the return of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the time just before Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JUD	1	18	w1mx	figs-metaphor	πορευόμενοι	1		Here Jude uses the word **going** to refer to habitually doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JUD	1	18	j5m4		κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυμίας&τῶν ἀσεβειῶν	1		Here, **lusts of ungodliness** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “according to their own sinful and ungodly desires”
+JUD	1	18	j5m4		κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυμίας  &  τῶν ἀσεβειῶν	1		Here, **lusts of ungodliness** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “according to their own sinful and ungodly desires”
 JUD	1	19	r28j	writing-pronouns	οὗτοί	1		Here, **These** refers to the mockers Jude referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “These mockers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JUD	1	19	l568	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **divisions** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones dividing others against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	19	jwyt	figs-explicit	Πνεῦμα	1		Here, **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. It does not refer to the spirit of a human or to an evil spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ JUD	1	21	mzqu	figs-possession	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1		Here, **our Lor
 JUD	1	21	okfy	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JUD	1	21	qb29	grammar-connect-logic-result	τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1		Jude is using **to** to introduce the result of **the mercy**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the mercy of our Lord Jesus Christ, which brings eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JUD	1	22	ynz1	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεᾶτε	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “act mercifully toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JUD	1	22	wbr5		οὓς&διακρινομένους	1		The phrase **{some} who are doubting** refers to people who have become confused because of the teaching and activities of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “some who are uncertain about what to believe”
+JUD	1	22	wbr5		οὓς  &  διακρινομένους	1		The phrase **{some} who are doubting** refers to people who have become confused because of the teaching and activities of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “some who are uncertain about what to believe”
 JUD	1	23	gx9t		ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες	1		This clause indicates the means by which Jude wants his audience to save a certain group of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this connection explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of snatching from fire”
 JUD	1	23	wkj9	figs-metaphor	ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες	1		Here Jude speaks of urgently rescuing some people from going to hell as though it was like pulling people from a **fire** before they start to burn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “doing whatever must be done to keep them from going to hell” or “doing whatever must be done to save them, as if pulling them from fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JUD	1	23	ign7	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεᾶτε	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “act mercifully toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -157,6 +157,6 @@ JUD	1	24	gq9e		ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει	1		This phrase describes the manner i
 JUD	1	25	a3ua		μόνῳ Θεῷ Σωτῆρι ἡμῶν	1	to the only God our Savior through Jesus Christ our Lord	Here, **our Savior** refers to God. It does not refer to Jesus. This phrase emphasizes that God the Father, as well as the Son, is the Savior. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the only God, who is our Savior”
 JUD	1	25	m1g8	figs-abstractnouns	Σωτῆρι ἡμῶν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Savior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the person who saves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	25	db0v	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν,	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Lord** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the person who rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JUD	1	25	kql5	figs-abstractnouns	μόνῳ Θεῷ&δόξα, μεγαλωσύνη, κράτος, καὶ ἐξουσία	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **glory, majesty, power** and **authority** by translating them with adjective phrases. Alternate translation: “may the only God … be recognized as glorious, majestic, powerful, and authoritative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+JUD	1	25	kql5	figs-abstractnouns	μόνῳ Θεῷ  &  δόξα, μεγαλωσύνη, κράτος, καὶ ἐξουσία	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **glory, majesty, power** and **authority** by translating them with adjective phrases. Alternate translation: “may the only God … be recognized as glorious, majestic, powerful, and authoritative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JUD	1	25	dya1	figs-idiom	πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος	1		This is an idiom that refers to eternity past. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in eternity past” or “before everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JUD	1	25	kof4	figs-idiom	εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας	1		This is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])